2010XFWorkshop3LD PDF

m
Workshop Manual
co
s.
oc
gD
X250 - XF
Ja
3.0 Litre TDV6

www.JagDocs.com
2010 to 2011MY
Version 1.3
February 2015
1: General Information
100: Service Information
100‐00: General Information
Description and Operation
About This Manual
Application and Use of Specifications
Battery and Battery Charging Health and Safety Precautions
Brake System Health and Safety Precautions
Diesel Fuel System Health and Safety Precautions
General Service Information
Health and Safety Precautions
How To Use This Manual
Important Safety Instructions
Petrol and Petrol‐Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety Precautions
Solvents, Sealants and Adhesives
Standard Workshop Practices
Symbols Glossary
www.JagDocs.com
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and Safety Precautions
Road/Roller Testing
Window Glass Health and Safety Precautions
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Adaptive Damping Module (SUMB)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Anti‐Lock Braking System (ABS)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Audio Amplifier Module (AAM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Blind Spot Monitoring System Module (SODL/SODR)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Central Junction Box (CJB)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Climate Control Module (HVAC)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Digital Audio Broadcast Module (DABM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Driver Door Module/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Electric Parking Brake (PBM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexTDV6 3.0L Diesel, DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Front Seat Climate Control Module (DCSM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Headlamp Control Module (HCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Instrument Cluster (IPC)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Integrated Audio Module (IAM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Integrated Control Panel (FCIMB)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Parking Aid Module (PAM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Pedestrian Protection System Control Module (PPSCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Rear Junction Box (RJB)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Remote Keyless Entry Module (RFA)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Satellite Digital Audio Radio System Module (SARM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Speed Control Module (CCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Steering Column Lock Module (VIM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Television Module (TVM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Tire Pressure Monitoring System Module (TPM)
www.JagDocs.com
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Touch Screen Display (FCDIM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexVehicles With: 6HP28 6‐Speed Automatic Transmission, DTC:
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Transmission Shift Module (GSM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Portable Audio Interface Control Module (PAICM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Hybrid Digital Radio Control Module (HDRCM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Infotainment Control Module (ICM)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) IndexDTC: Telephone Module (TEL)

100‐01: Identification Codes
Identification Codes

100‐02: Jacking and Lifting
Jacking
Lifting

www.JagDocs.com
100‐04: Noise, Vibration and Harshness
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Diagnosis and Testing
Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
General Procedures
Exhaust System Neutralizing

2: Chassis
204: Suspension
204‐00: Suspension System ‐ General Information
Specification
Suspension System
General Procedures
Camber and Caster Adjustment
Four‐Wheel Alignment
Front Toe Adjustment (57.65.01)
Rear Toe Adjustment (57.65.08)
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout Check ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout Check ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout Check ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout Check ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes

204‐01: Front Suspension
Specification
Component Location
Overview
System Operation and Component Description
www.JagDocs.com
Front Suspension
Removal and Installation
Front Shock Absorber (60.30.04)
Front Lower Arm (60.35.53)
Rear Lower Arm (60.35.54)
Rear Lower Arm Bushing (60.40.12)
Shock Absorber Bushing (60.30.16) (60.30.23)
Front Stabilizer Bar ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Front Stabilizer Bar Link (60.10.02)
Stabilizer Bar Link Bushing (60.10.03)
Upper Arm LH (60.35.41)
Upper Arm RH (60.35.42)
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Wheel Knuckle (60.25.23)
Front Lower Arm Bushing

204‐02: Rear Suspension
Specification
www.JagDocs.com
Component Location
Overview
Rear Suspension
Lower Arm (64.35.43)
Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
Shock Absorber Lower Bushing (64.30.39)
Rear Stabilizer Bar (64.35.08)
Rear Wheel Bearing
Upper Arm
Disassembly and Assembly
Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly

204‐04: Wheels and Tires
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Wheels and Tires
Tire Low Pressure Sensor
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module
www.JagDocs.com
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Receiver
Wheel and Tire

204‐05: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
Component Location ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, 3.0L Diesel S
Overview ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, 3.0L Diesel S
System Operation and Component Description ‐ V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, 3.0L Diesel S
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
Adaptive Damping Module
Front Suspension Vertical Accelerometer
Rear Suspension Vertical Accelerometer

204‐06: Ride and Handling Optimization
www.JagDocs.com
Component Location
Overview

205: Driveline
205‐00: Driveline System ‐ General Information
Driveline System
General Procedures
Driveline Angle Inspection

205‐01: Driveshaft
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Component Location
Overview
Driveshaft
General Procedures
Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
Driveshaft ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel

205‐02: Rear Drive Axle/Differential
Specification ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Overview
Rear Drive Axle and Differential
General Procedures
Differential Draining and Filling
Differential Case ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Differential Front Bushing ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Drive Pinion Seal

205‐05: Rear Drive Halfshafts
Specification
Component Location
Overview
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Halfshafts
Rear Halfshaft (47.10.13) ‐ V6 3.0L Petrol
Rear Halfshaft ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.10.33)
Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot (47.10.32)

206: Brake System
206‐00: Brake System ‐ General Information
Specification ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Brake System
General Procedures
Brake Disc Runout Check
Brake System Bleeding (70.25.03)
Front Brake Disc Runout Check ‐ With Wheel On ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Front Brake Disc Runout Check ‐ With Wheel On ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Rear Brake Disc Runout Check ‐ With Wheel On

206‐03B: Front Disc Brake ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Brake Caliper ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Caliper ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Disc ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Disc ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
www.JagDocs.com
Brake Pads ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Pads ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Disc Shield (70.10.18) ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Disc Shield (70.10.18) ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes

206‐04B: Rear Disc Brake ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Brake Caliper ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Caliper ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Disc ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Brake Disc ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Pads ‐ Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
www.JagDocs.com
Brake Pads ‐ Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Brake Disc Shield (70.10.19)

206‐05: Parking Brake and Actuation
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Parking Brake
General Procedures
Parking Brake Cable Tension Release
Parking Brake Cable LH ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Parking Brake Cable RH ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Parking Brake Module
Parking Brake Switch
Parking Brake Release Actuator

206‐06: Hydraulic Brake Actuation
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Hydraulic Brake Actuation
Brake Fluid Reservoir (70.30.16)
Brake Master Cylinder (70.30.08)
www.JagDocs.com

206‐07: Power Brake Actuation
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Power Brake System
Brake Booster (70.50.17)
Brake Vacuum Pump ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel

206‐09: Anti‐Lock Control ‐ Stability Assist
Specification
Component Location
Overview
www.JagDocs.com
Anti‐Lock Control ‐ Stability Assist
Anti‐Lock Brake System (ABS) Module (70.60.02)
Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) (70.60.18) (70.60.19)
Rear Wheel Speed Sensor (70.60.04)
Steering Wheel Rotation Sensor
Yaw Rate Sensor and Accelerometer

211: Steering System
211‐00: Steering System ‐ General Information
Specification
Steering System
General Procedures
Power Steering System Bleeding (57.15.02 )
Power Steering System Flushing (57.15.08)
Power Steering System Filling ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel

211‐02: Power Steering
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Power Steering
Steering Gear (57.10.01)
www.JagDocs.com
Power Steering Fluid Cooler (57.15.11) ‐ V6 3.0L Petrol
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (57.15.08) ‐ V6 3.0L Petrol
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Power Steering Pump ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel

211‐03: Steering Linkage
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Steering Linkage
Tie Rod End (57.55.02)

211‐04: Steering Column
www.JagDocs.com
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Steering Column
Steering Column
Steering Column Flexible Coupling
Steering Wheel (57.60.01)

211‐05: Steering Column Switches
Component Location
Overview
Steering Column Switches
Hazard Flasher Switch
Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH
Steering Column Multifunction Switch RH
Steering Column Lock Actuator

www.JagDocs.com
3: Powertrain
303: Engine
303‐00: Engine System ‐ General Information
Engine ‐ 3.0L Diesel
General Procedures
Bearing Inspection
Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
Camshaft End Play
Camshaft Lobe Lift
Camshaft Surface Inspection
Connecting Rod Cleaning
Connecting Rod Large End Bore
Crankshaft End Play
Cylinder Bore Out‐of‐Round
Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection
Leakage Test Using Smoke Test Equipment
Piston Inspection
www.JagDocs.com
Piston Pin Diameter
Piston Pin to Bore Diameter
Piston Ring End Gap
Piston Ring‐to‐Groove Clearance
Valve Spring Free Length
Valve Stem Diameter
Cylinder Head Gasket Selection ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Cylinder Head Distortion
Cylinder Compression Test ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel

303‐01A: Engine ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Engine
General Procedures
Engine Oil Draining and Filling
Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
Camshaft LH
Camshaft RH
Camshaft Front Seal
Camshaft Rear Seal
Crankshaft Front Seal
Crankshaft Pulley
Crankshaft Rear Seal
Crankshaft Vibration Damper
www.JagDocs.com
Cylinder Head LH
Cylinder Head RH
Engine Mount LH
Engine Mount RH
Exhaust Manifold LH
Exhaust Manifold RH
Exhaust Manifold Crossover Pipe
Flexplate
Oil Filter Element
Oil Pan
Oil Pan Extension
Oil Pump
Timing Belt
Timing Cover
Valve Cover LH
Valve Cover RH
Removal
Engine
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Engine

303‐03A: Engine Cooling ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Engine Cooling
General Procedures
Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding
Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding
Auxiliary Radiator
Coolant Expansion Tank
Coolant Pump
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
Radiator (26.40.01)
Thermostat

303‐04A: Fuel Charging and Controls ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Fuel Charging and Controls
www.JagDocs.com
General Procedures
Fuel Injection Component Cleaning
Fuel Injection Pump
Fuel Injector
Fuel Rail LH
Fuel Rail RH
Intake Air Shutoff Throttle

303‐04B: Fuel Charging and Controls ‐ Turbocharger ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Turbocharger
Turbocharger LH
www.JagDocs.com
Turbocharger RH
Turbocharger Bypass Valve
Fixed Vane Turbocharger Actuator

303‐05A: Accessory Drive ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Accessory Drive
Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Fuel Injection Pump Pulley
Rear End Accessory Drive (READ)

303‐06A: Starting System ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Starting System
Starting System ‐ Vehicles With: Smart Key
Starter Motor
www.JagDocs.com

303‐07C: Glow Plug System
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Glow Plug System
Glow Plugs ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel

303‐08A: Engine Emission Control ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
www.JagDocs.com
Engine Emission Control
Crankcase Vent Oil Separator
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Outlet Tube
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH

303‐12A: Intake Air Distribution and Filtering ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering
Air Cleaner
Air Cleaner Element (19.10.08)
Charge Air Cooler

303‐14A: Electronic Engine Controls ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Electronic Engine Controls ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
www.JagDocs.com
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ring
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Differential Pressure Sensor
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Engine Oil Level Sensor
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Sensor
Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor RH
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Oil Temperature Sensor
Post Catalytic Converter Temperature Sensor
Post DPF Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor
www.JagDocs.com
Pre Catalytic Converter Temperature Sensor
Pre DPF Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor

307: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle
307‐01B: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Diagnostics
General Procedures
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Input Shaft Seal
Extension Housing Seal
Transmission Control Module (TCM) and Main Control Valve Body
Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter
Transmission Support Insulator ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transmission, Transmission Fluid Cooler and Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transmission and Transmission Fluid Cooler ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
Transmission ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Installation

Transmission ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel

www.JagDocs.com

307‐02B: Transmission/Transaxle Cooling ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Transmission Cooling
Transmission Fluid Cooler ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel

307‐05B: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol
Specification
www.JagDocs.com
Component Location
Overview
External Controls

309: Exhaust System
309‐00A: Exhaust System ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Component Location
Exhaust System
Diesel Particulate Filter
Catalytic Converter
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Exhaust System
Front Muffler
Rear Muffler

www.JagDocs.com
310: Fuel System ‐ General Information
310‐00: Fuel System ‐ General Information
Specification
General Procedures
Fuel Tank Draining
Low‐Pressure Fuel System Bleeding ‐ Diesel
Spring Lock Couplings
Quick Release Coupling
Quick Release Coupling ‐ Push Connect

310‐01A: Fuel Tank and Lines ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Tank and Lines
Fuel Cooler
Fuel Filter
Fuel Level Sender
Fuel Pump and Sender Unit
Fuel Tank
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe

310‐02: Acceleration Control
Specification
Acceleration Control
Accelerator Pedal

310‐03A: Speed Control ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Speed Control
General Procedures
Speed Control Sensor Adjustment
Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Speed Control Module
Speed Control Sensor
Speed Control Switch
www.JagDocs.com

4: Electrical
412: Climate Control System
412‐00: Climate Control System ‐ General Information
Specification
Climate Control System
General Procedures
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging (82.30.30)
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Flushing
Contaminated Refrigerant Handling
Electronic Leak Detection
Fluorescent Dye Leak Detection
Inspection and Assembly Requirements
Manifold Gauge Set Connection
Refrigerant Oil Adding ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Refrigerant System Tests
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Commissioning

www.JagDocs.com
412‐01: Climate Control
Specification
Air Distribution and Filtering
Component Location
Overview
Heating and Ventilation
Component Location
Overview
Air Conditioning
Component Location
Overview
Control Components
Component Location
Overview
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Blower Motor
Blower Motor Control Module
Center Registers
Climate Control Assembly
Climate Control Module
Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator
Driver Side Register
Evaporator
www.JagDocs.com
Floor Console Register
Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator
Heater Core
Heater Core and Evaporator Core Housing
Instrument Panel Register Trim Panel
In‐Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Passenger Side Register
Pollen Filter
Recirculation Blend Door Actuator
Sunload Sensor
Thermostatic Expansion Valve

412‐02: Auxiliary Climate Control
Specification
Component Location
Overview
www.JagDocs.com
Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump
Electric Booster Heater

412‐03: Air Conditioning
Specification
Air Conditioning
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Condenser Core ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Pressure Cutoff Switch (82.10.32)

413: Instrumentation and Warning Systems
413‐01: Instrument Cluster
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster Lens

www.JagDocs.com
413‐06: Horn
Specification
Horn
Horn Switch

413‐08: Information and Message Center
Component Location
Overview
Information and Message Center

413‐09: Warning Devices
Component Location
Overview
www.JagDocs.com
Warning Devices

413‐13: Parking Aid
Component Location
Overview
Parking Aid
Proximity Camera
Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor
Front Outer Parking Aid Sensor
Parking Aid Camera
Parking Aid Module
Rear Parking Aid Sensor

414: Battery and Charging System
414‐00: Battery and Charging System ‐ General Information
Battery Care Requirements
Quiescent Drain
Battery Report Form – In Service Batteries Only
Charging System

www.JagDocs.com
414‐01: Battery, Mounting and Cables
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Battery
General Procedures
Battery Disconnect and Connect
Battery

414‐02A: Generator and Regulator ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Specification
Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Overview
Generator

415: Information and Entertainment Systems
415‐00: Information and Entertainment System ‐ General Information
Navigation System Map Updates
Information and Entertainment System
Cellular Phone
Navigation System

415‐01A: Information and Entertainment System
Specification
Audio System
Component Location
Overview
Navigation System
Component Location
Overview
Information and Entertainment System
Audio Unit
Audio Unit Antenna Amplifier
Audio and Climate Control Assembly
www.JagDocs.com
Front Door Speaker
Information and Entertainment Display
Information and Entertainment Module
Instrument Panel Speaker
Rear Door Speaker
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Subwoofer Amplifier
Subwoofer Speaker
Satellite Radio Tuner

415‐01B: Information and Entertainment System ‐ DTC: Audio Input Control Module
Audio Input Control Module

417: Lighting
417‐01: Exterior Lighting
Specification
www.JagDocs.com
Component Location
Overview
Headlamps
General Procedures
Headlamp Adjustment (86.40.18)
Approach Lamp
Headlamp Assembly
Headlamp Leveling Front Sensor
Headlamp Leveling Rear Sensor
High Mounted Stoplamp
Rear Fog Lamp
Rear Lamp Assembly
Side Turn Signal Lamp

417‐02: Interior Lighting
Component Location
Overview
Interior Lighting

417‐04: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Overview

www.JagDocs.com
418: Electrical Distribution
418‐00: Module Communications Network
Overview
Communications Network
Auxiliary Junction Box (AJB)
Central Junction Box (CJB)

418‐02: Wiring Harnesses
Wiring Harness
General Procedures
Wiring Harness Repair
www.JagDocs.com
Luggage Compartment Lid Wiring Harness

419: Electronic Feature Group
419‐01A: Anti‐Theft ‐ Active
Component Location
Overview
Anti‐Theft ‐ Active
Anti‐Theft Alarm Horn (86.52.03)

419‐01B: Anti‐Theft ‐ Passive
Component Location
Overview
Anti‐Theft – Passive

419‐05: Telematics
Telematics

419‐07: Navigation System
Description and Operation Diagnosis and Testing
Navigation System
Navigation System Antenna (86.62.06)
Navigation System Module (86.62.05)
www.JagDocs.com

419‐08: Cellular Phone
Bluetooth Module

419‐10: Multifunction Electronic Modules
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Driver Door Module (DDM)
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Module
Passenger Door Module (PDM)
Driver Seat Module (DSM)
Passenger Door Module (PDM)
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Door Module (RDM)
5: Body and Paint
501: Body and Paint
501‐02: Front End Body Panels
Specification
Air Deflector
Cowl Vent Screen (76.10.01)
Engine Rear Undershield
Fender Splash Shield
Hood
Radiator Splash Shield
Secondary Bulkhead Center Panel
Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol

501‐03: Body Closures
Front Door
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Door Assembly
Luggage Compartment Lid (76.19.01)
Rear Door

www.JagDocs.com
501‐05: Interior Trim and Ornamentation
Specification
A‐Pillar Trim Panel
B‐Pillar Lower Trim Panel
B‐Pillar Upper Trim Panel
C‐Pillar Lower Trim Panel
C‐Pillar Trim Panel
Cowl Side Trim Panel
Engine Cover ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Front Door Trim Panel (76.34.01)
Front Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Instrument Panel Speaker Grille
Headliner
Loadspace Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Loadspace Trim Panel
Loadspace Trim Panel LH
Loadspace Trim Panel RH
www.JagDocs.com
Luggage Compartment Lid Trim Panel
Parcel Shelf
Rear Door Trim Panel
Rear Scuff Plate Trim Panel
Sun Visor (76.10.48)
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror

501‐08: Exterior Trim and Ornamentation
Specification
Radiator Grille
Luggage Compartment Lid Moulding
Front Fender Moulding
Rocker Panel Moulding

501‐09: Rear View Mirrors
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Rear View Mirrors
Exterior Mirror
Exterior Mirror Cover
Exterior Mirror Glass
Exterior Mirror Motor
Interior Rear View Mirror
www.JagDocs.com

501‐10: Seating
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Seat Cover Inspection
Seats
Heater Mats
Seats ‐ Vehicles With: Climate Controlled Seats
General Procedures
Seat Smoothing
Front Seat (76.70.01)
Front Seat Backrest (76.70.06)
Front Seat Backrest Cover (76.70.15)
Front Seat Bolster
www.JagDocs.com
Front Seat Bolster Pump
Front Seat Cushion Cover
Front Seat Track Motor
Lumbar Assembly
Memory Seat Position Switch
Seat Base
Rear Seat Backrest Cover (76.70.48) (78.90.12)
Rear Seat Cushion (76.70.37)
Front Seat Height Adjustment Motor
Front Seat Control Switch
Front Seat Head Restraint Motor (86.75.17)
Rear Seat Bolster
Front Seat Backrest Cover Trim Panel

501‐11: Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms
Fixed Window Glass
General Procedures
Door Window Motor Initialization
Driver Door Window Control Switch (86.25.03) (86.25.08)
Front Door Window Glass
Front Door Window Regulator and Motor (76.31.45)
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Door Fixed Window Glass
Rear Door Window Glass
Rear Door Window Regulator and Motor
Rear Window Glass
Windshield Glass
Door Window Regulator Motor (86.25.04)

501‐12: Instrument Panel and Console
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Floor Console
Floor Console Cup Holder
Floor Console Double Cup Holder
www.JagDocs.com
Floor Console Side Trim Panel
Glove Compartment
Instrument Panel Console
Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel
Overhead Console

501‐14: Handles, Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Locks, Latches and Entry Systems
Door Lock Cylinder Cover
Exterior Front Door Handle
Exterior Luggage Compartment Lid Release Switch
Exterior Rear Door Handle
Front Door Latch
Front Door Lock Cylinder
Interior Front Door Handle
Luggage Compartment Lid Latch Actuator
Luggage Compartment Lid Lock Cylinder
Rear Door Latch

501‐16: Wipers and Washers
Specification
Component Location
Overview
www.JagDocs.com
Wipers and Washers
Headlamp Washer Jet
Headlamp Washer Pump
Rain Sensor
Windshield Washer Reservoir
Windshield Wiper Motor
Windshield Wiper Pivot Arm
Windshield Washer Pump

501‐17: Roof Opening Panel
Specification
Component Location
Overview
www.JagDocs.com
Roof Opening Panel
General Procedures
Roof Opening Panel Alignment
Motor Synchronization (76.82.48)
Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose
Roof Opening Panel Frame
Roof Opening Panel Glass
Roof Opening Panel Motor
Roof Opening Panel Rear Drain Hose
Roof Opening Panel Weatherstrip

501‐19: Bumpers
Specification
Front Bumper (76.22.08)
Front Bumper Cover
Front Bumper Cover Insert
Rear Bumper Cover
Rear Bumper

501‐20A: Safety Belt System
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Safety Belt System
www.JagDocs.com
Front Safety Belt Buckle
Front Safety Belt Retractor
Rear Center Safety Belt Retractor
Rear Safety Belt Buckle
Rear Safety Belt Retractor
Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster

501‐20B: Supplemental Restraint System
Specification
Component Location
Overview
Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
www.JagDocs.com
General Procedures
Air Bag Disposal
B‐Pillar Side Impact Sensor
Clockspring
C‐Pillar Side Impact Sensor
Crash Sensor
Driver Air Bag Module
Occupant Classification Sensor
Passenger Air Bag Module
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Side Air Bag Module (76.73.47)
Side Air Curtain Module

501‐20C: Pedestrian Protection System
Component Location
Overview
Pedestrian Protection System
Pedestrian Impact Sensor
Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator LH
Pedestrian Protection Hood Actuator RH
Pedestrian Protection Module

501‐25A: Body Repairs ‐ General Information
Body Repairs

www.JagDocs.com
501‐25B: Body Repairs ‐ Corrosion Protection
Corrosion Protection

501‐25C: Body Repairs ‐ Water Leaks
Water Leaks

501‐26: Body Repairs ‐ Vehicle Specific Information and Tolerance Checks
Body and Frame

501‐27: Front End Sheet Metal Repairs
Front End Sheet Metal
Fender Apron Closing Panel Front Section
Fender Apron Panel
www.JagDocs.com
Fender Apron Panel Closing Panel
Fender Apron Panel Front Extension
Fender Apron Panel Front Section
Front Bumper Mounting
Front Fender
Front Fender Support Bracket
Front Side Member
Front Side Member and Suspension Top Mount Assembly
Front Side Member Closing Panel
Front Side Member Closing Panel Section
Front Side Member Section
Front Wheelhouse Section
Hood Latch Panel
Hood Latch Panel Mounting Bracket

501‐28: Roof Sheet Metal Repairs
Roof
Roof Panel ‐ Vehicles With: Sliding Roof Opening Panel
Roof Panel ‐ Vehicles Without: Sliding Roof Opening Panel

501‐29: Side Panel Sheet Metal Repairs
Side Panel Sheet Metal
A‐Pillar Outer Panel
A‐Pillar Reinforcement
B‐Pillar Inner Panel
B‐Pillar Reinforcement
www.JagDocs.com
Front Door Skin Panel
Rear Door Skin Panel
Rocker Panel
Rocker Panel and B‐Pillar Outer Panel
Rocker Panel Front Section
Rocker Panel Inner Reinforcement
Rocker Panel Rear Section

501‐30: Rear End Sheet Metal Repairs
Rear End Sheet Metal
Back Panel
Quarter Panel
Quarter Panel Lower Extension
Rear Bumper Mounting
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Floor Side Extension
Rear Side Member Closing Panel Section
Rear Side Member Section
Rear Wheelhouse Outer
Spare Wheel Well

502: Frame and Mounting
502‐00: Uni‐Body, Subframe and Mounting System
Specification
Front Subframe ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Rear Subframe ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Rear Subframe Rear Bushing (64.25.36) ‐ TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
www.JagDocs.com
Published: 11-May-2011
General Information - About This Manual
Introduction
This manual covers diagnosis and testing and repair procedures.
It is structured into groups and sections, with specific system sections collected together under their relevant group.
A group covers a specific portion of the vehicle. The manual is divided into five groups, General Information, Chassis,
Powertrain, Electrical and Body and Paint. The number of the group is the first number of a section number.
Within Etis, the navigation tree will list the groups. After selecting a group the navigation tree will then list the sections
within that group. Each section has a contents list detailing Specifications, Description and Operation, Diagnosis and Testing,
General Procedures, Disassembly and Assembly, Removal and Installation.
References to LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand)
All LH and RH references to the vehicle are taken from a position sitting in the driver seat looking forward.
Vehicle LH and RH definition

www.JagDocs.com
Item Part Number Description

1 - LH
2 - RH
All LH and RH references to the engine are taken from a position at the flywheel looking towards the crankshaft front pulley.
Powertrain LH and RH definition
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 front
2 right
3 rear
4 left
How to use Repair Procedures

This manual has been written in a format that is designed to meet the needs of technicians worldwide. It provides general
descriptions for accomplishing repair work with tested and effective techniques.
Important Safety Instructions
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor vehicles as
well as the personal safety of the individual carrying out the work.
Anyone who departs from the instructions provided in this manual must first establish that personal safety or vehicle integrity
is not compromised by the choice of method, tools or components.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual
WARNING: Warnings are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: Cautions are used to indicate that failure to follow a procedure correctly may result in damage to the vehicle or
equipment being used.
NOTE: Notes are used to provide additional essential information required to carry out a complete and satisfactory repair.
Generic warnings or cautions are in their relevant description and operation procedure within section 100-00. If the generic
warnings or cautions are required for a procedure, there will be a referral to the appropriate description and operation
procedure.
If a warning, caution or note only applies to one step, it is placed at the beginning of the specific step.
www.JagDocs.com
Trustmark Authoring Standards (TAS) Repair Procedur
NOTE: TAS style procedures can be identified by steps that have no accompanying step text and the magenta color of the
electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps or clips.
A TAS removal and installation procedure uses a sequence of color illustrations to indicate the order to be followed when
removing/disassembling or installing/assembling a component.
Many of the TAS procedures will have the installation information within the removal steps. These procedures will have the
following note at the beginning of the procedure:
NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
Reuse of fasteners and seals and gaskets
The following list details the general policy for the reuse of fasteners and seals and gaskets.
Types of self-locking nuts and bolts
NOTE: There are more types of self-locking fasteners available than shown in following illustration.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Completely coated self-locking bolt
2 Partially coated self-locking bolt
3 Self-locking bolt with a locking washer
4 Self-locking nut with a plastic locking insert
5 Self-locking nut with thread deformation (3 dents)
6 Self-locking nut with thread deformation (squeeze of thread to oval shape)
7 Self-locking nut with integrated locking ring
All types of seals and gaskets must be discarded and new seals and gaskets installed unless otherwise stated within
the procedure.
Nuts and bolts with a chemical coating for locking and/or sealing and/or antiseize must be discarded unless the
procedure advises to reapply the coating with a specified material.
Nuts and bolts with a mechanical locking such as thread inserts, thread deformation or locking washers must be
discarded and new nuts and bolts installed unless otherwise stated within the procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque to yield bolts must be discarded and new torque to yield bolts installed unless otherwise stated within the
procedure, recognizable by a tightening torque with more than one stage together with a torque angle.
Specification data
Specification procedures will only contain technical data that is not already part of a repair procedure.
Sequence of tasks
If components must be removed or installed in a specific sequence, the sequence will be identified numerically in a graphic and
the corresponding text will be numbered accordingly.
Special Tools, Equipment, Materials and Torque Figures
Special tools will be shown with the tool numbers in the illustration. The special tool numbers, general equipment, materials
and torque figures used for the procedure step will be shown in the text column.
TAS Graphics
Colors used in the graphic are as follows:
Blue - Component to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled.

Green and Brown - Additional components that need to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled prior to the
target component.
Yellow - Component that is touched or affected in a way but remains in the vehicle. It may be detached, attached,
moved, modified, checked, adjusted etc.
Magenta - Electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps and clips.
Pale Blue - Special tool(s) and general equipment.
One illustration may have multiple steps assigned to it.
Numbered pointers are used to indicate the number of electrical connectors and fasteners such as nuts, bolts, clamps and
clips.
www.JagDocs.com
Items in the illustration can be transparent or use cutouts to show hidden details.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
TAS Symbols
Symbols are used inside the graphics and in the text area to enhance the information display. The following paragraphs
describe the various types and categories of symbols.
For additional information, refer to: Symbols Glossary (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
www.JagDocs.com
Prohibition symbols advise on prohibited actions to either avoid damage or health and safety related risks. These symbols are
Health and Safety symbols recommend the use of particular protection equipment to avoid or at least reduce the risk or
severity of possible injuries.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Warning symbols are used to indicate potential risks resulting from a certain component or area.
Instruction symbols are used to apply sealer, lubricant, weight, tape or cleaning detergent to a component.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Location symbols are used to show the location of a component or system within the vehicle.
www.JagDocs.com
Gearshift lever or selector lever position symbols are used to show which gearshift lever or selector lever position is to be set.
www.JagDocs.com
Pointer symbols are used to draw attention to components and give special instructions such as a required sequence or number
of components. The number of components is reflected by the value inside the luty arrow. A sequence number is located inside
the circle. Numbers inside circles are also used to allocate special information such as tightening torques or chemicals to a
particular component.
www.JagDocs.com
Movement arrows are used to show three dimensional or rotational movements. These movements can include specific values
inside the symbol if required.
www.JagDocs.com
Standard tool symbols recommend the use of certain standard tools. These tools can include dimension values if required.
www.JagDocs.com
The following graphic illustrates a set of symbols that are used to provide detailed information on where to apply a material.
www.JagDocs.com
Measurement symbols provide detailed information on where to carry out a specific measurement. These symbols can include
specific values if required.
How to use Diagnosis and Testing procedures

www.JagDocs.com
Inspection and Verification
Visual Inspection Charts, Symptom Charts and other information charts (such as diagnostic routines) or supplement test
procedures with technical specifications will navigate the user to a specific test procedure.
Symptom Chart
The symptom chart indicates symptoms, sources and actions to address a condition.
Pinpoint Tests
For electrical systems, pinpoint test steps are used to identify the source of a concern in a logical, step-by-step manner.
Pinpoint tests have two columns: CONDITIONS and DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS.
The CONDITIONS column is used exclusively for graphics and icons (with or without captions) and the DETAILS/RESULTS
/ACTIONS column provides direction to another test step or specific corrective actions.
The boxed numbers indicate the order in which the described action is to be carried out.
Component Tests
A component test is used when a component is tested in multiple pinpoint tests, or if a procedure is too complicated to be
formatted within a single page of the pinpoint test.
Graphics
Test graphics show the measurement or test to be carried out in a test step.
A representative tester graphic is used for voltmeters and ohmmeters.
If multiple measurements are made in a single graphic, the test leads are drawn with a solid line until the test lead splits to
indicate the multiple measurements, at which point dashed lines are used.
Breakout box type testers are represented by a double circle test pin. Test pins are labeled with the pin number.
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Application and Use of Specifications
Torque Specifications
Torque specifications are shown in the torque specifications chart located at the front of the relevant section.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Battery and Battery Charging Health and Safety
Precautions
WARNINGS:
Batteries contain sulphuric acid, avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear safety goggles when working near the
battery to protect against possible splashing of the acid solution.
EYE CONTACT: If acid comes into contact with the eyes, flush immediately with plenty of running water for a minimum of
15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: If acid comes into contact with the skin, flush immediately with plenty of running water for a minimum of
15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
SWALLOWED: If acid is swallowed, rinse the mouth with plenty of water and then drink plenty of water or milk. Do not
induce vomiting. Seek immediate medical attention.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases. Do not allow naked flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the
battery.
www.JagDocs.com
When charging the battery shield your face and wear safety goggles. Provide adequate ventilation.
CAUTION: Boost charging with excessive current or voltage above 16 volts will damage the battery.
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Brake System Health and Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
EYE CONTACT: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. Avoid contact with the eyes. Wash hands thoroughly
after handling. If brake fluid comes into contact with the eyes, flush the eyes with plenty of cold running water for 15 minutes.
Seek medical attention for any persistent eye irritation or abnormality.
SWALLOWED: Brake fluid contains polyglycol ethers and polyglycols. If swallowed, drink plenty of water. Seek immediate
medical attention.
INHALED: Dust from friction materials can be harmful if inhaled.
Only use new specified brake fluid from airtight containers.
CAUTION: If brake fluid is spilled on the paintwork, the affected area must be immediately washed down with cold water.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diesel Fuel System Health and Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Fuel may not give adequate warning before toxic or harmful effects arise.
Exposure to fuel can be harmful and can cause severe health damage or death.
Provide adequate ventilation when working on fuel systems.
Extreme care must be exercised when handling hot fluids. Always wash off spilled fluids from affected areas of skin
immediately.
Fuel must not be used as a cleaning agent.
Keep fuel containers tightly closed, out of direct sunlight and in a cool area. Keep away from heat sources, ignition
sources and oxidizing agents.
SKIN CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the skin and may cause dermatitis due to defatting effect. Remove
contaminated clothing. Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Seek medical attention for any persistent skin
www.JagDocs.com
irritation or abnormality. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
SKIN CONTACT: Excessive or prolonged skin contact with diesel fuel may cause serious skin disorders including skin
cancer.
EYE CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the eyes. Flush with plenty of running water, blinking as often as possible. Do
not force the eyelid open. Seek medical attention for any persistent eye irritation or abnormality.
SWALLOWED: Fuel is moderately toxic and tends to foam on vomiting. If drawn into the lungs, inflammation may
develop. Do not induce vomiting. If spontaneous vomiting occurs place the victim in a forward position to reduce the risk of
fuel being drawn into the lungs. Give nothing by mouth. If breathing but unconscious, place in the recovery position. If
breathing has stopped, apply artificial respiration. Seek immediate medical attention.
INHALED: Fuel is toxic to the respiratory and other body systems. Exposure may result in various symptoms including
drowsiness, unconsciousness or severe health damage. Move a victim to fresh air. Keep a victim warm and at rest. If
unconscious, place in the recovery position. If not breathing, apply artificial respiration. Give cardiac massage if necessary.
Seek immediate medical attention.
CAUTIONS:
Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is essential that absolute
cleanliness is observed when working with these components.
Make sure that the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible.
Make sure that non-plated tools are used.
Tools must be cleaned using a new brush and fresh suitable evaporative cleaning agent.
Make sure to use a steel topped workbench covered with clean, lint-free, non-flocking material.
Make sure that all parts removed from the vehicle are placed on the lint-free, non-flocking material.
Make sure that any protective clothing worn is clean and made from lint-free, non-flocking material.
www.JagDocs.com
Make sure to wear non-powdered latex type gloves.
Make sure to protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking material before using the
suitable evaporative cleaning agent.
NOTE: Soot, discomfort and irritation usually give adequate warning of hazardous fume concentrations.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Published: 28-Dec-2012
General Information - General Service Information
Repairs and Replacements

When service parts are required, it is essential that only genuine Jaguar/Daimler replacements are used.
Attention is drawn to the following points concerning repairs and the installation of replacement parts and accessories:
Safety features embodied in the vehicle may be impaired if other than genuine parts are installed. In certain territories,
legislation prohibits the installation of parts which are not produced to the vehicle manufacturer's specification.
Torque wrench setting figures given in this manual must be strictly adhered to. Locking devices, where specified, must
be installed. If the efficiency of a locking device is impaired during removal it must be renewed.
Owners purchasing accessories while travelling abroad should make sure that the accessory and its installed location on
the vehicle conform to mandatory requirements existing in their country of origin.
The vehicle warranty may be invalidated by the installation of other than genuine Jaguar/Daimler parts. All
Jaguar/Daimler replacements have the full backing of the factory warranty.
Jaguar/Daimler dealers are obliged to supply only genuine service parts.
Vehicle Specifications
Purchasers are advised that the specification details set out in this manual apply to a range of vehicles and not to any specific
one. For the specification of a particular vehicle, purchasers should consult their dealer.
The Manufacturer reserves the right to vary the specifications, with or without notice, and at such times and in such manner as
the Manufacturer thinks fit. Major as well as minor changes may be involved, in accordance with the Manufacturer's policy of
continuous improvement.
Whilst every effort is made to make sure the accuracy of the particulars contained in this manual, neither the Manufacturer nor
www.JagDocs.com
the Dealer, by whom the manual is supplied, shall in any circumstances be held liable for any inaccuracy or the consequences
thereof.
Service Repair Operation Numbering

A master index of numbered operations has been compiled for universal application to all vehicles manufactured by Jaguar
Land Rover Limited.
Each operation is allocated a number from the master index and cross-refers with an identical number in the Repair Operation
Times schedule. The number consists of six digits arranged in three pairs.
Each maintenance procedure in this manual is described in the sequence necessary to complete the operation in the minimum
time, as specified in the Repair Operation Times schedule.
References to Bank-1 and Bank-2

References to Bank-1 and Bank-2 are made with regard to the engine. When viewed from the flywheel the right-hand bank will
be Bank-1 and the left-hand bank will be Bank-2.
Special Tools
Any special tools and equipment required to perform a maintenance procedure, are shown at the beginning of each procedure.
When possible, illustrations are given to assist in identifying the tool needed.
Disconnecting/Connecting the Battery

Always stop the engine before disconnecting the battery negative lead and make sure the battery positive lead is isolated i.e.
wrapped in a suitable cloth.
WARNING: Radio code saving devices must not be used when conducting work on Air Bag or Fuel systems. It must be
noted that, when using these devices, the vehicle electrical system is still live albeit with a reduced current flow.
NOTE: Before disconnecting the battery make sure that the radio receiver/cassette player/mini disc player and compact
disc player keycodes are known and, that no data is required from the Engine Control Module (ECM) as battery disconnection
will erase any fault codes and idle/drive values held in the Keep Alive Memory (KAM).
Always disconnect the battery before commencing repair operations which require:
The vehicle to be jacked up

Work on the engine
Work underneath the vehicle
Arc welding
Alternatively a Radio Code Saver may be used, when not working on the Air Bag or Fuel systems. With the battery
www.JagDocs.com
disconnected, a Radio Code Saver will allow sufficient current to pass to maintain the radio receiver/cassette player/mini disc
player and compact disc player memory, operate the clock and supply the door operated interior lights while isolating the
battery in the event of a short circuit.
Reconnecting the Battery
WARNING: If the battery has been on bench charge the cells may be giving off explosive hydrogen gas. Avoid creating
sparks, and if in doubt cover the vent plugs or covers with a damp cloth.
Always make sure that all electrical systems are switched OFF before reconnecting the battery to avoid causing sparks or
damage to sensitive electrical equipment.
Always reconnect the battery positive lead first and the negative last, ensuring that there is a good electrical contact and the
battery terminals are secure.
Restart the clock (where installed) and set it to the correct time.
Enter the radio receiver/cassette player/mini disc player and compact disc player keycodes and preset' frequencies, if known.
Following reconnection of the battery, the engine should be allowed to idle until it has reached normal operating temperature
as the stored idle and drive values contained within the ECM have been lost. Allow the vehicle to idle for a further three
minutes. Drive the vehicle at constant speeds of approximately 48 km/h (30 mph), 64 km/h (40 mph), 80 km/h (50 mph), 96
km/h (60 mph) and 112 km/h (70 mph) for three minutes each. This will allow the ECM to relearn idle and drive values, and
may cause driveability concerns if the procedure is not carried out.
Connecting a Slave Battery Using Jump Leads
WARNING: If the slave battery has recently been charged and is gassing, cover the vent plugs or covers with a damp
cloth to reduce the risk of explosion should arcing occur when connecting the jump leads.
www.JagDocs.com
CAUTIONS:
A discharged battery condition may have been caused by an electrical short circuit. If this condition exists there will be
an apparently live circuit on the vehicle even when all circuits are switched off. This can cause arcing when the jump leads are
connected.
Whilst it is not recommended that the vehicle is jump started, it is recognized that this may occasionally be the only
practical way to mobilize a vehicle. In such an instance the discharged battery must be recharged immediately after jump
starting to avoid permanent damage.
Always make sure that the jump leads are adequate for the task. Heavy duty cables must be used.
Always make sure that the slave battery is of the same voltage as the vehicle battery. The batteries must be connected
in parallel.
Always make sure that switchable electric circuits are switched off before connecting jump leads. This reduces the risk
of sparks occurring when the final connection is made.
WARNING: Make sure that the ends of the jump leads do not touch each other or ground against the vehicle body at any
time while the leads are attached to the battery. A fully charged battery, if shorted through jump leads, can discharge at a rate
well above 1000 amps causing violent arcing and very rapid heating of the jump leads and terminals, and can even cause the
battery to explode.
Always connect the jump leads in the following sequence.
Slave battery positive first then vehicle battery positive.

Slave battery negative next and then vehicle ground at least, 300 mm (12 in) from the battery terminal e.g. engine
lifting bracket.
www.JagDocs.com
Always reduce the engine speed to idle before disconnecting the jump leads.
Before removing the jump leads, switch on the heater blower (high) or the heated rear screen, to reduce the voltage peak
when the leads are removed.
Always disconnect the jump leads in the reverse order to the connecting sequence and take great care not to short the ends of
the leads.
Do not rely on the generator to restore a discharged battery. For a generator to recharge a battery, it would take in excess of 8
hours continuous driving with no additional loads placed on the battery.
Component Cleaning
To prevent ingress of dirt, accumulations of loose dirt and greasy deposits should be removed before disconnecting or
dismantling components or assemblies.
Components should be thoroughly cleaned before inspection prior to reassembly.
Cleaning Methods:
Dry Cleaning
Removal of loose dirt with soft or wire brushes
Scraping dirt off with a piece of metal or wood
Wiping off with a rag
CAUTION: Compressed air is sometimes wet so use with caution, especially on hydraulic systems.
Blowing dirt off with compressed air (Eye protection should be worn when using this method)
Removal of dry dust using vacuum equipment. This method should always be used to remove friction lining material
dust (asbestos particles)
Steam Cleaning
www.JagDocs.com
Calibration of Essential Measuring Equipment
WARNING: Failure to comply may result in personal injury or damage to components.
It is of fundamental importance that certain essential equipment e.g. torque wrenches, multimeters, exhaust gas analysers,
rolling roads etc., are regularly calibrated in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Use of Control Modules

Control modules may only be used on the vehicle to which they were originally installed. Do not attempt to use or test a
control module on any other vehicle.
Functional Test
On completion of a maintenance procedure, a thorough test should be carried out, to ensure the relevant vehicle systems are
working correctly.
Preparation
Before disassembly, clean the surrounding area as thoroughly as possible. When components have been removed, blank off
any exposed openings using grease-proof paper and masking tape. Immediately seal fuel, oil and hydraulic lines when
separated, using plastic caps or plugs, to prevent loss of fluid and the entry of dirt. Close the open ends of oil ways, exposed
by component removal, with tapered hardwood plugs or readily visible plastic plugs. Immediately a component is removed,
place it in a suitable container; use a separate container for each component and its associated parts. Before dismantling a
component, clean it thoroughly with a recommended cleaning agent; check that the agent will not damage any of the materials
within the component. Clean the bench and obtain marking materials, labels, containers and locking wire before dismantling a
component.
Dismantling
Observe scrupulous cleanliness when dismantling components, particularly when parts of the brake, fuel or hydraulic systems
are being worked on. A particle of dirt or a fragment of cloth could cause a dangerous malfunction if trapped in these systems.
Clean all tapped holes, crevices, oil ways and fluid passages with compressed air.
WARNING: Do not permit compressed air to enter an open wound. Always use eye protection when using compressed air.
Make sure that any O-rings used for sealing are correctly reinstalled or renewed if disturbed. Mark mating parts to make sure
that they are replaced as dismantled. Whenever possible use marking materials which avoid the possibilities of causing
distortion or the initiation of cracks, which could occur if a center punch or scriber were used. Wire together mating parts where
necessary to prevent accidental interchange (e.g roller bearing components). Tie labels on to all parts to be renewed and to
parts requiring further inspection before being passed for reassembly. Place labelled parts and other parts for rebuild in
separate containers. Do not discard a part which is due for renewal until it has been compared with the new part, to make sure
www.JagDocs.com
that the correct part has been obtained.
Inspection
Before inspecting a component for wear or performing a dimensional check, make sure that it is absolutely clean; a slight
smear of grease can conceal an incipient failure. When a component is to be checked dimensionally against figures quoted for
it, use the correct equipment (surface plates, micrometers, dial gauges etc.) in serviceable condition. The use of makeshift
equipment can be dangerous. Reject a component if its dimensions are outside the limits quoted, or if damage is apparent. A
component may be reinstalled if its critical dimension is exactly to the limit size and it is otherwise satisfactory. Use
Plastigauge 12 Type PG-1 for checking bearing surface clearance, e.g. big end bearing shell to crank journal. Instructions for
the use of Plastigauge and a scale giving bearing clearances in steps of 0,0025 mm (0.0001 in) are supplied with the package.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD)

This vehicle uses programmed electronic control systems to provide engine management and emission regulation, automatic
transmission operation and anti-lock braking control. These control systems are integral with the On-Board Diagnostics (OBD)
facility that is used in conjunction with either the Jaguar approved diagnostic system or the more restricted scan tools.
The OBD information in this manual provides diagnostic and rectification procedures for emission related electrical and
mechanical systems. The information is intended to facilitate fault diagnosis and the subsequent rectification of the vehicle
without recourse to the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
The diagnosis and testing sections within the manual cover:
System principles of operation with links to the relevant Description and Operation sections
Self tests (where appropriate)
Inspection and Verification - manual checks, symptom and Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) driven diagnostic charts with
actions required to rectify concerns
Component tests (where appropriate)
Circuit Diagrams
www.JagDocs.com
To understand the relationship between the vehicle electrical system and the system circuit diagrams, Refer to the Electrical
Guide.
In the interest of clarity, single lines may represent multiple wires. Refer to the color code (1st alpha) followed by the wire
reference (numeric/alpha/numeric) to trace origin and destination.
e.g. BW 647B002. BW (black with white trace) 647 (wire reference) B002 (stage from origin).
Glossary of Terms
This glossary of terms is intended to cover mainly emissions-related (to SAE J 1930) terminology, and other abbreviations that
may be used in this manual.
The required term may be looked-up in the left-hand column, and subsequent columns give the standard acronym, unit or
abbreviation, and definition.
Acronym/Unit
Term(s) /Abbreviation Definition
Air Conditioning A/C
Accelerator Pedal Position APP Is a multitrack sensor which inputs the drivers demand into the engine
control module (ECM)
After Bottom Dead Center ABDC Event occurring after bottom dead center
After Top Dead Center ATDC Event occurring after top dead center
Anti-lock Brake System ABS System which prevents wheel lock-up under braking by sensing lack of
rotation of a wheel(s) and diverting fluid pressure away from it (them)
Alternating Current ac
Amplitude Modulation AM
Automatic Temperature Control ATC
Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF
Ampere A SI unit of current
Ampere hour Ah
Barometric Pressure BARO Pressure of surrounding air at any given temperature and altitude
Battery positive voltage B+ The positive voltage from a battery or any circuit connected directly to it
Before Bottom Dead Center BBDC Event occurring before bottom dead center
Before Top Dead Center BTDC Event occurring before top dead center
Bottom Dead Center BDC Lowest point of piston travel in a reciprocating engine
Battery Junction Box BJB
Brake Pedal Position BPP
Brake Horsepower BHP Effective horsepower developed by an engine or motor, as measured by a
brake applied to its output shaft
British Standard BS Standard specification issued by the British Standards Institution
Brake Traction Control System BTCS
www.JagDocs.com
Acronym/Unit
Bus Topology of a
communication
network
Coast Clutch Solenoid CCS
Camshaft Position CMP Indicates camshaft position
Carbon dioxide CO² Colorless gas with a density of approximately 1.5 times that of air
Carbon monoxide CO Poisonous gas produced as the result of incomplete combustion
Chlorofluorocarbon CFC
Catalytic converter In-line exhaust system device used to reduce the level of engine exhaust
emissions
Celsius C SI term for the Centigrade scale, with freezing point at zero and boiling
point at 100 degrees
Compact Disc CD
Cylinder Head Temperature CHT Sensor A sensor for measuring the temperature of the cylinder head
Sensor
Central Junction Box CJB
Crankshaft Position CKP Indicates crankshaft position
Clutch Pedal Position CPP Indicates clutch pedal position
Controller Area Network CAN A communication system which allows control modules to be linked
together
Constant Velocity CV
Cubic centimeter cm³
Central Security Module CSM Electronic module to support security system functionality
Data Link Connector DLC Connector providing access and/or control of the vehicle information,
operating conditions, and diagnostic information
Driver Door Module DDM Electronic module to support driver door functionality
Driver Seat Module DSM Electronic module to support driver seat functionality
www.JagDocs.com
Daytime Running Lamps DRL

Deutsche Institut fur Normung DIN German standards regulation body
Diagnostic Trouble Code DTC An alpha/numeric identifier for a fault condition identified by the On-Board
Diagnostic (OBD) system
Direct current dc Current which flows in one direction only, though it may have appreciable
pulsations in its magnitude
Domestic Data Bus D2B
Digital Versatile Disc DVD
Electronic Automatic EATC
Temperature Control
Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR
Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGRT Sensing EGR function based on temperature change
Temperature Sensor
Electronic Brake Force EBD
Distribution
Engine Control Module ECM Electronic module to support engine functionality
Electronic Crash Sensor ECS Sensor to measure severity of impact
Engine Coolant Temperature ECT
Engine Oil Pressure EOP
European On-Board Diagnostic EOBD
Electronic Pressure Control EPC
Electrically Erasable EEPROM
Programmable Read-Only
Memory
Erasable Programmable EPROM
Read-Only Memory
Evaporative Emission EVAP System designed to prevent fuel vapor from escaping into the atmosphere.
Typically includes a charcoal filled canister to absorb fuel vapor
Flash Electrically Erasable FEEPROM
Programmable Read-Only
Memory
Front Electronic Module FEM
Flash Erasable Programmable FEPROM
Read-Only Memory
Frequency Modulation FM
Fuel Pump Driver Module FPDM
Fuel Rail Pressure FRP
Generic Electronic Module GEM
Ground GND Electrical conductor used as a common return for an electrical circuit or
circuits, and with a relative zero potential
Global Positioning System GPS
Global System for Mobile GSM
Communication
Gross Vehicle Weight GVW
Heated Oxygen Sensor HO2S Electrically heated oxygen sensor which induces fuelling corrections
www.JagDocs.com
Acronym/Unit
Hydrofluorocarbon HFC
High tension HT
Hydrocarbon HC
Idle Air Control IAC Stepper motor driven device which varies the volume of air by-passing the
throttle to maintain the programmed idle speed
Intake Air Temperature IAT Temperature of intake air
Inertia Fuel Shut-off IFS An inertia system that shuts off the fuel supply when activated by
pre-determined force limits brought about by (e.g.) collision
Input Shaft Speed ISS Indicates input shaft speed
Key On, Engine Off KOEO
Key On, Engine Running KOER
Kilogram (mass) kg
Kilogram (force) kgf
Kilogram force per square kgf/cm²
centimeter
Kilometer km
Kilometer per hour km/h
Kilopascal kPa
Kilovolt kV
Knock Sensor KS Sensor which detects the onset of detonation, and signals the ECM to
retard the ignition
Liquid Crystal Display LCD Optical digital display system, to which applied voltage varies the way the
crystals reflect light, thereby modifying the display
Lighting Control Module LCM
Light Emitting Diode LED
Low Tension LT Primary circuit of the ignition system, linking the battery to the primary
winding in the ignition coil
www.JagDocs.com
Left-Hand LH
Left-Hand Drive LHD
Mass Air Flow MAF System which provides information on the mass flow rate of the intake air
to the engine
Manifold Absolute Pressure MAP Absolute pressure of the intake manifold air
Manifold Absolute Pressure and MAPT
Temperature
Malfunction Indicator Lamp MIL A required on-board indicator to alert the driver of an emission related
malfunction
Meter (measurement) m
Metric (screw thread, e.g. M8) M
Farad F Unit of electrical capacitance
Millimeter mm
Millimeter of mercury mmHg
Millisecond ms
Model year MY
Newton N SI unit of force. 1 N = 0.2248 pounds force
Newton Meter Nm SI unit of torque. Must not be confused with nm (nanometer)
Negative Temperature NTC
Coefficient
Naturally aspirated N/A Fuelling system using intake air at atmospheric pressure; not
supercharged or turbocharged
Noise, Vibration and Harshness NVH
North American Specification NAS Vehicles for sale in the USA and Canadian markets
On-Board Diagnostic OBD A system that monitors some or all computer input and output control
signals. Signal(s) outside the pre-determined limits imply a fault in the
system or a related system
Oxides of Nitrogen Nox
Oxygen Sensor O2S A sensor which detects oxygen content in the exhaust gases
On-board Refuelling Vapour ORVR
Recovery
Output State Control OSC
Output Shaft Speed OSS
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation PAD
Pulsed Secondary Air Injection PAIR
Passive Anti-Theft System PATS
Positive Crankcase Ventilation PCV
Parameter Identification PID An index number referring to a parameter within a module without
knowledge of its storage location
Park/Neutral Position PNP
Pulse Width Modulation PWM
Programmable Electronic PECUS Process whereby a common ECM is programmed on the production line to
Control Units System suit the market requirements of a particular vehicle
www.JagDocs.com
Acronym/Unit
Programmable Read-only PROM ROM with some provision for setting the stored data after manufacture
Memory
Portable Support Electronics PSE
Power Steering Pressure PSP
Polytetrafluoroethylene PTFE
Random Access Memory RAM Fast access memory store which is accessible for entry or extraction of
data
Read Only Memory ROM Fast access memory in which data is fixed and may not be changed
Restraints Control Module RCM Electronic module to support functionality of the Supplemental Restraints
System
Radio Data System RDS
Rear Electronic Module REM
Remote Keyless Entry RKE
Right-hand RH
Right-hand drive RHD
Research Octane Number RON
Rear Seat Module RSM Electronic module to support functionality of rear seats
Supercharger SC An intake system which utilizes a supercharger (mechanically driven
device that pressurizes intake air, thereby increasing density of charge air
and the consequent power output from a given displacement)
Serial Communications Link SCL
Standard Corporate Protocol SCP A high-speed, serial communications system linking all body system
control modules. Control messages and data are passed between modules
at up to 786 messages per second
Supplemental Restraints SRS
System
Shift Solenoid SS Controls shifting in an automatic transmission
www.JagDocs.com
Seat Control Module SCM Module controlling the seat motor systems (not electric raise/lower-only
seats)
Secondary Air Injection AIR System used for a period of time each time the engine is started, unless
certain temperature criteria are met. Pumps air directly into the exhaust
system which generates extra heat and reduces the time taken for the
catalytic converters to reach operating temperature
Service Repair Operation SRO Number generated by Jaguar Methods & Techniques system which relates
(number) to the time allowed to complete a repair operation. Further information on
the system can be found in the separate Jaguar Publications (for each
model range) entitled 'Repair Operation Times'
Society of Automotive SAE
Engineers
Timing/Coast Clutch Solenoid T/CCS
Torque Converter Clutch TCC
Transmission Control Indicator TCIL
Lamp
Throttle Position TP
Top Dead Center TDC
Transmission Control Module TCM Controls the shifting pattern of the (automatic) transmission
Transmission Control Switch TCS Modifies the operation of electronically controlled transmissions
Transmission Fluid Temperature TFT Indicates temperature of transmission fluid
Transmission Range TR The range in which the transmission is operating
Turbine Shaft Speed TSS Indicates rotational speed of transmission output shaft or turbine shaft
Variable Assist Power Steering VAPS
Variable Camshaft Timing VCT A system by which the relationship of the crankshaft and camshaft may be
altered during engine running
Vehicle Identification Number VIN Number assigned to the vehicle by the manufacturer, primarily for
licensing and identification purposes
Vehicle Speed Sensor VSS Sensor which provides vehicle speed information
Worldwide Diagnostic System WDS Jaguar approved diagnostic system
Wide Open Throttle WOT Full throttle position
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Health and Safety Precautions
The Health and Safety Precautions subsection refers to some commonly used chemicals and materials, hazards associated with
their use, and safety measures to be taken. Some of these chemicals may be included in the following list either in their own
right or as an ingredient in a sealer or adhesive.
Acids and Alkalis

See also Battery Acids.
e.g. caustic soda, sulphuric acid.
Used in batteries and cleaning materials.
Irritant and corrosive to the skin, eyes, nose and throat. Cause burns. Can destroy ordinary protective clothing.
Avoid splashes to the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear suitable protective impervious apron, gloves and goggles. Do not breath
mists.
Ensure access to eye wash bottles, shower and soap are readily available for splashing accidents.
Display Eye Hazard sign.
Air Bags
See also Fire, Chemical Materials - General
Highly flammable, explosive – observe No Smoking policy.

www.JagDocs.com
Used as a part of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), mounted in various positions around the vehicle.
The inflator contains a high-energetic propellant which, when ignited, produces a VERY HOT GAS (2500° C).
The gas generant used in air bags is Sodium Azide. This material is hermetically sealed in the module and is completely
consumed during deployment. No attempt should be made to open an air bag inflator as this will lead to the risk of exposure
to Sodium Azide. If a gas generator is ruptured, full protective clothing should be worn when dealing with the spillage.
After normal deployment, gloves and safety goggles should be worn during the handling process.
Deployed air bags should be disposed of in a plastic bag in accordance with local regulations at an approved chemical waste
site.
Following any direct contact with gas generant.
Wash affected areas thoroughly with water

Seek medical assistance if necessary
WARNING: To avoid accidental deployment and possible personal injury, the backup power supply must be depleted
before repairing or replacing any SRS components. To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery negative
cable and wait for one minute. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
NOTE: The storage, transportation, disposal and/or recycling of air bag modules must be carried out in accordance with all
applicable federal, state and local regulations including, but not limited to, those governing building and fire codes,
environmental protection, occupational health and safety and transportation.
Air Bags - Do's
Do store in an air bag safe when not installed to the vehicle.

Do store modules in an upright position
Do keep modules dry
Do carry modules with the cover side pointing away from the body
Do place modules with their cover side upwards
Do carefully inspect modules for damage
Do stand to one side when connecting modules
Do make sure all test equipment is properly calibrated and maintained
Do wash you hands after handling deployed air bags
Do wear safety glasses when carrying out repairs to the SRS or when handling an air bag module
Only carry out a system test with the air bag modules fully installed
Do inspect the condition of the impact sensor mounting bracket and sensor flylead if the vehicle has been involved in
an impact. Replace if damaged, even if there has been no deployment.
Air Bags - Do Nots
Do not store highly flammable material together with modules or gas generators
Do not store gas generators at temperatures exceeding 80° C
www.JagDocs.com
Do not store modules upside down
Do not attempt to open a gas generator housing
Do not expose gas generators to open flame or sources of heat
Do not place anything on top of a module cover
Do not use damaged modules
Do not handle a deployed device or gas generator for at least 20 minutes
Do not probe air bag module electrical connectors or any other SRS component
Air Conditioning Refrigerant

See also Chlorofluorocarbon, Chemical Materials
Highly flammable, combustible – observe No Smoking policy.
Skin contact may result in frostbite.
Instructions given by the manufacturer must be followed. Avoid naked lights, wear suitable protective gloves and goggles.
If refrigerant comes into contact with the skin or eyes, rinse the affected areas with water immediately. Eyes should also be
rinsed with an appropriate irrigation solution and should not be rubbed. SEEK MEDICAL ASSISTANCE IF NECESSARY.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant - Do Nots
Do not expose refrigerant bottles to sunlight or heat

Do not expose refrigerant bottles to frost
Do not drop refrigerant bottles
Do not vent refrigerant to atmosphere under any circumstance
Do not mix refrigerants i.e. R12 (Freon) and R134a
Antifreeze
See also Fire, Solvents.
www.JagDocs.com
e.g. isopropanol, ethylene glycol, methanol.
Highly flammable, flammable, combustible.
Used in vehicle coolant systems, brake air pressure systems, screenwash solutions.
Vapors may be given off from coolant antifreeze (glycol) when heated. Avoid breathing these vapors.
Antifreeze may be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities. Antifreeze, if swallowed can be fatal and medical
attention should be sought immediately.
These products must not be used in any cooling or industrial water system which is connected or linked to general, food
preparation or drinking water supplies.
Asbestos
Used in brake and clutch linings, transmission brake bands and gaskets. Jaguar original production and replacement items are
asbestos free.
See also Warning Symbols on Vehicles at the end of this subsection.
Breathing asbestos dust may cause lung damage or, in some cases, cancer.
The use of drum cleaning units, vacuum cleaning or damp wiping is preferred.
Asbestos dust waste should be dampened, placed in a sealed container and marked to make sure safe disposal. If any cutting
or drilling is attempted on materials containing asbestos the item should be dampened and only hand tools or low speed
power tools used.
Battery Acids
See also Acids and Alkalis.
Gases released during charging are explosive. Never use naked flames or allow sparks near charging or recently charged
batteries.
Ensure adequate ventilation.
Brake and Clutch Linings and Pads

See Asbestos.
Brake Fluids (Polyalkylene Glycols)

See also Fire.
www.JagDocs.com
Splashes to the skin and eyes may cause irritation. Avoid skin and eye contact as far as possible. Vapor inhalation hazards do
not arise at ambient temperatures because of the very low vapor pressure.
Brazing
See Welding.
Chemical Materials
See also Legal Aspects.
Chemical materials such as solvents, sealers, adhesives, paints, resin foams, battery acids, antifreeze, brake fluids, fuels, oils
and grease should always be used with caution and stored and handled with care. They may be toxic, harmful, corrosive,
irritant or highly flammable and give rise to hazardous fumes and dusts.
The effects of excessive exposure to chemicals may be immediate or delayed; briefly experienced or permanent; cumulative;
superficial; life threatening; or may reduce life-expectancy.
Chemical Materials - Do's
Do carefully read and observe hazard and precaution warnings given on material containers (labels) and in any
accompanying leaflets, posters or other instructions. Material health and safety data sheets can be obtained from
manufacturers
Do remove chemical materials from the skin and clothing as soon as practical after soiling. Change heavily soiled
clothing and have it cleaned
Do organise work practices and protective clothing to avoid soiling of the skin and eyes, and the breathing in of vapors,
aerosols, dusts or fumes
Do wash before breaks, before eating, smoking, drinking or using toilet facilities when handling chemical materials
Do keep work areas clean, uncluttered and free from spills
Do store chemical materials according to national and local regulations
Do keep chemical materials out of the reach of children
www.JagDocs.com
Chemical Materials - Do Nots
Do not mix chemical materials except under the manufacturer's instructions; some chemicals can form other toxic or
harmful chemicals, give off toxic or harmful fumes or become explosive when mixed together
Do not spray chemical materials, particularly those based on solvents, in confined spaces e.g. when people are inside a
vehicle
Do not apply heat or flame to chemical materials except under the manufacturer's instructions. Some are highly
flammable and some may release toxic or harmful fumes
Do not leave containers open. Fumes given off can build up to toxic, harmful or explosive concentrations. Some fumes
are heavier than air and will accumulate in confined areas, pits etc.
Do not transfer chemical materials to unlabeled containers
Do not clean hands or clothing with chemicals. Chemicals, particularly solvents and fuels, will dry skin and may cause
irritation leading to dermatitis or be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities
Do not use emptied containers for other materials except when they have been cleaned under supervised conditions
Do not sniff or smell chemical materials. Brief exposure to high concentrations of fumes can be toxic or harmful
Chlorofluorocarbons (CFC)
There is concern in the scientific community that CFCs and Halons are depleting the upper ozone layer which filters out harmful
ultraviolet radiation. Decreased filtration of ultraviolet radiation may result in increases in skin cancer, cataracts and immune
system suppression in humans, as well as decreased productivity of crops and aquatic systems.
CFCs are used primarily as refrigerants in vehicle air conditioning systems and as aerosol propellants. Halons are used as fire
extinguishants.
Jaguar supports worldwide elimination of CFC usage and it is recommended that Company subsidiaries and affiliates should
phase out CFC usage as soon as acceptable substitutes are commercially available.
Clutch Fluids
See Brake fluids.
Clutch Linings and Pads

See Asbestos.
Corrosion Protection Materials

See also Solvents, Fire.
Highly flammable, flammable – observe No Smoking policy.
These materials are varied and the manufacturer's instructions should be followed. They may contain solvents, resins,
petroleum products etc. Skin and eye contact should be avoided. They should only be sprayed in conditions of adequate
ventilation and not in confined spaces.
www.JagDocs.com
Cutting
See Welding.
Dewaxing
See Solvents and Fuels (Kerosene).
Dusts
Powder, dusts or clouds may be irritant, harmful or toxic. Avoid breathing dusts from powdery chemical materials or those
arising from dry abrasion operations. Wear respiratory protection if ventilation is inadequate.
Fine dusts of combustible material can present an explosion hazard. Avoid explosive limits and/or sources of ignition.
Electric Shock
Electric shock can result from the use of faulty electrical equipment or from the misuse of equipment in good condition.
Ensure that electrical equipment is maintained in good condition and frequently tested. Faulty equipment should be labelled
and preferably removed from the work station.
Ensure that flexes, cables, plugs and sockets are not frayed, kinked, cut, cracked or otherwise damaged.
Ensure that electrical equipment and flexes do not come into contact with water.
Ensure that electrical equipment is protected by the correct rated fuse.
Never misuse electrical equipment and never use equipment which is in any way faulty. The results could be fatal.
Ensure that the cables of mobile electrical equipment cannot get trapped and damaged, such as in a vehicle hoist.
www.JagDocs.com
Ensure that the designated electrical workers are trained in basic First Aid.
In cases of electrocution:
Switch off the power supply before approaching the victim

If this is not possible push or drag the victim from the source of electricity using dry non-conductive material
Commence resuscitation if trained to do so
SUMMON MEDICAL ASSISTANCE
Engine Oils
See Lubricants and Grease.
Exhaust Fumes
These contain asphyxiating, harmful and toxic chemicals and particles such as carbon oxides, nitrogen oxides, aldehydes, lead
and aromatic hydrocarbons. Engines should be run only under conditions of adequate exhaust extraction or general ventilation
and not in confined spaces.
Gasolene (petrol) engine

There may not be adequate warning of odour or of irritation before toxic or harmful effects arise. These may be immediate or
delayed.
Fibre Insulation
See also Dusts.
Used in noise and sound insulation.
The fibrous nature of surfaces and cut edges can cause skin irritation. This is usually a physical and not a chemical effect.
Precautions should be taken to avoid excessive skin contact through careful organization of work practices and the use of
gloves.
Fire
See also Welding, Foams, Legal Aspects.
Many of the materials found on or associated with the repair of vehicles are highly flammable. Some give off toxic or harmful
fumes if burnt.
Observe strict fire safety when storing and handling flammable materials or solvents, particularly near electrical equipment or
welding processes.
Ensure, before using electrical or welding equipment, that there is no fire hazard present.
www.JagDocs.com
Have a suitable fire extinguisher available when using welding or heating equipment.
First Aid
Apart from meeting any legal requirements it is desirable for someone in the workshop to be trained in First Aid procedures.
Splashes in the eye should be flushed carefully with clean water for at least ten minutes.
Soiled skin should be washed with soap and water.
Individuals affected by inhalation of gases, fumes etc. should be removed to fresh air immediately. If effects persist, consult a
doctor.
If liquids are swallowed inadvertently, consult a doctor giving the information on the container or label. Do not induce vomiting
unless this action is indicated on the label.
Fluoroelastomer
See Viton.
Foams - Polyurethane
See also Fire.
Used in sound and noise insulation. Cured foams used in seat and trim cushioning.
Follow manufacturer's instructions.
Unreacted components are irritating and may be harmful to the skin and eyes. Wear gloves and goggles.
Individuals with chronic respiratory diseases, asthma, bronchial medical problems, or histories of allergic diseases should not
www.JagDocs.com
work in or near uncured materials.
The components, vapors or spray mists can cause direct irritation, sensitivity reactions and may be toxic or harmful.
Vapors and spray mists must not be inhaled. These materials must be applied with adequate ventilation and respiratory
protection. Do not remove the respirator immediately after spraying, wait until the vapor/mists have cleared.
Burning of the uncured components and the cured foams can generate toxic and harmful fumes. Smoking, naked flames or the
use of electrical equipment during foaming operations and until vapors/mists have cleared should not be allowed. Any heat
cutting of cured foams or partially cured foams should be conducted with extraction ventilation.
Freon
See Air Conditioning Refrigerant.
Fuels
See also, Fire, Legal Aspects, Chemicals and Solvents.
Avoid skin contact with fuel where possible. Should contact occur, wash the affected skin with soap and water.
Gasoline (Petrol)
Highly flammable - observe No Smoking policy.
Swallowing can result in mouth and throat irritation and absorption from the stomach can result in drowsiness and
unconsciousness. Small amounts can be fatal to children. Aspiration of liquid into the lungs e.g. through vomiting, is a very
serious hazard.
Gasoline dries the skin and can cause irritation and dermatitis on prolonged or repeated contact. Liquid in the eye causes
severe pain.
Motor gasoline may contain appreciable quantities of benzene, which is toxic upon inhalation, and the concentration of
gasoline vapors must be kept very low. High concentrations will cause eye, nose and throat irritation, nausea, headache,
depression and symptoms of drunkenness. Very high concentrations will result in rapid loss of consciousness.
Ensure there is adequate ventilation when handling and using gasoline. Great care must be taken to avoid the serious
consequences of inhalation in the event of vapor build up arising from spillages in confined spaces.
Special precautions apply to cleaning and maintenance operations on gasoline storage tanks.
Gasoline should not be used as a cleaning agent. It must not be siphoned by mouth. See First Aid.
Gas - oil (Diesel Fuel)

See warnings and cautions in relevant manual sections.
Combustible.
www.JagDocs.com
Gross or prolonged skin contact with high boiling point gas oils may also cause serious skin disorders including skin cancer.
Kerosene (Paraffin)
Used also as heating fuel, solvent and cleaning agent.
Flammable - observe No Smoking policy.
Irritation of the mouth and throat may result from swallowing. The main hazard from swallowing arises if liquid aspiration into
the lungs occurs.
Liquid contact dries the skin and can cause irritation or dermatitis. Splashes in the eye may be slightly irritating.
In normal circumstances the low volatility does not give rise to harmful vapors. Exposure to mists and vapors from kerosene at
elevated temperature should be avoided (mists may arise in dewaxing). Avoid skin and eye contact and make sure there is
adequate ventilation.
Gas Cylinders
See also Fire.
Gases such as oxygen, acetylene, argon and propane are normally stored in cylinders at pressures of up to 13.790 kPa, (2000
lb/in²) and great care should be taken in handling these cylinders to avoid mechanical damage to them or to the valve gear
attached. The contents of each cylinder should be clearly identified by appropriate markings.
Cylinders should be stored in well ventilated enclosures, and protected from ice and snow, or direct sunlight. Fuel gases (e.g.
acetylene and propane) should not be stored in close proximity to oxygen cylinders.
Care should be exercised to prevent leaks from gas cylinders and lines, and to avoid sources of ignition.
Only trained personnel should undertake work involving gas cylinders.

www.JagDocs.com
Gases
See Gas Cylinders.
Gaskets (Fluoroelastomer)
See Viton.
General Workshop Tools and Equipment

It is essential that all tools and equipment are maintained in good condition and the correct safety equipment is used where
required.
Never use tools or equipment for any purpose other than that for which they were designed. Never over – load equipment such
as hoists, jacks, axle and chassis stands or lifting slings. Damage caused by overloading is not always immediately apparent
and may result in a fatal failure the next time that the equipment is used.
Do not use damaged or defective tools or equipment, particularly high speed equipment such as grinding wheels. A damaged
grinding wheel can disintegrate without warning and cause serious injury.
Wear suitable eye protection when using grinding, chiselling or sand blasting equipment.
Wear a suitable breathing mask when using abrasive blasting equipment, working with asbestos-based materials or using
spraying equipment.
Ensure adequate ventilation to control dusts, mists and fumes.
High Pressure Air, Lubrication and Oil Test Equipment

See also Lubricants and Greases.
Always keep high pressure equipment in good condition, and regularly maintained, particularly at joints and unions.
Never direct a high pressure nozzle, e.g. diesel injector, at the skin as the fluid may penetrate to the under - lying tissue etc.,
and cause serious injury.
Halon
See CFCs.
Legal Aspects
Many laws and regulations make requirements relating to health and safety in the use and disposal of materials and
equipment in workshops. Some of these laws which apply in the UK are listed. Similar laws exist for other territories:
The Factories Act (1961)
www.JagDocs.com
The Asbestos Regulations (1969)
Highly Flammable Liquids and Liquified Petroleum Gases Regulations (1972)
Control of Pollution Act (1974)
Health and Safety at Work Act (1974)
The Classification, Packaging and Labelling of Dangerous Substances Regulations (1978, 1981, 1983, 1984)
Control of Lead at Work Regulations (1980)
Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) Regulations (1989)
Abrasive Wheels Regulations (1970)
Reporting of injuries, diseases and dangerous occurrences regulations 1985 (RIDDOR)
Workshops should be familiar, in detail, with these and associated laws and regulations.
Consult the local factory inspectorate if in any doubt.
Lubricants and Greases

Avoid all prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oils. All lubricants and greases may be irritating to the eyes and skin.
Used Engine Oil

Prolonged and repeated contact with mineral oil will result in the removal of natural oils from the skin, leading to dryness,
irritation and dermatitis. In addition, used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin cancer.
Adequate means of skin protection and washing facilities must be provided.
Do not employ used engine oils as lubricants or for any application where appreciable skin contact is likely to occur.
There are publications describing the problems and advising on precautionary measures. For the UK a typical Health and Safety
Executive publication is: SHW 397: Cautionary Notice: Effects of mineral oil on the skin.
Health Protection Precautions
Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils
www.JagDocs.com
Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable

Do not put oily rags into pockets
Avoid contaminating clothing with oil
Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly
First Aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to enable easier removal of dirty oil and grease from the
skin
Wash with soap and water to make sure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations
containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed
Do not use gasoline (petrol), kerosene (paraffin), diesel fuel (gas oil), thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay
Where practical, degrease components prior to handling
Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, goggles or face shields; in addition an
eye wash facility should be provided
Environmental Precautions
Burning used engine oil in small space heaters or boilers can be recommended only for units of approved design. In the UK the
heating system must meet the requirements of HM Inspectorate of Pollution for small burners of less than 0.4 MW. If in doubt
check with the appropriate local authority and/or manufacturer of approved appliances.
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors or licensed waste disposal sites, or to
the waste oil reclamation trade, batteries should also be disposed off under similar arrangements. If in doubt, contact the
relevant local authority for advice on disposal facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil, antifreeze and automatic transmission fluid on to the ground, down sewers, drains, or into water
courses.
Noise
Some operations may produce high noise levels which could, in time, damage hearing. In these cases, suitable ear protection
must be worn.
Noise Insulation Materials

See Foams, Fibre Insulation.
0-Rings (Fluoroelastomer)
See Viton.
Paints
See also body and paint manual.
See also Solvents, Chemical Materials.
www.JagDocs.com
Highly flammable, flammable - observe No Smoking policy
Pressurized Equipment
See High Pressure Air, Lubrication and Oil Test Equipment.
Solder
Solders are a mixture of metals such that the melting point of the mixture is below that of the constituent metals (normally
lead and tin). Solder application does not normally give rise to toxic lead fumes, provided a gas/air flame is used.
Oxy-acetylene flames should not be used, as they are much hotter and will cause lead fumes to be produced.
Some fumes may be produced by the application of any flame to surfaces coated with grease etc. and inhalation of these
should be avoided.
Removal of excess solder should be undertaken with care, to make sure that fine lead dust is not produced, which can give
toxic effects if inhaled. Respiratory protection may be necessary.
Solder spillage and filings should be collected and removed promptly to prevent general air contamination by lead.
High standards of personal hygiene are necessary in order to avoid ingestion of lead or inhalation of solder dust from clothing.
Solvents
See also Chemical Materials, Fuels (Kerosene), Fire.
e.g. acetone, white spirit, toluene, xylene, trichloroethane.
Used in cleaning and de-waxing materials, paints, plastics, resins, thinners etc.
Some may be highly flammable or flammable.

www.JagDocs.com
Skin contact will degrease the skin and may result in irritation and dermatitis following repeated or prolonged contact. Some
can be absorbed through the skin in toxic or harmful quantities.
Splashes in the eye may cause severe irritation and could lead to loss of vision.
Brief exposure to high concentrations of vapors or mists will cause eye and throat irritation, drowsiness, dizziness, headaches
and, in the worst circumstances, unconsciousness.
Repeated or prolonged exposure to excessive but lower concentrations of vapors or mists, for which there might not be
adequate warning indications, can cause more serious toxic or harmful effects.
Aspiration into the lungs (e.g. through vomiting) is the most serious consequence of swallowing.
Avoid splashes to the skin, eyes and clothing. Wear protective gloves, goggles and clothing if necessary.
Ensure good ventilation when in use, avoid breathing fumes, vapors and spray mists and keep containers tightly sealed. Do not
use in confined spaces.
When spraying materials containing solvents, e.g. paints, adhesive, coatings, use extraction ventilation or personal respiratory
protection in the absence of adequate general ventilation.
Do not apply heat or flame except under specific and detailed manufacturer's instructions.
Sound Insulation
See Fibre Insulation, Foams.
Suspended Loads
CAUTION: Never improvise lifting tackle.
There is always a danger when loads are lifted or suspended. Never work under an unsupported, suspended or raised load e.g.
suspended engine, etc.
Always make sure that lifting equipment such as jacks, hoists, axle stands, slings, etc., are adequate and suitable for the job,
in good condition and regularly maintained.
Transmission Brake Bands

See Asbestos.
Underseal
See Corrosion Protection.
www.JagDocs.com
Viton
In common with many other manufacturers' vehicles, some components installed to the Jaguar range have 'O' rings, seals or
gaskets which contain a material known as 'Viton'.
Viton is a fluoroelastomer, that is a synthetic rubber type which contains Fluorine. It is commonly used for 'O' rings, gaskets
and seals of all types. Although Viton is the most well known fluoroelastomer, there are others, including Fluorel and
Tecmoflon.
When used under design conditions fluoroelastomers are perfectly safe. If, however, they are exposed to temperatures in
excess of 400º C, the material will not burn, but will decompose, and one of the products formed is hydrofluoric acid.
This acid is extremely corrosive and may be absorbed directly, through contact, into the body.
'O' rings, seals or gaskets which have been exposed to very high temperatures will appear charred or as a black sticky
substance.
DO NOT, under any circumstances touch them or the attached components.
Enquiries should be made to determine whether Viton or any other fluoroelastomer has been used in the affected 'O' ring, seal
or gasket. If they are of natural rubber or nitrile there is no hazard. If in doubt, be cautious and assume that the material may
be Viton or any fluoroelastomer.
If Viton or any other fluoroelastomers have been used, the affected area should be decontaminated before the commencement
of work.
Disposable heavy duty plastic gloves should be worn at all times, and the affected area washed down using wire wool and a
limewater (calcium hydroxide) solution to neutralize the acid before disposing of the decomposed Viton residue and final
cleaning of the area. After use, the plastic gloves should be discarded carefully and safely.
Welding
www.JagDocs.com
See also Fire, Electric Shock, Gas Cylinders.
Welding processes include Resistance Welding (Spot Welding), Arc Welding and Gas Welding (and cutting).
Resistance Welding (Spot Welding)
This process may cause particles of molten metal to be emitted at a high velocity, and the eyes and skin must be protected.
Arc Welding
This process emits a high level of ultraviolet radiation which may cause arc-eye and skin burns to the operator and to other
persons nearby. Gas-shielded welding processes are particularly hazardous in this respect. Personal protection must be worn,
and screens used to shield other people.
CONTACT LENS WEARERS ARE ADVISED TO REVERT TO ORDINARY SPECTACLES WHEN ARC WELDING as the arc spectrum is
believed to emit microwaves which dry out the fluid between the lens and the eye. This may result in blindness when the lens
is removed from the eye.
Metal spatter will also occur, and appropriate eye and skin protection is necessary.
The heat of the welding arc will produce fumes and gases from the metals being welded, the rods and from any applied
coatings or contamination on the surfaces being worked on. These gases and fumes may be toxic and inhalation of these
should be avoided. The use of extraction ventilation to remove the fumes from the working area may be necessary particularly
in cases where the general ventilation is poor, or where considerable welding work is anticipated. In extreme cases or confined
spaces where adequate ventilation cannot be provided, air-fed respirators may be necessary.
Gas Welding (and Cutting)
Oxy-acetylene torches may be used for welding and cutting, and special care must be taken to prevent leakage of these gases,
with consequent risk of fire and explosion.
The process will produce metal spatter and eye and skin protection is necessary.
The flame is bright, and eye protection should be used, but the ultraviolet emission is much less than that from arc welding,
and lighter filters may be used.
The process itself produces few toxic fumes, but such fumes and gases may be produced from coatings on the work,
particularly during cutting away of damaged body parts, and inhalation of the fumes should be avoided.
In brazing, toxic fumes may be produced from the metals in the brazing rod, and a severe hazard may arise if brazing rods
containing cadmium are used. In this event particular care must be taken to avoid inhalation of fumes and expert advice may
be required.
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN BEFORE ANY WELDING OR CUTTING TAKES PLACE ON VESSELS WHICH HAVE
CONTAINED COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS, E.G. BOILING OR STEAMING OUT OF FUEL TANKS.
Warning Symbols on Vehicles

Decals showing warning symbols will be found on various vehicle components.
www.JagDocs.com
These decals must not be removed. The warnings are for the attention of owners/operators and persons carrying out service or
repair operations on the vehicle.
The most commonly found decals are reproduced below together with an explanation of the warnings.
1. Components or assemblies displaying the warning triangle and open book symbol advise consultation of the relevant
section of the owners handbook before touching or attempting adjustments of any kind.
www.JagDocs.com
2. Components or assemblies displaying the warning triangle with the electrified arrow and open book symbol give
warning of inherent high voltages. Never touch these with the engine running or the ignition switched on. See Electric
Shock in this subsection.
3. Jaguar vehicles and replacement parts which contain asbestos are identified by this symbol. See Asbestos in this
subsection.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Components or assemblies displaying this symbol give warning that the component contains a corrosive substance. See
Acids and Alkalis in this subsection.
www.JagDocs.com
5. Vehicles displaying the caution circle with a deleted lighted match symbol, caution against the use of naked lights or
flames within the immediate vicinity due to the presence of highly flammable or explosive liquids or vapors. See Fire in
this subsection.
6. All vehicles with the passenger air bag installed from the factory have a warning sticker attached to the instrument
panel, prohibiting the use of rear facing child seats in the front seating position. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in personal injury.
White Spirit
See Solvents.
Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Working on the fuel system results in fuel and fuel vapor being present in the atmosphere. Fuel vapor is extremely
flammable, hence great care must be taken whilst working on the fuel system. Adhere strictly to the following precautions:
Do not smoke in the work area

Display 'no smoking' signs around the area
Disconnect the battery before working on the fuel system
Do not connect/disconnect electrical circuits, use electrical equipment or other tools or engage in working practices
which in any way may result in the production of sparks
Ensure that a CO² fire extinguisher is close at hand
Ensure that dry sand is available to soak up any fuel spillage
Empty fuel using suitable fire proof equipment into an authorized explosion proof container
www.JagDocs.com
Do not empty fuel while working in a workshop or a pit
Ensure that working area is well ventilated
Ensure that any work on the fuel system is only carried out by experienced and well qualified maintenance personnel
Ensure that fume extraction equipment is used where appropriate
Fume extraction equipment must be in operation when solvents are used e.g. Trichloroethane, white spirit, sbp3,
methylene chloride, perchlorethylene. Do not smoke in the vicinity of volatile degreasing agents.
Whenever possible, use a ramp or pit whilst working beneath a vehicle, in preference to jacking. Position chocks at the wheels
as well as applying the parking brake. Never rely on a jack alone to support a vehicle. Use axle stands, or blocks carefully
placed at the jacking points, to provide a rigid location. Check that any lifting equipment used has adequate capacity and is
fully serviceable. Ensure that a suitable form of fire extinguisher is conveniently located. When using electrical tools and
equipment, inspect the power lead for damage and check that it is properly earthed. Disconnect the earth (grounded) terminal
of the vehicle battery. Do not disconnect any pipes of the air conditioning refrigeration system unless you are trained and
instructed to do so. A refrigerant is used which can cause blindness if allowed to come into contact with the eyes. Ensure that
adequate ventilation is provided when volatile degreasing agents are being used.
Adhere strictly to handling and safety instructions given on containers and labels. Keep oils and solvents away from naked
flames and other sources of ignition. Do not apply heat in an attempt to free seized nuts or fittings; as well as causing
damage to protective coatings, there is a risk of damage from stray heat to electronic equipment and brake lines. Do not leave
tools, equipment, spilt oil etc. around the work area. Wear protective overalls and use barrier cream when necessary.
Environmental Protection
In some countries it is illegal to pour used oil onto the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water courses. The burning of
used engine oil in small space heaters or boilers is not recommended unless emission control equipment is installed. Dispose
of used oil through authorized waste disposal contractors, to licensed waste disposal sites or to the waste oil reclamation
trade. If in doubt, contact the Local Authority for advice on disposal facilities.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - How To Use This Manual
Workshop Manual Organization

This manual covers descriptive, diagnostic (including OBD), and repair aspects to service the vehicle effectively.
The manual is arranged in sections, each section dealing with a specific part of a vehicle system. For example, Section 412-03
[Air Conditioning] covers air conditioning, which is part of the climate control system.
The first digit of the section number indicates the group (in the above example this being Electrical). There are five groups:
General Information.
Chassis.
Powertrain.
Electrical. Body
and Paint.
The second and third digits of the section number indicate the vehicle system (12 in the above example being Climate
Control).
The last two digits of the section number indicate the part of the system covered by the section (03 in the example denotes
Air Conditioning).
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Important Safety Instructions
Safety Notice
Appropriate service methods and correct repair procedures are essential for the safe, reliable operation of all motor vehicles,
as well as the safety of the person doing the work. This manual provides general directions for accomplishing service and
repair work with tested effective techniques. Following them will help assure reliability.
There are numerous variations in procedures, techniques, tools, and parts for servicing vehicles, as well as in the skill of the
person doing the work. This manual cannot possibly anticipate all such variations and provide advice or cautions as to each.
Accordingly, anyone who departs from the instructions provided in the manual must first establish that neither personal safety
or vehicle integrity is compromised from choices of methods, tools or parts.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and
Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Fuel may not give adequate warning before toxic or harmful effects arise.
Exposure to fuel can be harmful and can cause severe health damage or death.
Extreme care must be exercised when handling hot fluids. Always wash off spilled fluids from affected areas of skin
immediately.
Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may ignite when working on fuel systems. Do not allow naked flames,
sparks or lighted substances to come near fuel related components.
Fuel must not be used as a cleaning agent.
Keep fuel containers tightly closed, out of direct sunlight and in a cool area. Keep away from heat sources, ignition
sources and oxidizing agents.
www.JagDocs.com
SKIN CONTACT: Excessive or prolonged skin contact with diesel fuel may cause serious skin disorders including skin
cancer.
SKIN CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the skin and may cause dermatitis due to defatting effect. Remove
contaminated clothing. Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Seek medical attention for any persistent skin
irritation or abnormality. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.
EYE CONTACT: Fuel is mildly irritating to the eyes. Flush with plenty of running water, blinking as often as possible. Do
not force the eyelid open. Seek medical attention for any persistent eye irritation or abnormality.
SWALLOWED: Fuel is moderately toxic and tends to foam on vomiting. If drawn into the lungs, inflammation may
develop. Do not induce vomiting. If spontaneous vomiting occurs place the victim in a forward position to reduce the risk of
fuel being drawn into the lungs. Give nothing by mouth. If breathing but unconscious, place in the recovery position. If
breathing has stopped, apply artificial respiration. Seek immediate medical attention.
INHALED: Fuel is toxic to the respiratory and other body systems. Exposure may result in various symptoms including
drowsiness, unconsciousness or severe health damage. Move a victim to fresh air. Keep a victim warm and at rest. If
unconscious, place in the recovery position. If not breathing, apply artificial respiration. Give cardiac massage if necessary.
Seek immediate medical attention.
CAUTIONS:
Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is essential that absolute
cleanliness is observed when working with these components.
Make sure that the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible.
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Solvents, Sealants and Adhesives
WARNING: Always handle all solvents, sealers and adhesives with extreme care. Some contain chemicals or give off
fumes which can be dangerous to health. Always follow the manufacturers instructions. If in doubt about any substance,
particularly a solvent, DO NOT use it.
CAUTION: If in doubt about the suitability of any proprietary solvent or sealer for a particular application, contact the
manufacturer of the product for information regarding storage, handling and application.
The Solvents, Sealers and Adhesives subsection refers to some commonly used chemicals and materials, hazards associated
with their use, and safety measures to be taken.
Adhesives and Sealers

Highly flammable, flammable, combustible – observe No Smoking policy.
Generally should be stored in No Smoking' areas. Cleanliness and tidiness in use should be observed e.g. disposable paper
covering benches; should be dispensed from applicators where possible; containers, including secondary containers, should be
labelled appropriately.
Solvent - based Adhesives/Sealers - See Solvents

Follow manufacturer's instructions.
Water - based Adhesives/Sealers

www.JagDocs.com
Those based on polymer emulsions and rubber latexes may contain small amounts of volatile toxic and harmful chemicals. Skin
and eye contact should be avoided and adequate ventilation provided during use.
Hot Melt Adhesives

In the solid state, they are safe. In the molten state they may cause burns and health hazards may arise from the inhalation
of toxic fumes.
Use appropriate protective clothing and a thermostatically controlled heater with a thermal cut - out and adequate extraction.
Resin - based Adhesives/Sealers e.g. Epoxide and Formaldehyde Resin - based

Mixing should be carried out in well ventilated areas, as harmful or toxic volatile chemicals may be released.
Skin contact with uncured resins and hardeners can result in irritation, dermatitis, and absorption of toxic or harmful chemicals
through the skin. Splashes can damage the eyes.
Provide adequate ventilation and avoid skin and eye contact.
Anaerobic, Cyanoacrylate (Super - glues) and other Acrylic Adhesives

Many are irritant, sensitizing or harmful to the skin and/or respiratory tract. Some are eye irritants.
Skin and eye contact should be avoided and the manufacturer's instructions followed.
Cyanoacrylate adhesives (super-glues) MUST NOT contact the skin or eyes. If skin or eye tissue is bonded, cover with a clean
moist pad and seek immediate medical attention. Do not attempt to pull tissue apart. Use in well ventilated areas as vapors
can cause irritation to the nose and eyes.
For two - pack systems see Resin - based and Isocyanate Adhesives/Sealers.
Isocyanate (Polyurethane) Adhesives/Sealers

See also Resin - based Adhesives
Individuals suffering from asthma or respiratory allergies should not work with or near these materials as sensitivity reactions
can occur.
Over exposure is irritating to the eyes and respiratory system. Excessive concentrations may produce effects on the nervous
system including drowsiness. In extreme cases, loss of consciousness may result. Long term exposure to vapor concentrations
may result in adverse health effects.
Prolonged contact with the skin may lead to skin irritation and, in some cases, dermatitis.
Splashes entering the eye will cause discomfort and possible damage.
Any spraying should preferably be carried out in exhaust ventilated booths removing vapors and spray droplets from the
breathing zone.
Wear appropriate gloves, eye and respiratory protection.

Published: 04-Jul-2014
General Information - Standard Workshop Practices
Protecting the Vehicle

Always install covers to protect the fenders before commencing work in the engine compartment. Always install the interior
protection kit, wear clean overalls and wash hands or wear gloves before working inside the vehicle. Avoid spilling hydraulic
fluid, antifreeze or battery acid on the paintwork. In the event of spillage, wash off with water immediately. Use polythene
sheets in the luggage compartment to protect carpets. Always use the recommended service tool, or a satisfactory equivalent,
where specified. Protect temporarily exposed screw threads by replacing nuts or installing caps.
Vehicle in Workshop
When working on a vehicle in the workshop always make sure that:
The parking brake is applied or the wheels are securely chocked to prevent the vehicle moving forwards or backwards
If the engine is to be run, there is adequate ventilation, or an extraction hose to remove exhaust fumes is installed
There is adequate room to jack up the vehicle and remove the wheels, if necessary
Fender covers are always installed if any work is to be carried out in the engine compartment
The battery is disconnected if working on the engine, underneath the vehicle, or if the vehicle is jacked up
CAUTION: When electric arc welding on a vehicle, always disconnect the generator wiring to prevent the possibility of a
surge of current causing damage to the internal components of the generator.
If using welding equipment on the vehicle, ensure a suitable fire extinguisher is readily available.
Screw Threads
www.JagDocs.com
Damaged nuts, bolts and screws must always be discarded. Attempting to recut or repair damaged threads with a tap
or die impairs the strength and fit of the threads and is not recommended.
NOTES:
During certain repair operations, it may be necessary to remove traces of thread locking agents using a tap. Where this
is necessary, the instruction to do so will appear in the relevant operation and it is essential that a tap of the correct size and
thread is used.
New Taptite bolts when used cut their own threads on the first application.
Some bolts are coated with a thread locking agent and unless stated otherwise, they must not be reused. New bolts
having the same part number as the original must always be installed. When nuts or bolts are to be discarded, the
repair operation and relevant torque chart will include an instruction to that effect. Do not use proprietary thread
locking agents as they may not meet the specification required. See also Encapsulated ('Patched') Bolts and Screws.
Always make sure that replacement nuts and bolts are at least equal in strength to those that they are replacing.
Castellated nuts must not be loosened to accept a split pin except in recommended cases when this forms part of an
adjustment.
Do not allow oil or grease to enter blind holes, the hydraulic action resulting from tightening the bolt or stud can split
the housing and also give a false torque reading.
Always tighten a nut, bolt or screw to the specified torque figure, damaged or corroded threads can give a false torque
reading.
Nut and bolt loosening and tightening sequences, where given, must ALWAYS be followed. Distortion of components or
faulty sealing of joints will result if the sequences are not followed. Where an instruction is given to tighten in stages,
these stages must be adhered to; do not attempt to combine stages particularly where certain stages involve
tightening by degrees.
To check or re-tighten a fixing to a specified torque, first loosen a quarter of a turn, then retighten to the specified
torque figure.
Unless instructed otherwise, do not lubricate bolt or nut threads prior to installing.
Where it is stated that bolts and screws may be reused, the following procedures must be carried out:
Check that threads are undamaged.

Remove all traces of locking agent from the threads.
CAUTION: DO NOT use a wire brush; take care that threads are not damaged.
Make sure that threads are clean and free from oil or grease.
Apply the specified locking agent to the bolt threads.
www.JagDocs.com
Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) Precautions
WARNING: Do not install rear facing child seats in the front passenger seat.
The SRS contains components which are potentially hazardous to service personnel if not handled correctly. The following
guidelines and precautions are intended to alert personnel to potential sources of danger and emphasise the importance of
ensuring the integrity of the SRS components installed to the vehicle.
WARNING: The following precautions MUST be adhered to when working on the SRS system:
The correct procedures must always be used when working on SRS components.
Persons working on the SRS system must be fully trained and have been issued with the safety guidelines.
The airbag modules contain extremely flammable and hazardous compounds. Contact with water, acids or heavy
metals may produce harmful or explosive results. Do not dismantle, incinerate or bring into contact with electricity
before the unit has been deployed.
Always replace a seat belt assembly that has withstood the strain of a severe vehicle impact or if the webbing
shows signs of fraying.
Always disconnect the vehicle battery before carrying out any electric welding on a vehicle installed with an SRS
system.
CAUTION: Do not expose airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners to temperatures exceeding 85° C (185° F).
It should be noted that these precautions are not restricted to operations performed when servicing the SRS system. The same
care should be exercised when working on ancillary systems and components located in the vicinity of SRS components; these
include but are not limited to:
Steering wheel airbag, rotary coupler.

Passenger front airbag.
Head airbag modules - front and rear.
Seat belt pre-tensioners.
www.JagDocs.com
SRS harnesses, link leads and connectors.

Side (thorax) air bags.
Making the system safe
Before working on or in the vicinity of SRS components, make sure the system is rendered safe by performing the following
operations:
Remove the ignition key.

Disconnect battery, earth lead first.
Wait 2 minutes for the SRS power circuit to discharge before commencing work.
NOTE: The SRS uses energy reserve capacitors to keep the system active in the event of electrical supply failure under
crash conditions. It is necessary to allow the capacitors sufficient time to discharge (2 minutes) in order to avoid the risk of
accidental deployment.
Installation
In order to make sure system integrity, it is essential that the SRS system is regularly checked and maintained so that it is
ready for effective operation in the event of a collision. Carefully inspect SRS components before installation. Do not install a
part that shows signs of being dropped or improperly handled, such as dents, cracks or deformation.
WARNING: The integrity of the SRS systems is critical for safety reasons. Make sure the following precautions are always
adhered to:
Do not install accessories or other objects to trim panels which cover ITS airbags.
Never install used SRS components from another vehicle or attempt to repair an SRS component.
When repairing an SRS system, only use genuine new parts.
Never apply electrical power to an SRS component unless instructed to do so as part of an approved test
procedure.
Special fixings are necessary for installing an airbag module – do not use other fixings and make sure that all
fixings are tightened to the correct torque.
Always use new fixings when replacing an SRS component.
CAUTIONS:
Take care not to trap airbag modules when installing interior trim components.
Make sure SRS components are not contaminated by oil or grease.
NOTES:
Following seat belt pre-tensioner deployment, the seat belts can still be used as conventional seat belts but will need to
www.JagDocs.com
be replaced as soon as possible to make sure full SRS protection.
If the SRS components are to be replaced, the part number/bar code of the new unit must be recorded.
SRS component testing precautions
The SRS components are triggered using relatively low operating currents, always adhere to the following :
WARNING: Never use a multimeter or other general purpose equipment on SRS components. Use only approved JLR
diagnostic equipment to diagnose system faults.
www.JagDocs.com
WARNING: Do not use electrical test equipment on the SRS harness while it is connected to any of the SRS components,
it may cause accidental deployment and injury.
Handling and storage
Always observe the following precautions when handling SRS components:
Never drop an SRS component. The airbag diagnostic control unit is a particularly shock sensitive device and must be
handled with extreme care. Airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners could deploy if subjected to a strong shock.
Never wrap your arms around an airbag module. If a module has to be carried, hold it by the cover with the cover
uppermost and the base away from your body.
Never transport airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners in the passenger compartment of a vehicle. Always use the
luggage compartment of the vehicle for carrying airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioner units.
Never attach anything to an airbag cover or any trim component covering an airbag module. Do not allow anything to
rest on top of an airbag module.
Always keep components cool, dry and free from contamination.
Never apply grease or cleaning solvents to seat belt pre-tensioner units, component failure could result.
Always store an airbag module with the deployment side uppermost. If it is stored deployment side down, accidental
deployment will propel the airbag module with sufficient force to cause serious injury.
Keep new airbag modules in their original packaging until just prior to installing. Place the old module in the empty
packaging for carriage.
www.JagDocs.com
WARNINGS:
When handling an inflatable tubular structure (ITS) airbag module, hold by the gas generator housing, DO NOT hold by
the airbag. Do not wrap the thumb around the gas generator while holding. Do not drape airbag over shoulder or around neck.
For seat buckle type pre-tensioners, hold by the piston tube, with the open end of the piston tube pointing towards the ground
and the buckle facing away from your body. Do not cover the end of the piston tube. DO NOT hold buckle type pre-tensioners
by the bracket assembly or cable. Never point the piston tube towards your body or other people.
Airbag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners are classed as explosive devices. For overnight and longer term storage,
they must be stored in a secure steel cabinet which has been approved as suitable for the purpose and has been registered
with the local authority.
www.JagDocs.com
Store airbag modules or seat belt pre-tensioners in a designated storage area. If there is no designated storage area
available, store in the locked luggage compartment of the vehicle and inform the workshop supervisor.
CAUTION: Improper handling or storage can internally damage the airbag module making it inoperative. If you suspect
the airbag module has been damaged, install a new module and refer to the deployment/disposal procedures for disposal of
the damaged module.
SRS harness and connectors
Always observe the following precautions with regards to SRS system electrical wiring:
Never attempt to modify, splice or repair SRS wiring.

Never install electrical equipment such as a mobile telephone, two-way radio or in-car entertainment system in such a
way that it could generate electrical interference in the airbag harness. Seek specialist advice when installing such
equipment.
NOTE: SRS wiring can be identified by a special yellow outer sleeve protecting the wires (black with yellow stripe
protective coverings are sometimes used).
www.JagDocs.com
WARNING: Always make sure SRS wiring is routed correctly. Be careful to avoid trapping or pinching the SRS wiring.
www.JagDocs.com
WARNING: Do not leave the connectors hanging loose or allow SRS components to hang from their harnesses. Look for
possible chafing points.
Side impact crash sensor inspection
After any degree of side body damage, inspect the side impact crash sensors. Replace a crash sensor if there is any sign of
damage.
CAUTION: Take extra care when painting or carrying out bodywork repairs in the vicinity of the crash sensors. Avoid direct
exposure of the crash sensors or link harnesses to heat guns, welding or spraying equipment. Take care not to damage sensor
or harness when reinstalling components.
Rotary coupler
CAUTION: Always follow the procedure for installing and checking the rotary coupler as instructed in the SRS repairs
section. Comply with all safety and installation procedures to make sure the system functions correctly. Observe the following
precautions:
Do not unlock and rotate the rotary coupler when it is removed from the vehicle.
Do not turn the road wheels when the rotary coupler is removed from the vehicle.
Always make sure the rotary coupler is removed and installed in its central position and with the front road wheels in
the straight ahead position - refer to SRS repair section for the correct removal and installation procedure.
If a new rotary coupler is being installed, make sure the locking tab holding the coupler's rotational position is not
broken; units with a broken locking tab must not be used.
Airbag location labels
WAITING AIRBAG LOCATION AND DESIGN LABELS - DUE MARCH - NEIL HARRISON 46404
Airbag and pre-tensioner deployment
WARNING: During deployment parts of the airbag module become hot enough to burn you. Wait 30 minutes after
deployment before touching the airbag module.
www.JagDocs.com
Deployment procedures and precautions as detailed in this manual should be strictly adhered to. Only personnel who have
undergone the appropriate training should undertake deployment of airbag and pre-tensioner modules. The following
precautions must be complied with:
Only use deployment equipment approved for the intended purpose.

Deployment of airbag / pre-tensioner modules must be performed in a well ventilated area which has been designated
for the purpose.
Make sure airbag / pre-tensioner modules are not damaged or ruptured before attempting to deploy.
Where local legislation exists, notify the relevant authorities of intention to deploy airbag and pretensioner units.
When deploying airbag pre-tensioner units, make sure that all personnel are at least 15 metres (45 feet) away from the
deployment zone.
Make sure deployment tool is connected correctly, in compliance with the instructions detailed in the SRS section of this
manual. In particular, make sure deployment tool is NOT connected to battery supply before connecting to airbag
module connector.
When deploying seat belt pre-tensioners, make sure pre-tensioner unit is secured correctly to the seat.
When removing deployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units, wear protective clothing. Use gloves and seal
deployed units in a plastic bag.
Following deployment of any component of the SRS system within the vehicle, all SRS components must be replaced.
DO NOT reuse or salvage any parts of the SRS system.
Do not lean over an airbag module when connecting deployment equipment.
If a vehicle is to be scrapped, undeployed airbag modules and pre-tensioner units must be manually deployed. In this case
airbags can be deployed in the vehicle. Before deployment, make sure the airbag module is secure within its correct mounting
position. Deployment of the driver's airbag in the vehicle may damage the steering wheel; if the vehicle is not being scrapped,
deploy the module outside of the vehicle.
SRS Component Replacement Policy

CAUTIONS:
www.JagDocs.com
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) will log a crash fault after every impact which is severe enough to cause airbag
deployment. It is possible to have three crashes/impacts logged after one event where, for example, a front, side and
rollover has occurred. After the third fault is logged, the SRS warning lamp will be illuminated and the RCM must be
installed. After any airbag deployment a new RCM must be installed.
The SRS side impact sensor must be replaced if there are any signs of physical damage or if the restraints control module
(RCM) is registering a fault.
The following information details the policy for replacement of SRS components as a result of a vehicle accident.
Impacts which do not deploy the airbags or pre-tensioners
Check for structural damage in the area of the impact paying particular attention to bumper armatures, longitudinals and
bracketry.
Impacts which deploy the airbags or pre-tensioners
The replacement and inspection policy is dependent on the type and severity of the crash condition. The following guidelines
are the minimum that should be exercised as a result of the deployment of specific SRS components.
Check for structural damage in the area of impact paying particular attention to bumper armatures, longitudinals and
bracketry.
Front Airbag Deployment - Driver and Passenger
CAUTION: If the front airbags are deployed, the following components must be replaced:
Driver airbag module

Passenger airbag module
Fly leads (where applicable) connecting front airbag modules to SRS harness
Front seat belt buckle pre-tensioner
Rear seat belt pre-tensioners - if installed
Driver's seat belt retractor - if installed
Rotary coupler
Any front impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Restraints control module (RCM) if the three crashes/impacts have been stored
Additionally, the following items must be inspected for damage and replaced as necessary:
Front passenger's seat belt retractor and webbing, tongue latching function, 'D' loop and body anchorage point
Rear seat belt buckles, webbing, buckle covers, body anchorage points and tongue latching function
Fascia moulding adjacent to passenger airbag module
Steering wheel
Front seat frames and head restraints
Steering column - if adjustment is lost or if there are signs of collapse
Seat belt height adjusters
www.JagDocs.com
Rear seat belts
Side Air Bags
CAUTION: If the side (thorax) air bags are deployed, the following components must be replaced on the side of the
vehicle on which the deployment occurred:
Side (thorax) airbag

Any side impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Restraints Control Module (RCM) if the three crashes/impacts have been stored
Front seat belts, retractors and webbing, tongue latching function, 'D' loop and body anchorage points
Rear seat belt buckles, webbing, buckle covers, tongue latching function, and body anchorage points
Front seat frame and head restraints
Door trim casing
Rear seat belts
Head airbag modules
CAUTION: If the head airbag modules are deployed, the following components must be replaced on the side of the
vehicle on which the deployment occurred:
Head airbag modules

Link lead between airbag gas generator and restraints control module (RCM) harness
Airbag retaining clips
Internal trim finisher
Front seat belt buckle pre-tensioners
www.JagDocs.com
Any side impact sensors that have been physically damaged or if a fault is being registered
Headlining
Component mounting brackets
Adjacent trim components
Rear impacts
CAUTION: If the seat belt pre-tensioners are deployed during a rear impact, the following components must be replaced:
Seat belt pre-tensioners

Front and rear seat belt retractors used during the impact

www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Symbols Glossary
Symbols are used inside the graphics and in the text area to enhance the information display.
Movement Symbols
Movement symbols provide detailed information to a required component movement. These component movements can be
rotational or 1-3 dimensional movements.
www.JagDocs.com

1 - Minor component movement clockwise/counterclockwise
2 - Major component movement clockwise/counterclockwise
3 - Component movement to the left/right/up/down
4 - Component movement towards/away
5 - 3 dimensional component movement
6 - 2 dimensional component movement
7 3 dimensional component rotation
8 3 dimensional component cycling
www.JagDocs.com
Turn Symbols
Turn symbols are used to provide further information on the direction or angle of component turns.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Turn the component clockwise through 45°
2 Turn the component counterclockwise through 45°
7 Turn the component clockwise through 2 complete turns
8 Turn the component counterclockwise through 2 complete turns
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Wheel Symbols
Steering wheel symbols are used to provide further information to a required steering wheel position or steering column lock
status.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Steering wheel in straight ahead position
2 Steering column lock locked
3 Steering column lock unlocked
www.JagDocs.com
4 Turn the steering wheel to the 90° left position
5 Turn the steering wheel to the 90° right position
6 Turn the steering wheel to the left-hand end position
7 Turn the steering wheel to the right-hand end position
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 3, 4, 5-door body style
2 Wagon body style
3 Sports utility vehicle body style
4 Coupe body style
5 Convertible body style
6 Van body style
7 3, 4, 5-door body style - Top View
8 Wagon body style - Top View
9 Underview
10 Right-hand drive (RHD) vehicle
11 Left-hand drive (LHD) vehicle
www.JagDocs.com
Gearshift lever and selector lever position symbols
Gearshift lever and selector lever position symbols are used to show the lever position that is required to be selected to carry
out a procedure step.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Set the selector lever to the park (P) position
2 Set the selector lever to the reverse ®) position
3 Set the selector lever to the neutral (N) position
4 Set the selector lever to the drive (D) position
5 Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the park (D) position
6 Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the manual (M) position
7 Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the shift down (-) position
8 Set the selector lever with manual shift pattern to the shift up (+) position
9 Set the gearshift lever to the neutral (N) position
10 Further gearshift lever positions that may appear in illustrations
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Screwdriver symbols
The screwdriver symbols are used to show which screwdriver bit is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Screwdriver
2 Cross bladed screwdriver
3 Flat bladed screwdriver
4 Hexagonal screwdriver
5 TORX screwdriver
www.JagDocs.com
Pliers symbols
The pliers symbols are used to show which pliers is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Combination pliers
2 Side cutter pliers
www.JagDocs.com
3 Securing ring pliers - inner
4 Securing ring pliers - outer
5 Hose clamp pliers
6 Locking pliers
7 Long nose pliers
Drill symbols
The drill symbols are used to show which type and size of drill bit is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Drill bit with a specified diameter
2 Hole saw with a specified diameter
3 Stepped drill bit with a specified diameter
4 Tap with a specified diameter
5 Die with a specified diameter
6 Scraper for circular holes
7 Scraper for straight edges
www.JagDocs.com
Cutting tool symbols
The cutting tool symbols are used to show which type of cutting tool is recommended to carry out a procedure step.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Cutting knife
2 Air body saw
3 Scissors
4 Grinder
5 Jig saw
www.JagDocs.com
6 Plasma cutter
7 Sanding Paper
8 Drill through the shown number of body panel layers with a specified diameter
9 Drill through the shown number of body panel layers with a suitable diameter
10 Drill through 1 body panel layer with a specified diameter
11 Drill through 1 body panel layer with a suitable diameter
12 Wire brush
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Apply Chemical or load symbols
The apply chemical or load symbols are used to show where to apply which type of chemical or load to carry out a procedure
step.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Apply a bead from the specified tube
2 Apply a bead from the specified cartridge
3 Apply the specified chemical with a brush
4 Apply the specified load to the specified component
5 Apply a bead with a specific diameter from the specified tube
www.JagDocs.com
6 Apply a bead with a specific diameter from the specified cartridge
7 Apply the specified chemical with a roller
8 Apply hot glue to the specified component
9 Apply the specified amount of fluid from the fluid can
10 Apply fluid from the fluid can
11 Clean the specified component with the specified material
12 Apply a broken bead from the specified tube
13 Apply the specified chemical from a spray can
14 Apply the specified lubricant to the specified component
15 Apply spot welds to the specified component
16 Apply a continuous weld to the specified component
17 Handle the fluid using a syringe
18 Extract the specified amount of fluid using a syringe
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Measurement symbols
The measurement symbols are used to show where to measure which type of measurement to carry out a procedure step.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Measure the current using a digital multimeter
2 Measure the voltage using a digital multimeter
3 Measure the resistance using a digital multimeter
4 Measure the length/distance
5 Check that the specified pressure is available using a suitable pressure gauge
www.JagDocs.com
6 Measure the pressure at the specified port using a suitable pressure gauge
7 Measure the time using a suitable stopwatch
8 Wait for the specified period of time
9 The specified task requires the specified minimum temperature
10 The specified task requires the specified maximum temperature not to be exceeded
11 The specified task requires the specified temperature range
12 The specified task requires the specified temperature
13 Measure and check for the specified value using a dial indicator gauge
14 Measure and check for the specified MAX value using a dial indicator gauge
15 Measure and check for the specified MIN value using a dial indicator gauge
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
General equipment symbols
The general equipment symbols are used to show where to use which type of general equipment to carry out a procedure step.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Hot air gun
2 Soldering iron
3 Scraper
4 Scriber
5 Securing strap
www.JagDocs.com
6 File with a specified size
7 Center punch
8 Marker
9 Metal inert gas (MIG) welding equipment
10 Hose clamp
11 Interior trim remover
12 Vacuum cleaner
13 Strap wrench
14 Wedge
15 Pin Punch
Material symbols
The material symbols are used to show where to use which type of material to carry out a procedure step.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Remove/Install the specified blind rivet
2 Apply tape to the specified component/area
3 Remove/Install the specified cable tie
www.JagDocs.com
Miscellaneous symbols
These symbols provide further information that is required to carry out a procedure step.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Set the ignition switch to the 0 position
2 Set the ignition switch to the II position
3 The procedure step requires the aid of the specified number of supporting technicians
4 Self contained breathing apparatus
5 General prohibition used in combination with another symbol
www.JagDocs.com
6 Do not use power tools
7 Visual check
8 Noise check
9 Dispose the specified component
10 Replaced by item 9 (Dispose the specified component)
11 Set the engine speed to the specified value
12 Fully apply the parking brake lever
13 Fully release the parking brake lever
14 Do not dispose of batteries into the waste bin
15 Visual check using a mirror
16 Area/component must be dry
Mandatory Protective equipment - Health and safety symbols
The protective equipment symbols advise to use a mandatory protective equipment to avoid or at least reduce possible health
and safety risks.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Wear protective gloves
2 Wear face guard
3 Wear safety goggles
4 Wear ear protectors
5 Wear safety goggles and ear protectors
6 Wear a respirator
Prohibition - Health and safety symbols and component damage
The prohibition symbols are used to prohibit the specified actions to avoid or at least reduce possible component damage and
health and safety risks.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 General prohibition symbol
2 No naked flames
3 No smoking
4 No water
5 Do not touch
www.JagDocs.com
6 Do not switch
7 No grinding
Warning symbols - Health and safety and component damage
The warning symbols are used to advise on hazardous conditions to avoid or at least reduce possible component damage and
health and safety risks.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Hazardous voltage/Electrical shock/Electrocution
2 Fire Hazard/Highly flammable
3 Burn hazard/Hot surface
4 Automatic start-up
5 Toxic
6 Explosive material
7 Battery hazard
8 Corrosive material
9 Lifting hazard
www.JagDocs.com
10 Hand crush/Force from above
11 Cutting of fingers or hand
12 Pressure hazard
Control Diagram symbols - Description and Operation procedures
These symbols provide further information on the type of connectivity, direction of flow or type of data bus of a system.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Mid-speed Controller Area Network (CAN)
2 High-speed Controller Area Network (CAN)
3 Local Interconnect Network (LIN)
4 Wires crossing not connected
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Health and
Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Only qualified technicians are allowed to work on pyrotechnic components.
INHALED: Exposure to pyrotechnic residue may cause low blood pressure, severe headache, irritation of mucous
membranes, fainting, shortness of breath or rapid pulse. Move a victim to fresh air. Seek immediate medical attention.
EYE CONTACT: Exposure to unburned pyrotechnic residue may cause irritation, burning and etching of the eyes. Flush
immediately with plenty of cold running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
EYE CONTACT: Exposure to burned pyrotechnic residue may cause irritation, burning and etching of the eyes. Flush
immediately with diluted boric acid solution. Seek immediate medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: Unburned pyrotechnic residue may be rapidly absorbed through the skin in toxic quantities. Wash
immediately with plenty of soap and water. Seek medical attention.
SKIN CONTACT: Burned pyrotechnic residue may be rapidly absorbed through the skin in toxic quantities. Wash with
www.JagDocs.com
plenty of water. Do not use soap. Seek medical attention.
SWALLOWED: Unburned pyrotechnic residue is extremely toxic. If conscious drink plenty of water then induce vomiting.
Seek immediate medical attention. If unconscious, or in convulsions do not attempt to induce vomiting or give anything by
mouth. Seek immediate medical attention.
SWALLOWED: Burned pyrotechnic residue is extremely toxic. Drink plenty of water and seek immediate medical attention.
The deployment key must only be accessible to authorized personnel.
Make sure that the deployment key remains removed from the deployment equipment except during deployment.
If permenantly disabling or enabling the passenger air bag a new seat belt for vehicles without or with a passenger air
bag must be installed.
Undeployed pyrotechnic components must not be deployed in the vehicle.
Pyrotechnic components must be deployed following local regulations.
Check thoroughly that no loose objects can be spread during the deployment of pyrotechnic components.
Pyrotechnic components must be transported following local regulations.
Never carry out any electrical measurement on disconnected, undeployed pyrotechnic components.
Pyrotechnic components must not be disassembled.
Pyrotechnic components are not interchangeable between vehicles.
Always carry a live air bag module away from the body with the air bag or trim cover pointing upwards.
www.JagDocs.com
Live air bag modules must be placed in a suitable cage when removed from the vehicle. The air bag or trim cover must be
facing upwards.
Do not install a rearward facing child safety seat to the passenger seat with an activated passenger air bag.
CAUTIONS:
Pyrotechnic components must not be subjected to temperatures higher than 110°C.
Never install aftermarket accessories to the vehicle on or adjacent to the supplemental restraint system module.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Road/Roller Testing
Road or roller testing may be carried out for various reasons and a procedure detailing pre-test checks, through engine starting
and stopping, pre-driving checks, on-test checks to final checks on completion of the test is given in this section.
Unless complete vehicle performance is being checked, the full road test procedure need not be carried out. Instead, those
items particularly relevant to the system/s being checked can be extracted.
Pre - Test Checks
WARNING: If the brake system hydraulic fluid level is low, pedal travel is excessive or a hydraulic leak is found, do not
attempt to road test the vehicle until the reason for the low fluid level, excessive pedal travel or hydraulic leak is found and
rectified.
It is suggested that pre-test checks, and functional tests of those systems/circuits which affect the safe and legal operations
of the vehicle, such as brakes, lights and steering, should always be carried out before the road or roller test.
Engine oil level

Engine coolant level
Tires, for correct pressure, compatible types and tread patterns, and wear within limits
There is sufficient fuel in the tank to complete the test
All around the engine, transmission and under the vehicle for oil, coolant, hydraulic and fuel leaks. Make a note of any
apparent leaks and wipe off the surrounding areas to make it easier to identify the extent of the leak on completion of
the test
Starting the Engine

www.JagDocs.com
CAUTION: On initial drive away from cold and within the first 1.5 km (1 mile), do not depress accelerator pedal beyond
half travel until the vehicle has attained a minimum speed of 25 km/h (15 miles/h). Never operate at high engine speed or
with the accelerator pedal at full travel whilst the engine is cold.
With the ignition switched off, check:
The parking brake is applied

The transmission selector lever is in Park
All instrument gauges (except fuel gauge) read zero
With the ignition switched on, check:
Ignition controlled warning lamps come on

Engine coolant temperature gauge registers a reading compatible with the engine coolant temperature
Fuel gauge registers a reading appropriate to the fuel level in the tank
The operation of the parking brake and brake fluid level warning lamps
On Road or Roller Test Check:
CAUTION: If road testing, check the brake operation while still travelling at low speed before continuing with the test. If
the brakes pull to one side, or appear to be otherwise faulty, do not continue with the road test until the fault has been found
and rectified.
Initial gear engagement is smooth

Parking brake control operates smoothly and the parking brake releases quickly and completely
Transmission takes up the drive smoothly, without judder
The engine power output is satisfactory, full power is achieved, acceleration is smooth and pedal operation not stiff or
heavy, and engine speed returns to idle correctly
There is no excessive or abnormally colored smoke from the engine under normal driving, heavy load or overrun
conditions
Steering operation, including power steering, is smooth, accurate, not excessively heavy or with excessive free play or
vibration. Does not pull to one side and self centres smoothly after cornering
Speedometer, oil pressure warning lamp, coolant temperature gauge and tachometer register the correct readings or
operate correctly
Switches and controls operate smoothly and positively, warning lamps operate correctly and the direction indicator
control self cancels when the steering is returned to the straight ahead position
Heating and ventilation systems work correctly and effectively
Brake operation and efficiency
Brake Testing
WARNING: When brake testing, avoid breathing the smoke or fumes from hot brakes, this may contain asbestos dust
which is hazardous to health, see Health and Safety Precautions.
www.JagDocs.com
Avoid brake testing on busy roads where it can cause inconvenience or danger to other road users.
CAUTION: Brake testing which includes heavy brake applications should not be carried out with new brake pads/discs or
linings/drums until the components have bedded-in. New brake friction components will not reach full efficiency until the
bedding-in process is complete.
Test the brakes at several speeds within the normal operating range using both light and heavy pedal pressure. Note any
tendency to snatch, pull or drag, and any undue delay in application or release.
Allow the vehicle to coast and note any tendency to pull to one side, or evidence that the brakes are binding.
After stopping the vehicle (not immediately after a period of heavy braking), carefully check the brake temperature. A disc
which feels hot, or appreciably hotter than the others, indicates that the brake is binding.
After completion of the test, check for:
Oil, coolant, hydraulic, air and fuel leaks

Abnormal temperature of any moving components or assemblies, e.g. wheel hubs, transmission, axle etc., which might
indicate over tightness or lack of lubrication
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Window Glass Health and Safety Precautions
WARNINGS:
Cured polyurethane (PU) adhesive can degrade if subjected to high temperatures. Isocyanide compounds can be released
when grinding or welding in close proximity to cured PU adhesive.
SKIN CONTACT: Prolonged exposure to polyurethane (PU) adhesive may cause skin irritation. If PU adhesive comes into
contact with the skin, remove any contaminated clothing. Immediately wash the skin with soap and water. Seek medical
attention for any persistent skin irritation or abnormality.
EYE CONTACT: Polyurethane (PU) adhesive may cause severe irritation or damage. If PU adhesive comes into contact with
the eyes, immediately flush eyes with plenty of running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek immediate medical attention.
SWALLOWED: If polyurethane (PU) adhesive is swallowed, flush the mouth thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Provide
rest, warmth and fresh air. Seek immediate medical attention.
INHALED: Persons having a respiratory allergy may have an allergic reaction when handling polyurethane (PU) adhesive.
INHALED: Polyurethane (PU) adhesive can cause asthma like symptoms. Isocyanate vapor from primer or PU adhesive can
cause allergies in the respiratory tract.
www.JagDocs.com
INHALED: If polyurethane (PU) adhesive fumes are inhaled, move victim to fresh air. Provide oxygen if necessary. If
breathing stops, provide artificial respiration. Keep a victim warm and at rest. Seek immediate medical attention.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the direct glazing for bonded glass cutting blades are changed where the cutting depth changes to avoid
damage to the body and trim panels.
During the curing period of the PU adhesive, the door windows must be left open to avoid a build up of pressure when the
doors are opened and closed.
www.JagDocs.com
Published: 17-Apr-2014
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Adaptive
Damping Module (SUMB)
Adaptive Damping Module (SUMB)
CAUTION: Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle
NOTES:
If the control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module/component
Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only 5-digit codes. Match the 5 digits from the scan tool to
the first 5 digits of the 7-digit code listed to identify the fault (the last 2 digits give extra information read by the
manufacturer-approved diagnostic system)
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places and with a
current calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the digital multimeter leads into account
www.JagDocs.com
Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests
Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion
If diagnostic trouble codes are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent
concern may be the cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals
Where an 'on demand self-test' is referred to, this can be accessed via the 'diagnostic trouble code monitor' tab on the
manufacturers approved diagnostic system
Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required
he table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the adaptive damping module, for additional
diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section
For additional information, refer to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension, Diagnosis and Testing).
DTC Description Possible Causes Action

C101D-12 Left Front
vertical Left Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front
acceleration acceleration sensor vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to power or
sensor - Short circuit short to power another circuit. Repair circuit, clear the DTC and retest the
to power system
C101D-14 Left Front

vertical Left Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front vertical
acceleration acceleration sensor acceleration sensor circuit for short to ground, open circuit. If
sensor - Short circuit short to no fault found on wiring suspect sensor. Replace sensor, clear
to ground, open ground, open circuit DTC and retest the system
circuit Vertical acceleration
sensor fault
C101D-22 Left Front

vertical Left front vertical With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Left Front Vertical
acceleration acceleration sensor Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9 to 2.1
sensor - Signal insecurely mounted volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts, loose
amplitude > Left front vertical connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then suspect
maximum acceleration sensor faulty sensor/incorrectly fitted sensor. Check the sensor is
signal circuit short to correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as required. Refer
another circuit to the new module/component installation note at the top of
Left front vertical the DTC Index, clear DTC and retest system
acceleration sensor
www.JagDocs.com
internal fault
C101D-26 Left Front

vertical Left front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Left Front
acceleration acceleration sensor Vertical Accelerometer signal circuit for faults, if circuit is
sensor - Signal signal circuit short to correct suspect faulty sensor, refer to the new
rate of change another circuit module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
below threshold Left front vertical Index. Replace the sensor, clear the DTC and retest the
acceleration sensor system
internal fault
C101D-78 Left Front

vertical Left front vertical Check Left Front Vertical Accelerometer for location and
acceleration acceleration sensor security, if correct suspect faulty Accelerometer, refer to the
sensor - bracket bent new module installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
Alignment or Left front vertical Replace the sensor/bracket as required, clear the DTC and
adjustment acceleration sensor retest the system
incorrect damaged
C101E-12 Right Front

vertical Right Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front
to power system

vertical Right Front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front
acceleration acceleration sensor vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to ground, open
sensor - Short circuit short to circuit. If no fault found on wiring suspect sensor. Replace
to ground, open ground, open circuit sensor, clear DTC and retest the system
www.JagDocs.com
sensor fault

vertical Right front vertical With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Right Front
acceleration acceleration sensor Vertical Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9 to
sensor - Signal insecurely mounted 2.1 volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts,
amplitude > Right front vertical loose connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then
maximum acceleration sensor suspect faulty sensor/incorrectly fitted sensor. Check the
signal circuit short to sensor is correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as
another circuit required. Refer to the new module/component installation
Right front vertical note at the top of the DTC Index, clear DTC and retest system
acceleration sensor
internal fault

vertical Right front vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Right Front
below threshold Right front vertical Index. Replace the sensor, clear the DTC and retest the
internal fault

vertical Right front vertical Check Right Front Vertical Accelerometer for location and
Alignment or Right front vertical Replace the sensor/bracket as required, clear the DTC and
incorrect damaged
C1024-00 System
Temporarily Loss of power to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power and
Disabled Due To control module whilst ground circuits to Adaptive Damping Control Module for
Power driving intermittent or poor connection. Repair wiring circuits as
Interruption required, clear DTC and retest the system
During Driving -
No sub type
information
C1030-12 Left Rear
vertical Left Rear vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear
to power system
www.JagDocs.com
C1030-14 Left Rear
vertical Left rear vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear
acceleration acceleration sensor vertical acceleration sensor circuit for short to ground, open
sensor - Short circuit short to circuit. If no fault found on wiring suspect sensor. Replace
to ground, open ground, open circuit sensor, clear DTC and retest the system
sensor fault
C1030-22 Left Rear

vertical Left Rear vertical With vehicle parked on a level surface, read Left Rear Vertical
acceleration acceleration sensor Accelerometer voltage and check it lies in range 1.9 to 2.1
sensor - Signal insecurely mounted volts. If not OK then check electrical wiring for shorts, loose
amplitude > Left Rear vertical connections and repair as required. If wiring OK then suspect
maximum acceleration sensor faulty sensor/incorrectly fitted sensor. Check the sensor is
signal circuit short to correctly mounted, secure or replace sensor as required. Refer
another circuit to the new module/component installation note at the top of
Left Rear vertical the DTC Index, clear DTC and retest system
acceleration sensor
internal fault
C1030-26 Left Rear

vertical Left Rear vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Left Rear
below threshold Left Rear vertical Index. Replace the sensor, clear the DTC and retest the
internal fault
C1030-78 Left Rear

vertical Left Rear vertical Check Left Rear Vertical Accelerometer for location and
www.JagDocs.com
Alignment or Left Rear vertical Replace the sensor/bracket as required, clear the DTC and
incorrect damaged
C1A03-12 Left Front

Height Sensor - Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Left
Circuit short to shorted to another Height Sensor circuit for short to power, If circuit correct
power cable suspect Sensor internal fault, replace as required
Height sensor internal
fault
C1A03-14 Left Front

Height Sensor - Wiring to sensor Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor and inspect
Circuit short to (signal) open circuit connector pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water
ground or open Wiring to height ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect harness at Control
sensor partial short to Module. A: Check for short circuits between any of the 3
ground terminals and vehicle ground. B: Check for electrical continuity
Wiring to height between the two connectors for each of the 3 terminals.
sensor short to other Reconnect electrical connector at Control Module only. C:
cable Check voltages at terminals within height sensor connector
Height sensor internal (sensor not connected), with respect to vehicle body. •
electrical fault Voltage to sensor ground connection should be ~0v • Voltage
to sensor signal connection should be ~0v • Voltage to sensor
supply connection should be ~5v All voltages should be within
± 0.15v
C1A03-21 Left Front

Height Sensor - Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height
Signal amplitude not connected sensor fixings were slackened or found to be loose or if a
< minimum Height sensor or height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be
bracket loose re-calibrated. Confirm that the correct height sensor part
Height sensor bracket number is fitted, as specified in the service parts database.
bent To check height sensor: Disconnect electrical connector to
Incorrect height height sensor and inspect connecter pins & terminals for
calibration evidence of corrosion or water ingress. If no corrosion found,
Height sensor linkage disconnect harness at Control Module. A: Check for short
toggled circuits between any of the 3 terminals and vehicle ground. B:
Height sensor water Check for electrical continuity between the two connectors for
ingress each of the 3 terminals. Reconnect electrical connector at
Wiring to height Control Module only. C: Check voltages at terminals within
sensor partial short to height sensor connector (sensor not connected), with respect
ground to vehicle body. • Voltage to sensor ground connection should
Wiring to height be ~0v • Voltage to sensor signal connection should be ~0v •
sensor short to other Voltage to sensor supply connection should be ~5v All
cable voltages should be within ± 0.15v. To check sensor operation
Height sensor on the vehicle: Check for water ingress around the height
www.JagDocs.com
electrical fault sensors, electrical connectors or shaft end. Check for
Height sensor linkage excessive movement in the shaft in all directions. Raise
bent vehicle (ideally on wheels-free ramp) until suspension on
Incorrect height corner under investigation is at rebound to gain access to
sensor fitted height sensor. Access may be improved by removing road
wheel. Carefully disconnect the height sensor link from the
upper suspension arm. Monitor the height sensor signal
voltage output for the height sensor under investigation.
Position the sensor arm so it is in the mid position and
confirm that the voltage is around 2.5 volts. Move the sensor
arm over the range ±40° around the mid position and confirm
that the voltage changes smoothly between around 0.2 volts
and 4.8 volts. If voltages are incorrect or do not change
smoothly then replace sensor. NOTE: For angles of movement
beyond ±40°, the sensor signal will clamp to a voltage of
~0.15v or ~4.85v, depending on position of sensor lever. This
is normal. When investigation is complete, refit height sensor
link to upper arm. If any fixings to the height sensor body or
mounting bracket were slackened or found to be loose or if a
height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be
re-calibrated. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
manual for the calibration procedure
C1A03-22 Left Front

> maximum Height sensor or height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be
www.JagDocs.com

C1A03-76 Left Front

Height Sensor - Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
Wrong mounting calibration calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the system
position
C1A03-78 Left Front
Alignment or calibration calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the system
adjustment
incorrect
www.JagDocs.com
C1A04-12 Right Front
Height Sensor - Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Right
fault

± 0.15v

www.JagDocs.com

www.JagDocs.com

www.JagDocs.com
position
adjustment
incorrect
C1A05-12 Left Rear Height
Sensor - Circuit Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Left
short to power shorted to another Height Sensor circuit for short to power, If circuit correct
cable suspect Sensor internal fault, replace as required
fault

Sensor - Circuit Wiring to sensor Disconnect electrical connector to height sensor and inspect
short to ground (signal) open circuit connector pins & terminals for evidence of corrosion or water
or open Wiring to height ingress. If no corrosion found, disconnect harness at Control
± 0.15v

Sensor - Signal Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height
amplitude < not connected sensor fixings were slackened or found to be loose or if a
minimum Height sensor or height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be
www.JagDocs.com

Sensor - Signal Height sensor linkage Inspect for damage or loose fixings. NOTE If any height
amplitude > not connected sensor fixings were slackened or found to be loose or if a
maximum Height sensor or height sensor was changed, the vehicle ride height MUST be
www.JagDocs.com


Sensor - Wrong Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
mounting calibration calibration procedure. Clear the DTC and retest the system
position
Sensor - Incorrect height Refer to the workshop manual and perform the height sensor
adjustment
incorrect
www.JagDocs.com
C1A06-12 Right Rear
Height Sensor - Height sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Right
fault
C1A06-14 Right Rear

± 0.15v
C1A06-21 Right Rear

www.JagDocs.com
C1A06-22 Right Rear

www.JagDocs.com
C1A06-76 Right Rear

www.JagDocs.com
position
C1A06-78 Right Rear
adjustment
incorrect
C110C-01 Left Front
Damper Left front damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Left
Solenoid - solenoid circuit fault damper solenoid circuit for faults, If no faults are evident
General suspect a faulty control module, refer to the new module
electrical failure installation note at the top of the DTC Index
C110C-18 Left Front

Damper Front Left Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Left
Solenoid - Actuator open circuit Damper Solenoid circuit resistance. Damper solenoid circuit
Circuit current at startup should lie in range of 2 to 3.5 ohms
below threshold
C110C-19 Left Front
Solenoid - Solenoid circuit Damper Solenoid circuit resistance. Damper solenoid circuit
Circuit current current above should lie in range of 2 to 3.5 ohms
above threshold threshold
C110C-14 Left Front

Damper Left front damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Solenoid - Short solenoid circuit - short the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
to ground, open to ground, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check left front damper solenoid
circuit Left front damper circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and install a
failure new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
C110C-1D Left Front

Damper Left front damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Solenoid - solenoid circuit - short the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Circuit current to ground/power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check left front damper solenoid
out of range circuit circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check and
Left front damper install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy
failure and procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
C110C-64 Left Front

Solenoid - Solenoid Measured Damper Solenoid circuit resistance. Damper solenoid circuit
Signal Current control loop should lie in range of 2 to 3.5 ohms
plausibility failed
failure Front Left Damper
Solenoid open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
C110D-01 Right Front
Damper Right front damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Right

Damper Front Right Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Front Right
below threshold

Damper Right front damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
to ground, open to ground, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check Right front damper
circuit Right front damper solenoid circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and
failure install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
C110D-1D Right Front

Damper Right front damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Circuit current to ground/power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check Right front damper
out of range circuit solenoid circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check
Right front damper and install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty
www.JagDocs.com
failure policy and procedures manual if a module/component is

suspect

plausibility failed
failure Front Right Damper
C110E-01 Left Rear

Damper Left Rear damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Left
C110E-18 Left Rear

Damper Rear Left Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Left
below threshold
C110E-19 Left Rear
C110E-14 Left Rear

Damper Left Rear damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
to ground, open to ground, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear damper solenoid
circuit Left Rear damper circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and install a
failure new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
C110E-1D Left Rear

Damper Left Rear damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Circuit current to ground/power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check left Rear damper solenoid
out of range circuit circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check and
Left Rear damper install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy
failure and procedures manual if a module/component is suspect
C110E-64 Left Rear

www.JagDocs.com
plausibility failed
failure Rear Left Damper
C110F-01 Right Rear

Damper Right Rear damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Right
Electrical Failure installation note at the top of the DTC Index
C110F-18 Right Rear

Damper Rear Right Damper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Rear Right
below threshold
C110F-19 Right Rear
C110F-14 Right Rear

Damper Right Rear damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
to ground, open to ground, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check Right Rear damper
circuit Right Rear damper solenoid circuit for short to ground, open circuit. Check and
failure install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty policy
C110F-1D Right Rear

Damper Right Rear damper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
www.JagDocs.com
Circuit current to ground/power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check Right Rear damper
out of range circuit solenoid circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check
Right Rear damper and install a new damper as required. Refer to the warranty
failure policy and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect
C110F-64 Right Rear

plausibility failed
failure Rear Right Damper
C1B14-1C Sensor Supply

Voltage A - Out Left Front Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sensor
of range Sensor or Right Front supply for circuit fault. Check all height sensors. Check
Height Sensor or Left module sensor supply output voltage measured voltage
Rear Height Sensor or should be between 4.995 volts and 4.85 volts
Right Rear Height
Sensor supply partial
short to other circuit
or ground
Left Front Height
Sensor or Right Front
Height Sensor or Left
Rear Height Sensor or
Right Rear Height
Sensor internal failure
Internal control
module failure
C1B15-1C Sensor Supply

Voltage B - Out Left Front Vertical Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sensor
of range Acceleration Sensor or supply for circuit fault. Check all Vertical Acceleration Sensors.
Right Front Vertical Check control module sensor supply output voltage Measured
Acceleration Sensor or voltage should be between 4.995 volts and 4.85 volts
Left Rear Vertical
Acceleration Sensor or
Right Rear Vertical
Acceleration Sensor
supply partial short to
other circuit or
ground. Left Front
Vertical Acceleration
Sensor or Right Front
www.JagDocs.com
Sensor or Left Rear
Sensor or Right Rear
Sensor supply partial
short to other circuit
or ground
Left Front Vertical
Right Front Vertical
Left Rear Vertical
Right Rear Vertical
Acceleration Sensor
internal failure
Internal control
module failure
U0001-88 High speed CAN

communication Lost Communication Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
bus - Bus off With Engine Control electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit for faults,
Module (ECM) (CAN check CAN circuits for open circuits or shorts to power, ground
Bus circuit fault) or other circuits
U0100-00 Lost
Communication Missing message from Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
With ECM/PCM A ECM electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus for circuit fault
- No sub type
information
U0101-00 Lost
www.JagDocs.com
Communication Lost Communication Check Transmission Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to
with TCM - No with Transmission the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus for circuit
sub type control module (TCM) fault
information (CAN Bus circuit fault)
U0103-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Gear Shift Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
With Gear Shift With Gear Shift electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus for circuit faults
Control Module Module (GSM) (CAN
A - No sub type Bus circuit fault)
information
U0121-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Anti lock Brake System Control Module for stored DTCs.
With Anti-Lock With Anti-Lock Brake Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus
Brake System System (ABS) Control circuit to Anti lock Brake System Control Module for circuit
(ABS) Control Module (CAN Bus faults
Module - No sub circuit fault)
type information
U0132-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Air Suspension Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to
With Suspension With Air Suspension the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit to Air
Control Module Control Module (CAN Suspension Control Module for circuit faults
A - No sub type Bus circuit fault
information
U0136-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Rear Differential Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer
With Differential With Rear Differential to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus circuit to
Control Module - Control Module (CAN Rear Differential Control Module for circuit faults
Rear - No sub Bus circuit fault)
type information
U0140-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Body Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to the
With Body With Body Control electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit to Body
Control Module - Module (Front Smart Control Module for faults
No sub type Junction Box) (CAN
information Bus circuit fault)
U0142-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Rear Smart Junction Box for stored DTCs. Refer to the
With Body with rear smart electrical circuit diagrams and check Can Bus circuit to Rear
Control Module junction box (CAN Bus Smart Junction Box for faults
B - No sub type circuit fault)
information
U0155-00 Lost
Communication Lost Communication Check Instrument Panel Cluster for stored DTCs. Refer to the
With Instrument With Instrument Panel electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus to Instrument
Panel Cluster Cluster (IPC) Control Panel Cluster for circuit fault
www.JagDocs.com
(IPC) Control Module (CAN bus
Module - No sub circuit fault)
type information
U0300-00 Internal control
module software CAN master Check Front Smart Junction Box vehicle configuration file,
incompatibility - configuration ID check part number of adaptive damping control module
No sub type incorrect
information
U0401-68 Invalid Data
Received from Invalid Data Received Check Engine Control Module for DTCs. Refer to the relevant
ECM/PCM A - from Engine Control DTC index
Event Module
information
Received from Invalid Data Received Check for Transmission Control Module DTCs. Refer to relevant
TCM - Event from Transmission DTC index
information control module

Received from Invalid data received Check Gear Shift Control Module for DTCs. Refer to the
Gear Shift from gear shift control relevant DTC index
Control Module module
A - Event
information
Received From Invalid Data Received Check for Anti lock Brake System DTCs. Refer to the relevant
Anti-Lock Brake From Anti-Lock Brake DTC index
System (ABS) System (ABS) Control
Control Module - Module
Event
www.JagDocs.com
information
Received from Invalid Data Received Check Air Suspension Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer to
Suspension From Air Suspension the relevant DTC index
Control Module Control Module
A - Event
information
Received From Invalid Data Received Check Body Control Module (Front Smart Junction Box) for
Body Control From Body Control stored DTCs. Refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - Event Module (Front Smart
information Junction Box)

Received From Invalid Data Received Check Rear Differential Control Module for stored DTCs. Refer
Differential From Rear Differential to the relevant DTC index
Control Module - Control Module
Rear - Event
information
Received From Invalid Data Received Check rear smart junction box for DTCs and refer to relevant
Body Control From body control DTC index
Module B - module B (Rear Smart
Event Junction Box)
information
U1A14-00 CAN
initialization CAN network harness Refer to circuit diagrams and check CAN Bus circuit for fault
failure - No sub short, disconnected (short to power, ground or open circuit)
type information
U2100-00 Initial
Configuration Car Configuration Install car config to Front Smart Junction Box. Clear DTC and
Not Complete - Data not loaded (New retest systems
No sub type Body Control Module
information (Front Smart Junction
Box) fitted to vehicle
and not initialized)
Internal Body Control
Module (Front Smart
Junction Box) failure
U2101-00 Control Module

Configuration Car Configuration Carry out the new module software installation procedure
Incompatible - Data transmitted over
No sub type CAN does not match
information adaptive damping
control module
internal config
www.JagDocs.com
U3000-01 Control module -
General General electrical Check integrity of electrical connectors and pins to module.
Electrical Failure failure Check damper negative circuits for short to Ground. Refer to
the new module installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
Install a new Adaptive Damping Control Module
U3000-04 Control Module -

System Internal Module Internal Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check all damper
Failure failure solenoid circuits for short to power. If no harness faults are
found suspect adaptive damping control module. Install a new
module, refer to new module installation note at top of DTC
Index

Special memory Module Internal Suspect Adaptive Damping Control Module internal failure.
failure failure Install a new module, refer to the new module/component
installation note at the top of the DTC Index

Program memory Module Internal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power and
failure failure ground circuit for fault. Clear DTC turn off ignition, wait 1
minute. Turn on ignition, check for DTCs. If DTC returns
suspect Adaptive Damping Control Module internal failure.
Install a new module, refer to the new module/component

Watchdog / Module Internal If this DTC is logged contact your local in-market support
safety Micro Failure
controller failure
www.JagDocs.com
Not activated Adaptive Damping Install the latest software / Carry out the new-module
Control Module has (software) install procedure
been replaced and not
programmed

Missing Adaptive damping Install the latest software / Carry out the new-module
calibration control module has (software) install procedure
been replaced and no
software is installed
U3003-1C Battery voltage

- Circuit voltage Circuit voltage out of Check the battery is in good condition and fully charged, refer
out of range range (Supply Voltage to the battery care manual. Refer to the starting and charging
at adaptive damping section of the workshop manual and check the performance of
control module < the charging system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
10.5v or Supply and check power and ground circuit to adaptive damping
Voltage at adaptive control module for faults, including intermittent high
damping control resistance
module > 18v for 30s)
U3003-62 Battery Voltage

- Signal compare High Resistance Check the battery is in good condition and fully charged, refer
failure Connections to the battery care manual. Refer to the starting and charging
Adaptive Damping section of the workshop manual and check the performance of
Control module the charging system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Internal Failure and check power and ground circuit to adaptive damping
control module for faults, including intermittent high
resistance
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Anti-Lock
Braking System (ABS)
Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the anti-lock braking system module, for
additional diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist, Diagnosis
and Testing).

C0021-09 Brake Booster
Performance - No vacuum available from Check integrity of brake booster vacuum hose.
Component Failures engine due to split/leaking Check and install a new brake booster as required
hose etc
Brake booster servo has
failed due to lack of vacuum
C0030-38 Left Front Tone

Wheel - Signal Left front magnetic pulse Check the left front magnetic pulse ring for damage
frequency incorrect ring damaged/contaminated or contamination. Clean or replace as required. If no
Incorrect component damage/contamination found, suspect wheel speed
installed sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
Sensor internal fault manual if a module/component is suspect. To
validate the repair and extinguish the lamps, the
vehicle needs to be driven above 9mph/15kph for
more than 10 seconds
C0031-12 Left Front Wheel

Speed Sensor - Electrical wiring harness Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Short to battery fault wheel speed sensor circuit for short to power. Repair
Sensor internal fault harness as required. If no harness fault found,
suspect wheel speed sensor. Refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedures manual if a
www.JagDocs.com
module/component is suspect

Circuit short to fault wheel speed sensor circuit for short to ground or
ground or open Sensor internal fault open circuit. Repair harness as required. If no
harness fault found, suspect wheel speed sensor.
Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual
if a module/component is suspect

Signal fault wheel speed sensor circuit for partial or
shape/waveform Sensor internal fault intermittently grounded signal circuit. Repair
failure harness as required. If no harness fault found,
module/component is suspect. To validate the repair
and extinguish the lamps, the vehicle needs to be
driven above 9mph/15kph
C0031-2F Left Front Wheel

Signal erratic fault wheel speed sensor circuit for intermittent short to
Sensor internal fault power, ground or open circuit. Repair harness as
required. If no harness fault found, suspect wheel
speed sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
Procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect. To validate the repair and extinguish the
lamps, the vehicle needs to be driven above
9mph/15kph
www.JagDocs.com

Speed Sensor - No Electrical wiring harness Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
signal fault wheel speed sensor circuit for open circuit or high
Magnetic pulse ring resistance. Check connectors for damage or
de-magnetised or damaged corrosion. Check the wheel speed sensor for correct
Sensor internal fault location and contamination. Check the magnetic
pulse wheel for contamination, damage or
de-magnetisation. Clean or replace the sensor or
wheel bearing as required. Refer to the Warranty

Signal compare fault wheel speed sensor circuit for intermittent short to
failure Sensor internal fault power, ground or open circuit. Repair harness as
9mph/15kph

Speed Sensor - Incorrect wheels/tyres Check the correct wheels and tyres are installed.
Signal plausibility installed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
failure Electrical wiring harness wheel speed sensor circuit for intermittent short to
fault power, or ground. Check for EMC influences on the
EMC influences on left front speed sensor and circuits. Check magnetic pulse
wheel speed sensor and wheel for damage/contamination and
supply line de-magnetisation. Repair Wiring harness, install a
Magnetic pulse wheel new sensor or wheel bearing as required. Refer to
damaged/contaminated, the Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
de-magnetised module/component is suspect
Sensor internal fault
C0032-11 Left Front wheel

Speed Sensor Electrical wiring harness Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Supply - Circuit fault wheel speed sensor circuit for short to ground.
short to ground Sensor internal fault Repair harness as required. If no harness fault
found, suspect wheel speed sensor. Refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual if a
www.JagDocs.com
C0033-38 Right Front Tone
Wheel - Signal Right front magnetic pulse Check the right front magnetic pulse ring for
frequency incorrect ring damaged/contaminated damage or contamination. Clean or replace as
Incorrect component required. If no damage/contamination found,
installed suspect wheel speed sensor. Refer to the Warranty
Sensor internal fault Policy and Procedures manual if a
driven above 9mph/15kph for more than 10 seconds
C0034-12 Right Front Wheel



www.JagDocs.com

C0034-2F Right Front Wheel

9mph/15kph


9mph/15kph

EMC influences on right front speed sensor and circuits. Check magnetic pulse
www.JagDocs.com
supply line de-magnetisation. Repair wiring harness, install a

C0036-38 Left Rear Tone

Wheel - Signal Left rear magnetic pulse ring Check the left rear magnetic pulse ring for damage
frequency incorrect damaged/contaminated or contamination. Clean or replace as required. If no
Incorrect component damage/contamination found, suspect wheel speed
installed sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
Sensor internal fault manual if a module/component is suspect. To
validate the repair and extinguish the lamps, the
vehicle needs to be driven above 9mph/15kph for
more than 10 seconds
C0037-12 Left Rear Wheel

www.JagDocs.com


C0037-2F Left Rear Wheel

9mph/15kph

www.JagDocs.com
9mph/15kph

EMC influences on left rear speed sensor and circuits. Check magnetic pulse
supply line de-magnetisation. Repair Wiring harness, install a

www.JagDocs.com
C0039-38 Right Rear Tone

Wheel - Signal Right rear magnetic pulse Check the right rear magnetic pulse ring for damage
frequency incorrect ring damaged/contaminated or contamination. Clean or replace as required. . If
Incorrect component no damage/contamination found, suspect wheel
installed speed sensor. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
Sensor internal fault Procedures manual if a module/component is
9mph/15kph for more than 10 seconds
C003A-12 Right Rear Wheel



C003A-2F Right Rear Wheel

9mph/15kph
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Audio
Amplifier Module (AAM)
Audio Amplifier Module (AAM)
guarantee confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
If a control module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component.
manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter accurate to three decimal places, and with
an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the digital multimeter leads into
account.
www.JagDocs.com
Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
Inspect connectors for signs of water ingress, and pins for damage and/or corrosion.
If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests, a fault is not present, an intermittent concern may be the
cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals.
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as required.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Audio Amplifier Module (AAM). For
additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Information and Entertainment System (415-00 Information and Entertainment System -
General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1A01-11 Speaker #1 - Circuit
short to ground Front left tweeter or Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
mid-range speaker tweeter speaker circuit for short to ground
circuit - Short to
ground

short to battery Front left tweeter or Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
mid-range speaker tweeter speaker circuit for short to power
circuit - Short to
power

open Front left tweeter or Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
mid-range speaker tweeter speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit - Open circuit
B1A01-1A Speaker #1 - Circuit

resistance below Front left tweeter or Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
threshold mid-range speaker using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
circuit - Resistance
below threshold
www.JagDocs.com
B1A01-49 Speaker #1 - Internal
electronic failure Internal electronic Suspect the audio amplifier module, check and install a
failure new module as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top of the
DTC Index

short to ground Front right tweeter or Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
mid-range speaker tweeter speaker circuit for short to ground
circuit - Short to
ground

short to battery Front right tweeter or Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
mid-range speaker tweeter speaker circuit for short to power
circuit - Short to
power

open Front right tweeter or Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
mid-range speaker tweeter speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit - Open circuit

resistance below Front right tweeter or Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
threshold mid-range speaker using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
circuit - Resistance
below threshold

www.JagDocs.com

DTC Index

short to ground Front left woofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
speaker circuit - Short woofer speaker circuit for short to ground
to ground

short to battery Front left woofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
speaker circuit - Short woofer speaker circuit for short to power
to power

open Front left woofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front left
speaker circuit - Open woofer speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit

resistance below Front left woofer Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
threshold speaker circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Resistance below
threshold

DTC Index

short to ground Front right woofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
speaker circuit - Short woofer speaker circuit for short to ground
to ground

short to battery Front right woofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
speaker circuit - Short woofer speaker circuit for short to power
to power

open Front right woofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front right
speaker circuit - Open woofer speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit
www.JagDocs.com
resistance below Front right woofer Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Resistance below
threshold

DTC Index

short to ground Rear left speaker Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
circuit - Short to speaker circuit for short to ground
ground

short to battery Rear left speaker Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
circuit - Short to speaker circuit for short to power
power

open Rear left speaker Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
circuit - Open circuit speaker circuit for open circuit

resistance below Rear left speaker Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
threshold circuit - Resistance using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
below threshold
www.JagDocs.com

DTC Index

short to ground Rear right speaker Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
circuit - Short to speaker circuit for short to ground
ground

short to battery Rear right speaker Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
circuit - Short to speaker circuit for short to power
power

open Rear right speaker Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
circuit - Open circuit speaker circuit for open circuit

resistance below Rear right speaker Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
threshold circuit - Resistance using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
below threshold

DTC Index

short to ground Rear left surround Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
speaker circuit - Short surround speaker circuit for short to ground
to ground

short to battery Rear left surround Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
speaker circuit - Short surround speaker circuit for short to power
to power

open Rear left surround Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear left
speaker circuit - Open surround speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit
www.JagDocs.com
resistance below Rear left surround Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Resistance below
threshold

DTC Index

short to ground Rear right surround Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
speaker circuit - Short surround speaker circuit for short to ground
to ground

short to battery Rear right surround Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
speaker circuit - Short surround speaker circuit for short to power
to power

open Rear right surround Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check rear right
speaker circuit - Open surround speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit

resistance below Rear right surround Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Resistance below
www.JagDocs.com
threshold

DTC Index

short to ground Center speaker circuit Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check center
- Short to ground speaker circuit for short to ground

short to battery Center speaker circuit Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check center
- Short to power speaker circuit for short to power

open Center speaker circuit Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check center
- Open circuit speaker circuit for open circuit

resistance below Center speaker circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
threshold - Resistance below using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
threshold

DTC Index

short to ground Left subwoofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check left
speaker circuit - Short subwoofer speaker circuit for short to ground
to ground

short to battery Left subwoofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check left
speaker circuit - Short subwoofer speaker circuit for short to power
to power

open Left subwoofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check left
speaker circuit - Open subwoofer speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit
www.JagDocs.com
resistance below Left subwoofer Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Resistance below
threshold
B1A10-49 Speaker #10 -

Internal electronic Internal electronic Suspect the audio amplifier module, check and install a
failure failure new module as required, refer to the new
DTC Index

short to ground Right subwoofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check right
speaker circuit - Short subwoofer speaker circuit for short to ground
to ground

short to battery Right subwoofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check right
speaker circuit - Short subwoofer speaker circuit for short to power
to power

open Right subwoofer Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check right
speaker circuit - Open subwoofer speaker circuit for open circuit
circuit

resistance below Right subwoofer Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Resistance below
www.JagDocs.com
threshold
B1A11-49 Speaker #11 -

Internal electronic Internal electronic Suspect the audio amplifier module, check and install a
failure failure new module as required, refer to the new
DTC Index
U2003-98 Fibre Optic

Communication Bus - Component or system Clear DTC and allow system to cool, monitor for
Component or system over temperature re-occurrence of DTC
over temperature
System programming Software Re-configure the audio amplifier as an existing control
failures incompatibility module, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
The version of the system
Local Configuration
file does not match
that expected

General memory General memory Re-configure the audio amplifier as an existing control
failure failure module, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Clear DTC, cycle ignition and read DTCs. If DTC
returns, suspect audio amplifier module and install a
new module. Refer to the new module/component
U3000-44 Control module - Data

memory failure Data memory failure Re-configure the audio amplifier as an existing control
module, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Clear DTC, cycle ignition and read DTCs. If DTC
returns, suspect audio amplifier module and install a
new module. Refer to the new module/component
U3000-55 Control Module - Not

configured Incorrect car Check/up-date Car Configuration File using manufacturer
configuration data approved diagnostic system
received

Missing message Missing message Check CJB for DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Check
information and entertainment module for Car
Configuration File and MOST network DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC Index. Carry out MOST/CAN network tests
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
www.JagDocs.com
U3003-16 Battery Voltage -
Circuit voltage below Circuit voltage below Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
threshold threshold using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system

Circuit voltage above Circuit voltage above Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Blind Spot
Monitoring System Module (SODL/SODR)
Blind Spot Monitoring System Module (SODL/SODR)
guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
of a new module/component.
manufacturer approved diagnostic system).
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to three decimal places,
and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM leads into
account.
www.JagDocs.com
If DTCs are recorded and, after performing the pinpoint tests a fault is not present, an intermittent concern may be the
Where an 'on demand self-test' is referred to, this can be accessed via the 'DTC Monitor' tab on the manufacturers
approved diagnostic system.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Blind Spot Monitoring System Module, for
additional Diagnosis and Testing information refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing Section.
For additional information, refer to: Warning Devices (413-09 Warning Devices, Diagnosis and Testing).

B11C9-11 Driver Display Status
LED - Circuit short to Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground driver display status LED circuit for short to
ground
B11C9-15 Driver Display Status

LED - Circuit short to Circuit short to power or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery or open open circuit driver display status LED circuit for short to
ground
B11D6-11 Driver Display Alert LED -

Circuit short to ground Circuit short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
driver display status LED circuit for short to
ground
B11D6-15 Driver Display Alert LED -

Circuit short to battery Circuit short to power or Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or open open circuit driver display status LED circuit for short to
ground
U0010-00 Medium Speed CAN

Communication Bus - No No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
sub type information the power and ground connections to the module.
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
www.JagDocs.com
the CAN network
U0140-00 Lost Communication

With Body Control No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Module - No sub type the power and ground connections to the module.
information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
the CAN network between the Central Junction
Box and Blind Spot Monitoring System Module

With Instrument Panel No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Cluster (IPC) Control the power and ground connections to the module.
Module - No sub type Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
the CAN network between the Instrument Cluster
and Blind Spot Monitoring System Module

With Blind Spot CAN bus circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Monitoring System Harness fault between left the power and ground connections to the module.
Module - Left - No sub side mirror and left side Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
type information module system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
the CAN network between the left Blind Spot
Monitoring System Module and the right Blind
Spot Monitoring System Module
the left side harness between the left side mirror
www.JagDocs.com
and left hand module

With Blind Spot CAN bus circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Monitoring System Harness fault between the power and ground connections to the module.
Module - Right - No sub right side mirror and right Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
type information side module system, complete a CAN network integrity test.
the CAN network between the left Blind Spot
Monitoring System Module and the right Blind
Spot Monitoring System Module
the right side harness between the right side
mirror and right hand module
U0300-00 Internal Control Module

Software Incompatibility No sub type information Check Central Junction Box for related DTCs and
- No sub type refer to the relevant DTC Index. Check Restraints
information Control Module for related DTCs and refer to DTC
Index. Check correct components are installed
and that the latest software version is installed
U0415-68 Invalid Data Received

From Anti-Lock Brake Event information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
System (ABS) Control system check the central junction box and the
Module - event anti-lock brake system (ABS) control module for
information related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index

From Body Control Event information Check the Central Junction Box for related DTCs
Module - Event and refer to the relevant DTC index
information
U2100-00 Initial Configuration Not
Complete - No sub type Car Configuration File Check/amend Car Configuration File using
information information not received manufacturer approved diagnostic system
completely

Configuration Car Configuration File Check/amend Car Configuration File using
Incompatible - No sub information incompatible manufacturer approved diagnostic system
type information to Control module
U3000-44 Control Module - Data

memory failure Control module data Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
memory failure the power and ground circuits to the component.
Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual if a module is suspect
www.JagDocs.com
Watchdog/safety Control module internal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
microcontroller failure watchdog/safety the power and ground circuits to the component.
MicroController failure Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
U3000-49 Control Module - Internal

electronic failure Control module internal Clear DTC, cycle ignition and retest. If fault
electronic failure (internal persists, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
error) and check the power and ground circuits to the
component. Repair as required, clear DTC and
retest
If fault persists, check and install a new
blindspot monitoring control module as required.
U3003-62 Battery Voltage - Signal

compare failure Mis-match in battery Check the module connector for security and
voltage, between Central integrity. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Junction Box and Blind and check the Control module supply voltage.
Spot Monitoring System Check vehicle battery voltage and state of
module, of 2 volts or more charge. Check the power signal line to the
module
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Central
Junction Box (CJB)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Central Junction Box (CJB). For additional
diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Testing).

B00D5-11 Restraint System
Passenger Disable PAD lamp supply circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Indicator - Circuit short to ground PAD lamp supply circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Indicator - Circuit short to power PAD lamp supply circuit for short to power
short to battery
Indicator - Circuit open circuit PAD lamp supply circuit for open circuit
open
B1009-51 Ignition Authorisation
- Not programmed Faulty instrument cluster Check ignition, power and ground supplies to CJB
Target SID and instrument cluster. Re-synchronize ID by
re-synchronisation error re-configuring the instrument cluster as a new
following programming module. Check CAN communications between
CAN fault instrument cluster and tester

- Signal compare Low speed CAN fault Check CAN communications between CJB and
failure CJB fault instrument cluster. Check ignition, power and
Instrument cluster fault ground supplies to CJB and instrument cluster.
Incorrect module installed Confirm correct module is installed.
(CJB/Instrument cluster) Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the
Target SID synchronisation instrument cluster as a new module. Check CAN
www.JagDocs.com
error following network for interference/EMC related issues
re-programming
Noise/EMC related error

- Circuit/component CJB fault Check Power and Ground supplies to CJB and
protection time-out Low speed CAN fault instrument cluster. Check CAN communications
Instrument cluster fault between CJB and instrument cluster. Check
Low battery voltage <9V battery is in fully charged and serviceable
condition, refer to the battery care manual

- Signal plausibility CJB fault Check power and ground supplies to CJB and
failure Low speed CAN fault instrument cluster. Check CAN communications
Instrument cluster fault between CJB and instrument cluster
B102B-67 Passive Key - Signal

incorrect after event CJB fault Check power and ground supplies to CJB and RKE
Low speed CAN fault module. Check CAN communications between CJB
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and RKE module. Re-synchronise ID by
module fault re-configuring the RKE module as a new module
Write target SID
synchronisation error
following re-programming
B102B-87 Passive Key - Missing

message CJB fault Check power and ground supplies to CJB, RKE
Low speed CAN fault module and receiver. Check CAN communications
RKE module fault between CJB and instrument cluster. Check key
Key fob battery low/battery fob battery. Confirm vehicle surroundings, move
contact issue vehicle. Check CAN network for interference/EMC
www.JagDocs.com
Interference from other RF related issues. Disconnect battery, then

signal re-connect - confirm operation by re-programming
EMC/noise keys. Check serial circuit between receiver and
Receiver fault RKE module. Confirm spare key works. Refer to
Receiver not programmed the electrical circuit diagrams and test circuits to
correctly all 3 antennas. Check whereabouts of key
Serial communications fault
(between receiver and RKE
module)
Key fault
Passive antenna fault
Confirm placement of key
within vehicle
B1084-13 Boot/Trunk Motor

Close Switch - Circuit Trunk latch open signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
open circuit - open circuit trunk latch open signal circuit for open circuit
B1087-83 LIN Bus "A" - Value of

signal protection Checksum of the received Check operation of rain/light sensor by covering
calculation incorrect LIN frame from battery sensor or applying water to screen, install a new
backed sounder, roof header sensor as required
console, and/or rain/light
sensor is incorrect
B1087-88 LIN Bus "A" - Bus off

Bus off. Battery backed Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
sounder, roof header DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
console, and/or rain/light system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor LIN circuit - short to and check battery backed sounder, roof header
ground, power console, and rain/light sensor LIN circuit for short
to ground, power
B108A-11 Start Button - Circuit

short to ground Start/Stop switch analogue Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
input circuits 1 or 2 - short Start/Stop switch analogue input circuits 1 and 2
to ground for short to ground
B108A-12 Start Button - Circuit

short to battery Start/Stop switch analogue Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
input circuits 1 or 2 - short Start/Stop switch analogue input circuits 1 and 2
to power for short to power
B1095-12 Wiper On/Off Relay -

Circuit short to battery Wiper On/Off relay control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
circuit - short to power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check wiper On/Off relay control circuit for
www.JagDocs.com
short to power
B1095-14 Wiper On/Off Relay -

Circuit short to ground Wiper On/Off relay control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or open circuit - short to ground, wiper On/Off relay control circuit for short to
open circuit ground, open circuit
B1096-12 Wiper High/Low Relay

- Circuit short to Wiper Fast/Slow relay Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
battery control circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
power system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check wiper Fast/Slow relay control circuit for
short to power
B1096-14 Wiper High/Low Relay

- Circuit short to Wiper Fast/Slow relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground or open control circuit - short to wiper Fast/Slow relay control circuit for short to
ground, open circuit ground, open circuit
B1097-12 Heated Windshield

Relay - Circuit short to Heated windshield relay Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
and check heated windshield relay control circuit
for short to power
B1097-14 Heated Windshield

Relay - Circuit short to Heated windshield relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground or open control circuit - short to heated windshield relay control circuit for short to
ground, open circuit ground, open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
B10A6-12 Main Light Switch -

Circuit short to battery Master light switch signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
from roof header console master light switch signal from roof header
circuit - short to power console circuit for short to power

Signal stuck low Master light switch signal Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
from roof header console DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
signal stuck low. Switch is system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
read as ON for too long a and check master light switch signal from roof
time header console for short to ground
B10AD-09 Rain Sensor -

Component failures Component failures Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Suspect the rain/light sensor, check and
install a new sensor as required
B10AD-11 Rain Sensor - Circuit

short to ground Rain/light sensor power Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
circuit - short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check rain/light sensor power circuit for short
to ground
B10AD-96 Rain Sensor -

Component internal Component internal failure Suspect the rain/light sensor, check and install a
failure new sensor as required
B10E5-11 PCM Wake-up Signal -

Circuit short to ground ECM wake-up signal circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to ground ECM wake-up signal circuit for short to ground

Circuit short to battery ECM wake-up signal circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to power ECM wake-up signal circuit for short to power

Circuit open ECM wake-up signal circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
open circuit ECM wake-up signal circuit for open circuit
B10F1-11 Key In Switch - Circuit

short to ground Keyless vehicle module, key Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
IN status circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check keyless vehicle module, key IN status
circuit for short to ground
www.JagDocs.com
short to battery Keyless vehicle module, key Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
IN status circuit - short to keyless vehicle module, key IN status circuit for
power short to power

open Keyless vehicle module, key Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
IN status circuit - open keyless vehicle module, key IN status circuit for
circuit open circuit
B10F2-11 Sunroof Control -

Circuit short to ground Sunroof enable signal circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check sunroof enable signal circuit for short
to ground

Circuit short to battery Sunroof enable signal circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
- short to power sunroof enable signal circuit for short to power

Circuit open Sunroof enable signal circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
- open circuit sunroof enable signal circuit for open circuit
B10F3-11 Left Front Position

Light - Circuit short to Left front side lamps circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ground short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check left front side lamps circuit for short to
ground
www.JagDocs.com
B10F3-15 Left Front Position

Light - Circuit short to Left front side lamps circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
battery or open short to power, open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check left front side lamps circuit for short to
power, open circuit
B10F4-11 Right Front Position

Light - Circuit short to Right front side lamps circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ground - short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check right front side lamps circuit for short
to ground
B10F4-15 Right Front Position

Light - Circuit short to Right front side lamps circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
battery or open - short to power, open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check right front side lamps circuit for short
to power, open circuit
B10F8-12 Accessory socket 'A'

relay - Circuit short to Accessory socket 'A' relay Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
and check accessory socket 'A' relay control circuit
for short to power
B10F8-14 Accessory socket 'A'

relay - Circuit short to Accessory socket 'A' relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground or open control circuit - short to accessory socket 'A' relay control circuit for short
ground, open circuit to ground, open circuit
B10F9-12 Accessory socket 'B'

relay - Circuit short to Front powerpoint, trailer tow Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery connector, road pricing front powerpoint, trailer tow connector, road
connector, sunblind power pricing connector, sunblind power supply circuits
supply circuits - short to for short to power
power

relay - Circuit short to Front powerpoint, trailer tow Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground or open connector, road pricing front powerpoint, trailer tow connector, road
connector, sunblind power pricing connector, sunblind power supply circuits
supply circuits - short to for short to ground, open circuit
ground, open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
relay - No operation Front powerpoint, trailer tow Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
connector, road pricing DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
connector, sunblind power system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
supply circuits - short to and check front powerpoint, trailer tow connector,
power, ground, open circuit road pricing connector, sunblind power supply
circuits for short to power, ground, open circuit
B10FA-93 Delayed Power Off

relay - No operation ADRC ECM, roof header Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
console lamp, glove box DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
lamp , RH/LH footwell system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
lamps, JAG Sense glove box and check ADRC ECM, roof header console lamp,
module, RH/LH sunvisor glove box lamp , RH/LH footwell lamps, JAG
lamps, rear dome lamps Sense glove box module, RH/LH sunvisor lamps,
switched power circuits - rear dome lamps switched power circuits for short
short to power, open circuit to power, open circuit
B10FF-11 Ignition control -

Circuit short to ground ECM and FPDB ignition Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
control circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check ECM and FPDB ignition control circuit
for short to ground
B10FF-13 Ignition control -

Circuit open ECM and FPDB ignition Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
control circuit - open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check ECM and FPDB ignition control circuit
for open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
B1100-11 O2 sensor heater relay

- Circuit short to FPDB O2 sensor heater relay Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ground control circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check FPDB O2 sensor heater relay control
B113D-12 Sunroof Global

Open/Close Control - Roof opening panel global Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Circuit short to battery open/close control circuit - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short to power system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check roof opening panel global open/close
control circuit for short to power
B113D-14 Sunroof Global

Open/Close Control - Roof opening panel global Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to ground open/close control circuit - roof opening panel global open/close control
or open short to ground, open circuit circuit for short to ground, open circuit
B1140-11 Engine Crank

Authorisation - Circuit Engine crank authorisation Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
short to ground signal circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check engine crank authorisation signal circuit
for short to ground
B1142-11 Ignition Status 1 -

Circuit short to ground Ignition supply 1 circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check all ignition supply 1 circuits for short to
ground

Circuit short to ground Ignition supply 2 circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
and check all ignition supply 2 circuits for short to
ground
B1144-11 Heated Steering

Wheel Supply - Circuit Heated steering wheel Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
short to ground supply circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check heated steering wheel supply circuit for
short to ground
www.JagDocs.com
B1145-11 Glovebox Locking
Motor - Circuit short to Glovebox latch locking motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ground circuit - short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check glovebox latch locking motor circuit for
short to ground

Motor - Circuit short to Glovebox latch locking motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery control circuit - short to glovebox latch locking motor control circuit for
power short to power

Motor - Circuit open Glovebox latch locking motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
control circuit - open circuit glovebox latch locking motor control circuit for
open circuit
B1146-12 Passive sounder

Supply - Circuit short Security passive sounder Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to battery control circuit - short to security passive sounder control circuit for short
power to power
B1146-14 Passive sounder

Supply - Circuit short Security passive sounder Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to ground or open control circuit - short to security passive sounder control circuit for short
ground, open circuit to ground, open circuit
B1158-11 Front Passenger Seat

Heater Sensor - Circuit Front passenger seat heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
short to ground sensor circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
www.JagDocs.com
and check front passenger seat heater sensor

B1158-13 Front Passenger Seat

Heater Sensor - Circuit Front passenger seat heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
open sensor circuit - open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check front passenger seat heater sensor
circuit for open circuit
B1159-11 Driver Seat Heater

Sensor - Circuit short Driver seat heater sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
to ground circuit - short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check driver seat heater sensor circuit for
short to ground
B1159-13 Driver Seat Heater

Sensor - Circuit open Driver seat heater sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
circuit - open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check driver seat heater sensor circuit for
open circuit
B115A-11 Front Passenger Seat

Heater - Circuit short Front passenger seat heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
to ground supply circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check front passenger seat heater supply
B115A-15 Front Passenger Seat

Heater - Circuit short Front passenger seat heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
to battery or open supply circuit - short to DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
power, open circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check front passenger seat heater supply
circuit for short to power, open circuit
B115B-11 Driver Seat Heater -

Circuit short to ground Driver seat heater supply Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
circuit - short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check driver seat heater supply circuit for
short to ground
www.JagDocs.com
B115B-15 Driver Seat Heater -
Circuit short to battery Driver seat heater supply Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
or open circuit - short to power, open DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check driver seat heater supply circuit for
short to power, open circuit
B1175-13 Driver Door Ajar

Switch - Circuit open Driver door ajar switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
signal circuit - open circuit driver door ajar switch signal circuit for open
circuit
B1176-13 Passenger Door Ajar

Switch - Circuit open Passenger door ajar switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
signal circuit - open circuit passenger door ajar switch signal circuit for open
circuit
B1177-12 Screenwash Level

Switch - Circuit short Screenwash level switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to battery signal circuit - short to screenwash level switch signal circuit for short to
power power
B11C0-13 Driver Side Rear Door

Ajar Switch - Circuit Left rear door ajar switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
open signal circuit - open circuit left rear door ajar switch signal circuit for open
circuit
B11C1-13 Passenger Side Rear

Door Ajar Switch - Right rear door ajar switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit open signal circuit - open circuit right rear door ajar switch signal circuit for open
circuit
www.JagDocs.com
B1222-23 Master Lock/Unlock

Switch - Signal stuck Master lock or unlock switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
low digital input circuit - signal master lock and unlock switch digital input
stuck low circuits for short to ground, open circuit
B1237-11 Gear Shift Module

Early Wake-up - Transmission shift module Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Circuit short to ground wake-up control circuit - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short to ground system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check transmission shift module wake-up
control circuit for short to ground

Early Wake-up - Transmission shift module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to battery wake-up control circuit - transmission shift module wake-up control circuit
short to power for short to power

Early Wake-up - Transmission shift module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit open wake-up control circuit - transmission shift module wake-up control circuit
open circuit for open circuit
B123E-13 Crank Enable - Circuit

open OK to crank signal circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
open circuit OK to crank signal circuit for open circuit
B1A85-96 Ambient Light Sensor

- Component internal Light sensor internal Check and install a new sensor as required
failure electronic failure
B1C45-13 Front Wiper Park

Position Switch - Windshield wiper motor park Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit open switch signal circuit - open windshield wiper motor park switch signal circuit
B1C45-23 Front Wiper Park

Position Switch - Signal stuck low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Signal stuck low front wiper park position switch input circuit for
short, open circuit
B1C78-12 Powerwash Relay -

Circuit short to battery Powerwash relay control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - short to power powerwash relay control circuit for short to power
B1C78-14 Powerwash Relay -

Circuit short to ground Powerwash relay control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or open circuit - short to ground, powerwash relay control circuit for short to
open circuit ground, open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Climate
Control Module (HVAC)
Climate Control Module
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Climate Control Module. For additional
For additional information, refer to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis
and Testing).

B105A-01 Cabin
Temperature Aspirator motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Sensor Fan - diagnostic circuit - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
General electrical short to ground, open electrical circuit diagrams and check aspirator motor
failure circuit diagnostic circuit for short to ground, open circuit
Aspirator fan
component failure
B1081-00 Left Temperature

Damper Motor - Left hand blend stepper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
No sub type motor internal or the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
information external fault
B1081-49 Left Temperature

Damper Motor - Left hand blend stepper Suspect the left hand blend stepper motor. Check and
Internal electronic motor internal install a new stepper motor as required, refer to the new
failure electronic failure module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
B1082-00 Right Temperature

Damper Motor - Right hand blend Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
No sub type stepper motor internal the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
information or external fault
www.JagDocs.com
Damper Motor - Right hand blend Suspect the right hand blend stepper motor. Check and
Internal electronic stepper motor internal install a new stepper motor as required, refer to the new
Index
B1083-01 Recirculation
Damper Motor - RECIRC servo motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
General electrical circuits - short to the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
failure ground, power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check RECIRC servo motor
circuit circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit
B1085-00 Defroster Damper

Motor - No sub Defrost stepper motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
type information internal or external the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
fault
B1085-49 Defroster Damper

Motor - Internal Defrost stepper motor Suspect the defrost stepper motor. Check and install a new
electronic failure internal electronic stepper motor as required, refer to the new
failure module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
B1086-00 Air Distribution

Damper Motor - Panel/foot stepper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
No sub type motor internal or the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
information external fault
B1086-49 Air Distribution

Damper Motor - Panel/foot stepper Suspect the panel/foot stepper motor. Check and install a
Internal electronic motor internal new stepper motor as required, refer to the new
www.JagDocs.com
Index
B1087-88 LIN Bus "A" - Bus

off LIN Bus power #1 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
circuit - open circuit the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check LIN Bus power #1
B1088-88 LIN Bus "B" - Bus

off LIN Bus power #2 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
circuit - open circuit the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check LIN Bus power #2
B11ED-68 Electric Heater

Control Module - Event information. Clear DTC. With engine coolant temperature low, set
Event information Electric heater - invalid climate temperature to high and re-test. If DTC remains in
communication isolation suspect the PTC heater, check and install a new
message heater as required, refer to the new module/component
installation note at the top of the DTC Index. If additional
LIN related DTCs are logged refer to the Actions for these
DTCs

Control Module - Electric heater - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Missing message missing communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
message

Control Module - Component internal Suspect the PTC heater, check and install a new heater as
Component failure required, refer to the new module/component installation
internal failure note at the top of the DTC Index

Control Module - Component or system Clear DTC. With engine coolant temperature low, set
Component or over temperature climate temperature to high and re-test. If DTC remains
system over suspect the PTC heater, check and install a new heater as
temperature required, refer to the new module/component installation
note at the top of the DTC Index
B11EE-01 A/C Compressor -

General electrical Air conditioning Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
failure compressor clutch the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
solenoid circuits - short electrical circuit diagrams and check air conditioning
to ground, power, open compressor clutch solenoid circuits for short to ground,
circuit power, open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
B11F0-11 Air Intake Damper
Position Sensor - RECIRC servo motor air Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check RECIRC
Circuit short to intake feedback and 5 servo motor air intake feedback and 5 volt supply circuits
ground volt supply circuits - for short to ground
short to ground
B11F0-15 Air Intake Damper

Position Sensor - RECIRC servo motor air Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Circuit short to intake feedback and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
battery or open ground circuits - short electrical circuit diagrams and check RECIRC servo motor air
to power, open circuit intake feedback and ground circuits for short to power, open
circuit
B11F8-00 Left Outer Vent -

No sub type Left outer IP vent Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
information actuator internal or the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
external fault
B11F8-49 Left Outer Vent -

Internal electronic Left outer IP vent Suspect the left outer IP vent actuator. Check and install a
failure actuator internal new actuator as required, refer to the new
electronic failure module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
B11F9-00 Left Inner Vent -

No sub type Left inner IP vent Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
external fault
B11F9-49 Left Inner Vent -

Internal electronic Left inner IP vent Suspect the left inner IP vent actuator. Check and install a
www.JagDocs.com

Index
B11FA-00 Right Inner Vent -

No sub type Right inner IP vent Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
external fault
B11FA-49 Right Inner Vent -

Internal electronic Right inner IP vent Suspect the right inner IP vent actuator. Check and install a
Index
B11FB-00 Right Outer Vent -

No sub type Right outer IP vent Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
external fault
B11FB-49 Right Outer Vent -

Internal electronic Right outer IP vent Suspect the right outer IP vent actuator. Check and install a
Index
B11FF-84 A/C Refrigerant

Pressure - Signal Signal below allowable This DTC can be logged by the system due to low ambient
below allowable range. A/C System temperature soak (below 3°C) reducing the pressure in the
range Refrigerant Pressure refrigerant gas system. If the cabin temperature logged
too low along with the DTC at the time is below 10°C this could
indicate low temperature. If the air conditioning
performance is satisfactory and the in-cabin temperature is
below 10°C then it is likely that the system contains a
suitable amount of gas and the DTC is being recorded as
an effect of the low ambient temperature. If this is not the
case carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check air conditioning
pressure sensor circuits for short, open circuit. Check for
correct charge weight
B11FF-85 A/C Refrigerant

Pressure - Signal Signal above allowable Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
above allowable range. A/C System the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
range Refrigerant pressure electrical circuit diagrams and check air conditioning
too high pressure sensor circuits for short, open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
B1A59-11 Sensor 5 Volt
Supply - Circuit Air conditioning Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check air
short to ground pressure sensor or conditioning pressure sensor and RECIRC servo motor 5 volt
RECIRC servo motor 5 supply circuits for short to ground
volt supply circuits -
short to ground

Supply - Circuit Air conditioning Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check air
open pressure sensor 5 volt conditioning pressure sensor 5 volt supply circuit for open
supply circuits - open circuit
circuit
B1A60-11 Pollution Sensor -

Hydrocarbon - Pollution sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check pollution
Circuit short to hydrocarbon input sensor hydrocarbon input circuit for short to ground
ground circuit - short to ground
B1A61-11 Cabin
Temperature In car temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check In car
Sensor - Circuit sensor circuit - short to temperature sensor circuit for short to ground
short to ground ground
B1A61-15 Cabin
Temperature In car temperature Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Sensor - Circuit sensor circuit - short to the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
short to battery or power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check In car temperature
open sensor circuit for short to power, open circuit
B1A63-11 Right Solar Sensor

- Circuit short to Right sun load sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right sun
www.JagDocs.com
ground signal circuit - short to load sensor signal circuit for short to ground
ground
B1A64-11 Left Solar Sensor

- Circuit short to Left sun load sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left sun
ground signal circuit - short to load sensor signal circuit for short to ground
ground
B1A67-13 Sensor Ground -

Circuit open Sensor ground circuits - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sensor
open circuit ground circuits for open circuit
B1A69-01 Humidity Sensor -

General electrical Humidity sensor PWM Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
failure input circuit - short to the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
ground, power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check humidity sensor PWM
circuit input circuit for short to ground, power, open circuit. Check
Sensor component and install a new sensor as required
failure
B1B62-11 Pollution Sensor -

NOx - Circuit Pollution sensor NOx Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check pollution
short to ground input circuit - short to sensor NOx input circuit for short to ground
ground
B1B71-11 Evaporator
Temperature Evaporator temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check evaporator
Sensor - Circuit sensor signal circuit - temperature sensor signal circuit for short to ground
short to ground short to ground
B1B71-15 Evaporator
Temperature Evaporator temperature Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Sensor - Circuit sensor signal circuit - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
short to battery or short to power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check evaporator
open circuit temperature sensor signal circuit for short to power, open
circuit
B1B72-11 LIN Bus #1 Power

Supply Circuit - Stepper motor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check stepper
Circuit short to LIN Bus #1 power motor circuit LIN Bus #1 power supply for short to ground
ground supply - short to
ground
C1B14-13 Sensor Supply

Voltage A - Circuit RECIRC servo motor 5 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check RECIRC
open volt supply circuit - servo motor 5 volt supply circuit for open circuit
open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
C1B15-13 Sensor Supply
Voltage B - Circuit RECIRC servo motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check RECIRC
open and EVAP sensor servo motor and EVAP sensor ground circuits for open
ground circuits - open circuit
circuit
P0530-11 A/C Refrigerant

Pressure Sensor A Air conditioning Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check air
Circuit - Circuit pressure sensor signal conditioning pressure sensor signal circuit for short to
short to ground circuit - short to ground ground
P0530-15 A/C Refrigerant

Pressure Sensor A Air conditioning Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Circuit - Circuit pressure sensor signal the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
short to battery or circuit - short to power, electrical circuit diagrams and check air conditioning
open open circuit pressure sensor signal circuit for short to power, open
circuit
U0010-88 Medium Speed

CAN Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Bus - Bus off
U0300-00 Internal Control
Module Software Invalid configuration Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
Incompatibility - message is received diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is
No sub type still logged suspect the climate control module, refer to the
information new module/component installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
U1A14-49 CAN Initialisation

Failure - Internal Internal electronic Suspect the climate control module, check and install a
www.JagDocs.com
electronic failure failure new module as required, refer to the new

module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index

Not configured Incorrect car Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
configuration data diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC
received remains suspect the climate control module. Check and
install a new module as required, refer to the new
Index

Missing message Missing message Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Check climate control module for DTCs
and refer to the DTC Index. Carry out CAN network integrity
tests using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
If DTC remains suspect the climate control module. Check
and install a new module as required, refer to the new
Index
U3002-81 Vehicle
Identification Vehicle/component Check and install original/new module as required, refer to
Number - Invalid mis-match. Corrupt VIN the new module/component installation note at the top of
serial data data being transmitted, the DTC Index
received module previously
installed to other
vehicle
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Digital Audio
Broadcast Module (DABM)
Digital Audio Broadcast Module (DABM)
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged on the digital audio broadcast module, for
additional diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section.

B11A4-11 L-Band Antenna -
Circuit short to Digital audio broadcast Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check digital audio
ground L-band antenna circuit - broadcast L-band antenna circuit for short circuit to ground
short circuit to ground
B11A4-15 L-Band Antenna -

battery or open L-band antenna circuit - broadcast L-band antenna circuit for short circuit to power,
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit, high
resistance
B11A5-11 Band 3 Antenna -

ground band 3 antenna circuit - broadcast band 3 antenna circuit for short circuit to ground
short circuit to ground
B11A5-15 Band 3 Antenna -

battery or open band 3 antenna circuit - broadcast band 3 antenna circuit for short circuit to power,
short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
open circuit, high
resistance
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Driver Door
Module/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM)
Driver/Passenger Door Module (DDM/PDM)
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Driver/Passenger Door Modules
(DDM/PDM). For additional diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section.
For additional information, refer to: Driver Door Module (DDM) (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Diagnosis and
Testing).

B108F-23 Cabin Lock/Unlock
Switch - Signal stuck low Cabin lock/unlock switch signal Check the switch operation and
stuck serviceability. Refer to the electrical circuit
Switch pressed for longer than diagrams and check the switch circuit
20 seconds
Switch circuit short circuit to
power or ground
Switch failure
B109C-11 Front Courtesy Light -

Circuit short to ground Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
test front courtesy light circuit for short to
ground
B109C-15 Front Courtesy Light -

Circuit short to battery Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
or open test front courtesy light circuit for short to
power or open circuit
B10EB-11 Driver Door Double

Locking Motor - Circuit Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short to ground test driver door double locking motor circuit
for short to ground
www.JagDocs.com
B10EB-15 Driver Door Double
Locking Motor - Circuit Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short to battery or open test driver door double locking motor circuit
for short to power or open circuit
B10EC-11 Passenger Door Double

short to ground test passenger door double locking motor
B10EC-15 Passenger Door Double

short to battery or open test passenger door double locking motor
circuit for short to power or open circuit
B10ED-11 Rear Door Driver Side

Double Locking Motor - Rear driver door double locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit short to ground motor circuit short circuit to check the circuit
ground
B10ED-15 Rear Door Driver Side

Double Locking Motor - Rear driver door double locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit short to battery motor circuit short circuit to check the circuit
or open power or open circuit
B10EE-11 Rear Door Passenger

Side Double Locking Rear passenger door double Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Motor - Circuit short to locking motor circuit short check the circuit
ground circuit to ground
B10EE-15 Rear Door Passenger

www.JagDocs.com
Side Double Locking Rear passenger door double Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
battery or open circuit to power or open circuit
B1108-11 Driver Door Central

short to ground test driver door central locking motor circuit
for short to ground
B1108-15 Driver Door Central

short to battery or open test driver door central locking motor circuit
for short to power or open circuit
B1109-11 Passenger Door Central

short to ground test passenger door central locking motor
B1109-15 Passenger Door Central

short to battery or open test passenger door central locking motor
circuit for short to power or open circuit
B110A-11 Rear Door Driver Side

Central Locking Motor - Rear driver door central locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit short to ground motor circuit short circuit to check the circuit
ground
B110A-15 Rear Door Driver Side

Central Locking Motor - Rear driver door central locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit short to battery motor circuit short circuit to check the circuit
or open power or open circuit
B110B-11 Rear Door Passenger

Side Central Locking Rear passenger door central Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground circuit to ground
B110B-15 Rear Door Passenger

Side Central Locking Rear passenger door central Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
battery or open circuit to power or open circuit
B1163-11 Left Mirror Heater

Output Short To Ground Short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
- Circuit short to ground test left mirror heater output circuit for short
to ground
www.JagDocs.com
B1163-15 Left Mirror Heater
Output Short To Power - Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit short to battery test left mirror heater output circuit for short
or open to power or open circuit
B1164-11 Right Mirror Heater

- Circuit short to ground test right mirror heater output circuit for
short to ground
B1164-15 Right Mirror Heater

Output Short To Power - Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit short to battery test right mirror heater output circuit for
or open short to power or open circuit
B1165-11 Left Front Puddle Lamp

- Circuit short to ground test left front puddle lamp output circuit for
short to ground
B1165-15 Left Front Puddle Lamp

Output Open Load Or Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Short To Power - Circuit test left front puddle lamp output circuit for
short to battery or open short to power or open circuit
B1166-11 Right Front Puddle Lamp

- Circuit short to ground test right front puddle lamp output circuit for
short to ground
B1166-15 Right Front Puddle Lamp

www.JagDocs.com
Output Open Load Or Short to power or open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Short To Battery - Circuit test right front puddle lamp output circuit for
short to battery or open short to power or open circuit
B117C-07 Rear Power Window Up -

Mechanical Failures Set when window is reversed Check for mechanical problems with the
during window up due to window operation. Check for obstructions in
mechanical problems, window the window channels and that the glass is
channel restriction preventing not restricted in the full range of travel
window closure or Window
mechanism fault

Actuator stuck open Door module internal relay Renew the relevant rear door module. Refer
sticking open to the warranty policy and procedures

Actuator stuck closed Door module internal relay Renew the relevant rear door module. Refer
sticking closed to the warranty policy and procedures

Performance or incorrect Set when auto window up was Check the window operation. Clear the DTC
operation interrupted (e.g. by pressing and retest
local switch)
B117D-72 Rear Power Window

Down - Actuator stuck Door module internal relay Renew the relevant rear door module. Refer
open sticking open to the warranty policy and procedures
B117D-73 Rear Power Window

Down - Actuator stuck Door module internal relay Renew the relevant rear door module. Refer
closed sticking closed to the warranty policy and procedures
B117E-07 Front Power Window Up

- Mechanical Failures Set when window is reversed Check for mechanical problems with the
during window up due to window operation. Check for obstructions in
mechanical problems, window the window channels and that the glass is
channel restriction preventing not restricted in the full range of travel
window closure or Window
mechanism fault
www.JagDocs.com
- Actuator stuck open Door module internal relay Renew the relevant front door module. Refer
sticking open to the warranty policy and procedures

- Actuator stuck closed Door module internal relay Renew the relevant front door module. Refer
sticking closed to the warranty policy and procedures

- Performance or Set when auto window up was Check the window operation. Clear the DTC
incorrect operation interrupted (e.g. by pressing and retest
local switch)
B117F-72 Front Power Window

Down - Actuator stuck Door module internal relay Renew the relevant front door module. Refer
open sticking open to the warranty policy and procedures
B117F-73 Front Power Window

Down - Actuator stuck Door module internal relay Renew the relevant front door module. Refer
closed sticking closed to the warranty policy and procedures
B1189-29 Front Window Position

Sensor - Signal invalid Missing signal from hall sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
1 or 2 check the hall sensor circuit between the
Sensor circuit fault door module and window motor. Repair as
Hall sensor fault necessary. If the problem persists, renew the
window motor
www.JagDocs.com
B118A-29 Rear Window Position

Sensor - Signal invalid Missing signal from hall sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
1 or 2 check the hall sensor circuit between the
Sensor circuit fault door module and window motor. Repair as
Hall sensor fault necessary. If the problem persists, renew the
window motor
B11D1-83 LIN Bus "C" - Value of

signal protection LIN Bus checksum error; driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
calculation incorrect switchpack internal fault check the LIN Bus circuit between the driver
door window switch and the door module.
Check the connectors for integrity and
security. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
problem persists, renew the driver door
window switch
B11D1-86 LIN Bus "C" - Signal

invalid LIN Bus header error; driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
switchpack internal fault check the LIN Bus circuit between the driver
door window switch and the door module.
window switch
B11D1-87 LIN Bus "C" - Missing

message Slave node communication Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
missing; driver switchpack check the LIN Bus circuit between the driver
internal fault door window switch and the door module.
window switch
B11F6-11 Driver Folding Mirror

Motor - Circuit short to Driver folding mirror motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground circuit short circuit to ground check the mirror fold circuit between the
Mirror motor failure drivers door module and the mirror assembly.
Repair as necessary
B11F6-15 Driver Folding Mirror

Motor - Circuit short to Driver mirror heater output Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
battery or open circuit short circuit to power or check the mirror fold circuit between the
open circuit drivers door module and the mirror assembly.
Mirror motor failure Repair as necessary
www.JagDocs.com
B11F7-11 Passenger Folding Mirror
Motor - Circuit short to Passenger folding mirror motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground circuit short circuit to ground check the mirror fold circuit between the
Mirror motor failure passenger door module and the mirror
assembly. Repair as necessary
B11F7-15 Passenger Folding Mirror

Motor - Circuit short to Passenger mirror heater output Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
battery or open circuit short circuit to power or check the mirror fold circuit between the
open circuit passenger door module and the mirror
Mirror motor failure assembly. Repair as necessary
B1A98-83 LIN Bus Circuit #1 -

Value of signal Value of signal protection Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
protection calculation calculation incorrect check the LIN Bus circuit between the rear
incorrect door control unit and the Driver Door Module.
problem persists, renew the rear door control
module

Signal invalid Signal invalid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the LIN Bus circuit between the rear
door control unit and the Driver Door Module.
module

www.JagDocs.com
Missing message Missing message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the LIN Bus circuit between the rear
door control unit and the Driver Door Module.
module
B1C09-11 Driver Left/Right Mirror

Motor Circuit - Circuit Driver mirror adjustment motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short to ground circuit short circuit to ground check the mirror motor circuit between the
Mirror left/right motor failure drivers door module and the mirror assembly.
Repair as necessary
B1C09-15 Driver Left/Right Mirror

short to battery or open circuit short circuit to power or check the mirror motor circuit between the
Mirror left/right motor failure Repair as necessary
B1C10-11 Driver Up/Down Mirror

short to ground circuit short circuit to ground check the mirror motor circuit between the
Mirror motor failure drivers door module and the mirror assembly.
Repair as necessary
B1C10-15 Driver Up/Down Mirror

short to battery or open circuit short circuit to power or check the mirror motor circuit between the
Mirror motor failure Repair as necessary
B1C11-11 Passenger Left/Right

Mirror Motor Circuit - Passenger mirror adjustment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit short to ground motor circuit short circuit to check the mirror motor circuit between the
ground passenger door module and the mirror
B1C11-15 Passenger Left/Right

Circuit short to battery motor circuit short circuit to check the mirror motor circuit between the
or open power or open circuit passenger door module and the mirror
B1C12-11 Passenger Up/Down

Circuit short to ground motor circuit short circuit to check the mirror motor circuit between the
ground passenger door module and the mirror
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC:
Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM)
Driver/Passenger Seat Module (DSM/PSM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Driver/Passenger Seat Module
(DSM/PSM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Diagnosis and Testing).

B105F-11 Seat Cushion Extension
Motor Output - Circuit short Driver seat cushion extension Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
to ground motor circuit - short to ground with this DTC using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat cushion extension motor circuit for
short to ground
B105F-15 Seat Cushion Extension

Motor Output - Circuit short Driver seat cushion extension Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
to battery or open motor circuit - short to power, with this DTC using the manufacturer
open circuit approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
seat cushion extension motor circuit for
B1060-11 Seat Headrest Motor

Output - Circuit short to Driver seat headrest motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
ground circuit - short to ground with this DTC using the manufacturer
seat headrest motor circuit for short to
ground
www.JagDocs.com
Output - Circuit short to Driver seat headrest motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
battery or open circuit - short to power, open with this DTC using the manufacturer
circuit approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
seat headrest motor circuit for short to
power, open circuit
B1063-31 Seat Cushion Extension

Motor Speed/Position Harness/connector problem Check the seat wiring harness/connectors
Sensor - No signal No signal from sensor for security/integrity
Sensor/motor malfunction Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the seat cushion motor sensor
circuit. Repair circuit as required. Clear DTC
and retest

Speed/Position Sensor - No Harness/connector problem Check the seat wiring harness/connectors
signal No signal from sensor for security/integrity
check the seat headrest motor sensor
and retest
B1065-24 Cushion extend switch -

Signal stuck high Signal stuck high Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the
seat switch pack to seat module LIN circuit
for short, open circuit and cushion extend
www.JagDocs.com
B1066-24 Cushion retract switch -

for short, open circuit and cushion retract
B106D-24 Headrest up switch - Signal

stuck high Signal stuck high Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the
for short, open circuit and headrest up
B106E-24 Headrest down switch -

for short, open circuit and headrest down
B1A98-83 LIN Bus Circuit #1 - Value

of signal protection Value of signal protection Check LIN network for interference/EMC
calculation incorrect calculation incorrect related issues
B1A98-86 LIN Bus Circuit #1 - Signal

invalid LIN bus Header error Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
with this DTC using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Check LIN
network for interference/EMC related
issues

Missing message Slave node communication Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test
missing. LIN bus circuit - short LIN Bus between seat switch pack and
to ground, power, open circuit control module for short to ground, power,
(ECU Types 7 & 8) open circuit, check power and ground
supplies to switch pack
B1A98-88 LIN Bus Circuit #1 - Bus off

Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
approved diagnostic system. Refer to
electrical circuit diagrams and test LIN Bus
between seat switch pack and control
module for short to ground or power
www.JagDocs.com
B1B86-11 Seat Height Motor Relay -
Circuit short to ground Driver seat parallel height Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
motor circuit - short to ground with this DTC using the manufacturer
seat parallel height motor circuit for short
to ground
B1B86-15 Seat Height Motor Relay -

Circuit short to battery or Driver seat parallel height Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
open motor circuit - short to power, with this DTC using the manufacturer
open circuit approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
seat parallel height motor circuit for short
B1B87-31 Seat Height Motor

check the seat height motor sensor circuit.
Repair circuit as required. Clear DTC and
retest
B1B88-11 Seat Slide Motor Relay -

Circuit short to ground Driver seat slide motor circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
short to ground with this DTC using the manufacturer
seat slide motor circuit for short to ground
www.JagDocs.com
B1B88-15 Seat Slide Motor Relay -

Circuit short to battery or Driver seat slide motor circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
open short to power, open circuit with this DTC using the manufacturer
seat slide motor circuit for short to power,
open circuit
B1B89-31 Seat Slide Motor

check the seat slide motor speed sensor
and retest
B1B90-11 Seat Tilt Motor Relay -

Circuit short to ground Driver seat tilt motor circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
short to ground with this DTC using the manufacturer
seat tilt motor circuit for short to ground
B1B90-15 Seat Tilt Motor Relay -

Circuit short to battery or Driver seat tilt motor circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
open short to power, open circuit with this DTC using the manufacturer
seat tilt motor circuit for short to power,
open circuit
B1B91-31 Seat Tilt Motor

check the seat tilt motor speed sensor
and retest
B1B92-11 Seat Recline Motor Relay -

Circuit short to ground Driver seat recline motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
circuit - short to ground with this DTC using the manufacturer
seat recline motor circuit for short to
ground
www.JagDocs.com
B1B92-15 Seat Recline Motor Relay -
Circuit short to battery or Driver seat recline motor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
open circuit - short to power, open with this DTC using the manufacturer
circuit approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
seat recline motor circuit for short to
power, open circuit
B1B93-31 Seat Recline Motor

check the seat recline motor speed sensor
and retest
B1B94-24 Seat Height Up Switch -

for short, open circuit and seat height up
B1B95-24 Seat Height Down Switch -

for short, open circuit and seat height
down circuit for short to ground
B1B96-24 Seat Slide Forward Switch -

www.JagDocs.com
for short, open circuit and seat slide
forward circuit for short to ground
B1B97-24 Seat Slide Backward Switch

- Signal stuck high Signal stuck high Check for a stuck switch. Refer to the
for short, open circuit and seat slide
backward circuit for short to ground
B1B98-24 Seat Tilt Up Switch - Signal

for short, open circuit and seat tilt up
B1B99-24 Seat Tilt Down Switch -

for short, open circuit and seat tilt down
B1C00-24 Seat Recline Up Switch -

for short, open circuit and seat recline up
B1C01-24 Seat Recline Down Switch -

for short, open circuit and check seat
recline down circuit for short to ground
B1C02-24 Memory Store Switch -

for short, open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
B1C03-24 Memory #1 Switch - Signal


U0010-88 Medium speed Can

communication Bus - Bus Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
off with this DTC using the manufacturer
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
network to climate controlled seat module
U0140-00 Lost communication with

CJB - No sub type Lost communication with CJB Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
information with this DTC using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Check CJB for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
www.JagDocs.com
Index

RJB - No sub type Lost communication with RJB Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
information with this DTC using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Check RJB for
related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Index
U0155-00 Lost communications with

instrument cluster - No sub Lost communications with Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
type information instrument cluster with this DTC using the manufacturer
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
network to climate controlled seat module
and instrument cluster for short, open
circuit

Driver Door Module (DDM) - Lost communication with DDM Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
No sub type information with this DTC using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system
U0300-00 Internal control module

software incompatibility - Invalid configuration message Re-configure the RJB using the
No sub type information is received manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is still
logged suspect the DSM/PSM, refer to the
new module installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
U1A14-49 CAN Initialisation failure -

Internal electronic failure Internal electronic failure Install a new DSM, refer to the new
module installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
U1A4C-68 Build/end of line mode

active - Event information Manufacturing mode has not Place DSM in to customer mode using
been removed manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U3000-49 Control module - Internal

electronic failure Internal electronic failure Install a new DSM, refer to the new
module installation note at the top of the
DTC Index
www.JagDocs.com
U3000-55 Stored vehicle
configuration data does not Incorrect car configuration data Re-configure the RJB using the
match - Not configured received manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains
suspect the DSM, refer to the new module
installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
U3000-87 Control Module - Missing

message Missing message Re-configure the RJB using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Check DSM for DTCs and refer to the DTC
Index. Check CAN network integrity using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
U3001-46 Control module improper

shutdown - Calibration/parameter memory Check for DTCs that could indicate power
Calibration/parameter failure failure to the module and refer to the DTC
memory failure Index
U3002-81 Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) - Invalid Vehicle/component mis-match. Install original module, check for DTCs and
serial data received Corrupt VIN data being refer to relevant DTC Index
transmitted, module previously
installed to other vehicle
U3003-16 Battery Voltage - Circuit

voltage below threshold Circuit voltage below threshold Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
www.JagDocs.com
U3003-17 Battery Voltage - Circuit

voltage above threshold Circuit voltage above threshold Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Electric
Parking Brake (PBM)
Electric Parking Brake (PBM)
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSM's which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as needed.
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the electric parking brake module, for
For additional information, refer to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Diagnosis and Testing).

P1536-62 Parking Brake Switch
Circuit - Signal compare Wiring harness fault All signals from the switch are active at the same
failure Switch internal fault time. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check all the switch apply, release and return
circuits for short circuit or open circuit. Repair
wiring harness as required
If no fault with wiring harness suspect switch has
an internal fault. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
suspect
P1536-66 Parking Brake Switch

Circuit - Signal has too System abuse
NOTE: The Electric Parking Brake system will be
many transitions / Wiring harness fault
locked out if the module receives more then 30
events Switch internal fault
apply/release requests within 1 minute.
Cycle the ignition to clear the fault mode. Clear

the DTC and test the system
all the switch apply, release and return circuits for
intermittent short circuit or open circuit. Repair
If there are no wiring faults and the DTC resets
www.JagDocs.com
suspect the switch. Refer to the Warranty Policy
and Procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect
P1571-64 Brake Switch - Signal

plausibility failure Wiring harness fault The signal from the hardwired brake pedal switch
Brake pedal switch fault does not agree with the brake status message
broadcast on CAN. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the brake pedal switch
circuits for short circuit or open circuit. Repair
If there are no wiring harness faults suspect
switch. Refer to the Warranty Policy and
suspect
C1127-31 Position Sensor - No

Signal Parking brake motor hall Inspect mechanical linkages for faults/damage.
effect position sensor Repair as required. Refer to the electrical circuit
power circuit fault diagrams and check parking brake motor hall
Parking brake motor hall effect position sensor circuits for short, open
effect position sensor circuit. Check and install a new sensor actuator as
ground circuit fault required
Parking brake motor hall
effect position sensor
signal circuit fault
Mechanical fault with
sensor/actuator
C1129-39 Actuator engage -

Incorrect has too few Motor engage current Carry out parking brake calibration procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
pulses reached before full apply check for mechanical failure of parking brake
travel distance system
Service brake adjustment
incorrect after brake lining
replacement
Brake cables broken,
seized, trapped.
Caliper malfunction
C1129-3A Actuator engage -

Incorrect has too many Motor engage current not Carry out parking brake calibration procedure.
pulses reached or travelled too far check for mechanical failure of parking brake
upon apply system
Service brake adjustment
incorrect after brake lining
replacement
Brake cables broken,
seized, trapped
Caliper malfunction
C112A-39 Actuator disengage -

Incorrect has too few Intermittent motor or Check for additional motor or circuit DTCs and
pulses circuit - open circuit refer to DTC index. check for mechanical failure of
Actuator malfunction parking brake
C1D00-11 Park brake apply switch

- Circuit short to ground Connector fault - bent, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
loose or corroded pin(s) switch primary and secondary apply circuits for
Harness fault - short to short to ground. Repair circuit faults or install a
ground new switch as required
Switch fault

circuit - Circuit short to Connector fault - bent, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the
battery or open loose or corroded pin(s) switch primary and secondary apply circuits for
Harness fault - short to short to power or open circuit. Repair circuit faults
power or open circuit or install a new switch as required
Switch fault
C1D00-1C Park brake apply switch

- Voltage out of range Connector fault - bent, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
loose or corroded pin(s) primary parking brake apply switch circuits for
Harness fault - low short to ground
resistance to ground Check and install a new switch as required
Switch fault
www.JagDocs.com
- Signal compare failure Connector fault - bent, Apply switch active then release switch active,
loose or corroded pin(s) refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
Harness fault apply/release switch circuits
Switch fault Check and install a new switch as required

- Signal plausibility Connector fault - bent, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
failure loose or corroded pin(s) parking brake primary and secondary apply circuits
Harness fault - primary or Check and install a new switch as required
secondary apply circuit
Switch fault
C1D01-11 Park brake release

switch - Circuit short to Connector fault - bent, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
ground loose or corroded pin(s) park brake primary and secondary circuit for short
Harness fault - short to to ground
ground Check and install a new switch as required
Switch fault

switch - Circuit short to Connector fault - bent, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
battery or open loose or corroded pin(s) parking brake primary and secondary release
Harness fault - open circuit circuits for open circuits or short to power
Harness fault - short to Check and install a new switch as required
power
Switch fault
C1D01-1C Park brake release

switch - Voltage out of Connector fault - bent, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and test park
range loose or corroded pin(s) brake switch primary and secondary switch circuits
www.JagDocs.com
Harness fault - low for low resistance to ground

resistance to ground Check and install a new switch as required
Switch fault

switch - Signal compare Connector fault - bent, Release switch active then apply switch active.
failure loose or corroded pin(s) Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
Harness fault switch circuits for open circuits or shorts. Repair
Switch fault circuit or replace switch as required

switch - Signal Connector fault - bent, Primary and secondary release switch inputs
plausibility failure loose or corroded pin(s) signals do not match. Check connectors for
Harness fault damaged pins, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
Switch fault and check switch circuits for open circuits or
shorts. Repair circuit or replace switch as required

Signal plausibility The hard wired ignition Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
failure status signal does not parking brake module ignition power supply for
agree with CAN messages. short to ground, open circuit
Ignition power supply is
detected open circuit when
ignition status is set to
'ON'
U0001-87 High Speed CAN

communication bus - CAN Bus circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Missing message Power distribution fault the power and ground connections to the module.
the CAN network
U0001-88 High speed CAN

communication Bus - CAN Bus circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Bus off Power distribution fault the power and ground connections to the module.
the CAN network

with ECM/PCM A - No Engine control module / Check the Engine Control Module for related DTCs
sub type information system fault and refer to the relevant DTC index
Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the power and ground connections to the module.
www.JagDocs.com
the CAN network
U0103-00 Lost communication

With Gear Shift Module Gear shift control module / Check the Gear Shift Control Module for related
A - No sub type system fault DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
information Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the CAN network

With Cruise Control Speed control module / Check the Speed Control Module for related DTCs
Module A - No sub type system fault and refer to the relevant DTC index
the CAN network

with Anti-Lock Braking Anti-Lock Braking System Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Control
System (ABS) Control control module / system Module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Module - No sub type fault DTC index
www.JagDocs.com

the CAN network

With Instrument Panel Instrument Cluster / Check the Instrument Cluster for related DTCs
Cluster (IPC) Control system fault and refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - No sub type Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
information the power and ground connections to the module.
the CAN network

Software Car configuration file Check all control modules for related DTCs and
Incompatibility - No sub stored in Park Brake refer to the relevant DTC index
type information Module does not match the Check the components installed on the vehicle
master car configuration were installed by the factory or a dealer
file Install the original components or a new one as
Master car configuration required
file not being transmitted
by master control module

From ECM/PCM - No sub Invalid message from the Check the Engine Control Module for related DTCs
type information Engine Control Module and refer to the relevant DTC index

From Gear Shift Control Invalid message from the Check the Gear Shift Control Module for related
Module A - No sub type gear shift control module DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
information
From Anti-Lock Braking Invalid message from the
NOTE: This DTC may be stored even though no fault
System (ABS) Control anti-lock Braking system
condition is present and should be ignored unless the
Module - No sub type module
customer has reported a electronic park brake concern.
information Clear the DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern
prior to diagnosis
Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Control

Module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
U0422-00 Invalid data received

from Central Junction Invalid message from the Check the Central Junction Box for related DTCs
Box - No sub type Central Junction Box and refer to the relevant DTC index
information
www.JagDocs.com
From Instrument Panel Invalid message from the Check the Instrument Cluster for related DTCs
Control Module - No sub instrument panel control and refer to the relevant DTC index
type information module

From Cruise Control Incorrect apply request
NOTE: The Park Brake Module has received a
Front Distance Range from the speed control
request to apply the parkbrake from the Adaptive Speed
Sensor - Signal module when the
Control module but the conditions were not correct for
plausibility failure conditions were not correct
the apply to take place. E.g. the vehicle was moving. The
module will ignore the request but this DTC is logged for
safety reference
Check the Speed Control Module for related DTCs

and refer to the relevant DTC index
U2001-68 Reduced System

Function - Event Invalid or missing message
NOTE: There has been invalid or missing data
information from Anti-Lock Braking
detected from the Anti-Lock Brake System Control
System with ignition OFF
Module. This DTC may be logged if the ignition is
and vehicle speed > 3Kph
switched off with the vehicle still moving. This DTC will
never be recorded as confirmed and is stored for
historical analysis only
Check the Speed Control Module for related DTCs

U2005-64 Vehicle Speed - Signal

implausibility failure Implausible speed
NOTE: Implausible speed is defined as passing
message from the
from high speed dynamic mode to static mode without
www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Lock Braking System

passing through low speed dynamic mode
control module
Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Control
Module for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC index
U200D-4B Control Module Output

Power A - Over Actuator FET circuit over Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
temperature current / over temperature actuator circuit for low resistance. Repair circuit
faults or install a new actuator as required
U2011-11 Motor - Circuit short to

ground Electric park brake motor Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
output short to ground actuator circuit for short to ground. Repair circuit
U2011-12 Motor - Circuit short to

battery Electric park brake motor Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
output short to power actuator circuit for short to power. Repair circuit
U2011-13 Motor - Circuit open

Electric park brake motor Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
output open circuit actuator circuit for open circuit. Repair circuit

Watchdog/safety micro Defective ECU Lost communication with secondary micro
controller failure processor, check power and ground connections to
module. Clear DTC, perform battery reset and
retest system. If DTC reoccurs suspect the
Parking Brake control module
Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
manual if a module/component is suspect

Number (VIN) - Invalid The Park Brake Module has Check and install the original, or a new Park Brake
serial number previously been installed Module
to another vehicle Refer to the Warranty Policy and Procedures
manual if a module/component is suspect
U3003-62 Battery Voltage - Signal

compare failure Power distribution fault There is a difference of more than 2 volts
Wiring harness fault between the power supply to the parking brake
module and the battery voltage value broadcast
on CAN. Check other control modules for battery
voltage related DTCs. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the power and ground
www.JagDocs.com
supply circuits to the Park Brake Module. Repair
wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest the
system
U3006-16 Control Module Input

Power A - Circuit ECU logic voltage is high Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check power
voltage below threshold (over 18 volts for 40mS) supplies and ground connections to the park brake
Wiring harness fault control module. Check battery voltage and
Charging system fault charging system. Repair wiring harness or
charging system as required, clear DTC, perform
battery reset. Retest system

Power A - Circuit ECU logic voltage is low Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check power
voltage above threshold (below 8 volts for 2000mS) supplies and ground connections to the park brake
Wiring harness fault control module. Check battery voltage and
Charging system fault charging system. Repair wiring harness or
charging system as required, clear DTC, perform
battery reset. Retest system

Power B - Circuit short Connector fault - bent, Refer to electrical circuit diagrams, check Park
to ground or open loose or corroded pin(s) Brake Module high power feed circuit for open
Harness fault circuits or short to ground. Repair wiring harness
as required, clear DTC
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index TDV6 3.0L Diesel ,
DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM)
Engine Control Module (ECM) - 3.0L Diesel
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Engine Control Module (ECM) - 3.0L
Diesel. For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop
manual.
For additional information, refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1087-93 LIN Bus "A" - No operation
Generator LIN bus Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
communication circuit failure check the generator LIN bus circuit, for short
circuit to power, short circuit to ground, open
circuit. Repair harness as required. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system
clear all stored DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis
Menu’ tab and retest
B10A2-32 Crash Input - Signal low

time < minimum Restraints control module This DTC is set when the 'airbag deployed'
failure signal supplied by the restraints control
Auxiliary junction box failure module is outside the specification expected
Harness failure by the engine control module
Check the restraints control module for DTCs
Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs and
refer to the relevant DTC index
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
the supplementary restraints system input
circuit for failures. This circuit is a single wire
which connects the restraints control
module to the auxiliary junction box and the
engine control module. Check this circuit for
short circuit to power, short circuit to ground,
open circuit. Repair harness as required.
www.JagDocs.com
system clear all stored DTCs using the
‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
B10A2-35 Crash Input - Signal high

time > maximum Restraints control module This DTC is set when the 'airbag deployed'
failure signal supplied by the restraints control
Auxiliary junction box failure module is outside the specification expected
Harness failure by the engine control module
Check the restraints control module for DTCs
Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs and
refer to the relevant DTC index
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
B10A2-36 Crash Input - Signal

frequency too low The engine control module This DTC is set when the 'airbag deployed'
detected excessive duration signal supplied by the restraints control
for one cycle of the output module is outside the specification expected
across a specified sample by the engine control module
size Check the restraints control module for DTCs
www.JagDocs.com
Restraints control module and refer to the relevant DTC index

failure Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs and
Auxiliary junction box failure refer to the relevant DTC index
Harness failure Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
B10A2-37 Crash Input - Signal

frequency too high The engine control module This DTC is set when the 'airbag deployed'
detected insufficient signal supplied by the restraints control
duration for one cycle of the module is outside the specification expected
output across a specified by the engine control module
sample size Check the restraints control module for DTCs
Restraints control module and refer to the relevant DTC index
failure Check auxiliary junction box for DTCs and
Auxiliary junction box failure refer to the relevant DTC index
Harness failure Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
B11D9-00 Vehicle Battery - No sub

type information Harness failure This DTC is set when the battery monitoring
Battery failure system fails a diagnostic check
Battery monitoring system Refer to the battery care manual and verify
module failure that the vehicle battery is fully charged and
serviceable before continuing with further
diagnostic tests
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the connections between the battery
and the battery monitoring module are clean
and secure
Ensure that full battery voltage is present on
www.JagDocs.com
the monitor line pin at the battery
monitoring system module connector. Ensure
the battery ground connection is clean and
secure
Check the LIN bus connections to the
battery monitoring system module. Check
LIN bus integrity. Check and install new
battery monitoring system module as
required
B11DB-87 Battery Monitoring Module -

Missing message Harness failure This DTC is set when the engine control
Battery monitoring system module has lost communication with the
module failure battery monitoring system module
Refer to the battery care manual and verify
that the vehicle battery is fully charged and
serviceable before continuing with further
diagnostic tests
check the connections between the battery
and the battery monitoring module are clean
and secure
Ensure that full battery voltage is present on
the monitor line pin at the battery
monitoring system module connector. Ensure
the battery ground connection is clean and
secure
Check the LIN bus connections to the
battery monitoring system module. Check
LIN bus integrity. Check and install new
battery monitoring system module as
www.JagDocs.com
required
B1206-68 Crash Occurred - Event

information Event information - The This DTC is set if the restraints control
engine control module has module has deployed the restraints systems
received a crash signal from following activation of the crash sensors.
the restraints control module Check the restraints control module for DTCs
P0030-11 HO2S Heater Control Circuit

(Bank 1, Sensor 1) - Circuit The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short to ground has detected a ground system check datalogger signals, Oxygen
measurement for a period Sensor (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1
longer than expected or has Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
detected a ground circuit diagrams and check the heated oxygen
measurement when another sensor heater control (heater ground)
value was expected circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair
Harness failure - Heated harness as required. Using the manufacturer
oxygen sensor heater control approved diagnostic system clear all stored
circuit short circuit to ground DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and
Heated oxygen sensor retest
failure Check and install new heated oxygen sensor
as required

short to battery has detected a vehicle system check datalogger signals, Oxygen
power measurement for a Sensor (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1
period longer than expected Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
or has detected a vehicle circuit diagrams and check the heated oxygen
power measurement when sensor heater control (heater ground)
another value was expected circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
Harness failure - Heated harness as required. Using the manufacturer
oxygen sensor heater control approved diagnostic system clear all stored
circuit short circuit to power DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and
Heated oxygen sensor retest
failure Check and install new heated oxygen sensor
as required

open has determined an open system check datalogger signals, Oxygen
circuit via lack of bias Sensor (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1
voltage, low current flow, no Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
change in the state of an circuit diagrams and check the heated oxygen
input in response to an sensor heater control (heater ground)
output circuit for open circuit. Repair harness as
Harness failure - Heated required. Using the manufacturer approved
www.JagDocs.com
oxygen sensor heater control diagnostic system clear all stored DTCs
circuit open circuit using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
Heated oxygen sensor Check and install new heated oxygen sensor
failure as required
P0030-4B HO2S Heater Control Circuit

(Bank 1, Sensor 1) - Over Harness failure - Heated Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
temperature oxygen sensor heater control system check datalogger signals, Oxygen
circuit short circuit to power Sensor (O2S) Heater Duty Cycle Bank 1
Heated oxygen sensor Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
failure circuit diagrams and check the heated oxygen
sensor heater control (heater ground)
circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
harness as required. Using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system clear all stored
DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and
retest
Check and install new heated oxygen sensor
as required
P0033-00 Turbocharger/Supercharger
Bypass Valve Control Harness failure - Boost air Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit / Open - No sub recirculation solenoid control check the boost air recirculation solenoid
type information circuit open circuit control circuit between the engine control
Boost air recirculation module and the control valve for open
solenoid failure circuit. Check the power supply to the
control valve. Repair harness as required.
Check and install new boost air recirculation
www.JagDocs.com
solenoid as required
Circuit Low - No sub type recirculation solenoid circuit check the boost air recirculation solenoid
information short circuit to ground circuit between the engine control module
Boost air recirculation and the control valve for a short circuit to
solenoid failure ground. Check the power supply to the
Circuit High - No sub type recirculation solenoid circuit check the boost air recirculation solenoid
information short circuit to power Boost circuit between the engine control module
air recirculation and the control valve for a short circuit to
solenoid failure power. Check the power supply to the control
valve. Repair harness as required. Using the
P0039-4B Turbocharger/Supercharger
Circuit Range/Performance - recirculation solenoid circuit check the boost air recirculation solenoid
Over temperature short to ground, short circuit circuit between the engine control module
to power, high resistance and the control valve for a short circuit to
Boost air recirculation ground, short circuit to power, high
solenoid failure resistance. Check the power supply to the
P004A-00 Turbocharger/Supercharger
Boost Control B Circuit / Harness failure - Variable Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Open - No sub type geometry turbine vane system check datalogger signals,
information actuator control circuit open Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
circuit (0x0533), Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2 -
Variable geometry turbine Controller output (0x03DE). Refer to the
www.JagDocs.com
vane actuator control unit electrical circuit diagrams and check the
failure variable geometry turbine vane actuator
control circuit for open circuit. Check both of
the circuits for open circuit. Repair harness
as required. Using the manufacturer
retest
Check and install new variable geometry
turbine vane actuator control unit as
required
P004A-71 Turbocharger/Supercharger
Boost Control B Circuit / Harness failure - Variable Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Open - Actuator stuck geometry turbine vane system check datalogger signals,
actuator control circuit open Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
circuit (0x0533), Boost Pressure Actuator Bank 2 -
Variable geometry turbine Controller output (0x03DE). Refer to the
vane actuator control unit electrical circuit diagrams and check the
failure variable geometry turbine vane actuator
control circuit for open circuit. Check both of
the circuits for open circuit. Repair harness
retest
required
P004B-16 Turbocharger/Supercharger
www.JagDocs.com
Boost Control B Circuit The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Range/Performance - Circuit measured a voltage below a system check datalogger signals,
voltage below threshold specified range but not Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
necessarily a short circuit to (0x0533). Refer to the electrical circuit
ground diagrams and check the variable geometry
Harness failure - Variable turbine vane actuator control circuit for high
geometry turbine vane resistance or short circuit to another circuit.
actuator control circuit Check both of the circuits for failures. Repair
Variable geometry turbine harness as required. Using the manufacturer
vane actuator control unit approved diagnostic system clear all stored
failure DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and
retest
required
P004B-19 Turbocharger/Supercharger
Boost Control B Circuit Harness failure - Variable Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Range/Performance - Circuit geometry turbine vane system check datalogger signals,
current above threshold actuator control circuit short Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
circuit to ground, short (0x0533). Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to power, high diagrams and check the variable geometry
resistance turbine vane actuator control circuit for short
Variable geometry turbine circuit to ground, short circuit to power, high
vane actuator control unit resistance. Check both of the circuits for
failure failures. Repair harness as required. Using
required
P004B-1D Turbocharger/Supercharger
Range/Performance - Circuit geometry turbine vane system check datalogger signals,
current out of range actuator control circuit Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
Mechanical failure on (0x0533). Refer to the electrical circuit
actuator mechanism diagrams and check the variable geometry
Variable geometry turbine turbine vane actuator control circuit for short
vane actuator control unit circuit to another circuit. Check both of the
failure circuits for failures. Repair harness as
required. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system clear all stored DTCs
using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
Check for mechanical failure on actuator
mechanism
www.JagDocs.com
required
P004B-4B Turbocharger/Supercharger
Range/Performance - Over geometry turbine vane system check datalogger signals,
temperature actuator control circuit short Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
circuit to ground, short (0x0533). Refer to the electrical circuit
circuit to power, high diagrams and check the variable geometry
resistance. turbine vane actuator control circuit for short
Mechanical failure on circuit to ground, short circuit to power, high
actuator mechanism resistance. Check both of the circuits for
Variable geometry turbine failures. Repair harness as required. Using
vane actuator control unit the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure system clear all stored DTCs using the
mechanism
required
P004C-00 Turbocharger/Supercharger
Boost Control B Circuit Low Harness failure - Variable Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
- No sub type information geometry turbine vane system check datalogger signals,
actuator control circuit short Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
circuit to ground (0x0533). Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the variable geometry
turbine vane actuator control circuit for short
circuit to ground. Check both of the circuits
for failures. Repair harness as required.
www.JagDocs.com

Boost Control B Circuit Low The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
- Circuit short to ground has detected a ground system check datalogger signals,
measurement for a period Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
longer than expected or has (0x0533). Refer to the electrical circuit
detected a ground diagrams and check the variable geometry
measurement when another turbine vane actuator control circuit for short
value was expected circuit to ground. Check both of the circuits
Harness failure - Variable for failures. Repair harness as required.
geometry turbine vane Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
actuator control circuit short system clear all stored DTCs using the
circuit to ground ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
Boost Control B Circuit Low The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
circuit - Short to battery has detected a vehicle system check datalogger signals,
power measurement for a Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
period longer than expected (0x0533). Refer to the electrical circuit
or has detected a vehicle diagrams and check the variable geometry
power measurement when turbine vane actuator control circuit for short
another value was expected circuit to power. Check both circuits for
Harness failure - Variable failures. Repair harness as required. Using
geometry turbine vane the manufacturer approved diagnostic
actuator control circuit short system clear all stored DTCs using the
circuit to power ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
Boost Control B Circuit Low Harness failure - Variable Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
- Commanded position not geometry turbine vane system check datalogger signals,
reachable actuator control circuit short Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
circuit to ground, high (0x0533). Refer to the electrical circuit
resistance, open circuit diagrams and check the variable geometry
Harness failure - Variable turbine vane actuator control circuit for short
geometry turbocharger circuit to ground, high resistance, open
sensor circuit, short circuit circuit. Repair harness as required. Using the
to ground, high resistance, manufacturer approved diagnostic system
open circuit clear all stored DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis
Mechanical failure on Menu’ tab and retest
actuator mechanism Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Variable geometry turbine check the variable geometry turbocharger
vane actuator control unit sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, high
failure resistance, open circuit
mechanism
www.JagDocs.com
required
P004D-00 Turbocharger/Supercharger
Boost Control B Circuit High Harness failure - Variable Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
- No sub type information geometry turbine vane system check datalogger signals,
actuator control circuit short Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
circuit to power (0x0533). Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the boost control circuit
for short circuit to power. Check both circuits
for failures. Repair harness as required.
P004D-77 Turbocharger/Supercharger
Boost Control B Circuit High Harness failure - Variable Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
- Commanded Position Not geometry turbine vane system check datalogger signals,
Reachable actuator control circuit short Commanded Boost Actuator Control Bank 2
circuit to power (0x0533). Refer to the electrical circuit
Harness failure - Variable diagrams and check the variable geometry
geometry turbocharger turbine vane actuator control circuit for short
sensor circuit, short circuit circuit to power. Repair harness as required.
to power Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Mechanical failure on system clear all stored DTCs using the
actuator mechanism ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
Variable geometry turbine Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
vane actuator control unit check the variable geometry turbocharger
failure sensor circuit for short circuit to power
www.JagDocs.com
mechanism
required
P006A-00 MAP - Mass or Volume Air

Flow Correlation - No sub Intake air system, high If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
type information pressure boost leak bank 1 P0402-00 & P00BF-07, suspect intake air
Intake air system, high system, high pressure boost leak bank 1
pressure boost leak bi-turbo If this DTC is logged with P1247-00, suspect
mode bank 2 intake air system, high pressure boost leak
Intake air system, low bi-turbo mode bank 2
pressure boost leak bank 1 If this DTC is logged with P00BE-07 &
Intake air system, low P0401-00, suspect intake air system, low
pressure boost leak bank 2 pressure boost leak bank 1
If this DTC is logged with P00BC-00, suspect
intake air system, low pressure boost leak
bank 2
system perform the (Turbo, EGR and air path
dynamic test) routine
P006A-22 MAP - Mass or Volume Air

Flow Correlation - Signal The engine control module Check for other DTCs associated with intake
amplitude > maximum measured a signal voltage and boost air flow control actuators, refer to
above a specified range but the relevant DTC index and act on those
not necessarily a short DTCs first
circuit to power, gain too Refer to workshop manual and check intake
high air circuit, boost air circuit and associated
Error path indicating whether control valves, intercooler and air filter for
over boost monitoring is leaks, blockages, restrictions and control
active or not valve actuator malfunctions
Failure in induction air circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Failure in boost air circuit check both mass air flow sensor circuits for
Mass air flow sensor circuit short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
short circuit to ground, short high resistance, open circuit. Repair harness
circuit to power, high as required. Using the manufacturer
resistance, open circuit approved diagnostic system clear all stored
Manifold absolute pressure DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and
sensor circuit short circuit to retest
ground, short circuit to Check manifold absolute pressure sensor
power, high resistance, open wiring circuits for short circuit to ground,
circuit short circuit to power, high resistance, open
Mass air flow sensor failure circuit. Repair harness as required. Using the
Manifold absolute pressure manufacturer approved diagnostic system
sensor failure clear all stored DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis
Check and install new mass air flow sensor
www.JagDocs.com
or manifold absolute pressure sensor as
required
P0070-16 Ambient Air Temperature

Sensor Circuit - Circuit The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
voltage below threshold measured a voltage below a system check datalogger signals, Ambient
specified range but not Air Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x03BA),
necessarily a short circuit to Ambient Air Temperature (0xF466). This DTC
ground is set when the ambient air temperature
Harness failure - Ambient air sensor signal line voltage at the engine
temperature sensor circuit control module is less than the threshold
Ambient air temperature value. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor failure and check both sides of the circuit for high
resistance or short circuits. Repair harness
retest
Check and install new ambient air
temperature sensor as required
P0070-17 Ambient Air Temperature

Sensor Circuit - Circuit The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
voltage above threshold measured a voltage above a system check datalogger signals, Ambient
specified range but not Air Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x03BA),
necessarily a short circuit to Ambient Air Temperature (0xF466). This DTC
power is set when the ambient air temperature
Harness failure - Ambient air sensor signal line voltage at the engine
temperature sensor circuit control module is greater than the threshold
Ambient air temperature value. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
sensor failure and check both sides of the circuit for high
www.JagDocs.com
resistance or short circuits. Repair harness

retest
Check and install new ambient air
P007A-16 Charge Air Cooler

Temperature Sensor Circuit The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
(Bank 1) - Circuit voltage measured a voltage below a system check datalogger signals, Charge Air
below threshold specified range but not Temperature Voltage (0x03EE). This DTC is
necessarily a short circuit to set when the air charge temperature sensor
ground signal line voltage at the engine control
Harness failure - Air charge module is less than the threshold value.
temperature sensor circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Air charge temperature check both sides of the circuit for high
sensor failure resistance or short circuits. Repair harness
retest
Check and install new charge air temperature
sensor as required

Temperature Sensor Circuit The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
(Bank 1) - Circuit voltage measured a voltage above a system check datalogger signals, Air Charge
above threshold specified range but not Temperature (0x051C). This DTC is set when
necessarily a short circuit to the air charge temperature sensor signal line
power voltage at the engine control module is
Harness failure - Air charge greater than the threshold value. Refer to
temperature sensor circuit the electrical circuit diagrams and check both
Air charge temperature sides of the circuit for high resistance or
sensor failure short circuits. Repair harness as required.
sensor as required

Temperature Sensor Circuit Harness failure - Air charge Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
(Bank 1) - Signal compare temperature sensor circuit system check datalogger signals, Charge Air
failure short circuit to ground, short Temperature Voltage (0x03EE). Refer to the
circuit to power, high electrical circuit diagrams and check air
resistance, open circuit charge temperature sensor circuit for short
Air charge temperature circuit to ground, short circuit to power, high
www.JagDocs.com
sensor failure resistance, open circuit. Repair harness as
sensor as required
P0087-00 Fuel Rail/System Pressure -

Too Low - No sub type Low level fuel condition Check the fuel volume available in the fuel
information Fuel gauge sender unit tank is sufficient, add fuel as required. Using
sticking the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Fuel lines restricted system clear all stored DTCs using the
Fuel lines leaking ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
Fuel pump failure Check the fuel gauge sender units for correct
Fuel rail pressure sensor operation
signal circuit short circuit to Check fuel lines for restriction
ground, short circuit to Check fuel lines for leakage
power, open circuit, high Check for fuel pump related DTCs and refer
resistance to the relevant DTC index
Fuel rail pressure sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
failure check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit, high resistance. Repair harness
as required
Check and install new fuel rail pressure
sensor as required

Too Low - Circuit voltage The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
below threshold measured a voltage below a check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
specified range but not short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
www.JagDocs.com
necessarily a short circuit to resistance. Repair harness as required. Using

ground the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Fuel rail pressure sensor system clear all stored DTCs using the
circuit, short circuit to ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
ground, open circuit, high Check and install new fuel rail pressure
resistance sensor as required
Fuel rail pressure sensor
failure

Too Low - Signal amplitude The engine control module Check fuel lines for restriction
< minimum measured a signal voltage Check fuel lines for leakage
below a specified range but Check fuel injector's for stuck open, leakage
not necessarily a short Check for fuel pump related DTCs and refer
circuit to ground, gain low to the relevant DTC index
Fuel lines restricted Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fuel lines leaking check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
Fuel injector's stuck open, short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
leaking resistance. Repair harness as required
Fuel pump failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fuel rail pressure sensor check fuel pressure control valve circuit for
circuit short circuit to short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
ground, open circuit, high resistance. Repair harness as required
resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fuel pressure control valve check fuel volume control valve circuit for
circuit short circuit to short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
ground, open circuit, high resistance. Repair harness as required
resistance Check and install new fuel rail pressure
Fuel volume control valve sensor as required
circuit short circuit to Check and install new fuel pressure control
ground, open circuit, high valve as required
resistance Check and install new fuel volume control
Fuel rail pressure sensor valve as required
failure
Fuel pressure control valve
failure
Fuel volume control valve
failure

Too High - No sub type Fuel gauge sender unit Check the fuel gauge sender units for correct
information sticking operation
Fuel rail pressure sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
signal circuit short circuit to check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
power short circuit to power. Repair harness as
Fuel rail pressure sensor required
ground circuit open circuit, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
high resistance check fuel rail pressure sensor ground circuit
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel pressure control valve for open circuit, high resistance. Repair
circuit short circuit to power, harness as required
ground, open circuit, high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
resistance check fuel pressure control valve circuit for
Fuel volume control valve short circuit to power, ground, open circuit,
circuit short circuit to power, high resistance. Repair harness as required
resistance check fuel volume control valve circuit for
Fuel rail pressure sensor short circuit to power, ground, open circuit,
failure high resistance. Repair harness as required
Fuel pressure control valve Check and install new fuel rail pressure
failure sensor as required
Fuel volume control valve Check and install new fuel pressure control
failure valve as required
Check and install new fuel volume control
valve as required

Too High - Circuit voltage The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
above threshold measured a voltage above a check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
specified range but not short circuit to power
necessarily a short circuit to
power
signal circuit short circuit to
power

Too High - Signal amplitude The engine control module Check the fuel gauge sender units for correct
> maximum measured a signal voltage operation
above a specified range but Check fuel lines for restriction
www.JagDocs.com
not necessarily a short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and

circuit to power, gain too check fuel rail pressure sensor circuit for
high short circuit to power, ground, open circuit,
Fuel gauge sender unit high resistance. Repair harness as required
sticking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fuel lines restricted check fuel pressure control valve circuit for
Fuel rail pressure sensor short circuit to power, ground, open circuit,
resistance check fuel volume control valve circuit for
Fuel pressure control valve short circuit to power, ground, open circuit,
ground, open circuit, high Check and install new fuel rail pressure
resistance sensor as required
Fuel volume control valve Check and install new fuel pressure control
circuit short circuit to power, valve as required
ground, open circuit, high Check and install new fuel volume control
resistance valve as required
Fuel rail pressure sensor Check for fuel pump related DTCs and refer
failure to the relevant DTC index
failure
failure
Fuel pump failure
P0089-21 Fuel Pressure Regulator

Performance - Signal The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
amplitude < minimum measured a signal voltage check fuel pressure regulator circuit for short
below a specified range but circuit to ground, open circuit. Repair
not necessarily a short harness as required
circuit to ground, gain low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Fuel pressure regulator check fuel pressure regulator reference
signal circuit short circuit to voltage circuit for high resistance. Repair
ground, open circuit harness as required
Fuel pressure regulator Check and install new fuel pressure regulator
reference voltage circuit high as required
resistance
Fuel pressure regulator
failure
P0089-22 Fuel Pressure Regulator

Performance - Signal The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
amplitude > maximum measured a signal voltage check fuel pressure regulator circuit for short
above a specified range but circuit to power. Repair harness as required
not necessarily a short Check and install new fuel pressure regulator
circuit to power, gain too as required
high
www.JagDocs.com
signal circuit short circuit to
power
failure
P0090-13 Fuel Pressure Regulator 1

Control Circuit/Open - The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit open has determined an open system check datalogger signals, Fuel
circuit via lack of bias Pressure Relief Control Valve Duty Cycle
voltage, low current flow, no (0x03C3). Refer to the electrical circuit
change in the state of an diagrams and check the fuel pressure control
input in response to an valve control circuit for open circuit. Repair
output harness as required. Using the manufacturer
Harness failure - Fuel approved diagnostic system clear all stored
pressure control valve DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and
control circuit open circuit retest
P0090-4B Fuel Pressure Regulator 1

Control Circuit/Open - Over Fuel pressure control valve Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
temperature signal circuit short circuit to system check datalogger signals, Fuel
power, open circuit Pressure Relief Control Valve Duty Cycle
Fuel pressure regulator (0x03C3). Refer to the electrical circuit
failure diagrams and check fuel pressure control
valve circuit for short circuit to power, open
circuit. Repair harness as required. Using the
Check and install new fuel pressure regulator
as required
www.JagDocs.com

Control Circuit Low - Circuit The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short to ground has detected a ground system check datalogger signals, Fuel
measurement for a period Pressure Relief Control Valve Duty Cycle
longer than expected or has (0x03C3). Refer to the electrical circuit
detected a ground diagrams and check the fuel pressure control
measurement when another valve circuit for short circuit to ground. Check
value was expected power supply circuit to control valve. Repair
Harness failure - Fuel harness as required. Using the manufacturer
pressure control valve circuit approved diagnostic system clear all stored
short circuit to ground DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and
Fuel pressure control valve retest
failure Check and install new fuel pressure control
valve as required

Control Circuit Low - Circuit The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
voltage below threshold measured a voltage below a system check datalogger signals, Fuel
specified range but not Pressure Relief Control Valve Duty Cycle
necessarily a short circuit to (0x03C3). This DTC is set when the voltage
ground on the fuel pressure control valve circuit is
Harness failure - Fuel less than the threshold expected by the
pressure control valve circuit engine control module. Refer to the electrical
Fuel pressure control valve circuit diagrams and check the fuel pressure
failure control valve circuit for high resistance, short
circuit to ground. Check power supply circuit
to the fuel pressure control valve. Repair
retest
Check and install new fuel pressure control
valve as required

Control Circuit High - The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit short to battery has detected a vehicle system check datalogger signals, Fuel
power measurement for a Pressure Relief Control Valve Duty Cycle
period longer than expected (0x03C3). Refer to the electrical circuit
or has detected a vehicle diagrams and check the fuel pressure control
power measurement when valve circuit for short circuit to power. Check
another value was expected power supply circuit to control valve. Repair
Harness failure - Fuel harness as required. Using the manufacturer
pressure control valve circuit approved diagnostic system clear all stored
short circuit to power DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and
retest
www.JagDocs.com
Control Circuit High - The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit voltage above measured a voltage above a system check datalogger signals, Fuel
threshold specified range but not Pressure Relief Control Valve Duty Cycle
necessarily a short circuit to (0x03C3). This DTC is set when the voltage
power on the fuel pressure control valve circuit is
Harness failure - Fuel more than the threshold expected by the
pressure control valve circuit engine control module. Refer to the electrical
Fuel pressure control valve circuit diagrams and check the fuel pressure
failure control valve circuit for high resistance, short
circuit to power. Check power supply circuit
to the fuel pressure control valve. Repair
retest
Check and install new fuel pressure control
valve as required
P00AA-16 Intake Air Temperature

Sensor 1 Circuit (Bank 2) - The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit voltage below measured a voltage below a system check datalogger signals, Intake Air
threshold specified range but not Temperature Sensor (0x1279), Intake Air
necessarily a short circuit to Temperature (0xF40F). This DTC is set when
ground the voltage on the intake air temperature
Harness failure - Intake air sensor circuit is less than the threshold
temperature sensor circuit expected by the engine control module. The
Intake air temperature intake air temperature sensor is integrated
sensor failure (part of mass into the electronics package of the mass air
air flow sensor) flow sensor and shares the same ground
circuit as the mass air flow element of the
www.JagDocs.com
sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams

and check all the circuits connected
to the mass air flow sensor for short circuit
to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit, high resistance. Check mass air flow
sensor 2 circuits as both sensors share the
ground connection. Repair harness as
Check and install new intake air temperature
sensor as required

Sensor 1 Circuit (Bank 2) - The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit voltage above measured a voltage above a system check datalogger signals, Intake Air
threshold specified range but not Temperature Sensor (0x1279), Intake Air
necessarily a short circuit to Temperature (0xF40F). This DTC is set when
power the voltage on the intake air temperature
Harness failure - Intake air sensor circuit is more than the threshold
temperature sensor circuit expected by the engine control module. The
Intake air temperature intake air temperature sensor is integrated
sensor failure (part of mass into the electronics package of the mass air
air flow sensor) flow sensor and shares the same ground
circuit as the mass air flow element of the
sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check all the circuits connected
to the mass air flow sensor for short circuit
circuit, high resistance. Check mass air flow
sensor 2 circuits as both sensors share the
ground connection. Repair harness as
sensor as required

Sensor 1 Circuit (Bank 2) - Harness failure - Intake air Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Signal compare failure temperature sensor circuit check all the circuits connected to the mass
Intake air temperature air flow sensor for short circuit to ground,
sensor failure (part of mass short circuit to power, open circuit, high
air flow sensor) resistance. Check mass air flow sensor 2
circuits as both sensors share the ground
connection. Repair harness as required.
www.JagDocs.com
sensor as required
P00BC-00 Mass or Volume Air Flow A

Circuit Range/Performance - Boost air solenoid stuck If this DTC is logged with P1247-00, suspect
Air Flow Too Low - No sub shut bi-turbo mode boost air solenoid stuck shut bi-turbo mode
type information Turbine intake solenoid If this DTC is logged with P22D3-77 &
stuck shut P22CF-71, suspect turbine intake solenoid
Intake system low pressure stuck shut
boost leak bank 2 If this DTC is logged with P006A-00, suspect
intake system low pressure boost leak bank
2

Circuit Range/Performance - Air flow disruption at This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
Air Flow Too Low - sensing element of mass air from sensor 1 is less than the value
Mechanical failures flow sensor expected by the engine control module.
Mass air flow sensor failure Refer to the relevant sections of the
workshop manual and check the induction
system for air leaks, and obstructions to
flow. Check the condition of the air filter and
examine the induction pipes for debris which
could disrupt air flow at the sensing
element. Using the manufacturer approved
as required

www.JagDocs.com
Circuit Range/Performance - Boost air solenoid stuck If this DTC is logged with P1247-00, suspect
Air Flow Too Low - Signal shut bi-turbo mode boost air solenoid stuck shut bi-turbo mode
plausibility failure Turbine intake solenoid If this DTC is logged with P22D3-77 &
stuck shut P22CF-71, suspect turbine intake solenoid
Intake system low pressure stuck shut
boost leak bank 2 If this DTC is logged with P006A-00, suspect
intake system low pressure boost leak bank
2
Refer to the relevant sections of the
P00BD-00 Mass or Volume Air Flow A

Circuit Range/Performance - Air leak at air intake system Refer to the relevant sections of the
Air Flow Too High - No sub A workshop manual and check the induction
type information Harness failure - Mass air system for air leaks
flow sensor circuit short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit to power check mass air flow sensor for short circuit
Mass air flow sensor failure to power. Repair harness as required. Using
as required

Circuit Range/Performance - Boost air solenoid stuck If this DTC is logged with P0235-94 suspect,
Air Flow Too High - open mono turbo mode boost air solenoid stuck open mono turbo
Mechanical failures Turbine intake solenoid mode
leakage when closed If this DTC is logged with P0235-94 suspect,
Turbine intake solenoid turbine intake solenoid leakage when closed
stuck open If this DTC is logged with P0235-94,
Intake air system, blocked P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P22CF-71 suspect,
low pressure air intake. This turbine intake solenoid stuck open
failure mode can be caused If this DTC is logged with P0235-94,
by snow packing in the P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P22CF-71 suspect,
intake system. Symptoms intake air system, blocked low pressure air
often disappear after the intake
vehicle has been warmed If this DTC is logged with P00BE-07 &
and heat soaked. Similar P1247-00 suspect, primary turbocharger
symptoms to seized primary seized
turbo Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
www.JagDocs.com
Primary turbo charger seized system perform the (Turbo, EGR and air path

Circuit Range/Performance - Boost air solenoid stuck If this DTC is logged with P0235-94 suspect,
Air Flow Too High - Signal open mono turbo mode boost air solenoid stuck open mono turbo
plausibility failure Turbine intake solenoid mode
leakage when closed If this DTC is logged with P0235-94 suspect,
stuck open mono turbo If this DTC is logged with P0235-94,
mode P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P22CF-71 suspect,
Intake system high pressure turbine intake solenoid stuck open
bank 2 in mono turbo mode Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system perform the (Turbo, EGR and air path
P00BE-00 Mass or Volume Air Flow B

Circuit Range/Performance - Boost air recirculation If this DTC is logged with P1247-00, suspect
Air Flow Too Low - No sub solenoid stuck open bi-turbo boost air recirculation solenoid stuck open.
type information mode Refer to the relevant sections of the
Air flow disruption at workshop manual and check the boost air
sensing element of mass air recirculation solenoid circuit for short circuit
flow sensor 2 to power, short circuit to ground, open
Harness failure - Mass air circuit. Refer to the relevant sections of the
flow sensor circuit short workshop manual and check the induction
circuit to ground, high system for air leaks, and obstructions to
resistance, open circuit flow. Check the condition of the air filter and
Mass air flow sensor 2 examine the induction pipes for debris which
failure could disrupt air flow at the sensing element
www.JagDocs.com

check mass air flow sensor 2 for short circuit
to ground, high resistance, open circuit.
Repair harness as required. Using the
Check and install new mass air flow sensor 2
as required
P00BE-07 Mass or Volume Air Flow B

Circuit Range/Performance - Air flow disruption at This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
Air Flow Too Low - sensing element of mass air from sensor 2 is less than the value
Mechanical failures flow expected by the engine control module.
Mass air flow failure Refer to the relevant sections of the
Check and install new mass air flow as
required
P00BF-00 Mass or Volume Air Flow B

Circuit Range/Performance - Air leak at air intake system If this DTC is logged with P00BE-00, suspect
Air Flow Too High - No sub B boost air recirculation solenoid stuck open.
type information Harness failure - Mass air Refer to the relevant sections of the
flow sensor circuit short workshop manual and check the boost air
circuit to power recirculation solenoid circuit for short circuit
Mass air flow sensor 2 to power, short circuit to ground, open
failure circuit. Refer to the relevant sections of the
system for air leaks
solenoid as required.
to power. Repair harness as required. Using
as required
www.JagDocs.com
P00BF-07 Mass or Volume Air Flow B
Circuit Range/Performance - Intake air system, high If this DTC is logged with P1247-00,
Air Flow Too High - pressure boost leak P006A-00 & P00BF-07, suspect intake air
Mechanical failures system, high pressure boost leak
P00CF-62 Secondary Compressor

Outlet Pressure Sensor - Boost air circuit leak or This DTC is set when the engine control
Signal compare failure blockage module detects a signal compare failure on
Boost air recirculation the boost air pressure sensor signal. Check
solenoid failure the sensor hose for blockages or leaks.
Boost air solenoid failure Check the sensor and harness for mechanical
Mechanical failure - Sensor damage caused by heat or chaffing
hose blocked or leaking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Harness failure - Boost air check the secondary compressor outlet
pressure sensor circuit pressure sensor power and ground supplies
Boost air pressure sensor for short circuit to ground, open circuit.
failure Check the signal line for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit.
Repair harness as required
Check and install new secondary compressor
outlet pressure sensor as required
P0101-21 Mass or Volume Air Flow A

Circuit Range/Performance - The engine control module This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
Signal amplitude < measured a signal voltage from sensor 1 is less than the value
minimum below a specified range but expected by the engine control module.
not necessarily a short Refer to the relevant sections of the
circuit to ground, gain low workshop manual and check the induction
Air flow disruption at system for air leaks, and obstructions to
sensing element of mass air flow. Check the condition of the air filter and
flow sensor examine the induction pipes for debris which
www.JagDocs.com
Harness failure - Mass air could disrupt air flow at the sensing element
circuit to ground, high check mass air flow sensor circuit for short
resistance, open circuit circuit to ground, high resistance, open
Mass air flow sensor failure circuit. Repair harness as required. Using the
as required

Signal amplitude > measured a signal voltage from sensor 1 is more than the value
maximum above a specified range but expected by the engine control module.
circuit to power, gain too workshop manual and check the induction
high system for air leaks, and obstructions to
Air flow disruption at flow. Check the condition of the air filter and
sensing element of mass air examine the induction pipes for debris which
flow sensor could disrupt air flow at the sensing element
Harness failure - Mass air Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
flow sensor circuit short check mass air flow sensor circuit for short
circuit to power circuit to power. Repair harness as required.
Mass air flow sensor failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
as required
P0101-92 Mass or Volume Air Flow

Sensor "A" Circuit Air flow disruption at This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
Range/Performance - sensing element of mass air from sensor 1 is less than the value
Performance or incorrect flow sensor expected by the engine control module.
operation Harness failure - Mass air Refer to the relevant sections of the
circuit to ground, short system for air leaks, and obstructions to
circuit to power, open circuit, flow. Check the condition of the air filter and
high resistance examine the induction pipes for debris which
Mass air flow sensor failure could disrupt air flow at the sensing element
check mass air flow sensor circuit for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit, high resistance. Repair harness as
www.JagDocs.com
as required

Circuit Low - No sub type Air flow disruption at Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information sensing element of mass air system check datalogger signals, Air Flow
flow sensor Rate From mass air flow Sensor Bank 1
Harness failure - Mass air (0x0504). This DTC is set if the mass air
flow sensor circuits flow signal from sensor 1 is less than the
Mass air flow sensor failure value expected by the engine control
module. Refer to the relevant sections of the
could disrupt air flow at the sensing element
check the mass air flow sensor power and
ground circuits for high resistance, short
circuit to power, short circuit to ground.
Check the mass air flow signal line for high
resistance. Repair harness as required. Using
as required

Circuit High - No sub type Air flow disruption at Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
flow sensor Rate From Mass Air Flow Sensor Bank 1
www.JagDocs.com
flow sensor circuits flow signal from sensor 1 is greater than the
Mass air flow sensor failure value expected by the engine control
element.
check the mass air flow sensor power and
ground circuits for high resistance, short
circuit to power, short circuit to ground.
Check the mass air flow signal line for high
as required
P0105-16 Manifold Absolute

Pressure/BARO circuit - The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit voltage below measured a voltage below a check the 5 volt supply circuit for open
threshold specified range but not circuit, high resistance, short circuit to
necessarily a short circuit to ground. Check the sensor ground for open
ground circuit, short circuit to power. Check the
Harness failure - Manifold signal circuit for short circuit to ground, high
absolute pressure sensor resistance. Repair harness as required. Using
circuits the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Manifold absolute pressure system clear all stored DTCs using the
sensor failure ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
Blockage or leak between Check and install new manifold absolute
the intake manifold and the pressure sensor as required
manifold absolute pressure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
sensor system check datalogger signals, Corrected
Intake Manifold Absolute Pressure (0x0322),
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor Voltage
(0x0301), Manifold Absolute Pressure Bank 1
(0x052C). This DTC is set when the voltage
on the manifold absolute pressure sensor
signal circuit is less than the threshold
expected by the engine control module.
Refer to the workshop manual and check the
manifold absolute pressure sensor is
correctly connected to the air intake
manifold and there are no blockages or air
www.JagDocs.com
leaks preventing communication of pressure
changes between the manifold and the
sensor

Pressure/BARO circuit - The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Circuit voltage above measured a voltage above a check the 5 volt supply circuit for short
threshold specified range but not circuit to power. Check the sensor ground for
necessarily a short circuit to open circuit, short circuit to power. Check the
power signal circuit for short circuit to power.
Harness failure - Manifold Repair harness as required. Using the
absolute pressure sensor manufacturer approved diagnostic system
circuits clear all stored DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis
Manifold absolute pressure Menu’ tab and retest
sensor failure Check and install new manifold absolute
Blockage or leak between pressure sensor as required
the intake manifold and the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
manifold pressure sensor system check datalogger signals, Corrected
(0x052C). This DTC is set when the voltage
on the manifold absolute pressure sensor
signal circuit is greater than the threshold
Refer to the workshop manual and check the
manifold absolute pressure sensor is
correctly connected to the air intake
www.JagDocs.com
sensor

Pressure/Barometric Harness failure - Manifold Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Pressure Sensor Circuit - absolute pressure sensor check the 5 volt supply circuit for short
Signal has too few circuits circuit to power. Check the sensor ground for
transitions/events Manifold absolute pressure open circuit, short circuit to power. Check the
sensor failure signal circuit for short circuit to power.
Blockage or leak between Repair harness as required. Using the
the intake manifold and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
manifold pressure sensor clear all stored DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis
Check and install new manifold absolute
pressure sensor as required
system check datalogger signals, Corrected
(0x052C). Refer to the workshop manual and
check the manifold absolute pressure sensor
is correctly connected to the air intake
sensor

Pressure Sensor Circuit Low absolute pressure sensor check the 5 volt supply circuit for short
- No sub type information circuits circuit to power. Check the sensor ground for
Manifold absolute pressure open circuit, short circuit to power. Check the
sensor failure signal circuit for short circuit to power.
Blockage or leak between Repair harness as required. Using the
the intake manifold and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
manifold pressure sensor clear all stored DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis
www.JagDocs.com
sensor

Pressure/Barometric The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Pressure Sensor Circuit Low measured a voltage below a check the 5 volt supply circuit for open
- Circuit voltage below specified range but not circuit, short circuit to power, short circuit to
threshold necessarily a short circuit to ground. Check the sensor ground for open
ground circuit, short circuit to power. Check the
Harness failure - Manifold signal circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
absolute pressure sensor power, short circuit to ground. Repair
circuits harness as required. Using the manufacturer
Manifold absolute pressure approved diagnostic system clear all stored
sensor failure DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and
Blockage or leak between retest
the intake manifold and the Check and install new manifold absolute
manifold pressure sensor pressure sensor as required
(0x052C). This DTC is set when the manifold
absolute pressure sensor signal voltage is
lower than expected by the engine control
module. Refer to the workshop manual and
www.JagDocs.com

sensor

Pressure Sensor Circuit absolute pressure sensor check the 5 volt supply circuit for open
High - No sub type circuits circuit, short circuit to power, short circuit to
information Manifold absolute pressure ground. Check the sensor ground for open
sensor failure circuit, short circuit to power. Check the
Blockage or leak between signal circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
the intake manifold and the power, short circuit to ground. Repair
manifold pressure sensor harness as required. Using the manufacturer
retest
sensor

Pressure/Barometric The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Pressure Sensor Circuit measured a voltage above a check the 5 volt supply circuit for open
High - Circuit voltage above specified range but not circuit, short circuit to power, short circuit to
threshold necessarily a short circuit to ground. Check the sensor ground for open
power circuit, short circuit to power. Check the
Harness failure - Manifold signal circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
absolute pressure sensor power, short circuit to ground. Repair
circuits harness as required. Using the manufacturer
Manifold absolute pressure approved diagnostic system clear all stored
sensor failure DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and
Blockage or leak between retest
the intake manifold and the Check and install new manifold absolute
manifold pressure sensor pressure sensor as required
www.JagDocs.com
(0x052C). This DTC is set when the manifold
absolute pressure sensor signal voltage is
greater than expected by the engine control
module. Refer to the workshop manual and
sensor
P010A-92 Mass or Volume Air Flow

Sensor "B" Circuit - Air flow disruption at This DTC is set if the mass air flow signal
Performance or incorrect sensing element of mass air from sensor 2 is greater than the value
operation flow expected by the engine control module.
Harness failure - Mass air Refer to the relevant sections of the
circuit to ground, short system for air leaks, and obstructions to
circuit to power, open circuit, flow. Check the condition of the air filter and
high resistance examine the induction pipes for debris which
Mass air flow failure could disrupt air flow at the sensing element
to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance. Repair harness as required.
‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest Check and
install new mass air flow sensor 2 as
required
www.JagDocs.com
P010B-21 Mass or Volume Air Flow B

Signal amplitude < measured a signal voltage from sensor 2 is less than the value
minimum below a specified range but expected by the engine control module.
circuit to ground, gain low workshop manual and check the induction
Air flow disruption at system for air leaks, and obstructions to
sensing element of mass air flow. Check the condition of the air filter and
flow examine the induction pipes for debris which
Harness failure - Mass air could disrupt air flow at the sensing element
circuit to ground, high check mass air flow sensor 2 for short circuit
resistance, open circuit to ground, high resistance, open circuit.
Mass air flow failure Repair harness as required. Using the
as required
P010B-22 Mass or Volume Air Flow B

Signal amplitude > measured a signal voltage from sensor 2 is more than the value
maximum above a specified range but expected by the engine control module.
circuit to power, gain too workshop manual and check the induction
high system for air leaks, and obstructions to
Air flow disruption at flow. Check the condition of the air filter and
sensing element of mass air examine the induction pipes for debris which
flow sensor 2 could disrupt air flow at the sensing element
Harness failure - Mass air Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
flow sensor circuit short check mass air flow sensor 2 circuit for short
circuit to power circuit to power. Repair harness as required.
Mass air flow failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
as required
P010C-00 Mass or Volume Air Flow B

Circuit Low - No sub type Air flow disruption at Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
flow Rate From Mass Air Flow Sensor Bank 2
flow sensor circuits flow signal from sensor 2 is less than the
Mass air flow failure value expected by the engine control
www.JagDocs.com
check the power and ground circuits for the
mass air flow sensors for high resistance,
short circuit to power, short circuit to ground.
Check the mass air flow signal line between
the engine control module and the mass air
flow sensor for high resistance. Repair
retest
as required
P010D-00 Mass or Volume Air Flow B

Circuit High - No sub type Air flow disruption at Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
flow Rate From Mass Air Flow Sensor Bank 2
flow sensor circuits flow signal from sensor 2 is greater than the
Mass air flow failure value expected by the engine control
www.JagDocs.com

check the power and ground circuits for the
mass air flow sensors for high resistance,
short circuit to power, short circuit to ground.
Check the mass air flow signal line between
the engine control module and the mass air
flow sensor for high resistance. Repair
retest
as required
P0116-00 Engine Coolant

Temperature Sensor 1 Engine coolant level or flow Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit Range/Performance - failure system check datalogger signals, Engine
No sub type information Harness failure - Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (0x0357),
coolant temperature sensor Engine Coolant Temperature (0xF405). This
circuits DTC is set if the engine coolant temperature
Engine coolant temperature value fails plausibility checks by the engine
sensor failure control module. Refer to the workshop
manual and check the engine cooling system
to ensure the coolant condition and level is
correct
check the engine coolant temperature sensor
circuits for high resistance, short circuit to
other circuits. Repair harness as required.
Check and install new engine coolant

Temperature Sensor 1 The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit Range/Performance - measured a voltage below a system check datalogger signals, Engine
Circuit voltage below specified range but not Coolant Temperature Sensor (0x0357),
threshold necessarily a short circuit to Engine Coolant Temperature (0xF405). This
ground DTC is set if the engine coolant temperature
Engine coolant level or flow sensor signal voltage is less than the value
failure expected by the engine control module.
Harness failure - Engine Refer to the workshop manual and check the
coolant temperature sensor engine cooling system to ensure the coolant
circuits condition and level is correct
Engine coolant temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
www.JagDocs.com
sensor failure check the engine coolant temperature sensor

Circuit Range/Performance - measured a voltage above a system check datalogger signals, Engine
Circuit voltage above specified range but not Coolant Temperature Sensor (0x0357),
threshold necessarily a short circuit to Engine Coolant Temperature (0xF405). This
power DTC is set if the engine coolant temperature
Engine coolant level or flow sensor signal voltage is greater than the
failure value expected by the control module. Refer
Harness failure - Engine to the workshop manual and check the
circuits condition and level is correct
Engine coolant temperature Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
sensor failure check the engine coolant temperature sensor

www.JagDocs.com
Circuit Range/Performance - measured a signal voltage system check datalogger signals, Engine
Signal amplitude < below a specified range but Coolant Temperature Sensor (0x0357),
minimum not necessarily a short Engine Coolant Temperature (0xF405). This
circuit to ground, gain low DTC is set if the engine coolant temperature
Engine coolant level or flow sensor signal amplitude is lower than the
failure value expected by the control module. Refer
Harness failure - Engine to the workshop manual and check the
circuit short circuit to condition and level is correct
ground, high resistance, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
open circuit check the engine coolant temperature sensor
Engine coolant temperature circuit for short circuit to ground, high
sensor failure resistance, open circuit. Repair harness as

Circuit Range/Performance - measured a signal voltage system check datalogger signals, Engine
Signal amplitude > above a specified range but Coolant Temperature Sensor (0x0357),
maximum not necessarily a short Engine Coolant Temperature (0xF405). This
circuit to power, gain too DTC is set if the engine coolant temperature
high sensor signal amplitude is greater than the
Engine coolant level or flow value expected by the control module. Refer
failure to the workshop manual and check the
Harness failure - Engine engine cooling system to ensure the coolant
coolant temperature sensor condition and level is correct
circuit short circuit to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Engine coolant temperature check the engine coolant temperature sensor
sensor failure circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
retest
P0130-00 O2 Sensor Circuit (Bank 1

Sensor 1) - No sub type Harness failure - Heated Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
information oxygen sensor circuit open check the heated oxygen sensor circuits for
circuit open circuit. Repair harness as required.
Heated oxygen sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
component failure system clear all stored DTCs using the
www.JagDocs.com
as required
P0130-11 O2 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor

1) - Circuit short to ground The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
has detected a ground check the heated oxygen sensor circuits for
measurement for a period short circuit to ground. Repair harness as
longer than expected or has required. Using the manufacturer approved
detected a ground diagnostic system clear all stored DTCs
measurement when another using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
value was expected Check and install new heated oxygen sensor
Harness failure - Heated as required
oxygen sensor circuit short
circuit to ground
Heated oxygen sensor
component failure

1) - Circuit short to battery The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
has detected a vehicle check the heated oxygen sensor circuits for
power measurement for a short circuit to power. Repair harness as
period longer than expected required. Using the manufacturer approved
or has detected a vehicle diagnostic system clear all stored DTCs
power measurement when using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
another value was expected Check and install new heated oxygen sensor
oxygen sensor circuit short
circuit to power
component failure
www.JagDocs.com

1) - Circuit open The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
has determined an open check the heated oxygen sensor circuits for
circuit via lack of bias open circuit. Repair harness as required.
voltage, low current flow, no Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
change in the state of an system clear all stored DTCs using the
input in response to an ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
output Check and install new heated oxygen sensor
oxygen sensor circuit open
circuit
component failure
P0130-1A O2 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor

1) - Circuit resistance Harness failure - Heated This DTC is set when the heated oxygen
below threshold oxygen sensor circuit failure sensor internal trim resistance value is less
Heated oxygen sensor than that expected by the engine control
component failure module. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the heated oxygen
sensor circuits for short circuits. Repair
retest
as required
P0130-1B O2 Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor

1) - Circuit resistance Harness failure - Heated This DTC is set when the oxygen sensor
above threshold oxygen sensor circuit failure internal trim resistance value is greater than
Heated oxygen sensor that expected by the engine control module.
component failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the heated oxygen sensor circuits for
short circuits, open circuits. Repair harness
retest
as required

1) - Signal rate of change The signal transitions more Check for and rectify any exhaust leak
below threshold slowly than is reasonably between cylinder head and catalytic
allowed converter. Check heated oxygen sensor is
Exhaust system leak correctly installed in exhaust manifold
Fuel control system failure Check fuel control system for related DTCs
www.JagDocs.com
Heated oxygen sensor to and refer to the relevant DTC index
engine control module circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short circuit to ground, short check heated oxygen sensor to engine
circuit to power, high control module circuit for short circuit to
resistance ground, short circuit to power, high
Heated oxygen sensor resistance, open circuit. Repair harness as
failure required. Using the manufacturer approved
as required
P0133-00 O2 Circuit Slow Response

(Bank 1, Sensor 1) - No sub Exhaust system leak Check for and rectify any exhaust leak
type information Fuel control system failure between cylinder head and catalytic
Heated oxygen sensor to converter. Check heated oxygen sensor is
engine control module wiring correctly installed in exhaust manifold
shield high resistance Check fuel control system for related DTCs
Heated oxygen sensor and refer to the relevant DTC index
failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check heated oxygen sensor to engine
control module wiring shield for high
as required
P0135-16 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit

(Bank 1 Sensor 1) - Circuit Heated oxygen sensor to Check fuel control system for related DTCs
www.JagDocs.com
voltage below threshold engine control module circuit and refer to the relevant DTC index
short circuit to ground, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit check heated oxygen sensor to engine
Heated oxygen sensor control module circuit for short circuit to
failure ground, open circuit
as required
P0148-00 Fuel Delivery Error - No sub

type information This DTC is set after the Check high pressure fuel pump for
engine control module mechanical damage and excessive wear
internal monitoring function Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
has evaluated high pressure system, Using the manufacturer approved
fuel pump fatigue and wear diagnostic system clear all stored DTCs
against fuel rail pressure using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
Check and install new high pressure fuel
pump as required
P0181-16 Fuel Temperature Sensor A

Circuit Range/Performance - The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit voltage below measured a voltage below a system check datalogger signals, Fuel
threshold specified range but not Temperature "A" (0x0522), Fuel Rail
necessarily a short circuit to Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x033F). This
ground DTC is set when the voltage on the fuel
Harness failure - Fuel temperature sensor circuit is less than that
temperature sensor circuit expected by the engine control module.
Sensor component failure check the fuel temperature sensor signal
circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair
retest
Check and install new fuel temperature
sensor as required

Circuit voltage above measured a voltage above a system check datalogger signals, Fuel
threshold specified range but not Temperature "A" (0x0522), Fuel Rail
necessarily a short circuit to Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x033F). This
power DTC is set when the voltage on the fuel
Harness failure - Fuel temperature sensor circuit is greater than
temperature sensor circuit that expected by the engine control module.
Sensor component failure check the fuel temperature sensor signal and
ground circuits for short circuit to power,
open circuit or high resistance. Repair
www.JagDocs.com
retest
sensor as required

Circuit Low - No sub type Harness failure - Fuel Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information temperature sensor circuit system check datalogger signals, Fuel
failure Temperature "A" (0x0522), Fuel Rail
Sensor component failure Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x033F). This
DTC is set when the voltage on the fuel
temperature sensor circuit is less than that
check the fuel temperature sensor signal
circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair
retest
sensor as required

Circuit High - No sub type Harness failure - Fuel Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information temperature sensor circuit system check datalogger signals, Fuel
failure Temperature "A" (0x0522), Fuel Rail
Sensor component failure Temperature Sensor Voltage (0x033F). This
DTC is set when the voltage on the fuel
www.JagDocs.com
temperature sensor circuit is greater than

that expected by the engine control module.
check the fuel temperature sensor signal and
ground circuits for short circuit to power,
open circuit or high resistance. Repair
retest
sensor as required
P0191-16 Fuel Rail Pressure Sensor A

Circuit voltage below measured a voltage below a system check datalogger signals, Fuel Rail
threshold specified range but not Pressure Sensor (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure
necessarily a short circuit to (0xF423). The fuel rail pressure sensor is a
ground pressure transducer mounted on the fuel rail.
Fuel supply system failure This DTC is set when the voltage on the
Harness failure - Fuel rail signal line is less than that expected by the
pressure sensor circuit engine control module. Refer to the workshop
failure manual and ensure that the fuel
Sensor component failure supply system is working correctly
check the sensor supply, signal and ground
connections for intermittent failures, open
circuits, short circuits, high resistance.
sensor as required

Circuit voltage above measured a voltage above a system check datalogger signals, Fuel Rail
threshold specified range but not Pressure Sensor (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure
power pressure transducer mounted on the fuel rail.
Harness failure - Fuel rail signal line is greater than that expected by
pressure sensor circuit the engine control module. Refer to the
failure workshop manual and ensure that the fuel
www.JagDocs.com
sensor as required

Circuit Low - Circuit voltage The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
below threshold measured a voltage below a system check datalogger signals, Fuel Rail
specified range but not Pressure Sensor (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure
ground pressure transducer mounted on the fuel rail.
Harness failure - Fuel rail signal line is less than that expected by the
pressure sensor circuit engine control module. Refer to the workshop
failure manual and ensure that the fuel
connections for short circuit to power, short
circuit to ground, open circuit, high
sensor as required
www.JagDocs.com

Circuit High - Circuit The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
voltage above threshold measured a voltage above a system check datalogger signals, Fuel Rail
specified range but not Pressure Sensor (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure
power pressure transducer mounted on the fuel rail.
Harness failure - Fuel rail signal line is greater than that expected by
pressure sensor circuit the engine control module. Refer to the
failure workshop manual and ensure that the fuel
connections for short circuit to power, short
circuit to ground, open circuit, high
sensor as required

Circuit Intermittent/Erratic - Fuel supply system failure Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
No sub type information Harness failure - Fuel rail system check datalogger signals, Fuel Rail
pressure sensor circuit Pressure Sensor (0x0324), Fuel Rail Pressure
failure (0xF423). The fuel rail pressure sensor is a
Sensor component failure pressure transducer mounted on the fuel rail.
Refer to the workshop manual and ensure
that the fuel supply system is working
correctly
sensor as required
P0195-00 Engine Oil Temperature

Sensor Circuit - No sub type Oil contaminated or level Check the oil level is correct and the oil does
information incorrect not appear contaminated. Renew or top up
Harness failure - Oil level oil as required
and temperature sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuits check the sensor power and ground supplies
www.JagDocs.com
Oil level and temperature for open circuit or short circuit to ground.
sensor failure Check the signal line for open circuit, short
circuit to power, short circuit to ground, high
resistance and intermittent connections.
Check and install new engine oil level and

Sensor Circuit - Signal The engine control module Check the oil level is correct and the oil does
stuck low measures a signal that not appear contaminated. Renew or top up
remains low when oil as required
transitions are expected Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Oil contaminated or level check the sensor power and ground supplies
incorrect for open circuit or short circuit to ground.
Harness failure - Oil level Check the signal line for open circuit, short
and temperature sensor circuit to power, short circuit to ground, high
circuits resistance and intermittent connections.
Oil level and temperature Repair harness as required. Using the
sensor failure manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Check and install new engine oil level and

Sensor Circuit - Signal Oil contaminated or level Check the oil does not appear contaminated
compare failure incorrect and the level is correct. Renew or top up oil
www.JagDocs.com
Harness failure - Oil level as required

and temperature sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
circuit short circuit to check oil level and temperature sensor signal
ground, short circuit to circuit for short circuit to ground, short
power, high resistance, open circuit to power, high resistance, open
circuit, disconnected circuit, disconnected
Oil level and temperature Start the engine from cold and allow to idle,
sensor failure check and record Sump Oil Temperature -
Measured (0x03F3) datalogger signal.
Continue to warm up at idle, after
approximately 10 minutes check and record
Sump Oil Temperature - Measured (0x03F3)
signal. If value of signal has not increased
by 5°C check and install new oil level and
P0201-00 Cylinder 1 Injector

Circuit/Open - No sub type Harness failure - Cylinder 1 This DTC is set when the engine control
information injector circuit open circuit module detects an open circuit on the
Cylinder 1 injector failure cylinder 1 injector control circuit. Refer to
the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
two control circuits between the engine
control module and the fuel injector for high
resistance, open circuits or intermittent
connections. Repair harness as required.
Check and install new fuel injector as
required

connections. Repair harness as required
required

www.JagDocs.com
required

required

required

www.JagDocs.com

required
P0216-00 Injector/Injection timing

Control Circuit - No sub Internal engine control Refer to the workshop manual and the
type information module power supply is battery care manual, inspect the vehicle
unable to supply the fuel battery and ensure it is fully charged and
injectors with the maximum serviceable before performing further tests
number of injections Check the vehicle charging system
required performance to ensure the voltage regulation
Internal engine control is correct
module monitoring has Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
detected a fuel pressure not check engine control module power and
able to meet the demand for ground circuits
the number of fuel injections Check fuel control system for related DTCs
At high engine speeds the and refer to the relevant DTC index
internal engine control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
module monitoring has system, Using the manufacturer approved
detected that the computing diagnostic system clear all stored DTCs
time available for the using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
desired number of injections
is not sufficient
P0219-00 Engine Overspeed

Condition - No sub type Camshaft or crankshaft Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
information position sensor circuit short check camshaft and crankshaft position
circuit to ground, short sensor circuits for short circuit to ground,
circuit to power, open circuit short circuit to power, open circuit
Camshaft or crankshaft Check for engine oil ingestion to sensors.
position sensor failure Check and install new camshaft and
crankshaft position sensor as required
Boost Sensor A Circuit - The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit voltage below measured a voltage below a system check datalogger signals,
threshold specified range but not Turbocharger/Supercharger Boost Sensor A
necessarily a short circuit to Circuit (0x033C), Boost Absolute Pressure -
ground Raw Value (0x033E). This DTC is set when
Mechanical failure - Sensor the engine control module detects a signal
hose blocked or leaking voltage from the boost air pressure sensor
Failure affecting intake air signal line which is less than the threshold
circuit or boost air circuit value. Check the sensor hose for blockages
www.JagDocs.com
control valves or actuators or leaks
Harness failure - Boost air Check the intake air and boost air circuits for
pressure sensor circuit failures including leaks, blockages, control
Boost air pressure sensor valve actuator malfunctions
check the sensor power and ground supplies
for open circuit or short circuit to ground.
Check the signal line for open circuit, short
circuit to ground, high resistance and
intermittent connections. Repair harness as
Check and install new boost air pressure
sensor as required
Boost Sensor A Circuit - The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Circuit voltage above measured a voltage above a system check datalogger signals,
threshold specified range but not Turbocharger/Supercharger Boost Sensor A
necessarily a short circuit to Circuit (0x033C), Boost Absolute Pressure -
power Raw Value (0x033E). This DTC is set when
Mechanical failure - Sensor the engine control module detects a signal
hose blocked or leaking voltage from the boost air pressure sensor
Failure affecting intake air signal line which is greater than the
circuit or boost air circuit threshold value. Check the sensor hose for
control valves or actuators blockages or leaks
Harness failure - Boost air Check the intake air and boost air circuits for
pressure sensor circuit failures including leaks, blockages, control
Boost air pressure sensor valve actuator malfunctions
www.JagDocs.com
check the sensor power and ground supplies

for open circuit or short circuit to ground.
Check the signal line for open circuit, short
circuit to power. Repair harness as required.
Check and install new boost air pressure
sensor as required
Boost Sensor A Circuit - Boost air solenoid stuck If this DTC is logged with P00BD-07 suspect,
Unexpected operation open mono turbo mode boost air solenoid stuck open mono turbo
Turbine intake solenoid mode
leakage when closed If this DTC is logged with P00BD-07 suspect,
stuck open If this DTC is logged with P00BD-07,
Intake air system, blocked P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P22CF-71 suspect,
low pressure air intake. This turbine intake solenoid stuck open
failure mode can be caused If this DTC is logged with P00BD-07,
by snow packing in the P22D2-77, P1247-00 & P22CF-71 suspect,
intake system. Symptoms intake air system, blocked low pressure air
often disappear after the intake
vehicle has been warmed Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and heat soaked. Similar system perform the (Turbo, EGR and air path
symptoms to seized primary dynamic test) routine
turbo
P023D-00 Manifold Absolute Pressure-

Turbocharger/Supercharger Induction system air leak or Check induction system for leaks, blockages
Boost Sensor A Correlation blockage Check boost air system for leaks, blockages.
- No sub type information Boost air system leak or Check for related DTCs and refer to the
blockage relevant DTC index
Manifold absolute pressure Check and install new manifold absolute
sensor A failure pressure sensor as required
Variable geometry Check and install new variable geometry
turbocharger actuator A turbocharger actuator as required
sticking, failure Check turbocharger rod connection and oil
Turbocharger A failure seals
P0251-13 Injection Pump Fuel

Metering Control A - Circuit The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
open has determined an open system check datalogger signals, Fuel
circuit via lack of bias Volume Control Valve Duty Cycle (0x03C2),
voltage, low current flow, no Fuel Volume Control Valve Current -
change in the state of an Measured (0x03EA). Refer to the electrical
input in response to an circuit diagrams and check the fuel volume
output control valve circuit between the engine
www.JagDocs.com
Harness failure - Fuel control module and the fuel volume control
volume control valve circuit valve for open circuit. Check power supply to
open circuit fuel volume control valve. Repair harness as
Fuel volume control valve required. Using the manufacturer approved
failure diagnostic system clear all stored DTCs
valve as required
P0251-4B Injection Pump Fuel

Metering Control A - Over Harness failure - Fuel Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
temperature volume control valve circuit system check datalogger signals, Fuel
short circuit to ground, short Volume Control Valve Duty Cycle (0x03C2),
circuit to power, high Fuel Volume Control Valve Current -
resistance Measured (0x03EA). Refer to the electrical
Fuel volume control valve circuit diagrams and check the fuel volume
failure control valve circuit between the engine
control module and the fuel volume control
valve for short circuit to ground, short circuit
to power, high resistance. Check power
supply to fuel volume control valve. Repair
retest
valve as required

Metering Control A The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Range/Performance - Circuit measured a voltage below a system check datalogger signals, Fuel
www.JagDocs.com
voltage below threshold specified range but not Volume Control Valve Duty Cycle (0x03C2),
necessarily a short circuit to Fuel Volume Control Valve Current -
ground Measured (0x03EA). This DTC is set when
Harness failure - Fuel the voltage on the signal circuit to the fuel
volume control valve circuit volume control valve is less than that
Fuel volume control valve expected by the engine control module.
check the fuel volume control valve circuit
between the engine control module and the
fuel volume control valve for an intermittent
open circuit, high resistance, short circuit to
ground. Check the power supply to fuel
volume control valve. Repair harness as
valve as required

Metering Control A The engine control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Range/Performance - Circuit measured a voltage above a system check datalogger signals, Fuel
voltage above threshold specified range but not Volume Control Valve Duty Cycle (0x03C2),
necessarily a short circuit to Fuel Volume Control Valve Current -
power Measured (0x03EA). This DTC is set when
Harness failure - Fuel the voltage on the signal circuit to the fuel
volume control valve circuit volume control valve is greater than that
Fuel volume control valve expected by the engine control module.
volume control valve for a short circuit to
power. Check the power supply to fuel
volume control valve. Repair harness as
valve as required

Metering Control A Low - Harness failure - Fuel Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
No sub type information volume control valve circuit system check datalogger signals, Fuel
short circuit to ground, open Volume Control Valve Duty Cycle (0x03C2),
circuit Fuel Volume Control Valve Current -
Fuel volume control valve Measured (0x03EA). This DTC is set when
failure the voltage on the signal circuit to the fuel
volume control valve is less than that
www.JagDocs.com
fuel volume control valve for a short circuit
to ground, open circuit. Repair harness as
valve as required

Metering Control A High - Harness failure - Fuel Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
No sub type information volume control valve circuit system check datalogger signals, Fuel
short circuit to power Volume Control Valve Duty Cycle (0x03C2),
Fuel volume control valve Fuel Volume Control Valve Current -
failure Measured (0x03EA). This DTC is set when
the voltage on the signal circuit to the fuel
volume control valve is greater than that
fuel volume control valve for a short circuit
to power. Repair harness as required. Using
valve as required
www.JagDocs.com

Metering Control A Harness failure - Fuel Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Intermittent - No sub type volume control valve circuit system check datalogger signals, Fuel
information intermittent short circuit to Volume Control Valve Duty Cycle (0x03C2),
ground, short circuit to Fuel Volume Control Valve Current -
power, high resistance Measured (0x03EA). Refer to the electrical
Fuel volume control valve circuit diagrams and check the fuel volume
intermittent failure control valve circuit between the engine
control module and the fuel volume control
valve for an intermittent short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, high
valve as required
P0261-00 Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit

Low - No sub type Harness failure - Injector Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
information control circuit short circuit check the injector control circuit between the
Injector failure engine control module and the cylinder 1
injector for short circuit to ground or short
between the two wires. This circuit is a
twisted pair, check both high and low sides
for short circuit to power. Repair harness as
required

Low - Circuit short to The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground has detected a ground check the injector control circuit between the
measurement for a period engine control module and the cylinder 1
longer than expected or has injector for short circuit to ground or short
detected a ground between the two wires. This circuit is a
measurement when another twisted pair, check both high and low sides
value was expected for short circuit to ground. Repair harness as
Harness failure - Injector required. Using the manufacturer approved
control circuit short circuit to diagnostic system clear all stored DTCs
ground using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
required
www.JagDocs.com
Low - Signal stuck low The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
measures a signal that check the injector control circuits between
remains low when the engine control module and the cylinder 1
transitions are expected injector for short circuit to other injector
Harness failure - Short control circuits. Repair harness as required.
circuit between injector Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control circuits on different system clear all stored DTCs using the
cylinders ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest

required

www.JagDocs.com

required


required

required
www.JagDocs.com

required

www.JagDocs.com

required


required

required
www.JagDocs.com

required

www.JagDocs.com

required

Low - Signal Stuck Low The engine control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
P02CD-00 Cylinder 1 Fuel Injector

Offset Learning at Max Corrected set point voltage Check for other related DTCs and refer to the
Limit - No sub type of the piezo actuator relevant DTC index. Using the manufacturer
information violates the on board approved diagnostic system clear all stored
diagnostic limit DTCs using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and
Fuel injector internal retest
components out of tolerance Check and install new a fuel injector as
required
P02CF-00 Cylinder 2 Fuel Injector

required
P02D1-00 Cylinder 3 Fuel Injector

required

www.JagDocs.com
required

required

required
P02EE-17 Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit

Range/Performance - Circuit The engine control module This DTC is set when the engine control
voltage above threshold measured a voltage above a module monitors a voltage on the cylinder 1
specified range but not injector control circuit that is above the
necessarily a short circuit to diagnostic threshold. The injector control
power circuit consists of a twisted pair of wires
Harness failure - Injector between the engine control module and the
control circuit Piezo actuator within the injector. Refer to
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel injector failure the electrical circuit diagrams and check both
the control circuits (high and low) for open
circuit, short circuit to ground, short circuit
to power, intermittent connections, high
resistance, short to or interference from
other circuits. Repair wiring harness as
required
Check and install new a fuel injector as
required
P02EE-1C Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit

voltage out of range measured a voltage outside module monitors a voltage on the cylinder 1
of the expected range, but injector control circuit that is out of range.
not identified as too high or The injector control circuit consists of a
too low twisted pair of wires between the engine
Harness failure - Injector control module and the Piezo actuator within
control circuit the injector. Refer to the electrical circuit
Fuel injector failure diagrams and check both the control circuits
(high and low) for open circuit, short circuit
to ground, short circuit to power,
intermittent connections, high resistance,
short to or interference from other circuits.
Repair wiring harness as required
required
P02EE-68 Cylinder 1 Injector Circuit

Range/Performance - Event Harness failure - Injector This DTC is set when the engine control
information control circuit module monitors a voltage on the cylinder 1
Fuel injector failure injector control circuit that is out of range.
The injector control circuit consists of a
twisted pair of wires between the engine
control module and the Piezo actuator within
the injector. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check both the control circuits
required
www.JagDocs.com
P02EF-17 Cylinder 2 Injector Circuit
required
required
P02EF-1C Cylinder 2 Injector Circuit

www.JagDocs.com

required
P02EF-68 Cylinder 2 Injector Circuit

required
P02F0-17 Cylinder 3 Injector Circuit

required
required
P02F0-1C Cylinder 3 Injector Circuit

www.JagDocs.com
required

required

www.JagDocs.com
required
required

required

required
www.JagDocs.com
required
required

www.JagDocs.com

required

required

required
required

www.JagDocs.com
required

required
P0300-00 Random Misfire Detected -

No sub type information Fuel injector circuit failure(s) Check for cylinder mis-fire, glow plug and
(injector DTCs also flagged) injector DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Fuel system failure index. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check injector circuits for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit.
www.JagDocs.com

Check for fuel system failure. Repair harness
retest
P0301-00 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected

- No sub type information Fuel injector electrical circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
failure(s) (injector DTCs also check injector circuit for short circuit to
flagged) ground, short circuit to power, open circuit.
Fuel injector failure Repair harness as required. Using the
Cylinder compression low manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Check for cylinder mis-fire, glow plug and
injector DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
index
Check for fuel injector failure or blockage.
Carry out cylinder compression tests

index

www.JagDocs.com
index

index

index
www.JagDocs.com

index
P0336-29 Crankshaft Position Sensor

A Circuit Crankshaft position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Range/Performance - Signal circuit for short circuit to check crankshaft position sensor circuit for
invalid ground, short circuit to short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
power, open circuit, open circuit, disconnected. Repair harness as
disconnected required. Using the manufacturer approved
Crankshaft position sensor diagnostic system clear all stored DTCs
circuit shielding failure using the ‘Diagnosis Menu’ tab and retest
Crankshaft Position sensor Check and install new crankshaft position
failure sensor circuit shielding as required
Crankshaft position sensor Check crankshaft position sensor for foreign
foreign matter on sensor matter on crankshaft position sensor face.
face, gap incorrect Check crankshaft position sensor air gap
Target wheel failure Check and install new crankshaft position
sensor as required. Check and install new
target wheel as required
P0336-31 Crankshaft Position Sensor

A Circuit Harness failure - Crankshaft Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams.
Range/Performance - No position sensor circuits Check the power supply and ground circuits
signal Crankshaft position sensor to the sensor, check the signal circuit for
failure open circuits, short circuit to power, and
Crankshaft position sensor short circuit to ground. Repair harness as
or reference target required. Using the manufacturer approved
positioning incorrect diagnostic system clear all stored DTCs
Refer to the relevant section of the
workshop manual. Check the sensor and
crankshaft target for damage,
contamination, and correct mounting
Check and install new crankshaft position
sensor as required. Check and install new
target wheel as required
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Front Seat
Climate Control Module (DCSM)
Front Seat Climate Control Module (DCSM)
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the seat climate control module, for additional
diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section.
For additional information, refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Diagnosis and Testing).

B10B9-13 Blower Control - Circuit
open Connectors disconnected or Check for any disconnected connectors or damaged
connector pin damage connector pins
Seat blower left circuit - Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
Open circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
Blower motor assembly - present
Short circuit to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Front seat climate control the front seat climate control module - Circuit
module failure reference LH_FANS_RTN, Circuit reference
LH_FANS_PWR - For open circuit. Repair circuit as
required, clear DTC and retest
Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
approved diagnostic system to confirm
rectification. Alternatively, carry out any pinpoint
tests associated with this DTC using the
B10B9-4B Blower Control - Over

temperature Mechanical restriction in Check for mechanical restriction or debris in seat
blower motor assembly blower
Seat blower left circuit - Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
Short circuit to ground approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
module failure reference LH_FANS_RTN, Circuit reference
LH_FANS_PWR - For short circuit to ground. Repair
circuit as required, clear DTC and retest
www.JagDocs.com
B1157-13 Blower Control "B" -

Circuit open Connectors disconnected or Check for any disconnected connectors or damaged
connector pin damage connector pins
Seat blower right circuit - Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
Open circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
Open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
module failure reference RH_FANS_RTN, Circuit reference
RH_FANS_PWR - For open circuit. Repair circuit as
B1157-4B Blower Control "B" -

Over temperature Mechanical restriction in Check for mechanical restriction or debris in seat
blower motor assembly blower
Seat blower right circuit - Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
Short circuit to ground approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
www.JagDocs.com
module failure reference RH_FANS_RTN, Circuit reference

RH_FANS_PWR - For short circuit to ground. Repair
circuit as required, clear DTC and retest
B120E-13 Right Thermal Electric

Device Control - Circuit Connectors disconnected or Check for any disconnected connectors or damaged
open connector pin damage connector pins
Seat backrest thermal Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
electric device right circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
- Open circuit present
Seat cushion thermal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
electric device right circuit the front seat climate control module - Circuit
- Open circuit reference RH_SEAT_BACK_TED+, Circuit reference
Front seat climate control RH_SEAT_BACK_TED- - For open circuit. Repair
module failure circuit as required, clear DTC and retest
the front seat climate control module - Circuit
reference RH_CUSHION_TED+, Circuit reference
RH_CUSHION_TED- - For open circuit. Repair circuit
as required, clear DTC and retest
B120E-19 Right Thermal Electric

Device Control - Circuit Seat backrest thermal Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
current above threshold electric device right circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
- Short circuit to ground present
- Short circuit to ground reference RH_SEAT_BACK_TED+, Circuit reference
Front seat climate control RH_SEAT_BACK_TED- - For short circuit to ground.
module failure Repair circuit as required, clear DTC and retest
RH_CUSHION_TED- - For short circuit to ground.
Repair circuit as required, clear DTC and retest
www.JagDocs.com
B120E-4B Right Thermal Electric

Device Control - Over Restriction in thermal Check for blockage or restriction in thermal electric
temperature electric device air path device air path
electric device right circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
- Short circuit to ground present
- Short circuit to ground reference RH_SEAT_BACK_TED+, Circuit reference
Front seat climate control RH_SEAT_BACK_TED- - For short circuit to ground.
RH_CUSHION_TED- - For short circuit to ground.
B120F-98 Left Seat Cushion -

Component or system Blocked or restricted Check for blockage or restriction in thermal electric
over temperature thermal electric device fan device fan exhaust vent
exhaust vent Check for restricted thermal electric device fan
Restricted thermal electric movement
device fan movement Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
www.JagDocs.com

B1223-13 Right Seat Cushion

Temperature Sensor - Connectors disconnected or Check for any disconnected connectors or damaged
Circuit open connector pin damage connector pins
Seat cushion temperature Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
sensor right circuit - Open approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
circuit present
Front seat climate control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
module failure the front seat climate control module - Circuit
reference RH_CUSHION_SENSOR, Circuit reference
RH_CUSHION_SENSOR_RTN - For open circuit.
B1224-13 Left Thermal Electric

Device Control - Circuit Connectors disconnected or Check for any disconnected connectors or damaged
open connector pin damage connector pins
electric device left circuit - approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
Open circuit present
electric device left circuit - the front seat climate control module - Circuit
Open circuit reference LH_SEAT_BACK_TED+, Circuit reference
Front seat climate control LH_SEAT_BACK_TED- - For short circuit to ground.
reference LH_CUSHION_TED+, Circuit reference
LH_CUSHION_TED- - For short circuit to ground.
www.JagDocs.com
B1224-19 Left Thermal Electric
Device Control - Circuit Seat backrest thermal Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
current above threshold electric device left circuit - approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
Short circuit to ground present
Short circuit to ground reference LH_SEAT_BACK_TED+, Circuit reference
B1224-4B Left Thermal Electric

Device Control - Over Restriction in thermal Check for blockage or restriction in thermal electric
temperature electric device air path device air path
electric device left circuit - approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
Short circuit to ground present
Short circuit to ground reference LH_SEAT_BACK_TED+, Circuit reference
www.JagDocs.com

B1225-13 Right Seat Back

Seat backrest temperature Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
sensor right circuit - Open approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
circuit present
reference RH_SEAT_BACK_SENSOR, Circuit
reference RH_SEAT_BACK_SENSOR_RTN - For open
circuit. Repair circuit as required, clear DTC and
retest
B1229-13 Left Seat Back

Seat backrest temperature Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
sensor left circuit - Open approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
circuit present
reference LH_SEAT_BACK_SENSOR, Circuit
reference LH_SEAT_BACK_SENSOR_RTN - For open
circuit. Repair circuit as required, clear DTC and
retest
www.JagDocs.com
B122A-11 Right Seat Cushion
Blower Speed Sensor - Seat cushion blower speed Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
Circuit short to ground right circuit - Short circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
to ground present
Blower motor assembly - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Short circuit to ground the front seat climate control module - Circuit
Front seat climate control reference RH_CUSHION_FAN_SPEED - For short
module failure circuit to ground. Repair circuit as required, clear
DTC and retest
B122A-12 Right Seat Cushion

Circuit short to battery right circuit - Short circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
to power present
Short circuit to power the front seat climate control module - Circuit
Front seat climate control reference RH_CUSHION_FAN_SPEED - For short
module failure circuit to power. Repair circuit as required, clear
DTC and retest
B122B-11 Right Seat Back Blower

www.JagDocs.com
Speed Sensor - Circuit Seat backrest blower speed Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
short to ground right circuit - Short circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
to ground present
Front seat climate control reference RH_SEAT_BACK_FAN_SPEED - For short
DTC and retest
B122B-12 Right Seat Back Blower

short to battery right circuit - Short circuit approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
to power present
Front seat climate control reference RH_SEAT_BACK_FAN_SPEED - For short
DTC and retest
B122C-11 Left Seat Cushion

Circuit short to ground left circuit - Short circuit to approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
ground present
Front seat climate control reference LH_CUSHION_FAN_SPEED - For short
DTC and retest
www.JagDocs.com
B122C-12 Left Seat Cushion
Circuit short to battery left circuit - Short circuit to approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
power present
Front seat climate control reference LH_CUSHION_FAN_SPEED - For short
DTC and retest
B122D-11 Left Seat Back Blower

short to ground left circuit - Short circuit to approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
ground present
Front seat climate control reference LH_SEAT_BACK_FAN_SPEED - For short
DTC and retest
B122D-12 Left Seat Back Blower

www.JagDocs.com
short to battery left circuit - Short circuit to approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
power present
Front seat climate control reference LH_SEAT_BACK_FAN_SPEED - For short
DTC and retest
B122E-98 Right Seat Cushion -

B122F-98 Right Seat Back -

B1230-98 Left Seat Back -

www.JagDocs.com
B1231-7A Right Seat - Fluid leak
or seal failure Seat backrest assembly - Check for blockage or restriction in seat
Air path leaking backrest/seat cushion thermal electric device fan
Seat cushion assembly - ducts
Air path leaking Check seat backrest/seat cushion thermal electric
Seat assembly damaged device fan exhaust vent is clear
B1232-7A Left Seat - Fluid leak or

seal failure Seat backrest assembly - Check for blockage or restriction in seat
Air path leaking backrest/seat cushion thermal electric device fan
Seat cushion assembly - ducts
Air path leaking Check seat backrest/seat cushion thermal electric
Seat assembly damaged device fan exhaust vent is clear
B1235-13 Left Seat Cushion

Seat cushion temperature Carry out on demand self test using manufacturer
sensor left circuit - Open approved diagnostic system to confirm the fault is
circuit present
www.JagDocs.com

reference LH_CUSHION_SENSOR, Circuit reference
LH_CUSHION_SENSOR_RTN - For open circuit.

Communication Bus - Medium speed CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Bus off communication - Bus off the power and ground connections to the module
system, complete a CAN network integrity test
approved diagnostic system to confirm rectification

With Body Control Lost communication with
NOTE: This DTC may be stored even though no fault
Module - No sub type central junction box
condition is present and should be ignored unless the
information customer has reported a climate seat concern. Clear the
DTC and retest. Verify the customer concern prior to
diagnosis

the power and ground connections to the module
the CAN network between the front seat climate
control module and central junction box

With Body Control Lost communication with Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Module "B" - No sub rear junction box the power and ground connections to the module
type information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module and rear junction box
www.JagDocs.com
With Instrument Panel Lost communication with Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Cluster (IPC) Control instrument cluster the power and ground connections to the module
Module - No sub type Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system, complete a CAN network integrity test
control module and instrument cluster

With Information Lost communication with Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Center "A" - No sub rear seat entertainment the power and ground connections to the module
type information control module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
control module and rear seat entertainment
control module

Software Software stored in front Check the front seat climate control module is
Incompatibility - No seat climate control configured correctly
sub type information module is not compatible Reconfigure the front seat climate control module
with master configuration using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Clear the DTC and retest the system
www.JagDocs.com

From ECM/PCM - No The engine control module Check the engine control module for related DTCs
sub type information has transmitted engine and refer to the relevant DTC index
speed quality factor CAN On software levels previous to 8X23-14B663-AE
signal at a specific value clear the DTC and take no further action if the
for a greater than expected system is operating correctly
time period
U2101-00 Control module

Configuration Compatible central car Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Incompatible - No sub configuration file not system check and update the car configuration file
type information received by front seat as required. Carry out on demand self test using
climate control module manufacturer approved diagnostic system to
confirm rectification. Clear the DTC and retest

System internal Front seat climate control Check and install new front seat climate control
failures module - Internal failure module as required. Carry out on demand self test
using manufacturer approved diagnostic system to
confirm rectification

Signal compare failure Wiring harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Battery internal failure the power and ground connections to the front
Charging system fault seat climate control module and the central
junction box
Refer to the battery care manual and verify that
the vehicle battery is fully charged and serviceable
before continuing with further diagnostic tests
Check the vehicle charging system
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Headlamp
Control Module (HCM)
Headlamp Leveling Control Module (HLCM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Headlamp Leveling Control Module
(HLCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop
manual.
For additional information, refer to: Headlamps (417-01 Exterior Lighting, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1041-04 Leveling Control -
System internal Module internal Suspect Headlamp Leveling Module internal fault. Replace
failures failure as required, refer to the new module/component
B1041-54 Leveling Control -

Missing calibration NOTE: This DTC will NOTE: Sensor calibration routine must be carried out with the
normally be logged when a vehicle unladen.
new module has been
installed. Calibrate the Headlamp Leveling Sensors using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, carry the out
Leveling sensor routine 'Headlamp Control Module System Calibration' from
calibration routine the 'Module programming and configuration - Setup and
not carried out Configuration - Lighting'
B10AE-11 Headlamp Leveling

Motor - Circuit short Headlamp Leveling Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Headlamp
to ground Motor Control Circuit - Leveling Motor Control Circuit for short to ground
short to ground

Motor - Circuit short Headlamp Leveling Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Headlamp
to battery Motor Control Circuit - Leveling Motor Control Circuit for short to power
short to power
www.JagDocs.com
Motor - Signal Signal plausibility Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
plausibility failure failure voltage out of Headlamp Leveling Motor circuits for failure. Disconnect one
range headlamp connector, clear DTC and re-test. If DTC cleared,
suspect Headlamp Leveling Module or circuits to the
disconnected side. If DTC remains, reconnect first
headlamp and disconnect second, clear DTC and re-test. If
DTC cleared, suspect Headlamp Leveling Module or circuits
to the disconnected side. If DTC remains, suspect common
circuits of the failure. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check as required

Supply - Circuit Headlamp Leveling Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check Headlamp
short to ground Sensor 5 volt supply Leveling Sensor 5 volt supply circuit for short to ground
circuit short to ground

Supply - General Headlamp Leveling Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check Headlamp
electrical failure Sensor 5 volt supply Leveling Sensor 5 volt supply circuit for short to power
circuit short to power
C1A04-11 Right Front Height

Sensor - Circuit Right front Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Right
short to ground Sensor circuit short to Front Height Sensor circuit for short to ground
ground

Sensor - Circuit Right front Height Check Right Front Height Sensor connector for security.
short to battery or Sensor circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Right
open power or open circuit Front Height Sensor circuit for short to power or open circuit
www.JagDocs.com

Sensor - Signal Sensor (PWM) Signal
NOTE: This DTC may be logged if the vehicles wheels have
plausibility failure out of range
been raised from the floor
Check the location, security and mechanical operation of

the Height Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams,
and check Right Front Height Sensor signal circuit for fault
C1A06-11 Right Rear Height

Sensor - Circuit Right rear Height Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Right
short to ground Sensor circuit short to Rear Height Sensor circuit for short to ground
ground

Sensor - Circuit Right rear Height Check Right Rear Height Sensor connector for security. Refer
short to battery or Sensor circuit short to to the electrical circuit diagrams, and check Right Rear
open power or open circuit Height Sensor circuit for short to power or open circuit

Sensor - Signal Sensor (PWM) Signal
NOTE: This DTC may be logged if the vehicles wheels have
plausibility failure out of range
been raised from the floor
Check the location, security and mechanical operation of

the Height Sensor. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams,
and check Right Rear Height Sensor signal circuit for fault

Communication Bus CAN Bus Off Check other modules for stored DTCs. Carry out the CAN
- Bus off CAN Bus Circuit fault Network Integrity test using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

with TCM - No sub Lost communication Check the Transmission Control Module for stored DTCs.
type information with the Transmission Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Control Module complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
CAN network fault electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the
Transmission Control Module

With Anti-Lock Lost communication Check the Anti-lock Brake System Module for stored DTCs.
Brake System (ABS) with the Anti-lock Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Control Module - No Brake System Module complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
sub type CAN network fault electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
information between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the Anti-lock
Brake System Module
www.JagDocs.com
Module Software Car Configuration File Check/amend the Car Configuration File (CCF) using the
Incompatibility - No (CCF) information manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Confirm the
sub type incompatible to latest Strategy and Calibration software is installed in the
information Headlamp Leveling Headlamp Leveling Module, using the manufacturer
Module approved diagnostic system update the Headlamp Leveling
Module software as required. If DTC returns suspect an
internal fault with the Headlamp Leveling Module Replace
as required, refer to the new module/component

Received From NOTE: Steering angle NOTE: The steering wheel center (straight ahead) position is
Anti-Lock Brake sensor not calibrated recalculated each ignition cycle
System (ABS)
Control Module - No Invalid data received Clear the DTC then cycle the ignition state to off then on.
sub type from ABS module Carry out a short road test to calibrate the Steering Wheel
information Angle Sensor. If DTC returns, check the Anti-lock Brake
System Module for related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
Index
U2100-00 Initial Configuration

Not Complete - No Car Configuration File
NOTE: The Car Configuration File (CCF) parameters required
sub type (CCF) information not
are (Vehicle type)(Headlamp type)(Gearbox type) and (Dayrunning
information received completely
light)
Check/amend Car Configuration File (CCF) as required using

the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear the stored
DTC then cycle the Ignition State to off, wait 30 seconds.
www.JagDocs.com
Return the Ignition state to on and check for stored DTCs,

if the DTC returns check other modules for related stored
DTCs. If no other modules have related DTCs confirm the
security and condition of the Headlamp Leveling Module
circuit connections. If no other DTCs are stored and the
circuit is correct suspect an internal fault with the
Headlamp Leveling Module Replace as required, refer to the
new module/component installation note at the top of the
DTC Index

Configuration Car Configuration File
NOTE: The Car Configuration File (CCF) parameters required
Incompatible - No (CCF) information
are (Vehicle type)(Headlamp type)(Gearbox type) and (Dayrunning
sub type incompatible to
light)
information Headlamp Leveling
Module Check/amend Car Configuration File (CCF) as required using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U3002-81 Vehicle
Identification The stored Vehicle Check the correct Headlamp Leveling Module is installed to
Number - Invalid Identification Number vehicle specification. Refit original or replace the module as
serial data received is not the same as required. Refer to the new module/component installation
the Central Broadcast note at the top of the DTC Index
Vehicle Identification
Number
The Headlamp
Leveling Module has
previously been
installed to another
vehicle

Circuit voltage The power supply to Suspect Battery or Charging fault. Check the battery
below threshold the Module has been condition and state of charge. Check the vehicle charging
below 9 Volts for system. Refer to the relevant workshop manual section.
more than 1000 Clear the DTC, cycle ignition state to off then on, if DTC
milliseconds returns refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
power and ground circuit to the Headlamp Leveling Module

Circuit voltage The power supply to Suspect Charging fault. Check the battery condition and
above threshold the Module has been state of charge. Check the vehicle charging system. Refer
above 16 Volts for to the relevant workshop manual section
more than 1000
milliseconds
www.JagDocs.com
Signal compare Difference in battery Check other modules for related stored DTCs. Refer to the
failure voltage, of 2 volts or electrical circuit diagrams and check power and ground
more, between the voltages at the Headlamp Leveling Module
central broadcast
voltage (via CAN Bus)
and Headlamp
Leveling Module

Received From Check the Steering Angle Sensor Module for stored DTCs.
NOTE: Steering Angle
Steering Angle Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Sensor not calibrated
Sensor Module - No complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
sub type Invalid Data Received electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
information from the Steering between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the
Angle Sensor Module Transmission Control Module

Received From Invalid Data Received Check the Transmission Control Module for stored DTCs.
Transmission from the Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Control Module - No Transmission Control complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
sub type Module electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
information Transmission between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the
component fault Transmission Control Module

With Steering Angle Lost communication Check the Steering Angle Sensor Module for stored DTCs.
Sensor Module - No with the Steering Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
sub type Angle Sensor Module complete the CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the
information CAN network fault electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the Headlamp Leveling Module and the Steering
www.JagDocs.com
Angle Sensor

With Body Control Lost communication Check the Auxiliary Junction Box for stored DTCs. Using the
Module "B" - No sub with the Auxiliary manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete the
type information Junction Box CAN Network Integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
CAN network fault diagrams and check the CAN network between the
Headlamp Leveling Module and the Auxiliary Junction Box
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Instrument
Cluster (IPC)
Instrument Cluster (IC)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Instrument Cluster (IC). For additional
For additional information, refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1008-11 Wiper Mode Switch -
Circuit short to ground Master wiper switch circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to ground master wiper switch circuit for short to ground
B1008-15 Wiper Mode Switch -

Circuit short to battery Master wiper switch circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
or open short to power, open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check master wiper switch circuit for short to
power, open circuit
B1009-51 Ignition Authorisation -

Not programmed Instrument cluster power Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
and ground supply circuits - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short, open circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Target SID synchronization and check instrument cluster power and ground
error following supply circuits for short, open circuit. Perform
re-programming the Immobilisation application from the Set-up
CAN fault menu using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Check CAN communications
between instrument cluster and tester

Signal compare failure LS CAN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
CJB ignition, power and DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground supply circuits - system. Check CAN communications between
short, open circuit CJB and instrument cluster. Refer to the
www.JagDocs.com
Instrument cluster power electrical circuit diagrams and check CJB ignition,
and ground supply circuits - power and ground supply circuits for short, open
short, open circuit circuit and instrument cluster power and ground
Incorrect CJB or instrument supply circuits for short, open circuit. Check
cluster installed correct CJB and instrument cluster installed.
Target SID synchronization Perform the Immobilisation application from the
error following Set-up menu using the manufacturer approved
re-programming diagnostic system. Check CAN network for
Noise/EMC related error interference/EMC related issues

Missing message CJB ignition, power and Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ground supply circuits - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LS CAN fault and check CJB ignition, power and ground supply
Instrument cluster power circuits for short, open circuit and instrument
and ground supply circuits - cluster power and ground supply circuits for
short, open circuit short, open circuit. Check CAN communications
Low battery voltage <9 between CJB and instrument cluster. Check
volts battery is in serviceable condition and fully
charged
B100A-62 Fuel Pump Authorisation

- Signal compare failure LS CAN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
RJB power and ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
supply circuits - short, open system. Check CAN communications between
circuit RJB and instrument cluster. Refer to the
Instrument cluster power electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power
and ground supply circuits - and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit
short, open circuit and instrument cluster power and ground supply
Incorrect RJB or instrument circuits for short, open circuit. Check correct RJB
www.JagDocs.com
cluster installed and instrument cluster installed. Perform the

Target SID synchronization Immobilisation application from the Set-up menu
error following using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
re-programming system. Check CAN network for interference/EMC
Noise/EMC related error related issues

- Signal plausibility Target SID synchronization Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
failure error following DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
re-programming system. Perform the Immobilisation application
RJB power and ground from the Set-up menu using the manufacturer
supply circuits - short, open approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power
LS CAN fault and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit.
Check CAN communications between RJB and
instrument cluster

- Missing message RJB power and ground Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
supply circuits - short, open DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LS CAN fault and check RJB power and ground supply circuits
Instrument cluster power for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
and ground supply circuits - power and ground supply circuits for short, open
short, open circuit circuit. Check CAN communications between RJB
Low battery voltage <9 and instrument cluster. Check battery is in
volts serviceable condition and fully charged
B100B-67 Column Lock Ground

Authorisation - Signal Algorithm based failure- If a non start issue has not been identified,
incorrect after event signal is incorrect after the clear the DTC and check vehicle starts correctly.
event If a non start issue has been identified run the
Instrument cluster power manufacturers approved diagnostic system Start
and ground supply circuits - Authorisation Application. Carry out any pinpoint
short, open circuit tests associated with this DTC using the
LS CAN fault manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer
RJB power and ground to the electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB
supply circuits - short, open power and ground supply circuits for short, open
circuit circuit and instrument cluster power and ground
Vehicle speed present when supply circuits for short, open circuit. Check CAN
attempting to power ESCL communications between RJB and instrument
Engine speed present when cluster. Check for invalid vehicle speed signal
attempting to power ESCL from ABS/instrument cluster gateway. Check for
PowerMode status > 4 when invalid engine speed signal from ECM/instrument
attempting to perform lock cluster gateway. Check for invalid signal from
action CJB
www.JagDocs.com
B100B-87 Column Lock Ground
Authorisation - Missing Instrument cluster power Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
message and ground supply circuits - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LS CAN fault and check RJB power and ground supply circuits
RJB power and ground for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
circuit circuit. Check CAN communications between RJB
and instrument cluster
B100C-67 Column Lock Supply

Authorisation - Signal Instrument cluster power Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
incorrect after event and ground supply circuits - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LS CAN fault and check CJB power and ground supply circuits
CJB power and ground for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
circuit circuit. Check CAN communications between CJB
Vehicle speed present when and instrument cluster. Check for invalid vehicle
attempting to power ESCL speed signal from ABS/instrument cluster
Engine speed present when gateway. Check for invalid engine speed signal
attempting to power ESCL from ECM/instrument cluster gateway. Check for
PowerMode status > 4 when invalid signal from CJB
attempting to perform lock
action
B100C-87 Column Lock Supply

Authorisation - Missing Instrument cluster power Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
message and ground supply circuits - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
LS CAN fault and check CJB power and ground supply circuits
www.JagDocs.com
CJB power and ground for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
circuit circuit. Check CAN communications between CJB
and instrument cluster
B100D-62 Column Lock

Authorisation - Signal CAN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
compare failure ESCL power and ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
supply circuits - short, open system. Check CAN communication between
circuit Electronic Steering Column Lock and instrument
Instrument cluster power cluster. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and ground supply circuits - and check Electronic Steering Column Lock power
short, open circuit and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit
Incorrect ESCL or instrument and Instrument cluster power and ground supply
cluster installed circuits for short, open circuit. Check correct
Target SID synchronization Electronic Steering Column Lock and instrument
error following cluster installed. Perform the Immobilisation
re-programming application from the Set-up menu using the
Noise/EMC related error manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
CAN network for interference/EMC related issues

Authorisation - Signal Algorithm based failure- If the customer has not reported a non start
plausibility failure signal plausibility failure issue, clear the DTC and check vehicle starts
CAN fault correctly. If a non start issue has been reported
ESCL power and ground run the manufacturers approved diagnostic
supply circuits - short, open system Start Authorisation Application and
circuit follow the actions required for this DTC. Carry
Instrument cluster power out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
and ground supply circuits - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short, open circuit system. Check CAN communication between
Electronic Steering Column Lock and instrument
cluster (check transmission out speed, vehicle
speed, engine speed, gear position and
powermode signals to Electronic Steering
Column Lock). Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check Electronic Steering Column
Lock power and ground supply circuits for short,
open circuit and Instrument cluster power and
ground supply circuits for short, open circuit

Authorisation - Missing Missing message Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and unlock car using
message - Missing CAN fault the key fob and retest. Check for related DTCs
message No response from electric and refer to the relevant DTC index
steering column lock control If the fault is cleared, notify the customer that
module, instrument cluster, the steering column lock may fail to unlock if the
central junction box vehicle is parked with a high steering angle or
www.JagDocs.com
Battery voltage at electric with the road wheel against a curb. If the
steering column lock control column lock is failing to disengage, the customer
module too low may be able to rectify this by rotating the
Electric steering column lock steering wheel while pressing the engine start
control module, instrument button
cluster, central junction box If fault persists, complete a CAN network
fault integrity test using the manufacturers approved
diagnostic system. Alternatively, refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits
between the central junction box, the instrument
cluster and the electronic steering column lock.
the central junction box, the instrument cluster
and the electronic steering column lock power
and ground supply circuits for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required. Clear
DTC, perform an on demand self-test and retest
If fault persists, check that the vehicle battery
supply voltage is between 9-16 volts. Rectify as
required

Authorisation - Battery voltage at electric Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and unlock car using
Component internal steering column lock control the key fob and retest
failure module too low If fault persists, check that the vehicle battery
Torque load on steering supply voltage is between 9-16 volts. Rectify as
column required
CAN fault Ensure the column lock bolt movement is not
Electric steering column lock obstructed or restricted (the parked position of
control module - Internal the road wheels may be exerting a turning force
www.JagDocs.com
failure through the steering column, preventing the lock

from releasing. The steering wheel may need to
be held against the force to allow the column
lock to release). Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and
unlock car using the key fob and retest
If fault persists, complete a CAN network
integrity test using the manufacturers approved
diagnostic system. Alternatively, refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN circuits
between the central junction box, the instrument
cluster and the electronic steering column lock.
the central junction box, the instrument cluster
and the electronic steering column lock power
and ground supply circuits for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high
resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required. Clear
If fault persists, check and install a new electric
steering column lock control module as required
B1024-87 Start Control Unit -

Missing message Smart card docking station Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
failure - slave node not DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
responding system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the smart card docking station LIN
circuit for short, open circuit. Suspect the smart
card docking station, check and install a new
docking station as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top
of the DTC Index
B1046-11 Front Fog Lamp Control

Switch - Circuit short to Fog lamp switch circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground short to ground fog lamp switch circuit for short to ground
B1046-15 Front Fog Lamp Control

Switch - Circuit short to Fog lamp switch circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery or open short to power, open circuit fog lamp switch circuit for short to power, open
circuit
B1048-11 Brake Fluid Level Switch

- Circuit short to ground Brake fluid level switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - short to ground brake fluid level switch circuit for short to ground
www.JagDocs.com
B10A0-11 Wiper/ Washer Switch -
Circuit short to ground Wash/wipe circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground wash/wipe circuit for short to ground
B10A0-15 Wiper/ Washer Switch -

Circuit short to battery Wash/wipe circuit - short to Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
or open power, open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check wash/wipe circuit for short to power,
open circuit

Circuit short to ground Master lighting switch circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
- short to ground master lighting switch circuit for short to ground

Circuit short to battery Master lighting switch circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
or open - short to power, open DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check master lighting switch circuit for short
B112B-87 Steering Wheel Module -

Missing message Steering wheel module Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
failure - slave node not DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
responding system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the clockspring LIN circuit for short,
open circuit. Suspect the clockspring, check and
install a new clockspring as required, refer to the
new module/component installation note at the
top of the DTC Index
www.JagDocs.com
B115C-7A Transfer Fuel Pump -

Fluid leak or seal failure Fuel pump system fault Check for fuel system jet pump or jet pump fuel
level sensor fault
B1A85-15 Ambient Light Sensor -

Circuit short to battery Autolamp sensor circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
or open short to power, open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check autolamp sensor circuit for short to
power, open circuit
B1B01-00 Key Transponder - No

sub type information Operator only cycles one key Ensure all keys to be programmed are available.
During transponder key Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check
programming the instrument power and ground supply circuits to all relevant
cluster, smartcard docking modules. Replace faulty key and repeat key
station or key loses programming. Check CAN network for
power/circuit failure interference/EMC related issues
Faulty key during key
programming
Unable to program
transponder key due to
noise/EMC related error
B1B01-05 Key Transponder -

System programming Error following SCU Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
failures replacement DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Smartcard docking station system. Perform the Immobilisation application
power and ground supply from the Set-up menu using the manufacturer
circuits - short, open circuit approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
LIN fault electrical circuit diagrams and check smartcard
Instrument cluster power docking station power and ground supply circuits
and ground supply circuits - for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
short, open circuit power and ground supply circuits for short, open
circuit. Check LIN communications between
smartcard docking station and instrument cluster
B1B01-51 Key Transponder - Not

programmed LIN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Instrument cluster power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and ground supply circuits - system. Check LIN communications between
short, open circuit smartcard docking station and instrument
Key fault cluster. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Smartcard docking station and check smartcard docking station power and
power and ground supply ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and
circuits - short, open circuit instrument cluster power and ground supply
Attempted to program a non circuits for short, open circuit. Confirm
www.JagDocs.com
default key transponder key operation. Ensure new keys are
from a known source
B1B01-55 Key Transponder - Not

configured Un-programmed key Confirm the correct keys are used
inserted in SCU2
A non default key inserted
during key programming

Signal compare failure Instrument cluster power Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
and ground supply circuits - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Incorrect instrument cluster circuits for short, open circuit. Check correct
or smartcard docking station instrument cluster and smartcard docking station
installed are installed. Perform the Immobilisation
Error during or following the application from the Set-Up menu using the
Write Target SID routine manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
Noise/EMC related error CAN network for interference/EMC related issues

Signal plausibility LIN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
failure Instrument cluster power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Transponder key fault cluster. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
www.JagDocs.com
Error occurred during circuits for short, open circuit. Confirm
transponder key transponder key operation. Repeat transponder
programming key programming

Signal incorrect after LIN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
event Instrument cluster power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Transponder key fault cluster. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Another key in close circuits for short, open circuit. Confirm
proximity transponder key operation. Confirm single key
Instrument cluster in operation. Ensure instrument cluster in correct
incorrect programming state mode i.e. Auto Enable, Key erase etc. Ensure
Attempted to program a non new keys are from a known source. Check for
default key intermittent power and ground to instrument
Instrument cluster Cold init cluster. Design condition - advise customer of
whilst in Ignition On state, starting sequence. Design condition - determine
without key being present in customer transponder key usage
the SCU
Race condition caused by
closing driver door and
pressing the start button
within a small time window
Passive Key search function
from last door closed and
key inserted in the SCU

Missing message LIN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Instrument cluster power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Smartcard docking station cluster. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
power and ground supply and check smartcard docking station power and
circuits - short, open circuit ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and
instrument cluster power and ground supply
circuits for short, open circuit
B1B33-05 Target I.D. Transfer -

System programming CAN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
failures ECM ignition, power and DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short, open circuit ECM and instrument cluster. Refer to electrical
www.JagDocs.com
Instrument cluster power circuit diagrams and check ECM ignition, power
ECM or instrument cluster circuits for short, open circuit. Perform the
incorrectly configured Immobilisation application from the Set-up menu
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system

Signal compare failure CAN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ECM ignition, power and DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Incorrect ECM or instrument circuits for short, open circuit. Check correct ECM
cluster installed and instrument cluster installed. Perform the
Synchronisation error Immobilisation application from the Set-up menu
following re-programming using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Noise/EMC related error system. Check CAN network for interference/EMC
related issues
B1B33-64 Target identification

transfer - Signal Algorithm based failure - If the customer has not reported a non start
plausibility failure signal plausibility failure issue, clear the DTC and check vehicle starts
CAN fault correctly. If a non start has been reported run
ECM ignition, power and the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
ground supply circuits - Start Authorisation Application and follow the
short, open circuit actions required for this DTC. Carry out any
Instrument cluster power pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
www.JagDocs.com
and ground supply circuits - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.

short, open circuit Check CAN communications between ECM and
electronic steering column instrument cluster. Refer to electrical circuit
lock status incomplete diagrams and check ECM ignition, power and
Race condition caused by ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and
closing driver door and instrument cluster power and ground supply
pressing the start button circuits for short, open circuit. Check electronic
within a small time window steering column lock operation. Advise customer
of starting sequence and to allow time to elapse
between closing door and pressing start button

Missing message CAN fault Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ECM ignition, power and DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Low battery voltage circuits for short, open circuit. Check battery is
in serviceable condition and is fully charged,
check terminals etc
B1C32-77 Steering Column Tilt

Solenoid - Commanded TILT axis fails to move Check for restricted/jammed steering column
position not reachable minimum distance within motor mechanism. Refer to the electrical circuit
allotted time period. Motion diagrams and check steering column motor
may have been prohibited UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit for short, open circuit
due to motor jamming,
stalling or solenoid pin not
engaging

Solenoid - Unexpected TELE axis moves when it Check for stuck/jammed solenoid/switch. Refer
operation has not been commanded to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to. Motion may have steering column motor UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit
occurred due to solenoid pin for short, open circuit
not disengaging or
mechanism has been
jammed on, whilst REACH
axis has been commanded
to move

Feedback Signal - Circuit Steering column tilt Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to battery feedback signal circuit - steering column tilt feedback signal circuit for
short to power short to power
www.JagDocs.com
Feedback Signal - Circuit Steering column tilt Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
short to ground or open feedback signal circuit - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
short to ground, open circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check steering column tilt feedback signal
circuit for short to ground, open circuit
B1C34-77 Steering Column

Telescope Solenoid - REACH axis fails to move Check for restricted/jammed steering column
Commanded position minimum distance within motor mechanism. Refer to the electrical circuit
not reachable allotted time period. Motion diagrams and check steering column motor
may have been prohibited UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit for short, open circuit
due to motor jamming,
stalling or solenoid pin not
engaging

Telescope Solenoid - REACH axis moves when it Check for stuck/jammed solenoid/switch. Refer
Unexpected operation has not been commanded to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to. Motion may have steering column motor UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit
occurred due to solenoid pin for short, open circuit
not disengaging or
mechanism has been
jammed on, whilst TILT axis
has been commanded to
move

Telescope Feedback Steering column TELE Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Signal - Circuit short to feedback signal circuit - steering column TELE feedback signal circuit for
battery short to power short to power
www.JagDocs.com

Telescope Feedback Steering column TELE Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Signal - Circuit short to feedback signal circuit - DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
ground or open short to ground, open circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check steering column TELE feedback signal

Tilt/Telescope Switch - Steering column adjust Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to ground switch circuit - short to steering column adjust switch circuit for short to
ground ground
B1C48-11 Flash to Pass Switch -

Circuit short to ground Main beam flash switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - short to ground main beam flash switch circuit for short to
ground
B1C48-15 Flash to Pass Switch -

Circuit short to battery Main beam flash switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
or open circuit - short to power, DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
open circuit system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check main beam flash switch circuit for
B1C53-11 Front Wiper Intermittent

Data - Circuit short to Intermittent wipe switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground circuit - short to ground intermittent wipe switch circuit for short to
ground
B1C53-15 Front Wiper Intermittent

Data - Circuit short to Intermittent wipe switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
battery or open circuit - short to power, DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check intermittent wipe switch circuit for
B1D36-11 Turn Indicator Switch -

Circuit short to ground Direction indicator switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - short to ground direction indicator switch circuit for short to
ground
B1D36-15 Turn Indicator Switch -

Circuit short to battery Direction indicator switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
or open circuit - short to power, DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
and check direction indicator switch circuit for
www.JagDocs.com
B1D37-11 Wiper Switch
Connection Circuit - Flick wipe switch circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to ground short to ground flick wipe switch circuit for short to ground
B1D37-15 Wiper Switch

Connection Circuit - Flick wipe switch circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Circuit short to battery short to power, open circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
or open system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check flick wipe switch circuit for short to
power, open circuit
C1110-64 Power steering

Calibration Data - Signal Invalid VAPS curve loaded Re-configure the instrument cluster as new to
plausibility failure download VAPS curve data
P0635-11 Power Steering Control

Circuit - Circuit short to VAPS ignition supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground - short to ground VAPS ignition supply circuit for short to ground

Circuit - Circuit short to VAPS ignition supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery - short to power VAPS ignition supply circuit for short to power

Circuit - Circuit open VAPS ignition supply circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
- open circuit VAPS ignition supply circuit for open circuit

Circuit - Signal First valid received speed Check ABS module for DTCs and refer to relevant
amplitude > maximum value above threshold DTC Index
www.JagDocs.com

Circuit - Data memory Data memory failure Re-configure the instrument cluster as new to
failure download VAPS curve data

Communication Bus - Bus Off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Bus off DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Carry out CAN network integrity test
and check HS CAN network to instrument cluster

Communication Bus - Bus Off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Bus off DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Carry out CAN network integrity test
and check MS CAN network to instrument cluster

With ECM/PCM “A” - No Loss of CAN communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
sub type information with ECM DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check ECM for DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index

with TCM - No sub type Loss of CAN communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
information with TCM DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check TCM for DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index

With Gear Shift Module Loss of CAN communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- No sub type with transmission shift DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information module system. Check transmission shift module for
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index

With Cruise Control Loss of CAN communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Module - No sub type with speed control module DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system. Check speed control module for DTCs
and refer to the relevant DTC Index

With Anti-Lock Brake Loss of CAN communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
System (ABS) Control with ABS module DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - No sub type system. Check ABS module for DTCs and refer to
information the relevant DTC Index
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Integrated
Audio Module (IAM)
Integrated Audio Module (IAM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Integrated Audio Module (IAM). For

B1B69-15 12 Volt supply circuit
- Circuit short to Antenna power supply Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
battery or open circuit - short to battery, DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
high resistance system.
B1B69-11 12 Volt supply circuit

- Circuit short to Antenna power supply Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
ground circuit - short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
the antenna power supply circuit for short to ground
B1D19-16 Compact Disc Unit -

Circuit voltage below Circuit voltage below Suspect the integrated audio module, check and
threshold threshold install a new module as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index

Commanded position Commanded position not Suspect the integrated audio module, check and
not reachable reachable install a new module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index
www.JagDocs.com
No operation No operation Suspect the integrated audio module, check and
the DTC Index

short to ground Front driver speaker circuits Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
test front driver speaker circuits for short to ground

short to battery Front driver speaker circuits Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- short to power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test front driver speaker circuits for short to power

resistance below Front driver speaker circuits Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
threshold - resistance below DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold system
B1A01-1B Speaker #1 - Circuit

resistance above Front driver speaker circuits Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
threshold - resistance above DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold system
B1A01-1C Speaker #1 - Circuit

voltage out of range Front driver speaker circuits Suspect the integrated audio module. Check and
- voltage out of range. install a new module as required, refer to the new
www.JagDocs.com
Power IC failure internal to module/component installation note at the top of

the integrated audio the DTC Index

short to ground Front passenger speaker Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
circuits - short to ground DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test front passenger speaker circuits for short to
ground

short to battery Front passenger speaker Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
circuits - short to power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test front passenger speaker circuits for short to
power

resistance below Front passenger speaker Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
threshold circuits - resistance below DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold system

resistance above Front passenger speaker Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
threshold circuits - resistance above DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
threshold system

voltage out of range Front passenger speaker Suspect the integrated audio module. Check and
circuits - voltage out of install a new module as required, refer to the new
range. Power IC failure module/component installation note at the top of
internal to the integrated the DTC Index
audio

short to ground Rear left speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
test rear left speaker circuits for short to ground

short to battery Rear left speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
short to power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test rear left speaker circuits for short to power
www.JagDocs.com
resistance below Rear left speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
threshold resistance below threshold DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system

resistance above Rear left speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
threshold resistance above threshold DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system

voltage out of range Rear left speaker circuits - Suspect the integrated audio module. Check and
voltage out of range. Power install a new module as required, refer to the new
IC failure internal to the module/component installation note at the top of
integrated audio the DTC Index

short to ground Rear right speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
test rear right speaker circuits for short to ground

short to battery Rear right speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
short to power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test rear right speaker circuits for short to power

resistance below Rear right speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
threshold resistance below threshold DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
www.JagDocs.com
system

open Rear right speaker circuits - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
resistance above threshold DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system

voltage out of range Rear right speaker circuits - Suspect the integrated audio module. Check and
voltage out of range. Power install a new module as required, refer to the new
IC failure internal to the module/component installation note at the top of
integrated audio the DTC Index
B1A56-13 Antenna - Circuit

open Antenna circuit - open Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
circuit DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
check antenna circuit for open circuit
B1D78-11 Auxiliary Input -

Circuit short to Auxiliary input circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
test Auxiliary input circuits for short to ground

Circuit short to Auxiliary input circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
battery short to power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test Auxiliary input circuits for short to power

Circuit open Auxiliary input circuit - high Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
resistance DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test Auxiliary input circuits for high resistance
B1D79-11 Microphone Input -

Circuit short to Microphone input circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
test microphone input circuits for short to ground

Circuit short to Microphone input circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
battery short to power DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test microphone input circuits for short to power
www.JagDocs.com
Circuit open Microphone input circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
high resistance DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
test microphone input circuits for high resistance
B1134-11 Phone Input - Circuit

short to ground Phone input circuit - short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
to ground phone input circuits for short to ground

short to battery Phone input circuit - short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
to power phone input circuits for short to power

open Phone input circuit - high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
resistance phone input circuits for high resistance

Not Complete - No Car configuration data not Check RJB for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
sub type information received DTC Index

Configuration Incorrect car configuration Check RJB for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
Incompatible - No sub data received DTC Index. Check/amend Car Configuration File
type information using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system

Internal electronic Internal electronic failure Suspect the integrated audio module, install a new
failure module as required, refer to the new module
www.JagDocs.com

configured Incorrect car configuration Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
data received approved diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test.
If the DTC remains suspect the integrated audio
module, refer to the new module installation note
at the top of the DTC Index

Missing message Missing message Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system. Check integrated audio
module for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index. Check
CAN network integrity using the manufacturer

Component or system Component or system over Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
over temperature temperature Clear DTC and re-test/monitor condition

Signal compare failure Mis-match in battery Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
voltage, of 2 volts or more, DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
between integrated audio system
module and RJB
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Integrated
Control Panel (FCIMB)
Integrated Control Panel (ICP)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Integrated Control Panel (ICP). For

B1012-23 Heated Windshield Switch
- Signal stuck low Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
down/jammed install a new integrated control panel as required
Integrated control
panel failure
B1013-23 Heater Rear Defog Switch

- Signal stuck low Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
Integrated control
panel failure
B1014-23 Recirculation Switch -

Signal stuck low Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
Integrated control
panel failure
B1015-23 Screen On/Off Switch -

Integrated control
panel failure
www.JagDocs.com
B1016-23 Status Switch - Signal
stuck low Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
Integrated control
panel failure
B1017-23 Left Temperature Decrease

Switch - Signal stuck low Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
Integrated control
panel failure

Decrease Switch - Signal Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
stuck low down/jammed install a new integrated control panel as required
Integrated control
panel failure
B1019-23 Left Temperature Increase

Integrated control
panel failure
B101A-23 Right Temperature

Increase Switch - Signal Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
stuck low down/jammed install a new integrated control panel as required
Integrated control
panel failure
B101B-23 Defrost Switch - Signal

www.JagDocs.com
Integrated control
panel failure
B101C-23 Seek Up Switch - Signal

Integrated control
panel failure
B101D-23 Seek Down Switch - Signal

Integrated control
panel failure
B101E-23 Air Conditioning Mode

Integrated control
panel failure
B101F-23 Eject Switch - Signal stuck

low Button stuck Check for stuck down/jammed button. Check and
Integrated control
panel failure
B1020-23 Load Switch - Signal stuck

Integrated control
panel failure
B1021-23 Source Switch - Signal

Integrated control
panel failure
B1022-23 Audio On/Off Switch -

Integrated control
panel failure
www.JagDocs.com
B11A9-23 Tone Button - Signal stuck
Integrated control
panel failure
B121F-23 Climate Switch - Signal

Integrated control
panel failure

Communication Bus - Bus Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
off using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U0140-00 Lost Communication With

Body Control Module - No Missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
sub type information from CJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system

Body Control Module "B" - Missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
No sub type information from RJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system

Instrument Panel Cluster Missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated to this DTC
(IPC) Control Module - No from instrument using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
sub type information cluster

Information Center "A" - Missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
www.JagDocs.com
No sub type information from information and using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
entertainment control
module

Software Incompatibility - Invalid car Re-configure the integrated control panel as new.
No sub type information configuration data Clear DTC and re-test, if DTC remains suspect the
received integrated control panel. Check and install a new
integrated control panel as required, refer to the new
DTC Index
U3000-41 Control Module - General

checksum failure Checksum error, Suspect the integrated control panel, check and
internal module install a new integrated control panel as required,
failure refer to the new module/component installation note
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
NOTES:
It is advisable not to use a cellular phone or to have a cellular phone in close proximity when working on the restraints
control module or associated systems
Given the legal implications of a restraints system failure, harness repairs to Air Bag module circuits are not acceptable.
Where the text refers to "REPAIR the circuit", this will normally mean the replacement of a harness.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the occupant classification system, for
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20
Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1193-53 Crash Event
Storage Full and Crash event occurred Clear diagnostic trouble code and re-test
Locked -
Deactivated
B1A54-01 Occupant Belt
Tension Sensor - General electrical failure Clear diagnostic trouble code and re-test. If the problem
General Electrical persists, check and install a new safety belt tension
Failure sensor as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval
programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a
new module/component

Tension Sensor - General signal failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check safety
General signal belt tension and mat pressure sensor circuits for short to
failure each other
www.JagDocs.com
Tension Sensor - Safety belt tension Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check safety
Circuit short to sensor voltage reference belt tension sensor voltage reference and signal circuits
ground or signal circuit - short for short to ground
to ground

Circuit short to sensor voltage reference belt tension sensor voltage reference and signal circuits
battery or signal circuit - short for short to power
to power

Circuit open sensor voltage reference belt tension sensor voltage reference and signal circuits
or signal circuit - open for open circuit
circuit
B1A62-02 Pressure Sensor -

General signal General signal failure Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check safety
failure belt tension and mat pressure sensor circuits for short to
each other

Circuit short to Mat pressure sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check mat
ground voltage reference or pressure sensor voltage reference and signal circuits for
signal circuits - short to short to ground
ground

Circuit short to Mat pressure sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check mat
www.JagDocs.com
battery voltage reference, pressure sensor voltage reference, ground and signal
ground or signal circuits circuits for short to power
- short to power

Circuit open Mat pressure sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check mat
voltage reference or pressure sensor voltage reference and signal circuits for
signal circuit - open open circuit
circuit
B1A62-7B Pressure Sensor -

Low fluid level Low fluid level - bladder Check and install new bladder as required. Refer to the
damaged warranty policy and procedures manual, or determine if
any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module/component

Communication Bus off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN
Bus - Bus off network for short, open circuit. Carry out the CAN
network integrity test using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
U0151-00 Lost
Communication Restraints control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power
With Restraints module missing and ground supplies to restraints control module. Carry
Control Module - message out CAN network integrity test using the manufacturer
No sub type approved diagnostic system
information
Module Software Master car configuration Check correct occupancy seat module is installed for
Incompatibility - file ID does not vehicle specification. Check rear junction box for related
No sub type correspond diagnostic trouble codes and refer to relevant diagnostic
information trouble code index

Main Software - Main software not Check and install a new occupancy seat module as
Not programmed programmed required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is
in operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component
U201A-51 Control Module

Main Calibration Main calibration data not Check and install a new occupancy seat module as
Data - Not programmed required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
programmed manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is
module/component
www.JagDocs.com
System Internal Occupancy seat module Check and install a new occupancy seat module as
Failures internal electronic failure required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
module/component

Missing calibration This diagnostic trouble Check the following criteria have all been achieved:
code is set if a 'calibrate Ignition status set to RUN/START. Verify seat is always
occupancy seat module empty after power-up before re-zero is requested. The
empty seat offset' occupancy seat module has gone through the seat
routine is requested and assembly plant calibration. No collision event received
fails due to one of the from the restraints control module during the current
pre-conditions to ignition cycle. No faults present in the current ignition
execute the routine cycle. The trigger message for calibrate empty seat
offset has been received from the diagnostic tool.
Occupancy seat module has enough time to begin
classification. Temperature is between 6C (42F) and 36C
(97F)

Circuit voltage Circuit voltage below Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable
below threshold threshold condition. Check integrity of charging system

Circuit voltage Circuit voltage above Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable
above threshold threshold condition. Check integrity of charging system
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Parking Aid
Module (PAM)
Parking Aid Control Module (PACM)
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
Physical damage to the sensor (impact damage or scratched sensor surface) must NOT be changed under warranty.
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Parking Aid Control Module (PACM). For
For additional information, refer to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1B36-01 Front Right Outer
Sensor - General Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the front
Electrical Failure Front right outer sensor bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
- Component internal circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
failure power, open circuit. Repair or replace any wiring
harness as required
Check the connector for integrity and damage, then
re-connect sensor to confirm connection
Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
clear the DTC and run the on demand self test
If the problem persists remove the suspect sensor
from the bumper. Inspect the sensor connector for
signs of water ingress/corrosion. Exchange the
suspect sensor with another sensor within the
bumper that is not reporting a fault. Clear the DTC
and run the on demand self test to confirm if the
fault code now appears for the new position of the
suspect sensor. Renew the faulty sensor
www.JagDocs.com
Sensor - Circuit short Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the front
to battery bumper harness for damage. Check sensor circuit for
short circuit to power. Repair or replace any wiring
harness as required

Sensor - Component Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the front
internal failure Front right outer sensor bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B38-01 Front Right Inner

www.JagDocs.com
Electrical Failure Front right inner sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
Component internal circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to
harness as required

harness as required

internal failure Front right inner sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
www.JagDocs.com
B1B40-01 Front Left Outer
electrical failure Front left outer sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required

harness as required

www.JagDocs.com
internal failure Front left outer sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B42-01 Front Left Inner Sensor

- General electrical Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the front
failure Front left inner sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required

- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the front
battery bumper harness for damage. Check sensor circuit for
harness as required
www.JagDocs.com
- Component internal Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the front
failure Front left inner sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B44-01 Rear Right Outer

Sensor - General Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
electrical failure Rear Right Outer Sensor bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
www.JagDocs.com


Sensor - Circuit short Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
harness as required

Sensor - Component Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
internal failure Rear Right Outer Sensor bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B46-01 Rear Right Inner

Sensor - General Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
electrical failure Rear Right Inner Sensor bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
www.JagDocs.com

Sensor - Circuit short Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
harness as required

Sensor - Component Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
internal failure Rear Right Inner Sensor bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
www.JagDocs.com

B1B48-01 Rear Left Outer Sensor

- General electrical Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
failure Rear Left Outer Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required

- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
harness as required

- Component internal Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
failure Rear Left Outer Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
www.JagDocs.com
B1B50-01 Rear Left Inner Sensor

- General electrical Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
failure Rear Left Inner Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required

- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
harness as required
www.JagDocs.com


- Component internal Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the rear
failure Rear Left Inner Sensor - bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check sensor
harness as required
B1B54-11 Function LED - Park Aid

- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
ground Switch/LED - Component parking aid LED circuit for short circuit to ground.
internal failure Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
clear the DTC and run the on demand self test. If the
problem persists, suspect the switch/LED
B1B54-12 Function LED - Park Aid

- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
battery Switch/LED - Component parking aid LED circuit for short circuit to power.
internal failure Repair or replace any wiring harness as required
Control Module - Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
Component internal clear the DTC and run the on demand self test. If the
failure problem persists, suspect the switch/LED
B1B57-11 Front Sensors Power

Circuit- Circuit short to Wiring harness fault Check front and rear bumper harness for signs of
ground Control Module - damage and security of connections
Component internal Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
failure parking assist front sensor power circuit and rear
sensor power circuit for short circuit to ground. Repair
or replace any wiring harness as required
problem persists, suspect the control module
www.JagDocs.com
Cycle the ignition off, then on, to power up parking
aid system and check corrective action
B1B58-11 Rear Sensors Power

Circuit - Circuit short Wiring harness fault Check rear and front (if front PDC fitted) bumper
to ground Control Module - harness for signs of damage and security of
Component internal connections
failure Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
parking assist rear sensor power circuit and front
sensor power circuit (if front PDC fitted) for short
circuit to ground. Repair or replace any wiring harness
as required
problem persists, suspect the control module
Cycle the ignition off, then on, to power up parking
aid system and check corrective action
B1C30-73 Disable Switch -

Actuator stuck closed Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
Control Switch - parking assist switch and switch circuit. Repair or
Component internal replace any wiring harness as required
failure Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
problem persists, suspect the control switch
Check the switch function

Communication Bus - Medium speed CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
No sub type failure - bus off parking aid control module medium speed CAN bus
information for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
www.JagDocs.com
open circuit, high resistance, or short circuit between

the paired CAN wires
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
complete a CAN network integrity test
Cycle the ignition off, then on, and check if the DTC
is still logged

Communication Bus Control module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
"A" Off - No sub type communication Bus "A" parking aid control module high speed CAN bus for
information failure - bus off short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit, high resistance, or short circuit between the
paired CAN wires
is still logged

With Body Control Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Module - No sub type communication with power and ground connections to the central junction
information central junction box box. Clear DTC and retest
complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the CAN network
between the central junction box and the parking aid
control module

With Body Control Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Module "B" - No sub communication with power and ground connections to the auxiliary
type information auxiliary junction box junction box. Clear DTC and retest
control module

With Instrument Panel Loss of CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Cluster (IPC) Control communication with power and ground connections to the instrument
Module - No sub type instrument cluster cluster. Clear DTC and retest
information Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
control module
www.JagDocs.com
Module Software Car configuration file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Incompatibility - No stored in parking aid check all other control modules, for related DTCs and
sub type information control module does not refer to the relevant DTC index
match the master car Check the components installed on the vehicle were
configuration file installed by the factory or a dealer
Master car configuration Install the original component or a new one as
file not being required
transmitted by master
control module

From Body Control Invalid data received Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module - No sub type check central junction box, for related DTCs and refer
information to the relevant DTC index
is still logged
Clear the DTC and re-test

From Instrument Panel Invalid data received Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Control Module - No check instrument cluster, for related DTCs and refer
sub type information to the relevant DTC index
is still logged
www.JagDocs.com

From Body Control Invalid data received Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module "B" - No sub check auxiliary junction box, for related DTCs and
type information refer to the relevant DTC index
is still logged

Not Complete - No sub Car configuration file not
NOTE: After updating the car configuration file, set the
type information the same as expected by
ignition to on and wait 30 seconds before clearing the DTCs
the parking aid control
module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
check and update the car configuration file as
required. Clear the DTC and retest

Configuration Parking aid control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Incompatible - No sub module configuration check and up-date the car configuration file as
type information error required. Clear the DTC and re-test

Internal electronic Parking aid control Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
failure module internal failure clear the DTC, cycle the ignition off, then on, and
check if the DTC is still logged
If the DTC is still logged suspect the parking aid
control module

Number - Invalid serial VIN Mismatch, stored Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
data received VIN does not match clear the DTC, cycle the ignition off, then on, and
broadcast VIN check if the DTC is still logged
If the DTC is still logged replace the parking aid
control module
U3003-16 Battery voltage -

Circuit voltage below Circuit voltage below Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
threshold threshold check central junction box, for related DTCs and refer
to the relevant DTC index
Check the vehicle charging system performance to
ensure the voltage regulation is correct
Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
battery care manual. Check battery state of charge
and starting/charging system performance
parking aid control module power and ground circuits
www.JagDocs.com
for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit
Clear the DTC and retest

Circuit voltage above Circuit voltage above Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
threshold threshold check central junction box, for related DTCs and refer
to the relevant DTC index
Check the vehicle charging system performance to
ensure the voltage regulation is correct
Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
open circuit

Signal compare failure Signal compare failure in Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
battery voltage, of 2 check central junction box, for related DTCs and refer
volts or more, between to the relevant DTC index
parking aid control Check the vehicle charging system performance to
module and central ensure the voltage regulation is correct
junction box Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
www.JagDocs.com
open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Pedestrian
Protection System Control Module (PPSCM)
Pedestrian Protection System Control Module (PPSCM)
WARNING: TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST
BE DEPLETED BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY PEDESTRIAN PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT TWO MINUTES. FAILURE TO FOLLOW
THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
account.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Pedestrian Protection System Control
Module (PPSCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the
workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Pedestrian Protection System (501-20C Pedestrian Protection System, Diagnosis and
Testing).

B1001-11 Right Hood Deployment
Control - Circuit short to Right hood deployment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
ground control circuit short circuit check the right hood deployment control circuit
to ground for short circuit to ground. Install a new wiring
harness as necessary. If no wiring harness
fault exists, using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest.
If the fault persists, install a new right hood
deployment control
B1001-12 Right Hood Deployment

Control - Circuit short to Right hood deployment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
battery control circuit short circuit check the right hood deployment control circuit
to power for short circuit to power. Install a new wiring
harness as necessary. If no wiring harness
fault exists, using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, clear the DTCs and retest.
If the fault persists, install a new right hood
deployment control
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Rear
Differential Control Module (RDCM)
Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM)
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals
If the rear differential control module, rear differential actuator or the rear differential are replaced, the on demand self
test (ODST) must be carried out to calibrate the components
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as needed
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the rear differential control module, for
For additional information, refer to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Diagnosis and
Testing).

P0562-00 System Voltage Low -
No sub type Rear differential control Check the battery charge condition, refer to the
information module voltage supply electrical circuit diagrams and check the wiring to
below 9 volts the rear differential control module, repair as
necessary
P0563-00 System Voltage High -

No sub type System voltage high Check engine control module for stored DTCs,
information (supply voltage supply suspect charging system fault. Refer to the
greater than 16 volts) electrical circuit diagrams and check, power and
ground circuit for fault
P0604-00 Internal Control Module

Random Access Memory Rear differential control Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
(RAM) Error - No sub module internal error renew the control module. Refer to the warranty
type information policy and procedures manual, or determine if any
prior approval programme is in operation, prior to
the installation of a new module/component

Read Only Memory Rear differential control Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
(ROM) Error - No sub module internal error renew the control module. Refer to the warranty
type information policy and procedures manual, or determine if any
www.JagDocs.com
prior approval programme is in operation, prior to
P0606-00 Control Module

Processor - No sub type Watchdog reset - internal This is a control module internal check DTC. If no
information control module failure other DTCs are logged and no customer complaint
exists, clear/ignore this DTC. If the problem
persists, renew the control module. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component
P0607-00 Control Module

Performance - No sub Rear differential control Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists,
type information module internal error - renew the control module. Refer to the warranty
charge pump voltage policy and procedures manual, or determine if any
below threshold prior approval programme is in operation, prior to
P0652-00 Sensor Reference

Voltage B Circuit Low - Position sensor supply Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
No sub type below 5.7V the differential actuator sensor position circuit,
information Sensor failure (within repair as necessary. Clear the DTC and retest
actuator) If no circuit problems exist, renew the differential
actuator. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any prior
approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module/component
P0653-00 Sensor Reference

www.JagDocs.com
Voltage B Circuit High - Motor position sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
No sub type supply above 8.3 V the differential actuator hall sensor reference
information Internal control module voltage at the control module or the actuator
failure If voltage is too high, then renew control module.
manual, or determine if any prior approval
programme is in operation, prior to the installation
P0666-00 PCM / ECM / TCM

Internal Temperature Internal electronic control This is a control module internal check DTC. If no
Sensor A Circuit - No unit temperature sensor other DTCs are logged and no customer complaint
sub type information value above 105°C exists, clear this DTC and retest. Check the
security of control module fixings. Check the
module ground connection. Consider environmental
conditions before suspecting the control module. If
the problem persists, renew the control module.
P0702-64 Transmission Control

System Electrical - Implausibility of Check the rear differential oil quantity and
Signal plausibility differential motor specification. Refer to the relevant section of the
failure temperature sensor and workshop manual. Check both temperature sensor
oil temperature sensor circuits and connectors for damage/water ingress,
readout detected repair as necessary. Where available, after vehicle
Motor or oil temperature has been switched off for at least an hour, use the
sensor circuit - short manufacturer approved diagnostic system to read
circuit to ground or power motor temperature and oil temperature sensor
values. Temperature difference should be less than
25°C. Clear the DTC and retest
motor temperature sensor and oil sump
temperature sensors and circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power
P0712-00 Transmission Fluid

Temperature Sensor A Differential actuator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit Low - No sub internal temperature rear differential actuator motor temperature sensor
type information sensor circuit - open circuit for short circuit to ground, open circuit, high
circuit or short circuit to resistance. Clear the DTC and retest. If no circuit
ground problems exist, renew the differential actuator.
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Rear
Junction Box (RJB)
Rear Junction Box (RJB)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Rear Junction Box (RJB). For additional
For additional information, refer to: Communications Network (418-00 Module Communications Network, Diagnosis and
Testing).

P0460-11 Fuel Level Sensor A
Circuit - Circuit short to Fuel level sensor A Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
ground analogue input circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
fuel level sensor A analogue input circuit for short to
ground
P0460-15 Fuel Level Sensor A

Circuit - Circuit short to Fuel level sensor A Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
battery or open analogue input circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to power, open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit fuel level sensor A analogue input circuit for short to
power, open circuit
P0571-12 Brake Switch A Circuit -

Circuit short to battery Footbrake switch digital Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
input signal circuits - footbrake switch digital input signal circuits for
short to power short to power
P1230-12 Fuel Pump Low Speed

Malfunction (VLCM) - High Side output not Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to battery driven - Diagnosis fuel pump delivery module for short to power
feedback indicates
output is short to power
www.JagDocs.com
Malfunction (VLCM) - High Side output not Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to ground driven - Diagnosis fuel pump delivery module for short to ground, open
or open feedback indicates circuit
output is short to

Malfunction (VLCM) - No High Side output not Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
operation driven - Diagnosis using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
feedback indicates Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
output is at open load fuel pump delivery module for short to power, open
or short to power circuit
P1346-11 Fuel Level Sensor B

Circuit - Circuit short to Fuel level sensor B Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
fuel level sensor B analogue input circuit for short to
ground
P1346-15 Fuel Level Sensor B

Circuit - Circuit short to Fuel level sensor B Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
circuit fuel level sensor B analogue input circuit for short to
power, open circuit
P1624-13 Anti-theft System -

Circuit open Anti-theft signal circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
from CJB - open circuit anti-theft signal circuit from CJB for open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
C111A-11 Right Stop Lamp -

Circuit short to ground Right stomp lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
control circuit - short to using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
right stomp lamp control circuit for short to ground

Circuit short to battery Right stomp lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
control circuit - short to right stomp lamp control circuit for short to power
power

Circuit open Right stomp lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
control circuit - open right stomp lamp control circuit for open circuit
circuit
C111B-11 Left Stop Lamp - Circuit

short to ground Left stomp lamp control Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
circuit - short to ground using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
stomp lamp control circuit for short to ground
C111B-13 Left Stop Lamp - Circuit

open Left stomp lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
circuit - open circuit stomp lamp control circuit for open circuit
C1120-11 Reversing lamp - Circuit

short to ground Reverse lamp control Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
reverse lamp control circuit for short to ground

short to battery Reverse lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - short to power reverse lamp control circuit for short to power

open Reverse lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - open circuit reverse lamp control circuit for open circuit

short to battery or open Reverse lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - short circuit to reverse lamp control circuit for short circuit to power,
power, open circuit, high open circuit, high resistance. Repair wiring harness
resistance as required. Clear DTC and retest
www.JagDocs.com
- Not programmed RJB fault Check power and ground supplies to RJB. Check CAN
Low speed CAN fault communications between RJB and instrument
Instrument cluster fault cluster. Check power and ground supplies to
instrument cluster

- Signal compare failure Low speed CAN fault Check CAN communications between RJB and
RJB fault instrument cluster. Check power and ground supplies
Instrument cluster fault to RJB and instrument cluster. Confirm correct
Incorrect module module installed. Re-synchronise ID by
installed re-configuring the RJB as a new module. Check CAN
(RJB/Instrument cluster) network for interference/EMC related issues
Write target SID
following
re-programming

- Circuit/component RJB fault Check power and ground supplies to RJB and
protection time-out Low speed CAN fault instrument cluster. Check CAN communications
Instrument cluster fault between RJB and instrument cluster. Check battery
Low battery voltage <9V is in fully charged and serviceable condition, refer to
the battery care manual
B1026-12 Steering Column Lock -

Circuit short to battery Steering column lock Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground circuit - short to steering column lock ground circuit for short to
power power
www.JagDocs.com

signal protection The checksum of the Check the battery monitoring system and rear
calculation incorrect received LIN frame is parking aid system for DTCs and refer to relevant
incorrect DTC Index
B1087-86 LIN Bus "A" - Signal

invalid The header of the LIN Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
message received is using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
incorrect Check the battery monitoring system and rear
parking aid system for DTCs and refer to relevant
DTC Index

Battery monitoring Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
system LIN circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground, power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery monitoring system LIN circuit for short to
ground, power
B108A-23 Start Button - Signal

stuck low Start/Stop switch digital Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
input signal circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
stuck low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Start/Stop switch digital input signal circuit for short
to ground
B10A1-11 Trailer Tow Detection -

Circuit short to ground Trailer tow detection Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
digital input circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
trailer tow detection digital input circuit for short to
ground
B10AF-12 Blower Fan Relay -

Circuit short to battery High Side output not Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
driven - Diagnosis blower motor supply circuit for short to power
feedback indicates
B10AF-14 Blower Fan Relay -

Circuit short to ground High Side output not Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or open driven - Diagnosis blower motor supply circuit for short to ground, open
feedback indicates circuit
output is short to
www.JagDocs.com
B10AF-93 Blower Fan Relay - No
operation High Side output not Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
driven - Diagnosis using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
output is at open load blower motor supply circuit for short to power, open
or short to power circuit
B10DD-11 Airbag Deployed -

Circuit short to ground Airbag deployed digital Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
input signal circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
airbag deployed digital input signal circuit for short
to ground
B10DD-15 Airbag Deployed -

Circuit short to battery Airbag deployed digital Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
or open input signal circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit airbag deployed digital input signal circuit for short
B10DD-38 Airbag Deployed - Signal

frequency incorrect Signal frequency Check the RCM for related DTCs and refer to the
incorrect relevant DTC Index
B10DE-11 Low Fuel Warning

Switch - Circuit short to Diesel run-dry switch Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
diesel run-dry switch analogue input circuit for short
to ground
www.JagDocs.com
B10DE-15 Low Fuel Warning

Switch - Circuit short to Diesel run-dry switch Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
circuit diesel run-dry switch analogue input circuit for short
B1112-11 Park Aid Ignition -

Circuit short to ground Parking aid ignition Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
supply circuit - short to using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
parking aid ignition supply circuit for short to ground
B1112-12 Park Aid Ignition -

Circuit short to battery Parking aid ignition Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
supply circuit - short to parking aid ignition supply circuit for short to power
power
B1115-11 High Mounted Stop

Lamp Control - Circuit High mounted stop lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
short to ground control circuit - short to using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
high mounted stop lamp control circuit for short to
ground
B1116-11 Left Tail Lamp - Circuit

short to ground Left hand tail lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
hand tail lamp control circuit for short to ground
B1117-11 Right Tail Lamp - Circuit

short to ground Right hand tail lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
right hand tail lamp control circuit for short to
ground
B111A-11 Number Plate Lamps -

Circuit short to ground Right hand or left hand Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
number plate lamp using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
control circuits - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground right hand and left hand number plate lamp control
circuits for short to ground
www.JagDocs.com
Circuit short to battery Right hand or left hand Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
number plate lamp right hand and left hand number plate lamp control
control circuits - short to circuits for short to power
power

Circuit open Right hand or left hand Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
number plate lamp right hand and left hand number plate lamp control
control circuits - open circuits for open circuit
circuit

Circuit short to battery Right or left side licence Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or open plate lamp(s) right side and left side licence plate lamp control
inoperative circuits for short circuit to power, open circuit, high
Right or left side licence resistance. Repair wiring harness as required. Clear
plate lamp control DTC and retest
circuits - short circuit to
power, open circuit, high
resistance
B111D-12 Boot/Trunk Motor Open -

Circuit short to battery Luggage compartment Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
lid latch actuator control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
luggage compartment lid latch actuator control
circuit for short to power
B111D-14 Boot/Trunk Motor Open -

Circuit short to ground Luggage compartment Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
www.JagDocs.com
or open lid latch actuator control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to ground, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
open circuit luggage compartment lid latch actuator control
B111E-11 Boot/Trunk Lamps -

Circuit short to ground Luggage compartment Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
lamp control circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
luggage compartment lamp control circuit for short
to ground

Circuit short to battery Luggage compartment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
lamp control circuit - luggage compartment lamp control circuit for short
short to power to power

Circuit open Luggage compartment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
lamp control circuit - luggage compartment lamp control circuit for open
open circuit circuit

Circuit short to battery Luggage compartment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or open lamp inoperative luggage compartment lamp control circuit for short
Luggage compartment circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair
lamp control circuit - wiring harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
short circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B1123-12 Restraints Ignition

Relay - Circuit short to High Side output not Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
battery driven - diagnosis using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
output is short to power restraints ignition relay output for short to power

Relay - Circuit short to High Side output not Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
ground or open driven - diagnosis using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
output is short to restraints ignition relay output for short to ground,
ground, open circuit open circuit

Relay - No operation High Side output not Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
driven - diagnosis using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
output is at open load restraints ignition relay output for open load or
www.JagDocs.com
or short to power short to power
B1124-11 Lamp Fade Control -

Circuit short to ground Interior lamp fade Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
control circuit - short to interior lamp fade control circuit for short to ground
ground
B1124-12 Lamp Fade Control -

Circuit short to battery Interior lamp fade Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
control circuit - short to interior lamp fade control circuit for short to power
power
B113C-12 Hazard Switch

Illumination - Circuit Hazard switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to battery illumination control hazard switch illumination control circuit for short to
circuit - short to power power
B113C-14 Hazard Switch

Illumination - Circuit Hazard switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to ground or open illumination control hazard switch illumination control circuit for short to
circuit - short to ground, ground, open circuit
open circuit
B113E-12 External Boot/Trunk

Release Switch - Circuit External luggage Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to battery compartment lid release external luggage compartment lid release switch
switch digital input digital input circuit for short to power
circuit - short to power
B113E-23 External Boot/Trunk

Release Switch - Signal External luggage Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
www.JagDocs.com
stuck low compartment lid release using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
switch digital input Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - signal stuck low external luggage compartment lid release switch
digital input circuit for short to ground
B11D9-49 Vehicle Battery -

Internal electronic Vehicle battery Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable
failure damaged/worn out condition using the Midtronics battery tester and
the battery care manual
B11DB-49 Battery Monitoring

Module - Internal Internal electronic Suspect the battery monitoring module. Check and
electronic failure failure install a new module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index
B11DB-87 Battery Monitoring

Module - Missing Battery monitoring Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
message module connector using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
dis-connected/poor If additional DTCs B108783, B108786, B108787 are
connection logged, suspect the RJB. Check and install a new
Battery monitoring RJB as required, refer to the new module/component
module to RJB LIN installation note at the top of the DTC Index. If
circuit - open circuit additional DTCs B108783, B108786, B108787 are
Battery monitoring NOT logged, check for good/clean contact at battery
module to battery monitoring module connector, refer to electrical
positive monitor circuit - circuit diagrams and check battery monitoring
open circuit module to RJB LIN circuit and battery monitoring
Battery monitoring module to battery positive monitor circuit for open
module/RJB failure circuit. Clear DTC and repeat automated diagnostic
procedure using manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. If DTC remains suspect the battery
monitoring module, check and install a new battery
monitoring module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index
B123A-11 Left Front Turn Indicator

- Circuit short to ground Left front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
lamp control circuit - front turn signal lamp control circuit for short to

- Circuit short to battery Left front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
lamp control circuit - front turn signal lamp control circuit for short to
short to power power
www.JagDocs.com
- Circuit open Left front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
lamp control circuit - front turn signal lamp control circuit for open circuit
open circuit

- Circuit short to battery Left front turn signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check left
or open lamp control circuit - front turn signal lamp control circuit for short circuit
short circuit to power, to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair wiring
open circuit, high harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
resistance
B123B-11 Right Front Turn

Indicator - Circuit short Right front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to ground lamp control circuit - right front turn signal lamp control circuit for short
short to ground to ground

Indicator - Circuit short Right front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to battery lamp control circuit - right front turn signal lamp control circuit for short

Indicator - Circuit open Right front turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
lamp control circuit - right front turn signal lamp control circuit for open

Indicator - Circuit short Right front turn signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check right
to battery or open lamp control circuit - front turn signal lamp control circuit for short circuit
www.JagDocs.com

resistance
B1247-11 Left Rear Turn Indicator

- Circuit short to ground Left rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
lamp control circuit - rear turn signal lamp control circuit for short to

- Circuit short to battery Left rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
lamp control circuit - rear turn signal lamp control circuit for short to

- Circuit open Left rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
lamp control circuit - rear turn signal lamp control circuit for open circuit
short to power, open
circuit

- Circuit short to battery Left rear turn signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check left
or open lamp control circuit - rear turn signal lamp control circuit for short circuit
resistance
B1248-11 Right Rear Turn

Indicator - Circuit short Right rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to ground lamp control circuit - right rear turn signal lamp control circuit for short to

Indicator - Circuit short Right rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to battery lamp control circuit - right rear turn signal lamp control circuit for short to

Indicator - Circuit open Right rear turn signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
lamp control circuit - right rear turn signal lamp control circuit for open

Indicator - Circuit short Right rear turn signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check right
to battery or open lamp control circuit - rear turn signal lamp control circuit for short circuit
resistance
www.JagDocs.com
B1261-13 Fuel Flap/Door Release
Switch - Circuit open Fuel filler flap digital Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
input signal circuit - fuel filler flap digital input signal circuit for open
B1A79-11 Rear Fog Lamp - Circuit

short to ground Rear fog lamp control Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
rear fog lamp control circuit for short to ground

short to battery Rear fog lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - short to power rear fog lamp control circuit for short to power

open Rear fog lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
circuit - open circuit rear fog lamp control circuit for open circuit
B1C55-12 Horn Relay - Circuit

short to battery Horn control circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to power horn control circuit for short to power
B1C55-14 Horn Relay - Circuit

short to ground or open Horn control circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
short to ground, open horn control circuit for short to ground, open circuit
circuit
B1C83-12 Rear Defog Relay -

Circuit short to battery High Side output not Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
driven - diagnosis heated rear window power supply circuit for short to
www.JagDocs.com
feedback indicates power

B1C83-14 Rear Defog Relay -

Circuit short to ground High Side output not Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
or open driven - diagnosis heated rear window power supply circuit for short to
feedback indicates ground, open circuit
output is short to
B1C83-93 Rear Defog Relay - No

operation High Side output not Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
driven - diagnosis using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
output is at open load heated rear window power supply circuit for open
or short to power load and short to power
B1C91-12 Fuel Flap/Door Lock

Relay Coil Circuit - Fuel filler flap locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to battery motor control circuit - fuel filler flap locking motor control circuit for short
B1C91-14 Fuel Flap/Door Lock

Relay Coil Circuit - Fuel filler flap locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit short to ground motor control circuit - fuel filler flap locking motor control circuit for short
or open short to ground, open to ground, open circuit
circuit
B1D35-12 Hazard Switch - Circuit

short to battery Hazard warning lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
switch digital input hazard warning lamp switch digital input circuit for
circuit - short to power short to power
B1D35-23 Hazard Switch - Signal

stuck low Hazard warning lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
switch digital input using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - signal stuck low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
hazard warning lamp switch digital input circuit for
short to ground
U0019-88 Low Speed CAN

Communication Bus - Bus off Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
Bus off using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system

With Body Control No sub type information Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
Module - No sub type using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
information
www.JagDocs.com
With Instrument Panel No sub type information Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
Cluster (IPC) Control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Module - No sub type
information
With Parking Assist No sub type information Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
Control Module "A" - No using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
sub type information
With HVAC Control No sub type information Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
Module - No sub type using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
information
With Remote Function No sub type information Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
Actuation - No sub type using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
information
Software Incompatibility Calibration/parameter Suspect the RJB. Check and install a new RJB as
- Calibration/parameter memory failure required, refer to the new module/component
memory failure installation note at the top of the DTC Index
U1000-00 Solid State Driver

Protection Active -Driver No sub type information Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC
Disabled - No sub type using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
information
Failure - Internal Internal electronic Suspect the RJB. Check and install a new RJB as
electronic failure failure required, refer to the new module/component
www.JagDocs.com

Internal electronic Internal electronic Suspect the RJB. Check and install a new RJB as
failure failure required, refer to the new module/component

configured Not configured Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Remote
Keyless Entry Module (RFA)
Remote Keyless Entry Module (RFA)

CAUTIONS:
Diagnosis by substitution from a donor vehicle is NOT acceptable. Substitution of control modules does not guarantee
confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle
When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor kit, part number
3548-1358-00
NOTES:
warranty policy and procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the remote keyless entry module, for
For additional information, refer to: Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Module (419-10 Multifunction Electronic Modules, Diagnosis
and Testing).

B102B-00 Passive Key - No sub
type information Response Error - general Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure system, clear all passive keys, re-learn all passive
keys
B10C1-00 Left Front Unlock Pull

Switch - No sub type No power supply to door Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
information handle DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Switch circuit open, or system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
short circuit to power check the power supply to the door handle. Check
the switch circuit is not open circuit or short to
power. Repair wiring as required
B10C1-24 Left Front Unlock Pull

Switch - Signal stuck Signal stuck high - button Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
high stuck in active position DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check for stuck left front unlock switch.
left front unlock switch circuit for short to ground
www.JagDocs.com
B10C2-00 Left Rear Unlock Pull
B10C2-24 Left Rear Unlock Pull

system. Check for stuck left rear unlock switch.
left rear unlock switch circuit for short to ground
B10C3-00 Right Front Unlock Pull

B10C3-24 Right Front Unlock Pull

system. Check for stuck right front unlock switch.
right front unlock switch circuit for short to ground
B10C4-00 Right Rear Unlock Pull

www.JagDocs.com
B10C4-24 Right Rear Unlock Pull

system. Check for stuck right rear unlock switch.
right front unlock switch circuit for short to ground
B10C5-24 Trunk Unlock Pull

system. Check for stuck luggage compartment lid
unlock switch. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check luggage compartment lid unlock
switch circuit for short to ground
B10C6-1F Exterior Trunk Antenna

- Circuit intermittent Circuit intermittent - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
general electrical error DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
check exterior luggage compartment antenna
circuits for short to ground, power, open circuit
B10C7-1F Interior Trunk Antenna

check interior luggage compartment antenna circuits
for short to ground, power, open circuit
B10C8-1F Interior Center

Antenna - Circuit Circuit intermittent - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
intermittent general electrical error DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
check interior center antenna circuits for short to
ground, power, open circuit
B10C9-1F Interior Front Antenna

check interior front antenna circuits for short to
www.JagDocs.com
ground, power, open circuit
B10CA-1F Left Rear Door Handle

check left rear door handle antenna circuits for short
to ground, power, open circuit
B10CB-1F Right Rear Door Handle

check right rear door handle antenna circuits for
short to ground, power, open circuit
B10CC-24 Left Front Latch Clutch

Switch - Signal stuck Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck left front door latch clutch switch.
high stuck in active position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
left front door latch clutch switch circuit for short to
ground
B10CD-24 Left Rear Latch Clutch

Switch - Signal stuck Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck left rear door latch clutch switch.
ground
B10CE-24 Right Front Latch

Clutch Switch - Signal Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck right front door latch clutch switch.
stuck high stuck in active position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
www.JagDocs.com

ground
B10CF-24 Right Rear Latch Clutch

Switch - Signal stuck Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck right rear door latch clutch switch.
ground
B10D1-24 Left Front Lock Button

- Signal stuck high Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck left front door handle lock switch.
stuck in active position Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground
B10D2-24 Left Rear Lock Button -

Signal stuck high Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck left rear door handle lock switch.
ground
B10D3-24 Right Front Lock

Button - Signal stuck Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck right front door handle lock switch.
ground
B10D4-24 Right Rear Lock Button

- Signal stuck high Signal stuck high - button Check for stuck right rear door handle lock switch.
ground

Communication Bus - No subtype information Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
No subtype information DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Carry out CAN network integrity test using

With Body Control Missing message from Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Module - No subtype CJB DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system. Carry out CAN network integrity test using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer
to the electrical circuit diagrams and check power
and ground supplies to CJB
www.JagDocs.com
With Body Control Missing message from Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Module "B" - No RJB DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
subtype information system. Carry out CAN network integrity test using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer
and ground supplies to RJB

With Instrument Panel Missing message from Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Cluster (IPC) Control instrument cluster DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - No subtype system. Carry out CAN network integrity test using
information the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer
and ground supplies to instrument cluster

Module Software Invalid configuration Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
Incompatibility - No message is received approved diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and
subtype information retest. If the DTC is still logged suspect the remote
keyless entry module, refer to the new module
U201F-00 External Receiver - No

subtype information No subtype information - Suspect the RF receiver, check and install a new RF
communication error receiver as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at top of DTC
Index
U201F-13 External Receiver -

Circuit open Line open Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test RF
www.JagDocs.com
receiver communication circuit to remote keyless

entry module for short to ground or open circuit
U201F-87 External Receiver -

Missing message Transmission error Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
the data line between the RF receiver and the
remote keyless entry module for short, open circuit.
Suspect the RF receiver or remote keyless entry
module, check and install a new RF receiver or
remote keyless entry module as required, refer to
the new module/component installation note at top
of DTC Index

Not Complete - No No subtype information Configure the Remote Keyless Entry module using
subtype information the manufacturer approved diagnostic system

Configuration No subtype information Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
Incompatible - No approved diagnostic system
subtype information
Internal electronic Internal electronic failure Install a new remote keyless entry module, refer to
failure the new module installation note at the top of the
DTC Index

Number - Invalid serial Vehicle/component Install correct/new module to vehicle specification,
data received mis-match. Module refer to the new module/component installation
previously installed to note at the top of the DTC Index
other vehicle

Signal compare failure Mis-match in battery Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
voltage, of 2 volts or DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
more, between remote system
keyless entry module and Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
RJB manual and test the battery and charging system
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Restraints
Control Module (RCM)
Restraints Control Module (RCM)

WARNINGS:
TO AVOID ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY, THE BACKUP POWER SUPPLY MUST BE DEPLETED
BEFORE REPAIRING OR REPLACING ANY AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) COMPONENTS. TO DEPLETE THE
BACKUP POWER SUPPLY ENERGY, DISCONNECT THE BATTERY GROUND CABLE AND WAIT ONE MINUTE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW
THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY
Do not use a multimeter to probe the restraints control module. It is possible for the power from the meter battery to
trigger the activation of the airbags. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
module/component.
account.
It is advisable not to use a cellular phone or to have a cellular phone in close proximity when working on the restraints
control module or associated systems.
Given the legal implications of a restraints system failure, harness repairs to air bag module circuits are not acceptable.
Where the text refers to "REPAIR the circuit", this will normally mean the replacement of a harness.
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Restraints Control Module (RCM). For
For additional information, refer to: Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B
Supplemental Restraint System, Diagnosis and Testing).

B0001-09 Driver Frontal Stage 1
Deployment Control - Driver front stage 1 air bag - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
Component failures internal driver failure with this DTC using the manufacturer
www.JagDocs.com
Deployment Control - Circuit Driver front stage 1 air bag Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
short to ground circuit - short to ground test driver front stage 1 air bag circuit
for short to ground

short to battery circuit - short to power test driver front stage 1 air bag circuit
for short to power
B0001-1A Driver Frontal Stage 1

Deployment Control - Circuit Circuit resistance below Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
resistance below threshold threshold with this DTC using the manufacturer
B0001-1B Driver Frontal Stage 1

Deployment Control - Circuit Circuit resistance above Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
resistance above threshold threshold with this DTC using the manufacturer
B0001-1C Driver Frontal Stage 1

voltage out of range circuit - high resistance test driver front stage 1 air bag circuit
for high resistance

Deployment Control - Incompatible configuration Re-configure the RCM using the
Invalid/incomplete manufacturer approved diagnostic
configuration system

www.JagDocs.com
Deployment Control - Incorrect Crosscoupling with other Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
assembly firing loop test driver front stage 1 air bag circuit
for crosscoupling with other firing loop

Deployment Control - Driver front stage 2 air bag - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
Component failures internal driver failure with this DTC using the manufacturer

Deployment Control - Circuit Driver front stage 2 air bag Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
short to ground circuit - short to ground and test driver front stage 2 air bag

Deployment Control - Circuit Driver front stage 2 air bag Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
short to battery circuit - short to power and test driver front stage 2 air bag
B0002-1A Driver Frontal Stage 2

B0002-1B Driver Frontal Stage 2

B0002-1C Driver Frontal Stage 2

voltage out of range circuit - high resistance test driver front stage 2 air bag circuit
for high resistance


assembly firing loop test driver front stage 2 air bag circuit
for crosscoupling with other firing loop
B0010-09 Passenger Frontal Stage 1

Deployment Control - Passenger front stage 1 air Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
Component failures bag - internal driver failure with this DTC using the manufacturer
www.JagDocs.com
Deployment Control - Circuit Passenger front stage 1 air Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
short to ground bag circuit - short to ground and test passenger front stage 1 air bag

short to battery bag circuit - short to power and test passenger front stage 1 air bag
B0010-1A Passenger Frontal Stage 1

Deployment Control - Circuit Circuit resistance below Carry out the pinpoint tests associated
B0010-1B Passenger Frontal Stage 1

Deployment Control - Circuit Circuit resistance above Carry out the pinpoint tests associated
B0010-1C Passenger Frontal Stage 1

Deployment Control - Circuit Passenger front stage 1 air Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
voltage out of range bag circuit - high resistance test passenger front stage 1 air bag
circuit for high resistance


www.JagDocs.com
assembly firing loop test passenger front stage 1 air bag
circuit for crosscoupling with other firing
loop

Deployment Control - Passenger front stage 2 air Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
Component failures bag - internal driver failure with this DTC using the manufacturer

short to ground bag circuit - short to ground and test passenger front stage 2 air bag

short to battery bag circuit - short to power and test passenger front stage 2 air bag
B0011-1A Passenger Frontal Stage 2

B0011-1B Passenger Frontal Stage 2

B0011-1C Passenger Frontal Stage 2

Deployment Control - Circuit Passenger front stage 2 air Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
voltage out of range bag circuit - high resistance test passenger front stage 2 air bag
circuit for high resistance


assembly firing loop test passenger front stage 2 air bag
loop
www.JagDocs.com
B0020-09 Left Side Air Bag Deployment
Control - Component failures Left side air bag circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
internal driver failure with this DTC using the manufacturer

Control - Circuit short to Left side air bag circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
ground short to ground and test left side air bag circuit for short
to ground

Control - Circuit short to Left side air bag circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
battery short to power and test left side air bag circuit for short
to power
B0020-1A Left Side Air Bag Deployment

Control - Circuit resistance Circuit resistance below Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
below threshold threshold with this DTC using the manufacturer
B0020-1B Left Side Air Bag Deployment

Control - Circuit resistance Circuit resistance above Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
above threshold threshold with this DTC using the manufacturer
B0020-1C Left Side Air Bag Deployment

Control - Circuit voltage out of Left side air bag circuit - Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
range high resistance test left side air bag circuit for high
resistance

www.JagDocs.com
Control - Invalid/incomplete Incompatible configuration Re-configure the RCM using the

configuration manufacturer approved diagnostic
system

Control - Incorrect assembly Crosscoupling with other Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
firing loop test left side air bag circuit for
crosscoupling with other firing loop
B0028-09 Right Side Air Bag Deployment

Control - Component failures Right side air bag circuit - Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
internal driver failure with this DTC using the manufacturer

Control - Circuit short to Right side air bag circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
ground short to ground and test right side air bag circuit for
short to ground

Control - Circuit short to Right side air bag circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
battery short to power and test right side air bag circuit for
short to power
B0028-1A Right Side Air Bag Deployment

Control - Circuit resistance Circuit resistance below Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
B0028-1B Right Side Air Bag Deployment

Control - Circuit resistance Circuit resistance above Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
B0028-1C Right Side Air Bag Deployment

Control - Circuit voltage out of Right side air bag circuit - Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
range high resistance test right side air bag circuit for high
resistance

Control - Invalid/incomplete Incompatible configuration Re-configure the RCM using the
system

Control - Incorrect assembly Crosscoupling with other Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
firing loop test right side air bag circuit for
crosscoupling with other firing loop
www.JagDocs.com
B0029-09 Right Curtain Deployment
Control 1 - Component failures Right curtain deployment Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
control 1 circuit - internal with this DTC using the manufacturer
driver failure approved diagnostic system

Control 1 - Circuit short to Right curtain deployment Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
ground control 1 circuit - short to check right curtain deployment control 1
ground circuit for short to ground

Control 1 - Circuit short to Right curtain deployment Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
battery control 1 circuit - short to check right curtain deployment control 1
power circuit for short to power
B0029-1A Right Curtain Deployment

Control 1 - Circuit resistance Circuit resistance below Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
B0029-1B Right Curtain Deployment

Control 1 - Circuit resistance Circuit resistance above Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
B0029-1C Right Curtain Deployment

Control 1 - Circuit voltage out Right curtain deployment Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
of range control 1 circuit - high test right curtain deployment control 1
resistance circuit for high resistance

www.JagDocs.com
Control 1 - Invalid/incomplete Incompatible configuration Re-configure the RCM using the

system

Control 1 - Incorrect assembly Crosscoupling with other Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
firing loop test right curtain deployment control 1
loop
B0050-11 Driver Safety Belt Sensor -

Circuit short to ground Driver safety belt sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit - short to ground and test driver safety belt sensor circuit
for short to ground

Circuit short to battery Driver safety belt sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit - short to power and test driver safety belt sensor circuit
for short to power

Circuit open Driver safety belt sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit - open circuit and test driver safety belt sensor circuit
for open circuit
B0050-1E Driver Safety Belt Sensor -

Circuit resistance out of range Driver safety belt sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
circuit - resistance out of with this DTC using the manufacturer
range approved diagnostic system

Invalid/incomplete Incompatible configuration Re-configure the RCM using the
system
B0052-11 Passenger Safety Belt Sensor -

Circuit short to ground Passenger safety belt sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit - short to ground and test passenger safety belt sensor

Circuit short to battery Passenger safety belt sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit - short to power and test passenger safety belt sensor

Circuit open Passenger safety belt sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
circuit - open circuit and test passenger safety belt sensor
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Satellite
Digital Audio Radio System Module (SARM)
Satellite Radio Module (SARM)
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged on the satellite radio module, for additional
diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section.

B1A89-01 Satellite Antenna -
General electrical Wiring harness fault - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
failure Coaxial cable between satellite digital audio radio antenna coaxial cable for
satellite radio module and short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
the satellite antenna circuit, high resistance. Repair wiring harness as
Internal electronic failure required, clear DTC and retest
- Satellite digital audio If fault persists, check and install a new satellite digital
radio antenna audio radio antenna
Internal electronic failure If fault persists, check and install a new satellite radio
- Satellite radio module module
Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual, or
determine if any prior approval programme is in
operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component

Circuit short to Satellite antenna circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground short to ground satellite antenna circuit for short circuit to ground.
Repair wiring harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
www.JagDocs.com
Circuit short to Satellite antenna circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
battery short to power satellite antenna circuit for short circuit to power. Repair
wiring harness as required. Clear DTC and retest

Circuit open Satellite antenna circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
open circuit, high satellite antenna circuit for open circuit, high
resistance resistance. Repair wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
and retest

System internal System internal failure Check and install a new satellite radio module as
failures required. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
module/component
U3000-4A Control Module -

Incorrect Satellite radio module - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
component Incorrect component select the vehicle configuration main menu>vehicle
installed installed configuration>display and modify the vehicle
Car configuration configuration file data
mismatch Check update as required

Not configured Satellite radio module - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Incorrect component select the vehicle configuration main menu>select
installed configure existing modules menu and program the
Incorrect car configuration satellite radio module
file data received
www.JagDocs.com

Missing message The satellite radio module Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
has not received the check that the satellite radio module is configured
configuration file correctly
Master module not Check that the configuration file is being transmitted by
transmitting configuration the master module
file Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
complete a MOST network integrity test

Component or Satellite radio module Check for possible causes of the satellite radio module
system over cooling vents obstructed overheating. Check that the ventilation is not
temperature Wiring harness fault obstructed
Internal electronic failure Check for short circuit related DTCs. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check ground circuit for
high resistance. Check antenna circuit for short to power
or ground. Repair wiring harness as required. Clear DTC
and retest
Check for internal electronic failure related DTCs
If fault persists, check and install a new satellite radio
module. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures
module/component

Signal compare Signal compare failure Refer to relevant section of workshop manual and
failure Satellite radio module battery care manual. Check battery state of charge and
voltage differs more than starting/charging system performance. Check power
±2V compared to rear supply circuit from rear junction box to satellite radio
junction box voltage module
Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
and ground supply circuits to the module. Repair wiring
harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Speed
Control Module (CCM)
Adaptive Speed Control Module (ASCM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Adaptive Speed Control Module (ASCM).
For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop manual.
For additional information, refer to: Speed Control (310-03C Speed Control - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and
Testing).

B1A84-81 Car Configuration Data
- Invalid serial data RJB reporting invalid Re-configure the RJB using manufacturer approved
received data diagnostic system
C1A67-54 Forward Looking Sensor

- Missing calibration Speed control sensor out Check speed control sensor for correct vertical
of alignment alignment, and carry out speed control sensor
alignment procedure using manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

- Invalid serial data Yaw voltage Clear DTC and re-test, if DTC remains suspect speed
received unreasonable for 0.5 control sensor. Check and install a new sensor as
seconds or unchanged required, refer to the new module/component
for 1.2 seconds. Note: installation note at the top of the DTC Index
Yaw sensor internal to
speed control sensor

- Missing Message Incorrect or missing data Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
from speed control DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
sensor system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check power and ground supplies for short, open
circuit. Check private CAN network between speed
control sensor and speed control module for failure,
clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains suspect the
www.JagDocs.com
speed control sensor, check and install a new sensor

- Component internal Internal hardware failure Suspect the speed control sensor. Check and install a
Failure new sensor as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index

- Component or system Sensor reduced visibility Check for blockage in front of radar. Note: This DTC
operation obstructed or will be cleared automatically when environmental
blocked conditions allow

- Component or system Speed control sensor Allow system to cool. Note: This DTC will be cleared
over temperature internal temperature automatically when environmental conditions allow
exceeded threshold
P174E-81 Output Shaft

Speed/ABS Wheel Follow speed is Clear DTC and re-test
Speed Correlation - mis-calculated to too
Invalid serial data high a value
received
Communication Bus - Vehicle CAN Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Bus off condition DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Carry out CAN network integrity tests using
www.JagDocs.com
U0100-00 Lost Communications

With ECM/PCM "A" - No ECM missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
sub type information DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check ECM for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index

With TCM - No sub TCM missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
type information DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check TCM for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index

With Gear Shift Control No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Module A - No sub type power and ground connections to the Transmission
information Shift Module. Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system, complete a CAN network integrity
test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the CAN network between the Transmission
Shift Module and Speed Control Module

With Gear Shift Module Transmission shift Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- Missing Message module missing message DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check transmission shift module for related

With Anti-lock Brake ABS missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
System (ABS) Control DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - No sub type system. Check ABS for related DTCs and refer to the
information relevant DTC Index

With Park Brake Module Parking brake missing Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- No sub type message DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system. Check parking brake module for related

With Instrument Panel Instrument cluster Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Cluster (IPC) Control missing message DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - No sub type system. Check instrument cluster for related DTCs
information and refer to the relevant DTC Index
www.JagDocs.com
Software Invalid configuration Re-configure the speed control module using the
Incompatibility - No message is received manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear
sub type information DTCs and re-test. If DTC still logged, suspect
incorrect speed control module installed. Check and
install a new module as required, refer to new
Index

Software RJB - at least one of the Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
Incompatibility - Not car configuration approved diagnostic system
configured parameters is not
configured

From ECM/PCM A - No ECM did not respond Check ECM for related DTCs and refer to relevant
sub type information properly to speed control DTC Index
cancel or auto brake
cancel request

From ECM/PCM A - ECM did not respond Check ECM for related DTCs and refer to relevant
Signal incorrect after properly to speed control DTC Index
event resume request

From ECM/PCM A - Invalid data received Check the Engine Control Module for related DTCs
Invalid serial data from engine control and refer to relevant DTC Index. If U040181 is
received module logged as historic but no other DTCs have logged in
Bus signal/message the engine control module at the same time and
www.JagDocs.com
failure distance, it may be caused by cranking with low

Speed control inhibited voltage conditions. Check battery and charging
by ECM system according to instructions in the battery care
manual. Install the latest Engine Control Module
software using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, contact Dealer Technical Support before
replacing components

From Anti-Lock Braking Event information Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Module for
System (ABS) Control Deactivated related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - De-activated
From Anti-lock Brake Stability assist fault Check ABS module for related DTCs and refer to
System (ABS) Control relevant DTC Index
Module - Invalid serial
data received
From Park Brake Parking brake module did Check parking brake module for related DTCs and
Control Module - Signal not respond properly to refer to relevant DTC Index
incorrect after event apply request

From Park Brake Speed control inhibited Check parking brake module for related DTCs and
Control Module - by parking brake module refer to relevant DTC Index
Invalid serial data
received
From Brake System Event information Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Module for
Control Module - Event related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
information
From Suspension Invalid serial data Check the Suspension Control Module for related
Control Module 'A' - received DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Invalid serial data
received
From Instrument Panel Speed control inhibited Check instrument cluster, CJB and RJB for related
Control Module - by instrument cluster DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index
Invalid serial data
received
U1A00-88 Private Communication
Network - Bus off Bus off The module setting this code has disabled CAN
transmission. Check for other bus off codes. Check
the module and circuits. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams. Clear all DTCs and road test the vehicle. If
the concern reoccurs contact Dealer Technical
www.JagDocs.com
Support for further advice. Under no circumstance
should any parts be replaced to overcome this issue

Failure - Internal Internal electronic failure Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
electronic failure a new module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index

Configuration Data sent from RJB is Check/amend Car Configuration File using the
Incompatible - No sub invalid manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear DTC
type information and re-test. If DTC remains, re-configure RJB using
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear DTC
and re-test. If DTC remains check RJB for DTCs and
refer to DTC Index

General checksum Internal micro controller Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
failure error a new module as required, refer to the new
Checksum fault module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index

General memory failure Internal RAM test fault Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
a new module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index

Internal electronic Internal control module Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
www.JagDocs.com
failure failure a new module as required, refer to the new

the DTC Index

Circuit/component Circuit/component The Control module internal protection has been
protection time-out protection time-out activated. Check for other related DTCs that could
lead to this event. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
problem persists, renew the module. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
suspect

Signal compare failure Signal compare failure Check vehicle battery and charging system. Refer to
Battery supply voltage the relevant section in the workshop manual. Refer
below a recognized value to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
and ground supply circuits to the modules
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Steering
Column Lock Module (VIM)
Steering Column Lock Module (VIM)
NOTES:
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Steering Column Lock Module, for
For additional information, refer to: Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Diagnosis and Testing).

Authorisation - Not Module not programmed Configure the Steering Column Lock Module using the
programmed manufacturers approved diagnostic system

Authorisation - Signal compare failure Configure the modules using the manufacturers approved
Signal compare - This DTC will be diagnostic system. If the problem persists, complete a
failure logged if the CAN network integrity test using the manufacturers
encrypted data approved diagnostic system. Perform an on demand
exchange does self-test and retest
not match
between Steering
Column Lock and
the Central
Junction Box

Authorisation - Signal plausibility failure
NOTE: Prior to clearing this DTC, carry out the Vehicle
Signal plausibility Steering Column Lock
Functional Reset application using the manufacturer approved
failure unable to perform lock
diagnostic system
action
CAN Network fault Check the serviceability of the steering column and lock.
Anti-lock Braking Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, carry
System, Engine Control out CAN Network Integrity Test and Module Self Test
Module, Central Junction using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Box fault Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
www.JagDocs.com
check CAN Network

Authorisation - Missing message
NOTE: Prior to clearing this DTC, carry out the Vehicle
Missing message CAN fault
Functional Reset application using the manufacturer approved
No response from
diagnostic system
electric steering column
lock control module, Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and unlock car using the key
instrument cluster, fob and retest. Check for related DTCs and refer to the
central junction box relevant DTC index
Battery voltage at If the fault is cleared, notify the customer that the
electric steering column steering column lock may fail to unlock if the vehicle is
lock control module too parked with a high steering angle or with the road wheel
low against a curb. If the column lock is failing to disengage,
Electric steering column the customer may be able to rectify this by rotating the
lock control module, steering wheel while pressing the engine start button
instrument cluster, If fault persists, complete a CAN network integrity test
central junction box fault using the manufacturers approved diagnostic system.
Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check CAN circuits between the central junction box, the
instrument cluster and the electronic steering column
lock. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
central junction box, the instrument cluster and the
electronic steering column lock power and ground supply
circuits for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power,
open circuit, high resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required.
Clear DTC, perform an on demand self-test and retest
If fault persists, check that the vehicle battery supply
voltage is between 9-16 volts. Rectify as required
www.JagDocs.com

Communication Bus off Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Bus - Bus off power and ground connections to the module. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the CAN network

Module Software No sub type information Refer to network communication section of the workshop
Incompatibility - manual. Clear the DTC and ensure the vehicle battery
No sub type supply voltage is between 9-16Volts. Using the
information manufacturers approved diagnostic system, complete a
CAN integrity test. Perform an on demand self-test and
retest

Internal electronic Internal electronic Refer to network communication section of the workshop
failure failure detected during manual. Clear the DTC and ensure the vehicle battery
self test or lock/unlock supply voltage is between 9-16Volts. Perform an on
operation demand self-test and if the DTC returns suspect the
electric steering column lock, refer to the warranty policy

Missing message Configuration message Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
not received power and ground connections to the module. Using the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, complete a
CAN network integrity test. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check the CAN network. Check modules are
configured correctly using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
U3002-81 Vehicle
Identification Invalid vehicle Confirm the correct VIN details are stored in Steering
Number - Invalid identification number Column Lock Module using the approved diagnostic
serial data system
received
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Television
Module (TVM)
Television Control Module (TVCM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Television Control Module (TVCM). For

short to ground Antenna circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
short to ground manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical
circuit diagrams and check antenna circuit for short to ground

short to battery Antenna circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
short to power manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical
circuit diagrams and check antenna circuit for short to power

open Antenna circuit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
open circuit manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical
circuit diagrams and check antenna circuit for open circuit
B1D55-11 Antenna#2 - Circuit

short to ground Antenna #2 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
circuit short to manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical
ground circuit diagrams and check antenna #2 circuit for short to
ground

short to battery Antenna #2 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
circuit short to manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical
power circuit diagrams and check antenna #2 circuit for short to power
www.JagDocs.com
open Antenna #2 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
circuit open manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical
circuit circuit diagrams and check antenna #2 circuit for open circuit
B1D56-11 Antenna #3 Circuit -

Circuit short to Antenna #3 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
ground circuit short to manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical
ground

battery circuit short to manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical

Circuit open Antenna #3 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the

ground

www.JagDocs.com

Circuit open Antenna #4 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
B1D58-11 Television Output -

Circuit short to Television output Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
ground circuit diagrams and check television output circuit for short to
ground

Circuit short to Television output Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
power circuit diagrams and check television output circuit for short to
power

Circuit open Television output Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
circuit circuit diagrams and check television output circuit for open
circuit

Internal electronic Internal Suspect the television module, check and install a new module
failure electronic failure as required, refer to the new module/component installation

Circuit voltage below Circuit voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
threshold below threshold manufacturer approved diagnostic system

Circuit voltage above Circuit voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
threshold above threshold manufacturer approved diagnostic system
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Module (TPM)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPM)
NOTES:
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System, for
For additional information, refer to: Wheels and Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and Testing).

C1A56-31 Left Front Tire Pressure
Sensor and Transmitter Missing, incompatible or For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
Assembly - No signal defective tire pressure Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
sensor or radio frequency Testing).Go to pinpoint test F in section 204-04,
receiver Diagnosis and Testing, Wheels and Tires

Sensor and Transmitter Information only - vehicle No action required
Assembly - Event exposed to extreme
information temperature environment
and/or tire pressure
sensor low battery
voltage event

Sensor and Transmitter Tire pressure sensor has Replace defective tire pressure sensor. Refer to
Assembly - Parametric reported out of range the relevant section of the workshop manual
information for pressure,
temperature or
acceleration

Sensor and Transmitter No tire pressure sensor For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
Assembly - No operation can be localized at this Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
position due to an Testing).Go to pinpoint test G in section 204-04,
initiator or tire pressure Diagnosis and Testing, Wheels and Tires
www.JagDocs.com
sensor malfunction
C1A57-11 Left Front Initiator -

Circuit short to ground Left front initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
is short to ground Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
Testing).Go to pinpoint test B1 in section 204-04,
Diagnosis and Testing, Wheels and Tires

Circuit short to battery Left front initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
is short to power Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and

Circuit open Left front initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
open Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
C1A58-31 Right Front Tire Pressure


www.JagDocs.com
sensor low battery

voltage event

Sensor and Transmitter Tire pressure sensor has Replace defective tire pressure sensor. refer to
temperature or
acceleration

sensor malfunction
C1A59-11 Right Front Initiator -

Circuit short to ground Right front initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
is short to ground Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
Testing).Go to pinpoint test C1 in section 204-04,

Circuit short to battery Right front initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
is short to power Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and

Circuit open Right front initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
C1A60-31 Left Rear Tire Pressure


Sensor and Transmitter Information only - Vehicle No action required
sensor low battery
voltage event
www.JagDocs.com
Sensor and Transmitter Tire pressure sensor has Replace defective tire pressure sensor, refer to
temperature or
acceleration

sensor malfunction
C1A61-11 Left Rear Initiator -

Circuit short to ground Left rear initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
short to ground Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
Testing).Go to pinpoint test D1 in section 204-04,

Circuit short to battery Left rear initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
short to power Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
Testing).Go to pinpoint test D2 in section
204-04,Diagnosis and Testing, Wheels and Tires

Circuit open Left rear initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
Testing).Go to pinpoint test D9 in section 204-04,
www.JagDocs.com
C1A62-31 Right Rear Tire Pressure


sensor low battery
voltage event

Sensor and Transmitter Tire pressure sensor has Replace defective tire pressure sensor, refer to
temperature or
acceleration

sensor malfunction
C1A63-11 Right Rear Initiator -

Circuit short to ground Right rear initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
short to ground Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
Testing).Go to pinpoint test E1 in section 204-04,

Circuit short to battery Right rear initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
short to power Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
Testing). Go to pinpoint test E2 in section 204-04,

Circuit open Right rear initiator circuit For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
Testing).Go to pinpoint test E9 in section 204-04,
www.JagDocs.com
C1A64-68 Spare Wheel Tire
Pressure Sensor and Information only - vehicle No action required
Transmitter Assembly - exposed to extreme
Event information temperature environment
sensor low battery
voltage event

Pressure Sensor and Tire pressure sensor has Replace defective tire pressure sensor, refer to
Transmitter Assembly - reported out of range the relevant section of the workshop manual
Parametric information for pressure,
temperature or
acceleration

Pressure Sensor and Missing, incompatible or For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
Transmitter Assembly - defective tire pressure Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
No operation sensor or radio frequency Testing).Go to pinpoint test H in section 204-04,
C1D19-11 External Receiver Data

Line - Circuit short to Tire pressure monitoring For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
ground system radio frequency Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
receiver or data line Testing).Go to pinpoint test A in section
circuit is short to ground 204-04,Diagnosis and Testing, Wheels and Tires

Line - Circuit short to Tire pressure monitoring For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
battery system radio frequency Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
receiver or data line Testing).Go to pinpoint test I in section 204-04,
www.JagDocs.com
circuit is short to power diagnosis and testing

Line - Missing message Radio Frequency For additional information, refer to: Wheels and
reception blocked Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Diagnosis and
Tire pressure monitoring Testing).Go to pinpoint test J in section 204-04,
system radio frequency Diagnosis and Testing, Wheels and Tires
receiver faulty
Tire pressure monitoring
system radio frequency
receiver or data line
circuits open circuit
Missing, incompatible or
defective tire pressure
sensors

Communication Bus - Bus CAN bus fault Carry out CAN network integrity tests. Refer to
off the electrical wiring diagrams and check CAN
network for short, open circuit

body control module - No CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
sub type information Central junction box fault central junction box power and ground supplies
for short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network
integrity tests

Body Control Module "B" - CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
No sub type information Rear junction box fault rear junction box power and ground supplies for
short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network
integrity tests

With Instrument Panel CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
Cluster (IPC) Control Instrument cluster fault instrument cluster power and ground supplies for
Module - No sub type short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network
information integrity tests

HVAC Control Module - No CAN bus fault Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
sub type information Climate control module climate control module power and ground supplies
fault for short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network
integrity tests
www.JagDocs.com
Software Incompatibility - Incompatible tire Check correct tire pressure monitoring system
No sub type information pressure monitoring module is installed to vehicle specification,
system module for otherwise suspect the rear junction box
vehicle CAN network

From Anti-Lock Brake Invalid data received Check anti-lock braking system control module
System (ABS) Control from the anti-lock braking and Instrument Cluster for related DTCs and refer
Module - No sub type system control module to the relevant DTC index. Carry out CAN network
information CAN bus fault integrity tests
Anti-lock braking system
fault

From HVAC Control HVAC control module Check climate control module for related DTCs
Module - No sub type fault and refer to relevant DTC index
information
U1A14-49 CAN Initialisation Failure
- Internal electronic Tire pressure monitoring Install a new tire pressure monitoring module.
failure system module fault Refer to the new module/component installation
note at the top of the DTC index

configured Tire pressure monitoring Check and amend the car configuration file
system configuration data
is invalid
U3000-87 Control Module - Missing

message Tire pressure monitoring Check the rear junction box for related DTCs and
system configuration data refer to the relevant DTC index. Carry out CAN
www.JagDocs.com
not received network integrity test

Number - Invalid serial Tire pressure monitoring
NOTE: This DTC indicates that the tire pressure
data received system module and
monitoring system module is not the original part
vehicle VIN mismatch
installed to the vehicle at the factory/dealer and could
have been substituted. Refer to the note above the DTC
index about replacing components which may remain
under manufacturer warranty.
Re-install the original or a new tire pressure

monitoring system control module
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Touch
Screen Display (FCDIM)
Touch Screen (TS)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Touch Screen (TS). For additional

B100E-25 Video Input 'A' - Signal
shape/waveform ODST Only - TV video Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
failure synch mis-match using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
B100F-25 Video Input 'B' - Signal

shape/waveform ODST Only - Reverse Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
failure Camera video synch using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
mis-match
U1A01-01 Communication Link -

General electrical ODST Only - cable Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
failure from navigation using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
module not correctly Check electrical harness from navigation module is
installed correctly installed
U1A01-15 Communication Link -

Circuit short to battery TSD to navigation Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
or open module circuit - short using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check TSD to
navigation module circuit for short to power, open circuit
U1A4B-48 Control Module

Processor B - Supervision software Re-configure the TSD using the manufacturer approved
Supervision software failure diagnostic system
failure
www.JagDocs.com
memory failure EEPROM, External Suspect the TSD, check and install a new TSD as
RAM access failure required, refer to the new module/component

Supervision software Supervision software Re-configure the TSD using the manufacturer approved
failure failure diagnostic system
U3000-4B Control Module - Over

temperature Touch panel backlight Allow the system to cool, clear the DTC and
- high temperature check/monitor system for re-occurrence. If DTC re-occurs
detected suspect the TSD. Check and install a new TSD as
required, refer to the new module/component

configured Incorrect Car Check/amend Car Configuration File using the
Configuration manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Parameters received

Missing message Car Configuration File Check RJB for related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC
not received Index. Check CAN and MOST networks, carry out the
CAN and MOST network tests using the manufacturer

Component or system TSD internal Allow the system to cool, clear the DTC and
over temperature temperature over check/monitor system for re-occurrence. If DTC re-occurs
limit suspect the TSD. Check and install a new TSD as
www.JagDocs.com


Circuit voltage below Circuit voltage below Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC

Circuit voltage above Circuit voltage above Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index Vehicles With:
6HP28 6-Speed Automatic Transmission, DTC: Transmission Control Module
(TCM)
Transmission Control Module (TCM) 6 speed (6HP28 Applications)
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the transmission control module, for
additional diagnosis and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section
For additional information, refer to: Diagnostics (307-01 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Diagnosis and Testing).

P0121-86 Throttle/Pedal Position
Sensor A Circuit Throttle/Pedal Position Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
Range/Performance - Sensor Fault (Data
Signal invalid received over CAN Bus)
P0219-86 Engine Overspeed

Condition - Signal invalid Engine speed too low or Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
too high (Data received
over CAN Bus)
P0500-81 Vehicle Speed Sensor A -

Invalid serial data Vehicle Speed Sensor Check Dynamic Stability Control module for stored
received fault (Data received over DTCs
CAN Bus)
P0501-81 Vehicle Speed Sensor A

Range/Performance - Vehicle Speed receive Check Dynamic Stability Control module for stored
Invalid serial data over CAN Bus does not DTCs. Check correct Differential is installed to the
received match Transmission vehicle
Output-Shaft speed
www.JagDocs.com
P0561-1C System Voltage Unstable
- Circuit voltage out of Power supply voltage out Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
range of range when engine Check Charging System and Battery condition
running
P0562-21 System Voltage Low -

Signal amplitude < Circuit low voltage. Refer to Circuit diagrams and check Power and
minimum Battery supply voltage to Ground Circuit for fault. Check Engine Control
Transmission Control Module for stored DTCs. Check Charging System
Module and Battery condition
P0563-22 System Voltage High -

Signal amplitude > High Battery charge, Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
maximum alternator fault Check Charging System and Battery condition

Memory Check Sum Error Software error Re-configure the Transmission Control Module
- General checksum Transmission Control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
failure Module failure system, clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains,
Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
new Transmission Control Module as required,
refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
if a module/component is suspect.

Random Access Memory Shift-by-Wire fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
(RAM) Error - No sub type new Transmission Control Module as required,
information refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

www.JagDocs.com
Read Only Memory (ROM) General checksum failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Error - General checksum new Transmission Control Module as required,
failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0606-04 TCM Processor - System

Internal Failures Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
component faults new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0606-26 TCM Processor - Signal

rate of change below Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
threshold component faults new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0606-49 TCM Processor - Internal

electronic failure Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0613-04 TCM Processor - System

Internal Failures Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0613-06 TCM Processor -

Algorithm Based Failures Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0613-11 TCM Processor - Circuit

Short to Ground Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

Short to Battery Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
www.JagDocs.com
Open Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

Short to Ground or Open Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

amplitude < minimum Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

amplitude > maximum Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0613-47 TCM Processor -

Watchdog / safety Micro Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
controller failure new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0613-49 TCM Processor - Internal

www.JagDocs.com
electronic failure Micro controller Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0613-68 TCM Processor - Event

Information Watchdog fault Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P061B-02 Internal Control Module

Torque Calculation Transmission Control Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Performance - General Module - positive torque new Transmission Control Module as required,
signal failure signal not valid refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P061B-26 Internal Control Module

Torque Calculation Transmission Control Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Performance - Signal rate Module positive torque new Transmission Control Module as required,
of change below signal not valid refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
threshold if a module/component is suspect.
P062F-04 Internal Control Module

EEPROM Error - System EEPROM communication Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Internal Failures error new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0642-21 Sensor Reference Voltage

A Circuit Low - Signal Sensor supply voltage Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude < minimum fault low new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0643-22 Sensor Reference Voltage

A Circuit High - Signal Sensor supply voltage Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude > maximum fault high new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0657-13 Actuator Supply Voltage

A Circuit / Open - Circuit Actuator supply (pressure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Open control valves etc) Open new Transmission Control Module as required,
Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
www.JagDocs.com
P0657-1C Actuator Supply Voltage
A Circuit / Open - Circuit Actuator supply (pressure Refer to electrical Circuit diagrams and check
voltage out of range control valves etc) Transmission Control Module connector for signs of
voltage plausibility fault water ingress or damage, check pin 7 for Short to
Power or Ground (should NOT be connected and
harness terminal should have a bung installed). If
no fault identified, suspect the Transmission
Control Module. Check and install a new
Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
module/component is suspect.

A Circuit Low - Circuit Actuator supply (pressure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Short to Ground control valves etc) new Transmission Control Module as required,
voltage Short to Ground refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

A Circuit High - Circuit Actuator supply (pressure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Short to Battery control valves etc) new Transmission Control Module as required,
voltage Short to Power refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0667-01 PCM / ECM / TCM Internal

Temperature Sensor A General electrical failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Range/Performance - new Transmission Control Module as required,
General Electrical Failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

www.JagDocs.com
Temperature Sensor A Internal Electronic Failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
System Internal Failures refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

Temperature Sensor A Internal electronic failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Internal electronic failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

System (MIL Request) - General Signal failure Clear DTC, Road test and re-test, Read DTCs and
General signal failure Investigate as required

System (MIL Request) - Double fault from If any of the following DTCs are also present;
Signal amplitude > monitoring of internal P074013, P096712, P273912, P273012, P272112,
maximum power supply and P096312, P276312, P097112, suspect the
pressure Transmission Control Module, check and install a
regulator/solenoid control new Transmission Control Module as required,
software refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

System (MIL Request) - Emergency Position Not Clear DTC, Road test and re-test, Read DTCs and
Emergency Position Not Reachable investigate as required
Reachable
Temperature Sensor A Transmission fluid Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Circuit - Circuit Open temperature sensor Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Circuit Open Circuit Transmission Control Module as required, refer to

Temperature Sensor A General electrical failure Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Circuit Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Range/Performance - Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
General Electrical Failure the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Temperature Sensor A Signal amplitude > Clear DTC. Carry out cold start road test, continue
Circuit maximum. Excessive driving vehicle until normal operating temperature
Range/Performance - jump in temperature is achieved. Reads DTCs, if DTC returns, suspect
Signal amplitude > the Transmission Control Module. Install a new
maximum Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
www.JagDocs.com

Circuit Low - Circuit Short temperature sensor Transmission Control Module. Install a new
to Ground Circuit Short to Ground Transmission Control Module as required, refer to

Temperature Sensor A General electrical failure Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Circuit High - General Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Electrical Failure Transmission Control Module as required, refer to

Circuit High - Circuit temperature sensor Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Short to Battery Circuit Short to Power Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
P0716-14 Turbine/Input Shaft

Speed Sensor A Circuit Turbine/Input Shaft Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Range/Performance - Speed Sensor Circuit Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Circuit Short to Ground or Short to Ground or Open Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
Open Circuit the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
www.JagDocs.com

Speed Sensor A Circuit Turbine/Input Shaft Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
Range/Performance - Speed Sensor signal too the Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Signal amplitude < small Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
minimum the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Speed Sensor A Circuit Turbine/Input Shaft Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
Range/Performance - Speed Sensor signal the Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Signal amplitude > above maximum Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
maximum the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Speed Sensor A Circuit Turbine/input shaft speed Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
No Signal - Circuit Short sensor A Circuit Short to Transmission Control Module. Install a new
to Battery Power Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
P0720-12 Output Shaft Speed

Sensor Circuit - Circuit Transmission output Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Short to Battery shaft speed sensor Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Circuit Short to Power Transmission Control Module as required, refer to

Sensor Circuit - Circuit Transmission output Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Short to Ground or Open shaft speed sensor Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Circuit Short to Ground or Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
Open Circuit the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Sensor Circuit Transmission output Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
Range/Performance - shaft speed sensor signal the Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Signal amplitude > above maximum Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
maximum the warranty policy and procedures manual if a

Sensor Circuit Output shaft speed Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect
Range/Performance - negative gradient too the Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Signal rate of change high Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
above threshold the warranty policy and procedures manual if a
www.JagDocs.com
Sensor Circuit Signal plausibility failure Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Range/Performance - Transmission Control Module. Install a new
Signal plausibility failure Transmission Control Module as required, refer to
P0729-07 Gear 6 Incorrect Ratio -

Mechanical Failures Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
Mechanical Failures re-detects suspect Transmission (mechanical)
internal fault. Install a new Transmission as
required, refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect.

suspect.

suspect.
www.JagDocs.com

suspect.

suspect.

suspect.
P0736-07 Reverse Incorrect Ratio -

suspect.
P0740-13 Torque Converter Clutch

Solenoid Circuit / Open - Pressure control solenoid Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Circuit Open 2 Circuit Open Circuit Transmission Control Module. Install a new

Solenoid Circuit Too high slip at torque Suspect torque converter lockup clutch. Install a
Performance/Stuck Off - converter clutch. new torque converter, refer to the warranty policy
Mechanical Failures Mechanical Failures and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect. If transmission fluid is in very poor
condition and dirty, install a new transmission,
www.JagDocs.com
P0745-04 Pressure Control Solenoid
A - System Internal System Internal Failures Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failures new Transmission Control Module as required,

A - Supervision Software Supervision Software Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failure Failure new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0758-12 Shift Solenoid B Electrical

- Circuit Short to Battery Circuit Short to Power Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0758-13 Shift Solenoid B Electrical

- Circuit Open Solenoid valve 1 or Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Pressure control Solenoid new Transmission Control Module as required,
G Circuit Open Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0771-71 Shift Solenoid E

Performance/Stuck Off - Actuator stuck Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Actuator stuck new Transmission Control Module as required,

www.JagDocs.com
B - System Internal System Internal Failures Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

B - Supervision Software Supervision Software Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failure Failure new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0781-07 1-2 Shift - Mechanical

Failures Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.
P0781-77 2-1 Shift - Commanded

position not reachable Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.

suspect.

suspect.

www.JagDocs.com
suspect.

suspect.

suspect.

suspect.
P0798-1A Pressure Control Solenoid

C Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Below C Circuit resistance below new Transmission Control Module as required,
Threshold threshold refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
www.JagDocs.com
P0798-1E Pressure Control Solenoid

C Electrical - Circuit Short Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
to Ground C electrical circuit short new Transmission Control Module as required,
to ground refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

C Electrical - Signal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude < minimum C Electrical signal new Transmission Control Module as required,
amplitude < minimum refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0814-62 Transmission Range

Display Circuit - Signal Transmission Range Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
compare failure Display Circuit signal new Transmission Control Module as required,
compare failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0826-08 Up and Down Switch

circuit - Bus Signal Invalid CAN signal from Check Central Junction Box and Instrument Cluster
Message Failures Central Junction for stored DTCs. Check gear change switches for
Box/Instrument Cluster correct operation. Refer to circuit diagrams and
Stuck Sprintronic switch check CAN bus for a circuit fault
CAN bus circuit fault

Circuit - Invalid serial Invalid Can signal from Check Central Junction Box and Instrument Cluster
data received Central Junction Box / for stored DTCs. Check Gear Change Switches for
Instrument Cluster correct operation. Refer to Circuit diagrams and
Stuck Sprintronic switch check CAN Bus for Circuit fault
CAN Bus Circuit fault

Circuit - Bus off Steering Wheel Module to Check Central Junction Box and Steering Wheel
Central Junction Box / Ice Switches for stored DTCs. Refer to Circuit
Instrument Cluster LIN diagrams and check LIN Bus for Circuit fault
Bus failure

suspect.
www.JagDocs.com
Position Not Reachable Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.
P084F-01 Park / Neutral Switch

Input Circuit - General Wrong voltage level Check for correct output at Transmission Control
Electrical Failure detected on Park/No Park Module park signal pin (check in all positions) 12
signal volts in Park, 0 volts in all other positions. If fault
identified, suspect the Transmission Control
Module. Install a new Transmission Control Module
as required, refer to the warranty policy and
suspect. If no fault identified, check Park signal
circuit to Transmission Shift Module for short, open
circuit
P0850-01 Park / Neutral Switch

Input Circuit - General General electrical failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Electrical Failure new Transmission Control Module as required,

Input Circuit - General General signal failure Check Parklock mechanism, If Parklock operation
signal failure correct suspect the Transmission Control Module.
Install a new Transmission Control Module as
www.JagDocs.com

suspect.

Input Circuit - Signal Signal Invalid Check Parklock mechanism, If Parklock operation
invalid correct suspect the Transmission Control Module.
Install a new Transmission Control Module as
suspect.
P0850-1C Park / Neutral Switch

Input Circuit - Circuit Circuit voltage out of Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
voltage out of range range new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0919-93 Gear Shift Position

Control Error - No No shifting despite driver Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
operation request new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0919-94 Gear Shift Position

Control Error - Shifting without driver Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Unexpected operation request new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0938-29 Hydraulic Oil Temperature

Sensor Transmission fluid Clear DTC. Carry out cold start road test, continue
Range/Performance - temperature compared driving vehicle until normal operating temperature
Signal invalid with module temperature is achieved. Read DTCs, if DTC returns, suspect
fault the Transmission Control Module. Install a new

A Control Circuit High - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Battery 1 Circuit Short to Power new Transmission Control Module as required,

B Control Circuit / Open - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Open B Control Circuit Open new Transmission Control Module as required,
www.JagDocs.com

B Control Circuit / Open - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground or B Control Circuit Short to new Transmission Control Module as required,
Open Ground or Open refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

B Control Circuit Low - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground 2 Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

B Control Circuit High - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

C Control Circuit / Open - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground or 3 Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,
Open or Open Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

C Control Circuit Low - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground 3 Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,
www.JagDocs.com

C Control Circuit High - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
P0972-22 Shift Solenoid A Control

Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Range/Performance - 1 current too large new Transmission Control Module as required,
Signal amplitude > refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
maximum if a module/component is suspect.

Circuit Low - Circuit Short Shift solenoid A control Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
to Ground Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

Circuit Low - Circuit Short Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
to Ground or Open 1 Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,
or Open Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0973-1A Shift Solenoid A Control

Circuit Low - Circuit Shift Solenoid A control Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Below circuit resistance below new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0973-1E Shift Solenoid A Control

Circuit Low - Circuit Shift Solenoid A control Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Out Of Range circuit resistance out of new Transmission Control Module as required,
range refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
P0976-11 Shift Solenoid B Control

Circuit Low - Circuit Short Solenoid valve 2 Circuit Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
to Ground Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,
P0976-14 Shift Solenoid B Control

Circuit Low - Circuit Short Solenoid valve 2 Circuit Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
to Ground or Open Short to Ground or Open new Transmission Control Module as required,
Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
www.JagDocs.com
P1674-04 Control Module Software
Corrupted - System System internal failures Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Internal Failures new Transmission Control Module as required,
P1674-48 Control Module Software

Corrupted - Supervision Supervision software Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Software Failure failure new Transmission Control Module as required,
P1707-07 Transfer Case Neutral or

Park/Neutral Indication Transfer case neutral or Clear the DTC. Test drive the Vehicle, engaging
Circuit - Commanded park/neutral indication and disengaging the parking lock several times. If
position not reachable circuit - mechanical the DTC recurs, check parking lock components
failures and replace as required. If no faulty parklock
component is found Clear DTC and the DTC returns
suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

Park/Neutral Indication Transfer case neutral or Clear the DTC. Test drive the Vehicle, engaging
Circuit - Actuator Stuck park/neutral indication and disengaging the parking lock several times. If
Open circuit - Actuator stuck the DTC recurs, check parking lock components
open and replace as required. If no faulty parklock
www.JagDocs.com


Park/Neutral Indication Commanded position not Clear the DTC. Test drive the Vehicle, engaging
Circuit - Commanded reachable and disengaging the parking lock several times. If
position not reachable the DTC recurs, check parking lock components
and replace as required. If no faulty parklock
P2700-07 Transmission Friction

Element A Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
Range/Performance - Mechanical Failures re-detects suspect Transmission (mechanical)
Mechanical Failures internal fault. Install a new Transmission as
suspect.

Element B Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.

Element C Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.

Element D Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.
www.JagDocs.com
Element E Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
suspect.

D - System Internal System internal failures Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a

D - Supervision Software Supervision software Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failure failure new Transmission Control Module as required,

D Electrical - Signal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude > maximum D Electrical signal new Transmission Control Module as required,
amplitude > maximum refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

D Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Below D circuit resistance below new Transmission Control Module as required,
www.JagDocs.com

D Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Out Of Range D circuit resistance out of new Transmission Control Module as required,

D Control Circuit / Open - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground or D Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,
Open or Open Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

D Control Circuit Low - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground D Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

D Control Circuit High - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Battery D Circuit Short to Power new Transmission Control Module as required,

E - System Internal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failures E system internal failures new Transmission Control Module as required,

E - Supervision Software Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failure E supervision control new Transmission Control Module as required,
software failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

E Electrical - Signal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude > maximum E Electrical signal new Transmission Control Module as required,

E Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Below E electrical resistance new Transmission Control Module as required,
Threshold below threshold refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
www.JagDocs.com
E Electrical - Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Out Of Range E circuit resistance out of new Transmission Control Module as required,

E Control Circuit / Open - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground or E Control Circuit Short to new Transmission Control Module as required,
Open Ground or Open Circuit refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

E Control Circuit Low - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground E Circuit Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

E Control Circuit High - Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Battery E Circuit Short to Power new Transmission Control Module as required,

F - System Internal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failures F no sub type information new Transmission Control Module as required,

www.JagDocs.com
F - Supervision Software Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Failure F supervision software new Transmission Control Module as required,
failure refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

F Electrical - Signal Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
amplitude > maximum F Electrical signal new Transmission Control Module as required,

F Electrical-Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Below F electrical circuit new Transmission Control Module as required,
Threshold resistance below refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
threshold if a module/component is suspect.

F Electrical-Circuit Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Resistance Out Of Range F electrical circuit new Transmission Control Module as required,
resistance out of range refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

F Control Circuit / Open - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground or F Control Circuit Short to new Transmission Control Module as required,
Open Ground or Open refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

F Control Circuit Low - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Ground F Control Circuit Short to new Transmission Control Module as required,
Ground refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

F Control Circuit High - Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Circuit Short to Battery F Control Circuit Short to new Transmission Control Module as required,
Power refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual

Pressure Control Solenoid Pressure control solenoid Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Control Circuit High - F Circuit Short to Power new Transmission Control Module as required,
Circuit Short to Battery refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
www.JagDocs.com
Pressure Control Solenoid Torque converter clutch Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Control Circuit Low - pressure control solenoid new Transmission Control Module as required,
Circuit Short to Ground control Circuit Short to refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Ground if a module/component is suspect.
P2764-1A Torque Converter Clutch

Circuit Resistance Below control circuit resistance refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Threshold below threshold if a module/component is suspect.
P2764-1E Torque Converter Clutch

Circuit Resistance Out Of control circuit resistance refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Range out of range if a module/component is suspect.

G - Circuit Short to Park solenoid Circuit Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Ground Short to Ground new Transmission Control Module as required,

G - Circuit Short to Park solenoid Circuit Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Battery Short to Power new Transmission Control Module as required,

www.JagDocs.com
G - Circuit Open Park solenoid Circuit Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
Open Circuit new Transmission Control Module as required,

G - Circuit Short to Park solenoid Circuit Carry out any diagnostic pinpoint tests associated
Ground or Open Short to Ground or Open with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
Circuit diagnostic system. Suspect the Transmission
Control Module. Install a new Transmission Control
Module as required, refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect.
B1087-82 LIN Bus "A" - Alive /

sequence counter Alive counter fault Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
incorrect / not updated Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
Transmission Control Module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short to Ground or Open Circuit (LIN
Bus)

signal protection Checksum error Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs
calculation incorrect Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
Transmission Control Module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short to Ground or Open Circuit (LIN
Bus)
B1087-87 LIN Bus "A" - Missing

message Transmission Shift Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs
Module is NOT visible to Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
the Transmission Control Transmission Control Module to Transmission Shift
Module on the LIN Bus Module for Short or Open Circuit (LIN Bus)

LIN Bus Circuit fault. Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
Check hardware of LIN Transmission Control Module to Transmission Shift
connection between Module LIN bus circuit for Short, Open Circuit.
transmission and Check Transmission Shift Module for related DTCs
Transmission Shift
Module

Communication Bus - Bus CAN Bus off Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
off CAN Bus for Circuit fault
www.JagDocs.com
ECM/PCM "A" - Alive / Alive counter fault Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
sequence counter
incorrect / not updated
ECM/PCM "A" - Value of Checksum fault Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
signal protection
calculation incorrect
ECM/PCM "A" - Missing CAN Timeout
NOTE: Do NOT install a new Engine Control Module
message if an Engine Control Module Timeout DTC is only logged in
the Transmission Control Module, the failure is NOT with
the Engine Control Module
Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.

Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault

Gear Shift Control Module Alive counter fault Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
A - Alive / sequence Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
counter incorrect / not
updated
Gear Shift Control Module Checksum fault Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
A - Value of signal Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
protection calculation
incorrect
Gear Shift Control Module CAN Timeout Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
A - Missing message Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
www.JagDocs.com

Vehicle Dynamics Control Alive counter fault Check Dynamic Stability Control (ABS) for stored
Module - Alive / DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
sequence counter
Vehicle Dynamics Control Checksum fault Check Dynamic Stability Control (ABS) for stored
Module - Value of signal DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
incorrect
Vehicle Dynamics Control CAN Timeout Check Dynamic Stability Control (ABS) for stored
Module - Missing DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
message
Steering Angle Sensor Lost Communication With Check SAS for stored DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit
Module - No sub type Steering Angle Sensor for fault
information Module

Park Brake Control CAN timeout electronic Check Electronic Parking Brake Module (EPB) for
Module - Missing parking brake module stored DTCs. Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
message
Body Control Module - Alive counter fault Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs. Check
Alive / sequence counter CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Body Control Module - Checksum fault Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs. Check
Value of signal protection CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Body Control Module - CAN Timeout Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs. Check
Missing message CAN Bus Circuit for fault

Instrument Panel Cluster CAN timeout instrument Check Instrument Cluster for stored DTCs. Check
(IPC) Control Module - cluster CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Missing message
U0300-68 Control Module - Event
information Transmission software Check Central Junction Box software level, Check
does not match vehicle Transmission Control Module Software level,
network Update software as required using the
manufacturer approved process
www.JagDocs.com
From ECM/PCM A - Bus Inaccurate engine speed, Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs,
Signal Message Failures torque information Check CAN Bus circuit for faults

from ECM/PCM A - Event Inaccurate engine speed, Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
information torque information Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault

from ECM/PCM A - Signal Inaccurate engine speed, Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
Invalid torque information Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault

from Gear Shift Control Incorrect CAN data Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
Module A - Event received from Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN
information Transmission Shift Bus for Circuit fault
Module

from Gear Shift Control Incorrect LIN data Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
Module A - Invalid Serial received from Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN
Data Received Transmission Shift Bus for Circuit fault
Module

From Vehicle Dynamics Event information brake Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs.
Control Module - Event information Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
information
From Body Control Event information invalid Check Central Junction Box for stored DTCs. Check
Module - Event Power mode information CAN Bus Circuit for fault
www.JagDocs.com
information
U101B-87 Lost Communication With
GSM - Multiple Bus - Missing message lost Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
Missing message communication with Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN
Transmission Shift Bus for Circuit fault
Module (multiple Bus)
U3000-49 Control Module - Internal

electronic failure Internal electronic failure Suspect the Transmission Control Module. Install a
U3000-4B Control Module - Circuit

resistance above Internal electronic failure Check and correct oil level. Check hydraulic flow
threshold through oil cooler and pipe circuit for restriction or
blockage. If no restrictions found, suspect the
Transmission Control Module. Install a new
U3000-81 Control Module - Invalid

serial data received Vehicle or Engine type Reflash the Transmission Control Module using the
signal incorrect from manufacturer approved process
Central Junction Box or
incorrect Transmission
Control Module software
installed
U3001-94 Control Module Improper

Shutdown - Unexpected Control Module Improper Check Engine Control Module For Power
operation Shutdown (voltage (alternator) faults. Check Power and Ground
related) Circuit and Battery for fault. Clear DTCs. Road
Test. If DTC reoccurs suspect the Transmission
Control Module. Install a new Transmission Control
Module as required, refer to the warranty policy
and procedures manual if a module/component is
suspect.
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Transmission
Shift Module (GSM)
Gear Shift Module (GSM)
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the gear shift module, for additional diagnosis
and testing information refer to the relevant diagnosis and testing section.
For additional information, refer to: External Controls (307-05 Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V6 3.0L
Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing).

B1087-08 LIN Bus "A" - Bus
Signal / Message LIN bus 'A' Error Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Failures check LIN input signal circuit for short circuit
circuit, high resistance
B1087-81 LIN Bus "A" -

Invalid serial data Transmission control module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
received message error - LIN/CAN signal check LIN input signal circuit for short circuit
mismatch (complement fault) to ground, short circuit to power, open
circuit, high resistance. Check transmission
control module for related DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC index
B1087-82 LIN Bus "A" - Alive

/ sequence counter Transmission control module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
incorrect / not message error - Alive counter fault check LIN input signal circuit for short circuit
updated to ground, short circuit to power, open
relevant DTC index
www.JagDocs.com
B1087-83 LIN Bus "A" - Value
of signal protection Transmission control module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
calculation message error - checksum fault check LIN input signal circuit for short circuit
incorrect to ground, short circuit to power, open
relevant DTC index
B1087-87 LIN Bus "A" -

Missing message Transmission control module LIN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
message error - Missing message check LIN input signal circuit for short circuit
relevant DTC index

Signal compare Hardwired ignition and CAN Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
failure powermode signals differ check ignition supply circuit for short circuit
B123C-01 Dynamic Stability

Control Status Dynamic stability control LED failure Check transmission shift module, check
Indicator - General operation of the dynamic stability control
Electrical Failure button status illumination, check and install
new transmission shift module as required.
programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module
www.JagDocs.com
B123D-64 Dynamic Stability

Control Button - Dynamic stability control button may Check for normal dynamic stability control
Signal plausibility be stuck, may be due to a faulty button functionality. If it operates normally
failure button or to the user holding the then no further action required. If the
button for a prolonged period dynamic stability control button fails to
(dynamic stability control button operate normally then may be due to an
detected as pressed for 30 seconds) internal fault, check and install new
(S1) transmission shift module as required. Refer
to the warranty policy and procedures
B123F-01 Adaptive Speed

Limiter Mode Adaptive speed limiter LED failure Check transmission shift module, check
Indicator - General operation of the active speed limiter button
Electrical Failure status illumination, check and install new
transmission shift module as required. Refer
B1241-64 Adaptive Speed

Limiter Button - May be due to a faulty button or to Check for normal adaptive speed limiter
Signal plausibility the user holding the button for a button functionality. If it operates normally
failure prolonged period (adaptive speed then no further action required. If the
limiter button detected as pressed adaptive speed limiter button fails to
for 30 seconds) operate normally then may be due to an
internal fault, check and install new
B1242-64 Winter Button -

Signal plausibility May be due to a faulty button or to Check for normal winter button functionality.
failure the user holding the button for a If it operates normally then no further action
prolonged period (winter button required. If the winter button fails to operate
detected as pressed for 30 seconds) normally then may be due to an
internal fault, check and install new
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Portable
Audio Interface Control Module (PAICM)
Portable Audio Interface Control Module (PAICM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Portable Audio Interface Control Module
(PAICM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop
manual.

U3000-13 Control
Module - Universal serial bus Check for correct connection of universal serial bus (USB) harness
Circuit open (USB) harness between portable audio interface panel and user interface panel.
between portable Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check portable audio
audio interface panel interface module connection detect circuit between portable audio
and user interface interface panel and user interface panel is grounded. Install
panel is not properly universal serial bus (USB) harness between portable audio
connected interface panel and user interface panel as required, refer to the
Connection - detect new module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
circuit between Index
portable audio
interface panel and
user interface panel
is not grounded
Universal serial bus
(USB) harness
between portable
audio interface panel
and user interface
panel is open circuit
U3000-44 Control
Module - Data Portable audio Suspect the portable audio interface module. Check and install a
memory interface module new module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
failure internal RAM memory procedures manual if a module is suspect
www.JagDocs.com
failure
U3000-45 Control
Module - Portable audio Suspect the portable audio interface module. Check and install a
Program interface module new module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
memory internal flash memory procedures manual if a module is suspect
failure failure
U3000-55 Control
Module - Not Portable audio Re-program the portable audio interface module, clear DTC and
configured interface module not re-test. If DTC remains carry out MOST tests and test USB cable
configured correctly for open, short circuit, clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains
suspect the portable audio interface module, check and install a
new module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual if a module is suspect
U3003-62 Battery
Voltage - Portable audio Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the fuses, power
Signal interface module and ground connections to both modules
compare voltage differs more
failure than ±2V compared
to central electronics
module voltage
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Hybrid
Digital Radio Control Module (HDRCM)
Hybrid Digital Radio Control Module (HDRCM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Hybrid Digital Radio Control Module
(HDRCM). For additional diagnosis and testing information, refer to the relevant Diagnosis and Testing section in the workshop
manual.

B1A56-02 Antenna - General
signal failure Antenna general signal failure Renew the diversity antenna amplifier

short to ground Diversity antenna amplifier circuit short Refer to the electrical guides and check
to ground the diversity antenna amplifier circuit and
the antenna for short circuit to ground

short to battery Diversity antenna amplifier circuit short Refer to the electrical guides and check
to power the diversity antenna amplifier circuit and
the antenna for short circuit to power

open Diversity antenna amplifier circuit open Refer to the electrical guides and check
circuit the diversity antenna amplifier circuit and
the antenna for open circuit
U200D-14 Control Module

Output Power A - Diversity antenna amplifier power supply Refer to the electrical guides and check
Circuit short to circuit short to ground or open circuit the diversity antenna amplifier power
ground or open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
System internal Diversity antenna amplifier internal Renew the amplifier module
failures failure
U3000-4A Control Module -

Incorrect Diversity antenna amplifier internal Using the manufacturer approved
component incorrect component installed diagnostic system select the vehicle
installed - The module has been installed to configuration main menu, select configure
a vehicle not configured to accept existing modules menu and program the
it module

Not configured Diversity antenna amplifier not Using the manufacturer approved
configured correctly diagnostic system select the vehicle
configuration main menu, select configure
existing modules menu and program the
module

Missing message Missing message Using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system select the vehicle
configuration main menu, select configure
existing modules menu and program the
module

Component or Diversity antenna amplifier component or Consider moving the amplifier mounting
system over system over temperature position to prevent unit overheating. Cool
temperature the vehicle interior down by ensuring it is
in the shade and have the A/C on cool.
When cool, clear the DTC and retest. If
www.JagDocs.com
the problem persists, renew the amplifier

module

Signal compare Mismatch in battery voltage of 2 volts or Refer to the electrical guides and check
failure more for longer than 1 minute, between that power supply voltage at Digital Audio
the measured battery voltage at the Control Module C and Rear Junction Box is
Digital Audio Control Module C and the not different by more than 2 volts. Rectify
battery voltage signal sent from the Rear as required
Junction Box.
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Infotainment
Control Module (ICM)
Infotainment Control Module (ICM)
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Infotainment Control Module (ICM). For

B1D21-11 Remote control
switch - Circuit The information and Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check front
short to ground entertainment module has remote circuit for short to ground
detected a ground
measurement for a period
longer than expected or has
detected a ground
measurement when another
value was expected
Front remote circuit short
circuit to ground
U0010-00 Medium speed CAN

communication bus General failure Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- No sub type Open circuit medium speed DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information CAN negative circuit system. Clear DTC and re-test, if DTC remains, refer
Short circuit to power to electrical circuit diagrams and check for open
medium speed CAN negative circuit, short to power, short to ground on medium
circuit speed CAN negative circuit. Check for open circuit,
Short circuit to ground short to power, short to ground on medium speed
medium speed CAN negative CAN positive circuit. Check for short circuit between
circuit medium speed CAN positive circuit and medium
Open circuit medium speed speed CAN negative circuit
CAN positive circuit
Short circuit to power
medium speed CAN positive
www.JagDocs.com
circuit
Short circuit to ground
circuit
Short circuit between
circuit and medium speed
CAN negative circuit
U0156-4A Lost communication

with information The information and Suspect incorrect instrument cluster installed. Refer
center "A" - entertainment module has to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
Incorrect component detected a mismatch module is suspect. Check the system is operating
installed between the hardware correctly and there are no DTCs
connected and the expected
hardware
Module has incorrect serial
number

with parking assist General failure Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
control module "A" - Parking aid module, battery DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
No sub type supply circuit, open circuit system. Check parking aid module for DTCs and
information Parking aid module, ground refer to the relevant DTC Index. Refer to electrical
supply circuit, open circuit circuit diagrams, check battery and ground supplies,
Parking aid module medium to parking aid module for open circuit. Check
speed CAN negative circuit, medium speed CAN negative and positive harness
open circuit to parking aid module, repair as necessary
parking aid module medium
speed CAN positive circuit,
open circuit
www.JagDocs.com

with navigation General failure Check the navigation system module for DTCs and
control module - No Navigation system module, refer to the relevant DTC index. Using the
sub type battery supply circuit, open manufacturing approved diagnostic system carry out
information circuit MOST ring test. Using the manufacturers approved
Navigation system module diagnostic system re-configure the navigation
ground supply circuit, open system module. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
circuit check battery and ground supplies to navigation
Navigation system module, system module for open circuit. Repair as necessary.
MOST network, open circuit Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Navigation system module if module is suspect. Check the system is operating
not configured correctly and there are no DTCs
Navigation system module
failure

with navigation The information and Suspect incorrect navigation module installed. Refer
control module - entertainment module has to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
hardware
number

with radio - No sub General failure Check the integrated audio module for DTCs and
type information Integrated audio module refer to the relevant DTC index. Using the
battery supply circuit, open manufacturing approved diagnostic system carry out
circuit MOST ring test. Using the manufacturers approved
Integrated audio module diagnostic system re-configure the integrated audio
ground supply circuit, open module. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams check
circuit battery and ground supplies to integrated audio
Integrated audio module module for open circuit. Repair as necessary. Refer
MOST network, open circuit to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
Integrated audio module not module is suspect. Check the system is operating
configured correctly and there are no DTCs
Integrated audio module
failure

with radio - The information and Suspect incorrect integrated audio module installed.
Incorrect component entertainment module has Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
installed detected a mismatch if module is suspect. Check the system is operating
between the hardware correctly and there are no DTCs
hardware
www.JagDocs.com
number

with audio amplifier General failure Check the amplifier audio module for DTCs and refer
"A" - No sub type Amplifier audio module to the relevant DTC index. Using the manufacturing
information battery supply circuit, open approved diagnostic system carry out MOST ring
circuit test. Using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
Amplifier audio module system re-configure the amplifier audio module.
ground supply circuit, open Refer to electrical circuit diagrams check battery and
circuit ground supplies to amplifier audio module for open
Amplifier audio module circuit. Repair as necessary. Refer to the warranty
MOST network, open circuit policy and procedures manual if module is suspect.
Amplifier audio module not Check the system is operating correctly and there
configured are no DTCs
Amplifier audio module
failure

with audio amplifier The information and Suspect incorrect amplifier audio module installed.
"A" - Incorrect entertainment module has Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
component installed detected a mismatch if module is suspect. Check the system is operating
between the hardware correctly and there are no DTCs
hardware
number

with television - No General failure Check the television receiver module for DTCs and
sub type Television receiver module refer to the relevant DTC index. Using the
www.JagDocs.com
information battery supply, open circuit manufacturing approved diagnostic system carry out
Television receiver module MOST ring test. Using the manufacturers approved
ground supply circuit, open diagnostic system re-configure the television
circuit receiver module. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
Television receiver module check battery and ground supplies to television
MOST network, open circuit receiver module for open circuit. Repair as
Television receiver module necessary. Refer to the warranty policy and
not configured procedures manual if module is suspect. Check the
Television receiver module system is operating correctly and there are no DTCs
failure

with television - The information and Suspect incorrect television receiver module
Incorrect component entertainment module has installed. Refer to the warranty policy and
installed detected a mismatch procedures manual if module is suspect. Check the
between the hardware system is operating correctly and there are no DTCs
hardware
number

with digital audio General failure Check the digital audio broadcast module/satellite
control module A - Digital audio broadcast radio module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
No sub type module/satellite radio index. Using the manufacturing approved diagnostic
information module battery supply system carry out MOST ring test. Using the
circuit, open circuit manufacturers approved diagnostic system
Digital audio broadcast re-configure the digital audio broadcast
module/satellite radio module/satellite radio module. Refer to electrical
module ground supply circuit diagrams check battery and ground supplies
circuit, open circuit to digital audio broadcast module/satellite radio
Digital audio broadcast module for open circuit. Repair as necessary. Refer
module/satellite radio to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
module MOST network, open module is suspect. Check the system is operating
circuit correctly and there are no DTCs
Digital audio broadcast
module/satellite radio
module not configured
Digital audio broadcast
module/satellite radio
module failure

with digital audio The information and Suspect incorrect digital audio broadcast
control module A - entertainment module has module/satellite radio module installed. Refer to the
Incorrect component detected a mismatch warranty policy and procedures manual if module is
installed between the hardware suspect. Check the system is operating correctly
connected and the expected and there are no DTCs
www.JagDocs.com
hardware
number

with telephone General failure Check the telephone control module for DTCs and
control module - No Telephone control module refer to the relevant DTC index. Using the
sub type battery supply circuit, open manufacturing approved diagnostic system carry out
information circuit most ring test. Using the manufacturers approved
Telephone control module diagnostic system re-configure the telephone
ground supply circuit, open control module. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
circuit check battery and ground supplies to telephone
Telephone control module control module for open circuit. Repair as necessary.
MOST network open circuit Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual
Telephone control module if module is suspect. Check the system is operating
not configured correctly and there are no DTCs
Telephone control module
failure

with telephone The information and Suspect incorrect telephone module installed. Refer
control module - entertainment module has to the warranty policy and procedures manual if
hardware
number

with digital audio General failure Check the module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
www.JagDocs.com
control module C - High definition radio module DTC index. Using the manufacturing approved
No sub type battery supply circuit, open diagnostic system carry out MOST ring test. Using
information circuit the manufacturers approved diagnostic system
High definition radio module re-configure the high definition radio module . Refer
ground supply circuit, open to electrical circuit diagrams check battery and
circuit ground supplies to high definition radio module for
High definition radio module open circuit. Repair as necessary. Refer to the
MOST network, open circuit warranty policy and procedures manual if module is
High definition radio module suspect. Check the system is operating correctly
not configured and there are no DTCs
High definition radio module
failure

with digital audio The information and Suspect incorrect high definition radio module
control module C - entertainment module has installed, Refer to the warranty policy and
Incorrect component detected a mismatch procedures manual if module is suspect. Check the
installed between the hardware system is operating correctly and there are no DTCs
hardware
number

with accessory General failure Check the portable audio interface console for DTCs
protocol interface Portable audio interface and refer to the relevant DTC index. Using the
module - No sub console battery supply manufacturing approved diagnostic system carry out
type information circuit, open circuit MOST ring test. Using the manufacturers approved
Portable audio interface diagnostic system re-configure the portable audio
console ground supply interface console. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams
circuit, open circuit check battery and ground supplies to portable audio
Portable audio interface interface console for open circuit. Repair as
console MOST network, open necessary. Refer to the warranty policy and
circuit procedures manual if module is suspect. Check the
Portable audio interface system is operating correctly and there are no DTCs
console not configured
Portable audio interface
console failure

with accessory The information and Suspect incorrect portable audio interface console
protocol interface entertainment module has installed. Refer to the warranty policy and
module - Incorrect detected a mismatch procedures manual if module is suspect. Check the
component installed between the hardware system is operating correctly and there are no DTCs
hardware
number
www.JagDocs.com
General Information - Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index DTC: Telephone
Module (TEL)
Telephone Module
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
The table below lists all Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Telephone Module. For additional
For additional information, refer to: Cellular Phone (415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information,

B1A56-13 Antenna - Circuit open
Bluetooth antenna circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check blue
- open circuit tooth antenna circuit for open circuit

Signal below Signal amplitude < Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test
allowable range minimum microphone input circuit for short/open circuit. Check
integrated audio module for related DTCs and refer to
relevant DTC Index
U1A00-88 Private
Communication Bluetooth phone module Suspect the module. Check and install a new
Network - Bus off internal communications telephone module as required, refer to the new
failure module/component installation note at the top of the
DTC Index

Not Complete - No Initial configuration not Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
sub type information complete diagnostic system. If DTC remains, carry out CAN
network integrity tests using the manufacturer

Configuration Configuration Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
Incompatible - No sub incompatible diagnostic system. If DTC remains, suspect the
type information telephone module. Check and install a new telephone
www.JagDocs.com
module as required, refer to the new
DTC Index

memory failure Data memory failure Re-configure the telephone module. If the DTC
remains, suspect the telephone module. Check and
install a new telephone module as required, refer to
the new module/component installation note at the

Program memory Program memory failure Re-configure the telephone module. If the DTC
failure remains, suspect the telephone module. Check and
install a new telephone module as required, refer to

configured Incorrect car Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
configuration data diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC
received remains suspect the telephone module. Check and
DTC Index

Component or system Component or system Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index.
over temperature over temperature Clear DTC and re-test/monitor condition for
re-occurrence
www.JagDocs.com

Signal compare failure Mis-match in battery Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
voltage, of 2 volts or using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
more, between
telephone module and
RJB
www.JagDocs.com
Part N
—umber Published: 19-Dec-2011
Identification Codes - Identification Codes
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

The official Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) for title and registration purposes is stamped on a metal plate and fastened to
the instrument panel. It is positioned close on the left-hand side of the vehicle and is visible from the outside.
The VIN is also located on the vehicle certification label.

www.JagDocs.com

1 — VIN (stamped) To the end of 11MY
2 — Bar code label (USA)
3 — VIN label (Europe/Rest of World shown)
4 — VIN plate
5 — VIN (stamped) From 12MY onwards
www.JagDocs.com
Vehicle Identification Number (Typical)
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 World manufacturer identifier
2 Market, air bag specification
3 Transmission and steering code
4 Body code
5 Emission control system
6 Check digit
7 Model year
8 Assembly plant, model line
9 Production sequence number
World Manufacturer Identifier

VIN Positions 1
Codes Manufacturer Make Type
SAJ Jaguar Cars Limited, England Jaguar Passenger Car
Market, Air Bag Specification

VIN position 2
VIN code Description
A Rest of World with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
K Japan with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
W USA with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
X Canada with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
Y Mexico with twin air bags, side air bags and curtain air bags
Transmission, Steering Code

VIN Position 3
VIN Code Description
A Automatic LHS
C Automatic RHS
www.JagDocs.com
Body Code - All except USA and Canada - 2010 and 2011 model years
VIN Position 4
05 Luxury
06 Premium luxury
07 Sport luxury/Portfolio/SV8
08 'R'
Body Code (USA and Canada) 2010 and 2011 model years
VIN Position 4
0F Luxury
0G Premium luxury
0H Portfolio/SV8
0J 'R'
Body Code - All except USA and Canada - 2012 model year
VIN Position 4
04 Entry
05 Luxury
06 Premium luxury
07 Sport luxury/Portfolio/SV8
08 'R'
85 Luxury+speedpack
86 Premium luxury+speedpack
www.JagDocs.com
87 Sport luxury/Portfolio/SV8+speedpack
88 'R' + speedpack
Body Code (USA and Canada) 2012 model year

VIN Position 4
0F Luxury
0G Premium luxury
0H Portfolio/SV8
0J 'R'
8E Luxury+speedpack
8F Premium luxury+speedpack
8G Sport luxury/Portfolio/SV8+speedpack
8H 'R' + speedpack
Engine Emission System - 2009 model year

VIN Position 5
NOTES:
*1 EU. Includes the following markets; Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Rep, Denmark, Eire, Estonia, Finland,
France, Germany, Greece, Holland, Hungary, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovenia,
Slovakia, Spain (incl. Canary Islands), Sweden and UK.
*2 East Europe. Includes the following markets; Albania, Bosnia, Croatia, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia,
Kosovo, Montenegro and Serbia.
*3 Russia. Includes the following markets; Belarus, Kazakhstan, Ukraine and Uzbekistan.
*4 Middle East. Includes the following markets; Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Dubai, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Oman, Qatar and
Saudi Arabia.
*5 Caribbean. Includes the following markets; Bahamas, Barbados, Grand Cayman, Grenada and Trinidad and Tobago.
VIN
Code Engine Market
D 3.0L *5 Caribbean, Chile, Dominican Rep, Guatemala, Indonesia, Malaysia, *4 Middle East, Morocco,
F 4.2L Panama, Phillipines, Singapore, Sri Lanka and Uruguay
www.JagDocs.com
VIN
Code Engine Market
G 4.2L
Supercharged
N/A 2.7L Diesel
M 3.0L China
N/A 4.2L
N/A 4.2L
Supercharged
N/A 2.7L Diesel
M 3.0L *2 East Europe, *1 EU, Israel, Norway, *3 Russia, Switzerland and Turkey
P 4.2L
R 4.2L
Supercharged
1 2.7L Diesel
W 3.0L Brazil
X 4.2L
Y 4.2L
Supercharged
N/A 2.7L Diesel
S 3.0L Egypt and Syria
U 4.2L
V 4.2L
Supercharged
N/A 2.7L Diesel
H 3.0L Japan
K 4.2L
L 4.2L
Supercharged
www.JagDocs.com
N/A 2.7L Diesel

N/A 3.0L USA
B 4.2L
C 4.2L
Supercharged
N/A 2.7L Diesel
N/A 3.0L Canada
B 4.2L
C 4.2L
Supercharged
N/A 2.7L Diesel
N/A 3.0L Mexico
K 4.2L
L 4.2L
Supercharged
N/A 2.7L Diesel
N/A 3.0L South Korea
B 4.2L
C 4.2L
Supercharged
1 2.7L Diesel
D 3.0L South Africa
F 4.2L
G 4.2L
Supercharged
1 2.7L Diesel
M 3.0L Argentina, Australia, Cyprus, Hong Kong, Malta, New Zealand, Taiwan, Thailand and UK (and Eire)
P 4.2L
R 4.2L
Supercharged
1 2.7L Diesel

VIN Position 5
NOTES:
*1 EU. Includes the following markets; Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Rep, Denmark, Eire, Estonia, Finland,
France, Germany, Greece, Holland, Hungary, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovenia,
Slovakia, Spain (incl. Canary Islands), Sweden and UK.
*2 East Europe. Includes the following markets; Albania, Bosnia, Croatia, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia,
www.JagDocs.com
Kosovo, Montenegro and Serbia.
*3 Russia. Includes the following markets; Belarus, Kazakhstan, Ukraine and Uzbekistan.
*4 Middle East. Includes the following markets; Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Dubai, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Oman, Qatar and
Saudi Arabia.
*5 Caribbean. Includes the following markets; Bahamas, Barbados, Grand Cayman, Grenada and Trinidad and Tobago.
VIN
Code Engine Market
D 3.0L Algeria, Brunei, *5 Caribbean, Dominican Rep, Guatemala, Indonesia, Libya, *4 Middle East, Morrocco,
F 5.0L Pakistan, Panama, Phillipines, Sri Lanka, Tunisia and Uruguay
G 5.0L
Supercharged
H 3.0L China
P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
H 3.0L Chile
P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
H 3.0L Argentina
P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
www.JagDocs.com
H 3.0L *1 EU, *2 East Europe, Israel, Norway, Switzerland and Turkey

P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
2 3.0L Diesel
W 3.0L Brazil
X 5.0L
Y 5.0L
Supercharged
S 3.0L - Egypt Egypt and Syria
only
F 5.0L
G 5.0L
Supercharged
H 3.0L Japan
P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
A 4.2L USA
B 5.0L
C 5.0L
Supercharged
A 4.2L Canada
B 5.0L
C 5.0L
Supercharged
A 4.2L Mexico
B 5.0L
C 5.0L
Supercharged
B 5.0L South Korea
C 5.0L
Supercharged
2 3.0L Diesel
H 3.0L Malaysia
P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
D 3.0L South Africa
F 5.0L
G 5.0L
Supercharged
2 3.0L Diesel
www.JagDocs.com
VIN
Code Engine Market
H 3.0L Taiwan
P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
2 3.0L Diesel
D 3.0L Thailand
F 5.0L
G 5.0L
Supercharged
D 3.0L Singapore
F 5.0L
G 5.0L
Supercharged
H 3.0L Australia, Cyprus, Hong Kong, Malta, New Zealand and UK (and Eire)
P 5.0L
R 5.0L
Supercharged
2 3.0L Diesel

VIN Position 5
NOTES:
*1 EU. Includes the following markets; Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark,
Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, India (gasoline only), Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania,
www.JagDocs.com
Luxembourg, Malta, Moldova, Monaco, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, San Marino, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia,
Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey, UK; (Canary Islands, Azores, Madeira, Martinique, Guadeloupe, Reunion are included as
remote parts of sovereign states).
*2 With Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF), includes the following markets; Australia, Belarus, Gibraltar, Hong Kong, Iceland,
Israel, Korea (diesel), Macau, Morocco, New Zealand, Palestine, Singapore (diesel only), South Africa (Diesel), Taiwan, Tunisia.
*3 With-out DPF, includes the following markets; Argentina, Bermuda, Chile, China, Guadeloupe, India (diesel only),
Kazakhstan, Morocco, Ukraine, Russia.
*4 Rest Of World (ROW), includes the following markets; Barbados, Benin, Botswana, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Brunei,
Cameroon, Central African Republic, Chad, Congo, Costa Rica, Democratic Republic of Congo, Dominican Republic, Equatorial
Guinea, Ethiopia, Falklands, Fiji, Gabon, Gambia, Ghana, Guatemala, Guinea, Guinea Bissau, Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Ivory
Coast, Lesotho, Liberia, Madagascar, Malawi, Mali, Mozambique, Mauritania, Namibia, New Caledonia, Niger, Panama, Papua
New Guinea, Rwanda, Sierra Leone, Singapore (gasoline only),Somalia, Swaziland, Tahiti, Tanzania, Togo, Trinidad & Tobago,
Uganda, Western Sahara, Zambia, Zimbabwe.
*5 Emergent World, With-out OBD, includes the following markets; Albania, Angola, Bolivia, Colombia, Ecuador, Georgia,
Indonesia, Jamaica, Kenya, Kyrgystan, Macedonia, Malaysia, Mauritius, Nigeria, Paraguay, Peru, Philippines, South Africa
(gasoline only), Sri Lanka, Turkmenistan, Uruguay, Uzbekhistan, Venezuela, Vietnam.
*6 Hot Climate, With-out OBD, includes the following markets; Algeria, Azerbaijan, Bahrain, Bangladesh for gasoline,
Bhutan, Dubai, Egypt, Iraq, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon (gasoline only), Libya, Oman, Pakistan, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Sudan, Syria
(gasoline only), Thailand, Tunisia, United Arab Emirates, Yemen.
B 5.0L USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea

C 5.0L Supercharged USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea
D 3.0L *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
E 5.0L Supercharged USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea
F 5.0L *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
G 5.0L Supercharged *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
H 3.0L #(*2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF),* Japan and *1 EU
J 5.0L Supercharged *1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
K 5.0L Supercharged Brazil
L 5.0L Supercharged *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
P 5.0L *1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
R 5.0L Supercharged *1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
W 3.0L Brazil
X 5.0L Brazil
www.JagDocs.com
Y 5.0L Supercharged Brazil
2 3.0L Diesel *1 EU and *2 With DPF
3 3.0L Diesel *1 EU
5 3.0L Diesel *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World, *3 With-out DPF, Japan and *6 Hot Climate
#( ) 3.0L Gasoline EU4 is compliant with european emission requirements until December 2010.

VIN Position 5
NOTES:
*1 EU. Includes the following markets; Andorra, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Chile(diesel only), Croatia, Cyprus, Czech
Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, India (gasoline only), Ireland, Italy, Latvia,
Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Moldova, Monaco, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, San Marino,
Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey, UK; (Canary Islands, Azores, Madeira, Martinique, Guadeloupe,
Reunion are included as remote parts of sovereign states).
*2 With DPF, Australia, Belarus, Gibraltar, Hong Kong, Iceland, Israel, Korea (diesel only), Macau, Morocco, New Zealand,
Palestine, Singapore (diesel only), South Africa (Diesel), Taiwan, Tunisia
*3 With-out DPF, Argentina, Bermuda, Chile (gasoline only), China, Guadeloupe, India (diesel only), Kazakhstan, Mexico
(diesel only), Morocco, Ukraine, Russia.
www.JagDocs.com
*4 Rest Of World (ROW), includes the following markets; Barbados, Benin, Botswana, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Brunei,
Cameroon, Central African Republic, Chad, Congo, Costa Rica, Democratic Republic of Congo, Dominican Republic, Equatorial
Guinea, Ethiopia, Falklands, Fiji, Gabon, Gambia, Ghana, Guatemala, Guinea, Guinea Bissau, Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Ivory
Coast, Lesotho, Liberia, Madagascar, Malawi, Mali, Mozambique, Mauritania, Namibia, New Caledonia, Niger, Panama, Papua
New Guinea, Rwanda, Sierra Leone, Singapore (gasoline only),Somalia, Swaziland, Tahiti, Tanzania, Togo, Trinidad & Tobago,
Uganda, Western Sahara, Zambia, Zimbabwe.
*5 Emergent World, With-out OBD, includes the following markets; Albania, Angola, Bolivia, Colombia, Ecuador, Georgia,
Indonesia, Jamaica, Kenya, Kyrgystan, Macedonia, Malaysia, Mauritius, Nigeria, Paraguay, Peru, Philippines, South Africa
(gasoline only), Sri Lanka, Turkmenistan, Uruguay, Uzbekhistan, Venezuela, Vietnam.
*6 Hot Climate, With-out OBD, includes the following markets; Algeria, Azerbaijan, Bahrain, Bangladesh for gasoline,
Bhutan, Dubai, Egypt, Iraq, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon (gasoline only), Libya, Oman, Pakistan, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Sudan, Syria
(gasoline only), Thailand, Tunisia, United Arab Emirates, Yemen.
B 5.0L USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea

C 5.0L Supercharged USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea
D 3.0L *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
E 5.0L Supercharged USA, Canada, Mexico and Korea
F 5.0L *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
G 5.0L Supercharged *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
H 3.0L *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
J 5.0L Supercharged *1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
K 5.0L Supercharged Brazil
L 5.0L Supercharged *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World and *6 Hot Climate
P 5.0L *1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
R 5.0L Supercharged *1 EU, *2 With DPF, *3 With-out DPF and Japan
T 2.2L Diesel *1 EU and *2 With DPF
W 3.0L Brazil
X 5.0L Brazil
Y 5.0L Supercharged Brazil
5 3.0L Diesel *4 ROW, *5 Emergent World, *3 With-out DPF, Japan and *6 Hot Climate
Check Digit
VIN Position 6
0 - 9 or X Calculated in accordance with American standard CFR part 565
www.JagDocs.com
Model Year
VIN Position 7
9 2009 model year
A 2010 model year
B 2011 model year
C 2012 model year
Assembly Plant and Model Line

VIN Position 8
D Castle Bromwich 2.2L Diesel
F Castle Bromwich 3.0L Petrol
H Castle Bromwich 4.2L Normally aspirated Petrol
L Castle Bromwich 5.0L Normally aspirated Petrol
M Castle Bromwich 5.0L Supercharged Petrol
N Castle Bromwich 3.0L Diesel
1 Castle Bromwich 4.2L Supercharged Petrol
7 Castle Bromwich 2.7L Diesel
Production Sequence Number

VIN Position 9
Sequence Number
R00001 - R99999
S00001 - S99999
T00001 - T99999
www.JagDocs.com
VIN Label
VIN Label (Europe and Rest of world)
Item Description
1 Whole Vehicle Type Approval (WVTA) - Only shown for certain markets
2 VIN
3 Gross vehicle weight
www.JagDocs.com
4 Gross train weight
5 Maximum permitted front axle loading
6 Maximum permitted rear axle loading
7 Date of manufacture
8 Interior trim code
9 Paint code
VIN Label (North America)
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
5 VIN
6 Type
8 Paint code
www.JagDocs.com
VIN Label (Saudi Arabia and Gulf States)
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
2 VIN
4 Paint code
www.JagDocs.com
VIN Label (Canada)
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
5 VIN
6 Paint code
8 Type
VIN Label (China)
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Occupant number
2 Engine specification (Type/Capacity/Power)
3 VIN
4 Trade mark
5 Vehicle type
8 Manufacturer name
VIN Label (Argentina)
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 VIN
2 Trade mark and manufacturer adress (in Spanish)
4 Gross train weight
9 Paint code
Automatic Transmission Number

The serial number of the transmission unit is displayed on a metal label or bar code (if equipped) attached to the transmission
casing.
Engine Number(s)
Engine Number - 2.2L Diesel
The serial number is stamped on an engine web on the right-hand side of the cylinder block behind the engine mounting.
Engine Number - 3.0L
The engine number is contained on a bar code label on the front cover and is also stamped in the cylinder block casting on the
www.JagDocs.com
left-hand side of the engine below the engine mounting.
Engine Number - 4.2L and 4.2L Supercharged
The serial number is stamped on an engine web on the left-hand side of the cylinder block behind the engine mounting. The
emission code is also located here, on the transmission flange.
Engine Number - 5.0L and 5.0L Supercharged
The serial number is stamped on an engine web on the left-hand side of the cylinder block behind the engine mounting.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Jacking and Lifting - Jacking
Safety Precautions
WARNING: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to raise the vehicle for any other purpose. Refer to the Driver Handbook when
using the jack supplied with the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
The following safety precautions must be observed when raising the vehicle to carry out service operations:
Never rely on a jack alone to support a vehicle. Always use suitable vehicle stands to provide rigid support.
When working beneath a vehicle, whenever possible use a vehicle hoist instead of a jack and vehicle stands.
Make sure that the vehicle is standing on firm, level ground before using a jack.
Do not rely on the parking brake alone; chock the wheels and put the automatic transmission into Park if possible.
Check that any lifting equipment used has adequate capacity for the load being lifted and is in correct working order.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Jacking and Lifting - Lifting
Lifting Points—Twin-Post Hoist and Floor Jack

CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the hoist adapters to contact the steering linkage, suspension arms, stabilizer bar, rear subframe stabilizer
brackets or to compress the lower suspension arm stabilizer bar insulator. Damage to the suspension, exhaust and steering
linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters of two-post hoists prior to lifting
the vehicle.
Never use the differential housing as a lift point. Damage to the differential housing and cover may occur.
When using a floor jack, a cushioned pad must be utilized to avoid body damage.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Vehicle Support Points
www.JagDocs.com
Vehicle Recovery
NOTE: Prior to vehicle recovery, make sure the vehicle keys are available and the security system is disarmed.
Vehicle recovery methods are:
By flat-bed transporter.
By rear suspended tow.
By rear suspended tow.
Transporter or Trailer Recovery
When the vehicle is being recovered by transporter or trailer:
The parking brake must be applied and the wheels chocked.

The gear selector lever must be in Neutral. Do not select Park on automatic transmission vehicles, as the parking lock
mechanism may be damaged by the forward and backward rocking motion of the vehicle.
The vehicle must be securely tied down to the transporter or trailer.
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Suspended Tow
When the vehicle is being recovered by rear suspended tow:
The ignition key must be removed from the ignition switch to lock the steering.
The rear wheels must be correctly positioned in the lifting cradle and securely tied down.
Emergency Towing
WARNING: If the engine is not running, the steering will become heavy and the force necessary to effectively apply the
brakes will be greatly increased.
CAUTION: A vehicle with a defective transmission must be towed by rear suspended tow.
When the vehicle is being towed on its own wheels:
Local regulations for the towing of vehicles must be followed. In some countries the registration number of the towing
vehicle and an 'On Tow' sign or warning triangle must be displayed at the rear of the towed vehicle.
The gear selector lever must be in Neutral.
www.JagDocs.com
The ignition switch must be in position II to release the steering lock and make the direction indicators, horn and stop
lamps operate.
A distance of 0,8 km (0.5 mile) must not be exceeded.
A speed of 48 km/h (30 mph) must not be exceeded.
The tow rope must be attached to the front towing eye.
www.JagDocs.com
Noise, Vibration and Harshness - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) is becoming more important as vehicles become more sophisticated and passenger
comfort levels increase. This section is designed to aid in the diagnosis, testing and repair of NVH concerns.
Noise is defined as sounds not associated with the operation of passenger compartment equipment that interface with
customer satisfaction.
Vibration is defined as impulses felt by the customer that are not caused by road surface changes.
Harshness is a ride quality issue where the customer feels that the vehicle response to the road surface is sharply
transmitted to the customer.
Diagnostic Theory
Diagnosis is more than just following a series of interrelated steps in order to find the solution to the specific condition. It is a
way of looking at systems that are not functioning the way they should and finding out why. Also it is knowing how the system
should work and whether it is working correctly.
There are basic rules for diagnosis. If these rules are followed, the cause of the condition is usually found the first time
through the system.
Know the System

Know how the parts go together.
Know how the system operates as well as its limits and what happens when the system goes wrong.
Sometimes this means checking the system against one that is known to be working correctly.
Know the History of the System

www.JagDocs.com
A clue in any one of these areas may save time:
How old or new is the system?

What kind of treatment has it had?
Has it been repaired in the past in such a manner that might relate to the present condition?
What is the repair history?
Know the History of the Condition

Did it start suddenly or appear gradually?
Was it related to some other occurrence such as a collision or previous part renewal?
Know how the condition made itself known; it may be an important clue to the cause.
Know the Probability of Certain Conditions Developing

Look for the simple rather than the complex.
For example:
- Electrical conditions usually occur at connections rather than components.
- An engine no-start is more likely to be caused by a loose wire or small adjustment rather than a sheared-off
camshaft.
Know the difference between impossible and improbable. Certain failures in a system can be improbable but still
happen.
New parts are just that, new. It does not mean they are always good functioning parts.
Do Not Cure the Symptom and Leave the Cause

Lowering the pressure in a front tire may correct the condition of a vehicle leaning to one side, but it does not correct the
original condition.
Be Positive the Cause is Found

Double check the findings.
What caused a worn component?
A loose transmission or engine mount could indicate that other mounts are also loose.
Diagnostic Charts
Charts are a simple way of expressing the relationship between basic logic and a physical system of components. They help
discover the cause of a condition in the least time. Diagnostic charts combine many areas of diagnosis into one visual display:
probability of certain things occurring in a system

speed of checking certain components or functions before others
simplicity of carrying out certain tests before others
elimination of checking huge portions of a system by carrying out simple tests
certainty of narrowing down the search to a small portion before carrying out in-depth testing
The fastest way to find a condition is to work with the tools that are available. This means working with proven diagnostic
charts and the correct special equipment for the system.
www.JagDocs.com
Published: 16-Sep-2013
Noise, Vibration and Harshness - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH)
Principle of Operation
For a detailed description of Noise, Vibration and Harshness issues, refer to the Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual.
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Description and Operation).

1. Verify the customer's concerns by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition.
2. Visually inspect the vehicle to determine any obvious cause(s) of the concern(s).
3. If the inspection reveals obvious causes that can be readily identified, repair as necessary.
4. If the concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s) and refer to the Symptom Chart.
How To Use This Diagnostic Procedure Section

Noise, vibration and harshness (NVH) concerns have become more important as vehicles have become more sensitive to
these vibrations. This section is designed as an aid to identifying these situations
The section provides diagnostic procedures based on symptoms. If the condition occurs at high speed, for instance, the
most likely place to start is under High Speed Shake
The road test procedure will tell how to sort the conditions into categories and how to tell a vibration from a shake
A series of Road Test Quick Checks is provided to make sure that a cause is either pinpointed or eliminated
Name the condition, proceed to the appropriate section and locate the correct diagnosis. When the condition is
www.JagDocs.com
identified, the job is partly done

Follow the diagnostic procedure as outlined
Quick Checks are described within the step, while more involved tests and adjustments are outlined in General
Procedures
Always follow each step exactly and make notes to recall important findings later
Customer Interview
The road test and customer interview (if available) provide information that will help identify the concerns and will provide
direction to the correct starting point for diagnosis.
Identify the Condition

NVH problems usually occur in a number of areas:
tires
engine accessories
suspension
driveline
air leakage (wind noise)
squeaks and rattles
heating ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC)
electrical (e.g. motor noise)
transmission
engine
It is important, therefore, that an NVH concern be isolated into its specific area(s) as soon as possible. The easiest and
quickest way to do this is to carry out the Road Test as outlined.
Noise Diagnostic Procedure
Non-Axle Noise
The five most important sources of non-axle noise are exhaust, tires, roof racks, trim and mouldings, and transmission.
Therefore, make sure that none of the following conditions are the cause of the noise before proceeding with a driveline tear
down and diagnosis.
Under certain conditions, the pitch of the exhaust may sound very much like gear noise. At other times, it can be
mistaken for a wheel bearing rumble
Tires, especially snow tires, can have a high pitched tread whine or roar, similar to gear noise. Radial tires, to some
degree, have this characteristic. Also, any non-standard tire with an unusual tread construction may emit a roar or
whine type noise
Trim and mouldings can also cause whistling or a whining noise
Clunk may be a metallic noise heard when the automatic transmission is engaged in reverse or drive, or it may occur
when the throttle is applied or released. It is caused by backlash somewhere in the driveline
Bearing rumble sounds like marbles being tumbled. This condition is usually caused by a damaged wheel bearing
www.JagDocs.com
Noise Conditions
Gear noise is typically a howling or whining due to gear damage or incorrect bearing preload. It can occur at various
speeds and driving conditions, or it can be continuous
Chuckle is a particular rattling noise that sounds like a stick against the spokes of a spinning bicycle wheel. It occurs
while decelerating from approximately 64 km/h (40 miles/h) and can usually be heard all the way to a stop. The
frequency varies with vehicle speed
Knock is very similar to chuckle, though it may be louder and occurs on acceleration or deceleration. The tear down will
disclose what has to be corrected
Check and rule out tires, exhaust and trim items before disassembling the transmission to diagnose and correct gear noise.
The noises described under Road Test usually have specific causes that can be diagnosed by observation as the unit is
disassembled. The initial clues are the type of noise heard on the road test and the driving conditions.
Vibration Conditions
NOTE: New Constant Velocity (CV) joints should not be installed unless disassembly and inspection revealed unusual
wear.
Clicking, popping or grinding noises may be caused by the following:
Cut or damaged CV joint boots resulting in inadequate or contaminated lubricant in the outboard or inboard CV joint
bearing housings
Loose CV joint boot clamps
Another component contacting the rear drive half shaft
Worn, damaged or incorrectly installed wheel bearing, suspension or brake component
Vibration at highway speeds may be caused by the following:
Out-of-balance front or rear wheels

www.JagDocs.com
Out-of-round tires
Driveline imbalance
Driveline run-out (alignment)
NOTE: Rear drive half shafts are not balanced and are not likely to contribute to rotational vibration disturbance.
Shudder or vibration during acceleration (including from rest) may be caused by the following:
Driveline alignment
Excessively worn or damaged outboard or inboard CV joint bearing housing
Excessively high CV joint operating angles caused by incorrect ride height. Check ride height, verify correct spring rate
and check items under Inoperative Conditions
Excessively worn driveshaft components
Leakage Conditions
1. Inspect the CV joint boots for evidence of cracks, tears or splits.
2. Inspect the underbody for any indication of grease splatter in the vicinity of the rear drive half shaft, outboard and
inboard CV joint boot locations, which is an indication of CV joint boot or CV joint boot clamp damage.
3. Inspect the inboard CV joint bearing housing seal for leakage.
Inoperative Conditions
If a CV joint or rear drive half shaft pull-out occurs, check the following:
suspension components for correct location, damage or wear

bushings for wear
subframe for damage
bent or worn components
- Stabilizer bar link
- Left-hand rear suspension lower arm and bushing
- Right-hand rear suspension lower arm and bushing
- Rear wheel hub and rear drive half shaft
Road Test
A gear-driven unit will produce a certain amount of noise. Some noise is acceptable and may be audible at certain speeds or
under various driving conditions as on a newly paved blacktop road. The slight noise is in no way detrimental and must be
considered normal.
The road test and customer interview (if available) provide information needed to identify the condition and give direction to
the correct starting point for diagnosis.
1. Make notes throughout the diagnosis routine. Make sure to write down even the smallest piece of information, because
www.JagDocs.com
it may turn out to be the most important.
2. Do not touch anything until a road test and a thorough visual inspection of the vehicle have been carried out. Leave the
tire pressures and vehicle load just where they were when the condition was first observed. Adjusting tire pressures,
vehicle load or making other adjustments may reduce the conditions intensity to a point where it cannot be identified
clearly. It may also inject something new into the system, preventing correct diagnosis.
3. Make a visual inspection as part of the preliminary diagnosis routine, writing down anything that does not look right.
Note tire pressures, but do not adjust them yet. Note leaking fluids, loose nuts and bolts, or bright spots where
components may be rubbing against each other. Check the luggage compartment for unusual loads.
4. Road test the vehicle and define the condition by reproducing it several times during the road test.
5. Carry out the Road Test Quick Checks as soon as the condition is reproduced. This will identify the correct diagnostic
procedure. Carry out the Road Test Quick Checks more than once to verify they are providing a valid result. Remember,
the Road Test Quick Checks may not tell where the concern is, but they will tell where it is not.
Road Test Quick Checks

1. 24-80 km/h (15-50 miles/h): With light acceleration, a moaning noise is heard and possibly a vibration is felt in the
front floor pan. It is usually worse at a particular engine speed and at a particular throttle setting during acceleration at
that speed. It may also produce a moaning sound, depending on what component is causing it. Refer to Tip-In Moan in
the Symptom Chart.
2. Acceleration/deceleration: With slow acceleration and deceleration, a shake is sometimes noticed in the steering
wheel/column, seats, front floor pan, front door trim panel or front end sheet metal. It is a low frequency vibration
(around 9-15 cycles per second). It may or may not be increased by applying brakes lightly. Refer to Idle Boom/Shake
/Vibration in the Symptom Chart.
3. High speed: A vibration is felt in the front floor pan or seats with no visible shake, but with an accompanying sound or
rumble, buzz, hum, drone or booming noise. Coast with the clutch pedal depressed or shift control selector lever in
neutral and engine idling. If vibration is still evident, it may be related to wheels, tires, front brake discs, wheel hubs
www.JagDocs.com
or front wheel bearings. Refer to High Speed Shake in the Symptom Chart.
4. Engine rpm sensitive: A vibration is felt whenever the engine reaches a particular rpm. It will disappear in neutral
coasts. The vibration can be duplicated by operating the engine at the problem rpm while the vehicle is stationary. It
can be caused by any component, from the accessory drive belt to the torque converter which turns at engine speed
when the vehicle is stopped. Refer to High Speed Shake in the Symptom Chart.
5. Noise/vibration while turning: Clicking, popping, or grinding noises may be due to a worn, damaged, or incorrectly
installed front wheel bearing, rear drive half shaft or CV joint.
6. Noise/vibration that is road speed relative: This noise/vibration can be diagnosed independent of engine speed or gear
selected (engine speed varies but torque and road speed remain constant). The cause may be a rear drive
axle/differential whine.
Road Conditions
An experienced technician will always establish a route that will be used for all NVH diagnosis road tests. The road selected
should be reasonably smooth, level and free of undulations (unless a particular condition needs to be identified). A smooth
asphalt road that allows driving over a range of speeds is best. Gravel or bumpy roads are unsuitable because of the additional
road noise produced. Once the route is established and consistently used, the road noise variable is eliminated from the test
results.
NOTE: Some concerns may be apparent only on smooth asphalt roads.
If a customer complains of a noise or vibration on a particular road and only on a particular road, the source of the concern
may be the road surface. If possible, try to test the vehicle on the same type of road.
Vehicle Preparation
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the vehicle before carrying out the road test. Note anything which is unusual. Do not
repair or adjust any condition until the road test is carried out, unless the vehicle is inoperative or the condition could pose a
hazard to the technician.
After verifying the condition has been corrected, make sure all components removed have been installed.
Lift Test
After a road test, it is sometimes useful to do a similar test on a lift.
When carrying out the high-speed shake diagnosis or engine accessory vibration diagnosis on a lift, observe the following
precautions:
WARNING: If only one drive wheel is allowed to rotate, speed must be limited to 55 km/h (35 miles/h) indicated on the
speedometer since actual wheel speed will be twice that indicated on the speedometer. Speed exceeding 55 km/h (35 miles/h)
or allowing the drive wheel to hang unsupported could result in tire disintegration, differential failure, constant velocity joint
www.JagDocs.com
and drive half shaft failure, which could cause serious personal injury and extensive vehicle damage. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTION: The suspension should not be allowed to hang free. When the CV joint is run at a very high angle, extra
vibration as well as damage to the seals and joints can occur.
The rear suspension lower arm should be supported as far outboard as possible. To bring the vehicle to its correct ride height,
the full weight of the vehicle should be supported in the rear by floor jacks. REFER to: (100-02 Jacking and Lifting)
Jacking (Description and Operation),

Lifting (Description and Operation).
1. Raise and support the vehicle. REFER to: (100-02 Jacking and Lifting)
2. Explore the speed range of interest using the Road Test Quick Checks as previously described.
3. Carry out a coast down in neutral. If the vehicle is free of vibration when operating at a steady indicated speed and
behaves very differently in drive and coast, a transmission concern is likely.
Note, however, that a test on the lift may produce different vibrations and noises than a road test because of the effect of the
lift. It is not unusual to find vibrations on the lift that were not found in the road test. If the condition found on the road can
be duplicated on the lift, carrying out experiments on the lift may save a great deal of time.
Exhaust Neutralization Procedure

1. Raise vehicle on lift and slacken all exhaust fixings.
2. With all fixings loose, neutralize the exhaust system.

www.JagDocs.com
3. Tighten all fixings to correct torque, starting at the rear-most point working towards the front of the vehicle.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Cause Action

High-speed shake GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Wheel end vibration
Engine/transmission
Driveline
Tip-in moan GO to Pinpoint Test B.

Air cleaner
Power steering
Powertrain
Engine mounts
Exhaust system
Idle boom/shake/vibration, or shudder GO to Pinpoint Test C.

Cable(s)/hoses(s)
Intake air distribution and filtering system
Engine mounts
Exhaust system
Belt/pulleys
Wheel end vibration analysis GO to Pinpoint Test D.

Suspension/rear drive halfshaft and CV joints
Tires/wheels
Wheel bearings
CV joint boots
Non-axle noise GO to Pinpoint Test E.

Trim/mouldings
A/C system
Accessories
Pinpoint Tests
NOTE: These Pinpoint Tests are designed to take the technician through a step-by-step diagnosis procedure to determine
the cause of a condition. It may not always be necessary to follow the chart to its conclusion. Carry out only the Pinpoint Test
steps necessary to correct the condition. Then check operation of the system to make sure the condition is corrected.
After verifying that the condition has been corrected, make sure all components removed have been installed.
PINPOINT TEST A : HIGH-SPEED SHAKE
TEST DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS
www.JagDocs.com
PINPOINT TEST B : TIP-IN MOAN
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK THE AIR CLEANER
1 Check the air cleaner.
Check the air cleaner, inlet tube, outlet tube, resonators and all other components associated with
the air induction system for correct installation and tightness of all connections.
Are the components OK?

Yes
GO to B2.
No
Correct the condition. Repeat the Road Test as outlined.
B2: CHECK THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
1 Carry out the exhaust system neutralizing procedure in this section.
Is the exhaust system OK?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
Repair as necessary. Restore vehicle. Repeat the Road Test as outlined.
B3: CHECK THE POWER STEERING
1 Remove the auxiliary drive belt and test for tip-in moan.
Is the tip-in moan OK?
Yes
Repair the power steering as necessary. For additional information, refer to Section 211-00.
No
Check and install new engine/transmission mounts as necessary. Repeat Road Test as outlined.
www.JagDocs.com
PINPOINT TEST C : IDLE BOOM/SHAKE/VIBRATION/SHUDDER
CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK CABLE/HOSES
1 Check the engine compartment for any component that may be grounding between the engine and body
or chassis. Example: air conditioning (A/C) hoses.
Are the components OK?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
C2: CHECK THE COOLING RADIATOR
1 Check the engine cooling radiator mountings and bushings for security and condition. Check the radiator
installation for any component that may have a touch condition.
Are the installation and bushings OK?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
C3: CHECK THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
1 Carry out the exhaust system neutralizing procedure in this section.
Is the exhaust system OK?
Yes
Check and install new engine/transmission mounts as necessary. Repeat Road Test as outlined.
No
Repair as necessary. Repeat Road Test.
PINPOINT TEST D : WHEEL END VIBRATION ANALYSIS
TEST CONDITIONS DETAILS/RESULTS/ACTIONS

D1: INSPECT THE TIRES
1 Inspect the tires.
Raise and support the vehicle. REFER to: (100-02 Jacking and Lifting)
Inspect the tires for:
Correct tire size
Tire/wheel compatibility
Wear or damage
www.JagDocs.com
Tire beads correctly seated
Are the tires OK?

Yes
GO to D2.
No
Inspect the wheels. For additional information, refer to Section 204-00.
D2: INSPECT WHEEL BEARINGS
1 Inspect the wheel bearings. For additional information, refer to Section 204-00.
Are the wheel bearings OK?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
Repair as necessary. Repeat the Road Test as outlined.
D3: INSPECT THE CONSTANT VELOCITY (CV) JOINT BOOTS
1 Inspect the CV joint boots.
Spin the rear tire by hand
Inspect for evidence of cracks, tears, splits or splattered grease
Are the CV joint boots OK?

Yes
GO to D4.
No
Repair as necessary. Repeat the Road Test as outlined.
D4: INSPECT WHEEL AND TIRE RUNOUT
1 Inspect the wheel and tire runout.
Carry out the Wheel and Tire Check procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
REFER to: Lifting (100-02 Jacking and Lifting, Description and Operation).
Is the wheel and tire runout OK?

Yes
Balance the wheels and tires. Refer to the wheel balance equipment manufacturers instructions.
No
Repair as necessary.
Repeat the Road Test as outlined.
PINPOINT TEST E : NON-AXLE NOISE
CONDITIONS
E1: INSPECT VEHICLE TRIM
1 Check the grille and trim mouldings to see if they are the source of the noise.
Are the vehicle trim components causing the noise?
Yes
Install new trim or repair as necessary. For additional information, refer to Section 501-08.
No
GO to E2.
E2: CHECK THE A/C SYSTEM FOR NOISE
1 Check the A/C system components for noise by turning the A/C system on and off.
Is the A/C system causing the noise?
Yes
Diagnose the A/C system.
No
GO to E3.
E3: CHECK NON-FACTORY ACCESSORIES
1 Inspect any accessories for being the source of the noise. Example: grounding body-to-frame,
antennas, visors, bug deflectors and fog lights?
Are the accessories the cause of the noise?
Yes
Adjust, repair or install new accessories or fasteners as required.
No
Verify the customer concern.
www.JagDocs.com
Noise, Vibration and Harshness - Exhaust System Neutralizing
General Procedures
1. Loosen the muffler inlet pipe and resonator pipe to exhaust manifold
fasteners at the flanges and the muffler inlet connection.
2. Place a stand to support the muffler parallel to the vehicle frame with
the muffler pipe bracket free of stress.
3. Tighten the muffler connection.
4. Position the exhaust pipes to the manifolds and tighten. Make sure that
the catalytic converter and heat shield do not contact the frame rails.
5. With the complete exhaust system tight (and cooled) the rear hanger
insulator should be angled forward, to allow the system to expand
rearward when heated during normal running
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Published: 27-Aug-2013
Suspension System - General Information -
Vehicle Ride Height
NOTE: All figures are at "Kerb" height - For additional information, refer to Vehicle Ride Height below.
Description Measurement
Description Front/Rear Kerb mm (inch) Tolerance mm (inch)
Vehicles without supercharger Front 388 (15.28) ±12 (0.5)
Rear 391 (15.39) ±12 (0.5)
Vehicles with supercharger Front 385 (15.16) ±12 (0.5)
Rear 384 (15.12) ±12 (0.5)
Vehicles with All wheel drive Front 404 (15.90) ±12 (0.5)
Rear 391 (15.39) ±12 (0.5)
Ride height is measured from the centre of the wheel to the apex of the wheel arch, through the wheel centre line.
Kerb - with all fluids at full and a full tank of fuel, no occupants/luggage.
Tires must be inflated to normal pressure -
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Specifications).
Wheel Alignment - Front Camber
NOTE: *1 Camber Balance = left-hand camber - right-hand camber.
Description Left-hand Right-hand Balance*1

Markets Degrees/Minutes Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance
All right-hand drive and Japan Degrees/Minutes -0° 36' ±45' -0° 12' ±45' -0° 24' ±45'
www.JagDocs.com
Decimal Degrees -0.6° ±0.75° -0.2° ±0.75° -0.4° ±0.75°

USA, Canada, Mexico and Dominican Republic Degrees/Minutes -0° 12' ±45' -0° 33' ±45' 0° 21' ±45'
(Federal) Decimal Degrees -0.2° ±0.75° -0.55° ±0.75° 0.35° ±0.75°
Rest of world Degrees/Minutes -0° 12' ±45' -0° 24' ±45' 0° 12' ±45'
Decimal Degrees -0.2° ±0.75° -0.4° ±0.75° 0.2° ±0.75°
Vehicles with All wheel drive Degrees/Minutes -0° 11' ±45' -0º 32' ±0.45' 21' ±45'
Decimal Degrees -0.19° ±0.75º -0.54º ±0.75º 0.35º ±0.75°
Wheel Alignment - Front Caster
NOTE: *2 Caster Balance = left-hand caster - right-hand caster.
Description Left-hand Right-hand Balance*2

All right-hand drive and Japan Degrees/Minutes 6° 53' ±45' 6° 20' ±45' 0° 33' ±45'
Decimal Degrees 6.88° ±0.75° 6.33° ±0.75° 0.55° ±0.75°
USA, Canada, Mexico and Dominican Republic Degrees/Minutes 6° 36' ±45' 6° 45' ±45' -0° 8' ±45'
(Federal) Decimal Degrees 6.61° ±0.75° 6.74° ±0.75° -0.14° ±0.75°
Rest of world Degrees/Minutes 6° 36' ±45' 6° 36' ±45' 0° 0' ±45'
Decimal Degrees 6.61° ±0.75° 6.61° ±0.75° 0° ±0.75°
Vehicles with All wheel drive Degrees/Minutes 6° 2' ± 45' 6° 11' ± 45' - 9' ± 45'
Decimal Degrees 6.04º ±0.75° 6.19° ± 0.75° -0.15° ± 0.75°
Wheel Alignment - Front Toe
Description Total Toe
Markets Degrees/Minutes Nominal Tolerance
All right-hand drive and Japan Degrees/Minutes 0° 13' ±12'
Decimal Degrees 0.22° ±0.20°
USA, Canada, Mexico and Dominican Republic (Federal) Degrees/Minutes 0° 13' ±12'
Rest of world Degrees/Minutes 0° 13' ±12'
Vehicles with All wheel drive Degrees/Minutes 16' ± 12'
Decimal Degrees 0.27° ± 0.20°
Wheel Alignment - Rear Camber (Vehicles without supercharger)
Description Left-hand Right-hand
Markets Degrees/Minutes Nominal Tolerance Nominal Tolerance
All Markets Degrees/Minutes -0° 47' ±45' -0° 47' ±45'
Decimal Degrees -0.78° ±0.75° -0.78° ±0.75°
Wheel Alignment - Rear Camber (Vehicles with supercharger)
All Markets Degrees/Minutes -0° 59' ±45' -0° 59' ±45'
www.JagDocs.com
Decimal Degrees -0.98° ±0.75° -0.98° ±0.75°
Vehicles with All wheel drive Degrees/Minutes - 53' ± 45' - 53' ± 45'
Decimal Degrees -0.89° ± 0.75° -0.89° ± 0.75°
Wheel Alignment - Rear Toe
Description Left-hand Right-hand Total Toe
All Markets Degrees/Minutes 0° 5' ±8' 0° 5' ±8' 0° 10' ±12'
Decimal Degrees 0.083° ±0.14° 0.083° ±0.14° 0.17° ±0.20°
Vehicles with All wheel drive Degrees/Minutes 5' ± 8' 5' ± 8' 9' ± 12'
Decimal Degrees 0.08° ± 0.14° 0.08° ± 0.14° 0.15° ± 0.20°
Wheel Alignment - Rear Thrust Angle
NOTE: *5 Rear Thrust Angle = (left-hand toe - right-hand toe) ÷ 2.
Markets Rear Thrust Angle*5

Markets Degrees/Minutes Nominal Tolerance
All Markets Degrees/Minutes 0° 0' ±8'
Decimal Degrees 0° ±0.14°
Vehicles with All wheel drive Degrees/Minutes 0° 0' ±8'
Decimal Degrees 0° ±0.14°
General Specifications
Item Specification
Clear Vision
Clear vision (negative value is counterclockwise) 0° ± 3°
Ball Joint Radial Play
www.JagDocs.com
Lower ball joint — maximum 0.8 mm (1/32 in)

Upper ball joint — maximum 0.8 mm (1/32 in)
www.JagDocs.com
Suspension System - General Information - Suspension System
For a detailed description of the suspension system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the workshop
manual. REFER to:
Front Suspension (204-01 Front Suspension, Description and Operation),

Rear Suspension (204-02 Rear Suspension, Description and Operation),
Rear Suspension (204-02 Rear Suspension, Description and Operation),
Rear Suspension (204-02 Rear Suspension, Description and Operation).

1. Verify the customer concern by carrying out a road test on a smooth road. If any vibrations are apparent, refer to
section 100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity.
Visual Inspection Chart

Mechanical
Damaged tires
Wheel bearing(s)
Loose or damaged front or rear suspension components
Loose, damaged or missing suspension fastener(s)
www.JagDocs.com
Incorrect spring usage

Damaged or sagging spring(s)
Damaged or leaking shock absorber(s)
Damaged or leaking strut(s)
Worn or damaged suspension bushing(s)
Loose, worn or damaged steering system components
Damaged axle components
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported condition is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to
the next step.
4. If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the following Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Possible Sources Action

Crabbing * Incorrect rear thrust angle. * Check the rear toe adjustment.
REFER to: Rear Toe Adjustment (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, General Procedures).
* Front or rear suspension components. * Inspect the front and rear suspension systems. Repair or
install new suspension components as necessary.
* Drive axle damaged. * Install a new rear drive axle/differential.
REFER to: Axle Assembly - V6 3.0L Petrol (205-02 Rear
Drive Axle/Differential, Removal and Installation).
Drift/Pull * Unequal tire pressure. * Check and adjust the tire pressures. Inspect the tire for
excessive wear.
REFER to: Specifications (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
Specifications).
* Incorrect wheel alignment. * Check and adjust the wheel alignment. REFER to:
(204-00 Suspension System - General Information)
Front Toe Adjustment (General Procedures),
Rear Toe Adjustment (General Procedures),
Camber and Caster Adjustment (General Procedures).
* Tires. * Check and adjust the tire pressures. Inspect the tire for
excessive wear.
Specifications).
* Unevenly loaded or overloaded vehicle. * Notify the customer of incorrect vehicle loading.
* Damaged steering components. * Check the steering system.
* Brake drag. * Check the brakes.
REFER to: Brake System (206-00 Brake System - General
Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Front Bottoming or * Coil springs. * Check the ride height. Install new springs as necessary.
Riding Low REFER to:
Front Shock Absorber (204-01 Front Suspension,
Removal and Installation),
Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly (204-02 Rear
Suspension, Removal and Installation).
Incorrect Tire Wear * Incorrect tire pressure (rapid center rib * Check and adjust the tire pressure. Inspect the tire for
or inner and outer edge wear). excessive wear.
Specifications).
* Excessive front or rear toe (rapid inner * Check and adjust the wheel alignment. REFER to:
or outer edge wear). (204-00 Suspension System - General Information)
* Excessive negative or positive camber * Check and adjust the wheel alignment. REFER to:
(rapid inner or outer edge wear). (204-00 Suspension System - General Information)
* Tires out of balance (tires cupped or * Balance the tires.
dished).
Rough ride * Spring(s) * Check and install new spring(s) as necessary. REFER to:
Shimmy or Wheel Tramp * Loose wheel nut(s). * Check and tighten the wheel nuts to specification.
Specifications).
* Loose front suspension fasteners. * Check and tighten the suspension fasteners to
www.JagDocs.com
specification.
REFER to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension System -
General Information, Specifications).
* Front wheel bearing(s). * Check the wheel bearings.
* Worn or damaged suspension * Check and install new components as necessary.
component bushing.
* Wheel/tires. * Check the wheels/tires. Balance or install new
wheel/tires as necessary.
REFER to: Wheels and Tires (204-04 Wheels and Tires,
* Loose, worn or damaged ball joint(s). * Check the Ball Joint(s).
* Loose, worn or damaged steering * Check and install new components as necessary.
components.
* Front wheel alignment. * Check and adjust the wheel alignment. REFER to:
* Shock absorber(s). * Check and install new shock absorber(s) as necessary.
REFER to:
* Spring(s). * Check and install new springs as necessary. REFER to:
Poor self center action of * Ball joints. * Check the Ball Joints.
the steering * Steering components. * Check and install new components as necessary.
Steering wheel off-center * Unequal front or rear toe settings. * Check and adjust the wheel alignment. REFER to:
* Steering components. * Check and install new components as necessary.
Sway or roll * Overloaded, unevenly or incorrectly * Notify the customer of incorrect vehicle loading.
loaded vehicle.
* Loose wheel nut(s). * Check and tighten the wheel nut(s) to specification.
Specifications).
* Coil spring(s). * Check and install new coil springs as necessary. REFER
to:
www.JagDocs.com
* Loose front stabilizer bar or rear * Check and tighten the stabilizer bar to specification.
stabilizer bar. REFER to:
Specifications (204-01 Front Suspension, Specifications),
Specifications (204-02 Rear Suspension, Specifications).
* Worn lower suspension arm stabilizer * Install new lower suspension arm stabilizer bar as
bar insulators. necessary. REFER to:
Front Stabilizer Bar - 3.0L Diesel (204-01, Removal and
Installation),
Front Stabilizer Bar - V6 3.0L Petrol (204-01 Front
Suspension, Removal and Installation),
Front Stabilizer Bar - 4.2L (204-01, Removal and
Installation),
Rear Stabilizer Bar (204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal
and Installation).
REFER to:
Vehicle Leans to One * Unevenly loaded or overloaded vehicle. * Notify the customer of incorrect vehicle loading.
Side * Front or rear suspension components. * Inspect the front and rear suspension systems. Repair or
install new suspension components as necessary.
REFER to:
www.JagDocs.com
* Coil spring(s). * Check and install new spring(s) as necessary. REFER to:
* Incorrect ride height. Lateral tilt out of * Check the ride height. Install new spring(s) as
specification. necessary. REFER to:
Vibration/Noise * Tires/wheels. * Check and install new components as necessary.
* Wheel bearings.
* Wheel hubs.
* Brake components.
* Suspension components.
* Steering components.
Wander * Unevenly loaded or overloaded vehicle. *
Notify the customer of incorrect vehicle loading.
* Ball joint(s). *
Check the Ball Joint(s).
* Front wheel bearing(s). *
Check the wheel bearings.
* Loose, worn or damaged suspension *
Check and install new suspension components as
components. necessary.
* Loose suspension fasteners. * Check and tighten the suspension fasteners to
specification.
REFER to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension System -
General Information, Specifications).
* Steering components. * Check and install new steering components.
* Wheel alignment (excessive total front * Check and adjust the wheel alignment. REFER to:
toe-out). (204-00 Suspension System - General Information)
Component Tests
Ball Joint Inspection
NOTE: The front suspension is shown in the following procedures. The inspection of the rear suspension upper ball joint
is similar.
1. Raise and support the vehicle. REFER to: (100-02 Jacking and Lifting)
2. Prior to carrying out any inspection of the ball joints, inspect the front wheel bearings.
www.JagDocs.com
3. CAUTION: The safety stand beneath the suspension lower arm must only support the weight of the suspension and
not the full weight of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the components.
Position a safety stand beneath the front suspension lower arm or rear suspension lower arm to be tested.
www.JagDocs.com
4. While an assistant pulls and pushes the top and bottom of the tire, observe the relative movement between the ball
joint and the front suspension lower arm. Any movement at or exceeding the specification indicates a worn or damaged
ball joint. Install a new wheel knuckle as necessary.
REFER to: Wheel Knuckle (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
5. While an assistant pulls and pushes the top and bottom of the tire, observe the relative movement between the ball
joint and the front suspension upper arm or rear suspension upper arm. Any movement at or exceeding the specification
indicates a worn or damaged ball joint. Install a new upper arm as necessary. REFER to: (204-01 Front Suspension)
Upper Arm LH (Removal and Installation),
Upper Arm RH (Removal and Installation).
6. Remove the safety stand.
7. Lower the vehicle.

Published: 16-Oct-2013
Suspension System - General Information - Camber and Caster Adjustment
General Procedures
NOTES:
The camber and caster adjustment for the left-hand side is shown, the procedure for adjusting the right-hand side is
similar.
This procedure must be carried out using a 4-post ramp.
Adjustments to the camber will affect the toe settings. Therefore, the camber and toe may need to be adjusted at the
same time to achieve the correct settings.
Adjustments to the camber may affect the caster settings. Therefore, the caster will need to be checked, and adjusted as
necessary.
All vehicles
1. Vehicles with air suspension.

For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Manual Tight
Tolerance Setting Mode (204-05, General Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
2. Check the rear toe adjustment.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Toe Adjustment (204-00
Suspension System - General Information, General Procedures).
Adjust as necessary.
3. Check the front toe adjustment.

For additional information, refer to: Front Toe Adjustment (204-00
Adjust as necessary.
4. Check the camber and caster settings. Follow the equipment

manufacturer's instructions.
5. NOTE: Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.
Loosen the tie-rod end lock nut.

Clean and lubricate the lock nut and tie-rod threads.
6. NOTES:
Do not allow the tie-rod end or steering gear boot to twist

when the tie-rod is rotated.
Left-hand, shown right-hand similar.
Rotate the tie-rod to adjust the toe.
Vehicles requiring camber adjustment
Loosen the rear lower arm lock nut.

www.JagDocs.com
Rotate the camber adjustment cam bolt to adjust the camber.
9. Check the camber and toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's
instructions. Adjust as necessary.
10. NOTES:
Make sure the camber adjustment cam bolt does not

rotate.
Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.
Tighten the rear lower arm lock nut.

Tighten to 175 Nm.
Vehicles requiring caster adjustment
Loosen the front lower arm lock nut.

www.JagDocs.com
12. NOTES:
Adjustments to the caster will affect the toe settings.

Therefore, the caster and toe may need to be adjusted at the
same time to achieve the correct settings.
Rotate the caster adjustment cam bolt to adjust the caster.
13. NOTES:
Make sure the caster adjustment cam bolt does not

rotate.
Tighten the caster adjustment cam bolt lock nut.

Tighten to 175 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
14. NOTES:
Make sure the tie-rod or tie-rod end does not rotate.
Tighten the tie-rod end lock nut

Tighten to 55 Nm.
15. NOTE: Make sure that all fixings are torqued to the correct
specification.
Check the caster and toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's
instructions. Adjust as necessary.
www.JagDocs.com
Suspension System - General Information - Four-Wheel Alignment
General Procedures
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the vehicle is on a flat level surface.
Make sure the tire pressures are within specification.
Make sure that only the manufacturers' recommended four wheel alignment equipment is used.
Make sure the steering is in the straight ahead position.
1. For wheel alignment information, refer to the suspension specification

section.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, Specifications).
2. Check the tie rod ends, suspension joints, wheel bearings and wheels
and tires for damage, wear and free play.
Adjust or repair any worn, damaged or incorrectly adjusted
components.
www.JagDocs.com
3. Check and adjust tire pressures.
4. Position the vehicle on a calibrated, level, vehicle lift.

6. Release the vehicle parking brake.
7. Using only four-wheel alignment equipment approved by Jaguar, check

the wheel alignment.
8. NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar. To
adjust, loosen the toe link locknuts.

9. CAUTION: Do not allow the gaiter to twist.
NOTES:
Both tie rods must be rotated by an equal amount.
LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
Adjust the rear toe.
10. Tighten the toe link locknuts to 55 Nm (40 lb.ft).
11. NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
To adjust the caster, loosen the front lower arm lock nuts.
www.JagDocs.com
Rotate the caster adjustment cam bolt.
13. CAUTION: Make sure the caster adjustment bolt does not rotate
while the lock nut is being tightened.
Tighten the caster adjustment cam bolt nut.

Tighten the nut and bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
14. CAUTION: Adjustments made to the camber setting will
affect the front toe setting. Therefore , the camber and toe
may need to be adjusted at the same time.
NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar.
To adjust the camber, loosen the rear lower arm lock nuts.
Rotate the camber adjustment cam bolt.

www.JagDocs.com
16. CAUTION: Make sure the camber adjustment bolt does not rotate
while the lock nut is being tightened.
Tighten the camber adjustment cam bolt nut.

Tighten the nut and bolt to 175 Nm (129 lb.ft).
To adjust, loosen the tie rod end lock nuts.

NOTES:
Adjust the front toe.
19. Tighten the tie rod end lock nuts to 55 Nm (40 lb.ft).

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Suspension System - General Information - Front Toe Adjustment
General Procedures
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the vehicle is on a flat level surface.
Make sure the tire pressures are within specification.
1. For wheel alignment information, refer to the suspension specification

section.
For additional information, refer to: Specifications (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information, Specifications).
2. Check the tie rod ends, suspension joints, wheel bearings and wheels
and tires for damage, wear and free play.
Adjust or repair any worn, damaged or incorrectly adjusted
components.
www.JagDocs.com
3. Check and adjust tire pressures.
4. Position the vehicle on a 4 post lift.
5. Release the vehicle parking brake.

7. For additional information, refer to: Air Suspension Manual Tight


9. NOTE: LH illustration shown, RH is similar. To
adjust, loosen the tie rod end lock nuts.

NOTES:
Adjust the front toe.
Tighten the tie rod end lock nuts to 55 Nm.

www.JagDocs.com

Suspension System - General Information - Rear Toe Adjustment
General Procedures

2. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's

instructions.
3. NOTE: Left-hand, shown right-hand similar.
Loosen the lock nut.

Clean and lubricate the lock nut and toe link threads.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Rotate the toe link to adjust the toe settings.
5. Tighten the lock nut.
6. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's

instructions.
Published: 14-Feb-2012
Suspension System - General Information - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout
Check Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
NOTES:
Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
RH illustration shown, LH similar.
1. WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle stands.
Raise the front of the vehicle.
2. Remove the front wheel.

For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper support bolts.

Push the brake caliper pistons back to release the pads from the disc.
Detach the brake caliper and position to one side with suitable tie strap.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Remove the disc.

Remove the 2 clips.
5. Mount special 6. Position

tool 100-053 the Dial
on the lower Test
caliper support Indicator
bracket as (DTI)
shown. gauge
A probe on
spacer the hub
washer flange
may be as
required shown.
under
the
tool.
Use the
brake
caliper
support
bolt
and
suitable
nut.
7. Zero DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to measure hub runout. hub runout must not
exceed 0.015 mm.
8. If the hub runout exceeds the limit, install a new hub and bearing.For additional information, refer to:
(204-01 Front Suspension)
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V6 3.0L Petrol (Removal and Installation),
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (Removal
and Installation).
9. If the hub runout is within the limit install the removed components.
10. tighten the brake caliper bolts to 115 Nm.

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Suspension System - General Information - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Runout
Check Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
NOTES:
2. Remove the front wheel.

For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).

Push the brake caliper pistons back to release the pads from the disc.
Detach the brake caliper and position to one side with suitable tie strap.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Remove the disc.

Remove the 2 clips.
5. Mount special 6. Position

tool 100-053 the Dial
on the lower Test
caliper support Indicator
bracket as (DTI)
shown. gauge
A probe on
spacer the hub
washer flange
may be as
required shown.
under
the
tool.
Use the
brake
caliper
support
bolt
and
suitable
nut.
7. Zero DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to measure hub runout. hub runout must not
exceed 0.015 mm.
8. If the hub runout exceeds the limit, install a new hub and bearing.
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V6 3.0L Petrol (204-01 Front
For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
10. Tighten brake caliper bolts to 115 Nm.

www.JagDocs.com
This section contains no data
www.JagDocs.com
Suspension System - General Information - Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel
Hub Runout Check Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
NOTES:
It is recommended that the DTI is capable of measurements of 0.005 mm.
Raise the rear of the vehicle.
2. Remove the rear wheel.

For additional information, refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and
Tires, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com

Push the brake pads back to release the brake
caliper from the disc.
Detach the brake caliper and position to one side
with suitable tie strap.
4. Remove the disc.

Remove the 2 clips.
5. Mount special tool 100-053 on the lower caliper support
bracket as shown.
A spacer washer may be required under the tool.
Use the brake caliper support bolt and suitable nut.
6. CAUTION: Take care not to contact the studs.

www.JagDocs.com
Position the Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge probe on the

hub flange as shown.
7. Zero DTI and rotate the hub one complete revolution to measure hub
runout. Hub runout must not exceed 0.025 mm.
8. If the hub runout exceeds the limit, install a new hub and bearing.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheel Bearing (204-02 Rear
10. Tighten the brake support caliper bolts to 103 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
Front Suspension -
Torque Specification
Description Nm lb-ft lb-in
Steering gear to subframe retaining bolts 100 74 -
Toe link ball joint to wheel knuckle retaining nut 133 98 -
Stabilizer bar link to stabilizer bar retaining nut 43 32 -
Stabilizer bar link to lower arm retaining nut and bolt 70 52 -
Stabilizer bar clamp to subframe retaining bolts 55 41 -
Rear lower arm to wheel knuckle ball joint retaining nut 75 55 -
Rear lower arm to subframe retaining nut and bolt 175 129 -
Front lower arm to subframe retaining nut and bolt 175 129 -
Front lower arm to rear lower arm retaining nut and bolt Stage 1 - 60 Stage 2 - 135 Stage 1 - 44 Stage 2 - 135 -
degrees degrees
Upper arm ball joint to wheel knuckle retaining nut 90 66 -
Upper arm to body retaining nuts and bolts 47 35 -
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting to body 28 20 -
retaining nuts
Shock absorber and spring assembly to lower arm retaining nut and 175 129 -
bolt
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting retaining nut 50 37 -
(without adaptive damping)
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting retaining nut 27 20 -
(with adaptive damping)
Wheel hub and bearing assembly to wheel knuckle retaining bolt 90 66 -
Wheel and tire to wheel hub retaining nuts 125 92 -
www.JagDocs.com
Front Suspension - Front Suspension - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Subframe
2 Spring and damper assembly
3 Upper control arm
4 Wheel knuckle
5 Wheel hub and bearing assembly
6 Lower lateral control arm
7 Lower forward control arm
8 Stabilizer bar
9 Stabilizer bar link
Front Suspension - Front Suspension - Overview
OVERVIEW
The front suspension is a fully independent design assembled on a non-isolated subframe. The wheel knuckle attaches to the
wishbone type upper and lower control arms.
The stabilizer bar attaches to the front of the subframe and varies in shape depending on the engine variant.
The spring and damper assemblies are located between the lower control arm and the front suspension housing in the inner
wing. Dependant on vehicle model there are three types of coil spring and damper available:
a standard oil passive damper (All models except supercharged),

an adaptive damper, also known as Computer Active Technology Suspension (CATS) on 4.2L supercharged vehicles up to
2010MY,
Refer to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - 4.2L (204-05, Description and Operation).
a continuously variable adaptive damper, also known as Adaptive Dynamics System on 5.0L supercharged vehicles from
2010MY and Diesel S from 2011MY.
Refer to: Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension,
Description and Operation).
www.JagDocs.com
Published: 20-Jun-2011
Front Suspension - Front Suspension - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
The front suspension is a fully independent design assembled on a non-isolated subframe mounted by four bolts to the vehicle
body. This rigid mounting arrangement provides the driver with optimum steering feel and facilitates towards the vehicle's
sporty dynamic suspension.
The suspension arrangement is a double-wishbone type with the length ratio between the upper and lower wish-bone control
arms calculated to minimize track and camber changes.
An adaptive damping system is available on specified models. For additional information refer to Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
4.2L or 5.0L.
Component Description
COMPONENTS
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Subframe
3 Upper control arm
4 Wheel knuckle
7 Lower lateral control arm
8 Lower forward control arm
9 Stabilizer bar
Upper Control Arm
The forged-aluminum upper control arm is a wishbone design and connects to the vehicle body through two plain bushes, and
links to the swan neck wheel knuckle by an integral ball joint. The upper control arm is inclined to provide anti-dive
characteristics under heavy braking, while also controlling geometry for vehicle straight-line stability.
Lower Control Arm

The forged aluminum lower control arms are of the wishbone design; the arms separate to allow for optimum bush tuning:
The rear lateral control arm is fitted with a bush at its inner end which locates between brackets on the subframe. The
arm is secured with an eccentric bolt which provides the adjustment of the suspension camber geometry. The outer end
of the control arm has a tapered hole which locates on a ball joint fitted to the wheel knuckle. An integral clevis bracket
on the forward face of the lateral control arm allows for the attachment of the forward control arm. A bush is fitted
below the clevis bracket to provide for the attachment of the stabilizer bar link. A cross-axis joint is fitted to a
cross-hole in the control arm to provide the location for the clevis attachment of the spring and damper assembly.
The forward control arm is fitted with a fluid-block rubber bush at its inner end which locates between brackets on the
subframe. The arm is secured with an eccentric bolt which provides adjustment of the castor and camber geometry. The
outer end of the control arm is fitted with a cross-axis joint and locates in the integral clevis bracket on the lateral
control arm.
Wheel Knuckle
The cast aluminum wheel knuckle is a swan neck design and attaches to the upper control arm and lower lateral control arm.
The lower lateral control arm locates on a non serviceable ball-joint integral with the wheel knuckle. The lower boss on the
rear of the knuckle provides for the attachment of the steering gear tie-rod ball joint.
The wheel knuckle also provides the mounting locations for the:
wheel hub and bearing assembly

the wheel speed sensor (integral to the wheel hub and bearing assembly)
brake caliper and disc shield.
www.JagDocs.com
Stabilizer Bar
The stabilizer bar is attached to the front of the subframe with bushes and mounting brackets. The pressed steel mounting
brackets locate over the bushes and are attached to the cross member with bolts screwed into threaded locations in the
subframe. The stabilizer bar has crimped, 'anti-shuffle' collars pressed in position on the inside edges of the bushes. The
collars prevent sideways movement of the stabilizer bar.
The stabilizer bar is manufactured from 32mm diameter tubular steel on supercharged models and 31mm diameter tubular
steel on diesel and normally aspirated models and has been designed to provide particular characteristics in maintaining roll
rates, specifically in primary ride comfort.
Each end of the stabilizer bar curves rearwards to attach to a ball joint on a stabilizer link. Each stabilizer link is secured to a
bush in the lower lateral arm with a bolt and locknut. The links allow the stabilizer bar to move with the wheel travel providing
maximum effectiveness.
The only difference between the front stabilizer bars, in addition to the diameter, is in the shape to accommodate engine
variant:
a slightly curved bar, between bush centers, for V6 diesel (31 mm dia) and V8 gasoline supercharged (32 mm dia),
a straight bar, between bush centers, for V6 and V8 normally aspirated gasoline engines (31 mm dia).
Spring and Damper Assembly

The spring and damper assemblies are located between the lower lateral arm and the front suspension housing in the inner
wing. Dependant on vehicle model there are three types of coil spring and damper available:

2010MY, For additional information refer to Vehicle Dynamic Suspension 4.2L.
2010MY and Diesel S from 2011MY. For additional information refer to Vehicle Dynamic Suspension 5.0L.
The dampers are a monotube design with a spring seat secured by a circlip onto the damper tube. The damper's lower
spherical joint is an integral part of the lateral lower control-arm, and the damper takes the form of a clevis-end, which
straddles the spherical joint.
The damper piston is connected to a damper rod which is sealed at its exit point from the damper body. The threaded outer
end of the damper rod locates through a hole in the top mount. A self locking nut secures the top mount to the damper rod.
The damper rod on the adaptive damper has an electrical connector on the outer end of the damper rod.
Supercharged 4.2L vehicles up to 2010MY: The adaptive damper functions by restricting the flow of hydraulic fluid through
internal galleries in the damper's piston. The adaptive damper has a solenoid operated valve, which when switched allows a
greater flow of hydraulic fluid through the damper's piston. This provides a softer damping characteristic from the damper. The
adaptive damper defaults to a firmer setting when not activated. The solenoid is computer controlled and can switch between
soft and hard damping settings depending on road wheel inputs and vehicle speed.
Supercharged 5.0L vehicles from 2010MY: The variable damper functions by adjustment of a solenoid operated variable orifice,
which opens up an alternative path for oil flow within the damper. When de-energized the bypass is closed and all the oil flows
www.JagDocs.com
through the main (firm) piston. When energized the solenoid moves an armature and control blade, which work against a
spring. The control blade incorporates an orifice which slides inside a sintered housing to open up the bypass as required. In
compression, oil flows from the lower portion of the damper through a hollow piston rod, a separate soft (comfort) valve, the
slider housing and orifice and into the upper portion of the damper, thereby bypassing the main (firm) valve. In rebound the oil
flows in the opposite direction
The damper rod is fitted with a spring aid which prevents the top mount making contact with the top of the damper body
during full suspension compression and also assists with the suspension tune.
The spring rate of the coil springs can differ between models and are color coded for identification. The coil spring locates on a
spring packer and a lower spring seat which is located on the damper body. The spring locates in an upper spring seat which is
located on the underside of the top mount. The majority of the roll stiffness is provided by the springs rather than the
stabilizer bar as this arrangement allows for a natural frequency of roll and consequently a consistent suspension ride.
India-Specific Spring and Damper Assembly Spacers

www.JagDocs.com
Front and rear spring and damper assemblies are fitted with spacers to raise ride height in India-specific vehicles. The front
and the rear spacers are the same, their color is black.
Front Suspension - Front Suspension
manual.REFER to: (204-01 Front Suspension)
Front Suspension (Description and Operation),

Front Suspension (Description and Operation),
Front Suspension (Description and Operation).

1. Verify the customer concern
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage and system integrity
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Damaged suspension dampers
the next step
4. If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the following Symptom Chart
www.JagDocs.com
Symptom Chart
Evidence of fluid on suspension damper
Fluid on damper from an external source Damper not faulty, do not renew
Fluid leaking from damper GO to Pinpoint Test A.
PINPOINT TEST A : DAMPER FLUID LEAK DIAGNOSIS

A1: ASSESS LEAK
NOTES:
Residual oil left over from the damper assembly process may create oil staining on the damper tube. This will not affect
the function of the damper.
Slight seepage is considered normal.
1 Assess the extent of the oil leakage

Is the leakage serious enough to indicate that the damper seal has failed?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Damper not faulty, do not renew.
PINPOINT TEST B : CONFIRM LEAK

B1: ROAD TEST
1 Clean all traces of oil from the damper
2 Drive the vehicle over a speed bump or similar ten times
Is any fluid visible on the outside of the damper?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test C.
No
PINPOINT TEST C : DAMPER STICKOUT TEST

C1: DAMPER STICKOUT TEST
NOTE: If a significant quantity of fluid has leaked out of the damper, the dividing piston will be displaced upwards in the
tube by the pressure of the gas below it. This will limit the downward travel of the piston.
1 Remove the suspension strut assembly

REFER to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01 Front Suspension,
Removal and Installation).
2 Remove the spring
3 Remove the bump stop
4 Push the damper piston fully into the damper tube
5 Measure and record the stickout dimension (the distance
between the damper tube cap and the piston rod shoulder)
Is the stickout dimension greater than 12.0mm?

www.JagDocs.com
Yes
Damper unserviceable. Install a new suspension damper.
Enclose a record of the stickout dimension with the returned
part.
No
Damper serviceable. Re-assemble and re-install the
suspension strut
REFER to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01 Front Suspension,
Front Suspension - Front Shock Absorber
Removal
NOTES:
Fuse box release only required on removal of the RH front shock absorber.
Expansion tank release only required for supercharged variant removal of the LH front shock absorber.
All vehicles
1. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a

jack. Always support the vehicle on safety stands.
Raise and support the vehicle.
2. Remove the front wheel and tire.

3. Remove the front stabilizer bar link.

www.JagDocs.com
For additional information, refer to: Front Stabilizer Bar Link (204-01
Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
4. Release the front shock absorber from the lower arm.
5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the wheel knuckle is supported. Failure to

follow these instructions may result in damage to the vehicle.
Use an Allen key to prevent the ball joint rotating whilst

removing the nut.
Disconnect the upper arm from the wheel knuckle.

7. Release the fuse box.
Remove the 2 bolts and 1 nut.
Position the fuse box aside for access to the inboard
retaining nut.
8. Release the coolant expansion tank for access.

www.JagDocs.com
Vehicles with supercharger
9. Disconnect the front shock absorber electrical connector.
All vehicles
www.JagDocs.com
10. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but
the essential information is always correct.
Remove the front shock absorber and spring assembly.
11. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is removed for

access only.
Install the front shock absorber and spring assembly in the spring
compressor.
12. WARNING: The spring is under extreme tension, care

must be taken at all times. Failure to follow these instruction
www.JagDocs.com
may result in personal injury.
Compress the spring.
13. Remove the front shock absorber retaining nut
14. Carefully release the spring tension.

15. Remove the front shock absorber.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Vehicles without adaptive damping: Tighten the nut to 50 Nm.

www.JagDocs.com
2. Vehicles with adaptive damping: Tighten the nut to 27 Nm.
3. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the

essential information is always correct.
Install the front shock absorber and spring assembly.

Tighten the nuts to 27 Nm.

4. Connect the front shock absorber electrical connector.
All vehicles
5. Secure the fuse box.

www.JagDocs.com
6. Secure the coolant expansion tank.

Tighten to 10 Nm.
7. Raise the vehicle.

8. CAUTIONS:
Use an Allen key to prevent the ball joint rotating whilst

installing the nut.
Make sure the wheel knuckle is supported. Failure to

follow these instructions may result in damage to the vehicle.
Secure the upper arm to the wheel knuckle.

Tighten the nut to 90 Nm.
9. Connect the front shock absorber and spring assembly to the

lower arm.
Tighten the bolt to 175 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
10. Install the front stabilizer bar link.

11. Install the front wheel and tire.


Front Suspension - Front Lower Arm
Removal

2. Remove the air deflector.

For additional information, refer to: Air Deflector (501-02 Front End Body
Panels, Removal and Installation).

4. NOTES:
Note the fitted position.

www.JagDocs.com
RH illustration shown, LH is similar
Release the front lower arm.

Remove the 2 bolts and discard the nuts.
Installation
1. NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH is similar
Install the front lower arm.

Install the bolt and tighten the new nut to 60 Nm +
135 degrees.
Install the front lower arm inner retaining nut and
bolt, but do not fully tighten at this stage.
2. Install the front wheel and tire.

www.JagDocs.com
4. CAUTION: The final tightening of the front lower arm inner
retaining nut and bolt must be carried out with the vehicle
on its wheels
Tighten the 14mm bolt to 175 Nm.
5. Install the air deflector.


the wheel alignment, and adjust if required.
www.JagDocs.com
Front Suspension - Rear Lower Arm
Special Tool(s)
Ball joint splitter
204-327
Removal

Raise the vehicle on a 4 post lift.
2. Remove the engine undertray.

www.JagDocs.com
3. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack.

Always support the vehicle on safety stands.
Raise and support the body.
4. Remove the wheel and tire.

5. Remove the stabilizer bar link.

6. Release the tie rod.

7. Release the steering gear.
8. Secure the steering gear.

www.JagDocs.com
Release the shock absorber and spring assembly.
9.
Remove the rear lower arm inner bolt.

10.
Release the front lower arm.
Remove and discard the nut and bolt.
11.
CAUTION: Prevent the rear lower arm ball joint ball pin
12. hexagon from rotating. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the lower ball joint boot.
Loosen the rear lower arm ball joint retaining nut.

www.JagDocs.com
hexagon from rotating. Failure to follow this instruction may
Adjust the rear lower arm ball joint retaining nut until the ball
joint thread cannot be seen.
13.
WARNING: Make sure the special tool is supported while

carrying out the operation. Failure to follow this instruction
14. may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the special tool is supported while carrying out

the operation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the special tool.
Make sure the special tool is correctly located and the

lower ball joint boot is not damaged while carrying out the
operation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the component.
Using the special tool, release the rear lower arm ball joint
from the wheel knuckle lower pivot.
Tighten the special tool adjusting bolt to a maximum of
60 Nm.
If the rear lower arm ball joint releases from the wheel
knuckle lower pivot, using no more than 60 Nm on the
special tool adjusting bolt, proceed to step 13.
If the rear lower arm ball joint does not release from
the wheel knuckle lower pivot, using no more than 60
Nm on the special tool adjusting bolt, proceed to step
12.
15. WARNING: Make sure the special tool is supported while

carrying out the operation. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the special tool is supported while carrying out

the operation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the special tool.
Make sure the special tool is correctly located and the

lower ball joint boot is not damaged while carrying out the
operation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
NOTE: Do not carry out this step if the rear lower arm
www.JagDocs.com
ball joint released from the wheel knuckle lower pivot in step
12.
Using the special tool, release the rear lower arm ball joint
from the wheel knuckle lower pivot.
Tighten the special tool adjusting bolt to a maximum of
60 Nm.
Strike the top surface of the special tool directly above
the rear lower arm ball joint at the point indicated
using a copper mallet.
16. CAUTION: Prevent the rear lower arm ball joint ball pin
Remove the rear lower arm.

Remove and discard the retaining nut.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. WARNING: Make sure that a new lower arm ball joint nut
is installed.
Install the rear lower arm.

2. NOTE: Install a new retaining nut and bolt.
Secure the front lower arm.

Stage 1: Tighten to 60 Nm.
Stage 2: Tighten to a further 135 degrees.
www.JagDocs.com
3. Secure the rear lower arm.

Install the rear lower arm inner retaining nut, but do
not tighten fully at this stage.
4. Install the shock absorber and spring assembly.

Tighten the bolt to 175 Nm.
5. Remove and discard the retaining straps.
6. Install the steering gear.

Tighten the bolts to 100 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
7. Secure the tie rod end.

8. Install the stabilizer bar link.

9. Install the wheel and tire.

10. Lower the body.
11. CAUTION: The final tightening of the upper arm must be

carried out with the vehicle on it's wheels.
Tighten to 175 Nm.
12. Install the engine undertray.


and adjust the wheel alignment.
For additional information, refer to: Camber and Caster Adjustment
(204-00 Suspension System - General Information, General Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
Front Suspension - Rear Lower Arm Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Rear lower arm bushing remover and installer
204-464
Rear lower arm bushing remover
204-333
Rear lower arm bushing installer
204-332
www.JagDocs.com
204-465
204-334
Removal
CAUTION: Nuts and bolts must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle on the suspension.

2. Remove the rear lower arm.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Lower Arm (204-01 Front
3. NOTE: Note the fitted position.
Using the special tools, remove and discard the lower arm rear
bushings.
Installation
1. Install the special tools to the rear lower arm.

Tighten the bolts.
www.JagDocs.com
2. NOTE: Align to the position noted on removal.
Position the bushing in the special tool.
3. Using the special tools, partially install the lower arm bushing.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Change the special tools, then complete installation of the
bushing.
5. Install the rear lower arm.

www.JagDocs.com
Front Suspension - Shock Absorber Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Replacer support-bush
204-337
Replacer-bush
204-338
Remover-bush
204-336
www.JagDocs.com
Remover support-bush
204-335
Removal
CAUTION: Nuts and bolts must be tightened with the weight of the vehicle on the suspension.


3. NOTE: Take note of the fitted position of the bush. Using
the special tools, remove the shock absorber bushing.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the shock absorber bushing boot is

correctly located into the special tool.
Install the bushing into the special tool.

www.JagDocs.com
Using the special tools, install the shock absorber bushing.

Front Suspension - Front Stabilizer Bar TDV6 3.0L Diesel
General Equipment
Powertrain Jack
Removal
1. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and
Cables, General Procedures).

3. Refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and

Charging (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, General
Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
4. Refer to: Radiator Splash Shield (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal
and Installation).
5. Refer to: Air Deflector (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
6. Refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
7. Refer to: Engine Cover - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (501-05 Interior Trim and
Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
8.
Secure the radiator assembly.
9.
www.JagDocs.com
10. Torque: 8 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 8 Nm
11.

www.JagDocs.com
12.
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur,

but the essential information is always correct.
Torque: 45 Nm
13.
14. Torque: 100 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
18.
17.
16.
15.
19.
20. NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur,

www.JagDocs.com
21. Torque: 5 Nm

23.
24. CAUTIONS:
www.JagDocs.com
Support the engine on a jack. The angle may need to

be adjusted during this procedure.
Make sure to protect the paintwork.

26. General Equipment: Powertrain Jack

Torque: 43 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
29. During installation tighten the bolts in the following

sequence.
Torque:
Bolt 1 55 Nm
Bolt 2 55 Nm
Bolt 1 55 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
30.
31.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
2. Refer to: Camber and Caster Adjustment (204-00 Suspension System -

General Information, General Procedures).
Front Suspension - Front Stabilizer Bar Link
Removal


3. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the ball joint

rotating.
Remove the front stabilizer bar link.

Remove and discard the 2 nuts.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

rotating.
Install the front stabilizer bar link.

Tighten the upper nut to 47 Nm.
Tighten the lower nut to 70 Nm.

Front Suspension - Stabilizer Bar Link Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Bush installer
204-340
Bush remove
204-342
Support
204-341
www.JagDocs.com
Support
204-339
Removal
CAUTION: The final tightening of the suspension components must be carried out with the vehicle on its wheels.


3. Using the special tools, remove and discard the stabilizer bar
link bushing.
Installation
1. NOTE: Apply water to lubricate the bushing.
Using the special tools, install the stabilizer bar link bushing.
www.JagDocs.com

Front Suspension - Upper Arm LH
Removal


For additional information, refer to: Front Shock Absorber (204-01 Front
3. Remove the secondary bulkhead panel LH.

For additional information, refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH - 3.0L
NA V6 - AJ27 (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the air cleaner.

For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A, Removal and
Installation) /
Air Cleaner (303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V6 3.0L
Petrol, Removal and Installation) /
www.JagDocs.com
Air Cleaner (303-12C, Removal and Installation) /

Air Cleaner LH (303-12D, Removal and Installation).

Remove the upper arm retaining nut.

www.JagDocs.com
7. Remove the upper arm.
Installation
1. Install the upper arm.

www.JagDocs.com

Install the upper arm retaining nut, but do not tighten fully at
this stage.

this stage.
4. Install the front shock absorber.

5. CAUTION: The final tightening of the suspension components

must be carried out with the vehicle on its wheels.
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but

Tighten to 47 Nm.
6. CAUTION: The final tightening of the suspension

components must be carried out with the vehicle on its wheels.

Tighten to 47 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
7. Install the air cleaner.

For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A, Removal and
Installation) /
Air Cleaner (303-12B Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - V6 3.0L
Petrol, Removal and Installation) /
Air Cleaner (303-12C, Removal and Installation) /
Air Cleaner LH (303-12D, Removal and Installation).
8. Install the secondary bulkhead panel LH.

Front Suspension - Upper Arm RH
Removal


3. Remove the secondary bulkhead panel RH.

For additional information, refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH - 3.0L


www.JagDocs.com

6. Remove the upper arm.

Installation
1. Install the upper arm.

this stage.
www.JagDocs.com

this stage.
4. Install the front shock absorber.

5. CAUTION: The final tightening of the suspension components
must be carried out with the vehicle on its wheels.

Tighten to 47 Nm.

components must be carried out with the vehicle on its wheels.

Tighten to 47 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
7. Install the secondary bulkhead panel RH.

www.JagDocs.com
Front Suspension - Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
2. Torque: 125 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
3. Torque: 10 Nm
5. CAUTION: Discard the bolts.

www.JagDocs.com
NOTES:
Secure with cable ties.
Torque: 115 Nm

7. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolts.
Make sure that the area around the component is

clean and free of foreign material.
Do not attempt to release the wheel hub by hitting it

with a hammer directly, loosen the wheel hub retaining
bolts partially before applying an even amount of force to
the head of each bolts to release the wheel hub from the
wheel knuckle. Failure to follow this instruction may cause
NOTES:
Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the

Install the components to their original fitted

positions.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 90 Nm
Installation

Front Suspension - Wheel Knuckle
Special Tool(s)
Ball joint splitter
204-327
Removal

2. Remove the hub assembly.

For additional information, refer to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
www.JagDocs.com
- V6 3.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
Remove the brake disc shield.

Remove the 3 rivets.
4. NOTES:
Use an additional wrench to prevent the ball joint

rotating.
Disconnect the steering gear tie rod end ball joint.

Remove and discard the tie rod end retaining nut.
5. NOTES:

rotating.
Disconnect the upper arm from the wheel knuckle.

Remove and discard the nut.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the ball joint seal is not

damaged. A damaged seal will lead to the premature failure
of the joint.
NOTES:

rotating.
www.JagDocs.com
Remove the wheel knuckle.

Remove and discard the nut.
Using the special tool, release the ball joint from
the lower suspension arm.
Installation

rotating.
Install the wheel knuckle.

Clean the component mating faces.
www.JagDocs.com
rotating.
Connect the upper arm and wheel knuckle.

3. NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the

component from rotating.
Connect the tie-rod end ball joint.

www.JagDocs.com
4. Install the brake disc shield.

Install the rivets.
5. Install the hub assembly.

- V6 3.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and Installation).
Published: 19-Nov-2013
Front Suspension - Front Lower Arm Bushing
Special Tool(s)
JLR-204-813
Remover/Installer, Lower Arm Bush
www.JagDocs.com
JLR-204-814
JLR-204-815
General Equipment
Center punch
Hydraulic press
www.JagDocs.com
Removal
NOTE: Removal and installation of the bush requires the use of a press.
1. Visually inspect the lower arm for signs of a center punch mark. If
four marks are located on the lower arm in the area illustrated,
install a new front lower arm.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
2. Only continue with the procedure below if there is less than four marks
on the lower front arm.
Refer to: Front Lower Arm (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
3. Measure and note the value both sides of the bush as illustrated prior to
removal.
www.JagDocs.com
4. CAUTION: Note the orientation of the bush prior to removal.
Using suitable marking tools, mark the bush and lower arm prior to
removal.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
5. Using the special tools, remove the bush.
Special Tool(s): JLR-204-813, JLR-204-814

General Equipment: Hydraulic press
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the bush is correclty seated in the special
tool.
Special Tool(s): JLR-204-815

www.JagDocs.com
2. Using the special tools, remove the bush.
Special Tool(s): JLR-204-813, JLR-204-815

General Equipment: Hydraulic press
www.JagDocs.com
3. Make sure that the bush has been installed to the noted removal
position.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Make sure that measurement taken prior to removal is still correct.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
5. Mark the front lower arm with a center punch, once the procedure
has been completed.
General Equipment: Center punch

www.JagDocs.com
6. Refer to: Front Lower Arm (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
Rear Suspension -
Halfshaft outer constant velocity joint retaining nut 300 221 -
Lower arm to wheel knuckle retaining nut and bolt 190 140 -
Lower arm to subframe retaining nut and bolt 192 142 -
Lower arm to subframe retaining bolt 192 142 -
Upper arm ball joint to wheel knuckle retaining nut 96 71 -
Upper arm to subframe retaining nut and bolt 115 85 -
Toe link to subframe ball joint retaining nut 90 66 -
Toe link to wheel knuckle retaining nut and bolt 63 46 -
Toe link setting nut 55 41 -
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting to body retaining nuts 28 21 -
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting retaining nut (without adaptive damping) 50 37 -
Shock absorber and spring assembly upper mounting retaining nut (with adaptive damping) 27 20 -
Shock absorber to lower arm retaining bolt 133 98 -
Stabilizer bar link to stabilizer bar retaining nut 48 35 -
Stabilizer bar clamp to subframe retaining bolt 55 41 -
Stabilizer bar link to lower arm retaining nut 48 35 -
Wheel and tire to wheel hub retaining nuts 125 92 -
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Subframe
2 Upper control arm
5 Toe link
7 Wheel knuckle
8 Lower control arm
9 Shear bracket
10 Cross brace
11 Single brace
12 Stabilizer bar
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension - Overview
OVERVIEW
The double wishbone type rear-suspension is a fully independent design assembled on a steel subframe; large diameter
bushes isolate the subframe from the vehicle's body.
A toe-link located between the wheel knuckle and the subframe is used to adjust the toe angle of the rear wheels.
The wheel knuckle attaches to the upper and lower control arms, and the coil spring and damper assembly is located between
the lower control arm and the vehicle body.
Dependant on vehicle model there are three types of coil spring and damper available:

a continuously variable adaptive damper also known as Adaptive Dynamics
, System on 5.0L supercharged vehicles from
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
The double wishbone type rear-suspension is assembled on a fabricated high-grade steel subframe. Large diameter mounting
bushes are used to isolate the subframe from the vehicle's body; the front bushes are hydrabushes, the rear are voided rubber.
To achieve optimum suspension refinement a cross-brace is used to increase the torsional stiffness of the subframe. The single
brace attached to the shear brackets helps to reduce the transmission of road noise.
An adaptive damping system is available on specified models. For additional information refer to Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
4.2L or 5.0L.
COMPONENTS
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Subframe
2 Stabilizer bar
3 Upper control arm
5 Toe link
6 Wheel knuckle
9 Lower control arm
Upper Control Arm

The cast aluminum upper control arm locates to the subframe via one cross-axis joint and one plain rubber bush, and links to
the aluminum wheel knuckle via an integral ball-joint.
Lower Control Arm

The aluminum lower arm locates to the subframe via one cross-axis joint and one plain rubber bush, and to the wheel knuckle
via a second plain rubber bush.
The rear of the control arm has mounting points for the damper and the stabilizer link.
Toe-Link
The toe-link is located between the wheel knuckle and brackets on the subframe.
The toe-link comprises an inner rod with integral axial ball joint. The inner ball joint has a threaded spigot which locates in a
bracket on the subframe and is secured with a locknut. The rod has an internal thread which accepts the outer rod.
The outer rod has a cross-axis joint at its outer end which is located in a clevis on the wheel knuckle, and is secured with a
bolt and locknut.
The length of the toe-link can be adjusted by rotating the inner rod. This allows for adjustment of the toe angle for the rear
wheel. Once set the inner rod can be locked in position by tightening a locknut on the outer rod against the inner rod.
Wheel Knuckle
The cast aluminum wheel knuckle attaches to:
the upper control arm via a ball-joint located in the arm,

the lower control arm via a plain rubber bush located in the arm,
the toe-link via a cross-axis joint located in the toe link.
The wheel knuckle also provides the mounting locations for the:
www.JagDocs.com
wheel hub assembly,

wheel bearing,
wheel speed sensor,
brake caliper,
and disc shield.
Stabilizer Bar
The solid construction stabilizer bar and bushes have been designed to provide particular characteristics in maintaining roll
rates, specifically in primary ride comfort. There are six derivatives of rear stabilizer bar, with different diameters, to support
the various powertrains:
V6 gasoline - 12.7 mm solid bar

V8 4.2L and 5.0L gasoline - 13.6 mm solid bar
V6 2.7L diesel -14.5 mm solid bar
V6 3.0L diesel - 14.5 mm solid bar
V6 3.0L diesel with Adaptive Damping – 16mm tubular
V8 4.2L gasoline supercharged – 16mm tubular
V8 5.0L gasoline supercharged
- SV8 - 17mm tubular
- XFR - 18mm tubular
The stabilizer bar is attached to the top of the subframe with two bushes and mounting brackets. The stabilizer bar has
crimped, 'anti-shuffle' collars pressed in position on the inside edges of the bushes. The collars prevent sideways movement of
the stabilizer bar.
Each end of the stabilizer bar curves rearward to attach to a ball joint on each stabilizer link. Each link is attached via a
second ball joint to a cast bracket on the lower control arm. The links allow the stabilizer bar to move with the wheel travel
providing maximum effectiveness.
Spring and Damper Assembly

The spring and damper assembly are attached to cast brackets on the lower control arms and to the vehicle body by four studs
secured by locking nuts. Dependant on vehicle model there are three types of coil spring and damper available:

The dampers are a monotube design with a spring located by a circlip onto the damper tube. The lower end of the damper has
a spherical joint which locates in the lower control arm and is secured with a bolt.
The damper piston is connected to a damper rod which is sealed at its exit point from the damper body. The threaded outer
end of the damper rod locates through a hole in the top mount. A self locking nut secures the top mount to the damper rod.
The damper rod on the adaptive damper has an electrical connector on the outer end of the damper rod.
Supercharged 4.2L vehicles up to 2010MY: The damper functions by restricting the flow of hydraulic fluid through internal
galleries in the damper's piston. The adaptive damper has a solenoid operated valve, which when switched allows a greater
flow of hydraulic fluid through the damper's piston. This provides a softer damping characteristic from the damper. The
adaptive damper defaults to a firmer setting when not activated. The solenoid is computer controlled and can switch between
soft and hard damping settings depending on road wheel inputs and vehicle speed.
Supercharged 5.0L vehicles from 2010MY: The variable damper functions by adjustment of a solenoid operated variable orifice,
which opens up an alternative path for oil flow within the damper. When de-energized the bypass is closed and all the oil flows
through the main (firm) piston. When energized the solenoid moves an armature and control blade, which work against a
spring. The control blade incorporates an orifice which slides inside a sintered housing to open up the bypass as required. In
compression, oil flows from the lower portion of the damper through a hollow piston rod, a separate soft (comfort) valve, the
slider housing and orifice and into the upper portion of the damper, thereby bypassing the main (firm) valve. In rebound the oil
flows in the opposite direction
The damper rod is fitted with a spring aid which prevents the top mount making contact with the top of the damper body
during full suspension compression and also assists with the suspension tune.
The spring rate of the coil springs can differ between models and are color coded for identification. The coil spring locates on a
spring packer and a lower spring seat which is located on the damper body. The spring locates in an upper spring seat which is
located on the underside of the top mount. The majority of the roll stiffness is provided by the springs rather than the
stabilizer bar as this arrangement allows for a natural frequency of roll, providing a consistent suspension ride.
India-Specific Spring and Damper Assembly Spacers

www.JagDocs.com
Front and rear spring and damper assemblies are fitted with spacers to raise ride height in India-specific vehicles. The front
and the rear spacers are the same, their color is black.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Suspension - Rear Suspension
manual.REFER to: (204-02 Rear Suspension)
Rear Suspension (Description and Operation),

Rear Suspension (Description and Operation),
Rear Suspension (Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Damaged suspension dampers
the next step
4. If the fault is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the following Symptom Chart
www.JagDocs.com
Symptom Chart
Evidence of fluid on suspension damper
Fluid on damper from an external source Damper not faulty, do not renew
Fluid leaking from damper GO to Pinpoint Test A.
PINPOINT TEST A : DAMPER FLUID LEAK DIAGNOSIS

A1: ASSESS LEAK
NOTES:
Residual oil left over from the damper assembly process may create oil staining on the damper tube. This will not affect
the function of the damper.
Slight seepage is considered normal.
1 Assess the extent of the oil leakage

Is the leakage serious enough to indicate that the damper seal has failed?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST B : CONFIRM LEAK

B1: ROAD TEST
1 Clean all traces of oil from the damper
2 Drive the vehicle over a speed bump or similar ten times
Is any fluid visible on the outside of the damper?
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST C : DAMPER STICKOUT TEST

C1: DAMPER STICKOUT TEST
NOTE: If a significant quantity of fluid has leaked out of the damper, the dividing piston will be displaced upwards in the
tube by the pressure of the gas below it. This will limit the downward travel of the piston.
1 Remove the suspension strut assembly

REFER to: Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly (204-02
Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
2 Remove the spring
3 Remove the bump stop
4 Push the damper piston fully into the damper tube
5 Measure and record the stickout dimension (the distance
between the damper tube cap and the piston rod shoulder)
Is the stickout dimension greater than 12.0mm?

www.JagDocs.com
Yes
Damper unserviceable. Install a new suspension damper.
Enclose a record of the stickout dimension with the returned
part.
No
Damper serviceable. Re-assemble and re-install the
suspension strut
REFER to: Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly (204-02
Rear Suspension - Lower Arm
Removal
NOTES:
Before commencing work on the vehicle ensure the park brake is in the off position.
LH shown RH similar.
Raise the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to: W heel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and
3. Release the shock absorber and spring assembly from the

lower arm.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Release the rear stabilizer bar link.

5. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on the
brake hose.
NOTE: Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Release the rear brake caliper and tie aside.
6. Release the lower arm from the wheel hub assembly.

www.JagDocs.com
7. Remove the lower arm.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Nuts and bolts must be tightened with the

weight of the vehicle on the suspension.
Install the lower arm.

Secure the lower arm to the wheel hub assembly.
3. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on the

brake hose.
NOTE: Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Secure the rear brake caliper.

www.JagDocs.com
4. Secure the rear stabilizer bar link.


Secure the shock absorber and spring assembly to the lower

arm.

For additional information, refer to: W heel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and
www.JagDocs.com
8. Tighten to 175 Nm.

www.JagDocs.com

Rear Suspension - Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
Removal
All vehicles
1. Remove the luggage compartment side trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel LH (501-05
Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal and Installation).
Vehicles with active damping
2. Disconnect the active suspension damper electrical connector.

www.JagDocs.com
All vehicles
3. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly top mount

nuts. TORQUE: 28 Nm
Raise the vehicle.

6. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is
removed for access only.
Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly. TORQUE: 133

Nm
7. WARNINGS:
Make sure the shock absorber is secured by fully

inserting the locking pin in to the special tool. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
As the spring is under extreme tension care must be

www.JagDocs.com
taken at all times. Failure to follow these instructions may

Make sure that a new nut is installed.
Using the special tool, compress the suspension spring to

remove the shock absorber.
Remove the nut. TORQUE: 27 Nm
Vehicles without active damping
8. WARNINGS:



remove the shock absorber.
Remove the nut. TORQUE: 50 Nm
All vehicles
9. Remove the shock absorber rod components.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation
All vehicles
1. Install the shock absorber rod components.
www.JagDocs.com
2. WARNINGS:



install the shock absorber.
www.JagDocs.com
Vehicles without active damping
3. WARNINGS:



install the shock absorber.

Tighten to 133 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com

All vehicles
6. Install the shock absorber and spring assembly top mount

nuts.
Tighten to 28 Nm.
7. Connect the active suspension damper electrical connector.
All vehicles
8. Install the luggage compartment side trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel LH (501-05
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Suspension - Shock Absorber Lower Bushing
Special Tool(s)
Bushing Remover / Installer
204-335
Bushing remover
204-533
Bushing installer
204-534
www.JagDocs.com
Removal
1. WARNING: Failure to follow this instruction may cause damage to

the vehicle.
Mark the orientation of the shock absorber in relation to the lower

suspension arm.
2. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly. For additional

information, refer to: Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly (204-02 Rear
3. NOTES:
Place the shock absorber with the recessed side facing

upwards.
With assistance make sure the special tool is aligned.
Using the special tool, support the shock absorber.

4. NOTES:
Position the special tool onto the recessed side of the

bush.
With assistance make sure the special tool is aligned.
Position and align the special tool to the shock absorber

bushing.
5. Using the special tools, carefully remove the bushing from the
shock absorber.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. NOTES:
Make sure the bush is clean and free from oil or grease.
Use a suitable lubricant to allow the bush to locate into

the special tool.
Locate the new bushing in the special tool.
2. WARNING: Failure to follow this instruction may cause

damage to the vehicle.
NOTES:
Make sure the shock absorber is clean and free from oil or
grease and is not damaged prior to pushing in the new bush.
Make sure the bush is installed following the same

direction as removal.
Make sure correct alignment is maintained.
Using the special tools, align the bushing to the shock

absorber.
3. NOTE: Make sure correct alignment is maintained.
Slowly push the bush into the shock absorber until the tool
reaches the stop.

For additional information, refer to: Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
(204-02 Rear Suspension, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Suspension - Rear Stabilizer Bar
Special Tool(s)
Powertrain Assembly Jack, HTJ
1200-2
Removal
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable.

For additional information, refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect
(414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General Procedures).

www.JagDocs.com
3. Remove both rear wheels and tires.

4. Drain the fuel tank.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank Draining (310-00 Fuel
5. Remove the exhaust system.

For additional information, refer to: Front Muffler (309-00B Exhaust
System - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
6. CAUTION: Always plug any open connections to

prevent contamination.
NOTES:
To prevent the loss of brake fluid, using the special

tool apply the brake pedal and set to 40mm ( 1.6 in ) below
the rest position.
RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
Disconnect the brake hose from the brake caliper.

Using the special tool, press and hold the brake
pedal.
Remove and discard the two sealing washers.
Release the brake caliper.

Remove and discard the 2 bolts.
Tie the brake caliper aside.
Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor.

www.JagDocs.com
9. Disconnect the electronic parking brake actuator electrical

connector.
Disconnect both parking brake cables from the rear brake

calipers.
www.JagDocs.com
Detach the shock absorber.
12. Detach the fuel filler hose.

www.JagDocs.com
13. CAUTION: Under no circumstances must the flexible

coupling (or its fixings) be loosened or removed from the
driveshaft.
Detach the driveshaft from the rear drive axle flange.

Mark the position of the driveshaft in relation to the
rear drive axle flange.
Mark the position of the balance nut in relation to the
rear drive axle flange. (if fitted).
Mark the position of each nut and bolt in relation to the
driveshaft flexible joint.
Remove the rear subframe reinforcement plate retaining bolts.

Install the special tool to support the rear subframe.
15.
NOTE: Left-hand shown, right-hand similar.
Remove the rear subframe rear retaining bolt.

www.JagDocs.com
16.
17. Remove the rear subframe front retaining bolt.
Remove the rear subframe.
18.
19. Remove the stabilizer bar link nuts.
20. Remove the rear stabilizer bar.

Remove the stabilizer bar bushings.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. During installation tighten the bolts in the following

sequence.
Bolt 1: 55 Nm.
Bolt 2: 55 Nm.
Bolt 1: 55 Nm.
2. Install new nuts to the stabilizer bar links.
Tighten to 48 Nm.
3. Install the rear subframe.

www.JagDocs.com
Loosely install the rear subframe front bolt.
5. Loosely install the rear subframe rear bolt.

Loosely install the rear subframe reinforcement plate bolts.
7. Tighten the subframe bolts.

Tighten to 80 Nm + 240°.
www.JagDocs.com
8. Remove the special tool.
9. Tighten the rear subframe reinforcement plate retaining bolts.

Tighten to 47 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
Install the shock absorber.

Tighten to 133 Nm.
11. NOTE: Install the components to their original fitted

positions.
Attach the driveshaft to the rear drive axle flange.

www.JagDocs.com
12. Attach the fuel filler hose to the fuel tank.
13. Connect both park brake cables to the rear brake calipers.
14. Connect the parking brake actuator electrical connector.
15. Connect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector.

www.JagDocs.com
16. Install the brake caliper.

17. Connect the brake hose to the brake caliper.

Install new sealing washers.
Tighten the union to 38 Nm.
18. Install the exhaust system.
For additional information, refer to: Front Muffler (309-00B Exhaust
System - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
19. Refill the fuel tank.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel Tank Draining (310-00 Fuel
20. Bleed the brake system.

For additional information, refer to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00
Brake System - General Information, General Procedures).
21. Install the rear wheels and tires.

22. Connect the battery ground cable.


For additional information, refer to: Camber and Caster Adjustment
(204-00 Suspension System - General Information, General Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Suspension - Rear Wheel Bearing
Special Tool(s)
204-250
Wheel bearing install and removal tool
204-269
Flange remover forcing screw
204-305
Remover, Wheel Bearing
www.JagDocs.com
204-725
Support Tool, Wheel Hub
204-726
Remover/Installer, Wheel Bearing
204-727A
Installer, Wheel Bearing
204-791
Installer, Wheel Bearing
205-491
Hub puller
205-491-1
Adapter nuts
www.JagDocs.com
Removal
2. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
6.
5.
4.
7.
www.JagDocs.com
8.
CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to detach the

halfshaft from the hub assembly, failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the halfshaft.
Special Tool(s): 205-491, 205-491-1, 204-269
9.
NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the
10.
11. Special Tool(s): 204-726, 204-725
12. Special Tool(s): 204-305, 204-726, 204-725

www.JagDocs.com
13.
14. Special Tool(s): 204-726
Installation
1. NOTES:
Make sure bearing is installed in correct direction,

encoder ring incorporated into the inboard seal of the wheel
bearing.
www.JagDocs.com
Make sure correct alignment of the bearing is

maintained when installing into the hub carrier.
Special Tool(s): 204-727A, 204-791

2.
3. NOTE: Make sure the correct alignment of the drive

flange is maintained when installing into the hub carrier
and bearing assembly.
Special Tool(s): 204-726, 204-250

www.JagDocs.com

components must be carried out with the vehicle on its
wheels.
Torque: 90 Nm
5. CAUTION: Install the halfshaft nut finger tight.
NOTE: The wheel hub nut is not tightened at this

stage.
www.JagDocs.com
wheels.
Torque: 150 Nm

wheels.
Torque: 55 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
8. Torque: 6 Nm
9.
10. Torque: 103 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
11. CAUTION: Do not use air tools to install the nut.

Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the component.
Torque: 300 Nm
Installation).
Rear Suspension - Upper Arm
Removal
CAUTION: The final tightening of the suspension components must be carried out with the vehicle on its wheels.
NOTES:
Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.
RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
1. Raise and lower the vehicle on a 4 post ramp.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation).
4. Refer to: Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly (204-02, Removal and
Installation).
5.
6.
7. CAUTIONS:
www.JagDocs.com
Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.

Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new

blanking caps.
Torque: 38 Nm
8. Torque: 96 Nm
9. Torque: 115 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
2. Refer to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00, General Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Suspension - Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
Special Tool(s)
Compressor, Coil Spring
204-476
Disassembly
1. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly.

For additional information, refer to Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly
in this section.
2. WARNING: Make sure the shock absorber is secured by fully

Install the shock absorber and spring assembly to the special

tool as shown.
www.JagDocs.com
3. WARNING: AS THE SPRING IS UNDER EXTREME TENSION

CARE MUST BE TAKEN AT ALL TIMES. FAILURE TO FOLLOW
THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Clamp the road spring.
4. Remove the shock absorber retaining nut.

Remove and discard the retaining nut.
5. Release the road spring.
6. Remove the shock absorber.

www.JagDocs.com
Assembly
1. CAUTION: Make sure the spring ends butt correctly

against the spring seats.
Install the shock absorber and spring assembly to the special

tool.
2. WARNING: AS THE SPRING IS UNDER EXTREME TENSION

CARE MUST BE TAKEN AT ALL TIMES. FAILURE TO FOLLOW
THESE INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Clamp the road spring.

3. Vehicles without adaptive damping.
Install a new retaining nut.
Tighten to 50 Nm.
4. Vehicles with adaptive damping.

Install a new retaining nut.
Tighten to 27 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
5. Release the road spring.
6. Remove the shock absorber and spring assembly from the

special tool.
Wheels and Tires -
Description Nm lb/ft lb/in
Wheel nuts 125 92 -
Tire Pressures
Summer Tyres (ROW) Up to 100 mph Over 100 mph
235/55R17 99W Front 2.3 bar (34 lbf/in²) 2.3 bar (34 lbf/in²)
Rear 2.3 bar (34 lbf/in²) 2.3 bar (34 lbf/in²)
245/45R18 100 W&Y X/L Front 2.1 bar (31 lbf/in²) 2.6 bar (38 lbf/in²)
245/40R19 98 Y X/L Front 2.1 bar (31 lbf/in²) 2.5 bar (36 lbf/in²)
235/35R20 97Y X/L Front 2.3 bar (34 lbf/in²) 2.3 bar (34 lbf/in²)
Rear - -
285/30R20 99y X/L Front - -
Tire Pressures
All Season Tyres (USA & Canada) 0 mph - 121 mph
245/45R18 96H Front 2.1 bar (31 lbf/in²)
Rear 2.1 bar (31 lbf/in²)
245/40R19 94H Front 2.4 bar (35 lbf/in²)
Rear 2.4 bar (35 lbf/in²)
Wheel Specification
Wheel Type Wheel Size
www.JagDocs.com
Libra 7.5 x 17
Cygnus 8.5 x 18
Venus 8.5 x 18
Auriga 8.5 x 19
Carelia 8.5 x 19
Volans (front) 8.5 x 20
Volans (rear) 9.5 x 20
Selena 8.5 x 20
Tires and Fitment
Wheels
Description Type Tire Type
Vehicles with 2.7L Diesel and 3.0L engine Libra 235/55R17 99W Pirelli P7
Cygnus 245/45R18 100W Dunlop SP01
Vehicles without supercharger Cygnus 245/45R18 100W Dunlop SP01
Vehicles without supercharger (ROW) Venus 245/45R18 100Y Pirelli PZero
Carelia 245/40R19 98Y Dunlop SP01
Auriga 245/40R19 98Y Dunlop SP01
Vehicles without supercharger (ROW) and vehicles with supercharger (USA & Cygnus 245/45R18 96H Continental
Canada) ProContact
Auriga 245/40R19 96H Continental
ProContact
Vehicles with supercharger Volans 255/35R20
97Y Pirelli PZero
(front)
Volans (rear) 285/30R20 99Y Pirelli PZero
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires - Component Location
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Component Location

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Tire pressure sensor
2 Tire pressure monitoring system module
3 Tire pressure receiver
4 Tire pressure monitoring system initiator
www.JagDocs.com
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires - Overview
OVERVIEW
A number of alloy wheel designs are available ranging from 17 to 20 inch in diameter. A Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) is used to monitor the air pressure in each tire and inform the driver if the pressure falls below predetermined
thresholds.
All wheels are of cast construction in aluminum alloy with the choice of wheel design dependant on the vehicle trim level and
engine derivative.
On normally aspirated petrol models and all diesel models a 4J X 18 inch temporary spare wheel is supplied as standard,
supercharged petrol models are supplied with a 4Jx19 inch temporary spare wheel. In some major European markets an Instant
Mobility System is offered as an alternative to the spare wheel. The Instant Mobility System is capable of providing a
temporary repair and tire inflation to a puncture of up to 6mm in diameter in the tread area of the tire. A puncture in the tire
wall cannot be repaired using the system.
The vehicle jack and accessories are stored in the spare wheel-well in the luggage compartment.
Tire Changing
WARNINGS:
Tires must be inflated to the recommended pressures when the tires are cold (ambient temperature) only. Refer to label
on the 'B' pillar for recommended tire pressures. If the tires have been subjected to use or exposed to direct sunlight, move
the vehicle into a shaded position and allow the tires to cool before checking or adjusting the pressures.
www.JagDocs.com
Valve stem seal, washer nut, valve core and cap should be replaced at every tire change. Valve stem seal, washer and
nut must be replaced if the valve retention nut is loosened. Sensor units and nuts must be fitted using correct torque figures
and associated profile. Damage to the vehicle and consequently injury to the vehicle's occupants may result if these
instructions are not adhered to.
NOTE: The TPMS valve should be serviced using the suitable service kit, each time the tyre is dismounted, to ensure an
air tight seal. Attention should be made to the detail of fitting this kit.
Vehicles fitted with TPMS can be visually identified by an external metal locknut and valve of the tire pressure sensor on the
road wheels. Vehicles without TPMS will have rubber tire valve.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Tire valve and pressure sensor
2 Tire fitting/removal tool initial start position
3 High tire and bead tension area
4 Low tire and bead tension area
When removing the tire, the bead breaker must not be used within 90 degrees of the tire valve in each direction on each side
of the tire.
When using the tire removal machine, the fitting arm start position must be positioned as shown in the tire changing
illustration for each side of the tire. The wheel can then be rotated through 180 degrees in a counter-clockwise direction. This
will relieve tension from the tire bead allowing the remaining 180 degrees of the tire to be manually pulled from the rim.
When refitting the tire, position the fitting arm as shown. Rotate the tire and take care that the bead on the low tension side
of the tire does not damage the sensor.
Run-Flat Tires
Run-flat tires are not available on vehicles from 2011MY.
TREAD Act - NAS Only
Vehicles supplied to the North American markets must comply with the legislation of the Transport Recall Enhancement,
Accountability and Documentation (TREAD) act. Part of the requirement of the TREAD act is for the vehicle to display a label
which defines the recommended tire inflation pressure, load limits and maximum load of passengers and luggage weight the
vehicle can safely carry. This label will be specific to each individual vehicle and will be installed on the production line. The
label is positioned on the driver's side 'B' pillar on NAS vehicles and the inside rear face of the LH door on Canadian
specification vehicles.
This label must not be removed from the vehicle. The label information will only define the specification of the vehicle as it
came off the production line. It will not include dealer or owner fitted accessory wheels and tires of differing size from the
original fitment.
If the label is damaged or removed for body repair, it must be replaced with a new label specific to that vehicle. A new label is
requested from Jaguar parts and will be printed specifically for the supplied VIN of the vehicle.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is a driver assistance system which assists the driver to maintain the tire
pressures at the optimum level. TPMS is standard fitment on NAS vehicles and an optional fitment in other markets. TPMS
provides the following benefits:
Maintain optimal fuel consumption.

Maintain ride and handling characteristics.
Reduce the risk of rapid tire deflation - which may be caused by under inflated tires.
Comply with legislation requirements in relevant markets.
CAUTION: TPMS is not intended as a replacement for regular tire pressure and tire condition checks and should be
considered as additional to good tire maintenance practices.
The TPMS measures the pressure in each of the vehicle's tires and issues warnings to the driver if any of the pressures deviate
from defined tolerances. The space saver spare wheel is not monitored.
NOTE: TPMS is not designed to warn the driver of a tire 'blow-out', as due to the short duration of a 'blow-out', it is not
possible to give the driver sufficient warning that such an event is occurring. The design of the TPMS is to assist the driver in
keeping the tires at the correct pressure, which will assist to reduce the likelihood of a tire 'blow-out' occurring.
www.JagDocs.com
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; F = RF Transmission; N = Medium speed CAN bus; W = LF Transmission

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (250A)
3 CJB (central junction box)
4 RJB (rear junction box)
5 TPMS receiver
6 Tire pressure sensors
7 Initiators
8 TPMS module
9 Instrument cluster
System Operation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The controlling software for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is located within a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Module. The software detects the following:
When the tire pressure is below the recommended low pressure value - under inflated tire.
The location of the tire on the vehicle that is below the recommended pressure.
Malfunction warning.
The TPMS system comprises:
Tire pressure monitoring system module located below the right-hand front seat.
Tire pressure receiver located near the gear shifter within the floor console.
Two front initiators positioned forward of the wheels and behind the fender splash shields.
Two rear initiators positioned rearward of the wheels and assembled on dedicated brackets located behind the fender
splash shields.
Four sensors, each sensor is integral with a tire valve and located within the tire; the space saver spare wheel is not
fitted with a sensor.
The four initiators are hard wired to the TPMS module. The initiators transmit 125 KHz Low Frequency (LF) signals to the tire
pressure sensors which respond by modifying the mode status within the Radio Frequency (RF) transmission. The 315 or 433
MHz RF signals are detected by the tire pressure receiver which is connected directly to the TPMS module. The received RF
signals from the tire pressure sensors are passed to the TPMS module and contain identification, pressure, temperature and
acceleration information for each wheel and tire.
www.JagDocs.com
The TPMS module communicates with the instrument cluster via the medium speed CAN bus to provide the driver with
appropriate warnings. The TPMS module also indicates status or failure of the TPMS or components.
Tire Location and Identification
The TPMS can identify the position of the wheels on the vehicle and assign a received tire pressure sensor identification to a
specific position on the vehicle, for example front left, front right, rear left and rear right. This feature is required because of
the different pressure targets and threshold that could exist between the front and rear tires.
The wheel location is performed automatically by the TPMS module using an 'auto-location' function. This function is fully
automatic and requires no input from the driver. The TPMS module automatically re-learns the position of the wheels on the
vehicle if the tire pressure sensors are replaced or the wheel positions on the vehicle are changed.
The TPMS software can automatically detect, under all operating conditions, the following:
one or more new tire pressure sensors have been fitted

one or more tire pressure sensors have stopped transmitting
TPMS module can reject identifications from tire pressure sensors which do not belong to the vehicle
two 'running' wheels on the vehicle have changed positions.
If a new tire pressure sensor is fitted on any 'running' wheel, the module can learn the new sensor identification automatically
through the tire learn and location process.
The tire-learn and location process is ready to commence when the vehicle has been stationary or traveling at less than 12
mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. This is known as 'parking mode'. The learn/locate process requires the vehicle to be driven at
speeds of more than 12 mph (20 km/h) for 15 minutes. If the vehicle speed reduces to below 12 mph (20 km/h), the learn
process timer is suspended until the vehicle speed increases to more than 12 mph (20 km/h), after which time the timer is
resumed. If the vehicle speed remains below 12 mph (20 km/h) for more than 15 minutes, the timer is set to zero and process
starts again.
Low Pressure Monitoring
The tire low pressure sensor transmits by RF (315 MHz or 433 MHz depending on market) signal. These signals contain data
which corresponds to tire low pressure sensor identification, tire pressure, tire temperature, acceleration and tire low pressure
sensor mode.
Each time the vehicle is driven, the tire pressure monitoring system module activates each LF antenna in turn. The
corresponding tire low pressure sensor detects the LF signal and responds by modifying the mode status within the RF
transmission.
The system enters 'parking mode' after the vehicle speed has been less than 20 km/h (12.5 miles/h) for 12 minutes. In parking
mode the tire low pressure sensors transmit a coded signal to the tire pressure monitoring system module once every 13
hours. If the tire pressure decreases by more than 0.06 bar (1 lbf/in²) the tire low pressure sensor will transmit more often as
pressure is lost.
As each wheel responds to the LF signal from the tire pressure monitoring system module, it is assigned a position on the
vehicle and is monitored for the remainder of that drive cycle in that position.
www.JagDocs.com
When the vehicle has been parked for more than 15 minutes and then driven at a speed of more than 20 km/h (12.5 miles/h),
the antennas fire in turn for 6 seconds on all except North American Specification (NAS) vehicles or for 18 seconds on NAS only
vehicles in the following order:
Front left
Six second pause (for the tire pressure monitoring system module to detect a response from the tire low pressure
sensor)
Front right
Six second pause
Rear right
Six second pause
Rear left
Six second pause.
Each tire low pressure sensor responds in turn so the tire pressure monitoring system module can establish the tire low
pressure sensor positions at the start of the drive cycle. This process is repeated up to three times but less if the tire low
pressure sensor positions are already known in the tire pressure monitoring system module.
This process is known as 'Auto Location' and takes:
three to five minutes on all except North American specification vehicles to complete, and
seven to eight minutes on North American specification vehicles to complete.
During this period the tire low pressure sensors transmit at regular intervals:
once every 5 seconds on all except North American specification vehicles, and
once every 15 seconds on North American specification vehicles.
For the remainder of the drive cycle the tire low pressure sensors transmit once every 60 seconds or if a change in tire pressure
is sensed until the vehicle stops and the tire pressure monitoring system returns to parking mode.
Once the wheel position is established, the antennas stop firing and do not fire again until the vehicle has been parked for
more than 15 minutes. The signal transmissions from each tire low pressure sensor continue at one minute intervals whilst the
www.JagDocs.com
vehicle is being driven. This transmission is to monitor the tire pressure. The warning occurs at 25% deflation and comprises
the low tire pressure warning indicator and an appropriate message displayed in the instrument cluster message center. The
message center will also display additional information about the position of the affected wheel(s).
Spare Tire Monitoring
Tire pressure sensors are not fitted to the space saver spare wheel and therefore the spare wheel is not monitored.
Initiator
Each initiator has a connector which connects to the vehicle body harness. The initiator is a passive, LF transmitter. The
initiators transmit their signals which are received by the tire pressure sensors, prompting them to modify their mode status.
The TPMS module energizes each initiator in turn using LF drivers. The corresponding tire pressure sensor detects the LF signal
and responds by modifying the mode status within the RF transmission.
Tire Pressure Sensor
The TPMS uses active tire pressure sensors which are located on each wheel, inside the tire cavity. The sensor incorporates the
tire valve and is secured in the wheel by a nut on the outside of the wheel. The sensor contains a Printed Circuit Board which
houses a PTC (positive temperature coefficient)sensor, a Piezo pressure sensor, a radio receiver and transmitter and a lithium
battery.
www.JagDocs.com
The tire pressure sensors use the PTC sensor and the Piezo sensor to periodically measure the pressure and temperature of
the air inside the tire. The data is transmitted by RF data signals at either 315 MHz or 433 MHz dependant on market
requirements.
The RF transmission from the sensor contains a unique identification code in its transmission data. This allows the TPMS to
identify the wheel on the vehicle. If the sensor is replaced on a wheel, the new sensor identification will be learnt through the
learn and location process.
The tire pressure sensor can also detect when the wheel is rotating. In order to preserve battery power, the sensor uses
different transmission rates when the wheel is stationary or moving.
NOTE: For important information regarding the removal and fitting of tire pressure sensors and associated valves, see the
Tire Changing section.
Instrument Cluster Indications
Item Description
1 Low tire pressure warning indicator
2 Message center
The warning indications to the driver are common on all vehicles fitted with TPMS. The driver is alerted to system warnings by
a low tire pressure warning indicator in the instrument cluster and an applicable text message in the message centre.
The TPMS module passes system status information to the instrument cluster on the medium speed CAN bus. The instrument
cluster converts this data into illumination of the warning indicator and the display of an appropriate message.
When the ignition is switched on, the warning indicator is illuminated for 3 seconds for a bulb check.
NOTE: If the vehicle is not fitted with the TPMS, the warning indicator will not illuminate.
The instrument cluster checks, within the 3 second bulb check period, for a CAN bus message from the TPMS. During this time
the TPMS performs internal tests and CAN bus initialization. The warning indicator will be extinguished if the TPMS module
does not issue a fault message or tire pressure warning message.
If a TPMS fault warning message is detected by the instrument cluster at ignition on, the warning indicator will flash for 72
seconds after the 3 second bulb check period and then remain permanently illuminated.
If a tire pressure warning message is detected by the instrument cluster at ignition on, the warning indicator will extinguish
briefly after the 3 second bulb check period, before re-illuminating to indicate a tire pressure warning.
The following table shows the warning indicator functionality for given events:
Event Instrument Cluster Indications

Low pressure warning limit reached in one wheel Warning indicator illuminated. 'CHECK TYRE PRESSURE' message displayed
and applicable tire highlighted on display.
Low pressure warning limit reached in one or Warning indicator illuminated. 'CHECK ALL TYRE PRESSURES' message
more wheels in low speed mode (only if displayed.
programmed or learning)
TPMS fault Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then permanently
www.JagDocs.com
illuminated. The flash sequence repeats after ignition on cycle. 'TYRE

PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' message displayed.
No transmission from a specific tire pressure Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then permanently
sensor or Specific tire pressure sensor fault illuminated. The flash sequence repeats after ignition on cycle. 'TYRE NOT
MONITORED' message displayed.
No transmission from more than one tire pressure Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then permanently
sensor or more than one tire pressure sensor illuminated. The flash sequence repeats after ignition on cycle. 'TYRE
fault PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' message displayed.
CAN (controller area network) signals missing Warning indicator flashes for 72 seconds and is then permanently
illuminated. The flash sequence repeats after ignition on cycle. 'TYRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' message displayed.
Vehicle enters high speed mode (only available in Warning indicator illuminated. 'TYRE PRESSURE LOW FOR SPEED' message
certain markets) displayed.
Wheels and Tires - Wheels and Tires
For a detailed description of the wheels and tires, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual. REFER to: (204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Wheels and Tires (Description and Operation),

Wheels and Tires (Description and Operation),
Wheels and Tires (Description and Operation).
1. Verify the customer complaint. As much information as possible should be gathered from the driver to assist in
diagnosing the cause(s). Confirm which of the following two warning types (A or B) exist for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System when the ignition status is switched from 'OFF' to 'ON'
(A) Check Tire Pressure Warnings. A low tire pressure warning will continuously illuminate the low tire
pressure warning lamp. This warning may be accompanied by a text message such as CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
(refer to owner literature). The manufacturer approved diagnostic system does NOT need to be used. Diagnostic
Trouble Codes (DTCs) are not generated with this type of warning. To extinguish this warning it is essential that,
with the ignition 'ON', all vehicle tires (including the spare) are to be set to the correct pressure as stated in the
vehicle handbook or as indicated on the placard label in the passenger/driver door aperture. It is not necessary
to drive the vehicle to clear 'check tire pressure' warnings - just changing the tire pressure causes the tire
www.JagDocs.com
low pressure sensor to transmit new data.

NOTES:
The tire pressures should be set by:
Using a calibrated tire pressure gauge

With 'cold' tires (vehicle parked in the ambient temperature for at least one hour, not in a garage with an
artificial ambient temperature)
If the tire pressure warning does not clear within two minutes, it is likely that the gauge is not correctly
calibrated or the tires are 'warm'. Carry out the following steps until the warning has cleared:
Increase the tire pressures by 3psi

Wait a further two minutes
When the tires are at ambient temperature and a calibrated gauge is available, reset the tire pressures
to the correct pressure.
Tire pressure adjustments are part of routine owner maintenance. Tire pressure adjustments that are
required due to a lack of owner maintenance are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.
(B) System Fault Warnings. When a system fault is detected, the low tire pressure warning lamp will flash for
approximately 75 seconds prior to being continuously illuminated. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage
and system integrity. Check for the presence of tire low pressure sensors on all four wheels (note: a tire low
pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber one).
2. Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
NOTE: If the tester fails to communicate with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module, the following actions are
recommended:
Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System power supply fuse, inspect and re-install (if intact). Test to see if
communications have been re-established.
Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System ignition fuse (if applicable), inspect and re-install (if intact). Test to see if
communications have been re-established.
With ignition status set to 'ON', refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Tire Pressure Monitoring System
module for power, ignition and ground supplies .
Carry out CAN network integrity test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
DTC Index
CAUTION: When probing connectors to take measurements in the course of the pinpoint tests, use the adaptor kit, part
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:
Warranty Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to
the installation of a new module/component.
Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. If this is the case, match the five
digits from the scan tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give extra
information read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
account.
DTC Description Possible Cause Action

C1A56-31 Left Front Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test F.
Sensor and Transmitter Missing, incompatible or
Assembly-no signal defective tire low pressure
sensor or radio frequency
receiver
www.JagDocs.com
C1A56-68 Left Front Tire Pressure No action required.

Sensor and Transmitter Information only - vehicle
Assembly-event information exposed to extreme
temperature environment
and/or tire low pressure
sensor low battery voltage
event
C1A56-91 Left Front Tire Pressure Replace defective tire low pressure sensor. Refer to
Sensor and Transmitter Tire low pressure sensor the relevant section of the workshop manual.
Assembly-parametric has reported out of range
temperature or acceleration
C1A56-93 Left Front Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test G.

Sensor and Transmitter No tire low pressure sensor
Assembly-no operation can be localized at this
position due to an initiator
or tire low pressure sensor
malfunction
C1A57-11 Left Front Initiator-circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B. Refer to Pinpoint test B1

short to ground Left front initiator circuit is
short to ground
C1A57-12 Left Front Initiator-circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B. Go to Pinpoint test B2

short to battery Left front initiator circuit is
short to power
C1A57-13 Left Front Initiator-circuit GO to Pinpoint Test B. Go to Pinpoint test B9

open Left front initiator circuit
open
C1A58-31 Right Front Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test F.

receiver
C1A58-68 Right Front Tire Pressure No action required.

event
www.JagDocs.com
C1A58-91 Right Front Tire Pressure Replace defective tire low pressure sensor. refer to
C1A58-93 Right Front Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test G.

malfunction
C1A59-11 Right Front Initiator-circuit GO to Pinpoint Test C. Go to Pinpoint test C1

short to ground Right front initiator circuit
is short to ground

short to battery Right front initiator circuit
is short to power

open Right front initiator circuit
open
C1A60-31 Left Rear Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test F.

receiver
www.JagDocs.com
C1A60-68 Left Rear Tire Pressure No action required.

event
C1A60-91 Left Rear Tire Pressure Replace defective tire low pressure sensor, refer to
C1A60-93 Left Rear Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test G.

malfunction
C1A61-11 Left Rear Initiator-circuit GO to Pinpoint Test D. Go to Pinpoint test D1

short to ground Left rear initiator circuit
short to ground

short to battery Left rear initiator circuit
short to power

open Left rear initiator circuit
open
C1A62-31 Right Rear Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test F.

receiver
C1A62-68 Right Rear Tire Pressure No action required.

event
C1A62-91 Right Rear Tire Pressure Replace defective tire low pressure sensor, refer to
C1A62-93 Right Rear Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test G.

malfunction
C1A63-11 Right Rear Initiator-circuit GO to Pinpoint Test E. Go to Pinpoint test E1

short to ground Right rear initiator circuit
short to ground

short to battery Right rear initiator circuit
short to power

open Right rear initiator circuit
open
C1A64-68 Spare Wheel Tire Pressure No action required.

www.JagDocs.com
event
C1A64-91 Spare Wheel Tire Pressure Replace defective tire low pressure sensor, refer to
C1A64-93 Spare Wheel Tire Pressure GO to Pinpoint Test H.

Assembly-no operation defective tire low pressure
receiver
C1D19-11 External Receiver Data GO to Pinpoint Test A.

Line-circuit short to ground Tire pressure monitoring
receiver or data line circuit
is short to ground
C1D19-12 External Receiver Data GO to Pinpoint Test I.

Line-circuit short to battery Tire pressure monitoring
receiver or data line circuit
is short to power
C1D19-87 External Receiver Data GO to Pinpoint Test J.

Line-missing message Radio Frequency reception
blocked
receiver faulty
receiver or data line
circuits open circuit
Missing, incompatible or
defective tire low pressure
sensors
U0010-88 Medium Speed CAN Carry out CAN network integrity tests. Refer to the
Communication Bus-bus off CAN bus fault electrical wiring diagrams and check CAN network for
short, open circuit.
U0140-00 Lost communication with Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
body control module-no sub CAN bus fault Central Junction Box power and ground supplies for
type information Central Junction Box fault short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity
tests.
U0142-00 Lost Communication With Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
Body Control Module "B" CAN bus fault Auxiliary Junction Box power and ground supplies for
-no sub type information Auxiliary Junction Box fault short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity
tests.
U0155-00 Lost Communications With Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
Instrument Panel Cluster CAN bus fault instrument cluster power and ground supplies for
(IPC) Control Module-no Instrument cluster fault short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity
sub type information tests.
U0164-00 Lost Communication With Refer to the electrical wiring diagrams and check
HVAC Control Module-no CAN bus fault climate control module power and ground supplies for
sub type information Climate control module short, open circuit. Carry out CAN network integrity
fault tests.
U0300-00 Internal Control Module Check correct tire pressure monitoring system module
Software Incompatibility-no Incompatible tire pressure is installed to vehicle specification, otherwise
sub type information monitoring system module suspect the Auxiliary Junction Box.
for vehicle CAN network
U0415-00 Invalid Data Received From Check Anti-Lock Braking System control module and
Anti-Lock Brake System Invalid data received from Instrument Cluster for related DTCs and refer to the
(ABS) Control Module-no the Anti-Lock Braking relevant DTC Index. Carry out CAN network integrity
subtype information System Control Module tests.
CAN bus fault
Anti-Lock Braking System
fault
U0424-00 Invalid Data Received From Check climate control module for related DTCs and
HVAC Control Module-no HVAC control module fault refer to relevant DTC Index.
sub type information
U1A14-49 CAN Initialisation Failure- Install a new tire pressure monitoring module. Refer
internal electronic failure Tire pressure monitoring to the new module/component installation note at
www.JagDocs.com
system module fault the top of the DTC Index.
U3000-55 Control Module-not Check and amend the car configuration file.
configured Tire pressure monitoring
system configuration data
is invalid
U3000-87 Control Module-missing Check the Auxiliary Junction Box for related DTCs and
message Tire pressure monitoring refer to the relevant DTC Index. Carry out CAN
system configuration data network integrity test.
not received

Number - invalid serial data Tire pressure monitoring
NOTE: This DTC indicates that the tire pressure
received system module and vehicle
monitoring system module is not the original part
VIN mis-match
installed to the vehicle at the factory/dealer and
could have been substituted. Refer to the note above
the DTC index about replacing components which may
remain under manufacturer warranty.
Re-install the original or a new tire pressure

monitoring system control module.
Component Tests
Wheels and Tires
For wheel and tire specification information (pressures, torques, etc).
When replacing wheels or tires, local legislation regarding health and safety must be complied with.
If the vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitoring System installed, only Jaguar approved wheels and tires should be used. If the
wheel and tire size is changed (for example from R18 to R20) the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module should be updated
with the correct pressure information appropriate to the new wheel and tire set. Update the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
module using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
As a general guideline, only replace tires in pairs or as a set, and only with tires of equivalent size and specification.
Confirm the symptoms of the customer complaint.
As much information as possible should be gathered from the driver to assist in diagnosing the cause(s).
1. Before a road test, carry out a basic inspection to make sure the vehicle is safe and legal to drive.
Basic inspection
Correct tire inflation

Legal tire tread depth
Cuts/Bulges in tire sidewall(s)
Tire ply separation
Embedded objects
Wheel rim damage
Correct tire installation (specification, direction of rotation, etc)
Any obvious distortion of the tire (flat/high spots)
Worn/Damaged steering or suspension components
Road test
If the results of the basic inspection are acceptable, carry out a road test to confirm the symptoms.
To reproduce the symptoms, test the vehicle on similar roads to those on which the fault occurs and at similar speeds
(provided it is legal to do so).
If the vibration or noise can be reproduced, note the speed at which it occurs and see if it is possible to drive through the
symptom, meaning, is it possible to alter the fault by driving faster or slower than the speed at which it occurs?
If it is possible, it is likely that the fault is caused by an imbalance in the wheel or tire.
If the vibration or noise gets worse as the vehicle speed increases, it is likely that the fault is caused by distortion in the
wheel or tire, or worn or damaged components.
Distortion checks
Check for distortion by raising the vehicle so that the wheels are free and placing an axle stand or similar fixed object next to
each wheel in turn.
If the stand is placed at the tread of the tire, the tire can be checked for ovality by turning the wheel by hand and checking for
high or low spots where the gap between the tread and the stand increases or reduces.
If the stand is placed next to the wheel rim or tire sidewall, the wheel and tire can be checked for run-out in a similar way.
www.JagDocs.com
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : C1D1911 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE
CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND

A1: C1D1911 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND
1 Ignition off.
2 Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Receiver electrical connector, C3MC45.
3 Measure the resistance between
C3MC45, harness side Battery

Pin 1 Negative terminal
Is the resistance less than 5 Ohms?
Yes
GO to A2.GO to A2.
No
GO to A3.GO to A3.
A2: C1D1911 CHECK THE EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector, C3MC39B.

Yes
REPAIR the short circuit in wiring harness.
No
GO to A4.GO to A4.
A3: C1D1911 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
GROUND
1 Reconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Receiver electrical connector, C3MC45.
2 Using manufacturer approved diagnostic system run On Demand Self Test (0x0202).
Is the DTC C1D1911 set?
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.
No
Investigate possible cause of intermittent failure.
A4: C1D1911 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
GROUND
1 Reconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module electrical connector, C3MC39B.
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring System Control Module.
No
PINPOINT TEST B : LEFT FRONT LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

B1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Ignition off.
2 Disconnect the left hand front low-frequency initiator electrical
connector, C1MC40.
www.JagDocs.com
3 Measure the resistance between:

Is the resistance less than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to B5.
No
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Pin 2 Positive terminal
Yes
GO to B6.
No
GO to B3.
B3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND

Yes
GO to B7.
No
GO to B4.
B4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Yes
GO to B8.
No
GO to B9.
B5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
www.JagDocs.com
1 Disconnect the Tire Pressure Monitoring System module connector,
C3MC39A.

Yes
REPAIR the short circuit. This circuit contains intermediate
connector, C13-B. For additional information, refer to the wiring
diagram. Clear the DTC and run an On Demand Self Test (ODST)
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system to confirm
www.JagDocs.com
rectification.
No
INSTALL a new Tire Pressure Monitoring System module. REFER to:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module (204-04 Wheels
and Tires, Removal and Installation).
C3MC39A.

Yes
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.

Yes
rectification.
No
www.JagDocs.com

C3MC39A.

Yes
rectification.
No
B9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE
C3MC39A, harness side C1MC40, harness side

Pin 14 Pin 2
Is the resistance greater than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the high resistance circuit. This circuit contains
intermediate connector, C13-B. For additional information, refer to
the wiring diagram. Clear the DTC and run an On Demand Self Test
(ODST) using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system to
confirm rectification.
No
GO to B10.
B10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Pin 13 Pin 1
Yes
No
INSTALL a new left hand front low-frequency initiator. REFER to:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (204-04
Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
PINPOINT TEST C : RIGHT FRONT LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

C1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
www.JagDocs.com
1 Ignition off.
2 Disconnect the right hand front low-frequency initiator electrical
connector, C1MC41.


Yes
GO to C5.
No
GO to C2.
C2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Yes
GO to C6.
No
GO to C3.
C3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND

Yes
GO to C7.
No
GO to C4.
C4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Yes
GO to C8.
No
GO to C9.
C5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
C3MC39A.

www.JagDocs.com

Yes
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
www.JagDocs.com

C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
C9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Pin 16 Pin 2
Yes
www.JagDocs.com
No
GO to C10.
C10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Pin 15 Pin 1
Yes
No
INSTALL a new right hand front low-frequency initiator. REFER to:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (204-04
PINPOINT TEST D : LEFT REAR LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

D1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Ignition off.
2 Disconnect the left hand rear low-frequency initiator electrical
connector, C4MC42.
www.JagDocs.com


Yes
GO to D5.
No
GO to D2.
D2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Yes
GO to D6.
No
GO to D3.
D3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND

Yes
GO to D7.
No
GO to D4.
D4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Yes
GO to D8.
No
GO to D9.
D5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
C3MC39A.

www.JagDocs.com

Yes
connector, C44-W. For additional information, refer to the wiring
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
www.JagDocs.com
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
D9: CHECK THE INITIATOR RETURN CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Pin 6 Pin 2
Yes
intermediate connector, C44-W. For additional information, refer to
No
GO to E1.
D10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Pin 5 Pin 1
Yes
intermediate connector, C44-W. For additional information, refer to
No
INSTALL a new rear left hand low-frequency initiator. REFER to:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (204-04
PINPOINT TEST E : RIGHT REAR LOW FREQUENCY INITIATOR CIRCUIT

E1: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
1 Ignition off.
2 Disconnect the right hand rear low-frequency initiator electrical
connector, C4MC43.

www.JagDocs.com

Yes
GO to E5.
No
GO to E2.
E2: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Yes
GO to E6.
No
GO to E3.
E3: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND

Yes
GO to E7.
No
GO to E4.
E4: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Yes
GO to E8.
No
GO to E9.
E5: CHECK WHETHER THE SHORT CIRCUIT IS IN THE HARNESS OR THE MODULE
C3MC39A.


Yes
connector, C44-Y. For additional information, refer to the wiring
www.JagDocs.com

rectification.
No
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
C3MC39A.
www.JagDocs.com


Yes
rectification.
No
www.JagDocs.com
C3MC39A.


Yes
rectification.
No
E9: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Pin 8 Pin 2
Yes
intermediate connector, C44-Y. For additional information, refer to
No
GO to E10.
E10: CHECK THE INITIATOR CIRCUIT FOR HIGH RESISTANCE

Pin 7 Pin 1
Yes
intermediate connector, C44-Y. For additional information, refer to
No
INSTALL a new rear right hand low-frequency initiator. REFER to:
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (204-04
PINPOINT TEST F : MISSING, INCOMPATIBLE OR DEFECTIVE RUNNING TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
OR RECEIVER
CONDITIONS
F1: CHECK FOR CORRECT WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY AND TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Establish that a full size running wheel and tire assembly has a tire low pressure sensor installed. As a
visual confirmation, a tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber one and
cannot be installed to a mini/space saver spare wheel.
Is a full size wheel and tire assembly with tire low pressure sensor installed?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
Install the correct wheel and tire assembly or tire low pressure sensor, of correct frequency, in accordance
www.JagDocs.com
with that defined in the manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor
application.
F2: CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
1 Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System power supply fuse and re-install it. Clear DTCs and leave
the vehicle stationary for 15 minutes, then drive it at a speed greater than 15.5 mph (25 kph)
continuously for at least 10 minutes.
(Note: If the vehicle speed drops below this value, the drive time to complete the test will need to be increased.)
The use of the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and the datalogger signal ’Tire pressure
monitor system status – learn mode status’ will verify the completion of the test when the value returns
to ‘Inactive’.
2 Check for additional DTCs C1A5631, C1A5831, C1A6031, C1A6231, with identical time stamps.
Have all four DTCs logged with identical time stamps in the tire pressure monitoring system module?
Yes
Replace the tire pressure monitoring system radio frequency receiver.
REFER to: Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Receiver (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
No
GO to F3.
F3: VERIFY THE POSITION OF THE DEFECTIVE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Check tire pressure monitoring system DTCs.
Are any C1AXX31 DTCs logged?
Yes
Install the correct tire low pressure sensor, of correct frequency, in accordance with that defined in the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application, to the position
identified by the logged DTC.
REFER to: Tire Low Pressure Sensor (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
No
No further action is required.
(Note: The use of the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and the datalogger signal ’Tire pressure monitor system status – learn
completed successfully’ will verify the successful completion of the test.)
PINPOINT TEST G : LOCALIZATION FAILURE
CONDITIONS
G1: CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
1 Check for additional DTCs: C1A5711, C1A5712, C1A5713. C1A5911, C1A5912, C1A5913, C1A6111,
C1A6112, C1A6113, C1A6311, C1A6312, C1A6313.
Are any of the DTCs listed above also logged?
Yes
Refer to the DTC Index and remedial actions.
No
GO to G2.
G2: CHECK FOR ADDITIONAL DTCS
1 Check for additional DTCs: C1A5631, C1A5831, C1A6031 or C1A6231
Is a C1A5631, C1A5831, C1A6031 or C1A6231 DTC also logged?
Yes
Refer to the DTC Index and remedial actions.
No
GO to G3.
G3: CHECK INITIATOR INSTALLATION
1 Check for correct installation of Initiator. REFER to: (204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (Removal and Installation),
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (Removal and Installation).
Is the Initiator correctly installed?
Yes
GO to G4.
No
Rectify as required. REFER to: (204-04 Wheels and Tires)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna (Removal and Installation),
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna (Removal and Installation).
G4: CHECK FOR SHORT CIRCUIT IN INITIATOR HARNESS
1 Locate and remove module blue connector L.
2 Measure the resistance across the relevant initiator circuits within the blue connector.
Is the resistance less than 1 Ohm?
Yes
A value of less than 1 Ohm indicates a short circuit, rectify the short circuit as required.
No
manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application, to the position
identified by the logged DTC.
REFER to: Tire Low Pressure Sensor (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and Installation).
PINPOINT TEST H : SPARE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR NO OPERATION

www.JagDocs.com
CONDITIONS
H1: ESTABLISH THE TYPE OF SPARE WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY INSTALLED
1 Establish the type of spare wheel and tire assembly Installed.
Is the spare wheel a mini/space saver type?
Yes
Tire low pressure sensors are not installed to mini/space-saver spare wheels. Tire low pressure sensors
are installed to full size spare wheels only. The DTC is to be ignored and no repair action is required.
No
GO to H2.
H2: ESTABLISH THAT THE SPARE WHEEL HAS A TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR INSTALLED
1 Establish that the spare wheel has a tire low pressure sensor installed, considering the following
additional information:
a) As a visual confirmation, the tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber
one.
Is a tire low pressure sensor installed?

Yes
GO to H3.
No
A new spare tire low pressure sensor should be installed. Note: Refer to the note above the DTC index
about replacing components which may remain under manufacturer warranty. Refer to the relevant section
of the workshop manual.
H3: CONFIRM OPERATION OF THE SPARE WHEEL PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Deflate the spare tire, in close proximity to the vehicle, until it is completely deflated.
2 Complete an ignition cycle to ignition on and verify that the instrument cluster reports a spare tire
pressure warning for approximately 20 seconds.
3 Re-inflate the spare tire, in close proximity to the vehicle, to the recommended spare tire pressure.
4 Complete an ignition cycle to ignition on and verify that the instrument cluster no longer reports a spare
tire pressure warning.
Does the instrument cluster continue to report a spare tire pressure warning?
Yes
GO to H4.
No
No repair action is required. It is possible that the customer may have placed items in the vehicle's
luggage compartment that prevented correct RF reception.
H4: VERIFY THAT THE SPARE TIRE LOW PRESSURE SENSOR ID HAS BEEN CORRECTLY PROGRAMMED TO THE
MODULE
1 Remove tire low pressure sensor. Record the 8 character hexadecimal ID written on the casing.
2 Use the approved diagnostic system to read the spare tire sensor ID from the module. Refer to the
relevant procedure in the workshop manual.
3 Compare the IDs from steps 1 & 2.
Do the IDs match?
Yes
Replace the spare tire low pressure sensor. Refer to the relevant installation section in the workshop
manual.
The identification for the sensor must be programmed into the tire pressure monitoring system module
using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. The identification code is provided on a label with
the complete assembly and is also printed on the casing of each sensor.
No
Program the spare tire sensor ID, recorded in step 1, to the module using the approved diagnostic
system. The identification code is provided on a label with the complete assembly and is also printed on
the casing of each sensor.
Repeat test to ensure correct operation.GO to H3.
PINPOINT TEST I : C1D1912 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE
CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER

I1: C1D1912 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER
1 Ignition off.

Yes
GO to I2.
No
GO to I3.
www.JagDocs.com
I2: C1D1912 CHECK THE EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER

Yes
REPAIR the short circuit in wiring harness.
No
GO to I4.
I3: C1D1912 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO
POWER
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.
No
I4: C1D1912 CHECK THE TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM CONTROL MODULE FOR SHORT CIRCUIT TO POWER
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST J : C1D1987 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE
MISSING MESSAGE
CONDITIONS
J1: C1D1987 VERIFY EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE MISSING MESSAGE
Yes
GO to J2.
No
GO to J5.
J2: C1D1987 CHECK EXTERNAL RECEIVER DATA LINE CIRCUIT
1 Ignition off.
C3MC45, harness side C3MC39B, harness side

Pin 1 Pin4
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to J3.
No
REPAIR the high resistance/open circuit in wiring harness.
J3: C1D1987 CHECK EXTERNAL RECEIVER
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.GO to J4.
No
J4: C1D1987 CHECK TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM CONTROL MODULE
Yes
No
Test is complete. No further action is required.
J5: C1D1987 CHECK WHEELS HAVE TIRE SENSORS INSTALLED
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: As a visual check, a tire low pressure sensor has a metal valve stem rather than a rubber one
and cannot be installed to a mini/space saver spare wheel.
1 Check that all full size running wheel and tire assemblies have tire low pressure sensors installed.
Is a full size wheel and tire assembly with tire low pressure sensor installed to all running wheel positions?
Yes
GO to J6.
No
If agreed with the customer install correct tire low pressure sensors in accordance with that defined in
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application, as required.
(Note: Confirm why the vehicle has non-Tire Pressure Monitoring System wheel & tire assemblies installed before installing tire low
pressure sensors, which are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.)
J6: C1D1987 CHECK TIRE SENSOR COMPATIBILITY TO TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM RECEIVER
1 Remove tire low pressure sensor from 1 wheel.
2 Verify the tire low pressure sensor part number from the information on the casing.
Is the tire low pressure sensor the correct part for the vehicle?
Yes
Replace Tire Pressure Monitoring Receiver.Carry out the following to verify repair.
Remove the Tire Pressure Monitoring System power supply fuse and re-install it. Clear DTCs and leave
the vehicle stationary for 15 minutes, then drive it at a speed greater than 15.5 mph (25 kph)
continuously for at least 10 minutes.
(Note: If the vehicle speed drops below this value, the drive time to complete the test will need to be increased. The use of the
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and the datalogger signal ’Tire pressure monitor system status – learn mode status’ will verify
the completion of the test when the value returns to ‘Inactive’.)
No
manufacturer approved diagnostic system new tire low pressure sensor application, to the position(s)
identified.
(Note: Confirm why the vehicle has incorrect Tire Pressure Monitoring System wheel & tire assemblies installed before installing tire low
pressure sensors, which are not to be claimed under vehicle warranty.)
www.JagDocs.com
Wheels and Tires - Tire Low Pressure Sensor
Removal
Installation).
3. Remove the tire from the wheel, release the tire bead from the rim 180
degrees from the valve.
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
Discard the tire valve and retaining nut.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the seal is correctly located.
Make sure that new components are installed.
Install the washer and seal, making sure the valve remains
pressed fully onto its seat.
2. WARNINGS:
Make sure that any corrosion or dirt is removed from the

mating surfaces.
Make sure that a new tire valve, valve core, seal, washer,
cap and retaining nut is installed.
www.JagDocs.com
CAUTIONS:
Use lint free cloth.
Only use moderate force when installing the sensor.
NOTE: Only tighten the nut finger tight at this stage.
Install the tire low pressure sensor and support the

sensor body in position.
Support the back of the valve stem in order to prevent
rotation to the tire low pressure sensor body.
Gently push the nut towards the center of the wheel.
Tighten the nut.
Torque: 8 Nm
3. Install the tire and balance the wheel.
Installation).
Lower the vehicle.

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Front Antenna
Removal
2. NOTES:
This step requires the aid of another technician.
Lower the radiator splash shield enough to access the tire pressure
monitoring system front antenna.
Note the position of the component before removal.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is secured in the retainer.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is installed to the noted

removal position.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear Antenna
Removal
Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4. NOTE: Note the position of the component before

removal.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is secured in the retainer.
NOTE: Make sure that the component is installed to the noted

removal position.

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Module
Removal
1. Switch the igntion off.
2. Remove the right-hand front seat.
Refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: B-Pillar Lower Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
4. Detach and reposition the floor covering.

www.JagDocs.com
5.
6.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com

Wheels and Tires - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Receiver
Removal
NOTES:
The tire pressure monitoring system receiver is installed in the same location on both LHD and RHD vehicles.
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Remove the left-hand floor console side trim panel.
Refer to: Floor Console Side Trim Panel (501-12 Instrument Panel and
Console, Removal and Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
2. Configure the tire pressure monitoring system using the diagnostic tool.
Wheels and Tires - Wheel and Tire
Removal
2. Torque: 125 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTION: Apply a small amount of grease to the hub and wheel mating
surfaces before installation. Make sure the grease does not come into
contact with the vehicles braking components and the wheel stud
threads. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
www.JagDocs.com
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol - Component Location
Component Location - Supercharged Vehicles and Diesel S

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 RH (right-hand) front-spring and damper assembly
2 RH rear suspension height sensor
3 RH rear-spring and damper assembly
4 Rear vertical accelerometer
5 LH (left-hand) rear-spring and damper assembly
6 LH rear suspension height sensor
7 Adaptive damping module
8 LH front-spring and damper assembly
9 LH front suspension height sensor
10 LH front vertical accelerometer
11 RH front suspension height sensor
12 RH front vertical accelerometer
www.JagDocs.com
S/C 5.0L Petrol - Overview
OVERVIEW
Adaptive Dynamics - Supercharged Vehicles and Diesel S
The adaptive dynamics system, is an electronically controlled suspension system which constantly adjusts the damping
characteristics of the suspension dampers in reaction to the existing driving conditions. The adaptive dynamics system is
available on specified models.
The system is controlled by an Adaptive Damping Module (ADM), located beneath the right-hand front seat. The module
receives signals from three dedicated vertical accelerometers; two at the front of the vehicle and one at the rear, which,
together with four suspension height sensors, determine the state of the body and wheel motions. In addition to these inputs,
further signals from other vehicle electronic system components to determine vehicle state and driver inputs are monitored by
the adaptive damping module. These combined signals are used by the adaptive damping module to continuously adjust the
damping characteristics of each of the suspension dampers in reaction to the current driving conditions to give the optimum
body control and vehicle ride.
www.JagDocs.com
S/C 5.0L Petrol - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box) (Megafuse (250 A)
3 AJB (auxiliary junction box)
5 ATC (automatic temperature control) module
6 Fuse 36 (10 A) - from delayed power-off relay
7 Rear accelerometer
9 JaguarDrive selector module
10 ABS (anti-lock brake system) module
11 TCM (transmission control module)
12 ECM (engine control module)
13 RH (right-hand) rear damper
14 RH front damper
15 LH (left-hand) front damper
16 LH rear damper
17 LH rear suspension height sensor
18 RH rear suspension height sensor
19 LH front suspension height sensor
20 RH front accelerometer
21 RH front suspension height sensor
22 Adaptive damping module
23 LH front accelerometer
System Operation
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The adaptive damping module uses a combination of information from other system modules and data from the accelerometers
www.JagDocs.com
and suspension height sensors to measure the vehicle and suspension states and driver inputs. Using this information, the
adaptive damping module applies algorithms to control the dampers for the current driving conditions.
The adaptive damping module receives signals on the high speed CAN bus from the following system components:
Brake Pressure - ABS module.

Brake Pressure Quality Factor - ABS module.
Car Configuration Parameters - AJB.
Center Differential Range Actual - ECM.
Engine Speed - ECM.
Engine Speed Quality Factor - ECM.
Engine Torque Flywheel Actual - ECM.
Engine Torque Flywheel Actual Quality Factor - ECM.
Gear Position Target - TCM.
Lateral Acceleration - ABS module.
Power Mode (Ignition Signal) - CJB.
Power Mode Quality Factor - CJB.
Roll Stability Control Mode - ABS module.
Steering Wheel Angle - ABS module.
Steering Wheel Angle Speed - ABS module.
Steering Wheel Angle Status - ABS module.
Terrain Mode Requested - JaguarDrive selector.
Torque Converter Slip - TCM.
Vehicle Information Parameters HS - AJB
Vehicle Speed - ABS module.
Vehicle Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
Front Left Wheel Speed - ABS module.
Front Left Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
Front Right Wheel Speed - ABS module.
Front Right Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
Rear Left Wheel Speed - ABS module.
Rear Left Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
Rear Right Wheel Speed Quality Factor - ABS module.
Rear Right Wheel Speed - ABS module.
The adaptive damping module also outputs information on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems as follows:
Fault Message - instrument cluster.

Terrain Mode Change Status - JaguarDrive selector.
Terrain Mode - JaguarDrive selector.
The adaptive damping module monitors the input signals and operates the damper solenoids. The input signals are used in
control modes and a force required for each damper for that mode is calculated. An arbitration mode monitors the force
requirements from each mode and apportions a force to a damper. The force is converted to the appropriate current and sent to
the damper.
The control modes are as follows:
www.JagDocs.com
Body Control – Uses CAN and accelerometer inputs. Calculates road induced body motions 100 times a second and sets
each damper to the appropriate level to maintain a flat and level body.
Roll Rate Control – Uses CAN inputs. Predicts vehicle roll rate due to driver steering inputs 100 times a second and
increases damping to reduce roll rate.
Pitch Rate Control – Uses CAN inputs. Predicts vehicle pitch rate due to driver throttle and braking inputs 100 times a
second and increases damping to reduce pitch rate.
Bump Rebound Control – Uses suspension height sensor and CAN inputs. Monitors the position of the wheel 500 times
a second and increases the damping rate as the damper approaches the end of its travel.
Wheel Hop Control – Uses suspension height sensor and CAN inputs. Monitors the position of the wheel 500 times a
second and detects when the wheel is at its natural frequency and increases the dampingto reduce vertical wheel
motion.
Under normal road conditions when the vehicle is stationary with the engine running, the dampers are set to the firm condition
to reduce power consumption.
The adaptive damping module receives its power supply via a relay and fuse in the CJB. The relay remains energized for a
period of time after the ignition is off. This allows the adaptive damping module to record and store any DTC (diagnostic
trouble code) relating to adaptive dynamics system faults.
DAMPERS
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
A Front spring and damper assembly
B Rear spring and damper assembly
The 'Adaptive Dynamics' dampers are monotube, nitrogen gas and oil filled units, manufactured by Bilstein. The dampers are
continuously variable, which allows the damping force to be electrically adjusted when the vehicle is being driven. The variable
dampers provide the optimum compromise between vehicle control and ride comfort.
The dampers have an electrical connector on the end of the piston rod, in the center of the top mount (the dampers look
identical to those on the Computer Active Technology Suspension (CATS) system of 4.2L supercharged vehicles, but have a
different part number).
In each damper, the continuous damping adjustment is achieved by a solenoid operated variable orifice, which opens up an
alternative path for oil flow within the damper. When de-energized the bypass is closed and all the oil flows through the main
(firm) piston. When energized, the solenoid moves an armature and control blade, which work against a spring. The control
blade incorporates an orifice which slides inside a sintered housing to open up the bypass as required. In compression, oil
flows from the lower portion of the damper through a hollow piston rod, a separate soft (comfort) valve, the slider housing and
orifice and into the upper portion of the damper, thereby bypassing the main (firm) valve. In rebound the oil flows in the
opposite direction.
In the firm setting, oil flows through the main (firm) valve only, but when the bypass is opened by any amount the oil flows
through both valves in a pressure balance. When fully energized the solenoid moves the armature and therefore the slider to
the maximum extension and opens the orifice completely. The damper operates continuously between these two boundary
conditions.
The solenoid in each damper is operated by a 526 Hz PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the adaptive damping module.
When fully energized, the adaptive damping module applies a 1.5 A current to operate the damper in the soft setting. When
de-energized (0.0 A) the damper is in the firm setting. The current varies continuously as required to increase and decrease
the damping individually in each of the dampers.
Sectioned Views of Damper Operating States

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
A Firm setting
B Soft setting
C Main oil flow
D Bypass oil flow
1 Bypass valve (open)
2 Main piston
3 Tube
4 Bypass valve (closed)
5 Piston and rod assembly
ACCELEROMETERS
Three accelerometers are used in the adaptive dynamics system. The accelerometers are located as follows:
One each on the rear edge of the radiator support panel.

One in the luggage compartment, in the rear LH corner adjacent to the rear lamp assembly.
www.JagDocs.com
The accelerometers measure acceleration in the vertical plane and output a corresponding analogue signal to the adaptive
damping module. The algorithms in the adaptive damping module calculate the heave, pitch and roll motions of the vehicle,
which are used by the module to control road induced body modes.
Each accelerometer is connected to the adaptive damping module via three wires, which supply ground, 5 V supply and signal
return.
The sensing element comprises a single parallel plate capacitor, one plate of which moves relative to the other dependant on
the force (acceleration) applied. This causes the capacitance to change as a function of applied acceleration. This capacitance
is compared with a fixed reference capacitor in a bridge circuit and the signal is processed by means of a dedicated integrated
circuit to generate an output voltage that varies as a function of applied acceleration. The sensors output a signal voltage of
approximately 1 V/g ± 0.05 V/g.
SUSPENSION HEIGHT SENSORS
Four suspension height sensors are used in the adaptive dynamics system, two for the front suspension and two for the rear
suspension. A front suspension height sensor is attached to each side of the front subframes and connected by a sensor arm
and sensor link to the related lower lateral arm of the front suspension. A rear suspension height sensor is attached to each
side of the rear subframe and connected by a sensor arm and sensor link to the related upper control arm of the rear
suspension. On each suspension height sensor, the sensor arm and sensor link convert linear movement of the suspension into
rotary movement of the sensor shaft.
The sensors are also used for the static dynamic headlamp leveling system on vehicles fitted with xenon headlamps.
The suspension height sensors measure suspension displacement at each corner of the vehicle and output a corresponding
analogue signal to the adaptive damping module. The algorithms in the adaptive damping module calculate the position,
velocity and frequency content of the signals and use the results for wheel control.
Each suspension height sensor is connected to the adaptive damping module via three wires, which supply ground, 5 V supply
and signal return.
The sensing element consists of an array of Hall effect devices arranged to measure the direction of the magnetic field of a
small magnet attached to the end of the sensor shaft. As the sensor shaft rotates, so do the lines of magnetic flux from the
magnet. The signals from the Hall effect elements are processed by means of a dedicated integrated circuit to generate an
output voltage that varies as the sensor shaft is rotated. The sensor has a measurement range of ± 40° around its nominal
position and the nominal sensitivity is 57 mV/° of shaft rotation.
ADAPTIVE DAMPING MODULE
The adaptive damping module is installed on the floor pan, below the RH front seat.
System Fault Message

www.JagDocs.com
The adaptive damping module has a high speed CAN connection to the instrument cluster. If a fault is detected by the
adaptive damping module, a message is sent to the instrument cluster and the message 'ADAPTIVE DYNAMICS FAULT' is
displayed. The adaptive damping module also logs an appropriate DTC. The adaptive damping module can be interrogated
using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system.
When a fault is detected, the adaptive damping module implements a strategy based on the type of fault. If there is an
electrical power fault, or the adaptive damping module cannot control the dampers, they default to the firm condition. If a
sensor fails that only affects one or more control modes then an intermediate damper setting is used as the lower threshold
and the remaining working modes can demand higher damping as required.
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Vehicle Dynamic Suspension
For a detailed description of the adaptive damping system operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of
the workshop manual. REFER to: (204-05 Vehicle Dynamic Suspension)
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol Diesel S (Description and Operation),

1. Verify the customer concern.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical Electrical
Coil spring(s) Fuse(s)

Shock absorber(s) Wiring harness/electrical connectors
Accelerometer(s) installation Accelerometer(s)
Height sensor(s) installation Adaptive Damping Control Module
Height sensor(s)
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to
www.JagDocs.com
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check the system for any logged Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the
DTC index.
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Adaptive Damping Module (SUMB) (100-00 General Information,
www.JagDocs.com
Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Adaptive Damping Module
Removal
1. Refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).
2. Refer to: B-Pillar Lower Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and
3. Detach and reposition the floor covering.

www.JagDocs.com
4.
5.
Torque: 5 Nm
6.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Front Suspension Vertical Accelerometer
Removal

2. Refer to: Fender Splash Shield (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal
and Installation).
3. CAUTION: The accelerometer is an extremely delicate

component and can easily be rendered unserviceable. Never
use an accelerometer which has been dropped or subjected
to mistreatment of any type.
Torque: 5 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTION: The accelerometer is an extremely delicate component

and can easily be rendered unserviceable. Never use an accelerometer
which has been dropped or subjected to mistreatment of any type.

Vehicle Dynamic Suspension - Rear Suspension Vertical Accelerometer
Removal
1. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel LH (501-05 Interior Trim and

2. CAUTION: The accelerometer is an extremely delicate

component and can easily be rendered unserviceable. Never
use an accelerometer which has been dropped or subjected
to mistreatment of any type.
Torque: 5 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTION: The accelerometer is an extremely delicate component

and can easily be rendered unserviceable. Never use an accelerometer
which has been dropped or subjected to mistreatment of any type.

Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization -
Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
3 JaguarDrive Control selection buttons
www.JagDocs.com
Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization - Overview
OVERVIEW
JaguarDrive Control is a selectable vehicle optimisation system, designed to fine-tune the driving characteristics of the vehicle
by accommodating different driving conditions or driving styles. The system allows the performance envelope of the vehicle to
be stretched and prevents the necessity for a single, compromised configuration for all conditions. JaguarDrive Control
increases the vehicle's abilities by changing the characteristics of engine mapping, transmission shifts and stability and
traction interventions. The software for the JaguarDrive control is incorporated in the JaguarDrive selector module.
NOTE: The JaguarDrive Control system is a co-ordinating system only. It CANNOT generate a fault in one of the
participating sub-systems. All participating subsystems should be FULLY diagnosed before assuming a fault with JaguarDrive
Control. Replacing the JaguarDrive selector module should not be done until all other options have been exhausted.
www.JagDocs.com
Ride and Handling Optimization - Ride and Handling Optimization - System
Operation and Component Description
System Operation
JAGUARDRIVE CONTROL OPERATION
Engine Management System
The Engine Management System (EMS) varies the accelerator pedal maps to change the amount of torque per percentage of
pedal travel. The EMS can also change the accelerator pedal response to control the allowed torque change relative to the
speed of pedal travel.
Each driving mode uses a combination of operating parameters for each sub-system. Changing between driving modes initiates
a different set of operating characteristics, which will be noticeable to the driver. The driver will notice differences in engine
response when, for example, the accelerator pedal is held in a constant position and the driving mode is changed from Winter
to Dynamic, the driver will notice the torque and engine speed increase. Similarly, if the mode is changed from Normal or
Dynamic to Winter the driver will notice a reduction in torque and engine speed.
NOTE: The change in torque and engine speed can take approximately 30 seconds and care must be taken not to confuse
the JaguarDrive Control system operation with an EMS fault.
Transmission Control
The TCM (transmission control module) changes the shift maps for the JaguarDrive Control mode selected. This changes the
shift points providing early or late upshifts and downshifts. For example, on slippery surfaces in Winter mode the transmission
www.JagDocs.com
will select 2nd gear for starting from a standstill on a flat surface to minimize wheel slip.
Anti-lock Braking System Control
The ABS (anti-lock brake system) module controls several vehicle functions and adjusts the operating parameters of these
functions to optimize the selected JaguarDrive Control mode. Traction control uses different slip/acceleration thresholds to
improve traction and vehicle composure. For example, the system sensitivity is increased on slippery surfaces to reduce wheel
spin.
If TracDSC is selected or DSC is switched off, then subsequently the JaguarDrive Control mode is changed, DSC is automatically
switched back on (or to TracDSC for Dynamic mode).
The stability control uses different threshold values for the selected mode, reducing the requirement for the driver to change
the DSC system mode for optimum performance in various driving scenarios.
Incorrect Mode Usage
Selection of an inappropriate mode is discouraged in the following ways:
The active mode icon is continually displayed in the instrument cluster message center
In any special mode, when the ignition has been in the off position continuously for more than 6 hours, the JaguarDrive
Control system defaults to the special modes off (DSC on).
Selection of an inappropriate mode for the conditions will not endanger the driver or immediately cause damage to the vehicle.
Continued use of an inappropriate mode may reduce the life of some components. The driver may notice a different vehicle
response, with the engine and transmission responses being different than in the special modes off.
Driver Information
The instrument cluster contains a message center, which displays vehicle information to the driver. The message center
contains the JaguarDrive Control mode icons, which display the currently selected mode. If no symbol is displayed, no special
mode is selected and the system is in special modes off.
Any required changes to the subsystems are also passed to the driver in the form of warning illumination in the instrument
cluster or appropriate messages in the message center, DSC off for example.
In Dynamic mode when the transmission is in manual mode, the gear information is displayed in amber when the appropriate
engine speed is reached for optimum sporty change point.
DIAGNOSTICS
JaguarDrive Control relies on the correct functionality of the sub-systems. If one of the sub-systems develops a fault, the
JaguarDrive Control system will not function, even though the fault is not in the JaguarDrive Control system.
The JaguarDrive Selector module and rotary control should only be investigated if there are no apparent faults in any of the
sub-systems. If a fault in a sub-system is subsequently corrected, the JaguarDrive Control system will function normally after
an ignition on and off cycle.
JaguarDrive Control Sub-System Faults
If a fault occurs in a sub-system, the driver is alerted by the illumination of a warning indicator and/or an appropriate message
for that sub-system in the instrument cluster message center. No JaguarDrive Control message will be shown when a failed
sub-system displays its own message.
When a sub-system fault is present and the driver attempts to select a different JaguarDrive Control mode or at the next
ignition on cycle, a message 'WINTER MODE FAULT' or 'DYNAMIC MODE FAULT' will appear in the message center. This
generally implies that the JaguarDrive Control system has a fault, but only because a sub-system fault is preventing its
operation. This message will be displayed once per ignition cycle, but is repeated if a further selection is made by the driver
using the JaguarDrive Control buttons or at the next ignition on cycle.
NOTE: The message 'WINTER MODE FAULT' or 'DYNAMIC MODE FAULT' can also in very rare circumstances be generated
by a fault in the JaguarDrive Control module.
It is not possible for the JaguarDrive Control module to cause any fault behavior (warning indicator illumination or message
generation) in any of the sub-systems. Illumination of a sub-system warning indicator and/or a sub-system related message
will never be associated with a JaguarDrive Control module or JaguarDrive Control system fault.
The sub-system control modules can detect a fault with the CAN (controller area network) bus signal from the transmission
selector module. If a fault in the JaguarDrive Control system is detected, the sub-system control modules will operate in the
'special modes off' setting. The sub-system control modules will record a fault code for a failure of the JaguarDrive Control CAN
signal. These faults can be retrieved using the Jaguar approved diagnostic tool and will provide useful information to indicate
investigation of the JaguarDrive Selector module or the CAN bus network.
JaguarDrive Control System or Control Module Fault
If a fault occurs in the JaguarDrive Control system, all button icon LED (light emitting diode)'s will be turned off (background
illumination will remain on) and pressing of the JaguarDrive Control buttons is ignored. The instrument cluster message center
will display a message 'WINTER MODE FAULT' or 'DYNAMIC MODE FAULT' when the fault occurs, if the fault is present and the
driver attempts to select a special mode (if the control module is able to do this) or at the next ignition on cycle.
The JaguarDrive Control buttons and control module (JaguarDrive Selector module) are an integral unit. If a fault occurs in
www.JagDocs.com
either component, the whole unit will require replacement, however, this is extremely unlikely.
CAN Bus Faults
If a CAN bus fault exists and prevents JaguarDrive Control system operation, all of the JaguarDrive Control button icon LED's
will be illuminated and rotation pressing of the JaguarDrive Control buttons is ignored.
If the instrument cluster does not receive a JaguarDrive Control system CAN bus message from the JaguarDrive Control
module, the message 'SPECIAL MODE UNAVAILABLE' will be displayed when the fault occurs and will be repeated at every
ignition on cycle.
User Error
A special mode change while DSC or ABS is active (this includes ABS cycling) may be misinterpreted as a system fault.
JAGUARDRIVE CONTROL DESCRIPTION
JAGUARDRIVE CONTROLS
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Winter mode button
2 DSC/TracDSC mode button
3 ASL (automatic speed limiter) - Reference only, not part of JaguarDrive system
4 Dynamic mode (Supercharged models only)
The system is controlled by buttons adjacent to the JaguarDrive Selector located on the floor console. The buttons allow the
selection of one of the following 3 modes:
Special modes off

Winter mode
Dynamic mode (Supercharged models only).
The instrument cluster will display the selected JaguarDrive Control mode in the message center.
The JaguarDrive Control system uses a combination of a number of vehicle sub-systems to achieve the required vehicle
characteristics for the mode selected. The following sub-systems make up the JaguarDrive Control system:
The Engine Management System (EMS)

Automatic transmission
Brake system.
The JaguarDrive Control software is stored in the JaguarDrive Selector module located below the JaguarDrive selector. The
module detects the selection made using the buttons and transmits a signal on the high speed CAN bus, which is received by
each of the sub-system control modules.
Each of the affected sub-system control modules contain software, which applies the correct operating parameters to their
controlled system for the JaguarDrive Control mode selection made.
Each sub-system control module also provides a feedback for the selected mode so that the JaguarDrive Control software can
check that all systems have changed to the correct operating parameters.
NOTE: The JaguarDrive Control system is a co-ordinating system only. It CANNOT generate a fault in one of the
participating sub-systems. All participating sub-systems should be FULLY diagnosed before assuming a fault with JaguarDrive
Control. Replacing the JaguarDrive Selector module should not be done until all other options have been exhausted.
Winter Mode
To activate winter mode, press the winter mode button briefly (not less than 300 ms) to activate or de-activate the mode.
NOTE: Winter mode cannot be active at the same time as dynamic mode (Supercharged models only).
When active the winter mode icon and message appear in the instrument cluster message center to confirm the activation.
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
Press the DSC mode button briefly (not less than 300 ms) to switch between DSC and TracDSC. The instrument cluster
message center will display either 'DSC ON' or 'TRAC DSC' depending on which selection is made. When TracDSC is selected,
the DSC warning lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated and the DSC button is illuminated.
DSC can be manually switched off by pressing the DSC mode button for more than 10 seconds. Confirmation is given by a
chime from the instrument cluster, 'DSC OFF' is displayed in the instrument cluster message center and the DSC warning lamp
in the instrument cluster is illuminated.
NOTE: DSC is operational at all times when the engine is running unless manually switched off.
Dynamic Mode (Supercharged models only)

www.JagDocs.com
To activate Dynamic mode, press the button briefly. The dynamic mode and DSC buttons are illuminated. 'Dynamic Mode
Confirmed' message is displayed in the instrument cluster message center and the DSC off warning lamp in the instrument
cluster is illuminated (due to automatic selection of TracDSC in Dynamic mode).
NOTE: Dynamic mode cannot be active at the same time as winter mode.
Once activated, TracDSC is automatically selected. In gearbox Sport mode, the driver has full control over the transmission
shift points and the TCM will not intervene to prevent engine overspeed (for example; upshifts are inhibited in gearbox sport
mode when Dynamic mode is selected). In this setting, the gear indicator in the instrument cluster will turn amber at high
rev's to indicate an appropriate manual upshift point.
www.JagDocs.com
Driveline System - General Information - Driveline System
For a detailed description of driveline operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual. REFER to:
Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft, Description and Operation),

Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02, Description and Operation),
Rear Drive Halfshafts (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Description and Operation),
Rear Drive Halfshafts (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Description and Operation),
Rear Drive Halfshafts (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Description and Operation).
CAUTION: Only serviceable items can be renewed or adjusted. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the warranty
of the component being rejected.
Certain driveline trouble symptoms are also common to the engine, transmission, wheel bearings, tires, and other parts of the
vehicle. For this reason, make sure that the cause of the trouble is in the driveline before adjusting, repairing, or installing any
new components. For additional information, refer to Workshop Manual section 100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness.
www.JagDocs.com
1. Verify the customer concern by carrying out a road test of the vehicle.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage and system integrity.
the next step.
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Identify the Condition
Gear Howl and Whine
Howling or whining of the ring gear and pinion is due to an incorrect gear pattern, gear damage or incorrect bearing preload.
Bearing Whine
Bearing whine is a high-pitched sound similar to a whistle. It is usually caused by worn/damaged pinion bearings, which are
operating at driveshaft speed. Bearing noise occurs at all driving speeds. This distinguishes it from gear whine which is speed
dependent.
As noted, pinion bearings make a high-pitched, whistling noise, usually at all speeds. If however there is only one pinion
bearing that is worn/damaged, the noise may vary in different driving phases.
A wheel bearing noise can be mistaken for a pinion bearing noise.
Chuckle
Chuckle that occurs on the coast driving phase is usually caused by excessive clearance between the differential gear hub and
the differential case bore.
Damage to a gear tooth on the coast side can cause a noise identical to a chuckle. A very small tooth nick or ridge on the edge
of a tooth can cause the noise.
www.JagDocs.com
Knock
Knock, which can occur on all driving phases, has several causes including damaged teeth or gearset.
A gear tooth damaged on the drive side is a common cause of the knock.
Clunk
Clunk is a metallic noise heard when the automatic transmission is engaged in REVERSE or DRIVE. The noise may also occur
when the throttle is applied or released. Clunk is caused by transmission calibration, backlash in the driveline or loose
suspension components and is felt or heard in the vicinity of the rear drive axle.
Bearing Rumble
Bearing rumble sounds like marbles being tumbled. This condition is usually caused by a worn/damaged wheel bearing. The
lower pitch is because the wheel bearing turns at only about one-third of the driveshaft speed. Wheel bearing noise also may
be high-pitched, similar to gear noise, but will be evident in all four driving modes.
Symptom Chart
www.JagDocs.com

Noise is at constant tone over
a narrow vehicle speed range. Rear drive axle For additional information, GO to Pinpoint
Usually heard on light drive Test A.
and coast conditions
Noise is the same on drive or
coast Road No action required for road noise
Worn or damaged driveshaft joint Install new components as required
Driveshaft center bearing
Wheel bearing
Noise is produced with the

vehicle standing and driving Engine For additional information, REFER to:
Transmission Engine - 3.0L/4.2L (303-00 Engine System -
General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Engine - 3.0L Diesel (303-00 Engine System -
General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Diagnostic Strategy (307-01A Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle - V6 3.0L Petrol,
Loud clunk in the driveline

when shifting from reverse to Transmission calibration Using the Manufacturer approved diagnostic
forward Transmission Mount system, re-configure the Transmission
Transmission Control Module (TCM) with the latest
Suspension components available calibration
Backlash in the driveline Inspect and install new transmission mounts
Engine idle speed set too high as required
Engine mount For additional transmission information,
REFER to: Diagnostic Strategy (307-01A
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V6 3.0L
Petrol, Diagnosis and Testing).
Inspect and install new suspension
components as required
Inspect and install new driveline components
as required
Check and adjust the idle speed as required
Inspect and install new engine mounts as
required
Clicking, popping, or grinding

noises Inadequate or contaminated Inspect, clean and lubricate with new grease
lubrication in the rear drive as required
halfshaft constant velocity (CV) Inspect and repair as required
joint Inspect and install new components as
Another component contacting the required
rear drive halfshaft
Wheel bearings, brakes or
suspension components
Vibration at highway speeds

Out-of-balance wheel(s) or tire(s) Balance and install new wheel(s) and tire(s)
Driveline out of as required
balance/misalignment REFER to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels
Driveshaft center bearing touching and Tires, Removal and Installation).
body mounting point For additional information,
REFER to: Driveline Angle Inspection (205-00
Driveline System - General Information,
General Procedures).
Refer to the Manufacturer approved
diagnostic system for driveshaft balancing
application
Check for correct spacer washer thickness.
Inspect and install new washers as required
Shudder, Vibration During

Acceleration Powertrain/driveline misalignment Check for misalignment. Install new
High constant velocity (CV) joint components as required. For driveshaft
operating angles caused by alignment,
incorrect ride height REFER to: Driveline Angle Inspection (205-00
Driveline System - General Information,
Check the ride height and verify the correct
spring rate. Install new components as
required
Lubricant Leak
www.JagDocs.com
Rear drive axle breather Check oil level and correct as required
Damaged seal Install new components as required
Rear drive axle filler plug
Rear drive axle rear cover joint
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : EXCESSIVE DRIVELINE NOISE
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK NOISE FROM VEHICLE ON ROAD TEST
1 Road test vehicle to determine load and speed conditions when noise occurs.
2 Assess the noise with different gears selected.
Does the noise occur in different gears at the same vehicle speed?
Yes
Install a new rear drive axle/differential assembly.
REFER to: Axle Assembly - V6 3.0L Petrol (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Removal and
Installation).
Re-test the system for normal operation.
No
Suspect the engine or transmission. For additional information, REFER to:
Engine - 3.0L/4.2L (303-00 Engine System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Engine - 3.0L Diesel (303-00 Engine System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing),
Diagnostic Strategy (307-01A Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V6 3.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Driveline System - General Information - Driveline Angle Inspection
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Alignment Tool
205-535
All vehicles

All vehicles
www.JagDocs.com

3. Remove the engine rear undershield.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Remove the rear subframe crossbrace.
All except vehicles with diesel engine
5. Remove the support bracket.

www.JagDocs.com
6. Loosen the retaining nuts.

Vehicles with diesel engine
7. Remove the support bracket.

Remove the bolts.
Detach the intermediate muffler exhaust hanger
insulators.
8. Loosen the catalytic converter to diesel particulate filter

(DPF) retaining clamps.
www.JagDocs.com
All vehicles
9. CAUTION: Make sure that the exhaust system is

supported with a suitable transmission stand.
Lower the exhaust assembly sufficiently to gain access to

the driveshaft heat shield.
Release the 6 exhaust hangers.
10. Remove the driveshaft heat shield.
www.JagDocs.com
All vehicles
11. CAUTION: Make sure that the special tool is correctly

located.
Using the special tool, align the driveshaft center bearing.

Tighten to 40 Nm.
12. Install the driveshaft heat shield.
Tighten to 10 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com

supported with a suitable transmission stand.
Attach the exhaust hangers.

14. Tighten the catalytic converter to DPF retaining clamps.

Tighten to 11 Nm.
15. Install the support bracket.

Attach the intermediate muffler exhaust hanger
insulators.
Tighten to 10 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
16. Tighten the retaining nuts.

Tighten to 45 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
17. Install the support bracket.
Tighten to 10 Nm.
All vehicles
18. Install the rear subframe cross brace.

Tighten to 62 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
19. Install the engine rear undershield.
www.JagDocs.com

Driveshaft -
Centre bearing retaining bolts 48 36 -
Transmission flexible joint retaining bolts 127 94 -
Rear drive axle CV joint retaining bolts 73 54 -
Driveshaft heat shield retaining bolts 7 - 62
www.JagDocs.com
Driveshaft - Driveshaft - Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Transmission flexible joint
2 Collapsible front driveshaft tube
3 Splined slip joint
4 Center bearing
5 Universal joint
6 Rear driveshaft tube
7 Differential flexible joint
Driveshaft - Driveshaft - Overview
Driveshaft Overview
The two-piece driveshaft, manufactured from lightweight tubular steel, transmits drive from the engine, via the transmission,
to the differential. The driveshaft aligns with the centerline of the vehicle’s body and is supported by a center bearing.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Driveshaft - Driveshaft - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
Driveshaft
The two-piece driveshaft, manufactured from lightweight tubular steel, transmits drive from the engine, via the transmission,
to the differential. The driveshaft aligns with the centerline of the vehicle’s body and is supported by a center bearing.
The driveshaft's front tube is of swaged construction, which is a crash energy management feature, designed to collapse
progressively and predictably in the event of a severe frontal impact. A low-friction splined slip-joint at the center of the
driveshaft provide the driveshaft's plunge capability.
Flexible couplings connecting the driveshaft to both the transmission and the differential counteract the angular movement of
the driveshaft caused by the driveline's acceleration and braking forces.
The center universal joint is positioned at a specified angle using shims between the center bearing and the vehicle's body.
The driveline angles have been carefully configured to balance minimum power losses with excellent vibration and wear
characteristics. The universal joint is lubricated during manufacture and sealed for life.
www.JagDocs.com
Driveshaft - Universal Joints - Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Transmission flexible joint
2 Collapsible front driveshaft tube
3 Splined slip joint
4 Center bearing
5 Universal joint
6 Rear driveshaft tube
7 Differential flexible joint
Driveshaft - Universal Joints - Overview
Refer to: Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft, Description and Operation).

www.JagDocs.com
Driveshaft - Universal Joints - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
Refer to: Driveshaft (205-01 Driveshaft, Description and Operation).
www.JagDocs.com
Driveshaft - Driveshaft
For additional information.

REFER to: Driveline System (205-00 Driveline System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Driveshaft - Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
General Procedures
1. For additional information, refer to the Jaguar Approved Diagnostic

System.
www.JagDocs.com
Driveshaft - Driveshaft TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Special Tool(s)
205-932
Remover, Driveshaft
Removal
NOTE: Select NEUTRAL before disconnecting the battery, to allow the driveshaft to be turned.
www.JagDocs.com

3. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
4.
5.
6. NOTE: Mark the position of the driveshaft on the

transmission flange.
www.JagDocs.com

coupling (or it's fixings) be loosened or removed from the
driveshaft.
8. CAUTION: Do not use the 5mm hole on the
differential case flange for the alignment mark.
NOTE: Using the 3mm hole on the differential case

flange, paint an alignment mark (as indicated) to aid
correct installation of the driveshaft to the differential case.
9. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the joint or gaiter, do

www.JagDocs.com
not allow the driveshaft to hang.
NOTE: Make sure that the special tool is correctly

installed to the recess on the driveshaft.
Special Tool(s): 205-932

10. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the joint or gaiter, do
not allow the driveshaft to hang.
NOTE: Using a suitable hammer and drift, make sure

that you only hit the corner edges of the special tool to
remove the driveshaft.
11.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger-tight at this

stage.
2. NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark on the

www.JagDocs.com
driveshaft is correctly aligned to the alignment mark on the

differential case.
Torque: 75 Nm
3. NOTES:
This step only applies if a new driveshaft is being

installed.
Using the 3mm hole on the differential case flange

and paint alignment mark on the driveshaft (as indicated).
Make sure that the alignment marks are correctly aligned.
Torque: 75 Nm
4. NOTE: Make sure that you re-align the driveshaft to

www.JagDocs.com
the transmission flange using the alignment mark.

driveshaft.
Torque: 127 Nm
6. Torque: 40 Nm
7. Torque: 5 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
8. Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Axle/Differential -
Item Specification
Differential fluid - vehicles without supercharger Castrol SAF XO (75W 90)
Differential fluid - vehicles with supercharger Castrol BOT 720 (75W 90)
Initial Specifications
Item Specification
Differential fluid capacity - vehicles without supercharger 0.9 Liters
Differential fluid capacity - vehicles with supercharger 1.3 Liters
Service Specifications
Item Specification
Differential fluid capacity - vehicles without supercharger 0.85 Liters
Differential fluid capacity - vehicles with supercharger 1.25 Liters
Differential case front retaining bolt 90 66 -
Differential case rear retaining bolts 192 142 -
Differential filler plug 27 20 -
Differential drain plug 27 20 -
Halfshaft constant velocity joint nut 300 221 -
Driveshaft retaining bolts 73 54 -
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential - Component
Location
OPEN DIFFERENTIAL - 5.0L NATURALLY ASPIRATED, 4.2L V8 (NAS ONLY), 3.0L V6 PETROL AND 3.0L V6 DIESEL VEHICLES FROM
2010MY
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Open differential
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential - Overview
OVERVIEW
The differential has two functions:
to convert the 'angle of drive' through 90° and distribute drive, via the rear drive halfshafts, to the rear wheels.
to compensate for differences in the rotational speeds of the vehicle's rear wheels during cornering.
Two types of differential are installed:
an open differential on 5.0L V8 normally aspirated, 4.2L V8 naturally aspirated, 3.0L V6 petrol and 3.0L V6 diesel
vehicles
an electronic differential on 5.0L V8 SC (supercharger) vehicles.
Both types of differential are attached to the rear subframe at four mounting points. Each mounting point incorporates a rubber
bush to reduce NVH (noise, vibration and harshness). The bushes in the forward mounting points are installed in the
differential. The bushes in the rear mounting points are installed in the rear subframe.
The open differentials are almost identical in their design and differ only in the final drive ratio and a heavier input flange
which is fitted to 3.0L V6 diesel vehicles. The final drive ratios for the open and the electronic differentials are as follows:
5.0L V8, 4.2L V8 naturally aspirated, 5.0L V8 SC and 3.0L V6 petrol engines - 3.31:1
3.0L V6 diesel engines - 2.73:1.
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential - System
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus
Control Diagram - 5.0L Supercharger Vehicles Only

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (175 A)
3 AJB (auxiliary junction box)
4 Motor
5 Differential Locking Module (DLM)
6 Oil temperature sensor
7 High speed CAN from suspension control module
System Operation
OPEN DIFFERENTIAL - 5.0L NATURALLY ASPIRATED, 3.0L V6 PETROL AND 3.0L V6 DIESEL
VEHICLES FROM 2010MY
Rotational input from the drive shaft is passed via the input flange to the pinion shaft and pinion gear. The angles of the
pinion gear to the crown wheel drive gear moves the rotational direction through 90°.
The transferred rotational motion is now passed to the crown wheel drive gear, which in turn rotates the differential casing.
The cross-shaft, which is secured to the casing, also rotates at the same speed as the casing. The planet gears, which are
mounted on the shaft, also rotate with the casing. In turn, the planet gears transfer their rotational motion to the left and
right hand sun gears, rotating the drive halfshafts.
When the vehicle is moving in a forward direction, the torque applied through the differential to each sun gear is equal. In this
condition both drive halfshafts rotate at the same speed and the planet gears do not rotate.
If the vehicle is turning, the outer wheel will be forced to rotate faster than the inner wheel by having a greater distance to
travel. The differential senses the torque difference between the sun gears. The planet gears rotate on their axes to allow the
outer wheel to rotate faster than the inner one.
ELECTRONIC DIFFERENTIAL - 5.0L SUPERCHARGER VEHICLES FROM 2010MY

The multi-plate clutch prevents excessive differential slip and therefore maximizes the traction performance of the vehicle. This
is fundamentally different from 'braked' traction control systems, which can only counteract differential slip when it occurs.
www.JagDocs.com
A certain amount of differential slip is required to allow the vehicle to turn corners and to remain stable under control of the
ABS (anti-lock brake system). The system is completely automatic and does not require any special driver input.
The multi-plate clutch actively controls the torque flow through the differential and optimizes the torque distribution in the
driveline. The clutch biases the torque from the differential to the wheel with the higher grip and prevents the wheel with the
lower grip from spinning.
OPEN DIFFERENTIAL - 5.0L NATURALLY ASPIRATED, 3.0L V6 PETROL AND 3.0L V6 DIESEL
VEHICLES FROM 2010MY
NOTE: Petrol differential shown - diesel similar

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Cover
2 LH (left-hand) rear drive halfshaft oil seal
3 Filler/Level plug
4 Input flange
5 Front mounting points with insulator assemblies
6 Carrier
7 Rear mounting points
8 Breather
9 RH (right-hand) rear drive halfshaft oil seal
10 Magnetic drain plug
The open differential is a conventional design using a hypoid gear layout. The final drive ratio is 3.31:1 for petrol engine
vehicles and 2.73:1 for diesel engine vehicles.
The cast iron casing comprises two parts; a cover and a carrier. The carrier provides locations for all the internal components.
The cover is sealed to the carrier with Loctite RTV sealant and secured with nine bolts. The cover and carrier have cast fins,
which assist rigidity and cooling. A breather cap is fitted to the top of the carrier.
www.JagDocs.com
The diesel open differential differs from the petrol variants in respect to the final drive ratio and the input flange which
connects the propshaft to the differential. The diesel input flange is larger to address driveline NVH (noise, vibration and
harshness) boom inherent with the diesel engine.
Exploded View of Open Differential

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Bolt (9 off)
2 Oil seal
3 Cover
4 Shim
5 Bearing assembly
6 Bolt (10 off)
7 Differential case
8 Bearing assembly
9 Oil seal
10 Oil slinger inner
11 Oil slinger outer
12 Input flange
13 Pinion nut
14 Collapsible spacer
15 Shim
16 Bearing assembly
17 Pinion shaft
18 LH mounting insulator inner
19 LH mounting insulator rubber
20 LH mounting insulator outer
21 Carrier
22 RH mounting insulator inner
23 RH mounting insulator rubber
24 RH mounting insulator outer
25 Oil seal
26 Drain plug
27 Vent
28 Breather cap
29 Shim
30 Bearing assembly
31 Drive gear
www.JagDocs.com
32 Shaft
33 Planet gear (2 off)
34 Thrust washer (2 off)
35 Sun gear (2 off)
36 Spacer (2 off)
37 Roll pin
38 Fill/Level plug
The open differential contains a quantity of oil for splash lubrication of the internal components. A magnetic drain plug is
installed in the bottom of the carrier and a filler/level plug is installed in the cover.
The open differential comprises a pinion shaft and hypoid pinion gear, and a crown wheel drive gear attached to a differential
carrier. The differential carrier houses two planet gears and two sun gears
The pinion shaft has an externally splined outer end, which accepts and locates the input flange, which is retained by the
pinion nut. The input flange has six threaded holes for the driveshaft attachment bolts. An oil seal is pressed into the carrier
to seal the input flange to the carrier. The pinion shaft has a hypoid gear at its inner end, which mates with the crown wheel
drive gear.
The crown wheel drive gear is located on the differential carrier and secured with ten bolts. The differential carrier is mounted
on taper roller bearings located in machined bores in the carrier and the cover. Shims are installed behind the bearing cups to
apply the correct bearing preload and hypoid backlash.
The differential carrier has a through hole, which provides location for a cross shaft. The planet gears are installed on the cross
shaft, with thrust washers between the planet gears and the differential carrier. A roll pin locks the cross shaft to the
differential carrier.
The sun gears are located in pockets in the differential carrier and mesh with the planet gears. Belville washers are fitted
between the sun gears and the differential carrier and set the correct mesh contact between the planet gears and the sun
gears. Each sun gear has a machined bore with internal splines and a machined groove. The splines transfer drive to the rear
drive halfshafts. The groove provides positive location for the snap ring fitted to the inboard end of the rear drive halfshafts.
Oil seals are installed in the carrier and the cover to seal the rear drive halfshafts.
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Rear Drive Axle and Differential
For a detailed description of the Rear Drive Axle and Differential, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: Rear Drive Axle and Differential (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Description and Operation).
Fixings that secure Rear Differential Control Module (Heat path Fuses/Relays
for Module Heatsink) Damaged, Loose or Corroded Connector(s)
Damage to Wiring Loom/Incorrect Location,
Stretched or Taught
the next step.
www.JagDocs.com
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check the system for any logged Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the
DTC index.
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00. REFER to: Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Rear Differential Control Module (RDCM) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Check
NOTE: Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential information is always correct.
1. Refer to: Specifications - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Specifications).
3.
Clean the area around the lubricant filler plug.
Position container to collect fluid loss.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
Clean the area around the drain plug.
Remove the fluid drain plug.
Drain the differential lubricant.
Adjustment
1.
Clean the drain plug.
Torque: 27 Nm
2. CAUTIONS:
www.JagDocs.com
Do not fill the differential with lubricant up to the

filler plug. The filler plug is only used to fill the differential
with lubricant, and not to act as a level indicator.
Make sure the correct specification and quanity of oil

is used.
Fill the differential with the correct amount of

lubricant.
www.JagDocs.com
3.
Clean the filler plug.
Torque: 27 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Case TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
205-932
Remover, Driveshaft
Removal
All vehicles


www.JagDocs.com
2. Refer to: Rear Halfshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00C Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8

S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4. CAUTIONS:
Do not use the 5mm hole on the differential case

flange for the alignment mark.
Make sure that the driveshaft is supported with

suitable retaining straps.
NOTE: Using the 3mm hole on the differential case

flange, paint an alignment mark (as indicated) to aid
correct installation of the driveshaft to the differential case.
5. NOTES:
On vehicles with diesel engine, note the illustrated

orientation of the special tool.
Make sure that the special tool is correctly installed to

the recess on the driveshaft.

www.JagDocs.com
6. CAUTION: Care must be taken not to damage the

surrounding components when using the special tool.
NOTE: Using a suitable hammer and drift, make sure

that you only hit the corner edges of the special tool to
remove the driveshaft.

7.
All vehicles
8. Support the rear differential casing.
9.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
All vehicles
1. Torque:
M14 190 Nm
M12 90 Nm
2.
All vehicles
3. NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark on the driveshaft

is correctly aligned to the alignment mark on the
differential case.
Torque: 75 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4. NOTES:
This step only applies if a new driveshaft is being

installed.
Using the 3mm hole on the differential case flange

and paint alignment mark on the driveshaft (as indicated).
Make sure that the alignment marks are correctly aligned.
Torque: 75 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
5. Refer to: Exhaust System (309-00C Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
6. Refer to: Rear Halfshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
7. Check and top-up the differential case.
Torque: 30 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Differential Front Bushing TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8
Special Tool(s)
204-274
Bush install and removal tool
204-275
204-335
www.JagDocs.com
204-601
Bush install tool
303-1121
Installer, Crankshaft Seal
Removal

2. Refer to: Differential Case - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol (205-02 Rear Drive Axle/Differential, Removal and
Installation).
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the new bushes are installed in the correct
orientation.
Special Tool(s): 204-275, 204-601, 303-1121, 204-274

www.JagDocs.com
2. Refer to: Differential Case - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
Installation).
Rear Drive Axle/Differential - Drive Pinion Seal
Special Tool(s)
204-264
Pinion Seal Replacer
204-265
Remover/Installer, Drive Pinion Seal
204-266
Adapter for 204-265
www.JagDocs.com
204-267
Adapter for 204-265
204-269
205-053
Retainer, Drive Flange
205-053-03
Adapter, Drive Pinion Flange
Removal

2. Refer to: Driveshaft - TD4 2.2L Diesel (205-01, Removal and

Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - V6 3.0L Petrol (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-01
Driveshaft, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
www.JagDocs.com
Installation).
3. NOTE: Measure for installation.
Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the pinion shaft.
www.JagDocs.com
4. NOTE: Accurately scribe a line to mark the drive pinion
shaft to the drive pinion nut and pinion flange.
5. Special Tool(s): 205-053, 205-053-03

www.JagDocs.com
6. Special Tool(s): 204-266, 204-265, 204-269

7. NOTE: Be prepared to collect escaping fluid.
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
2.
3. Special Tool(s): 204-267, 204-266, 204-265
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the drive pinion flange has no end float and
is free to rotate.
Make sure that the drive pinion flange scribed mark is

aligned and is never tightend short of the scribed mark on
the drive pinion shaft and is no more than a maximum of 5
www.JagDocs.com
degrees past the scribed mark on the drive pinion shaft.
NOTES:
Using the special tool, counter hold the drive pinion

flange.
Measure the depth of the pinion nut on the pinion

shaft to previous noted depth.
Special Tool(s): 205-053, 205-053-03
Torque: 34 Nm
6. Refer to: Driveshaft - TD4 2.2L Diesel (205-01, Removal and

Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - V6 3.0L Petrol (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-01
Driveshaft, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation).
Rear Drive Halfshafts -
Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Item Specification
Constant velocity (CV) grease Optimal LN 584 LO
Fill Capacities
Description Grams
Grease for inner CV joint - all vehicles 140
Grease for outer CV joint - all vehicles 125
Torque Specifcations
NOTE: Make sure that a new nut is installed.
Item Nm lb-ft lb-in

Halfshaft outer constant velocity joint retaining nut 300 221 -
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts - Component Location
Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Outer constant velocity joint
2 Outer constant velocity joint gaiter
3 Left hand halfshaft
4 Inner constant velocity joint gaiter
5 Inner constant velocity joint
6 Right hand halfshaft
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts - Overview
Overview
The CV (constant velocity) joint at each end of the halfshafts meets the angle change requirements due to suspension
deflection. The plunge capability of the CV joint accommodates the length change.
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts - System Operation and
System Operation
Rear Drive Halfshafts
The solid-steel halfshafts are of unequal length, with each halfshaft comprising inner and outer CV (constant velocity) joints.
The CV joints are the 'ball and socket' type packed with grease and protected by gaiters.
The outer CV joint is an interference fit into the wheel hub and secured by a locking nut. The inner CV joint is a slide fit and is
retained in the differential with a spring clip.
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Drive Halfshafts

REFER to: Driveline System (205-00 Driveline System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Rear Halfshaft TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
204-269
www.JagDocs.com
205-491
Hub puller
205-491-1
Adapter nuts
308-005
Remover, Axle oil seal
308-621-1
Installer, Halfshaft Oil Seal
308-621-2
Installer/Guide, Halfshaft Oil Seal
Removal

2. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire.
Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04 Wheels and Tires, Removal and
Installation).
3. With assistance, remove the halfshaft retaining nut, and

www.JagDocs.com
retain it for the install procedure.
4. Release the brake caliper.
www.JagDocs.com
5. Remove the rear brake disc.
6. Remove the wheel speed sensor.

www.JagDocs.com
7. Disconnect the toe link.

Release the lower arm.
8.
CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to detach the

halfshaft from the hub assembly, failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the halfshaft.
Using the special tools, release the halfshaft from the drive
flange.
Special Tool(s): 204-269, 205-491-1, 205-491

www.JagDocs.com
9.
NOTE: Use an additional wrench to prevent the

Remove the wheel knuckle.
10. Release the halfshaft from the differential.
11.
12. Remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal.
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 308-005
13. Remove and discard the circlip.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. Clean the components mating faces.

2. Using the special tool, install a new halfshaft oil seal.
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 308-621-1, 308-621-2
3. CAUTION: Use Loctite WSK-M2G349-A4 or equivalent,

meeting the Jaguar specification.
Install a new circlip.

www.JagDocs.com
4. CAUTION: The halfshaft oil seal protector must be left

in place, until the halfshaft is fully installed.
Install the halfshaft oil seal protector.

5. CAUTIONS:
Do not install the rear halfshaft fully at this stage.
Only install the rear halfshaft until the halfshaft

splines have past the halfshaft oil seal.
6. Remove and discard the halfshaft oil seal plutector.
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the rear halfshaft circlip is

installed correctly by pulling the halfshaft gently to make
sure it is engaged.
www.JagDocs.com

wheels.
Torque: 90 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
9. CAUTION: Install the halfshaft nut finger tight.
NOTE: Do not fully tighten the locking nut at this

stage.

wheels.
Torque: 150 Nm
www.JagDocs.com

wheels.
Torque: 55 Nm
12. Torque: 6 Nm
13. Install the brake disc.

www.JagDocs.com
14. Torque: 103 Nm

15. CAUTION: Do not use air tools to install the nut.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the component.
Torque: 300 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
17. Install the LH rear wheel and tire.
Installation).
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal

2. Remove the rear halfshaft.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Halfshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
/V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts,
3. CAUTION: Use suitable protective covers to protect the halfshaft.
Using a suitable clamp, secure the rear halfshaft.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the inner constant velocity (CV)

joint is not separated from the halfshaft.
www.JagDocs.com
Remove and discard the inner CV joint boot retaining clip.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the CV joint ball bearings do not

drop out of the CV joint.
Using a suitable tool, remove the inner CV joint.

6. Remove the inner CV joint boot.
Remove and discard the retaining clip.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the protective sleeve is

correctly installed, prior to installing the CV joint boot.
www.JagDocs.com
2. NOTE: Install a new retaining clip.
www.JagDocs.com
3. CAUTIONS:
Only use lubricants meeting the Jaguar specification.
Make sure the CV joint ball bearings do not drop out

of the CV joint.
NOTE: Clean the constant velocity (CV) joint,

removing as much of the old grease as possible.
Install the inner CV joint.

Fill the CV joint with 40 grams of grease.
Fill the CV joint boot with 100 grams of grease.
4. CAUTIONS:
www.JagDocs.com
Make sure the CV joint is not separated from the

halfshaft.
Make sure enough air is present in the CV boot.
Install a new retaining clip.
5. Install a new retaining clip.
6. Remove the rear halfshaft from the clamp.

7. Install the rear halfshaft.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Halfshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel
/V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts,
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Drive Halfshafts - Outer Constant Velocity (CV) Joint Boot
Removal

2.
3. For additional information, refer to: Inner Constant Velocity (CV) Joint
Boot (205-05 Rear Drive Halfshafts, Removal and Installation).
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
6. CAUTION: Make sure the CV joint ball bearings do not drop out of
the CV joint.
NOTE: Clean the constant velocity (CV) joint, removing as much of

the old grease as possible.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Only use lubricants meeting the Jaguar

specification.
NOTE: Make sure that the protective sleeve is

correctly installed, prior to installing the CV joint boot.
Fill the CV joint with 50 grams of grease.

Fill the CV joint boot with 85 grams of grease.
www.JagDocs.com
2. CAUTION: Make sure enough air is present in the CV

boot.
NOTE: Install new retaining clips.

Brake System - General Information -
CAUTION: Do not use brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 on 2006my vehicles onwards. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: Brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 has now been superseded by Shell ESL Super Dot 4 which is the Jaguar recommended
brake fluid. Shell ESL Super Dot 4 can be used on all model years.
Item Specification
Brake fluid Shell ESL Dot 4
Brake Lining and Disc Specifications
Item Specification
Front brake pad material nominal thickness 13 mm (0.51 in)
Front brake pad material minimum thickness 2 mm (0.08 in)
Rear brake pad material nominal thickness 10.8 mm (0.43 in)
Rear brake pad material minimum thickness 2 mm (0.08 in)
Front brake disc diameter - 3.0L petrol, 3.0L diesel and 4.2L 326 mm (12.8 in)
Front brake disc diameter - 3.0L diesel and 5.0L naturally aspirated 355 mm (14.0 in)
Front brake disc diameter - 5.0L supercharged 380 mm (15.0 in)
New front brake disc nominal thickness - 3.0L petrol 3.0L diesel and 4.2L 30 mm (1.18 in)
New front brake disc nominal thickness - 3.0L diesel and 5.0L naturally aspirated 32 mm (1.26 in)
New front brake disc nominal thickness - 5.0L supercharged 36 mm (1.42 in)
Worn front brake disc minimum thickness - 3.0L petrol and 4.2L 28 mm (1.14 in)
Worn front brake disc minimum thickness - 3.0L diesel and 5.0L naturally aspirated 30 mm (1.18 in)
www.JagDocs.com
Worn front brake disc minimum thickness - 5.0L supercharged 34 mm (1.34 in)
Rear brake disc diameter - all vehicles except 5.0L supercharged 326 mm (12.8 in)
Rear brake disc diameter - 5.0L supercharged 376 mm (14.8 in)
New rear brake disc nominal thickness - all vehicles except 5.0L supercharged 20 mm (0.79 in)
New rear brake disc nominal thickness - 5.0L supercharged 26 mm (1.02 in)
Worn rear brake disc minimum thickness - all vehicles except 5.0L supercharged 18 mm (0.72 in)
Worn rear brake disc minimum thickness - 5.0L supercharged 24 mm (0.94 in)
Maximum front brake disc runout (installed) 0.075 mm ( 0.003 in)
Maximum rear brake disc runout (installed) 0.09 mm ( 0.004 in)
Maximum front hub face runout (installed) 0.015 mm ( 0.0006 in)
Maximum rear hub face runout (installed) 0.025 mm ( 0.0009 in)
Front brake caliper piston diameter - all vehicles except 5.0L supercharged 60 mm (2.36 in)
Front brake sliding caliper double piston diameter - 5.0L supercharged 42 mm (1.66 in)
Rear brake caliper piston diameter 45 mm (1.77 in)
Front brake caliper bleed screw - 3.0L petrol and 4.2L 8 Nm (6 lb-ft)
Front brake caliper bleed screw - 3.0L diesel and 5.0L 14 Nm (10 lb-ft)
Rear brake caliper bleed screw 14 Nm (10 lb-ft)
www.JagDocs.com
Brake System - General Information - Brake System
For a detailed description of the brake system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the workshop
manual. REFER to:
Front Disc Brake (206-03, Description and Operation),

Rear Disc Brake (206-04, Description and Operation),
Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Description and Operation),
Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Description and Operation),
Brake Booster (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Description and Operation),
Brake Booster (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Description and Operation),
Brake Booster (206-07, Description and Operation).

Visually examine the front and rear wheel and tire assemblies for damage such as uneven wear patterns, tread worn out or
sidewall damage. Verify the tires are the same size, type and, where possible, same manufacturer. Replace the damaged
wheel or excessively worn tire.
www.JagDocs.com
Wheels and tires must be cleared of any foreign matter and tire pressures adjusted to the correct specification.
If the tires exhibit uneven wear or feathering, the cause must be corrected. Check the steering and suspension components for
damage or wear and, if necessary, check and adjust front wheel alignment. REFER to: (204-00 Suspension System - General
Information)
Specifications (Specifications),
Front Toe Adjustment (General Procedures).
Visual Inspection
Brake master cylinder Parking brake actuator

Brake caliper piston(s) Parking brake module
Brake discs Parking brake switch
Wheel bearings Damaged or corroded wiring harness
Brake pads Brake master cylinder fluid level switch
Power brake booster
Brake pedal linkage
Brake booster vacuum hose
Tires
Debris
Road Test
Carry out a road test to compare actual vehicle braking performance with the performance standards expected by the driver.
The ability of the test driver to make valid comparisons and detect performance deficiencies will depend on experience.
The driver should have a thorough knowledge of brake system operation and accepted general performance guidelines to make
good comparisons and detect performance concerns.
An experienced brake technician will always establish a route that will be used for all brake diagnosis road tests. The roads
selected will be reasonably smooth and level. Gravel or bumpy roads are not suitable because the surface does not allow the
tires to grip the road equally. Crowned roads should be avoided because of the large amount of weight shifted to the low set
of wheels on this type of road. Once the route is established and consistently used, the road surface variable can be
eliminated from the test results.
Before a road test, obtain a complete description of the customer concerns or suspected condition. From the description, the
technician's experience will allow the technician to match possible causes with symptoms. Certain components will be tagged
as possible suspects while others will be eliminated by the evidence. More importantly, the customer description can reveal
unsafe conditions which should be checked or corrected before the road test. The description will also help form the basic
approach to the road test by narrowing the concern to specific components, vehicle speed or conditions.
Begin the road test with a general brake performance check. Keeping the description of the concern in mind, test the brakes at
different vehicle speeds using both light and heavy pedal pressure. To determine if the concern is in the front or rear braking
system, use the brake pedal and then use the parking brake control. If the condition (pull, vibration, pulsation) occurs only
with the parking brake, the concern is in the rear brake system.
If the concern becomes evident during this check, verify it fits the description given before the road test. If the concern is not
evident, attempt to duplicate the condition using the information from the description.
If a concern exists, use the Symptom Chart in order to isolate it to a specific sub-system and condition description. From this
description, a list of possible sources can be used to further narrow the cause to a specific component or condition.
Symptom Chart

Brakes noisy GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Brake pads
Brake discs
Vibration when brakes are GO to Pinpoint Test B.

applied Wheels/tires out of balance
Wheel hub nuts loose
Brake caliper mounting bolts loose
Brake pads
Foreign material/scratches/corrosion
on brake disc contact surfaces
Excessive brake disc thickness
variation
Excessive brake disc runout
Wheel bearing wear or failure
Suspension bushing wear or failure
Steering bushing wear or failure
The brakes pull or drift GO to Pinpoint Test C.

Tire pressures/wear
Brake calipers
Brake pads
www.JagDocs.com
Brake discs
Wheel alignment adjustment
Wheel bearing
Suspension bushings and ball joints
The pedal feels spongy GO to Pinpoint Test D.

Air in brake hydraulic system
Leak in hydraulic system
Brake booster/master cylinder
Brake pads
The pedal goes down fast GO to Pinpoint Test E.

Air in brake hydraulic system
Leak in hydraulic system
Brake pads
The pedal goes down GO to Pinpoint Test F.

slowly Air in brake hydraulic system
Excessive brake pedal GO to Pinpoint Test G.

effort required Brake pads
Brake booster
Brake lockup during light GO to Pinpoint Test H.

brake pedal force Brake pads
Brake calipers
Brakes drag GO to Pinpoint Test I.

Parking brake control
applied/malfunction
Seized parking brake cables
Seized brake caliper slide pins
Seized brake caliper
Brake booster
Pedal gear
Excessive/Erratic brake GO to Pinpoint Test J.

pedal travel Hydraulic system
Brake pads Brake
discs
Hub and bearing assembly
The red brake warning Fill the system to specification. Check for leaks.
indicator is always on Fluid level Install a new brake master cylinder fluid reservoir as
Brake master cylinder fluid level required.
sensor REFER to: Brake Fluid Reservoir (206-06 Hydraulic
Parking brake control Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
Electrical circuit For parking brake control and circuit tests.
REFER to: Parking Brake (206-05, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Slow or incomplete brake GO to Pinpoint Test K.
pedal return Brake pedal binding
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : BRAKES NOISY
CONDITIONS
A1: INSPECT BRAKE PADS
1 Inspect the condition of the front and rear brake pads. Check for damage to any anti-squeal shims.
Are the brake pads OK?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Clean/install new front and rear brake pads as required. REFER to:
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation),
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol,
Brake Pads (206-04A Rear Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-04, Removal and Installation).
Re-test vehicle for brake noise.
A2: INSPECT BRAKE DISCS
www.JagDocs.com
1 Inspect the brake discs for excessive corrosion, wear or disc thickness variation.
Does excessive corrosion, wear or disc thickness variation exist?
Yes
Install new front and rear brake discs and brake pads as required. REFER to:
Installation),
Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-04, Removal and Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol,
Brake Disc (206-04A Rear Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-04, Removal and Installation).
Re-test vehicle for brake noise.
No
No action required, vehicle is OK.
PINPOINT TEST B : VIBRATION WHEN BRAKES ARE APPLIED
CONDITIONS
B1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle between 40-80 km/h (25-50 mph) without applying brakes.
Is the vibration present?
Yes
For noise vibration and harshness tests.
REFER to: Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) (100-04 Noise, Vibration and Harshness, Diagnosis and
Testing).
No
GO to B2.
B2: CHECK FOR BRAKE VIBRATION
1 Road test the vehicle between 40-80 km/h (25-50 mph) with light and medium application on the brake
pedal.
Is a vibration present?
Yes
Check the brake caliper mounting bolts and wheel hub nuts and tighten to specification as required. Check
the balance of all road wheels and tires and repair as required. Check the brake discs for excessive wear,
runout, thickness variation or cracks. Install new brake discs and brake pads as required. GO to B3.
No
B3: IS VIBRATION STILL PRESENT UNDER BRAKE APPLICATION?
1 Road test the vehicle between 40-80 km/h (25-50 mph) with light and medium application on the brake
pedal.
Is a vibration present?
Yes
Check for wear or failure of steering gear bushings. Check for wear or failure of steering gear ball joints.
Check for wear or failure of front wheel bearings, suspension bushings and ball joints. Check for wear or
failure of rear wheel bearings, suspension bushings and ball joints. Refer to relevant section in workshop
manual and install new components as required.
No
PINPOINT TEST C : THE BRAKES PULL OR DRIFT
CONDITIONS
C1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brake pedal.
Does the vehicle pull or drift?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
C2: INSPECT TIRE CONDITION/PRESSURE
1 Check for excessive tire wear or incorrect pressures.
Are the tires at the correct pressure and in good condition?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
Adjust the tire pressures or install new tires if excessively worn. Re-test the system for normal
operation.
C3: CHECK CALIPERS
1 Check the disc brake caliper pistons and pins for binding, leaking or sticking.
www.JagDocs.com
Do the disc brake caliper pistons and pins bind, leak or stick?
Yes
Rectify sticking pins and install new brake calipers as required. REFER to:
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation),
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol,
Brake Caliper (206-04A Rear Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-04, Removal and Installation).
No
GO to C4.
C4: INSPECT BRAKE DISCS
1 Check the brake discs for excessive damage, thickness variation or runout.
REFER to: Brake Disc Runout Check (206-00 Brake System - General Information, General Procedures).
Does excessive damage or runout exist?
Yes
Install new brake discs and brake pads as required. Re-test the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C5.
C5: INSPECT THE FRONT HUB AND WHEEL BEARING ASSEMBLY
1 Check the front hub and wheel bearing assembly.
Are the wheel bearings OK?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
Install new wheel bearings as required.
REFER to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V6 3.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
C6: CHECK SUSPENSION BUSHINGS AND BALL JOINTS.
1 Check all suspension bushings and ball joints.
Are the suspension bushings and ball joints OK?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
Install new front suspension bushings and ball joints as required. Install new rear suspension bushings
and ball joints as required. Refer to the relevant section in the workshop manual.
C7: CHECK VEHICLE ALIGNMENT
1 Check the vehicle alignment. REFER to:
Front Subframe - 3.0L Diesel (502-00, Removal and Installation),
Front Subframe - V6 3.0L Petrol (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and
Installation),
Front Subframe - 4.2L (502-00, Removal and Installation).
Is the alignment within specification?
Yes
No action is required, vehicle is OK.
No
Adjust the alignment as required. REFER to:
Front Subframe - 3.0L Diesel (502-00, Removal and Installation),
Front Subframe - V6 3.0L Petrol (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and
Installation),
Front Subframe - 4.2L (502-00, Removal and Installation).
PINPOINT TEST D : THE PEDAL FEELS SPONGY
CONDITIONS
D1: CHECK FOR SPONGY PEDAL (ENGINE OFF)
1 Check for a firm brake pedal.
Is the brake pedal effort and brake pedal travel normal?
Yes
No action is required, vehicle is OK.
No
GO to D2.
D2: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE (ENGINE OFF)
1 Pump the brake pedal 10 times and hold on the final application.
Does the brake pedal feel firm on final application?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
Bleed the brake system.
REFER to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00 Brake System - General Information, General Procedures).
D3: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE (ENGINE ON)
www.JagDocs.com
1 With engine running at idle speed.

2 Apply the brake pedal lightly three or four times.
3 Wait 15 seconds for the vacuum to recover.
4 Push down on the brake pedal until it stops moving downward or an increased resistance to the brake
pedal travel occurs.
5 Hold the brake pedal in the applied position while increasing the engine speed to 2000 revs/min.
6 Release the accelerator pedal.
Does the brake pedal move downward as the engine speed returns to idle?
Yes
GO to D4.
No
Check the vacuum to brake booster.
D4: CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
1 Check the brake master cylinder reservoir fluid level.
Is the fluid level OK?
Yes
No
Check for leaking brake system and rectify as required. Add fluid and bleed the brake system.
PINPOINT TEST E : THE PEDAL GOES DOWN FAST
CONDITIONS
E1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brake pedal.
Yes
No
GO to E2.
E2: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL-PRESSURIZE SYSTEM
1 Pump the brake pedal rapidly (five times).
Does the brake pedal travel build up and then hold?
Yes
No
GO to E3.
E3: CHECK FOR BRAKE SYSTEM LEAKS
www.JagDocs.com
1 Check for external brake system leaks. For additional information, refer to brake master cylinder
component test in this section.
Is there a leak present?
Yes
Repair as necessary, add fluid and bleed brake system.
No
No action required, system is OK.
PINPOINT TEST F : THE PEDAL GOES DOWN SLOWLY
CONDITIONS
F1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE - CHECK BRAKE PEDAL OPERATION
1 Check if the condition occurs during actual stopping application by applying the brake pedal while the
vehicle is moving.
Does the condition occur when the vehicle is moving?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
GO to F3.
F2: CHECK FOR BRAKE SYSTEM LEAKS
1 Check for external brake system leaks. For additional information, refer to brake master cylinder
component test in this section.
Are there any external brake system leaks?
Yes
Rectify as necessary. Add fluid and bleed the brake system.
No
www.JagDocs.com
GO to F3.
F3: CARRY OUT A BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER BYPASS TEST
1 Test for brake master cylinder bypass condition. Refer to Brake master cylinder component test in this
section.
Has a concern been identified?
Yes
Install a new brake master cylinder, add fluid and bleed the brake system.
No
No action required, system is OK.
PINPOINT TEST G : EXCESSIVE BRAKE PEDAL EFFORT
CONDITIONS
G1: CHECK BRAKE PADS
1 Check the brake pads for wear, contamination, correct installation, damage and type.
Yes
Correctly install or install new brake pads as required. REFER to:
Installation),
No
GO to G2.
G2: CHECK VACUUM
1 Disconnect the vacuum hose from the brake booster.
2 Connect a vacuum/pressure tester to the vacuum hose.
3 Run the engine at normal operating temperature.
4 Record the vacuum reading.
Is the reading 40.5 kPa (12 in-Hg) or greater?
Yes
GO to G3.
No
Locate and rectify the source of low vacuum. Re-test the system for normal operation.
G3: INSPECT SYSTEM
1 Switch the engine off.
2 Reconnect the vacuum hose.
3Inspect the brake booster, rubber grommet, and all vacuum plumbing for cracks, holes, damaged
connections, or missing clamps.
4 Pump the brake pedal several times to exhaust the vacuum. Push down on the brake pedal and hold.
Does the brake pedal move down when the engine is started?
Yes
Vacuum system is OK.
No
GO to G4.
G4: CHECK POWER BRAKE BOOSTER VALVE
1 Check the brake booster valve. For additional information, refer to Brake Booster component test in this
section.
Is the power brake booster valve OK?
Yes
Check the brake booster. For additional information, refer to Brake Booster component test in this
section. Install a new brake booster as required. REFER to:
Brake Booster (206-07 Power Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation),
Brake Booster - RHD (206-07, Removal and Installation).
No
Install a new brake booster valve. Re-test the system for normal operation.
PINPOINT TEST H : BRAKE LOCKUP DURING LIGHT BRAKE PEDAL FORCE
CONDITIONS
H1: TEST BRAKE LOCKUP
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brake pedal lightly.
Do the brakes lockup?
Yes
GO to H2.
www.JagDocs.com
No
H2: INSPECT BRAKE PADS
1 Inspect brake pads for contamination, correct installation, damage and type.
Yes
Correctly install or install new brake pads as required. REFER to:
Installation),
No
GO to H3.
H3: INSPECT BRAKE CALIPERS
1 Inspect brake calipers for binding, leaking or sticking.
Yes
Correctly install or install new brake calipers as required. REFER to:
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation),
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol,
Brake Caliper (206-04A Rear Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Caliper - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-04, Removal and Installation).
No
PINPOINT TEST I : BRAKES DRAG
CONDITIONS
I1: ROAD TEST VEHICLE
1 Road test the vehicle and apply the brakes.
Are the brakes functioning correctly?
Yes
No
GO to I2.
I2: CHECK BRAKE CALIPERS
1 Check the front and rear calipers pistons and pins for binding, leaking or sticking.
Do the disc brake caliper pistons and pins bind, leak or stick?
Yes
Inspect the brake calipers and parking brake cables. Install new components as required. Re-test the
system for normal operation.
No
GO to I3.
I3: CHECK BRAKE BOOSTER
1 Check the brake booster connecting rod alignment and travel.
Is the connecting rod OK?
Yes
Vehicle is OK.
No
Install a new brake booster as required. REFER to:
PINPOINT TEST J : EXCESSIVE/ERRATIC BRAKE PEDAL TRAVEL
CONDITIONS
J1: TEST ON ROUGH ROAD
1 Road test the vehicle on rough road conditions.
2 Apply the brakes slowly.
Yes
No
GO to J2.
J2: CHECK BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
www.JagDocs.com
1 Check the brake master cylinder reservoir fluid level.

Is the fluid level OK?
Yes
GO to J3.
No
Check brake master cylinder reservoir sealing points. For additional information, refer to Brake master
cylinder component test in this section. Add brake fluid and bleed the brake system.
J3: CHECK BRAKE PEDAL RESERVE
1 Run engine at idle speed.
2 Apply the brake pedal lightly three or four times.
3 Wait 15 seconds for the vacuum to replenish.
4 Push down on the brake pedal until it stops moving downward or an increased resistance to the brake
pedal travel occurs.
5 Hold the brake pedal in the applied position while increasing the engine speed to 2000 revs/min.
6 Release the accelerator pedal.
Does the brake pedal move downward as the engine speed returns to idle?
Yes
GO to J4.
No
Check the vacuum to the brake booster.
J4: CHECK THE FRONT WHEEL BEARING ASSEMBLY
1 Check the front wheel bearing assembly.
Are the front wheel bearings loose/damaged?
Yes
Tighten to specification or install a new front wheel bearing as required.
REFER to: Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V6 3.0L Petrol (204-01 Front Suspension, Removal and
Installation).
No
Check the front brake discs for thickness variances.
PINPOINT TEST K : SLOW OR INCOMPLETE BRAKE PEDAL RETURN
CONDITIONS
K1: CHECK FOR BRAKE PEDAL RETURN
1 Run the engine at idle while making several brake applications.
2 Pull the brake pedal rearward with approximately 44.5 N (10lb) force.
3 Release the brake pedal and measure the distance to the toe board.
4 Make a hard brake application.
5 Release the brake pedal and measure the brake pedal to toe board distance. The brake pedal should
return to its original position.
Does the brake pedal return to its original position?
Yes
No
GO to K2.
K2: CHECK FOR BRAKE PEDAL BINDING
1 Disconnect the brake booster from the brake pedal. Check the brake pedal to ensure free operation.
Is the brake pedal operating freely?
Yes
Install a new brake booster as required. REFER to:
No
Repair or install new brake pedal. Re-test the system for normal operation.
Component Tests
Brake Booster
1. Check all hoses and connections. All unused vacuum connectors should be capped. Hoses and their connections should
be correctly secured and in good condition with no holes and no collapsed areas. Inspect the valve on the brake booster
for damage.
2. Check the hydraulic brake system for leaks or low fluid.
3. With the automatic transmission in PARK, stop the engine and apply the parking brake. Pump the brake pedal several
times to exhaust all vacuum in the system. With the engine switched off and all vacuum in the system exhausted,
apply the brake pedal and hold it down. Start the engine. If the vacuum system is operating, the brake pedal will tend
to move downward under constant foot pressure. If no motion is felt, the vacuum booster system is not functioning.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Remove the vacuum hose from the brake booster. Manifold vacuum should be available at the brake booster end of the
hose with the engine at idle speed and the automatic transmission in PARK. Make sure that all unused vacuum outlets
are correctly capped, hose connectors are correctly secured and vacuum hoses are in good condition. When it is
established that manifold vacuum is available to the brake booster, connect the vacuum hose to the brake booster and
repeat Step 3. If no downward movement of the brake pedal is felt, install a new brake booster.
5. Operate the engine for a minimum of 10 seconds at a fast idle. Stop the engine and allow the vehicle to stand for 10
minutes. Then, apply the brake pedal with approximately 89 N (20lb) of force. The pedal feel (brake application) should
be the same as that noted with the engine running. If the brake pedal feels hard (no power assist), install a new valve
and then repeat the test. If the brake pedal still feels hard, install a new brake booster. If the brake pedal movement
feels spongy, bleed the brake system.
Brake Master Cylinder
Usually, the first and strongest indicator of anything wrong in the brake system is a feeling through the brake pedal. In
diagnosing the condition of the brake master cylinder, check pedal feel as evidence of a brake concern. Check for brake warning
lamp illumination and the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder reservoir.
Normal Conditions
The following conditions are considered normal and are not indications that the brake master cylinder is in need of repair.
Modern brake systems are designed to produce a pedal effort that is not as hard as in the past. Complaints of light
pedal efforts should be compared to the pedal efforts of another vehicle of the same model and year.
The fluid level will fall with brake pad wear.
Abnormal Conditions
Changes in the brake pedal feel or brake pedal travel are indicators that something could be wrong in the brake system. The
diagnostic procedure and techniques use brake pedal feel, warning indicator illumination and low brake fluid level as indicators
to diagnosing brake system concerns. The following conditions are considered abnormal and indicate that the brake master
cylinder is in need of repair:
NOTE: Prior to carrying out any diagnosis, make sure the brake system warning indicator is functional.
Brake pedal goes down fast. This could be caused by an external or internal leak.
Brake pedal goes down slowly. This could be caused by an internal or external leak.
Brake pedal is low or feels spongy. This condition may be caused by no fluid in the brake master cylinder, reservoir cap
vent holes clogged or air in the hydraulic system.
Brake pedal effort is excessive. This may be caused by a bind or obstruction in the pedal/linkage, a faulty non-return
valve, booster or insufficient booster vacuum.
Rear brakes lock up during light pedal force. This may be caused by damaged brake pads, a partially applied parking
brake, a damaged ABS sensor or bearing failure.
Brake pedal effort erratic. This condition could be caused by the brake booster or incorrectly installed brake pads.
Brake warning indicator is on. This may be caused by low fluid level or float assembly damaged.
Non Pressure Leaks
Any reduced fluid volume in the brake master cylinder reservoir may be caused by two types of none pressure external leaks.
Type 1: An external leak may occur at the brake master cylinder reservoir cap because of incorrect positioning of the gasket
and cap. Reposition cap and gasket.
Type 2: An external leak may occur at the brake master cylinder reservoir mounting seals. Repair such a leak by installing new
seals and make sure that the brake master cylinder reservoir retaining bolt is correctly installed.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Brake System - General Information - Brake Disc Runout Check
General Procedures
Check

2. Install all the wheel nuts and tighten equally to 20 Nm (15 lb.ft).
Make sure that the brake disc is fully seated against the hub
face.
3. Install a dial test indicator gauge and holding fixture to a suitable

mounting point.
4. NOTE: If the runout is outside specification, check the hub face

runout.
Using the dial test indicator, measure the inner and outer faces of the
brake disc. For additional information, refer to: (206-00 Brake System -
General Information)
Specifications - 3.0L NA V6 - AJ27 (Specifications),
www.JagDocs.com
Specifications - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
(Specifications).
1. Position the gauge so that it contacts the disc 10 mm (0.4 in)
from the outer edge.
2. Slowly rotate the hub/disc assembly. Note the reading.
5. If a front hub runout check is required, remove the front brake disc. For
additional information, refer to:
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake -
V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03B Front Disc Brake -
TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03A Front Disc
Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03B Front Disc
Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).
6. If a rear hub runout check is required, remove the rear brake disc. For
Brake Disc (206-04A Rear Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-04B Rear Disc
and Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04B Rear Disc Brake -
Installation).
7. NOTE: The hub surface should be free from dirt and corrosion. Do not
use abrasive cloths to clean hub faces.
Using the dial test indicator, measure the hub face runout.
1. Position the gauge so that it contacts the mounting tube
between the stud and the chamfer.
2. Slowly rotate the hub and note the runout. For additional
information, refer to the specification chart.
If the front hub runout exceeds the specifications, install a new
hub, brake disc and recheck. For additional information, refer to:
(204-01 Front Suspension)
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - V6 3.0L Petrol (Removal
and Installation),
Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (Removal and Installation).
If the rear hub runout exceeds the specifications, install a new
hub, brake disc and recheck.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheel Bearing (204-02
8. If the front hub face is within specification, install a new brake disc. For
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake -
V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03B Front Disc Brake -
Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03A Front Disc
Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation),
Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03B Front Disc
and Installation).
If the rear hub face is within specification, install a new disc.

www.JagDocs.com
Brake System - General Information - Brake System Bleeding
General Procedures
CAUTIONS:
The brake fluid reservoir must remain full with new, clean brake fluid at all times during bleeding.
Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the area with water.
NOTE:
All vehicles

2. Check that the brake fluid lines are secure and that there are no signs of
a brake fluid leak. If a brake fluid leak is detected, investigate and
rectify the cause of the leak before bleeding the brakes.
www.JagDocs.com
3. Remove the brake master cylinder cover.

Carefully release the clip.
4. WARNING: Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids to enter

the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of the correct
specification from airtight containers. Do not mix brands of
brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished

surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean
the area with water.
Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap.

Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.
5.
All vehicles
6. Install the bleed tube to the right hand rear brake caliper bleed screw
and immerse the free end of the bleed tube in a bleed jar, containing a
small quantity of approved brake fluid.
Remove the bleed screw caps.
7. Loosen the bleed screw by one-half to three-quarters of a

www.JagDocs.com
turn.
8. CAUTION: The brake fluid reservoir must remain full with new, clean
brake fluid at all times during bleeding.
NOTE: If the bleed tube used, does not have a one way valve the
bleed screw will need to be closed before the brake pedal is returned to
the rest position. Then opened again and the procedure repeated for
each pedal application.
With assistance, depress the brake pedal steadily through its full stroke
and allow it to return to the rest position. Repeat the procedure until
brake fluid, clean and air-free flows into the bleed jar.
9. CAUTION: Make sure the bleed screw cap is installed after

bleeding. This will prevent corrosion to the bleed screw.
With the brake pedal fully depressed, tighten the bleed screw.
Vehicles with standard brakes: Tighten the front caliper bleed
screw to 8 Nm.
Vehicles with high performance brakes: Tighten the front caliper
bleed screw to 14 Nm.
Tighten the rear bleed screw to 14 Nm.
10. Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.

Left-hand drive vehicles
11. WARNING: Braking efficiency may be seriously

impaired if an incorrect bleed sequence is used.
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each brake

caliper, following the above sequence.
Right-hand drive vehicles
12. WARNING: Braking efficiency may be seriously

impaired if an incorrect bleed sequence is used.
Repeat the brake bleeding procedure for each brake

caliper, following the above sequence.
www.JagDocs.com
All vehicles
13. Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.
14. Apply the brakes and check for leaks.
15. Install the brake fluid reservoir cap.
16. Install the brake master cylinder cover.

Carefully secure the clip.
www.JagDocs.com
Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout Check - With
Wheel On Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
General Procedures
1. NOTES:
Some variation in the illustrations may occur, but the essential

information is always correct.
RH illustration shown, LH similar
All measurements must taken with the wheel installed.
3. Mount the DTI Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge to the bolt as shown with
tool 100-053.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Make sure the DTI is securely mounted.

5. Position the DTI probe 5 mm from the outer edge of the
disc.
Zero DTI and rotate road wheel one complete
revolution to measure disc runout.
6. Position the DTI probe in the centre of the disc.

www.JagDocs.com
7. Position the DTI probe 5 mm from the inner edge of the
disc.
8. NOTE: The disc runout limit is 0.075 mm.

www.JagDocs.com
If the disc runout exceeds the limit check the hub drive flange and
bearing runout.
Runout Check - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (204-00
9. If hub runout is within the limit replace the brake disc.
10. Install the wheel.

Tighten the road wheel nuts in sequence as shown
above to the following:
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 60 Nm.
Stage 3: 125 Nm.
11. Re-check the disc runout as detailed above.

12. Remove DTI and install the bait. 90 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
Brake System - General Information - Front Brake Disc Runout Check - With
Wheel On Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
General Procedures
1. NOTES:

RH illustration shown, LH similar
All measurements must taken with the wheel installed.
3. Mount the Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge to the bolt as shown with tool
100-053.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Make sure the DTI is securely mounted.
www.JagDocs.com
disc.

www.JagDocs.com
disc.

www.JagDocs.com
bearing runout.
Runout Check - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (204-00 Suspension

above to the following:
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 60 Nm.
Stage 3: 125 Nm.

12. Remove DTI and install the bait. 90 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
Brake System - General Information - Rear Brake Disc Runout Check - With
Wheel On
General Procedures
1. NOTES:

All measurements must be taken with the wheel installed.
Raise the rear of the vehicle.
3. Modify tool 100-053 with an M8 bolt and nut as shown.

www.JagDocs.com
4. Mount the DTI Dial Test Indicator (DTI) gauge on the tool
as shown.
5. Securely mount the DTI on the bottom calliper mounting
bolt, a spacer washer maybe required under the tool.

disc.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com

disc.
www.JagDocs.com
bearing runout.
For additional information, refer to: Rear Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Runout Check - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (204-00
to the following:
Stage 1: 4 Nm.
Stage 2: 60 Nm.
Stage 3: 125 Nm.
13. Remove DTI and install the bolt. 103 Nm.

www.JagDocs.com
Front Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -

Brake caliper anchor plate retaining bolts 115 85 -
Brake caliper retaining bolts 58 43 -
Brake hose retaining bolt 42 31 -
www.JagDocs.com
Front Disc Brake - Component Location
NOTE: LH (left-hand) installation shown, RH (right-hand) installation similar.
Standard Brakes - 5.0L Naturally Aspirated V8, Mid and High Power 3.0L TdV6 Vehicles
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Brake pad wear sensor
2 Caliper body
3 Anti-rattle spring
4 Piston
5 Piston seal
6 Piston dust cover
7 Inboard brake pad
8 Outboard brake pad
9 Retaining washer (2 off)
10 Brake disc
11 Rivet (2 off)
12 Heat shield
13 Front wheel knuckle/hub and bearing assembly
14 Caliper bolt (2 off)
15 Caliper carrier
16 Guide pin dust cover (2 off)
17 Guide pin bush (2 off)
18 Guide pin (2 off)
19 Bleed screw
20 Bleed screw dust cap
Performance Brakes - 5.0L Supercharger V8 Vehicles
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
2 Caliper body
4 Piston (2 off)
5 Piston seal (2 off)
6 Piston dust cover (2 off)
7 Inboard brake pad
10 Brake disc
11 Rivet (2 off)
12 Heat shield
13 Front wheel knuckle/hub and bearing assembly
14 Caliper bolt (2 off)
15 Caliper carrier
19 Bleed screw
www.JagDocs.com
Front Disc Brake - Overview
OVERVIEW
The standard front braking system features 355 mm (13.98 in.) diameter x 32 mm (1.26 in.) thick ventilated brake discs and
cast iron, single piston, sliding calipers.
The brake disc is manufactured from cast iron. The brake disc is retained on the wheel hub by two washers and the wheel nuts.
A brake pads wear sensors is fitted to the LH (left-hand) front brake.
Performance Brakes - 5.0L Supercharger V8 Vehicles
The performance front braking system features ventilated brake discs with dual piston sliding calipers. The discs are 380 mm
(14.96 in.) diameter x 36 mm (1.42 in.) thick.
The brake disc is manufactured from cast iron. The disc is retained on the wheel hub by two retaining washers and the wheel
nuts.
A brake pads wear sensors is fitted to the LH front brake.

www.JagDocs.com
Front Disc Brake - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (250 A)
3 Front brake pad wear sensor
4 Rear brake pad wear sensor
7 Power distribution box
System Operation
BRAKE CALIPERS
When hydraulic pressure is supplied to the caliper, the pistons extend to force the inner pad against the brake disc. The caliper
reacts and slides along two guide pins to bring the outer pad into contact with the brake disc.
BRAKE PAD WEAR SENSORS

When a brake pad incorporating a brake pad wear sensor is approximately 75% worn, the sensor wire within the pad material
is worn through and the brake pad wear sensor goes open circuit. When the instrument cluster detects the open circuit, it
illuminates the amber LED (light emitting diode) in the brake warning indicator, displays an appropriate warning in the
message center and sounds a warning chime.
Refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation).
NOTE: A new pad wear sensor lead must be fitted whenever the brake pads are changed, irrespective of the brake pad
warning sensor being triggered.
BRAKE CALIPERS
Each caliper is mounted within a fixed carrier that is secured to the front wheel knuckle with two bolts. The inboard brake pad
of the LH (left-hand) brake incorporates a wear sensor.
Each outboard brake pad is installed with a pressed steel anti-rattle spring. On SC (supercharger) vehicles, a badge with the
'R' symbol is formed on the anti-rattle spring.
www.JagDocs.com

The brake pad wear sensor is wired in series with a wear sensor on the RH (right-hand) rear brake and the instrument cluster.
If the thickness of one of the brake pads connected to a wear sensor decreases to a predetermined limit, the instrument
cluster illuminates the brake warning indicator.
Brake Caliper Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled, immediately remove the fluid and clean the area
with water.

2. Remove the left-hand front wheel and tire.
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
3.
www.JagDocs.com
NOTES:

the rest position.

www.JagDocs.com
6.
7. CAUTION: Removal of the clips is a delicate
procedure, damage will occur if any force is used.
Lever the anti-rattle spring in the center of the

spring until either side is released.
8. WARNING: If the brake caliper piston seal is damaged

www.JagDocs.com
a new brake caliper must be installed.
CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang on

the brake hose.
Release the clip.

Installation
1. WARNING: Do not use compressed air to clean brake components.

Dust from friction materials can be harmful if inhaled.
CAUTION: As the piston is pushed back into the caliper housing,

the brake fluid level in the reservoir will rise. Do not allow the reservoir
www.JagDocs.com
to overflow.
Press the piston into the caliper housing.
2.
Apply grease C2C-39930 to the areas indicated.

www.JagDocs.com

Torque: 58 Nm
Secure the bottom arm of the anti-rattle spring

under the bottom anchor bracket of the caliper.
Compress the upper spring arm into the correct
position, under the upper anchor bracket, whilst
retaining the logo plate.
Using the screw-driver, tap the central locating tag
into the locked position.
7. CAUTIONS:
www.JagDocs.com
Always plug any open connections to prevent

contamination.
Make sure new sealing washers are installed.
NOTES:

the rest position.
Torque: 42 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
8.
9. CAUTIONS:
www.JagDocs.com
Make sure that the road wheels are in the straight

ahead position.
Make sure that excessive force is not used. Failure to

follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Make sure that the brake hose is not twisted and is

correctly located.
Pull downwards at the position shown.
10. Refer to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00 Brake System - General
Information, General Procedures).
Installation).
Brake Caliper Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
with water.

2. Remove the left-hand front wheel and tire.
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
3.
NOTES:

the rest position.

www.JagDocs.com


the brake hose.
7.
Release the clip.
www.JagDocs.com
8.
Installation


to overflow.
2.
www.JagDocs.com
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
5.
Torque: 58 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
6.
7. CAUTION: Make sure new sealing washers are
installed.
Torque: 42 Nm
8.
www.JagDocs.com
9. CAUTIONS:

ahead position.


correctly located.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation).
Brake Disc Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
CAUTION: Brake discs must be renewed in pairs.

2. Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-03B
Front Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
3. Torque: 115 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4.
Remove the 2 clips.
Clean the components mating faces.
5. Repeat the above procedure on the opposite side.

Installation

Brake Disc Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal

2. Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-03B Front
Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
3. Torque: 115 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4.
Remove the 2 clips.
Installation 5. Repeat the above procedure on the opposite side.

www.JagDocs.com
Brake Pads Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
with water.

Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
www.JagDocs.com



the brake hose.

www.JagDocs.com
Release the clip.

10.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation


to overflow.
2.
3.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 58 Nm

www.JagDocs.com

8.
9. CAUTIONS:
www.JagDocs.com

ahead position.


correctly located.
Installation).
Brake Pads Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
with water.

Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com


www.JagDocs.com

the brake hose.
Release the clip.

8.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation


to overflow.
www.JagDocs.com
2.
3.
www.JagDocs.com

www.JagDocs.com

Torque: 58 Nm

8.
www.JagDocs.com
9. CAUTIONS:

ahead position.


correctly located.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation).
Brake Disc Shield Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
2. Remove the brake disc.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc - Vehicles With: Standard
Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
3. Remove the brake disc shield.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Install the rivets.
www.JagDocs.com
Brake Disc Shield Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
2. Remove the front brake disc.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc - Vehicles With: High
Performance Brakes (206-03A Front Disc Brake - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal
and Installation).

www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Install the rivets.
Rear Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Brake hose to brake caliper 42 31 -
Brake caliper anchor plate 103 76 -
Brake caliper retaining bolts 28 21 -
Brake caliper logo badge retaining bolts - Vehicles with high performance brakes 10 7 -
www.JagDocs.com
Rear Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Rear
Disc Brake - Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Retaining washers (2 off)
2 Brake disc
3 Rivets (3 off)
4 Brake dust shield
5 Rear wheel knuckle/hub and bearing assembly
6 Caliper carrier bolts (2 off)
7 Brake pad wear sensor (where fitted)
10 Guide pins (2 off)
11 Brake caliper housing
12 Piston
13 Piston dust cover
14 Inboard brake pad and shim
17 Caliper carrier
18 Bleed screw
20 Knurled pin
21 Parking brake lever
22 Parking brake return spring
Performance Brakes - 5.0L Supercharger V8
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
2 Brake disc
3 Rivet (3 off)
4 Brake dust shield
5 Rear wheel knuckle/hub and bearing assembly
6 Caliper carrier bolt (2 off)
11 Caliper carrier
12 Brake caliper housing
13 Piston
14 Piston dust cover
15 Inboard brake pad and shim
18 Bleed screw
20 Knurled pin
www.JagDocs.com
21 Parking brake lever

22 Parking brake return spring
www.JagDocs.com
Disc Brake - Overview
OVERVIEW
The standard and performance rear braking systems feature ventilated brake discs and aluminum, single piston, sliding
calipers. The brake discs are:
326 mm (12.83 in.) diameter x 20 mm (0.79 in.) thick on standard brakes (the same as on base brakes).
376 mm (14.8 in.) diameter x 26 mm (1.02 in.) thick on performance brakes.
The brake disc is manufactured from cast iron. The brake disc is retained on the wheel hub by two washers and the wheel nuts.
A brake pad wear sensor is fitted to the RH (right-hand) rear brake.
Also incorporated into each rear brake caliper carrier is the parking brake mechanism.
Refer to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Description and Operation).
After any work on the rear brakes, the parking brake must be re-calibrated.
Refer to: Parking Brake (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, Description and Operation).
www.JagDocs.com
Disc Brake - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (250 A)
3 Front brake pad wear sensor
4 Rear brake pad wear sensor
7 Power distribution box
System Operation
BRAKE CALIPERS
When hydraulic pressure is supplied to the caliper, the pistons extend to force the inner pad against the brake disc. The caliper
reacts and slides along two guide pins to bring the outer pad into contact with the brake disc.

When a brake pad incorporating a brake pad wear sensor is approximately 75% worn, the sensor wire within the pad material
is worn through and the brake pad wear sensor goes open circuit. When the instrument cluster detects the open circuit, it
illuminates the amber LED (light emitting diode) in the brake warning indicator, displays an appropriate warning in the
message center and sounds a warning chime.
NOTE: A new pad wear sensor lead must be fitted whenever the brake pads are changed, irrespective of the brake pad
warning sensor being triggered.
BRAKE CALIPERS
Each caliper is mounted within a fixed carrier that is secured to the rear wheel knuckle with two bolts. Each outboard brake pad
is installed with a wire anti-rattle spring.
The brake calipers on SC (supercharger) vehicles are painted and also include a logo badge, secured with two screws, which
must be removed in order to change the brake pads.
www.JagDocs.com
The inboard brake pad of the RH (right-hand) brake incorporates a wear sensor.

The brake pad wear sensor is wired in series with a wear sensor on the LH (left-hand) front brake and the instrument cluster. If
the thickness of one of the brake pads connected to a wear sensor decreases to a predetermined limit, the instrument cluster
illuminates the brake warning indicator.
Rear Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - Brake
Caliper Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal
WARNING: Failure to release the tension and calibrate the electric parking brake during rear parking brake related service
procedures, could cause the parking brake to function incorrectly or become inoperative.
with water.

Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
3. Refer to: Parking Brake Cable Tension Release (206-05 Parking Brake and
Actuation, General Procedures).
4.
Torque: 10 Nm
6. CAUTIONS:
www.JagDocs.com

contamination.
If brake fluid is spilt on the paintwork, the affected

area must be immediately washed down with cold water.
NOTES:

the rest position.
Torque: 42 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Release the 2 clips.

www.JagDocs.com
Release the clip.


the brake hose.
Torque: 28 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Caliper Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal
with water.

2. Refer to: Wheel and Tire (204-04, Removal and Installation).

www.JagDocs.com
3. Refer to: Parking Brake Cable Tension Release (206-05, General

Procedures).
4.
5. CAUTIONS:

contamination.

NOTES:

the rest position.
Torque: 42 Nm

www.JagDocs.com

Release the clip.

www.JagDocs.com

the brake hose.
Torque: 28 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
2. Refer to: Brake System Bleeding (206-00, General Procedures).

Disc Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Removal

2. Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes (206-04B
Rear Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Torque: 103 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
3.
Remove the 2 clips.

4.
Installation
Disc Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Removal

2. Refer to: Brake Pads - Vehicles With: Standard Brakes (206-04B Rear
Disc Brake - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Torque: 103 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
3.
Remove the 2 clips.

4.
Installation

Pads Vehicles With: High Performance Brakes
Special Tool(s)
206-080
Brake caliper piston retractor tool
206-081
303-588
Remover, Crankshaft Pulley/Damper
www.JagDocs.com
Removal
WARNINGS:
Failure to release the tension and calibrate the electric parking brake during rear parking brake related service procedures,
could cause the parking brake to function incorrectly or become inoperative.
Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids to enter the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of the correct specification from
airtight containers. Do not mix brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only, otherwise braking efficiency may be impaired.
with water.
NOTES:
Only extraction bolt from special tool 303-588 is used.



Procedures).
4.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com

www.JagDocs.com
Release the clip.

8. WARNING: If the brake caliper piston seal is damaged a
new brake caliper must be installed.

the brake hose.
Torque: 28 Nm

www.JagDocs.com

Using the special tools, fully retract the brake
caliper piston.
11.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. NOTE: The brake pad wear sensor retaining tang must be

installed to the sensor prior to installation to the brake
pad.

Pads Vehicles With: Standard Brakes
Special Tool(s)
206-080
206-081
303-588
Remover, Crankshaft Pulley/Damper
www.JagDocs.com
Removal
WARNINGS:
Failure to release the tension and calibrate the electric parking brake during rear parking brake related service procedures,
could cause the parking brake to function incorrectly or become inoperative.
Do not allow dirt or foreign liquids to enter the reservoir. Use only new brake fluid of the correct specification from
airtight containers. Do not mix brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
Brake pads must be renewed in axle sets only, otherwise braking efficiency may be impaired.
with water.
NOTES:
Only extraction bolt from special tool 303-588 is used.



Procedures).
4.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Release the clip.

www.JagDocs.com

the brake hose.
Torque: 28 Nm

www.JagDocs.com

Using the special tools, fully retract the brake
caliper piston.
10.

Installation
1. NOTE: The brake pad wear sensor retaining tang must be

installed to the sensor prior to installation to the brake
pad.

www.JagDocs.com
Disc Shield
Removal
WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle stands.
1. Raise and support the body.
2. Remove the brake disc.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Disc (206-04A Rear Disc Brake
- V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).

Drill out the 3 rivets
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Parking Brake and Actuation -

Parking brake module retaining bolts 4 - 35
Parking brake release actuator retaining bolts 20 15 -
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake - Component Location
Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Parking brake switch
2 EPB (electronic parking brake) module
3 Parking brake actuator
4 Caliper and disc assemblies (2 off)
5 Stoplamp switch
6 Brake warning indicator - NAS vehicles
7 Brake warning indicator (all except NAS (North American Specification) vehicles)
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake - Overview
Overview
The parking brake is an electrically actuated system that operates on the rear brake calipers. Two cables are connected to the
rear brake calipers, and act directly on the same pistons used for normal, hydraulic rear brake actuation.
Refer to: Rear Disc Brake (206-04, Description and Operation).
The parking brake is controlled by the EPB (electronic parking brake) module. In response to commands from the driver through
the parking brake switch, the EPB module controls operation of the parking brake actuator. The actuator adjusts the tension of
the brake cables to apply and release the rear brake calipers. Features of the parking brake include:
Manual apply.
Manual release.
Automatic release.
A service mode is also available and must be activated using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system. This allows the
decoupling of the components and prevention of damage to the actuator. When in service mode all switch functions will be
inhibited.
www.JagDocs.com
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus.

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box)
5 EPB module
6 Stoplamp switch
8 Parking brake switch
9 Parking brake actuator
System Operation
Static Apply
The EPB module receives a vehicle speed signal from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module on the high speed CAN bus. If
the parking brake switch is pulled to the 'Apply' position and vehicle speed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h), the EPB module will
instigate its 'Static Apply' mode and drive the actuator to apply full parking brake force to the rear wheels.
The EPB module monitors the current drawn by the actuator and compares this to information held within its configuration
software to determine when full braking force has been applied.
Dynamic Apply
There are two 'Dynamic Apply' modes; low speed dynamic and high speed dynamic. The low speed dynamic mode operates at
speeds between 2 mph (3 km/h) and 20 mph (32 km/h). The high speed dynamic mode operates at speeds above 20 mph (32
km/h).
If the parking brake switch is pulled up to the 'Apply' position and vehicle speed is within the low speed dynamic range, the
EPB module drives the actuator to apply full parking brake force to the rear wheels.
If the parking brake switch is pulled up to the 'Apply' position and vehicle speed is within the high speed dynamic range, the
EPB module will apply braking force to the rear wheels at a slower rate until full braking load is reached or the switch is
released. The rate with which braking force is applied is controlled by the EPB module, which monitors both current drawn by
the actuator and positional information from the actuator hall sensor and compares this to information held within its
configuration software.
www.JagDocs.com
Drive Away Release

The EPB module will initiate its 'Drive Away Release' function and automatically release the parking brake if the following
conditions are detected:
The engine is running.

Drive , or reverse is selected.
Positive throttle movement is detected.
The EPB module receives messages of gear selector position and throttle angle over the high speed CAN bus from the TCM
(transmission control module) and the ECM (engine control module) respectively.
Release from Park

The EPB module will initiate its 'Release from Park' function and automatically release the parking brake if the gear selector is
moved from Park to any position except Neutral.
Repairs
Before carrying out any work on the parking brake system, the Jaguar approved diagnostic system must be connected and the
'parking brake unjam' routine run. The routine can be found in the 'Vehicle Configuration' area, under the 'Set-up and
Configuration' menu. After any work has been carried out on the parking brake, the system will require resetting.
CAUTION: Do not use the 'Emergency Release' tool to allow work to be carried out on the parking brake. Work can only be
carried out on the parking brake system after the 'parking brake unjam' routine has been run.
Resetting
If the electrical supply is disconnected from the EPB module, the actuator will loose its position memory. On battery
re-connection and ignition on, 'APPLY FOOT AND PARK BRAKE' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center
indicating the parking brake requires resetting.
Refer to: Parking Brake (206-05, Diagnosis and Testing).
Operating Voltages
The EPB module will only operate the actuator if the power supply from the battery is between 9 V and 16 V. At any voltage
within this range, the actuator is able to fully tighten and release the brake cables. If the power supply falls outside of the
range, a fault code is stored in the EPB module and can be retrieved using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
Parking Brake Switch
www.JagDocs.com
The parking brake switch is mounted in the floor console, rearward of the rotary gear selector. The switch has 3 states:
Apply: When the switch is pulled up to apply the parking brake.

Release: When the switch is pushed down to release the parking brake.
Neutral: The central default position. The switch returns to this position regardless of parking brake status.
The parking brake switch contains a pair of micro-switches for both the apply and release actions. The EPB module provides an
individual hardwired electrical feed to each of the four micro-switches plus a single ground connection, allowing it to constantly
monitor switch status.
EPB Module
The EPB module is mounted in the luggage compartment on the RH (right-hand) side quarter panel and is connected to the
vehicles electrical wiring by two multiplugs. The EPB module is also connected to the high speed CAN bus, allowing it to
communicate with other vehicle systems.
www.JagDocs.com
The EPB module monitors the condition of the parking brake switch through a series of hardwired electrical connections and
controls operation of the parking brake actuator accordingly.
Parking Brake Actuator

www.JagDocs.com
The parking brake actuator is mounted on the rear cross beam, underneath the vehicle. Operation of the actuator is controlled
by the EPB module in response to parking brake switch requests from the driver.
A Hall sensor is located within the actuator and provides positional information back to the EPB module. The principle function
of the Hall sensor is to ensure the actuator fully releases the parking brake when a static release request is made. The signal
provided by the Hall sensor is compared to configuration information contained within the EPB module software to determine
when a full release has been carried out.
Stoplamp Switch
www.JagDocs.com
The stoplamp switch is mounted on the brake pedal box. One of the prerequisites for releasing the parking brake is that the
foot brake is applied. The EPB module is able to determine the position of the footbrake by monitoring the status of the
stoplamp switch via a hardwired electrical connection.
The stoplamp switch also forms part of:
The ABS.
Refer to: Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist, Description and Operation).
The speed control system. For additional information, refer to:
Speed Control (310-03A, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03B, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03C, Description and Operation).
Instrument Cluster
Depending on market specification, the instrument cluster may contain a red and an amber brake warning indicator, or only a
red brake warning indicator. The functionality of the warning indicators is shown in the table below.
Indicator Status Details

Red Illuminated Parking brake applied
Red Flashing Parking brake electrical failure
Amber Illuminated Parking brake electrical failure
If a parking brake failure warning indicator is active, the message 'CANNOT APPLY PARK BRAKE' or 'PARK BRAKE FAULT' will
also appear in the instrument cluster message center. If the vehicle is moving with the parking brake applied, the message
'PARK BRAKE ON' will appear in the message center accompanied by a chime from the instrument cluster.
Refer to: Information and Message Center (413-08 Information and Message Center, Description and Operation).
www.JagDocs.com
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake
For a detailed description of the Parking Brake operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation)
Parking Brake (Description and Operation),

Parking Brake (Description and Operation),
Parking Brake (Description and Operation).
Parking Brake Calibration

The parking brake system must be calibrated whenever the battery has been disconnected or has been in a state of discharge,
or repairs have been carried out to the rear service or parking brake system.
NOTE: If new rear brake pads have been installed, pressure must be applied to the brake pedal a minimum of five times
prior to calibration of the parking brake system.
To calibrate the parking brake system:
1. Place gear selector lever in 'P' Park position.
2. Release parking brake cable tension to service position.

REFER to: Parking Brake Cable Tension Release (206-05 Parking Brake and Actuation, General Procedures).
3. Set the ignition status to 'ON'.

www.JagDocs.com
4. Apply and hold the footbrake then pull up the parking brake switch.
5. To release the parking brake, apply and hold the footbrake then release and press down the parking brake switch.
Visual Inspection
Parking brake cable Fuse(s)

Parking brake actuator Wiring harness/electrical connectors
Brake caliper Check for bent/corroded pins
Brake pads Parking brake switch
Stabilizer bar drop link caps Parking brake module
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident check the system for any logged Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and proceed to
the DTC Index , alternatively, verify the customer concern and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart

The parking brake will not
engage or release (with no Cables fouled, trapped or damaged Check the rear and primary
parking brake warning Cables incorrectly routed or installed cables for correct installation
message) Rear lining wear and damage
Service brake incorrectly adjusted following Inspect the rear brake linings for
lining change wear
Caliper malfunction Re-calibrate the parking brake,
refer to the calibration procedure
Check the rear service brake for
correct installation and operation
The parking brake will not
engage or release (with Cables fouled, trapped or damaged Check the rear and primary
parking brake warning Cables incorrectly routed or installed cables for correct installation
message) Rear lining wear and damage
Actuator malfunction Inspect the rear brake linings for
Caliper malfunction wear
Re-calibrate the parking brake,
refer to the calibration procedure
Check the rear service brake for
correct installation and operation
No communication with the

parking brake module Fuse Check fuses
Module off Bus Ensure battery is fully charged
CAN network error and in serviceable condition.
Parking brake module fault Check battery voltage at parking
brake module
Check CAN network using
manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
'Park brake Fault' displayed on

message center with Parking brake system fault Check the parking brake module
associated warning lamps for DTCs and refer to DTC Index
Brakes drag
Parking brake not re-calibrated after battery has Re-calibrate parking brake, refer
been disconnected or has been in a state of to the calibration procedure
discharge, or repairs have been carried out to Check the service brake for
the rear service or parking brake system correct operation
Service brake system fault
www.JagDocs.com
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Electric Parking Brake (PBM) (100-00 General Information, Description
and Operation).
www.JagDocs.com
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable Tension Release
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Electric parking brake release tool 206-082. Only to be used for EMERGENCY brake
release
Electric parking brake release tool link lead 206-082-01. Only to be used for EMERGENCY brake
release
www.JagDocs.com
1. WARNING: Always use Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment to

release the cable tension, when carrying out repair operations on the
electric park brake which require cable tension release.
Connect the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment to release the

electric parking brake cable tension.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. WARNING: The procedure below should only be used in emergency

situations, to release the electric park brake. All calibration of the
parking brake system will be lost, and the parking brake will need to be
re-calibrated to function correctly.
NOTE: The tools shown must only be used in the event of an

emergency.
Remove the RH loadspace trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel RH (501-05
3. WARNING: Failure to follow this instruction may result in a
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) being generated.
Disconnect the 2 electrical connectors from the parking

brake module, in the sequence illustrated.

www.JagDocs.com
Connect the special tool to the parking brake module.
5. Release the parking brake cable tension.

An audible 'click', signals complete parking brake cable
tension release.
6. Remove the special tool and carry out any necessary repairs on the
system.
7. Connect the electrical connectors in the sequence shown.
8. Install the RH loadspace trim panel.

For additional information, refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel RH (501-05
www.JagDocs.com
9. WARNING: Calibrate the electric park brake using Jaguar approved

diagnostic equipment. If Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment is not
available disconnect the battery for approximatly 30 seconds , the
vehicle will then prompt the driver to carry out the calibration procedure
as per the vehicle hand book on re-connection.
Calibrate the electric park brake.

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable LH TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8
Removal
3. Refer to: Rear Subframe - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe
and Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Rear Subframe - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (502-00
www.JagDocs.com
Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
4.
6. Torque: 20 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Cable RH TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8
Removal
3. Refer to: Rear Subframe - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (502-00 Uni-Body, Subframe
and Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Rear Subframe - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (502-00
www.JagDocs.com
Uni-Body, Subframe and Mounting System, Removal and Installation).
4.

6. Torque: 20 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Module
Removal
2. Refer to: Loadspace Trim Panel RH (501-05 Interior Trim and

3. Torque: 4 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. To install, reverse the removal position
2. Configure the electronic parking brake (EPB) using the diagnostic tool.
Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Switch
Removal
NOTES:
The parking brake switch is part of the transmission control switch (TCS) assembly and therefore can not be serviced
separately.
2. Refer to: Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (307-05A Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V6 3.0L Petrol, Removal and
Installation).
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
1. CAUTION: Make sure that all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) have
been removed after the road test.

Parking Brake and Actuation - Parking Brake Release Actuator
Removal
3. Remove the differential case.
Refer to: Differential Case - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
Installation).
Refer to: Differential Case - TD4 2.2L Diesel/TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-02,
www.JagDocs.com
4. Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 20 Nm
6.
www.JagDocs.com
7.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
2. CAUTION: Make sure the wiring harness is correctly routed

to avoid contact with the halfshaft. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the component.
3. CAUTION: Calibrate the electric park brake using Jaguar approved

diagnostic system. If the Jaguar approved diagnostic system is not
available disconnect the battery for approximately 30 seconds, the
vehicle will then prompt the driver to carry out the calibration procedure
as per the vehicle hand book on re-connection.
Calibrate the electric parking brake (EPB) using the diagnostic tool.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation -
CAUTION: Do not use brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 on 2006my vehicles onwards. Failure to follow this instruction may
NOTE: Brake fluid ITT Super Dot 4 has now been superseded by Shell ESL Super Dot 4 which is the Jaguar recommended
brake fluid. Shell ESL Super Dot 4 can be used on all model years.
Item Specification
Brake master cylinder to brake booster retaining nuts. 25 18 -
HCU to brake master cylinder brake tubes 17 13 -
Brake master cylinder reservoir retaining bolts 4 - 35
www.JagDocs.com
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Component Location
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) installation shown, LHD (left-hand drive) installation similar.
Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Brake master cylinder and fluid reservoir
2 Brake pedal
3 Brake pipes
4 Stoplamp switch
5 ABS (anti-lock brake system) module/ HCU (hydraulic control unit)
6 Brake booster
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Overview
Overview
The hydraulic brake system is a diagonally split dual line system. The system consists of a brake pedal, vacuum brake booster,
brake master cylinder assembly, HCU (hydraulic control unit), hydraulic pipes and brake hoses.
Brake pipes from the master cylinder supply pressure to the brake calipers at the four corners of the vehicle via the HCU.
Braided steel hoses are used to connect the brake pipes to the front and rear brake calipers.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation - System Operation
and Component Description
System Operation
When the brake pedal is pressed, the front push rod in the brake booster pushes the master cylinder primary piston along the
bore of the housing. This produces pressure in the primary pressure chamber which, in conjunction with the primary spring,
overcomes the secondary spring and simultaneously moves the secondary piston along the bore. The initial movement of the
pistons away from the piston stops closes the primary and secondary center valves in the master cylinder. Further movement of
the pistons then pressurizes the fluid in the primary and secondary chambers and thus the brake circuits. The fluid in the
chambers behind the pistons is unaffected by the movement of the pistons and can flow unrestricted through the inlet ports
between the chambers and the reservoir.
Pressurized fluid enters the HCU (hydraulic control unit), which is mounted on the front of the ABS (anti-lock brake system)
module. The HCU modulates the supply of pressurized fluid to the brakes under control of the ABS module.
www.JagDocs.com
Brake Pedal
www.JagDocs.com
The brake pedal is mounted to a bracket attached to the rear side of the engine bulkhead. The bracket also contains the
accelerator pedal. A clevis pin connects the brake pedal to the input push rod of the brake booster and master cylinder
assembly.
The stoplamp switch is mounted in the brake pedal bracket and is operated by the brake pedal.
Brake Master Cylinder and Fluid Reservoir
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Brake fluid level switch electrical connector
2 Brake fluid reservoir cap
3 Brake fluid reservoir
4 Primary circuit inlet port
5 Brake master cylinder
6 Torx bolt
7 Primary circuit outlet
8 Secondary circuit outlet
9 Secondary circuit inlet port
10 Reservoir to master cylinder seal (2 off)
The brake booster and master cylinder assembly is fitted in the engine compartment. The brake master cylinder housing
consists of two hydraulic chambers containing two pistons in tandem. The primary piston (adjacent to the brake booster)
produces pressure for the primary braking circuit and this pressure acts on the secondary piston and hence creates pressure in
the secondary circuit. A brake fluid reservoir is mounted on top of the master cylinder to provide a supply of brake fluid to the
brake system. The reservoir cap is fitted with a brake fluid level switch.
Brake Fluid Level Switch
The brake fluid level switch is located in the fluid reservoir and is hardwired to the instrument cluster. When the level of fluid
in the reservoir reaches a predetermined low level, the switch contacts close and provide a signal feed back to the instrument
cluster. On receipt of the signal, the brake fluid red warning indicator will illuminate and 'BRAKE FLUID LOW' will be displayed
in the message center.
ABS Module
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 LH (left-hand) front brake
2 RH (right-hand) rear brake
3 LH rear brake
4 RH front brake
5 Primary circuit inlet port
6 Secondary circuit inlet port
The ABS module is located in the passenger side, rear engine bay and incorporates the HCU. The HCU is a four channel unit
that modulates the supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes under control of the ABS module.
The primary and secondary outlets of the master cylinder are connected to the primary and secondary circuits within the HCU.
The primary circuit in the HCU has separate outlet ports to the RH front and LH rear brakes. The secondary circuit in the HCU
has separate outlet ports to the LH front and RH rear brakes.
CAUTION: The ABS module and the HCU are a single unit and must not be separated.
HCU Schematic Diagram

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Brake booster
2 Primary circuit
3 Secondary circuit
4 HCU
www.JagDocs.com
5 Pulsation damper
6 Pulsation damper
7 Separation valve
8 Damping chambers
9 Separation valve
10 Shuttle valve
11 Hydraulic pumps
12 Motor
13 Shuttle valve
14 Pressure sensor - all vehicles
15 Low pressure accumulator
16 Check valve
17 Low pressure accumulator
18 Inlet valve
19 Inlet valve
20 Inlet valve
21 Inlet valve
22 Outlet valve
23 Outlet valve
24 Outlet valve
25 Outlet valve
www.JagDocs.com
26 Pressure sensors - vehicles fitted with adaptive speed control only

27 RH front brake
28 LH rear brake
29 RH rear brake
30 LH front brake
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Hydraulic Brake Actuation

REFER to: Brake System (206-00 Brake System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Fluid Reservoir
Removal
CAUTION: If brake fluid is spilt on the paintwork, the affected area must be immediately washed down with cold water.
1. Remove the brake fluid reservoir cap.
2. Disconnect the brake fluid level electrical connector.

www.JagDocs.com
3. Using a suitable suction device drain the brake fluid resrvoir.

4. Remove the brake fluid reservoir.
5. Remove and discard the O-ring seals.

Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Tighten to 8 Nm.
Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX mark.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation - Brake Master Cylinder
Removal
2. Remove the cowl vent screen.

For additional information, refer to: Cowl Vent Screen (501-02 Front End
Body Panels, Removal and Installation).
3. CAUTION: Brake fluid will damage paint finished surfaces. If spilled,

immediately remove the fluid and clean the area with water.
Remove the brake fluid reservoir.

For additional information, refer to: Brake Fluid Reservoir (206-06
Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Removal and Installation).
4. Remove the brake booster vacuum line from the brake vacuum
pump.
www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use

new blanking caps.
Disconnect the master cylinder brake pipes.
www.JagDocs.com
6. Release the fuse box.
7. Remove the brake master cylinder.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Install new O-ring seals.
www.JagDocs.com

Power Brake Actuation -
Brake booster retaining nuts - all vehicles 25 18 -
Exhaust gas recirculation valve coolant pipe - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 9 - 80
Brake vacuum pump nut - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 23 17 -
Brake vacuum pump threaded stud - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 13 10 -
Brake vacuum pump bolts - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 23 17 -
Brake vacuum pump bolts - vehicles with 5.0L 12 9 -
www.JagDocs.com
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster - Component Location
Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Output pushrod
2 Brake booster
3 Input pushrod
4 Vacuum pipe
5 Non return valve
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster - Overview
Overview
Power assistance for the braking system is provided by a vacuum brake booster. The unit increases the input load by a ratio of
6.2 : 1 and is secured to the driver's side of the engine compartment bulkhead by four studs and nuts.
The booster and master cylinder assembly is fitted in the engine compartment. A two piece plastic vacuum pipe connects the
brake booster to the inlet manifold to provide the necessary vacuum to the booster. The connection into the brake booster has
a non return valve to maintain the vacuum level in the booster and also prevent fuel vapor from entering the brake booster.
The input push rod within the brake booster is connected to the brake pedal lever. Initially, any effort applied by the driver is
increased by pedal ratio which is transferred to the input push rod. This load is further increased by the booster. The increased
load is applied to the primary piston of the master cylinder via the output pushrod of the booster. Hydraulic pressure in the
master cylinder is then applied to the brakes.
Refer to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Description and Operation).
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Power Brake Actuation - Power Brake System

REFER to: Brake System (206-00 Brake System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Booster
Removal
1. Remove the brake master cylinder.
2. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum electrical connector.
3. Remove the lower trim panel.

www.JagDocs.com
4. Remove the retaining nut.

5. Remove the brake booster retaining nuts.
6. Remove the brake booster.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. NOTE: Replace the brake booster/pedal box gasket.

Tighten to 25 Nm.
2. Tighten to 3 Nm.
Power Brake Actuation - Brake Vacuum Pump TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
3. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel RH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
4. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Panel LH - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L
Installation).
5. Refer to: Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03A
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
6.
7.
8. Torque: 9 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
9. Torque: 9 Nm
10. Torque: 23 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
11. Torque: 13 Nm
12. NOTE: Remove and discard the O-ring seal.

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 23 Nm
Installation
1. NOTES:
Install a new O-ring seal.
Apply silicone gasket sealant or equivalent meeting

Jaguar specification.
The application of sealant must be 10 mm square in

two places. Install the brake vacuum pump immediately
after applying the sealant.
The brake vacuum pump should be fitted directly to

the engine without smearing the sealant.
Make sure that the drive coupling is aligned with

camshaft coupling.

www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist -
Item Specification
Brake master cylinder primary pressure transducer 30 22 –
Brake tubes to hydraulic control unit (HCU) 17 13 –
Rear wheel speed sensor retaining bolt 6 – 53
Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer retaining nuts 7 – 62
Hydraulic control unit (HCU) retaining bolts 8 – 71
Steering wheel rotation sensor retaining screws 4 – 35
Steering column to lower shroud retaining screws 3 – 27
www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist -
Component Location
Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
2 RH (right-hand) front wheel speed sensor
4 Steering angle sensor
5 Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor
6 RH rear wheel speed sensor
7 LH (left-hand) rear wheel speed sensor
8 LH front wheel speed sensor
www.JagDocs.com
Overview
Overview
The ABS (anti-lock brake system) and DSC (dynamic stability control) system features a Bosch modulator, which is an
integrated four-channel HCU (hydraulic control unit) and ABS module. The unit is located in the rear of the engine compartment
on the passenger side, and is installed in the brake hydraulic circuit between the brake master cylinder and the four brake
calipers.
The ABS module is connected to the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus, and actively interacts with other vehicle
system control modules and associated sensors to receive and transmit current vehicle operating information.
When required, the ABS module will actively intervene and operate the HCU during braking or vehicle maneuvers to correct the
vehicle attitude, stability, traction or speed. During incidents of vehicle correction, the ABS module may also request the ECM
(engine control module) to control engine power in order to further stabilize and correct the vehicle.
To provide full system functionality, the ABS and DSC system comprise the following components:
DSC switch.
Four wheel speed sensors.
Steering angle sensor.
Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor.
Stoplamp switch.
Instrument cluster indicator lamps.
Integrated ABS module and HCU.
Brake booster vacuum sensor (3.0L vehicles only).
www.JagDocs.com
Two variants of ABS module are available, Bosch ESP®8.1 and Bosch ESP®plus8.1. The Bosch ESP®plus8.1 system is fitted to
vehicles with ACC (adaptive cruise control) and incorporates a new feature to Jaguar known as 'electronic brake prefill'.
Electronic brake prefill, senses any rapid throttle lift off, activating a small brake hydraulic pressure build-up of approximately 3
to 5 bar (43.5 to 72.5 lbf/in²) in anticipation of the brakes being applied. This application produces a quicker brake pedal
response and consequently slightly shorter stopping distances. When the ECM detects rapid throttle lift off it signals the ABS
module which controls the HCU to apply a low brake pressure to assist in a quicker brake application.
NOTE: All vehicles with ACC are supported by the Bosch ESP®plus8.1 system.
The ABS provides the following brake functions that are designed to assist the vehicle or aid the driver:
ABS.
DSC, including Trac DSC.
CBC (corner brake control).
EBD (electronic brake force distribution).
ETC (electronic traction control).
EBA (emergency brake assist).
EDC (engine drag-torque control).
Understeer control.
Electronic brake prefill (vehicles with ACC only).
Brake vacuum assist (3.0L vehicles only).
All the brake functions listed are automatically active when the ignition is in power mode and the engine is running. The DSC
system can be selected to off using the DSC switch.
WARNING: Although the vehicle is fitted with DSC, it remains the drivers responsibility to drive safely according to the
prevailing conditions.
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; N = Medium speed CANCAN bus; V = Private
CAN bus.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box) (250 A megafuse)
4 EJB (engine junction box)
5 LH (left-hand) front wheel speed sensor
6 RH (right-hand) front wheel speed sensor
7 Brake fluid level switch
8 LH rear wheel speed sensor
9 RH rear wheel speed sensor
11 High mounted stop lamp
12 LH stop lamp
13 RH stop lamp
14 Diagnostic socket
16 Electronic parking brake module
20 JaguarDrive selector module
21 Adaptive damping control module
22 Adaptive speed control module
23 Yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor
24 Roof opening panel motor/module
25 Brake booster vacuum sensor (3.0L vehicles only)
26 Steering angle sensor
www.JagDocs.com
System Operation
Anti-Lock Brake System
ABS controls the speed of all road wheels to ensure optimum wheel slip when braking at the adhesion limit. The wheels are
prevented from locking to retain effective steering control of the vehicle.
The brake pressures are modulated separately for each wheel. Rear brake pressures are controlled to maintain rear stability on
split friction surfaces.
Dynamic Stability Control

DSC (dynamic stability control) uses brakes and powertrain torque control to assist in maintaining the yaw stability of the
vehicle. While the ignition is energized the DSC function is permanently enabled, unless selected off using the DSC switch.
DSC enhances driving safety in abrupt maneuvers and in under-steer or over-steer situations that may occur in a bend. The
ABS module monitors the yaw rate and lateral acceleration of the vehicle, steering input and individual wheel speeds, then
selectively applies individual brakes and signals for powertrain torque adjustments to reduce under-steer or over-steer
conditions.
In general:
In an under-steer situation the inner wheels are braked to counteract the yaw movement towards the outer edge of the
bend.
In an over-steer situation the outer wheels are braked to prevent the rear end of the vehicle from pushing towards the
outer edge of the bend.
The ABS module monitors the tracking stability of the vehicle using inputs from the wheel speed sensors, the steering angle
sensor, and the yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor. The tracking stability is compared with stored target data. Whenever
the tracking stability deviates from the target data, the ABS module intervenes by applying the appropriate control strategy.
The following interactions occur in an intervention situation:
High speed CAN signal to the ECM, to reduce engine torque.

Application of braking to the appropriate corner of the vehicle.
Trac DSC
TracDSC is an alternative setting of DSC with reduced system interventions. With TracDSC engaged, traction may be somewhat
increased, although stability may be reduced compared to normal DSC. TracDSC is intended for use only on dry tarmac, by
suitably experienced drivers and should not be selected for other surfaces or by drivers with insufficient skill and training to
operate the vehicle safely with the TracDSC function engaged.
The less restrictive TracDSC setting may be preferred, for example, by expert drivers engaged in high performance driving on
dry Tarmac surfaces such as tracks and circuits.
Switching between DSC and Trac DSC:

Press and hold the DSC switch for less than 10 seconds.
The message center will temporarily display either Trac DSC or DSC ON.
The warning indicator in the instrument panel will illuminate while Trac DSC is selected.
The warning indicator will flash when DSC or Trac DSC is active.
NOTE: If cruise control is engaged, it will automatically disengage if DSC activates.
Refer to: Speed Control (310-03 Speed Control - 3.0L V6 - TdV6, Description and Operation).
Corner Brake Control

CBC (corner brake control) influences the brake pressures, below and within DSC and ABS thresholds, to counteract the yawing
moment produced when braking in a corner. CBC produces a correction torque by limiting the brake pressure on one side of the
vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution

EBD (electronic brake force distribution) limits the brake pressure applied to the rear wheels. When the brakes are applied, the
weight of the vehicle transfers forwards, reducing the ability of the rear wheels to transfer braking effort to the road surface.
This may cause the rear wheels to slip and make the vehicle unstable.
EBD uses the ABS braking hardware to automatically optimize the pressure to the rear brakes, below the point where ABS is
normally invoked.
NOTE: Only the rear brakes are controlled by the EBD function.
Electronic Traction Control

www.JagDocs.com
ETC (electronic traction control) attempts to optimize forward traction by reducing engine torque, or by applying the brake of a
spinning wheel until traction is regained.
ETC is activated if an individual wheel speed is above that of the vehicle reference speed (positive slip) and the brake pedal is
not pressed. The brake is applied to the spinning wheel, allowing the excess torque to be transmitted to the non-spinning
wheel through the drive line. If necessary, the ABS module also sends a high speed CAN bus message to the ECM to request a
reduction in engine torque.
When the DSC function is selected off using the DSC switch, the braking and engine torque reduction features are both
disabled, except when the JaguarDrive control is in winter mode. When the JaguarDrive control is in winter mode, selecting the
DSC function off retains the braking and engine torque reduction features, but reduces intervention levels compared to DSC
and Trac DSC modes.
Emergency Brake Assist

EBA (emergency brake assist) assists the driver in emergency braking situations by automatically increasing the applied
braking effort. The ABS module invokes EBA when:
The brake pedal is rapidly pressed.

The brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation.
When the brake pedal is rapidly pressed, the ABS module increases the hydraulic pressure to all of the brakes until the
threshold for ABS operation is reached. This action applies the maximum braking effort for the available traction. The ABS
module monitors for the sudden application of the brakes, using inputs from the brake pedal switch and from the pressure
sensor within the HCU (hydraulic control unit). With the brake pedal pressed, if the rate of increase of hydraulic pressure
exceeds the predetermined limit, the ABS module invokes emergency braking.
When the brake pedal is pressed hard enough to bring the front brakes into ABS operation, the ABS module increases the
hydraulic pressure to the rear brakes up to the ABS threshold.
EBA operation continues until the driver releases the brake pedal, sufficiently for the hydraulic pressure in the HCU to drop
below a threshold value stored in the ABS module.
Engine Drag-Torque Control

EDC (engine drag-torque control) prevents wheel slip caused by any of the following: A
sudden decrease in engine torque when the accelerator is suddenly released.

A downshift using the Jaguar sequential shift function on automatic transmission vehicles.
When the ABS module detects the onset of wheel slip without the brakes being applied, the ABS module signals the ECM via
the high speed CAN bus to request a momentary increase in engine torque.
Understeer Control
Understeer Logic Control is a proactive system which monitors the vehicle for understeer by comparing signals from the yaw
rate and lateral acceleration sensor with signals from the steering angle sensor and wheel speed sensors.
When the ABS module detects the onset of understeer, the ABS module signals the ECM via the high speed CAN bus to request
a decrease in engine torque. At the same time the ABS module will control the HCU to apply brake pressure to the relevant
wheels to correct the understeer.
Electronic Brake Prefill (Vehicles With ACC Only)

Electronic brake prefill (Bosch ESP®plus8.1), senses any rapid throttle lift off, activating a small brake hydraulic pressure
build-up of approximately 3 to 5 bar (43.5 to 72.5 lbf/in²) in anticipation of the brakes being applied.
This application produces a quicker brake pedal response and consequently slightly shorter stopping distances. The system
supports vehicles with ACC (adaptive cruise control).
When the ABS module detects rapid throttle lift off (from the signals received from the ECM over the high speed CAN bus), it
controls the HCU to apply a low brake pressure to assist in a quicker brake application.
Brake Vacuum Assist (3.0L Vehicles Only)

Operation of Brake Vacuum Assist generally occurs at the beginning of an ignition cycle when brake booster vacuum levels are
low; refer to Brake Booster Vacuum sensor, below.
Brake vacuum assist operation will be recognized by the driver experiencing a vibrating brake pedal and slight modulator noise.
This will be similar to that experienced when ABS system is operating.
As the engine warms up, Brake Vacuum Assist operation will become less frequent. However, it can be become more active
when vacuum levels are low due to driving at high-altitudes, or during frequent heavy-braking.
Noise levels during Brake Vacuum Assist may vary with initial system activity being the loudest observed. In some
circumstances initial activity may be interpreted as a 'thump' noise, particularly if there is no immediate and significant Brake
Vacuum Assist functionality.
In this circumstance system behavior is normal and should not be a cause for fault investigation.
www.JagDocs.com
Dynamic Stability Control Switch
Item Description
1 DSC switch
The DSC switch is mounted in the floor console adjacent to the JaguarDrive selector.
www.JagDocs.com
DSC becomes active whenever the engine is running. A momentary press of the switch allows the driver to toggle between the
standard DSC settings and the optimized 'Trac DSC' settings. The message 'Trac DSC' or 'DSC on' will temporarily be displayed
in the instrument cluster message center. The amber DSC warning indicator in the instrument cluster remains illuminated while
'Trac DSC' is selected.
The DSC can be switched off by pressing and holding the switch for more than 10 seconds.
In each case the message 'DSC OFF' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center to confirm DSC has been
switched off. The amber DSC warning indicator in the instrument cluster will remain illuminated. The system can be switched
back on again by simply pressing and releasing the switch. The message 'DSC ON' will then temporarily appear in the
instrument cluster message center to confirm the system is on.
NOTE: Switch requests may be delayed if the switch is pressed while a DSC operation is taking place. The switch request
will be displayed in the instrument cluster but the ABS module will not initiate any stability changes until it is safe to do so.
If a fault is detected with the DSC switch, the ABS module defaults to the 'DSC ON' setting and any switch requests are
ignored.
WARNING: It is recommended that when using snow chains, Trac DSC is switched off and JaguarDrive control winter mode
is selected.
Wheel Speed Sensors

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Front wheel speed sensor
2 Rear wheel speed sensor
An active wheel speed sensor is installed in each wheel hub to provide the ABS module with a rotational speed signal from
each road wheel. The head of each front wheel speed sensor is positioned close to a magnetic encoder ring incorporated into
the inboard seal of the wheel bearing. The head of each rear wheel speed sensor is positioned close to a magnetic encoder
ring incorporated into the rear wheel bearing assembly. Each encoder ring contains 46 north and south poles. A fly lead
connects each sensor to the vehicle harness.
The wheel speed sensors each have a signal and a return connection with the ABS module. When the ignition is ON the ABS
module supplies a signal feed to the wheel speed sensors and monitors the return signals. Any rotation of the road wheels
induces current fluctuations in the return signals, which are converted into individual wheel speeds and overall vehicle speed
by the ABS module.
The ABS module broadcasts the individual wheel speeds and the vehicle speed on the high speed CAN bus for use by other
systems, although vehicle speed information to the roof opening panel motor/module is a hardwired connection.
If a wheel speed sensor fault is detected by the ABS module, 'ABS FAULT' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message
center and an amber warning indicator will illuminate.
As the wheel speed sensors are active devices, a return signal is available when the road wheels are not rotating. This enables
the ABS module to check the condition of the speed sensors while the vehicle is stationary.
Steering Angle Sensor

www.JagDocs.com
The steering angle sensor measures the steering wheel angle and the rate of change of the steering wheel angle. These
measurements are received by the ABS module and broadcast on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems.
The steering angle sensor is mounted on the steering column upper shroud mounting bracket, immediately behind the
multifunction switches, and is secured by 2 screws. A fly lead connects the sensor to the passenger compartment wiring
harness via a 4 pin multiplug.
The sensor is housed in a 'U' shaped plastic casing and contains two offset LED (light emitting diode)s facing two detectors.
An encoder ring is mounted on the inner steering column shaft and intersects the LEDs and detectors. The encoder ring
contains 60 slots which break and restore the light beams between the LEDs and the detectors as the steering wheel is
rotated. The ABS module is able to determine the direction of rotation of the steering wheel by monitoring when the light
beams change state. The LEDs and detectors are mounted in such a way that only one beam will change state, either to
broken or restored, at any one time.
The center (straight ahead) position of the steering wheel has to be learned by the ABS module every time the ignition is
switched ON. The steering angle sensor is unable to determine the center position so inputs from the yaw rate and lateral
acceleration sensor and wheel speed signals are also used by the ABS module to help it perform this process. If extreme
weather conditions are present, for example ice causing extreme wheel spin or understeer/oversteer, the ABS module may not
be able to determine the center position of the steering wheel. In this situation 'DSC NOT AVAILABLE' will be displayed in the
instrument cluster message center and the amber warning indicator will illuminate.
'DSC NOT AVAILABLE' will also be displayed if the ABS module detects a steering angle sensor fault. The amber warning
indicator will illuminate until the fault is rectified.
Yaw Rate and Lateral Acceleration Sensor

www.JagDocs.com
The yaw rate and lateral acceleration sensor is mounted on the rear parcel shelf. The sensor is secured by two screws and
connects to the vehicle wiring via a four pin multiplug.
When the ignition is ON, the sensor receives a power feed from the CJB. The ground path for the sensor is located behind the
left hand rear seat back. The sensor measures the yaw rate and lateral acceleration of the vehicle, providing values to the ABS
module via a dedicated, private high speed CAN bus connection. The ABS module broadcasts these values on the high speed
CAN bus for use by other systems.
If a sensor fault is detected by the ABS module, 'DSC NOT AVAILABLE' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message
center and the amber warning indicator will illuminate.
Stoplamp Switch
www.JagDocs.com
The stoplamp switch is mounted on the brake pedal box and is connected to the vehicle harness via a four pin multiplug.
When the brake pedal is pressed, the switch contacts close. This allows a hard wired signal feed to be sent to the ECM. A
stoplamp switch status message is then sent from the ECM to the ABS module on the high speed CAN bus. The ABS module is
then able to control braking force accordingly in conjunction with the HCU.
NOTE: The stoplamp switch also forms part of the speed control system.
For additional information, refer to:
Speed Control (310-03 Speed Control - 3.0L V6 - TdV6, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03 Speed Control - 3.0L NA V6 - AJ27, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03 Speed Control - 4.2L NA V8 - AJV8/4.2L SC V8 - AJV8, Description and Operation).
Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 ABS warning indicator (USA only)
2 ABS warning indicator (Canada and Mexico only)
3 ABS warning indicator (all except USA, Canada and Mexico)
4 DSC warning indicator
5 Brake warning indicator (USA only)
6 Brake warning indicator (all except USA)
The instrument cluster and message center contains warning indicators and warning messages to display the operating status
of the anti-lock control - stability assist functions. The warning indicators and messages provide a visual notification of either
a system warning or information indication to the driver. There are three warning indicators on the instrument cluster, which
vary dependant on market, and several types of message relating to the anti-lock control - stability assist functions. The DSC
OFF message is accompanied by an audible warning.
The following anti-lock control - stability assist warning indicators are installed in the instrument cluster:
An amber ABS warning indicator.

A red brake warning indicator.
An amber DSC warning indicator.
Refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Description and Operation) / Information and Message Center (413-08
Information and Message Center, Description and Operation).
www.JagDocs.com
ABS Module
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 LH front brake
2 RH rear brake
3 LH rear brake
4 RH front brake
5 Primary inlet
6 Secondary inlet
The ABS module is located in the passenger side, rear engine bay and incorporates the HCU. The module is mounted on the
rear face of the HCU, which it uses to control all braking and stability functions by modulating hydraulic pressure to the
individual wheel brakes.
Two types of ABS modules are available; one for vehicles with standard Speed Control, one for vehicles fitted with Adaptive
Speed Control.
If an ABS modulator fault is detected, 'ABS FAULT' will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center and the amber
warning indicator will illuminate.
CAUTION: The ABS module and the HCU comprise a single unit and must not be separated.
Hydraulic Control Unit

The HCU is a four channel unit, secured to a mounting bracket located in the passenger side, rear engine bay. The HCU
modulates the supply of hydraulic pressure to the brakes under the control of the ABS module.
Refer to: Hydraulic Brake Actuation (206-06 Hydraulic Brake Actuation, Description and Operation).
Brake Booster Vacuum Sensor (3.0L Vehicles Only)
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Brake booster vacuum sensor
When the brake booster vacuum is low the ABS control module will raise the braking system’s hydraulic pressure to
compensate for the brake booster’s vacuum deficiency. This function will operate until the brake booster’s vacuum has been
replenished. See Brake Vacuum Assist above.
The brake booster vacuum sensor, mounted on the brake booster, provides vacuum pressure information to the ABS module.
The sensor monitors the vacuum pressure in both chambers of the brake booster, providing vacuum pressure values to the ABS
module via hard wired connections.
The brake booster vacuum sensor receives a power feed from the ABS module, which also provides a ground path for the
sensor.
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist
For a detailed description of the Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: (206-09 Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist)
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (Description and Operation),

Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (Description and Operation),
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist (Description and Operation).
2. Confirm if the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) warning light was illuminated, or still is.
NOTE: An intermittent fault may allow the warning light to go off. This does not necessarily mean the fault is not
present. Some warnings will appear to clear when the ignition is cycled. This is often because the warning has flagged as a
result of one of the vehicle's on-board diagnostic routines having run to detect the fault. If the same routine is not run when
the ignition status is set to ON, the warning will not re-flag until the routine does run.
www.JagDocs.com
Visual Inspection
Brake fluid level Warning light operation

Vacuum system Fuses
Wheel speed sensor installation Wheel speed sensors
Wheel speed sensor air gap Connectors/Pins
Magnetic pulse wheel(s) (damaged/contaminated) Harnesses
Steering angle sensor Steering wheel rotation sensor
Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer cluster installation Yaw rate sensor and accelerometer cluster
Incorrect wheel or tire size Booster pressure sensor
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
the next step.
5. If the cause is not visually evident check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) (100-00 General Information,
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
Removal
1. NOTE: The anti-lock braking system (ABS) module mounted to the

hydraulic control unit (HCU) cannot be serviced separately. If the ABS
module requires replacement, the unit must be replaced as a complete
assembly.
Remove the HCU.

For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
(206-09, Removal and Installation).
Installation
1. Install the HCU.

For additional information, refer to: Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
(206-09, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Front Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal
and Installation).

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the component
prior to removal.
Installation

www.JagDocs.com

www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
Special Tool(s)
Brake pedal hold down tool
JDS9013
Removal
All vehicles

2. Remove the secondary bulkhead RH panel.

www.JagDocs.com

3. Remove the secondary bulkhead LH panel.

All vehicles

5. Connect brake bleed pipes and bottles to the left-hand front and the
left-hand rear brake caliper bleed nipples and loosen the brake caliper
bleed nipples.
6. NOTE: To prevent the loss of brake fluid, using the special tool
apply the brake pedal and set to 40mm ( 1.6 in ) below the rest
position.
Using the special tool, press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Remove the bleed pipes and bottles.

Tighten the left-hand front brake caliper bleed nipple.
1. For vehicles with supercharger: Tighten to 14Nm.
2. For vehicles without supercharger: Tighten to 8 Nm.
Tighten the left-hand rear brake caliper bleed nipple.

1. All vehicles: Tighten to 14 Nm.
Disconnect and remove the brake bleed pipes and bottles.

Install the bleed nipple dust caps.
Disconnect the hydraulic control unit (HCU) electrical

connector.
9. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.

NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this operation.
Note the position of the components prior to removal.

Disconnect the 6 brake pipe unions.

Remove the HCU.

Loosen but do not remove the 2 nuts.
Lift and remove the HCU.
Installation
All vehicles
1. CAUTION: If accidentally dropped or knocked install a new
hydraulic control unit (HCU) and module.
NOTES:
Make sure the HCU locating grommet is correctly

seated in the bracket before installing the ABS module.
Make sure the HCU locating pin is correctly located in

the grommet, and the 2 isolators are fully seated in the
bracket slots.

Install the HCU to the retaining bracket.

Tighten to 8 Nm.
2. CAUTIONS:
www.JagDocs.com

Make sure that these components are installed to the

noted removal position.
NOTES:
Remove and discard the blanking caps.

Connect the brake pipe unions.

Tighten to 17 Nm.

Connect the HCU electrical connector.

www.JagDocs.com
6. Install the secondary bulkhead RH panel.

7. Install the secondary bulkhead LH panel.

All vehicles

9. Using the diagnostic tool, configure the new HCU.

www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Removal
NOTES:
The ignition must be switched off.

2. Disconnect the wheel speed sensor electrical connector.

www.JagDocs.com
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the harness retaining bracket
is not removed. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in damage to the harness.
NOTE: Note the orientation of the clip.
Release the wiring harness grommet.

www.JagDocs.com

prior to removal.
Remove the wheel speed sensor.

Remove the retaining bolt.
Release the wheel speed sensor.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the component is installed to

the position noted on removal.

Tighten to 6 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Steering Wheel Rotation Sensor
Removal
2. Refer to: Clockspring (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System, Removal

and Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Anti-Lock Control - Stability Assist - Yaw Rate Sensor and Accelerometer
Removal
2. Refer to: Parcel Shelf (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).
3. Torque: 6 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4. CAUTION: Make sure that all diagnostic trouble codes

(DTCs) have been removed after the road test.
NOTE: Make sure that this component is installed to

the noted removal position.
Installation

Steering System - General Information -
Steering Linkage Specifications
Steering Linkage Free Play Measurement (mm) Measurement (in)
Free play (measured at the steering wheel rim) 0-6 0-0.24
Power Steering Pump Specifications
Item Specification
Power steering pump relief pressure 106-114 bar
Item Specification
Power steering fluid Dexron 3
www.JagDocs.com
Steering System - General Information - Steering System
For a detailed description of the steering system operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections of the
workshop manual. REFER to:
Power Steering (211-02 Power Steering, Description and Operation),

Steering Linkage (211-03 Steering Linkage, Description and Operation),
Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Description and Operation),
Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and Operation),
Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and Operation),
Steering Column Switches (211-05 Steering Column Switches, Description and Operation).

Visual Inspection
www.JagDocs.com
Tire condition/pressure Fuses

Fluid level Harnesses for damage/corrosion
Leaks Electrical connector(s)
Security, condition and correct installation of suspension components Damaged/corroded pins
Security, condition and correct installation of steering system components
CAUTION: If a steering gear assembly is returned under warranty with leaking output shaft seals, but there is also
damage to the steering gear boot/boots the steering gear warranty will be invalid. This is due to the steering gear output
shaft seals being damaged due to foreign materials entering the steering gear boot and damaging the steering gear output
shaft seals thereafter.
the next step.
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the symptom chart.
Symptom Charts
WARNING: It is not possible to CHECK the torque of a patchlock bolt, if the torque is suspected to be low, the bolt must
be REMOVED/DISCARDED and a new bolt MUST be INSTALLED and torque to the correct value.
NOTE: If the module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the
Fluid Leakage
NOTE: Confirm the location of the fluid leak. CLEAN the area of the leak, inspect the area and confirm the exact position.
Ensure the fluid is not from another system on the vehicle.
Symptom Possible Causes Action
Overfilled system Correct the fluid level as required
Power steering
fluid leakage Check and install new steering gear as required, refer to the new
Steering gear module/component installation note at the top of the Symptom
Charts
Damaged fluid
Check and install a new fluid cap/reservoir as required
cap/reservoir
Tighten the hose connection or latch plate fixing to the

recommended torque.
Loose or damaged
REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System - General
hoses and fittings
Information, Specifications).
O-ring or Dowty seals
Check and install new components as required
Install new O-ring or Dowty seals as required
Check and install a new fluid cooler as required, refer to the new
Fluid cooler module/component installation note at the top of the Symptom
Charts
Check and install a new power steering pump as required, refer to

Power steering pump the new module/component installation note at the top of the
Symptom Charts
Functional
Check the steering alignment.

Steering wheel REFER to: Specifications (204-00
Steering not correctly centred
misalignment Suspension System - General
www.JagDocs.com
Check and tighten the steering

wheel retaining bolt as required.
Steering wheel loose REFER to: Specifications (211-00
Steering System - General
Check and install new

Excess play in the steering linkage
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to

adjust the steering gear yoke. Failure to
follow this instruction will invalidate the
steering gear warranty
Steering gear not correctly adjusted (causing
excessive backlash) Check and install a new steering
gear as required, refer to the
Excessive free play at installation note at the top of
steering wheel (refer to the Symptom Charts
the Steering Linkage
Inspection and Backlash
(Free play) Check in this Check and tighten the lower
section) steering column pinch bolts as
Lower steering column universal joint pinch required.
bolts loose REFER to: Specifications (211-00
Check and install a new steering

column or steering column lower
Excessive wear in steering column universal shaft as required, refer to the
joints new module/component
installation note at the top of
the Symptom Charts
Check/tighten and install new

steering gear mounting bolts as
Steering gear mounting bolts loose or required.
damaged REFER to: Specifications (211-00
Check and install new tie-rod

ends as required, refer to the
Wear in steering gear tie-rod end ball joints new module/component
the Symptom Charts
NOTE: Inner ball joint wear is rare. The steering

gear installed to all Jaguar vehicles has a spring
loaded pinion to ensure the correct level of Check and install new steering
engagement between the rack and pinion. This play gear as required, refer to the
is optimized with the steering gear in the central new module/component
position and should not be confused with inner ball installation note at the top of
joint wear. Check for vertical motion in the inner ball the Symptom Charts
joint with the steering gear in the central position.
Wear in steering gear inner ball joints
Check and install new

Wear in suspension ball joints/bushings

Steering gear not correctly adjusted
www.JagDocs.com

the Symptom Charts
Check and rectify the source of

the contamination and install
new brake pads and discs as
Veer under braking Contamination of brake pads and discs required, refer to the new
module/component installation
note at the top of the Symptom
Charts
Check and rectify sticking slide

pins and install new calipers as
required, refer to the new
Seized front brake caliper slide pins or piston
Charts
Damaged brake discs
Check and install new brake discs
as required, refer to the new
Charts
For information on diagnosis of

uneven tire wear.
REFER to: Suspension System
(204-00 Suspension System -
General Information, Diagnosis
Uneven tire wear
and Testing).
Incorrect tire pressure
Check and adjust tire pressures
as required.
Vehicle pulls to one side REFER to: Specifications (204-04
when driving on a level Wheels and Tires,
surface Specifications).
NOTE: Dealerships must keep a

copy of the BEFORE and AFTER
Incorrect geometry settings geometry figures with job card for future
reference
Check and adjust geometry as

required. REFER to: (204-00
www.JagDocs.com
Suspension System - General
Information)
(General Procedures),
Front Toe Adjustment (General
Procedures),
Rear Toe Adjustment (General
Procedures).
Notify the customer of incorrect

Vehicle is unevenly loaded or overloaded
vehicle loading

Steering gear is not correctly adjusted
the Symptom Charts

front suspension components as
Loose, damaged or worn front suspension required.
components REFER to: Specifications (204-00
www.JagDocs.com

rear suspension components as
Loose, damaged or worn rear suspension required.
components REFER to: Specifications (204-00
For information on diagnosis of

the brake system.
REFER to: Brake System (206-00
Incorrect brake operation
Brake System - General
Information, Diagnosis and
Testing).
Set underbody alignment

referring to the Removal and
Incorrect underbody alignment Installation procedures in section
502-00 of the workshop manual
for instruction
Check and adjust the tire

pressures as required.
REFER to: Specifications (204-04
Incorrect tire pressure or tire size Wheels and Tires,
Specifications).
Check and install a new tire as
required
Vehicle wanders from

side to side when driven Notify the customer of incorrect
Vehicle is unevenly or excessively loaded
straight ahead and the vehicle loading
steering wheel is held in
a firm position
Check and adjust as required.
REFER to: (204-00 Suspension
System - General Information)
Incorrect toe adjustment (General Procedures),
Front Toe Adjustment (General
Procedures),
Rear Toe Adjustment (General
Procedures).
Noise
Check for leaks and rectify as required. For further

information refer to the symptom charts for
Low power steering fluid level
leakage in this section. Fill power steering fluid
reservoir to correct level
NOTE: Look for small air bubbles Bleed the power steering system.
visible in the fluid, air may also get REFER to: Power Steering System Bleeding
trapped in the hydraulic system (211-00 Steering System - General Information,
Air in hydraulic system
Continuous noise
Power steering pipe/hose in Check and reposition, or install new IF
contact with the vehicle body damaged/deformed, power steering pipe/hose
Check and clear restriction to pipe/hose

Power steering pipe/hose
Reposition power steering pipe/hose. Install new
restricted or twisted
pipe/hose IF permanently damaged/deformed
Tighten the power steering pump mounting bolts

Power steering pump mounting to the correct torque.
bolts loose REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System
- General Information, Specifications).
www.JagDocs.com
Check and fill power steering fluid reservoir to

NOTE: Refer to the power correct level
steering pressure check in this section Bleed the power steering system.
Noise gets worse REFER to: Power Steering System Bleeding
when system is Low power steering fluid level (211-00 Steering System - General Information,
loaded Aerated fluid General Procedures).
Low power steering pump Check power steering pump pressure. If the pump
pressure pressure is low, install a new power steering
pump
Front End Accessory Check FEAD belt tension

FEAD belt incorrectly tensioned
Drive (FEAD) belt Check FEAD belt condition and install a new belt
or glazed
squeal as required
Chirp noise from the Check FEAD belt tension

steering pump when a Loose or worn FEAD belt Check FEAD belt condition and install a new belt
load is applied as required
Scrape/grind noise Steering column shroud foul Correctly install the steering column shroud to
from behind steering condition or clockspring eliminate the foul condition
wheel while steering Install a new clockspring as required
Foreign objects Remove foreign objects from between steering

column shroud and steering wheel/steering
column rotating components
Click Clockspring or steering column Correctly install and install new components as
multifunction switch LH required
Loose universal joint pinch bolt Install a new universal joint pinch bolt and
tighten to correct specification.
REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System
Squeak Steering column shroud joints Apply Krytox spray to steering column shroud
joints
Clockspring Install new clockspring as required

Loose fixings (universal joint Tighten fixings to correct specification.

Knock pinch bolt and steering column REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System
fixings) - General Information, Specifications).
Foreign objects Remove foreign objects from between steering

column shroud and steering wheel/steering
column rotating components
Rattle
Loose fixings Tighten steering column fixings to correct
specification.
REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System
Electric motor/solenoid
NOTE: Before carrying out repairs/replacement,
assess column adjustment noise levels against other
vehicles of the same model
Noise while adjusting
column Install new components as required
Motor spindle/lead screw Lubricate lead screw
Vibration

www.JagDocs.com
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to adjust the

steering gear yoke. Failure to follow this
Loose or worn steering instruction will invalidate the steering gear
Wheel Fight (Kick Back) - condition warranty.
where roughness is felt in the components/bushings
steering wheel by the driver when Tighten and install new steering
the vehicle is driven over rough components/bushings as required
surfaces
Loose or worn suspension Tighten and install new suspension

components/bushings components/bushings as required
Check for wheel and tire damage. Install

Road wheel and tire new components as required
Nibble (Shimmy) - condition where
condition Check for tire uniformity. Install new
oscillation of the steering wheel
tire(s) as required
occurs (not vertical which is Shake).
This is driven by road wheel
imbalance Check and adjust road wheel balance as
Road wheel imbalance
required
NOTE: Vibration smooths out Ensure tires installed are to Jaguar

Shake - condition where vertical
after several miles of driving specification. Install new tires as
vibration of the steering
required
wheel/column occurs (not
Road wheel imbalance due Check and adjust tire pressures to
oscillation which is Nibble)
to tire flat-spotting correct specification
Component Tests
Steering Linkage Inspection and Backlash (Free play) Check
CAUTION: Steering gear boots must be handled carefully to avoid damage. Use new clamps when installing steering gear
boots.
Inspect the boots for cuts, deterioration, twisting or distortion. Check the steering gear boots to make sure they are tight.
Install new boots or clamps as required.
NOTE: The following steps must be carried out with assistance.
1. With the wheels in the straight ahead position, gently turn the steering wheel to the left and the right to check for free
play.
2. Free play should be between 0 and 6 mm (0 and 0.24 in) at the steering wheel rim. If the free play exceeds this limit,
either the ball joints are worn, the lower steering column joints are worn or the backlash of the steering gear is
excessive.
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to adjust the steering gear yoke. Failure to follow this instruction will invalidate the steering
gear warranty.
3. The backlash of the steering gear cannot be adjusted, install a new steering gear if excessive backlash is diagnosed.
4. Grasp the steering wheel firmly and move it up and down and to the left and right without turning the wheel to check
for column bearing wear, steering wheel or steering column.
Power Steering Fluid Condition Check
1. Run the engine for 2 minutes.
2. Check the power steering fluid system level.
3. Observe the color and the odor. The color under normal circumstances should be dark reddish, not brown or black.
4. Using a suitable clean syringe extract a suitable amount of fluid from the reservoir.
5. Allow the fluid to drip onto a facial tissue and examine the stain.
6. If evidence of solid material is found, the power steering fluid system should be drained for further inspection.
7. If fluid contamination or steering component failure is confirmed by the sediment in the power steering fluid system,
refer to Steering Fault Diagnosis by Symptom Charts in this section.
Power Steering Pressure Test

www.JagDocs.com
Test Equipment

1 211-011 Pressure Gauge Hose
2 211-011-08 Pump Return Hose
3 211-011-07 Pump Return Hose Connector
4 211-011-03/2 Test Equipment to High Pressure Hose Adaptor
5 211-011-03/1 Pump High Pressure Outlet to Hose Adaptor
6 211-011-02 Pump Adaptor to Control Valve Hose
7 211-011-01 Control Valve
8 211-011 Pressure Gauge
9 - 'O' Ring Seal
The measurement of the maximum system pressure, (which is governed by the pressure relief valve) is achieved by inserting
the Service Tool (pressure gauge and adaptors) into the fluid circuit of the power steering system. Run the engine at idle
speed, turn the steering from lock to lock and read the maximum pressure recorded on the gauge.
Installing Test Equipment
To install the pressure test equipment:
Place a suitable drain tray below the power steering pump.

Install a hose clamp on the reservoir to pump hose prior to disconnecting any hoses, to avoid unnecessary loss of fluid.
Disconnect the hose from the power steering pump high pressure outlet.
Install the pump outlet to hose adaptor (5). Do not omit the 'O' ring seal (9).
Connect the power steering pump adaptor to control valve hose (6) of the test equipment.
Install the adaptor (4) in the high pressure hose previously removed from the power steering pump outlet.
Connect the connector (3) of the test equipment hose (2) to the adaptor (4).
Remove the hose clamp from the reservoir hose.
Start the engine to check the system pressure.
With the control valve (7) OPEN and the engine idling, the following system pressures may be checked:
During turning when static (dry parking pressure).

When the steering is held on full lock (maximum system pressure or pressure relief).
With the steering at rest (idle pressure or back pressure).
CAUTIONS:
To avoid excessive heating of the power steering pump when checking the pressure, do not close the valve for more than
5 seconds maximum.
When checking the pump pressure DO NOT drive the vehicle with the test equipment installed.
With the control valve (7) CLOSED the power steering pump maximum output pressure can be checked.
Removing Test Equipment
To remove the test equipment:
Install a hose clamp on the reservoir to power steering pump hose.

Removing the test equipment is a reversal of the installation instructions.
Install a new 'O' ring seal (9) to the power steering pump high pressure outlet to hose connection.
Install the original hose to the power steering pump.
Remove the clamp from the reservoir to the power steering pump hose.
Top-up the reservoir fluid.
Bleed the power steering system.
REFER to: Power Steering System Bleeding (211-00 Steering System - General Information, General Procedures).
Description of Terms
www.JagDocs.com
General Steering System Noises
Boom
Rhythmic sound like a drum roll or distant thunder. May cause pressure on the ear drum.
Buzz
Low-pitched sound, like a bee. Usually associated with vibrations.
Chatter
Rapidly repeating metallic sound.
Chuckle
Rapid noise that sounds like a stick against the spokes of a spinning bicycle wheel.
Chirp
High pitched rapidly repeating sound, like chirping birds.
Click
Light sound, like a ball point pen being clicked.
Click/Thump
Heavy metal-to-metal sound, like a hammer striking steel.
Grind
Abrasive sound, like a grinding wheel or sandpaper rubbing against wood.
Groan/Moan
Continuous, low-pitched humming sound.
Groan/Howl
Low, guttural sound, like an angry dog.
Hiss
Continuous sound like air escaping from a tire valve.
www.JagDocs.com
Hum
Continuous sound of varying frequencies, like a wire humming in the wind.
Knock
Heavy, loud repeating sound like a knock on a door.
Ping
Similar to knock, except at higher frequency.
Rattle
A sound suggesting looseness, such as marbles rolling around in a can.
Roar
Deep, long, prolonged sound like an animal, or winds and ocean waves.
Rumble
Low, heavy continuous sound like that made by wagons or thunder.
Scrape
Grating noise like one hard plastic part rubbing against another.
Squeak
High-pitched sound like rubbing a clean window.

www.JagDocs.com
Squeal
Continuous, high-pitched sound like running finger nails across a chalkboard.
Tap
Light, hammering sound like tapping pencil on edge of table. May be rhythmic or intermittent.
Whirr/Whine
High-pitched buzzing sound, like an electric motor or drill.
Whistle
Sharp, shrill sound, like wind passing a small opening.
Specific Steering System Noise Types
Belt Squeal
Belt squeal is a high frequency air-borne noise generated by slippage of the ribbed Vee belt on the power steering pump
pulley. Squeal increases with system loading and at full lock.
Clonk
Clonk is a structure-borne noise heard as a loose-sounding rattle or vibration coming from the steering column. Clonk can be
identified by driving and turning over cobblestones, rough roads, or high frequency bumps such as 25-50 mm tall tar strips.
Clonk requires a tie-rod load impact.
Column Knock
Column knock is a loose-sounding rattle or vibration generated by the steering column shaft contacting other portions of the
column assembly. The noise is both audible and tactile. Column knock is generated by driving over cobblestones or rough
pavement. It is not necessary to turn the steering wheel to create this noise.
Column Rattle
Column rattle is a metallic sounding noise created when applying a highly impulsive force to the steering wheel. Column rattle
is often used to combine the more general group of column noises including clonk and column knock. Column rattle noises can
be caused by clonk, knock, loose column components, bonus parts etc. A series of parked, straight-line driving, and cornering
tests should be carried out to isolate the source/sources.
Grinding/Scrape
Grinding is a low frequency noise in the column when the steering wheel is turned. It is generally caused by interference
between moving components such as the steering wheel to steering column shroud.
Grunt (Squawk/Whoop)
Grunt is a 'honking' sound elicited when coming off one of the steering stops. Grunt is generally excited during parking
manoeuvres with a low to medium speed steering input.
Hiss (Swish)
Hiss or Valve Hiss is a high-frequency sound coming from the steering gear when the system is loaded. It is a rushing or
'swish' noise that doesn't change frequency with RPM. Hiss is the general noise generated by the flow of hydraulic fluid through
restrictions in the steering system. Restrictions include the rotary steering valve, power steering tubes, connectors, tuning
orifices, etc. Hiss can be air-borne and structure-borne, but the structure-borne path through the steering intermediate shaft is
usually dominant.
Moan (Groan)
Moan is the general structure-borne noise of the steering system. Moan is primarily transmitted to the driver via the body
structure through the pump mount, engine mounts, power steering lines and power steering brackets. On some vehicles, moan
is a loud humming noise, often present when the wheel is turned and the system is loaded. It may change frequency with
engine RPM and if the system is loaded or unloaded.
Steering Gear Knock (Steering Gear Slap)
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to adjust the steering gear yoke. Failure to follow this instruction will invalidate the steering
gear warranty.
Steering gear knock is a rattle sound and steering wheel vibration caused by separation of the steering gear and pinion while
driving over bumps. It is a structure-borne noise transmitted through the intermediate shaft and column. Steering gear knock
can also be heard as a 'thump' or impact noise that occurs with the vehicle stationary when the steering wheel is released
www.JagDocs.com
from a loaded position and allowed to return to rest. Noise occurs with the engine on or off.
Rattles
Rattles are noises caused by knocking or hitting of components in the steering system. Steering rattles can occur in the engine
compartment, the suspension, or the passenger compartment. Rattles can be caused by loose components, movable and
flexible components, and improper clearances.
Squeaks/Scrapes
Squeaks/Scrapes are noises due to friction or component rubbing anywhere in the steering system. Squeaks/Scrapes have
appeared in steering linkages and joints, in column components and in column and steering wheel trim.
Weep
Weep is an air-borne noise, occasionally generated when turning the steering across lock at a constant rate. When present on
a vehicle the noise, once initiated can often be maintained across a large proportion of the available steering movement.
Whistle
Whistle is similar to hiss but is louder and of a higher frequency. It is also more of a pure tone noise than hiss. Whistle is
air-borne and is generated by a high flow rate of hydraulic fluid through a small restriction.
Zip
Zip noise is the air-borne noise generated by power steering pump cavitation when power steering fluid does not flow freely
through the suction hose from the reservoir to the pump. Zip primarily occurs during cold weather at start-up.
Steering System Vibrations and Harshness
Buzz
Buzz is a tactile rotary vibration felt in the steering wheel when steering inputs are slow. Buzz can also be called a grinding
feel and it is closely related to grunt and is caused by high system gain with low damping. Buzz is generally excited during
parking manoeuvres with low to medium speed steering input.
Buzz (Electrical)
A different steering buzz can be caused by pulse width modulated (PWM) electric actuators used in variable assist steering
systems. This buzz is felt by turning the ignition key to run without starting the engine and holding onto the steering wheel.
In extreme cases, the buzz can be felt with the engine running also.
Column/Steering Wheel Shake
Column shake is a low frequency vertical vibration excited by primary engine vibrations.
Nibble (Shimmy)
Steering nibble is a rotary oscillation or vibration of the steering wheel, which can be excited at a specific vehicle speed.
Nibble is driven by wheel and tire imbalance exciting a suspension recession mode, which then translates into steering gear
travel and finally steering wheel nibble.
Shudder (Judder)
Shudder is a low frequency oscillation of the entire steering system (tire, wheels, steering gear and linkage, etc.) when the
vehicle is steered during static-park or at low speeds. Shudder is very dependent on road surface.
Torque/Velocity Variation (Phasing/Effort Cycling)
Steering wheel torque variation occurring twice in one revolution is normally as a result of problems with the lower steering
column (intermediate shaft), but foul conditions generally result in either constant stiffness or single point stiffness.
Depending upon the orientation of the joints, the steering can feel asymmetric (torque falling off in one direction and rising in
the other) or else it can simply have pronounced peaks and troughs as the steering moves from lock to lock.
Wheel Fight (Kick Back)
Wheel fight is excess feedback of sudden road forces through the steering system and back to the driver. It is evaluated at all
vehicle speeds over cobblestones, rough roads, and potholes. The tires, wheels, and suspension generate forces into the
steering systems. Steering friction, hydraulic damping, hydraulic compliance, mechanical compliance, steering ratio, and assist
gain all affect how much is transmitted to the driver.
www.JagDocs.com
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System Bleeding
General Procedures
1. Clean power steering fluid reservoir around the filler cap and fluid
indicator.
Check the power steering fluid, if aerated, wait until fluid is free
from bubbles then top-up reservoir to UPPER level mark with
recommended fluid.
2. CAUTION: Fluid must always be present in the reservoir

during bleeding.
Remove the filler cap and fill to the MAX level mark.
Install the reservoir filler cap.
www.JagDocs.com
3. Start the engine and allow to run for 10 seconds, stop the engine.
Check the power steering fluid, if aerated, wait until fluid is free
from bubbles then top-up reservoir to UPPER level mark with
recommended fluid.
4. CAUTION: Do not hold steering on full lock for longer than 10

seconds.
Start the engine and turn steering fully lock to lock, stop the engine.
Check and top-up power steering fluid level.
5. Start and run the engine for 2 minutes, turn the steering fully lock to
lock.
Check and top-up power steering fluid level.
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System Flushing
General Procedures
NOTES:
If heavy steering or contamination within the power steering system is found, it is necessary to carry out the system
flush procedure as detailed below. If any components have been replaced in the power steering system the procedure below
must be carried out in full.
1. Remove the power steering fluid reservoir cap.
2. Using a suitable syringe, remove the power steering fluid from the power
steering fluid reservoir.
3. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping fluids.
Detach the power steering fluid reservoir.

www.JagDocs.com
Detach but do not remove the power steering fluid

reservoir.
Release the power steering fluid return hose from
the power steering fluid reservoir.
If a quick release coupling is fitted to the power
steering return hose, release the power steering
fluid return hose from the coupling by removing the
clip.
NOTE: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use

new blanking caps.
Using a suitable blanking cap, cap the power steering

reservoir return pipe.
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: Make sure the extended pipe is not kinked or

twisted and is correctly secured with hose clips.
Attach a suitable pipe to the power steering return hose to

allow the fluid to drain.
6. NOTES:
The suitable funnel should have the a capacity of 4

litres and O-ring seal
The suitable funnel must be tightly sealed to the

power steering fluid reservoir to avoid fluid leakage.
www.JagDocs.com
Install a suitable funnel onto the power steering fluid

reservoir.

Raise and support the vehicle with the wheels just clear of the ground.
8. CAUTIONS:
Steps 8 and 9 must be carried out within 2 - 3 seconds of each

other. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
power steering system.
Using the suitable funnel, top up the power steering system with the
specified fluid. Make sure the fluid level is maintained at two thirds full
in the funnel.
9. CAUTIONS:
Do not allow the power steering fluid level in the

power steering fluid reservoir to fall below the minimum
power steering fluid level. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the power steering system.
Make sure the engine is switched off as soon as the

full 4 litres of power steering fluid has entered the power
steering fluid reservoir.
Flush the power steering system.

Start the engine
With assistance turn the steering slowly lock to lock
3 times at approximately 1 revolution every 5
seconds.
Continue to flush the power steering system until 4
litres of power steering fluid has been added to the
power steering reservoir. This should take
approximately 30 seconds.

www.JagDocs.com
Remove the suitable funnel.
Remove the suitable pipe to the power steering return

hose.

If a quick release coupling is fitted to the power steering return hose,

connect the power steering fluid return hose to the coupling by installing
the clip.
13. Install a new power steering fluid reservoir. For additional information,
refer to: (211-02 Power Steering)
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir - V6 3.0L Petrol (Removal and
Installation),
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (Removal and
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Steering System - General Information - Power Steering System Filling TDV6
3.0L Diesel
General Procedures
Draining
1.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation).
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the area around the

component is clean and free of foreign material.
NOTE: Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
Filling
1. CAUTIONS:

Install new o-ring seals

www.JagDocs.com
2. Torque: 24 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4. CAUTION: Fluid must always be present in the
reservoir during bleeding.
Fill the power steering reservoir.
5. Install the vacuum hand pump to the power steering fluid reservoir.
www.JagDocs.com
6. NOTE: Apply the maximum vacuum possible on the reservoir for 1

minute.
Apply a vacuum to the power steering fluid reservoir.
7. Remove the vacuum hand pump from the power steering fluid reservoir.

9.
Run the engine for 30 seconds.
Turn the steering fully lock-to-lock, stop the engine.
minute.


www.JagDocs.com
14.
minute.
19.
www.JagDocs.com
20.
Install the power steering fluid reservoir cap.
21. Check for fluid leaks.
Installation).
Power Steering -

Lower steering column slider pinch bolt 35 26 -
Lower steering column to steering gear pinch bolt 35 26 -
Power steering control valve actuator 2 - 18
Power steering fluid cooler retaining bolts 7 - 62
Power steering pump pulley retaining bolts 20 25 -
Power steering pump retaining bolts - All except vehicles with diesel engine 25 18 -
Power steering pump retaining bolts - Vehicles with diesel engine 22 16 -
Power steering pump to steering gear pressure line 25 18 -
Steering gear retaining bolts 100 74 -
Steering gear supply and return lines 10 - 89
www.JagDocs.com
Power Steering - Power Steering - Component Location
POWER STEERING - COMPONENT LOCATION 3.0L TdV6

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Tie-rod end (2 off)
2 Power steering pump
3 Power steering fluid reservoir
4 Feed pipe to pump
5 Low pressure fluid return hose
6 Servotronic transducer valve
7 High pressure feed pipe to steering gear
8 Valve unit
9 Tie-rod (2 off)
10 Mounting bolt (3 off)
11 Steering gear
www.JagDocs.com
Power Steering - Power Steering - Overview
OVERVIEW
The steering system comprises a ZF manufactured rack and pinion Servotronic 2 steering gear, a power steering pump, a fluid
reservoir, a fluid cooler (if fitted) and fluid hoses. The steering gear is an end take-off rack and pinion power assisted unit with
the addition of road speed proportional ZF Servotronic 2 assistance.
The steering rack is connected to the front wheel knuckles by adjustable tie-rods. The tie-rods allow for adjustment to
centralize the steering wheel and also adjust the toe setting of the front wheel geometry.
The steering gear has a variable ratio rack. This provides conventional response when the steering is in the centre, straight
ahead position, but provides more direct and faster steering as the turning angle increases. The variable ratio provides precise
and rapid steering response at high speeds and provides optimized steering of the vehicle when manoeuvring into parking
spaces, turning in tight areas and when cornering in extreme conditions.
Fluid is supplied to the steering gear by a fixed displacement vane pump on petrol models and a variable displacement pump
on diesel models. The pump is driven by a belt from the crankshaft pulley. The pump is mounted on the LH (left-hand) side of
the engine, above the A/C (air conditioning) compressor. A fluid reservoir is positioned at the front LH side of the engine
compartment, forward of the front suspension housing.
On petrol engine vehicles, a fluid cooler is located in front of the engine cooling radiator. Diesel models do not have a fluid
cooler.
Servotronic 2 adds electronic control and speed sensitive steering to the steering gear. The Servotronic 2 feature provides easy
and comfortable steering operation when parking, improved 'road feel' at increased road speeds and adds an integrated,
positive center feel feature which optimises steering wheel torque during high speed driving. The Servotronic 2 system is
controlled by software which is incorporated into the instrument cluster. The software responds to road speed signals and
www.JagDocs.com
controls the power assistance via a transducer valve located on the steering gear valve housing.
Power Steering - Power Steering - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
The following hydraulic circuits show power steering operation and fluid flow for the steering in a straight ahead, neutral
position and when turning right. The circuit diagram for turning left is similar to that shown for turning right.
Power Steering in Neutral Position

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Return fluid control groove
2 Radial groove
3 Feed fluid control groove
4 Radial groove
5 Axial groove
6 Feed fluid control edge
7 Feed fluid radial groove
8 Return fluid control edge
9 Return fluid chamber
10 Cut-off valve
11 Radial groove
14 Radial groove
15 Orifice
16 Balls
17 Compression spring
18 Torsion bar
20 Valve rotor
21 Reaction piston
22 Reaction chamber
23 Centering piece
24 Pressure relief/flow limiting valve
26 Inner tie-rod
27 Pinion
28 Valve sleeve
29 Steering gear rack
30 Steering gear housing
31 Power assist cylinder - right
32 Piston
33 Power assist cylinder - left
When the engine is started, the power steering pump draws fluid from the reservoir down the low pressure suction line. The
fluid passes through the pump and is delivered at pressure, via a hose, to the steering rack valve unit.
The pressurized fluid flows through a connecting bore in the valve and, via the feed fluid radial groove and the transverse
bores in the valve sleeve, passes to the feed fluid control groove of the valve rotor.
In the neutral (straight ahead) position , the fluid passes over the open feed fluid control edges to all valve sleeve axial
grooves. The fluid then passes through return fluid control edges and the return fluid grooves of the valve rotor, back to the
www.JagDocs.com
reservoir passes via the fluid cooler.
Simultaneously, the radial grooves of the valve and their associated pipes provide a connection the left and right power assist
cylinders.
Power Steering in Right Turn Position

Item Description
1 Return fluid control groove
2 Radial groove
3 Feed fluid control groove
4 Radial groove
5 Axial groove
6 Feed fluid control edge
8 Return fluid control edge
10 Cut-off valve
11 Radial groove
14 Radial groove
15 Orifice
16 Balls
18 Torsion bar
20 Valve rotor
21 Reaction piston
www.JagDocs.com
22 Reaction chamber
23 Centering piece
24 Pressure relief/flow limiting valve
26 Inner tie-rod
27 Pinion
28 Valve sleeve
29 Steering gear rack
30 Steering gear housing
31 Power assist cylinder - right
32 Piston
33 Power assist cylinder - left
When the steering wheel is turned to the right, the steering rack and piston moves to the left in the piston bore. The valve
rotor is rotated to the right (clockwise) and pressurized fluid is directed over the further opened feed fluid control edges and to
the associated axial grooves, the radial groove and via an external pipe to the left power assist cylinder chamber. The pressure
applied to the piston from the left power assist cylinder chamber provides the hydraulic assistance.
An adaptable pressure build-up is achieved by the partially or fully closed feed fluid control edges restricting or preventing a
connection between the fluid pressure inlet and the other axial grooves connected to the radial groove.
Simultaneously, the fluid pressure outlet to the pressurized axial grooves are restricted or partially restricted by the closing
return fluid control edges. The fluid displaced by the piston from the right power assist cylinder chamber, flows through an
external pipe to the radial grooves. From there the fluid passes to the associated axial grooves and on to the return fluid
control grooves, via the further opened return fluid control edges.
The return flow of fluid to the reservoir passes via interconnecting bores which lead to the return fluid chamber. When the
steering wheel is turned to the left the operating sequence is as above but the pressure is applied to the opposite side of the
piston.
Servotronic Operation
The Servotronic software contains a number of steering maps which are selected via the car configuration file depending on the
vehicle mode and tire fitment.
If a failure of the Servotronic valve or software occurs, the system will suspend Servotronic assistance and only normal power
steering wheel be available. Fault codes relating to the fault are stored, but no warning lamps are illuminated and the driver
may be aware of the steering being 'heavier' than usual.
When the vehicle is manoeuvred into and out of a parking space (or other similar manoeuvre), the Servotronic software uses
road speed data from the ABS module to determine the vehicle speed, which in this case will be slow or stationary. The
Servotronic software analyses the signals and outputs an appropriate control current to the Servotronic transducer valve. The
Servotronic valve closes and prevents fluid flowing from the feed fluid radial groove to the reaction chamber. An orifice also
ensures that there is return pressure in the reaction chamber. This condition eliminates any 'reaction' ensuring that the
steering is very light to operate, reducing the effort required to turn the steering wheel.
As the vehicle is driven and the road speed increases, the Servotronic software analyses the road speed signals from the ABS
(anti-lock brake system) module and reduces the amount of control current supplied to the Servotronic valve which increases
the reaction pressure. This modifies the input torque applied through the steering wheel and provides the driver with an
improved 'road feel' allowing precise steering and directional stability.
Steering Gear
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Locknut ( 2 off)
2 RH (right-hand) tie-rod
3 Steering gear boot (2 off)
4 Steering gear
5 Bolt and washer (3 off)
6 Servotronic valve
7 Valve unit
8 Input shaft
9 LH (left-hand) tie-rod
10 Steering gear mounting bushes
The steering gear is located at the rear of the engine and attached to the front sub-frame. The gear is secured to the
sub-frame with 3 bolts and washers which screw into threaded tubes in bushes which are integral with the sub-frame.
The steering gear comprises an aluminum, cast, valve housing which contains the hydraulic valve unit and Servotronic valve.
The mechanical steering rack and the hydraulic actuator are located in a steel cylinder which is attached to the cast valve
housing.
The steering gear uses a rack with an integrated piston which is guided on plain bearings within the cylinder and the valve
housing. The pinion, which is attached to the valve unit, runs in bearings and meshes with the rack teeth. The rack is pressed
against the pinion by a spring loaded yoke which ensures that the teeth mesh with the minimum of play. The pinion is
connected to the valve unit via a torsion bar. The rotary motion of the steering wheel is converted into linear movement of the
rack by the rack and pinion mechanism and is initiated by the valve unit. This movement is transferred into movement of the
road wheels by adjustable tie-rods.
www.JagDocs.com
The rack teeth angles vary from 20 degrees in the centre position to 40 degrees at the end sections of the rack. It is this
variation in teeth angles which provides the variable ratio.
The piston of the hydraulic actuator is located on the rack bar. Each side of the piston is connected to fluid pressure or fluid
return via external metal pipes which are connected to the valve unit.
Each end of the rack bar has a threaded hole which provides for the fitment of the tie-rod. The external ends of the gear are
sealed with boots which prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture. The tie-rod has a long threaded area which allows for the
fitment of the tie-rod end. The thread allows for the adjustment of the steering toe. When the correct toe setting is achieved,
a locknut is tightened against the tie-rod end preventing inadvertent movement.
The gear has a central hole machined along most of its length. The hole allows the air in the boots to be balanced when the
steering is turned. The boots are serviceable items and are retained on the gear housing and the tie-rod with clips.
Valve Unit
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Pressure/return to/from steering gear
3 Cut-off valve
4 Radial groove
6 Fluid feed radial groove
7 Radial groove
8 Orifice
9 Balls
11 Torsion bar
12 Valve rotor
13 Reaction piston
14 Reaction chamber
15 Centering piece
16 Return to reservoir
17 Pressure supply from pump
18 Pinion
19 Steering gear rack bar
20 Valve sleeve
The valve unit is an integral part of the steering gear. The principle function of the valve unit is to provide power assistance
(i.e. when parking) to optimize the effort required to turn the steering wheel.
The pinion housing of the valve is an integral part of the main steering gear casting. The pinion housing has four machined
ports which provide connections for pressure feed from the power steering pump, return fluid to the reservoir and pressure
feeds to each side of the cylinder piston.
The valve unit comprises an outer sleeve, an input shaft, a torsion bar and a pinion shaft. The valve unit is co-axial with the
pinion shaft which is connected to the steering column via the input shaft. The valve unit components are located in the
steering gear pinion housing which is sealed with a cap.
The outer sleeve is located in the main bore of the pinion housing. Three annular grooves are machined on its outer diameter.
PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene) rings are located between the grooves and seal against the bore of the pinion housing. Holes
are drilled radially in each annular groove through the wall of the sleeve. The bore of the outer sleeve is machined to accept
the input shaft. Six equally spaced slots are machined in the bore of the sleeve. The ends of the slots are closed and do not
continue to the end of the outer sleeve. The radial holes in the outer sleeve are drilled into each slot.
The input shaft has two machined flats at its outer end which allow for the attachment of the steering column intermediate
shaft yoke. The flats ensure that the intermediate shaft is fitted in the correct position. The inner end of the input shaft forms
a dog-tooth which mates with a slot in the pinion shaft. The fit of the dog-tooth in the slot allows a small amount of relative
rotation between the input shaft and the pinion shaft before the dog-tooth contacts the wall of the slot. This ensures that, if
the power assistance fails, the steering can be operated manually without over stressing the torsion bar. The central portion of
the input shaft has equally spaced longitudinal slots machined in its circumference. The slots are arranged alternately around
the input shaft.
The torsion bar is fitted inside the input shaft and is an interference fit in the pinion shaft. The torsion bar is connected to the
www.JagDocs.com
input shaft by a drive pin. The torsion bar is machined to a smaller diameter in its central section. The smaller diameter allows
the torsion bar to twist in response to torque applied from the steering wheel in relation to the grip of the tyres on the road
surface.
The pinion shaft has machined teeth on its central diameter which mate with teeth on the steering gear rack. A slot, machined
in the upper end of the pinion shaft mates with the dog-tooth on the input shaft. The pinion shaft locates in the pinion
housing and rotates on ball and roller bearings.
Servotronic Valve
The Servotronic transducer valve is located in a port in the side of the steering gear valve housing. The valve is sealed in the
housing with an O-ring seal and is secured with two long screws into threaded holes in the housing. The Servotronic valve is a
transducer controlled valve which responds to control signals supplied from Servotronic software in the instrument cluster.
The Servotronic valve determines the hydraulic reaction at the steering gear rotary valve and controls the input torque required
to turn the steering wheel. The Servotronic system allows the steering to be turned with the optimum effort when the vehicle
is stationary or manoeuvred at slow speed. The hydraulic reaction changes proportional to the vehicle speed, with the required
steering effort increasing as the vehicle moves faster. At high speeds, the Servotronic system provides the driver with a good
feedback through the steering providing precise steering and improved stability.
The instrument cluster receives road speed signals from the ABS module and calculates the correct controlling signal for the
Servotronic valve. The Servotronic software within the instrument cluster has a diagnostic capability which allows a Jaguar
approved diagnostic system to check the tune of the steering and retrieve fault codes relating to the Servotronic valve. Two
fault codes are stored relating to the valve for positive connection short to ground or battery and negative connection short to
ground or battery.
The Servotronic software within the instrument cluster also contains a number of steering maps which are selected via the car
configuration file depending on the vehicle model and tire fitment.
If a failure of the Servotronic valve or software occurs, the system will suspend Servotronic assistance and only a default level
of assistance will be available. Fault codes relating to the fault are stored in the instrument cluster. No warning lamps are
illuminated and the driver may be aware of the steering being 'heavier' than usual.
Power Steering Pump - V6 and V8 Petrol Models
NOTE: V8 pump shown
The power steering pumps used on the different petrol engine variants are basically the same pump with different flow control
valve mechanisms. The pump is a positive displacement, vane type pump which supplies a constant fluid flow to the steering
gear valve unit. The pump is driven by a Poly Vee belt from the crankshaft pulley. A self-adjusting tensioner is fitted to
maintain the correct tension on the belt.
The pump has an internal pressure relief valve and a flow control valve. The pressure relief valve limits the maximum pressure
supplied to the steering gear to 110 bar (1595 lbf in2) ± 4 bar (58 lbf in2). The flow control valve limits the maximum flow to
7.5 l/min (1.64 gal/min) ± 0.75 l/min (0.16 gal/min) regardless of engine speed. The pump has a displacement of 10.5 cm3/rev
(0.64 in3/rev).
www.JagDocs.com
A shaft runs longitudinally through the pump. One end of the shaft is fitted with a pressed-on drive pulley, the opposite end of
the shaft is closed by a cover. The shaft runs in bearings located in the body and oil seals at each end of the shaft prevent
leakage of hydraulic fluid. The pump contains ten vanes which rotate within a cam ring and are driven by the shaft. As the
vanes rotate, the cam ring causes the space between the vanes to increase. This causes a depression between the vanes and
fluid is drawn from the reservoir via the suction hose into the space between the vanes.
As the shaft rotates, the inlet port is closed to the vanes which have drawn in fluid, trapping the fluid between the vanes. The
cam ring causes the space between the vanes to reduce and consequentially compresses and pressurises the hydraulic fluid
trapped between them.
Further rotation of the shaft moves the vanes to the outlet port. As the vanes pass the port plate the pressurized fluid passes
from the pump outlet port into the pressure hose to the steering gear.
The pressurized fluid is subject to control by the flow control and pressure relief valve. The flow control valve maintains a
constant flow of fluid supplied to the steering gear irrespective of engine speed variations. The pressure relief valve limits the
maximum pressure on the output side of the pump. A metering orifice is included in the discharge port of the pump. If the
pressure in the orifice reaches a predetermined level, a spring loaded ball in the centre of the flow control valve is lifted from
its seat and allows pressurized fluid to recirculate within the pump.
The pressure relief valve will operate if the discharge from the pump is restricted, i.e.; steering held on full lock. If the output
from the pump is blocked, all output is recirculated through the pump. In this condition, as no fresh fluid is drawn into the
pump from the reservoir, the fluid temperature inside the pump will increase rapidly. Consequentially, periods of operation of
the steering gear on full lock should be kept to a minimum to prevent overheating of the pump and the fluid within it.
Power Steering Pump - 3.0L V6 Diesel Models
A variable displacement power steering pump is used on the diesel engine variants. The variable displacement, vane type
pump supplies the required hydraulic pressure to the steering gear valve unit. The pump is located at the front of the engine
and is driven by the FEAD (front end accessory drive) Poly Vee belt which is directly driven from the crankshaft. The output
from the pump increases proportionally with the load applied to the steering valve unit.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Power steering fluid inlet port
2 Flow control valve
3 Power steering fluid outlet port
4 Variable Orifice
5 Pump rotor
6 High pressure
7 Adapter ring
8 Cam Ring
9 Low pressure
The pump consists of a shaft containing a number of slots into which vanes are inserted and these vanes run within a cam ring
in the pump body. The centerline of the shaft is not concentric with that of the bore of the body and this creates the expanding
and contracting cavities that form the pumping action.
The vanes rotate within the cam ring and are driven by the shaft. As the vanes rotate, the cam ring causes the space between
the vanes to increase. This causes a depression between the vanes and fluid is drawn from the reservoir via the suction hose
into the space between the vanes. As the shaft rotates, the inlet port is closed to the vanes which have drawn in fluid,
trapping the fluid between the vanes. The cam ring causes the space between the vanes to reduce and consequentially
compresses and pressurizes the hydraulic fluid trapped between them. Further rotation of the shaft moves the vanes to the
outlet port. As the vanes pass the port plate the pressurized fluid passes from the pump outlet port into the pressure hose to
the steering gear.
The cam ring in the pump body can move within the valve body. By moving the cam ring it is possible to vary the eccentricity of
the shaft and the vanes in relation to the cam ring. As the eccentricity is decreased, the volume of hydraulic fluid trapped
between the vanes decreases, maintaining the flow in response to pump speed. This reduces the load required to turn the
pump and therefore improves engine output and economy. This allows the flow rate to be matched to the system demands and
increased flow rate is only required when the steering wheel is turned.
The pump has an internal regulating valve which controls the eccentricity of the cam ring and therefore varies the flow rate
according to demand. The regulating relief valve limits the maximum pressure supplied to the steering gear to 110 bar (1595
lbf in2) ± 4 bar (58 lbf in2) and also limits the maximum flow to 8.5 l/min (1.86 gal/min) ± 0.5 l/min (0.1 gal/min) regardless
of engine speed.
Fluid Reservoir
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Bolt and washer (2 off)
2 Rubber mounting (2 off)
3 Cap
4 Reservoir body
5 Return connection
6 Suction hose connection
7 Max/Min level
8 Lanyard
The reservoir is located in the engine compartment, on the LH suspension housing. The reservoir is attached to a bracket via 2
rubber mounts, and the bracket is attached to the suspension housing.
The reservoir is a plastic moulding with an integral 80 micron, non-serviceable filter. Two moulded ports at the base of the
reservoir provide for attachment of the fluid supply hose to the power steering pump and fluid return hose from the fluid cooler.
The reservoir is fitted with a removable cap which is screwed 1/4 turn to lock into the reservoir body.
The reservoir has upper and minimum marks moulded on its outside of the body.
www.JagDocs.com
Fluid Cooler
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
A V8 naturally aspirated and 3.0 V6
B V8 supercharged
1 Fluid cooler
2 Hose - return to fluid reservoir
3 Hose - Return from steering gear valve unit
The fluid cooler is located in the return circuit from the steering gear to the reservoir. The cooler is an aluminum fin and tube
design. Cool air entering the front of the vehicle passes over the cooler and flows through the fins. The fins act as heat
exchangers, conducting heat from the fluid as it passes through the tube.
Power Steering - Power Steering

REFER to: Specifications (211-00 Steering System - General Information, Specifications).
www.JagDocs.com
Power Steering - Steering Gear
Removal
CAUTIONS:
Do not turn the steering wheel with the steering column lower shaft disconnected as damage to the clockspring and
steering wheel switches may occur.
NOTES:
RHD illustration shown, LHD is similar.
1. Raise and support the vehicle.

www.JagDocs.com
2. Center the steering wheel.

Lock in position and remove the ignition key.
3. Remove the front wheels and tires.


5. Make sure the alignment mark, on the steering gear pinion
seal protection cover, is central to the steering gear pinion
casting.
www.JagDocs.com
Release both track rods from tie rod ends, note the number
of turns for installation.
Loosen the tie-rod ends lock nuts.
7. Disconnect the power steering control valve actuator

electrical connector.
8. CAUTION: Air tools MUST NOT be used on steering
column bolts.
Disconnect the lower steering column from the steering

gear.
Remove and discard the bolt.
9. Release the power steering line support bracket.
10. CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting or removing the components,

make sure the area around the joint faces and connections
are clean and dry. Plug open connections to prevent
contamination.
www.JagDocs.com
Cap the power steering line to prevent loses of fluid

and dirt ingress.
If power steering fluid is spilt on the paintwork, the

effected area must be immediately washed down with cold
water. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
NOTE: Some fluid spillage is inevitable during this

operation.
Disconnect the power steering feed and return fluid lines

from the steering gear.
Remove the bolt.
Position a container to collect spillage.
Remove and discard both O-ring seals.
11. Remove the steering gear.

Remove the 3 bolts.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
2. Install the tie rod end, note the number of turns until
adjacent to the locknut.
Repeat the above procedure for the other side.
3. Tighten the bolts to 117 Nm.

www.JagDocs.com
4. NOTE: Make sure that all the component mating faces

are clean.
Tighten to 20 Nm.
Install the new O-ring seals.
Install a new retaining bolt.
6. Fill and bleed the power steering system.

For additional information, refer to: Power Steering System Bleeding
(211-00 Steering System - General Information, General Procedures).

For additional information, refer to: Front Toe Adjustment (204-00
www.JagDocs.com
Power Steering - Power Steering Fluid Reservoir TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
2. Refer to: Power Steering System Filling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (211-00 Steering System - General Information, General
Procedures).
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
Installation

Power Steering - Power Steering Pump TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal

3. Refer to: Power Steering System Filling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (211-00
Steering System - General Information, General Procedures).
4. Refer to: Accessory Drive Belt (303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L
Diesel, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 47 Nm
Torque: 8 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com

Torque: 24 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 25 Nm
Installation

Steering Linkage -
Tie-rod end retaining nut 133 98 -
Tie-rod end lock nut 55 41 -
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage - Component Location
STEERING LINKAGE COMPONENT LOCATION

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Steering gear boot
2 Inner tie-rod arm
3 Locknut
4 Outer tie-rod arm
5 Taper ball joint
6 Locknut
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage - Overview
OVERVIEW
The steering linkage comprises the tie rod which provides the connection between the steering gear and the front wheel
knuckle. Each end of the steering gear has a threaded hole which provides for the fitment of the inner tie rods. The external
ends of the inner tie rods are sealed with boots to prevent the ingress of dirt and moisture into the steering gear.
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
TIE-ROD
The threads on the tie rods allow the position of the outer tie rod to be adjusted in order to set the correct toe angle for each
front wheel.
TIE-ROD
Each tie rod comprises two parts; an inner and outer tie rod. The inner and outer tie rods are screwed into each other and
locked with a locknut to prevent inadvertent movement.
The outer tie rod incorporates a non-serviceable tapered ball joint which locates in a tapered hole in the front wheel knuckle
and is secured with a self-locking nut. The ball joint has an internal hexagonal drive which enables the joint to be held
stationary when the self-locking nut is tightened.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Linkage - Steering Linkage

REFER to: Steering System (211-00 Steering System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Linkage - Tie Rod End
Removal


3. Loosen the tie-rod end lock nut.

www.JagDocs.com
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the ball joint ball does not
rotate.
Remove and discard the tie rod end retaining nut.
5. Remove the tie-rod end, note the number of turns for

installation.
Installation
1. Install the tie rod end, note the number of turns until adjacent to the
locknut.
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the ball joint ball does not rotate.
Connect the tie-rod end ball joint.

Install a new nut and tighten to 133 Nm.
3. Tighten the tie-rod locking nut.

4. Install the front wheel.


For additional information, refer to: Four-Wheel Alignment (204-00
www.JagDocs.com
Published: 24-Mar-2014
Steering Column -
Steering wheel retaining bolt 60 44 -
Steering column pinch bolt 35 26 -
Steering column retaining nuts 30* 22 -
Tilt solenoid retaining bolts 1 - 9
Telescopic solenoid retaining bolts 1 - 9
Telescopic housing retaining bolts 8 - 71
If you are re-using this fixing on a vehicle built prior to VIN N83337, then tighten to 25 Nm. If you are replacing a fixing, then
you must tighten to 30 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Column - Steering Column - Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Steering wheel
2 Gear change paddle switch
3 Column adjust switch
4 Lower shroud
5 Rake adjustment housing
6 Reach adjustment housing
7 Column adjustment motor
8 Lower column - Upper collapse shaft
9 Bulkhead bearing and seal assembly
10 Lower column - Lower collapse shaft
11 Electric steering lock mechanism
12 Column mounting plate
13 Upper shroud
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Column - Steering Column - Overview
OVERVIEW
The steering column comprises the upper column assembly, the lower column assembly and the steering wheel. The 3
components are positively connected together to pass driver rotary input from the steering wheel to a linear output of the
steering rack.
The upper column assembly contains electrical adjustment for steering wheel reach and rake, the electric steering lock
mechanism and the steering angle sensor. Steering adjustment memory positions are stored in the driver's seat module.
The electric steering column is a standard fitment on all models. The upper column assembly contains electrical adjustment for
steering wheel reach and rake, the electric column lock mechanism and the steering angle sensor. Steering adjustment memory
positions are stored in the driver's seat module. The column also features a 'tilt away' function which moves the steering
column away from the driver allowing easier exit and entry to the vehicle.
Column adjustment is provided by a single motor for both reach and rake adjustment. Operation of the column adjustment is
controlled by a four way joystick type switch located in the column lower shroud. Column adjustment is an integral part of the
driver position memory system.
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Column - Steering Column - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box) - Megafuse (175A)
4 Electric steering column lock
5 High Speed CAN (controller area network) bus to other vehicle systems
7 Rake adjustment solenoid and potentiometer
8 Reach adjustment solenoid and potentiometer
11 Steering column adjust switch
12 Driver's seat module (position memory)
System Operation
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT
Power for the column adjustment motor is supplied via a megafuse in the BJB to the CJB. A fused supply from the CJB is
passed to the instrument cluster which controls the power application to the motor.
The column adjust switch is hardwired to the instrument cluster. Up/down and in/out selections on the switch are each passed
through a resistor of differing values to the instrument cluster. The cluster monitors the output value from the switch and
operates the motor in the required direction and simultaneously energizes the required solenoid for rake or reach adjustment.
When the applicable solenoid is energized, a clutch is engaged and locates on a lead screw. The motor rotates the lead screw
and the rotational drive of the screw is transferred into linear movement of the applicable clutch to move either the rake or
reach adjustment. For reach adjustment, the lead screw drives the outer housing in or out as required. For rake adjustment the
lead screw drives a rake lever which moves the column up or down as required.
The position of the column is monitored by potentiometers which are connected to the instrument cluster. The cluster monitors
the output signal from the potentiometers to precisely control the positioning of the column in each plane.
The instrument cluster controls the memory positioning of the column via a medium speed CAN bus connection to the driver's
seat module. The driver's seat module receives information regarding the particular remote handset used to enter the vehicle
and outputs positional information relative to that stored for the handset. This information is passed to the instrument cluster
via the medium speed CAN bus which moves the column to the memorized positions.
www.JagDocs.com
The column logic in the instrument cluster also incorporates an entry/exit mode. When the vehicle is unlocked or the ignition is
switched off, the instrument cluster lifts the column upwards to its maximum rake position to allow the driver more room below
the steering wheel and improve access/egress of the vehicle. When the ignition is next switched on the column will adjust to
its previous position.
The electric steering column lock is controlled by the CJB.

STEERING COLUMN
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Rake housing
3 Mounting plate
4 Rake lever
5 Crash tube
6 Distance keeper
7 Steering wheel mounting splines
8 Steering angle sensor ring
9 Crash adaptor
10 Rake lever pivot bearing (2 off)
11 Flanged locknut (4 off) - mounting to cross-beam
12 Rake solenoid
13 Rake clutch
14 Spindle
15 Reach solenoid
16 Reach clutch
18 Outer clamping yoke
19 Clamp bolt
20 Inner tube yoke
WARNING: Do not attempt to dismantle the steering column. The crash safety of the unit will be compromised.
The steering column is attached to the in-vehicle cross-beam and secured with 4 flanged lock nuts onto 4 studs integral with
the cross-beam.
Steering Column - Sectional View
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Tube and clamping yoke pivot bearing
2 Tube yoke
3 Tolerance ring
4 Locking ring
5 Axial housing
6 Rake housing
7 Tube
8 Splined shaft
9 Crash adaptor
10 Steering angle sensor ring
11 Steering wheel mounting splines
12 Upper bearing
14 Lower bearing
www.JagDocs.com
15 Outer clamping yoke
16 Ball (12 off)
17 Distance keeper
18 Crash tube
The column comprises a cast magnesium mounting bracket which provides the attachment to the cross-beam. Attached to the
mounting bracket is a rake lever which is attached to the mounting bracket at the lower end with two pivot bearings. The
bearings allow the rake lever to rotate upwards or downward to adjust the column rake.
The rake lever also provides for the attachment of the rake housing which can slide within the lever to provide the reach
adjustment. Within the rake housing is the axial housing which is supported on each side with 6 ball bearings which allow the
rake housing to move forward or backwards. The bearings on each side are arranged in groups of 3 bearings and are separated
by a distance keeper which allows the housing to supported on bearings along its length. Within the axial housing is a tube
which is supported at the upper end of the column on the upper bearing. The tube has a central splined hole which provides for
the fitment of the splined shaft. The splined shaft can slide within the tube on the splines when the column reach is adjusted
or the column collapses in a crash condition. The splined shaft also passes rotary motion from the steering wheel through the
length of the column to the outer clamping yoke which is supported on the lower bearing.
The electric steering column lock is attached to the top of the rake lever. A lock bolt within the steering column lock engages in
one of 8 slots in the locking sleeve located at the lower end of the column preventing rotation of the steering wheel. The
locking sleeve is retained by a tolerance ring which in turn is located on the outer diameter of the tube yoke. The tolerance
ring allows a specified amount of torque to be applied to the splined shaft before it slips, preventing damage to the column
lock due to excessive force being applied to the steering wheel when the lock is engaged. The tolerance ring is designed to
slip on the splined shaft when the applied torque exceeds the fitted slip load of 200 Nm minimum. Repeated rotation of the
lock collar will reduce its slipping torque to 100 Nm minimum. The lock is controlled by the CJB.
A steering angle sensor is located at the upper end of the steering column and is attached to the crash adaptor. The sensor
measures steering rotation via a toothed wheel located on the splined tube at the upper end of the column. The sensor
receives a power supply from the CJB and supplies 2 signals (A and B) relating to the steering rotation to the ABS (anti-lock
brake system) module. The module transmits this data on the high speed CAN bus for use by other vehicle systems.
www.JagDocs.com
The steering column is adjustable electrically, for reach and rake. The adjustment mechanism comprises an electric adjustment
motor, a lead screw, a rake solenoid, a reach solenoid, a reach clutch and a rake clutch. The column adjustment is controlled
manually using a joystick switch located on the LH (left-hand) side of the column lower cowl. The joystick can be moved
forward and backward to adjust the column reach in and out and moved up and down to adjust the rake. The switch selection
energizes the adjustment motor in the applicable direction and also engages the applicable solenoid and clutch.
When the joystick switch is rotated to the 'auto' position, the steering column will adjust to the uppermost rake position when
the ignition is switched off. It will re-adjust to the position corresponding to the memory position for the remote handset when
the ignition is switched on.
The memory function of the electric column is linked to and controlled by the driver's seat module. The module provides for the
storage of three separate memory positions which are stored against 3 individual remote handsets.
Refer to: Seats (501-10 Seating, Description and Operation).
The steering wheel locates on a splined shaft in the upper column assembly and is secured with a bolt. The steering wheel
houses the driver's airbag and switches for the audio system, gear change and speed control. A clockspring is used to connect
the steering wheel electrical components to the vehicle harness.
Two plastic shrouds are fitted to the upper column assembly. The lower shroud is fitted with an energy absorbing foam pad to
minimize leg injury in the event of an accident.
LOWER SHAFT ASSEMBLY
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Yoke
2 Upper collapse shaft
3 Flexible coupling
4 Shaft plate
5 Rivet (4 off)
6 Upper tube
7 Plastic sleeve
8 Boot
9 Bearing (4 off)
10 Teeth tube
11 Lower shaft
12 Yoke clamp bolt (2 off)
13 Bearing (4 off)
14 Lower yoke
15 Spider
16 Upper yoke
The lower shaft assembly comprises 2 splined shafts connected by a universal joint in the center.
The upper collapse shaft has a flexible couple at its upper end. The flexible coupling controls axial and torsional movements
and also assists with noise and vibration damping. The flexible coupling is fitted with a shaft plate which has a boss with
machined flats on it. The flats provide positive location on the upper column outer clamping yoke. A cut-out in the boss allows
for the fitment of a clamping bolt to secure the upper column outer clamping yoke. The cut-out ensures that the lower shaft
assembly can only be fitted in one orientation.
The upper collapse shaft is connected to the stopper plate of the flexible coupling with splines. The stopper plate is connected
to the shaft plate via the flexible coupling and is secured with rivets. The upper collapse shaft has a series of splines which
engage with the upper tube. The splines allow the upper collapse shaft to slide into the upper tube in the event of an
accident.
The upper tube is positively connected to the upper half of the yoke of the universal joint. A plastic tube is located around the
upper tube and provides for the attachment of a boot which seals the lower shaft assembly where it passes through the
vehicle bulkhead.
The yoke is attached to the teeth tube which in turn is located over the lower shaft on splines. The teeth tube is fitted with a
tolerance ring which provides resistance to movement of the splines on the lower shaft. The splines of the lower shaft allow it
to slide into the teeth tube with the tolerance ring controlling the collapse.
The lower shaft is fitted with a yoke which provides the attachment to the torsion bar of the steering valve unit.
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Column - Steering Column

REFER to: Steering System (211-00 Steering System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Column - Steering Column
Removal
2. Refer to: Instrument Panel Lower Trim Panel (501-12 Instrument Panel
and Console, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Steering Wheel Rotation Sensor (206-09 Anti-Lock Control -

Stability Assist, Removal and Installation).
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
6. WARNING: Make sure that a new steering column flexible coupling bolt
is installed.
Torque: 30 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
7. Torque: 25 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Steering Column - Steering Column Flexible Coupling
Removal
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
5. WARNING: Make sure that a new steering column

flexible coupling bolt is installed.
Torque: 30 Nm
6. Torque: 10 Nm
7. WARNING: Make sure that a new steering column
flexible coupling bolt is installed.
Torque: 30 Nm
8.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Column - Steering Wheel
Special Tool(s)
Clockspring locking tool
211-326
Removal
1. Make the SRS system safe.

For additional information, refer to: Standard Workshop Practices
(100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).

www.JagDocs.com
3. Remove the driver air bag module.

For additional information, refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20B
Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).
Remove the steering wheel.

Disconnect the electrical connector.
Loosen, but do not fully remove the bolt.
Release the steering wheel from the spline.
Remove the bolt.
Release the electrical harness.
5. CAUTIONS:
Failing to install the clockspring special tool, may result

in damage to vehicle.
Do not dismantle the clockspring, it has no serviceable

parts and must be replaced as a complete assembly.
Do not allow the clockspring to unwind.
Install the special tool to the clockspring.

Remove the upshift and downshift paddle switches.

Remove the Torx bolt.
Release the assembly.
Repeat the procedure and remove the opposite
hand.
7. NOTE: The steering wheel is shown removed for

clarity.
Release the steering wheel switch assembly.

Remove the Torx bolt.
Repeat the procedure and remove the opposite
hand.
www.JagDocs.com
8. Remove the air bag housing.

Remove the 4 Torx bolts.
Release the electrical harness.
9. Remove the air bag ground cable.

Remove the Torx screw.
Installation
1. Install the air bag ground cable.

Install the Torx screw.
2. Install the air bag housing.

Secure the electrical harness.
Tighten to 6 Nm.
www.JagDocs.com
3. Secure the steering wheel switch assembly.

Connect and secure the electrical connectors.
Tighten to 3 Nm.
Repeat the above procedure on the opposite hand.
4. Install the upshift and downshift paddle switches.
Connect and secure the electrical connector.
Tighten to 3 Nm.
Repeat the above procedure on the opposite hand.
5. CAUTION: Make sure that the arrow on the cassette is

centered and pointing vertically prior to the steering wheel
installation. On removal of the special tool keep the
clockspring cables taught to prevent the cassette moving
from the set position. Do not allow the clockspring to
unwind. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
Remove the special tool.

www.JagDocs.com
6. CAUTION: Check the alignment arrow is still in the

vertical position with the wheels straight ahead to make
sure that the directional indicator cancellation is central.
Install the steering wheel.

Check the clockspring is aligned.
Position the electrical harness.
Connect the electrical connector.
Tighten to 60 Nm.
7. Install the driver air bag module.

For additional information, refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20B
Supplemental Restraint System, Removal and Installation).

Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches - Component Location
STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES COMPONENT LOCATION

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Audio and telephone switches
2 Steering column adjustment switch
3 LH (left-hand) (-) gear change paddle switch
4 Steering column multifunction switches and clockspring
5 RH (right-hand) (+) gear change paddle switch
6 Speed control switches (Adaptive Speed Control switch pack shown, non adaptive speed control switch pack similar)
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches - Overview
OVERVIEW
The steering column multifunction switch is situated on the steering column and consists of the wiper switch, the turn signal
indicator/lighting switch and the trip computer switch.
The RH (right-hand) multifunction switch controls the following windshield wiper functions:
Flick wipe
Intermittent wipe
Slow speed wipe
High speed wipe
Wash/Wipe
Headlamp powerwash
Rain sensing / variable wipe selection.
The LH (left-hand) multifunction switch controls the following functions:
Turn signal indicators

Side lamps
Headlamps
Auto lamps
High/low beam
Headlamp flash
Headlamp timer
Trip computer.
www.JagDocs.com
The steering column adjustment switch is located in the steering column lower shroud on the LH side. The switch is a 4
position 'joystick' which controls reach and rake adjustment.
The trip button allows the driver to cycle though an option menu and also reset trip cycle mileage calculations. The trip
computer information is displayed in the instrument cluster message centre.
Steering wheel mounted switches on the LH side of the driver's airbag, control the audio and telephone functions. Switches on
the RH side of the driver's airbag, control the speed control functions.
The steering wheel has an internal heating element. This is controlled by the driver via the Touch Screen Display (TSD).
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches - System Operation
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; P = Fibre Optic MOST ring
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
4 Heated steering wheel slip rings
5 Heated steering wheel control module
6 Steering wheel heater element
8 Steering column LH (left-hand) multifunction switch
9 Steering column RH (right-hand) multifunction switch
11 Speed control switches
12 Audio/telephone switches
13 Clockspring
14 Information and entertainment module
15 Media Oriented System Transport (MOST) ring connection to other vehicle systems
16 Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus to other vehicle systems
System Operation
LEFT HAND MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
Turn Signal Indicators
The instrument cluster outputs a reference voltage to the turn signal indicator switch. When the switch is in the central off
position, the voltage flows through 3 resistors which are connected in series and back to the instrument cluster which monitors
the signal and determines the turn signal indicators are off. This information is broadcast on the medium speed CAN bus to
the CJB.
When the switch is operated in the LH turn signal indicator position, the reference voltage from the instrument cluster is
routed via 1 of the resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on
the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB. The CJB activates the applicable turn signal indicators until it receives an off message
from the instrument cluster.
www.JagDocs.com
When the switch is operated in the RH turn signal indicator position, the reference voltage from the instrument cluster is
routed via 2 of the resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on
the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB. The CJB activates the applicable turn signal indicators until it receives an off message
from the instrument cluster.
Lighting Control Switch
The instrument cluster outputs 2 reference voltages to the rotary lighting control switch; one feed being supplied to the light
selection function of the switch and the second feed being supplied to the autolamp exit delay function. The switch position is
determined by instrument cluster by the change in returned signal voltage which is routed through up to 4 resistors in series
depending on the selection made.
When the lighting control switch is in the off position, the reference voltage flows through 1 of the resistors. The returned
signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB that
no lighting selection is made. The reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 4 resistors which is
detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB that autolamp or exit
delay has not been selected.
When the lighting control switch is in the sidelamp position, the reference voltage flows through 2 of the resistors. The
returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the
CJB to activate the sidelamps. The reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 4 resistors which is
When the lighting control switch is in the headlamp position, the reference voltage flows through 3 of the resistors. The
CJB to activate the headlamps. The reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 4 resistors which is
When the lighting control switch is in the autolamp position, the reference voltage flows through 4 of the resistors. The
CJB to activate the autolamp function. The reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 4 resistors
which is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB that autolamp
has been selected.
Autolamp Exit Delay
When the lighting control switch is in any of the autolamp exit delay position, the lighting control switch reference voltage
flows through 4 of the resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on
the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB that autolamps has been selected.
Depending on the selected position, the reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 3, 2 or 1
resistors which is detected by the instrument cluster. The cluster outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB
that autolamp exit delay period has been selected at 30, 60 or 120 seconds respectively.
Trip Function Button
The instrument cluster outputs a reference voltage to the trip function button. When the function button is pressed a ground
path is completed and a signal voltage is returned to the instrument cluster via a resistor. The returned reference voltage is
detected by the instrument cluster and performs the requested trip function.
RIGHT HAND MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH

The instrument cluster outputs 4 separate reference voltages to the following switch functions:
Wash/wipe switch
Intermittent wipe switch
Master wiper switch
Flick wipe switch.
Wash/Wipe Switch
The reference voltage is supplied to one of two resistors connected in parallel. When the switch is not being operated the
current flows through one resistor and the returned signal voltage is monitored by the instrument cluster. When the wash/wipe
switch is operated, a connection is made and the current flows through the second resistor. The change in signal voltage is
detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB to activate the
wash/wipe function.
Intermittent Delay/Auto Wipe Switch
The reference voltage is supplied to the switch and can pass through up to 7 resistors, connected in series, for intermittent
delay selections and the auto wipe function.
When the rotary switch is in the auto position the reference voltage flows through 1 resistor. The returned signal voltage is
detected by the instrument cluster which determines auto wipe is selected. The instrument cluster outputs a message on the
medium speed CAN bus to the CJB to activate the auto wipe function.
With the rotary switch in one of the intermittent positions, the reference voltage is routed through up to 7 of the resistors
depending on the delay period selected. The returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which determines
selected delay period. The instrument cluster outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB to activate the
www.JagDocs.com
selected intermittent wipe function.
NOTE: The delay period for the intermittent selections can vary according to vehicle speed.
Master Wiper Switch
The reference voltage supplied from the instrument cluster to the master wiper switch. The voltage can pass through up to 4
resistors connected in series.
When the switch is in the off position, the reference voltage passes through 4 resistors and the returned voltage is monitored
by the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB that no wiper
selections have been requested.
With the switch in the intermittent, slow wipe or fast wipe position, the reference voltage passes through 3, 2 or 1 resistors
respectively. The returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which determines selected delay period. The
instrument cluster outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB to activate the selected wipe function.
Flick Wipe Switch
The reference voltage is supplied to one of two resistors connected in parallel. When the switch is not being operated the
current flows through one resistor and the returned signal voltage is monitored by the instrument cluster. When the flick wipe
switch is operated, a connection is made and the current flows through the second resistor. The change in signal voltage is
detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB to activate the flick
wipe function.
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

The instrument cluster supplies 2 reference voltages to the column adjustment switch.
The first reference voltage is supplied to the joystick switch. When the switch is moved to one of its 4 positions, the switch
contact is completed and the reference voltage is passed through one of 4 different resistors with different values. The
returned signal voltage is measured by the instrument cluster which determines the selected column adjust request. The
instrument cluster outputs a supply to the steering column adjustment motor and energizes the applicable clutch solenoid to
move the column to the desired position.
The second reference voltage is supplied to the auto/manual selection of the switch. When the switch is in the auto position,
the reference voltage passes directly through the switch contacts and is measured by the instrument cluster. The instrument
cluster outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the driver seat module which responds with the recorded memory
position setting. The instrument cluster then activates the column adjustment motor and clutch solenoids to move the column
to the memorized position. When the switch is in the manual position the reference circuit is broken. The instrument cluster
detects the broken circuit and allows manual operation of the column adjustment switch to move the column.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL

The heated steering wheel receives a battery power supply via the CJB. The heated steering wheel is controlled by the driver
using a selection on the TSD. When the driver selects the heated steering wheel to be active, the request is passed from the
TSD on the MOST ring to the information and entertainment module. The information and entertainment module converts the
message into a medium speed CAN bus message which is passed to the CJB. The CJB processes the request and allows the
battery power supply to be passed via the slip ring assembly in the steering wheel to the heated steering wheel control
module. The steering wheel module supplies power to the steering wheel heater element and also monitors the temperature
via a NTC (negative temperature coefficient) temperature sensor incorporated into the heater element. The control module
varies the power supply to the element to maintain the steering wheel rim at the optimum temperature.
STEERING COLUMN MULTIFUNCTION SWITCHES
The steering column multifunction switches are situated on the steering column and consists of the wiper switch, the turn
signal indicator/lighting switch and the trip computer switch.
The steering column adjustment switch is located in the steering column lower shroud on the LH side. The switch is a 4
position 'joystick' which controls reach and rake adjustment.
Steering wheel mounted switches on the LH side of the driver's airbag, control the audio and telephone functions. Switches on
the RH side of the driver's airbag, control the speed control functions. For additional information, refer to:
Audio System (415-01A Information and Entertainment System, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03A, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03B, Description and Operation),
Speed Control (310-03C, Description and Operation).
Two transmission paddle switches are located at the rear of the steering wheel.
Refer to: External Controls (307-05, Description and Operation).
LH Multifunction Switch
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 High beam
2 Lighting control rotary switch
3 RH turn signal indicator
4 Headlamp flash
5 LH turn signal indicator
6 Trip computer function button
The LH multifunction switch controls the following windshield wiper functions:
www.JagDocs.com
Side lamps
Headlamps
Auto lamps
High/low beam
Headlamp flash
Headlamp timer
Trip computer.
The switch is located in a slot in the clockspring and secured with 2 plastic clips.
RH Multifunction Switch
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Auto/intermittent rotary switch
2 Fast wipe
3 Slow wipe
4 Intermittent wipe
5 Off position
6 Wash/wipe
7 Flick wipe
The RH multifunction switch controls the following windshield wiper functions:
Flick wipe
Intermittent wipe
Slow speed wipe
High speed wipe
Wash/Wipe
Headlamp powerwash
Rain sensing / variable wipe selection.
The switch is located in a slot in the clockspring and secured with 2 plastic clips.
STEERING COLUMN ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

The column adjustment switch is located in the steering column lower shroud and held in place with a spring clip. The switch
allows the adjustment of the steering column for both reach and rake angle. The switch has an auto position which allows the
desired position of the column to be set by the driver using the driver's seat memory buttons. The column position is
automatically reset once the applicable remote handset has been detected by the vehicle security systems.
STEERING WHEEL HEATER

On certain models the rim of the steering wheel contains a heater element. Operation of the heater is selected using the
Touch Screen Display (TSD).
The heater temperature is controlled by a heated steering wheel control module located within the steering wheel. Power for
the heater element is supplied to the steering wheel via 2 contacts on the clockspring and a slip ring mounted on the steering
wheel.
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Switches
For a detailed description of the steering column lock and switches, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in
the workshop manual. REFER to: (211-05 Steering Column Switches)
Steering Column Switches (Description and Operation),

Steering Column Switches (Description and Operation),
Steering Column Switches (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Switches Fuse(s)
Steering column lock Electrical connector(s)
Wiring Harness
www.JagDocs.com
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Central Junction Box (CJB) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
Steering Column Switches - Hazard Flasher Switch
Removal
1. NOTE: When removing the component, some of the

clips may remain attached. These clips should be removed
and returned to their original positions in the instrument
panel.
www.JagDocs.com
2.
Installation

Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch LH
Removal
1.
2.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
Installation

Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Multifunction Switch RH
Removal
1.
2.
www.JagDocs.com
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
Installation

Steering Column Switches - Steering Column Lock Actuator
Removal
2. Refer to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Removal and

Installation).
3. Torque: 12 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Engine System - General Information - Engine 3.0L Diesel
For a detailed description of the 3.0L Diesel engine, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual. REFER to: (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Engine (Description and Operation),

Engine (Description and Operation),
Engine (Description and Operation).

2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.

Visual Inspection
Coolant level Wiring harness
Coolant leaks Electrical connector(s)
Oil level Injectors
Oil leaks Glow plugs
Visibly damaged or worn parts 5 volt sensor supply
Loose or missing nuts or bolts Sensor(s)
Cooling fan control module and motor
If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to
www.JagDocs.com
the next step.
3. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the relevant Symptom Chart. Symptom Charts
have been separated into Leaks and Noise Vibration and Harshness (NVH) for ease of use. Alternatively, check for
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Symptom Charts
Symptom Chart, Leaks
External coolant leaks For cooling system checks,
Damaged hose(s) REFER to: Engine Cooling (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6
Damaged 3.0L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
expansion tank
Damaged radiator
Leaking
seals/gaskets
Cracked/damaged
casings
Internal coolant leaks Note: This may For cooling system checks,
be indicated by the production of Leaking REFER to: Engine Cooling (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6
white smoke from the exhaust seals/gaskets 3.0L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
Cracked/damaged
casings
Engine overheats For cooling system checks,

Insufficient coolant REFER to: Engine Cooling (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6
Insufficient oil 3.0L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
Pressure cap fault
Thermostat not
opening
Coolant pump
failure
Cooling fan failure
Engine takes too long to reach For cooling system checks,

operating temperature Thermostat stuck REFER to: Engine Cooling (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6
open 3.0L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
External oil leaks Clean and confirm the area of the leak. Check the visual
Gaskets condition of oil carrying components. Check the crankcase
Seals ventilation system,
Oil pipes REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08A Engine
Oil filter Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
Oil cooler Carry out a compression test, GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Damaged/cracked
casings
www.JagDocs.com
Crankcase
ventilation system
Piston ring blow-by
Internal oil leaks (leaks into coolant Check for traces of oil in the coolant. Check for evidence of
or combustion chamber) Note: This Gaskets oil in the combustion chambers (deposits on the glow plugs,
may be indicated by the production of Seals etc). Confirm oil consumption and vehicle usage with the
blue smoke from the exhaust Damaged/cracked owner/driver. Carry out an oil consumption test, GO to
casings Pinpoint Test B.
Worn valve guides
Worn cylinder
bores/pistons
Broken piston rings
Symptom Chart, NVH
NOTE: As the checks suggested here are open to interpretation, they should be used as a guide only. Descriptions of
noises, etc, are in general terms, so depend on a degree of experience on the part of the technician.

Rattle/ticking from top of Check the engine oil pressure, GO to Pinpoint Test C. . Check the
engine Valve gear noise function of the hydraulic tappets and the camshaft condition.
Camshaft bearing noise Check the camshaft bearings, chains and tensioners. Check the
Camshaft chain noise vacuum pump, and high pressure fuel pump
Tensioner noise
Vacuum pump noise
High pressure fuel
pump noise
Growl from top of engine Check the high pressure fuel pump belt and tensioner
www.JagDocs.com
High pressure fuel

pump belt noise
High pressure fuel
pump belt tensioner
noise
Squeaking/Creaking/Squeal Check the FEAD belt and driven components,

from front of engine Front End Accessory REFER to: Accessory Drive (303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L
Drive (FEAD) belt Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
FEAD belt tensioner
Driven components on
FEAD belt
Whine/Slap/Growl from front Check the FEAD belt and driven components. Check the timing
of engine Front End Accessory belt and tensioners
Drive (FEAD) belt
FEAD belt tensioner
Driven components on
FEAD belt
Timing belt noise
Timing belt tensioner
noise
Knock from lower half of Check the engine oil pressure, GO to Pinpoint Test C. . Check
engine (often worse with a Piston slap piston, cylinder bore, piston pin and connecting rod bearing for
cold engine) Piston pin noise excess wear
Connecting rod bearing
noise
Knock/Rumble from lower half Check the engine oil pressure, GO to Pinpoint Test C. . Check
of engine (often worse on Main bearing noise connecting rod bearing for excess wear
overrun)
Misfire/Rough running For engine management system tests,
Engine management REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A, Diagnosis and
system Testing).
Fuel charging and For fuel charging and controls systems tests, REFER to:
controls Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls
Exhaust gas - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing),
recirculation (EGR) Turbocharger (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger
system - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
Burnt/sticking valves For EGR system tests,
Worn valve guides REFER to: Engine Emission Control (303-08A Engine Emission
Worn cylinder Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Diagnosis and Testing).
bores/pistons Carry out a compression test, GO to Pinpoint Test A. Check for
Broken piston rings excess wear in engine components
Damaged/cracked
casings
www.JagDocs.com
DTC Index
For a list of DTCs that could log in the Engine Control Module (ECM) refer to section 303-14. REFER to: Electronic Engine
Controls (303-14A, Diagnosis and Testing).
Pinpoint Tests
NOTE: Where reference is made to 'suitable equipment', this refers to standard workshop equipment. Refer to the
operating instructions for your own equipment when performing any tests.
PINPOINT TEST A : CHECK THE CYLINDER COMPRESSIONS
WARNING: Only compression testers able to read the higher compression pressures found in diesel engines should be
used. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
NOTE: Where possible, compression testing should be carried out on an engine at operating temperature.
CONDITIONS
A1: CARRY OUT A DRY CYLINDER COMPRESSION TEST
1 Make sure the parking brake is applied and that the selector lever is in park.
2 Set the ignition status to OFF.
3 Remove the starter relay.
4 Disconnect the starter motor solenoid connector.
5 Connect a suitable remote starter device to the starter motor solenoid.
www.JagDocs.com
6 Remove the glow plugs.

7 Install adaptor 303-1131 in place of the glow plug in the first cylinder to be tested.
8 Connect a suitable compression tester to the adaptor. See warning above.
9 Using the remote starter device, crank the engine a minimum of five revolutions.
10 Record the compression figure and the number of revolutions taken to reach it.
11 Repeat steps 7 - 10 above for the remaining cylinders, cranking the engine for a similar number of
revolutions each time.
12 Compare the compression figures across all the cylinders.
Are the compression figures within 10% of each other?
Yes
Unless the compression figures are universally very low (experience will indicate this), check for other
causes for the customer complaint.
No
GO to A2.
A2: CARRY OUT A WET CYLINDER COMPRESSION TEST
CAUTION: If engine oil is introduced into the cylinders, run the engine at 2,000 rpm for a minimum of ten minutes after
completing testing to prevent damage to the catalytic converters. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
NOTE: There is a combustion chamber in the top of each piston. Make sure that the oil is not allowed to run into this
chamber.
1 Using a suitable oil can with a flexible spout, introduce a small amount of clean engine oil into the
cylinder just before testing, such that the oil is able to run between the piston and the cylinder bore.
2 Repeat steps 7 - 10 from the test above, introducing oil into each cylinder just before testing.
3 Compare the compression figures across all the cylinders.
Is the compression figure higher than the dry test?
Yes
A higher figure following the introduction of oil may indicate a worn or damaged cylinder bore, piston
and/or piston rings. Disassembly would be required to confirm this.
No
If the compression figure is unaffected by the introduction of oil, but the figure is still less than 90% of
the other cylinders, this may indicate a burnt and/or sticking valve, leaking head gasket, etc.
Disassembly would be required to confirm this.
Clear any DTCs which may have been induced by the test.
PINPOINT TEST B : OIL CONSUMPTION TEST
NOTE: Oil consumption will vary, depending on a number of factors. New engines will normally use more oil than 'run-in'
engines, although a guideline would be to expect 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) per liter.
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK FOR EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION
1 Start the engine and allow it to run until it reaches normal operating temperature.
2 Make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface and set ignition status to OFF.
3 Allow to settle for at least five minutes.
4 Check the oil level.
5 Correct the level, if necessary, and record the reading and mileage in the vehicle history.
6 Make sure that the owner/driver is aware that a test is being carried out, and that they should not
top-up their oil level for the duration of the test, but should check the level every 160-240 Km (100-150
miles).
7 When the oil level reaches the ADD mark, the customer should bring the vehicle in to be checked.
8 Top-up the oil to the level at the beginning of the test and record the amount of oil needed to do so,
and the mileage covered in the course of the test.
9 From this, the consumption can be calculated, and a decision made as to whether or not the
consumption is considered excessive.
Is the consumption excessive for the mileage and/or use?
Yes
Disassembly will be required to check the components indicated in the symptom chart.
No
No further action is required.
PINPOINT TEST C : CHECK THE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
NOTES:
Check and, if necessary, top-up the engine oil level before beginning this test.
www.JagDocs.com
Where reference is made to 'suitable equipment', this refers to standard workshop equipment. Refer to the operating
instructions for your own equipment when performing any tests.
CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK FOR LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
1 Remove the oil pressure sensor.
2 Connect a suitable oil pressure gauge in place of the oil pressure sensor.
3 Start the engine and check for leaks at the gauge connection.
4 Allow the engine to idle and monitor the oil pressure.
5 Raise the engine speed to 2,500 rpm and monitor the oil pressure.
Is the oil pressure less than 0.50 bar (7.25 psi) between idle and 2,500 rpm?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
GO to C3.
C2: CHECK FOR LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE AT ENGINE SPEEDS GREATER THAN 2,500 RPM
1 Raise the engine speed to above 2,500 rpm and monitor the oil pressure.
Is the oil pressure less than 1.0 bar (14.5 psi) at engine speeds greater than 2,500 rpm?
Yes
Pressure this low may indicate a problem with: oil pump, filtering, clearances within the engine. Check if
there are any other indications of engine faults (noise, etc), refer to the symptom chart above.
No
GO to C3.
C3: CHECK FOR HIGH ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
1 Monitor the engine oil pressure at varying engine speeds.
Does the oil pressure reach 4.0 bar (58 psi)?
Yes
Pressure this high may indicate a blockage in the lubrication system. If this is not resolved, high oil
pressure will lead to engine oil leaks and other failures.
No
If the oil pressure stays in the band between 0.50 bar (7.25 psi) and 1.0 bar (14.5 psi) this would be
considered normal.
Engine System - General Information - Bearing Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect bearings for the following defects.

1. Cratering - fatigue failure
2. Spot polishing - incorrect seating.
3. Imbedded dirt engine oil.
4. Scratching - dirty engine oil.
5. Base exposed - poor lubrication.
6. Both edges worn - journal damaged.
7. One edge worn - journal tapered or bearing not seated.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
General Procedures
1. Determine the diameter of the camshaft journals.

Using a micrometer measure the diameter at 90
degrees intervals to determine if the journals are
out-of-round.
Measure at two different points on the journal to
determine if there is any tapering.
If the measurements are out of the specified range,
install a new camshaft.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft End Play
General Procedures
1. NOTE: Make sure that the camshaft is to specification.
Using the special tool, measure the end play.

Slide the camshaft in both directions. Read and note
the maximum and minimum values on the dial indicator
gauge.
1. End play = maximum value minus minimum value.
If the measurement is out of specification, install new

components.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Lobe Lift
General Procedures
1. Measure the diameter (1) and diameter (2) with a vernier caliper. The
difference in measurements is the lobe lift.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Camshaft Surface Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the active area. Minor
pitting is acceptable outside the active area.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Connecting Rod Cleaning
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not use a caustic cleaning solution or damage to

connecting rods may occur.
Mark and separate the parts and clean with solvent. Clean the oil
passages.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Connecting Rod Large End Bore
General Procedures
1. Measure the bearing bore in two directions. The difference is the

connecting rod bore out-of-round. Verify the out-of-round is within
specification.
2. Measure the bearing bore diameter in two directions. Verify the bearing
bore is within specification.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Crankshaft End Play
General Procedures
1. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Brackets, measure the end
play.
Measure the end play by lifting the crankshaft using a
lever.
If the value is out of the specification, install new
thrust half rings to take up the end float and repeat the
measurement.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Bore Out-of-Round
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The main bearing caps or lower crankcase must be in

place and tightened to the specified torque; however, the bearing
shells should not be installed.
Measure the cylinder bore with an internal micrometer.

Carry out the measurements in different directions and at
different heights to determine if there is any out-of-
roundness or tapering.
If the measurement is out of the specified range, hone out
the cylinder block or install a new block.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and
Inspection
General Procedures
1. Inspect the cylinder head joining flanges of the exhaust manifold for
evidence of exhaust gas leaks.
2. Inspect the exhaust manifold for cracks, damaged gasket surfaces, or

other damage that would make it unfit for further use.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Leakage Test Using Smoke Test
Equipment
General Procedures
CAUTION: The compressed air line supply pressure must be between 3.5 and 12 bar (50 and 175 psi) for the smoke test
equipment to function correctly. Do not exceed this pressure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
smoke test equipment.
NOTES:
The vehicle battery must be in good condition and fully charged before carrying out this procedure.
On vehicles with 3.0L TDV6, it will be necessary to insert smoke at both air cleaner outlet pipes independently if the right
hand turbocharger and associated hoses are to be tested.
In some cases it may be necessary to remove undertrays, trim or engine covers to obtain access to all potential leak
locations.
For further information regarding operation of the test equipment refer to the manufacturers operators manual supplied
www.JagDocs.com
with the kit.
1. WARNING: Use an additional support to prevent the hood

from falling if the smoke test equipment is secured to the
hood. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
Install the smoke test equipment to a suitable location

under the hood.
2. Connect a suitable compressed air line to the smoke test equipment.
3. Connect the smoke test equipment positive power cable to the battery
positive terminal.
4. WARNING: Do not connect the smoke test equipment negative

cable to the battery negative terminal.
Connect the smoke test equipment negative cable to a suitable body

ground point.
5. NOTE: A flashing green light indicates low battery voltage.
In this case, place the battery on charge and make sure
that the battery is fully charged before using the smoke
test equipment.
Observe the power indicator lamp on the smoke test

equipment. Make sure that a continuous green light is
displayed.
6. NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
In some cases it may be necessary to remove the air

cleaner(s) to allow access to the air cleaner outlet pipes.
In some cases it will be necessary to cap one of the

air cleaner outlet pipes. Use the blanking caps supplied in
the kit to cap the open orifice.
Disconnect the air cleaner outlet pipe(s).
www.JagDocs.com
7. NOTE: Make sure the smoke test equipment adapter is a
good fit to the air cleaner outlet pipe. This must be an air
tight seal.
Connect the smoke test equipment supply hose to the air

cleaner outlet pipe.
1. Install the appropriate adapter to the air cleaner
outlet pipe.
2. Connect the smoke test equipment supply hose to
the adapter link hose.
www.JagDocs.com
8. NOTES:
The flow control valve must be in the fully open

position.
Smoke is produced for 5 minutes. The smoke test

equipment will automatically switch off after this period of
time.
Switch the smoke test equipment on.
9. Remove the oil filler cap, and observe until a constant flow of smoke is
visible leaving the oil filler orifice. Install the oil filler cap.
10. NOTE: The longer smoke is allowed to exit from a leak, the more
fluorescent dye will be deposited at a leak location.
Using the torch supplied in the kit set to white light, look for escaping
smoke. Alternatively, use the ultraviolet light to look for fluorescent dye
deposits at the source of a leak.
Engine System - General Information - Piston Inspection
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not use any aggressive cleaning fluid or a wire

brush to clean the piston.
Carry out a visual inspection.

Clean the piston skirt, pin bush, ring grooves and crown
and check for wear or cracks.
If there are signs of wear on the piston skirt, check
whether the connecting rod is twisted or bent.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Piston Pin Diameter
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston and piston pin are a matched pair. Do not
mix up the components.
Measure the piston pin diameter.

Measure the diameter in two directions.
If the values are not to specification, install a new
piston and a new piston pin.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Piston Pin to Bore Diameter
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston and piston pin form a matched pair. Do not mix up
the components.
Measure the diameter of the piston pin bore.

Measure the diameter in two directions.
If the values are not to specification, install both a new piston
and a new piston pin.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Piston Ring End Gap
General Procedures
1. CAUTION: Do not mix up the piston rings. Install the

piston rings in the same position and location.
Using the Feeler Gauge, measure the piston ring gap.

The values given in the specification refer to a gauge
ring used during production.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Piston Ring-to-Groove Clearance
General Procedures
1. NOTE: The piston ring must protrude from the piston groove.
To determine the piston ring clearance, insert the Feeler
Gauge right to the back of the groove, behind the wear ridge.
Using the Feeler Gauge, measure the piston ring clearance.

www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Valve Spring Free Length
General Procedures
1. Using a vernier gauge, measure the free length of each valve

spring. Verify the length is within specification.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Valve Stem Diameter
General Procedures
1. Using a micrometer measure the diameter of the valve stems.

If the measurements are not to specification, install a
new valve.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Head Gasket Selection TDV6
3.0L Diesel
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-979
Measuring Bridge, Piston Protusion
Check
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the surface is clean and free of

foreign material.
www.JagDocs.com
Zero the gauge on the cylinder block machined face.

2. CAUTION: Make sure that the surface is clean and free of
foreign material.
NOTE: Note the dial gauge readings.
Take 2 measurements on each piston crown.

www.JagDocs.com
3. Use the average piston protrusion measurement (taken from all piston
measurements), to select the correct thickness cylinder head gasket.
Refer to: Specifications (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,

Specifications).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Head Distortion
General Procedures
Check
1. Using a suitable metallic straight edge and feeler gauge, measure the
cylinder head face in the areas illustrated. Note the maximum value.
www.JagDocs.com
2. CAUTION: Machine the minimum thickness of material from the cylinder

head to meet specification. If a selection of cylinder head gaskets are
available, increase the thickness of the cylinder head gasket by one
size.
NOTES:
Prior to having the cylinder head machined, prior approval is
required by Jaguar or Land Rover engineering.
If the cylinder head requires machining, this must be carried out by

a local engineering company.
If the cylinder head exceeds the maximum value (0.2mm), the cylinder
head must be machined.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine System - General Information - Cylinder Compression Test TDV6 3.0L
Diesel
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
JLR-303-1623-2
Adaptor, Compression Tester
JLR-303-1629
SP 90 Degree Elbow, Compression Tester
www.JagDocs.com
Check
CAUTION: Before disconnecting or removing components, make sure the area around the joint faces and connections are
clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.
NOTES:
The vehicle battery must be in good condition and fully charged before carrying out this procedure.
1. Refer to: Glow Plugs - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (303-07C Glow Plug System,
2. Torque: 10 Nm
3. NOTE: Some components shown removed for clarity.

www.JagDocs.com
4. NOTE: Some components shown removed for clarity.
5. CAUTION: Make sure the fuel injection system is

www.JagDocs.com
disabled before carrying out a cylinder compression test.

Failure to follow this step may result in damage to the
vehicle.
NOTE: Some components shown removed for clarity.
www.JagDocs.com
6. CAUTION: Make sure the fuel injection system is
disabled before carrying out a cylinder compression test.
Failure to follow this step may result in damage to the
vehicle.
NOTE: Some components shown removed for clarity.
7. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
8. Torque: 10 Nm
9. Install the oil filter element and housing.

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 28 Nm
10. CAUTION: Make sure the fuel injection system is disabled before
carrying out a cylinder compression test. Failure to follow this step may
Crank the engine for approximately five seconds to remove any

remaining fuel in the cylinders.
11. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is clean, free
of foreign material and lubricant.
Using a suitable tool, remove the corner edges of special

tool JLR-303-1629 as illustrated.
Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1629
12. NOTE: The compression test gauge requires special

www.JagDocs.com
tool JLR-303-1629 for cylinders 2 and 5.
Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1623-2, JLR-303-1629

Torque: 10 Nm
13. Special Tool(s): JLR-303-1623-2
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
14. NOTES:
Print graphic number E163867 in Step 20. Use this

graphic to record each cylinder compression figure.
The vehicle battery must be in good condition and fully

charged before carrying out this procedure.
Crank the engine for 10 seconds and record the figure

displayed on the compression test gauge. Make sure the
pressure is released from the compression test gauge after
each cylinder recording. Repeat the process for all cylinders.
15.
www.JagDocs.com
16. NOTE: Remove and discard all blanking caps.
17. The minimum cylinder compression reading recorded must be within 10%
of the maximum cylinder compression reading recorded. If the difference
across the cylinders is higher than 10% please contact dealer technical
support (DTS) for further assistance.
18. Using Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment, read and clear any
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Engine Data
Engine Maximum Engine Torque Maximum Engine Power Compression
Engine Description Capacity (EEC) (SAE) (EEC) (SAE) Ratio Bore Stroke
60° "Vee" • 6 Cylinder • 2993 ccm 500 Nm at 2000 RPM 177 kW at 4000 RPM 16.1:1 ± 0.5 84 90
24 Valves 600 Nm at 2000 RPM (S) 202 kW at 4000 RPM (S)
Engine Firing Order
Firing Order
1:4:2:5:3:6
Glow Plug
Specification
9X2Q-6M090-AC
Lubricants,Fluids,Sealers and Adhesives

Description Specification
Engine oil (EUR) 5W–30 meeting Jaguar WSS–M2C934–B
Engine oil (ROW) 5W–30 meeting Jaguar WSS–M2C913–B or C
Sealant WSE–M4G323–A5
Core plug and stub pipe retainer WSK-M2G349-A7
Jaguar premium cooling system fluid WSS-M97B44-D
Capacities
Description Liters
Engine oil initial fill 7.7
Engine oil service fill with oil filter change 6.6
www.JagDocs.com
Cylinder Head and Valve Train

Item Specification
Valve guide inner diameter (mm) 5.980 ± 0.010
Intake valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 94.99mm +/- 0.15
Exhaust valve effective length (mm) (tip to gauge line) 94.45mm +/-0.15
Valve stem to guide clearance intake diametrical (mm) 0.027 - 0.063
Valve stem to guide clearance exhaust diametrical (mm) 0.037 - 0.073
Valve head diameter intake (mm) 27.8mm +/-0.1
Valve head diameter exhaust (mm) 25.2mm +/-0.1
Intake valve face angle (degrees) 44 deg 52 min +/-7min30sec
Exhaust valve face angle (degrees) 44 deg 52 min +/-7min30sec
Valve stem diameter intake (mm) 5.935±0.008
Valve stem diameter exhaust (mm) 5.925±0.008
Valve spring free length (mm) - inlet 38.9mm
Valve spring free length (mm) - exhaust 38.9mm
Valve spring installed height (mm) - inlet 31.22mm
Valve spring installed height (mm) - exhaust 31.22mm
Camshaft lobe max lift intake (mm) 3.75187mm
Camshaft lobe max lift exhaust (mm) 3.80999mm
Camshaft journal to cylinder head bearing surface clearance diametrical (mm) 0.040-0.090
Camshaft journal diameter - all positions 25.950±0.010
Bearing diameter - all positions 26.015±0.015
Camshaft journal maximum run out limit (mm) 0.030mm
Camshaft journal maximum out of round (mm) - all journals 0.010mm
Cylinder head maximum permitted warp (flatness specification) 0.2 mm (0.008 in)
Cylinder Head Gasket
Identification Gasket Thickness (mm) Piston Protrusion (mm)
2 1.17 0.552 - 0.603
3 1.22 0.604 - 0.655
4 1.27 0.656 - 0.707
5 1.32 0.708 - 0.760
NOTE: A = refer to procedure for correct torque sequence

Piston cooling nozzle 10 7 88
Engine coolant drain plug 18 13 159
Cylinder head retaining bolts A - -
Oil filter housing retaining bolts 10 7 88
Fuel injection pump cradle retaining bolts 23 17 203
Fuel injection pump to cradle retaining bolts 23 17 203
Fuel injection pump bracket to cradle retaining 10 7 88
bolts
Fuel injection pump to bracket retaining bolts 10 7 88
Oil pump retaining bolts 10 7 88
Crankshaft rear oil seal housing retaining bolts 10 7 88
Oil pan extension retaining bolts M6 10 7 88
Oil pan extension retaining bolts M8 23 17 88
Oil pump pick up pipe retaining bolts 10 7 88
Oil pan retaining bolts 10 7 88
Engine oil level sensor retaining nuts 10 7 88
Crankshaft timing belt pulley retaining bolt A - -
Crankshaft position sensor (CKP) retaining bolt 5 - 44
Timing chain tensioner retaining bolts 10 7 88
Camshaft bearing cap retaining bolts A - -
Timing belt idler pulley retaining bolt 45 33 398
Fuel injection pump belt rear cover retaining 10 7 88
bolts
Fuel injection pump sprocket retaining nut 50 37 442
Coolant outlet pipe retaining bolts 10 7 88
Coolant pump retaining bolts 10 7 88
Timing belt tensioner retaining bolt 26 19 230
Engine lifting eye bolts 23 17 203
Camshaft rear end accessory drive (READ) pulley Stage 1 - 80 Stage 2 - Stage 1 - 59 Stage 2 - Stage 1 - 708 Stage 2 -
hub retaining bolt 80 degrees 80 degrees 80 degrees
Camshaft front timing pulley hub retaining bolt 80 + 80° 59 + 80 ° 708 + 80°
Camshaft READ pulley retaining bolt 23 17 203
Camshaft front timing pulley retaining bolt 23 17 203
Fuel injection pump timing belt tensioner bolt 23 17 203
www.JagDocs.com
Camshaft position sensor (CMP) retaining bolt 10 7 88

Intake manifold / camshaft cover retaining bolts 10 7 88
Brake vacuum pump retaining bolts 23 17 203
Engine oil pressure (EOP) switch 14 10 124
Glow plug 11 8 97
Fuel rail retaining bolts 23 16 203
Fuel rail bracket retaining bolts 23 16 203
Fuel injector retaining bolts A - -
High pressure fuel line union nuts A - -
High pressure fuel line bracket retaining bolts 9 - 80
Turbocharger assembly to exhaust manifold 24 18 212
retaining nuts
Exhaust manifold to cylinder head retaining nuts A - -
Exhaust manifold heatshield retaining bolts 11 8 97
Turbocharger heatshield retaining bolts 11 8 97
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve retaining 10 7 88
bolts M6
Accessory drive belt idler pulley bracket retaining 83 61 735
bolts
Timing belt covers retaining bolts 10 7 88
Engine mount bracket to engine retaining bolts 90 66 796
Exhaust cross over pipe retaining nuts 24 18 212
Engine coolant inlet pipe retaining bolts 10 7 88
Coolant pump pulley retaining bolts 25 18 221
Crankshaft pulley/vibration damper retaining 25 18 221
bolts
Throttle body retaining threaded stud 10 7 88
Wiring harness retaining nuts 10 7 88
Vacuum hose assembly retaining bolts 10 7 88
Flexplate retaining bolts A - -
Accessory drive component bracket retaining 23 17 203
bolts
Power steering pump retaining bolts 23 17 203
Generator retanining bolts 47 35 416
Accessory drive belt tensioner retaining bolt 47 35 416
Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining bolt 47 35 416
Air conditioning compressor bracket retaining 23 17 203
bolts
Air conditioning compressor retaining bolts 23 17 203
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine - Component Location
External Views
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine - Overview
OVERVIEW
The 3.0 liter diesel engine is a V6 configuration unit with 2 banks of 3 cylinders arranged at 60 degrees to each other. There
are 4 valves per cylinder, which are operated by 2 overhead camshafts per cylinder bank.
The cylinder block is cast in compacted graphite iron, which uses less material to produce compared to a conventional cast iron
block. This provides reduced weight and length with superior structural capabilities. A separate aluminum ladder frame, bolted
to the underside of the cylinder block, provides a lightweight, compact and very stiff bottom end of the engine.
The cylinder heads are cast aluminum with a moulded plastic camshaft cover with an integral air intake. The single-piece oil
pan is formed from stamped steel. The exhaust manifolds are cast from an iron alloy. A moulded plastic acoustic cover is fitted
over the upper engine to absorb engine-generated noise.
A low compression ratio of 16:1 contributes to improved emissions quality, quieter combustion and compatibility with the
engine’s unique forced induction system. For additional information refer to Intake Air distribution and Filtering.
The low compression ratio also means less heat build-up in the piston bowl and more efficient fuel burn, resulting in the
production of lower levels of pollutants. It also assists with cold starting allowing a faster cranking speed.
The engine is available in three power output forms; 211 Horse Power (HP), 240 HP and 275 HP. The power difference is
achieved by changes to the engine calibration within the ECM (engine control module) and other vehicle control modules.
NOTE: It is not possible to re-configure a lower power output engine to the higher output specification.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
OPERATION
Operation of the engine is controlled by the ECM (engine control module). For additional information refer to 303-14A Electronic
Engine Controls.
ENGINE STRUCTURE
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Cylinder heads
2 Cylinder block
3 Stiffening frame
4 Oil pan
CYLINDER BLOCK COMPONENTS

The cylinder block is a single cast construction with a hollow beam structure, cast from compact graphite iron. This type of
construction provides outstanding strength and durability and uses less material than a conventional cast iron block, therefore
reducing engine weight and length.
The use of compact graphite iron allows the cross sectional areas of the casting to be reduced, compared with a conventional
gray cast iron block. This ensures reduced engine weight and length, with higher structural capabilities.
To maintain the stiffness of the bottom end of the cylinder block and crankshaft system, the cylinder block has a deep skirt
and bearing cap design. Each of the main bearing caps is double bolted at each side of the crankshaft bearing and cross bolted
back to the cylinder block.
The cylinder block assembly is further stiffened by coupling it to a separate die cast aluminium stiffening frame, which is
bolted to the cylinder block skirt faces and to the bearing caps.
Lubrication oil is distributed through the cylinder block, via a main oil gallery and channels bored in the block, to all critical
moving parts. These channels divert oil to the main and connecting rod bearings via holes machined into the crankshaft.
A tapping at the rear of the cylinder block connects a pipe to the turbochargers by means of banjo connections. Oil is supplied,
under pressure via this tapping, from the oil pump to provide lubrication for the bearings of the turbochargers.
Cylinder cooling is achieved by coolant circulating through chambers in the cylinder block casting.
Two hollow metal dowels are used to locate the cylinder heads to the cylinder block, 1 on each side at the rear of the unit.
www.JagDocs.com
A port is included at the RH (right-hand) and LH (left-hand) side of the cylinder block, below each of the turbochargers, to
connect the turbochargers oil return pipe to the oil pan.
Two coolant drain plugs are installed in the cylinder block; one is fitted in the rear RH side, and the other is fitted in the
middle of the cylinder block on the LH side.
Engine Data
NOTE: Arrow indicates front of engine
Item Description
1 Engine data locations
Engine data is marked at 2 locations at the back of the cylinder block. Component diameters are represented by alphabetical
and numerical codes; keys to the codes are in the removal and installation section of this manual.
Piston Cooling Jets

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Bolt
2 Cooling jet
Jets located in the cylinder block provide piston and piston pin lubrication and cooling. These jets spray oil on to the inside of
the piston, the oil then flows through 2 internal wave shaped channels to help cool each piston crown.
Item Description
1 Cylinder heads
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Oil pump drive
2 Main bearing Journal
3 Connecting rod bearing journal
4 Rear drive flange
5 Rear oil seal location
6 Trigger wheel location
The crankshaft is forged steel and fillet rolled with induction hardened journals, which run in 4 bearings with clamped 2 layer
bearing shells. The upper and lower shells of bearing number 4 are flanged, which limits the end float of the crankshaft. The
main bearing caps are double bolted and cross bolted to increase the strength and rigidity of the engine block.
The main bearings are aluminum/tin split plain selective bearings. An oil groove in the top half of each bearing transfers oil
into the crankshaft for lubrication of the connecting rod bearings. The upper and lower shells of bearing number 4 contain
integral thrust washers, which limits the end float of the crankshaft.
Rear Crankshaft Oil Seal
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Housing
2 Seal
3 Crankshaft
4 Rear oil seal retainer
5 Bolt (10 off)
The rear main oil seal and retainer assembly is a one-piece unit and is supplied with its own plastic fitting sleeve. The seal
and retainer have 2 locating dowels, 10 fixing bolts and a rubber seal. In addition, the retainer has a location for the
crankshaft position sensor. For additional information refer to 303-14A Electronic Engine Controls.
A torsional vibration crankshaft damper pulley is bolted to the front of the crankshaft.
Crankshaft Trigger Wheel
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Special Tool
2 Trigger wheel
The crankshaft trigger wheel is located on the rear of the crankshaft. It is pressed onto the crank using a special tool, which
also precisely aligns the trigger wheel for crankshaft position and timing.
The trigger wheel consists of 60 magnets minus 2 for ECM crankshaft position reference and synchronization. The magnets
cannot be seen on the trigger wheel, which therefore can only be positioned using a special tool. For additional information
refer to 303-14A Electronic Engine Controls.
If the trigger is removed for any reason, then a new trigger wheel must be fitted.
www.JagDocs.com
Stiffening Frame
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Stiffening Frame
The stiffening frame is fitted to the lower cylinder block to stiffen the base structure of the engine, helping to reduce noise,
vibration and harshness. The frame is made of high-pressure die cast aluminum and also incorporates an oil baffle plate to
reduce oil foaming and splash.
The stiffening frame is secured to the cylinder block with 2 dowels, 2 locator pins for the gasket and 18 retaining bolts; 3
different lengths of bolts are used:
M6 x 20 (6 off)
M8 x 75 (4 off)
M6 x 105 (8 off).
Iron inserts, cast into the main bearing supports of the stiffening frame, minimize main bearing clearance changes due to heat
expansion.
A gasket seals the joint between the stiffening frame and the cylinder block.
An oil pick-up pipe with integral strainer locates in the front of the stiffening frame to provide oil to the crankshaft driven oil
pump.
OIL PAN COMPONENTS

A pressed steel oil pan, manufactured from a ‘sound deadening steel’ material, is bolted to the stiffening frame with 14 M6 x
16 bolts and is sealed with a reusable gasket. An engine oil drain plug and the oil level and temperature sensor are located
towards the front of the oil pan.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Oil pump
2 Oil suction tube
3 Oil pan
4 Oil level and temperature sensor
An ultrasonic sensor provides an electronic indication when the oil in the oil pan is low or high. This removes the requirement
for the mechanical dipstick. The sensor monitors the level of the oil continually during trips. An advantage in comparison with
the static 'dipstick' method is that all marginal influences, for example vehicle being on a slope, lateral and longitudinal
acceleration, are compensated for by averaging.
The values determined can be used to signal that the minimum oil level has been reached or to display the current oil level if
required.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
The sensor is mounted to the underside of the oil pan where it sends an ultrasonic pulse vertically upward, it then measures
the time for the pulse to be reflected back from the top surface of the oil.
Warnings will be displayed in the message center if the oil level is not maintained within the safe operating levels (minimum
and maximum). A warning will also be displayed if there is a fault with the oil level monitoring system.
PISTON AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Connecting rod bolts (2 off)
2 Connecting rod
3 Piston
4 Piston pin
5 Circlips
6 Connecting rod identification
The connecting rods are manufactured from sinter-forged steel and have fracture-split bearing caps. The bearing caps are
produced by fracturing the opposing sides of the connecting rod at the bearing horizontal centre-line. As well as being easier
to manufacture, when reassembled the fractured surfaces interlock to form a strong seamless joint. The cylinder position is
etched on adjoining sides of the joint to identify matching connecting rods and bearing caps. The selective connecting rod
bearings are aluminum/tin split plain bearings. The connecting rod bearing is 'sputter coated', which is a manufacturing process
that layers the bearing material to produce a higher load capacity for improved durability.
NOTE: The connecting rods are not selective.

Piston and Connecting Rod Orientation
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Piston and connecting rod assembly, cylinders 4-6
2 Piston and connecting rod assembly, cylinders 1-3
3 Bolts (12 off)
4 Connecting rod bearing cap (6 off)
5 Connecting rod lower bearing (6 off)
When installing a connecting rod, ensure the back of the connecting rod faces the center of the 'vee'.
The pistons are made from aluminum alloy and are fitted with 3 rings. The piston crown incorporates a pronounced bowl; this
forms the combustion chamber, which promotes swirl and turbulence necessary for good combustion and improved emissions.
In addition, the piston skirt has a molybdenum-coated surface, which counteracts scoring of the cylinder bore and piston.
The piston also incorporates a double wave gallery within the piston crown to enhance piston cooling. The pistons are supplied
oil by means of spray jets located in the cylinder block oil gallery. These jets ensure optimum piston cooling to counteract the
high temperatures generated by the combustion process.
Each piston is installed on a piston pin located in a aluminum/tin bushing in the connecting rod.
www.JagDocs.com
Piston Ring Orientation
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Ring gap oil control
2 Ring gap upper compression
3 Spiral joint oil control
4 Ring gap lower compression
5 Upper compression ring
6 Lower compression ring
7 Oil control ring
When installing pistons ensure the arrows on the piston crowns all point to the front of the engine. All pistons are common
single grade/single part number for all engines.
The piston top ring is a taper type and is fitted with the taper to the top of the piston. All rings marked 'top' are assembled
with 'top' uppermost. All rings must be spaced evenly around the piston before installing. The circumference gap of the double
bevelled oil control ring must be opposite the spiral control joint.
CAMSHAFT TIMING COMPONENTS
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Rear engine accessory drive rear cover
2 Rear engine accessory drive tensioner
3 Bolt
4 Fuel pump pulley
5 Nut
6 Rear engine accessory drive camshaft pulley
7 Rear engine accessory drive belt
8 Bolt
9 Rear engine accessory drive front cover
10 RH chain tensioner
11 RH timing chain
12 RH intake camshaft
13 RH exhaust camshaft
14 LH intake camshaft
15 LH exhaust camshaft
16 LH chain tensioner
17 LH timing chain
18 Timing belt
19 Front cover bridge
20 Primary drive cover
21 Bolt
22 Tensioner
23 Bolt
24 Idler
25 Camshaft hub
26 LH camshaft timing pulley
27 Bolt (3 off)
28 Bolt
29 Idler
30 Bolt
31 Bolt (3 off)
32 Bolt
33 RH camshaft timing pulley
34 Camshaft hub
Primary drive is provided by a single toothed belt from the crankshaft to the exhaust camshaft gears of each cylinder bank via
2 idler pulleys and a tensioner.
www.JagDocs.com
Timing belt adjustment is carried out by an eccentric type tensioner mounted on the RH front face of the cylinder block.
A primary drive cover is made up from 3 separate plastic mouldings. The covers are secured to the front of the cylinder block
and cylinder heads with 15 bolts and 1 stud and nut. The 2 upper covers are partially sealed with a rubber seal.
Secondary Drive
Item Description
1 Timing chain
2 Bolts
3 Intake camshaft
4 Exhaust camshaft
5 Tensioner firing pin
Secondary drive is provided by 2 short crossover chains, which transfer drive from the exhaust camshaft gears to the intake
camshaft gears. The crossover drives are located at the rear of the RH cylinder bank and the front of the LH cylinder bank. This
allows for a much shorter and simpler run for the main camshaft drive belt at the front of the engine.
Each crossover chain is tensioned via an automatic chain tensioner, which acts directly on the chains via a guide rail. The
tensioners are located between the exhaust and intake camshafts at the front or rear of the cylinder head, depending on the
cylinder bank.
The tensioner firing pin holds the automatic chain tensioner in a compressed state to aid installation.
www.JagDocs.com
CYLINDER HEAD COMPONENTS
6NOTE: LH cylinder head shown·, RH cy 1i· nder head similar.

www.JagDocs.com
E11 7584
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Hydraulic lash adjusters (12 off)
2 Valve spring retainers (12 off)
3 Roller rockers (12 off)
4 Valve stem seals (12 off)
5 Valve guides (12 off)
6 Exhaust valves (6 off)
7 Intake valve seats (6 off)
8 Exhaust valve seats (6 off)
9 Intake valves (6 off)
10 Valve springs (12 off)
11 Bolt
12 Bracket
13 Intake manifold
14 Lifting eye
15 Washer
16 Bolt
17 Bolt
18 Bolt
19 Seal
20 Cap
www.JagDocs.com
21 Intake manifold cover assembly

22 Washer
23 Bolt
24 Lifting eye
25 Seal
26 Camshaft bearing caps (7 off)
27 Bolts (18 off)
28 Gasket
29 Camshaft bearing cap and seal housing
30 Camshaft bearing cap and seal housing
31 Intake camshaft
32 Exhaust camshaft
33 Cylinder head
34 Cylinder head bolts (8 off)
35 Exhaust manifold studs (6 off)
36 Cylinder head gasket
37 Core plug
38 Plug
39 Seal
40 Oil filler tube
41 Oil filler cap
42 Intake manifold
43 Injectors (3 off)
44 Bolt (2 off)
45 Bolt
46 Vacuum pump
47 Water outlet assembly
48 Bolt (4 off)
Cylinder Heads
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Studs
2 Bolts
3 Blanking plug
The aluminum gravity die cast cylinder heads are unique to each cylinder bank. Eight deep-seated bolts help reduce distortion
and secure each cylinder head to the cylinder block. The cylinder head bolts are located beneath the camshafts, 4 under the
intake camshaft and 4 under the exhaust camshaft. Two hollow dowels align each cylinder head with the cylinder block.
NOTE: The cylinder heads cannot be reworked.
The cylinder head gasket is a 3-layer, laminated steel type and is available in 5 different thicknesses. The choice of gasket
thickness is dependent on the maximum piston protrusion. Gasket thickness is identified by serrations cut into the front end of
the gasket.
The cylinder head has 4 ports machined at each cylinder location, 2 exhaust ports and 2 intake ports. One of the intake ports
is helical and functions as a swirl port, the other is arranged laterally as a tangential port and functions as a charge port.
The camshafts are of a hollow steel tube construction, with pressed on sintered lobes. Each camshaft is retained by aluminum
alloy caps, 5 for the exhaust camshafts and 4 for the intake camshafts. Location letters, A to I for the intake camshaft and R
to Z for the exhaust camshaft, are marked on the outer faces of the caps for each cylinder head.
The LH cylinder bank exhaust camshaft is machined to accept a rear camshaft gear. The rear camshaft gear provides drive for
the high-pressure fuel pump. For additional information refer to 303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls.
The exhaust camshaft gear of the LH cylinder head also incorporates a trigger wheel, which is used in conjunction with the
camshaft sensor to measure engine position. For additional information refer to 303-14A Electronic Engine Controls.
The RH cylinder head exhaust camshaft is machined at the rear end to provide a drive connection for the vacuum pump.
The fuel injection nozzles are centrally mounted above each cylinder. For additional information refer to 303-04A Fuel Charging
and Controls.
The glow plugs are arranged centrally on the intake side of the cylinder heads, between the 2 intake ports of each cylinder. For
additional information refer to 303-07D Glow Plug System.
The engine lifting eyes are bolted to the cylinder head, 1 at the front and 2 at the rear, 1 per cylinder head.
Camshaft Covers
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Stud bolt M6 x 40 (6 off)
2 Bolt M6 x 40 (7 off)
3 Oil filler cap
4 RH camshaft cover assembly
The camshaft covers are manufactured from vinyl ester composite. The RH bank camshaft cover incorporates an outlet for the
full load engine breather and the engine oil filler cap. The LH bank camshaft cover incorporates an outlet for the part load
engine breather. For additional information refer to 303-08A engine Emission Control.
Silicon rubber in-groove gaskets seal the joints between the camshaft covers and the cylinder heads. Together with spacers
and seals on the camshaft cover fasteners, they also isolate the covers from direct contact with the cylinder heads, to reduce
noise.
Intake and Exhaust Valves

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Valve spring collet (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
2 Valve spring retainer (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
3 Valve spring (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
4 Valve stem seal (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
5 Intake valve (12 off, 6 per cylinder head)
6 Exhaust valve (12 off, 6 per cylinder head)
Each cylinder head incorporates 2 overhead camshafts operating 4 valves per cylinder via steel roller rockers with hydraulic lash
adjusters.
Roller Rockers with Hydraulic Lash Adjusters
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Roller rocker (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
2 Hydraulic lash adjuster (24 off, 12 per cylinder head)
The lightweight valve gear provides good economy and noise levels. Valve head diameters are 31 mm (1.220 in) for the
exhaust and 35 mm (1.378 in) for the intake. All valves have 5 mm (0.197 in) diameter stems supported in sintered metal
seats and guide inserts. Collets, valve collars and spring seats locate single valve springs on both intake and exhaust valves.
Valve stem seals are integrated into the spring seats.
www.JagDocs.com
Vacuum Pump
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Vacuum pump connections
2 Bolt (2 off)
3 Nut
4 Bracket (emission hose)
5 Stud
The vacuum pump is located at the rear of the RH side cylinder head and is driven from the exhaust camshaft.
Exhaust Manifolds
NOTE: LH exhaust manifold shown; RH exhaust manifold similar.

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Cylinder head
2 Connecting pipe
3 Nut (2 off)
4 Nut (3 off)
5 Exhaust manifold
6 Bolt
7 Gasket
8 Turbocharger (primary turbocharger shown)
9 Manifold rear heat shield
10 Bolt
11 Bolt (2 off)
12 Manifold heat shield
The exhaust manifolds are cast from an iron alloy with a high nickel content giving excellent heat and corrosion resistance
properties. They are sealed to the cylinder head by means of a steel gasket. Sacrificial plastic sleeves are used to align the
manifolds. These sleeves must be changed when refitting the manifolds. Spacers on the securing bolts allow the manifolds to
expand and retract with changes of temperature while maintaining the clamping loads.
Each manifold has a connection for the EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) transfer pipe.
The engine is fitted with twin variable geometry turbochargers, which fix to the exhaust manifolds by a 3-hole flange with a
steel gasket.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Inlet camshaft
2 Exhaust camshaft
3 Turbocharger oil supply
4 Primary turbocharger
5 Crankshaft and connecting rods
6 Oil pan
8 Oil pump
9 Oil cooler and filter assembly
10 Piston cooling jets
11 Secondary turbocharger
Oil is drawn from the oil pan and pressurized by the oil pump. The output from the oil pump is then filtered and distributed
through internal oil passageways.
All moving parts are lubricated by pressure or splash oil. Pressurized oil is also provided for operation of the hydraulic
adjusters and the timing gear chain tensioners.
Oil Cooler and Filter Assembly

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Filter housing
2 'O' ring seal
3 Paper element
4 Retaining bolt (6 off)
5 Coolant outlet connection
6 Cooler assembly
The engine is lubricated by a force-feed oil circulation system with a full flow oil filter. The oil cooler forms a unit with the oil
filter, which is mounted centrally in the middle of the cylinder block between the 2 banks of cylinders. The engine oil is cooled
using the engine cooling system. This eliminates the need for an additional engine oil cooler remotely mounted.
Oil returns to the oil pan under gravity. Large drain holes through the cylinder heads and cylinder block ensure the quick return
of the oil, reducing the volume of oil required and enabling an accurate check of the contents soon after the engine stops.
System replenishment is through the oil filler cap on the RH camshaft cover.
The moulded composite oil pick-up is immersed in the oil reservoir to provide a supply to the oil pump during all normal vehicle
attitudes. A mesh screen in the inlet prevents debris from entering the oil system.
NOTE: Fuel cooling is facilitated by a blast air fuel cooler in the return line to the fuel tank.
Oil Pump
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Oil pump
2 Bolt (10 off)
The oil pump is a gear type pump and is bolted and dowelled to the front of the cylinder block. It is sealed by means of a
rubber gasket, which is recessed into the oil pump housing. The pump inlet and outlet ports align with oil passages in the
stiffening frame.
The pumping element is an eccentric rotor, which is directly driven by flats on the crankshaft. An integral pressure relief valve
regulates pump outlet pressure at 4.5 bar (65.25 lb/in2).
The front crankshaft oil seal is housed in the oil pump casing and is fitted such that its front face is 1 mm (0.04 in) under flush
with the machined front face of the oil pump.
NOTE: The seal is not to be pushed all the way into the bore as this will block the seal drains.
The oil pressure switch, located in the 'vee' at the front of the LHcylinder head, connects a ground input to the instrument
cluster when oil pressure is present. The switch operates at a pressure of 0.15 to 0.41 bar (2.2 to 5.9 lb/in2).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine

REFER to: Engine - 3.0L Diesel (303-00 Engine System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Oil Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Draining
WARNING: The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent scalding.
CAUTION: Make sure the engine is warm.
1. Refer to: Oil Filter Element (303-01, Removal and Installation).
Installation).
4. WARNING: Observe due care when draining engine oil as

the oil can be very hot.
www.JagDocs.com
CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping oil.
Discard the bolt.
Allow at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain.
Drain the engine oil.
Filling
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the component is clean, free of foreign

material and lubricant.
Make sure that a new bolt is installed.
Torque: 23 Nm
Installation).

5. Fill the engine with oil.
6. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is left for 5 minutes from
filling with oil and that the engine oil level is reading at least minimum,
before starting the engine. To check engine oil level follow steps 9-12.
Clean any residual engine oil from the oil filler cap area.
www.JagDocs.com
7.
8.
Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop the
engine.
Check for leaks.
9. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the vehicle is parked on level ground.
Make sure that the selector lever and the gearshift mechanism are
in the park (P) position.
Make sure that the hood is open.
NOTE: Allow 10 minutes from the engine switch off for the engine
oil level to stabilize.
Turn the ignition on.

10.
Scroll through the trip menu to access the engine oil
level display.
www.JagDocs.com
11.
Press the cruise control cancel button twice within 2
seconds.
12.
The message center display will revert to the normal
display in the trip computer.
level display.
This display is now the live reading of the engine oil
level.
Take a reading from the level display and, if
necessary, top up with oil as instructed.
www.JagDocs.com
13. Turn the ignition off.
14. NOTE: Note - TAS | Engine | Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil
level to stabilize if there has been additional oil top up.

15.
level display.
www.JagDocs.com
16.
seconds.
17.
level display.
level.
www.JagDocs.com
18.
Press and hold the cruise control cancel button for
more than 2 seconds.
19.
The message center display will revert to the normal display in
the trip computer.
21. Turn the ignition on.

22.
level display.
Make sure that the average oil level value has now
been updated.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
303-1484
Vacuum Pump, Oil Drain
303-1484-01
Adapter for 303-1484
Draining
www.JagDocs.com
WARNING: The spilling of hot engine oil is unavoidable during this procedure, care must be taken to prevent scalding.
CAUTION: Make sure the engine is warm.
NOTE: Clean the components general area prior to dismantling.
1. Refer to: Oil Filter Element (303-01 Engine - 3.0L V6 - TdV6, Removal
and Installation).
2.
3. CAUTION: Allow 10 minutes from turning the engine
off before starting oil extraction.
4.
Using the oil vacuum pump drain the oil out through
the oil extraction tube.
Special Tool(s): 303-1484, 303-1484-01

www.JagDocs.com
5.
Remove the oil vacuum pump.
Filling
1. Refer to: Oil Filter Element (303-01 Engine - 3.0L V6 - TdV6, Removal
and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
2.
3. Fill the engine with oil.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the vehicle is left for 5 minutes from filling
with oil and that the engine oil level is reading at least minimum,
before starting the engine. To check engine oil level follow steps 8-10.
Clean any residual engine oil from the oil filler cap area.
www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTION: Correct installation of the oil filler cap can be

obtained by tightening the cap until an audible click is
heard.
6.
Start the engine and allow to run for 10 minutes, stop the
engine.
Check for leaks.
7. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the vehicle is parked on level ground.
Make sure that the selector lever and the gearshift mechanism are
in the park (P) position.
Make sure that the hood is open.
NOTE: Allow 10 minutes from the engine switch off for the engine
oil level to stabilize.

8.
level display.
www.JagDocs.com
9.
seconds.
10.
level display.
level.
www.JagDocs.com
12. NOTE: Allow 10 minutes for the engine oil level to stabilize if there
has been additional oil top up.
www.JagDocs.com
13.
level display.
www.JagDocs.com
14.
seconds.
15.
level display.
level.
www.JagDocs.com
16.
Press and hold the cruise control cancel button for
more than 2 seconds.
17.
The message center display will revert to the normal display in
the trip computer.
19. Turn the ignition on.

20.
level display.
Make sure that the average oil level value has now
been updated.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Camshaft LH
Special Tool(s)
303-1126
Timing Peg, Camshaft Pulley
Removal
1. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General
Procedures).
3. Refer to: Valve Cover (303-01, Removal and Installation).

www.JagDocs.com
4.
5.
6.
7.
www.JagDocs.com
8.
Reposition the rubber insulator cover.
9.
www.JagDocs.com
11.
12. CAUTION: Only rotate the crankshaft clockwise.
NOTES:

www.JagDocs.com
Engine shown removed for clarity.
Rotate the crankshaft until the mark on the rear camshaft pulley is in the
illustrated position.
13.
14. Install the special tool.
15.
www.JagDocs.com
16.
17. NOTE: Do not loosen the bolts more than 2 turns.
18.
www.JagDocs.com
20.
21.
www.JagDocs.com
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
www.JagDocs.com
27.
www.JagDocs.com
28.
29.
www.JagDocs.com
30. NOTE: Discard the gasket.

www.JagDocs.com
33.
32.
31.
www.JagDocs.com
36.
35.
34.
37.
38. Torque: 8 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
39.
40.

www.JagDocs.com
42. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack. Always support
the vehicle on safety stands.
43.
www.JagDocs.com

www.JagDocs.com
46.
47.
CAUTION: Do not use the special tools to lock the camshafts. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the engine or the special tools.
NOTE: Do not loosen the bolts more than 2 turns.

www.JagDocs.com
48.
CAUTIONS:
Discard the component.
Discard the bolt.
49.
CAUTION: Discard the component.
50.
51.
Install the special tool.

www.JagDocs.com
52.
54.
55.
Reposition the secondary timing chain tensioner.

Retain the secondary timing chain tensioner plunger.
www.JagDocs.com
56.
Remove the camshaft bearing caps evenly.
57.
58.
59. CAUTION: Discard the seals.
60. Remove the LH bank camshafts and secondary timing chain tensioner
assembly.
www.JagDocs.com
61. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner assembly.
62. Remove the secondary timing chain from the camshafts.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. Install the secondary timing chain onto the camshafts.
2. Install the secondary timing chain tensioner assembly.

www.JagDocs.com
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the dots on the camshafts are aligned at the
12 o'clock position. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the engine.
NOTES:
Lubricate the camshafts and the camshaft bearing caps with oil meeting
Jaguar specification prior to installation.
Use hypoid oil to lubricate the camshafts.
Install the camshafts.
4. NOTE: Install new seals.

5. Torque: lJl..lllm
www.JagDocs.com
6.
Apply
Loctite
518
sealant
to the
exhaust
camshaft
seal
bearing
caps.
Apply
Loctite
518
sealant,
2 mm
wide, to
the LH
rear and
RH front
camshaft
bearing
caps.
Apply
Loctite
518
sealant,
7 mm
diameter,
to the
LH front
and RH
rear
camshaft
bearing
www.JagDocs.com
caps.
7. NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Install the camshaft bearing caps in their original positions.

Stage 1: Bolts 1 to 14, 1 Nm.
8. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner retaining pin.

www.JagDocs.com
9.

Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°
11.

www.JagDocs.com
12.
CAUTION: Only tighten the bolt finger-tight at this stage.
13.
14.
www.JagDocs.com
CAUTIONS:
Only tighten the bolts finger-tight at this stage.
15.
CAUTION: Make sure the camshaft pulleys remain in the clockwise

position.
Install the new timing belt.

Starting at the crankshaft pulley, install the timing belt in a counter-
clockwise direction, in the sequence shown.
Stage one: Attach the timing belt to the crankshaft pulley.
Stage two: Attach the timing belt to the idler pulley.
Stage three: Attach the timing belt to the left-hand camshaft pulley.
Stage four: Attach the timing belt to the idler pulley.
Stage five: Attach the timing belt to the RH camshaft pulley.
Stage six: Attach the timing belt to the timing belt tensioner.
www.JagDocs.com
16.
CAUTION: Make sure the timing belt tensioner window is aligned with the
groove as illustrated.
Tension the timing belt.

Rotate the tensioner assembly counter-clockwise.
Torque: 26 Nm
17.
CAUTION: Do not use the special tools to lock the camshafts. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the engine or the special tools.
18. Using a suitable tool, counterhold the camshaft pulley center retaining
bolts.
Torque: 23 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Rotate the engine two complete turns clockwise.
22. Install with the special tool.

23.
Install the special tools to the exhaust camshaft pulleys.
If the special tool does not fit correctly, repeat the timing belt
installation procedure.
Remove the special tools from the camshaft pulleys.
24. Torque: 80 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
25. NOTE: Install a new gasket.
Torque: 10 Nm
26. CAUTION: Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Torque: 24 Nm
27. Torque: 25 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
28. WARNING: Do not work on or under a vehicle supported only by a jack. Always support
the vehicle on safety stands.
Lower the vehicle.
Torque: 10 Nm
30. Torque: 8 Nm
31. Torque: 8 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
32. Torque: 8 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
33.
34. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
35. Torque: 3 Nm
36.
37.
www.JagDocs.com
38. Torque: 8 Nm
39.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
41.
42. Torque: 3 Nm
43. Torque: 8 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
44. Torque: 3 Nm
Torque: 8 Nm
45.
Torque: 14 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
46.
Torque: 10 Nm
47.
48.
www.JagDocs.com
49.
Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°
www.JagDocs.com
50.
51.
CAUTION: Only tighten the bolt finger-tight at this stage.
52.
53. CAUTION: Do not install the new fuel injection pump belt to the pulleys
with the fuel pump belt tensioner installed. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the fuel pump belt.
NOTES:
The fuel injection pump rotates in a counter-clockwise direction when

viewed from the rear of the engine.
Make sure the new fuel injection pump belt is correctly seated onto the
camshaft and fuel pump pulleys.

www.JagDocs.com
55. Make sure that the rear end accessory drive (READ) belt is aligned with the
marks on the rear camshaft pulley and fuel injection pump pulley as illustrated.
56. CAUTION: Make sure that the fuel injection pump belt tensioner locking
pin is not removed until the fuel injection pump belt tensioner is fully installed.
Torque: 23 Nm
57.
Torque: 23 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
58.
60.
61.
62.
www.JagDocs.com
63. Torque: 48 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
64.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
65.
Torque: 7 Nm
66.
67.
www.JagDocs.com
68. Torque: 23 Nm
69. Refer to: Valve Cover (303-01, Removal and Installation).
70. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, General
Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Camshaft RH
Special Tool(s)
303-1117
Timing Peg, Automatic Transmission
303-1124
Holding Tool, Camshaft Front Pulley
303-1126
www.JagDocs.com
Removal
Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01 Battery, Mounting and
3. Refer to: Starter Motor (303-06A Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
4. Refer to: Brake Vacuum Pump - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (206-07 Power Brake
Actuation, Removal and Installation).
5. Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
6.
7. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to align the crankshaft alignment hole in

the flywheel or flexplate with the block aperture.
www.JagDocs.com
8. Check the camshaft pulley alignment holes are correctly

aligned. If the alignment holes are not aligned, rotate the
crankshaft one full turn clockwise.
10.
www.JagDocs.com

13.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
15. CAUTION: Do not use the special tools to lock the
camshafts. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the engine or the special tools.
16. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolt.

www.JagDocs.com
17. CAUTION: Discard the component.

18.

www.JagDocs.com

20.

www.JagDocs.com

22.
23.
Reposition the secondary timing chain tensioner.
Retain the secondary timing chain tensioner plunger.
www.JagDocs.com
24. Remove the camshaft bearing caps evenly.

25.
CAUTION: Discard the seal.

26.
www.JagDocs.com
Remove the RH bank camshafts and secondary timing chain

tensioner assembly.
27.
Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner assembly.
28.
www.JagDocs.com
29. Remove the secondary timing chain from the camshafts.
Installation
1. Install the secondary timing chain onto the camshafts.

www.JagDocs.com
2. Install the secondary timing chain tensioner assembly.

3. CAUTION: Make sure that the dots on the camshafts are
aligned at the 12 o'clock position. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the engine.
NOTES:
Lubricate the camshafts and the camshaft bearing

caps with oil meeting Jaguar specification prior to
installation.
Use hypoid oil to lubricate the camshafts.
Install the camshafts.
4. NOTE: Install a new seal.

www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6.
Apply Loctite 518 sealant to the exhaust camshaft seal bearing
caps.
Apply Loctite 518 sealant, 2 mm wide, to the LH rear and RH
front camshaft bearing caps.
Apply Loctite 518 sealant, 7 mm diameter, to the LH front and RH
rear camshaft bearing caps.
0 0
·$ ·$·
www.JagDocs.com
0 0
I I
E116784
Install the camshaft bearing caps in their original

positions.
8. Remove the secondary timing chain tensioner retaining pin.

www.JagDocs.com
9.
11. Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
13. CAUTION: Only tighten the bolt finger-tight at this

stage.
www.JagDocs.com
14.
15. CAUTIONS:
16. CAUTION: Make sure the camshaft pulleys remain in

the clockwise position.

Starting at the crankshaft pulley, install the timing
belt in a counter-clockwise direction, in the
sequence shown.
Stage one: Attach the timing belt to the crankshaft
pulley.
www.JagDocs.com

Stage three: Attach the timing belt to the left-hand
camshaft pulley.
Stage five: Attach the timing belt to the RH
camshaft pulley.
Stage six: Attach the timing belt to the timing belt
tensioner.
17. CAUTION: Make sure the timing belt tensioner window

is aligned with the groove as illustrated.

Torque: 26 Nm

Using a suitable tool, counterhold the camshaft

pulley center retaining bolts.
Torque: 23 Nm

www.JagDocs.com

23.
Install the special tools to the exhaust camshaft
pulleys.
www.JagDocs.com

If the special tool does not fit correctly, repeat the
timing belt installation procedure.
24. Torque: 80 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 24 Nm
27. Torque: 25 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
29.
www.JagDocs.com
30. Refer to: Valve Cover RH (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal
and Installation).
31. Refer to: Brake Vacuum Pump - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (206-07 Power Brake
Actuation, Removal and Installation).
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Camshaft Front Seal
Removal
3. Refer to: Timing Belt (303-01, Removal and Installation).

www.JagDocs.com
5.
7.
www.JagDocs.com
9.
10. CAUTION: Make sure the special tool is correctly
seated behind the camshaft seal. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the special tool.
11.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the seal is installed correctly.
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of
corrosion and foreign material.
Do not use any lubricant on the camshaft front seal or

the camshaft. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
NOTE: Make sure that the seal is 1mm below the face
of the cylinder head.

www.JagDocs.com
4.
www.JagDocs.com
6. Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°
www.JagDocs.com

stage.
10. Refer to: Timing Belt (303-01, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Camshaft Rear Seal
Removal
3. Refer to: Rear End Accessory Drive (READ) (303-05A Accessory Drive -
TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
4.
www.JagDocs.com

6.

www.JagDocs.com
8.
9. CAUTION: Make sure the special tool is correctly

www.JagDocs.com
seated behind the camshaft seal. Failure to follow this

instruction may result in damage to the special tool.
www.JagDocs.com
10.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com

2. CAUTIONS:
Do not use any lubricant on the camshaft rear seal or

the camshaft. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
NOTE: Make sure that the seal is 1mm below the face
of the cylinder head.

www.JagDocs.com
4.

www.JagDocs.com
6. Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°

www.JagDocs.com
stage.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankshaft Front Seal
Special Tool(s)
303-1120
Remover, Crankshaft Front Seal
303-1121
Installer, Crankshaft Seal
303-1122
Installer, Crankshaft Front Seal
www.JagDocs.com
Removal
3. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01 Engine - 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
5. CAUTION: Discard the seal.

www.JagDocs.com
Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft front seal.

Installation
1. CAUTION: Do not use any lubricant on the crankshaft

front seal, special tools or the crankshaft. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure that all the component mating faces

are clean.
Install a new crankshaft front seal to the special tool.
2. Reposition the crankshaft front seal along the special tool.

www.JagDocs.com
3. Install the special tool to the crankshaft.

www.JagDocs.com

5. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the seal is seated 1mm under flush.
Discard the bolt.
Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front seal.

www.JagDocs.com
7. Refer to: Crankshaft Pulley (303-01 Engine - 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankshaft Pulley
Special Tool(s)
303-1117
303-1123
Locking Tool, Flywheel
303-D121
www.JagDocs.com
Puller, General Purpose
Removal
3. Refer to: Timing Belt (303-01 Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
4. Refer to: Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6
3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

www.JagDocs.com

7.

www.JagDocs.com
Special Tool(s): 303-D121
9. CAUTION: Discard the bolt.

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the pulley washer is correctly seated

before installing the pulley.
Do not lubricate the components.
Before installing the crankshaft pulley retaining bolt,

note the thread size of the bolt (there are two different
sized threads, M14 and M16). Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the engine.
Install the crankshaft pulley.
Torque:
M14 retaining bolt
Stage 1:140 Nm
Stage 2:90°
M16 retaining bolt
Stage 1:150 Nm
Stage 2:300 Nm
Stage 3:90°
www.JagDocs.com

www.JagDocs.com
5. Refer to: Timing Belt (303-01 Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankshaft Rear Seal
Removal
3. Refer to: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ring (303-14A Electronic

Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
4.
www.JagDocs.com

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the crankshaft rear oil seal is correctly

located.
Make sure the crankshaft seal mating faces are clean

and dry.
Apply an 8 mm bead of sealant to the cylinder block in the

areas shown.
2.
Lubricate the oil seal.
www.JagDocs.com
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
6. Refer to: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ring (303-14A Electronic

Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankshaft Vibration Damper
Removal
3. Refer to: Turbocharger Bypass Valve (303-04B Fuel Charging and

Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTION: Tighten the bolts in a diagonal sequence.
NOTE: Install the bolt finger tight before final

tightening.
Torque: 25 Nm
Installation
1. To install reverse the removal procedure.

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Cylinder Head LH
Removal
3. Refer to: Camshaft (303-01 Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
5.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
7. Refer to: Catalytic Converter (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L

www.JagDocs.com
8. NOTE: Discard the sealing washers.
9.
www.JagDocs.com
10.
11.
12.
13.
www.JagDocs.com

16. CAUTION: Discard the nuts.

www.JagDocs.com
17. CAUTION: Discard the studs.
18.
www.JagDocs.com
19.
Position the turbocharger to one side.
20.
21.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: Discard the gasket.

www.JagDocs.com
25.
26.
www.JagDocs.com
29.
28.
27.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of
foreign material.
Clean and inspect the cylinder head and cylinder block.

www.JagDocs.com
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Use care when installing the cylinder head. Damage to

the cylinder block, cylinder head or cylinder head gasket
may result.
The head gasket must be installed over the cylinder

block dowels.
NOTES:
Install a new gasket.
No additional lubrication to the cylinder head bolts is

required.
Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:180°
4.
5. CAUTION: Install the new seals.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
6. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 24 Nm
7.
Torque: 14 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
8.
WARNING: Make sure that new nuts are installed.
CAUTION: Install the nuts finger tight before final

tightening.
NOTE: Install a new gasket.
9.
NOTE: Tighten the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Torque: 24 Nm
10.
www.JagDocs.com
11. CAUTION: Install new studs.
Torque: 24 Nm
12. WARNING: Make sure that new nuts are installed.
Torque: 24 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
13. Torque: 10 Nm
14.
15.
www.JagDocs.com
16. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 13 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
CAUTION: Only tighten the nut finger tight at this

stage.
19. NOTES:
Tighten the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Turbocharger shown removed for clarity.
Torque: 24 Nm
20. CAUTION: Install a new seal.

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 24 Nm
22.
www.JagDocs.com
23.
Torque: 7 Nm
24. Torque: 7 Nm
25.
www.JagDocs.com
26. Torque: 10 Nm
27. CAUTION: Make sure that a new sealing washer is

installed.
Torque: 30 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
29.
30. Torque: 24 Nm
32. Refer to: Camshaft (303-01 Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Cylinder Head RH
Removal
NOTES:
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable
3. Refer to: Turbocharger RH (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls -

www.JagDocs.com
Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).


www.JagDocs.com
7.
8.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
9.
10.
www.JagDocs.com
11. Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
12.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign
material.
An acceptable flatness of the cylinder head is 0.2mm.
Clean and inspect the cylinder head and cylinder block.

Check the cylinder head face for distortion, across the center and
from corner to corner.
Refer to: Cylinder Head Distortion (303-00 Engine System -

www.JagDocs.com
2. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that new bolts are installed.
Use care when installing the cylinder head. Damage to

the cylinder block, cylinder head or cylinder head gasket
may result.
The head gasket must be installed over the cylinder

block dowels.
NOTES:
No additional lubrication to the cylinder head bolts is

required.
Torque: 80 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 180°
5.
6. Refer to: Camshaft RH (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
7. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
8.
9. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
10.

www.JagDocs.com

tightening.

Torque: 28 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 13 Nm
Torque: 24 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
16. Reconnect the battery ground cable
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Mount LH
Removal
3. Refer to: Turbocharger LH (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls -

4. Using the special tool, raise and support the engine.

www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 63 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
6. Torque: 90 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
prior to removal.
NOTES:
Position and secure component in a bench vice fitted

with soft jaws.
Do not disassemble further if the component is

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Mount RH
Removal

4. Using the special tool, raise and support the engine.

www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 63 Nm
6. Torque: 90 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
prior to removal.
NOTES:
Position and secure component in a bench vice fitted

with soft jaws.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust Manifold LH
Removal

4.
www.JagDocs.com


www.JagDocs.com
Installation

tightening.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 24 Nm
Torque: 24 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 24 Nm
5. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust Manifold RH
Removal


www.JagDocs.com

Installation
www.JagDocs.com
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that new nuts are installed.
Install the nuts finger tight before final tightening.

Torque: 28 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 13 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4. CAUTION: Make sure that new nuts are installed.
Torque: 28 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust Manifold Crossover Pipe
Removal

4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
7.
www.JagDocs.com
8.
www.JagDocs.com
11.
10.
9.
12.

www.JagDocs.com
14.
www.JagDocs.com
16.
www.JagDocs.com


www.JagDocs.com

1. NOTES:
Installation
New exhaust manifold retaining studs must be fitted

if the old studs are removed.
Install new gaskets.
Torque: 15 Nm
2. NOTE: New exhaust manifold retaining studs must be

www.JagDocs.com
fitted if the old studs are removed.
Torque: 15 Nm
3. NOTE: New exhaust manifold retaining studs must be

fitted if the old studs are removed.
Torque: 15 Nm
4.

www.JagDocs.com
CAUTION: Only tighten the nuts finger-tight at this

stage.

stage.
stage.

stage.
www.JagDocs.com

stage.
www.JagDocs.com
10. Remove the exhaust cross-over pipe RH support bracket.
11. Remove the exhaust cross-over pipe LH support bracket.

www.JagDocs.com
12. Torque: 23 Nm
stage.

www.JagDocs.com
stage.
15. Torque: 23 Nm
16. Torque: 23 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
17. Torque: 23 Nm
18. Torque: 23 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
19. Torque: 23 Nm
20. Torque: 23 Nm
21. Torque: 11 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
22. Torque: 11 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
23.

stage.
www.JagDocs.com
24.
Torque: 25 Nm
25. Torque: 12 Nm
26.
27. Torque: 22 Nm
28. Torque: 11 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
29.
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Flexplate
Special Tool(s)
303-1123
Locking Tool, Flywheel
Removal

www.JagDocs.com
4. Refer to: Transmission - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (307-01B Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol, Installation).
5.
NOTE: Prevent the flexplate from rotating.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
NOTES:
Make sure that all the component mating faces are clean.
Loosely install all retaining bolts.
Prevent the flexplate from rotating.
2. CAUTION: Tighten the bolts evenly in the stages

shown.
Stage 1: Tighten to 50 Nm.

Stage 2: Tighten to 45 degrees.
Stage 3: Tighten to 45 degrees.
3.

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Oil Filter Element
Removal
2.
Rotate the oil filter element housing five complete
turns counter-clockwise.
Allow the engine oil to drain from the oil filter
element housing for two minutes.
Remove the oil filter element housing.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be installed.
NOTE: Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil.

2. Torque: 25 Nm
4. Start and run the engine.
5. Check and top-up the engine oil.

www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Oil Pan
Removal
Installation).
4. Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L
Diesel, General Procedures).
5.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
7.
CAUTION: Make sure to support the steering gear.

www.JagDocs.com
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
www.JagDocs.com
13.
14.
www.JagDocs.com
15.

www.JagDocs.com
17.
18.

www.JagDocs.com
19.
20.

Installation
Torque: 10 Nm

www.JagDocs.com

4.
5. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
7.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
8.
9. Torque: 7 Nm
10.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 7 Nm
11.
Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
12.
Torque: 7 Nm
13. Torque: 100 Nm
14.
15.
16. Torque: 35 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
17.
18. Refer to: Engine Oil Draining and Filling (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L
Diesel, General Procedures).
Installation).
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Oil Pan Extension
Removal
3. Refer to: Transmission (307-01A Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - V6

3.0L Petrol, Removal).
4. Refer to: Oil Pan (303-01, Removal and Installation).
5.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
www.JagDocs.com
9.
8.
7.
11.
www.JagDocs.com

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
14.
13.
www.JagDocs.com
17.
16.
15.
www.JagDocs.com
20.
19.
18.
21.
22. NOTE: Loosen the bolt, but do not fully remove.

www.JagDocs.com
23.
24.
25.
www.JagDocs.com
26.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
2. Apply the sealant as shown.

stage.

www.JagDocs.com
Torque:
M8 10 Nm
M6 4 Nm
Torque:
M8 24 Nm
M6 10 Nm
6. Torque: 24 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
7.
8. Torque: 25 Nm
9. Torque: 24 Nm
www.JagDocs.com

stage.
11. Torque: 24 Nm
12. Torque: 24 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
13. Torque:
M6 10 Nm
Clip 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
14. Torque: 10 Nm
15. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
16. Torque: 47 Nm
17.
18.
www.JagDocs.com
19. Torque: 15 Nm
20.

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 7 Nm
22. Torque: 10 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 48 Nm
24. Torque: 10 Nm
25. Torque: 10 Nm
26. Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
27.
www.JagDocs.com
28. Torque: 23 Nm

30. Refer to: Oil Pan (303-01, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Oil Pump
Special Tool(s)
Crankshaft Front Seal Remover
303-1120
Crankshaft Front Seal Sleeve
303-1122
www.JagDocs.com
Crankshaft Front Seal Installer
303-1121
Removal

2. For additional information, refer to: Generator (414-02A Generator and

Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation)..
3. For additional information, refer to: Timing Belt (303-01 Engine - TDV6
4. Remove the crankshaft pulley.

www.JagDocs.com
6. For additional information, refer to: Oil Pan (303-01A, Removal and
Installation).
7. Remove the oil pump lower retaining bolts.

8. Remove the timing belt cover sealing strips.
9. Remove the oil pump.

Remove the ten retaining bolts.
www.JagDocs.com
10. Remove the alignment dowels (if equipped).
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
1. Install a new oil pump gasket.
2. Prime the oil pump.

Fill the orifice shown with 20 ml of engine oil.
Rotate the oil pump drive 2 complete turns.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
3. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and
free of foreign material.
Apply a 3 mm diameter bead of sealant, to the area shown.
4. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of foreign
material.
Make sure the gasket is installed correctly.
Install the oil pump.

www.JagDocs.com
5. Install two bolts to the oil pump, only finger tighten at this
stage.
Remove the oil pump locator.
6. Install the oil pump lower retaining bolts.
Tighten the 4 bolts to 10 Nm.
7. Secure the oil pump.

Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown to 10 Nm .
www.JagDocs.com
8. Install the timing belt cover sealing strips.
9. For additional information, refer to: Oil Pan (303-01A, Removal and
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
10. CAUTION: Do not use any lubricant on the crankshaft

front seal, special tools or the crankshaft. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
NOTE: Make sure all component mating faces are

clean.
Install a new crankshaft front seal to the special tool.

11. Reposition the crankshaft front seal along the special tool.
Remove the sleeve from the special tool.

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
13. Remove the special tool from the crankshaft.

www.JagDocs.com
15. CAUTION: Make sure the seal is installed correctly.
Using the special tool, install the crankshaft front seal.

Use the crankshaft bolt with the service tool.
16. CAUTION: Make sure the seal is installed correctly.

www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: Wait 10 seconds before removing the

crankshaft seal installation tool.

Remove and discard the crankshaft pulley retaining
bolt.
17. CAUTION: Make sure that a new crankshaft pulley bolt
is installed.
NOTE: Before installing the crankshaft pulley retaining

bolt, note the thread size of the bolt (there are two
different sized threads, M14 and M16). Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Install the crankshaft pulley.

Tighten the M14 retaining bolt in two stages:
1. Stage one: Tighten to 140 Nm.
2. Stage two: Tighten a further 90degrees.
Tighten the M16 retaining bolt in three stages:

1. Stage one: Tighten to 150 Nm.
2. Stage two: Tighten to 300 Nm.
3. Stage three: Tighten a further 90 degrees.
18. Install the new timing belt kit.

For additional information, refer to: Timing Belt (303-01 Engine - TDV6
www.JagDocs.com
19. Install the generator.

For additional information, refer to: Generator (414-02A Generator and
Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).

Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Timing Belt
Special Tool(s)
303-1117
303-1126
www.JagDocs.com
Removal
3. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01 Engine - 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
5.
6. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to align the crankshaft alignment hole in

the flywheel or flexplate with the block aperture.
www.JagDocs.com
7. Check the camshaft pulley alignment holes are correctly

aligned. If the alignment holes are not aligned, rotate the
crankshaft one full turn clockwise.
www.JagDocs.com
9.
www.JagDocs.com

12. CAUTIONS:
Discard the bolt.

www.JagDocs.com

Installation
1.
2. CAUTIONS:

www.JagDocs.com
3. CAUTION: Make sure the camshaft pulleys remain in

the clockwise position.

Starting at the crankshaft pulley, install the timing
belt in a counter-clockwise direction, in the
sequence shown.
Stage one: Attach the timing belt to the crankshaft
pulley.
Stage three: Attach the timing belt to the left-hand
camshaft pulley.
Stage five: Attach the timing belt to the RH
camshaft pulley.
Stage six: Attach the timing belt to the timing belt
tensioner.
4. CAUTION: Make sure the timing belt tensioner window is

aligned with the groove as illustrated.

Torque: 26 Nm
Using a suitable tool, counterhold the camshaft

pulley center retaining bolts.
Torque: 23 Nm

www.JagDocs.com

10.
Install the special tools to the exhaust camshaft
pulleys.
www.JagDocs.com

If the special tool does not fit correctly, repeat the
timing belt installation procedure.
11. Torque: 80 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
13.
www.JagDocs.com
15. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01 Engine - 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Timing Cover
Removal

www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 14 Nm
6. Torque: 8 Nm
7. Lower the vehicle
9. Torque: 3 Nm
10. Torque: 8 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
11. Torque: 3 Nm
12.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
14.
15. Torque: 8 Nm
16.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
17.
18. Torque: 3 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
19. Torque: 10 Nm
20.
www.JagDocs.com
21. Torque: 8 Nm
22. Torque: 8 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
23. Torque: 8 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
26. Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 24 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Valve Cover LH
Removal
5. Refer to: Fuel Rail LH (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L
www.JagDocs.com
6. Refer to: Intake Air Shutoff Throttle (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls
- TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
7.
8. Refer to: Fuel Injection Component Cleaning (303-04A Fuel Charging and
Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General Procedures).
9. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping fuel.
NOTE: Make sure that the fuel injector return line has
a maximum of 8 uses.
10.

www.JagDocs.com
12.
14. Remove the 2 remaining fuel injectors.

www.JagDocs.com
15.
16.
www.JagDocs.com
20.
19.
18.
17.
21.

23.
www.JagDocs.com
24.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
28.
27.
26.
29.

www.JagDocs.com
31. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean
and free of corrosion and foreign material.
NOTES:
Discard the gasket.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Install all the bolts finger tight before final tightening.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 10 Nm
3. Torque: 3 Nm
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 8 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
6. Torque: 3 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
8. Torque: 8 Nm
9. Torque: 14 Nm

Torque: 24 Nm
11.
www.JagDocs.com
12.
Torque: 10 Nm
13. Torque: 7 Nm
14.
15.
www.JagDocs.com
16.
17. CAUTIONS:
18. Make sure that the area around the open fuel injector
ports are clean and free of foreign material and lubricant
prior to installing the fuel injector.
Make sure that a new sealing washer is installed.

19. NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts evenly and
progressively.
Torque: 9 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
21.
22. Install the 2 remaining fuel injectors.
24. Refer to: Fuel Rail LH (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L
Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Valve Cover RH
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
310-213
Fuel Injector Removal Adapter
www.JagDocs.com
Removal
NOTES:
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable
3. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
4. Refer to: Fuel Rail RH (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L
www.JagDocs.com
6.
www.JagDocs.com

9.

www.JagDocs.com
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 310-213

11. Special Tool(s): 100-012, 310-213

www.JagDocs.com
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 310-213
13. Remove the 2 remaining fuel injectors.

14. NOTES:
This step is only required if new components have not

been installed.
Remove and discard the O-ring seals.
Discard the sealing washers.
Repeat this step for each of the fuel injectors.
15. NOTE: This step is only required if new components

www.JagDocs.com
have not been installed.

16.
17.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
19.
18.
www.JagDocs.com
21.
20.
22.
23.
www.JagDocs.com
24.
NOTES:
Discard the gasket.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the mating faces are clean and free of corrosion and
foreign material.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
2. Torque: 24 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
3.
4. Torque: 9 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 9 Nm
6.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
8.
7.
www.JagDocs.com
10.
9.
11. NOTE: This step is only required if previously
removed.
www.JagDocs.com
12. CAUTION: Make sure that new sealing washers are

installed.
NOTES:
This step is only required if new components are not

installed.
Repeat this step for each of the fuel injectors.
www.JagDocs.com
13. CAUTION: Make sure that the area around the open
fuel injector ports are clean and free of foreign material and
lubricant prior to installing the fuel injector.
NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts evenly and

progressively.
Torque: 9 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
15. Install the 2 remaining fuel injectors.

16.
www.JagDocs.com
18. Refer to: Fuel Rail RH (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L
19. Refer to: Timing Cover (303-01A Engine - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and
Installation).
20. Connect the battery ground cable
Removal
Special Tool(s)
303-021
Engine support bracket
303-1129
Engine Lifting Brackets
303-1497
www.JagDocs.com
Left-Hand Rear Engine Lifting Bracket

Procedures).
4. Refer to: Transmission - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (307-01 Automatic

Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /TD4 2.2L Diesel, Removal).
Installation).
Installation).
8. Refer to: Power Steering System Filling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (211-00
Steering System - General Information, General Procedures).
9. Refer to: Coolant Expansion Tank (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L
10. Refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering -
12. Refer to: Hood (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
13.
www.JagDocs.com
14.
15.
16.
17.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com

24.
www.JagDocs.com
25.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
29.
26.
28.
27.
30.
31. NOTE: Turbocharger shown removed for clarity.

www.JagDocs.com
32.
www.JagDocs.com
34.
35.
33.
36.
37. Using a suitable tie strap, secure the power steering pipes to the
engine.
Special Tool(s): 303-1497, 303-1129

Torque: 22 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
39.
40. Remove the special tool supporting the engine.
Special Tool(s): 303-1129, 303-021
41. Install the lifting chains.
42. NOTE: This step requires the aid of another technician.
Using a suitable tool, remove the engine.

www.JagDocs.com
Install the engine to a suitable engine stand.
44. Remove the lifting chains.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
Special Tool(s)
303-021
303-1129
303-1497
www.JagDocs.com
1. Install the lifting chains.
Remove the engine from the engine stand.
Using a suitable tool, install the engine.
4. Install the engine support tool.
Special Tool(s): 303-1129, 303-021

5. Torque: 63 Nm
Special Tool(s): 303-1497, 303-1129

www.JagDocs.com
7.
8. Torque: 9 Nm
9. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
10. Torque: 7 Nm
11.
NOTE: Turbocharger shown removed for clarity.

www.JagDocs.com
12.
13.
Torque: 25 Nm
14.
15. Torque:
M6 10 Nm
Clip 7 Nm
16. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
17. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
18.
19.
www.JagDocs.com

20.
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 6 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 8 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 25 Nm

26.
Torque: 27 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
27.
Torque: 7 Nm
28.
29.
30.
31. Refer to: Hood (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
35. Refer to: Power Steering System Filling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol (211-00 Steering System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Installation).
Installation).

Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Jaguar Premium Cooling System Fluid WSS M97B44-D
Jaguar Premium Cooling System Flush EGR-M14P7-A
Engine Capacity
3.0L Diesel 9.7L

Coolant expansion tank retaining bolt 7 - 62
Coolant expansion tank bleed bolt 3 - 27
Cooling fan motor and shroud retaining nuts 7 - 62
Thermostat housing to shroud bolt 7 - 62
Coolant pump retaing bolts 25 18 -
Thermostat housing upper to lower bolts 4 - 35
Radiator panel bolts 9 - 80
Radiator drain plug 2 - 18
www.JagDocs.com
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Cooling - Component Location
Component Location - 3.0L Diesel from 2010MY

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Expansion tank
2 RH (right-hand)EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) cooler
3 Heater core
4 Engine oil and fuel coolers
5 LH (left-hand)EGR cooler
6 Coolant pump
7 Transmission oil cooler
8 LH auxiliary radiator
9 Radiator
10 RH auxiliary radiator
11 Pressure relief thermostat
12 Cooling fan
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Cooling - Overview
OVERVIEW
The engine cooling system maintains the engine within an optimum temperature range under changing ambient and engine
operating conditions. It also provides:
Heating for the passenger compartment. For additional information refer to Heating and Ventilation 412-01.
Cooling for:
- The engine oil
- The fuel
- The EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) system - For additional information refer to Engine Emission Control
303-08B.
- The transmission fluid.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Cooling - System Operation and
System Operation
COOLANT CIRCUIT FLOW
When the engine is running the coolant is circulated around the engine cooling system by the coolant pump. From the coolant
pump, coolant flows through the cylinder block and the cylinder heads. Some of the coolant in the cylinder block is diverted
through the engine oil cooler before returning to the 5-way connector via the water outlet.
From the 5-way connector, the majority of the coolant flows to the pressure relief thermostat, either directly or via the radiator,
depending on the temperature of the coolant. Some of the coolant is also directed through the auxiliary cooling radiators
returning the cooled coolant to the Pressure Relief Thermostat (PRT) via the radiator bottom hose. From the outlet of the
thermostat the coolant flows to the inlet of the coolant pump.
A separate hose from the radiator allows extra-cooled coolant from the radiator to flow through the transmission oil cooler. The
coolant from the cooler is returned to the system via a branch in the bottom radiator hose.
Coolant from the water outlet also flows through the EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) coolers and then to the heater core. From
the heater core outlet, the coolant flows to the outlet zone of the pressure relief thermostat.
The expansion tank allows expansion of coolant due to temperature increases to pass excess coolant back to the expansion
tank. A small hose is connected from the water outlet to the expansion tank for this purpose. As the coolant cools, the coolant
is allowed back into the system from the tank via a hose from the expansion tank into the radiator bottom hose.
PRESSURE RELIEF THERMOSTAT (PRT)

www.JagDocs.com
The thermostat is closed at temperatures below approximately 82°C (179°F). When the coolant temperature reaches
approximately 82°C the thermostat starts to open and is fully open at approximately 96°C (204°F). In this condition the full
flow of coolant is directed through the radiator. The thermostat is exposed to 90% hot coolant from the engine on one side
and 10% cold coolant returning from the radiator bottom hose on the other side. Hot coolant from the engine passes from the
by-pass pipe through four sensing holes in the flow valve into a tube surrounding 90% of the thermostat sensitive area. Cold
coolant returning from the engine, cooled by the radiator, conducts through 10% of the sensitive area.
In cold ambient temperatures, the engine temperature is raised by approximately 10°C (50°F) to compensate for the heat loss
of 10% exposure to the cold coolant returning from the bottom hose.
The by-pass flow valve is held closed by a light spring. It operates to further aid heater warm-up. When the main valve is
closed and the engine speed is at idle, the coolant pump does not produce sufficient flow and pressure to open the valve. In
this condition the valve prevents coolant circulating through the by-pass circuit and forces the coolant through the heater
matrix only. This provides a higher flow of coolant through the heater matrix to improve passenger comfort in cold conditions.
When the engine speed increases above idle, the coolant pump produces a greater flow and pressure than the heater circuit
can take. The pressure acts on the by-pass flow valve and overcomes the valve spring pressure, opening the valve and limiting
the pressure in the heater circuit. The valve modulates to provide maximum coolant flow through the heater core and yet
allowing excess coolant to flow into the by-pass circuit to provide the engine's cooling needs at higher engine speeds.
COOLING FAN
The cooling fan is operated by a fan control module integrated into the cooling fan motor. The fan control module regulates the
voltage, and subsequently the speed, of the cooling fan motor in response to a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the
ECM (engine control module). The ECM calculates the required fan speed from the engine temperature, A/C (air conditioning)
system pressure and transmission oil temperature. Under hot operating conditions, the fan may continue to operate for up to
four minutes after the engine has been switched off. For additional information refer to Electronic Engine controls 303-14B.
ENGINE COOLING - SCHEMATIC FLOW DIAGRAM
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Expansion tank
2 Engine LH (left-hand) cylinder bank
3 Engine oil cooler
4 Engine RH (right-hand) cylinder bank
5 5 Way connector
6 ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor
7 EGR coolers
8 LH auxiliary radiator
9 Radiator
10 RH auxiliary radiator
11 Transmission fluid cooler
12 Heater core
13 Coolant pump
14 Bleed screw
15 Water outlet
16 Pressure Relief Thermostat
www.JagDocs.com
PRESSURE RELIEF THERMOSTAT (PRT)
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Connection to expansion tank
2 Connection to radiator top hose
3 Heater core return connection
4 PRT body
5 Connection from radiator bottom hose
6 Connection to cylinder block water inlet
A plastic thermostat housing is located behind the radiator. The housing has 5 connections which locate the radiator bottom
hose, top hose from the 5-way connector, coolant pump feed hose to the cylinder block and return feed from the heater core.
The housing contains a wax element and a spring loaded by-pass flow valve.
The thermostat is used to maintain the coolant at the optimum temperature for efficient combustion and to aid engine
warm-up.
RADIATOR
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Coolant outlet to transmission fluid cooler
2 Coolant inlet
3 Locating spigot (2 off)
4 Support (2 off)
5 Coolant inlet from auxiliary coolers
6 Coolant outlet to pressure relief thermostat
7 Drain plug
The radiator is a cross-flow type with an aluminum core and plastic end tanks. The radiator is located in the vehicle by locating
spigots and supports integrated into the end tanks. The supports are installed in rubber bushes in the upper chassis rails. The
locating spigots are installed in rubber bushes in the front end carrier. A drain plug is integrated into the LH end tank. Coolant
inlet and outlet connections are incorporated into the RH and LH end tanks respectively.
The LH end tank also has connections for coolant inlet from the auxiliary coolers and a coolant outlet to the transmission fluid
cooler.
AUXILIARY RADIATORS
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Ducting from front bumper
2 Auxiliary cooling radiator (2 off)
3 Coolant inlet from 5-way connector
4 Coolant outlet to radiator
Two auxiliary cooling radiators are used to maintain the optimum engine coolant temperature for performance driving.
Each radiator is located behind the LH and RH side of the front bumper and ducting provides are flow to each radiator via
apertures in the bumper. Each auxiliary radiator is connected to the main radiator with flow through the system controlled by
the PRT.
COOLANT PUMP
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Bolt (3 off)
2 Drive hub
3 Housing
4 Impeller
5 Pulley
The coolant pump has a housing that supports a shaft with an impeller attached to one end and a drive hub at the other. The
housing is attached to the front of the cylinder block with the impeller located in a pumping chamber. The pump is driven by a
pulley attached to the drive hub and driven by the accessory drive belt. For additional information refer to Accessory Drive
303-05B.
EXPANSION TANK
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Bleed screw
2 Level markings
3 Vent hose connection
4 Expansion hose connection
5 Level sensor
6 Filler cap
A pressurized expansion tank system is used which continuously separates the air from the cooling system and replenishes the
system through a hose connected between the expansion tank and the heater return hose. A continuous vent into the
expansion tank, through a hose connected to the engine's coolant outlet connector, prevents air locks from forming in the
cooling system.
The expansion tank is installed behind the top right corner of the radiator. A filler cap, bleed screw and level sensor are
incorporated into the expansion tank. MAX and MIN level markings are molded into the interior of the tank below the filler cap.
The expansion tank provides the following functions:
Service fill
Coolant expansion during warm-up
Air separation during operation
System pressurization by the filler cap
The expansion tank has an air space of approximately 0.5 to 1 liter (1.06 to 2,11 US pints), above the MAX level, to allow for
coolant expansion.
www.JagDocs.com
COOLING FAN
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Shroud
2 Fan
3 Motor and fan control module
4 Electrical connector
An electric, variable speed cooling fan is installed in a shroud attached to the rear of the radiator. The cooling fan is operated
by a fan control module, integrated into the electric motor, under the control of the ECM. Electrical connectors at the LH side of
the shroud provides the interface between the cooling fan harness and the vehicle wiring.
ENGINE OIL COOLER
Item Description
1 Coolant outlet
2 Engine oil filter
3 Engine oil cooler
The engine oil cooler is attached to a common adapter assembly located in the vee of the cylinder block. Inlet and outlet ports
for engine oil, and an inlet port for coolant, are incorporated into the cylinder block mating face of the adapter assembly. A
metal gasket seals the joint between the adapter assembly and the cylinder block. From the cylinder block, coolant flows
through the adapter assembly and into the cooler. After passing through the cooler, the coolant then flows into the engine
coolant water outlet.
TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER
Item Description
1 Transmission fluid inlet
2 Coolant outlet to radiator bottom hose
3 Transmission fluid outlet
4 Coolant inlet from radiator
www.JagDocs.com

6 Mounting bracket
The transmission fluid cooler is located near the lower LH corner of the radiator. The cooler is connected to the cooling system
with 2 hoses and receives cooled fluid from the upper section of the radiator, which flows through the cooler, reducing the
temperature of the transmission fluid.
ENGINE COOLANT
The coolant is silicate free and must not be mixed with conventional engine coolant.
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Cooling
For a detailed description of the engine cooling system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
of the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-03A Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Engine Cooling (Description and Operation),

Engine Cooling (Description and Operation),
Engine Cooling (Description and Operation).
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests.
Visual Inspection
Coolant leaks Fuses

Coolant Hoses Harnesses
Coolant expansion tank Loose or corroded connector(s)
www.JagDocs.com
Radiator Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor

Heater core
Accessory drive belt
Viscous fan
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
Symptom Chart

Coolant loss Carry out a visual inspection. If there are no obvious leaks, carry out a cooling
Hoses system pressure test. Rectify any leaks as necessary.
Hose connections
Radiator
Water pump
Heater core
Gaskets
Engine casting cracks
Engine block core
plugs
Overheating Check the coolant level and condition. Carry out a cooling system pressure
Low/Contaminated test. Rectify any leaks as necessary. Check the thermostat and rectify as
coolant necessary. Check the viscous fan operation, make sure the viscous fan rotates
Thermostat freely. Check for obstructions to the air flow over the radiator. Rectify as
Viscous fan necessary.
ECT sensor
Restricted air flow
over the radiator
Engine not Check the thermostat operation. Check the viscous fan operation, make sure
reaching normal Thermostat the viscous fan is not seized. Rectify as necessary.
temperature Viscous fan
Thermostat
Electric fan
Fan speed module
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding
General Procedures
Draining
and Installation).
3. WARNING: When releasing the cooling system pressure,

cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a thick cloth.
CAUTION: Since injury such as scalding could be

caused by escaping steam or coolant, make sure the vehicle
cooling system is cool prior to carrying out this procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
4. CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping coolant.
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged in the Engine Control Module (ECM), please refer to Section
303-14.
REFER to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A, Diagnosis and Testing).
5.
6. Carry out the procedure up to step 1 in the filling section three times,
filling the cooling system with clean water at the first two drains. At the
third refill, use a suitable measuring tool to make sure that the cooling
www.JagDocs.com
system maintains a 50% mix.
Filling
1.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
3.
4.
2.
5. CAUTION: Anti-freeze concentration must be
maintained at 50%.
Fill the cooling system, keeping coolant to the upper level

mark of the expansion tank until a steady stream of coolant
is seen running from the coolant hose bleed point. Tighten
the bleed screw.
6.
www.JagDocs.com
7. Set the heating to the HOT position.
9. Raise the engine to 2500 RPM for 30 seconds.
10.
Continue to top-up with coolant with engine idling until hot air is
emitted from face vents.
When the coolant stops dropping, continue to fill the coolant
untill the maximum level is reached.
11. CAUTION: Correct installation of the Coolant
expansion tank cap can be obtained by tightening the cap
until an audible click is heard.
12. Increase the engine speed to 3000rpm.

www.JagDocs.com
13.
When hot air is emitted from the vents, switch the heater off.
Hold the engine speed at 3000 RPM for a further 2 minutes.
14.
When the thermostat is opened increase the engine speed from
idle to 4000 RPM for 5 times.
Hold the engine at 3000 rpm for 1 minute.
15. Allow the engine to idle for 2 minutes.
16. Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
17. Check and top up the cooling system as required when cool.
18. Visually check the engine and cooling system for signs of coolant
leakage.
and Installation).
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Cooling System Partial Draining, Filling
and Bleeding
General Procedures
Draining
2. WARNING: When releasing the cooling system pressure,

cover the coolant expansion tank cap with a thick cloth.
CAUTION: Since injury such as scalding could be

caused by escaping steam or coolant, make sure the vehicle
cooling system is cool prior to carrying out this procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
and Installation).
4. NOTE: Allow at least 15 minutes for the coolant to drain

from the radiator drain plug.
Filling
1.

www.JagDocs.com
3.
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTION: Anti-freeze concentration must be
maintained at 50%.
Fill the cooling system, keeping coolant to the upper level

mark of the expansion tank until a steady stream of coolant
is seen running from the coolant hose bleed point. Tighten
the bleed screw.
6.
Continue to fill the coolant until the maximum level
is reached.
www.JagDocs.com
7. Set the heating to the HOT position.
9. Raise the engine to 2500 RPM for 30 seconds.
10.
Continue to top-up with coolant with engine idling until hot air is
emitted from face vents.
When the coolant stops dropping, continue to fill the coolant
untill the maximum level is reached.
11. CAUTION: Correct installation of the Coolant
expansion tank cap can be obtained by tightening the cap
until an audible click is heard.
12. Increase the engine speed to 3000rpm.

www.JagDocs.com
13.
When hot air is emitted from the vents, switch the heater off.
Hold the engine speed at 3000 RPM for a further 2 minutes.
14.
When the thermostat is opened increase the engine speed from
idle to 4000 RPM for 5 times.
Hold the engine at 3000 rpm for 1 minute.
15. Allow the engine to idle for 2 minutes.
16. Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
17. Check and top up the cooling system as required when cool.
leakage.
and Installation).
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Auxiliary Radiator
Removal
2. Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03A Engine
Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General Procedures).

www.JagDocs.com
and Installation).
6. Torque: 7 Nm
7.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com

Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Coolant Expansion Tank
Removal
1.
2. Using a syringe, remove the cooling fluid from the expansion tank.
www.JagDocs.com
3. Torque: 7 Nm
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5. Disconnect the coolant low level sensor electrical connector.

www.JagDocs.com
Release the clip and disconnect the coolant hose.
7.
Installation
2. Fill the cooling system to the upper level mark of the coolant expansion
tank.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Coolant Pump
Removal
4. Refer to: Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding (303-03A Engine
Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, General Procedures).

www.JagDocs.com
Using a suitable 6mm bar, retain the coolant pump

pulley and remove the bolts.
Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
Removal
and Installation).
6.
www.JagDocs.com
7.
8.
www.JagDocs.com
9.
www.JagDocs.com
10. Torque: 10 Nm
11. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Radiator
Removal
www.JagDocs.com

7. Torque: 7 Nm
8. Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com

10. Torque: 7 Nm
11. CAUTIONS:
Protect the air conditioning (A/C) condenser.
Using suitable cable tie secure the A/C condenser

away from the radiator.
Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
12. NOTE: This step requires the aid of another

technician.
13.
14. Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Engine Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Thermostat
Removal
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping coolant.

www.JagDocs.com
5.
6. Torque: 7 Nm
7.
8.
www.JagDocs.com
9. Release the clip and disconnect the coolant hose.

10.

www.JagDocs.com
12.
13.
14. Torque: 4 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
NOTE: A = refer to procedure for the correct torque sequence.

Fuel injection pump cradle bolts 23 16 -
Fuel injection pump retaining bolts 23 16 -
Fuel injection pump bracket 9 - 80
Fuel injection pump sprocket bolt 50 37 -
Inlet manifold retaining bolts 9 - 80
Fuel injection pump belt rear cover retaining bolts 9 - 80
Camshaft rear end accessory drive (READ) pulley hub retaining bolt A - -
Fuel injection pump belt tensioner retaining bolt 23 16 -
Camshaft READ pulley retaining bolt A - -
Fuel rail bracket retaining bolts 23 16 -
Fuel injector retaining bolts 10 - -
Fuel rail retaining bolts 25 - -
High-pressure fuel line bracket retaining bolts 9 - 80
High-pressure fuel line union nuts A - -
Fuel rail supply tube union nuts A - -
Fuel crossover line union nuts A - -
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve retaining bolts 9 - 80
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Charging and Controls -
Component Location
Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 High pressure fuel supply
2 Common fuel rail
3 Fuel pressure control valve
4 Exhaust camshaft
5 Injectors
6 Volume control valve
7 Fuel rail balance pipe
8 Fuel pressure sensor
9 High pressure fuel pump
Overview
OVERVIEW
The 3.0L V6 diesel engine is equipped with a High Pressure (HP) common rail fuel injection system. With this fuel injection
process, a HP pump delivers a uniform level of pressure to the shared fuel lines (the common rails), which serve all 6 fuel
injectors. Pressure is controlled to the optimum level for smooth operation.
The common rail system supports a pre and pilot injection depending on engine operating conditions, which reduces
combustion noise levels, more commonly referred to as 'diesel knock'.
Fuel injection pressure is generated independently of engine speed and fuel injection events.
The fuel injection timing and volume are calculated by the ECM (engine control module), which then energizes the appropriate
piezo actuated injector. The common rail fuel injection system has the following features:
High fuel injection pressures of up to 2000 bar (29007 lbf/in2) for greater atomization of fuel (increasing performance
and lowering emissions).
Variable injection to optimize combustion in all engine operating conditions
Low tolerances and high precision throughout the life of the system.
The fuel system is divided into two sub systems:
Low Pressure (LP) system

HP system.
The LP system features the following components:

www.JagDocs.com
In-tank fuel pump

Fuel pressure regulator (integral to the fuel delivery module)
Fuel filter
Return pipes
Injector return pipes
Fuel coolers (engine and vehicle).
The LP system is regulated to 0.5 bar (7.25 lbf/in2).

The HP system features the following components:
HP pump
Fuel rails and diverter rail
HP fuel pipes
Injectors.
System Operation
ENGINE STARTING
During starting, the fuel rail pressure must be at least 150 bar (2175 lbf/in2). Should the pressure be below this figure, the
injectors will not operate, resulting in the vehicle not starting.
ENGINE STOPPING
To stop the engine the ECM (engine control module) stops energizing the actuators in the fuel injectors, therefore, no fuel is
injected and the engine speed drops to zero.
Refer to: Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
HP FUEL PUMP
When the HP fuel pump is rotated, pressure is created when the volume control valve is open and the pressure control valve is
closed. Both valves are electronically controlled by the ECM to allow variable fuel delivery and pressure control. When the ECM
actuates the piezo actuators, the fuel rail pressure drop is off-set by additional fuel being delivered to the fuel rails by the
pressure control valve. The fuel pressure in the system is reduced within a few seconds after the engine has stopped as the
pressure control valve no longer has the holding current it requires, and therefore opens. No residual pressure remains in the
system and the fuel is returned to the LP fuel return line to the fuel filter through the open pressure control valve.
www.JagDocs.com
LOW PRESSURE (LP) SYSTEM
LP Fuel Pump
The electric fuel pump is located inside the fuel tank. Fuel is pumped from the tank via the in-tank fuel pump, to the HP pump
via the fuel filter.
Refer to: Fuel Tank and Lines (310-01A Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Fuel Filter
The fuel filter is located on a bracket on the LH (left-hand) suspension turret in the engine compartment. Incorporated in the
fuel filter housing is a bimetallic, temperature sensing, regulating valve which will start to close at 30 °C (86 °F) and will fully
close at 50 °C (122 °F). This allows pre-heated diesel fuel, returning from the HP pump, to circulate inside the fuel filter to
prevent waxing in cold operating conditions. When the valve is closed the fuel from the HP pump is passed through the fuel
cooler before returning to filter to maintain the fuel at an optimum temperature.
The filter has an air bleed return to the fuel tank which returns excess air and fuel to the tank.
The fuel filter is also fitted with a water sensor to detect when moisture which has collected in the filter has reached an
unacceptable level.
Refer to: Fuel Tank and Lines (310-01A Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Fuel Cooler
An air blast fuel cooler is located under the LH side of the vehicle floor pan. The fuel cooler has 2 connections; one is an inlet
which allows heated fuel from the HP pump to be cooled, the second allows the cooled fuel to be fed from the cooler into the
supply pipe from the LP fuel pump in the fuel tank, via a 'Y' connector back to the fuel filter.
When the regulating valve in the fuel filter is open, the heated fuel from the HP pump is routed direct to the fuel cooler before
returning to the fuel filter.
HIGH PRESSURE (HP) SYSTEM
HP Fuel Pump
www.JagDocs.com
The HP pump is a 2 piston radial plunger pump. The pump has the ability to produce a maximum pressure of 2000 bar (29007
lbf/in²). The housing is cast from iron, the flange is cast from aluminum.
The HP pump is driven from the LH cylinder bank exhaust camshaft via a toothed belt. The drive from the belt rotates a cam
within the pump which operate a plunger within each pumping element. A procedure and special tools are required for pump or
belt replacement to time the pump.
The high-pressure pump comprises 2 high pressure pumping elements, a volume control valve, an internal transfer pump and a
fuel temperature sensor.
The fuel is delivered to the internal transfer pump via the external fuel filter and an electric fuel pump which is located in the
fuel tank.
The volume control valve is mounted on the high-pressure pump, and located in the feed port between the high pressure pump
elements and the internal transfer pump. The volume control valve is a variable position solenoid-operated valve that is
controlled by the ECM. The volume control valve determines the amount of fuel that is delivered from the internal transfer
pump to the HP pumping elements. When there is no signal to the volume control valve, the valve is closed and there is no
fuel delivery.
The fuel from the internal transfer pump is passed to the HP pumping elements at a constant pressure known as transfer
pressure. The transfer pressure is controlled by an internal pressure relief valve. Once the fuel enters each of the HP pump
elements the pressure rises rapidly, with each element providing a HP supply to one of the fuel rails. The high pressure is
controlled by the high pressure regulator valve and the fuel rail pressure sensor.
A controlled amount of fuel is allowed to leak-off from the internal transfer pump. This fuel is delivered to the pump internal
components to provide cooling and lubrication and is passed back the fuel filter via the LP feed line.
The pressure control valve is located in one of the fuel rails. The fuel pressure is monitored by a pressure sensor located in the
other fuel rail. The ECM controls the pressure control valve using the received signals from the pressure sensor. Reducing the
pressure in the fuel rails via the pressure control valve results in fuel returning from the fuel rails to the LP fuel return to the
fuel filter.
The fuel temperature sensor is located on the rear of the HP pump. It measures the fuel temperature in the low-pressure side
of the HP pump. The ECM continually monitors this signal to determine the fuel temperature to prevent overheating of the fuel
system. The ECM will also make fine adjustments to fuel injection quantity to adjust for fuel temperature.
Fuel Rails
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 LH fuel rail
4 RH (right-hand) fuel rail
5 HP fuel connection from HP pump
6 Fuel rail balance pipe
The fuel rails are steel fabrications and are similar in their construction. Two fuel rails are used with each rail supplying high
pressure fuel to 3 fuel injectors.
Each rail has 5 threaded connections which provide for the attachment of the high pressure fuel supply from the HP pump, the
balance pipe and connections for the 3 injectors supplied with fuel from that rail.
The fuel pressure in the rails is detected by a fuel pressure sensor which is located in the end of the RH rail. The LH rail
houses a pressure control valve. The ECM controls the pressure control valve using signals from the pressure sensor.
The fuel rail pressure sensor is a piezo-resistive type sensor containing an actuating diaphragm. Deflection of the diaphragm
provides a proportional signal (output) voltage to the ECM, dependant on the fuel pressure within the fuel rail.
Both rails are connected together with a balance pipe which ensures the pressure in both rails is equal, even though each rail
is supplied from a different pumping element in the HP pump.
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Injectors
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Fuel return
2 O-ring seal
3 Piezo stack actuator
4 Hydraulic coupler
5 Control valve
6 Nozzle body
7 Copper sealing washer
9 High pressure feed
10 Nozzle
Six fuel injectors are used in the fuel system. A piezo actuator in each injector is electronically controlled by the ECM to
operate the injector in response to engine speed and load conditions.
Each injector has an electrical connector which connects the injector to the engine harness. A fuel connection on the top of the
injector provides for the high pressure fuel inlet from the HP pump. A second fuel connection allows fuel leakage within the
injector to return to the HP pump.
Each injector is located in a machined hole in the cylinder head and is sealed in the cylinder head with a copper sealing washer
and an O-ring seal. The injector is retained in the cylinder head with a clamp plate and 2 bolts. If an injector is removed or
replaced, a new copper sealing washer and a clamp plate must be used when refitting the injector.
The injector can operate up to 5 times during one combustion cycle depending on engine speed and load. The injection
sequence can occur as follows:
1. Pilot injection - occurs before the main injection and improves fuel and air mixing
2. Pre-injection - shortens the main injection's ignition delay and therefore reduces the generation of nitrous oxides
3. Main injection - delivers the required engine torque
4. After injection - occurs after the Main injection and assists the re-burn of any remaining particulate matter
5. Post injection - helps manage the temperature of the exhaust gas for more effective exhaust-gas after-treatment
www.JagDocs.com
6. Injection delay 0.4 ms.
Each injector is calibrated to the ECM and applicable the cylinder to which it is fitted. Therefore, if an injector is removed it
must be refitted to the cylinder from which it was removed. If a new injector is fitted, a calibration routine using a Jaguar
approved diagnostic system must be performed to calibrate the injector unique code to the ECM.
The operating voltage of the injector is between 110 and 163 volts depending on engine speed and load and care must be
taken when working in the vicinity of the injectors. The voltage increases linearly from 200 to 1200 bar.
Each injector has an electrical resistance value of between 150 - 250 kOhms.
CAUTION: Each injector operation is controlled by a charge and discharge cycle allowing energy to dissipate in, and
recover from the injector. Never disconnect the wiring connection when the engine is running. The injector can remain open
thus causing engine damage.
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Charging and Controls
Principles of Operation
For a detailed description of the fuel charging and controls system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Fuel Charging and Controls (Description and Operation),

Fuel Charging and Controls (Description and Operation),
Fuel Charging and Controls (Description and Operation).
WARNING: Make sure that all suitable safety precautions are observed when carrying out any work on the fuel system.
Failure to observe this warning may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to
any open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor vehicle.
www.JagDocs.com
Visual Inspection
Low/Contaminated fuel Fuses

Fuel supply/return line(s) Glow plug indicator
Fuel tank and filler pipe Inertia fuel shutoff switch
Fuel leak(s) Fuel pump module
Fuel filler cap Sensor(s)
Fuel filter Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Push connect fittings Fuel volume control valve
Fuel rail Fuel pressure control valve
Fuel pump Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) sensor
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system Fuel temperature sensor
Fuel injector(s)
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Engine cranks, Check that the inertia switch has not tripped. Check the fuel level and
but does not Inertia fuel shutoff condition. Draw off approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand
start switch for 1 minute. Check to make sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating
Low/Contaminated fuel water or other liquid in the fuel. Check the intake air system for leaks. Check
Air leakage the lift pump operation, check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage.
Low-pressure fuel Check the fuel filter, check for DTCs indicating a fuel volume or pressure control
system fault valve fault. Check the fuel pump. Check the CKP sensor circuits. Refer to the
Fuel pump module (lift electrical guides.
pump) fault
Blocked fuel filter
Fuel volume regulator
blocked/contaminated
Fuel pressure control
valve
Fuel pump fault
Crankshaft position
(CKP) sensor
Difficult to Check the glow plug circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the fuel
start Glow plug system fault level/condition. Draw off approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to
(very cold conditions) stand for 1 minute. Check to make sure there is no separation of the fuel
Low/Contaminated fuel indicating water or other liquid in the fuel. Check the intake air system for
Air leakage leaks. Check the lift pump operation, check the low-pressure fuel system for
Fuel pump module (lift leaks/damage. Check the fuel filter, check for DTCs indicating a fuel volume or
pump) fault pressure control valve fault. Check the EGR system.
Low-pressure fuel
system fault
Blocked fuel filter
Fuel volume control
valve
valve
Exhaust gas recirculation
(EGR) valve(s) fault
Rough idle Check the intake air system for leaks. Check the fuel level/condition. Draw off
Intake air system fault approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check
Low/Contaminated fuel to make sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or other liquid
Low-pressure fuel in the fuel. Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage. Check the
system fault fuel filter, check for DTCs indicating a fuel volume or pressure control valve
Blocked fuel filter fault. Check the EGR system.
Fuel volume control
www.JagDocs.com
valve
valve
Lack of power Check the intake air system for leakage or restriction. Check for a
when Intake air system fault blockage/restriction in the exhaust system, install new components as
accelerating Restricted exhaust necessary. Check for DTCs indicating a fuel pressure fault. Check the EGR
system system. Check turbocharger actuator.
Low fuel pressure
Turbocharger actuator
fault
Engine Check the intake air system for leaks. Check the fuel level/condition. Draw off
stops/stalls Air leakage approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check
Low/Contaminated fuel to make sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or other liquid
Low-pressure fuel in the fuel. Check the fuel system for leaks/damage: Check for DTCs indicating
system fault a fuel volume or pressure control valve fault. Check the EGR system.
High pressure fuel leak
Fuel volume control
valve
valve
(EGR) valve fault
Engine judders Check the fuel level/condition. Draw off approximately 1 ltr (2.11 pints) of fuel
Low/Contaminated fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to make sure there is no separation of
Air ingress the fuel indicating water or other liquid in the fuel. Check the intake air system
Low-pressure fuel for leaks. Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage. Check the
system fault high pressure fuel system for leaks, check for DTCs indicating a fuel volume or
Fuel metering valve pressure control valve fault. Check the fuel pump.
Fuel volume control
valve
valve
Fuel pump fault
DTC Index
303-14.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Injection Component
Cleaning
General Procedures
WARNINGS:
Do not carry out any repairs to the fuel system with the engine running. The fuel pressure within the system can be as
high as 2000 bar. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel related components.
Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek immediate medical attention.
Place the vehicle in a well ventilated, quarantined area and arrange ' No Smoking/Petrol Fumes' signs about the vehicle.
Wait at least 30 seconds after the engine stops before commencing any repair to the high-pressure fuel injection system.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Wash hands thoroughly after fuel handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.
www.JagDocs.com
Do not carry or operate cellular phones when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable vapors
are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Before using the cleaning fluid, protect all electrical components and connectors with lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that all parts removed from the vehicle are placed on the lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that any protective clothing worn is clean and made from lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure that clean non-plated tools are used. Clean tools using a new brush that will not lose its bristles and fresh
cleaning fluid, prior to starting work on the vehicle.
Use a steel topped workbench and cover it with clean, lint-free non-flocking material.
Make sure the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and as dust free as possible. Foreign
matter from work on clutches, brakes or from machining or welding operations can contaminate the fuel system and may result
in later malfunction.
NOTE: Pneumatic vacuum gun
1. Using a new brush that will not lose its bristles, brush cleaning fluid
onto the components being removed and onto the surrounding area.
2. Using a pneumatic vacuum gun, remove all traces of cleaning fluid and
foreign material.
3. Dispose of any used cleaning fluid and the brush after completing the
repair.
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Injection Pump
Special Tool(s)
303-1124
Holding Tool, Camshaft Front Pulley
Removal
www.JagDocs.com
5. Refer to: Fuel Injection Pump Pulley (303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6
6. Refer to: Crankcase Vent Oil Separator (303-08A Engine Emission Control

www.JagDocs.com
9.
10. CAUTIONS:
Be prepared to collect escaping fuel.

11.
www.JagDocs.com
12. CAUTIONS:

CAUTIONS:
13.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping fuel.

www.JagDocs.com
14.

15. CAUTIONS:
16. Be prepared to collect escaping fuel.
Discard the components.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
19.
18.
17.
20.
www.JagDocs.com
21.
22.
23.
www.JagDocs.com
26.
25.
24.
27.
28.
www.JagDocs.com

Installation
1. Torque: 3 Nm
2.
www.JagDocs.com
3. Torque: 23 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5.
www.JagDocs.com
7. Torque:
Stage 1:80 Nm
Stage 2:80°
8.
9. Torque: 23 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
10. Torque: 10 Nm
11. Torque: 10 Nm
12. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
13. Torque: 23 Nm
CAUTIONS:
Tighten the fuel supply line unions finger tight.
Make sure that a new component is installed.
14.
CAUTIONS:

www.JagDocs.com
15.
CAUTIONS:

16. CAUTIONS:
17. Make sure that a new component is installed.

18. CAUTIONS:
"Make sure that new components are installed. "
19. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
20. CAUTIONS:

www.JagDocs.com
Tighten the high-pressure fuel lines union to 15Nm.
21.


www.JagDocs.com
22.

23. Tighten the high-pressure fuel lines union to 15Nm.
24.

www.JagDocs.com
27. Tighten the high-pressure fuel line union to 30Nm.

Tighten the high-pressure fuel line union to 30Nm.


www.JagDocs.com


www.JagDocs.com
33. Torque: 10 Nm
34.
35.
www.JagDocs.com
37. Refer to: Fuel Injection Pump Pulley (303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6
www.JagDocs.com
1. NOTE: A minimum of 12 litres of fuel in the fuel tank is
required for the following Steps.
Make sure the fuel tank has a sufficiant amount of fuel to carry
out the following Steps.
2. NOTES:
Do not start the vehicle.
Allow 15 seconds between each ignition cycle (between

each ignition ON and ignition OFF) to allow the fuel tank pump
to pump fuel to the fuel injection pump correctly.
Turn the ignition on and off four times.

3. Crank the engine until it starts.
4. Road test the vehicle for at least 10 miles (16 Km).
5. Check the diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)s using the approved
diagnostic tool. Clear or repair as necessary.
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Injector
Removal
All vehicles
3. Refer to: Secondary Bulkhead Center Panel (501-02 Front End Body
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
6.
7.
www.JagDocs.com
All vehicles

9.
10.
www.JagDocs.com
12.
www.JagDocs.com
15.
www.JagDocs.com
17.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
All vehicles
www.JagDocs.com
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the area around the open

fuel injector ports are clean and free of foreign material and
lubricant prior to installing the fuel injector.
2. NOTE: Tighten the retaining bolts evenly and

progressively.
Torque: 9 Nm
4. CAUTION: Only tighten the unions finger-tight at this

stage.
www.JagDocs.com

stage.
6.
Stage 1:Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line
unions at the fuel rail to 15Nm.
Stage 2: Tighten the high-pressure fuel supply line
unions at the injector to 15Nm.
7.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
8.
9.
10.
12.
www.JagDocs.com
All vehicles
13. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
14.
15. Torque: 25 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
19. If a new unit is installed, configure using the approved diagnostic tool.
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Rail LH
Removal
All vehicles
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Installation).
6. Refer to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Outlet Tube (303-08A
Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
7.
8. CAUTION: Make sure to support the steering gear.

9.
All vehicles
10.
www.JagDocs.com
11.
www.JagDocs.com
15.
14.
13.
12.
16.
17.
www.JagDocs.com
18.
19.
www.JagDocs.com
21.
www.JagDocs.com
23.
24.

www.JagDocs.com


www.JagDocs.com

www.JagDocs.com
33.
32.
31.
35.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
38.
www.JagDocs.com
39.

Installation
All vehicles
1. CAUTIONS:
2.
www.JagDocs.com
3.
4.
5.
www.JagDocs.com

stage.
7. CAUTIONS:

www.JagDocs.com
stage.
9. Torque: 10 Nm
10. Torque: 10 Nm
11. Torque: 24 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
12. CAUTION: Tighten the fuel supply line unions finger

tight.
www.JagDocs.com
tight.
14. CAUTIONS:

www.JagDocs.com
15.
16.
17.

www.JagDocs.com


www.JagDocs.com
22.

www.JagDocs.com

26.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
27.
Torque: 10 Nm
28. Torque: 10 Nm
29.
www.JagDocs.com
30.

www.JagDocs.com
31.
CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger tight at this

stage.
32.
CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger tight at this
stage.
33.
Torque: 10 Nm
34.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
35.
Torque: 10 Nm
36. Torque: 10 Nm
37.
Torque: 10 Nm
38.
www.JagDocs.com
39.
40.
41.
Torque: 10 Nm
42.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
43.
44. Torque: 27 Nm
45.
46.
47. Torque: 100 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
48. Torque: 35 Nm
All vehicles
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Rail RH
Removal
All vehicles
Installation).
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
6.

8.
All vehicles
9.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
12.
11.
10.
13.
14.
www.JagDocs.com
15.
www.JagDocs.com
16.
www.JagDocs.com
17.
18.
19.
21.
www.JagDocs.com
22.
24. CAUTIONS:

www.JagDocs.com

28.
www.JagDocs.com
29.
30.
www.JagDocs.com
31. CAUTIONS:
www.JagDocs.com
32.

www.JagDocs.com
33.
34.
35.
36.
37. CAUTIONS:

www.JagDocs.com
Installation
All vehicles
1. CAUTIONS:

www.JagDocs.com
5.
4.
3.
2.
stage.
7. CAUTIONS:

www.JagDocs.com

stage.
9. Torque: 10 Nm
10. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
11. Torque: 24 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
tight.

tight.
14. CAUTIONS:

www.JagDocs.com
tight.
16.
18. CAUTION: Make sure that a new component is

installed.

www.JagDocs.com

21.
www.JagDocs.com


www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 10 Nm
26.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
27.
Torque: 10 Nm
28.
29.

stage.
www.JagDocs.com

stage.
33. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
34.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
35.
Torque: 10 Nm
36. Torque: 7 Nm
37.
38.
39.
www.JagDocs.com
40. Torque: 10 Nm
41.
42. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
43. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
44.
45. Torque: 100 Nm
46. Torque: 35 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
All vehicles
Installation).
Installation).
Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Intake Air Shutoff Throttle
Removal
2.
www.JagDocs.com
3. Torque: 10 Nm
4.
5.
6.
www.JagDocs.com
7.
www.JagDocs.com
8. Torque: 10 Nm
10.
www.JagDocs.com
11.
12.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Exhaust manifold threaded stud 13 10 -
Exhaust manifold retaining nuts 24 18 -
Turbocharger oil return tube to turbocharger retaining bolt 9 - 80
Turbocharger oil return tube to engine retaining bolt 9 - 80
Turbocharger bracket retaining bolts 23 17 -
Turbocharger to exhaust manifold retaining nuts 24 18 -
Exhaust manifold heatshield retaining bolt 11 8 -
Exhaust heatshield retaining bolt 9 - 80
Exhaust heatshield retaining nut 10 - 7
Turbocharger oil supply tube retaining bolt 9 - 80
Turbocharger oil supply tube union bolt 30 22 -
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve retaining bolts 9 - 80
EGR valve tube to exhaust manifold retaining bolts 9 - 80
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Turbocharger
- Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Secondary turbocharger turbine shut-off valve
2 Turbocharger oil supply
3 Primary turbocharger (variable vane)
4 Primary turbocharger control module (variable vane actuator)
5 Secondary turbocharger recirculation valve and shut-off valve
6 Charge air tube
7 Turbocharger oil drain
8 Secondary turbocharger (fixed vane)
- Overview
INTRODUCTION
The 3.0L V6 diesel engine uses two turbochargers; a fixed vane type (secondary) and a variable vane (primary) type. The fixed
vane turbocharger is fitted to the RH (right-hand) cylinder bank and the variable vane turbocharger is fitted to the LH
(left-hand) cylinder bank.
Both turbochargers are used in a parallel sequential turbocharging system which enables the engine to achieve quick throttle
response at low engine speeds and efficient use of exhaust gas energy at high engine speeds.
The variable vane turbocharger has an ECM (engine control module) controlled electronic rotary actuator. The rotary actuator
adjusts the turbine vanes to optimize the exhaust gas flow and velocity onto the turbine wheel to maintain the required boost
pressure.
The parallel sequential turbocharging system comprises the two turbochargers and the ECM. The primary variable nozzle
turbine operates through the entire engine speed range but is at its most efficient at engine speeds of up to 2800 rpm. At
engine speeds above 2800 rpm under load, the fixed vane secondary turbine comes into operation, with both of the
turbochargers now running in a parallel bi-turbo mode.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
- System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
TURBOCHARGERS
The turbine wheel of the turbocharger uses the engine's exhaust gasses to drive the compressor wheel. The compressor wheel
draws in fresh air which is supplied to the engine cylinders in a compressed form.
The primary variable vane turbocharger allows the optimum inlet geometry (inlet area and flow angle) to be used over a wide
range of engine operating conditions. This allows a rapid speed of response and higher boost pressures at low engine speeds.
The variable vane angle determines both the inlet area as well as the flow angle, as controlled by the ECM (engine control
module). The variable vanes allow efficient use of the exhaust gas energy which in turn improves turbocharger and engine
efficiency.
Principles of Variable Vane Operation

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
A Low engine speed
B Intermediate engine speed
C High engine speed
1 ECM
2 Electronic rotary actuator
3 Turbine housing
4 Variable vanes
5 Compressor wheel
The variable vanes in the primary turbocharger are controlled by the ECM. The ECM controls a rotary electronic actuator
attached to the primary turbocharger which is used to adjust the pitch angle of the vanes by rotating the turbine housing. The
electronic rotary actuator also provides the ECM with a feedback signal to determine the pitch angle of the vanes.
The variable vanes in the primary turbocharger improve the exhaust gas power transfer to the turbine wheel which in turn
drives the compressor wheel. At low engine speeds this greatly assists the increase in turbocharger boost pressure.
As engine speed, and therefore the exhaust gas velocity, increases, the vanes are opened. The amount of opening is
determined by the ECM to ensure that the power transfer from the turbine wheel to the compressor wheel is within the
turbocharger speed and boost pressure requirements.
At high engine speed and exhaust gas flow, the ECM increases the vane opening to avoid overspeed of the turbines and
provide a smooth high speed operation. At this point the dual mode boosting system comes into affect by utilizing the
secondary (fixed vane) turbocharger.
Dual Mode Boosting
The dual mode boosting system comprises two turbochargers and software within the ECM. The two turbochargers can operate
in two modes; mono turbocharger operation or bi-turbocharger operation.
Mono Turbocharger Operation
Mono Turbocharger Schematic Diagram

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Fixed vane turbine
2 Turbine shut-off valve
3 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
4 Flexible center resonators
5 Catalytic Converter
6 Variable vane turbocharger
7 Engine
8 Throttle
9 Air filter
10 MAF (mass air flow) meter
11 Charge air cooler
12 Compressor shut-off valve
13 Recirculation valve
Fresh air is drawn through the air filter and the MAF meter to the primary turbocharger compressor. The compressed air is then
passed through the charge air cooler and into the engine.
The turbine shut-off valve on the secondary turbocharger is closed and therefore exhaust gasses are unable to operate the
secondary turbocharger turbine. In this condition all turbocharging boost pressure is produced by the primary turbocharger.
www.JagDocs.com
Bi-Turbocharger Switching Operation
Bi-Turbocharger Switching Schematic Diagram

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
7 Engine
8 Throttle
9 Air filter
10 MAF meter
When the engine operating parameters approach the limits (approximately 2800 rpm under load) of the primary turbocharger,
dual mode boosting control software within the ECM begins the switch to parallel bi-turbocharger operation. The secondary
turbocharger is brought into operation by the opening of the turbine shut-off valve which allows exhaust gasses to flow
through the turbine.
Initially, the secondary turbocharger does not produce a boost pressure to equal that of the primary turbocharger. Therefore,
the initial boost pressure from the secondary turbocharger is fed via the recirculation valve into the clean air inlet for the
primary turbocharger. As the secondary turbocharger boost pressure output increases, the recirculation valve is then closed and
the compressor shut-off valve opened to increase the boost pressure from the secondary turbocharger which is directed into
the charge air cooler.
Bi-Turbocharger Schematic Diagram

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
www.JagDocs.com
7 Engine
8 Throttle
9 Air filter
10 MAF meter
When the secondary turbocharger has reached the required operating parameters, the recirculation valve is closed and the
compressor shut-off valve is opened. The ECM will maintain the engine operating in bi-turbocharger operation with both
primary and secondary turbochargers contributing to the air charge induction. When the dual mode boosting software
determines that the engine operating parameters no longer require the use of dual mode boosting, the system switches back
to mono turbocharger operation.
If the engine idles for more than 3 minutes, the secondary turbocharger is actuated to ensure correct lubrication. This is
achieved by pressurizing the turbine shaft bearing cavities through a pipe, which is connected to the air intake system and
periodically opening the turbine shut-off valve to operate the turbocharger.
CAUTION: Ensure both ends of the pipe are securely connected to the secondary turbo and the air intake system to
prevent damage to the turbo components.
Each turbocharger consists of two turbo elements, a turbine wheel and compressor wheel, enclosed separately in cast housings
and mounted on a common shaft, which rotates in two semi-floating bearings.
VARIABLE VANE TURBOCHARGER (PRIMARY)

www.JagDocs.com
The variable vane turbocharger is attached to the LH (left-hand) exhaust manifold and secured to 3 studs on a flange on the
manifold with nuts. On production, no gasket is used to seal the joint between turbocharger and the manifold. In-service
vehicles will require a service gasket to be fitted if the joint between the turbocharger and the manifold is disturbed.
A second flange on the turbocharger has 3 integral studs and provides for the attachment of the LH catalytic converter inlet
pipe. Three nuts secure the inlet pipe to the flange studs and a gasket seals the joint between the components.
The compressor end of the turbocharger has two hose connections. The central connection provides a clean air supply from the
air filter to the compressor. The second connection on the outside of the housing provides for a pipe connection from the
turbocharger to the charge air cooler
The turbocharger is a conventional design with both the turbine wheel and the compressor wheel sharing a common shaft
which is supported on bearings. The turbocharger receives an engine oil feed via a pipe from the cylinder block. The pipe
supplies both turbochargers with an oil supply for lubrication purposes. An oil drain pipe from the turbocharger allows oil to
drain from the turbocharger into the cylinder block.
An integral bracket houses the variable vane electronic rotary actuator. The rotary actuator is connected to an eccentric lever
which moves the turbine housing to adjust the position of the vanes. When the rotary actuator operates a boss is rotated,
which in turn moves the lever and changes rotary motion into linear motion. The lever is connected to the outside of the
turbine housing and the linear motion is converted back to rotary motion of the housing. Operation of the electronic rotary
actuator is controlled by the ECM.
FIXED VANE TURBOCHARGER (SECONDARY)

The fixed vane turbocharger is attached to the RH (right-hand) exhaust manifold and is secured to 3 studs on a flange on the
manifold with nuts. On production, no gasket is used to seal the joint between turbocharger and the manifold. In-service
vehicles will require a service gasket to be fitted if the joint between the turbocharger and the manifold is disturbed.
A second flange on the turbocharger has 2 integral studs and provides for the attachment of the RH exhaust system downpipe.
Two nuts secure the downpipe to the flange studs and a gasket seals the joint between the downpipe and the turbocharger.
The compressor end of the turbocharger has two hose connections; the central connection provides the clean air supply from
the air filter. The second connection on the outside of the turbocharger housing allows the connection from the turbocharger to
the charge air cooler
Attached to the rear of the turbocharger is a turbine shut-off valve. The valve is vacuum operated and electronically controlled
by the ECM. The valve is closed when the system is operating in mono-turbocharger mode, diverting exhaust gasses from the
RH exhaust manifold, via the exhaust cross-over duct to the LH exhaust manifold. When bi-turbocharger operation is required,
the ECM electronically operates the valve allow vacuum to open the shut-off valve allowing exhaust gasses from the RH
exhaust manifold to drive the turbine of the fixed vane turbocharger.
For a detailed description of the fuel charging and controls system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Turbocharger (Description and Operation),

Turbocharger (Description and Operation),
Turbocharger (Description and Operation).
WARNING: The following tests may involve working in close proximity to hot components. Make sure adequate protection
is used. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.

www.JagDocs.com
Visual Inspection
Intake air system Circuit(s)

Hose(s)/hose connections Engine control module (ECM)
General engine condition. Electrical connections and harnesses
the next step
Symptom Chart

Poor Check the fuel level and condition. Check the air intake for restriction. Check the
performance Low/Contaminated engine condition, compressions, etc. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
fuel manual. Check for DTCs. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if an
Restricted air intake engine control module is suspect.
system
General engine
condition
Engine control module
failure
No boost Check the electrical connections and harnesses. Check the air intake for
Electrical connections restriction/leakage (see visual inspection). Refer to the relevant section of the
and harnesses workshop manual. Refer to the warranty policy and procedures manual if an engine
Restricted air intake control module is suspect.
system
Charge air cooler
restricted/leaking
failure
DTC Index
303-14.
LH
Removal

4. Refer to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve LH (303-08A Engine

Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
6.
www.JagDocs.com
10.
9.
8.
7.

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
15.
www.JagDocs.com
16.
Position the turbocharger to one side.
17.
18.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Install new studs.
Check the turbocharger and exhaust manifold mating

faces for distortion.
Install a new turbocharger to exhaust manifold gasket

every time the turbocharger is removed.
Torque: 13 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4.
2.
3.
5. Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 13 Nm
www.JagDocs.com

stage.
8. NOTES:
Tighten the bolts in the indicated sequence.
Torque: 24 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 10 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 24 Nm
11.
www.JagDocs.com
12.
Torque: 7 Nm
13. Torque: 7 Nm
14.
15. Torque: 10 Nm
16. CAUTION: Make sure that a new sealing washer is

installed.
Torque: 30 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
RH
Removal
3. Refer to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH (303-08A Engine

5.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
www.JagDocs.com
8.
7.
10.
www.JagDocs.com
11.
12.
www.JagDocs.com
13.
14.
www.JagDocs.com


www.JagDocs.com

Reposition the turbocharger.
19.
www.JagDocs.com
20.
21.
NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is

22.
23.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
1. CAUTIONS:
Check the turbocharger and exhaust manifold mating

faces for distortion.
Install a new turbocharger to exhaust manifold gasket

every time the turbocharger is removed.
2.
3.
4. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
5.
6.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 13 Nm

stage.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 24 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 10 Nm
12. Torque: 24 Nm
13. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
14.
15. Torque: 7 Nm
16. Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 30 Nm
18. Torque: 25 Nm
19. Torque: 22 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
20.
21. Torque: 11 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
23. Refer to: Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve RH (303-08A Engine
Bypass Valve
Removal
Installation).
3. Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4. Torque: 7 Nm
5. Torque: 7 Nm
6. Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
7.
8.
9. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fixed Vane
Turbocharger Actuator
Removal
All vehicles
Installation).

www.JagDocs.com
All vehicles
4.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
6.
5.
7. NOTE: Remove and discard the gasket.
8. NOTE: Engine shown removed for clarity.

www.JagDocs.com
9.
10.
11. CAUTIONS:
www.JagDocs.com
Remove the Torx screws evenly and progressively.
Make sure component mating faces are not damaged

during removal.
Using a suitable 130mm T30 Torx socket, remove the

retaining bolts.
12. NOTES:
Make a note of the orientation of the gasket tang.
Remove and discard the gasket using the gasket tang.
13. NOTES:
Remove and discard the gasket.
Turbocharger shown removed for clarity.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation
All vehicles

NOTES:
Make sure that the gasket tang is installed in the

correct orientation as noted in the removal step.
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the mating faces are clean and
free of corrosion and foreign material.
NOTES:
Apply a small amount of grease in the areas indicated

to allow the gasket to remain in the position for
installation.
3. CAUTIONS:
www.JagDocs.com
Tighten the Torx screws evenly and progressively.
Using a suitable 130mm T30 Torx socket, Install the

retaining bolts.
Torque: 12 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4. Torque: 9 Nm
5.
www.JagDocs.com
6. NOTE: Engine shown removed for clarity.
Torque: 9 Nm
Torque: 25 Nm
8. Torque: 22 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
9.
10. Torque: 11 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 30 Nm
All vehicles
Installation).
13. If a new fixed vane turbocharger actuator is installed, carry out the reset
procedure for the fixed vane turbocharger actuator using approved
diagnostic tool.
Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Accessory drive belt tensioner retaining bolt 47 35 -
Accessory drive belt central idler pulley retaining bolt 47 35 -
Accessory drive belt idler pulley retaining bolt 47 35 -
Fuel injection pump sprocket retaining nut 50 37 -
Rear end accessory drive belt (READ) cover retaining 9 - 80
bolts
Camshaft rear hub bolt Stage 1 - 80 Stage 2 - 80 Stage 1 - 59 Stage 2 - 80 -
degrees degrees
Camshaft rear pulley retaining bolts 23 16 -
READ belt tensioner retaining bolt 23 16 -
www.JagDocs.com
Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Accessory Drive - Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
2 Idler
3 Coolant pump
4 Idler
5 A/C (air conditioning) compressor
6 Crankshaft pulley
7 Generator
8 Belt tensioner
www.JagDocs.com
Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Accessory Drive - Overview
OVERVIEW
The crankshaft pulley drives a single ribbed belt which in turn drives all of the engine mounted accessories.
www.JagDocs.com
Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Accessory Drive - System Operation and
System Operation
OPERATION
The crankshaft pulley is attached to and rotates with the crankshaft. The pulley provides the drive for the accessory drive vee
belt which in turn provides rotational power for the front mounted accessories such as the generator, power steering pump,
coolant pump and the A/C (air conditioning) compressor.
The crankshaft pulley is a combined pulley and torsional vibration damper.
DESCRIPTION
The accessory drive belt, which is a maintenance free poly-V type belt, is automatically pre-loaded by the belt tensioner and
routed over idlers in order to maintain sufficient friction around the drive wheels. This ensures slip-free drive of the accessory
components.
The torsional vibration damper incorporates compressed rubber between its inner and outer diameters to absorb vibration and
shock loads.
The belt tensioner is calibrated to provide the correct amount of tension to the belt for a given drive system. Unless a spring
within the tensioner assembly breaks, or some other mechanical part of the tensioner fails, there is no need to check the
tensioner for correct tension.
www.JagDocs.com
The accessory drive belt should be inspected at every routine service for excessive wear and damage.
The belt tensioner consists of an idler pulley, which is free to rotate on a bearing located at the end of a spring-loaded pivot
arm. The accessory drive belt has wear indicators which are incorporated on the bottom of the accessory drive belt tensioner.
When the indicators are aligned the accessory drive belt requires replacing.
Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Accessory Drive
For a detailed description of the accessory drive system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section
of the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-05A Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Accessory Drive (Description and Operation),

Accessory Drive (Description and Operation),
Accessory Drive (Description and Operation).
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
www.JagDocs.com
Drive belt condition (cracking/damage/contamination)

Idler assembly
Generator
Engine cooling fan
Tensioner assembly
Engine coolant pump
Power steering pump
Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor
Torsional vibration damper
Tensioner assembly
Accessory drive belt
Security/Correct installation of the fuel injection pump cover
Fuel injection pump belt condition (cracking/damage/contamination)
Fuel injection pump belt tensioner assembly
Fuel injection pump
Fuel injection pump belt
the next step.
CAUTION: If the engine is run without the accessory drive belts connected to eliminate driven components, diagnostic
trouble codes, (DTCs) may be set which must be cleared before the vehicle is returned to the owner. The engine should not be
run for more than 2-3 minutes with the belts disconnected. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
vehicle.
Symptom Chart (accessory drive belt)

Noise Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the tensioner function.
Belt condition Check the pulley alignment. Check the driven components for excessive
Belt tension resistance to rotation. Rectify as necessary.
Pulleys misaligned
Driven components
(including tensioners)
Drive belt does Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the tensioner function.
not hold tension Belt condition Rectify as necessary.
Tensioner fault
Symptom Chart (fuel injection pump belt)
Noise Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the belt cover for indications
Belt condition of fouling (this may indicate a pump misalignment), refer to the relevant workshop
Belt fouling manual section. The belt tensioner must be renewed if the belt is removed, making
cover a check of the bearing impractical. Remove the belt, check the fuel injection pump
Tensioner pulley for security. Check the fuel injection pump for excessive resistance to rotation
bearing failure (excessive resistance in the pump will cause the pulley securing nut to loosen as a
Fuel injection design feature). Check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) indicating a pump
pump failure malfunction.
Drive belt does Check the belt condition (see visual inspection). Check the tensioner function.
not hold tension Belt condition Rectify as necessary.
Tensioner fault
Loss of drive Investigate the cause of the belt breakage/damage (a belt broken at a 45 degree
(with no drive to Belt angle normally indicates a shear, a break straight across the belt normally indicates
the fuel injection broken/stripped that the belt has been crimped). Check the fuel injection pump for excessive
pump, the engine teeth resistance to rotation (excessive resistance in the pump will cause the pulley
will not run) Drive pulleys securing nut to loosen as a design feature). Check for DTCs indicating a pump
loose malfunction.
DTC Index
303-14.
www.JagDocs.com
Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Accessory Drive Belt
Removal

www.JagDocs.com
5.
6. Torque: 47 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
7. Torque: 25 Nm
8. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that the accessory drive belt is correctly

located on each pulley.
Clean and inspect the accessory drive belt pulleys for

damage.
www.JagDocs.com
NOTES:
Note the fitted position of the accessory drive belt.
Installation

Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Removal

4.
www.JagDocs.com
6. CAUTIONS:

damage.

NOTES:
Torque: 47 Nm
Installation

Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Removal

4.
www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTIONS:

damage.

NOTES:
Torque: 47 Nm
Installation
Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Injection Pump Pulley
Special Tool(s)
310-138A
Holding Tool, Fuel Pump Pulley
310-139A
Holding Tool, Fuel Pump Pulley
www.JagDocs.com
Removal
Special Tool(s): 310-139A

5.

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
8.
www.JagDocs.com
10.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1.

www.JagDocs.com

3. Torque: 50 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Accessory Drive - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Rear End Accessory Drive (READ)
Special Tool(s)
303-1117
310-212
Rear End Accessory Drive (READ) belt Timing Tool
www.JagDocs.com
Removal
Installation).
5.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
8.
7.
6.
www.JagDocs.com
11.
10.
9.
www.JagDocs.com
14.
13.
12.
NOTES:
Rotate the crankshaft until the mark on the rear camshaft

pulley is in the illustrated position.
16.
www.JagDocs.com
17.
18.

www.JagDocs.com
20. NOTE: Do not loosen the bolts more than 2 turns.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the READ belt tensioner tang is

correctly located to the READ belt rear cover. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in damage to the engine.
NOTE: Make sure that the READ belt tensioner locking

pin is not removed until the READ belt is fully installed.
Torque: 23 Nm
2. NOTE: Make sure the new READ belt is correctly

seated onto the fuel pump pulley.
www.JagDocs.com
3.
4. NOTES:
The READ rotates in a counter-clockwise direction

when viewed from the rear of the engine.
Make sure the new READ belt is correctly seated onto

the camshaft and fuel pump pulleys.
Install the READ belt onto the camshaft pulley (1) and on
to the tensioner (2).
5. NOTE: Make sure that the READ belt tensioner locking

pin is not removed until the READ belt is fully installed.
Make sure that the rear end accessory drive (READ) belt is
aligned with the marks on the rear camshaft pulley and fuel
injection pump pulley as illustrated.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
7. Torque: 23 Nm
8.
9.
www.JagDocs.com
10.
11.
12.
www.JagDocs.com
13. Torque: 10 Nm
14.
15. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
16. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
17. Torque: 5 Nm
18. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
19.
20. Torque: 27 Nm
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com

Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -

Starter motor to oil pan bolts 47 35 -
Battery positive terminal integral connector retaining nut 10 7 -
Solenoid terminal integral connector nut 7 - 62
www.JagDocs.com
Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Starting System - Component Location
Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Starting System - Overview
OVERVIEW
The starter motor is located on the rear RH (right-hand) side of the cylinder block stiffening frame and protrudes through an
aperture to drive the flywheel via a ring gear. The motor is secured to the stiffening frame by 2 bolts. The rear of the starter
motor is attached to a support bracket which in turn is bolted to the stiffening frame. The bracket provides crucial support for
the starter motor and must not be omitted when installing or reinstalling the unit.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Starting System - System Operation
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuses
3 Starter motor
4 Stop/start switch
6 Engine compartment fusebox (starter motor relay)
System Operation
OPERATION
The starter solenoid is energised by a signal from the ECM when the stop/start switch is pressed and the driver has depressed
the brake pedal. When engine cranking is requested, the ECM checks that a valid key code has been received before granting
the crank request.
Once engine cranking has been granted, the ECM energizes the starter motor relay located in the engine compartment fusebox.
The closing of the starter motor relay contacts causes battery voltage to be applied to the starter motor solenoid. The solenoid
is energised and the pinion gear is pushed to engage with the flywheel ring gear. Simultaneously, the starter solenoid contacts
close, causing current to flow into the motor brushes and armature which operates the motor. The armature rotational force is
transferred to the engine’s ring gear through the pinion gear, rotates the flywheel and starts the engine.
DESCRIPTION
The Denso starter motor is rated as 2.2 kW. It is a conventional design with the motor and pinion in line and the solenoid
mounted above.
The starter motor is of the pre-engaged type and comprises a series wound motor, an overrunning clutch and an integral
solenoid. This starter incorporates labyrinth-breathing tubes to help with sealing and drainage.
The power for starter operation is supplied on a substantial single cable connected direct from the battery positive terminal,
via a megafuse. The cable is connected to the solenoid via a copper threaded stud and secured with a nut.
www.JagDocs.com
Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Starting System
For a detailed description of the starting system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: (303-06A Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Starting System (Description and Operation),

Starting System (Description and Operation),
Starting System (Description and Operation).
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical and electrical damage.
Visual Inspection
www.JagDocs.com
Gear selector lever cable adjustment (vehicles with automatic Battery

transmission) Fuses
Starter motor Starter relay
Engine (turns freely) Wiring harness(es)
Damaged, loose or corroded
connectors
Ignition switch
Generator
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
the next step.
Symptom Chart

The engine does Make sure the gear selector is in the P or N position and correctly
not crank (starter Gear selector not in P or N adjusted. Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check for
motor does not position (vehicles with DTCs indicating an immobilizer fault. Check the starter motor relay,
turn) automatic transmission) ignition switch and generator circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
Battery Check for TCM and ECM DTCs. Check that the engine turns freely.
Starter relay
Invalid key code received by
Harness/Connectors
Starter motor
Ignition switch
Generator
Transmission Control Module
(TCM)
Engine seized
The engine does Check the starter motor installation (fasteners tight, starter motor
not crank (starter Starter motor installation square to engine, etc). Check the flywheel/drive plate ring gear teeth
motor does turn) Starter motor for damage, foreign objects, etc.
Flywheel/Drive plate ring
gear
Engine cranks too Check the battery condition and state of charge. Check the starter
slowly Battery motor circuits. Refer to the electrical guides. Check the engine oil
Harness/Connectors grade and condition.
Starter motor
Oil grade
Engine cranks too Check the engine compressions.

fast Low engine compression
Excessive starter Check the starter motor installation (fasteners tight, motor square to
motor noise Starter motor engine, etc). Check the starter motor casing condition. Check the
Flywheel/Drive plate ring flywheel/drive plate ring gear teeth for damage, foreign objects, etc.
gear
Starter motor
installation/casing
DTC Index
303-14.
www.JagDocs.com
Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Starting System Vehicles With: Smart
Key
For a detailed description of the starting system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the workshop
manual.

Visual Inspection
Steering column Fuses

Brake pedal Harnesses and connectors
Smart key Warning lamp operation
Steering Wheel Smart key operation
Engine start operation
the next step.
www.JagDocs.com
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) and refer to the DTC Index.
5. Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSM's which may be valid for the specific
customer complaint and carry out the recommendations as needed.
CAUTIONS:
3548-1358-00
NOTES:
Symptom Chart
Symptom - Message Displayed Symptom - Possible Cause Action
Smart key not found - Refer to handbook Ignition mode fails to switch on GO to Pinpoint Test A.
www.JagDocs.com
Symptom - Message Displayed Symptom - Possible Cause Action
Ignition mode fails to switch on GO to Pinpoint Test B.
NOTE: Back up start - 10MY onwards
Smart key not found - Refer to handbook

Press start and brake Engine fails to crank GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Steering column locked Ignition switches off after 3 seconds GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Ambient temperatures below zero GO to Pinpoint Test E.
NOTE: For diesel engines
Engine still not cranking
Pin Point Test
PINPOINT TEST A : SMART KEY NOT FOUND - REFER TO HANDBOOK
CONDITIONS
A1: IGNITION MODE FAILS TO SWITCH ON
NOTES:
In normal operation, pressing the start button for one second will cause the vehicle to enter the ignition mode. If the
procedures below are followed the engine should crank
For automatic transmission vehicles, ensure the brake pedal is depressed and the park or neutral selected
1 Ensure the smart Key is within the cabin area. Check the smart key is not close to any electrical devices
www.JagDocs.com
e.g. Smart phones, laptops, laptop cases, games consoles and game console bags, briefcases, metal
objects etc. All can affect the system performance and may block its communication with the vehicle. If
the smart key battery low warning message has been displayed it is likely that the smart key battery has
insufficient charge. Refer to section 'Back Up Start' for 10MY onwards
Has the vehicle started?
Yes
No further action required
No
Check and install a new battery as required. Clear the DTC and retest. If the problem persists, contact
dealer technical support
PINPOINT TEST B : BACK UP START - 10MY ONWARDS - SMART KEY NOT FOUND - REFER TO HANDBOOK
CONDITIONS
B1: IGNITION MODE FAILS TO SWITCH ON
NOTES:
In normal operation, pressing the start button for one second will cause the vehicle to enter the ignition mode. If the
procedures below are followed the engine should crank
1 On pressing the start button, smart key not found. When this warning is displayed the smart key should
be brought into close proximity with the immobilize antenna unit. Hold the key in the location and press
the start button again. If this process fails the first time, try repositioning the key around the immobilize
antenna unit location, repeat the sequence again
Has the vehicle started?
Yes
No
Contact dealer technical support
PINPOINT TEST C : PRESS START AND BRAKE - (MESSAGE DISPLAYED)
CONDITIONS
C1: ENGINE FAILS TO CRANK
NOTES:
Conditions for starting in addition to pressing the start button are

PINPOINT TEST D : STEERING COLUMN LOCKED - (MESSAGE DISPLAYED)
CONDITIONS
D1: IGNITION SWITCHES OFF AFTER 3 SECONDS
NOTES:
Conditions for starting in addition to pressing the start button are
If the engine can be heard to crank there is no fault with the smart key
If the locking pin is still engaged, turn the steering wheel to overcome the side load
Start authorisation defined as Ignition functions, Steering column lock engagement, Engine immobilize and smart key
authorisation
1 Unlock the vehicle using the key fob, within 3 minutes of unlocking ensure the steering wheel can rotate
freely. Perform a further lock and unlock check and attempt to start vehicle. If the steering 'column locked'
message is still displayed, Lock the vehicle with the key fob and ensure the column is locked (If
installed) by turning the steering wheel. Then unlock the vehicle ensuring the column Steering wheel can
turn freely. Now perform another start attempt
Did the engine start?
www.JagDocs.com
Yes
No
PINPOINT TEST E : ENGINE STILL NOT CRANKING
CONDITIONS
E1: AMBIENT TEMPERATURES BELOW ZERO
1 Hold the start button down for at least 4 seconds while starting the vehicle
2 Switch the ignition on, the passive anti theft system (PATS) LED should now be illuminated. Start the
engine, the PATS LED should switch off after 3 seconds
Did the engine start?
Yes
No
Starting System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Starter Motor
Removal
Installation).
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 35 Nm
Torque: 100 Nm
7.
www.JagDocs.com
8. Torque: 23 Nm
9.
10. Torque: 7 Nm
11. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
12.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
13. Torque: 48 Nm
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
Glow Plug System -

Glow plug 10 - 89
www.JagDocs.com
Glow Plug System - Glow Plug System - Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Glow plug module
4 Glow plug warning indicator lamp
5 Glow plugs
Glow Plug System - Glow Plug System - Overview
OVERVIEW
A glow plug is installed into the cylinder head for each cylinder to heat the combustion chambers before and during cranking.
This aids the engine's cold starting, reduces emissions and engine noise when idling from a cold engine.
A glow plug control unit powers each glow plug individually. The glow plug control unit incorporates diagnostic functions for the
individual glow plugs and reports the diagnostic status via an output signal to the ECM (engine control module). The power
level applied to the glow plugs by the glow plug control unit is determined by an input signal from the ECM, which also controls
the illumination of the glow plug indicator in the instrument cluster.
Each glow plug is grounded through its fixing in the cylinder head. Operation of the glow plug relays is controlled by the ECM.
The glow plugs are a low voltage metallic type.
It is important that the correct torque setting is used when refitting a glow plug into the cylinder head.
www.JagDocs.com
Glow Plug System - Glow Plug System - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High Speed CAN (controller area network)

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
4 Glow plug warning indicator lamp
5 Glow plugs
6 Glow plug module
www.JagDocs.com
System Operation
System Operation
There are three phases of glow plug heating: Pre heating, crank heating and post heating. The ECM determines the power
levels for each phase and heating times from the coolant temperature.
When the start/stop button is pressed to start the engine and the brake pedal is applied, the ECM calculates any required
heating times and, if heating is required, sends a signal to the glow control unit. The glow control unit energizes the glow
plugs with the required power levels. When pre heating is required, the ECM also sends a message to the instrument cluster,
on the high speed CAN bus, to request illumination of the glow plug indicator. The glow plug indicator remains illuminated for
the duration of the pre heating phase. If required by the ECM, the glow control unit keeps the glow plugs energized during
cranking and for the duration of any post heating phase.
The glow control unit monitors the drive circuit of the glow plugs for plausibility of operation, continuity, and short and open
circuits. If a fault is detected, the glow control unit sends a signal to the ECM, which then stores a related fault code.
Pre Heating
Pre-heat is the length of time the glow plugs operate prior to engine cranking. The ECM controls the pre-heat time based on
ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor output and barometric pressure. If the ECT sensor fails, the ECM will use a predefined
temperature as a default value. The pre heating period is dependent on the temperature signal (low temperature =
longer pre heating period).
Crank Heating
Crank heating is controlled by the ECM based on ECT and is active when the engine is cranking to assist cold engine starts.
Post Heating
www.JagDocs.com
The ECM controls the post heating time based on ECT sensor output post heating phase is active once the engine has started.
Glow Plug
A separate harness connects the four glow plugs. The harness connects into the engine wiring harness.
The glow plug module receives a battery voltage feed via a 250A megafuse and a 60A fuse in the engine compartment
fusebox. Operation of the glow plug module is controlled by the ECM, which also controls the illumination of the glow plug
indicator in the instrument cluster.
The operating voltage of the glow plugs is significantly lower than the 12 volts of the main electrical circuit. The voltage that
is supplied to the glow plug controls the glow tip temperature. This produces the optimum glow plug tip temperature for all
operating conditions. The lower power consumption of the glow plugs and their time-staggered activation reduces the peak
load on the main circuit during the cold start and immediate post-start periods.
In the event of glow plug failure, a diagnostic code will be stored in the ECM.
Glow Plug System - Glow Plug System
For a detailed description of the glow plug system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the workshop
manual. REFER to: (303-07C Glow Plug System)
Glow Plug System (Description and Operation),

Glow Plug System (Description and Operation),
Glow Plug System (Description and Operation).
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Fuse(s)
Glow plug relay
Engine management control relay
Wiring harness
www.JagDocs.com
Electrical connector(s)
Glow plug(s)
Engine control module (ECM)
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - TDV6 3.0L Diesel , DTC: Engine Control Module (ECM) (100-00 General
Information, Description and Operation).
Glow Plug System - Glow Plugs TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
5. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
6. Torque: 10 Nm
7. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the
component.
8. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -

Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve to cylinder head retaining bolts 10 - 89
EGR valve to EGR cooler retaining bolts 10 - 89
EGR valve tube to exhaust manifold retaining bolts 10 - 89
EGR valve cooler mounting bracket retaining bolt 10 - 89
EGR valve outlet tube to EGR valve retaining bolts 10 - 89
EGR valve outlet tube to timing cover retaining bolt 4 - 35
Fuel filter mounting bracket retaining M8 nuts 27 20 -
Fuel filter mounting bracket retaining M6 bolt 2 - 18
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Emission Control -
Component Location
NOTE: Authoring Template
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Component Location

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) valve motor
2 EGR outlet pipe
3 By-pass valve vacuum actuator
4 Vacuum pump
5 Solenoid valve
6 Vacuum pipe (2 off)
7 EGR cooler
8 EGR inlet pipe from exhaust manifold
9 Throttle intake manifold
Crankcase Ventilation Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Cylinder ventilation scavenger hose (2 off)
2 Crankcase gas to air intake hose
3 Crankcase breather cylinder block connections
4 Oil drain to oil filter housing
5 Crankcase breather and oil separator
Overview
OVERVIEW
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
The EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) system is used to control the amount of exhaust gas being recirculated in order to reduce
exhaust emissions and combustion noise. EGR is enabled when the engine is at normal operating temperature and under
cruising conditions.
Crankcase Ventilation System
The crankcase ventilation system ensures that all gasses emitted from the crankcase during engine running are separated from
any oil particles and recirculated via the clean air induction system.
www.JagDocs.com
System Operation
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM OPERATION
If small volumes of fuel are injected into a combustion chamber full of pure air, the effect is to create a very lean mixture. This
burns at a high temperature, which in turn causes the excess oxygen in the mixture to combine with the naturally occurring
nitrogen in the air to create nitrogen oxides (NOx), a noxious class of pollutants associated with acid rain. This is a particular
problem for diesel engines at low to medium loads (as the engine has no throttle, the cylinder is replenished with a full charge
of 'air' at every induction stroke). Exhaust gas is blended into the intake air charge to create the cylinder charge. As the
exhaust gas effectively contains no oxygen, it prevents the formation of a very lean mixture, so lowering combustion
temperatures and minimizing the formation of NOx.
At low engine speeds and loads, over 50 percent of the cylinder charge can be made up of recycled exhaust gas. This is routed
directly from the exhaust manifold and passes through a gas-water heat exchanger before being supplied to the inlet manifold.
The volume of exhaust gas added to the intake charge is regulated by an electronically controlled EGR (exhaust gas
recirculation) valve, actuated according to precise engine speed and load by the engine management system.
CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM OPERATION

Crankcase gasses are drawn into the oil separator unit from the crankcase and the cylinder head covers (both banks) by a
vacuum created by a connection into the air induction system.
The crankcase gasses are circulated around the oil separator where the gas and oil are separated. The gas is returned to the
inlet side of the air induction system prior to the primary turbocharger. The collected oil is drained down to the sump via the oil
www.JagDocs.com
cooler and filter housing on the cylinder block.
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM
EGR System Control Components
Item Description
1 Oxygen sensor
2 LH (left-hand) exhaust pipe
3 EGR cooler
5 EGR valve motor
6 EGR outlet pipe
7 EGR cooler and valve housing
8 EGR inlet pipe
9 Exhaust system cross-over pipe
10 Pre and post catalyst exhaust gas temperature sensors
The EGR system comprises an EGR cooler and housing assembly which is bolted to the cylinder head, above the exhaust
manifold. Each EGR assembly comprises an EGR cooler, a by-pass housing, a by-pass valve motor and a by-pass valve vacuum
actuator.
A pipe is connected to the exhaust manifold and directs exhaust gasses into the by-pass housing. A second pipe from the
by-pass housing connects to the throttle intake manifold and passes the cooled exhaust gasses into the intake manifold to
mix with the clean air entering the engine from the air filter.
The EGR cooler is attached to the by-pass housing with a gasket and 5 screws. The by-pass housing has an engine coolant
connection which allows coolant to flow from the engine oil cooler into the by-pass housing. Engine coolant flows from the
by-pass housing into a water jacket within the cooler which in cools the exhaust gasses by heat transfer within the cooler. The
engine coolant flows from the cooler through an outlet pipe and is passed back into the cooling system via the heater core.
The by-pass housing contains the EGR valve motor, the EGR valve and the by-pass valve.
By-pass Housing Components

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
2 EGR valve motor
3 EGR valve
4 By-pass valve
www.JagDocs.com
By-Pass Valve
The by-pass valve is a vacuum operated valve which directs the flow of exhaust gasses either through the EGR cooler or
by-passes the cooler and directs the gasses directly to the intake manifold.
A vacuum actuator is located on a bracket attached to each EGR cooler. The actuator receives a vacuum which is produced by
the vacuum pump located at the rear of the engine. The vacuum actuator is connected to the by-pass valve within the by-pass
housing by a connecting rod.
The vacuum supply to the actuator is controlled by the ECM (engine control module). When by-pass control is required, the
ECM energizes a vacuum solenoid valve which applies vacuum to the vacuum actuators. The vacuum causes the actuators to
move the connecting rods in a linear direction. The linear movement of the rod is transferred to rotary movement of the
by-pass valve within the by-pass housing.
By-Pass Valve Closed

www.JagDocs.com
When the by-pass valve is closed, exhaust gasses are directed through the cooler before being passed to the intake manifold.
By-Pass Valve Open
When the by-pass valve is open, exhaust gasses are passed directly through the by-pass housing into the intake manifold with
no cooling applied to the gasses.
EGR Valve
The EGR valve motor is located on the by-pass housing. A 5 pin connector provides the power, ground and ECM signal and
feedback connections for the motor.
The motor is secured to the by-pass housing with 4 torx screws. A pinion gear on the motor spindle drives a geared rack which
is connected to the EGR valve in the by-pass housing.
The motor is controlled by the ECM which provides power supply to operate the motor as required. A 5 Volt feedback signal is
passed to the ECM which is used to establish motor position for precise control.
CRANKCASE VENTILATION
The crankcase ventilation system comprises an oil breather and separator. The breather receives crankcase directly from the
crankcase and also from the cylinder heads.
The breather is connected to the top of the cylinder block with two seals. Two scavenge pipes located on the top of the
breather are connected to the cylinder head covers. A breather pipe is connected from the top of the breather to the clean air
intake hose at a point prior to the primary turbocharger.
Clean air being drawn into the engine when it is running creates a vacuum in the breather pipe. This vacuum in turn creates a
vacuum in the oil breather and separator which draws gasses from the crankcase and cylinder heads into the breather. These
gasses are circulated around the breather, allowing oil particles to be separated from the gas. The gasses are drawn into the
breather pipe and are mixed with the clean air being drawn into the turbocharger.
The oil particles separated from the gasses accumulate in the oil separator and drain through a third connection at the bottom
of the oil breather and separator, through a connection on the oil cooler housing to the oil pan.
www.JagDocs.com
Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Emission Control
For a detailed description of the engine emission control system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-08A Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Engine Emission Control (Description and Operation),

Engine Emission Control (Description and Operation),
Engine Emission Control (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
www.JagDocs.com
Engine breather system Fuse(s)

Oil separator Wiring harness
Exhaust gas recirculation pipes/hoses (check for cracks) Loose or corroded electrical connector(s)
EGR valve(s) Intake air shut off throttle
EGR cooler(s) Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve(s)
Vacuum system Engine Control Module (ECM)
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Difficult to start Check the Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve.
Poor/Erratic idle Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
Lack of power when valve stuck open
accelerating
Engine stops/stalls Check the Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve. Check the engine
Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) breather system. Check the oil separator. Check for Exhaust gas
valve stuck open recirculation (EGR) DTCs.
Breather system
disconnected/restricted/blocked
Excessive fuel
consumption Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
valve stuck open
Excessive black Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
smoke not operating
Excessive Breather system
emissions restricted/blocked
Excessive blow-by Check the engine breather hoses. Check the oil separator.
Breather system
restricted/blocked
Engine oil leaks Check the engine breather hoses. Check the oil separator.
Breather system
restricted/blocked
DTC Index
303-14.
Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankcase Vent Oil Separator
Removal
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Torque: 10 Nm
5.
6.
7. CAUTIONS:
Discard the seals.
Make sure that all openings are sealed.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
Valve LH
Removal
All vehicles
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
Installation).
7.
CAUTION: Make sure to support the steering gear.
8.
www.JagDocs.com
9.
All vehicles
10.
www.JagDocs.com
14.
13.
12.
11.

www.JagDocs.com
17.
18.
19.
www.JagDocs.com
20.
21.
www.JagDocs.com
23.
www.JagDocs.com
25.
26.

www.JagDocs.com


www.JagDocs.com
33.
www.JagDocs.com
35.
34.
36.
37.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
39.

www.JagDocs.com
40.
41.
42.
43.

www.JagDocs.com

stage.
Installation
All vehicles
1. CAUTIONS:
2.
www.JagDocs.com
3.
4.
5.

stage.
www.JagDocs.com
7. CAUTIONS:

stage.
9. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
10. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
11.
12. Torque: 24 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
13. Torque: 24 Nm
tight.

tight.
www.JagDocs.com
16. CAUTIONS:
17.
18.

www.JagDocs.com

installed.

tight.

www.JagDocs.com
23.

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
27.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
28.
Torque: 10 Nm
29. Torque: 10 Nm
30.
31.

www.JagDocs.com
32.
CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger-tight at this

stage.
33.
CAUTION: Only tighten the bolts finger-tight at this
stage.
34.
Torque: 10 Nm
35.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
36.
Torque: 10 Nm
37. Torque: 10 Nm
38.
Torque: 10 Nm
39.
www.JagDocs.com
40.
41.
CAUTION: Be prepared to collect escaping coolant.
42.
44. Remove coolant hose clamps.
45.
www.JagDocs.com
46. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
47. Torque: 10 Nm
48.
www.JagDocs.com
49. Torque: 27 Nm
50.
51. Torque: 100 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
52. Torque: 35 Nm
All vehicles
Installation).
Installation).
58. Top up coolant.
www.JagDocs.com
Valve Outlet Tube
Removal
2. NOTE: Discard the retaining clips.

www.JagDocs.com
3. Torque: 5 Nm
Torque: 10 Nm
Installation
Valve RH
Removal
All vehicles
Installation).
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
6.
www.JagDocs.com
8.
All vehicles
9.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
12.
11.
10.

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
17.
16.
15.
18.
www.JagDocs.com
19.
20.
21.
www.JagDocs.com
22.

www.JagDocs.com
23.
24.
25.
27. CAUTIONS:

www.JagDocs.com

31.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
34.
33.
32.
35. CAUTIONS:
36.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
39.
www.JagDocs.com
40.
41. CAUTIONS:

Installation
All vehicles
1. CAUTIONS:
2.
www.JagDocs.com
3.
4.
5.
www.JagDocs.com

stage.
7. CAUTIONS:

www.JagDocs.com
stage.
9. Torque: 10 Nm
10. Torque: 10 Nm
11.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
12. Torque: 24 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
tight.

tight.
15. CAUTIONS:

www.JagDocs.com
tight.
17.

installed.

www.JagDocs.com

tight.

22.
www.JagDocs.com


www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 10 Nm
27.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
28.
Torque: 10 Nm
29.
30.
32.
www.JagDocs.com

stage.

stage.

Torque: 10 Nm
35.
Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
36.
Torque: 10 Nm
37. Torque: 10 Nm
38.
39. Torque: 7 Nm
40.
www.JagDocs.com
41.

www.JagDocs.com
44. Remove coolant hose clamps.
45. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
47.
46.
48. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
49.
50. Torque: 100 Nm
51. Torque: 35 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
All vehicles
Installation).
Installation).
56. Top up coolant.
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Air cleaner housing retaining bolt 8 - 71
Throttle body retaining bolts 9 - 80
Inlet manifold retaining bolts 9 - 80
www.JagDocs.com
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Intake Air
Distribution and Filtering - Component Location
Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 RH (right-hand) intake manifold
2 Crankcase gas to clean air intake pipe
3 LH (left-hand) intake manifold
4 Charge air MAPT (manifold absolute pressure and temperature) sensor
5 Intake manifold throttle actuator
6 MAF (mass air flow) sensor (secondary turbocharger)
7 MAF / IAT (intake air temperature) sensor (primary turbocharger)
8 Air cleaner housing
www.JagDocs.com
9 Air intake scoop
11 Turbocharger inlet valve assembly
12 Pipe - Compressed air from primary turbocharger to charge air cooler
13 Primary turbocharger
14 Crankcase breather and separator
15 Intake air to primary turbocharger pipe
16 Charge air cooler to throttle intake manifold pipe
17 Pipe - Compressed air from secondary turbocharger to charge air cooler
18 Intake air to secondary turbocharger pipe
19 Secondary turbocharger
www.JagDocs.com
Distribution and Filtering - Overview
Authoring Template
OVERVIEW
The intake air distribution and filtering system comprises:
Two MAF (mass air flow) / IAT (intake air temperature) sensor
Charge air temperature sensor
Air cleaner and housing
Charge air cooler
Primary and secondary turbochargers.
The system cleans, cools and compresses the intake air. The turbochargers compress the air which is then cooled in the charge
air cooler before being mixed with the injected fuel in the cylinder producing a high energy combustion increasing engine
performance.
www.JagDocs.com
Distribution and Filtering - System Operation and Component Description
System Operation
OPERATION
Air is drawn into the air intake system via the air intake scoop located at the front of the vehicle. The air passes into the air
cleaner housing and passes through the air cleaner. The air cleaner is a pleated, paper type filter which removes dust, pollen
etc. from the intake air.
The filtered clean air passes from the air cleaner housing to the turbocharger inlet valve assembly. Depending on engine load
and operating conditions, the intake air can be passed to only the primary turbocharger or to both the primary and secondary
turbochargers.
Exhaust gasses leaving the exhaust manifolds are used to drive a turbine in the turbocharger which is turn drives a
compressor. The rotational speed of the compressor is directly related to the speed of the exhaust gasses leaving the engine.
Increased exhaust gas emission drives the turbine, and subsequently the compressor, faster, further compressing the intake air
delivered to the engine.
The compression of the air by the turbocharger also heats the air which increases the air volume (density). The intake air is
passed into the charge air cooler which reduces the air temperature as it passes through the cooler. This in turn decreases the
air volume allowing more air molecules to be passed into the cylinders. The cooled and compressed air is mixed with the
injected fuel in the cylinder producing a high energy combustion increasing engine performance.
www.JagDocs.com
DESCRIPTION
Air Cleaner and Housing
The air cleaner housing is located in the front LH (left-hand) side of the engine compartment. The housing has a water drain
with a grommet which is located in a hole in the LH chassis longitudinal structure. A bolt secures the air cleaner housing to a
captive nut in a bracket on the LH inner fender.
The air cleaner element is a pleated paper type element with an rubber seal around its perimeter. The seal locates in a groove
in the housing and prevents air by-passing the element. The housing upper lid can be removed by pulling back 2 plastic clips to
release the lid.
Charge Air Cooler
The charge air cooler is located at the front of the engine compartment, between the A/C (air conditioning) condenser and the
engine cooling radiator.
Turbochargers are designed to force more air mass into the engine intake manifold and combustion chambers. This
compression process by the turbocharger produces heat which can reduce the performance gains of turbocharging due to
reduced density of the intake air and an increase the cylinder combustion temperature. To counteract this the charge air cooler
is used to reduce the intake air temperature which increases the density of the air allowing more air molecules to be delivered
to the combustion chamber.
The cooler is a cross flow type cooler and has inlet and outlet connections. The LH connection is the inlet for the compressed
air deliver from the turbocharger compressors. The RH (right-hand) connection is the outlet for the cooled compressed air to be
delivered to the throttle intake manifold.
The charge air cooler is an air-to-air type cooler. Heated air from the turbochargers is passed through tubes in the cooler.
Ambient air passing over the tubes cools the intake air as it passes through the cooler.
Air Intake Components
The air intake components comprise 3 main components; airbox, intake manifolds and a throttle intake manifold.
Airbox
The airbox allows for the connection of the cooled intake air from the charge air cooler to the throttle intake manifold. The
airbox houses a charge air temperature sensor which measures the temperature of the air entering the combustion chambers
and passes this information to the ECM (engine control module).
A single pipe from the airbox connects to the secondary turbocharger. Boost pressure is applied via this pipe to the turbine
shaft of the secondary turbocharger to maintain the correct lubrication of the turbocharger during driving conditions where the
secondary turbocharger is inactive.
Refer to: Turbocharger (303-04B Fuel Charging and Controls - Turbocharger - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Throttle Intake Manifold

The throttle intake manifold is located between the 2 intake manifolds and the airbox. The manifold splits the air entering the
engine between the 2 intake manifolds.
The throttle intake manifold houses a DC electric throttle actuator which controls a flap in the body of the manifold. The flap is
controlled by the ECM and is constantly adjusted in response to driver inputs via the throttle pedal to precisely control the
amount of air allowed into the intake manifolds.
Pipe connections on either side of the throttle intake manifold allow for the attachment of the exhaust gas outlet pipes from
the EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) valves
Refer to: Engine Emission Control (303-08A Engine Emission Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
A boost pressure sensor is located on the top of the manifold where the air flow splits for the 2 intake manifolds. The pressure
sensor measures the pressure of the intake air as delivered from the one or both of the turbochargers and passes this
information to the ECM for turbocharger control.
Intake Manifolds
The intake manifolds are an integral part of the cylinder head covers. Each intake manifold is connected to the throttle intake
manifold via a push fit, sealed connection. The intake manifolds direct intake air to the inlet valves for each combustion
chamber.
www.JagDocs.com
Distribution and Filtering
For a detailed description of the intake air distribution and filtering system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and
Operation section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (303-12A Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (Description and Operation),

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (Description and Operation),
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
www.JagDocs.com
Hoses and ducts condition and installation Fuse(s)

Air cleaner element condition and installation Wiring harness
Restricted air intake Loose or corroded electrical connector(s)
Vacuum hoses condition and installation Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor
Pipework to turbocharger condition and installation Air Charge Temperature (ACT) sensor
Turbocharger condition and installation Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
Charge air coolers Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor
Intake air shut-off throttle solenoid
the next step.
Symptom Chart

Clear the restriction. Replace the air cleaner element as necessary.
Vehicle does not Restricted/Blocked air intake
start/hard Restricted/Blocked air cleaner
starting element
Check the turbocharger. Check the intake air shutoff throttle function
Turbocharger fault (make sure the throttle body returns to the open position). Check the
Poor performance Throttle body fault intercooler hoses.
Intercooler hoses
Excessive intake Check the joint between the air intake elbow and the intake air shutoff
noise Intake air leak after the throttle. Check the joints between the throttle body outlets and the
turbocharger intake manifolds. Check the charge air cooler seals. Check the intake
Intake pipe system and hoses for correct installation/damage.
disconnected/damaged after
the air cleaner
Air cleaner assembly
incorrectly
assembled/damaged
DTC Index
303-14.
www.JagDocs.com
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Air Cleaner
Removal
1.
www.JagDocs.com
2.
3.
4.

www.JagDocs.com
6. Torque: 8 Nm
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Air Cleaner Element
Removal
1.
2. TORQUE: 8 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
3.
Installation

Intake Air Distribution and Filtering - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Charge Air Cooler
Removal
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
7. Torque: 4.5 Nm
8. Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com

10. Torque: 7 Nm
11. CAUTIONS:
Protect the air conditioning (A/C) condenser.
Using suitable cable tie secure the A/C condenser

away from the radiator.
Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com

technician.
13.
14. Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor retaining bolt 10 7 -
Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor retaining bolt 5 - 44
Engine control module (ECM) cover retaining nuts 10 7 -
ECM to bracket retaining bolt 7 - 5
Engine oil pressure (EOP) sensor 14 11 -
Engine oil level sensor retaining nut 10 7 -
Mass air flow (MAF) sensor 2 - 18
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor 3 - 27
Exhaust gas temperature sensor RH 35 26 -
Pre catalytic converter temperature sensor 35 26 -
Post catalytic converter temperature sensor 35 26 -
Pre diesel particulate filter (DPF) exhaust gas temperature sensor 35 26 -
Post DPF exhaust gas temperature sensor 35 26 -
Heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) 35 26 -
www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Electronic Engine Controls -
Component Location
Component Location - Sheet 1 of 3

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Pre-catalyst temperature sensor
2 HO2S (heated oxygen sensor)
3 Exhaust gas temperature sensor
4 Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) pressure pipes (connected to differential pressure sensor located on top of transmission)
5 Diesel Particulate filter (DPF)
6 Pre and post DPF temperature sensors
7 Post catalyst temperature sensor
8 Catalyst (RH (right-hand) bank)
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Glow plug module
3 MAP (manifold absolute pressure) sensor
4 APP (accelerator pedal position) sensor
5 Brake lamp/brake test switch
7 Differential pressure sensor
9 Water in fuel sensor
10 CKP (crankshaft position) sensor
11 Primary turbocharger control module
12 LH (left-hand)EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) valve
13 CMP (camshaft position) sensor
14 Engine oil level/temperature sensor
15 Secondary turbocharger recirculation valve
16 MAF (mass air flow) / IAT (intake air temperature) sensor (primary turbocharger)
17 MAF sensor (secondary turbocharger)
18 Charge air temperature sensor
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Fuel injector (6 off)
2 EGR cooler bypass vacuum solenoid valve
3 Fuel temperature sensor
4 Fuel volume control valve
5 Engine oil pressure sensor
7 Secondary turbocharger compressor shut-off solenoid valve
8 Secondary turbocharger turbine shut-off solenoid valve
10 Throttle actuator
11 Glow plug (6 off)
13 Secondary turbocharger boost pressure sensor
14 RHEGR valve
15 Secondary turbocharger turbine shut-off valve and position sensor
www.JagDocs.com
Overview
OVERVIEW
The 3.0L V6 diesel engine has an ECM (engine control module) controlled engine management system. Multiple sensor inputs
and precision control of actuators are used by the ECM to achieve optimum performance during all driving conditions.
The ECM receives and processes information from the following input sources:
Oil level sensor

Secondary turbocharger shut-off sensor
Secondary turbocharger boost pressure sensor
Alternator
Differential pressure sensor
CMP (camshaft position) sensor
CKP (crankshaft position) sensor
Fuel temperature sensor
Air charge temperature sensor
ECT (engine coolant temperature) sensor
TP (throttle position) sensor
MAF (mass air flow)/IAT (intake air temperature) sensor
MAP (manifold absolute pressure)
EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) sensors
HO2S (heated oxygen sensor)
Catalyst and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) temperature sensors
www.JagDocs.com
Brake lamp switch
The ECM outputs controlling signals to the following sensors and actuators:
A/C (air conditioning) compressor clutch solenoid

A/C compressor clutch
Fuel injectors
Glow plug relay
Fan control module
Vacuum control valves (EGR cooler by-pass, secondary turbocharger compressor shut-off, secondary turbocharger turbine
shut-off)
ABS (anti-lock brake system) module
TCM (transmission control module)
Instrument cluster
RCM (restraints control module)
Primary turbocharger control module
EGR recirculation valves
Alternator
Throttle actuator
Secondary turbocharger compressor recirculation valve
Control Diagram
3.0L V6 Diesel Control Diagram - Sheet 1 of 2
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
NOTE:A = Hardwired
1 Battery
3 CKP (crankshaft position) sensor
4 CMP (camshaft position) sensor
www.JagDocs.com
7 MAF (mass air flow)/IAT (intake air temperature) sensor
8 MAF sensor
9 Engine oil level/temperature sensor
10 Fuel volume control valve
11 MAP (manifold absolute pressure) sensor
12 Throttle actuator
13 Secondary turbocharger boost pressure sensor
15 EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) solenoid valve
16 Secondary turbocharger turbine shut-off solenoid valve
17 Secondary turbine compressor shut-off solenoid valve
18 Fuel temperature sensor
20 Secondary turbocharger recirculation valve
www.JagDocs.com
3.0L V6 Diesel Control Diagram - Sheet 2 of 2
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
NOTE:A = Hardwired; D = High Speed CAN (controller area network)
1 Glow plug relay
2 LH (left-hand)EGR recirculation valve
3 RH (right-hand)EGR recirculation valve
4 EGR cooler bypass vacuum solenoid valve
8 Primary turbocharger control module
9 Charge air temperature sensor
11 JaguarDrive selector
12 ECM
16 RCM (restraints control module)
18 Glow plug (6 off)
System Operation
OPERATION
The 3.0L V6 diesel engine management system is controlled by an ECM and is able to monitor, adapt and precisely control the
fuel injection. The ECM uses multiple sensor inputs and precision control of actuators to achieve optimum performance during
all driving conditions.
The ECM controls fuel delivery to all six cylinders via a common rail injection system. The common rail system uses a fuel rail
to accumulate highly pressurized fuel and feed the six, electronically controlled injectors. The fuel rail is located in close
proximity to the injectors, which assists in maintaining full system pressure at each injector at all times.
The ECM uses the drive by wire principle for acceleration control. There are no control cables or physical connections between
the accelerator pedal and the engine. Accelerator pedal demand is communicated to the ECM by two potentiometers located in
an APP sensor. The ECM uses the two signals to determine the position, rate of movement and direction of movement of the
pedal. The ECM then uses this data, along with other engine information from other sensors, to achieve the optimum engine
response.
DESCRIPTION

www.JagDocs.com
The ECM is located on a bracket on the passenger side of the engine compartment bulkhead.
The ECM connected to the vehicle harnesses via 2 connectors. The ECM contains data processors and memory microchips. The
output signals to the actuators are in the form of ground paths provided by driver circuits within the ECM. The ECM driver
circuits produce heat during normal operation and dissipate this heat via the casing. Some sensors receive a regulated voltage
supplied by the ECM. This avoids incorrect signals caused by voltage drop during cranking.
The ECM performs self diagnostic routines and stores fault codes in its memory. These fault codes and diagnostics can be
accessed using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system. If the ECM is to be replaced, the new ECM is supplied 'blank' and must be
configured to the vehicle using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system. A 'flash' EEPROM (electrically erasable programmable
read only memory) allows the ECM to be externally configured, using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system, with market specific
or new tune information. The current engine tune data can be accessed and read using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
When a new ECM is fitted, it must also be synchronized to other system control modules using a Jaguar approved diagnostic
system. ECM's cannot be 'swapped' between vehicles as they must be 'matched' with security information to other system
modules.
The ECM is connected to the engine sensors which allow it to monitor the engine operating conditions. The ECM processes
these signals and decides the actions necessary to maintain optimum engine performance in terms of drive ability, fuel
efficiency and exhaust emissions. The memory of the ECM is programmed with instructions for how to control the engine. The
memory also contains data in the form of maps which the ECM uses as a basis for fuelling and emission control. By comparing
the information from the sensors to the data in the maps, the ECM is able to calculate the various output requirements. The
ECM contains an adaptive strategy which updates the system when components vary due to production tolerances or ageing.
The ECM is connected to other system control modules and receives data from these modules on the high speed CAN bus to
enable precise engine control under all vehicle operating conditions.
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor

The CKP sensor is located at the rear of the engine block on the LH side. The sensor lead passes through a cover in an
aperture on the side of the engine block. The sensor is secured to a bracket on a plate which locates the rear crankshaft oil
seal. The sensor tip is aligned with a magnetic trigger reluctor wheel which is attached to the end of the crankshaft. The
trigger wheel is a press fit on the end of the crankshaft. The trigger wheel must be carefully aligned to the crankshaft to
ensure correct timing. The sensor produces a square wave signal, the frequency of which is proportional to engine speed.
The ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal and can detect engine over-speed. The ECM counteracts engine over-speed by
gradually fading out speed synchronized functions. The CKP is a Hall effect sensor. The sensor measures the magnetic field
variation induced by the magnetized trigger wheel.
The trigger wheel has a 60 minus 2 tooth pattern. The missing teeth represent 12º of crankshaft rotation and provide a
reference point for the angular position of the crankshaft at 21º BTDC (before top dead center) on cylinder 1.
When the space with the two missing teeth pass the sensor tip, a gap in the signal is produced which the ECM uses to
determine the crankshaft position. The air gap between the sensor tip and the ring is important to ensure correct signals are
output to the ECM. The recommended air gap between the CKP and the trigger wheel is 0.4 mm- 1.5 mm.
The ECM uses the signal from the CKP sensor for the following functions:
Synchronization
Determine fuel injection timing
Produce an engine speed signal which is broadcast on the high speed CAN bus for use by other systems.
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor

www.JagDocs.com
The CMP is located on the front face of the LH cylinder head. The sensor tip protrudes through an aperture in the front face of
the cylinder head to pick up on a reluctor behind the camshaft pulley. The CMP sensor is a Hall effect type sensor.
The ECM uses the CMP sensor signal to determine if the piston in No. 1 cylinder is at injection TDC (top dead center) or
exhaust TDC. Once this has been established, the ECM can then operate the correct injector to inject fuel into the cylinder
when the piston is at injection TDC
The CMP sensor is a Hall effect sensor which used by the ECM at engine start-up to synchronize the ECM with the CKP sensor
signal. The ECM does this by using the CMP sensor signal to identify number one cylinder to ensure the correct injector timing.
Once the ECM has established the injector timing, the CMP sensor signal is no longer used.
The CMP sensor receives a 5V supply from the ECM. Two further connections to the ECM provide ground and signal output.
If a fault occurs, an error is registered in the ECM. Two types of failure can occur; no CMP sensor signal or a synchronization
error of the CMP and CKP sensors. The error recorded by the ECM can also relate to a total failure of the crankshaft signal or
crankshaft signal dynamically implausible. Both components should be checked to determine the cause of the fault.
If a fault occurs with the CMP sensor when the engine is running, the engine will continue to run but the ECM will deactivate
boost pressure control. Once the engine is switched off, the engine will crank but will not restart while the fault is present.
Mass Air Flow (MAF) and Inlet Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 MAF sensor
2 MAF/IAT sensor
The MAF/IAT sensors are located on the inlet air duct directly after the air filter box. Two sensors are fitted; the lower sensor
is a combined MAF/IAT sensor and the upper sensor is a MAF sensor only.
The MAF sensors work on the hot film principle. Each sensor has 2 sensing elements which are contained within a film. One
element is maintained at ambient (air intake) temperature, e.g. 25°Celsius (77°F). The other element is heated to 200°Celsius
(392°F) above the ambient temperature, e.g. 225°Celsius (437°F). Intake air entering the engine passes through the MAF
sensors and has a cooling effect on the film. The ECM monitors the current required to maintain the 200°Celsius (392°F)
differential between the two elements and uses the differential to provide a precise, non-linear, signal which equates to the
volume of air being drawn into the engine.
The MAF sensor output is a digital signal proportional to the mass of the incoming air. The ECM uses this data, in conjunction
with signals from other sensors and information from stored fuelling maps, to determine the precise fuel quantity to be
injected into the cylinders. The signal is also used as a feedback signal for the EGR system.
The IAT sensor in the lower sensor incorporates a NTC (negative temperature coefficient) thermistor in a voltage divider circuit.
The NTC thermistor works on the principle of decreasing resistance in the sensor as the temperature of the intake air
increases. As the thermistor allows more current to pass to ground, the voltage sensed by the ECM decreases. The change in
voltage is proportional to the temperature change of the intake air. Using the voltage output from the IAT sensor, the ECM can
correct the fuelling map for intake air temperature. The correction is an important requirement because hot air contains less
oxygen than cold air for any given volume.
The MAF sensor receives a 12V supply from the BJB and a ground connection via the ECM. Two further connections to the ECM
provide a MAF signal and IAT signal.
The IAT sensor receives a 3.3V reference voltage from the ECM and shares a ground with the MAF sensor. The signal output from
the IAT sensor is calculated by the ECM by monitoring changes in the supplied reference voltage to the IAT sensor voltage
divider circuit.
The ECM checks the calculated air mass against the engine speed. If the calculated air mass is not plausible, the ECM uses a
default air mass figure which is derived from the average engine speed compared to a stored characteristic map. The air mass
value will be corrected using values for boost pressure, atmospheric pressure and air temperature.
If one of the MAF sensor fails the ECM implements the default strategy based on engine speed. In the event of a MAF sensor
signal failure, the following symptoms may be observed:
EGR system off

Delayed engine response
Reduced engine performance.
www.JagDocs.com
If the IAT sensor fails the ECM uses a default intake air temperature of 40°Celsius (104°F). In the event of an IAT sensor
failure, the following symptom may be observed:
Under fuelling, resulting in reduced engine performance.
Electronic Throttle Actuator

www.JagDocs.com
The electronic throttle actuator is located on the side of the throttle intake manifold.
The electronic throttle actuator controls the volume of air allowed into the inlet manifolds by means of a DC motor which
controls a flap in the body of the throttle. The actuator is controlled by the ECM which operates the actuator in response to
driver inputs from the APP sensor and other engine related sensors to provide the correct air flow to the intake manifolds.
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is located in the LH EGR cooler coolant inlet pipe, at the front of the engine. The ECT sensor provides the ECM
and the instrument cluster with engine coolant temperature status.
The ECM uses the temperature information for the following functions:
Fuelling calculations
Limit engine operation if engine coolant temperature becomes too high
Cooling fan operation
Glow plug activation time.
The instrument cluster uses the temperature information for generation of engine temperature messages. The engine coolant
temperature signal is also transmitted on the medium speed CAN bus by the instrument cluster for use by other systems.
The ECT sensor circuit consists of an internal voltage divider circuit which incorporates an NTC thermistor. As the coolant
temperature rises the resistance through the sensor decreases and vice versa. The output from the sensor is the change in
voltage as the thermistor allows more current to pass to ground relative to the temperature of the coolant.
The ECM compares the signal voltage to stored values and adjusts fuel delivery to ensure optimum drive ability at all times.
The engine will require more fuel when it is cold to overcome fuel condensing on the cold metal surfaces inside the combustion
chamber. To achieve a richer air/fuel ratio, the ECM extends the injector opening time. As the engine warms up the air/fuel
ratio is leaned off.
The input to the sensor is a 3.3V reference voltage supplied from the voltage divider circuit within the ECM. The ground from
the sensor is also connected to the ECM which measures the returned current and calculates a resistance figure for the sensor
which relates to the coolant temperature.
If the ECT sensor fails, the following symptoms may be observed:
Difficult cold start

Difficult hot start
Engine performance compromised
Temperature gauge inoperative or inaccurate reading.
In the event of ECT sensor signal failure, the ECM applies a default value of 80°Celsius (176°F) coolant temperature for
fuelling purposes. The ECM will also permanently operate the cooling fan at all times when the ignition is switched on, to
protect the engine from overheating.
The table that follows shows ECT sensor values and the corresponding sensor resistance and voltage values.
Temperature (Degrees Celsius) Resistance (KOhms) Voltage (Volts)

www.JagDocs.com
- 40 925 3.23
- 30 496 3.16
- 20 277 3.06
- 10 160 2.91
-0 96 2.70
10 59 2.42
20 37 2.09
30 24 1.75
40 16 1.41
50 11 1.11
60 7.55 0.86
70 5.34 0.66
80 3.84 0.50
90 2.80 0.38
100 2.08 0.29
110 1.56 0.22
120 1.19 0.17
130 0.918 0.14
140 0.715 0.11
150 0.563 0.08
Engine Oil Level and Oil Temperature Sensor
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Engine oil level and temperature sensor
The 3.0L V6 diesel engine is not fitted with a conventional dipstick. The dipstick is replaced with an ultrasonic oil level and
temperature sensor which is located on 3 studs in the underside of the oil pan and secured with 3 locknuts.
The sensor uses ultrasonic pulses to determine the oil level in the oil pan. The level sensor sends an ultrasonic pulse vertically
upward and measures the time taken for the pulse to be reflected back to the sensor from the upper surface of the oil. A
second reference pulse is also transmitted across a reference distance. The time periods of the first and second pulses are
compared and the sensor calculates the oil height in the oil pan. The sensor then converts the results into a PWM (pulse width
modulation) signal to the ECM which converts the frequency of the signal into a oil level height.
The sensor uses an NTC type sensor to determine the oil temperature. The sensor measures the oil temperature and converts
the sensor signal into a PWM signal to the ECM which converts the frequency of the signal into an oil temperature.
If the oil level is incorrect or a system fault occurs, a warning message is displayed in the instrument cluster message center.
The messages that follow can be displayed in the message center:
Warning System Status

ENGINE OIL LOW (Amber warning The oil is at the minimum level for safe operation. Top-up with 1 liter (1.8 pints) of oil.
triangle displayed)
ENGINE OIL HIGH (Amber warning
This warning is displayed when the engine is started, if the oil is above the maximum level
triangle displayed) for safe operation. Stop the vehicle as soon as safety permits and seek qualified
assistance to have the engine oil drained, before driving the vehicle.
ENGINE OIL CRITICALLY LOW (Red The oil is below the minimum level for safe operation. Stop the vehicle as soon as safety
warning triangle displayed) permits and top-up with 1.5 liters (2.6 pints) of oil. Wait for 10 minutes, re-check the oil
level reading and top-up again if necessary.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL MONITOR A fault with the oil level monitoring system is indicated. Seek qualified assistance as soon
SYSTEM FAULT (Amber warning as possible.
triangle displayed)
Oil Level Check
The engine oil level is automatically monitored and is displayed in the trip computer area of the message center.
The steps that follow allow the driver to view the current 'average' engine oil level providing the following parameters are met:
It is recommended that a reading is taken after a journey (when the oil is hot)
The engine is stopped and the transmission is in park
The vehicle is parked on level ground
10 minutes has passed after stopping the engine (to allow the oil level to stabilize)
Press the 'TRIP' button on the end of the LH steering column multifunction switch repeatedly, until the oil can icon is displayed
at the bottom of the message center.
NOTE: The system will not give a reading until the oil level has stabilized.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
A Oil at recommended level. No top-up required.
B Add 0.5 litres (0.9 pint) of oil.
C Add 1 litre (1.8 pints) of oil.
D Oil above maximum for safe operation. Do not drive vehicle. Seek qualified assistance.
E Oil level below minimum for safe operation. Add 1.5 litre (2.6 pints) of oil, then recheck level.
F1 Oil level stabilizing, oil level not available. Wait ten minutes and then recheck the oil level display.
F2 If this display is accompanied by the warning message 'ENGINE OIL LEVEL MONITOR SYSTEM FAULT', a fault with the oil
level monitor is indicated. Seek qualified assistance.
Engine Oil Top-Up
CAUTIONS:
Failure to use an oil that meets the required specification, could cause excessive engine wear, a build-up of sludge and
deposits and increase pollution. It could also lead to engine failure and invalidation of vehicle warranty.
Overfilling with oil could result in severe engine damage.
Use the procedure that follows to replenish the engine oil level:
With the ignition on, but the engine not running, unscrew the oil filler cap.
Add the appropriate quantity of oil (as indicated by the message center oil level display). Wait 10 minutes to allow the
oil level stabilize and re-check the level. Clean up any oil spilled during topping up.
Once the correct level is achieved, refit the filler cap and hand-tighten securely until one click is heard.
NOTES:
The approximate quantity of oil required to raise the level from the minimum level of safe operation to the maximum, is
1.5 litres (2.6 pints).
The ignition must be left on during the top-up, so that the electronic dipstick can register and display the new oil level.
This enables an accurate level re-check.
Live Reading/Average Reset
A procedure is available to allow the technician to access the actual engine oil level, rather than the average engine oil level
which is available to the driver. An additional procedure is also available to reset the average engine oil level. Refer to Engine -
3.0L Diesel - General Procedures - Engine Oil Draining and Filling 303-01B.
Brake Lamp/Brake Test Switch

www.JagDocs.com
The brake lamp/brake test switch is located on the pedal box and is operated by the brake pedal. The 2 pole switch has a
normally open circuit switch connected to battery voltage which closes the circuit when the driver has depressed the brake
pedal and a normally closed circuit which is connected to ground when the driver depresses the brake pedal. The switch
contacts are connected directly to the ECM and the ECM also receives a brake pressure signal on the high speed CAN bus from
the ABS module.
The ECM uses the brake signal for the following:
To limit fuelling during braking

To inhibit/cancel Speed control if the brakes are applied.
In the event of a brake switch failure, the following symptoms may be observed:
Speed control inactive

Increased fuel consumption.
Fuel Pressure Control Valve
The fuel pressure control valve is incorporated into the forward end of the common fuel rail for the LH cylinder bank. The
control valve regulates the fuel pressure within the fuel rails and is controlled by the ECM. The control valve is a PWM
controlled solenoid valve.
When the solenoid is de-energized, an internal spring holds an internal valve closed. At fuel pressure of 100 bar (1450 lbf/in2)
or higher, the force of the spring is overcome, opening the valve and allowing fuel pressure to decay into the fuel return pipe.
When the pressure in the fuel rail decays to approximately 100 bar (1450 lbf/in2) or less, the spring force overcomes the fuel
pressure and closes the valve. When the ECM energizes the solenoid, the valve is closed allowing the fuel pressure to build.
www.JagDocs.com
The pressure in the fuel rail in this condition can reach approximately 2000 bar (29000 lbf/in2).
The ECM constantly monitors the fuel pressure and activates the fuel pressure control valve accordingly to control the fuel rail
pressure within the require parameters. Relieved fuel from the fuel rails is directed through the fuel rail leak-off pipe to the
fuel filter return circuit.
The ECM controls the fuel rail pressure by operating the control valve solenoid using a PWM signal. By varying the duty cycle of
the PWM signal, the ECM can accurately control the fuel rail pressure and hence the pressure delivered to the injectors
according to engine load. This is achieved by the control valve allowing a greater or lesser volume of fuel to pass from the high
pressure side of the pump to the un-pressurized fuel return line, regulating the pressure on the high pressure side.
The fuel pressure control valve receives a PWM signal from the ECM of between 0 and 12V. The ECM controls the operation of
the control valve using the following information to determine the required fuel pressure:
Fuel rail pressure

Engine load
APP sensor position
Engine coolant temperature
Engine speed.
In the event of a total failure of the fuel pressure control valve, the engine will not start. In the event of a partial failure of
the fuel pressure control valve, the ECM will activate the solenoid with the minimum duty cycle which results in the injection
quantity being limited.
Fuel Pressure Sensor

www.JagDocs.com
The fuel pressure sensor is located in the forward end of the common fuel rail for the RH cylinder bank. The sensor is screwed
into a threaded port in the end of the fuel rail.
The fuel pressure sensor is a piezo-resistive type sensor containing an actuating diaphragm. Deflection of the diaphragm
provides a proportional signal (output) voltage to the ECM, dependant on the fuel pressure within the fuel rails.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor allows the ECM to determine the driver requests for vehicle speed, acceleration and deceleration. The ECM
uses this information to determine the torque demand from the engine via injection control.
The APP sensor is installed on the pedal box and secured to a bracket with 3 screws.
The APP sensor is incorporated into the pedal box assembly. The APP sensor is a twin track rotary potentiometer type sensor
which is integral with the throttle pedal housing.
A six pin electrical connector provides the interface with the vehicle harness. The accelerator pedal is connected to a spindle
on the RH side of the APP sensor. The APP sensor receives two separate electrical supplies and generates two different
outputs.
Both tracks are analogue output signals connected to the ECM. Both signals contain the same positional information, but the
secondary track has half the voltage output of the primary track.
If there is a fault with the primary track, the secondary track is used and the vehicle/engine response to pedal demand will be
sluggish. If both analogue signals have a fault, the engine adopts a constant high speed of 1300 rpm to allow the vehicle to
move. Torque application and reduction of engine speed back to normal idle speed can be subsequently controlled via brake
lamp/brake test switch operation.
The ECM constantly checks the range and plausibility of the two signals and stored a fault code if it detects a fault.
EGR Cooler Bypass Vacuum Solenoid Valve

www.JagDocs.com
The EGR cooler bypass solenoid valve is located on a bracket at the rear of the engine, adjacent to the vacuum pump.
The solenoid valve has a vacuum pipe connection to the vacuum pump which provides the vacuum when the engine is running.
Two outlets from the solenoid valve each connect to an EGR bypass vacuum actuator.
When the EGR cooler bypass solenoid valve is energized, vacuum created by the vacuum pump is applied to each EGR bypass
vacuum actuator and exhaust gasses by-pass the EGR cooler. The default position is for exhaust gas cooling. The actuators
move under the influence of the vacuum and move a valve within the EGR cooler to divert the exhaust gasses straight through
the cooler. This system is used when the engine management system determines that exhaust gas cooling is not required.
The EGR cooler bypass solenoid valve receives a 12 volt supply from the EJB (engine junction box). The ECM controls the
operation of the solenoid valve by controlling the ground path for the solenoid.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Motor
www.JagDocs.com
The EGR valve motors each receive a 12 volt supply and ground from the ECM.
The 12 volt power supply from the ECM operates the EGR valve motor. Three further wires connect the EGR valve to the ECM a
5 volt reference voltage, a ground and a position signal feedback.
The valve is used to direct a calculated proportion of exhaust gas back into the combustion chamber.
Oil Pressure Sensor
www.JagDocs.com
The oil pressure sensor is located in a threaded port in the LH cylinder head. The sensor is connected directly to the
instrument cluster.
The sensor is not connected to the ECM but is supplied with a reference voltage from the instrument cluster. The sensor ground
is through the sensor body and the engine. When the oil pressure falls to below a predetermined threshold, the sensor internal
switch contacts close, completing a circuit from the instrument cluster. This circuit is sensed by the instrument cluster which
displays and appropriate warning message and warning lamp to alert the driver.
Glow Plugs
Three glow plugs are located in each of the cylinder heads, on the inlet side. The glow plugs and the glow plug module are a
vital part of the engine starting strategy. The glow plugs heat the air inside the cylinder during cold starts to assist
combustion. The use of glow plugs helps reduce the amount of additional fuel required on start-up, and consequently reduces
the emission of black smoke. The use of glow plugs also reduces the amount of injection advance required, which reduces
engine noise, particularly when idling with a cold engine.
There are three phases of glow plug activity:
Pre-heat
During crank
Post heat.
The ceramic sheathed element glow plugs are made from a heat-resistant, electrically conductive ceramic material. The ceramic
sheathed-element glow plugs outer layer is heated directly and is self regulating. The self regulation allows the resistance of
the sheathed element to automatically increase as the heat increases preventing the glow plug from overheating. In addition,
during the heating process and under the control of the glow plug module, the glow plugs can be operated above their nominal
voltages. This permits heat-up speeds of 1000°C per second. The sheathed-element glow plugs reach a maximum glow
temperature of 1300°C and can hold a temperature of 1150°C for several minutes after the first-start glow or at intervening
times.
The glow plugs are controlled by the ECM using the glow plug module and external sensor values to control the glow plug
operation via internal software.
Fuel Injectors
Six fuel injectors are used in the fuel system. A piezo actuator in each injector is electronically controlled by the ECM to
operate the injector in response to engine speed and load conditions.
Each injector is calibrated to the ECM and applicable the cylinder to which it is fitted. Therefore, if an injector is removed it
must be refitted to the cylinder from which it was removed. If a new injector is fitted, a calibration routine using a Jaguar
approved diagnostic system must be performed to calibrate the injector unique code to the ECM
The operating voltage of the injector is between 110 and 163 volts depending on engine speed and load and care must be
taken when working in the vicinity of the injectors. The voltage increases linearly with the injector operating pressure from 200
to 1200 bar.
Each injector has an electrical resistance value of between 150 - 250 kOhms.
CAUTION: Each injector operation is controlled by a charge and discharge cycle allowing energy to dissipate in, and
recover from the injector. Never disconnect the wiring connection when the engine is running. The injector can remain open
causing engine damage.
Charge Air Temperature Sensor

www.JagDocs.com
The is charge air temperature sensor is located in the rear of the intake chamber immediately preceding the throttle intake
manifold. The sensor is used to measure the intake air temperature from the turbochargers in order to calculate the required
amount of fuelling.
The charge air temperature sensor incorporates a NTC thermistor in a voltage divider circuit. The NTC thermistor works on the
principle of decreasing resistance in the sensor as the temperature of the charge air increases. As the thermistor allows more
current to pass to ground, the voltage sensed by the ECM decreases. The change in voltage is proportional to the temperature
change of the charge air. Using the voltage output from the charge air temperature sensor, the ECM can correct the fuelling
map for charge air temperature. The correction is an important requirement because hot air contains less oxygen than cold air
for any given volume.
The charge air temperature sensor receives a 3.3V reference voltage from the ECM. The signal output from the charge air
temperature sensor is calculated by the ECM by monitoring changes in the supplied reference voltage to the charge air
temperature sensor voltage divider circuit.
If the charge air temperature sensor fails the ECM uses a default charge air temperature of -5°C (23°F). In the event of an
charge air temperature sensor failure, any of the following symptoms may be observed:
Over fuelling, resulting black smoke emitting from the exhaust

Idle speed control inoperative.
www.JagDocs.com
High Pressure Fuel Pump Volume Control Valve
www.JagDocs.com
The volume control valve is mounted on the high pressure pump, and located in the feed port between the high-pressure pump
elements and the internal transfer pump. The volume control valve is a variable position solenoid-operated valve that is
controlled by the ECM.
The volume control valve is controlled by a PWM signal from the ECM to allow a defined amount of 'leak off' from the high
pressure fuel pump. The leak off fuel provides cooling and lubrication for the high-pressure pump internal components. The fuel
is returned through a leak off pipe to the fuel filter, where it cools and is returned into the fuel filter via the low pressure
return line.
The volume control valve determines the amount of fuel that is delivered from the internal transfer pump to the high pressure
pumping elements. When there is no signal to the volume control valve, the valve is closed and there is no fuel delivery. The
ECM applies a varying PWM signal of between 0 to 100% to control the required fuel volume.
High Pressure Fuel Pump Inlet Temperature Sensor
The fuel temperature sensor is located on the rear of the high pressure fuel pump. It measures the fuel temperature in the
low-pressure side of the high pressure fuel pump.
The ECM continually monitors this signal to determine the fuel temperature to prevent overheating of the fuel system. The
ECM will also make fine adjustments to fuel injection quantity to adjust for fuel temperature.
The inlet temperature sensor is an NTC thermistor. As the fuel temperature rises the resistance through the sensor decreases
and visa versa. The ECM measures the change in voltage as the thermistor allows more current to pass to ground relative to
the fuel temperature.
Primary Turbocharger Control Module

www.JagDocs.com
The primary turbocharger control module is attached to a bracket which is an extension of the turbocharger body.
The primary turbocharger control module comprises a stepper motor which electronically controls the primary turbocharger
variable vanes by moving an actuating lever. When the stepper motor drive shaft turns, a position signal is created. The ECM
receives the position signal to determine the angular position of the vanes.
The stepper motor is connected to an output shaft. The output shaft has a connecting rod attached eccentrically which
converts the rotary motion of the shaft into linear motion of the connecting rod. The opposite end of the connecting rod is
attached to an actuating lever. The actuating lever moves with the connecting rod and adjusts the variable vanes mechanically.
The ECM provides the stepper motor with a power and ground for stepper motor operation and also a reference voltage, ground
and position signal connections for variable vane position control.
Secondary Turbocharger Boost Pressure Sensor
www.JagDocs.com
The secondary turbocharger boost pressure sensor is located on the steering pump mounting bracket on the RH side of the
engine. The sensor is connected via a hose to the charge air outlet pipe from the primary turbocharger compressor.
The sensor provides a voltage signal to the ECM relative to the output charge air pressure from the secondary turbocharger.
The boost pressure sensor has a 3 pin connector which is connected to the ECM and provides a 5V reference supply from the
ECM, a signal input to the ECM and a ground for the sensor.
The boost pressure sensor uses a diaphragm transducer to measure pressure. The ECM uses the boost pressure sensor signal
for the following functions:
Maintain manifold boost pressure

Reduce exhaust smoke emissions when driving at high altitude
Control of the EGR system
To help smooth control of the mono to bi and bi to mono turbo transitions
To aid the air path diagnostics.
Secondary Turbocharger Turbine Shut-off Solenoid Valve
The secondary turbine shut-off solenoid valve is located on a bracket at the front of the engine, above the LH front cylinder
cover assembly. The bracket is shared with the secondary turbocharger recirculation solenoid valve. The secondary turbine
shut-off solenoid valve is the innermost of the two solenoid valves.
The secondary turbine shut-off solenoid receives a vacuum supply from the vacuum pump. The valve is connected by a pipe to
the turbine shut-off valve vacuum actuator which is located on the rear of the secondary turbocharger. A position sensor is
attached to the turbine shut-off valve vacuum actuator to inform the ECM of the turbine shut-off position.
Operation of the valve vacuum actuator is controlled by a PWM signal from the ECM and the secondary turbocharger turbine
shut-off valve solenoid. When the shut-off solenoid is energized by the ECM a 4.5V PWM current is applied to operate the
solenoid, vacuum is then applied to the shut-off valve vacuum actuator. The valve is opened allowing the secondary
turbocharger turbine to be driven by the exhaust gasses for as long as the valve is open. When the valve is to be closed the
ECM applies a 0.5V PWM current to the solenoid.
Secondary Turbocharger Compressor Shut-off Solenoid Valve
The secondary turbocharger compressor shut-off solenoid valve is located on a bracket at the front of the engine, above the LH
front cylinder cover assembly. The bracket is shared with the secondary turbocharger turbine shut-off solenoid valve. The
secondary turbocharger compressor shut-off solenoid valve is the outermost of the two solenoid valves.
The secondary turbocharger compressor shut-off solenoid valve receives a vacuum supply from the vacuum pump. The valve is
connected by a pipe to the compressor shut-off vacuum actuator located on the charge air intake manifold tube. When the
vacuum is applied to the vacuum actuator, the actuator operates to open the shut-off valve allowing charge air to flow into the
air intake pipe.
Operation of the secondary turbocharger compressor shut-off valve is controlled by a PWM signal from the ECM; 0% is off and
100% is on (solenoid activated). The solenoid valve is opened when bi-turbocharger operation is required allowing compressed
charge air from the secondary turbocharger compressor to enter the air intake system.
Secondary Turbocharger Compressor Recirculation Valve

www.JagDocs.com
The secondary turbocharger compressor recirculation valve motor is located on the compressor recirculation valve housing,
adjacent to the compressor shut-off valve. The solenoid valve is attached to the compressor recirculation valve with 3 screws.
The secondary turbocharger compressor recirculation valve motor is controlled by the ECM. The valve is used during operation
of the secondary turbocharger. When the ECM is switching to bi-turbocharger operation, the valve motor is operated which
opens the recirculation path to the primary turbocharger. This allows the secondary turbocharger to increase its speed. When
the secondary turbocharger has reached its optimum operating speed the recirculation valve motor is operated, closing the
recirculation path to the primary turbocharger.
Secondary Turbocharger Turbine Position Sensor
The secondary turbocharger turbine position sensor is located on the turbine vacuum shut-off valve. The sensor has three
connections to the ECM; a 5V reference voltage, a ground and a signal return.
The sensor is connected to the turbine shut-off vacuum actuator and senses when the actuator has operated. The sensor
returns a 0 - 5V analogue position signal to the ECM to confirm that the vacuum actuator has operated.
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Electronic Engine
Controls TDV6 3.0L Diesel
The 3.0L Diesel engine installed from 2010 model year incorporates many revisions to the previous 2.7L Diesel engine.
Familiarise yourself with the new features and any related warnings and cautions before attempting to diagnose a concern
For a detailed description of the 3.0L diesel electronic engine controls, refer to the relevant description and operation section
in the workshop manual, REFER to: (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Electronic Engine Controls (Description and Operation),

Electronic Engine Controls (Description and Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
www.JagDocs.com
Engine oil level Battery charge and condition

Cooling system coolant level Fuses
Fuel level Wiring harness
Fuel contamination Electrical connector(s)
Fuel leaks Sensor(s)
Air ingress into fuel system Actuator(s)
Fuel filter Engine control module
Front end accessory drive belt Transmission control module
Air filter and induction hoses Controller area network circuit (CAN)
Boost air circuit and intercooler
Exhaust system including oxidation catalyst and particulate filter
Primary turbocharger vane control linkage
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the symptom chart, alternatively, check for
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC index
Symptom Chart
WARNINGS:
Place the vehicle in a well ventilated, quarantined, area and arrange "No Smoking/Fuel Fumes" signs about the vehicle.
Before any work is carried out on the fuel system, ground the vehicle to earth and maintain the ground connection until
the work is complete.
Do not carry out any repairs to the fuel injection system with the engine running. The fuel pressure within the system can
be as high as 2000 bar. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Highly flammable vapours are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be checked visually for leaks. Failure to follow these instructions may
www.JagDocs.com
result in personal injury
If taken internally do not induce vomiting, seek immediate medical attention. Failure to follow these instructions may
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek medical attention.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling fuel, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.
This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for fuel spillage at all times and always observe fuel handling
precautions. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Diesel fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is therefore essential
that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always fit blanking plugs to any open orifices or
lines.
Always carry out the cleaning process before carrying out any repairs to the fuel injection system components. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in foreign matter ingress to the fuel injection system.
Do not disconnect an injector wiring connector when the engine is running. The fuel injectors are operated by piezo
www.JagDocs.com
elements controlled by an electrical signal, they can latch open if disconnected when the engine is running. Failure to observe
this caution may result in severe engine damage.
The low pressure fuel system bleeding procedure must be carried out before this procedure is carried out, or the engine is
attempted to be started, following removal or replacement of any low pressure fuel system component. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in damage to the fuel injection pump.
NOTE: If the module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the
Warranty Policy and Procedure manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module/component.

Engine does not Refer to the owner literature and ensure that the correct start up procedure
crank Battery is being adhered to. Refer to the battery care manual, ensure the vehicle
discharged/charging fault battery is in fully charged and serviceable condition. Check battery cables
Starting system are correctly connected. Check high current power distribution fusible links
fault/power distribution are in serviceable condition. Check for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
fault index. Check that the security system/immobilizer is disarmed. Check
Security transmission shift controls and pedal switches to ensure starter operation
system/immobilizer is not being inhibited. Check the engine is not seized or hydraulically locked
engaged
relay
Transmission shift control
module
Pedal switch fault
Engine
seized/hydraulically locked
Engine cranks, Check the 5 volt sensor power is present at both crankshaft position sensor
but does not The common 5 volt sensor and camshaft position sensor. Refer to the battery care manual and the
start power to both crankshaft workshop manual, check that the battery is fully charged and serviceable.
position sensor and Check that the cranking speed is within specification. Investigate and repair
camshaft position sensor start and charge faults as required. Check that the fuel level is sufficient
is missing and that the fuel is not contaminated. Check the fuel pump module
Battery discharged, operation, check the fuel system low pressure circuit for leaks/damage/air
starter circuit or motor ingress. Check the fuel filter for water, blockage. Check the fuel volume
fault control valve and fuel pressure control valve. Check the fuel injection high
Low/contaminated fuel pressure pump. Check the integrity of the air intake system and boost air
Air leakage circuit for correct installation. Check the crankshaft position sensor and
Fuel system low pressure circuits. In cold conditions with no indications of combustion when cranking,
circuit fault check the glow plug circuits. Refer to the new module/component
Fuel pump module fault installation note at the top of the symptom chart if an engine control
Blocked fuel filter module is suspect
Fuel injection pump failure
Crankshaft position sensor
fault
Engine stops, Check the 5 volt sensor power is present at both crankshaft position sensor
will crank, but The common 5 volt sensor and camshaft position sensor
will not start, power to both crankshaft
no DTCs logged position sensor and
in engine camshaft position sensor
control module is missing
Difficult to start If the fault is related to cold starts only check the glow plugs and
Glow plug system fault associated circuits first. Check the fuel level/possibility of contamination.
(cold engine start) Check the integrity of the air intake system and for correct installation.
Low/contaminated fuel Check the fuel pump module operation, check the fuel system low pressure
Air leakage circuit for leaks/damage. Check the fuel filter, fuel volume control valve and
Fuel pump module fault fuel pressure control valve. Check the exhaust gas recirculation system
Fuel system low pressure valves/actuators
circuit fault
Blocked fuel filter
valve(s) fault
www.JagDocs.com
Rough idle If the rough idle is from cold, and improves as the engine warms up, check
Glow plug system fault the glow plug system is operating correctly on all cylinders. Check the fuel
(cold engine start) level/condition. Check the fuel system low pressure circuit for
Low/contaminated fuel leaks/damage. Check the fuel filter, Fuel volume control valve and fuel
Air ingress into fuel pressure control valve. Check the integrity of the air intake system and for
system low pressure correct installation. Check the exhaust gas recirculation system
circuit valves/actuators
Fuel system low pressure
circuit delivery fault
Blocked fuel filter
valve(s) fault
electric throttle valve fault
Lack of power Check the fuel system for level/contamination/drain water from filter.
when Low fuel level (in torque Validate fuel level sender reading against actual tank contents. Check fuel
accelerating derate mode) filter for blockage. Check the fuel pressure. Check the integrity of the air
Fuel level sender fault intake system and for correct installation. Check for a blocked diesel
Blocked fuel filter particulate filter or catalytic converter. Check the exhaust gas recirculation
Low fuel pressure system. Check the turbochargers for operation including all valves/actuators
Blocked air filter used to control mono-turbo and bi-turbo mode transitions
Air intake system fault
Boost air circuit leak or
blockage
Restricted exhaust system
Diesel particulate filter
blocked/restricted
valve(s) fault
Primary variable geometry
turbocharger fault
Secondary fixed geometry
turbocharger fault
Turbine shut off valve
fault
Compressor recirculation
valve fault
Compressor shut off valve
fault
Engine Check the fuel level/condition/drain water from filter. Validate fuel level
stops/stalls Fuel level low (in run dry sender reading against actual tank contents. Check the fuel system low
mode) pressure circuit for leaks/damage. Check for fuel system leaks, fuel volume
Fuel level sender fault control valve and fuel pressure control valve. Check the exhaust gas
Contaminated fuel recirculation system
Air ingress into fuel
system
circuit fault
valve(s) fault
Engine judders Check the fuel level/condition/drain water from filter and check for
Low fuel level (in torque blockage. Validate fuel level sender reading against actual tank contents.
derate mode) Check the fuel system low pressure circuit for leaks/damage. Check for fuel
Fuel level sender fault system leaks. Check fuel volume control valve and fuel pressure control
Contaminated fuel valve. Check the fuel injection high pressure pump. Check fuel injector(s)
Fuel filter blocked
Air ingress into fuel
system
circuit fault
www.JagDocs.com

Fuel injection pump fault
Injector fault
Excessive fuel Check and adjust tire pressures. Check brakes are releasing correctly and do
consumption Tire pressures are not cause excessive drag. Check the fuel system for obvious leaks/damage.
incorrect Check the fuel volume control valve and fuel pressure control calve. Check
Vehicle brakes are for injector DTCs. Check for restricted induction system and air filter. Check
binding/not releasing the exhaust gas recirculation system including electric throttle plate. Check
Fuel system leak boost air circuit and intercooler for ineffective cooling or partial blockage.
Fuel system low pressure Check for restricted exhaust flow including catalytic converter and diesel
circuit fault particulate filter
Fuel temperature sensor
leak
Injector(s) failure
valve(s) fault
DTC failure type definitions
NOTE: Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. Match the five digits from the
scan tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits, DTC failure type give
additional information read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system). The DTC failure type information is described in
the table below
DTC
failure
type DTC failure type description
00-0F
General failure information
- This category includes all other categories and is used when the fault within that failure category is
unique, not amenable to standardization through assignment of a new sub type, or when the
detected fault is best described by two or more sub types within that failure category
DTC
failure
type DTC failure type description
10-1F
General electrical failures
- This category includes standard wiring failure modes, short circuit to ground, short to battery, open
circuit and direct current quantities related by Ohm's Law
20-2F
General signal failures
- This category includes quantities related to amplitude, frequency or rate of change, and wave shape
30-3F
Frequency modulated, pulse width modulated failures
- This category includes faults related to frequency modulated and pulse width modulated inputs and
outputs of the control module. This category also includes faults where position is determined by
counts
40-4F
System internal failures
- This category includes faults related to memory, software, and internal electrical circuitry; requiring
component, control module, sensor, replacement
50-5F
System programming failures
- This category includes faults related to operational software, calibrations, and options; remedied by
configuring, programming a part of the system, control module, sensor
60-6F
Algorithm based failures
- This category includes faults based on comparing two or more input parameters for plausibility or
comparing a single parameter to itself with respect to time
www.JagDocs.com
70-7F
Mechanical failures
- This category includes faults detected by inappropriate motion in response to control related input,
controlled output
80-8F
Bus signal / message failures
- This category includes faults related to bus hardware and signal integrity. This category is also used
when the physical input for a signal is located in one control module and another control module
diagnoses the circuit or inhibits operation due to a reported failure of that circuit
90-9F
Component failures
- This category includes faults related to component failures including parametric, performance
assembly and operating environment failures
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
Electronic Engine Controls - Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Long Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures
WARNING: Where possible, all road tests should be on well surfaced and dry roads. Always comply with speed limits and
local traffic regulations.
NOTES:
This procedure is an overcheck only. If fault codes are found, interrogation of the relevant system must be carried out and
claimed against.
The vehicle must exceed 50mph (80 km/h) during the road test.
1. Connect the diagnostic equipment to the vehicle.
2. Follow on screen prompts and check for engine management fault codes.
3. Clear the fault codes following the on screen procedure.

www.JagDocs.com
4. Disconnect the diagnostic equipment from the vehicle.
5. NOTE: Make sure cruise control is not engaged.
Make sure the engine temperature is above 60 ºC (140 ºF).
Carry out a road test and perform the following operations.

1. Accelerate to 55 mph (88 km/h) in 5th gear and cruise for 2
minutes with the engine speed at or above 1800rpm.
2. Lift off the throttle and allow the vehicle to decelerate until the
engine speed is less than 1000 rpm.
3. Stop the vehicle.
4. Release brake, allow the vehicle to move with no throttle for 1
minute.
5. Road test is now complete.
7. NOTE: If fault codes are found, interrogation of the relevant

system must be carried out and claimed against.
Follow on screen prompts and check for engine management fault codes.
www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Short Drive Cycle Self-Test
General Procedures
NOTE: This procedure is an overcheck only. If fault codes are found, interrogation of the relevant system must be carried
out and claimed against.
2. Follow on screen prompts and check for engine management fault codes.
3. Clear the fault codes following the on screen procedure.
4. Start the engine.

Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
Raise the engine speed to 1500 rpm and hold for 3 minutes until
a temperature of 70ºC (158 ºF) is achieved.
Allow the engine to idle for 30 seconds.
Switch off the engine.
www.JagDocs.com
5. NOTE: If fault codes are found, interrogation of the relevant

system must be carried out and claimed against.
Follow on screen prompts and check for engine management fault codes.

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Camshaft Position (CMP)
Sensor
Removal


and free of foreign material.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
The CMP sensor tip must rest on one of the three

webs on the back of the camshaft pulley. Incorrect
installation may result in the CMP sensor being damaged.
NOTES:
Only turn the engine in the normal direction of

rotation.
Timing belt left hand cover shown removed for clarity.
Turn the engine until one of the three webs on the back of
the camshaft pulley is visible through the CMP sensor
housing.
Torque: 10 Nm
2.

www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankshaft Position (CKP)
Sensor
Removal

Installation).
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
6. CAUTION: Install the CKP sensor correctly into the
housing. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the CKP sensor.
NOTE: Engine shown removed for clarity.
Torque: 5 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Crankshaft Position (CKP)
Sensor Ring
Special Tool(s)
303-1130
Installer - Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Ring
Removal

www.JagDocs.com
3. Refer to: Flexplate (303-01B, Removal and Installation).
4.
5.
6. NOTE: The CKP sensor retaining bolt should not be
removed from the CKP sensor.
7.
www.JagDocs.com
8.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the CKP sensor ring is aligned

correctly with the special tool pip and that both mating
surfaces are fully seated.

www.JagDocs.com

5. CAUTION: Install the CKP sensor correctly into the

housing. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the CKP sensor.
Torque: 5 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
6.
7.
8. Refer to: Flexplate (303-01B, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Differential Pressure Sensor
Removal

Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
5.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
2. NOTE: This step is only necessary when installing a new

component.
1. Using the diagnostic tool, clear diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)

from the engine control module (ECM).
2. Using the data logger, check the engine oil temperature.
3. Make sure the selector lever is in the 'P' position.
5. Make sure that the engine oil is at a minimum temperature of 50
degrees C.
6. Allow the engine to idle for 2 minutes and 30 seconds.
7. Make sure that the engine cooling fan is not running.
8. Turn off the ignition.
9. Wait for 30 seconds.
10. Repeat steps 4 to 9, a further 5 times.
11. Disconnect the Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Coolant Temperature
(ECT) Sensor
Removal
CAUTION: Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or coolant, make sure the vehicle cooling
system is cool prior to carrying out this procedure.
3. CAUTIONS:

www.JagDocs.com
The seal is to be reused unless damaged.
foreign material.
NOTE: Release the locking tang to remove the ECT

sensor.
Installation
2. Fill the cooling system, keeping coolant to the upper level mark of the
expansion tank.
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Control Module (ECM)
Removal
All vehicles
2. Refer to: Cowl Vent Screen (501-02 Front End Body Panels, Removal and
Installation).
Installation).

www.JagDocs.com
Installation).
All vehicles
5. Torque: 25 Nm
Torque: 25 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 8 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 6 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 10 Nm

Installation

www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Oil Level Sensor
Removal

Installation).
3. Refer to: Engine Oil Vacuum Draining and Filling (303-01A Engine - TDV6
3.0L Diesel, General Procedures).

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 11 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTION: A new O-ring seal is to be installed.

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Engine Oil Pressure (EOP)
Sensor
Removal
2. Torque: 15 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust Gas Temperature
Sensor RH
Removal
Installation).
4. Refer to: Engine Rear Undershield (501-02 Front End Body Panels,
www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the component prior

to removal.

prior to removal.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 35 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure the anti-seize compound does not contact the catalyst
monitor sensor tip.
www.JagDocs.com
If accidentally dropped or knocked install a new sensor.
Make sure that the wiring harness is not twisted or damaged on

installation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
NOTE: If the original sensor is to be installed, apply lubricant

meeting specification ESE-M12A4-A to the thread of the sensor.

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Heated Oxygen Sensor
(HO2S)
Removal
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com

prior to removal.

Torque: 48 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
monitor sensor tip.
Make sure the catalyst monitor sensor wiring harness is not twisted
more than 180 degrees and is not in contact with either the exhaust or
driveshaft.
Do not clean the internals of the sensor or electrical connector.
Do not apply any products to the internals of the sensor or

electrical connector.


www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Intake Air Temperature (IAT)
Sensor
Removal

www.JagDocs.com

Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Manifold Absolute Pressure
(MAP) Sensor
Removal
2. Torque: 3 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal

and free of foreign material.
Torque: 2 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Oil Temperature Sensor
Removal
1. The oil temperature sensor is an integrated part of the engine oil level
sensor.
Refer to: Engine Oil Level Sensor (303-14A Electronic Engine Controls -
Installation
1. To install, reverse the removal position.

www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Post Catalytic Converter
Temperature Sensor
Removal
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com

Torque: 35 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
monitor sensor tip.

the vehicle.


Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Post DPF Exhaust Gas
Temperature Sensor
Removal
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTION: Note the fitted position of the component prior

to removal.
6. Torque: 9 Nm
Torque: 35 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
monitor sensor tip.
www.JagDocs.com

the vehicle.

www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Pre Catalytic Converter
Temperature Sensor
Removal
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com

prior to removal.

Torque: 35 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
monitor sensor tip.

the vehicle.


www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Pre DPF Exhaust Gas
Temperature Sensor
Removal
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com

prior to removal.

Torque: 35 Nm
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
monitor sensor tip.

the vehicle.


www.JagDocs.com
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol -
CAUTION: CAUTION: Use only Shell M1375.4 Automatic transmission fluid. Use of any other fluids may result in a
transmission malfunction or failure.
Description Intervals
Normal maintenance Filled for life.
Severe duty maintenance Change the fluid at 48,000 km (30,000 miles) intervals.
NOTE: Lubricants, Fluids, Sealers and Adhesives
Transmission fluid Shell M1375.4
Sealant WSS-M4G323-A6
Metal surface cleaner WSW-M5B392-A
High temperature grease Molecote FB180
NOTE: General Specifications
Refill capacity approximate dry capacity, includes cooler and tubes. Check the level at
normal operating temperature. DO NOT OVERFILL. If it is necessary to add or change
Approximate fluid, use only fluid which has been certified by the supplier as meeting the Jaguar Cars
Vehicle Engine Liters Ltd specification shown. U.S. Quarts
www.JagDocs.com
XJ All 10.0 10.57

vehicles
NOTE: Torque Specifications

Transmission retaining bolts 48 35 -
Transmission mount retaining bolts 51 38 -
Transmission fluid fill plug A A A
Transmission control module (TCM) and main control valve body retaining bolts 8 - 53
Output shaft flange retaining nut 60 44 -
Torque converter retaining bolts 62 46 -
Transmission fluid cooler tube retaining bolt 22 16 -
Transmission fluid drain plug 8 - 53
Transmission fluid pan, gasket and filter retaining bolts 8 - 53
A = refer to the procedure for correct torque sequence
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Description - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Description - Overview
OVERVIEW
The ZF 6HP28 transmission is an electronically controlled, hydraulically operated, six speed automatic unit. The hydraulic and
electronic control elements of the transmission, including the TCM (transmission control module), are incorporated in a single
unit located inside the transmission and is known as 'Mechatronic'.
5.1 L SC (supercharger) and 3.0L diesel models use an uprated derivative of the ZF 6HP28 transmission used in the 5.0L
naturally aspirated models.
The ZF 6HP28 transmission has the following features:
Designed to be maintenance free

Transmission fluid is 'fill for life'
The torque converter features a controlled slip feature with electronically regulated control of lock-up, creating a smooth
transition to the fully locked condition
Shift programs controlled by the TCM
Electronic park lock, controlled by the TCM, with a mechanical emergency release
ASIS (adaptive shift strategy), to provide continuous adaptation of shift changes to suit the driving style of the driver,
which can vary from sporting to economical.
Connected to the ECM (engine control module) via the high speed CAN (controller area network) bus for communications
Default mode if major faults occur
Diagnostics available from the TCM via the high speed CAN bus.
The transmission selections are made using the rotary JaguarDrive selector in the floor console and two paddle switches on the
steering wheel. For additional information, refer to 307-05B Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - 5.0L/3.0L
www.JagDocs.com
Diesel).
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Description - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; B = K bus; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect
network) bus
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
6 Diagnostic socket
9 Clockspring
10 Steering wheel audio switches
11 Downshift paddle switch
12 Upshift paddle switch
System Operation
POWER FLOWS
Operation of the transmission is controlled by the TCM (transmission control module), which electrically activates various
solenoids to control the transmission gear selection. The sequence of solenoid activation is based on programmed information
in the TCM memory and physical transmission operating conditions such as vehicle speed, throttle position, engine load and
JaguarDrive selector position.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Torque input from engine
2 Torque converter lock-up clutch
3 Single web planetary gear carrier
4 Single web planetary gears
5 Single web sunwheel 1
6 Double web sunwheel 2
7 Double web planetary gears - long
8 Double web planetary gear carrier
9 Double web planetary gears - short
10 Double web sunwheel 3
11 Torque output from transmission
A Multiplate clutch
B Multiplate clutch
C Multiplate brake
D Multiplate brake
E Multiplate clutch
Engine torque is transferred, via operation of single or combinations of clutches to the 2 planetary gear trains. Both gear trains
are controlled by reactionary inputs from brake clutches to produce the 6 forward gears and 1 reverse gear. The ratios are as
follows:
Gear 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th Reverse
Ration 4.171 2.340 1.521 1.143 0.867 0.691 3.403
Shift Elements
Item Description
www.JagDocs.com
1 Turbine shaft
2 Stator shaft
3 Single web planetary gear train
4 Ring gear 1
5 Clutch A
6 Clutch B
7 Clutch E
8 Brake clutch C
9 Fixed connection to transmission housing
10 Shaft key
11 Brake clutch D
12 Double web planetary gear train
13 Planetary gears - long
14 Ring gear 2
15 Sunwheel 2
16 Sunwheel 3
17 Double web planetary gear carrier
18 Planetary gears - short
19 Single web planetary gear carrier
20 Sunwheel 1
The shift elements are three rotating multiplate clutches (A, B and E) and two fixed multiplate brakes (C and D). All shifts
from 1st to 6th gears are power-on overlapping shifts. Overlapping shifts can be described as one of the clutches continuing to
transmit drive at a lower main pressure until the next required clutch is able to accept the input torque.
The shift elements, clutches and brakes are actuated hydraulically. Fluid pressure is applied to the required clutch and/or brake,
pressing the plates together and allowing drive to be transmitted through the plates. The purpose of the shift elements
is to perform power-on shifts with no interruption to traction and smooth transition between gear ratios.
www.JagDocs.com
Power Flow 1st Gear
The JaguarDrive selector and the selector valve spool are in the 'D' position. Engine torque is transmitted from the torque
converter turbine shaft to the ring gear 1 of the single web planetary gear train and the outer plate carrier of clutch 'E'.
Ring gear 1 drives the planetary gears which rotate around sunwheel 1. This drives the planetary gear carrier 1 and also the
outer plate carrier of clutch 'A' and the inner plate carrier of clutch 'B'.
www.JagDocs.com
When clutch 'A' is engaged, sunwheel 3 in the double web planetary gear train is driven and meshes with the short planetary
gears.
The double web planetary gear train is locked against the transmission housing by brake 'D'. This allows ring gear 2 (output
shaft) to be driven in the same direction as the engine via the long planetary gears.
NOTE: Refer to 'Shift Elements' illustration for key

Power Flow 2nd Gear
The JaguarDrive selector and the selector spool valve are in the 'D' position. Engine torque is transmitted from the torque
www.JagDocs.com
gears.
Sunwheel 2 is locked to the transmission housing by brake clutch 'C'. The long planetary gears, which are also meshed with the
short planetary gears, roll around the fixed sunwheel 2 and transmit drive to the double web planetary gear train carrier and
ring gear 2 in the direction of engine rotation.

www.JagDocs.com
Power Flow 3rd Gear
gears.
Sunwheel 2 is driven via clutch 'B' which is engaged. The long planetary gears, which are also meshed with the short planetary
gears, cannot roll around the fixed sunwheel 2 and therefore transmit drive to the locked double web planetary gear train
carrier in the direction of engine rotation.
www.JagDocs.com
Power Flow 4th Gear
converter turbine shaft to ring gear 1 of the single web planetary gear train and the outer plate carrier of clutch 'E'.
gears.
The double web planetary gear carrier is driven via clutch 'E' which is engaged. The long planetary gears, which are also
meshed with the short planetary gears and the double web planetary gear carrier, drive ring gear 2 in the direction of engine
rotation.

www.JagDocs.com
Power Flow 5th Gear
www.JagDocs.com
gears.
The long planetary gears, which are also meshed with the short planetary gears and the double web planetary gear carrier,
drive ring gear 2 in the direction of engine rotation.

www.JagDocs.com
Power Flow 6th Gear
Clutches 'A' and 'B' are released, removing the effect of the single web planetary gear train.
Clutch brake 'C' is applied which locks sunwheel 2 to the transmission housing.
Clutch 'E' is engaged and drives the double web planetary gear carrier. This causes the long planetary gears to rotate around
the fixed sunwheel 2 and transmit drive to ring gear 2 which is driven in the direction of engine rotation.

www.JagDocs.com
Power Flow Reverse Gear
The JaguarDrive selector and the selector spool valve are in the 'R' position. Engine torque is transmitted from the torque
Ring gear 1 drives the planetary gears of the single web planetary gear train which rotate around the fixed sunwheel 1. This
transmits the drive to the single web planetary gear carrier, the outer plate carrier of clutch 'A' and the inner plate carrier of
clutch 'B'.
With clutch 'B' applied, sunwheel 2 in the double web planetary gear train is driven and meshes with the long planetary gears.
The double web planetary gear carrier is locked to the transmission housing by brake clutch 'D'. This allows ring gear 2 to be
driven in the opposite direction to engine rotation by the long planetary gears.

www.JagDocs.com
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Item Description
1 Transmission selected gear status
2 MIL (malfunction indicator lamp)
3 Message center
The instrument cluster is connected to the TCM via the high speed CAN bus. Transmission status is transmitted by the TCM
and displayed to the driver in one of two displays in the instrument cluster. For additional information, refer to 413-01
Instrument Cluster.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
The MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) is located in the tachometer in the instrument cluster. Transmission related faults which
may affect the vehicle emissions output will illuminate the MIL.
The MIL is illuminated by the ECM (engine control module) on receipt of a relevant fault message from the TCM on the high
speed CAN. The nature of the fault can be diagnosed using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system which reads the fault codes
stored in the TCM memory.
Transmission Status Display
The transmission status display is located in a LCD (liquid crystal display) at the top of the instrument cluster, between the
speedometer and the tachometer. The LCD shows the JaguarDrive selector position or the selected gear when in manual
'Jaguar Sequential Shift' mode.
The following table shows the displays and their descriptions.
Symbol Description
P Park selected
R Reverse selected
N Neutral selected
D Drive selected
www.JagDocs.com
S Sport mode selected

1 1st gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
2 2nd gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
3 3rd gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
4 4th gear selected (manual Jaguar sequential shift mode)
The message center is located in the lower center of the instrument cluster. The message center is a LCD to relay vehicle
status and operating information to the driver and can display messages relating to a number of the vehicle systems. If a
transmission fault occurs, the message center will display the message 'GEARBOX FAULT'.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

The TCM outputs signals to control the shift control solenoid valve and the EPRS (electronic pressure regulating solenoid) to
control the hydraulic operation of the transmission.
The TCM processes signals from the transmission speed and temperature sensors, the ECM and other vehicle systems. From
the received signal inputs and pre-programmed data, the module calculates the correct gear, torque converter clutch setting
and optimum pressure settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control.
The ECM supplies the engine management data over the high speed CAN bus. The TCM requires engine data to efficiently
control the transmission operation, for example; flywheel torque, engine speed, accelerator pedal angle, engine temperature.
The steering angle sensor and the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module also supply data to the TCM on the high speed CAN
bus. The TCM uses data from these systems to suspend gear changes when the vehicle is cornering and/or the ABS module is
controlling braking or traction control.
Using the signal inputs and the memorized data, the TCM control program computes the correct gear and torque converter
lock-up clutch setting and the optimum pressure settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control. Special output-side modules
(power output stages, current regulator circuits), allow the TCM to control the solenoid valves and pressure regulators and
consequently precisely control the hydraulics of the automatic transmission. In addition, the amount and duration of engine
interventions are supplied to the engine management by way of the CAN bus.
The transmission has a fully electronic JaguarDrive selector with no Bowden cable connection to the transmission. The
transmission selections are made using a rotary JaguarDrive selector which rises from the floor console once the engine is
running. Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector to any of the five positions is sensed by the TCM via the high speed CAN bus.
The TCM then reacts according to the selected position. The 'S' (sport) position selection allows the TCM to operate the
transmission using the semi-automatic 'Jaguar Sequential Shift'.
Gear selections are sensed by the TCM when the driver operates the steering wheel paddle switches. Once the JaguarDrive
selector position is confirmed, the TCM outputs appropriate information on the high speed CAN bus.
If the JaguarDrive selector is in 'D', 'Jaguar Sequential Shift' is temporary and will cancel after a time period or can be cancelled
by pressing and holding the + paddle for approximately 2 seconds.
If the JaguarDrive selector is in 'S', 'Jaguar Sequential Shift' is permanent and can only be cancelled by pressing and holding
the + paddle for approximately 2 seconds or by moving the JaguarDrive selector to the 'D' position.
The TCM can be reprogrammed using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system using a flash code. The TCM processor has a 440 kb
internal flash memory. Of this capacity, approximately 370 kb are used by the basic transmission program. The remainder,
approximately 70 kb is used to store vehicle-specific application data.
Engine Stall
If the vehicle stalls it will coast down in gear, with the transmission providing drive to the engine. A restart can be attempted
at this point and the engine may start and the driver can continue.
If the coast down speed reduces such that the speed of the engine is less than 600 rev/min, the transmission will go to
neutral, D illumination will flash in the instrument cluster. The driver needs to select neutral or park and then press the brake
pedal to restart the engine.
If the start/stop button is pressed when driving, the message ENGINE STOP BUTTON PRESSED is displayed in the message
center but there will be no change to the ignition state. If the driver requires to switch off the engine, the start/stop button
must be pressed for a second time. The engine will be stopped and will be back driven by the transmission as the vehicle
coasts down. When the engine speed is less than 600 rev/min the transmission engages neutral (flashing D illumination in the
instrument cluster). When vehicle speed is less than 2 km/h (1.2 mph) Park is engaged. The JaguarDrive selector automatically
rotates back to its lowered P position and the vehicle ignition is switched off.
The park engagement is prevented in a stall case as the ignition power is on and D was the last selected gear. The park
engagement speed at ignition off is from the least value of the wheel speeds (CAN signal) and transmission output speed
(internal signal).
TRANSMISSION
The transmission comprises the main casing which houses all of the transmission components. The main casing also
incorporates an integral bell housing.
A fluid pan is attached to the lower face of the main casing and is secured with bolts. The fluid pan is sealed to the main
www.JagDocs.com
casing with a gasket. Removal of the fluid pan allows access to the Mechatronic valve block. The fluid pan has a magnet
located around the drain plug which collects any metallic particles present in the transmission fluid.
A fluid filter is located inside the fluid pan. If the transmission fluid becomes contaminated or after any service work, the fluid
pan with integral filter must be replaced.
The integral bell housing provides protection for the torque converter assembly and also provides the attachment for the
gearbox to the engine cylinder block. The torque converter is a non-serviceable assembly which also contains the lock-up clutch
mechanism. The torque converter drives a crescent type pump via drive tangs. The fluid pump is located in the main casing,
behind the torque converter.
The main casing contains the following major components:
Input shaft
Output shaft
Mechatronic valve block which contains the solenoids, speed sensors and the TCM
Three rotating multiplate drive clutches
Two fixed multiplate brake clutches
A single planetary gear train and a double planetary gear train.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Torque converter lock-up clutch
2 Torque converter
3 Fluid pump
4 Single planetary gearset
5 Clutch A
6 Clutch B
7 Clutch E
8 Brake C
9 Brake D
10 Double planetary gearset
11 Park lock gear
12 Output shaft
13 Park lock pawl
14 Drain plug
15 Magnet
16 Pressure regulator
17 Mechatronic valve block
18 Fluid filter
19 Fluid pan
20 Input shaft
21 Bell housing
TORQUE CONVERTER
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Impeller
2 Turbine
3 Stator
4 Freewheel clutch
5 Torque converter hub
6 Stator shaft
7 Turbine shaft
8 Drive plate
9 Journal - Drive plate/crankshaft location
10 Torque converter cover
11 Lock-up clutch piston
12 Lock-up clutch plate
The torque converter is the coupling element between the engine and the transmission and is located in the bell housing, on
the engine side of the transmission. The driven power from the engine crankshaft is transmitted hydraulically and mechanically
through the torque converter to the transmission. The torque converter is connected to the engine by a drive plate attached to
the rear of the crankshaft.
The torque converter comprises an impeller, a stator and a turbine. The torque converter is a sealed unit with all components
located between the converter housing cover and the impeller. The two components are welded together to form a sealed, fluid
filled housing. With the impeller welded to the converter housing cover, the impeller is therefore driven at engine crankshaft
speed.
The converter housing cover has four threaded bosses, which provide for attachment of the engine drive plate. The threaded
bosses also provide for location of special tools which are required to remove the torque converter from the bell housing.
Impeller
Fluid Flow
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Turbine
2 Stator
3 Impeller
When the engine is running the rotating impeller acts as a centrifugal pump, picking up fluid at its center and discharging it at
high velocity through the blades on its outer rim. The design and shape of the blades and the curve of the impeller body cause
the fluid to rotate in a clockwise direction as it leaves the impeller. This rotation improves the efficiency of the fluid as it
contacts the outer row of blades on the turbine.
The centrifugal force of the fluid leaving the blades of the impeller is passed to the curved inner surface of the turbine via the
tip of the blades. The velocity and clockwise rotation of the fluid causes the turbine to rotate.
Turbine
The turbine is similar in design to the impeller with a continuous row of blades. Fluid from the impeller enters the turbine
through the tip of the blades and is directed around the curved body of the turbine to the root of the blades. The curved
surface redirects the fluid back in the opposite direction to which it entered the turbine, effectively increasing the turning force
applied to the turbine from the impeller. This principle is known as torque multiplication.
When engine speed increases, turbine speed also increases. The fluid leaving the inner row of the turbine blades is rotated in
a counter-clockwise direction due to the curve of the turbine and the shape of the blades. The fluid is now flowing in the
opposite direction to the engine rotation and therefore the impeller. If the fluid was allowed to hit the impeller in this
condition, it would have the effect of applying a brake to the impeller, eliminating the torque multiplication effect. To prevent
this, the stator is located between the impeller and the turbine.
Stator
The stator is located on the splined transmission input shaft via a freewheel clutch. The stator comprises a number of blades
which are aligned in an opposite direction to those of the impeller and turbine. The main function of the stator is to redirect
the returning fluid from the turbine, changing its direction to that of the impeller.
The redirected fluid from the stator is directed at the inner row of blades of the impeller, assisting the engine in turning the
impeller. This sequence increases the force of the fluid emitted from the impeller and thereby increases the torque
multiplication effect of the torque converter.
Stator Functions
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Blades
2 Stator held – fluid flow redirected
3 Stator rotates freely
4 Roller
5 Converter at coupling speed
6 Fluid flow from turbine
7 Converter multiplying
8 Fluid flow from impeller
9 Drive from engine
10 Impeller
11 Stator
12 Turbine
13 Output to transmission
Fluid emitted from the impeller acts on the turbine. If the turbine is rotating at a slower speed than the fluid from the impeller,
the fluid will be deflected by the turbine blades in the path 'A'. The fluid is directed at and deflected by the stator blades from
path 'B' to path 'C'. This ensures that the fluid is directed back to the pump in the optimum direction. In this condition the
sprag clutch is engaged and the force of the fluid on the stator blades assists the engine in rotating the impeller.
As the rotational speed of the engine and therefore the turbine increases, the direction of the fluid leaving the turbine changes
to path 'D'. The fluid is now directed from the turbine to the opposite side of the stator blades, rotating the stator in the
opposite direction. To prevent the stator from resisting the smooth flow of the fluid from the turbine, the sprag clutch releases,
allowing the stator to rotate freely on its shaft.
When the stator becomes inactive, the torque converter no longer multiplies the engine torque. When the torque converter
reaches this operational condition it ceases to multiply the engine torque and acts solely as a fluid coupling, with the impeller
and the turbine rotating at approximately the same speed.
The stator uses a sprag type, one way, freewheel clutch. When the stator is rotated in a clockwise direction the sprags twist
and are wedged between the inner and outer races. In this condition the sprags transfer the rotation of the outer race to the
inner race which rotates at the same speed.
One Way Free Wheel Clutch – Typical
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Sprags
2 Inner race
3 Outer race
4 Sprag and cage assembly
5 Sprag outer race
6 Sprag inner race
7 Retaining ring
The free wheel clutch can perform three functions; hold the stator stationary, drive the stator and free wheel allowing the
stator to rotate without a drive output. The free wheel clutch used in the ZF 6HP28 transmission is of the sprag type and
comprises an inner and outer race and a sprag and cage assembly. The inner and outer races are pressed into their related
components with which they rotate. The sprag and cage assembly is located between the inner and outer races.
The sprags are located in a cage which is a spring which holds the sprags in the 'wedge' direction and maintains them in
contact with the inner and outer races.
Referring to the illustration, the sprags are designed so that the dimension 'B' is larger than the distance between the inner
and outer race bearing surfaces. When the outer race rotates in a clockwise direction, the sprags twist and the edges across
the dimension 'B' wedge between the races, providing a positive drive through each sprag to the inner race. The dimension 'A'
is smaller than the distance between the inner and outer race bearing surfaces. When the outer race rotates in an
anti-clockwise direction, the dimension 'A' is too small to allow the sprags to wedge between the races, allowing the outer
race to rotate freely.
On the illustration shown, when the outer race is rotated in a clockwise direction, the sprags twist and are 'wedged' between
the inner and outer races. The sprags then transfer the rotation of the outer race to the inner race, which rotates at the same
speed.
Lock-Up Clutch Mechanism
The TCC (torque converter clutch) is hydraulically controlled by an EPRS, which is controlled by the TCM. This allows the torque
converter to have three states of operation as follows:
• Fully engaged
• Controlled slip variable engagement
• Fully disengaged.
The TCC is controlled by two hydraulic spool valves located in the valve block. These valves are actuated by pilot pressure
supplied via a solenoid valve which is also located in the valve block. The solenoid valve is operated by PWM (pulse width
www.JagDocs.com
modulation) signals from the TCM to give full, partial or no lock-up of the torque converter.
Item Description
A Unlocked condition
www.JagDocs.com
B Locked condition
1 Clutch plate
2 Clutch piston
3 Torque converter body
4 Turbine
5 Impeller
6 Stator
7 Piston chamber
8 Turbine chamber
The lock-up clutch is a hydro-mechanical device which eliminates torque converter slip, improving fuel consumption. The
engagement and disengagement is controlled by the TCM to allow a certain amount of controlled 'slip'. This allows a small
difference in the rotational speeds of the impeller and the turbine which results in improved shift quality. The lock-up clutch
comprises a piston and a clutch friction plate.
In the unlocked condition, the oil pressure supplied to the piston chamber and the turbine chamber is equal. Pressurized fluid
flows through a drilling in the turbine shaft and through the piston chamber to the turbine chamber. In this condition the clutch
plate is held away from the torque converter body and torque converter slip is permitted.
In the locked condition, the TCC spool valves are actuated by the EPRS. The fluid flow in the unlocked condition is reversed
and the piston chamber is vented. Pressurized fluid is directed into the turbine chamber and is applied to the clutch piston.
The piston moves with the pressure and pushes the clutch plate against the torque converter body. As the pressure increases,
the friction between the clutch plate and the body increases, finally resulting in full lock-up of the clutch plate with the body.
In this condition there is direct mechanical drive from the engine crankshaft to the transmission planetary gear train.
FLUID PUMP
The fluid pump is an integral part of the transmission. The fluid pump is used to supply hydraulic pressure for the operation of
the control valves and clutches, to pass the fluid through the transmission cooler and to lubricate the gears and shafts.
The ZF 6HP28 fluid pump is a crescent type pump and is located between the intermediate plate and the torque converter. The
pump has a delivery rate of 16 cm3 per revolution.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Securing ring
2 Shaft oil seal
3 O-ring seal
4 Pump housing
5 Ring gear
6 Crescent spacer
7 Roller bearing
8 Impeller
9 Centering pin
10 Spring washer
11 Outlet port (high pressure)
12 Inlet port (low pressure)
The pump comprises a housing, a crescent spacer, an impeller and a ring gear. The housing has inlet and outlet ports to direct
flow and is located in the intermediate plate by a centering pin. The pump action is achieved by the impeller, ring gear and
crescent spacer.
The crescent spacer is fixed in its position by a pin and is located between the ring gear and the impeller. The impeller is
driven by drive from the torque converter hub which is located on a needle roller bearing in the pump housing. The impeller
teeth mesh with those of the ring gear. When the impeller is rotated, the motion is transferred to the ring gear which rotates
in the same direction.
The rotational motion of the ring gear and the impeller collects fluid from the intake port in the spaces between the teeth.
When the teeth reach the crescent spacer, the oil is trapped in the spaces between the teeth and is carried with the rotation
of the gears. The spacer tapers near the outlet port. This reduces the space between the gear teeth causing a build up of fluid
pressure as the oil reaches the outlet port. When the teeth pass the end of the spacer the pressurized fluid is released into
the outlet port.
The fluid emerging from the outlet port is passed through the fluid pressure control valve. At high operating speeds the
pressure control valve maintains the output pressure to the gearbox at a predetermined maximum level. Excess fluid is
relieved from the pressure control valve and is directed, via the main pressure valve in the valve block, back to the pump inlet
port. This provides a pressurized feed to the pump inlet which prevents cavitation and reduces pump noise.
MECHATRONIC VALVE BLOCK
The Mechatronic valve block is located in the bottom of the transmission and is covered by the fluid pan. The valve block
houses the TCM, electrical actuators, speed sensors and control valves which provide all electro-hydraulic control for all
transmission functions. The Mechatronic valve block comprises the following components:
TCM
Pressure regulator solenoids
Shift control solenoid
Damper
Hydraulic spool valves
Selector valve
Temperature sensor
Turbine speed sensor
Output shaft speed sensor.
Sensors
Speed Sensors
The turbine speed sensor and the output shaft speed sensor are Hall effect type sensors located in the Mechatronic valve block
and are not serviceable items. The TCM monitors the signals from each sensor to determine the input (turbine) speed and the
output shaft speed.
The turbine speed is monitored by the TCM to calculate the slip of the torque converter clutch and internal clutch slip. This
signal allows the TCM to accurately control the slip timing during shifts and adjust clutch application or release pressure for
overlap shift control.
The output shaft speed is monitored by the TCM and compared to engine speed signals received on the CAN bus from the ECM.
Using a comparison of the two signals the TCM calculates the transmission slip ratio for plausibility and maintains adaptive
pressure control.
Temperature Sensor
www.JagDocs.com
The temperature sensor is also located in the Mechatronic valve block. The TCM uses the temperature sensor signals to
determine the temperature of the transmission fluid. These signals are used by the TCM to control the transmission operation
to promote faster warm-up in cold conditions or to assist with fluid cooling by controlling the transmission operation when high
fluid temperatures are experienced. If the sensor fails, the TCM will use a default value and a fault code will be stored in the
TCM.
Damper
There is one damper located in the valve housing. The damper is used to regulate and dampen the regulated pressure supplied
via EPRS. The damper is load dependent through modulation of the damper against return spring pressure.
The damper comprises a piston, a housing bore and a spring. The piston is subject to the pressure applied by the spring. The
bore has a connecting port to the function to which it applies. Fluid pressure applied to the applicable component (i.e. a
clutch) is also subjected to the full area of the piston, which moves against the opposing force applied by the spring. The
movement of the piston creates an action similar to a shock absorber, momentarily delaying the build up of pressure in the
circuit. This results in a more gradual application of clutches improving shift quality.
Spool Valves
The valve block spool valves control various functions of the transmission. The spool valves are of conventional design and are
operated by fluid pressure.
Each spool valve is located in its spool bore and held in a default (unpressurized) position by a spring. The spool bore has a
number of ports which allow fluid to flow to other valves and clutches to enable transmission operation. Each spool has a
piston which is waisted to allow fluid to be diverted into the applicable ports when the valve is operated.
When fluid pressure moves a spool, one or more ports in the spool bore are covered or uncovered. Fluid is prevented from
flowing or is allowed to flow around the applicable waisted area of the spool and into another uncovered port. The fluid is
either passed through galleries to actuate another spool, operate a clutch or is returned to the fluid pan.
DRIVE CLUTCHES
Multiplate Drive or Brake Clutch – Typical
Item Description
1 Input shaft
2 Main pressure supply port
www.JagDocs.com
3 Piston
4 Cylinder – external plate carrier
5 Clutch plate assembly
6 Baffle plate
7 Diaphragm spring
8 Output shaft
9 Bearing
10 Dynamic pressure equalization chamber
11 Piston chamber
12 Lubrication channel
There are three drive clutches and two brake clutches used in the ZF 6HP28 transmission. Each clutch comprises one or more
friction plates dependent on the output controlled. A typical clutch consists of a number of steel outer plates and inner plates
with friction material bonded to each face.
On 5.0L SC (supercharger) and 3.0L diesel models, the uprated transmission includes additional clutch plates to enable the
transmission to manage the additional power output from these engines.
The clutch plates are held apart mechanically by a diaphragm spring and hydraulically by dynamic pressure. The pressure is
derived from a lubrication channel which supplies fluid to the bearings etc. The fluid is passed via a drilling in the output shaft
into the chamber between the baffle plate and the piston. To prevent inadvertent clutch application due to pressure build up
produced by centrifugal force, the fluid in the dynamic pressure equalization chamber overcomes any pressure in the piston
chamber and holds the piston off the clutch plate assembly.
When clutch application is required, main pressure from the fluid pump is applied to the piston chamber from the supply port.
This main pressure overcomes the low pressure fluid present in the dynamic pressure equalization chamber. The piston moves,
against the pressure applied by the diaphragm spring, and compresses the clutch plate assembly. When the main pressure
falls, the diaphragm spring pushes the piston away from the clutch plate assembly, disengaging the clutch.
PLANETARY GEAR TRAINS

The planetary gear trains used on the ZF 6HP28 transmission comprise a single web planetary gear train and a double web
planetary gear train. These gear trains are known as Lepelletier type gear trains and together produce the six forward gears
and the one reverse gear.
Single Web Planetary Gear Train
The single web planetary gear train comprises:
Sunwheel
Three (naturally aspirated versions) or four (5.0L SC and 3.0L diesel versions) planetary gears
Planetary gear carrier (spider)
Ring gear or annulus.
Item Description
1 Cylinder
2 Baffle plate
www.JagDocs.com
3 Ring gear
4 Sun gear
5 Planetary gear spider
6 Torque converter input shaft
Torque Converter Input Shaft
Item Description
1 Planetary gear spider
2 Planetary gears (short)
3 Ring gear
4 Output shaft
5 Planetary gear carrier
6 Sunwheel
7 Double planetary gears (long)
8 Sunwheel
www.JagDocs.com
The double planetary gear train comprises:
Two sunwheels
Three short planetary gears
Three long planetary gears
Planetary gear carrier
Ring gear or annulus
ELECTRONIC PARK LOCK

The park lock is electronically actuated by solenoid valve located in the valve block. The park lock is engaged by a mechanical
spring system comprising a parking disc and a lock cylinder controlled by a solenoid valve.
The park lock is engaged when the TCM receives a park request from the JaguarDrive selector. When the park lock is released, a
solenoid valve in the valve housing directs hydraulic pressure to the lock cylinder, which moves the piston within the cylinder
and releases the park lock pawl at the rear of the transmission by means of a connecting rod. The solenoid on the lock cylinder
is energized and locks the cylinder piston in the unlocked position. Additional locking of the piston is achieved with ball
catches within the lock cylinder.
When park is selected, the solenoid on the lock cylinder is de-energized, the ball catches are released and the piston is free to
move in the lock cylinder. The solenoid in the valve housing is also de-energized. The spring loaded parking disc pulls the
cylinder piston in the park direction which allows the park disc to move on its mounting. This movement is transferred via the
connecting rod to parking pawl, which is engaged in the park lock gear.
If an electrical failure occurs, the park lock can be manually released by means of an emergency park release lever located in
the floor console. The lever is connected to the parking disc by a cable and allows the park lock to be released manually. For
additional information, refer to 307-05B Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE

The TCM is an integral part of the Mechatronic valve block which is located at the bottom of the transmission, within the fluid
www.JagDocs.com
pan. The TCM is the main controlling component of the transmission.
The TCM processes signals from the transmission speed and temperature sensors, ECM and other vehicle systems. From the
received signal inputs and pre-programmed data, the module calculates the correct gear, torque converter clutch setting and
optimum pressure settings for gear shift and lock-up clutch control.
5.0L Petrol - Diagnostics
For a detailed description of the automatic transmission/transaxle, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section n
the workshop manual. REFER to: (307-01B Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol)
Transmission Description (Description and Operation),

Transmission Description (Description and Operation),
Transmission Description (Description and Operation).
Fluid Level and Condition Check
CAUTION: The vehicle should not be driven if the fluid level is low as internal failure can result.
NOTE: The transmission fluid temperature must not be allowed to exceed 50°C (122°F) whilst checking level. Should the
temperature rise above this figure, abort the check and allow the transmission fluid to cool to below 30°C (86°F).
This vehicle is not equipped with a fluid level indicator. An incorrect level may affect the transmission operation and could
result in transmission damage. To correctly check and add fluid to the transmission.
REFER to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01B Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
High Fluid Level
A fluid level that is too high may cause the fluid to become aerated due to the churning action of the rotating internal parts.
This will cause erratic control pressure, foaming, loss of fluid from the vent tube and possible transmission damage. If an
overfill condition is identified, with the engine at idle ensure the fluid temperature is within the specified range and allow the
excess fluid to drain until a small thread of fluid runs from the filler/level plug hole.
Low Fluid Level
A low fluid level could result in poor transmission engagement, slipping, or damage. This could also indicate a leak in one of
the transmission seals or gaskets.
REFER to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01B Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
Adding Fluid
CAUTION: The use of any other type of transmission fluid other than that specified can result in transmission damage.
If fluid needs to be added, add fluid in 0.50 liter increments through the fill hole Opening. Do not overfill the fluid. For fluid
type, refer to the General Specification chart in this section.
REFER to: Specifications (307-01B Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol,
Specifications).
Fluid Condition Check

1. Check the fluid level.
REFER to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01B Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L
Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
2. Observe the color and the odor of the fluid. The color under normal circumstances should be Honey.
3. Allow the fluid to drip onto a facial tissue and examine the stain.
4. If evidence of solid material is found, the transmission fluid pan should be removed for further inspection.
NOTE: In the event of a transmission unit replacement for internal failure, the oil cooler and pipes must also be replaced.


Visual Inspection
Mechanical Electrical Hydraulic
Damaged/stuck shift mechanism Blown fuse(s) Fluid level too high/low

Damaged automatic transmission casing Damaged, loose or corroded connectors Poor condition of fluid
Wiring harness Fluid leak
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index.
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
If the control module/transmission is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
installation of a new module/transmission.
Generic scan tools may not read the codes listed, or may read only five digit codes. Match the five digits from the scan
tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give additional information
read by the manufacturer approved diagnostic system).
www.JagDocs.com
When performing electrical voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to three decimal
places, and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM leads
into account.

P0121-86 Throttle/Pedal Position Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
Sensor A Circuit Throttle/Pedal Position
Range/Performance - signal Sensor Fault (Data
invalid received over CAN Bus)
P0219-86 Engine Overspeed Condition Check Engine Control Module for stored DTCs
- signal invalid Engine speed too low or
too high (Data received
over CAN Bus)
P0500-81 Vehicle Speed Sensor A - Check DSC module for stored DTCs
invalid serial data received Vehicle Speed Sensor
fault (Data received over
CAN Bus)
P0501-81 Vehicle Speed Sensor A Check Anti-lock braking system module for stored
Range/Performance invalid Vehicle Speed receive DTCs. Check correct Differential is installed to the
serial data received over CAN Bus does not vehicle
match Transmission
Output-Shaft speed
P0561-1C System Voltage Unstable - Check Engine control module for stored DTCs. Check
Circuit voltage out of range Power supply voltage out Charging System and Battery condition
of range when engine
running
P0562-21 System Voltage Low - signal Refer to Circuit diagrams and check Power and Ground
amplitude < minimum Circuit low voltage. Circuit for fault. Check Engine control module for
Battery supply voltage to stored DTCs. Check Charging System and Battery
Transmission Control condition
Module (Transmission
control module)
P0563-22 System Voltage High - signal Check Engine control module for stored DTCs. Check
amplitude > maximum High Battery charge, Charging System and Battery condition
alternator fault
P0601-41 Internal Control Module Re-configure the Transmission control module using
Memory Check Sum Error - Software error the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
general checksum failure Transmission control DTC and re-test. If DTC remains, Suspect the
module failure Transmission control module. Install a new
Transmission control module as required, refer to the
new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0604-00 Internal Control Module Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Random Access Memory Shift-by-Wire fault new Transmission control module as required, refer to
(RAM) Error - no sub type the new module/component installation note at the
information top of the DTC Index
P0605-41 Internal Control Module Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Read Only Memory (ROM) General checksum failure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Error - general checksum the new module/component installation note at the
failure top of the DTC Index
P0606-04 Transmission control module Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Processor - System Internal Micro controller new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Failures component faults the new module/component installation note at the
Processor - signal rate of Micro controller new Transmission control module as required, refer to
change below threshold component faults the new module/component installation note at the
www.JagDocs.com
Processor-internal electronic Micro controller new Transmission control module as required, refer to
failure component faults the new module/component installation note at the
Processor - System Internal Micro controller new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Processor - Algorithm Based Micro controller new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Processor - Circuit Short to Watchdog fault new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground the new module/component installation note at the
Battery the new module/component installation note at the
Processor - Circuit Open Watchdog fault new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground or Open the new module/component installation note at the
Processor - signal amplitude Watchdog fault new Transmission control module as required, refer to
< minimum the new module/component installation note at the
Processor - signal amplitude Watchdog fault new Transmission control module as required, refer to
> maximum the new module/component installation note at the
Processor - watchdog / Watchdog fault new Transmission control module as required, refer to
safety Micro controller the new module/component installation note at the
Processor - internal Micro controller new Transmission control module as required, refer to
electronic failure component faults the new module/component installation note at the
Processor-Event Information Watchdog fault new Transmission control module as required, refer to
P061B-02 Internal Control Module Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Torque Calculation Transmission control new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Performance - general signal module - positive torque the new module/component installation note at the
failure signal not valid top of the DTC Index
P061B-26 Internal Control Module Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Torque Calculation Transmission control new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Performance - signal rate of module positive torque the new module/component installation note at the
change below threshold signal not valid top of the DTC Index
P062F-04 Internal Control Module Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
EEPROM Error - System EEPROM communication new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Internal Failures error the new module/component installation note at the
P0642-21 Sensor Reference Voltage A Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Low - signal Sensor supply voltage new Transmission control module as required, refer to
amplitude < minimum fault low the new module/component installation note at the
P0643-22 Sensor Reference Voltage A Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit High - signal Sensor supply voltage new Transmission control module as required, refer to
amplitude > maximum fault high the new module/component installation note at the
P0657-13 Actuator Supply Voltage A Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit / Open - Circuit Open Actuator supply (pressure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
control valves etc) Open the new module/component installation note at the
Circuit top of the DTC Index
P0657-1C Actuator Supply Voltage A Refer to electrical Circuit diagrams and check
Circuit / Open - Circuit Actuator supply (pressure Transmission control module connector for signs of
voltage out of range control valves etc) water ingress or damage, check pin 7 for Short to
voltage plausibility fault Power or Ground (should NOT be connected and
www.JagDocs.com
harness terminal should have a bung fitted). If no

fault identified, suspect the Transmission control
module. Check and install a new Transmission control
module as required, refer to the new
DTC Index
Circuit Low - Circuit Short to Actuator supply (pressure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground control valves etc) the new module/component installation note at the
voltage Short to Ground top of the DTC Index
Circuit High - Circuit Short to Actuator supply (pressure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Battery control valves etc) the new module/component installation note at the
voltage Short to Power top of the DTC Index
P0667-01 PCM / Engine control module Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
/ Transmission control General electrical failure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
module Internal Temperature the new module/component installation note at the
Sensor A Range/Performance top of the DTC Index
- General Electrical Failure
/ Transmission control Internal Electronic Failure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
- System Internal Failures
/ Transmission control Internal electronic failure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
- internal electronic failure
P0700-02 Transmission Control System Clear DTC, Road test and re-test, Read DTCs and
(MIL Request) - General General Signal failure Investigate as required
signal failure
P0700-22 Transmission Control System If any of the following DTCs are also present;
(MIL Request) - signal Double fault from P074013, P096712, P273912, P273012, P272112,
amplitude > maximum monitoring of internal P096312, P276312, P097112, suspect the Transmission
power supply and control module, check and install a new Transmission
pressure control module as required, refer to the new
regulator/solenoid module/component installation note at the top of the
control software DTC Index
P0700-75 Transmission Control System Clear DTC, Road test and re-test, Read DTCs and
(MIL Request) - Emergency Emergency Position Not investigate as required
Position Not Reachable Reachable
www.JagDocs.com
P0710-13 Transmission Fluid Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Temperature Sensor A Circuit Transmission fluid Transmission control module. Install a new
- Circuit Open temperature sensor Transmission control module as required, refer to the
Circuit Open Circuit new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
Temperature Sensor A Circuit General electrical failure Transmission control module. Install a new
Range/Performance - Transmission control module as required, refer to the
General Electrical Failure new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0711-22 Transmission Fluid Clear DTC. Carry out cold start road test, continue
Temperature Sensor A Circuit Signal amplitude > driving vehicle until normal operating temperature is
Range/Performance - signal maximum. Excessive achieved. Reads DTCs, if DTC returns, suspect the
amplitude > maximum jump in temperature Transmission control module. Install a new
the DTC Index
Low - Circuit Short to Ground temperature sensor Transmission control module as required, refer to the
Circuit Short to Ground new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
Temperature Sensor A Circuit General electrical failure Transmission control module. Install a new
High-General Electrical Transmission control module as required, refer to the
Failure new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
High - Circuit Short to temperature sensor Transmission control module as required, refer to the
www.JagDocs.com
Battery Circuit Short to Power new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0716-14 Turbine/Input Shaft Speed Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Sensor A Circuit Turbine/Input Shaft Transmission control module. Install a new
Range/Performance - Circuit Speed Sensor Circuit Transmission control module as required, refer to the
Short to Ground or Open Short to Ground or Open new module/component installation note at the top of
Circuit the DTC Index
P0716-21 Turbine/Input Shaft Speed Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect the
Range/Performance - signal Speed Sensor signal too Transmission control module as required, refer to the
amplitude < minimum small new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0716-22 Turbine/Input Shaft Speed Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect the
Range/Performance - signal Speed Sensor signal Transmission control module as required, refer to the
amplitude > maximum above maximum new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0717-12 Turbine/Input Shaft Speed Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Sensor A Circuit No Signal - Turbine/input shaft speed Transmission control module. Install a new
Circuit Short to Battery sensor A Circuit Short to Transmission control module as required, refer to the
Power new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0720-12 Output Shaft Speed Sensor Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Circuit - Circuit Short to Transmission output Transmission control module. Install a new
Battery shaft speed sensor Transmission control module as required, refer to the
Circuit Short to Power new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
Circuit - Circuit Short to Transmission output Transmission control module. Install a new
Ground or Open shaft speed sensor Transmission control module as required, refer to the
Circuit Short to Ground or new module/component installation note at the top of
Open Circuit the DTC Index
P0721-22 Output Shaft Speed Sensor Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect the
Circuit Range/Performance - Transmission output Transmission control module. Install a new
signal amplitude > shaft speed sensor Transmission control module as required, refer to the
maximum signal above maximum new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0721-27 Output Shaft Speed Sensor Clear DTC and road test, if DTC returns suspect the
Circuit Range/Performance - Output shaft speed Transmission control module. Install a new
signal rate of change above negative gradient too Transmission control module as required, refer to the
threshold high new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
Circuit Range/Performance - Signal plausibility failure Transmission control module. Install a new
signal plausibility failure Transmission control module as required, refer to the
the DTC Index
P0731-07 Incorrect Gear Ratio- Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
Mechanical Failures Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (gearbox) internal
Mechanical Failures fault. Install a new Transmission as required, refer to
www.JagDocs.com
P0740-13 Torque Converter Clutch Clear DTC and test. If code re-detects suspect the
Solenoid Circuit / Open - Pressure control solenoid Transmission control module. Install a new
Circuit Open 2 Circuit Open Circuit Transmission control module as required, refer to the
the DTC Index
P0741-07 Torque Converter Clutch Suspect torque converter lockup clutch. Install a new
Solenoid Circuit Too high slip at torque torque converter, refer to the new module/component
Performance/Stuck Off - converter clutch. installation note at the top of the DTC Index. If
Mechanical Failures Mechanical Failures transmission fluid is in very poor condition and dirty,
install a new transmission, refer to the new
DTC Index
P0745-04 Pressure Control Solenoid A Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
- System Internal Failures System Internal Failures new Transmission control module as required, refer to
- Supervision Software Supervision Software new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Failure Failure the new module/component installation note at the
P0758-12 Shift Solenoid B Electrical - Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Short to Battery Circuit Short to Power new Transmission control module as required, refer to
P0758-13 Shift Solenoid B Electrical - Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Open Solenoid valve 1 or new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Pressure control Solenoid the new module/component installation note at the
G Circuit Open Circuit top of the DTC Index
P0771-71 Shift Solenoid E Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a

Performance/Stuck Off - Actuator stuck new Transmission control module as required, refer to
actuator stuck the new module/component installation note at the
P0775-04 Pressure Control Solenoid B Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
- System Internal Failures System Internal Failures new Transmission control module as required, refer to
- Supervision Software Supervision Software new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Failure Failure the new module/component installation note at the
P0781-07 1-2 Shift - Mechanical Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
Failures Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
P0781-77 2-1 Shift - commanded Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
position not reachable Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
www.JagDocs.com
P0798-1A Pressure Control Solenoid C Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Electrical - Circuit Resistance Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Below Threshold C Circuit resistance the new module/component installation note at the
below threshold top of the DTC Index
P0798-1E Pressure Control Solenoid C Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Electrical - Circuit Short to Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground C electrical circuit short the new module/component installation note at the
to ground top of the DTC Index
P0798-21 Pressure Control Solenoid C Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Electrical - signal amplitude Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
< minimum C Electrical signal the new module/component installation note at the
amplitude < minimum top of the DTC Index
P0814-62 Transmission Range Display Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit - signal compare Transmission Range new Transmission control module as required, refer to
failure Display Circuit signal the new module/component installation note at the
compare failure top of the DTC Index
P0826-08 Up and Down Switch circuit - Check Central junction box and Instrument cluster for
Bus Signal Message Failures Invalid CAN signal from stored DTCs. Check gear change switches for correct
BCM/Instrument cluster operation. Refer to circuit diagrams and check CAN bus
Stuck switch for a circuit fault
CAN bus circuit fault
P0826-81 Up and Down Switch Circuit - Check Central junction box and Instrument cluster for
invalid serial data received Invalid Can signal from stored DTCs. Check Gear Change Switches for correct
BCM / Instrument cluster operation. Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN
Stuck switch Bus for Circuit fault
CAN Bus Circuit fault
P0826-88 Up and Down Switch Circuit - Check Central junction box and Steering Wheel Ice
Bus off SWM to BCM / Switches for stored DTCs. Refer to Circuit diagrams
Instrument cluster LIN and check LIN Bus for Circuit fault
Bus failure
Failures Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission internal fault. Install
Mechanical Failures a new Transmission as required, refer to the new
DTC Index
P0829-77 6-5 Shift - Commanded Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
Position Not Reachable Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission internal fault. Install
Mechanical Failures a new Transmission as required, refer to the new
DTC Index
P084F-01 Park / Neutral Switch Input Check for correct output at Transmission control
Circuit - General Electrical Wrong voltage level module park signal pin (check in all positions) 12 volts
Failure detected on Park/No Park in Park, 0 volts in all other positions. If fault
signal identified, suspect the Transmission control module.
Install a new Transmission control module as required,
refer to the new module/component installation note
at the top of the DTC Index. If no fault identified,
check Park signal circuit to Transmission Shift Module
for short, open circuit.
P0850-01 Park / Neutral Switch Input Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit - General Electrical General electrical failure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Failure the new module/component installation note at the
P0850-02 Park / Neutral Switch Input Check park lock mechanism. If park lock operation is
Circuit - General signal General signal failure correct, suspect the transmission control module.
failure Check and install a new transmission control module
as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
programme is in operation, prior to the installation of
a new module/component
www.JagDocs.com
P0850-29 Park / Neutral Switch Input Check park lock mechanism. If park lock operation is
Circuit - signal invalid Signal invalid correct, suspect the transmission control module.
Check and install a new transmission control module
as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
programme is in operation, prior to the installation of
a new module/component
P850-1C Park / Neutral Switch Input Check park lock mechanism, if park lock operation
Circuit - circuit voltage out Circuit voltage out of correct suspect the Transmission control module.
of range range Install a new Transmission control module as required,
refer to the new module/component installation note
P0919-93 Gear Shift Position Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Error - no operation No shifting despite driver new Transmission control module as required, refer to
request the new module/component installation note at the
P0919-94 Gear Shift Position Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Error - unexpected operation Shifting without driver new Transmission control module as required, refer to
request the new module/component installation note at the
P0938-29 Hydraulic Oil Temperature Clear DTC. Carry out cold start road test, continue
Sensor Range/Performance - Transmission fluid driving vehicle until normal operating temperature is
signal invalid temperature compared achieved. Read DTCs, if DTC returns, suspect the
with module temperature Transmission control module. Install a new
fault Transmission control module as required, refer to the
the DTC Index
Control Circuit High - Circuit Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Short to Battery 1 Circuit Short to Power the new module/component installation note at the
Control Circuit / Open - Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Circuit Open B Control Circuit Open the new module/component installation note at the
Circuit Short to Ground or B Control Circuit Short to the new module/component installation note at the
Open Ground or Open top of the DTC Index
Control Circuit Low - Circuit Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Short to Ground 2 Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
Control Circuit / Open - Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Circuit Short to Ground or 3 Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
Open or Open Circuit top of the DTC Index
Short to Ground 3 Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
P0972-22 Shift Solenoid A Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Range/Performance - Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
signal amplitude > 1 current too large the new module/component installation note at the
maximum top of the DTC Index
Circuit Low - Circuit Short to Shift solenoid A control new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
Circuit Low - Circuit Short to Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground or Open 1 Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
or Open Circuit top of the DTC Index
www.JagDocs.com
P0973-1A Shift Solenoid A Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Low - Circuit Shift Solenoid A control new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Resistance Below Threshold circuit resistance below the new module/component installation note at the
threshold top of the DTC Index
P0973-1E Shift Solenoid A Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Low - Circuit Shift Solenoid A control new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Resistance Out Of Range circuit resistance out of the new module/component installation note at the
range top of the DTC Index
P0976-11 Shift Solenoid B Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Low - Circuit Short to Solenoid valve 2 Circuit new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
P0976-14 Shift Solenoid B Control Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Circuit Low - Circuit Short to Solenoid valve 2 Circuit new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Ground or Open Short to Ground or Open the new module/component installation note at the
Circuit top of the DTC Index
P1674-04 Control Module Software Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Corrupted - System Internal System internal failures new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Failures the new module/component installation note at the
P1674-48 Control Module Software Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Corrupted - Supervision Supervision software new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Software Failure failure the new module/component installation note at the
P1707-07 Transfer Case Neutral or Clear the DTC. Test drive the Vehicle, engaging and
Park/Neutral Indication Transfer case neutral or disengaging the parking lock several times. If the DTC
Circuit - commanded park/neutral indication recurs, check parking lock components and replace as
position not reachable circuit - mechanical required. If no faulty park lock component is found
failures Clear DTC and the DTC returns suspect the
Transmission control module. Install a new
the DTC Index
Park/Neutral Indication Transfer case neutral or disengaging the parking lock several times. If the DTC
Circuit - Actuator Stuck Open park/neutral indication recurs, check parking lock components and replace as
circuit - Actuator stuck required. If no faulty park lock component is found
open Clear DTC and the DTC returns suspect the
the DTC Index
www.JagDocs.com
Park/Neutral Indication Commanded position not disengaging the parking lock several times. If the DTC
Circuit - commanded reachable recurs, check parking lock components and replace as
position not reachable required. If no faulty park lock component is found
Clear DTC and the DTC returns suspect the
the DTC Index
P2700-07 Transmission Friction Check and correct oil level. Clear DTC. If code
Element A Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
Range/Performance - Mechanical Failures fault. Install a new Transmission as required, refer to
Mechanical Failures the new module/component installation note at the
Element B Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
Element C Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
Element D Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
www.JagDocs.com
Element E Apply Time Gear Ratio Monitoring. re-detects suspect Transmission (Gearbox) internal
P2713-04 Pressure Control Solenoid D Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
- System Internal Failures System internal failures new Transmission control module as required, refer to
- Supervision Software Supervision software new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Failure failure the new module/component installation note at the
> maximum D Electrical signal the new module/component installation note at the
amplitude > maximum top of the DTC Index
P2716-1A Pressure Control Solenoid D Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Below Threshold D circuit resistance below the new module/component installation note at the
threshold top of the DTC Index
P2716-1E Pressure Control Solenoid D Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Out Of Range D circuit resistance out the new module/component installation note at the
of range top of the DTC Index
Control Circuit / Open - Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Circuit Short to Ground or D Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
Open or Open Circuit top of the DTC Index
Short to Ground D Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
Short to Battery D Circuit Short to Power the new module/component installation note at the
P2722-04 Pressure Control Solenoid E Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
- System Internal Failures Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
E system internal failures the new module/component installation note at the
- Supervision Software Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Failure E supervision control the new module/component installation note at the
software failure top of the DTC Index
> maximum E Electrical signal the new module/component installation note at the
P2725-1A Pressure Control Solenoid E Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Below Threshold E electrical resistance the new module/component installation note at the
below threshold top of the DTC Index
P2725-1E Pressure Control Solenoid E Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Out Of Range E circuit resistance out of the new module/component installation note at the
range top of the DTC Index
Circuit Short to Ground or E Control Circuit Short to the new module/component installation note at the
Open Ground or Open Circuit top of the DTC Index
Short to Ground E Circuit Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
Control Circuit High-Circuit Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
www.JagDocs.com
Short to Battery E Circuit Short to Power the new module/component installation note at the
P2731-04 Pressure Control Solenoid Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
F-System Internal Failures Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
F no sub type the new module/component installation note at the
information top of the DTC Index
P2731-48 Pressure Control Solenoid F - Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Supervision Software Failure Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
F supervision software the new module/component installation note at the
P2734-22 Pressure Control Solenoid F Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Electrical-signal amplitude > Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
maximum F Electrical signal the new module/component installation note at the
P2734-1A Pressure Control Solenoid F Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Electrical-Circuit Resistance Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Below Threshold F electrical circuit the new module/component installation note at the
resistance below top of the DTC Index
threshold
P2734-1E Pressure Control Solenoid F Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Electrical-Circuit Resistance Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Out Of Range F electrical circuit the new module/component installation note at the
resistance out of range top of the DTC Index
Circuit Short to Ground or F Control Circuit Short to the new module/component installation note at the
Open Ground or Open top of the DTC Index
Control Circuit Low - Circuit Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Short to Ground F Control Circuit Short to the new module/component installation note at the
Ground top of the DTC Index
Control Circuit High - Circuit Pressure Control Solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Short to Battery F Control Circuit Short to the new module/component installation note at the
Power top of the DTC Index
P2763-12 Torque Converter Clutch Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Pressure Control Solenoid Pressure control solenoid new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Control Circuit High - Circuit F Circuit Short to Power the new module/component installation note at the
Short to Battery top of the DTC Index
P2764-11 Torque Converter Clutch Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Pressure Control Solenoid Torque converter clutch new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Control Circuit Low - Circuit pressure control solenoid the new module/component installation note at the
Short to Ground control Circuit Short to top of the DTC Index
Ground
P2764-1A Torque Converter Clutch Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Control Circuit Low-Circuit pressure control solenoid the new module/component installation note at the
Resistance Below Threshold control circuit resistance top of the DTC Index
below threshold
P2764-1E Torque Converter Clutch Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
Control Circuit Low-Circuit pressure control solenoid the new module/component installation note at the
Resistance Out Of Range control circuit resistance top of the DTC Index
out of range
P2807-11 Pressure Control Solenoid G Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
- Circuit Short to Ground Park solenoid Circuit new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Short to Ground the new module/component installation note at the
- Circuit Short to Battery Park solenoid Circuit new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Short to Power the new module/component installation note at the
- Circuit Open Park solenoid Circuit new Transmission control module as required, refer to
Open Circuit the new module/component installation note at the
P2807-14 Pressure Control Solenoid G Carry out any diagnostic pinpoint tests associated
www.JagDocs.com
- Circuit Short to Ground or Park solenoid Circuit with this DTC using the manufacturer approved
Open Short to Ground or Open diagnostic system. Suspect the Transmission control
Circuit module. Install a new Transmission control module as
B1087-82 LIN Bus "A" - alive / Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
sequence counter incorrect / Alive counter fault Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
not updated Transmission control module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short to Ground or Open Circuit (LIN Bus)
B1087-83 LIN Bus "A" - value of signal Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs Refer
protection calculation Checksum error to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
incorrect Transmission control module to Transmission Shift
Module for Short to Ground or Open Circuit (LIN Bus)
B1087-87 LIN Bus "A" - missing Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs Refer
message GSM is NOT visible to the to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
Transmission control Transmission control module to Transmission Shift
module on the LIN Bus Module for Short or Open Circuit (LIN Bus)
B1087-88 LIN Bus "A" - Bus off Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check
LIN Bus Circuit fault. Transmission control module to Transmission shift
Check hardware of LIN module for Short, Open Circuit (LIN Bus). Check
connection between Transmission Shift Module for related DTCs
transmission and GSM
U0001-88 High Speed CAN Refer to the electrical Circuit diagrams and check CAN
Communication Bus - Bus off CAN Bus off Bus for Circuit fault
U0100-82 Lost Communication With Check Engine control module for stored DTCs
Engine control module/PCM Alive counter fault
"A" - alive / sequence
updated
U0100-83 Lost Communication With Check Engine control module for stored DTCs
Engine control module/PCM Checksum fault
"A" - value of signal
incorrect
Engine control module/PCM CAN Timeout
NOTE: Do NOT install a new Engine control
"A" - missing message module if an Engine control module Timeout DTC is
only logged in the Transmission control module, the
failure is NOT with the Engine control module
Check Engine control module for stored DTCs. Check

CAN Bus Circuit for fault
U0103-82 Lost Communication With Check Transmission shift module for stored DTCs.
Gear Shift Control Module Alive counter fault Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
A-alive / sequence counter
Gear Shift Control Module A Checksum fault Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
- value of signal protection
Gear Shift Control Module A CAN Timeout Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
- missing message
U0122-82 Lost Communication With Check Anti-lock braking system for stored DTCs. Check
Vehicle Dynamics Control Alive counter fault CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Module - alive / sequence
updated
Vehicle Dynamics Control Checksum fault CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Module - value of signal
incorrect
Vehicle Dynamics Control CAN Timeout CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Module - missing message
U0126-00 Lost Communication With Check Steering angle sensor for stored DTCs. Check
Steering Angle Sensor Lost Communication CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Module - no sub type With Steering Angle
information Sensor Module
U0128-87 Lost Communication With Check Electronic Parking Brake Module for stored DTCs.
www.JagDocs.com
Park Brake Control Module - CAN timeout electronic Check CAN Bus Circuit for fault
missing message parking brake module
U0140-82 Lost Communication With Check Central junction box for stored DTCs. Check CAN
Body Control Module - alive Alive counter fault Bus Circuit for fault
/ sequence counter incorrect
/ not updated
Body Control Module - value Checksum fault Bus Circuit for fault
of signal protection
Body Control Module - CAN Timeout Bus Circuit for fault
missing message
U0155-87 Lost Communication With Check Instrument cluster for stored DTCs. Check CAN
Instrument Panel Cluster CAN timeout instrument Bus Circuit for fault
(Instrument cluster) Control cluster
Module - missing message
U0300-68 Control Module - event Check Central junction box software level, Check
information Transmission software Transmission control module Software level, Update
does not match vehicle software as required using the manufacturer approved
network process
U0401-08 Invalid Data Received From Check Engine control module for stored DTCs, Check
Engine control module/PCM Inaccurate engine speed, CAN Bus circuit for faults
A - Bus Signal Message torque information
Failures
U0401-68 Invalid Data Received from Check Engine control module for stored DTCs. Check
Engine control module/PCM Inaccurate engine speed, CAN Bus Circuit for fault
A - event information torque information
U0401-86 Invalid Data Received from Check Engine control module for stored DTCs. Check
Engine control module/PCM Inaccurate engine speed, CAN Bus Circuit for fault
A - Signal Invalid torque information
U0404-68 Invalid Data Received from Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
Gear Shift Control Module A Incorrect CAN data Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN Bus
- event information received from for Circuit fault
Transmission shift
module
U0404-81 Invalid Data Received from Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
Gear Shift Control Module A Incorrect LIN data Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN Bus
- Invalid Serial Data received from for Circuit fault
Received Transmission shift
module
U0416-68 Invalid Data Received From Check Engine control module for stored DTCs. Check
Vehicle Dynamics Control Event information brake CAN Bus Circuit for fault
Module - event information information
U0422-68 Invalid Data Received From Check Central junction box for stored DTCs. Check CAN
Body Control Module - event Event information invalid Bus Circuit for fault
information Power mode information
U101B-87 Lost Communication With Check Transmission Shift Module for stored DTCs.
GSM - Multiple Bus-missing Missing message lost Refer to Circuit diagrams and check CAN and LIN Bus
message communication with for Circuit fault
Transmission Shift
Module (multiple Bus)
U3000-49 Control Module - internal Suspect the Transmission control module. Install a
electronic failure Internal electronic failure new Transmission control module as required, refer to
U3000-4B Control Module - Circuit Check and correct oil level. Check hydraulic flow
resistance above threshold Internal electronic failure through oil cooler and pipe circuit for restriction or
blockage. If no restrictions found, suspect the
the DTC Index
U3000-81 Control Module - invalid Reflash the Transmission control module using the
serial data received Vehicle or Engine type manufacturer approved process
signal incorrect from BCM
or incorrect Transmission
control module software
installed
www.JagDocs.com
U3001-94 Control Module Improper Check Engine control module For Power (generator)
Shutdown - unexpected Control Module Improper faults. Check Power and Ground Circuit and Battery for
operation Shutdown (voltage fault. Clear DTCs. Road Test. If DTC reoccurs suspect
related) the Transmission control module. Install a new
the DTC Index
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Fluid Level Check
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
307-452
Wrench, Transmission Filler Plug
Activation
WARNINGS:
Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.
Observe due care when working near a hot exhaust system.
1.
www.JagDocs.com
The following steps must be observed before starting the

transmission fluid level check.
The vehicle must be on a horizontal ramp.
The parking brake must be applied.
The engine must be running for 2 minutes with the transmission
control switch (TCS) in the "P" position.
2. CAUTION: Make sure that the transmission fluid temperature is

below 30 degrees before starting the fluid level check.
Connect Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment to the vehicle.
3.
Apply, and hold, the footbrake.
Move the selector lever from 'P' through all the gear positions,
pausing in each gear position for 2-3 seconds and return to the
'P' position.
Installation).
6. Place a suitable container under the transmission fluid fill plug.

7. CAUTIONS:
The transmission fluid level must only be checked

when the temperature of the fluid is between 30 degrees
and 50 degrees. The fluid level obtained will be incorrect if
the reading is outside this temperature range.
Discard the seal.
8. NOTE: Use transmission fluid meeting Jaguar

www.JagDocs.com
specification.
If the transmission fluid does not come out of the

transmission fluid fill plug hole the transmission fluid level
is insufficient. If this is the case add the transmission fluid
in 0.5 liter units into the transmission fluid fill plug hole
until fluid comes out.
9. NOTE: Make sure the transmission fluid temperature
does not exceed 50 °C (122 °F). If the transmission fluid
temperature does exceed 50 °C (122 °F) stop the
transmission fluid level check and allow the transmission
fluid to cool until the temperature is below 30 °C (86 °F).
Allow the transmission fluid to drain from the transmission

fluid filler plug hole until the flow almost stops.
10. NOTE: Install a new sealing washer.

www.JagDocs.com
Using the special tool, install the new transmission fluid fill
plug.
11. CAUTION: Make sure the transmission fluid fill plug is

tightened to the correct specification. Failure to follow this
To make sure the transmission fill plug is torqued to

the correct specification. Using the special tool and
torque wrench the following calculation steps must be
followed.
Step 1. Multiply 35 Nm by the effective length of the
torque wrench (1).
Step 2. Add the effective length of the special tool (2)
to the effective length of the torque wrench (1).
Step 3. Divide the total of step 1 by the total of step 2.
Step 4. Set the torque wrench to the figure arrived at in
step 3.
Tighten the transmission fluid fill plug to the torque
given by the calculation.

13. Remove the container.
Installation).
16. Disconnect the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment from the vehicle.
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
307-452
Wrench, Transmission Filler Plug
WARNINGS:
Observe due care when draining, as the fluid can be very hot.
Observe due care when working near a hot exhaust system.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation).
3. Place a container under the transmission.
www.JagDocs.com
Allow the fluid to drain.

installed.
Torque: 8 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
7. NOTE: Use transmission fluid meeting Jaguar

specification.
Refill the transmission with fluid.

8. Allow the transmission fluid to drain from the transmission
fluid filler plug hole until the flow almost stops.
9. NOTE: Install a new sealing washer.

www.JagDocs.com
Loosely install the transmission fluid fill plug.
10. CAUTION: Make sure the transmission fluid fill plug is

tightened to the correct specification. Failure to follow this
To make sure the transmission fill plug is torqued to

the correct specification. Using the special tool and
torque wrench the following calculation steps must be
followed.
Step 1. Multiply 35 Nm by the effective length of the
torque wrench (1).
Step 2. Add the effective length of the special tool (2)
to the effective length of the torque wrench (1).
Step 3. Divide the total of step 1 by the total of step 2.
Step 4. Set the torque wrench to the figure arrived at in
step 3.
Tighten the transmission fluid fill plug to the torque
given by the calculation.
11. Carry out a transmission fluid level check.

Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01B Automatic
Petrol, General Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Input Shaft Seal
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
100-012-01
Slide Hammer Adapter
307-613
Holding Pins, Torque Converter
www.JagDocs.com
308-246
Installer, Front Seal
308-375
Remover, Input and Output Seal
Removal


Petrol, Removal).

www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the edges of the

component.
Discard the seal.
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 100-012-01, 308-375
Installation

2. NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark is visable
through the inspection hole as illustrated.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the torque converter is fully

www.JagDocs.com
located into the oil pump drive.

www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Extension Housing Seal
Special Tool(s)
100-012
Slide Hammer
100-012-01
Slide Hammer Adapter
204-264
Pinion Seal Replacer
www.JagDocs.com
205-053
Retainer, Drive Flange
303-D121
Puller, General Purpose
308-375
Remover, Input and Output Seal
Removal
3. Refer to: Driveshaft - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (205-01 Driveshaft, Removal and
Installation).
4. Refer to: Transmission Support Insulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (307-01B

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
5. CAUTION: Discard the nut.

www.JagDocs.com
6. Special Tool(s): 303-D121
Special Tool(s): 100-012, 100-012-01, 308-375

Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
foreign material.
Install a new seal.
2. WARNING: Make sure that a new nut is installed.
Torque: 60 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
3. Refer to: Transmission Support Insulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel (307-01B

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
Installation).
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Control Module (TCM) and Main Control Valve
Body
Removal
NOTE: The transmission control module (TCM) is part of the main control valve body and cannot be serviced separately.
3. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter (307-01B Automatic
Petrol, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
4.
5.
NOTE: Note the position of the manual park brake

release.
www.JagDocs.com
8.
www.JagDocs.com
9.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Make sure that when fully fitted, all seals protrude by

the same amount.
www.JagDocs.com
Install the new seals.
Install a new seal block.
2. CAUTIONS:
Install the new seals.
Make sure that when fully fitted, all seals protrude by

the same amount.
3. CAUTION: Make sure the manual park release is
correctly engaged.
Torque: 8 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
installed.
5.
6.
7. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter (307-01B Automatic
Petrol, Removal and Installation).
9. If a new component has been installed, configure using Jaguar approved

www.JagDocs.com
diagnostic equipment.
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Fluid Pan, Gasket and Filter
Removal
Installation).
4. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill (307-01B Automatic

5.
www.JagDocs.com

www.JagDocs.com
7. CAUTIONS:

Torque: 8 Nm
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Support Insulator V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L
Petrol
Removal
Installation).
3. CAUTION: During this procedure the transmission

crossmember is removed, make sure the transmission is
correctly supported to avoid damaging associated
components.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 48 Nm

Torque: 55 Nm
Installation

5.0L Petrol - Transmission Support Insulator TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
Installation).
3. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4.
5. CAUTION: During this procedure the transmission
crossmember is removed, make sure the transmission is
correctly supported to avoid damaging associated
components.
Torque: 48 Nm

Torque: 55 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

5.0L Petrol - Transmission, Transmission Fluid Cooler and Transmission Fluid
Cooler Tubes V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal
CAUTION: Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking caps.
3. Refer to: Catalytic Converter RH (309-00C Exhaust System - V8 5.0L

Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
4. Refer to: Catalytic Converter LH (309-00C Exhaust System - V8 5.0L

5.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
8.
7.
6.
9.
Install blanking caps to the exposed ports.

www.JagDocs.com
11.
12.
13.
Make sure that the alignment mark is visible through
the inspection hole on removal of the last torque
converter bolt.
www.JagDocs.com

15.
Using a suitable tie strap, secure the driveshaft.
16. WARNING: Make sure that the transmission is secured with

Using a suitable stand, support the transmission.
17.
www.JagDocs.com
18. NOTE: The transmission is lowered for access.
Lower the rear of the transmission for access.

20.
www.JagDocs.com
21.
www.JagDocs.com
22.
23. CAUTION: Make sure that the torque converter

remains in the transmission.
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: This step requires the aid of another

technician.
Install the torque converter retainer.
24. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
Clamp the hoses to minimize coolant loss.
25.
www.JagDocs.com
26.
27.
28.
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
2. Torque: 11 Nm
3. Torque: 5 Nm
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
6. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
www.JagDocs.com


Raise the powertrain assembly jack and transmission

assembly.
www.JagDocs.com
9. NOTE: Transmission shown removed for clarity.
Torque: 48 Nm
10. Torque: 48 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
11. Torque: 48 Nm
12. Torque: 45 Nm
13. Remove the support.

www.JagDocs.com
14. Torque: 110 Nm
NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark is visible

Torque: 63 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
18.
16.
17.
19.
20. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
21. CAUTION: Install new o-ring seals
Torque: 10 Nm
22.
23.
www.JagDocs.com


27. Check and top up the cooling system as required.
28. Set the heater controls to HOT.
29. CAUTION: Observe the engine temperature warning light. If the

warning light is displayed, switch off immediately and allow to cool.
Failure to follow this instruction may cause damage to the vehicle.
Start the engine and allow to idle until hot air is emited at the face
registers.
www.JagDocs.com
Raise the engine speed to 2000 RPM and maintain at 2000 RPM until the
engine cooling fan operates.
31. CAUTION: Switch off the engine and allow the coolant temperature
to go cold.
Switch the engine off and allow to cool.
leakage.
33. WARNINGS:
When releasing the cooling system pressure, cover the coolant

expansion tank cap with a thick cloth.
Since injury such as scalding could be caused by escaping steam or

coolant, make sure the vehicle cooling system is cool prior to carrying
www.JagDocs.com
out this procedure.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the coolant level remains above the "COLD FILL RANGE"
lower level mark.
Anti-freeze concentration must be maintained at 50%.
NOTE: When the cooling system is warm, the coolant will be

approximately 10mm above the upper level mark on the expansion tank
with the cap removed.
Check and top-up the coolant if required.
34. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level Check (307-01B Automatic

5.0L Petrol - Transmission, Transmission Fluid Cooler and Transmission Fluid
Cooler Tubes TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Special Tool(s)
303-021
303-1129
www.JagDocs.com
303-1497
Removal
1.
2.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
7.

10.
www.JagDocs.com
11.

driveshaft.
15. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold Crossover Pipe (303-01, Removal and
Installation).
16.
www.JagDocs.com
17. NOTES:

Secure with cable ties.
www.JagDocs.com
18.

www.JagDocs.com

Remove the rubber access cover.

21.

www.JagDocs.com


converter bolt.
www.JagDocs.com
24.
23.
25.
26. WARNING: Make sure that the transmission is secured

www.JagDocs.com
with suitable retaining straps.

Align the powertrain assembly jack to the transmission.
27.
www.JagDocs.com


Lower the transmission jack.
www.JagDocs.com
31.
CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
www.JagDocs.com
32.
CAUTION: Clamp the hoses to minimize coolant loss.
33.
34.
35.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation

2. Torque: 5 Nm
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
5.
6. Torque: 5 Nm
8. Make sure that the alignment mark is visible through the

inspection hole on installation of the first torque converter
bolt.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com



assembly.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 48 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
12. Torque: 45 Nm
13. Remove the transmission jack.

www.JagDocs.com
15.
14.
16. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 63 Nm
18.
19.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 10 Nm
21. Torque: 23 Nm

Torque: 48 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
23. Torque: 30 Nm
24. Refer to: Exhaust Manifold Crossover Pipe (303-01, Removal and
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
driveshaft.
Torque: 110 Nm
27. Torque: 5 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
28. Torque: 7 Nm

31.
Remove the special tool supporting the engine.
32.
Remove the special tools from the engine.
Special Tool(s): 303-1129, 303-1497
www.JagDocs.com
36.
37.

www.JagDocs.com
registers.

to go cold.
leakage.
44. WARNINGS:


out this procedure.
CAUTIONS:
lower level mark.


www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission and Transmission Fluid Cooler V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal

www.JagDocs.com

5.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
8.
7.
6.
9.

www.JagDocs.com
11.
12.
13.
converter bolt.
www.JagDocs.com

15.
16. WARNING: Make sure that the transmission is secured with

Using a suitable stand, support the transmission.
17.
www.JagDocs.com
Lower the rear of the transmission for access.

20.
www.JagDocs.com
21.
www.JagDocs.com
22.

www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: This step requires the aid of another

technician.
Install the torque converter retainer.
24. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
25.
26.
www.JagDocs.com
27.
Installation
1. Torque: 5 Nm
2.
www.JagDocs.com
3.
4. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
www.JagDocs.com



assembly.
7. NOTE: Transmission shown removed for clarity.
Torque: 48 Nm
8. Torque: 48 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
9. Torque: 48 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
10. Torque: 45 Nm
11. Remove the support.

www.JagDocs.com
12. Torque: 110 Nm
NOTE: Make sure that the alignment mark is visible

Torque: 63 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
16.
14.
15.
17.
18. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 10 Nm
20.
21.
www.JagDocs.com



registers.
to go cold.
leakage.
31. WARNINGS:


www.JagDocs.com
out this procedure.
CAUTIONS:
lower level mark.


www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission and Transmission Fluid Cooler TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Special Tool(s)
303-021
303-1129
303-1497
www.JagDocs.com
Removal
1.
2.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
7.

10.
www.JagDocs.com
11.

Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol -
Item Specification
Transmission fluid ATF Shell M 1375.4
Vehicles with 3.0L diesel engine
Description Nm lb-ft
Transmission fluid cooler tube to transmission housing bolt 23 17
Transmission fluid cooler tube bracket to engine oil pan retaining bolt 23 17
Vehicles with 5.0L engine
Description Nm lb-ft
Transmission fluid cooler tube to transmission housing bolt 23 17
Transmission fluid cooler tube bracket to engine oil pan retaining bolt 11 8
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Cooling - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Latch-plate
2 Feed hose and pipe (from transmission)
4 Engine coolant hose connections
5 Return hose and pipe (to transmission)
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Cooling - Overview
OVERVIEW
Transmission cooling is provided by a transmission fluid cooler, which transfers heat from the transmission to the engine
cooling system. The transmission fluid cooler is attached to a mounting bracket on the front subframe, in the front left corner
of the engine compartment.
Two hose and pipe assemblies connect the transmission fluid cooler to the automatic transmission. Two engine coolant hose
connections are incorporated into the top of the transmission fluid cooler for the supply and return of coolant from the engine
cooling system. For additional information, refer to 303-03D Engine Cooling.
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Cooling - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
Fluid from the pump in the automatic transmission flows through the feed hose and pipe to the transmission fluid cooler. The
fluid then flows through the transmission fluid cooler, and the return hose and pipe, to the sump of the automatic
transmission.
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Cooling
For a detailed description of the automatic transmission cooling system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: (307-02B Transmission/Transaxle Cooling - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8
S/C 5.0L Petrol)
Transmission Cooling (Description and Operation),

Transmission Cooling (Description and Operation),
Transmission Cooling (Description and Operation).

1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system.
Visual Inspection
Mechanical
Feed and return tubes

Connections to the automatic transmission and the automatic transmission fluid cooler
Automatic transmission fluid level
www.JagDocs.com
the next step.
Symptom Chart
Condition Possible Causes Action

Over heating of the Obstruction in the automatic Flush out the automatic transmission fluid cooler with new
automatic transmission fluid cooler automatic transmission fluid. If the flushing is unsuccessful,
transmission install a new transmission fluid cooler.
Over heating of the Obstruction in the automatic Flush out the automatic transmission fluid cooler tubes with new
automatic transmission fluid tubes automatic transmission fluid. If the flushing is unsuccessful install
transmission new automatic transmission fluid cooler tubes.
Loss of automatic Connections to the automatic Check the integrity of the tubes, connections and seals. Check the
transmission fluid transmission and the automatic torque of the tube fixings.
transmission fluid cooler
Loss of automatic Leak at oil cooler Check the integrity of tubes, connections and seals. Check the
transmission fluid torque of the tube fixings.
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Fluid Cooler V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
Removal

3. Refer to: Cooling System Draining and Vacuum Filling (303-03C Engine
Cooling - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
4. CAUTIONS:
www.JagDocs.com

blanking caps.
5.
6.
7. Torque: 5 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol - Transmission Fluid Cooler TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal

www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
6.
7.
8. Torque: 5 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel /V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol -
Uppshift paddle switch to steering wheel retaining bolt 3 - 27
Downshift paddle switch to steering wheel retaining bolt 3 - 27
Transmission control switch (TCS) to floor console bracket retaining bolts 4 - 35
Emergency park position release lever cable bracket to transmission housing retaining bolts 11 8 -
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - External Controls - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Upshift (+) paddle switch
2 Downshift (-) paddle switch
4 Emergency park release
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - External Controls - Overview
OVERVIEW
The external controls for the transmission consist of a JaguarDrive selector, two paddle switches and an emergency park
release.
The JaguarDrive selector transmits driver transmission selections to the TCM (transmission control module). The paddle
switches allow the driver to initiate gear shifts when the transmission is in the sequential shift manual mode. The emergency
park release ensures the transmission is kept in neutral during vehicle recovery operations.
Four additional switches adjacent to the JaguarDrive selector control the JaguarDrive control functions. For additional
information, refer to 204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization Description and Operation.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - External Controls - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
6 Clockspring
7 Steering wheel audio switches
8 Upshift paddle switch
9 Downshift paddle switch
System Operation
JAGUARDRIVE SELECTOR
Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector to any of the five positions is sensed by the TCM (transmission control module) via the
high speed CAN bus. A LIN bus connection is also provided, but is only used in the event of a CAN bus failure as a back-up.
The TCM then reacts according to the selected position. The JaguarDrive selector is a magnetic system using Hall effect
sensors to determine the position of the selector.
The S (sport) position selection allows the TCM to operate the transmission using the semi-automatic Jaguar sequential shift.
Gear selections are sensed by the TCM when the driver operates the steering wheel paddle switches. Once the JaguarDrive
selector position is confirmed, the TCM outputs appropriate information on the high speed CAN bus which is received by the
instrument cluster to display the gear selection information in the message center.
The paddles can also be used on a temporary basis when the JaguarDrive selector is in the D (drive) position to override the
automatic gear selection if required.
PARK INTERLOCK AND NEUTRAL LOCK

Neutral lock is a requirement for the JaguarDrive selector. The selector is always locked at ignition on when the engine is not
www.JagDocs.com
running, except after an engine stall when the selector is not in P (park) or N (neutral).
If, when driving with the JaguarDrive selector in S, D or R (reverse) at a speed of more than 5 km/h (3 mph), the driver selects
P or N:
Without the brake pedal pressed, the JaguarDrive selector will be immediately locked once the vehicle speed falls to
below 5 km/h (3 mph).
With the brake pedal pressed, the JaguarDrive selector will remain locked for as long as the brake pedal remains
pressed, regardless of vehicle speed.
The transmission will only engage park once the vehicle speed is less than 2 km/h (1 mph).
If the driver selects N and releases the brake pedal with a vehicle speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the JaguarDrive selector
will be locked 2 seconds after N is selected. The selector will remain locked until the driver presses the brake pedal again.
To ensure that a driver request to change from a non-driving range (N for example) to a driving range (D for example), the park
interlock and neutral lock features are used in conjunction with the intermediate position.
If the transmission receives a range change request without the brake pedal pressed, the TCM initiates a soft lock function.
The transmission will remain in park or neutral, depending on the starting position.
If a transmission position letter is flashing in the message center and the vehicle has no drive, the driver must:
Press the brake pedal.

Reselect N or P on the JaguarDrive selector.
Select the required driving range, ensuring that the brake pedal is pressed.
Rocking Function
The rocking function compliments the neutral lock function. For all changes from a non-driving range to a driving range, it is
necessary to press the brake pedal (to release either the park interlock or neutral lock).
In situations where the driver will require to change the gear selection from R to D, or from D to R, without brake pedal input
(car park maneuvering, 3 point turns or 'rocking' the vehicle from a slippery surface for example), the rocking function gives a 2
second lock delay when N is selected on the JaguarDrive selector and the brake pedal is not pressed.
Intermediate Position
If the JaguarDrive selector is rotated slowly from P to S and back to position P with the brake pedal pressed, the R or D
position display letter in the message center will flash and the transmission will remain in park or neutral depending on the
previous starting position of the selector.
If the brake pedal is released when R or D is flashing in the message center and the JaguarDrive selector is rotated to the R or
D position, the required range will not be selected and the transmission will remain in park or neutral, depending on the
previous starting position. This feature is known as soft lock.
If the driving range letter in the message center is flashing and the vehicle has no drive, the driver should depress the brake
pedal to reselect N or P, and then select the required driving range while the brake pedal remains pressed.
JAGUARDRIVE SELECTOR
The Jaguardrive selector is a rotary selector installed in the top of the JaguarDrive selector module. The JaguarDrive selector
module is located in the floor console and controls the vehicle optimization functions on the vehicle. For additional
information, refer to: Ride and Handling Optimization (204-06 Ride and Handling Optimization, Description and Operation).
The TCM allows the transmission to be operated as a conventional automatic unit by selecting P, R, N, D on the JaguarDrive
selector.
Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector allows the selection of P, R, N and D. By depressing the JaguarDrive selector and rotating
clockwise from the D position, S mode can be selected. The JaguarDrive selector is fully electronic rotary transmission selector
www.JagDocs.com
with no mechanical connection to the transmission.
The JaguarDrive selector rises from the JaguarDrive selector module once the engine is running. When the engine is stopped
with the JaguarDrive selector in any position other than N, it retracts into the JaguarDrive selector module again. If the
selector is in position N when the engine is stopped, it remains in the raised position for up to 10 minutes, for use in a drive
through car wash for example. After 10 minutes the selector automatically retracts into the JaguarDrive selector module. The
selector also retracts if P is selected within the 10 minute period.
If the JaguarDrive selector does not rise from the console when the engine is started, but electrical power is supplied to the
selector, the retracted selector can still be rotated to make selections. If electrical power to the JaguarDrive selector is lost,
the selector will not rise from the console when the engine is started and the retracted selector will not rotate.
The JaguarDrive selector contains an internal interlock solenoid to prevent the selector from being rotated when the engine is
not running.
The engine can be stopped with the JaguarDrive selector in any position. Once the engine is stopped the selector will
automatically reset to the P position and the transmission park lock will be engaged, except if the selector is moved to the N
position when the engine is stopped.
PADDLE SWITCHES
www.JagDocs.com
Two gear change 'paddle' switches are fitted at the rear of the steering wheel and allow the driver to operate the transmission
as a semi-automatic manual gearbox using the Jaguar sequential shift feature.
Each paddle switch has three connections; ground, illumination PWM (pulse width modulation) supply and ground switch
signal. The paddle switches are hardwired to the steering wheel audio switches. Operation of the paddle switch completes a
ground path to the audio switch assembly. The audio switch assembly converts the completed ground signal into a LIN bus
signal which is passed via the clockspring to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster converts the signal into a high
speed CAN bus signal to the TCM.
Pulling the LH (left-hand) downshift - paddle provides down changes and pulling the RH (right-hand) upshift (+) paddle
provides up changes. The first operation of either paddle, after sport mode is selected, puts the transmission into permanent
manual Jaguar sequential shift mode. Rotation of the JaguarDrive selector back to the D position, returns the transmission to
conventional automatic operation.
Temporary operation of manual Jaguar sequential shift mode can also be operated with the JaguarDrive selector in the D
position. Operation of either the upshift or downshift paddles activates the manual mode operation. If the JaguarDrive selector
is in D, Jaguar sequential shift will cancel after a time period or can be cancelled by pressing and holding the + paddle for
approximately 2 seconds.
EMERGENCY PARK RELEASE
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Latch
2 Strap
3 Locking cylinder
4 Operating lever
5 Upper cable
6 Cable joint
7 Lower cable
8 Cable bracket
9 Park interlock lever
If a vehicle requires recovery/transportation, the emergency park release mechanism is used to manually disengage the park
lock and engage the transmission in neutral.
The emergency park release mechanism consists of an operating lever that is connected to a park interlock lever on the
transmission by an upper and lower cable assembly.
The operating lever is installed in the floor console, under the trim panel between the drinks holder and the cubby box. The
park interlock lever is attached to the transmission selector shaft.
One end of the operating lever is attached to a base by a hinge pin. A locking cylinder is installed in the other end of the
operating lever, to secure the operating lever to the base. The operating lever is raised by pulling on a strap.
When operated, the emergency park release mechanism turns the transmission selector shaft.
To disengage the park lock:
Open the cubby box lid and the drinks holder lid.
Remove the trim panel from between the drinks holder and the cubby box.
Rotate the locking mechanism of the emergency park release lever 90 degrees counterclockwise.
Apply the footbrake, pull the operating lever upwards and ensure it locks in the vertical position.
Raising the operating lever causes the emergency park release cable to rotate the park interlock lever on the transmission,
which disengages the parking pawl and engages neutral. This allows the vehicle to freewheel.
To re-engage the park lock:
Hold the strap on the operating lever, release the latch and lower the operating lever to the horizontal position.
Lock the operating lever by turning the locking mechanism 90 degrees clockwise.
Install the trim panel.
Close the cubby box lid and the drinks holder lid.
www.JagDocs.com
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol - External Controls
For a detailed description of the transmission external controls, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (307-05)
External Controls (Description and Operation),

External Controls (Description and Operation),
External Controls (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Check for stuck/jammed switches and buttons Fuse(s)

Visibly damaged or worn components Loose or corroded electrical connector(s)
www.JagDocs.com
Loose or missing fasteners Transmission control module

Transmission control switch
the next step.
DTC Index
For a list of DTCs that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Transmission Control Module (TCM) (100-00, Description and Operation)
/
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Transmission Control Switch (TCS) (100-00, Description and Operation).
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V6 3.0L Petrol -
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
Removal
2. Refer to: Audio and Climate Control Assembly (415-01A Information and
Entertainment System, Removal and Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
5. Torque: 4 Nm
6. Torque: 4 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
7. Torque: 4 Nm
8.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
1. CAUTION: Make sure that all diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) have
been removed after the road test.

Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Knob
Removal
1.
Start the engine and make sure that 'P' is selected.
www.JagDocs.com
2. Torque: 2 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Emergency Park Position Release Lever
Removal
2. Refer to: Air Deflector (501-02, Removal and Installation).
4. Refer to: Floor Console Side Trim Panel (501-12 Instrument Panel and
www.JagDocs.com
5. WARNING: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle

stands.
Torque: 11 Nm
6.
7. Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
8.
9.
10. Torque: 3 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
11.
Installation

Automatic Transmission/Transaxle External Controls - V6 3.0L Petrol - Upshift
Paddle Switch
Removal
1. Torque: 3 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
2.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the wiring harness is routed correctly.

Downshift Paddle Switch
Removal
1. Torque: 3 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
2.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the wiring harness is routed correctly.

www.JagDocs.com
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Description Nm lb-ft lb -in

Turbocharger to catalytic converter retaining studs 15 11 -
Turbocharger to catalytic converter retaining nuts 25 18 -
Catalytic converter bracket 25 18 -
Catalytic converter securing strap bolts 9 - 80
Catalytic converter to Diesel particulate filter (DPF) securing strap bolts 11 8 -
DPF support insulator bracket retaining bolts 9 - 80
DPF support insulator to bracket nuts 6 - 53
DPF to front muffler securing strap nuts 55 41 -
Front muffler support insulator bracket 30 22 -
Rear muffler securing strap nuts 55 41 -
Catalytic converter temperature sensors 35 26 -
DPF temperature sensor 35 26 -
DPF differential pressure sensor bracket bolt 7 5 -
DPF differential pressure sensor pipe clamp bolt 2 - 18
DPF differential pressure sensor pipe union nuts 17 13 -
DPF heat shield retaining bolts 6 - 53
www.JagDocs.com
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust System - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - 3.0L DIESEL FROM 2010MY

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Manifold flange (2 off)
2 Differential pressure sensor (located above transmission)
4 Rear silencer (2 off)
5 Exhaust trim (2 off)
6 Mounting rubber (6 off)
7 Flexible intermediate resonator assembly
8 Post DPF temperature sensor
9 Pre DPF temperature sensor
10 Mass damper
11 Post catalyst exhaust gas temperature sensor
13 Pre catalyst exhaust gas temperature sensor
14 Catalytic converter
www.JagDocs.com
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust System - Overview
OVERVIEW
The 3.0L V6 diesel exhaust system is fabricated from stainless steel and is supplied as 6 separate assemblies; a front section
incorporating a catalytic converter for the LH (left-hand) bank of cylinders, a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) and a rear section
incorporating a flexible intermediate assembly and two rear silencers.
The system is attached to the underside of the body with mounting rubbers which are located on mild steel hanger bars that
are welded to the system. The mounting rubbers locate on corresponding hangers which are welded or bolted to the underside
of the vehicle body.
The exhaust system incorporates a DPF which allows the vehicle to exceed European Stage 5 (EU5) emission standards.
www.JagDocs.com
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust System - System Operation and
System Operation
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
Passive Regeneration
Passive regeneration requires no special engine management intervention and occurs during normal engine operation. The
passive regeneration involves a slow conversion of the particulate matter deposited in the DPF into carbon dioxide. This
process is active when the DPF temperature reaches 250°C (482°F) and is a continuous process when the vehicle is being
driven at higher engine loads and speeds.
During passive regeneration, only a portion of the particulate matter is converted into carbon dioxide. This is due to the
chemical reaction process which is only effective within the normal operating temperature range of 250°C to 500°C (482°F to
932°F).
Above this temperature range the conversion efficiency of the particulates into carbon dioxide increases as the DPF
temperature is raised. These temperatures can only be achieved using the active regeneration process.
Active Regeneration
Active regeneration starts when the particulate loading of the DPF reaches a threshold as monitored or determined by the DPF
control software. The threshold calculation is based on driving style, distance travelled and back pressure signals from the
differential pressure sensor.
Active regeneration generally occurs every 450 miles (725 km) although this is highly dependant on how the vehicle is driven.
www.JagDocs.com
For example, if the vehicle is driven at low loads in urban traffic regularly, active regeneration will occur more often. This is due
to the rapid build-up of particulates in the DPF than if the vehicle is driven at high speeds when passive regeneration will have
occurred.
The DPF software incorporates a mileage trigger which is used as back-up for active regeneration. If active regeneration has
not been initiated by a back pressure signal from the differential pressure sensor, regeneration is requested based on distance
travelled.
Active regeneration of the DPF is commenced when the temperature of the DPF is increased to the combustion temperature of
the particles. The DPF temperature is raised by increasing the exhaust gas temperature. This is achieved by introducing
post-injection of fuel after the pilot and main fuel injections have occurred.
This is determined by the DPF software monitoring the signals from the two DPF temperature sensors to establish the
temperature of the DPF. Depending on the DPF temperature, the DPF software requests the ECM (engine control module) to
perform either one or two post-injections of fuel:
The first post-injection of fuel retards combustion inside the cylinder which increases the temperature of the exhaust
gas
The second post-injection of fuel is injected late in the power stroke cycle. The fuel partly combusts in the cylinder, but
some unburnt fuel also passes into the exhaust where it creates an exothermic event within the catalytic converter,
further increasing the temperature of the DPF.
The active regeneration process takes approximately 20 minutes to complete. The first phase increases the DPF temperature to
500°C (932°F). The second phase further increases the DPF temperature to 600°C (1112°F) which is the optimum temperature
for particle combustion. This temperature is then maintained for 15-20 minutes to ensure complete incineration of the particles
within the DPF. The incineration process converts the carbon particles to carbon dioxide and water.
The active regeneration temperature of the DPF is closely monitored by the DPF software to maintain a target temperature of
600°C (1112°F) at the DPF inlet. The temperature control ensures that the temperatures do not exceed the operational limits
of the turbocharger and the catalytic converter. The turbocharger inlet temperature must not exceed 830°C (1526°F) and the
catalytic converter brick temperature must not exceed 800°C (1472°F) and the exit temperature must remain below 750°C
(1382°F).
During the active regeneration process the following ECM controlled events occur:
The turbocharger is adjusted to reduce boost pressure. This minimizes heat transmission from the exhaust gas to the
turbocharger and reduces the rate of exhaust gas flow allowing optimum heating of the DPF. If the driver demands an
increase in engine torque, the turbocharger will respond by closing the vanes as necessary
The intake throttle is adjusted as this assists in increasing the exhaust gas temperature and reduces the rate of
exhaust gas flow which has the effect of reducing the time for the DPF to reach the optimum temperature
The EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) valve is closed. The use of EGR decreases the exhaust gas temperature and
therefore prevents the optimum DPF temperature being achieved.
If, due to vehicle usage and/or driving style, the active regeneration process cannot take place or is unable to regenerate the
DPF, the dealer can force regenerate the DPF. This is achieved by either driving the vehicle until the engine is at its normal
operating temperature and then driving for a further 20 minutes at speeds of between 45 and 70 mph (72 and 112 km/h) or by
connecting a Jaguar approved diagnostic system to the vehicle which will guide the technician through an automated
regeneration procedure to clean the DPF.
www.JagDocs.com
Diesel Particulate Filter Control
The DPF requires constant monitoring to ensure that it is operating at its optimum efficiency and does not become blocked.
The ECM contains DPF software which controls the monitoring and operation of the DPF system and also monitors other vehicle
data to determine regeneration periods and service intervals.
The DPF software can be divided into three separate control software modules; a DPF supervisor module, a DPF fuel
management module and a DPF air management module.
These three modules are controlled by a fourth software module known as the DPF co-ordinator module. The co-ordinator
module manages the operation of the other modules when an active regeneration is requested. The DPF supervisor module is a
sub-system of the DPF co-ordinator module.
DPF Fuel Management Module
The DPF fuel management module controls the following functions:
Timing and quantity of the four split injections per stroke (pilot, main and two post injections)
Injection pressure and the transition between the three different calibration levels of injection.
The above functions are dependant on the condition of the catalytic converter and the DPF.
The controlled injection determines the required injection level in addition to measuring the activity of the catalytic converter
and the DPF. The fuel management calculates the quantity and timing for the four split injections, for each of the three
calibration levels for injection pressure, and also manages the transition between the levels.
The two post injections are required to separate the functionality of increasing in-cylinder gas temperatures and the production
of hydrocarbons. The first post injection is used to generate the higher in-cylinder gas temperature while simultaneously
retaining the same engine torque output produced during normal (non-regeneration) engine operation. The second post
injection is used to generate hydrocarbons by allowing unburnt fuel into the catalytic converter without producing increased
engine torque.
DPF Air Management Module

www.JagDocs.com
The DPF air management module controls the following functions:
EGR control
Turbocharger boost pressure control
Intake air temperature and pressure control.
During active regeneration, the EGR operation is disabled and the closed-loop activation of the turbocharger boost controller is
calculated. The air management module controls the air in the intake manifold to a predetermined level of pressure and
temperature. This control is required to achieve the correct in-cylinder conditions for stable and robust combustion of the post
injected fuel.
The module controls the intake air temperature by actuating the EGR throttle and by adjustment of the turbocharger boost
pressure control.
DPF Co-ordinator Module
The DPF co-ordinator module reacts to a regeneration request from the supervisor module by initiating and co-ordinating the
following DPF regeneration requests:
• EGR cut-off
• Turbocharger boost pressure control
• Engine load increase
• Control of air pressure and temperature in the intake manifold
• Fuel injection control.
When the supervisor module issues a regeneration request, the co-ordinator module requests EGR cut-off and a regeneration
specific turbocharger boost pressure control. It then waits for a feedback signal from the EGR system confirming that the EGR
valve is closed.
When the EGR valve is closed, the co-ordinator module initiates requests to increase engine load by controlling the intake air
temperature and pressure.
Once confirmation is received that intake conditions are controlled or a calibration time has expired, the co-ordinator module
then changes to a state awaiting an accelerator pedal release manoeuvre from the driver. If this occurs or a calibration time
has expired, the co-ordinator module generates a request to control fuel injections to increase exhaust gas temperature.
FRONT SECTION
The front section comprises 1 catalytic converter for the LH (left-hand) bank of cylinders. The catalytic converter has a welded
inlet pipe which is curved through 90 degrees. The RH (right-hand) bank also has a curved inlet pipe which connects to a pipe
to the DPF. The outer end of each inlet pipe is fitted with a flange which mates with the turbocharger for each bank of
cylinders. Three studs in theLH flange and 2 studs in the RH flange locate in holes in the mating flange on the turbocharger
and are secured with flanged nuts. The base of the catalytic converter has an outlet pipe which is fitted with a cone. Two
curved pipes from the front of the DPF locate over the outlet pipe on the catalytic converter for the LH bank of cylinders and a
2 further pieces of pipe, connected with a cone and clamp, connect to the flange for the RH bank of cylinders. The joints for
both the LH and RH pipes are compressed joints with a cone and are sealed with a clamp.
The curved pipes are welded to the front inlet cone which forms part of the DPF body. The curved pipe has an inner pipe which
is secured in the outer pipe by 2 crimped indentations. The DPF inlet cone has 2 bosses which provide for the connection of a
DPF temperature sensor and the high pressure pipe for the differential pressure sensor. The DPF is oval in shape and is closed
at the rear by an outlet cone with 2 welded short pipes. The LH pipe has a bosses which allows for the attachment of the low
pressure pipe for the differential pressure sensor. The 2 pipes are held together by welded hanger brackets which support the
front section of the exhaust system on 2 mounting rubbers.
REAR SECTION
The 2 pipes from the DPF connect into 2 pipes which are welded to 2 flexible intermediate assemblies. Exhaust gasses exit
each flexible intermediate section via an outlet pipe. Each outlet pipe is braced together with a bracket and also each have a
welded hanger bracket which allow the rear section to be supported on mounting rubbers.
The 2 rear silencers each have a welded inlet pipe which mate with the 2 outlet pipes from the center flexible intermediate
sections and are each secured with a clamp. The fabricated rear silencers have 3 perforated tubes which are supported on 2
perforated baffle plates. The exhaust gasses are expelled from the rear silencer via a single outlet pipe. The outlet pipe from
each silencer has a welded hanger bar which support the rear silencer on mounting rubbers. The outlet pipe is fitted with a
welded outlet which is covered with a polished stainless steel finisher which is part welded to the rear silencer.
CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
The oxidizing catalytic converters are fitted in the front section of each exhaust system, after the pre-catalyst exhaust gas
temperature sensor. The pre and post catalyst exhaust gas temperature sensors are used by the engine management system
to monitor the DPF for regeneration purposes.
The engine management system provides accurately metered quantities of fuel to the combustion chambers to ensure the
most efficient use of fuel and to minimise the exhaust emissions. To further reduce the carbon monoxide and hydrocarbons
content of the exhaust gases, a catalytic converter is integrated into each front pipe of the exhaust system. In the catalytic
converter the exhaust gases are passed through honeycombed ceramic elements coated with a special surface treatment called
www.JagDocs.com
'washcoat'. The washcoat increases the surface area of the ceramic elements by a factor of approximately 7000. On top of the
washcoat is a coating containing platinum and palladium, which are the active constituents for converting harmful emissions
into inert by-products. The platinum and palladium add oxygen to the carbon monoxide and the hydrocarbons in the exhaust
gases, to convert them into carbon dioxide and water respectively.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
3 High pressure pipe
4 Low pressure pipe
5 Post DPF temperature sensor
6 DPF
10 Pre-catalyst exhaust gas temperature sensor
The front section of the DPF contains a catalytic converter to further reduce emissions before the gasses pass through the DPF.
The DPF system reduces diesel particulate emissions to negligible levels to meet European Stage 5 emission standards. The
particulate emissions are the black fumes emitted from the diesel engine under certain load conditions. The emissions are a
complex mixture of solid and liquid components with the majority of the particulates being carbon microspheres on which
hydrocarbons from the engine's fuel and lubricant condense.
The DPF is located in the exhaust system, downstream of the catalytic converters. A major feature of the DPF is its ability for
regeneration. Regeneration is the burning of particulates trapped by the filter to prevent obstruction to the free flow of
exhaust gasses. The regeneration process takes place at calculated intervals and is not noticeable by the driver of the vehicle.
Regeneration is most important, since an overfilled filter can damage the engine through excessive exhaust back pressure and
can itself be damaged. The material trapped in the filter is in the most part carbon particles with some absorbed hydrocarbons.
The DPF system comprises the following components:
Diesel particulate filter (silicone carbide ceramic)

DPF control software incorporated into the ECM
Exhaust gas temperature sensors
Differential pressure sensor.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
A Front face showing alternate closed cells
B Side view showing exhaust gas flow through the filter and particulate build up
C Rear face showing alternate closed cells
The DPF uses a filter technology based on a filter with a catalytic coating. The DPF is made from silicon carbide housed in a
steel container and has excellent thermal shock resistance and thermal conductivity properties. The DPF is designed for the
engine's operating requirements to maintain the optimum back pressure requirements.
The porous surface of the filter consists of a number of small parallel channels positioned in the longitudinal direction of the
exhaust system. Adjacent channels in the filter are alternately plugged at the end. This design forces the exhaust gasses to
flow through the porous filter walls, which act as the filter medium. Particulate matter which are too big to pass through the
porous surface are collected and stored in the channels.
The collected particulate matter, if not removed, can create an obstruction to exhaust gas flow. The particles are removed by a
regeneration process which burns off the particles.
DPF regeneration is controlled by the temperature of the exhaust gasses and the DPF. The DPF includes a wash coat to the
filter surface which comprises platinum and other active components and is similar to the catalytic converter. At certain
exhaust gas and DPF temperatures the wash coat promotes combustion of the particles in addition to oxidizing carbon
monoxide and hydrocarbon emissions.
The exhaust gas and DPF temperatures are controlled by the DPF software located in the ECM. The DPF software monitors the
load status of the DPF based on driving style, distance travelled and signals from the differential pressure sensor and
temperature sensors. When the particulate loading of the DPF reaches predetermined levels, the DPF is actively regenerated
by adjusting, in conjunction with the ECM, various engine control functions such as:
fuel injection
intake air throttle
exhaust gas recirculation
turbocharger boost pressure control.
The regeneration process is possible because of the flexibility of the common-rail fuel injection engine which provides precise
control of fuel flow, fuel pressure and injection timing which are essential requirements to promote the efficient regeneration
process. Two processes are used to regenerate the DPF; passive and active.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 High pressure connection
2 Low pressure connection
The differential pressure sensor is located in the engine compartment, on the lower RH side of the secondary bulkhead. The
sensor is secured with 2 screws.
The differential pressure sensor is used by the DPF software to monitor the condition of the DPF. Two pipe connections on the
sensor are connected by pipes to the inlet and outlet ends of the DPF. The pipes allow the sensor to measure the inlet (high)
and outlet (low ) pressures of the DPF.
As the amount of particulates trapped by the DPF increases, the pressure at the inlet side of the DPF increases in comparison
to the DPF outlet. The DPF software uses this comparison, in conjunction with other data, to calculate the accumulated amount
of trapped particulates.
By measuring the pressure difference between the DPF inlet and outlet and the DPF temperature, the DPF software can
determine if the DPF is becoming blocked and requires regeneration.
DIFFERENTIAL PARTICULATE FILTER TEMPERATURE SENSORS

Four temperature sensors are used in the DPF system. Two temperature sensors are located in the inlet and outlet sides of the
LH catalytic converter, one in the RH downpipe and the fourth sensor is located in the front of the DPF.
The sensors measure the temperature of exhaust gas entering and exiting the catalytic converters and before it passes
through the DPF and provides the information needed to calculate the DPF temperature.
The information is used, in conjunction with other data, to estimate the amount of accumulated particulates and to control the
DPF temperature.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INDICATIONS

For drivers who make regular short journeys at low speeds, it may not be possible to efficiently regenerate the DPF. In this
case, the DPF software will detect a blockage of the DPF from signals from the differential pressure sensor and will alert the
driver as follows.
When the DPF becomes full the driver will be alerted to this condition by a message 'DPF FULL' accompanied by a handbook
symbol. As detailed in the Owners Handbook, the driver should drive the vehicle until the engine is at its normal operating
temperature and then drive for a further 20 minutes at speeds of between 45 and 70 mph (72 and 112 km/h). Successful
regeneration of the DPF is indicated to the driver by the 'DPF FULL' message no longer being displayed.
www.JagDocs.com
If the DPF software detects that the DPF is still blocked, the message will change to 'DPF FULL VISIT DEALER', the driver
should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer to have the DPF force regenerated.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER SIDE EFFECTS

The following section details some side effects caused by the active regeneration process.
Engine Oil Dilution
Engine oil dilution can occur due to small amounts of fuel entering the engine crankcase during the post-injection phases. This
has made it necessary to introduce a calculation based on driving style to reduce oil service intervals if necessary. The driver is
alerted to the oil service by a message in the instrument cluster.
The DPF software monitors the driving style, the frequency of the active regeneration and duration. Using this information a
calculation can be made on the engine oil dilution. When the DPF software calculates the engine oil dilution has reached a
predetermined threshold (fuel being 7% of engine oil volume) a service message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Depending on driving style, some vehicles may require an oil service before the designated interval. If an service message is
displayed, the vehicle will be required have a full service and the service interval counter will be reset.
Fuel Consumption
During the active regeneration process of the DPF, there will be an increase in fuel consumption. However, because active
regeneration occurs infrequently and for limited periods of time, the overall effect on fuel consumption is less than 1%. The
additional fuel used during the active regeneration process is accounted for in the instantaneous (where applicable) and
average fuel consumption displays in the instrument cluster.
www.JagDocs.com
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Diesel Particulate Filter - Component
Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
4 High pressure pipe
5 Post DPF exhaust gas temperature sensor
6 Low pressure pipe
7 DPF
10 Heated Oxygen (HO2S) sensor
11 Pre-catalyst exhaust gas temperature sensor
COMPONENT LOCATION - DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Low pressure connection
2 High pressure connection
3 Bracket
4 Mounting bolt
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Diesel Particulate Filter - System
System Operation
Two processes are used to regenerate the DPF; passive and active.
Passive Regeneration
Passive regeneration requires no special engine management intervention and occurs during normal engine operation. The
passive regeneration involves a slow conversion of the particulate matter deposited in the DPF into carbon dioxide. This
process occurs when the DPF temperature exceeds 250°C (482°F) and is a continuous process when the vehicle is being driven
at higher engine loads and speeds.
During passive regeneration, only a portion of the particulate matter is converted into carbon dioxide. This is because the
chemical reaction, which utilises nitrogen dioxide, is slower than the rate of engine production of particulate matter and is
effective from 250°C (482°F).
Above 580°C the conversion efficiency of the particulates into carbon dioxide rapidly increases. These temperatures are
generally only be achieved using the active regeneration process.
Active Regeneration
Active regeneration starts when the particulate loading of the DPF reaches a threshold as monitored or determined by the DPF
control software. The threshold calculation is based on driving style, distance travelled and back pressure signals from the
differential pressure sensor.
www.JagDocs.com
Active regeneration generally occurs every 250 miles (400 km) although this is dependant on how the vehicle is driven. For
example, if the vehicle is driven at low loads in urban traffic regularly, active regeneration will occur more often. This is due to
the rapid build-up of particulates in the DPF than if the vehicle is driven at high speeds when passive regeneration will have
occurred.
The DPF software incorporates a mileage trigger which is used as back-up for active regeneration. If active regeneration has
not been initiated by a back pressure signal from the differential pressure sensor, regeneration is requested based on distance
travelled.
Active regeneration of the DPF is commenced when the temperature of the DPF is increased to the combustion temperature of
the particles. The DPF temperature is raised by increasing the exhaust gas temperature. This is achieved by introducing
post-injection of fuel after the pilot and main fuel injections have occurred.
It is determined by the DPF software monitoring the signals from the two DPF temperature sensors to establish the
temperature of the DPF. Depending on the DPF temperature, the DPF software requests the ECM (engine control module) to
perform either one or two post-injections of fuel:
The first post-injection of fuel retards combustion inside the cylinder which increases the temperature of the exhaust
gas.
The second post-injection of fuel is injected late in the power stroke cycle. The fuel partly combusts in the cylinder, but
some unburnt fuel also passes into the exhaust where it creates an exothermic event within the catalytic converter,
further increasing the temperature of the DPF.
The active regeneration process takes up to 20 minutes to complete. The first phase increases the DPF temperature to 500°C
(932°F). The second phase further increases the DPF temperature to 600°C (1112°F) which is the optimum temperature for
particle combustion. This temperature is then maintained for 15-20 minutes to ensure complete oxidation of the particles
within the DPF. The oxidation process converts the carbon particles to carbon dioxide.
The active regeneration temperature of the DPF is closely monitored by the DPF software to maintain a target temperature of
600°C (1112°F) at the DPF inlet. The temperature control ensures that the temperatures do not exceed the operational limits
of the turbocharger and the catalytic converter. The turbocharger inlet temperature must not exceed 830°C (1526°F) and the
catalytic converter brick temperature must not exceed 800°C (1472°F) and the exit temperature must remain below 875°C
(1382°F).
During the active regeneration process the following ECM controlled events occur:
The turbocharger is maintained in the fully open position. This minimizes heat transmission from the exhaust gas to
the turbocharger and reduces the rate of exhaust gas flow allowing optimum heating of the DPF. If the driver demands
an increase in engine torque, the turbocharger will respond by closing the vanes as necessary.
The throttle is closed as this assists in increasing the exhaust gas temperature and reduces the rate of exhaust gas
flow which has the effect of reducing the time for the DPF to reach the optimum temperature.
The EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) valve is closed. The use of EGR decreases the exhaust gas temperature and
therefore prevents the optimum DPF temperature being achieved.
If, due to vehicle usage and/or driving style, the active regeneration process cannot take place or is unable to regenerate the
DPF, the dealer can force regenerate the DPF. This is achieved by either driving the vehicle until the engine is at its normal
operating temperature and then driving for a further 20 minutes at speeds of not less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
DPF Control
The DPF requires constant monitoring to ensure that it is operating at its optimum efficiency and does not become blocked.
The ECM contains DPF software which controls the monitoring and operation of the DPF system and also monitors other vehicle
data to determine regeneration periods and service intervals.
The DPF software can be divided into three separate control software modules; a DPF supervisor module, a DPF fuel
management module and a DPF air management module.
These three modules are controlled by a fourth software module known as the DPF co-ordinator module. The co-ordinator
module manages the operation of the other modules when an active regeneration is requested.
DPF Fuel Management Module
The DPF fuel management module controls the following functions:
Timing and quantity of the four split injections per stroke (pilot, main and two post injections).
Injection pressure and the transition between the three different calibration levels of injection.
The above functions are dependant on the condition of the catalytic converter and the DPF.
The controlled injection determines the required injection level in addition to measuring the activity of the catalytic converter
and the DPF. The fuel management calculates the quantity and timing for the four split injections, for each of the three
calibration levels for injection pressure, and also manages the transition between the levels.
The two post injections are required to separate the functionality of increasing in-cylinder gas temperatures and the production
of hydrocarbons. The first post injection is used to generate the higher in-cylinder gas temperature while simultaneously
retaining the same engine torque output produced during normal (non-regeneration) engine operation. The second post
injection is used to generate hydrocarbons by allowing unburnt fuel into the catalytic converter without producing increased
engine torque.
DPF Air Management Module

www.JagDocs.com
The DPF air management module controls the following functions:
EGR control
Intake air temperature and pressure control.
During active regeneration, the EGR operation is disabled -except for overrun conditions - and the closed-loop activation of the
turbocharger boost controller is calculated. The air management module controls the air in the intake manifold to a
predetermined level of pressure and temperature. This control is required to achieve the correct in-cylinder conditions for
stable and robust combustion of the post injected fuel.
The module controls the intake air temperature by actuating the EGR throttle and by adjustment of the turbocharger boost
pressure control.
DPF Co-ordinator Module
The DPF co-ordinator module reacts to a regeneration request from the supervisor module by initiating and co-ordinating the
following DPF regeneration requests:
EGR cut-off - except for overrun condition

Engine load increase
Control of air pressure and temperature in the intake manifold
Fuel injection control.
When the supervisor module issues a regeneration request, the co-ordinator module requests EGR cut-off and a regeneration
specific turbocharger boost pressure control. It then waits for a feedback signal from the EGR system confirming that the EGR
valve is closed.
When the EGR valve is closed, the co-ordinator module initiates requests to increase engine load by controlling the intake air
temperature and pressure.
Once confirmation is received that intake conditions are controlled or a calibration time has expired, the co-ordinator module
then changes to a state awaiting an accelerator pedal release manoeuvre from the driver. If this occurs or a calibration time
has expired, the co-ordinator module generates a request to control fuel injections to increase exhaust gas temperature.

As the amount of particulates trapped by the DPF increases, the pressure at the inlet side of the DPF increases in comparison
to the DPF outlet. The DPF software uses this comparison, in conjunction with other data, to calculate the accumulated amount
of trapped particulates.
By measuring the pressure difference between the DPF inlet and outlet and the DPF temperature, the DPF software can
determine if the DPF is becoming blocked and requires regeneration.
www.JagDocs.com
The DPF system reduces diesel particulate emissions to negligible levels to meet current European stage 5 emission
standards.
The particulate emissions are the black fumes emitted from the diesel engine under certain load conditions. The emissions are
a complex mixture of solid and liquid components with the majority of the particulates being carbon microspheres on which
hydrocarbons from the engine's fuel and lubricant condense.
The DPF system comprises the following components:
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

DPF control software incorporated in the ECM
Differential pressure sensor.
The DPF is located in the exhaust system, downstream of the catalytic converter. Its function is to trap particulate matter in
the exhaust gases leaving the engine. A major feature of the DPF is its ability for regeneration. Regeneration is the burning of
particulates trapped by the filter to prevent obstruction to the free flow of exhaust gasses. The regeneration process takes
place at calculated intervals and is not noticeable by the driver of the vehicle.
Regeneration is most important, since an overfilled filter can damage the engine through excessive exhaust back pressure and
can itself be damaged or destroyed. The material trapped in the filter is in the most part carbon particles with some absorbed
hydrocarbons.
The DPF uses a filter technology based on a filter with a catalytic coating. The DPF is made from silicon carbide housed in a
steel container and has excellent thermal shock resistance and thermal conductivity properties. The DPF is designed for the
engine's operating requirements to maintain the optimum back pressure requirements.
The porous surface of the filter consists of thousands of small parallel channels positioned in the longitudinal direction of the
exhaust system. Adjacent channels in the filter are alternately plugged at the end. This design forces the exhaust gasses to
flow through the porous filter walls, which act as the filter medium. Particulate matter which are too big to pass through the
porous surface are collected and stored in the channels.
www.JagDocs.com
The collected particulate matter, if not removed, can create an obstruction to exhaust gas flow. The stored particles are
removed by a regeneration process which incinerates the particles.
Diesel Particulate Filter Temperature Sensors
The sensors measure the temperature of exhaust gas exiting the turbocharger and before it passes through the DPF and
provides the information needed to calculate the DPF temperature.
The information is used, in conjunction with other data, to estimate the amount of accumulated particulates and to control the
DPF temperature.
Instrument Cluster (IC) Indications
For drivers who make regular short journeys at low speeds, it may not be possible to efficiently regenerate the DPF. In this
case, the DPF software will detect a blockage of the DPF from signals from the differential pressure sensor and will alert the
driver as follows:
The driver will be alerted to this condition by a message 'EXHAUST FILTER NEARLY FULL'. See 'HANDBOOK'. As detailed in the
Owners Handbook, the driver should drive the vehicle until the engine is at its normal operating temperature and then drive for
a further 20 minutes at speeds of not less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Successful regeneration of the DPF is indicated to the driver
by the 'EXHAUST FILTER NEARLY FULL' message no longer being displayed. If the DPF software detects that the DPF is still
blocked, the message will continue to be displayed or an additional message 'EXHAUST FILTER FULL VISIT DEALER' will be
displayed. The driver should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer to have the DPF force regenerated using an approved
diagnostic system.
Diesel Particulate Filter Side Effects
The following section details some side effects caused by the active regeneration process.
Engine Oil Dilution
Engine oil dilution can occur due to small amounts of fuel entering the engine crankcase during the post-injection phases. This
has made it necessary to introduce a calculation based on driving style to reduce oil service intervals if necessary. The driver is
alerted to the oil service by a message in the instrument cluster.
The DPF software monitors the driving style and the frequency of the active regeneration and duration. Using this information a
calculation can be made on the engine oil dilution. When the DPF software calculates the engine oil dilution has reached a
predetermined threshold (fuel being 7% of engine oil volume) a service message is displayed in the IC.
Depending on driving style, some vehicles may require an oil service before the designated interval. If a service message is
displayed, the vehicle will be required have a full service and the service interval counter will be reset.
Fuel consumption
During the active regeneration process of the DPF, there will be an increase in fuel consumption.
However, because active regeneration occurs infrequently, the overall effect on fuel consumption is approximately 2%. The
additional fuel used during the active regeneration process is accounted for in the instantaneous and average fuel consumption
displays in the instrument cluster.
The differential pressure sensor is used by the DPF software to monitor the condition of the DPF. Two pipe connections on the
sensor are connected by pipes to the inlet and outlet ends of the DPF. The pipes allow the sensor to measure the inlet and
outlet pressures of the DPF.
Aftermarket DPF cleaning fluids
Recent years have seen the introduction of 'DPF cleaning fluids' to (non JLR approved) aftermarket sales. These products claim
to reduce the temperature that the soot reaction takes place. It should be stressed that, during the vehicle development
activity, every effort is made to generate DPF regeneration temperatures whilst maintaining safe levels for all other vehicle
components. Unauthorized use of the aftermarket fluids produces a significant risk to soot burn rates and DPF peak
temperatures real world driving conditions. These fluids are not authorised for JLR use.
www.JagDocs.com
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust System
For a detailed description of the Exhaust System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the workshop
manual.
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
Visual Inspection
Leaks Fuses
Metal fatigue Wiring harnesses and connectors
Pipes Engine control module (ECM)
Catalytic converter Sensor(s)
Muffler(s) Actuator(s)
Joints
Mountings
Clearance around components
the next step
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index
5. Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the specific
Symptom Chart

Noisy or leaking
exhaust Exhaust system/components Install new components as necessary. Refer to the relevant
section of the workshop manual
Lack of power
Air intake system fault Check the air intake system
Restricted exhaust system Check for a blocked catalytic converter or muffler, install new
Low fuel pressure components as necessary
Exhaust gas recirculation Check the fuel pressure
valve(s) fault Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and test
Turbocharger fault the exhaust gas recirculation valve(s)
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and test
the turbocharger(s)
DTC Index
For a complete list of all diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Diesel Particulate Filter
For a detailed description of the exhaust system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the workshop
manual. REFER to: (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Diesel Particulate Filter (Description and Operation),

Diesel Particulate Filter (Description and Operation).
guarantee confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor vehicle
NOTE: Check and rectify basic faults before beginning diagnostic routines involving pinpoint tests
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage
Visual Inspection
Diesel particulate filter Differential pressure sensor

www.JagDocs.com
Differential pressure sensor hoses Differential pressure sensor connector

Differential pressure sensor metal pipes and unions Differential pressure sensor wiring harness
Differential pressure sensor mounting position integrity Electrical connector(s)
Metal fatigue Sensor(s)
Joints Engine Control Module (ECM)
Mountings
Clearance around components
Damaged diesel particulate filter
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively check for DTCs
and refer to the DTC Index
Symptom Chart

Amber warning message If DTC is P2459-65 or AMBER DPF FULL REFER TO HANDBOOK
on instrument cluster - Blocked regeneration message is displayed with no other reported messages. No repair is
DPF FULL REFER TO Customer driving routine required, if the vehicle is driven on a highway AS DIRECTED IN THE
HANDBOOK - does not allow the HANDBOOK then the light will be extinguished and the system self
system to clean the healed, nothing more than this is required
particulate filter
Lack of power Check the air intake system. Check for a blocked catalytic converter
Air intake system fault or muffler, install new components as necessary. Check the fuel
Restricted exhaust pressure. For EGR and turbocharger tests, refer to the relevant
system section of the workshop manual
Low fuel pressure
Exhaust Gas
Recirculation (EGR)
valve(s) fault
Turbocharger fault
Diesel Particulate filter
fault
DTC Index
NOTES:
manufacturer approved diagnostic system)
cause. Always check for loose connections and corroded terminals

P0030-11 HO2S Heater Control
Circuit (Bank 1, Sensor Harness fault - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
1) - circuit short to Universal Heated datalogger signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater Duty
ground Exhaust Gas Oxygen Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
sensor heater circuit diagrams and check the Universal Heated Exhaust
control circuit short Gas Oxygen sensor heater control (heater ground) circuit
to ground for short to ground. This circuit runs from the Engine
Universal Heated Control Module (ECM) through the transmission harness to
Exhaust Gas Oxygen the exhaust system. Check for external harness damage
sensor internal fault due to chafing or heat. Repair harness as required, clear
DTC and retest system
Suspect sensor internal fault if DTC resets. Heater circuit
resistance measured at the component connector at
approximately 20ºC ambient temperature should be 2.4 -
www.JagDocs.com
4.0 Ohms. Refer to the new module/component


1) - circuit short to Universal Heated datalogger signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater Duty
battery Exhaust Gas Oxygen Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
control circuit short Gas Oxygen sensor heater control (heater ground) circuit
to power for short to power. This circuit runs from the Engine
Universal Heated Control Module (ECM) through the transmission harness to
Exhaust Gas Oxygen the exhaust system. Check for external harness damage
sensor internal fault due to chafing or heat. Repair harness as required, clear

1) - circuit open Universal Heated datalogger signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater Duty
Exhaust Gas Oxygen Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
control circuit open Gas Oxygen sensor heater control (heater ground) circuit
Universal Heated for open circuit. This circuit runs from the Engine Control
Exhaust Gas Oxygen Module (ECM) through the transmission harness to the
sensor internal fault exhaust system. Check for external harness damage due
to chafing or heat. Repair harness as required, clear DTC
and retest system
P0030-4B HO2S Heater Control

1) - over temperature Heated Oxygen datalogger signals, Oxygen Sensor (O2S) Heater Duty
Sensor heater Cycle Bank 1 Sensor 1 (0x03A1). Refer to the electrical
control circuit short circuit diagrams and check the Universal Heated Exhaust
to power Gas Oxygen sensor heater control (heater ground) circuit
Heated Oxygen for short to power. This circuit runs from the Engine
Sensor internal fault Control Module (ECM) through the transmission harness to
the exhaust system. Check for external harness damage
due to chafing or heat. Repair harness as required, clear
www.JagDocs.com
P0130-00 O2 Circuit (Bank 1,

Sensor 1) - no sub Harness fault - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
type information Universal Heated Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen circuits for open
Exhaust Gas Oxygen circuits on the Nernst Voltage and Pumping Current signal
sensor circuits open lines. Check harness for signs of damage due to chaffing
circuit or heat. Check the other Universal Heated Exhaust Gas
Universal Heated Oxygen sensor circuits for short circuits and open circuits
Exhaust Gas Oxygen If no fault found in wiring harness suspect Universal
sensor internal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor. Refer to the new
component fault module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index

Sensor 1) - circuit The Engine Control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
short to ground Module (ECM) has Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor circuits for
detected a ground short to ground. Repair wiring harness as required, clear
measurement for a DTC and retest system
period longer than If no fault found in wiring harness suspect Universal
expected or has Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor. Refer to the new
detected a ground module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
measurement when Index
another value was
expected
Harness fault -
Universal Heated
www.JagDocs.com
Exhaust Gas Oxygen

sensor circuit short
to ground
Universal Heated
Exhaust Gas Oxygen
sensor internal
component fault

Sensor 1) - circuit Harness fault - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
short to battery Universal Heated Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor circuits for
Exhaust Gas Oxygen short to power. Repair wiring harness as required, clear
sensor circuit short DTC and retest system
to power If no fault found in wiring harness suspect Universal
Universal Heated Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor. Refer to the new
Exhaust Gas Oxygen module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
sensor internal Index
component fault

Sensor 1) - circuit Harness fault - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
open Universal Heated Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor circuits for
Exhaust Gas Oxygen open circuit. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
sensor circuit open and retest system
circuit If no fault found in wiring harness suspect Universal
Universal Heated Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor. Refer to the new
Exhaust Gas Oxygen module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
sensor internal Index
component fault
P0130-1A O2 Circuit (Bank 1,

Sensor 1) - Circuit Harness fault - This DTC is set when the Universal Heated Exhaust Gas
Resistance Below Universal Heated Oxygen sensor internal trim resistance value is less than
Threshold Exhaust Gas Oxygen that expected by the Engine Control Module. Refer to the
sensor circuit fault electrical circuit diagrams and check the Universal Heated
Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor circuits for short circuits.
Exhaust Gas Oxygen Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and retest
sensor internal system
component fault If no fault found in wiring harness suspect Universal
Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor internal fault. Refer to
the new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
P0130-1B O2 Circuit (Bank 1,

Sensor 1) - Circuit Harness fault - This DTC is set when the oxygen sensor internal trim
Resistance Above Universal Heated resistance value is greater than that expected by the
Threshold Exhaust Gas Oxygen Engine Control Module. Refer to the electrical circuit
sensor circuit fault diagrams and check the Universal Heated Exhaust Gas
Universal Heated Oxygen sensor circuits for short circuits, open circuits.
Exhaust Gas Oxygen Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and retest
sensor internal system
Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor internal fault. refer to
the DTC Index

Sensor 1) - Signal Exhaust system leak Check for and rectify any exhaust leak between cylinder
Rate Of Change Below Fuel control system head and catalytic converter. Check Universal Heated
Threshold fault Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor is correctly installed in
Universal Heated exhaust manifold
Exhaust Gas Oxygen Check fuel control system for related DTCs and refer to
sensor to Engine the relevant DTC Index
Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Universal
(ECM) circuit short Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor to Engine Control
to ground, short to Module (ECM) circuit for short to ground, short to power,
power, high high resistance, open circuit
resistance Check and install a new Universal Heated Exhaust Gas
Universal Heated Oxygen sensor as required
Exhaust Gas Oxygen
sensor failure
P0133-00 O2 Circuit Slow

Response (Bank 1, Exhaust system leak Check for and rectify any exhaust leak between cylinder
Sensor 1) - no sub Fuel control system head and catalytic converter. Check Universal Heated
type information fault Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor is correctly installed in
Universal Heated exhaust manifold
Exhaust Gas Oxygen Check fuel control system for related DTCs and refer to
sensor to Engine the relevant DTC Index
www.JagDocs.com
Control Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check Universal
(ECM) wiring shield Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor to Engine Control
high resistance Module (ECM) wiring shield for high resistance
Universal Heated Check and install a new Universal Heated Exhaust Gas
Exhaust Gas Oxygen Oxygen sensor as required
sensor failure
P0135-16 O2 Heater Circuit

(Bank 1, Sensor 1) - Harness fault - This DTC is set when the voltage on the Universal Heated
Circuit Voltage Below Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor heater circuit is less than that
threshold Exhaust Gas Oxygen expected by the Engine Control Module. Refer to the
sensor circuit fault electrical circuit diagrams and check the Universal Heated
Universal Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor heater supply and heater
Exhaust Gas Oxygen ground circuits for short circuits, open circuits. Repair
sensor internal wiring harness as required, clear DTC and retest system
Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen sensor internal fault. refer to
the DTC Index
P0435-00 Catalyst Temperature

Sensor Circuit (Bank 2, Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
Sensor Circuit 1) - no temperature sensor datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
sub type information bank 2, sensor 1 Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
circuit short to 2 Sensor 1 (0x03F7)
ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
Catalyst temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for short to
temperature sensor ground. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
bank 2, sensor 1 retest system
circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
power temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for short to
Catalyst power. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
temperature sensor retest system
bank 2, sensor 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
circuit high temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for high
resistance resistance. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
Catalyst and retest system
temperature sensor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
bank 2, sensor 1 temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for open
circuit open circuit circuit. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
Catalyst retest system
bank 2, sensor 1 temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for
circuit disconnected disconnected. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
temperature sensor Check and install a new catalyst temperature sensor -
bank 2, sensor 1 bank 2, sensor 1 as required. Refer to the new
Index

Sensor Circuit Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
Range/Performance temperature sensor datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
(Bank 2, Sensor Circuit bank 2, sensor 1 Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
1) - no sub type circuit short to 2 Sensor 1 (0x03F7)
information ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
Index
www.JagDocs.com

Sensor Circuit Low Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
(Bank 2, Sensor Circuit temperature sensor datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
1) - no sub type bank 2, sensor 1 Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
information circuit short to 2 Sensor 1 (0x03F7)
circuit high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
resistance temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for high
Catalyst resistance. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
temperature sensor and retest system
circuit open circuit temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for open
Catalyst circuit. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
circuit disconnected temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 1 circuit for
Catalyst disconnected. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
bank 2, sensor 1 Check and install a new catalyst temperature sensor -
failure bank 2, sensor 1 as required. Refer to the new
Index

Sensor Circuit High Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
1) - no sub type bank 2, sensor 1 Sensor 1 Voltage (0x03BF), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank
information circuit short to 2 Sensor 1 (0x03F7). Refer to the electrical circuit
power diagrams and check catalyst temperature sensor bank 2,
Catalyst sensor 1 circuit for short to power. Repair wiring harness
temperature sensor as required, clear DTC and retest system
Index.
P043A-00 Catalyst Temperature

Sensor Circuit (Bank 2, Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
Sensor Circuit 2) - no temperature sensor datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 2
sub type information bank 2, sensor 2 Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor Bank
circuit short to 2 Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03E9)
Index
P043B-00 Catalyst Temperature

Sensor Circuit Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
Range/Performance temperature sensor datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 2
(Bank 2, Sensor Circuit bank 2, sensor 2 Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor Bank
2) - no sub type circuit short to 2 Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03E9)
information ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
www.JagDocs.com
Index
P043C-00 Catalyst Temperature

Sensor Circuit Low Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
2) - no sub type bank 2, sensor 2 Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor Bank
information circuit short to 2 Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03E9)
circuit high Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
resistance temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 2 circuit for high
Catalyst resistance. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
circuit open circuit temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 2 circuit for open
Catalyst circuit. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
circuit disconnected temperature sensor bank 2, sensor 2 circuit for
Catalyst disconnected. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
Index
P043D-00 Catalyst Temperature
Sensor Circuit High Catalyst Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
2) - no sub type bank 2, sensor 2 Sensor 2 (0x03F8), Exhaust Gas Temperature Sensor Bank
information circuit short to 2 Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03E9)
power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check catalyst
temperature sensor power. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
failure Check and install a new catalyst temperature sensor -
bank 2, sensor 2 as required. Refer to the new
Index
P0544-00 Exhaust Gas

Temperature Sensor Exhaust gas Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
Circuit - Bank 1 Sensor temperature sensor, gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for short
1 - no sub type bank 1 sensor 1 to ground
information circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
ground gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for short
Exhaust gas to power
temperature sensor, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
bank 1 sensor 1 gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for high
circuit short to resistance
power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
Exhaust gas gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for open
temperature sensor, circuit
bank 1 sensor 1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
circuit high gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for
resistance disconnected. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
Exhaust gas and retest system
www.JagDocs.com
temperature sensor, Check and install a new exhaust gas temperature sensor,
bank 1 sensor 1 bank1 sensor 1 as required. Refer to the new
circuit open circuit module/component installation note at top of DTC Index
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor,
bank 1 sensor 1
circuit disconnected
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor,
bank 1 sensor 1
failure

Circuit Low - Bank 1 temperature sensor, gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for short
Sensor 1 - no sub type bank 1 sensor 1 to ground
information circuit short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
ground gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for high
Exhaust gas resistance
temperature sensor, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
bank 1 sensor 1 gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for open
circuit high circuit
resistance Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check exhaust
Exhaust gas gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for
temperature sensor, disconnected. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC
bank 1 sensor 1 and retest system
circuit open circuit Check and install a new exhaust gas temperature sensor,
Exhaust gas bank1 sensor 1 as required. Refer to the new
temperature sensor, module/component installation note at top of DTC Index
bank 1 sensor 1
circuit disconnected
Exhaust gas
temperature sensor,
bank 1 sensor 1
failure

Circuit High - Bank 1 temperature sensor, gas temperature sensor, bank 1 sensor 1 circuit for short
Sensor 1 - no sub type bank 1 sensor 1 to power. Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and
information circuit short to retest system
power Check and install a new exhaust gas temperature sensor,
Exhaust gas bank1 sensor 1 as required. Refer to the new
temperature sensor, module/component installation note at top of DTC Index
bank 1 sensor 1
failure
www.JagDocs.com
P2002-68 Diesel Particulate
Filter Efficiency Below Diesel particulate Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
Threshold (Bank 1) - filter regeneration for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index. Carry
event information disabled by other out a diesel particulate filter regeneration
DTCs logged

Temperature Sensor Harness fault - Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check
Circuit Bank 1 Sensor Particulate filter datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
2 - no sub type inlet exhaust gas Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03C4), Exhaust Gas Temperature
information temperature sensor Bank 1 Sensor 2 (0x03F5). This DTC is set if the
Particulate filter particulate filter inlet exhaust gas temperature sensor
inlet exhaust gas fails a plausibility check at cold start. Refer to the
temperature sensor workshop manual and check the particulate filter inlet
internal fault exhaust gas temperature sensor and wiring harness for
obvious signs of mechanical damage due to chaffing or
heat. The particulate filter inlet exhaust gas temperature
sensor is a thermistor located in the inlet to the
particulate filter housing with a signal and ground
connection. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the signal circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
power, short circuit to ground, high resistance. Check the
ground circuit for open circuit, high resistance, short circuit
to power. Repair the wiring harness as required
If there are no wiring faults, refer to the workshop manual
and check the sensor resistance value. Replace the sensor
if required, refer to the new module/component
installation note at top of DTC Index

www.JagDocs.com
Circuit Low Bank 1 Particulate filter datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Sensor 2 - no sub type inlet exhaust gas Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03C4), Exhaust Gas Temperature
inlet exhaust gas fails a diagnostic check due to the circuit voltage being
temperature sensor less than the expected value. Refer to the workshop
internal fault manual and check the particulate filter inlet exhaust gas
temperature sensor and wiring harness for obvious signs of
mechanical damage due to chaffing or heat. The
particulate filter inlet exhaust gas temperature sensor is a
thermistor located in the inlet to the particulate filter
housing with a signal and ground connection. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the signal circuit for
open circuit, short circuit to power, short circuit to ground,
high resistance. Check the ground circuit for open circuit,
high resistance, short circuit to power. Repair the wiring
harness as required

Circuit High Bank 1 Particulate filter datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Sensor 2 - no sub type inlet exhaust gas Sensor 2 Voltage (0x03C4), Exhaust Gas Temperature
inlet exhaust gas fails a diagnostic check due to the circuit voltage being
temperature sensor greater than the expected value. Refer to the workshop
internal fault manual and check the particulate filter inlet exhaust gas
temperature sensor and wiring harness for obvious signs of
mechanical damage due to chaffing or heat. The
particulate filter inlet exhaust gas temperature sensor is a
thermistor located in the inlet to the particulate filter
housing with a signal and ground connection. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the signal circuit for
open circuit, short circuit to power, short circuit to ground,
high resistance. Check the ground circuit for open circuit,
high resistance, short circuit to power. Repair the wiring
harness as required
Temperature Sensor Harness fault - This DTC is set when there is a plausibility error on the
Circuit Secondary turbo signal from the secondary turbo outlet temperature
Range/Performance outlet temperature sensor. Refer to the workshop manual and check the
Bank 1 Sensor 1 - no sensor secondary turbo outlet temperature sensor and wiring
sub type information Secondary turbo harness for obvious signs of mechanical damage due to
outlet temperature chaffing or heat. The secondary turbo outlet temperature
sensor internal fault sensor is a thermistor with a signal and ground
connection. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the signal circuit for open circuit, short circuit to

Temperature Sensor Harness fault - close This DTC is set when there is a plausibility error on the
Circuit coupled catalyst signal from the close coupled catalyst outlet temperature
Range/Performance outlet temperature sensor. Refer to the workshop manual and check the close
Bank 1 Sensor 2 - no sensor coupled catalyst outlet temperature sensor and wiring
sub type information Close coupled harness for obvious signs of mechanical damage due to
catalyst outlet chaffing or heat. The close coupled catalyst outlet
temperature sensor temperature sensor is a thermistor with a signal and
internal fault ground connection. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check the signal circuit for open circuit, short circuit to
www.JagDocs.com

P2226-62 Barometric Pressure

Sensor A Circuit - The Engine Control Check the Engine Control Module (ECM) is clean and dry.
signal compare failure Module (ECM) has Check the Engine Control Module (ECM) is not sealed by
been submersed in any non approved covering.
water or mud If the DTC does not clear install a new Engine Control
The Engine Control Module (ECM) as required. Refer to the new
Module (ECM) has module/component installation note at top of DTC Index.
been sealed in a
non approved
covering
P2245-00 O2 Sensor Reference

Voltage Circuit Low - Harness fault - This DTC is set if the Engine Control Module (ECM) detects
Bank 1, Sensor 1 - no oxygen sensor the bank 1, oxygen sensor 1 reference voltage (LPV_A) is
sub type information circuit lower than expected. Refer to the electrical circuit
Oxygen sensor diagrams and check the oxygen sensor harness for signs of
internal fault damage caused by chaffing or heat. Check the oxygen
sensor circuits for open circuits, high resistance, short to
ground. Repair wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest
the system
If there are no wiring faults suspect the oxygen sensor.
Refer to the new module/component installation note at
the top of the DTC Index
P2246-00 O2 Sensor Reference

Voltage Circuit High - Harness fault - This DTC is set if the Engine Control Module (ECM) detects
Bank 1, Sensor 1 - no oxygen sensor the bank 1, oxygen sensor 1 reference voltage (LPV_A) is
sub type information circuit greater than expected. Refer to the electrical circuit
Oxygen sensor diagrams and check the oxygen sensor harness for signs of
internal fault damage caused by chaffing or heat. Check the oxygen
sensor circuits for open circuits, high resistance, short to
power. Repair wiring as required, clear the DTC and retest
the system
If there are no wiring faults suspect the oxygen sensor.
Refer to the new module/component installation note at
the top of the DTC Index
P242A-00 Exhaust Gas

Circuit Bank 1 Sensor particulate filter datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
3 - no sub type outlet temperature Sensor 3 (0x03F6), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
information sensor Sensor 3 Voltage (0x03F8). This DTC is set if the
Particulate filter Particulate filter outlet temperature sensor fails a cold
outlet temperature start diagnostic check by the Engine Control Module. Refer
sensor internal fault to the workshop manual and check the particulate filter
and sensor for obvious signs of damage. Check the sensor
harness for chaffing or heat damage. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the particulate filter
outlet temperature sensor signal circuit for open circuit,
short to ground, short to other circuits. Check the sensor
ground circuit for open circuit, short to power, high
resistance. Repair wiring as required
If there are no wiring faults suspect the particulate filter
outlet temperature sensor. Refer to the new
Index
P242B-00 Exhaust Gas

Circuit particulate filter datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Range/Performance outlet temperature Sensor 3 (0x03F6), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Bank 1 Sensor 3 - no sensor Sensor 3 Voltage (0x03F8). This DTC is set if the
sub type information Particulate filter Particulate filter outlet temperature sensor fails a
outlet temperature plausibility check by the Engine Control Module. Refer to
sensor internal fault the workshop manual and check the particulate filter and
sensor for obvious signs of damage. Check the sensor
harness for chaffing or heat damage. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check the particulate filter
outlet temperature sensor signal circuit for open circuit,
short to ground, short to other circuits. Check the sensor
ground circuit for open circuit, short to power, high
resistance. Repair wiring as required
www.JagDocs.com

Index
P242C-00 Exhaust Gas

Circuit Low Bank 1 particulate filter datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Sensor 3 - no sub type outlet temperature Sensor 3 (0x03F6), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Particulate filter Particulate filter outlet temperature sensor signal voltage
outlet temperature is less than the Engine Control Module (ECM) was
sensor internal fault expecting. Refer to the workshop manual and check the
particulate filter and sensor for obvious signs of damage.
Check the sensor harness for chaffing or heat damage.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
particulate filter outlet temperature sensor signal circuit
for open circuit, short to ground, short to other circuits.
Check the sensor ground circuit for open circuit, short to
power, high resistance. Repair wiring as required
Index
P242D-00 Exhaust Gas

Circuit High Bank 1 particulate filter datalogger signals, Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Sensor 3 - no sub type outlet temperature Sensor 3 (0x03F6), Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1
Particulate filter Particulate filter outlet temperature sensor signal voltage
outlet temperature is greater than the Engine Control Module (ECM) was
sensor internal fault expecting. Refer to the workshop manual and check the
particulate filter and sensor for obvious signs of damage.
Check the sensor harness for chaffing or heat damage.
particulate filter outlet temperature sensor signal circuit
for open circuit, short to ground, short to other circuits.
Check the sensor ground circuit for open circuit, short to
power, high resistance. Repair wiring as required
Index.
P242F-00 Diesel Particulate

Filter Restriction - Ash Maximum ash load
NOTE: The setting value of this DTC is inhibited
Accumulation (Bank 1)
- no sub type Contact dealer technical support
information
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : DTC P244A-96 IS STORED
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK FOR OTHER DTCS
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check if any of the following DTCs are stored
P2456-00
P2226-62
P2452-95
P2453-00
Are any of the additional DTCs stored?

Yes
Refer to the relevant DTC Index and carry out the relevant repair procedure. Only after the repair, using
the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear the DTC and re-test
No
Proceed to next step
A2: EXHAUST PIPE AND JOINTS
1 Check all exhaust pipes and joints for leaks
2 Check for external damage to the diesel particulate filter metalwork
Are any of the exhaust pipes leaking, or is there external damage to the diesel particulate filter metalwork?
Yes
Repair leaking exhaust joints as required
Check and install a new diesel particulate filter as requiredRefer to the warranty policy and procedures
www.JagDocs.com
manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a new
module/component
No
A3: DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER PRESSURE SENSOR PIPES
1 Check differential pressure sensor pipes for cracks, mis-routing or hoses crossed
Are any of the differential pressure sensor pipes cracked, mis-routed or hoses crossed?
Yes
Repair as required, clear DTC and retest
No
A4: HARNESS DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Check wiring harness to the differential pressure sensor, include any inline connectors
Was the wiring harness to the differential pressure sensor damaged?
Yes
Repair wiring harness as required, clear DTC and retest
No
A5: CONNECTOR INTEGRITY DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR
1 Check differential pressure sensor connector for damage and terminal corrosion
Was the differential pressure sensor connector damaged or terminal corrosion present?
Yes
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check connections are secure and wiring integrity. Repair as
No
A6: FUNCTIONAL CHECK DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR
NOTES:
The Particulate Filter Differential Pressure Sensor measured voltage with the ignition on checks the sensor
output with no variation/pressure in the exhaust system, checking the Particulate Filter Differential Pressure
Sensor adaption is working. The measured voltages at engine idle and 4000 RPM will be considerably different
depending on the diesel particulate filter soot loading. The idle value tells us that the Particulate Filter
Differential Pressure Sensor is working if it goes up from the ignition on value. The 4000 RPM value tells us how
much soot is in the diesel particulate filter. A diesel particulate filter which is recoverable measures less than
1.5volts / 300mbar at 4000 RPM
If a new differential pressure sensor or hose lines have been installed, incorrectly routed, or any
differential pressure sensor circuit repairs carried out, the Engine Control Module must learn and store the new
differential pressure sensor offset value. The following conditions must be met to allow the differential
pressure sensor offset value to be learnt and stored: Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear
DTCs from Engine Control Module, then monitor the datalogger signal 'sump oil temperature - measured'
ensuring a minimum of 50 degrees C is achieved. Start engine, run above 500RPM for 2 minutes, then a further
30 seconds at idle. Ensure the engine cooling fan is not running. Set vehicle in park and set ignition status to
off. Wait 30 seconds for the Engine Control Module to power down, learn and store differential pressure sensor
offset value. This process must be carried out six times, to allow a large negative offset value to adapt back to
0 Hpa
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check datalogger signal - Particulate Filter Differential
Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1 - (0x03DB) under the conditions described below. Allow the voltage to
stabilize before recording the value for approximately 7 seconds
Ignition is ON and engine speed is 0 RPM
Engine idle speed
Engine speed is 4000 RPM
Was datalogger signal - Particulate Filter Differential Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1 - (0x03DB) - value
approximately than 0.75 Volts when ignition ON and engine speed is 0 RPM?Was datalogger signal - Particulate
Filter Differential Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1 - (0x03DB) - value less than 1 Volt when engine speed at
idle?Was datalogger signal - Particulate Filter Differential Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1 - (0x03DB) - value
less than 1.5 Volts when engine speed at 4000 RPM?
(1volt = 100mbar, 1.5volts = 300mbar at 4000RPM)
Yes
No
Check and install a new differential pressure sensor as requiredRefer to the warranty policy and procedures
module/componentUsing the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear the DTC and re-test
NOTE: If a new differential pressure sensor or hose lines have been installed, incorrectly routed, or any
differential pressure sensor circuit repairs carried out, the Engine Control Module must learn and store the
new differential pressure sensor offset value. The following conditions must be met to allow the differential
pressure sensor offset value to be learnt and stored: Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, clear DTCs from Engine Control Module, then monitor the datalogger signal 'sump oil
temperature - measured' ensuring a minimum of 50 degrees C is achieved. Start engine, run above 500RPM
www.JagDocs.com
for 2 minutes, then a further 30 seconds at idle. Ensure the engine cooling fan is not running. Set vehicle
in park and set ignition status to off. Wait 30 seconds for the Engine Control Module to power down, learn
and store differential pressure sensor offset value. This process must be carried out six times, to allow a
large negative offset value to adapt back to 0 Hpa
A7: ACCELERATION SMOKE TEST
NOTE: Ensure the engine is at normal operating temperature
1 Increase the engine speed momentarily to 4000RPM and allow the engine to settle back to idle
2 Carry out above step 3 times
3 Carry out visual check for excessive black smoke leaving the tailpipe during each of the 3 tests
Is excessive black smoke visible leaving the tailpipe during each of the 3 tests?
Yes
Note: Only install a new diesel particulate filter if black smoke is visible leaving the tailpipe
Check and install a new diesel particulate filter as requiredRefer to the warranty policy and procedures
module/componentUsing the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear the DTC and re-test. Return
vehicle to the customer
No
Check and install a new differential pressure sensor as requiredCarry out differential pressure sensor
adaption process
PINPOINT TEST B : RED WARNING MESSAGE DPF FULL VISIT DEALER IS DISPLAYED AND DTC P2463-00
IS LOGGED
CONDITIONS
B1: VIN INFORMATION
1 Record the full vehicle identification number for the vehicle under test, as this information may later be
required by dealer technical support
Has the vehicle identification number been recorded?
Yes
Proceed to the next step
No
Record the vehicle identification number and proceed to the next step
B2: VEHICLE MILEAGE
1 Record the full mileage for the vehicle under test, as this information may later be required by dealer
technical support
Has the mileage been recorded?
Yes
No
Record the mileage and proceed to the next step
B3: VEHICLE SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: Known software issue on PD software level where Lambda sensor adaption is not complete and the
assumed value of O2 in air is 0%, PE software level corrected to 21% This can lead to non recognition of good
regenerations of the diesel particulate filter
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, record the software part number for the Engine
Control Module (ECM)
Has the software part number been recorded? Is the software installed to the vehicle to the latest relevant
level?
Yes
No
Record the software part number and proceed to the next step
B4: RECORD ALL ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) DTCS
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check Engine Control Module (ECM), for related DTCs
Are other DTCs logged?
Yes
No
Proceed to step 7
B5: DTC P2459-65 IS LOGGED
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, the logged mileage for DTCs can be seen by viewing
the snapshot data
Was DTC P2459-65 logged at a mileage up to 625 miles (1000KM) before the diagnostic trouble P2463-00 was
logged?
Yes
Suspect the customer has ignored the AMBER DPF FULL REFER TO HANDBOOK message. The customer
should be advised of this and the repair may become chargeable
Proceed to step 7
No
www.JagDocs.com
B6: OTHER RELATED ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM) DTCS

1 Related Engine Control Module (ECM) DTCs other than P2459-65 and P2463-00 are logged
Are related Engine Control Module (ECM) DTCs other than P2459-65 and P2463-00 logged?
Yes
Refer to the relevant DTC Index. Repair as required. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
clear the DTCs and re-test
No
Proceed to step 7
B7: DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER REGENERATION CYCLE
NOTE: Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system begin to perform a service regeneration cycle,
DO NOT drive the cleaning cycle. Record the grams of soot only
1 With the engine at running temperature check the pre catalyst oxygen sensor operation as follows:-
2 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check datalogger signals - Oxygen Sensor Voltage -
(0xF424)
Idle vehicle and record, should be (0.9 ~ 1 volt)

Idle to 100% pedal, during acceleration record, should be 0 volts
Accelerate to 4500RPM (stationary) and close throttle, should read 1.2 ~ 1.3 volts
Does the pre catalyst oxygen sensor meets this criteria?

Yes
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor is operating correctlyNote: DO NOT carry out the adaption process on the pre
catalyst oxygen sensor, as this resets the adaption to 0Proceed to step 8
No
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor adaption cycle is required
Pre catalyst oxygen sensor adaption cycle is NOT possible while DTCs are loggedUsing the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system, carry out FIT NEW PARTICULATE FILTER PROCESS only and clear the
DTCsAfter completing FIT NEW PARTICULATE FILTER PROCESS continue with pre catalyst oxygen sensor
adaption cycle as follows:-1. Idle vehicle for 10 minutes2. Set car in command shift 3rd gear3. Accelerate
to 3800RPM (where achievable) and overrun / coastdown without braking until revs drop below 1500 RPM4.
Repeat step 3 a further 3 times5. Check for any DTCs, if adaption failed a DTC will be evident and the
sensor will require replacement6. Check oxygen sensor adaption is now complete by returning to B7 item
27. Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear the DTC and re-test. Return vehicle to the
customer
B8: SOOT ESTIMATOR IS ACCURATE AND THE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR READING IS WORKING CORRECTLY
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check datalogger signal - Particulate Filter Differential
Pressure Sensor Voltage - Bank 1 - (0x03DB)
Record value with ignition ON

Idle engine record value
Hold engine speed at 4000RPM and record value
Note: 1volt = 100mbar, 1.5volts = 300mbar at 4000RPM
Have the values been recorded for each of the conditions?
Yes
Proceed to step 9
No
Record values for each of the conditions and proceed to step 9
B9: EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURES
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check datalogger signals
Exhaust Gas Temperature Bank 1 Sensor 2 - (0x03F5)
2 Hold engine speed at 2000RPM for 5 minutes and record values

(By doing this we are trying to establish if the system can recognize heat in the exhaust during regeneration)
Are all of the exhaust gas temperature sensors showing reasonable values between 120°C and 400°C?
Yes
Proceed to step 10
No
Check and install new exhaust gas temperature sensors as required. Refer to the new module/component
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear the DTCs and re-test
B10: COMPARISON OF SOOT MASS IN DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER AND PARTICULATE FILTER DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE SENSOR VOLTAGE
NOTE: Using the results from steps 7 and 8 establish if the Soot Mass estimator and the differential pressure sensor are
aligned, in terms of their assessment of soot in the filter. If the soot mass is less than 54 grams the diesel particulate filter is
recoverable.
1 Using the results from step 7 check soot mass is less than 54 grams
www.JagDocs.com
2 Using the results from step 8 check particulate filter differential pressure sensor voltage at 4000RPM is
less than 1.5Volts (300mbar)
Is diesel particulate filter soot mass value less than 54 grams and particulate filter differential pressure sensor
voltage at 4000RPM less than 1.5Volts (300mbar)?
Yes
If the diesel particulate filter soot mass value is greater than 50 grams and the differential pressure
sensor voltage is between 0.5Volts and 1.1Volts then the diesel particulate filter is low on soot but has
not been driven to allow pressure correction of the diesel particulate filter, if other issue from the tests
performed are evident. Proceed to next step
No
If the diesel particulate filter soot mass value is greater than 50 grams and the differential pressure
sensor voltage greater than 1.5Volts then the diesel particulate filter has a high soot contentIf no other
issue from the tests performed are evident then the vehicle has a soot generated fault not detected by
DTCs. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and check for boost pressure leakage using
the manufacturer approved leak check toolContact dealer technical support for further advice
B11: SOOT MASS REDUCTION
1 With the vehicle fully up to temperature and in Park maintain 2500RPM for 10 minutes
2 Return to step 7, check diesel particulate filter soot mass value
Has the diesel particulate filter soot mass reduced from the original recorded value?
Yes
No
Proceed to step 13
B12: DRIVE VEHICLE
CAUTION: At all times during this procedure you should observe all relevant speed limits, laws, and
regulations
1 Drive the vehicle until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. The engine should NOT be left
idling to achieve working temperature. Drive the vehicle for a further twenty minutes, keeping the vehicle
at a constant speed between 75 km/h (45 mph) and 120 km/h (75 mph). Keeping a constant speed
enables the diesel particulate filter to regenerate more efficiently. It is therefore recommended that cruise
control is used to achieve this, if possible
(Do NOT carry out diesel particulate filter service regeneration)
Is the diesel particulate filter soot mass less than 20 grams?

Yes
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear the DTC and re-test. Return vehicle to the
customer
No
Contact dealer technical support with all of the recorded values from the above tests
B13: CARRY OUT FIT NEW PARTICULATE FILTER PROCESS
WARNING: DO NOT carry out this process on any other occasion without first installing a new diesel
particulate filter
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, select SPECIAL APPLICATIONS ~ POWERTRAIN ~
1 carry out FIT NEW PARTICULATE FILTER PROCESS
2 Carry out diesel particulate filter service regeneration. Record grams of soot following diesel particulate
filter service regeneration
Is the diesel particulate filter soot mass less than 20 grams?
Yes
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system clear the DTC and re-test. Return vehicle to the
customer
No
Contact dealer technical support with all of the recorded values from the above tests
Diesel particulate filter regeneration procedure

If DPF FULL SEE HANDBOOK appears in the message center, carry out the following procedure
CAUTIONS:
The regeneration procedure produces high temperatures in the diesel particulate filter. Heat can be felt radiating from
beneath the vehicle, which is normal and not a cause for concern. However, the vehicle should not be parked over combustible
material, particularly during dry weather. The heat generated could be sufficient to start a fire when in close proximity to
combustible material such as long dry grass, paper etc
At all times during this procedure you should observe all relevant speed limits, laws, and regulations
NOTES:
The ideal speed and conditions for regeneration are 100 km/h (62 mph ) ~ 120 km/h (75 mph), in Drive. Keeping a
constant speed enables the diesel particulate filter to regenerate more efficiently. It is therefore recommended that cruise
control is used to achieve this, if possible
www.JagDocs.com
When driving off-road during the regeneration process, greater accelerator pedal use may be required
1. Drive the vehicle until the engine reaches normal operating temperature. The engine should NOT be left idling to
achieve working temperature
2. Drive the vehicle for a further twenty minutes, keeping the vehicle at a constant speed between 75 km/h (45 mph) and
120 km/h (75 mph)
3. If regeneration is successful the warning message will be extinguished, once the message is extinguished please keep
driving for 10 minutes to ensure that the diesel particulate filter is completely clean
4. If the message remains repeat the process
DTC Index
For a complete list of all diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00.
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Catalytic Converter
Removal
Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com

supported with suitable retaining straps.
Torque: 11 Nm
Torque: 22 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 15 Nm
7. NOTE: Loosen the bolt, but do not fully remove.
Torque: 12 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
8. Torque: 25 Nm
9. NOTES:

Discard the gasket.

www.JagDocs.com
10. Torque: 35 Nm
Installation
2. NOTE: For NAS vehicles only.
If required, carry out a long drive cycle.

Refer to: Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Long Drive Cycle Self-Test
(303-14D Electronic Engine Controls - V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General
Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Removal
WARNING: Observe due care when working near a hot exhaust system.

Installation).
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5. CAUTION: Make a note of the connection orientation

of the high and low pressure hoses to the sensor ports.
Make sure the hoses are located to the correct sensor port
when installed. Failure to follow these instructions may
6. Torque: 55 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 9 Nm
8. Torque: 11 Nm
Installation
Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Exhaust System
Removal
Installation).
4.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 9 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
6. CAUTION: Make a note of the connection orientation
of the high and low pressure hoses to the sensor ports.
Make sure the hoses are located to the correct sensor port
when installed. Failure to follow these instructions may
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the wiring harness does not

catch.
www.JagDocs.com
8. NOTES:

9. CAUTION: Make sure that these components are
installed to the noted removal position.
NOTES:
Apply lubricant to the exhaust mount to aid

installation.
Torque: 25 Nm
10. Torque: 11 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Front Muffler
Removal
2. Refer to: Rear Muffler (309-00C Exhaust System - V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C
5.0L Petrol, Removal and Installation).
4. Torque: 25 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 55 Nm
technician.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com

Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Rear Muffler
Removal
WARNING: Observe due care when working near a hot exhaust system.
2. CAUTION: Make sure that these components are

installed to the noted removal position.
Torque:
M8 25 Nm
M10 55 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel System - General Information -
Item Specification
Fuel tank gross capacity - all vehicles 77 liters
Fuel tank capacity - vehicles with 3.0L, 4.2L, 2.7L Diesel 69.5 (total) / 64 (usable) liters
Fuel tank capacity - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 71.1 (total) / 68.1 (usable) liters
Fuel tank capacity - vehicles with 5.0L 71.1 (total) / 69.5 (useable) liters
Fuel tank capacity - when fuel gauge indicates empty - vehicles with 3.0L Diesel 64 liters
Reserve capacity - when fuel gauge indicates empty - vehicles with 3.0L, 4.2L, 2.7L Diesel 5.5 liters
Reserve capacity - when fuel gauge indicates empty - vehicles with 5.0L, 3.0L Diesel 7 liters
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel System - General Information - Fuel Tank Draining
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Fuel tank drain adaptor
310-154
1. For additional information, refer to: Diesel Fuel System Health and
Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
2. For additional information, refer to: Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel

www.JagDocs.com
Systems Health and Safety Precautions (100-00 General Information,

Vehicles with 3.0L or 4.2L engine
3. Release the pressure in the fuel system.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release - V6
3.0L Petrol (310-00 Fuel System - General Information, General
Procedures).
Vehicles with 5.0L engine
4. Release the pressure in the fuel system.

For additional information, refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release - V8
5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol (310-00 Fuel System - General
All vehicles
5. Remove the rear seat cushion.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Seat Cushion (501-10 Seating,
6. Detach and reposition the door opening weatherstrip.

Remove the scuff plate trim panel.
7.
Detach and reposition the floor covering.

www.JagDocs.com
8.
Detach and reposition the rear seat cushion insulation.
9. Remove the floor aperture cover.
10.
11. CAUTION: The correct measurement must be used to
remove the fuel tank drain port top. Failure to follow this
NOTE: Vehicles without Diesel engine shown, vehicles

with Diesel engine similar.
Using a suitable tool, remove the top of the fuel tank drain
port.
12. NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
A fuel vacuum drain unit must be attached to the

special tool to achieve full fuel tank drain.
Vehicles without Diesel engine shown, vehicles with

Diesel engine similar.
Using the special tool, drain the right-hand side of the fuel
tank.
13. NOTE: Vehicles without Diesel engine shown, vehicles
14. CAUTION: Make sure the new fuel tank drain port
www.JagDocs.com
sealing cap is correctly installed. Failure to follow this


Install a new fuel tank drain port sealing cap.
www.JagDocs.com
15. CAUTION: The correct measurement must be used to
remove the fuel tank drain port top. Failure to follow this

Using a suitable tool, remove the top of the fuel tank drain
port.
16. NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
A fuel vacuum drain unit must be attached to the

special tool to achieve full fuel tank drain.
Vehicles without Diesel engine shown, vehicles with

Diesel engine similar.
Using the special tool, drain the left-hand side of the fuel
tank.
17. NOTE: Vehicles without Diesel engine shown, vehicles
18. CAUTION: Make sure the new fuel tank drain port
www.JagDocs.com
sealing cap is correctly installed. Failure to follow this


Install a new fuel tank drain port sealing cap.
19. Install the floor aperture cover.

Attach the rear seat cushion insulation.
20.
Attach the floor covering.

www.JagDocs.com
21.
Install the scuff plate trim panel.
22. Attach the door opening weatherstrip.
23.
24. Install the rear seat cushion.

For additional information, refer to: Rear Seat Cushion (501-10 Seating,
Fuel System - General Information - Low-Pressure Fuel System
Bleeding Diesel
General Procedures
WARNINGS:
Before any work is carried out on the fuel system, ground the vehicle to earth and maintain the ground connection until
the work is complete.
Highly flammable vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be checked visually for leaks. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in personal injury.
If taken internally, do not induce vomiting, seek immediate medical attention. Failure to follow these instructions may
www.JagDocs.com
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek immediate medical attention.
Wash hands thoroughly after fuel handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek
medical attention.
precautions. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Diesel fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances. It is therefore essential
that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs to any open orifices
or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in foreign matter ingress to the fuel injection system.
This procedure must be carried out before the engine is attempted to be started, following removal or replacement of any
fuel system component involving fuel line intrusion. Failure to follow this instruction will result in damage to the fuel injection
pump.
NOTE: This procedure is necessary if any low-pressure fuel system components are removed or replaced. These include
the fuel filter, fuel lines, fuel tank or fuel cooler.
1. NOTE: If the ignition is switched on for more than 10 seconds

without the engine starting the fuel pump will switch off to protect
itself.
Switch ignition on for 10 seconds. The fuel pump in the fuel tank will be
audible.
2. Switch the ignition off.
3. NOTES:
Do not start the vehicle.

Allow 15 seconds between each ignition cycle (between each
ignition ON and ignition OFF) to allow the fuel tank pump to pump fuel
to the fuel injection pump correctly.
Switch the ignition on and off four times.
4. NOTE: The engine must be allowed to idle for two minutes to allow a full
system bleed.
Crank the engine until it starts and allow to idle.

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel System - General Information - Spring Lock Couplings
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
Spring Lock Coupling Tool or Equivalent
310-D005 (23-040)
Disconnect
1. WARNINGS:
Place the vehicle in a quarantined area and arrange "No

Smoking/Petrol Fumes" signs about the vehicle.
Before any work is carried out on the fuel system, ground the
vehicle to earth and maintain the ground connection until the work is
complete.
www.JagDocs.com
Do not smoke or carry lighted tobacco or open flame of any type

when working on or near any fuel related components. Highly flammable
vapors are always present and may ignite. Failure to follow these
The fuel system remains pressurized for a long time after the
ignition is switched off. The fuel pressure must be relieved before
attempting any repairs. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
personal injury.
After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be checked visually
for leaks. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
This procedure involves fuel handling. Be prepared for fuel spillage

at all times and always observe fuel handling precautions. Failure to
If taken internally do not induce vomiting, seek immediate medical

attention. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal
injury.
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or
eyewash solution and seek medical attention.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling, as prolonged contact may

cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek medical attention.
Relieve the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to the
procedure in this section: Pressure Relief.
2. Remove the safety clip from the spring lock coupling.

www.JagDocs.com
4. Close the special tool and push it into the female end of the
spring lock coupling.
5. Disconnect the spring lock coupling.

Connect
1. NOTES:
Install a new garter spring.

Clean and inspect the male and female ends of the spring lock
coupling.
www.JagDocs.com
2. WARNING: Make sure the garter spring snaps over the male
end of the spring lock coupling.
Connect the spring lock coupling.
3. Check the spring lock coupling to make sure it is correctly

connected.
4 . Install the safety dip to the sprino lock coupling.
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel System - General Information - Quick Release Coupling
General Procedures
Disconnect
1. WARNINGS:

complete.

personal injury.
www.JagDocs.com
injury.


injury.

procedure in this section: Pressure Relief.
2. Disconnect the quick release fitting.

1. Release the retaining clip.
2. Disconnect the quick release fitting.
Connect
1. To connect, reverse the disconnect procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel System - General Information - Quick Release Coupling - Push Connect
General Procedures
Disconnect
1. WARNINGS:

complete.

personal injury.
www.JagDocs.com
injury.


injury.

procedure in this section:
For additional information, refer to: Fuel System Pressure Release
(310-00 Fuel System - General Information, General Procedures).
2. Disconnect the push connect fitting.

1. Press the tang.
2. Disconnect the push connect fitting.
Connect
1. To connect.
Support the male stub.
Push the connector fitting onto the stub until an audible
click can be heard.
Check the connection by a gentle tug test.
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Variant Fuel pressure at Idle Fuel pressure at wide open throttle
High pressure fuel line 2.2 bar (31.9lb/in²) (220kPa) 2.8 bar (40.6 lb/in²) (280 kPa)
Low pressure fuel line 0.6 bar (8.7 lb/in²) (60kPa) 0.6 bar (8.7 lb/in²) (60kPa)
Capacities
Liters
Fuel tank capacity 71.1 (total) / 68 (usable)
Fuel tank filler pipe bracket retaining nut 9 - 80
Fuel tank filler pipe bracket retaining bolt 9 - 80
Fuel tank strap retaining bolts 35 26 -
Fuel tube bracket to underbody retaining bolts 7 - 62
Fuel pump and sender unit locking ring 250 184 -
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Tank and Lines - Component
Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Fuel damper
2 Fuel filter
3 Vent pipe connection to fuel vent valve
4 Fuel pump module assembly
5 Fuel tank
6 Filler cap and lanyard
7 Fuel filler pipe
8 Spider trap
9 Vent pipe
10 Fuel return pipe
11 Fuel delivery pipe
12 Fuel cooler
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Tank and Lines - Overview
OVERVIEW
The major components of the 3.0L V6 diesel fuel system comprise a fuel tank, a fuel pump module, a fuel filter, a fuel cooler, a
fuel filler pipe and cap assembly and two fuel level sensors. The fuel system is a high pressure common rail system which uses
an engine mounted and driven high pressure pump to deliver a uniform level of pressure to the common fuel rails which supply
all 6 fuel injectors.
The fuel tank houses an internal fuel lift pump, located in the fuel pump module. The lift pump is employed to provide a
low-pressure supply to the common rail high pressure fuel system.
Refer to: Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Two fuel level sensors are installed in either side of the saddle tank. The sensors are a MAPPS (magnetic passive position
sensor) which provide a variable resistance to ground for the output from the fuel gauge.
A fuel cooler is located in the low pressure side of the system in the fuel return line and is a fuel to air type cooler.
The fuel tank breather system consists of a fuel vent valve and a fuel tank breather. No Roll Over Valves (ROV's) are fitted.
The fuel filter is a disposable canister type and is located on the left hand front inner wing turret.
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Tank and Lines - System
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuse (250A)
7 LH (left-hand) fuel tank level sensor
8 RH (right-hand) fuel tank level sensor
9 Fuel lift pump
System Operation
Diesel fuel is drawn from the tank by the internal electric lift pump. The fuel pressure regulator located in the fuel pump
module assembly regulates the delivery pressure at approximately 0.5 bar to the transfer pump housed in the High Pressure
(HP) pump. A VCV (volume control valve) governs the amount of fuel supplied to the HP pump.
The transfer and high pressure pump are driven directly by the engine. Due to the storage volume of the common rail, the
injection pressure will remain practically constant over the complete duration of the injection process.
The HP pump has a return pipe circuit which is separate from the injector return pipes.
Refer to: Fuel Charging and Controls (303-04A Fuel Charging and Controls - TDV6 3.0L Diesel, Description and Operation).
Fuel Delivery Schematic Diagram

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 LH common rail
3 RH common rail
4 Fuel rail and injector leak-off return line
5 High Pressure (HP) fuel pump
6 Thermostatic diverter valve
7 Fuel filter assembly
8 Fuel return/air bleed pipe
9 Low Pressure (LP) delivery pipe
10 Fuel cooler
11 Jet pump
12 Pressure regulator
13 Fuel pump module
14 RH fuel level sensor
15 LH fuel level sensor
FUEL TANK
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Fuel filler pipe connection and spit back flap
2 Vent valve
3 Vent pipe spider trap
4 Fuel return pipe
5 Fuel supply pipe
6 Suction pipe
7 LH level sensor float
8 LH level sensor
9 Fuel supply pipe connection
10 RH level sensor float
11 RH level sensor
12 Fuel pump module
13 Fuel return pipe connection
The fuel tank is a saddle type tank, blow moulded from HDPE (high density polyethylene). The tank is located forward of the
rear suspension and is mounted using two metal straps. The tank is a sealed unit with the only internal access being through
the fuel pump module aperture on the top of the tank.
The fuel pump module flange has a six pin external connector which provides the electrical connections for the fuel pump and
both fuel level sensors. A quick release connector provides for the connection of the fuel feed and return pipes.
The flange is fitted with a locking ring and seal. The seal locates in a groove on the tank. The locking ring locates and clamps
on the encapsulated ring that is moulded into the fuel tank. The flange has a tag which locates in the top of the tank to
ensure correct orientation.
The fuel pump module is mounted on a bayonet lock ring which is welded inside the fuel tank. A carrier within the tank
provides for the mounting of the fuel suction port, vent valve and liquid vapor separator (LVS), a level sensor and a passive
drain.
FUEL PUMP MODULE

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Fuel supply connection
2 Fuel return/air bleed connection
4 Swirl pot
5 Fuel level sensor float
6 Fuel suction pipe connection from fuel suction port
7 Three way connection
8 Pressure regulating valve
The low pressure fuel lift pump is located in the fuel pump module. The lift pump is employed to provide a low pressure supply
at approximately 0.5 bar, to the common-rail high pressure fuel system and maintain an equal fuel level in both compartments
of the saddle tank.
www.JagDocs.com
The lift pump operation is controlled by the ECM, via the fuel pump relay located in the RJB. When the ignition is switched on,
the fuel pump operates for 25 seconds to build up fuel pressure. As engine cranking commences the fuel pump stops running
until the engine starts. This function is employed to decrease load on the battery.
In cold conditions, 'waxing' of the fuel can occur. For this reason a coarse mesh filter is attached to the swirl pot inlet port at
the bottom of the pump module.
A three way connection is located on the top of the module. Two outlets supply the jet pumps, the other outlet is the pressure
feed through the pressure regulating valve to the fuel delivery line. The module incorporates a jet pump which draws fuel from
the LH side of the tank to the RH side to be collected by the fuel pump module.
FUEL LEVEL SENSORS

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Fuel level sensor
2 Float arm
3 Float
Two fuel level sensors are installed in either side of the saddle tank. One is mounted on the fuel pump module, the other is
mounted in a central position on the internal carrier within the tank. The sensors are a MAPPS (magnetic passive position
sensor) which provide a variable resistance to ground for the output from the fuel gauge. The sensor is sealed from the fuel
preventing contamination of the contacts, increasing reliability. The fuel level sensors are connected to an electrical connector
on the underside of the fuel pump module flange.
The sensor comprises a series of 51 film resistors mounted in an arc on a ceramic surface. The resistors are wired in series
with individual contacts. A soft magnetic foil with 51 flexible contacts is mounted a small distance above the film resistors. A
magnet, located below the ceramic surface, is attached to the sender unit float arm. As the float arm moves, the magnet
follows the same arc as the film resistors. The magnet pulls the flexible contacts onto the opposite film resistor contacts
forming an electrical circuit.
Item Description
1 Magnetic foil
2 Spacer
3 Ceramic surface
4 Magnet
5 Resistance film
The film resistors are arranged in a linear arc with resistance ranging from 51.2 to 992.11 Ohms. The electrical output signal is
proportional to the amount of fuel in the tank and the position of the float arm. The measured resistance is processed by the
instrument cluster to implement an anti-slosh function. This monitors the signal and updates the fuel gauge pointer position
at regular intervals, preventing constant pointer movement caused by fuel movement in the tank due to cornering or braking.
www.JagDocs.com
A warning lamp is incorporated in the instrument cluster and illuminates when the fuel level is low.
The fuel level sender signal is converted into a CAN (controller area network) message by the instrument cluster as a direct
interpretation of the fuel tank contents in liters.
In the event that fuel is allowed to run too low, signals transmitted from the fuel level sensors initiate the fuel run-dry
strategy. The driver will be notified before the tank is run critically low on fuel. Although this is a simulated run-dry procedure,
it provides the symptoms of the vehicle running out of fuel and the driver will perceive it as such. The engine will stop when
there is approximately 4 liters (0.87 gallons) of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
JET PUMP
The fuel system incorporates twin jet pumps which are integral with the fuel pump module. One jet pump collects fuel from the
RH side of the tank, and the other draws additional fuel from the LH side of the tank through a suction line that is mounted on
the carrier. The jet pump operates on a venturi effect created by the fuel at pump output pressure passing through the jet
pump.
The prime function of the jet pump is to collect fuel from the LH side of the tank and transfer it into the fuel pump module
swirl pot on the RH side of the tank. The jet pump feature ensures that fuel is drained from the LH side of the tank before fuel
run-out on the RH side of the tank.
FUEL VENT VALVE

The fuel level vent valve is located in the upper half of the tank and is connected into a separator that goes put to the vapor
separator tank breather. The main purpose of the fuel level vent valve is to control the fill volume of the tank. During filling air,
trapped inside the tank and a small amount of vapor is passed via the fuel level vent valve to the tank breather. The air and
vapor mix then vents to atmosphere through the breather. During filling, when the tank reaches its full level, the fuel level
vent valve closes and prevents air/vapor passing through to the tank breather. The resulting back pressure causes refueling to
stop automatically.
The fuel level vent valve is always open when the fuel tank is below full, providing an unrestricted air/vapor outlet to the tank
breather.
FUEL FILTER
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Fuel damper
2 Fuel supply from fuel tank and under vehicle cooler
3 Air bleed to fuel tank
4 Fuel return to under vehicle cooler
5 Fuel diverter pipe
6 Fuel return from engine
7 Fuel feed to common-rail fuel pump
The fuel filter is a disposable canister type.
To prevent diesel waxing in cold conditions and to aid warm-up, a temperature sensitive regulating valve incorporated in the
fuel filter housing, diverts a portion of the warm fuel returning from the engine into the fuel filter.
The regulating valve commences closing at 30° C (86° F) and fully closes at 50° C (122° F). When the valve is closed the
returning fuel is diverted to the fuel filter via the under vehicle fuel cooler to maintain an optimum fuel temperature.
The filter has an air bleed return to the fuel tank which returns excess air and fuel to the tank.
The filter canister incorporates a chamber for collecting moisture. The moisture contained in the diesel fuel collects on the
internal filter element and forms droplets, which fall into the moisture chamber. The filter is fitted with a water in fuel sensor
to raise a warning that the maximum recommended level of water in the filter has been reached.
FUEL COOLER
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Fuel cooler (low pressure side – under vehicle)
2 Fuel return to under vehicle cooler
3 Fuel return from engine
The low-pressure-side fuel cooler is situated under the vehicle floorpan, below the LH front seat.
The cooler is fuel to air cooled. Fuel flow through the underfloor cooler is controlled by the fuel filter.
FUEL FILLER PIPE
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Wide bore filler neck
2 Fuel cap
3 Fuel cap lanyard
4 Fuel filler pipe
5 Fuel filler hose
6 Hose connection with fuel tank inlet check valve
The stainless steel filler neck has a wide bore neck specially designed to reduce diesel frothing while the fuel tank is being
replenished. The filler pipe is connected at its lower end by a hose which is secured to the pipe with a worm drive clamp. The
opposite end of the hose is connected to the fuel tank inlet check valve and secured with another worm drive clamp.
The filler head incorporates the Fuel Guard system to prevent accidental filling of the tank with petrol (gasoline).
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Guard System
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Filler neck
2 Flap
3 Reset slots
4 Spigots
5 Reset tool
6 Spring
The fuel guard comprises a mechanically operated flap which is triggered when the smaller diameter filler nozzle tube, used on
petrol (gasoline) pumps, is inserted in the filler neck. The flap is actuated and blocks the sensor port on the fuel pump nozzle,
causing it to automatically switch off. The flap is locked in this position by a latch mechanism.
A reset tool is provided and stored in the luggage compartment. The tool is used to reset the fuel guard device if triggered and
release the latch. Two spigots on the tool locate in slots in the filler neck which release a latch and the flap is opened by its
own spring. The tool is located in the filler neck and once the two spigots on the tool are located in the slots it can be pulled
outwards, releasing a latch and allowing the flap to be opened by its own spring pressure. The tool is stored on the battery
mounting clamp.
The flap is colored yellow so that it is clearly visible when activated and has a 'Handbook' symbol on it.
A diesel fuel pump nozzle will not activate the fuel guard because the nozzle stops against two molded lugs. However, if an
unleaded gasoline pump nozzle is inserted into the housing, its smaller diameter allows it to pass the two molded lugs. The
nozzle strikes two pins on the inside of the filler housing which move forward. This movement rotates the shut-off flap which is
then held in place when the nozzle is removed by the latch mechanism.
NOTE: Russian markets do not use the fuel guard system and are fitted with a conventional filler neck.
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Tank and Lines
For a detailed description of the fuel tank and lines system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
section of the workshop manual. REFER to: (310-01A Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel )
Fuel Tank and Lines (Description and Operation),

Fuel Tank and Lines (Description and Operation),
Fuel Tank and Lines (Description and Operation).

WARNINGS:
Do NOT carry out any work on the fuel system with the engine running. The fuel pressure within the system can be as
high as 2000 bar (29,008 lb/in²). Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Eye protection must be worn at all times when working on or near any fuel related components. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in personal injury.
precautions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
www.JagDocs.com
After carrying out repairs, the fuel system must be checked visually for leaks. This should be done after the engine has
been run, but with the engine switched OFF. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
If taken internally, DO NOT induce vomiting. Seek immediate medical attention. Failure to follow this instruction may
If fuel contacts the eyes, flush the eyes with cold water or eyewash solution and seek medical attention. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in personal injury.
Wash hands thoroughly after handling, as prolonged contact may cause irritation. Should irritation develop, seek medical
attention. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting any part of the system, it is imperative that all dust, dirt and debris is removed from around
components to prevent ingress of foreign matter into the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the vehicle.
The fuel pipes between the injectors and the rail must be discarded after each use, and new pipes installed. Failure to
It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components. Always install blanking plugs
to any open orifices or lines. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Make sure that the workshop area in which the vehicle is being worked on is as clean and dust-free as possible. Areas in
which work on clutches, brakes or where welding or machining are carried out are not suitable in view of the risk of
contamination to the fuel system. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Make sure that any protective clothing worn is clean and made from lint-free non-flocking material. Failure to follow this
Make sure that any protective gloves worn are new and are of the non-powdered latex type. Failure to follow this
Make sure that clean, non-plated tools are used. Clean tools using a new brush that will not lose it's bristles and fresh
cleaning fluid prior to starting work on the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the vehicle.
Use a steel-topped work bench and cover it with clean, lint-free, non-flocking material. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in damage to the vehicle.
confirmation of a fault and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being checked and/or the donor vehicle.
NOTES:
When measuring fuel sender resistance values with a multimeter, it is critical to use the correct multimeter setting. The
multimeter should not be on the 'Auto' setting and must be set to 'Manual'. This will help prevent incorrect diagnosis and
unnecessary replacement of fuel senders. If the multimeter range is set at 'Auto' then, during a sweep of the sender from 50
Ohms to 998 Ohms, the multimeter has to change its measurement range. For approximately 1 second, during the range switch
over point, the multimeter display indicates an open circuit. This can lead to a mis-diagnosis of a fuel sender fault.
Visual Inspection
www.JagDocs.com
Low/contaminated fuel Fuses

Fuel supply/return line(s) Links
Fuel tank and filler pipe Relays
Fuel leak(s) Fuel pump module
Fuel filler cap Sensor(s)
Fuel filter Engine control module (ECM)
Push connect fittings Central Junction Box (CJB)
Fuel pump Restraints Control Module (RCM)
the next step
Symptom Chart

Engine cranks, but
does not start Low/contaminated fuel Check the fuel level and condition. Draw off approximately 1L
Air leakage (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to
Fuel pump module fault make sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or
Low-pressure fuel system other liquid in the fuel
fault Check the intake air system for leaks
Blocked fuel filter Check the lift pump operation, check the low-pressure fuel
Crankshaft position (CKP) system for leaks/damage
sensor Check the fuel filter
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the CKP sensor
circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open
Difficult to start
Glow plug system fault Check the glow plug circuits. Refer to the electrical guides
(very cold conditions) Check the fuel level and condition. Draw off approximately 1L
Low/contaminated fuel (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to
Air leakage make sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or
Fuel pump module (lift other liquid in the fuel
pump) fault Check the intake air system for leaks
Low-pressure fuel system Check the lift pump operation, check the low-pressure fuel
fault system for leaks/damage
Blocked fuel filter Check the fuel filter
Exhaust gas recirculation Check the EGR system
Rough idle
Intake air system fault Check the intake air system for leaks
Low/contaminated fuel Check the fuel level and condition. Draw off approximately 1L
Low-pressure fuel system (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to
fault make sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or
Blocked fuel filter other liquid in the fuel
Fuel volume control valve Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage
blocked/contaminated Check the fuel filter
Fuel pressure control Check the EGR system
valve
Lack of power when

accelerating Intake air system fault Check the intake air system for leakage or restriction
Restricted exhaust Check for a blockage/restriction in the exhaust system, install
system new components as necessary
Low fuel pressure Check for DTCs indicating a fuel pressure fault
Exhaust gas recirculation Check the EGR system
(EGR) valve(s) fault Check turbocharger actuator
Turbocharger actuator
fault
Engine stops/stalls
Air leakage Check the intake air system for leaks
Low-pressure fuel system (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to
fault make sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or
High pressure fuel leak other liquid in the fuel
Fuel volume control valve Check the fuel system for leaks/damage
www.JagDocs.com
blocked/contaminated Check the EGR system

valve
(EGR) valve fault
Engine judders
Air ingress (2.11 pints) of fuel and allow to stand for 1 minute. Check to
Low-pressure fuel system make sure there is no separation of the fuel indicating water or
fault other liquid in the fuel
Check the intake air system for leaks
Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage
Excessive fuel
consumption Low-pressure fuel system Check the low-pressure fuel system for leaks/damage
fault Check the EGR system
Fuel gauge reading

empty with fuel in Active fuel level sensor Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform the
the fuel tank circuit open circuit guided diagnostic routine - Fuel Level Sensor Test
Passive fuel level sensor
circuit open circuit
Instrument cluster
internal failure
Fuel gauge not

reading empty with Jet pump fault Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check
no fuel in the fuel Fuel crossover tube datalogger signals - Fuel Sender 2 (0x61B8) - Fuel Sender 1
tank blocked or leaking (0x61B7). Refer to the table below. If the right sensor reads
empty when the left sensor reads more than empty, check that
the jet pump is transferring fuel from the left side to the right
side
Fuel Gauge, Resistance, Voltage And Fuel Tank Level Comparison Chart
Use the chart to determine fuel tank fuel volume versus fuel gauge reading to determine the fuel level symptom and fault.
NOTES:
The vehicle must be parked on a level surface to obtain an accurate fuel level gauge reading.
The actual values may vary, according to the quantity of fuel in the left and right sides of the fuel tank.
An accurate fuel level gauge reading requires 3 to 5 minutes for levels to stabilise.
Volume, Resistance and Voltage Values

Fuel Sender 2 (0x61B8) - Right side Fuel Sender 1 (0x61B7) - Left side
Gauge Reading Fill Volume (L) Resistance (Ω) CAN Count (Tolerance ± 10) Resistance (Ω) CAN Count (Tolerance ± 10)
0 52 75 51 74
2 60 86 51 74
4 76 107 51 74
6 86 119 51 74
8 121 160 51 74
10 151 191 51 74
Empty 12 183 223 51 74
14 205 244 51 74
16 242 276 51 74
18 283 308 51 74
20 327 340 51 74
¼ 22 358 361 51 74
24 408 392 51 74
26 445 414 51 74
28 446 436 51 74
30 446 436 51 74
32 446 436 59 85
34 446 436 75 106
36 445 425 101 148
38 486 436 170 159
www.JagDocs.com
40 486 446 140 170

½ 42 486 446 160 201
44 460 425 192 223
46 486 446 204 243
48 552 457 204 243
50 626 489 204 243
52 654 521 228 254
54 654 521 241 275
56 654 521 254 286
¾ 58 654 521 281 307
60 684 531 296 318
62 707 531 326 339
64 727 541 357 350
66 737 562 373 370
Full 67 803 563 407 391
Maximum Fill Maximum Fill 911 594 425 402
DTC Index
303-14.
www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Cooler
Removal
1. Refer to: Diesel Fuel System Health and Safety Precautions (100-00
General Information, Description and Operation).

www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. CAUTIONS:

blanking caps.
Torque:
M6 Bolt 9 Nm
M6 Nut 5 Nm
Installation
1. NOTE: Remove and discard the blanking caps. To

install, reverse the removal procedure.
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Filter
Removal
All vehicles
1.
www.JagDocs.com
2.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
5.
4.
3.
7. Torque: 3 Nm
Vehicles with 3.0L diesel engine

www.JagDocs.com
8.
All vehicles
9. Torque: 3 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the fuel filter is correctly aligned.

Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the
vehicle.
2. Carry out the low-pressure fuel system bleeding.
Refer to: Low-Pressure Fuel System Bleeding - Diesel (310-00 Fuel

www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Level Sender
Removal
2. Refer to: Fuel Pump and Sender Unit (310-01A Fuel Tank and Lines -
3.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Pump and Sender Unit
Special Tool(s)
310-123
Locking Ring, Fuel Tank
Removal
www.JagDocs.com
3. Refer to: Fuel Tank Draining (310-00 Fuel System - General Information,
4. CAUTIONS:
Before disconnecting or removing components, make

sure the area around the joint faces and connections are
clean. Plug open connections to prevent contamination.

5. NOTE: Note the position of the locating tang.

www.JagDocs.com
7. WARNING: The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during

this operation. Make sure that all necessary precautions are
taken to prevent fire and explosion.
CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the fuel tank

level sensor float and arm.
Installation
1. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the fuel tank level sensor float and
arm.
Make sure the fuel pump and sender unit is correctly installed in to
the retaining bracket in the fuel tank.
Make sure the fuel tank level sensor arm moves from the full, to
the empty position freely and all the pipes are clear of it's path.
NOTE: Make sure the locating tang is installed in the correct

position.
2. Refer to: Low-Pressure Fuel System Bleeding - Diesel (310-00 Fuel

www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Tank
Removal
3. Refer to: Fuel Tank Draining (310-00 Fuel System - General Information,


www.JagDocs.com
Installation).
6. Torque: 10 Nm
7. Torque: 5 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
8. WARNING: The spilling of fuel is unavoidable during
this operation. Make sure that all necessary precautions are
taken to prevent fire and explosion.
9.
www.JagDocs.com
10.
11. WARNING: Secure the component to the transmission
jack.
CAUTION: Use suitable packing material to prevent

Torque: 35 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
13.
14.
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
Fuel Tank and Lines - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
Removal
Refer to: Petrol and Petrol-Ethanol Fuel Systems Health and Safety
Precautions (100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
2. Open the fuel filler door and remove the cap.

www.JagDocs.com

5. Remove the right-hand wheel and tire.
Installation).
6. Remove the right-hand wheel arch liner.
7.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
8. NOTE: If equipped.
Torque: 9 Nm
9. Refer to: Rear Muffler (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
Refer to: Rear Muffler (309-00A Exhaust System - TDV6 3.0L Diesel,
www.JagDocs.com

Refer to: Rear Muffler (309-00D, Removal and Installation).
Refer to: Rear Muffler (309-00E, Removal and Installation).
10.
11.

www.JagDocs.com
13. Torque: 9 Nm
14. Torque: Bolt: 9 Nm

www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Acceleration Control -
Acceleratror pedal 10 7 89
www.JagDocs.com
Acceleration Control - Acceleration Control
For a detailed description of the acceleration controls, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the workshop
manual. REFER to: Acceleration Control (310-02, Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Accelerator pedal Fuses

Throttle body Wiring harness
Sensor(s)
Engine control module (ECM)
www.JagDocs.com
the next step.
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
If the module or a component is suspect and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the Warranty
Policy and Procedure manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the
read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
into account.

P012100 Throttle/Pedal Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Position Sensor A TP sensor sensing manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Circuit circuits TP 1 and TP circuit diagrams and check TP sensor sensing circuits TP 1 and TP 2
Range/Performance 2 - short to power, for short to power, high resistance. Check and install a new throttle
high resistance body as required
TP sensor failure
www.JagDocs.com
Circuit Low circuit TP 1 - short circuit diagrams and check TP sensor sensing circuit TP 1 for short
to ground, high to ground, high resistance. Check and install a new throttle body as
resistance required
TP sensor failure
Circuit High circuit TP1 - short circuit diagrams and check TP sensor sensing circuit TP 1 for short
to power to power. Check and install a new throttle body as required
TP sensor failure
Position Sensor/Switch TP sensor sensing manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
B Circuit Low circuit TP 2 - short circuit diagrams and check TP sensor sensing circuit TP 2 for short
to ground, high to ground, high resistance. Check and install a new throttle body as
resistance required
TP sensor failure
Position Sensor/Switch TP sensor sensing manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
B Circuit High circuit TP 2- short circuit diagrams and check TP sensor sensing circuit TP 2 for short
to power to power. Check and install a new throttle body as required
TP sensor failure
Position Sensor/Switch APP sensor circuit manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
C Circuit Low APP 1 - short to circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuit APP 1 for short to
ground, high ground, high resistance
resistance
www.JagDocs.com
Position Sensor/Switch APP sensor circuit manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
C Circuit High APP 1 - short to circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuit APP 1 for short to
power power
P210129 Throttle Actuator Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Control Motor Circuit Signal invalid manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Range/Performance Jammed throttle circuit diagrams and test throttle actuator control motor circuit for
blade, gearing or short to ground, power, high resistance. Suspect the throttle body,
motor check and install a new throttle body as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top of the DTC Index
Control Motor Circuit Signal compare manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Range/Performance failure circuit diagrams and test throttle actuator control motor circuit for
Jammed throttle short to ground, power, high resistance. Suspect the throttle body,
blade, gearing or check and install a new throttle body as required, refer to the new
motor module/component installation note at the top of the DTC Index
Control Motor Circuit Signal plausibility manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Range/Performance failure circuit diagrams and test throttle actuator control motor circuit for
Jammed throttle short to ground, power, high resistance. Suspect the throttle body,
blade, gearing or check and install a new throttle body as required, refer to the new
motor module/component installation note at the top of the DTC Index
Control Motor Circuit Commanded manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Range/Performance position not circuit diagrams and test throttle actuator control motor circuit for
achievable short to ground, power, high resistance. Suspect the throttle body,
Throttle blade check and install a new throttle body as required, refer to the new
stuck open module/component installation note at the top of the DTC Index
Intake air system
leak
Control Motor Circuit Signal invalid manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
High Throttle motor circuit diagrams and check throttle motor control circuit for short to
control circuit - power. If ECM is suspect, check and install a new module as
short to power required, refer to new module/component installation note at top of
ECM fault DTC Index
Control Motor Circuit Signal plausibility manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
High failure circuit diagrams and check throttle motor control circuit for short to
Throttle motor power. If ECM is suspect, check and install a new module as
control circuit - required, refer to new module/component installation note at top of
short to power DTC Index
ECM fault
Control System - Throttle MIL manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Forced Engine request due to fuel
Shutdown cut
Control Motor Current Throttle motor manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Range/Performance control circuit - circuit diagrams and check throttle motor control circuit for short to
short to ground, ground, power, high resistance
power, high
resistance
Control Throttle Body Throttle spring manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Suspect throttle body
Range/Performance faulty faulty. Check and install a new throttle body as required, refer to
the new module/component installation note at top of DTC Index
Position Sensor/Switch APP sensor circuit 2 manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
D Circuit Low - low input circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuit 2 for short to ground,
open circuit
Position Sensor/Switch Accelerator pedal manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical circuit
D Circuit Low Input position (APP) diagrams and check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit 1
sensor circuit 1 - for short to ground, power. Set ignition status to 'ON' engine 'OFF'
short to ground, check and record 'Pedal value sensor 1' datalogger signal. With
power pedal in idle position, value of signal should be approximately 0%,
Accelerator pedal if not suspect the pedal position sensor, check and install a new
position (APP) sensor as required
sensor failure
www.JagDocs.com
D Circuit High - high input circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuit 2 for short to power
D Circuit High Input position (APP) diagrams and check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit 1
short to power check and record 'Pedal value sensor 1' datalogger signal. With
Accelerator pedal pedal in fully depressed position, value of signal should be
position (APP) approximately 99%, if not suspect the pedal position sensor, check
sensor failure and install a new sensor as required
E Circuit Low Input position (APP) diagrams and check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit 2
short to ground, check and record 'Pedal value sensor 2' datalogger signal. With
high resistance pedal in idle position, value of signal should be approximately 0%,
Accelerator pedal if not suspect the pedal position sensor, check and install a new
position (APP) sensor as required
sensor failure
E Circuit High Input position (APP) diagrams and check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit 2
short to power check and record 'Pedal value sensor 2' datalogger signal. With
Accelerator pedal pedal in fully depressed position, value of signal should be
position (APP) approximately 99%, if not suspect the pedal position sensor, check
sensor failure and install a new sensor as required
A/B Voltage and 2 range circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuits 1 and 2 for short to
Correlation performance - ground, power and high resistance. Clear the DTCs and retest. If
sub-processor the code remains, replace the APP sensor
Position Sensor/Switch APP sensor - manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
A/B Voltage excessive difference circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuits 1 and 2 for short,
Correlation between open circuit
raw values of circuit
1 and 2 -
sub-processor
A/B Voltage and 2 range circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuits 1 and 2 for short to
Correlation performance - ground, power and high resistance. Clear the DTCs and retest. If
sub-processor the code remains, replace the APP sensor
A/B Voltage and 2 range circuit diagrams and check APP sensor circuits 1 and 2 for short,
Correlation performance open circuit
Position Sensor/Switch Pedal value manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical circuit
D/E Voltage difference between diagrams and check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit 1
Correlation channel 1 and and 2 for short to ground, power. Set ignition status to 'ON' engine
channel 2 greater 'OFF' check and record 'Pedal value sensor 1' and 'Pedal value
than a threshold sensor 2' datalogger signal. With pedal in fully depressed position,
value of signals should be approximately 99%, with pedal in idle
position, value of signals should be approximately 0%, if not
suspect the pedal position sensor, check and install a new sensor
as required
Position Sensor/Switch Gradient on one manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to electrical circuit
D/E Voltage channel without diagrams and check accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor circuit 1
Correlation gradient on the and 2 for short to ground, power. Set ignition status to 'ON' engine
other 'OFF' check and record 'Pedal value sensor 1' and 'Pedal value
sensor 2' datalogger signal. With pedal in fully depressed position,
value of signals should be approximately 99%, with pedal in idle
position, value of signals should be approximately 0%, if not
suspect the pedal position sensor, check and install a new sensor
as required
www.JagDocs.com
Acceleration Control - Accelerator Pedal
Removal
2.
www.JagDocs.com
3. Torque: 9 Nm
Installation

Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -
Item Specification
Speed control module vertical alignment 90° ± 0.75°

Speed control module retaining nuts 5 - 44
Speed control module alignment bolt lock nut 5 - 44
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Speed Control - Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
3 Clock spring
5 Forward alert switch
9 Adaptive speed control radar sensor
10 Throttle intake manifold - Electric throttle
Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Speed Control - Overview
OVERVIEW
There are two variants of speed control available, a standard system and an adaptive system. The standard system maintains
a set speed selected by the driver until operation is suspended or cancelled by a further input from the driver and is controlled
by the ECM (engine control module) . The adaptive system includes the same functionality as the standard system, but also
has the ability to:
Reduce vehicle speed, to less than the set speed, in order to maintain a selected distance behind a slower moving
vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle back to the set speed, once the way ahead is clear, after reducing the set speed because of a
slower moving vehicle
Alert the driver when the vehicle comes within a given distance of a slower moving vehicle
The standard system and the adaptive system both have the following components:
A set +/- switch

A RESUME switch
A CANCEL switch
Both systems also use:
The ECM
The brake switch
The APP (accelerator pedal position) sensor
The adaptive system incorporates the following additional components:

www.JagDocs.com
An adaptive speed control module

An adaptive speed control sensor
A forward alert switch
The ABS (anti-lock brake system) control module
Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Speed Control - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus; U =
Private CAN bus
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
5 Audio control switches
6 Clockspring
8 Throttle intake manifold - Electric throttle
10 Adaptive speed control radar sensor
System Operation
SPEED CONTROL
The speed control system is integrated with the engine management system and uses fueling intervention to automatically
maintain a set vehicle speed. Once engaged, the system can also be used to accelerate the vehicle without using the
accelerator pedal. The speed control system comprises the following components:
'+' and '-' (set/accelerate and decelerate) steering wheel switches

Resume switch
Cancel switch
Clock spring
Speed control warning lamp.
The speed control system also uses inputs from the brake pedal switch, the APP sensor, the ECM and the ABS module.
The speed control is operated by the driver using only the steering wheel switches. When speed control is active, the ECM
www.JagDocs.com
regulates the PWM (pulse width modulation) signals to the fuel injectors to adjust the fuel supply as required to maintain the
set speed.
During speed control operation, the ECM controls vehicle speed by adjusting fuel injection duration and timing. When the
accelerator pedal is pressed with speed control active, the ECM outputs a calculated throttle angle signal in place of the actual
throttle angle signals produced by the APP sensor. The calculated throttle angle is derived from fuel demand.
The minimum set speed for speed control is 20 mph (32 (km/h). Speed control is automatically suspended if the following
conditions apply:
Vehicle speed falls below 20 mph (32 km/h).

The brake pedal is pressed.
The cancel button is pressed.
Neutral, park or reverse gear is selected.
The difference between actual speed and the set speed is too great.
When the vehicle speed reaches a maximum speed of 150 mph (240 kph).
If the accelerator pedal is used to accelerate beyond the set speed for too long.
Stability control system intervention
System error causes shut-off.
ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL

The adaptive speed control system comprises the following components:
Adaptive speed control sensor

Adaptive speed control module
Steering wheel control switches
ECM
Throttle intake manifold - Electric throttle
ABS module and pump
Adaptive speed control warning indicator (in the instrument cluster)
The adaptive speed control system uses a forward looking radar sensor to scan the road ahead, looking for objects that are
moving at a different rate to itself. When a target is identified the adaptive speed control system will monitor the time gap
between it and the target vehicle. When that gap falls below a set driver selected level the adaptive speed control system will
intervene slowing the vehicle by backing off the throttle and/ or applying the brakes, until the correct gap is attained. The
driver can chose between four gap settings, 1, 1.4, 1.8 and 2.2 seconds.
The system will detect but not react to the following:
Vehicles in the oncoming lane

Stationary vehicles
Pedestrians
Vehicles not in the same lane
Motorcycles.
Adaptive speed control is active when the vehicle is moving. Adaptive speed control only functions when a set speed is
entered in normal speed control mode. The adaptive speed control system only intervenes with the set speed when it detects
a target vehicle, and then only if the minimum time gap is breached.
It is important to note that the system is intended for use in limited driving situations, does not remove control and
responsibility from the driver, and at all times can be quickly overridden. The adaptive speed control system is not a collision
warning system and will not react to stationary objects. The system does not operate below a minimum speed of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h) since it is unsuitable for use in cities or congested traffic. The system is best suited to main
roads/ highways with gradual bends.
The ECM, electric throttle and throttle control are unchanged from those used for non adaptive speed control variants.
The adaptive speed control system is based on the use of a front mounted radar sensor. The sensor transmits a 1.5° wide
beam forward of the vehicle and detects the returning signals reflected off other vehicles and objects ahead.
The 1.5° wide radar beam is mechanically scanned at a rate of 10 sweeps/second across a total arc of 15° centered on the
longitudinal axis of the vehicle. The radar operates at millimetric wavelengths (76 - 77 GHz) and transmits a frequency
modulated continuous wave signal at a relatively low power level (no high power pulses).
With the ignition switched ON, the adaptive speed control module is powered up but no radar transmissions are emitted until
the vehicle is in motion.
In follow mode a set speed is selected in the normal speed control manner and this speed is maintained until a slower vehicle
is encountered in the lane ahead. When the vehicle ahead comes within the effective range of the radar sensor, the system
identifies it as a target vehicle and an icon is illuminated on the instrument cluster to indicate that the system is in "follow
mode". When the distance between the two vehicles closes to a set time gap, the adaptive speed control system closes the
throttle and if necessary applies the brakes to maintain the set time gap. Follow mode is effectively a closed loop system. If
several vehicles are ahead, the closest vehicle is chosen as the target to follow. If the target vehicle moves out of radar range,
or if either vehicle changes lane or drops below the minimum operating speed, the system exits follow mode and the follow
mode icon is extinguished. The adaptive speed control system will only raise its speed to the originally set speed, it will not
accelerate past this speed to maintain a time gap.
Driver operation of the foot brake or control switches will immediately cancel adaptive speed control. A 'cruise cancelled'
message will be displayed to the driver in the message center.
www.JagDocs.com
When the vehicle is in follow mode, the follow mode warning indicator is illuminated in the instrument cluster and the current
gap setting will be displayed in the message center.
Item Description
1 Forward Alert warning indicator
2 Follow mode warning indicator
The radar sensor detects three primary parameters of objects within the scanned arc. These are:
Range
Relative velocity
Angle
Range: The radar sensor detects the presence and ranges of different vehicles and objects within the scanned arc up to a
distance of approximately 130 meters. The transmitted signal frequency changes continuously in a cyclic pattern (modulation).
This means that, in the time taken for the signal wave front, to travel to and from a target vehicle (or other object), the
www.JagDocs.com
transmission frequency will have changed. The difference between the received signal frequency and the new transmission
frequency is proportional to the distance between the transmitting vehicle and the target vehicle.
Relative velocity: When the signal is reflected off a vehicle moving at a different speed (opening or closing gap) an effect
known as the Doppler shift causes an extra frequency modulation to be imposed on the signal. This Doppler frequency varies
with the relative speed of the vehicle being followed, enabling the system to differentiate between vehicles traveling at
different speeds and also between moving vehicles and stationary objects.
Angle: Using a narrow angle beam to scan horizontally enables the system to distinguish between vehicles in different lanes
and between vehicles and roadside objects.
SYSTEM RESTRICTIONS
The adaptive speed control system is only intended to provide enhanced speed control as described above in certain restricted
conditions. The following points should be noted:
Automatic braking is limited to approximately 30% of full pressure (0.3G deceleration) and is intended to provide a
smooth, gradual deceleration in follow mode conditions. Harsh braking by the target vehicle or following the target
vehicle down to very low speeds or to a halt will require the driver to intervene and override the brakes. A 'driver
intervene' message will be displayed in the message center accompanied with an audible chime.
While the radar sensor detects moving and stationary targets for assessment of the environment ahead, the system
does not react to or provide any control in situations other than follow mode conditions. Stationary or slow moving
vehicles (below 10 km/h), pedestrians, objects on the road and oncoming vehicles in the same lane are not recognized.
WARNING: It must be emphasized that the adaptive speed control system is not a collision warning or avoidance system
and that, other than the limited conditions of follow mode, driver intervention will be necessary to control the vehicle speed.
In follow mode, some situations may cause target ambiguities for the detection system. These situations include:
The nearby presence of a third vehicle when driving on a line slightly offset to the target vehicle.
Vehicles edging into the lane ahead which are not detected by the system until they have moved into the radar beam.
www.JagDocs.com
On the approach to, or exit from a bend, a target vehicle may be lost or a new target acquired as vehicles ahead change their
angular position with respect to the radar sensor. On a straight road, if the sensing vehicle is in follow mode below its selected
set speed, losing the target vehicle will cause the sensing vehicle to accelerate to this set speed. This acceleration is
undesirable either on, or entering a bend when the target is suddenly lost, and in this situation the system inhibits the
resumption of the set speed.
The speed control system compares vehicle speed data from the ABS system with the relative speed of an external object as
detected by the radar sensor to ascertain whether the object is stationary or not.
NOTE: If tires are fitted which are different in diameter from those specified for the vehicle, the vehicle speed calculated
by the ABS will not be the true road speed. This situation may cause stationary objects to be falsely identified as moving
vehicles and result in automatic deceleration on a clear road.
SPEED CONTROL SWITCHES
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Set speed adjustment switch
2 Time gap switch
3 Cancel switch
4 Resume switch
The speed control switches are located on the RH (right-hand) side of the steering wheel. The switches are connected via fly
leads to the clock spring. The speed control switches are resistive ladder type switches which vary the resistance of a 5 volt
signal sent to them. The signal is returned along a LIN bus to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster routes the control
signals to the ECM on the high speed CAN
Speed control is engaged by rotating the speed adjustment switch to the + or - positions. Once engaged the speed can be
varied by the speed adjustment switches. Each press of the speed adjustment switch will increase or decrease the set speed
in steps of 1 mph (2 kph).
ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL MODULE

The adaptive speed control module is located on the drivers side at the bottom of the A pillar. The control module is connected
to the other vehicle systems via the high speed CAN bus. Signals from the adaptive speed control forward looking radar sensor
are received on a dedicated CAN bus between the two modules.
ADAPTIVE SPEED CONTROL RADAR SENSOR
The adaptive speed control radar sensor is located in the front bumper, on the RH side above the radiator grill behind the
bumper cover. The sensor is connected to the adaptive speed control module via a private CAN bus. If the unit is replaced in
service the unit must be re-aligned vertically. Horizontal alignment is achieved by putting the sensor in service mode using an
approved Jaguar diagnostic system.
The vehicle is then driven for a short period while the sensor calibrates itself. Calibration is complete when the 'follow' icon in
the instrument cluster stops flashing.
www.JagDocs.com
FORWARD ALERT SWITCHES
Item Description
The forward alert system utilizes the adaptive speed control system components. Forward alert is turned on and off
independently of adaptive speed control, via a switch mounted in the lower outboard knee bolster switchpack. Forward alert
will notify the driver by means of a chime, and warning indicator in the instrument cluster and indication in the message
center, when a target vehicle comes into range. The system will NOT use throttle or brake intervention to slow the vehicle.
The forward alert switch is connected to the instrument cluster in a resistive ladder with the luggage compartment opening
switch and the fuel filler flap switch. The instrument cluster sends the forward alert information to the Adaptive speed control
module on the CAN bus.
NOTE: This system is intended as a driver aid and should be used as such. The system is NOT a collision warning or
avoidance device.
The system sensitivity can be adjusted in the same manner as the Adaptive Speed Control, via the steering wheel mounted
switches. Each adjustment is accompanied by a message in the message center.
www.JagDocs.com
Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Speed Control
For a detailed description of the speed control system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual.
Visual Inspection
Speed control sensor Fuses

Ensure the speed control sensor is free from obstructions Wiring harness
Speed control module Electrical connector(s)
Brake switch Steering wheel switches
Brake switch
Speed control sensor
Speed control module
www.JagDocs.com
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively, check for
Speed Control Sensor Adjustment (vehicles with adaptive system installed)

An incorrectly aligned speed control sensor can cause incorrect system operation. Before starting any repair work on the speed
control system, on vehicles with the adaptive system installed, check speed control sensor for correct vertical alignment, and
carry out speed control sensor alignment procedure using manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Symptom Chart

Speed control inhibited or
disabled Power or ground supply to Check for DTCs that could be caused by power or
speed control module or speed ground failure to the module or sensor and refer to
control sensor DTC Index
Steering wheel speed control Check for sticking, jammed and broken speed control
switch/circuits switches. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Throttle sensors check speed control switch circuits for short, open
Brake switch circuit
Anti-Lock Brake System fault For throttle position sensor tests. REFER to:
Electronic Engine Controls - 3.0L Diesel (303-14
Electronic Engine Controls - 3.0L Diesel, Diagnosis and
Testing),
Electronic Engine Controls - 3.0L (303-14B Electronic
Engine Controls - V6 3.0L Petrol, Diagnosis and
Testing),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14 Electronic Engine
Controls - V8 4.2L Petrol/V8 S/C 4.2L Petrol, Diagnosis
and Testing).
Check for correct installation and adjustment of brake
switch. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check brake switch circuits for short, open circuit
Check ABS system for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index
Unable to regulate/adjust
vehicle speed Steering wheel switch Check for sticking, jammed and broken speed control
malfunction switches. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check speed control switch circuits for short, open
circuit
www.JagDocs.com
DTC Index
Vehicles WITH Adaptive System Installed
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:
If a module or component is suspect, and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the Warranty
tool to the first five digits of the seven digit code listed to identify the fault (the last two digits give extra information read by
the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
When performing voltage or resistance tests, always use a digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to three decimal places and
with a current calibration certificate. When testing resistance, always take the resistance of the DMM leads into account.
www.JagDocs.com

B1A84-81 Car Configuration Data
- Invalid serial data RJB reporting invalid Re-configure the RJB using manufacturer approved
received data diagnostic system

- Missing calibration Speed control sensor out Check speed control sensor for correct vertical
of alignment alignment, and carry out speed control sensor
alignment procedure using manufacturer approved
diagnostic system

- Invalid serial data Yaw voltage Clear DTC and re-test, if DTC remains suspect speed
received unreasonable for 0.5 control sensor. Check and install a new sensor as
seconds or unchanged required, refer to the new module/component
for 1.2 seconds. Note: installation note at the top of the DTC Index
Yaw sensor internal to
speed control sensor
C1A67-87 Forward Looking Sensor Incorrect or missing data from

- Missing Message speed control sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
check power and ground supplies for short, open
circuit. Check private CAN network between speed
control sensor and speed control module for failure,
clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains suspect the
speed control sensor, check and install a new sensor

- Component internal Internal hardware failure Suspect the speed control sensor. Check and install a
Failure new sensor as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index

- Component or system Sensor reduced visibility Check for blockage in front of radar. Note: This DTC
operation obstructed or will be cleared automatically when environmental
blocked conditions allow
- Component or system Speed control sensor Allow system to cool. Note: This DTC will be cleared
over temperature internal temperature automatically when environmental conditions allow
exceeded threshold
P174E-81 Output Shaft

Speed/ABS Wheel Follow speed is Clear DTC and re-test
Speed Correlation - mis-calculated to too
Invalid serial data high a value
received
Communication Bus - Vehicle CAN Bus off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Bus off condition DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Carry out CAN network integrity tests using

With ECM/PCM "A" - No ECM missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
sub type information DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check ECM for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index

With TCM - No sub TCM missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
type information DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check TCM for related DTCs and refer to the
relevant DTC Index

With Gear Shift Control No sub type information Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
Module A - No sub type power and ground connections to the Transmission
www.JagDocs.com
information Shift Module. Using the manufacturer approved

diagnostic system, complete a CAN network integrity
test. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check the CAN network between the Transmission
Shift Module and Speed Control Module

With Gear Shift Module Transmission shift Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- Missing Message module missing message DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Check transmission shift module for related

With Anti-lock Brake ABS missing message Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
System (ABS) Control DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - No sub type system. Check ABS for related DTCs and refer to the
information relevant DTC Index

With Park Brake Module Parking brake missing Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
- No sub type message DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
information system. Check parking brake module for related

With Instrument Panel Instrument cluster Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this
Cluster (IPC) Control missing message DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module - No sub type system. Check instrument cluster for related DTCs
information and refer to the relevant DTC Index

Software Invalid configuration Re-configure the speed control module using the
Incompatibility - No message is received manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Clear
sub type information DTCs and re-test. If DTC still logged, suspect
incorrect speed control module installed. Check and
install a new module as required, refer to new
Index

Software RJB - at least one of the Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer
Incompatibility - Not car configuration approved diagnostic system
configured parameters is not
configured
From ECM/PCM A - No ECM did not respond Check ECM for related DTCs and refer to relevant
sub type information properly to speed control DTC Index
cancel or auto brake
cancel request

From ECM/PCM A - ECM did not respond Check ECM for related DTCs and refer to relevant
Signal incorrect after properly to speed control DTC Index
event resume request

From ECM/PCM A - Invalid data received Check the Engine Control Module for related DTCs
Invalid serial data from engine control and refer to relevant DTC Index. If U040181 is
received module logged as historic but no other DTCs have logged in
Bus signal/message the engine control module at the same time and
failure distance, it may be caused by cranking with low
Speed control inhibited voltage conditions. Check battery and charging
by ECM system according to instructions in the battery care
manual. Install the latest Engine Control Module
software using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system, contact Dealer Technical Support before
replacing components

From Anti-Lock Braking Event information Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Module for
System (ABS) Control Deactivated related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Module - De-activated
From Anti-lock Brake Stability assist fault Check ABS module for related DTCs and refer to
System (ABS) Control relevant DTC Index
www.JagDocs.com
Module - Invalid serial

data received
From Park Brake Parking brake module did Check parking brake module for related DTCs and
Control Module - Signal not respond properly to refer to relevant DTC Index
incorrect after event apply request

From Park Brake Speed control inhibited Check parking brake module for related DTCs and
Control Module - by parking brake module refer to relevant DTC Index
Invalid serial data
received
From Brake System Event information Check the Anti-Lock Braking System Module for
Control Module - Event related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
information
From Suspension Invalid serial data Check the Suspension Control Module for related
Control Module 'A' - received DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
Invalid serial data
received
From Instrument Panel Speed control inhibited Check instrument cluster, CJB and RJB for related
Control Module - by instrument cluster DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index
Invalid serial data
received
U1A00-88 Private Communication
Network - Bus off Bus off The module setting this code has disabled CAN
transmission. Check for other bus off codes. Check
the module and circuits. Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams. Clear all DTCs and road test the vehicle. If
the concern reoccurs contact Dealer Technical
Support for further advice. Under no circumstance
should any parts be replaced to overcome this issue

Failure - Internal Internal electronic failure Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
electronic failure a new module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index

Configuration Data sent from RJB is Check/amend Car Configuration File using the
Incompatible - No sub invalid manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear DTC
type information and re-test. If DTC remains, re-configure RJB using
manufacturer approved diagnostic system, clear DTC
and re-test. If DTC remains check RJB for DTCs and
refer to DTC Index

General checksum Internal micro controller Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
failure error a new module as required, refer to the new
Checksum fault module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index

General memory failure Internal RAM test fault Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
a new module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index

Internal electronic Internal control module Suspect the speed control module. Check and install
failure failure a new module as required, refer to the new
the DTC Index

Circuit/component Circuit/component The Control module internal protection has been
protection time-out protection time-out activated. Check for other related DTCs that could
lead to this event. Clear the DTC and retest. If the
problem persists, renew the module. Refer to the
warranty policy and procedures manual if a module is
suspect

Signal compare failure Signal compare failure Check vehicle battery and charging system. Refer to
Battery supply voltage the relevant section in the workshop manual. Refer
www.JagDocs.com
below a recognized value to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power
and ground supply circuits to the modules
Vehicles WITHOUT Adaptive System Installed
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:
If a module or component is suspect, and the vehicle remains under the Manufacturers warranty, refer to the Warranty

P0500-82 Vehicle Speed Sensor A - Alive
/ sequence counter incorrect / Vehicle speed - invalid Check ABS for related DTCs and refer to
not updated signal received over CAN relevant DTC Index
P0500-86 Vehicle Speed Sensor A -

Signal invalid Vehicle speed - invalid Check ABS for related DTCs and refer to
signal received over CAN relevant DTC Index

Range/Performance - No sub Vehicle speed signal from Carry out CAN network integrity test using
type information ABS not plausible the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. Contact Dealer Technical Support
for further assistance

Range/Performance - Signal Vehicle speed - range Check ABS/TCM for related DTCs and refer
compare failure performance to relevant DTC Index
P0504-00 Brake Switch A / B Correlation

- No sub type information The brake pressure reading Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
does not agree with the this DTC using the manufacturer approved
brake light switch value diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check brake switch
circuits for short, open circuit, high
resistance
P0504-01 Brake Switch A / B Correlation

- General electrical failure Brake switch high fault: Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with
- Brake lights stuck this DTC using the manufacturer approved
on diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
- Gearshift interlock circuit diagrams and check brake switch
inoperative circuits for short, open circuit, high
- Speed control resistance
inoperative
Brake switch low fault:
- Brake lights
inoperative
- Gearshift stuck in
Park
- Reduced engine
braking
P0566-00 Cruise Control OFF Signal - No

www.JagDocs.com
sub type information Speed control Cancel Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
switch 2 stuck closed check speed control switch circuits for short,
open circuit. Check for stuck switch. Check
and install a new speed control switch as
required
P0567-00 Cruise Control DECREASE

DISTANCE Signal - No sub Speed control Resume Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
type information switch 7 stuck closed check speed control switch circuits for short,
required
P0568-00 Cruise Control INCREASE

DISTANCE Signal - No sub Speed control Accel Set Check and install a new speed control
type information Plus Switch 6 stuck closed switch as required
P0569-00 Cruise Control COAST Signal -

No sub type information Speed control Coast Set Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
Minus switch 3 stuck check speed control switch circuits for short,
closed open circuit. Check for stuck switch. Check
required
P056A-00 Cruise Control INCREASE

DISTANCE Signal - No sub Speed control Headway Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
type information Plus switch 4 stuck closed check speed control switch circuits for short,
required
P056B-00 Cruise Control DECREASE

DISTANCE Signal - No sub Speed control Headway Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
type information Minus switch 5 stuck check speed control switch circuits for short,
closed open circuit. Check for stuck switch. Check
required
P0571-62 Brake Switch A Circuit - Signal

compare failure Plausibility error Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
check brake light switch signal circuits for
short, open circuit. Check and install a new
brake light switch as required
P0575-01 Cruise Control Input Circuit -

General electrical failure General electrical failure Check speed control system for related
DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index. Carry
out CAN network integrity tests using the
www.JagDocs.com
P0576-16 Cruise Control Input Circuit

Low - Circuit voltage below Circuit voltage below Check speed control system for related
threshold threshold DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index. Carry
P0577-17 Cruise Control Input Circuit

High - Circuit voltage above Circuit voltage above Check speed control system for related
threshold threshold DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index. Carry
P0578-00 Cruise Control Multi-Function

Input A Circuit Stuck - No sub One of speed control Check for stuck speed control switch, install
type information switches stuck a new switch pack as required
P0578-1C Cruise Control Multi-Function

Input A Circuit Stuck - Circuit Circuit voltage out of range Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
voltage out of range check speed control switch circuits for short,
required
P0579-1C Cruise Control Multi-Function

Input A Circuit Speed control switch pack Check and install a new speed control
Range/Performance - Circuit internal failure switch pack as required
voltage out of range
Input A Circuit Signal invalid Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and
www.JagDocs.com
Range/Performance - Signal check speed control switch circuits for short,

invalid open circuit. Check for stuck switch. Check
required

Input B Circuit Stuck - No sub Active speed limiter fault Check for active speed limiter fault, install a
type information new transmission shift module as required
Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Speed Control Sensor Adjustment
General Procedures
Special Tool(s)
501-F007
Inclinometer
1. CAUTION: Protect the surrounding paintwork to avoid

damage.
www.JagDocs.com
2. NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a

level surface.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a level
surface.
Special Tool(s): 501-F007
4. NOTES:
Do not release the lock nut.
Make sure that the vehicle is standing on a level

surface.
Special Tool(s): 501-F007

www.JagDocs.com

damage.
6.
Configure the ACC module using the diagnostic tool.
This procedure is required if:
A new ACC radar and, or ACC module are installed.
The ACC radar needed to be removed or is misaligned in its
position due to another repair operation.
7.
From the diagnostic tool menu, select: Service Alignment Mode.
The follow indicator will now be flashing, this indicates that the
vehicle is in "service alignment" and now requires driving.
The vehicle speed must be above 30mph (48 kph).
Choose a road with plenty of stationary objects, like street
lights, road signs, or barriers. Use an inside or outside lane.
Following vehicles too closely will obscure the stationary targets
from the radar, a time gap of 2 seconds is recommended.
A straight road will produce a quicker and better result, although
the process will still operate on a curved road.
The time that the ACC module takes to align will vary, depending
on the route, speed, number of targets, and individual module.
When the flashing follow indicator light extinguishes, the ACC
system is now functional, and a required vehicle speed can now
be set by the driver and the ACC system will operate as normal.
www.JagDocs.com
Published: 03-Jan-2013
Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Speed Control Deactivator Switch
Removal
1. Refer to: Stoplamp Switch (417-01, Removal and Installation).
Installation
1. Refer to: Stoplamp Switch (417-01, Removal and Installation).

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Speed Control Module
Removal
2. Refer to: Speed Control Sensor Adjustment (310-03C Speed Control - V8

5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).
4.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 4 Nm
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Speed Control Sensor
Removal
2. Refer to: Speed Control Sensor Adjustment (310-03C Speed Control - V8

5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol, General Procedures).

damage.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Torque: 5 Nm
NOTE: Make sure that the sensor is aligned after

installation as described in the speed control sensor
adjustment procedure.
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
Speed Control - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Speed Control Switch
Removal
Refer to: Standard Workshop Practices (100-00 General Information,

2. Refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20B Supplemental Restraint

System, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Upshift Paddle Switch (307-05A Automatic

Installation).
4. Refer to: Downshift Paddle Switch (307-05A Automatic

Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 3 Nm
6. Torque: 3 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
7. Torque: 6 Nm
8.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Climate Control System - General Information -
NOTE: NAS vehicles.
Air conditioning (A/C) refrigerant R-1234yf
A/C compressor oil SPA2
NOTE: ROW vehicles.
Air conditioning (A/C) refrigerant R-134a
NOTE: EU vehicles.
Air conditioning (A/C) refrigerant R-1234yf
Capacities
Description Grammes
A/C refrigerant - all engine variants 700
www.JagDocs.com
Refrigerant Oil Adding Capacities
NOTE: Rotate the A/C compressor shaft at least 6 to 8 turns when draining the refrigerant oil.
Item Milliliters
A/C condenser core and desiccant bag Add 25ml oil
A/C evaporator Add 30ml oil
A/C compressor 1. Drain old A/C compressor. With drain plug removed and ports uncapped, rotate
shaft to remove A/C compressor oil and measure the amount of oil captured. 2. Drain
new A/C compressor into a clean vessel. With drain plug removed and ports
uncapped, rotate shaft to remove oil. Then add back a quantity of the new oil that is
identical to the quantity of oil removed from the old A/C compressor. However, if this
quantity is less than 30ml, then make it up to 30ml.
A/C lines - if air conditioning has been Add 5ml oil per A/C line
operational.
A/C system after flushing - with new No oil should be used- new oil in new compressor is sufficient
compressor installed
A/C system after flushing - without a Add 80ml oil
new compressor installed - remaining
A/C compressor oil is to be drained.
Compressor and expansion valve must
not be flushed (removed from the circuit)
A/C compressor drain plug Torque 12Nm
Climate Control System - General Information - Climate Control System
For a detailed description of the Climate Control System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
Workshop Manual. REFER to:
Air Distribution and Filtering (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation),
Heating and Ventilation (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation),
Air Conditioning (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation),
Control Components (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation),
Electric Booster Heater (412-02 Auxiliary Climate Control, Description and Operation),
Electric Booster Heater (412-02 Auxiliary Climate Control, Description and Operation),
Electric Booster Heater (412-02 Auxiliary Climate Control, Description and Operation).
WARNING: Servicing must be carried out by personnel familiar with both vehicle system and the charging and testing
www.JagDocs.com
equipment. All operations must be carried out in a well ventilated area away from open flame and heat sources.
Visual Inspection
Coolant level Fuse(s)

Hose(s) Wiring harness
Coolant pump Electrical connectors
Control flap(s) Blower
Duct(s) Air conditioning compressor
Vent(s) Electric cooling fan
Cabin air filter Automatic Temperature Control Module (ATCM)
Drive belt Refrigerant pressure sensor
Air conditioning compressor
Thermostatic expansion valve
Evaporator
Receiver drier
Air conditioning condenser
Refrigerant pipes Auxiliary
drive belt
Fuel fired booster heater
Fuel fired booster heater fuel pump
Fuel fired booster heater fuel pipes
the next step
Symptom Chart
Air conditioning performance poor or
inoperative Refrigerant undercharged GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Refrigerant overcharged
Thermostatic expansion valve
faulty
Receiver drier restricted
Water in refrigerant
Air conditioning operates briefly and

then switches off Electric cooling fan inoperative Test the operation of the electric cooling
Air conditioning condenser fan
airflow obstructed Check the air conditioning condenser for
external obstructions
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : PRELIMINARY TESTS

A1: PRELIMINARY TEST 1
NOTES:
This test is performed with the engine not running.
Normal pressure for a correctly charged and switched off system is approximately 4.5 bar on both gauges (system
equalised).
www.JagDocs.com
1 Close the valves on the air conditioning station

2 Connect the air conditioning station to the vehicle charging ports
3 Check the pressure values
Is a pressure registered on both gauges?
Yes
No
GO to Pinpoint Test D.
PINPOINT TEST B : FUNCTIONALITY TESTS

B1: FUNCTIONALITY TEST 1
NOTES:
Normal pressures for a correctly charged and working system are 1.0 bar to 2.0 bar (low) and 11.0 bar to 15.0 bar (high).
Normal temperature (measured at the center air vent) for a correctly charged and working system is -7°C to -2°C when
ambient temperature is 20°C.
1 Close the valves on the air conditioning station

2 Connect the air conditioning station to the vehicle charging ports
3 Open all doors and the tailgate
4 Start the engine
5 Set the temperature to the lowest setting (all zones)
6 Set the fan speed to maximum
7 Set the recirculate switch to off
8 Insert a temperature probe into the centre air vent
9 Raise engine speed to 1500rpm and maintain this speed for 5 minutes
10 Check the temperature value
Are the pressure readings stable and in the green 'normal' region of the gauge?
Yes
Air conditioning system operating normally
No
Air conditioning system fault present. GO to Pinpoint Test C.
PINPOINT TEST C : GAUGE TESTS

CONDITIONS
C1: GAUGE TEST 1
NOTE: This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.

Did the gauges register a change in pressure when the air conditioning was switched on?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the Automatic Temperature Control Module
(ATCM) for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index
C2: GAUGE TEST 2
NOTE: This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.

Are the pressure gauge readings fluctuating?
Yes
Moisture present in the air conditioning system. Recover the refrigerant. Install a new receiver drier.
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and evacuate and recharge the air conditioning
system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
GO to C3.
C3: GAUGE TEST 3
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.

Are the pressure gauge readings too low?
Yes
GO to C4.
No
GO to C6.
C4: GAUGE TEST 4
NOTE: This test is performed with the engine not running.
1 Stop the engine

2 Using the manufacturer approved refrigerant leak detector, check for a refrigerant leak
Was a refrigerant leak detected?
Yes
Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and recover the refrigerant. Repair as necessary.
Evacuate and recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
GO to C5.
C5: GAUGE TEST 5
1 Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and recover the refrigerant
Was the weight of the recovered refrigerant less than specified for the air conditioning system?
Yes
No
Install a new receiver drier. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and evacuate and
recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
C6: GAUGE TEST 6
NOTES:
This test is performed with the engine running and the air conditioning set to on.
www.JagDocs.com
Are the pressure gauge readings too high?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
Test inconclusive. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
C7: GAUGE TEST 7
1 Stop the engine

2 Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and recover the refrigerant
Was the weight of the recovered refrigerant more than specified for the air conditioning system?
Yes
No
Install a new thermal expansion valve. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual and
evacuate and recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
PINPOINT TEST D : NITROGEN LEAK TESTS
CONDITIONS
D1: NITROGEN LEAK TEST
CAUTION: When charging the system with nitrogen, the pressure should be regulated to 7.0 bar.
www.JagDocs.com
1 Charge the air conditioning system with nitrogen

2 Isolate the nitrogen supply
3 Monitor the pressure gauge and check for leaks
Has the source of the leak been identified?
Yes
Rectify the leak as necessary. Install a new receiver drier. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop
manual and evacuate and recharge the air conditioning system. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
DTC Index
REFER to: Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Climate Control Module (HVAC) (100-00 General Information, Description
and Operation).
Climate Control System - General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
General Procedures
1. WARNING: Servicing must be carried out by personnel familliar with both

vehicle system and the charging and testing equipment. All operations
must be carried out in a well ventilated area away from open flame and
heat sources.
NOTE: The receiver drier need only be changed under the following
circumstances: There is dirt in the refrigerant circuit ( eg. compressor
seizure ), the system is leaking and refrigerant has been lost to
atmosphere, or the refrigerant circuit has been open more than 24 hours,
due to repair.
Refrigerant recovery.
2. Remove the dust covers from the high and low pressure
connections.
www.JagDocs.com
3. Connect the high and low pressure lines to the appropriate connections.
4. Open the valves on the connections.
5. Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.
6. Turn the process switch to the correct position.
7. Turn the main switch to 'ON'.

8. WARNING: Refrigerant must always be recycled before re-use to ensure
that the purity of the refrigerantis high enough for safe use in the air
conditioning system. Recycling should always be carried out with
equipment which is design certified by Underwriter Laboratory Inc. for
compliance with SEA J1991. Other equipment may not recycle refrigerant
to the required level of purity. R143a Refrigerant Recover Recycling
Recharging station must not be used with any other type of
refrigerant.Refrigerant R134a from domestic and comercial sources must
not be used in motor vehicles air conditioning systems.
Allow the system to recover the refrigerant from the system.
9. Close the valves on the refrigerant station.
10. Turn the main switch 'OFF'.
11. Close the valves on the connections.
12. Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.
13. Install the dust covers to the connectors.

www.JagDocs.com
14. Open the tap at the rear of the station to drain the refrigerant oil.
15. Measure and record the quantity of refrigerant oil recovered from the
system.
16. Close the tap at the rear of the station.
17. Evacuation.
18. Remove the dust covers from the high and low pressure connections.
19. Connect the high and low pressure lines to the appropriate connections.
20. Open the valves on the connections.
21. Turn the valves on the station to the correct positions.
22. Turn the process switch to the correct position.
23. Turn the main switch to 'ON'.
24. Allow the station to evacuate the A/C system.
25. CAUTION: The system must be evacuated immediatley before

recharging commences. Delay between evacuation and recharging is not
permitted
Recharging
26. Close the valves on the refrigerant station.

27. Close the valve on the oil charger.
28. Disconnect the yellow line from the refrigerant station.
29. Remove the cover from the oil charger.
30. Pour the correct quantity of refrigerant oil into the oil charger.
31. Install the cover to the oil charger.
32. Connect the yellow line to the refrigerant station.
33. Open the valve on the oil charger.
34. Move the pointer on the refrigerant gauge to mark the position of the
refrigerant drop.
35. Slowly open the correct valve on the refrigerant to allow the vacuum to
pull the refrigerant into the system.
www.JagDocs.com
36. Close the valve on the refrigerant station when the correct amount of
refrigerant has been drawn into the air conditioning system.
37. Turn the main switch 'OFF'.
38. Close the valves on the connections.
39. Disconnect the high and low pressure connections.

Climate Control System - General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Flushing
General Procedures
1. WARNINGS:
Use extreme care and observe all safety precautions related to the
use of refrigerants. Due to refrigerant hazards, always wear safety
goggles and non-penetrable gloves when working on or flushing air
conditioning (A/C) systems. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in personal injury.
When flushing the A/C system, refer to the manufacturers

equipment instructions for additional information. Failure to do so may
result in system damage or personal injury.
The A/C refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of

any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts shop bulk refrigerant
at risk of contamination. If the vehicle A/C refrigerant is contaminated,
refer the customer to return to the repair facility that performed the last
A/C repair. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the
A/C recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated
A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as
hazardous waste. For additional information, refer to the manufacturers
www.JagDocs.com
equipment instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in

personal injury.
Prior to using the A/C flushing equipment for the first time, follow
the operating instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
CAUTION: Prior to flushing, remove and discard the desiccant sack.

Depending on the equipment used, other A/C components may have to
be removed prior to flushing. For additional information, refer to the
manufacturers equipment instructions before flushing the A/C system.
Recover the refrigerant.

For additional information, refer to Air conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging in this section.
2. Remove the desiccant sack.

For additional information, refer to Section 412-03 Air Conditioning.
3. Flush the system. For additional information, refer to the manufacturers

equipment instructions.
4. Install new refrigerant lines if blocked with debris.
5. Install a new desiccant sack.

For additional information, refer to Section 412-03 Air Conditioning.
6. Add the required amount of oil to the A/C system depending on the
repair procedure.
For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding in this section.
7. Evacuate and charge the A/C system.

For additional information, refer to Air conditioning (A/C) System
8. Carry out fluorescent dye leak detection test.
www.JagDocs.com
For additional information, refer to Flourescent Dye Leak Detection in
this section.
9. Check the A/C system for correct operation.

www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control System - General Information - Contaminated Refrigerant
Handling
General Procedures
1. If contaminated refrigerant is detected DO NOT recover the refrigerant

into your R-134a OR R-12 recovery/recycling equipment. Take the follow
actions:
1. Repeat the test to verify contaminated refrigerant is present.
2. Advise the customer of the contaminated A/C system and any
additional cost to repair the system. The customer may wish to
return to the repair facility performing the last A/C repair.
3. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery only
equipment designed for capturing and storing contaminated
refrigerant. This equipment must only be used to recover
contaminated refrigerant to prevent the spread to other vehicles.
As an alternative, contact an A/C repair facility in your area with
the proper equipment to perform the repair.
4. On completion of the recovery of the contaminated refrigerant, it
will be necessary to carry out the A/C system flushing procedure.
For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (AC) System
Flushing in this section.
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control System - General Information - Electronic Leak Detection
General Procedures
1. WARNING: Good ventilation is necessary in the area where A/C leak

testing is to be carried out. If the surrounding air is contaminated with
refrigerant gas, the leak detector will indicate this gas all the time.
Odors from other chemicals such as antifreeze, diesel fuel, disc brake
cleaner, or other cleaning solvents can cause the same problem. A fan,
even in a well ventilated area, is very helpful in removing small traces of
contamination from the air that might affect the leak detector. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in personal injury.
Attach an R-134a manifold gauge set or use a UL-approved

recovery/recycling device such as an R-134a A/C refrigerant center (which
meets SAE Standard J 1991). For additional information, refer to the
manufacturers equipment instructions.
Both gauges should indicate 413-551 kPa (60-80 psi) at 24°C
(75°F) with the engine off.
If little or no pressure is indicated, carry out the air conditioning
(A/C) system recovery, evacuation and charging procedure.
2. Use an R134-a Automatic calibration halogen leak detector to leak test

the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to the
www.JagDocs.com
3. If a leak is found, carry out the air conditioning (A/C) system recovery
procedure.
Climate Control System - General Information - Fluorescent Dye Leak
Detection
General Procedures
1. WARNING: Eye protection glasses supplied with the ultraviolet (UV)

lamp should be used to protect eyesight from harm.
NOTE: The air conditioning (A/C) system has an R-134a leak trace
dye wafer incorporated into the desiccant bag. The exact location of
leaks can be pinpointed by the bright yellow/green glow of the tracer
dye. Since more than one leak may exist, always inspect each
component. If it is necessary to add dye (due to a severe leakage for
example) use proprietary tracer dye injection equipment.
Check for leaks using ultraviolet (UV) lamp.
2. Check all components, fittings and lines of the A/C system.
3. Carry out the repair. For additional information, refer to Section 412-03
Air Conditioning.
www.JagDocs.com
4. After the leak is repaired, remove any traces of leak trace dye with a
general purpose oil solvent.
5. Check the A/C system for correct operation.
6. Verify the repair by operating the system for a short time and inspecting
with the (UV) lamp.
Climate Control System - General Information - Inspection and Assembly
Requirements
General Procedures
1. Check for leaks using ultraviolet (UV) Lamp.

this section.
2. NOTES:
Any time a hose or component connection leak is observed, the

component and fitting must be separated, cleaned and a new O-ring
fitted and lubricated with air conditioning compressor oil.
For additional information, refer to Specifications in this section.
When separating A/C joints, cap the open connections

immediately. Do not leave open to atmosphere.
O-ring seal surfaces must be free of dirt, lint, burrs and scratches. The
O-ring and connector should be lubricated with air conditioning
compressor oil.
For additional information, refer to Specifications in this section.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control System - General Information - Manifold Gauge Set
Connection
General Procedures
1. WARNINGS:
use of refrigerants. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
For additional information, refer to the manufacturers equipment

instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result in personal
injury and system damage.
Install the manifold gauge set. For additional information, refer to the
2. Carry out the repair.
3. Remove the manifold gauge set. For additional information, refer to the
www.JagDocs.com
4. Carry out flourescent dye leak detection test.

this section.
5. Check air conditioning (A/C) system for correct operation.

Climate Control System - General Information - Refrigerant Oil Adding TDV6
3.0L Diesel /V8 5.0L Petrol/V8 S/C 5.0L Petrol
General Procedures
Check
CAUTIONS:
Collect the refrigerant oil in a clean measuring cylinder.
Make sure that all openings are sealed. Use new blanking caps.
1. NOTES:
This step only needs to be carried out when replacing

the A/C compressor.
www.JagDocs.com

Torque: 15 Nm
2. NOTES:
This step only needs to be carried out when replacing

the A/C compressor.

Rotate the A/C compressor shaft at least 6 to 8 turns when

draining the refrigerant oil.
3. CAUTIONS:
The refrigerant oil top-up quantity must not exceed the refrigerant
oil fill quantity.
If other A/C components are being renewed in addition to the A/C

compressor, there is no need to top up with additional refrigerant oil,
apart from filling the compressor.
Top up with the calculated quantity of new refrigerant oil.
Refer to: Specifications (412-00, Specifications).

Adjustment

www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control System - General Information - Refrigerant System Tests
General Procedures
1. WARNINGS:
use of refrigerants. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
personal injury.
The A/C refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of

any vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts shop bulk refrigerant
at risk of contamination. If the vehicle A/C refrigerant is contaminated,
refer the customer to return to the repair facility that carried out the last
A/C repair. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C
recovery equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C
refrigerant. All contaminated A/C refrigerant must be disposed of as
hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment manufacturers
procedures and instructions. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in personal injury.
NOTE: Jaguar Land Rover Limited supports the efficient usage,

recovery and recycling of the refrigerant used in passenger car air
conditioners. Jaguar Land Rover Limited recommends the use of
UL-approved recovery/recycling device such as R-134a A/C refrigerant
www.JagDocs.com
center (which meets SAE Standard J 1991) during any A/C system repair
and recharge procedure which requires that the system be evacuated.
Use R-134a A/C Refrigerant Centre to evacuate and recover the A/C
system.
Follow the equipment manufactures procedures and instructions
for use of equipment.
Climate Control System - General Information - Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor Commissioning
General Procedures
Activation
CAUTION: Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the component.
1. Set the ignition to the on position, make sure the air conditioning (A/C)
is in the off position.
2. Start the engine and allow to run for a minimum of 5 minutes.
3. Set the heater controls to 22°C, with the fan speed set to 75%.
4. Switch on the A/C system.
5. Open all air vents in the dashboard.
6. Run the A/C system for a minimum of 5 minutes, while the engine is still
www.JagDocs.com
at idle speed.
7. Once this is achieved the compressor is stabilized, with the oil being
distributed evenly throughout the system.
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control -

Blower motor control module retaining bolts 1 - 9
Foot duct to cross car beam retaining bolt 5 - 44
Climate control assembly to cross car beam retaining bolts 9 - 80
Climate control module retaining bolts 1 - 9
Defrost vent/register blend door actuator retaining bolts 1 - 9
Evaporator pipe bracket retaining bolts 1 - 9
Evaporator housing retaining bolts 1 - 9
Footwell vent/duct blend door actuator retaining bolt 1 - 9
Heater core housing retaining bolts 2 - 18
Sunload sensor retaining bolt 2 - 18
Evaporator core pipes mounting bracket retaining bolts 1 - 9
Evaporator core pipes to thermostatic expansion valve retaining bolt 5 - 44
Thermostatic expansion valve retaining bolts 3 - 26
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Air Distribution and Filtering - Component Location
NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) vehicle shown, RHD (right-hand drive) vehicle similar.
Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 LH (left-hand) side window vent
2 Windshield vent
3 Driver's face level duct
4 Windshield/Side window vent duct
5 Front passenger's face level duct
6 RH (right-hand) side window vent
7 Front passenger's face level register
8 Pollen filter
9 RH inner face level register
10 Front passenger's footwell duct
11 RH rear footwell duct
12 Rear face level registers
13 Rear face level duct
14 LH rear footwell duct
15 LH inner face level register
16 Driver's footwell duct
17 Driver's face level register
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Air Distribution and Filtering - Overview
Overview
The air distribution and filtering system controls the distribution and quality of air supplied to the passenger compartment. The
system comprises of a pollen filter and a number of ducts, vents and registers.
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Air Distribution and Filtering - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus; P
= Media orientated system transport (MOST) ring.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
4 Touch screen display (TSD)
www.JagDocs.com
7 RH (right-hand) outer face level register
9 LH (left-hand) inner face level register
10 LH outer face level register
11 Face/Feet distribution stepper motor
12 RH temperature blend stepper motor
13 Windshield (defrost) distribution stepper motor
14 LH temperature blend stepper motor
System Operation
Face Level Registers
Operation of the face level registers is controlled by the ATC module, using LIN bus messages to the integral stepper motors.
The four registers operate together in both the opening and closing phases.
The face level registers can be selected to run in one of two modes; 'automatic' or 'always open'. The mode is selected on the
climate control screen of the TSD.
Refer to: Navigation System (415-01 Information and Entertainment System, Description and Operation).
In the automatic mode, operation of the face level registers is synchronized with the engine START/STOP button. When the
engine starts the ATC module opens the registers. When the engine stops, the ATC module closes the registers.
If a face level register is fouled, when it receives an open or close request, the register concerned makes a number of
attempts to reach the requested position. If the register still does not move, it is left in the fouled position. The remaining
registers will continue to open and close as normal.
www.JagDocs.com
The automatic mode is disabled when the climate control system is off. The ATC module closes the registers if they are open
in the automatic mode and the climate control system is selected off.
Diagnostics
If a fault occurs with the face level registers, a DTC (diagnostic trouble code) is stored in the ATC module. The DTC can be
read using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system. The Jaguar approved diagnostic system can also initiate a self test routine
to check the operation of the face level registers.
Refer to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
Air Ducts
The air ducts distribute air from the heater assembly to the registers and vents in the instrument panel and the center floor
console. Air ducts also direct air from the heater assembly into the front and rear footwells.
Registers and Vents

The registers control the flow and direction of air from the air ducts. The instrument panel contains four face level registers;
one at each end and two mounted centrally. For the rear seat occupants, two registers are installed in the rear face of the
center floor console. All of the registers incorporate vertical and horizontal directional vane adjustment and full air flow
adjustment down to zero.
The four face level registers in the instrument panel each contain an integral stepper motor. The stepper motors enable the
registers to rotate between the open and closed positions. In the open position, the registers have normal appearance and
functionality. In the closed position, the registers present a smooth surface flush with the surrounding instrument panel.
The vents are fixed outlets. There are four vents in the upper surface of the instrument panel; one in each end to direct air
onto the side windows and two along the front edge to direct air onto the windshield.
Central Face Level Registers

Item Description
A Registers closed
B Registers open
www.JagDocs.com
Pollen Filter
Item Description
1 Air inlet duct
2 Pollen filter
3 Cover
The pollen filter removes odors and fine particles from fresh air entering the passenger compartment. The pollen filter is
located in the air inlet duct, in the inlet to the blower. A cover on the underside of the air inlet duct provides access to the
pollen filter for servicing.
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Heating and Ventilation - Component Location
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) vehicle shown, LHD (left-hand drive) vehicle similar.
Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Ventilation outlet
2 Blower relay (on RJB (rear junction box))
3 Heater assembly
4 Blower control module
5 Blower
7 Air inlet duct
8 Auxiliary coolant pump
Comments:
All except 3.0L vehicles; 5.0L version shown, 3.0L diesel version similar.
Climate Control - Heating and Ventilation - Overview
Overview
The heating and ventilation system controls the temperature and flow of air supplied to the passenger compartment. The
system is a dual zone automatic system, which can provide different temperature settings for the LH (left-hand) and RH
(right-hand) sides of the passenger compartment.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Heating and Ventilation - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
Comments:
all except 3.0L vehicles; 5.0L version shown, 3.0L diesel version similar
5 Touch screen display (TSD)
6 Integrated control panel
7 Information control module
10 RH (right-hand) temperature blend stepper motor
11 LH (left-hand) temperature blend stepper motor
15 Blower
System Operation
Operation of the heating and ventilation system is controlled by the ATC module.
Refer to: Control Components (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation).
The system can be operated in automatic or manual mode, with temperature settings selected using the switches on the
integrated control panel.
When the engine is running, coolant is constantly circulated through the heater core by the engine coolant pump and the
auxiliary coolant pump. Where fitted, the auxiliary coolant pump is energized by the CJB on receipt of medium speed CAN bus
signals from the ATC module. The CJB broadcasts auxiliary coolant pump status over the medium speed CAN bus for use by
other vehicle systems.
The blower is supplied with power by the blower relay on the RJB and connected to ground via the blower control module. The
blower control module regulates the voltage across the blower motor to control blower speed. The voltage set by the blower
www.JagDocs.com
control module is controlled by a PWM (pulse width modulation) signal from the ATC module. The ATC module uses a feedback
signal from the blower control module to monitor blower speed.
Heater Assembly
The heater assembly controls the temperature and flow of air supplied to the air distribution ducts. The heater assembly is
mounted on the vehicle centerline, between the instrument panel and the engine bulkhead.
The heater assembly consists of a casing that contains an A/C (air conditioning) evaporator, a heater core, two air distribution
control doors and two temperature blend control doors. On 3.0L diesel vehicles, the heater assembly also contains an electric
booster heater.
Refer to: Electric Booster Heater (412-02 Auxiliary Climate Control, Description and Operation).
Mounted on the heater casing are four stepper motors. Each of the stepper motors is connected to either an air distribution
control door or a temperature blend control door.
The A/C evaporator is part of the A/C system.

Refer to: Air Conditioning (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation).
The heater core provides the heat source to warm the air supplied to the passenger compartment. The heater core is an
aluminum two pass, fin and tube heat exchanger, and is installed across the width of the heater housing. Two aluminum tubes
attached to the heater core extend through the engine bulkhead and connect to the engine cooling system. For additional
information, refer to:
Engine Cooling (303-03A, Description and Operation),

Engine Cooling (303-03B Engine Cooling - V6 3.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Engine Cooling (303-03C, Description and Operation).
Air Inlet Duct

The air inlet duct connects the fresh air inlet in the engine bulkhead to the heater assembly. The air inlet duct is installed
behind the instrument panel on the passenger side.
The air inlet duct consists of a casing that contains a pollen filter, an air inlet door, a blower and a blower control module. A
recirculation air inlet is incorporated into the casing. A servo motor is mounted on the casing and connected to the air inlet
door, to allow selection between fresh and recirculated air.
The pollen filter is part of the air distribution and filtering system.
Refer to: Air Distribution and Filtering (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation).
The blower regulates the volume of air flowing through the air inlet duct to the heater assembly. The blower consists of an
open hub, centrifugal fan and an electric motor.
The blower control module regulates the power supply to the blower motor. The blower control module is installed in the air
inlet duct downstream of the blower, where any heat generated during operation is dissipated by the air flow.
Auxiliary Coolant Pump

On all vehicles except 3.0L, an auxiliary coolant pump is installed on the rear right side of the radiator housing, in the return
line from the heater core. The auxiliary coolant pump is an electric pump that boosts the flow of coolant through the heater
core.
Ventilation Outlets
The ventilation outlets allow the free flow of air through the passenger compartment. The outlets are installed in the LH and
RH rear quarter panels, below the rear lamps. Each ventilation outlet consists of a grille covered by a soft rubber flap, and is
effectively a non-return valve. The flaps open and close automatically depending on the pressure differential between the air
inside and outside the vehicle.
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Air Conditioning - Component Location
NOTE: LHD (left-hand drive) 4.2L vehicle shown, other vehicles similar.
Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Evaporator
2 Thermostatic expansion valve
3 Low pressure line
4 Low pressure servicing connection
5 A/C (air conditioning) compressor
6 Receiver/Drier
7 Condenser
8 Refrigerant pressure sensor
9 High pressure line
10 High pressure servicing connection
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Air Conditioning - Overview
Overview
The A/C (air conditioning) system transfers heat from the passenger compartment to the outside atmosphere to provide the
heater assembly with dehumidified cold air. It is a sealed, closed loop system filled with a charge weight of R134a refrigerant
as the heat transfer medium. Oil is added to the refrigerant to lubricate the internal components of the A/C compressor.
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Air Conditioning - System Operation and Component
Description
System Operation
General
To accomplish the transfer of heat, refrigerant is circulated around a sealed system, where it passes through two
pressure/temperature regimes. In each of the regimes the refrigerant changes state, during which process maximum heat
absorption or dissipation occurs.
The low pressure/temperature regime is from the thermostatic expansion valve, through the evaporator to the compressor. The
refrigerant decreases in pressure and temperature at the thermostatic expansion valve, then changes state from a liquid to a
vapor in the evaporator to absorb heat.
The high pressure/temperature regime is from the compressor, through the condenser and receiver drier assembly to the
thermostatic expansion valve. The refrigerant increases in pressure and temperature as it passes through the compressor, then
releases heat and changes state from a vapor to a liquid in the condenser.
Operation of the A/C (air conditioning) system is controlled by the ATC (automatic temperature control) module.
The A/C system works in conjunction with:
The air distribution and filtering system.

Refer to: Air Distribution and Filtering (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation).
The heating and ventilation system.
Refer to: Heating and Ventilation (412-01 Climate Control, Description and Operation).
www.JagDocs.com
A/C System Flow Diagram
NOTE: A = Refrigerant liquid; B = Refrigerant vapor; C = Air flow.

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Evaporator
2 Thermostatic expansion valve
3 High pressure servicing connection
5 Engine cooling fan
6 Condenser
7 Receiver/Drier
8 A/C compressor
9 Low pressure servicing connection
10 Blower
A/C Compressor
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Pressure relief valve
2 Outlet port
3 Inlet port
4 Solenoid valve
6 Pulley
The A/C compressor circulates refrigerant around the system by compressing low pressure, low temperature vapor from the
evaporator and discharging the resultant high pressure, high temperature vapor to the condenser.
The A/C compressor is a permanently engaged variable displacement unit which is driven by the engine accessory drive belt. To
protect the system from excessive pressure, a pressure relief valve is installed in the outlet side of the A/C compressor. The
pressure relief valve vents excess pressure into the engine compartment.
Condenser
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 RH (right-hand) end tank
2 Condenser core
3 LH (left-hand) end tank
4 Mounting brackets (4 off)
5 High pressure compressor discharge line connector block
6 High pressure liquid outlet line connector block
7 Receiver/Drier outlet pipe
8 Receiver/Drier inlet pipe
9 Receiver/Drier
The condenser transfers heat from the refrigerant to the surrounding air to convert the high pressure vapor from the
compressor into a liquid. The condenser is installed immediately in front of the radiator. Two brackets on each end tank attach
the condenser to the end tanks of the radiator.
The condenser is classified as a sub-cooling condenser and consists of a fin and tube heat exchanger core installed between
two end tanks. Divisions in the end tanks separate the heat exchanger into a four pass upper (condenser) section and a two
pass lower (sub-cooler) section.
The LH end tank provides the connections to the high pressure line from the A/C compressor and the high pressure liquid line
to the evaporator.
The RH end tank provides the connections to the receiver drier.
Receiver Drier
The receiver drier is integrated into the RH end tank of the condenser to remove solid impurities and moisture from the
refrigerant. It also provides a reservoir for liquid refrigerant to accommodate changes of heat load at the evaporator.
NOTE: The receiver drier is part of the condenser assembly and is not serviceable separately.
Refrigerant entering the receiver drier passes through a filter and a desiccant pack, then collects in the base of the unit before
flowing through the outlet pipe back to the condenser.
www.JagDocs.com
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
The refrigerant pressure sensor is located in the high pressure/temperature refrigerant line between the condenser and the
thermostatic expansion valve.
Thermostatic Expansion Valve

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Metering valve
2 Housing
3 Diaphragm
4 Temperature sensor
5 Outlet passage from evaporator
6 Inlet passage to evaporator
The thermostatic expansion valve meters the flow of refrigerant into the evaporator, to match the refrigerant flow with the
heat load of the air passing through the evaporator.
The thermostatic expansion valve is a block type valve located behind the heater assembly, and attached to the inlet and
outlet ports of the evaporator. The thermostatic expansion valve consists of an aluminium housing containing inlet and outlet
passages. A ball and spring metering valve is installed in the inlet passage and a temperature sensor is installed in the outlet
passage. The temperature sensor consists of a temperature sensitive tube connected to a diaphragm. The bottom end of the
temperature sensitive tube acts on the ball of the metering valve. Pressure on top of the diaphragm is controlled by the
evaporator outlet temperature conducted through the temperature sensitive tube. The bottom of the diaphragm senses
evaporator outlet pressure.
Liquid refrigerant flows through the metering valve into the evaporator. The restriction across the metering valve reduces the
pressure and temperature of the refrigerant. The restriction also changes the liquid stream of refrigerant into a fine spray, to
improve the evaporation process. As the refrigerant passes through the evaporator, it absorbs heat from the air flowing through
the evaporator. The increase in temperature causes the refrigerant to vaporise and increase in pressure.
The temperature and pressure of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator acts on the diaphragm and temperature sensitive tube,
which regulate the metering valve opening and so control the volume of refrigerant flowing through the evaporator. The warmer
the air flowing through the evaporator, the more heat available to evaporate refrigerant and thus the greater volume of
refrigerant allowed through the metering valve.
Evaporator
The evaporator is installed in the heater assembly, between the blower and the heater matrix, to absorb heat from the exterior
or recirculated air.
Most of the moisture in the air passing through the evaporator condenses into water, which drains out of the vehicle by passing
through a drain tube to the underside of the vehicle.
Refrigerant Lines
To maintain similar flow velocities around the A/C system, the diameter of the refrigerant lines varies to suit the two
pressure/temperature regimes. Larger diameter pipes are installed in the low pressure/temperature regime and smaller
diameter pipes are installed in the high pressure/temperature regime.
Low and high pressure charging connections are incorporated into the refrigerant lines for system servicing.
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Control Components - Component Location
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) vehicle shown, LHD (left-hand drive) vehicle similar.
Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Pollution sensor
Comments:
where fitted
2 Sunload sensor
3 Ambient air temperature sensor
4 Windshield (Defrost) distribution stepper motor
5 Evaporator temperature sensor
8 Control switches
9 Humidity and temperature sensor
10 Air inlet servo motor
11 Blower
16 A/C (air conditioning) compressor solenoid valve
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Control Components - Overview
Overview
The climate control system is controlled by the ATC (automatic temperature control) module. It controls the heating and
ventilation system and the A/C (air conditioning) system to regulate the temperature, volume and distribution of air into the
passenger compartment. The system is a fully automatic dual zone system capable of maintaining individual temperature
levels selected for the LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand) sides of the passenger compartment, up to a maximum differential
of approximately 3 ºC (5.4 ºF). Manual overrides for the system include inlet air source, blower speed and air distribution.
These selections can be made using either the soft switches on the home and climate control screens of the touch screen
display (TSD), or the switches on the integrated control panel.
The ATC module also controls:
The rear window heater.

The windshield heater (where fitted).
The exterior mirror heaters.
The seat heaters (where fitted).
The steering wheel heater.
TSD Home Screen

www.JagDocs.com
TSD Climate Control Screen
www.JagDocs.com
Integrated Control Panel
Item Description
1 LH temperature switches
2 Blower switch
www.JagDocs.com
3 RH temperature switches
4 Automatic climate control switch
5 Recirculation switch
6 Rear window heater switch
7 Windshield heater switch
Comments:
where fitted
8 Programmed defrost switch
Climate Control - Control Components - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
Comments:
All except 3.0L vehicles; 5.0L version shown, 3.0L diesel version similar.
6 TSD (touch screen display)
8 Evaporator temperature sensor
9 Humidity and temperature sensor
10 Sunload sensor
12 Pollution sensor
Comments:
where fitted
13 Air inlet servo motor
14 A/C (air conditioning) compressor solenoid valve
15 RH (right-hand) outer face level register
17 LH (left-hand) inner face level register
18 LH outer face level register
19 RH temperature blend stepper motor
22 LH temperature blend stepper motor
23 Windshield (Defrost) stepper motor
www.JagDocs.com

26 Blower
System Operation
Air Inlet Control
The source of inlet air is automatically controlled unless overridden by pressing the air recirculation switch on the integrated
control panel. During automatic control, the ATC module determines the required position of the recirculation door from its
'comfort' algorithm and, if fitted, the pollution sensor.
The ATC module provides analogue signals to the air inlet servo motor along a hardwired connection. A potentiometer in the
motor supplies the ATC module with a position feedback signal for closed loop control.
Air Temperature Control

Cooled air from the evaporator enters the heater assembly, where temperature blend doors direct a proportion of the air
through the heater core to produce the required output air temperature.
The two temperature blend doors operate independently to enable individual temperature settings for the left and right sides
of the passenger compartment. The temperature blend doors are operated by stepper motors, which are controlled by the ATC
module using LIN bus messages.
The ATC module calculates the temperature blend stepper motor positions required to achieve the selected temperature and
compares it against the current position. If there is any difference, the ATC module signals the stepper motors to adopt the
new position.
Air temperature is controlled automatically unless maximum heating (HI) or maximum cooling (LO) is selected. When maximum
heating or cooling is selected, a 'comfort' algorithm in the ATC module adopts an appropriate strategy for air distribution, blower
speed, and air source.
Temperature control in one side of the passenger compartment can be compromised by the other side of the passenger
compartment being set to a high level of heating or cooling. True maximum heating or cooling (displayed as 'HI' or 'LO' on the
TSD) can only be selected for the driver's side of the passenger compartment. If 'HI' or 'LO' is selected for the driver's side, the
temperature for the front passenger's side is automatically set to match the driver's side.
If A/C is selected off in the automatic mode, no cooling of the inlet air will take place. The minimum output air temperature
from the system will be ambient air temperature plus any heat pick up in the air inlet path.
If the Temp. sync. soft button on the TSD is pressed, the ATC module synchronizes the temperature of the passenger side of
the passenger compartment with the driver's side.
Blower Control
When the system is in the automatic mode, the ATC module determines the blower speed required from a comfort algorithm.
When the system is in the manual mode, the ATC module operates the blower at the speed selected using either the rotary
control switch on the integrated control panel or the + and - soft buttons on the touch screen display (TSD). The ATC module
also adjusts blower speed to compensate for the ram effect on inlet air produced by forward movement of the vehicle. As
vehicle speed and ram effect increases, blower motor speed is reduced, and vice versa.
Air Distribution Control

Two air distribution doors are used to direct air into the passenger compartment. The doors are operated by stepper motors,
which are controlled by the ATC module using LIN bus messages.
When the A/C system is in automatic mode, the ATC module automatically controls air distribution into the passenger
compartment in line with its 'comfort' algorithm. Automatic control is overridden if any of the TSD air distribution soft buttons
are selected. Air distribution in the passenger compartment will remain as selected until the 'Auto' switch is pressed or a
different manual selection is made.
A/C Compressor Control

When A/C is selected the ATC module maintains the evaporator at an operating temperature that varies with the passenger
compartment cooling requirements. If the requirement for cooled air decreases, the ATC module raises the evaporator
operating temperature by reducing the flow of refrigerant provided by the A/C compressor. The ATC module closely controls the
rate of temperature increase to avoid introducing moisture into the passenger compartment.
If the requirement for cooled air increases, the ATC module lowers the evaporator operating temperature by increasing the flow
of refrigerant provided by the A/C compressor.
When A/C is off, the compressor current signal supplied by the ATC module holds the A/C compressor solenoid valve in the
minimum flow position, effectively switching off the A/C function.
The ATC module incorporates limits for the operating pressure of the refrigerant system. If the system approaches the high
pressure limit, the compressor current signal is progressively reduced until the system pressure decreases. If the system falls
below the low pressure limit, the compressor current signal is held at its lowest setting so that the A/C compressor is
maintained at its minimum stroke. This avoids depletion of the lubricant from the A/C compressor.
www.JagDocs.com
A/C Compressor Torque

The ATC module transmits refrigerant pressure and A/C compressor current values to the ECM (engine control module) over the
medium speed then high speed CAN bus, using the CJB as a gateway. The ECM uses these values to calculate the torque being
used to drive the A/C compressor. The ECM compares the calculated value with its allowable value and if necessary forces the
ATC module to inhibit the A/C compressor by transmitting the 'ACClutchInhibit' CAN message. This forces the ATC module to
reduce the drive current to the A/C compressor solenoid valve, which reduces refrigerant flow. This in turn reduces the torque
required to drive the A/C compressor.
By reducing the maximum A/C compressor torque, the ECM is able to reduce the load on the engine when it needs to maintain
vehicle performance or cooling system integrity.
Cooling Fan Control

The ATC module determines the amount of condenser cooling required from the refrigerant pressure sensor, since there is a
direct relationship between the temperature and pressure of the refrigerant. The cooling requirement is broadcast to the ECM
on the medium speed CAN bus. The ECM then controls the temperature of the condenser using the cooling fan.
Programmed Defrost
The programmed defrost DEF switch is located on the integrated control panel. When the switch is pressed, the ATC module
instigates the programmed defrost function. When selected, the ATC module configures the system as follows:
Automatic mode off.

A/C on.
Selected temperature unchanged.
Air inlet set to fresh air.
Air distribution set to windshield.
Blower speed set to level 6.
Windshield heater (where fitted) and rear window heater on.
The programmed defrost function can be cancelled by one of the following:
Selecting any air distribution switch on the TSD.

Pressing the AUTO switch on the integrated control panel.
A second press of the DEF button.
Switching the ignition OFF.
The blower speed can be adjusted without terminating the programmed defrost function.
Rear Window Heater

Rear window heater operation is only enabled when the engine is running. The ATC module controls operation of the rear
window heater using a relay in the RJB. When rear window heater operation is required, the ATC module broadcasts a message
to the RJB on the medium speed CAN bus. On receipt of the message, the RJB energizes the relay by providing a ground path
for the relay coil. This allows a battery feed to flow across the relay to power the rear window heater element.
There are two modes of rear window heater operation; manual and automatic.
Manual operation is activated by pressing the rear window heater switch on the integrated control panel. When the switch is
pressed, the status LED (light emitting diode) in the switch illuminates and the rear window heater element is energized.
Manual operation is discontinued when the rear window heater switch is pressed a second time, 21 minutes have elapsed (the
heating phase), or the engine stops. If manual operation is discontinued by the engine stopping, the previous heating phase is
resumed if the engine is re-started within 30 seconds.
There are two variants of automatic operation; automatic operation at the start of a journey and automatic operation during a
journey.
Automatic operation at the start of a journey is initiated if the ambient air temperature is below 5 °C (41 °F). In this instance,
the switch LED is illuminated and the heater element is energized for 21 minutes. Automatic operation is discontinued if the
rear window heater switch is pressed or the engine stops.
Automatic operation during a journey is initiated when low ambient air temperatures are experienced and the vehicle has been
travelling for a set period of time above a threshold speed. In this instance, no feedback is given to the driver to inform him
the rear window heater is operational (the switch LED is not illuminated). The duration of heater operation is variable
depending on the ambient air temperature, vehicle speed and the amount of time the vehicle has been travelling.
Windshield Heater (Where Fitted)

Windshield heater operation is only enabled when the engine is running. The ATC module controls operation of the windshield
heater using two relays in the EJB (engine junction box). When windshield heater operation is required, the ATC module
broadcasts a message to the CJB on the medium speed CAN bus. On receipt of the message, the CJB energizes the relays by
providing a ground path for both relay coils. This allows a battery feed to flow across the relays to power the windshield left
and right heater elements.
There are two modes of windshield heater operation; manual and automatic.
Manual operation is activated by pressing the windshield heater switch on the integrated control panel. When the switch is
pressed, the status LED in the switch illuminates and the windshield heater elements are energized. Manual operation is
www.JagDocs.com
discontinued when the windshield heater switch is pressed a second time, 5 minutes have elapsed (the heating phase), or the
engine stops. If manual operation is discontinued by the engine stopping, the previous heating phase is resumed if the engine
is re-started within 30 seconds.
There are two variants of automatic operation; automatic operation at the start of a journey and automatic operation during a
journey.
Automatic operation at the start of a journey is initiated if the ambient air temperature is below 5 °C (41 °F). In this instance,
the switch LED is illuminated and the heater elements are energized for 6.5 minutes. Automatic operation is discontinued if
the windshield heater switch is pressed or the engine stops.
Automatic operation during a journey is initiated when low ambient air temperatures are experienced and the vehicle has been
travelling for a set period of time above a threshold speed. In this instance, no feedback is given to the driver to inform him
the windshield heater is operational (the switch LED is not illuminated) and the duration of operation is variable depending
upon the ambient air temperature, vehicle speed and the amount of time the vehicle has been travelling.
Exterior Mirror Heaters

Operation of the exterior mirror heaters is fully automatic and not controllable by the driver. Exterior mirror heater operation is
determined by ambient air temperature and windshield wiper status. When ambient air temperature reaches a pre-determined
level, the ATC module broadcasts an exterior mirror heating request to the door modules over the medium speed CAN bus. On
receipt of this message, the door modules provide feed and ground connections to both exterior mirror heater elements.
The amount of time the exterior mirror heaters are operational increases if the windshield wipers are switched on. This ensures
the mirrors remain mist free in damp and wet conditions, where there is an increased risk of misting.
Seat Heaters (Where Fitted)

There are four seat heater settings available; off, 1, 2 and 3, which can be selected on the home and climate control screens
of the TSD. The heat setting is relayed to the vehicle occupants through a graduated display on the TSD.
Operation of the heated seats is controlled by the ATC module. When the ATC module receives a heating request from the
TSD, it broadcasts a message to the CJB over the medium speed CAN bus. The CJB then provides a hardwired 12 V supply to
the three heater elements in the related front seat. The heater elements, two in the seat cushion and one in the seat squab,
are wired in series. The ATC module monitors seat temperature using a temperature sensor located in each seat cushion. The
CJB provides the temperature sensors with a 5 V supply. The level of the returned voltage back to the CJB is proportional to
the seat temperature. The value of the return signal is broadcast to the ATC module, over the medium speed CAN bus, which
allows it to control the seat temperature to the required level. The ATC module will suspend or disable operation of the seat
heaters if any of the following occur:
Battery voltage exceeds 16.5 ± 0.3 V for more than 5 seconds. Seat heating is re-enabled when battery voltage
decreases to 16.2 ± 0.3 V.
If a short or open circuit is detected.
If the seat heat temperature rises significantly above the target temperature setting.
The graduated display on the TSD remains illuminated until the seat heaters are turned off or the engine stops. If the engine
is restarted within 30 seconds the seat heater resumes the previous heating level.
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Wheel Heater
The steering wheel heater has a single heat setting and is turned on/off on the home and climate control screens of the TSD.
The on/off status of the steering wheel heater is relayed to the vehicle occupants through the TSD. When the ignition is
switched off, the steering wheel heater will reset to off.
Power for the heater element is supplied by the CJB on receipt of a request from the ATC module over the medium speed CAN
bus. Temperature control for the heater element is provided by the steering wheel heater control module which receives a
temperature feedback signal from a NTC (negative temperature coefficient) thermistor located within the steering wheel.
ATC Module
www.JagDocs.com
The ATC module is mounted on the outboard end of the air inlet duct, behind the front passenger side of the instrument panel.
The ATC module processes inputs from the TSD, the switches on the integrated control panel and the system sensors. In
response to these inputs, the ATC module outputs control signals to the A/C system and the heating and ventilation system.
Two electrical connectors provide the interface between the ATC module and the vehicle wiring. The ATC module uses hardwired
inputs from the system sensors, the LIN bus to communicate with the stepper motors and the medium speed CAN bus to
communicate with other control modules on the vehicle.
A/C Compressor Solenoid Valve

The A/C compressor solenoid valve is integral with the A/C compressor. Operation of the solenoid valve is controlled by the ATC
module using a hardwired drive current of differing values. By controlling the flow of refrigerant through the compressor, the
solenoid valve can control the A/C system pressure and the evaporator operating temperature.
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
The refrigerant pressure sensor provides the ATC module with a pressure input from the high pressure side of the refrigerant
system. The refrigerant pressure sensor is located in the refrigerant line between the condenser and the thermostatic
expansion valve.
The ATC module supplies a 5 V reference voltage to the refrigerant pressure sensor and receives a return signal voltage,
between 0 V and 5 V, related to system pressure.
The ATC module uses the signal from the pressure sensor to protect the refrigerant system from extremes of pressure. The ATC
module transmits the A/C pressure, along with the compressor drive current value, to the instrument cluster on the medium
speed CAN bus. These signals are broadcast to the ECM on the high speed CAN bus to allow it to calculate the torque being
applied to the engine by the compressor.
To protect the system from extremes of pressure, the ATC module sets the A/C compressor to the minimum flow position if the
pressure:
Decreases to 2.1 ± 0.2 bar (31.5 ± 3 lbf/in²); the ATC module loads the A/C compressor again when the pressure
increases to 2.3 ± 0.2 bar (33.4 ± 3 lbf/in²).
Increases to 31 ± 1 bar (450 ± 14.5 lbf/in²); the ATC module loads the A/C compressor again when the pressure
decreases to 26 ± 1 bar (377 ± 14.5 lbf/in²).
Evaporator Temperature Sensor

www.JagDocs.com
The evaporator temperature sensor is a NTC thermistor that provides the ATC module with a temperature signal from the
downstream side of the evaporator. The evaporator temperature sensor is mounted directly onto the evaporator matrix fins.
The ATC module uses the input from the evaporator temperature sensor to control the load of the A/C compressor and thus the
operating temperature of the evaporator.
Humidity and Temperature Sensor
www.JagDocs.com
The humidity and temperature sensor is installed above the glovebox in the instrument panel. The sensor incorporates:
A NTC thermistor to measure temperature.

A capacitive sensor element to measure humidity.
A motor driven fan to draw air through the sensor and over the sensing elements.
The humidity sensor element is built out of a film capacitor on different substrates. The dielectric is a polymer which absorbs
or releases water proportional to the relative humidity of the air being drawn through the sensor, and thus changes the
capacitance of the capacitor. For protection, the sensor element is contained in a nylon mesh cover.
Humidity within the passenger compartment is controlled by raising and lowering the evaporator temperature. An increase in
evaporator temperature increases the moisture content of the air entering the passenger compartment. Lowering the
evaporator temperature reduces the moisture content of the air entering the passenger compartment.
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 LH door mirror
2 Ambient air temperature sensor
The ambient air temperature sensor is a NTC thermistor that provides the ATC module with an input of external air
temperature. The sensor is hard wired to the ECM and its signal is transmitted to the instrument cluster on the high speed
CAN bus. The instrument cluster acts as a gateway and transmits the ambient air temperature signal to the ATC module on the
medium speed CAN bus. The sensor is installed in the LH door mirror, and is accessed by removing the mirror glass, cap and
actuator.
Sunload Sensor
The sunload sensor consists of two photoelectric cells that provide the ATC module with inputs of light intensity; one as
sensed coming from the left of the vehicle and one as sensed coming from the right. The inputs are a measure of the solar
heating effect on vehicle occupants, and are used by the ATC module to adjust blower speed, temperature and distribution to
improve comfort.
The sensor is installed in the speaker grill on the upper surface of the instrument panel. Power for the sensor is provided by a
5 V feed from the instrument cluster.
The sensor also contains the active anti-theft alarm indicator.

Refer to: Anti-Theft - Active (419-01 Anti-Theft - Active, Description and Operation).
Pollution Sensor (Where Fitted)
The pollution sensor allows the ATC module to monitor the ambient air for the level of hydrocarbons and oxidized gases such
as nitrous oxides, sulphur oxides and carbon monoxide. The sensor is attached to the center of the upper front crossmember.
The pollution sensor is powered by an ignition controlled voltage feed from the CJB and provides the ATC module with separate
signals of hydrocarbon and oxidized gas levels. With a pollution sensor fitted, the ATC module can control the air inlet source
to reduce the amount of contaminants entering the passenger compartment. This function is fully automatic, but can be
overridden by manual selection of the air source using the recirculation switch on the integrated control panel.
If there is a fault with the sensor, the ATC module disables automatic operation of the recirculation door.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Removal
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Cover (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and
Installation).
2.
www.JagDocs.com
3.
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
Installation

Climate Control - Blower Motor
Removal
2.
www.JagDocs.com
3.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Climate Control - Blower Motor Control Module
Removal
2. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the clips or

screw threads. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in damage to the climate control assembly.
NOTE: RHD illustration shown, LHD is similar.

www.JagDocs.com
3. Torque: 1.3 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Center Registers
Removal
CAUTION: Do not manually open the registers. Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to the internal
components.
NOTES:
The center registers must be open before carrying out this procedure. To achieve this set the registers to 'Always Open'
using the climate settings tab on the information and entertainment display. If the registers are set to 'Automatic' mode
(rotating with ignition on/off) and one or more are disconnected during an ignition cycle, a vehicle battery reset may be
required to reconnect the affected registers to the LIN BUS.
1. Set the registers to 'Always Open', using the information and

entertainment display.
2. Refer to: Passenger Side Register (412-01 Climate Control, Removal and
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
3. Fully extend and lower the steering column for access.
4.
5.
www.JagDocs.com
6. CAUTIONS:
The center registers must be open to aid access and

prevent damage to surrounding trim.
Do not manually open the registers. Failure to follow

this instruction may result in damage to the internal
components.

Installation
2. Return the registers to their original setting - 'Automatic' - using the

information and entertainment display.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Climate Control Assembly
Removal
NOTES:
RHD illustration shown, LHD is similar.
3. Refer to: Instrument Panel Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and

www.JagDocs.com
4.
5. Torque: 9 Nm
Torque: 9 Nm
7.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Climate Control - Climate Control Module
Removal
2. Refer to: Instrument Panel Console (501-12 Instrument Panel and

3. CAUTIONS:
Take extra care not to damage the clips or screw

threads. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
damage to the climate control assembly.
Make sure that the component is correctly located on

the locating dowels.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 1.3 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Defrost Vent/Register Blend Door Actuator
Removal
1. Refer to: Battery Disconnect and Connect (414-01, General Procedures).
2. Refer to: Instrument Panel Console (501-12, Removal and Installation).
3. CAUTIONS:


www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 1.3 Nm
Installation

Climate Control - Driver Side Register
Removal
components.
NOTES:
If the registers are set to 'Automatic' mode and one or more are disconnected during an ignition cycle, a vehicle battery
reset may be required to reconnect the affected registers to the LIN BUS.
1.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
2.
3.
www.JagDocs.com

www.JagDocs.com
6.
5.
7.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Climate Control - Evaporator
Removal
All vehicles
2. Refer to: Heater Core and Evaporator Core Housing (412-01 Climate
Control, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Thermostatic Expansion Valve (412-01 Climate Control,


www.JagDocs.com

Torque: 1.3 Nm
5. Torque: 1.3 Nm
6.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
7.
www.JagDocs.com
All vehicles

Torque: 1.3 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
10. WARNING: Only use moderate force when installing

the sensor.
CAUTIONS:
Make sure the evaporator temperature sensor harness

does not become trapped.
Make sure that the sensor is correctly installed.

Installation

Climate Control - Floor Console Register
Removal
1. Remove both floor console side trim panels.
2.
www.JagDocs.com
4. Remove the 2 clips.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Climate Control - Footwell Vent/Duct Blend Door Actuator
Removal
2. Refer to: Climate Control Assembly (412-01 Climate Control, Removal

and Installation).
3. CAUTIONS:


www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 1.3 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Heater Core
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles

www.JagDocs.com

Torque: 1.3 Nm
4. Torque: 1.3 Nm
component.

www.JagDocs.com

component.
Torque: 1.3 Nm

7.

www.JagDocs.com
8.
Installation

Climate Control - Heater Core and Evaporator Core Housing
Removal

and Installation).

www.JagDocs.com

Torque: 1.3 Nm

Torque: 1.3 Nm
6. CAUTION: Make sure that the wiring harnesses are

correctly located.
NOTE: Note the position of the wiring harnesses to

aid installation.
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the wiring harnesses are

correctly located.
NOTE: Note the position of the wiring harnesses to

aid installation.
www.JagDocs.com
8. Torque: 2.4 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
9. Torque: 2.4 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com

Climate Control - Instrument Panel Register Trim Panel
Removal
2. Refer to: Center Registers (412-01 Climate Control, Removal and

Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
5.
Installation
1. CAUTION: Make sure that the clutch rib is located

between the two ribs on the car rearward (front half), of
the register housing to avoid damage on installation.

www.JagDocs.com
2.
• Position the Iocat1.ng peg.
www.JagDocs.com
E 101124'
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Removal
1. Refer to: Glove Compartment (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console,

2.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Climate Control - Passenger Side Register
Removal
components.
NOTES:
If the registers are set to 'Automatic' mode and one or more are disconnected during an ignition cycle, a vehicle battery
reset may be required to reconnect the affected registers to the LIN BUS.
1.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
4.
3.
2.
5.
6. Install the clips into the instrument panel.

www.JagDocs.com

8. NOTE: When removing the component, some of the

clips may remain attached. These clips should be removed
and returned to their original positions in the passenger
side register carrier.
9.
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Pollen Filter
Removal
1.
www.JagDocs.com
2.
3.
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Recirculation Blend Door Actuator
Removal
2. Refer to: Glove Compartment (501-12 Instrument Panel and Console,

3. NOTE: Make sure that the actuator is correctly aligned

to the recirculation blend door arm.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Climate Control - Sunload Sensor
Removal
2. CAUTIONS:
Protect the surrounding trim to avoid damage.
Make sure that the clips are correctly located.

www.JagDocs.com
3.
4. CAUTION: Make sure that the component is correctly

located on the locating dowels.
Torque: 2 Nm
I nst allat ion

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Climate Control - Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Removal
NOTES:

and Installation).

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 1.3 Nm

Torque: 1.3 Nm
All vehicles
5. CAUTIONS:
Take care not to damage the O-ring seals during

installation.
A new O-ring seal is to be installed.
Torque: 5.3 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
6. CAUTIONS:
Take care not to damage the O-ring seals during

installation.
Torque: 3.5 Nm
Installation

Auxiliary Climate Control -

Electric booster heater retaining screws 1.3 - 11
www.JagDocs.com
Auxiliary Climate Control - Electric Booster Heater - Component Location
Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Evaporator
2 Heater core
3 Electric booster heater
4 Heater assembly
5 150 A megafuse
Auxiliary Climate Control - Electric Booster Heater - Overview
Overview
3.0 L diesel vehicles incorporate an electric booster heater to ensure there is sufficient heat available to maintain heater
performance.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Auxiliary Climate Control - Electric Booster Heater - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN (controller area network) bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN (local
interconnect network) bus.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
8 Ambient temperature sensor
15 150 A megafuse
System Operation
General
Operation of the electric booster heater is controlled by the ATC module, which communicates with the micro-controller in the
booster heater using the LIN bus. The temperature requested by the ATC module is based on:
The ambient air temperature.

The engine coolant temperature.
The temperatures selected on the integrated control panel.
The blower must be running for the electric booster heater to operate.
If electrical load management is in force, electric booster heater performance is reduced. For additional information, refer to:
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14A, Description and Operation),

www.JagDocs.com
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14B Electronic Engine Controls - V6 3.0L Petrol, Description and Operation),
Electronic Engine Controls (303-14C, Description and Operation).
Electric Booster Heater
The electric booster heater is installed in the heater assembly, on the downstream side of the heater core. It consists of
ceramic coated thermistor elements, rated at 1.25 kW, and a micro-controller. Electrical power for the booster heater is
supplied by the BJB via a 150 A megafuse installed under the RH front seat.
Auxiliary Climate Control - Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump
Removal

2. Refer to: Air Deflector (501-02, Removal and Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4. NOTE: Clamp the coolant hose to minimize coolant

lose.

lose.
6.
Installation
1.
www.JagDocs.com

lose.
lose.
4.
www.JagDocs.com
6. Remove the coolant expansion tank pressure cap.
7. Fill the cooling system up to the MAX mark on the coolant expansion
tank using a fifty percent mixture of Jaguar Premium Cooling System
Fluid or equivalent, meeting Jaguar specification WSS M97B44-D and
fifty percent water.
8. Install the coolant expansion tank pressure cap.
10. Set the heating system to MAX heat, the blower motor to MAX speed
and the air distribution to the instrument panel registers.
11. CAUTION: Observe the engine temperature gauge. If the engine

starts to over-heat switch off immediately and allow to cool. Failure to
follow this instruction may cause damage to the vehicle
Allow the engine to run until hot air is emitted from the instrument
panel registers, while observing the engine temperature gauge.
12. Switch the engine off.
13. Allow the engine to cool.
www.JagDocs.com
14. WARNINGS:
Never remove the coolant expansion tank cap under any

circumstances while the engine is operating. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in personal injury.
To avoid having scalding hot coolant or steam blowing out of the

cooling system, use extreme care when removing the coolant pressure
cap from a hot cooling system. Wait until the engine has cooled, then
wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure cap and turn it slowly
until the pressure begins to release. Step back while the pressure is
released from the system. When certain all the pressure has been
released (still with a cloth) turn and remove the coolant pressure cap
from the coolant expansion tank. Failure to follow these instructions may
Release the cooling system pressure.
15. Fill the cooling system up to the MAX mark on the coolant expansion
tank using a fifty percent mixture of Jaguar Premium Cooling System
Fluid or equivalent, meeting Jaguar specification WSS M97B44-D and
fifty percent water.
16. Install the coolant expansion tank pressure cap.

www.JagDocs.com
17. Raise the vehicle.
18. Check all coolant hoses for visible signs of coolant leaks.
Refer to: Air Deflector (501-02, Removal and Installation).

Auxiliary Climate Control - Electric Booster Heater
Removal
NOTES:
All vehicles
All vehicles
www.JagDocs.com

Torque: 1.3 Nm


Installation

Air Conditioning -
A/C compressor retaining bolts 25 18 -
A/C compressor manifold and tube retaining bolt 9 - 80
A/C condenser core retaining studs 5 - 48
A/C condenser core supply and return lines retaining nuts 8 - 71
Power steering oil cooler retaining nuts 7 - 62
A/C desiccant bag retaining screw (vehicles fitted with petrol engines) 22 16 -
A/C desiccant bag retaining screw (vehicles fitted with diesel engines) 4 - 37
A/C pressure cutoff switch 8 - 71
www.JagDocs.com
Air Conditioning - Air Conditioning

REFER to: Climate Control System (412-00 Climate Control System - General Information, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Air Conditioning - Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
NOTES:
2. CAUTION: Make sure to support the vehicle with axle stands.
www.JagDocs.com


Procedures).
6.
www.JagDocs.com
7.
www.JagDocs.com
8.
9. CAUTIONS:
10. Take care not to damage the O-ring seals during

installation.
Torque: 17 Nm
11. Torque: 9 Nm
12. Torque: 25 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Air Conditioning - Condenser Core TDV6 3.0L Diesel
Removal
and Installation).

Procedures).
4.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
6. Torque: 20 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
7. Torque: 20 Nm
8. Torque: 10 Nm
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Air Conditioning - Pressure Cutoff Switch
Removal
1. For additional information, refer to: Air Conditioning (A/C) System

Recovery, Evacuation and Charging (412-00 Climate Control System -
2. For additional information, refer to: Air Cleaner (303-12, Removal and
Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4. CAUTION: Make sure the air conditioning (A/C) hose

does not turn when removing the low pressure switch.
TORQUE: 8 Nm
Installation

Instrument Cluster -
Illumination bulb. 3.0 Watt
www.JagDocs.com
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Speedometer
2 Message Center
3 Tachometer
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster - Overview
OVERVIEW
The primary task of the instrument cluster is to display current vehicle status through a series of analogue gauges, indicator
lamps, and a LCD (liquid crystal display) message center. In addition to this, the instrument cluster:
Acts as a gateway between the medium speed and high speed CAN (controller area network) bus networks
Is connected by the LIN (local interconnect network) bus to the start control unit and the steering wheel clockspring
Controls operation of the steering column adjust feature
Refer to: Steering Column (211-04 Steering Column, Description and Operation).
Acts as an interface for the passive anti-theft system.
Refer to: Anti-Theft - Active (419-01A Anti-Theft - Active, Description and Operation).
Two analogue gauges are located in the instrument cluster; the speedometer and the tachometer. The speedometer is located
on the LH (left-hand) side of the instrument cluster. The tachometer is located on the RH (right-hand) side of the instrument
cluster
and displays engine speeds up to 7000 Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) for the supercharged engine, 8000 RPM for the naturally
aspirated engines and 6000 RPM for diesel variants.
The message center is a LCD located in a central position in the cluster. The message center displays system status
information including fuel quantity remaining.
www.JagDocs.com
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
interconnect network) bus
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
5 Sun load sensor (alarm LED (light emitting diode))
www.JagDocs.com
6 Servotronic valve
8 Steering column motor
9 High speed CAN bus connection to other vehicle systems
10 Engine oil pressure switch
12 Brake fluid level switch
13 LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction switch
14 Start control module
15 Clockspring
16 RH (right-hand) steering column multifunction switch
17 Engine coolant level sensor
18 Auxiliary lighting switch
System Operation
WARNING INDICATOR FUNCTIONALITY
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 LH turn signal
2 RH turn signal
3 Brake warning
4 Brake warning (NAS)
5 Forward alert
6 Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)
7 Adaptive speed control
8 ABS (anti-lock brake system) warning
9 ABS warning (NAS)
10 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
11 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
12 Airbag warning
13 Front fog lamps
14 Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) warning
15 Seat belt warning
16 Side lamps
17 High beam
18 Rear fog lamps
The functionality for each of the above warning indicators is described in the following sections:
1 and 2. Turn Signal Indicators
The turn signal indicators are controlled by the CJB on receipt of medium speed CAN bus signals from the instrument cluster.
The instrument cluster outputs a voltage to the turn signal indicator switch. The switch contains resistors of different values.
When the switch is operated in either the LH or RH direction, the voltage is passed to a ground connection in the instrument
cluster which detects the reduced voltage supplied via the resistors. When the turn signal indicator switch is operated in the
LH or RH direction, the instrument cluster detects the ground voltage and determines whether a LH or RH selection is made.
The instrument cluster transmits a medium speed CAN message to the CJB for operation of the applicable turn signal
indicators. The message can contain a number of states for each possible switch position and also an out of range low and
high state for circuit faults and an initial value for the switch neutral position. The turn signal indicators are not subject to the
3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
The RJB (rear junction box) software controls the flash rate of the warning indicator which sends 'ON' and 'OFF' signals to the
instrument cluster which flashes the indicators in a green color. During normal operation, the warning indicator flashes slowly,
accompanied simultaneously by a sound from the instrument cluster sounder. If a fault exists, the RJB transmits a message to
the instrument cluster which responds by displaying an appropriate message in the message center.
The hazard warning indicators are controlled by the CJB on receipt of a completed ground path from the hazard warning
indicator switch. The CJB outputs a medium speed CAN message to the instrument cluster which operates both the LH and RH
turn signal indicators simultaneously. The hazard warning indicators can operate with the ignition switched off, therefore the
CAN message from the CJB will also carry a 'wake-up' message for the instrument cluster.
3. Brake Warning Indicator
This warning indicator is displayed in a red or amber color (dependant on market) as a brake symbol in all markets except
United States of America (USA) which have the word 'BRAKE' in place of the symbol. The indicator is controlled by high speed
CAN messages from the ABS module and the parking brake control module. The indicator is illuminated in a red color for a 3
www.JagDocs.com
second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
The instrument cluster monitors the fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir using a hardwired level switch. If the fluid level falls
to below a determined level, the switch contact is broken and the ABS module detects the low fluid level condition. The
instrument cluster illuminates the warning indicator and simultaneously displays a 'BRAKE FLUID LOW' message in the
message center.
NOTE: If both the brake warning indicator and the ABS warning indicator illuminate simultaneously, a major fault in the
brake system will have occurred.
The warning indicator also displays parking brake status. When the parking brake is applied, the warning indicator will be
illuminated by the instrument cluster and, if the vehicle is moving, the message 'PARK BRAKE APPLIED' will be also displayed
in the message center in response to a CAN message from the parking brake control module.
If a condition exists where the parking brake cannot be applied, the parking brake control module issues a CAN message to the
instrument cluster which flashes the warning lamp on and off and is accompanied with a message 'CANNOT APPLY PARK BRAKE'.
If a fault occurs in the parking brake system, the parking brake control module issues a CAN message to the
instrument cluster which illuminates the warning indicator and displays the message 'PARK BRAKE FAULT' in the message
center.
4. Forward Alert Indicator
The forward alert system uses the components of the adaptive speed control system to alert the driver of the presence of a
vehicle ahead. The system can be turned on and off using a switch located in the auxiliary lighting switch when the adaptive
speed control system is off. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second indicator check when the ignition is
switched on.
The forward alert system is controlled by the adaptive speed control module. When the switch is pressed, the forward alert
system is activated and the adaptive speed control module issues a forward alert active message on the high speed CAN bus
to the instrument cluster. The forward alert icon in the instrument cluster will illuminate in an amber color and a 'FORWARD
ALERT' message will be displayed in the message center. When the button is pressed a second time, the module issues a
forward alert off CAN message. The forward alert system will be deactivated, the forward alert icon will go off and a message
'FORWARD ALERT OFF' will be displayed in the message center.
5. Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) Indicator
The ASL is controlled by the ECM (engine control module). An ASL switch is located in the floor console, adjacent to the gear
selector lever. When the ASL switch is pressed, this is sensed by the ECM which issues a high speed CAN message to the
instrument cluster. The instrument cluster illuminates the ASL warning indicator in an amber color to show the driver that ASL
is active. The driver sets the required speed using the speed control SET +/- switches on the steering wheel. The selected
speed is shown by the message ' LIMITER SET XXX MPH / K/MH' in the message center. The indicator is illuminated in an
amber color for a 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on. ASL can be deselected by pressing the ASL switch,
by depressing the throttle pedal initiating kick-down or by pressing the 'cancel' switch on the steering wheel. The ASL indicator
will go off and the message center will display the message 'limiter cancelled' for 4 seconds. If a fault occurs in the ASL
system, the ECM will send a message to the instrument cluster to illuminate the ASL indicator and display the message
'LIMITER NOT AVAILABLE'.
6. Adaptive Speed Control Indicator
The adaptive speed control system is controlled by the adaptive speed control module. Operation of the SET +/- switches on
the steering wheel will activate the system. Operation of the switches is detected by the adaptive speed control module. The
module issues a high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster which illuminates the adaptive speed control indicator,
when the system is in 'follow mode', in an amber color and displays a 'SETSPEED XXX MPH / KM/H' message in the message
center. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
7. Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Warning Indicator
The ABS warning indicator is controlled by the ABS module. If a fault in the ABS system is detected by the ABS module, the
module issues a high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster to illuminate the ABS warning indicator in an amber color
and display the message 'ABS FAULT' in the instrument cluster. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second
indicator check when the ignition is switched on. If a fault is present when the ignition is on, the bulb will remain illuminated
after the 3 second indicator check period.
NOTES:
The 'ABS FAULT' message is not displayed in NAS markets).
If both the ABS warning indicator and the brake warning indicator illuminate simultaneously, a major fault in the brake
system will have occurred.
On NAS vehicles, the ABS warning indicator is also used for parking brake operation. The NAS warning indicator does not have
'ABS' on the icon and will function as described previously for the parking brake operation of the brake warning indicator.
8. Engine Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
The MIL warning indicator is controlled by the ECM and illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a message on the
high speed CAN bus from the ECM. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second indicator check when the
ignition is switched on.
www.JagDocs.com
If the MIL remains illuminated after the engine is started or illuminates when driving, a fault is present and must be
investigated at the earliest opportunity. Illumination of the MIL warning indicator alerts the driver to an OBD (on-board
diagnostic) fault which will cause excessive emissions output. This may relate to either an engine management system fault or
a transmission.
9. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Indicator
The TPMS warning indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a medium speed CAN message from the TPMS
module. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for a 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
If the indicator illuminates and is accompanied by the message 'TYRE PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT' in the message center, then a
TPMS fault has occurred. If the indicator illuminates and accompanied by a different message, then a low tire pressure has
been detected, a spare wheel has been fitted or a TPMS sensor has failed.
10. Airbag Warning Indicator
The airbag warning indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for the 3
second indicator check when the ignition is switched on. The indicator remains illuminated after the 3 second period has
expired until the instrument cluster receives a turn off message on the high speed CAN bus from the RCM (restraints control
module).
11. Front Fog Lamp Indicator
The green colored front fog lamp indicator is controlled by the CJB and illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of a
front fog lamp on message on the medium speed CAN bus from the CJB. The indicator is illuminated for as long as the front
fog lamps are active. The front fog lamp indicator is not subject to the 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched
on.
12. Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) Indicator
The DSC warning lamp is controlled by the ABS module and illuminated by the instrument cluster in response to messages
received on the high speed CAN bus. The indicator is illuminated in an amber color for the 3 second indicator check when the
ignition is switched on. The DSC warning indicator, are permanently illuminated in an amber color if the instrument cluster
receives a high speed CAN message from the ABS module relating to one of the following faults:
Traction control fault

Yaw control fault
Engine drag torque control fault
Panic Brake Assist (PBA) fault
Signal missing relating to either traction control active, yaw control active or DSC switch input.
The above faults will also generate an applicable DSC and ABS warning message in the message center. The DSC warning
indicator will flash at 2 Hz for if the traction control or yaw control is active when the DSC system is enabled. If the DSC
system is switched off, the warning indicator will be permanently illuminated until the DSC system is subsequently
re-activated.
13. Safety Belt Warning Indicator
The safety belt warning indicator operates for both the driver and passenger safety belts. The warning indicator is controlled by
the RCM and illuminated by the instrument cluster on receipt of high speed CAN bus messages. The safety belt warning
indicator is not subject to the 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
The operation of the passenger seat buckle switch is as described below with the exception that the instrument cluster must
receive a hardwired signal from the belt minder control module to indicate that a passenger is occupying the seat.
The safety belt warning indicator is subject to a timer. The warning indicator is activated when the following conditions exist:
Ignition is switched on
One of the front seat belts is unbuckled
USA market only - 75 seconds has elapsed after ignition on mode is selected
Vehicle is not in reverse gear
Vehicle speed is more than 8 km/h (5 mph).
Once the above parameters are met, the instrument cluster flashes the warning indicator at 2 Hz for 10 seconds accompanied
by a simultaneous chime. After 10 seconds the chime ceases and the warning indicator is permanently illuminated for 20
seconds. This sequence is repeated every 30 seconds until one of the following events occurs:
300 seconds has elapsed

The safety belt of the occupied front seats is fastened
The ignition is switched to off mode
The vehicle speed decreases to below 5 km/h (3 mph).
NOTE: On USA market vehicles, the warning indicator in not permanently illuminated.
The safety belt minder function cannot be disabled. The seat belt minder function can be disabled.
Refer to: Safety Belt System (501-20A Safety Belt System, Description and Operation).
14. Side Lamp Indicator
The instrument cluster controls the green colored side lamp indicator on receipt of a side lamp status message on the medium
www.JagDocs.com
speed CAN bus from the CJB and the auxiliary junction box. The lighting switch on the LH steering column multifunction switch
is connected to the instrument cluster. Selections using this switch are detected by the cluster which requests the side or
headlamp operation via a message to the CJB and the RJB. The CJB and the RJB responds with a side lamp active message
and the cluster illuminates the side lamp indicator. The side lamp indicator is not subject to the 3 second indicator check when
the ignition is switched on.
15. High Beam Indicator
The instrument cluster controls the blue colored high beam indicator on receipt of a high beam status message on the medium
speed CAN bus from the CJB. The lighting switch on the LH steering column multifunction switch is connected to the
instrument cluster. High beam or flash selections using this switch are detected by the cluster which requests the light
operation via a CAN message to the CJB. The CJB responds with a high beam active message and the cluster illuminates the
high beam indicator. The high beam indicator is not subject to the 3 second indicator check when the ignition is switched on.
16. Rear Fog Lamp Indicator
The amber colored rear fog lamp indicator is controlled by the auxiliary junction box and illuminated by the instrument cluster
on receipt of a rear fog lamp on message on the medium speed CAN bus from the RJB. The indicator is illuminated for as long
as the rear fog lamps are active. The rear fog lamp indicator is not subject to the 3 second indicator check when the ignition is
switched on.
SPEEDOMETER
The speedometer is driven by high speed CAN signals transmitted by the ABS module. The wheel speeds are measured by
sensors reading the rotational speed of the rear wheels from toothed targets on the hubs. An average of the two wheel speeds
are passed from the sensors to the ABS module in the form of pulsed signals. The ABS module converts these signals into a
speed output on the high speed CAN to the instrument cluster. The same speed outputs from the wheel speed sensors are also
used to calculate the distance the vehicle has travelled.
TACHOMETER
The tachometer is driven by an engine speed signal transmitted on the high speed CAN from the ECM. The signal is derived
from the CKP (crankshaft position) sensor. The signal is received by the instrument cluster microprocessor and the output from
the microprocessor drives the tachometer.
FUEL GAGE
The fuel gage is controlled by CAN messages from the RJB. The RJB reads the values output by the fuel level sensors every
131 ms and transmits a fuel tank contents value, corrected for battery voltage, in a CAN message to the instrument cluster. A
fuel pump symbol is displayed to the left of the linear gage. An arrow above the symbol shows the driver on which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler cap is located. Above the linear fuel gage, is a LCD (liquid crystal display) area which displays odometer
and trip readouts. When a trip computer function is selected, these are replaced by a trip computer display for the trip function
selected.
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY

In the area above and below the message center is a LCD display. The area below the message center displays a linear fuel
gage, odometer, trip distance and trip computer readouts. The trip distance and trip computer information is derived from
information supplied on the high speed CAN bus to the instrument cluster from the ABS module and the ECM.
The area above the message center displays the transmission gear position information and speed control related information.
The transmission information is supplied on the high speed CAN bus from the TCM (transmission control module).
NOTE: There is no engine coolant temperature gage displayed. If the engine coolant temperature increases to above a
predetermined threshold, a warning message is displayed in the message center. The message is sent from the ECM in a high
speed CAN message to the instrument cluster.
TRANSMISSION GEAR SELECTION POSITION

The gear position display shows JaguarDrive selector position or selected gear when using the Jaguar Sequential Shift. The gear
selector module transmits a CAN message to the instrument cluster for gear selector lever position. The module also
outputs a 'not in park' signal to the instrument cluster. The TCM transmits a high speed CAN message to the instrument cluster
with data containing the selected gear when in Jaguar Sequential Shift mode.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - WARNING INDICATOR LOCATIONS
NOTE: Other market variants of instrument cluster are similar.
EUROPEAN MARKET - DIESEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Speedometer
2 ABS indicator
3 Adaptive speed control indicator
4 Glow plug indicator
6 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator
7 Airbag warning indicator
8 Front fog lamp indicator
9 Tachometer
11 Rear fog lamp indicator
12 Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) indicator
13 High beam indicator
14 Side lamp indicator
15 Seat belt warning indicator
www.JagDocs.com
16 Message center
17 Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) indicator
18 Forward alert indicator
19 Brake warning indicator
NAS MARKET - V8 NORMALLY ASPIRATED INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Speedometer
2 ABS indicator (NAS)
3 ABS indicator (ROW)
4 Adaptive speed control indicator
5 Tachometer
7 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator
8 Airbag warning indicator
9 Front fog lamp indicator
11 Rear fog lamp indicator
12 Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) indicator
13 High beam indicator
14 Seat belt warning indicator
15 Side lamp indicator
16 Message center
17 Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) indicator
18 Forward alert indicator
19 Brake warning indicator (NAS)
20 Brake warning indicator (ROW)
The warning indicators are located in various positions in the instrument cluster. The indicators can be split into two groups;
instrument cluster controlled and externally controlled.
Instrument cluster controlled warning indicators are dependent on software logic within the instrument cluster for activation.
The cluster software controls the indicator illumination check at ignition on (power mode 6).
Externally controlled indicators are supplied with current from another vehicle system control module or illuminated by the
instrument cluster software on receipt of a bus message from another vehicle sub-system. The indicator illumination check at
ignition on (powermode 6) is also controlled by the sub-system module for these indicators.
MESSAGE CENTER
The message center is a LCD located in a central position in the cluster. The message center displays system status
information.
ANALOGUE GAGES
Speedometer
The analogue speedometer is located on the LH side of the instrument cluster and is available in 4 market variants:
Major scale Miles Per Hour (MPH), minor scale kilometers per hour (km/h) (ROW)
Major scale MPH, minor scale km/h (NAS)
Major scale km/h, minor scale MPH
Major scale km/h only.
Tachometer
The analogue tachometer is located on the RH side of the instrument cluster. The tachometer has different Revolutions Per
Minute (RPM) scales depending on the engine variant fitted to the vehicle as follows:
4.2L V8 Naturally aspirated 8000 RPM (NAS Only)

5.0L V8 Naturally aspirated 8000 RPM
5.0L V8 Supercharger 8000 RPM
3.0L V6 Naturally aspirated 8000 RPM
3.0 V6 Diesel 6000 RPM.
ELECTRONIC GAGES
Fuel Gage
www.JagDocs.com
The linear fuel gage has a colored bar which moves left or right depending on the tank contents. As the bar moves to the left
the fuel tank contents displayed is decreasing. A warning message is displayed in the message center when the fuel tank
contents fall to below the reserve level.
Transmission Gear Position Display
The gear position display shows the JaguarDrive selector position or the selected gear when using the Jaguar Sequential Shift.
The applicable drive letter is highlighted to show that a selection has been made using the JaguarDrive selector.
When Jaguar Sequential Shift is selected, the letters change to numbers; 1 - 6, and the selected gear is highlighted to
emphasize the selection to the driver.
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster
For a detailed description of the Instrument Cluster, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the workshop
manual. REFER to: (413-01 Instrument Cluster)
Instrument Cluster (Description and Operation),

Instrument Cluster (Description and Operation),
Instrument Cluster (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Fluid level(s) Fuse(s)

Accessory installations Wiring harness
Instrument cluster
www.JagDocs.com

Engine Junction Box (EJB)
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart.
Symptom Chart
The instrument cluster contains a self-diagnostic mode known as engineering test mode (ETM). This can be used to show the
status of the instrument cluster inputs as well as a number of other useful features.
When in the ETM, the Message Centre displays internal data that can be cycled through. All functions except the message
centre display will continue to operate normally unless otherwise noted.
This document is to be used in conjunction with the instrument cluster ETM (see relevant section within this document) and
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) facility; this does not supersede or replace the IDS facility.
Go directly to the 'Area of Concern/Symptom' that indicates the customer concern(s) and perform the actions described within
the relevant section(s):
Area of Diagnostic
Concern/Symptom Ref. No. Actions Notes
Warning lights A-1 Perform instrument cluster Self-Diagnostic When this test is ended the warning lamps
Mode/ETM test 3. currently required to be 'ON' will remain
illuminated.
Multiple warning lights B–1 Check with IDS for DTCs related to .
'ON' identified vehicle system(s).
. B–2 Check instrument cluster battery and Specifically check continuity of Standard
ignition wiring - refer to circuit diagrams. Corporate Protocol (SCP) and Controller Area
Network (CAN) lines.
. B–3 Check instrument cluster grounds. .
. B–4 Check fuses in battery junction box. .
. B–5 Check for harness traps in facia. .
. B–6 Perform instrument cluster Self-Diagnostic Frost/ice warning illuminated in mixed red and
Mode/ETM test 3. amber; therefore colour differs from other
warning lamps. When this test is ended,
warning lamps currently required to be 'ON' will
remain illuminated.
. B–7 Check for open circuit/shorts in wiring to .
related warning lamp trigger (module,
sensor, switch).
Area of Diagnostic
Specific warning lamp C–1 Check with IDS for DTCs related to .
'ON' identified vehicle system.
. C–2 Check for open circuit/shorts in wiring .
related to warning lamp circuit (module,
sensor, switch) where appropriate.
. C–3 Perform cluster Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM Frost/ice warning illuminated in mixed red and
test 3. amber; therefore colour differs from other
warning lamps. When this test is ended,
warning lamps currently required to be 'ON' will
remain illuminated.
. C–4 Check the specific vehicle system What is the warning lamp telling me? Does this
indicated by the warning lamp check out with the DTC logged by the system
illuminated? indicating the fault?
Fuel gauge operation D–1 Perform Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 21 0 - 9 = short circuit; gauge will show empty. 10
to establish if fuel level input to cluster is – 254 = normal range. 255 = open circuit;
out of range or invalid. gauge will show empty. --- = missing signal;
gauge will show empty.
. D–2 Check gauge function versus 0 = empty, 254 = full. 255 = invalid; gauge will
Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 21. show empty.
. D–3 Check for open circuit/shorts in wiring .
between the Fuel Delivery Module, Jet
Pump Module and Rear Electronic Module
(REM).
Fuel gauge reading E–1 Check gauge position versus 0 = empty to 254 = full (255 invalid; gauge will
Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 21. show empty). Other values percentage of above
range e.g. 127 = half.
. E–2 Calculate percentage fuel level from figure Self-Diagnostic Mode fuel level percentage can
obtained from Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM be calculated as follows: Value from
test 21 and compare to IDS vehicle fuel Self-Diagnostic Mode test 26 ÷ 254 x 100 = %
www.JagDocs.com
percentage test. shown on gauge.

. E–3 Monitor value of Self-Diagnostic Mode 0 - 9 = short circuit; gauge will show empty. 10
test/ETM test 21 (during test drive) to – 254 = normal range. 255 = open circuit;
establish if input drops out of range. gauge will show empty. --- = missing signal;
gauge will show empty.
. E–4 Monitor 'FUEL LEVEL' in IDS data logger Gauge function is damped so will not follow
(during test drive) to correlate gauge rapidly changing Fuel Delivery Module values.
position to vehicle reported fuel level.
Speedometer H–1 Monitor Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 19 Display speed input in 1/10 mile/h, no decimal
operation (during test drive) check to establish if point shown, and is compensated for tire size
vehicle speed input to cluster is out of etc. Displays ---- or INV if message is not
range or invalid. received or if received data is invalid.
Speedometer reading I–1 During test drive compare speedometer Self-Diagnostic Mode displayed speed figure will
position to Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test be approx 3% higher than speed indicated by
19, displayed value. speedometer. Allowed tolerance – minus
nothing/+ 10% + 2.5 mile/h.
. I–2 Monitor Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 19 Displays ---- if message is not received or if
(during test drive) to establish if vehicle received data is invalid for two seconds or more.
speed input to cluster drops out of range
or is invalid.
. I–3 Check that installed wheels and tires are Non standard wheels and tires may lead to
standard Jaguar fitment. Confirm wheel speed indication inaccuracies. Incorrectly set
size in IDS, 'ADD REMOVE ACCESSORY' wheel size will result in speed indication
section. inaccuracies. Trip and odometer distance
accumulation will also be incorrect.
Tachometer operation J–1 Perform Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 20 Displays ---- or INV if message is not received
to establish if vehicle rpm input to cluster or if received data is invalid.
out of range or invalid.
Tachometer reading K–1 Check tachometer position versus Tachometer accuracy +/- 100 rpm.
Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 20,
displayed value.
. K–2 Monitor 'ENGINE RPM' in IDS data logger Tachometer accuracy +/- 100 rpm.
at constant engine rpm to compare
tachometer indicated engine rpm to
engine rpm reported by Engine Control
Module (ECM).
. K–3 Monitor Self-Diagnostic Mode test/ETM Displays ---- or INV if message is not received
test 20, (during test drive) to establish if or if received data is invalid.
input to cluster drops out of range or is
invalid.
Gauge judder L–1 Perform Self-Diagnostic Mode test/ETM .
test 2, to prove out smooth gauge
operation.
Gauge noise M–1 Perform vehicle road test. Gauges should .
not be audible during operation in drive
cycle.
Area of Diagnostic
. M–2 Benchmark noise against non-complaint .
vehicle.
Trip (fuel) computer N–1 Check for consistent display (during test Displays ---- , INV or 255 if message is not
drive) of valid 'Rolling Odometer' count in received, or if received data is invalid.
Self-Diagnostic Mode/ETM test 24.
. N–2 Check that installed wheels and tires are Non standard wheels and tires or incorrectly set
standard Jaguar fit. Confirm fitted wheel wheel size may lead to Odometer increment
size in IDS, 'ADD REMOVE ACCESSORY' inaccuracies. This will impact the distance
section. accumulators, which in turn affects the rolling
average, fuel economy and range values. Trip
distance accumulation will also be incorrect.
. N–3 Consider noting odometer value and .
resetting fuel computer system. Advise
customer to conduct brim-to-brim fuel
tank test. Use collected information to
determine if system accurate.
Column adjust O-1 Check with IDS for DTCs related to .
powered column system.
O-2 Check cluster battery supply voltage and .
ground resistance. Check for loose
connections.
O-3 Check power column motors supply .
voltage.
O-4 Check power column switch for physical .
damage.
Passive Anti-Theft P–1 Check for three second prove out when .
System (PATS) vehicle start button is pressed.
indicator
. P–2 Check for loose connections/wiring .
www.JagDocs.com
continuity.
. P–3 Check ignition switch for physical damage. .
Cluster illumination Q–1 Check for loose connections/wiring .
continuity.
. Q–2 Check dimmer switch operation. .
Cluster backlight R–1 Is the backlight on other components .
operation inoperative.
. R–2 Check dimmer switch operation. .
. R–3 Check for loose connections/wiring .
continuity.
Chime/tone operation S–1 Check vehicle configuration. .
. S–2 Utilize lights ON, ignition OFF, door open .
warning to verify chime operation.
. S–3 Check appropriate sensing circuit. .
Continuous chime/tone T–1 Check appropriate sensing circuit. .
Unexpected chime U–1 Check vehicle configuration. .
operation
Message centre V–1 Is the backlight 'ON' and other .
display illumination components dim?
. V–2 Does the lighting level of other .
components change when dimmer
adjusted?
Message centre W–1 Perform Self-Diagnostic Mode test/ETM .
display issue tests 5 to 9, to prove out LCD display
function.
Message centre X–1 Perform Self-Diagnostic Mode test/ETM .
missing lines tests 5 to 9, to prove out LCD display
function.
Message centre Y–1 What is the message? .
incorrect message
. Y–2 Check for open circuit/shorts in wiring to .
related warning light trigger (module,
sensor, switch).
Cluster/connectivity Z–1 Check cluster battery and ignition wiring. .
. Z–2 Check cluster grounds. .
. Z–3 Disconnect/reconnect cluster. .
. Z–4 Attempt to enter Self-Diagnostic .
Mode/ETM to prove cluster response to
inputs.
No crank AA–1 Check with IDS for presence of related .
DTCs.
. AA–2 Is there a Passive Anti-Theft System .
(PATS) flash code?
. AA–3 Does the vehicle crank with the other .
passive key?
www.JagDocs.com
Area of Diagnostic
. AA–4 Ensure only one key is in the vehicle, try If this test starts the vehicle this tends to
both keys in the Starter Control Unit indicate an issue with the keyless vehicle
(SCU). module.
. AA-5 Tried new key?
. AA–6 Check battery voltage. .
. AA–7 Diagnose non-start condition with IDS. .
. AA–8 Attempt PATS key erase and re-learn. Ensure keys are erased from current cluster if
replacing cluster.
Crank but no-start AB–1 Diagnose non-start condition with IDS. Not usually caused by cluster issue.
Incorrect configuration AC–1 Attempt to configure cluster. .
. AC–2 Ensure battery voltage is maintained .
above 12.5 volts if cluster re-configured.
1. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Self-Diagnostic Mode
Self-Diagnostic Mode
To place the cluster in engineering test mode (ETM) carry out the following steps
1. Press and hold the stalk trip cycle button, for more than five seconds but less than eight seconds, whilst briefly pressing the
vehicle START button. There is no initial display indication that the instrument cluster has entered ETM. If ETM has successfully
been entered then 'ENGINEERING TEST MODE' will be displayed in the Message Centre when the stalk trip button is released .
2.To navigate forward through the instrument cluster Self-Diagnostic Mode tests, press the stalk trip cycle button.
3. Each push of the stalk trip cycle button will advance one step through the ETM sequence. It is not possible to move
backward through the test sequence.
4.To exit the Self-Diagnostic Mode press and hold the stalk trip cycle button for more than three seconds.
www.JagDocs.com
5.The Self-Diagnostic Mode is also deactivated when the ignigition switch is turned to the 'OFF' position or low battery voltage
is detected.
6.If the Self-Diagnostic Mode cannot be accessed repeat the above paying particular care to the sequence timing.
7.The ETM text is not language configurable and will be displayed in English.
Message Center Gauge/Indicator/Display

ETM Test/no. Display Tested. Range Description
1 - Self- ENGINEERING TEST . Not Applicable Establishes Self - Diagnostic mode.
diagnostic MODE. (N/A).
entry.
2 - Gauge GAUGE SWEEP. Tachometer and speedometer. (N/A). All gauges go through a full up and
sweep. Gauges display current values down pointer sweep smoothness
after test. check.
3- Warning TELL TALE TEST. All internally controlled (N/A). Illuminates all the LED warning
lamp LED's. lamps/LED's regardless of indicators that are controlled by the
software configuration. instrument cluster. When this test is
exited current vehicle warning lamps
will remain illuminated.
4 - Version PROGRAM VERSION. Software Read only memory (N/A). Display's the instrument cluster ROM
information. (ROM) and Non volatile memory and NVM level version and date or
ROM: XXXX (NVM) version and date. indication of ROM checksum fault.
NVM: XXXX
REV: XXXX
DATE: XXXX
5 - Message LCD display in Message center LCD display. (N/A). Activates all pixels of LCD display in
Center display. WHITE. White.
6 - Message LCD display in DARK Message center LCD display. (N/A). Activates all pixels of LCD display in
Center display. GREY. Dark Grey.
7 - Message LCD display in LIGHT Message center LCD display. (N/A). Activates all pixels of LCD display in
Center display. GREY. Light Grey.
8 - Message LCD display in four Message center LCD display. (N/A). Activates all pixels of LCD in four
Center display. bands black to white, bands from black to white, from top
top to bottom. to bottom.
9 - Message LCD display in four Message center LCD display. (N/A). Activates all pixels of LCD in four
Center display. bands dark to light bands from dark to light, from left
left to right. to right.
10 - Digital DIGITAL I/O. Cluster configuration settings. (N/A). Display Hex coding of cluster
I/O. configuration settings ports A to H.
A: XXXX Not defined for diagnostic purpose.
E:XXXX
B: XXXX
F:XXXX
C: XXXX
G:XXXX
D: XXXX
H:XXXX
11 - Analogue ANALOG INPUTS. Cluster inputs. TDB. Displays Hex coding of inputs 0 - 3.
Inputs.
#: RAW -
RATIO 0 - Main beam / FTP 1
0:XXX - XXXX - Master light switch
1:XXX - XXXX 2 - Power column joystick
2:XXX - XXXX switch
3.XXX - XXXX 3 - DI / Hazard
Inputs.
#: RAW -
RATIO 4 - Auto lamp sensor
4:XXX - XXXX 5 - battery in
5:XXX - XXXX 6 - Pedal position
6:XXX - XXXX 7 - Display temperature
7.XXX - XXXX
Inputs.
#: RAW -
RATIO 8 - Power column Rake
8:XXX - XXXX position
9:XXX - XXXX 9 - Power column Reach
10:XXX - position
www.JagDocs.com
XXXX 10 - Auxiliary switch

11.XXX - 11 - Power column mode
XXXX switch
14 - Analogue ANALOG INPUTS. Cluster inputs. TDB. Displays Hex coding of inputs 12 -
Inputs. 15.
#: RAW -
RATIO
12:XXX - 12 - Not used
XXXX 13 -Airbag LED monitor
13:XXX - 14 - Battery voltage
XXXX 15 - Low brake fluid
14:XXX -
XXXX
15.XXX -
XXXX
15- Analogue ANALOG INPUTS. Cluster inputs. TDB. Displays Hex coding of inputs 16-
Inputs. 19.
#: RAW -
RATIO
16:XXX - 16 - Fog light switch
XXXX 17 - Flick wipe switch
17:XXX - 18 - Int. wipe switch
XXXX 19 - Exit delay switch
18:XXX -
XXXX
19.XXX -
XXXX
Inputs. 23.
#: RAW -
Ratio
20:XXX - 20 - Wash wipe switch
XXXX 21 - Trip cycle switch
21:XXX - 22 - dimmer level
XXXX 23 - Master wipe switch
22:XXX -
XXXX
23.XXX -
XXXX
Inputs. 27.
#: RAW- Ratio
24:XXX -
XXXX 24 - Brake pad wear
25:XXX - 25 - Passenger seat belt
XXXX 26 - Not used
26:XXX - 27 - On-board temp ref
XXXX
27.XXX -
XXXX
18 - Analogue Cluster inputs. TDB. Displays Hex coding of inputs 28 -

Inputs. ANALOG 31.
INPUTS.
#: RAW -
Ratio 28 - On-board temp
XXXX 30 - Not used
XXXX
30:XXX -
XXXX
31.XXX -
XXXX
19 - SPEEDOMETER. Speedometer inputs. .

Speedometer. Displays present .
RAW: Speedometer inputs values;
MPH: Speedometer will indicate
KMH: present road speed.
DRIVER:
20 - TACHOMETER. Tachometer inputs. . Displays present received

Tachometer. Tachometer input values,
www.JagDocs.com
RAW: tachometer will indicate present

ACTUAL: engine RPM.
DRIVER:
21 - Fuel FUEL SYSTEM. Fuel indication system. . Displays present received fuel level
system. A/D inputs in decimal, fuel gauge
(A) (B) will indicate present filtered level.
RAW: X X
FILT: X X
PERCENT: X X
22 - Battery BATTERY VOLTAGE. Battery voltage. . Displays present received battery

voltage. input voltage values. If message not
LOCAL: received or invalid display will be '_
VEHICLE: _ _'.
RAW:
A/D:
23 - Rolling ROLLING COUNTS. Odometer and fuel gauge. 0 - 255. Displays present received odometer
counts. and fuel level input values in
ODO: decimal, value is a rolling count. If
FUEL: either message not received or
invalid respective display will be ' _
_ _' .
24 - VAPS. VAPS. Variable assistance power . CURRENT is displayed in mA.
steering (VAPS) status. COMMAND is last command sent to
CURRENT: VAPS chip. STATUS is last status
COMMAND: returned from VAPS chip.
STATUS:
25 - Module MODULE STATUS. Provides status of; Ignition

status. (IGN), Dynamic Stability Control CONNECTED Communication (Coms) ok
IGN (DSC), Adaptive Cruise Control WAITING Coms not received, not an
DSC (ACC) and Adaptive damping MISSING issue
ACC control module (ADCM) modules. FAULTY. Coms never received
ADCM Coms error .
26 - Module MODULE STATUS. Provides status of; Electronic

status. park brake (EPB), Pedestrian CONNECTED Communication (Coms) ok
EPB Impact ECU (PIE), Restraints WAITING Coms not received, not an
PIE control module (RCM) and MISSING issue
RCM Traction control module (TCM), FAULTY. Coms never received
TCM modules.. Coms error .
27 - Module MODULE STATUS. Provides status of; Engine

status. control module (ECM), Rear CONNECTED Communication (Coms) ok
ECM Climate Control (RCC), Driver WAITING Coms not received, not an
RCC Door Control (DDC) and MISSING issue
DDC Passenger Door Control (PDC) FAULTY. Coms never received
PDC modules.. Coms error .
28 - Module MODULE STATUS. Provides status of; Keyless

status. vehicle module (KVM), Drivers CONNECTED Communication (Coms) ok
KVM seat module (DSM), WAITING Coms not received, not an
DSM Infotainment control module MISSING issue
ICM (ICM) and Integrated control FAULTY. Coms never received
ICP panel (ICP) modules.. Coms error .
29 - Module MODULE STATUS. Provides status of; Front smart

status. junction box (FSJB), Rear smart CONNECTED Communication (Coms) ok
FSJB junction box (RSJB), Tyre WAITING Coms not received, not an
RSJB pressure monitoring system MISSING issue
TPMS (TPMS) and Adaptive front FAULTY. Coms never received
AFLS lighting system (AFLS) modules. Coms error .
30 - Module MODULE STATUS. Provides status of; Passive

status. anti-theft system (PATS), Blind CONNECTED Communication (Coms) ok
PATS Spot Monitoring (BSM), Gear WAITING Coms not received, not an
BSM shift module (GSM) and Starter MISSING issue
GSM Control Unit (SCU) modules. FAULTY. Coms never received
SCU Coms error .
31- Back to GAUGE SWEEP. Tachometer and speedometer. N/A. Repeats display cycle from test 2.
test 2.
DTC Index
www.JagDocs.com
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:

B100811 Wiper Mode Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check master
Switch Master wiper switch circuit - wiper switch circuit for short to ground
short to ground
B100815 Wiper Mode Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Switch Master wiper switch circuit - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
short to power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check master wiper switch
B100951 Ignition Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Authorisation Instrument cluster power and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
ground supply circuits - short, electrical circuit diagrams and check instrument cluster power
open circuit and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit. Perform the
Target SID synchronization Immobilisation application from the Set-up menu using the
error following re-programming manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CAN
CAN fault communications between instrument cluster and tester
Authorisation LS CAN fault the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CAN
CJB ignition, power and communications between CJB and instrument cluster. Refer
ground supply circuits - short, to the electrical circuit diagrams and check CJB ignition,
open circuit power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and
Instrument cluster power and instrument cluster power and ground supply circuits for short,
ground supply circuits - short, open circuit. Check correct CJB and instrument cluster
open circuit installed. Perform the Immobilisation application from the
Incorrect CJB or instrument Set-up menu using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
cluster installed system. Check CAN network for interference/EMC related
Target SID synchronization issues
error following re-programming
Authorisation CJB ignition, power and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
ground supply circuits - short, electrical circuit diagrams and check CJB ignition, power and
open circuit ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument
LS CAN fault cluster power and ground supply circuits for short, open
Instrument cluster power and circuit. Check CAN communications between CJB and
ground supply circuits - short, instrument cluster. Check battery is in serviceable condition
open circuit and fully charged
Low battery voltage <9 volts
B100A62 Fuel Pump Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Authorisation LS CAN fault the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CAN
RJB power and ground supply communications between RJB and instrument cluster. Refer
circuits - short, open circuit to the electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power and
Instrument cluster power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument
ground supply circuits - short, cluster power and ground supply circuits for short, open
open circuit circuit. Check correct RJB and instrument cluster installed.
www.JagDocs.com
Incorrect RJB or instrument Perform the Immobilisation application from the Set-up menu
cluster installed using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
Target SID synchronization CAN network for interference/EMC related issues
Authorisation Target SID synchronization the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Perform the
error following re-programming Immobilisation application from the Set-up menu using the
RJB power and ground supply manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
circuits - short, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power and ground
LS CAN fault supply circuits for short, open circuit. Check CAN
communications between RJB and instrument cluster
Authorisation RJB power and ground supply the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
circuits - short, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power and ground
LS CAN fault supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
Instrument cluster power and power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit.
ground supply circuits - short, Check CAN communications between RJB and instrument
open circuit cluster. Check battery is in serviceable condition and fully
Low battery voltage <9 volts charged
B100B67 Column Lock If a non start issue has not been identified, clear the DTC
Ground Algorithm based failure-signal and check vehicle starts correctly. If a non start issue has
Authorisation is incorrect after the event been identified run the manufacturers approved diagnostic
Instrument cluster power and system Start Authorisation Application. Carry out any
ground supply circuits - short, pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
open circuit manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
LS CAN fault electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power and ground
RJB power and ground supply supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
circuits - short, open circuit power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit.
Vehicle speed present when Check CAN communications between RJB and instrument
attempting to power ESCL cluster. Check for invalid vehicle speed signal from
Engine speed present when ABS/instrument cluster gateway. Check for invalid engine
attempting to power ESCL speed signal from ECM/instrument cluster gateway. Check for
PowerMode status > 4 when invalid signal from CJB
action
B100B87 Column Lock Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Ground Instrument cluster power and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Authorisation ground supply circuits - short, electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB power and ground
open circuit supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
LS CAN fault power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit.
RJB power and ground supply Check CAN communications between RJB and instrument
circuits - short, open circuit cluster
www.JagDocs.com
B100C67 Column Lock Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Supply Instrument cluster power and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Authorisation ground supply circuits - short, electrical circuit diagrams and check CJB power and ground
CJB power and ground supply Check CAN communications between CJB and instrument
circuits - short, open circuit cluster. Check for invalid vehicle speed signal from
Vehicle speed present when ABS/instrument cluster gateway. Check for invalid engine
attempting to power ESCL speed signal from ECM/instrument cluster gateway. Check for
Engine speed present when invalid signal from CJB
attempting to power ESCL
PowerMode status > 4 when
action
B100C87 Column Lock Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Supply Instrument cluster power and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Authorisation ground supply circuits - short, electrical circuit diagrams and check CJB power and ground
CJB power and ground supply Check CAN communications between CJB and instrument
circuits - short, open circuit cluster
B100D62 Column Lock Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Authorisation CAN fault the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CAN
ESCL power and ground supply communication between Electronic Steering Column Lock and
circuits - short, open circuit instrument cluster. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
Instrument cluster power and and check Electronic Steering Column Lock power and ground
ground supply circuits - short, supply circuits for short, open circuit and Instrument cluster
open circuit power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit.
Incorrect ESCL or instrument Check correct Electronic Steering Column Lock and instrument
www.JagDocs.com
cluster installed cluster installed. Perform the Immobilisation application from

Target SID synchronization the Set-up menu using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
error following re-programming system. Check CAN network for interference/EMC related
Noise/EMC related error issues
B100D64 Column Lock If the customer has not reported a non start issue, clear the
Authorisation Algorithm based failure-signal DTC and check vehicle starts correctly. If a non start issue
plausibility failure has been reported run the manufacturers approved
CAN fault diagnostic system Start Authorisation Application and follow
ESCL power and ground supply the actions required for this DTC. Carry out any pinpoint
circuits - short, open circuit tests associated with this DTC using the manufacturer
Instrument cluster power and approved diagnostic system. Check CAN communication
ground supply circuits - short, between Electronic Steering Column Lock and instrument
open circuit cluster (check transmission out speed, vehicle speed, engine
speed, gear position and powermode signals to Electronic
Steering Column Lock). Refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check Electronic Steering Column Lock power
and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and
Instrument cluster power and ground supply circuits for
short, open circuit.
B100D87 Column Lock
Authorisation - Missing message Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and unlock car using the
Missing message CAN fault key fob and retest. Check for related DTCs and refer
No response from electric to the relevant DTC index
steering column lock control If the fault is cleared, notify the customer that the
module, instrument cluster, steering column lock may fail to unlock if the vehicle
central junction box Battery is parked with a high steering angle or with the road
voltage at electric wheel against a curb. If the column lock is failing to
steering column lock control disengage, the customer may be able to rectify this
module too low by rotating the steering wheel while pressing the
Electric steering column lock engine start button
control module, instrument If fault persists, complete a CAN network integrity
cluster, central junction box test using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
fault system. Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check CAN circuits between the central
junction box, the instrument cluster and the
electronic steering column lock. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the central junction box,
the instrument cluster and the electronic steering
column lock power and ground supply circuits for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required. Clear
If fault persists, check that the vehicle battery supply
voltage is between 9-16 volts. Rectify as required
B100D96 Column Lock
Authorisation - Battery voltage at electric Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and unlock car using the
Component steering column lock control key fob and retest
internal failure module too low If fault persists, check that the vehicle battery supply
Torque load on steering voltage is between 9-16 volts. Rectify as required
column Ensure the column lock bolt movement is not
CAN fault obstructed or restricted (the parked position of the
Electric steering column lock road wheels may be exerting a turning force through
control module - Internal the steering column, preventing the lock from
failure releasing. The steering wheel may need to be held
against the force to allow the column lock to
release). Clear DTC, repeatedly lock and unlock car
using the key fob and retest
If fault persists, complete a CAN network integrity
test using the manufacturers approved diagnostic
system. Alternatively, refer to the electrical circuit
diagrams and check CAN circuits between the central
junction box, the instrument cluster and the
electronic steering column lock. Refer to the electrical
circuit diagrams and check the central junction box,
the instrument cluster and the electronic steering
column lock power and ground supply circuits for short
circuit to ground, short circuit to power, open circuit,
high resistance. Repair circuit(s) as required. Clear
If fault persists, check and install a new electric
steering column lock control module as required
B102487 Start Control Unit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Smart card docking station the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
failure - slave node not electrical circuit diagrams and check the smart card docking
www.JagDocs.com
responding station LIN circuit for short, open circuit. Suspect the smart
card docking station, check and install a new docking station
as required, refer to the new module/component installation
B104611 Front Fog Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check fog lamp
Control Switch Fog lamp switch circuit - short switch circuit for short to ground
to ground
B104615 Front Fog Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check fog lamp
Control Switch Fog lamp switch circuit - short switch circuit for short to power, open circuit
B104811 Brake Fluid Level Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check brake fluid
Switch Brake fluid level switch circuit level switch circuit for short to ground
- short to ground
B10A011 Wiper/ Washer Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check wash/wipe
Switch Wash/wipe circuit - short to circuit for short to ground
ground
B10A015 Wiper/ Washer Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Switch Wash/wipe circuit - short to the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check wash/wipe circuit for
B10A611 Main Light Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check master
Master lighting switch circuit - lighting switch circuit for short to ground
short to ground
B10A615 Main Light Switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Master lighting switch circuit - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
short to power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check master lighting switch
B112B87 Steering Wheel Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Module Steering wheel module failure the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
- slave node not responding electrical circuit diagrams and check the clockspring LIN
circuit for short, open circuit. Suspect the clockspring, check
and install a new clockspring as required, refer to the new
Index
B115C7A Transfer Fuel Check for fuel system jet pump or jet pump fuel level sensor
Pump Fuel pump system fault fault
B1A8515 Ambient Light Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Sensor Autolamp sensor circuit - short the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
to power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check autolamp sensor circuit
for short to power, open circuit
B1B0100 Key Transponder Ensure all keys to be programmed are available. Refer to
Operator only cycles one key electrical circuit diagrams and check power and ground
During transponder key supply circuits to all relevant modules. Replace faulty key
programming the instrument and repeat key programming. Check CAN network for
cluster, smartcard docking interference/EMC related issues
station or key loses
power/circuit failure
Faulty key during key
programming
Unable to program
transponder key due to
noise/EMC related error
B1B0105 Key Transponder Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Error following SCU the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Perform the
replacement Immobilisation application from the Set-up menu using the
Smartcard docking station manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
power and ground supply electrical circuit diagrams and check smartcard docking
circuits - short, open circuit station power and ground supply circuits for short, open
LIN fault circuit and instrument cluster power and ground supply
Instrument cluster power and circuits for short, open circuit. Check LIN communications
ground supply circuits - short, between smartcard docking station and instrument cluster
open circuit
LIN fault the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check LIN
Instrument cluster power and communications between smartcard docking station and
ground supply circuits - short, instrument cluster. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
open circuit and check smartcard docking station power and ground
Key fault supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
Smartcard docking station power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit.
www.JagDocs.com
power and ground supply Confirm transponder key operation. Ensure new keys are from
circuits - short, open circuit a known source
Attempted to program a non
default key
B1B0155 Key Transponder Confirm the correct keys are used

Un-programmed key inserted
in SCU2
A non default key inserted
during key programming
Instrument cluster power and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
ground supply circuits - short, electrical circuit diagrams and check smartcard docking
open circuit station power and ground supply circuits for short, open
Smartcard docking station circuit and instrument cluster power and ground supply
power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit. Check correct instrument
circuits - short, open circuit cluster and smartcard docking station are installed. Perform
Incorrect instrument cluster or the Immobilisation application from the Set-Up menu using
smartcard docking station the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CAN
installed network for interference/EMC related issues
Error during or following the
Write Target SID routine
Transponder key fault supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
power and ground supply Confirm transponder key operation. Repeat transponder key
circuits - short, open circuit programming
Error occurred during
transponder key programming
Transponder key fault supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
power and ground supply Confirm transponder key operation. Confirm single key
circuits - short, open circuit operation. Ensure instrument cluster in correct mode i.e.
Another key in close proximity Auto Enable, Key erase etc. Ensure new keys are from a
Instrument cluster in incorrect known source. Check for intermittent power and ground to
programming state instrument cluster. Design condition - advise customer of
Attempted to program a non starting sequence. Design condition - determine customer
default key transponder key usage
Instrument cluster Cold init
whilst in Ignition On state,
without key being present in
the SCU
Race condition caused by
closing driver door and
Passive Key search function
from last door closed and key
inserted in the SCU
Smartcard docking station supply circuits for short, open circuit and instrument cluster
power and ground supply power and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit
circuits - short, open circuit
B1B3305 Target I.D. Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Transfer CAN fault the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CAN
ECM ignition, power and communications between ECM and instrument cluster. Refer
ground supply circuits - short, to electrical circuit diagrams and check ECM ignition, power
open circuit and ground supply circuits for short, open circuit and
ground supply circuits - short, open circuit. Perform the Immobilisation application from the
www.JagDocs.com
open circuit Set-up menu using the manufacturer approved diagnostic

ECM or instrument cluster system
incorrectly configured
ground supply circuits - short, open circuit. Check correct ECM and instrument cluster
open circuit installed. Perform the Immobilisation application from the
Incorrect ECM or instrument Set-up menu using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
cluster installed system. Check CAN network for interference/EMC related
Synchronisation error following issues
re-programming
B1B3364 Target If the customer has not reported a non start issue, clear the
identification Algorithm based failure - DTC and check vehicle starts correctly. If a non start has
transfer signal plausibility failure been reported run the manufacturers approved diagnostic
CAN fault system Start Authorisation Application and follow the actions
ECM ignition, power and required for this DTC. Carry out any pinpoint tests associated
ground supply circuits - short, with this DTC using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
open circuit system. Check CAN communications between ECM and
Instrument cluster power and instrument cluster. Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and
ground supply circuits - short, check ECM ignition, power and ground supply circuits for
open circuit short, open circuit and instrument cluster power and ground
electronic steering column lock supply circuits for short, open circuit. Check electronic
status incomplete steering column lock operation. Advise customer of starting
Race condition caused by sequence and to allow time to elapse between closing door
closing driver door and and pressing start button.
ground supply circuits - short, open circuit. Check battery is in serviceable condition and is
open circuit fully charged, check terminals etc
Low battery voltage
B1C3277 Steering Column Check for restricted/jammed steering column motor
Tilt Solenoid TILT axis fails to move mechanism. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
minimum distance within steering column motor UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit for short,
allotted time period. Motion open circuit
may have been prohibited due
to motor jamming, stalling or
solenoid pin not engaging
B1C3294 Steering Column Check for stuck/jammed solenoid/switch. Refer to the

Tilt Solenoid TELE axis moves when it has electrical circuit diagrams and check steering column motor
not been commanded to. UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit for short, open circuit
Motion may have occurred due
to solenoid pin not
disengaging or mechanism has
been jammed on, whilst
REACH axis has been
commanded to move
B1C3312 Steering Column Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check steering
Tilt Feedback Steering column tilt feedback column tilt feedback signal circuit for short to power
Signal signal circuit - short to power
B1C3314 Steering Column Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Tilt Feedback Steering column tilt feedback the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Signal signal circuit - short to electrical circuit diagrams and check steering column tilt
ground, open circuit feedback signal circuit for short to ground, open circuit
B1C3477 Steering Column Check for restricted/jammed steering column motor

Telescope REACH axis fails to move mechanism. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Solenoid minimum distance within steering column motor UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit for short,
allotted time period. Motion open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
may have been prohibited due

to motor jamming, stalling or
solenoid pin not engaging
B1C3494 Steering Column Check for stuck/jammed solenoid/switch. Refer to the

Telescope REACH axis moves when it has electrical circuit diagrams and check steering column motor
Solenoid not been commanded to. UP/IN, DOWN/OUT circuit for short, open circuit
Motion may have occurred due
to solenoid pin not
disengaging or mechanism has
been jammed on, whilst TILT
axis has been commanded to
move
Telescope Steering column TELE column TELE feedback signal circuit for short to power
Feedback Signal feedback signal circuit - short
to power
B1C3514 Steering Column Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Telescope Steering column TELE the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
Feedback Signal feedback signal circuit - short electrical circuit diagrams and check steering column TELE
to ground, open circuit feedback signal circuit for short to ground, open circuit
Tilt/Telescope Steering column adjust switch column adjust switch circuit for short to ground
Switch circuit - short to ground
B1C4811 Flash to Pass Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check main beam
Switch Main beam flash switch circuit flash switch circuit for short to ground
- short to ground
B1C4815 Flash to Pass Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Switch Main beam flash switch circuit the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
- short to power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check main beam flash switch
B1C5311 Front Wiper Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check intermittent
Intermittent Data Intermittent wipe switch wipe switch circuit for short to ground
circuit - short to ground
B1C5315 Front Wiper Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Intermittent Data Intermittent wipe switch the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
circuit - short to power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check intermittent wipe switch
circuit circuit for short to power, open circuit
B1D3611 Turn Indicator Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check direction
Switch Direction indicator switch indicator switch circuit for short to ground
www.JagDocs.com
B1D3615 Turn Indicator Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Switch Direction indicator switch the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
circuit - short to power, open electrical circuit diagrams and check direction indicator
circuit switch circuit for short to power, open circuit
B1D3711 Wiper Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check flick wipe
Connection Circuit Flick wipe switch circuit - short switch circuit for short to ground
to ground
B1D3715 Wiper Switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Connection Circuit Flick wipe switch circuit - short the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
to power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check flick wipe switch circuit
for short to power, open circuit
C111064 Power steering Re-configure the instrument cluster as new to download
Calibration Data Invalid VAPS curve loaded VAPS curve data
P063511 Power Steering Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check VAPS
Control Circuit VAPS ignition supply circuit - ignition supply circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Control Circuit VAPS ignition supply circuit - ignition supply circuit for short to power
short to power
Control Circuit VAPS ignition supply circuit - ignition supply circuit for open circuit
open circuit
P063522 Power Steering Check ABS module for DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index
Control Circuit First valid received speed
value above threshold
www.JagDocs.com
P063544 Power Steering Re-configure the instrument cluster as new to download

Control Circuit Data memory failure VAPS curve data
U000188 High Speed CAN Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Communication Bus Off the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Carry out CAN
Bus network integrity test using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check HS CAN network to instrument cluster
U001088 Medium Speed Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
CAN Bus Off the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Carry out CAN
Communication network integrity test using the manufacturer approved
Bus diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams
and check MS CAN network to instrument cluster
U010000 Lost Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check ECM for
With ECM/PCM “A” with ECM DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check TCM for
with TCM with TCM DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
With Gear Shift with transmission shift module transmission shift module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
Module DTC Index
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check speed
With Cruise with speed control module control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Control Module
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check ABS
With Anti-Lock with ABS module module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Brake System
(ABS) Control
Module
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check tire
With Tire with tire pressure monitoring pressure monitoring module for DTCs and refer to the
Pressure Monitor module relevant DTC Index
Module
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check parking
With Park Brake with parking brake module brake module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Control Module
with Suspension with adaptive damping module adaptive damping module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
Control Module 'B' DTC Index
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CJB for
With Body with CJB DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Control Module
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check RJB for
With Body with RJB DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Control Module
"B"
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check RCM for
With Restraints with RCM DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Control Module
with Information with information and information and entertainment control module for DTCs and
Centre 'A' entertainment control module refer to the relevant DTC Index
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check climate
with HVAC with climate control module control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Control Module
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check DDM for
with Door Control with driver door module (DDM) DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Module 'A'
www.JagDocs.com
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check PDM for
with Door Control with passenger door module DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Module 'B' (PDM)
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check DSM for
with Seat Control with driver seat module (DSM) DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Module 'A'
Communication Loss of CAN communication the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check KVM for
with Remote with keyless vehicle module DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
Function (KVM)
Actuation
with Headlamp with headlamp control module headlamp control module for DTCs and refer to the relevant
Control Module 'A' DTC Index
with Impact with pedestrian protection pedestrian protection module for DTCs and refer to the
Classification module relevant DTC Index
System Module
with Front with integrated control panel integrated control panel for DTCs and refer to the relevant
Controls Interface DTC Index
Module 'A'
U030000 Internal Control Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
Module Software Invalid configuration message diagnostic system. Clear the DTC and retest. If the DTC is
Incompatibility is received still logged suspect the instrument cluster, refer to the new
Index
U040268 Invalid data Check TCM for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
received from Algorithm based failures -
TCM events information
U200411 Auxiliary Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check auxiliary
Pack Auxiliary switch signal circuit - switch signal circuit for short to ground
short to ground
U200415 Auxiliary Switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Pack Auxiliary switch signal circuit - the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
short to power, open circuit electrical circuit diagrams and check auxiliary switch signal
U300046 Control Module Suspect the instrument cluster, check and install a new
Calibration/parameter memory instrument cluster as required, refer to the new
Index
U300049 Control Module Suspect the instrument cluster, check and install a new
Internal electronic failure instrument cluster as required, refer to the new
Index
U300055 Control Module Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
Incorrect car configuration diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains
data received suspect the instrument cluster. Check and install a new
instrument cluster as required, refer to the new
Index
Missing message diagnostic system. Check instrument cluster for additional
DTCs and refer to the DTC Index. Carry out CAN network
integrity tests using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system. If DTC remains suspect the instrument cluster.
Check and install a new instrument cluster as required, refer
to the new module/component installation note at the top of
the DTC Index
U300281 Vehicle Check and install original/new instrument cluster as required,
Identification Vehicle/component mis-match. refer to the new module/component installation note at the
Number Corrupt VIN data being top of the DTC Index
transmitted, instrument
cluster previously installed to
other vehicle
U300316 Battery Voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
www.JagDocs.com
Instrument cluster logic power the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
supply circuit - voltage below electrical circuit diagrams and check instrument cluster logic
threshold power supply circuit for short to ground, open circuit
Instrument cluster logic power the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
supply circuit - circuit voltage charging system for over charging condition
above threshold
Mis-match in battery voltage, the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
of 2 volts or more, between electrical circuit diagrams and check instrument cluster logic
instrument cluster and RJB power supply circuit for short, open circuit
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster
Removal
CAUTION: If a new instrument cluster is to be installed, the diagnostic tool must be connected prior to removal, the data
must then be downloaded from it and the keys (remote control handsets) set into default mode. Failure to follow this
instruction will result in permanent damage to the keys.
NOTES:
If a new instrument cluster is to be installed, make sure that all keys (remote control handsets) are present.
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
5.
www.JagDocs.com
6.
www.JagDocs.com
7.
www.JagDocs.com

instrument cluster face.
Installation
2. Configure the instrument cluster and ignition keys using the diagnostic
tool.
www.JagDocs.com
Instrument Cluster - Instrument Cluster Lens
Removal
1. Fully extend the steering column for access.
3. Refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Removal and

Installation).
4. CAUTION: To prevent static damage to the circuits,

place the instrument cluster inside the electro static
discharge bag and use the gloves provided during this
procedure.
www.JagDocs.com
5.
6.
7. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the dials.

www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. NOTE: Take care not to leave finger prints inside the new
lens.
2. Refer to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Removal and
Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Horn -

Vehicle horn retaining bolt 25 18 -
www.JagDocs.com
Horn - Horn
Removal
2. Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
3. Torque: 7 Nm
4. Torque: 25 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Horn - Horn Switch
Removal
1. Refer to: Standard Workshop Practices (100-00 General Information,

2. Refer to: Steering Wheel Audio Controls (415-01A Information and

3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
5.
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center -
Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Message center
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center -
Overview
OVERVIEW
The message center is a LCD (liquid crystal display) located in a central position in the instrument cluster. The message center
receives CAN (controller area network) bus, LIN (local interconnect network) bus, and hardwired signals from other vehicle
system control modules to display current vehicle status information. Depending on message importance, the message center
will be backlit in white, amber or red.
The message center will display:
Fuel level
Trip computer information
Gear selected
Speed control information
Vehicle map
Clock
Turn by turn satellite navigation
Voice control text
JaguarDrive Control system messages.
Operation of the message center is controlled by software within the instrument cluster.
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center - System
System Operation
SERVICE INTERVAL INDICATOR - 3.0L V6 DIESEL, 5.0L V8 SUPERCHARGER AND 5.0L V8
NATURALLY ASPIRATED ENGINES ONLY
If the vehicle is within 3,200 kilometers (1,988 miles) of a service, the message center will display 'SERVICE REQUIRED IN
XXXX km or MILES'. The display reduces the 'service required in' readout by increments every 50 kilometers (30 miles). If this
distance drops below 1 km (0.6 miles), the message center will display 'SERVICE REQUIRED'.
These messages are displayed every time the vehicle enters power mode 6, for 4 seconds after the instrument cluster bulb
check routine has finished.
NOTE: The message center will display distance to next service in miles on an instrument cluster fitted with a Miles Per
Hour (MPH) speedometer unless the driver has changed the display units on the Touch Screen Display (TSD).
Reset Procedure
To re-set the service interval indicator, the following process switch presses must each be carried out within 3 seconds:
With the vehicle in power mode 0, (ignition off) press and hold the rear fog lamp switch
Allow the vehicle to enter power mode 6 (Press the start button without a foot on the brake)
Immediately release the rear fog lamp switch
Press and hold the trip computer cycle switch
www.JagDocs.com
Press and hold the rear fog lamp switch

Continue to hold the trip computer and rear fog lamp switches
If the process has been successful, the message center will display 'RESETTING SERVICE MODE' and then display
'SERVICE MODE RESET' after 10 seconds
Release both switches and return the vehicle ignition to off, power mode 0.
MESSAGE CENTER
The message center LCD (liquid crystal display) display has a viewable area of 126 pixels horizontal and 174 pixels vertical. It
is divided into six information display zones as follows, starting from the top:
Set speed
Transmission position
Warning /message display
JaguarDrive Optimization icon
Odometer/Trip computer information
Fuel level.
The message center is active at all times when the ignition is on and can also be active when the ignition is off, dependant on
the information to be displayed. The message center LCD illumination is controlled by the sun load light sensor located on the
instrument panel. In bright conditions, the illumination is set to maximum brightness. As the ambient light levels drop, the
illumination dims. When the lights are switched on or activated by the 'AUTO' function, the illumination operates in the same
way until a defined ambient light threshold is reached, at this point the setting of the panel illumination dimmer in the
auxiliary light switch will control the brightness.
If more than one message is active, each message is displayed for 4 seconds in the order of priority. Once all messages have
been displayed, they are again displayed in turn for 2 seconds each. Warning messages can be displayed when the ignition is
in accessory power mode 4 which is the initial ignition state when a door is opened.
Message Priority
Messages are assigned priorities which are defined by the effect on driving safety and functional ability of the vehicle. When
new messages are displayed they may be accompanied by a chime from the instrument cluster sounder. A new message will be
displayed immediately, providing the currently displayed message (if there is one) has been displayed for at least 4 seconds. A
warning indicator will be activated simultaneously with the message being displayed. If more than one fault warning message
is being displayed, the messages will cycle, in priority order, with each message being displayed for 2 seconds.
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The transmission display is located in the upper section of the LCD. The transmission position information is sent from the
TCM (transmission control module) in a high speed CAN (controller area network) message to the instrument cluster. The
transmission has three modes of operation:
Conventional automatic operation (JaguarDrive selector in 'D' position)

Sport automatic operation (JaguarDrive selector in 'S' position)
Manual gear operation - Jaguar Sequential Shift.
The following table shows the JaguarDrive selector position and the highlighted indication displayed in the transmission
display.
JaguarDrive Selector Position Transmission Display

P - Park P
R - Reverse R
N - Neutral N
D - Drive D
S - Sport S
The following table shows the Jaguar Sequential Shift display. Selections are made using the steering wheel mounted paddle
switches.
Jaguar Sequential Shift Gear Selection Transmission Display

First 1
Second 2
Third 3
Fourth 4
Fifth 5
Sixth 6
The transmission may inhibit a requested up or down shift if the requested gear is outside the normal engine speed operating
range. If this occurs, the transmission display will briefly display the gear requested by the driver but will then change to
display the actual gear selection.
Speed Control and Set Speed Displays
The following table shows the possible messages which can be displayed, other visual or audible warnings and a description of
the message.
Message Other Warnings Reason Action

www.JagDocs.com
OVERLIMIT XXX Displayed when vehicle speed exceeds Reduce vehicle speed to ASL set
MPH (km/h) Amber ASL warning indicator the ASL set speed limit
illuminated at +4.8 km/h
(+3 mph) above limit
Amber ASL warning indicator
flashing at +24 km/h (+15
mph) above limit
Amber ASL warning indicator
flashing and chime emitted
at +24 km/h (+15 mph) for
a certain time period
LIMITER None Displayed for 4 seconds when driver None

CANCELLED deselects ASL
LIMITER SET None Displays new speed setting for the ASL None
XXX MPH (km/h)
LIMITER None Displayed when ASL is activated and None
STANDBY speed control is selected
LIMITER NOT None Displayed when ECM (engine control Use an approved Jaguar
AVAILABLE module) has detected a fault Diagnostic System to diagnose
fault.
TOO FAST TO None Displayed when 'Resume' switch is Reduce vehicle speed to set
RESUME pressed but vehicle speed is 30 km/h speed then press 'Resume' switch.
(18 mph) above the set speed.
CRUISE None Driver has cancelled speed control or None
CANCELLED the brake pedal has been pressed.
CRUISE None Driver has pressed the accelerator WARNING: Adaptive cruise
OVERRIDE pedal, overriding the speed control braking will be disabled when
system. Message will go off when this message is displayed.
accelerator pedal is released and
speed control is active.
GAP 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 None Displays the current set or default If required, adjust distance using
adaptive speed control distance. the steering wheel switches.
Displayed along with a vehicle graphic
in the LCD. Chevrons (>) denote gap
figure selected.
SETSPEED XXX None Displays the new speed input for the None
MPH (km/h) speed control
DRIVER None Immediate action required by the
INTERVENE driver to apply the brakes if required. Apply brakes if required.
May also be displayed if
speed control system
loses CAN messages when
active.
CRUISE NOT None Speed control cannot be engaged. A fault has occurred in the speed
AVAILABLE control system. Diagnose fault
using an approved Jaguar
Diagnostic System.
RADAR SENSOR None The adaptive speed control radar Remove obstruction or clean the
BLOCKED sensor has become dirty or obstructed. radar sensor.
FORWARD ALERT None Forward alert has been switched off. None
OFF No warning will be given for objects in
the vehicles forward direction.
FORWARD ALERT None Forward alert has been switched on or None
the gap settings have changed.
FORWARD ALERT None Forward Alert and Emergency Brake Use an approved Jaguar
UNAVAILABLE Assist are not available. Diagnostic System to diagnose
fault..
Warning/Message Display
Warning and information messages are displayed in the central area of the LCD. When no messages are required, an analogue
clock is present on the display. The message display language can be changed by the driver using a selection menu on the
Touch Screen Display (TSD). The following table shows the possible messages which can be displayed, other visual or audible
warnings and a description of the message.

DSC ON DSC warning indicator Displayed for a short time when the DSC None
flashes for a short time. switch is operated to activate the DSC
system.
DSC OFF DSC warning indicator Displayed for a short time when the DSC None
illuminated. switch is operated to de-activate the
DSC system.
TRAC DSC DSC warning indicator Displayed for a short time when the DSC None
www.JagDocs.com
illuminated. switch is operated to activate the TRAC

DSC system.
DSC NOT DSC warning indicator A fault is present in the DSC system. A fault has occurred in the DSC
AVAILABLE illuminated. system. Interrogate ABS (anti-lock
brake system) module for faults and
diagnose fault using an approved
Jaguar Diagnostic System.
BRAKE FLUID Brake fluid level has become low and Investigate fluid loss and check brake
LOW Brake warning activated low level switch. system for leaks. Repair system as
indicator required and replenish brake fluid
illuminated. reservoir.
Red warning triangle
illuminated in LCD.
ABS FAULT A fault is present in the ABS system. A fault has occurred in the ABS system.
ABS warning Braking system will operate but ABS will Interrogate ABS module for faults and
indicator not be available. diagnose fault using an approved
illuminated. Jaguar Diagnostic System.
Amber warning
triangle illuminated
in LCD.
BRAKE ASSIST Amber warning triangle A fault is present in the braking system A fault has occurred in the brake assist
FAULT illuminated in LCD. preventing brake assist operation. system. Interrogate ABS module for
Braking system will operate but brake faults and diagnose fault using an
assist will not be available and approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
increased effort on the brake pedal may
be required.
EBD FAULT Red warning triangle A fault is present in the braking system A fault has occurred in the EBD
illuminated in LCD. preventing EBD operation. Braking system. Interrogate ABS module for
system will operate but EBD will not be faults and diagnose fault using an
available. approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
ADAPTIVE Amber warning triangle A fault is present in the Computer A fault has occurred in the CATS
DYNAMICS FAULT illuminated in LCD. Active Technology Suspension (CATS) or system. Interrogate the CATS or
the Adaptive Dynamic Suspension adaptive damping module for faults
system. Suspension will default to the and diagnose using an approved Jaguar
'hard' setting. Diagnostic System.
PARK BRAKE None Parking brake has been applied when None
APPLIED the vehicle moving at a speed 5 km/h (3
mph) or above.
PARK BRAKE A fault is present in the parking brake A fault has occurred in the parking
FAULT Brake warning system. brake system. Interrogate the parking
indicator brake module for faults and diagnose
illuminated. using an approved Jaguar Diagnostic
Red warning triangle System.
illuminated in LCD.
www.JagDocs.com
APPLY FOOT AND Amber warning triangle The battery has been disconnected or Apply foot brake and parking brake to
PARK BRAKE illuminated in LCD. power supply interrupted to the parking reset the parking brake module.
brake module.
CANNOT APPLY A fault is present in the parking brake A fault has occurred in the parking
PARK BRAKE Brake warning system and the parking brake cannot be brake system. Interrogate the parking
indicator flashing. applied. brake module for faults and diagnose
Red warning triangle using an approved Jaguar Diagnostic
illuminated in LCD. System.
NOTE: In certain
markets the brake
warning indicator
does not flash.
CHECK TYRE A tire pressure has decreased to below Check tires for punctures and re-inflate
PRESSURE Tire Pressure the warning threshold. to correct pressures.
Monitoring System
(TPMS) warning
indicator
illuminated.
Vehicle graphic
displaying tire
location.
TYRE NOT
MONITORED Tire Pressure One or more tire pressure Check for local RF interference.
Monitoring System sensors have developed a fault. A wheel has been fitted without
(TPMS) warning A temporary spare wheel or a a TPMS sensor fitted (space
indicator wheel without a sensor has been saver spare wheel).
illuminated. fitted at the displayed position. TPMS sensor has developed a
Vehicle graphic An unapproved accessory may be fault or the battery voltage is
displaying tire interfering with the TPMS. low.
www.JagDocs.com
location. A fault has occurred in the

TPMS. Interrogate the TPMS
module for faults and diagnose
using an approved Jaguar
Diagnostic System.
CHECK ALL TYRE One or more tire pressures have

PRESSURES Tire Pressure decreased to below the warning Check tires for punctures and
Monitoring System threshold. re-inflate to correct pressures.
(TPMS) warning Message may be displayed
indicator when TPMS is learning position
illuminated. of a new sensor.
Amber warning
in LCD.
Vehicle graphic
displaying tire
location.
TYRE PRESSURE A fault has occurred in the TPMS.

SYSTEM FAULT Tire Pressure Wheels and tires without sensors Interrogate the TPMS module for faults
Monitoring System have been fitted to the vehicle. and diagnose using an approved Jaguar
(TPMS) warning TPMS sensors have become Diagnostic System.
indicator defective.
illuminated. An unapproved accessory may be
Amber warning interfering with the TPMS.
triangle illuminated A fault is present in the TPMS
in LCD. system and the tire pressures
cannot be monitored.
TYRE PRESSURE TPMS has detected current tire Check tire pressures and inflate to the
LOW FOR SPEED Tire Pressure pressures are too low for sustained high correct pressures if necessary.
Monitoring System speed driving
(TPMS) warning
indicator
illuminated.
Amber warning
in LCD.
TYRE PRESSURE A fault has occurred in the TPMS.

SYSTEM FAULT Tire Pressure Wheels and tires without sensors Interrogate the TPMS module for faults
Monitoring System have been fitted to the vehicle. and diagnose using an approved Jaguar
(TPMS) warning TPMS sensors have become Diagnostic System.
indicator defective.
illuminated. An unapproved accessory may be
Amber warning interfering with the TPMS.
triangle illuminated A fault is present in the TPMS
in LCD. system and the tire pressures
cannot be monitored.
ENGINE Amber warning triangle Engine coolant temperature has

TEMPERATURE illuminated in LCD at exceeded threshold for normal Stop vehicle and allow engine
HIGH temperatures of between operation. to idle for 5 minutes. Switch off
118.0°C (244.4°F) and engine and allow to stand for
119.3°C (246.8°F). not less than 10 minutes. Check
coolant level.
If message re-appears,
investigate coolant system for
leakage.
ENGINE Red warning triangle Engine coolant temperature has

OVERHEATING illuminated in LCD at exceeded threshold for normal engine Stop vehicle and allow engine
temperatures of 119.4°C operation. to idle for 5 minutes. Switch off
(247°F) or above. engine and allow to stand for
not less than 10 minutes. Check
coolant level.
leakage.
ENGINE OIL Red warning triangle Engine oil pressure has fallen below the Stop the engine immediately. Check
PRESSURE LOW illuminated in LCD. threshold for normal operation. engine oil level. If oil level correct, do
not restart engine until oil pressure
loss has been identified and corrected.
RESTRICTED Red or Amber warning A fault has occurred which has reduced Investigate cause of engine power
PERFORMANCE triangle illuminated in LCD engine power output. loss. Interrogate control modules for
depending on nature of faults and diagnose using an approved
power loss. Jaguar Diagnostic System.
www.JagDocs.com
ENGINE SYSTEMS
FAULT MIL (malfunction A fault has occurred in the Investigate cause of fault.
indicator lamp) engine management system or, if Interrogate ECM and TCM for
illuminated for the MIL is illuminated, an faults and diagnose using an
certain faults. emissions related fault is present approved Jaguar Diagnostic
Red or Amber which has been detected by System.
warning triangle the On-Board Diagnostic Check start/stop switch for
illuminated in LCD. systems in the ECM and TCM. correct operation or short
A fault has occurred with the circuits.
start/stop switch.
CHECK FUEL The Diagnostic Monitoring Tank Leakage Check fuel filler cap to ensure is it is
FILLER CAP (NAS Vehicles Only) (DMTL) system has detected fuel filler correctly installed and secure or check
Red warning triangle cap has not been correctly installed or the fuel system for leakage.
illuminated in LCD. the system has a leak.
ENGINE Red warning triangle A fault has occurred in the engine Investigate cause of engine
TEMPERATURE illuminated LCD. management system and the engine temperature failure. Interrogate ECM
INDICATION temperature signal is no longer being for faults and diagnose using an
FAULT received. approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
PLEASE WAIT Amber warning triangle Message appears after start/stop switch None
COLD START IN illuminated LCD. is pressed. Glow plugs are warming up,
PROGRESS message will appear for up to 12
seconds dependant on ambient
temperature. Engine will crank once
message is switched off.
GEARBOX FAULT Battery symbol and amber TCM has detected a fault in the Investigate transmission fault.
warning triangle illuminated transmission. Transmission may default Interrogate TCM and diagnose fault
in LCD. to 'limp home' mode and only allow using an approved Jaguar Diagnostic
limited operation of forward gears and System.
reverse.
BATTERY NOT Red warning triangle Charge output from generator not Investigate cause of generator failure.
CHARGING illuminated in LCD. detected by ECM.
OVER 120 km/h Vehicle has exceeded the preset 120 Reduce vehicle speed.
(GULF States Only) km/h speed value.
Red text illuminated
in LCD.
DPF FULL SEE Amber or Red warning ECM has detected diesel particulate Drive the vehicle as described in the
HANDBOOK triangle illuminated LCD. filter is becoming blocked or has become owners handbook or the workshop
blocked. manual to clean the filter.
COOLANT LEVEL Red warning triangle Coolant level in expansion tank has
LOW illuminated in LCD. fallen below minimum level. Stop vehicle and allow engine
to idle for 5 minutes. Switch off
engine and allow to stand for
not less than 10 minutes. Check
coolant level and replenish
expansion tank to maximum
level.
leakage.
BLIND SPOT Amber warning triangle Blind spot monitoring system has a fault Drive vehicle above threshold speed or
MONITOR NOT illuminated LCD. or vehicle speed is below threshold for investigate cause of fault.
AVAILABLE system operation.
BLIND SPOT Amber warning triangle A blind spot monitoring sensor has Remove obstruction or clean the radar
MONITOR illuminated LCD. become dirty or obstructed. sensor.
SENSOR
BLOCKED
BRAKE PADS Amber warning triangle Brake pads have reached the service Replace brake pads.
LOW illuminated LCD. limit.
SERVICE Amber warning triangle If the vehicle is within 3,200 kilometers None
REQUIRED IN illuminated LCD. (1,988 miles) of a service, the message
XXXX MILES/km center will display this message. The
displayed distance will decrease in
increments of 50 km (31 miles).
SERVICE Amber warning triangle This is displayed if the distance to next Vehicle requires service.
REQUIRED illuminated LCD. service drops below 1 km (0.6 miles).
RESETTING Amber warning triangle Displayed during the service reset None
SERVICE MODE illuminated LCD. procedure.
SERVICE MODE Amber warning triangle Displayed when the service rest None
RESET illuminated LCD. procedure has been successful.
WINTER MODE Snow mode symbol Displayed when snow mode has been None
CONFIRMED illuminated LCD. selected.
DYNAMIC MODE Dynamic mode symbol Displayed when dynamic mode has been None
CONFIRMED illuminated LCD. selected.
www.JagDocs.com
MODE CHANGE None or Snow mode symbol Displayed when the driver has selected None
IN PROGRESS illuminated or Dynamic an alternative JaguarDrive mode.
mode symbol illuminated
LCDLCD
RECOMMEND None or Dynamic mode Displayed when the JaguarDrive senses Select winter mode.
WINTER MODE symbol illuminated LCD excessive wheel slip.
FOR CONDITIONS
WINTER MODE None Confirmation that winter mode has been None
OFF deselected.
DYNAMIC MODE None Confirmation that dynamic mode has None
OFF been deselected.
WINTER MODE Amber warning triangle A sub-system fault is present and the Investigate cause of message.
FAULT illuminated LCD. driver attempts to select a different Interrogate sub-system control
JaguarDrive Control mode. The message modules for faults and diagnose using
'WINTER MODE FAULT' can also in very an approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
rare circumstances be generated by a If no sub-system fault is found,
fault in the JaguarDrive Control module. investigate JaguarDrive Control
module.
DYNAMIC MODE Amber warning triangle A sub-system fault is present and the Investigate cause of message.
FAULT illuminated LCD. driver attempts to select a different Interrogate sub-system control
'DYNAMIC MODE FAULT' can also, in very an approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
rare circumstances, be generated by a If no sub-system fault is found,
fault in the JaguarDrive Control module. investigate JaguarDrive Control
module.
SPECIAL MODES Amber warning triangle A sub-system fault is present and the Investigate cause of message.
NOT AVAILABLE illuminated LCD. driver attempts to select a different Interrogate sub-system control
'SPECIAL MODES NOT AVAILABLE' can an approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
also in very rare circumstances be If no sub-system fault is found,
generated by a fault in the JaguarDrive investigate JaguarDrive Control
Control module. module.
LISTENING Tone emitted from the The voice button has been pressed and None
instrument cluster. the Jaguar voice system is active and
awaiting a voice command.
VOICE NOT None If the Voice button on the steering Press button a second time after a
READY wheel is pressed before the system is short delay.
ready to receive a command, VOICE NOT
READY will be displayed
INSERT MAP DISC None Navigation disc not loaded. Load navigation disc in the navigation
computer.
NOT AVAILABLE None Voice button has been pressed during a None
PHONE IN USE telephone call.
COMMAND NOT None Jaguar Voice system has not recognised Repeat the command speaking clearly.
RECOGNISED the command.
NO SPEECH None Jaguar Voice system is expecting a voice Repeat required voice command.
DETECTED command .
STORING None Jaguar Voice system is storing input None
telephone information.
COMMAND None Jaguar Voice button has been pressed Previous command cancelled.
CANCELLED and held.
SEARCHING None Jaguar Voice system is searching for None
requested information from phone book.
HOLD BUTTON None Jaguar Voice system has requested a None
TO CANCEL command to be cancelled.
FUEL LEVEL LOW Amber warning triangle Fuel level in fuel tank has fallen below Replenish fuel tank.
illuminated LCD. low fuel warning limit.
FUEL PUMP Amber warning triangle Fuel pump or FPDM fault has occurred. Investigate cause of fault. Interrogate
SYSTEM FAULT illuminated LCD. ECM for faults and diagnose using an
approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
WASHER FLUID Amber warning triangle Fluid level has fallen below low level Replenish reservoir.
LOW illuminated LCD. switch in windshield washer reservoir.
DOOR OPEN Red text is illuminated in Door is open or incorrectly closed. Close open door.
LCD and vehicle view
showing open luggage
compartment lid is
displayed.
BOOT OPEN Red text is illuminated in Luggage compartment lid is open or Close open luggage compartment lid.
LCD and vehicle view incorrectly closed.
showing open door location
is displayed.
COLUMN ADJUST None Manual column adjust has been selected None
on steering column adjustment switch.
COLUMN ADJUST None Automatic column adjust has been None
www.JagDocs.com
AUTO selected on steering column adjustment

switch.
MEMORY 1 / 2 / 3 None Memory button has been pressed to None
/ 4 SETTINGS recall memory positions for seat,
RECALLED steering column and mirrors.
MEMORY 1 / 2 / 3 None Memory has been saved for one of the None
/ 4 SETTINGS memory button positions.
SAVED
SEAT BELT None Engine has been started and driver Fasten seat belt(s).
MINDER and/or front passenger seat belt has not
been fastened.
CHECK Red warning triangle A fault has occurred with the pedestrian Investigate cause of fault. Interrogate
PEDESTRIAN illuminated in LCD. protection system. pedestrian protection system control
SYSTEM module for faults and diagnose using
an approved Jaguar Diagnostic System.
INERTIA SWITCH Amber warning triangle Message appears when the crash status RCM can be rest with an ignition on/off
TRIPPED illuminated LCD. signal from the RCM (restraints control cycle. If fault has occurred, then
module) changes to crash detected or a investigate cause of fault and
fault in the restraints system prevents interrogate the RCM for faults and
the message from being transmitted. diagnose using an approved Jaguar
Diagnostic System.
VALET MODE None Confirmation that valet mode has been None
entered.
VEHICLE ARMED None Confirmation that alarm and None
immobilization has been achieved.
SMART KEY NOT Red warning triangle Smart key has not been detected by the Smart key not present in vehicle. May
FOUND PLEASE illuminated in LCD. passive system inside the vehicle. be caused by a flat smart key battery.
INSERT IN SLOT Replace internal battery in smart key.
May also be due to a communications
problem.
CHECK SMART None The smart key detected is not the Use the correct smart key coded to the
KEY correct smart key for the vehicle. vehicle.
REMOVE SMART None Smart key is in the start control module Remove smart key from the start
KEY and has been recognized by the passive control module.
start system.
SMART KEY None Battery voltage in smart key is Replace smart key internal battery.
BATTERY LOW becoming low, resulting in a decrease in
effective range of the smart key
transmitter.
PRESS BRAKE None The stop/start button has been pressed To start engine, press brake pedal,
WHEN STARTING without the brake pedal depressed. This then press stop/start button.
will turn on the ignition power mode 6.
GEARBOX NOT IN None The transmission is not in the 'park' Put transmission in the park position.
PARK position. Engine starting will be
prohibited until 'park' is selected.
STEERING Red warning triangle Fault has occurred preventing the Press the stop/start button to return to
COLUMN LOCKED illuminated in LCD. steering column lock from unlocking. accessory mode 4. If steering column
This will also prevent the engine from is still locked, investigate cause of
starting. fault and interrogate the CJB (central
junction box) for faults and diagnose
using an approved Jaguar Diagnostic
System.
IGNITION ON Red warning triangle Stop/start button has been pressed None
illuminated in LCD. without the brake pedal depressed.
Ignition is now in power mode 6.
ENGINE STOP Red warning triangle Engine stop button has been pressed Do not stop engine when vehicle is
BUTTON PRESSED illuminated in LCD. when the vehicle is moving. Engine will moving unless necessary.
not be switched off until button is
pressed quickly for a second time.
LIGHTS ON Amber warning triangle Side lamps or headlamps are on and the Switch off headlamps to avoid
illuminated in LCD. driver's door has been opened. excessive drain on battery.
AUTOLAMP None Autolamp delay feature has been None
DELAY OFF deactivated by moving light control
switch from the auto position.
AUTOLAMP None Lighting control switch has been moved None
DELAY XX:XX to one of the 4 autolamp delay
positions. Message displays delay timer
period selected.
AUTOLAMP None Autolamp delay is selected on the light None. Message will extinguish once the
DELAY control switch and the driver has selected delay timer has switched off
switched off ignition and opened driver's the headlamps.
door initiating the autolamp delay.
TAIL LAMP None The tail lamp LED (light emitting Correct fault in rear lamp assembly,
FAILURE diode)'s are not functioning correctly. RJB (rear junction box) or wiring.
Location shown on vehicle image.
www.JagDocs.com
BRAKE LAMP None The brake lamp LED's are not Correct fault in rear lamp assembly,
FAILURE functioning correctly. Location shown on RJB or wiring.
displayed vehicle image.
INDICATOR LAMP None A turn signal indicator bulb has failed. Replace failed turn signal indicator
FAILURE Location is shown on displayed vehicle bulb.
image.
E-DIFF NOT Amber warning triangle Differential temperature has reached the Allow differential to cool.
AVAILABLE illuminated in LCD overheat threshold. System deactivated
accompanied with a single until temperature returns within limits.
chime
E-DIFF FAULT Amber warning triangle Fault has occurred with electronic Investigate cause of fault and
illuminated in LCD differential. System deactivated until interrogate the system for faults and
accompanied with a single fault rectified. diagnose using an approved Jaguar
chime Diagnostic System.
ENGINE OIL LOW Amber warning triangle The oil is at the minimum level for safe Top-up with 1 liter (1.8 pints) of oil.
illuminated in LCD operation.
accompanied with a single
chime
ENGINE OIL Amber warning triangle This warning is displayed when the Stop the vehicle as soon as safety
HIGH illuminated in LCD engine is started, if the oil is above the permits and have the engine oil
accompanied with a single maximum level for safe operation. drained to correct level, before driving
chime the vehicle.
ENGINE OIL Red warning triangle The oil is below the minimum level for Stop the vehicle as soon as safety
CRITICALLY LOW illuminated LCD safe operation. permits and top-up with 1.5 liters (2.6
accompanied with a single pints) of oil. Wait for 10 minutes,
chime re-check the oil level reading and
top-up again if necessary.
ENGINE OIL Amber warning triangle A fault with the oil level monitoring Investigate cause of fault and
LEVEL MONITOR illuminated in LCD system is indicated. interrogate the ECM for faults and
SYSTEM FAULT accompanied with a single diagnose using an approved Jaguar
chime Diagnostic System.
WATER IN FUEL Amber warning triangle The water in fuel sensor in the fuel filter Drain fuel filter to remove collected
illuminated in LCD has detected water in the fuel system. water.
accompanied with a single
chime
Odometer Display
The odometer displays the total distance which the vehicle has traveled. This is calculated by the instrument cluster using
wheel speed signals from the ABS module.
The odometer can show 6 characters and distances up to 999,999 miles or kilometers. The total distance travelled is stored in a
EEPROM (electrically erasable programmable read only memory) and the RAM (random access memory). This ensures that the
total distance is not lost if the battery is disconnected.
The odometer value is passed to other vehicle system modules on the medium speed and high speed CAN bus. This is used to
record the total vehicle mileage for diagnostic purposes and when storing DTC (diagnostic trouble code)'s.
www.JagDocs.com
Trip computer Information Display
The instrument cluster contains software which controls the trip computer. The computer allows the driver to access
information for current fuel usage, current journey length, average speed and estimated vehicle range of fuel remaining.
The information is calculated from CAN messages from other vehicle systems, for example wheel speed signals from the ABS
module and fuel injector operating data from the ECM.
A 'Trip' button is located on the end of the LH (left-hand) multifunction switch and allows the driver to access, in sequence, the
available trip information by repeatedly pressing the button. The trip information is displayed in the following order:
Trip distance – The trip distance since the last reset is displayed
Average speed – The average speed since the last reset is displayed
Average fuel consumption – The average fuel consumption since the last reset is displayed
Range – The range is displayed showing the distance which can be travelled until the fuel gage reads empty. If the
range display shows dashes (-), this indicates a failure with one or both of the fuel level sensors.
The trip computer has three independent memories; A, B and Auto. Memories A and B can be set independently. The Auto
memory is reset after each ignition cycle and therefore only contains information relating the current journey.
The trip information can also be accessed from the TSD located in the center console. The TSD allows the same information
available with the trip button on the multifunction switch to be displayed on the TSD, with the addition of the option to reset
the values in the A and B memories.
If the battery is disconnected, all trip data in memories A, B and Auto are erased.
Fuel Level Display
The fuel level display is a linear LCD display to show the usable fuel tank contents. The level display is active at all times
when the ignition is on. Low fuel level is displayed as a LOW FUEL LEVEL message and an amber warning triangle in the
message center.
The fuel level is obtained by fuel level sensors in the fuel tank. These are monitored by the RJB software and their output
www.JagDocs.com
resistance values, corresponding fuel quantity, are transmitted to the instrument cluster on the medium speed CAN bus. The
instrument cluster uses the two level sensor signals to calculate the fuel tank contents. This calculation takes into account
fuel movement in the tank to display a steady fuel quantity in the LCD.
The fuel level information is transmitted on the medium speed and high speed CAN bus for use by other vehicle system
modules.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS
The instrument cluster can generate audible warnings to alert the driver to a displayed message and change of vehicle
operating condition. The audible warning is generated by a sounder located within the instrument cluster. The audible warnings
can be generated for the warnings below and are listed in order of priority, with the first being the highest priority:
Seatbelt reminder
EPB (High Pitch)
ACC Driver Intervene 1
Airbag fault
Key in ignition switch
ASL overspeed
ACC Driver Intervene 2
EPB (Low Pitch)
Vehicle armed (entry delay)
JaguarDrive selector not in park
Valet mode
Lights on reminder
Hood operation
Passive Entry / Passive Start (PEPS)
Memory set
Seat Belt Minder.
The audible warnings can take the form of a single chime, a number of chimes or a continuous chime. The audible warnings are
initiated by a CAN message request from the requesting sub-system control module or by the instrument cluster software.
Information and Message Center - Information and Message Center

REFER to: Instrument Cluster (413-01 Instrument Cluster, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Warning Devices - Blindspot Monitoring System - Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 RH (right-hand) door mirror
2 RH blind spot monitoring module
3 LH (left-hand) blind spot monitoring module
4 LH door mirror
Warning Devices - Blindspot Monitoring System - Overview
OVERVIEW
Eliminating blind spots is a major element in vehicle body design, but because of the structural requirements of B, C and D
posts, blind spots cannot be entirely eliminated. Statistics show that some accidents are directly attributable to drivers moving
across into the path of overtaking vehicles that have not been seen in conventional mirrors. New mirror designs have improved
the situation, but by remotely covering areas that cannot be seen either directly or by the vehicle mirrors, have led to the
introduction of a radar-based blind spot monitoring system.
The blind spot monitoring system comprises:
LH (left-hand) Blind spot monitoring sensor

RH (right-hand) Blind spot monitoring sensor
LH door mirror
RH door mirror
The system uses two radar modules operating at a frequency of 24 GHz and each combining the radar face and electronic
module in a single unit. The modules are located behind the rear bumper surface, symmetrically, one on each side of the car
behind the rear wheels. They are side facing and inclined rearwards at an angle of 16 degrees, which is dictated by the shape
at the rear of the vehicle. Each module is calibrated to detect a vehicle in the driver’s blind spot. Once a vehicle is detected
the module illuminates an amber warning ‘alert icon’ LED (light emitting diode) in the relevant exterior door mirror. If there is a
fault or blockage with the blind spot monitoring system an amber warning indicator dot LED is displayed in the exterior mirror
and the message ‘blind spot monitoring not available’ is displayed in the instrument cluster message center.
When the system initiates, it performs a self-check, during which the warning icons in the mirrors illuminate alternately for a
short period of time. Each module does a left/right determination check when the ignition is switched on. Each mirror has a
different circuit configuration so that the modules can determine which mirror they are connected to. If a module detects the
www.JagDocs.com
wrong mirror it will go into a fault condition.
The blind spot monitoring modules receive vehicle speed on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) and are inactive
until the vehicle reaches 16kph (10mph). Each blind spot monitor module emits a radar field greater than the blind spot area.
Each Blind Spot Monitor module emits a radar field greater than the blind spot area. The actual blind spot area is calibrated
into the module during its manufacture.
CAUTION: The blind spot monitoring system is designed as a driver aid not a safety device. The driver should always
exercise due care and attention whilst driving.
Warning Devices - Blindspot Monitoring System - System Operation and
Control Diagram
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
2 LH (left-hand) door mirror
3 RH (right-hand) door mirror
5 LH blind spot monitoring module
www.JagDocs.com
System Operation
Blind Spot Monitoring
The purpose of the blind spot monitoring system is to detect an object moving with a positive velocity relative to the radar
module, on either side of the vehicle, at a distance of up to 2.5 meters laterally and in an area from the door mirror up to 7.0
meters behind the module. These criteria identify an overtaking vehicle within the blind-spot area and within a typical
carriageway lane width, while eliminating other objects that are not relevant, either because of their position, they are
stationary, traveling in the opposite direction, or being overtaken. A vehicle is classed as a heavy goods vehicle, car or
motorcycle. A motorcycle is defined as a minimum size of 2.0m long, 0.8m wide (widest point) and 1.1m high. The system is
not affected by the mass of the overtaking vehicle providing all identification criteria, including relative velocity of (16km/h -
10mph) or above, is met.
The system emits radar pulses and analyses the reflections, identifying anything that moves into the blind spot zone. Having
detected another vehicle in the defined blind spot zone it alerts the driver by illuminating the amber alert icon located in the
appropriate exterior mirror.
NOTE: If an overtaking vehicle is detected on both sides of the vehicle simultaneously, the warning alert icons in both
mirrors will illuminate.
The light lens is shaped so as to minimize the visibility to other drivers. The LED (light emitting diode)’s are located towards
the outside extremity of the mirror face, within the peripheral view of the driver but not in any area of the mirror where they
could obscure or distract from the image.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Warning alert icon
2 System status warning indicator
The LED lighting sequence is as follows;
Amber alert LED icon permanently lit - system operational, vehicle detected in blind spot area
No LED’s lit – system active no vehicle detected in blind spot area
Amber status LED permanently lit - system not active or faulty
The system has operating limitations and is automatically turned off under certain operating conditions. During these
operating conditions the amber status LED is permanently lit.
The system operating limitations are as follows;
The area surrounding the radar face of the module must be clear of metallic items
The system is inactive until vehicle speed is greater than 16km/h - 10mph (amber status LED permanently lit)
The system is inactive if an approved trailer is connected to the vehicle (amber status LED permanently lit)
The system is inactive when reverse gear or park is selected (amber status LED permanently lit)
If either of the radar signals are blocked or distorted, for example by water, the radar face of the module is covered in mud,
sleet or snow the system may detect this and be disabled with the amber status LED permanently lit together with a ‘blind
spot monitoring blocked’ message displayed in the instrument cluster message center. The system is disabled until the
blockage is cleared.
If there is a fault in the system the amber status LED is permanently lit and a ‘blind spot monitoring not available’ message
displayed in the instrument cluster message center. The system is disabled until the fault is rectified.
System fault and blockage warnings are as follows;

The system is disabled when the radar module signal is blocked (amber status LED permanently lit and instrument
cluster message)
The system is disabled by a fault (amber status LED permanently lit and instrument cluster message)
If there is a failure in the communication network and the warning LED’s cannot be displayed in the mirror, a failure message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster message center.
When any faults are present in the system DTC (diagnostic trouble code)'s are stored in both blind spot monitoring modules
appropriate to each module. Replacement of modules requires the right hand module to be configured using the Jaguar
approved diagnostic equipment. Due to the fact that all modules are supplied as left hand modules the replacement left hand
modules do not require configuring.
Calibration of the modules using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new
technology becomes available or any fault concerns require software updates.
www.JagDocs.com
Warning Devices - Warning Devices
For a detailed description of the Blindspot Monitoring system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (413-09 Warning Devices)
Blindspot Monitoring System (Description and Operation),

Blindspot Monitoring System (Description and Operation),
Blindspot Monitoring System (Description and Operation).
NOTE: Particular attention should be paid to the following items where DTCs may not be logged:
Check for contamination (e.g. dirt, grime, frosting, ice) around the blindspot monitoring sensors and clear.
Visual Inspection
www.JagDocs.com
Exterior rear view mirror glass Fuse(s)

Mud or sleet contamination around rear bumper area Relay(s)
Blindspot Monitoring Modules Wiring Harness
Blindspot Monitoring Modules
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and refer to the Symptom Chart, alternatively, check for
Symptom Chart

Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left driver
The instrument cluster Left driver display display alert LED circuit for short to power
displays 'BSM System Fault' alert LED circuit -
DTC B11C915 is logged within short to power
the left hand Blind Spot
Monitoring module
The Left Alert icon is
constantly illuminated
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the left

The instrument cluster Left mirror ground mirror ground circuit for open circuit
displays 'BSM System Fault' circuit - open
DTC B11C915 is logged within circuit
the left hand Blind Spot
Monitoring module
No short to power or open
circuit fault on the driver
display status LED circuit
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the right

The instrument cluster Right mirror mirror ground circuit for open circuit
displays 'BSM System Fault' ground circuit -
DTC B11C915 is logged within open circuit
the right hand Blind Spot
Monitoring module
No short to power or open
circuit fault on the driver
display status LED circuit
The instrument cluster Left driver display Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
displays 'BSM System Fault' status LED circuit driver display status LED circuit for short to ground.
DTC U023200 is logged within - short to ground Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains suspect the left
the right hand Blind Spot Harness fault hand Blindspot Monitoring module
Monitoring module between left side Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
The left driver display status mirror and left left side harness between the left side mirror and left
LED does not illuminate when side module hand module
the vehicle is stationary, in Suspect left hand Check and install a new left hand Blindspot Monitoring
Park and the ignition is on module failure module only, refer to the new module/component
The instrument cluster Left driver display Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
displays 'BSM System Fault' alert LED - short driver display alert LED circuit for short to ground,
DTC U023200 is logged within to ground, open open circuit. Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains
the right hand Blind Spot circuit suspect the left hand Blindspot Monitoring module
Monitoring module Harness fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
When the system is powered between left side left side harness between the left side mirror and left
up the left driver display alert mirror and left hand module
LED does not illuminate during side module Check and install a new left hand Blindspot Monitoring
the bulb self-checks Suspect left hand module only, refer to the new module/component
module failure installation note at the top of the DTC Index
The instrument cluster Right driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
displays 'BSM System Fault' display status LED driver display status LED circuit for short to power.
DTC U023300 is logged within - short to power Clear DTC and re-test. If DTC remains suspect the
the left hand Blind Spot Harness fault right hand Blindspot Monitoring module
Monitoring module between right side Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
The right driver display status mirror and right right side harness between the right side mirror and
www.JagDocs.com
LED is constantly illuminated side module right hand module

Suspect right hand Check and install a new right hand Blindspot
module failure Monitoring module only, refer to the new
DTC Index
The instrument cluster Right driver Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
displays 'BSM System Fault' display status LED driver display status LED circuit for open circuit. Clear
DTC U023300 is logged within - open circuit DTC and re-test. If DTC remains suspect the right
the left hand Blind Spot Harness fault hand Blindspot Monitoring module
When the system is powered mirror and right right side harness between the right side mirror and
up the right driver display side module right hand module
status LED does not illuminate Suspect right hand Check and install a new right hand Blindspot
during the bulb self-checks module failure Monitoring module only, refer to the new
DTC Index
The instrument cluster Right mirror Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
displays 'BSM System Fault' ground circuit - right mirror ground circuit for open circuit. Clear DTC
DTC U023300 is logged within open circuit and re-test. If DTC remains suspect the left hand
the left hand Blind Spot Harness fault Blindspot Monitoring module
When the system is powered mirror and right right side harness between the right side mirror and
up both the right driver display side module right hand module
LEDs do not illuminate during Suspect right hand Check and install a new right hand Blindspot
the bulb self-checks module failure Monitoring module only, refer to the new
DTC Index
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00.
NOTES:
and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the DMM leads into
account.
When carrying out repair/diagnosis of the system, on removal of the front or rear bumper inspect the sensor connectors
to ensure they were correctly latched and check fly leads for signs of chaffing or trapped wires.

www.JagDocs.com
B11C911 Driver Display Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver display
Status LED Driver Display Status LED status LED circuit for short to ground
B11C915 Driver Display Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver display
Status LED Driver Display Status LED status LED circuit for short to power, open circuit
circuit - short to power,
open circuit
B11D611 Driver Display Alert Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver display
LED Driver Display Alert LED alert LED circuit for short to ground
B11D615 Driver Display Alert Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver display
LED Driver Display Alert LED alert LED circuit for short to power, open circuit
circuit - short to power,
open circuit
U001000 Medium Speed CAN Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using
Communication Bus No sub type information the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check MS CAN
bus state, carry out CAN network integrity tests using the
Communication Lost communication with the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check CJB for
With Body Control CJB related DTCs and correct function, refer to the relevant DTC
Module Index
Communication Lost communication with the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check RJB for
With Body Control RJB related DTCs and correct function, refer to the relevant DTC
Module "B" Index
Communication Lost communication with the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
With Gateway "A" information and information and entertainment module for related DTCs and
entertainment module correct function, refer to the relevant DTC Index
Communication Lost communication with the manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check
With Instrument instrument cluster instrument cluster for related DTCs and correct function, refer
Panel Cluster (IPC) to the relevant DTC Index
Control Module
U023200 Lost
Communication CAN bus circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
With Side Obstacle Harness fault between left power and ground connections to the module. Using
Detection Control side mirror and left side the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module - Left module complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
between the left Blind Spot Monitoring System Module
and the right Blind Spot Monitoring System Module
www.JagDocs.com
left side harness between the left side mirror and left
hand module
U023300 Lost
Communication CAN bus circuit fault Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the
With Side Obstacle Harness fault between power and ground connections to the module. Using
Detection Control right side mirror and right the manufacturer approved diagnostic system,
Module - Right side module complete a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
between the left Blind Spot Monitoring System Module
and the right Blind Spot Monitoring System Module
right side harness between the right side mirror and
right hand module
U030000 Internal Control Check RJB for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Module Software RJB car configuration data Index. Clear DTCs and re-test. If DTC still logged, re-configure
Incompatibility is not compatible with the the RJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Blindspot Monitoring Clear DTCs and re-test. If DTC still logged, re-configure the
module Blindspot Monitoring module using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test, if still logged
suspect the Blindspot Monitoring module. Check and install a
new module as required, refer to the new module/component
U041568 Invalid Data Check ABS module for related DTCs and correct function, refer
Received From Event information to the relevant DTC Index
Anti-Lock Brake
System Control
Module
www.JagDocs.com
U042268 Invalid Data Check CJB for related DTCs and correct function, refer to the
Received From Body Event information relevant DTC Index
Control Module
U042368 Invalid Data Check instrument cluster for related DTCs and correct function,
Received From Event information refer to the relevant DTC Index
Instrument Panel
Control Module
U210000 Initial Configuration Check RJB for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Not Complete No configuration has been Index
previously set
U210100 Control Module Check RJB for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Configuration Data sent from RJB is Index. Check/amend Car Configuration File using the
Incompatible invalid manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U300044 Control Module Cycle the ignition and check if the DTC is still logged. If DTC
Data memory failure remains suspect the module, refer to the new
Index
U300047 Control Module Cycle the ignition and check if the DTC is still logged. If DTC
Watchdog/safety Micro remains suspect the module, refer to the new
controller failure module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
Index
U300049 Control Module Clear DTC, cycle ignition and retest. If fault persists, check
Internal electronic failure and install a new Blindspot Monitoring module as required,
refer to the new module/component installation note at the
U300281 Vehicle Check RJB has not been previously installed to other vehicle.
Identification Vehicle/component mis- Install original/new module as required, refer to the new
Number match. Corrupt VIN module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
data being transmitted, Index. Check RJB for DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC Index
suspect module previously
installed to other vehicle
Mis-match in battery the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
voltage, of 2 volts or
more, between Blindspot
Monitoring module and RJB
Parking Aid - Parking Aid - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - PARKING AID

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Front parking aid sensors (4 off)
2 Parking aid switch
3 Rear parking aid sensors (4 off)
4 Parking aid module
COMPONENT LOCATION - PARKING AID CAMERA
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Touch Screen Display (TSD)
3 Parking aid camera
Parking Aid - Parking Aid - Overview
OVERVIEW
The parking aid system provides an audible warning to the driver when any obstacles are in the path of the vehicle during a
forward (if front sensors are fitted) or reversing manoeuver. The purpose of the system is to assist the driver when parking or
manoeuvring in a restricted space. It is not designed as a crash avoidance system or a replacement for visual interpretation by
the driver.
All vehicles are fitted with rear parking aid sensors. Higher specification vehicles may also be fitted with front parking aid
sensors.
A roof console mounted parking aid switch allows the driver to deactivate the parking aid system if operation is not required.
NOTE: The switch is only fitted to vehicles with front parking aid sensors.
A parking aid camera is a standard fitment on some models and optional on others. The parking aid camera supplements the
information provided by the parking aid system by providing the driver with a visual display of the area directly behind the
vehicle.
www.JagDocs.com
Parking Aid - Parking Aid - System Operation and Component Description
Control Diagram
CONTROL DIAGRAM - PARKING AID
www.JagDocs.com
A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; P = MOST ring

Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuses
4 Entertainment system control module
5 Integrated audio module
6 Audio amplifier
7 Audio system speakers
www.JagDocs.com
8 RH (right-hand) outer rear sensor
9 RH inner rear sensor
10 LH (left-hand) inner rear sensor
11 LH outer rear sensor
12 LH outer front sensor
13 LH inner front sensor
14 RH inner front sensor
15 RH outer front sensor
17 Parking aid switch
CONTROL DIAGRAM - PARKING AID CAMERA
www.JagDocs.com
A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus; P = MOST ring; T = Co-axial cable
Item Description
1 Battery
2 Megafuses
3 RJB
6 Parking aid camera
System Operation
PARKING AID
Two levels of parking aid system can be fitted; a rear only system or a front and rear system.
The parking aid module receives and ignition power mode 6 supply from the RJB.
The parking aid module is connected to the entertainment system control module by the medium speed CAN (controller area
network) bus and the Media Orientated System Transport (MOST). The entertainment system is used by the parking aid system
to provide the driver with an audible warning. If an obstacle is sensed by the rear parking aid sensors, the rear audio system
speakers will sound. If an obstacle is sensed by the front parking aid sensors (if fitted), the front audio system speakers will
sound.
The parking aid system operates using ultrasonic signals which are transmitted by the sensors. The reflected echo from this
output is received by the sensors and used by the parking aid module to calculate the distance from an object.
When the parking aid module activates the system, the switch LED (light emitting diode) is illuminated to indicate that the
system is operating. The parking aid module then processes signals received from the sensors to determine if there is an
object with the detection range of the sensors. A parking aid screen is automatically displayed in the Touch Screen Display. If
the vehicle has a parking aid camera fitted, the camera display is automatically displayed in the TSD in preference to the
parking aid alert display. To view the parking aid sensor display, a single touch of the TSD screen will remove the camera
image display and show the parking aid alert display.
www.JagDocs.com
Parking Aid Alert Display
A visual interpretation of the detection areas is given in the TSD.
The visual interpretation dynamically updates as the sensors detect an objets within the set parameters. This feature can also
be used as a diagnostic aid.
In the combined mode, the sensors emit a series of ultrasonic impulses and then switch to receiver mode to receive the echo
reflected by an obstacle within the detection range. The received echo signals are amplified and converted from an analogue
signal to a digital signal by the sensor. The digital signal is passed to the parking aid module and compared with
pre-programmed data stored in an EEPROM (electrically erasable programmable read only memory) within the module. The
module receives this data via the signal line from the sensor and calculates the distance from the object using the elapsed
time between the transmitted and received impulse. The duration of the impulse duration is determined by the module, with
the sensor controlling the frequency of the impulse output.
In receiver mode, the sensor receives impulses that were emitted by adjacent sensors. The module uses this information to
precisely determine the position and distance of the object.
If no objects are detected there are no further warning tones. If an object is detected, repeated audible tones are emitted
from either the front or rear audio speakers as appropriate. The time delay between the tones decreases as the distance
between the object and the vehicle decreases, until at approximately 300 mm (12 inches), the audible tone becomes
continuous.
After the initial detection of an object, if there is no decrease in the distance between an object and the central sensors, the
time delay between the audible warnings remains constant. If an object is detected by one of the corner sensors only, the
audible warnings stop after approximately 5 seconds if there is no change in the distance between an object and the corner
sensor.
When approaching several objects within detection range, the control module recognises the distance from the vehicle to the
nearest object.
The PDC module will prioritise the objects detected, the nearest object detected will take priority and the corresponding audio
outputs will be emitted. For example if 2 objects are detected (one front one rear) the nearest detected object will take
priority and relevant audible tone will be heard.
If two objects are detected at equal distance (one front one rear) the audible tones will alternate between the front and rear
speakers.
If reverse (R) is the first gear selected after the ignition is switched on, both the front (if fitted) and rear parking aid sensors
will become operational. If a forward drive gear is subsequently selected, the front and rear parking aid sensors will remain
operational until vehicle speed increases above 16 km/h (10 mph), park (P) is selected or the PDC control switch is pressed.
www.JagDocs.com
If drive (D) is the first gear selected after the ignition is switched on the parking aid system will have to be activated by
pressing the PDC control switch.
NOTE: The PDC system can not be activated whilst the vehicle is in park (P).
The volume output of the parking aid audible tones can be adjusted by selecting the 'Vehicle Settings' menu and selecting
'Parking' from the menu on the TSD. The volume can be adjusted using the + or - selections on the TSD.
The system can detect when a trailer is connected to the vehicle by a message output on the medium speed CAN bus from the
trailer module. When the parking aid module detects that a trailer is connected to the vehicle, the rear sensors are disabled to
prevent constant warnings due to the close proximity of the trailer.
NOTE: The ignition needs to be cycled once the trailer has been disconnected to activate the rear parking aid system.
Distance Calculation
www.JagDocs.com
The detection ranges of the sensors are shown in the table below.
Item Number Sensor Location Maximum Detection Range Audio Tone Continuous Audio Tone
1 Rear/Front Outer Approximately 600 mm (24 inches) Approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
2 Rear Inner Approximately 1800 mm (71 inches) Approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
3 Front Inner Approximately 800 mm (31 inches) Approximately 300 mm (12 inches)
PARKING AID CAMERA

The parking aid camera receives an ignition power mode 6 power supply from the RJB. It also has a LIN (local interconnect
network) bus connection from the RJB which is not used at the moment but installed for a later enhancement of the parking
aid camera.
A shielded co-axial cable connection between the camera and the Touch Screen Display (TSD) is used for the video image
transmission.
The camera receives power at all times when the ignition is in power mode 6. When reverse gear is selected, the RJB
transmits a reverse selected signal on the medium speed CAN bus message to the entertainment system control module. This
message is transferred on the MOST to the TSD which displays the parking aid camera video input from the camera in
preference to the parking aid alert screen.
If the driver does not require the camera image in the TSD, a single touch on the screen will revert the display to the parking
aid alert screen. The camera view can be reselected by pressing the 'Rear Camera' softkey on the TSD.
When reverse gear is deselected, the camera image remains on the TSD for 10 seconds after the transmission has been put
into drive 'D'. This is to prevent the TSD switching between screens if the vehicle is being manoeuvred into a parking space. If
the vehicle forward speed exceeds 16 km/h (10 mph) within the 10 second period, the camera image is removed from the TSD.
If the TSD display is switched off, the camera image will be automatically displayed when reverse gear is selected. When
reverse gear is deselected and the 10 second period has expired, the TSD will revert back to its switched off state.
PARKING AID
Parking Aid Module
The parking aid module is located on the LH side of the luggage compartment.
The parking aid module has three connectors which provide for power, ground and CAN bus connections, front parking aid
sensors and rear parking aid sensors. The medium speed CAN bus connections provide for the receipt of the following
information from other systems:
ABS (anti-lock brake system) module - Road speed signal

TCM (transmission control module) - Reverse gear engaged signal
Trailer module - Trailer attached to vehicle
The module also outputs messages on the medium speed CAN bus which are received by the integrated audio module. The
integrated audio module processes these messages and converts them into Media Orientated System Transport (MOST) signals
which are passed to the audio system power amplifier. These signals are then used by the power amplifier to emit the
applicable warning tones from the front or rear audio speakers when an object is detected by the front or rear parking aid
sensors. A warning tone can also be emitted to alert the driver to a fault in the parking aid system.
The control module has a diagnostic connection via the medium speed CAN bus to enable faults to be retrieved using the
Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment. Additionally an on-board diagnostic routine within the control module constantly
monitors the system and alerts the driver to a system fault by emitting a 3 second continuous tone through the rear audio
system speakers when the ignition is switched on. If front parking aid sensors are fitted, the control switch LED will also flash
6 times.
Parking Aid Sensors
Four ultrasonic sensors are located in the front (if fitted) and rear bumpers.
Each sensor has a three pin connector which mates with a bumper harness, which in turn is connected to the main body
harness. Three pins provide for power supply, ground and signal lines to and from the parking aid module.
The parking aid module controls the operation of each sensor using a digital output on the signal line. The module controls the
sensor in one of two modes; combined transmitter and receiver mode or receiver mode only.
Parking Aid Switch

www.JagDocs.com
The parking aid switch is located in the instrument panel switch pack, above the touch screen. The switch is the LH switch with
an integral LED.
The switch is a non-latching push switch which allows the driver to select the parking aid system on or off. When pressed, the
switch momentarily connects a ground to the parking aid module.
The LED indicates when the parking aid system is active. The LED is controlled by the parking aid module.
NOTE: The control switch allows the driver to activate/deactivate the parking aid system if operation is required or not
required.
www.JagDocs.com
PARKING AID CAMERA
The parking aid camera receives an ignition power mode 6 power supply from the RJB. It also has a LIN bus connection with
the RJB, which is used as a gateway.
A shielded co-axial cable connection between the camera and the TSD is used for the video image transmission.
The camera receives power at all times when the ignition is in power mode 6. When reverse gear is selected, the RJB
transmits a reverse selected message on the medium speed CAN bus. The information and entertainment module transfers the
message on the MOST ring to the TSD, which displays the video input from the parking aid camera in preference to the parking
aid alert screen.
The display from the camera incorporates graphic overlays, indicating vehicle direction, width and proximity to surrounding
objects.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
A Solid line: The projected wheel trajectory
B Dotted line: The safe working width of the vehicle (including exterior mirrors)
C Luggage compartment access guideline: Do not reverse beyond this point if luggage compartment access is required
D Bumper inclusion
E Parking sensor activation: A colored area appears, to indicate which rear sensors have been activated
A single touch on the screen will revert the display to the parking aid alert screen. The camera view can be reselected by
pressing the Rear Camera soft key on the TSD.
NOTE: This can only be activated when reverse gear is selected.
When reverse gear is deselected, the camera image remains on the TSD for 2 seconds after the transmission has been put into
D (drive). If the vehicle forward speed in D exceeds 16 km/h (10 mph) the camera image is removed from the TSD.
If the TSD is switched off, the camera image will be automatically displayed when reverse gear is selected. When reverse gear
is deselected, after 10 seconds the TSD will revert back to its switched off state.
Parking Aid - Parking Aid
For a detailed description of the parking aid system, characteristics and limitations refer to the relevant description and
operation section in the workshop manual.
REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Description and Operation).
Parking Aid System On-Board Self-Test

As part of the strategy of the system if any DTCs are detected, a long high-pitched tone approx 3 seconds will sound and the
parking aid switch (where fitted) indicator LED will flash 6 times at ignition on
If a fault is present when the parking aid system is activated then the parking aid switch (where fitted) status LED will
flash 6 times indicating an issue with front or rear parking aid sensors, wiring switch, parking aid control module or hard
wired sounders
The rear parking aid sounder/rear audio system will emit an error tone for approx 3 seconds at ignition on if a fault is
detected with the front or rear sensors, the switch, or if there is a controller area network (CAN) bus error
(Only applicable to vehicles fitted with front parking aid and a hard wired rear parking aid sounder). If there is a fault
with the rear parking aid sounder the error tone will come from the front parking aid sounder unit (integral with the
instrument cluster)
Audible and Visual Warnings when Parking Aid System is in Error State
Rear Parking Aid
System Fitted and
No Parking Aid
System Switch Rear Parking Aid System Fitted and Parking Aid Front and Rear Parking Aid System Fitted with
Fitted System Switch Fitted Parking Aid System Switch Fitted
www.JagDocs.com
A long high-pitched
error tone will A long high-pitched error tone will sound at A long high-pitched error tone will sound at
sound at Ignition ignition on for approx 3 seconds and the ignition on for approximately 3 seconds and
On for approx 3 parking aid switch indicator LED will flash 6 the parking aid switch indicator LED will flash 6
seconds times at ignition on. Every time the parking times at ignition on. Every time the parking aid
aid system is activated within the same system is activated within the same ignition
ignition cycle, parking aid switch indicator cycle the parking aid switch indicator LED will
LED will flash 6 times flash 6 times

CAUTIONS:
Do not apply any grease based products to any parking aid system connector or pins
NOTE: Check DDW for open campaigns. Refer to the corresponding bulletins and SSMs which may be valid for the specific
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage
3. Ensure that the parking aid sensor face is clear of contamination that could affect the performance of the sensor
Visual Inspection
Parking aid sensor condition/damaged Battery

Parking aid sensor installation and holder Fuse(s)
Parking aid sensor alignment Relays
Parking aid sensor contamination Wiring harness
Bumper cover(s) Electrical connector(s)
Vehicle ride height Front parking aid sensor(s)
Non standard/non manufacturer approved accessories fitted Rear parking aid sensor(s)
Parking aid switch and LED
Parking aid control module
Parking aid sounder
Audio system
the next step
5. If the cause is not visually evident, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC index
Symptom Chart
CAUTION: Do not apply any grease based products to any parking aid system connector or pins
NOTES:
Please note if this diagnosis is being carried out on a vehicle without a hard wired parking aid speaker, ensure the in car
infotainment system is fully functional and configured correctly
Parking aid sensors that are painted incorrectly and not to the manufacturer standards, will not be considered in any
warranty claim
Front or rear parking aid Clean front or rear parking aid sensors
NOTE:
sensors dirty Check the front or parking aid rear sensor position
Permanent/Intermittent fault
Front or rear parking aid Check the front or rear parking aid sensor are
Parking aid system not sensor position incorrect correctly installed
www.JagDocs.com
functioning correctly. (No Front or rear parking aid Check front or rear parking aid sensor coupling
DTCs displayed) sensor incorrectly installed rings are installed/installed correctly
Front or rear parking aid Ensure all parking aid system connectors are
sensor coupling rings not correctly latched
installed/incorrectly installed Remove parking aid sensor and ensure correctly
Parking aid control module or painted parking aid sensor is installed
parking aid sensor connector - Parking aid sensors that are painted
not fully latched incorrectly and not to the manufacturer
Parking aid sensors painted standards, will not be considered in any
without being removed from warranty claim
the bumper assembly or not
painted to the manufacturer
specification
Parking aid sensors incorrectly Ensure the sensors are a tight fit in the holder and
NOTE:
mounted locked. Ensure the sensors are central in the holder
Permanent/Intermittent fault
Incorrect vehicle ride height and bumper and at the correct angle
Parking aid system not Dirty parking aid sensor face. Ensure vehicle ride height is within the specified
functioning correctly. (No Ice/snow covered sensor. limits. Rectify as required
DTCs displayed). System Debris trapped between Clean the sensor face as required. Defrost the
characteristics or parking aid sensor and sensor and dry as required. Clear any debris from
environmental effects parking aid sensor body. the sensor and holder as required. Water flowing
Heavy rain or water splash over the sensor is a system limitation. (no action
from the ground required)
Non standard, bumper, Check for non standard, bumper, exhausts/tailpipe,
exhausts/tailpipes, tow bar or tow bar or external spare wheel mounting that may
external spare wheel be being detected by the parking aid system.
mounting Rectify as required
Area around vehicle is not Ensure the area around the vehicle is clear of any
clear of obstacles such as obstacles, move the vehicle to a suitable area
channels, gutters or other before continuing diagnosis
items on the ground Ensure no exhaust gas or warm area clouds are in
Exhaust gas and warm air the area around the parking aid sensor detection
clouds creating ghost echoes range
Vehicle not on level ground or Ensure the vehicle is on level ground and clear of
next to a gradient any ramps, potholes or speed bumps, move the
Parking aid sensors painted vehicle to a suitable area before continuing
without being removed from diagnosis
the bumper assembly or not Remove parking aid sensor and ensure correctly
painted to the manufacturer painted parking aid sensor is installed
specification - Parking aid sensors that are painted
incorrectly and not to the manufacturer
standards, will not be considered in any
warranty claim
Parking aid sensors are being Possible issue with sensor connectors
returned with no faults found not latched correctly When either no/intermittent operation has been
or signs of water reported the following action should be taken
ingress/corrosion 1. Using Datalogger, identify the position of the
suspect parking aid sensor within the bumper
2. Visually locate the position of the suspect
parking aid sensor. Inspect and provide details in
claim if the sensor has any sign of physical
damage
3. Remove the bumper. Disconnect the wiring at
the main harness connector. Inspect the main
harness connectors and terminals for signs of
damage, backed out pins, corrosion and water
ingress, or damage to the seals. Provide details in
claim if any of the above symptoms are present
4. Attempt to remove the harness connector from
the suspect parking aid sensor without using the
connector latch i.e. lightly pull back on ALL wires
together, ensuring the harness is held close to the
back of the connector, not elsewhere on the wiring
harness. DO NOT apply excessive force. If the
connector can be removed without using the latch,
provide details in claim if connector is loose. If the
connector is fully latched, disconnect it from the
sensor
5. Inspect and provide details in claim if the
suspect sensor harness connector has any sign of
water ingress/corrosion
6. Inspect and provide details in claim if the
suspect parking aid sensor harness connector
shows any sign that the terminals have backed-out
www.JagDocs.com
of the connector or for any damage to the terminal

seals. Replace/repair the harness as required and
proceed
7. Remove the suspect parking aid sensor from the
bumper. Inspect the parking aid sensor connector
for signs of water ingress/corrosion. Provide details
in claim if corrosion/water ingress is present
8. Exchange the suspect parking aid sensor with
another parking aid sensor within the bumper that
is performing correctly. Reconnect all sensors and
reconnect the bumper main harness connector.
Repeat step 1. Confirm if the original fault now
appears at the new position of the suspect parking
aid sensor, if so, proceed to step 10
9. If not, carry out the appropriate open circuit and
short circuit checks between the original suspect
parking aid sensor harness connector and the
parking aid control module
10. Refit the parking aid sensors to their original
position in the bumper
11. Reconnect the parking aid sensor to the
bumper harness connector. Reconnect main harness
connector and refit the bumper
12. Repeat Step 1. If fault is still present, replace
only the faulty sensor
PINPOINT TEST A : PARKING AID SYSTEM NOT FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY WITH NO DTCS LOGGED
CONDITIONS
A1: PERMANENT FAULT
1 When the parking aid system is activated, there is a vibration on the parking aid sensor membrane. This
can be verified by touching the parking aid sensor face with a hard item such as a pencil, ball-pen, small
screwdriver, or fingernail. Ensure no damage is caused to sensor painted surface
Are the parking aid sensor(s) vibrating?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
GO to A5.
A2: SENSORS VIBRATING WITH PARKING AID FAULT
1 Clean the parking aid sensor face
Parking aid system functioning correctly?
Yes
No
GO to A3.
1 Check parking aid sensors correctly mounted. Parking aid sensor holder correctly mounted. Parking aid
sensor decoupler ring fitted or fitted correctly. Parking aid sensor positioning correct. Parking aid sensor
painted without being removed from the bumper assembly or not painted to manufacturer specification.
Rectify as required
Yes
No
GO to A4.
1 Carry out speaker test. Only applicable to vehicles with rear hard wired parking aid speakers. Check the
parking aid speaker wiring circuit and connector. Rectify as required. Check and install a new parking aid
speaker as required. Vehicles with audio parking aid system. Confirm audio system is functioning
correctly. Refer to the relevant section of the workshop manual
Parking aid system functioning correctly
Yes
A5: SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PARKING AID FAULT
1 Isolate the fault to front or rear parking aid sensors
Are all rear parking aid sensors vibrating?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
GO to A10.
A6: FRONT SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PARKING AID FAULT
1 Check the parking aid control module is correctly configured. Check and update the car configuration file
as required
www.JagDocs.com
Yes
No
GO to A7.
1 Check the correct parking aid control module is installed to the vehicle
Yes
No
GO to A8.
1 If all 4 front parking aid sensors are not vibrating, carry out harness test on common ground, power
supply. Check main parking aid harness connector to bumper harness connector. Rectify as required
Yes
No
GO to A9.
1 Check and install a new parking aid control module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
Yes
A10: REAR SENSORS NOT VIBRATING WITH PARKING AID FAULT
1 Check the parking aid control module is correctly configured. Check and update the car configuration file
as required
Yes
No
GO to A11.
1 If all 4 rear parking aid sensors are not vibrating, carry out harness test on common ground, power supply.
Check main parking aid harness connector to bumper harness connector. Rectify as required
Yes
No
GO to A12.
1 Check and install a new parking aid control module as required. Refer to the warranty policy and
procedures manual, or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation
www.JagDocs.com
Yes
PINPOINT TEST B : PARKING AID SYSTEM NOT FUNCTIONING CORRECTLY WITH NO DTCS LOGGED
CONDITIONS
B1: PARKING AID SYSTEM GIVES WARNING SIGNAL WITHOUT OBSTACLE
1 Clean the parking aid sensor face. Check for any damage to the parking aid sensor face. Rectify as
required. Snow, water or ice on sensor face. Parking aid sensor face has been repainted to the incorrect
thickness. Rectify as required
Yes
No
GO to B2.
1 Ensure the vehicle ride height is within manufacturer specified limits. Rectify as required
Yes
No
GO to B3.
1 Check for any non standard accessories are not fitted, such as tow bar, bike rack, body kit, modified
exhaust, lighting or licence plate holder
Yes
www.JagDocs.com
No
GO to B4.
1 Limitations or characteristics of the parking aid system such as vehicle on a gradient, exhaust gas
vapour, signal reflection
Yes
No
For a detailed description of the parking aid system, refer to the relevant description and operation
section in the workshop manual.
REFER to: Parking Aid (413-13 Parking Aid, Description and Operation).
DTC Index
NOTES:
If the control module is suspect and the vehicle remains under manufacturer warranty, refer to the Warranty Policy and
Procedures manual (section B1.2), or determine if any prior approval programme is in operation, prior to the installation of a
new module.
and with an up-to-date calibration certificate. When testing resistance always take the resistance of the DMM leads into
account.
When carrying out repair/diagnosis of the system, on removal of the front or rear bumper inspect the sensor connectors
to ensure they were correctly latched and check fly leads for signs of chaffing or trapped wires
Physical damage to the sensor (impact damage or scratched sensor surface) must NOT be changed under warranty.

Sensor - General Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
electrical failure Front Right Outer Sensor front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
- Component internal sensor circuit for short circuit to ground, short circuit
failure to power, open circuit. Repair or replace any wiring
harness as required
www.JagDocs.com

Sensor - Circuit short Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
to battery front bumper harness for damage. Check sensor
circuit for short circuit to power. Repair or replace any

Sensor - Component Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
internal failure Front Right Outer Sensor front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
harness as required

Sensor - General Wiring harness fault Refer to electrical wiring diagrams and check the
electrical failure Front Right Inner Sensor front bumper harness for damage/corrosion. Check
harness as required
Parking Aid - Proximity Camera
For a detailed description of the rear view camera system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual.
NOTES:
module/component.
account.
www.JagDocs.com
Visual Inspection
Touch screen Fuses

Rear view camera Wiring harnesses and connectors
Touch screen
Rear view camera
the next step
Symptom Chart

Rear view camera
image slow to react System operation within
NOTE: After selecting reverse, it may take up to 20 seconds for the
specification
image to be displayed.
No further action necessary
Blank screen
Rear view camera not GO to Pinpoint Test A.
functioning
Blue screen
Video in signal absent GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No tracking lines
Missing/invalid reverse Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the
gear signal central junction box for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
LIN fault DTC index
Frozen tracking lines
LIN data gateway fault GO to Pinpoint Test D.
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : PERMANENT BLANK SCREEN TESTS
CONDITIONS
A1: PERMANENT BLANK SCREEN TEST 1
NOTE: A blank screen is the default display when the rear view camera is not transmitting an image.
Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the power and ground connections to the rear view
1
camera
Are the power and ground circuits within specification?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Repair power or ground circuit as necessary
A2: PERMANENT BLANK SCREEN TEST 2
CAUTION: Do not probe the coaxial cable connectors as they are prone to damage.
NOTE: A DC resistance measurement is not a reliable test method as the system operates at low voltage and high
frequency.
www.JagDocs.com
1 Check the integrity of the rear view camera coaxial cable connectors (at rear view camera, the touch
screen and in-line connectors)
2 Check the coaxial cable for excessive bending, clamping and insulation damage
Is the rear view camera coaxial cable disconnected or damaged?
Yes
Reconnect or install a new coaxial cable as necessary
No
Install a new rear view camera
PINPOINT TEST B : BLUE SCREEN TESTS
CONDITIONS
B1: BLUE SCREEN TEST 1
NOTE: A blue screen is the default display when the video in signal is absent.
1 Select reverse gear and observe the touch screen

Is the touch screen blue?
Yes
Check the integrity of the rear view camera coaxial cable connectors (at rear view camera, the touch
screen and in-line connectors), and retest
No
GO to Pinpoint Test A.
PINPOINT TEST C : ABSENT TRACKING LINES TESTS
CONDITIONS
C1: ABSENT TRACKING LINES TEST 1
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check the rear view camera LIN bus circuit for short circuit to
ground, short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Is a LIN bus circuit fault present?
Yes
Repair the LIN bus circuit as necessary
No
Install a new rear view camera
PINPOINT TEST D : FROZEN TRACKING LINES TESTS

D1: FROZEN TRACKING LINES TEST 1
NOTE: The vehicle may take 30 seconds (or 100m) to learn the steering centre position after starting the engine. This is
normal.
1 Start the engine

2 Wait at least 30 seconds
3 Select reverse gear
4 Turn the steering wheel and observe the touch screen
Do the tracking lines react to steering input?
Yes
No fault present
No
Potential LIN data gateway fault
DTC Index
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Parking Aid - Front Inner Parking Aid Sensor
Removal
1. Refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and

Installation).
2.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTION: If a new sensor is installed, make sure that the area

illustrated is the only area painted. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in the component malfunctioning.
NOTE: On vehicles that are equipped with black or unpainted

bumpers, the sensor(s) do not require painting.
www.JagDocs.com

Parking Aid - Front Outer Parking Aid Sensor
Removal
1. Refer to: Front Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and

Installation).
2.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. CAUTION: If a new sensor is installed, make sure that the area

illustrated is the only area painted. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in the component malfunctioning.
NOTE: On vehicles that are equipped with black or unpainted

bumpers, the sensor(s) do not require painting.
www.JagDocs.com

Parking Aid - Parking Aid Camera
Removal
1. Refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid Moulding (501-08 Exterior Trim and
2.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Parking Aid - Parking Aid Module
Removal

3.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
Installation
2. If a new component has been installed, configure using Jaguar approved

Parking Aid - Rear Parking Aid Sensor
Removal
1. Refer to: Rear Bumper Cover (501-19 Bumpers, Removal and

Installation).
2.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Battery and Charging System - General Information - Battery Care
Requirements
1. INTRODUCTION
This document defines the requirements for care and maintenance of batteries, and the standard of battery care at dealers and
retailers for new vehicles.
This applies to all types of 12 Volt Lead Acid Batteries used in Jaguar and Land Rover vehicles whether they are conventional
flooded technology or Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM – also known as Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA)) technology and also
applies to both Primary, Secondary and Auxiliary Batteries. AGM batteries offer improved resistance to cycling as seen in stop
start applications.
In order to prevent damage to the battery and ensure a satisfactory service life, all processes detailed within this document
must be rigorously adhered to.
It is equally important therefore to note the following key points:
All new vehicles leave the factory with either a transit relay installed and/or have a transit mode programmed into the
vehicle control modules. The transit relay must be removed and the transit mode disabled (where applicable) using an
approved diagnostic system, NOT MORE THAN 72 HOURS before the customer takes delivery.
The battery can be discharged by the following mechanisms:
- Self Discharge: - A lead acid battery will very slowly discharge itself due to its own internal chemical processes
whether it is connected to a vehicle or not.
- Quiescent Discharge: - The vehicle electrical systems when connected to the battery will draw charge from the
battery.
12 Volt Lead Acid Batteries rely on internal chemical processes to create a voltage and deliver current. These processes and
www.JagDocs.com
the internal chemical structure of the battery can be damaged if the battery is allowed to discharge over a number of weeks /
months, or is left in a discharged state for a lengthy time period.
On vehicles with conventional ignition keys, these must not be left in the ignition lock barrel when the transit relay
has been removed, otherwise quiescent current will increase and the battery will discharge more rapidly.
For keyless vehicles, the Smart Key must be stored at least 5m (16 ft) away from the vehicle when the vehicle is
parked or stored.
AGM Batteries are fully sealed and cannot have the electrolyte level topped up.
NOTE: Dealers and retailers involved in the storage / handling of vehicles and replacement batteries have a responsibility
to ensure that only a fully charged battery may be processed through the distribution selling chain.
2. GENERAL RULES FOR BATTERY CARE
2.1 Dealer Demonstration Vehicles
Vehicles used as dealer demonstrator(s), in a showroom, must be connected to a JLR approved showroom conditioner capable
of delivering 50 Amps. This will prevent the battery from being damaged.
2.2 Software Reflash, SDD work or Ignition On related workshop activities
Due to the high electrical current demand and high depth of discharge that can occur during vehicle software re-flash activities,
SDD work or ignition on (power mode 6) related work in the workshop, vehicles that are undergoing such activities MUST have a
JLR approved power supply capable of delivering 50 Amps or more.
2.3 Extended Vehicle Rework
For any extended vehicle rework that results in consuming vehicle power, either the battery should be disconnected or a JLR
approved power supply connected.
2.4 Jump Starting New vehicles before they have been delivered to the customer
It is the dealer / retailers responsibility to make sure the battery is not allowed to discharge by following the
instructions and processes defined in this manual.
However, if circumstances dictate that a new vehicle must be jump started due to a discharged battery whilst the
vehicle is in the dealer / retailers care, the battery on this vehicle must be replaced with a new one prior to delivery
to the customer at the dealer / retailers liability.
The vehicle should also undergo investigation as to why the battery became discharged.
Do not connect the jump starting cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery. Always connect to the recommended
earth point. As defined in the owners handbook or service documentation for that vehicle.
2.5 AGM Batteries

AGM batteries must not be charged above 14.8 Volts. Doing so will damage them.
AGM Batteries must be tested with a capable battery tester as detailed in the Equipment section (Section 5) of this
procedure.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should the battery be disconnected with the engine running because under these
conditions the generator can give a very high output voltage. This high transient voltage will damage the electronic
components in the vehicle. Loose or incomplete battery connections may also cause high transient voltage.
3. HEALTH AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGS:
BATTERY CELLS CONTAIN SULPHURIC ACID AND EXPLOSIVE MIXTURES OF HYDROGEN AND OXYGEN GASES. IT IS
THEREFORE ESSENTIAL THAT THE FOLLOWING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ARE OBSERVED.
Batteries emit highly explosive hydrogen at all times, particularly during charging. To prevent any potential form of
ignition occurring when working in the vicinity of a battery:
Do not smoke when working near batteries.

Avoid sparks, short circuits or other sources of ignition in the battery vicinity.
Switch off current before making or breaking electrical connections.
Ensure battery charging area is well ventilated.
Ensure the charger is switched off when: a) connecting to a battery; b) disconnecting from the battery.
Always disconnect the ground cable from the battery terminal first and reconnect it last.
Batteries contain poisonous and highly corrosive acid. To prevent personal injury, or damage to clothing or the vehicle,
the following working practices should be followed when topping up, checking electrolyte specific gravity, removal, refitting or
carrying batteries:
www.JagDocs.com
Always wear suitable protective clothing (an apron or similar), safety glasses, a face mask and suitable gloves.
If acid is spilled or splashed onto clothing or the body, it must be neutralized immediately and then rinsed with clean
water. A solution of baking soda or household ammonia and water may be used as a neutralizer.
In the event of contact with the skin, drench the affected area with water. In the case of contact with the eyes, bathe
the affected area with cool clean water for approximately 15 minutes and seek urgent medical attention.
If battery acid is spilled or splashed on any surface of a vehicle, it should be neutralized and rinsed with clean water.
Heat is generated when acid is mixed with water. If it becomes necessary to prepare electrolyte of a desired specific
gravity, SLOWLY pour the concentrated acid into water (not water into acid), adding small amounts of acid while
stirring. Allow the electrolyte to cool if noticeable heat develops. With the exception of lead or lead-lined containers,
always use non-metallic receptacles or funnels. Do not store acid in excessively warm locations or in direct sunlight.
Due to their hazardous contents, the disposal of batteries is strictly controlled. When a battery is scrapped, ensure it is
disposed of safely, complying with local environmental regulations. If in doubt, contact your local authority for advice on
disposal facilities.
4. BATTERY CARE REQUIREMENTS
4.1 RECEIPT OF A NEW VEHICLE
Within 24 hours of receipt of a new vehicle, a battery condition check must be carried out in accordance with the battery test
process utilizing a JLR approved tester as outlined in the Equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
NOTE: The Midtronics code from the tester must be recorded on the form.
Any actions must be carried out in accordance with the table shown in the Determining Battery Condition section (Section 6)
of this procedure. The details must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the new vehicle storage
document.
For additional information, refer to: New Vehicle Storage Form (100-11 Vehicle Transportation Aids and Vehicle Storage,
4.2 NEW VEHICLE STORAGE
If the vehicle is to be stored the transit relays MUST be refitted and / or the vehicle put into transport mode.
Transit relay removal / vehicle placed in normal mode should only be completed a maximum of 72 hours prior to handover to
customer
For vehicles without either a transit mode or transit relay the battery negative cable must be DISCONNECTED from the battery.
The battery must be tested and/or re-charged every 30 days and MUST be re-charged after every 90 day period.
document.
4.3 PDI / DELIVERY TO CUSTOMER
Before the vehicle is handed over to the customer and as part of the PDI, the condition of the battery needs to be confirmed.
The battery condition must be checked in accordance with the battery test process utilizing a JLR approved tester as outlined
in the Equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
document.
4.4 REPLACEMENT BATTERIES FOR SERVICE
All service replacement batteries must have the battery condition checked within 24 hours of receipt and controlled on a ‘First
In First Out’ basis to ensure batteries are not allowed to age unnecessarily.
For batteries in storage and not yet fitted to a vehicle, they must be stored in a dry environment, not in direct sunlight or
under any direct heat source. Any batteries exhibiting any forms of damage or corrosion must not be fitted to any vehicle. Any
batteries which are dropped must be scrapped, this applies even if no external damage is apparent.
The battery condition must be checked every 30 days in accordance with the battery test process utilizing a JLR approved
www.JagDocs.com
tester as outlined in the Equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
of this procedure.The details must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the new vehicle storage
document.
4.5 BATTERY MAINTENANCE
Any battery whether it is in a vehicle or a replacement part must be tested and/or re-charged every 30 days and MUST be
re-charged after every 90 day period.
4.6 BATTERY TEST PROCESS
It is recommended that this test is conducted at least 24 hours after the vehicle engine has been run or the battery charged to
avoid the need of surface charge removal. If time constraints make this unacceptable then the surface charge must be
removed.
Surface Charge Removal
A vehicle which has had its battery charged or been driven in a 24 hour period before the test, must have its surface charge
removed.
Turn on the ignition (power mode 6) but do not start the vehicle
Switch on the headlamps on high beam for a minimum 3 minutes
Switch off the headlamps
Wait a minimum of 5 minutes before recording test results for any battery measurements
Battery Test
The battery may be tested either on a bench or on the vehicle.
The battery condition must be checked in accordance with the battery test process utilizing a JLR approved tester as outlined
in the Equipment section (Section 5) of this procedure.
document.
CAUTION: DO NOT connect the tester to any other circuit or chassis point other than the battery negative terminal.
www.JagDocs.com
5. EQUIPMENT
All equipment used must be functionally capable of meeting the compliance requirements. Please refer to the approved
equipment document (JLR 000015).
In the case of batteries fitted to a new vehicle at the dealership, battery condition should be measured using the appropriate
hand-held Midtronics tester as follows:
Battery Type Battery Tester Battery Tester

Jaguar Land Rover
AGM & Flooded Midtronics EXP1080, GRX 3080 Midtronics EXP1080, GRX 3080
The test results must be recorded on the New Vehicle Storage Form which is part of the new vehicle storage document.
NOTE: All equipment must be calibrated
6 DETERMINING BATTERY CONDITION
TESTER RESULTS ACTION

GOOD BATTERY Return to service.
GOOD RE-CHARGE Fully charge battery and return to service.
CHARGE AND RE-TEST Fully charge battery. Remove surface charge. Re-test battery. If same result replace battery.
REPLACE BATTERY OR BAD Verify surface charge removed. Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test. If result repeats after
CELL BATTERY surface charge removal, replace battery. DO NOT RECHARGE.
UNABLE TO DO TEST Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test.
7 BATTERY CHARGING
www.JagDocs.com
It is essential that a suitably ventilated defined area exists in each dealership / retailer for battery charging.
CAUTION: It is very important that when charging batteries using the traction charger or other stand-alone chargers that
the charger is set for the correct type of battery before charging commences. If the wrong switch is selected the result would
be a battery that is not charged fully and / or overheating can occur. Follow the manufacturers operating instructions.
Batteries MUST BE tested and if necessary charged every 30 days and charged after 90 days irrespective of any test. It is
recommended that dealers / retailers always have fully charged batteries ready for use.
CAUTION: Do not charge AGM batteries with voltages over 14.8 Volts as this will damage the battery.
A designated controlled area must be allocated for scrap batteries and clearly controlled as such.
To bring a discharged but serviceable battery back to a fully charged condition proceed as follows:
Check and if necessary top-up the battery electrolyte level. (Flooded maintainable batteries only)
Charge the battery using a JLR approved charger as detailed in the approved equipment document following the
manufacturers operating instructions.
NOTE: When using the Midtronics Diagnostic Charger, automatic mode must always be used. After charging and analysis,
the charger may display ‘Top-Off Charging’, Hit STOP To End. Do not stop charging until the current falls to 5A or less,
otherwise the battery will not be fully charged.
Following charging, a post charge battery condition test must be carried out in accordance with the table shown in the
Determining Battery Condition section (Section 6) of this procedure.
document.
8 BATTERY REPLACEMENT
If it is determined that a battery requires replacement, always refer to the appropriate section of the workshop manual for
instructions on removing and installing the battery from the vehicle.
On in service vehicles fitted with a Battery Monitoring System (BMS), the BMS control module must be reset following the
installation of a new battery. The BMS control module reset procedure must be performed using an approved diagnostic
system.
9 CONFIRMING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL

WARNINGS:
BEFORE CHECKING AND TOPPING-UP THE BATTERY ELECTROLYTE, REFER TO THE HEALTH AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SECTION.
AGM TECHNOLOGY BATTERIES ARE FULLY SEALED FOR LIFE AND NO ATTEMPT SHOULD BE MADE TO CHECK OR TOP UP
THE ELECTROLYTE LEVEL.
On certain types of battery the electrolyte level may need to be checked.
Make sure the battery is of a type suitable for topping up. These types of batteries will have cell plugs visible on the
top face of the battery or a removable access panel to allow access to the cells.
On batteries with a clear or opaque case and level marks, check the electrolyte level by visual inspection of the
maximum level indicator mark on the battery casing indicating adequate level above the battery separators.
On batteries with black cases, remove the cell plugs or access panel and ensure the electrolyte level is level with the
indicator in the cell hole. A flashlight may be required to see the electrolyte level on this type of battery.
If the electrolyte level is low, top-up using distilled water.
NOTE: Maintenance free and Valve Regulated (AGM) batteries are sealed and therefore cannot be topped up.
CAUTION: DO NOT overfill.

www.JagDocs.com
Battery and Charging System - General Information - Quiescent Drain
VEHICLE QUIESCENT CURRENT TESTING

On vehicles fitted with a Battery Monitoring System (BMS), the diagnostic routine for quiescent drain testing in the approved
Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system should be utilized.
If a customer complains of a vehicle battery that discharges continuously or when left for a prolonged period of time, it is
recommended that a quiescent drain test is performed as described below.
The battery drain should be measured using the approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system or a Digital Multi-Meter
(DVOM). A procedure for quiescent drain measurement using the diagnostic system is available in the Diagnosis and Testing
section of the Workshop Manual. The vehicle should be in the locked/armed state (for example vehicle alarm fully armed), all
doors, engine and luggage compartment lids are open and latched (so as to appear closed from an electrical point of view).
The test should take place after the vehicle has entered shutdown mode. The time taken for this to occur after the ignition is
switched off varies according to model (Refer to the Topix On line resource for details).
When the vehicle is armed, the effect of the security system Light Emitting Diode (LED) flashing is to cause a pulsation in the
measured current drain. In this case, either the average current should be taken (using a Digital Multi- Meter (DVOM) with an
averaging system) or the current reading taken, ignoring the brief high current peaks.
EQUIPMENT
Approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system with current probeOR Digital Multi-Meter (DVOM) with current probe.
METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
Using an Approved Jaguar or Land Rover Diagnostic System.

www.JagDocs.com
1. Switch off all electrical loads and ensure that the ignition is off
2. Connect the current probe to the approved Jaguar or Land Rover diagnostic system
3. Calibrate the probe
4. Install a clamp around the battery lead/junction box lead
5. Go to the Quiescent Current Testing section in this procedure
Using a digital multimeter
Do not use an in-line DVOM to measure the quiescent drain on vehicles fitted with an electronic throttle (for example XK 2006
onwards). The current exceeds the maximum amount the fuse in the DVOM is capable of handling.
1. Switch off all electrical loads and ensure that the ignition is off
2. Connect the current probe to the digital multmeter
3. Calibrate the probe
4. Install a clamp around the battery lead/junction box lead
5. Go to the Quiescent Current Testing section in this procedure
QUIESCENT CURRENT TESTING

1. Switch ignition to ‘on’ or select ignition mode in keyless vehicles and switch to ‘off’ (do not crank)
2. Remove key from ignition switch (if equipped)
3. Open and latch all doors, hood and luggage compartment lid
4. Lock the vehicle using the remote function on the remote handset. (Single lock only to avoid volumetric alarm arming)
5. Remove any other potential electrical drains such as accessories plugged into accessory sockets
6. Record the amperage readings after the shutdown period referenced in the Topix on line resource for details. Note all
cars from 10MY onwards and XK from 07MY and XF from 08MY should be less than 30mA after 30 minutes
7. Record the final reading on the battery report form
The preferred method of testing following an excessive current consumption figure is to use a current probe around individual
junction box leads to the various suspected circuits to identify a potential cause. This is in preference to the old method of
removing fuses for the following reasons:
The drain may be caused by a module remaining active and preventing the quiescent drain from reducing to normal
levels
The drain may be caused by a relay winding that is activated. Pulling the fuse can allow this to ‘reset’ and the drain will
be lost and go un-diagnosed
QUIESCENT DRAIN - TYPICAL VALUES
NOTE: The quiescent drain after the initial shutdown period should not exceed the value shown in the table.
Jaguar Quiescent Drain Values

MODEL SHUT DOWN PERIOD (minutes) TYPICAL VALUES BATTERY DRAIN (mA)
XJS 3.2 60 <30
Sovereign 3.2 60 <37.3
MODEL SHUT DOWN PERIOD (minutes) TYPICAL VALUES BATTERY DRAIN (mA)
XJ6 4.0 60 <38.6
XJS 60 <43.9
XJ6 (X300) (1995MY) 60 <43
XJ8 (X300) 60 <30
XK8 (X100) 60 <30
S-Type (X200) 60 <30
X-Type (X400) 30 <30
XJ6 (X350) 40 <30
XJ8 (X350) 40 <30
XK (X150) - From 2006MY <20 (after lock/arm condition) ² <30
33 (unlocked) <30
XF (X250) - From 2008MY <20 (after lock/arm condition) ² <30
33 (unlocked) <30
XF (X250) - From 2013MY <10 (after lock/arm condition) ² <25
XF SportBrake (X250) - From 2013MY <10 (after lock/arm condition) ² <25
<20 (unlocked) <25
XJ (X351) - From 2010MY - 2012MY 10 (afterlock/arm condition) ² <20
30 (unlocked) <20
XJ (X351) - From 2013MY 10 (afterlock/arm condition) ² <20
<20 (unlocked) <20
F - Type (X152) - From 2013MY 10 (afterlock/arm condition) ² <20
<20 (unlocked) <20
NOTE:
1. The total current drain will be higher if certain approved accessories are fitted (for example: tracker, trailer module, etc.)
www.JagDocs.com
2. Applies to vehicles without Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Vehicle shut-down period with TPMS is approximately 15
minutes.
Battery and Charging System - General Information - Battery Report Form –
In Service Batteries Only
NOTE: Fields marked with * are mandatory and must be completed.
General Information
*Vehicle Identification Number (VIN): Vehicle Engine type:
Model:
*Mileage: *Repair -
Date:
Customer Questions
*1: What is the customer’s reason for dealer visit? (tick symptoms as Non crank Crank but non Warning Other:
appropriate) start message
*2: How long was the vehicle left prior to issue. *
*3: How was the car left (Locked/unlocked) *
*4: How did you access to the vehicle Key fob Manual key Handle pull
*5: Has the vehicle required assistance for battery issues previously? Yes No
*6: Is the vehicle used? (tick symptoms as appropriate) Daily Every other Weekly Less than
day weekly
*7: Average journey length *
*8: How many starts do you typically do in a day *
*9: Did the customer see any instrument pack warnings prior to the *
issue?
*10: Have any of the features been used Radio Power point CD DVD USB or IPOD TV Rear seat
www.JagDocs.com
without the engine running in the last 3 days accessory connection entertainment
(if fitted?)
11: Customer comments:- Please add any additional comments that *
are relevant.
Diagnostics (Battery Testing) - - - -
1: Loose battery clamps Yes * No *
2: Loose hold down clamps Yes * No *
3: Corroded terminal posts Yes * No *
4: Physical damage/leaks Yes No *
5: Low electrolyte (Flooded batteries only) Yes * No *
6: Battery Date Code *
7: FEAD belt tension OK * Not OK *
8: Quiescent Drain mA *
9: Vent tube correctly installed Yes * No *
10: Number of Times Battery Charged: *
10: Vent tube correctly installed Yes No
11: Remove the Surface (414-00 battery care requirements) Yes * No *
12: Battery voltage *
13: Midtronics test code before charging (EXP-1080) *
13a: If Midtronics indicates that the battery needs re-charging, charge *
the battery following instructions on the recommended battery charger
13b: Midtronics test code after charge *
13c: Midtronics test code result after charge *
13d: If "good and re-charge" charge the battery following instructions *
on the recommended battery charger
13e: If "charge and re-test" for both before and after the charge *
renew the battery
13f: Only renew the battery if "renew battery", "bad cell" or charge *
and re-test has been displayed twice.
Technician Comments:- Please add any additional comments that are relevant.
*
*
*
*
*
www.JagDocs.com
Battery and Charging System - General Information - Charging System

REFER to: Battery (414-01, Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
Battery, Mounting and Cables -
Battery Specification
Vehicle Specification
Europe
Vehicles fitted without electrical Vehicles fitted with electrical Rest of
Engine Specification optional extras optional extras world
Vehicles fitted with 3.0L diesel 90 Ahr 90 Ahr 90
engine Ahr
Vehicles fitted with 3.0L petrol 80 Ahr 90 Ahr 90
engine Ahr
Vehicles fitted with 4.2L petrol 90 Ahr 90 Ahr 90
engine Ahr
Battery cold cranking Specification
Item Specification
90 Ahr 800 Amps
80 Ahr 700 Amps
Battery positive cable to rear junction box retaining nut 12 9 -
Battery monitoring system retaining nut to battery positive terminal 5 - 44
Battery ground cable to body retaining bolt 12 9 -
Battery tray 10 - 89
Battery cable terminal 6 - 53
Battery clamp bolt 8 - 71
www.JagDocs.com
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery and Cables - Component Location
COMPONENT LOCATION - SINGLE BATTERY VEHICLES

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
5 BMS (battery monitoring system)
6 Battery
8 Generator
COMPONENT LOCATION - DUAL BATTERY VEHICLES
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 CJB Generator
2 BJB Starter motor
3 GWM (gateway module)
4 DBM (dual battery module)
5 RJB Duel battery module
6 Battery to BJB terminal
7 BMS (battery monitoring system) Duel battery fuse box
8 Primary battery
9 Transit relay
10 Secondary battery
11 DBJB (dual battery junction box)
12 ECM
13 Generator
14 EJB
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery and Cables - Overview
OVERVIEW
Single Battery Vehicles
Mounted on the battery negative terminal is a BMS (battery monitoring system) module. The BMS module is integral with the
battery negative cable and is controlled by the ECM (engine control module).
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the battery monitoring system module, always use a suitable body ground point rather than
the battery negative terminal when connecting a slave power supply to the vehicle.
If a new battery is fitted to the vehicle, the BMS module will require re-calibrating using the Jaguar approved diagnostic
system.
Fitted on the battery positive terminal is a transit relay. The transit relay must be removed from the vehicle during the
Pre-Delivery Inspection (PDI). For additional information, refer to the PDI Manual.
The vehicle battery provides power to the BJB (battery junction box). The BJB contains 3 megafuses, delivering power to the
RJB (rear junction box), the CJB (central junction box) and the EJB (engine junction box). In addition to containing fuses and
relays, the RJB and RJB contain software to control a number of vehicle systems. These functions are covered in the
appropriate sections of this manual.
Dual Battery System Vehicles - TD42.2L Engine Variants Only
Two batteries are fitted to accommodate the dual battery system used for the Stop/Start system.
www.JagDocs.com
A primary battery is located in the luggage compartment floor in a plastic molded tray and secured with a metal rod. The
secondary battery is located in the DBJB (dual battery junction box).
The primary battery is a 90Ahr, 850A CCA AGM Battery.

The secondary battery is a 14Ahr, 200A CCA Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) Battery.
A BMS (battery monitoring system) control module is mounted on the primary battery negative terminal. The BMS control
module is integral with the battery negative cable and is controlled by the GWM (gateway module).
CAUTION: To avoid damaging the BMS control module, always use the ground (negative (-)) terminal stud point on the
right side top mount. Never connect directly to the primary battery negative terminal when connecting a slave power supply to
the vehicle, the BMS control module can be damaged.
If a new primary battery is fitted to the vehicle, the BMS control module will require re-calibrating using a Jaguar approved
diagnostic system.
When the vehicle leaves the factory, a transit relay is fitted to the battery positive terminal. The transit relay is connected to
the CJB which limits the electrical functions to essential items only, to reduce loads on the primary battery. The transit relay
must be removed from the vehicle during the PDI (Pre-Delivery Inspection). For additional information, refer to the PDI.
The primary battery provides power to the BJB. The BJB contains three megafuses, delivering power to the RJB, the EJB and
the starter motor and generator. In addition to containing fuses and relays, the RJB and CJB contain software to control a
number of vehicle systems. These functions are covered in the appropriate sections of this manual.
A jump start terminal is located adjacent to the EJB. A cover protects the terminal when not in use. If jump starting is
required, the cover must be removed and the positive (+) jump lead attached securely. The negative (-) jump lead is attached
to a stud located on the right side top mount in the engine compartment. The cover must be fitted to the positive terminal
when not in use.
Dual Battery System
The dual battery system is used on vehicles with the stop/start system. The dual battery system prevents the vehicle
electrical systems being subjected to undesirably low voltages during repeated engine restarts. If the electrical systems are
subject to low voltages the customer may notice degraded performance of components and systems and incorrect fault DTC
(diagnostic trouble code)'s may be stored.
The dual battery system isolates all electrical components and systems sensitive to low supply voltage from the primary
battery while an engine start is in progress, and supplies them from the secondary battery. Without the dual battery system,
the electrical power required by the TSS (Tandem Solenoid Starter) motor to crank the engine for each start would cause a
voltage drop across the entire vehicle electrical network, and cause control modules to function incorrectly and in some cases
reset and/or record DTC's.
If the dual battery system is unable to prevent electrical supplies to the vehicle systems being subjected to low voltage levels
during engine stop/start operations, due to the condition of the primary and/or secondary batteries or a system fault, the
stop/start feature is disabled.
www.JagDocs.com
The dual battery system comprises the following components:
Dual Battery Module (DBM).
Dual Battery Junction Box (DBJB).
Gateway Module (GWM).
Primary battery.
Secondary battery.
The GWM hosts most of the software required to control the dual battery system and components. The GWM monitors the
components and can store fault related DTC's.
The GWM also controls the charging system software in conjunction with the ECM, RJB, CJB and ABS (anti-lock brake system)
control module via the high speed and medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus. The GWM software will monitor the
status of the stop/start system and determine when a stop/start event can occur. It can also intervene to maintain vehicle
systems by keeping the engine running or initiating a restart due to, for example, climate control system requirements or
request for restart from the ECM. A brake pressure signal is received from the ABS control module which will indicate to the
GWM that an engine restart is required from driver operation of the foot brake.
The GWM contains the intelligent power management system and the BMS software. Monitoring of the primary battery
condition for stop/start is controlled by the GWM and the BMS control module.
www.JagDocs.com
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery and Cables - System Operation and
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired, D = High speed CAN (Controller Area Network) bus, N = Medium speed CAN bus, O = LIN (Local
Interconnect Network) bus.
CONTROL DIAGRAM - SINGLE BATTERY VEHICLES

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery Monitoring System (BMS) control module
2 Battery
3 Battery junction box (BJB)
4 Generator
6 Instrument Cluster
7 Rear Junction Box (RJB)
CONTROL DIAGRAM - DUAL BATTERY SYSTEM VEHICLES
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery Monitoring System (BMS) control module
2 Tandem Solenoid Starter (TSS) motor
3 Generator
4 Engine Junction Box (EJB)
5 Engine Control Module (ECM)
6 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) control module
7 Transmission Control Module (TCM)
8 Central Junction Box (CJB)
9 Gateway Module (GWM)
10 Dual Battery Module (DBM)
11 Secondary battery
12 Dual Battery Junction Box (DBJB)
13 Rear Junction Box (RJB)
14 Megafuse
15 Battery Junction box (BJB)
16 Primary battery
System Operation
BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM - TD4 2.2L DIESEL VEHICLES ONLY
Periodically the battery monitoring system module will instigate a self-calibration routine. To self calibrate, the battery
monitoring system first charges the battery to its full condition.
NOTE: If the vehicle is only driven for short periods the charging process could take a number of days to complete.
Once the battery is fully charged, the battery monitoring system will discharge the battery to approximately 75% of its full
state of charge, but never lower than 12.2 V. The time taken to complete this part of the routine is dependent on the electrical
load on the vehicle.
When the second part of the routine has been successfully completed, the battery monitoring system will return the battery to
its optimum level of charge. The optimum level of charge will be between 12.6 V and 15 V, depending on battery condition,
temperature and loading.
The battery monitoring system module also monitors the battery condition with the engine switched off. If a low voltage
condition is detected the module can request the infotainment system is switched off to protect battery voltage. Once the
infotainment system has been switched off, the vehicle must be run for at least 5 minutes to charge the battery before the
www.JagDocs.com
infotainment system can be operated with the engine switched off.
BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM - SINGLE AND DUAL BATTERY SYSTEM VEHICLES

When the ignition is off (power mode 0), the BMS control module records the primary battery state of charge and begins to
monitor the battery condition from this point.
If the battery state of charge falls by 7%, the BMS control module will monitor the primary battery for 5 minutes. If after the 5
minute monitoring period, the primary battery charge has continued to fall due to the quiescent drain current being too high,
the BMS control module will determine that some control modules are still 'awake'. The BMS control module sends a shutdown
message on the LIN (local interconnect network) bus to the GWM (Gateway Module). The GWM sends a CAN (controller area
network) bus message on both the medium and high speed networks to all control modules, requesting them to shutdown.
The BMS control module will monitor the primary battery state of charge for a further 5 minutes and determine if the primary
battery state of charge is still dropping. If a quiescent drain current continues, the primary battery state of charge will
continue to drop. If the state of charge falls to 12% of the initial monitoring value, the BMS control module determines that
one or more control modules are still awake and a failure to respond to the shutdown request may indicate an error state
within the control module(s).
BMS Low Battery Warning and Energy Management Messages
The BMS continuously monitors the condition of the primary vehicle battery. If excessive battery discharge occurs, the system
will begin to shut down non-essential electrical systems in order to protect the battery.
If the BMS calculates that battery condition is not within set parameters, there are 3 messages that can be displayed, 2 on the
touch screen and 1 on the message center. These inform the user that the battery is either at a low level of charge or the
engine-off power consumption limit has been exceeded.
Low Battery - Please switch engine on or system will shutdown in 3 minutes: is displayed as a Warning on the
touch screen if the engine is not running. This indicates that the battery has fallen below a predefined threshold. As
soon as the battery is charged back above this threshold then the message will be removed.
Low Battery - Please start your engine is displayed on the message center if the engine is not running. This indicates
that the battery has fallen below a predefined threshold. As soon as the battery is charged back above this threshold
then the message will be removed or it can be manually removed by pressing 'OK'.
System will shut down in 3 minutes: is displayed as an Energy management on the touch screen if the engine is not
running, and system features are causing excessive battery discharge. After 3 minutes the BMS will begin shutting
down vehicle systems. Normal system operation will resume when the engine is started.
This is based on a percentage of battery capacity available for the customer to use with the engine off. The percentage can
change based upon several factors.
Once triggered, the resetting of this message will not occur until the vehicle is driven for 10 minutes with the engine running
(to allow the battery to recoup any lost charge). However, if the engine is run for less than 10 minutes, the message will only
be displayed after an additional 5 minutes with the ignition on but engine off.
BMS Control Module Self Calibration
Periodically the BMS control module will instigate a self-calibration routine. To self calibrate, the battery monitoring system
first charges the battery to its full condition.
NOTE: If the vehicle is only driven for short periods the charging process could take a number of days to complete.
Once the battery is fully charged, the BMS control module will discharge the battery to approximately 75% of its full state of
charge, but never lower than 12.2 V. The time taken to complete this part of the routine is dependent on the electrical load on
the vehicle.
When the second part of the routine has been successfully completed, the BMS control module will return the battery to its
optimum level of charge. The optimum level of charge will be between 12.6 V and 15 V, depending on battery condition,
temperature and loading.
The BMS control module also monitors the primary battery condition with the engine switched off. If a low voltage condition is
detected the BMS control module can request the infotainment system is switched off to protect battery voltage.
DUAL BATTERY SYSTEM - DUAL BATTERY SYSTEM VEHICLES ONLY

The dual battery system prevents electrical loads on the vehicle being subjected to low voltage levels during an ECO
(stop/start system) engine start. Low voltage can occur due to the power demand of the TSS (Tandem Solenoid Starter) motor
and could result in degraded performance of components and/or system control modules. The GWM contains the software to
control the dual battery system and electrical load management system to ensure that ECO engine starts do not affect other
vehicle systems.
The dual battery system isolates all power supply sensitive electrical components which may be affected by low voltage from
the primary battery due TSS motor operation, and supplies them with power from the secondary battery when an engine start
is in progress.
The DBJB (Dual Battery Junction Box) contains two contactors, which operate to change the power supply into two separate
circuits when an ECO engine start is required. Sensitive electrical components are supplied from the secondary battery. The
primary battery power is used exclusively to supply the TSS motor and maintain essential power loads to the engine
management system required for engine starting. The contactors are operated by the DBM (Dual Battery Module) on receipt of
www.JagDocs.com
LIN bus information from the GWM.
Dual Battery System - Normal State (Engine Running)
Item Description
2 Primary battery
3 Power and engine management system loads
www.JagDocs.com
4 Field Effect Transistor (FET)
5 Contactor 1 - closed
6 Contactor 2 - open
7 Secondary battery
8 Sensitive loads
9 Generator
NOTE: A = Primary battery supply
When the engine is running, the electrical systems are powered from the primary battery and the generator. The GWM and the
DBM communicate via the LIN bus and the DBM controls the DBJB contactors to isolate the secondary battery from the system
by opening its contactor.
The GWM monitors the state of charge of both the primary and secondary batteries to ensure that sufficient voltage is
available for the next ECO engine start. The GWM can apply charging to the secondary battery via the DBM and the DBJB if
required.
Dual Battery system - ECO Engine Stop/Start State

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
2 Primary battery
3 Power and engine management system loads
4 Field Effect Transistor (FET)
5 Contactor 1 - open
6 Contactor 2 - closed
7 Secondary battery
8 Sensitive loads
9 Generator
NOTE: A = Primary battery supply, B = Secondary battery supply
When an ECO engine start is required, the DBJB must change the battery supply via the two contactors before the TSS motor
is operated to crank the engine. The GWM is connected to the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) control module via the high speed
CAN bus. With the vehicle stationary and the engine off after an ECO engine stop, when the driver releases the brake pedal
the ABS control module senses the reduction in brake pressure. This change of brake pressure state is sent as a high speed
CAN message which is received by the GWM and the ECM. The GWM reacts within 105ms to instruct the DBM via the LIN bus
to operate the two contactors in the DBJB to supply the sensitive loads from the secondary battery and supply the TSS motor
direct from the primary battery.
When the engine is running and the generator is supplying power to the vehicle systems, the GWM again instructs the DBM to
operate the two contactors in the DBJB to supply all vehicle systems from the primary battery and the generator and to isolate
the secondary battery.
Secondary Battery Charging
The DBM also controls the charging of the secondary battery. The GWM contains electrical load management software and
monitors both batteries for their state of charge. The primary battery is monitored by the BMS control module which is
connected to the DBM via the LIN bus. The DBM communicates the primary battery condition to the GWM via a LIN bus
connection. The GWM sends a signal to the DBM via the LIN bus to instruct it to apply charging from the generator to the
secondary battery when required. The contactor 2 is closed by the DBJB to complete the secondary battery circuit, and the
generator output is applied to the secondary battery to charge it.
The generator output is controlled by the GWM which monitors and controls the electrical load management system. The
generator is connected to the GWM by a LIN bus allowing the GWM to control the output of the generator to maintain electrical
system load requirements and battery charging.
Electrical Load Management
The electrical load management is controlled by the GWM and the BMS control module.
The GWM will monitor the vehicle system power loads before and during an ECO engine stop.
Before an ECO engine stop, the GWM will transmit a signal to system control modules on the CAN bus to request a power save
on all electrical loads and set a minimum electrical value override. The GWM monitors the vehicle electrical loads and will
www.JagDocs.com
inhibit a ECO engine stop until the load current is at a value low enough to be supported by the secondary battery.
If the electrical loads cannot be reduced sufficiently, the GWM will inhibit the ECO engine stop.
When the engine is stopped after an ECO engine stop, the GWM will continue to monitor the primary battery state of charge.
If the primary or secondary battery voltage falls below 11.0V, a level which will result in degraded starting performance or
possible primary battery damage, the GWM will initiate an engine start.
System Inhibits
The ECO stop/start system is inhibited if the dual battery system is not be capable of preventing electrical loads on the
vehicle being subject to unacceptably low voltage levels during ECO stop/start operations due to a fault.
ECO stop/start inhibit monitoring of the primary battery is performed by the BMS control module. If the primary battery voltage
is too low to support an ECO stop/start, then the BMS control module will send a message to the GWM on the LIN bus to
suspend ECO stop/start.
The GWM monitors the secondary battery and the dual battery system components. Any fault found will cause the GWM to
inhibit ECO stop/start and the GWM will record a DTC (diagnostic trouble code).
Fault Diagnosis
The GWM performs passive and active diagnostics on the dual battery system to determine the status of the system
components.
Passive diagnostics can detect faults in the DBJB and can check for stuck open or closed contactors and failure of DBM
contactor command signals.
Active diagnostics is a routine to test the capability of the contactors to respond to open or close command signals sent from
the GWM to the DBM. This routine also checks the FET's (Field Effect Transistors) activate as required. (Refer to Dual Battery
Junction Box below for description of FET operation)
The GWM will also check the dual battery system components for faults in a controlled environment when the generator is
providing a charging output. This will ensure that the detection of a fault will not result in sensitive electrical loads being
subjected to low voltage which may occur during an ECO stop/start with a fault present.
The GWM will illuminate the charge warning indicator in the instrument cluster if fault is detected in the dual battery system
which will result in a degraded power supply.
If a fault is detected the GWM transmits a CAN message to inhibit ECO stop/start operation. In some cases it will record a
DTC, display a warning message in instrument cluster and also illuminate charge warning indicator.
PRIMARY BATTERY - ALL VEHICLES
The primary battery is located in a plastic tray under the luggage compartment floor in the right side of the luggage
compartment, adjacent to the spare wheel. The battery is vented via a tube which is connected with a T piece to the vent from
the secondary battery (if fitted) and passes through a grommet in the floorpan.
On new vehicles the primary battery positive terminal is fitted with a transit relay. The transit relay must removed using the
correct process detailed in the Pre Delivery Inspection (PDI) manual.
The battery negative terminal is fitted with a BMS control module. The control module is integral with the battery negative
cable and communicates with the GWM via a LIN bus connection. The battery condition information is passed to the GWM
which controls the generator output accordingly.
CAUTION: To avoid damage to the BMS control module, always use the body ground point in the engine compartment and
not the battery negative terminal when connecting a slave power supply.
Failure to use the recommended ground point will lead to the setting of a DTC. Incorrect information of battery condition will
be retained by the BMS control module due to the unmonitored current flow into the battery. The system will however,
recognize and compensate for the change in battery status after a period of time.
If a new battery is fitted, the BMS control module will require re-calibration using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system.
Replacement of the BMS control module requires no action as the control module will re-calibrate automatically.
SECONDARY BATTERY - DUAL BATTERY VEHICLES ONLY

The secondary battery is located in a tray on the next of the primary battery and is secured to the DBJB with a bracket. The
battery negative (-) terminal is connected via a cable to the vehicle body. The positive (+) terminal is connected by a cable to
the DBJB. The battery is vented via a tube which is connected with a T piece to the vent from the primary battery and passes
through a grommet in the floorpan.
The state of charge of the secondary battery is monitored by the Gateway Module (GWM).
BATTERY MONITORING SYSTEM (BMS)

www.JagDocs.com
The BMS (battery monitoring system) control module is located on the primary battery negative (-) terminal. The module is
located on the battery post and is clamped to the post with a bolt and nut.
The primary battery negative ground cable is connected to the BMS control module and is attached to a ground stud on the
vehicle body.
The BMS control module is connected into the vehicle wiring harness via a multiplug. The BMS control module receives a 12V
power supply direct from the primary battery positive terminal. A LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection provides
communication between the BMS control module and the ECM for control and monitoring of the primary battery current drain
and state of charge.
The BMS control module measures battery current and voltage, which it communicates to ECM.
CAUTION: Due to the self-calibration routine, it is recommended that all power supply diagnostic testing is carried out
using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system rather than a digital multimeter.
The BMS control module is able to generate DTC (diagnostic trouble code)'s to help diagnose primary battery or generator
power supply issues. These DTC's can be read using the Jaguar approved diagnostic system. The Jaguar approved diagnostic
system can also be used to implement a primary battery and generator self test routine. For additional information, refer to
the Diagnosis and Testing section of the workshop manual.
If a fault is detected, the GWM (gateway module) will override the BMS control module.
The BMS control module DTC's can be used to help diagnose battery or generator power supply faults. The DTC's are stored in
GWM. The Jaguar approved diagnostic system has a process for an automated power supply diagnostic procedure. The
procedure provides a menu driven process to locate a fault in a logical sequence. The procedure uses the capability of the BMS
control module and generator LIN bus controlled functions to provide current flow information and will detect if the BMS control
module or generator are functioning correctly.
GATEWAY MODULE (GWM)
The GWM (gateway module) is located at the rear of the right wheel arch in the luggage compartment, adjacent to the DBM
(dual battery module). The GWM is attached to a bracket, which is attached to a second bracket secured to the vehicle body.
The GWM contains software to control the following functions:
• Determine condition of primary and secondary batteries

• Control the output from the generator using load management software
• Controls ECO stop/start using power management to inhibit unnecessary electrical loads
• Control the DBJB (dual battery junction box) via the DBM to enable the switching of the contactors.
The GWM communicates with other system modules on the high speed and medium speed CAN (controller area network)
www.JagDocs.com
buses.
The GWM communicates with the BMS (battery monitoring system) control module and the DBM via a LIN bus.
DUAL BATTERY MODULE (DBM)
The DBM (dual battery module) is located at the rear of the right wheel arch in the luggage compartment, adjacent to the
GWM (gateway module) and the RJB (rear junction box). The DBM is attached to a bracket, which is attached to a second
bracket secured to the vehicle body.
The DBM is connected by two hardwired connections to the DBJB (dual battery junction box). The DBM uses these two
connections to apply battery voltage to the contactor coils in the DBJB. A LIN bus connection from the GWM passes contactor
operation signals to the DBM which operates the contactors as applicable.
The GWM will also instruct the DBM to apply charging to the secondary battery via a LIN bus message. The GWM instructs the
DBM of the charging current required for the secondary battery and the DBM applies the requested stabilized current to the
secondary battery via a dedicated connection direct to the secondary battery.
The DBM diagnoses the coils of the contactors and will report a fault via the LIN bus to the GWM.
The DBM receives a fused power supply from the RJB.

DUAL BATTERY JUNCTION BOX (DBJB)
The DBJB (dual battery junction box) is located adjacent to the primary battery. The DBJB houses two contactors which are
controlled by the DBM (dual battery module) and the GWM (gateway module) for switching power supplies during ECO
stop/starts and also for charging the secondary battery.
FET's (field effect transistor's) are also located in the DBJB. The FET's are connected in parallel with contactor 1 and allow the
primary battery power to flow to the sensitive loads during the contactor switching process to ensure there is no interruption in
power supply to the sensitive loads. The FET's also act as a secondary path to allow power to be supplied to the sensitive
loads should a fault occur and the contactor 1 becomes stuck open. The FET's will allow a current of up to 200A to flow through
them.
The DBJB receives a battery supply direct from the primary battery to contactor 1 and a battery supply from the secondary
battery to contactor 2. Two connections from the DBM are used for contactor coil control. A third connection from the DBM
applies a stabilized voltage to the secondary battery for charging when requested by the GWM.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery
For a detailed description of the battery system and operation, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section of the
workshop manual. REFER to: Battery and Cables (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Description and Operation).
NOTES:
read by the manufacturer-approved diagnostic system).
into account.
www.JagDocs.com
Visual Inspection
Generator Generator
Drive belt Battery
Drive belt tensioner Battery connections
Generator pulley Starter motor
Check the security of the generator fixings Harnesses and connectors
Fuses
Charge warning lamp function
the next step.
Symptom Chart
Battery power to vehicle High resistance between battery terminals and GO to Pinpoint Test
interrupted clamps A.
Midtronics EXP-1080 User Guide

Carry out the following: -
Surface Voltage Removal Process
A vehicle which has had its battery charged or been driven in a 24 hour period before the test, must have its surface charge
removed
1. Turn on the ignition but do not start the vehicle
2. Switch on the headlamps on high beam for a minimum 3 minutes
3. Switch off the headlamps
4. Wait a minimum of 5 minutes before recording test results for any battery measurements
PINPOINT TEST A : VOLTAGE DROP

A1: GROUND CIRCUIT
NOTE: This test checks for high resistance between the battery terminal and the battery clamp
1 Start the engine, turn on the following:
(1) ) Air conditioning
(2) ) Blower fan on full speed
(3) Headlights on main beam
(4) Heated screen - rear
(5) Heated screen - front (if installed)
(6) Heated seats (if installed)

www.JagDocs.com
2 Connect the multimeter between the battery negative terminal

and the battery clamp as shown in picture below (do not
disconnect the battery at this stage)
3 Set the multimeter to read DC voltage and record the reading
Is reading equal to or below 0.1 volts?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Switch all electrical loads and engine off, return the vehicle to
an ignition off condition. Disconnect the battery negative
clamp, clean clamp and terminal then reconnect and repeat test
GO to A1.
A2: POWER CIRCUIT
NOTE: This test checks for high resistance between the battery terminal and the battery clamp
1 Start the engine, turn on the following:
(1) ) Air conditioning
(2) ) Blower fan on full speed
(3) Headlights on main beam
(4) Heated screen - rear
(5) Heated screen - front (if installed)
(6) Heated seats (if installed)
2 Connect the multimeter between the battery positive terminal

and the battery clamp as shown in picture below (do not
disconnect the battery at this stage)
3 Set the multimeter to read DC voltage and record the reading
Is reading equal to or below 0.1 volts?
Yes
Carry out midtronics battery test procedure
No
Switch all electrical loads and engine off, return the vehicle to
an ignition off condition. Disconnect the battery power clamp,
clean clamp and terminal then reconnect and repeat test GO to
A2.
Reference Description
1 LCD screen with main menu
2 Control panel (key board and power button)
3 Positive and negative fly leads
4 Fly leads connection
5 Temperature sensor
6 Infra-red sensor (data transfer for printer)
7 Amp hour
8 Battery rating (CCA)
9 Rating units
10 Battery type
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: Flooded batteries does not have AGM on the label
The following steps must be carried out to ensure correct operation of the EXP-1080 during the battery test procedure
Checks Action
Battery fluid leakage, check for battery fluid leaks or damage
to the battery casing NOTE: If visible damage to the case is evident do not
return battery under warranty
Replace the battery if there is any battery fluid leaks evident

Battery vent pipe routing Check for routing, ensure there are no kinks
www.JagDocs.com
EXP-1080 fly lead, condition of clamps Clean or replace as required

EXP-1080 fly lead connection Confirm secure connection
NOTE: The Midtronics EXP-1080 is suitable for testing flooded and absorbed glass mat (AGM) type batteries including
Primary and Secondary batteries
Midtronics Battery Test Procedure
This midtronics battery test procedure will confirm the serviceability of the battery
1. Connect the fly-lead to the midtronics EXP-1080

2. Connect the fly-leads to the battery terminals
- Black lead to negative terminal
- Red lead to positive terminal
- Confirm the connections are secure
3. The EXP-1080 will power on automatically when connected to a battery, screen below is displayed
NOTE: MAIN MENU SCREEN
4. Main Menu. Select Battery test and press SELECT

NOTE: BATTERY LOCATION
www.JagDocs.com
5. Battery Location
Select Next
6. VIN. When IN VEHICLE selected, enter the last six of the VIN using the key pad
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: BATTERY RATING
7. Battery Type. Select the correct battery type (Regular or AGM)
NOTE: ALL AGM batteries are marked (Refer to battery label) Flooded batteries have no reference to being Flooded.
Select Next
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: BATTERY TYPE
8. Battery Units. Select the correct battery rating from the battery label in brackets (number 9). Scroll using the arrow
on the Midtronics panel and select Next
NOTE: UNITS
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: BATTERY RATING
9. BATTERY RATING. Scroll using the arrow keys on the midtronics panel, select the correct CCA rating (For CCA refer
to battery label)
Select Next
NOTES:
TEMPERATURE
Ensure that the temperature sensor does not touch any part of the battery or vehicle, this will cause damage not be
covered under the midtronics warranty and will require the unit to be returned to a service center
10. Temperature. Aim the temperature sensor towards the battery casing (Maintain distance of 5cm)
Select Next
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: TESTING
11. Testing. The screen displays clock hand's rotating, the EXP-1080 will automatically advance when test has
completed
NOTES:
SURFACE CHARGE
If there is no surface charge this step will not show. Go to next step
11a. Surface Charge. This next step is an additional surface charge test required if the voltage is above 12.4v with a
low CCA measured. Ensure the ignition state is on. Switch on the headlights (high beam) until EXP-1080 shows Turn
off headlights then return ignition state to off
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
BATTERY CHARGE
If the state of charge is sufficient this step will not show. Go to next step
11b. Battery Charge. Select Before Charging if battery has not been on a recommended mains charger for the
recommended time shown on the results screen
Select After Charging if battery has been on a recommended mains charger for the recommended time shown on the
results screen
NOTE: For a warranty claim you must supply both before and after test codes in the technical comments box when
submitting the claim
NOTE: DEEP SCAN TECHNOLOGY
This may not pop up on the screen and is automated program within the unit
NOTE: This test is automated and will show if required. Go to next step
12. Testing. The EXP-1080 will carry out the deep scan test, then automatically advance when test has completed
Number Description
1 Battery test result
2 CCA (Measured capacity rating)
3 Voltage
4 CCA (Manually entered)
5 Temperature
6 State Of Charge (SOC)
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: RESULTS
Test Result Action

GOOD BATTERY Test complete no action required
CHARGE AND RE-TEST Charge battery using a recommended mains charger (minimum 50 amp) until charging complete.
Retest. If the result is the same replace battery
REPLACE BATTERY / BAD Replace battery. Do Not Recharge
CELL BATTERY
UNABLE TO COMPLETE TEST Disconnect battery from vehicle and re-test
www.JagDocs.com
NOTES:
TEST CODE
Battery test code, must be given if a battery, starter motor or generator is exchanged under warranty
www.JagDocs.com
12b. If test result equals "Charge and Re-test" scroll down using the arrow keys to Time To Charge screen and follow
the 50AMP charge time for all vehicles apart from Defender which can be charged with a 25Amp charger
Results. From the result display use the arrow keys on the control panel to view the test code
The test code must be quoted with every battery claim under warranty
Flooded Battery Care Point
If the vehicle is equipped with a flooded battery, ensure the replacement battery is a flooded battery of the same specification
(cold cranking amperage (CCA) / amp hour rating (Ah)) as the original battery
Under no circumstances should you fit a flooded battery to a vehicle that originally had an AGM battery, unless formally
instructed by Jaguar/Land Rover
AGM Battery Care Point
If the vehicle is equipped with an absorbed glass mat (AGM) battery, ensure the replacement battery is a AGM battery of the
same specification (cold cranking amperage (CCA) / amp hour rating (Ah)) as the original battery, unless formally instructed by
Jaguar/Land Rover
DTC Index
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery Disconnect and Connect
General Procedures
Disconnect
1. Refer to: Battery and Battery Charging Health and Safety Precautions
(100-00 General Information, Description and Operation).
2. Obtain and record the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4. NOTE: Where fitted.
5. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the wiring

harness.
6.
7. CAUTION: Make sure that the battery negative cable

does not move when detaching the negative terminal from
the battery.
www.JagDocs.com
Connect

to the body retaining bolt is not loose and fully tightened.
Torque: 9 Nm
2. Torque: 6 Nm
3.
www.JagDocs.com
4. NOTE: Make sure that both the positive and negative battery
terminals are correctly located.

component.
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, reset the battery

monitoring system.
7. Refer to: Door Window Motor Initialization (501-11 Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms, General Procedures).
www.JagDocs.com
8. Enter the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
9. Reset the clock to the correct time.
10. Start the engine and allow to idle until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
www.JagDocs.com
Battery, Mounting and Cables - Battery
Removal
1. Obtain and record the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
2.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
5. Torque: 6 Nm

does not move when detaching the negative terminal from
the battery.
www.JagDocs.com
7. Torque: 6 Nm
8.
9. Torque: 13 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
10.
Installation

to the body retaining bolt is not loose and fully tightened.
Torque: 9 Nm
2. NOTE: Make sure that both the positive and negative battery
terminals are correctly located.
www.JagDocs.com

component.
Using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment, reset the battery

monitoring system.
4. Refer to: Door Window Motor Initialization (501-11 Glass, Frames and
Mechanisms, General Procedures).
5. Enter the audio unit preset radio frequencies.
6. Reset the clock to the correct time.
7. Start the engine and allow to idle until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.

Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel -

Generator retaining bolts 47 35 -
Battery positive cable retaining nut 12 9 -
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Generator - Component
Location
www.JagDocs.com
Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Generator - Overview
OVERVIEW
The charging system consists of a 180 Amp output generator and regulator assembly. The generator and regulator assembly
generates electrical power for the vehicle electrical system and maintains the battery in a charged state. When the engine is
running the generator produces an alternating current, which is converted to a direct current internally. The output from the
generator is controlled by the voltage regulator (located inside the generator) and then supplied to the battery through the
main battery positive cable.
The generator is mounted on the front right side of the engine and driven at approximately 3 times engine speed by the
accessory drive belt.
www.JagDocs.com
Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Generator - System Operation
Control Diagram
interconnect network) bus.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery monitoring system module
2 Battery
4 Generator and regulator
System Operation
OPERATION
The output voltage required from the generator and regulator is calculated by the battery monitoring system.
Refer to: Battery and Cables (414-01 Battery, Mounting and Cables, Description and Operation).
The battery monitoring system signals the calculated voltage to the ECM via the RJB and the instrument cluster. The ECM then
transmits the calculated voltage to the generator and regulator on the LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection.
The ECM will over-ride the voltage value requested by the battery monitoring system if it detects a fault in the generator and
regulator. The ECM also signals the instrument cluster to display a warning message if it detects a fault with the generator and
regulator.
DESCRIPTION
The regulator provides a controlled variable voltage output from the generator. Two electrical terminals are provided on the
outer casing of the generator. One terminal supplies the DC (direct current) voltage output from the generator to the battery
positive terminal. The second terminal provides the LIN bus connection between the regulator and the ECM.
www.JagDocs.com
Generator and Regulator - TDV6 3.0L Diesel - Generator
Removal

4. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 10 Nm
6. Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
7.
8. Torque: 15 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
9.
10.
www.JagDocs.com
11. Torque: 100 Nm

12. Using a suitable hydraulic jack, raise and support the
engine.
13. Torque: 47 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Navigation
System Map Updates
Map Update Applicability - DVD/USB

Vehicle Pre - 10MY 10 MY 11 MY 12MY 13MY 14MY
XK DVD DVD DVD DVD DVD DVD
F-Type - - - - - USB
XF DVD DVD DVD USB USB USB
XJ - USB USB USB USB USB
Freelander DVD DVD DVD DVD USB USB
Discovery 3 DVD - - - -
Discovery 4 - External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool USB USB USB
Range Rover Evoque - - - USB USB USB
Range Rover Sport (L320) DVD External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool USB USB USB
Range Rover Sport (L494) - - - - - USB
Range Rover (L322) DVD External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool External HD Service Tool - -
Range Rover (L405) - - - - USB USB
NOTE: For vehicles using SD card navigation updates refer to SD Card Navigation Updates (Asia Navigation) below.
Mapping Regions
Region Mapping Area
1 North America (USA, Canada and Mexico)
2 Western and Eastern Europe
3 Japan
4 Middle East (Bahrain, Jordan, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia and UAE
www.JagDocs.com
5 South Africa
6 South America (Brazil and Argentina)
7 Russia
8 Pacific (Australia and New Zealand)
9 South East Asia (Malaysia and Singapore)
DVD Map Updates
Vehicles equipped with the 'remote' navigation module are supplied with a DVD map update which is loaded into and left in
the navigation module. Map data is read directly from the DVD. This update can be carried out by the customer.
www.JagDocs.com
External HD Service Tool Map Updates
Discovery 4, Range Rover Sport and Range Rover vehicles, equipped with a HDD (hard disc drive) integrated into the touch
screen, are updated at point of service. Dealers are supplied with a set of master pack map update DVD's which are loaded
onto the dealer Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment. The map data is then loaded from the diagnostic
equipment onto the navigation tool hard drive. The map data is loaded to the touch s screen from the navigation tool hard
drive.
The following process should be used to update the map data:
NOTE: The navigation update tool does not need the map data loading every time. This is only necessary when a new
map update DVD is released.
Using the approved Jaguar/Land Rover diagnostic equipment select the navigation update tool.
www.JagDocs.com
Select Setup on th navigation update tool.

Connect the navigation update tool to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment using the USB cable and
press Continue proceed.
The navigation update tool will then check the connection.

www.JagDocs.com
Select your preferred language from the drop down menu then press Save and Continue Setup to proceed.
When the navigation update tool confirms the initial setup is complete, press Continue to proceed.
www.JagDocs.com
The navigation update tool will the return to the main menu screen, select Load Map Data to proceed.
Disconnect then reconnect, the USB cable connecting to the navigation update tool to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved
diagnostic equipment, press Continue proceed.
www.JagDocs.com
The navigation update tool will then check the connection.
Insert map update disk 1 into the DVD drive of the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment and press
Continue proceed
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
The navigation update tool will then read the map data
Map data will then be copied from disk 1 to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
www.JagDocs.com
Insert map update disk 2 into the DVD drive and press Continue proceed
Map data will then be copied from disk 2 to the Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
www.JagDocs.com
Map data is now ready to be uploaded onto the navigation update tool, press Continue proceed.
The map data is now being uploaded onto the navigation update tool.
www.JagDocs.com
Map data upload is now complete.
Disconnect the navigation update tool from Jaguar/Land Rover approved diagnostic equipment.
Connect the navigation update tool to the vehicle using the firewire cable.
Select Navigation using the touch screen display soft key.

www.JagDocs.com
Select Navigation Setup using the touch screen soft key.

Select Map Change using the touch screen.
Select map region using the touch screen display and press Map Data Update to continue.
www.JagDocs.com
The current map data version and the proposed update map data versions will now be shown, Select the relevant
region, using the related touch screen key to proceed.
Select OK to input the licence key using the touch screen.
www.JagDocs.com
Input the licence key using the touch screen display and press OK to continue.
Select OK using the touch screen.

www.JagDocs.com
The map update will begin.

When the map update is complete a message will be shown in the touch screen, select OK to continue using the touch
screen display soft key. The navigation system will restart with the new map data.
Disconnect the navigation update tool from the vehicle.
USB Map Updates

www.JagDocs.com
All Gen 2.1 equipped vehicles are supplied with a USB map updates, these updates can be carried out by the customer.
The following process should be used to update the map data:
Start the engine.

Navigate to the touch screen Home Menu screen.
Insert the USB memory stick containing the map data into the vehicle USB port.
Press Continue on the touch screen to proceed with the installation of the map update.
www.JagDocs.com
using the touch screen enter the licence code and press OK to proceed.
NOTE: Selecting 'Cancel' returns to the 'Home Menu' screen, the map update will continue to run in the background
The map update will begin and a message will be displayed in the touch screen display advising that navigation is
unavailable.
Map update progress can be viewed as a percentage of the completed download in the Home Menu screen.
www.JagDocs.com
When the update is complete a message is displayed informing the user.

The navigation will restart upon completion of the map update.
NOTE: Remove USB stick immediately
Turn off the engine.

Exit, lock the vehicle and leave for at 15 minutes before using the navigation system.
Japanese Navigation
The Japanese satellite navigation system uses a separate navigation computer module.
The HDD in the ACM/IAM is not used for navigation downloads in this market.
Map updates are supplied in DVD format. The DVD is loaded into the navigation module. Map data is read directly from the
DVD.
www.JagDocs.com
SD Card Navigation Updates (Asia Navigation)

The Asia market navigation system is an aftermarket unit.
Map updates are supplied in an SD card format. The SD card is loaded into the navigation module. Map data is read directly
from the SD card.
NOTE: The following countries use SD card navigation updates.
Country
ANGOLA
ARGENTINA
AZERBAIJAN
BAHAMAS
BARBADOS
BENIN
BOTSWANA
BRAZIL
BRUNEI
BURUNDI
CAYMAN ISLANDS
CHILE
CHINA
COLOMBIA
EGYPT
FIJI
GHANA
HONG KONG
INDIA
INDONESIA
ISRAEL
JAMAICA
KENYA
LEBANON
LESOTHO
MALAWI
MALI
MAURITIUS
MONGOLIA
MOROCCO
MOZAMBIQUE
NAMIBIA
NIGER
www.JagDocs.com
Country
NIGERIA
PERU
PHILIPPINES
RWANDA
SENEGAL
SOUTH AFRICA
SRI LANKA
SAINT LUCIA
SWAZILAND
TAIWAN
TANZANIA
THAILAND
TOGO
TUNISIA
UGANDA
URUGUAY
VENEZUELA
VIETNAM
ZAMBIA
ZIMBABWE
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Information
and Entertainment System
For a detailed description of the Information and Entertainment System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation
sections in the workshop manual. REFER to: (415-01A Information and Entertainment System)
Audio System (Description and Operation),

Audio System (Description and Operation),
Audio System (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Information and entertainment module Fuses

Audio amplifier module Loose or corroded connector(s)
www.JagDocs.com
Integrated audio module Information and entertainment module

Portable audio interface module Audio amplifier module
Digital audio broadcast module Integrated audio module
Integrated control panel Portable audio interface module
Touch screen display Digital audio broadcast module
Satellite radio module Integrated control panel
Television module Touch screen display
Navigation system module Satellite radio module
Telephone module Television module
Compact disc player jammed, not loading Navigation system module
Scratched/dirty compact discs Telephone module
Speakers Speakers
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Display Possible Causes Action

Poor audio quality (all Display normal
sources) MOST harness Check MOST harness connectors for
connections loose security
MOST harness Check MOST harness connectors for
connections contamination
contaminated Check the routing of the MOST harness
MOST harness
misrouted
- Too many
bends
- Bend radius
less than
25mm
Information and Touch screen blank or

entertainment system displaying a flashing MOST network fault REFER to: Communications Network
inoperative logo (418-00 Module Communications Network,
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00. REFER to:
(100-00 General Information)
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Audio Amplifier Module (AAM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Integrated Audio Module (IAM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Infotainment Control Module (ICM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Integrated Control Panel (FCIMB) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Satellite Digital Audio Radio System Module (SARM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Digital Audio Broadcast Module (DABM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Hybrid Digital Radio Control Module (HDRCM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Touch Screen Display (FCDIM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Television Module (TVM) (Description and Operation),
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Portable Audio Interface Control Module (PAICM) (Description and Operation).
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Cellular
Phone
For a detailed description of the Cellular Phone System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual.
Visual Inspection
Microphone Electrical connectors

Bluetooth antenna Wiring harness for damage or corrosion
Fuses
www.JagDocs.com
the next step.
Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
Symptom Chart
Symptom Action
Unable to pair
Not Auto Connecting

No Audio to 3rd Party

No Audio from 3rd Party

GO to Pinpoint Test D.
No Audio
GO to Pinpoint Test E.
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:

B1A5613 Antenna Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check blue tooth
Bluetooth antenna circuit - antenna circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B1D7984 Microphone Input Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test microphone
Signal amplitude < input circuit for short/open circuit. Check integrated audio
minimum module for related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index
U1A0088 Private Suspect the module. Check and install a new telephone
Communication Bluetooth phone module module as required, refer to the new module/component
Network internal communications installation note at the top of the DTC Index
failure
U210000 Initial Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved

Configuration Not Initial configuration not diagnostic system. If DTC remains, carry out CAN network
Complete complete integrity tests using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system
Configuration Configuration incompatible diagnostic system. If DTC remains, suspect the telephone
Incompatible module. Check and install a new telephone module as
required, refer to the new module/component installation note
www.JagDocs.com
U300044 Control Module Re-configure the telephone module. If the DTC remains,
Data memory failure suspect the telephone module. Check and install a new
telephone module as required, refer to the new
Index
U300045 Control Module Re-configure the telephone module. If the DTC remains,
Program memory failure suspect the telephone module. Check and install a new
telephone module as required, refer to the new
Index
Incorrect car configuration diagnostic system. Clear DTC and re-test. If the DTC remains
data received suspect the telephone module. Check and install a new
module as required, refer to the new module/component
U300098 Control Module Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Clear DTC
Component or system over and re-test/monitor condition for re-occurrence
temperature
Mis-match in battery the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
voltage, of 2 volts or more,
between telephone module
and RJB
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : UNABLE TO PAIR
CONDITIONS
A1: 'NO PHONE FITTED' DISPLAY
NOTE: Prior to continuing with any diagnosis, ensure that the Customer telephone and level of software is included on
the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the bluetooth function is activated
and the telephone handset is placed within the vehicle cabin area.
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'No Phone Fitted' is shown on vehicle display.
Is 'No Phone Fitted' displayed?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
Locate the connected telephone and if not Customer telephone, disconnect from the system.
A2: TELEPHONE BLUETOOTH DEVICE SEARCH
1 Carry out Bluetooth device search using Customer handset.
www.JagDocs.com
Is 'Jaguar' identified in Bluetooth device list?
Yes
Select device from list, then continue with diagnosis.GO to A3.
No
Carry out further Bluetooth device search, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting approximately 20 seconds
between searches. If 'Jaguar' still not identified in Bluetooth device list, set ignition status to OFF, wait
approximately 30 seconds and set ignition status to ON. Carry out further Bluetooth device search, to a
maximum of 4 times, waiting approximately 20 seconds between searches. If 'Jaguar' still not identified in
Bluetooth device list, contact your local in market support for further assistance.
A3: TELEPHONE HANDSET ERROR
1 Check for any error shown on the telephone handset when 'Jaguar' is selected from the Bluetooth device
list.
Was an error immediately shown on the telephone handset?
Yes
Wait approximately 10 seconds then re-attempt selection, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting
approximately 10 seconds between each attempt. If error still being displayed, contact your local in
market support for assistance.
No
Enter PIN '1313' then continue with diagnosis.GO to A4.
A4: PIN ENTRY STATUS
1 Check for successful PIN entry.
Was PIN entry successful?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Wait approximately 10 seconds then re-attempt PIN entry, to a maximum of 4 times, waiting
approximately 10 seconds between each attempt. If PIN entry is still un-successful, contact your local in
market support for assistance.
A5: 'NO PHONE FITTED' DISPLAY
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'No Phone Fitted' is still shown on vehicle display.
www.JagDocs.com
Is 'No Phone Fitted' still displayed?

Yes
From the telephone handset, select the connect option for the 'Land Rover' device identified in the
Bluetooth device list. If 'No Phone Fitted' is still displayed, suspect a telephone handset fault. Carry out
Pinpoint test again using known good telephone handset.
No
The telephone is paired and connected to the system. No further action is required for this symptom.
PINPOINT TEST B : NOT AUTOMATICALLY CONNECTING
CONDITIONS
B1: BLUETOOTH MODULE PAIRED DEVICE LIST
the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the bluetooth and auto connect
functions are activated and the telephone handset is placed within the vehicle cabin area.
1 Carry out checks to determine if the Customer telephone is shown in the Bluetooth Module paired device
list.
Is the Customer telephone in the Bluetooth Module paired device list?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Carry out Unable to Pair Pinpoint Test.GO to A.
B2: CUSTOMER HANDSET PAIRED DEVICE LIST
1 Carry out checks to determine if the Bluetooth Module is shown in the Customer telephone paired device
list.
Is the Bluetooth Module in the Customer telephone paired device list?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
Carry out Unable to Pair Pinpoint Test.GO to A.
B3: CUSTOMER TELEPHONE IN POSITION 1
1 Carry out checks to determine if the Customer telephone is in position 1 in the Bluetooth Module paired
device list.
Is the Customer telephone in position 1?
Yes
GO to B4.
No
Advise Customer that auto connection will only be attempted with the device that is shown in position 1
in Bluetooth Module paired device list.
B4: CHECK FOR DTC B1A56-13
1 Using Manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for DTC B1A56-13.
Is DTC B1A56-13 logged?
Yes
Carry out remedial actions as outlined in DTC Index. If symptom remains, contact your local in market
support for assistance.
No
GO to B5.
B5: BLUETOOTH CONNECTION
1 Carry out checks to determine if Bluetooth connection icon is shown on Customer Bluetooth telephone
screen but shows 'No Phone Fitted' on vehicle screen.
Is Bluetooth connection icon shown on the Customer handset but 'No Phone Fitted' displayed on vehicle
screen?
Yes
GO to B9.
No
GO to B6.
B6: 'LAND ROVER' AUTHORISATION
NOTE: Some handsets may require operator intervention to manually authorise connection.
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'Land Rover' is authorised in the Customer Bluetooth telephone device
list menu.
Is 'Land Rover' authorised in the Customer Bluetooth telephone device list menu?
Yes
GO to B7.
No
Advise customer that 'Land Rover' needs to be authorised in the Customer Bluetooth telephone device
list menu, or operator intervention may be required to manually authorise connection.
B7: SEARCH FOR DEVICES SCREEN
1 Select the search for devices button on the vehicle display.
Does pressing the search for devices button bring up the searching screen on the vehicle display?
www.JagDocs.com
Yes
Contact your local in market support for assistance.
No
GO to B8.
B8: CYCLE IGNITION AND CHECK SEARCH FOR DEVICES SCREEN
1 Lock vehicle (wait 60s) before unlocking and turning Ignition status back to ON.
Does pressing the search for devices button bring up the searching screen on the vehicle display?
Yes
No further action required for this Symptom. Possible intermitent fault.
No
B9: PAIRED DEVICE
1 Check Customer telephone paired device list to establish which device the Customer telephone is
connected to.
Is the Customer telephone connected to the vehicle?
Yes
Lock vehicle (wait 60s) before unlocking and turning Ignition status back to ON. If Not Automatically
Connecting, contact you local in market support for assistance.
No
Using the Customer telephone controls, disconnect from the currently connected device and delete from
paired device list. Lock vehicle (wait for 60s) before unlocking and turning Igition status to ON. If Not
Automatically Connecting, contact your local in market support for assistance.
PINPOINT TEST C : NO AUDIO TO THIRD PARTY

C1: MICROPHONE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTCS)
the JLR approved list, the telephone battery is fully charged and in a serviceable condition, the telephone is placed within the
vehicle cabin area and is connected to the vehicle via bluetooth.
1 Using the Manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check for any logged microphone DTCs in
Audio Front Control module.
Is DTC B1D79-01 logged?
Yes
Carry out diagnosis of electrical failure as advised in Action column of DTC Index.
No
PINPOINT TEST D : NO AUDIO FROM THIRD PARTY

D1: 'IN CALL' DISPLAY
1 Carry out checks to determine if 'In Call' is shown on the vehicle display.
Is vehicle display showing 'In Call'?
Yes
No
Call has ended. No further action is required for this symptom.
PINPOINT TEST E : NO AUDIO

E1: AUDIO FROM THIRD PARTY
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the Third Party.
Is there Audio from the Third Party?
Yes
GO to E2.
No
Refer to the 'No Audio From Third Party' Pinpoint test.GO to D.
E2: AUDIO TO THIRD PARTY
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio to the Third Party.
www.JagDocs.com
Is there Audio to the Third Party?

Yes
GO to E3.
No
Refer to the 'No Audio To Third Party' Pinpoint test.GO to C.
E3: CD OR RADIO AUDIO
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the CD or Radio.
Is there Audio from the CD or Radio?
Yes
GO to E4.
No
Suspect MOST ring fault, refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check/rectify MOST ring as
necessary.
E4: TELEPHONE HANDSET AUDIO
1 Establish from Customer feedback/symptom if there is Audio from the telephone handset.
Is there Audio from the telephone handset?
Yes
Ensure vehicle is parked. Disconnect and reconnect handset. If issue not resolved, contact your
local in market support for assistance.
No
Contact you local in market support for assistance.
Information and Entertainment System - General Information - Navigation
System
For a detailed description of the Navigation System, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the workshop
manual. REFER to: (415-01 Information and Entertainment System)
Navigation System (Description and Operation),

Video System (Description and Operation),
Video System (Description and Operation),
Video System (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
www.JagDocs.com
Information and entertainment module Fuses

Integrated audio module Information and entertainment module
Portable audio interface module Audio amplifier module
Digital audio broadcast module Integrated audio module
Integrated control panel Portable audio interface module
Touch screen display Digital audio broadcast module
Satellite radio module Integrated control panel
Television module Touch screen display
Navigation system module Satellite radio module
Telephone module Television module
Compact disc player jammed, not loading Navigation system module
Scratched/dirty compact discs Telephone module
Speakers Speakers
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the relevant DTC Index.
DTC Index
Navigation System Module
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:

B1A8911 Satellite Check satellite antenna connections. Refer to the electrical circuit
Antenna Satellite antenna circuit - diagrams and check satellite antenna circuit for short to ground
short to ground
B1A8913 Satellite Check satellite antenna connections. Refer to the electrical circuit
Antenna Satellite antenna circuit - diagrams and check satellite antenna circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B1A891B Satellite Suspect navigation module. Check and install a new navigation system
Antenna Satellite antenna - circuit module as required, refer to the new module/component installation
resistance above note at the top of the DTC Index
threshold
B1D5514 Antenna #2 Check TMC/VICS FM antenna connections. Refer to the electrical circuit
TMC/VICS FM antenna diagrams and check TMC/VICS FM antenna circuit for open circuit
circuit - open circuit
B1D5614 Antenna #3 Check VICS antenna connections. Refer to the electrical circuit
Circuit VICS antenna circuit - diagrams and check VICS antenna circuit for open circuit
open circuit
U200531 Vehicle Check ABS module and Instrument Cluster for speed related DTCs and
Speed Missing vehicle speed refer to relevant DTC Index
www.JagDocs.com
message
U300049 Control Suspect the navigation module. Check and install a new navigation
Module Internal electronic failure system module as required, refer to the new module/component
U300055 Control Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system check/amend the
Module Incorrect car Car Configuration File parameter in block 2, byte 127 to match vehicle
configuration data market/specification. If the DTC remains check navigation system
received module part number and ensure the correct component is installed to
vehicle market/specification
U300087 Control Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Module Missing message system. Check navigation module for DTCs and refer to the DTC Index.
Check CAN network integrity using the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system
U300098 Control Check for additional DTCs and refer to DTC Index. Clear DTC and
Module Component or system re-test/monitor condition for re-occurrence
over temperature
U300317 Battery Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Voltage Circuit voltage above manufacturer approved diagnostic system
threshold
U300362 Battery Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Voltage Mis-match in battery manufacturer approved diagnostic system
voltage, of 2 volts or
more, between
navigation module and
RJB
Touch Screen Display (TSD)
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com

B100E25 Video Input 'A' Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
ODST Only - TV video manufacturer approved diagnostic system
synch mis-match
B100F25 Video Input 'B' Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
ODST Only - Reverse manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Camera video synch
mis-match
U1A0101 Communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Link ODST Only - cable from manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check electrical harness
navigation module not from navigation module is correctly installed
correctly installed
U1A0115 Communication Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Link TSD to navigation manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
module circuit - short to circuit diagrams and check TSD to navigation module circuit for
power, open circuit short to power, open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
U1A4B48 Control Module Re-configure the TSD using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Processor B Supervision software system
failure
U300044 Control Module Suspect the TSD, check and install a new TSD as required, refer to
EEPROM, External RAM the new module/component installation note at the top of the DTC
access failure Index
U300048 Control Module Re-configure the TSD using the manufacturer approved diagnostic
Supervision software system
failure
U30004B Control Module Allow the system to cool, clear the DTC and check/monitor system
Touch panel backlight - for re-occurrence. If DTC re-occurs suspect the TSD. Check and
high temperature install a new TSD as required, refer to the new module/component
detected installation note at the top of the DTC Index
U300055 Control Module Check/amend the Car Configuration File using the manufacturer
Incorrect Car approved diagnostic system
Configuration
Parameters received
U300087 Control Module Check RJB for related DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index. Check
Car Configuration File CAN and MOST networks, carry out the CAN and MOST network
not received tests using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system
U300098 Control Module Allow the system to cool, clear the DTC and check/monitor system
TSD internal for re-occurrence. If DTC re-occurs suspect the TSD. Check and
temperature over limit install a new TSD as required, refer to the new module/component
U300316 Battery Voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Circuit voltage below manufacturer approved diagnostic system
threshold
U300317 Battery Voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Circuit voltage above manufacturer approved diagnostic system
threshold
Information and Entertainment System -

Audio antenna unit to "D" pillar retaining bolts 9 - 80
Digital Radio antenna pod retaining nuts 5 - 48
Amplifier retaining nuts 7 - 62
Information and entertainment display retaining bolts 2 - 17
Information and entertainment display mounting bracket to Information and entertainment display retaining bolts 3 - 26
Information and entertainment module retaining bolts 3 - 26
Instrument panel speaker retaining screws 2 - 18
Steering wheel audio control switch retaining screws 3 - 26
Subwoofer amplifier retaining nuts 7 - 62
Subwoofer speaker retaining bolts 6 - 53
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Audio System - Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 IAM (integrated audio module)
2 Touch-screen
3 ICP (integrated control panel)
4 ICM (information control module)
5 Roof pod antenna module (DAB band L and satellite radio receiver antennas)
6 RF filter
7 DAB (digital audio broadcasting) radio receiver (Optional - Europe only)
8 Satellite radio digital receiver (Optional - NAS only)
9 Power amplifier (Not fitted to the Jaguar Sound System)
10 RF filter
11 Diversity antenna module (AM/FM and DAB band III antennas)
12 Portable audio interface console (Optional)
13 Portable audio module (Optional)
14 Steering wheel remote audio controls
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Audio System - Overview
OVERVIEW
The audio system is available in three versions.
Jaguar Sound System

Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System
Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System
The audio systems are instrument panel mounted and combine the radio tuner with a slot loading single or 6 disc CD (compact
disc) player. All units have AM/FM diversity reception, through the diversity antenna module, which receives signals from
antennas located in the heated rear window. The audio systems have various levels of user control through the Touch-screen,
ICP (integrated control panel) and steering wheel control panel. The Jaguar Sound System (base audio unit) with single CD
player is only compatible with standard CD's. All other versions of CD player are compatible with standard CDs and CDs with
MP3 or WMA (windows media audio) files.
A portable audio module allows for the connection of a range of portable audio devices to the car’s audio system. The portable
audio module is controlled through the IAM (integrated audio module) and Touch-screen with play back through the car’s
speaker system. The introduction of this system allows the user to import their personal portable media player to interface
with the car, including iPod and other MP3 players, or USB mass storage devices such as memory sticks. MP3 players can also
be controlled through the Touch-screen if they are configured as mass storage devices. Details of how to do this will be
contained in the manufacturers instructions.
The chosen audio device can be plugged into the car using an interface panel located in the floor console between the front
seats. The interface includes a 3.5mm auxiliary jack-plug socket, a 12-volt power supply, a dedicated iPod connector with
charging function, plus a USB2 connector which allows connectivity for a wide variety of USB devices. The USB port also
provides a charging function although it does not support a USB hub. The maximum charging current supplied is 500ma. The
www.JagDocs.com
user can connect an iPod and USB device at the same time, changing the source via the Touch-screen. The non selected source
will still charge.
The Jaguar Sound System is the basic audio system which comprises of an IAM (integrated audio module) with no external
amplifier and 8 speakers.
The Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System has the addition of an AUD 8 power amplifier and a 9 speaker system.
The Bowers & Wilkins 440w Surround Sound System additions include an AUD 12 power amplifier, a Dolby Pro-Logic 2 7.1
Surround Sound System, and 14 speakers.
DAB (digital audio broadcasting) is available for most European markets and gives access to digital radio channels for better
sound quality and enhanced functionality depending on local service availability. The DAB (digital audio broadcasting) module
is located in the luggage compartment. The system receives reception signals from the following sources to ensure optimum
signal strength.
DAB band L antenna located in the roof pod antenna module

DAB band III antenna located in the heated rear window.
For NAS vehicles the digital format adopted is satellite radio which specifically links to the Sirius network. The system operates
in the S-band frequency range, and as a result of the use of satellite transmission, has the ability to provide CD quality audio
broadcasts over very large areas (typically continents). The satellite radio receiver is located in the luggage compartment. The
system receives reception signals from the satellite radio antenna located in the roof pod module.
Primary user control of the audio system is via the ICP (integrated control panel) and the Touch-screen which are located in the
center of the instrument panel. Control signals from the ICP (integrated control panel) are relayed on the medium speed CAN
(controller area network) bus to the ICM (information control module). The ICM (information control module) relays the control
signals to the rest of the audio system on the MOST (media oriented systems transport) ring. The ICM (information control
module) is the timing master for the MOST (media oriented systems transport) ring and also hosts a gateway function between
the medium speed CAN bus and the MOST (media oriented systems transport) ring. Audio output signals on the Jaguar 320W
Premium Sound System and Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System are sent on the MOST (media oriented systems
transport) ring from the IAM (integrated audio module) to the power amplifier for speaker output.
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Audio System - System Operation
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN bus; P = MOST ring; T = Coaxial
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Battery
7 Portable audio module
8 Clock spring
10 Portable audio interface panel
11 Microphone
12 Touch-screen
13 Power amplifier
14 Diversity antenna module
16 DAB receiver/Satellite Radio receiver (Note: There is no co-axial link from the diversity antenna module to the satellite
radio receiver)
17 Roof pod
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Navigation computer (Optional)
2 DAB (digital audio broadcasting) radio receiver (Optional - Europe only)
3 Satellite Radio digital receiver (Optional - NAS only)
4 Telephone control module (Optional)
5 Touch-screen
6 TV tuner (Optional)
7 Power amplifier (Not fitted to the Jaguar Sound System)
9 Portable audio module (Optional)
System Operation
AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
The components of the audio/infotainment system are all connected on the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring.
The MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring is a fibre optic communications bus for multimedia applications. Audio
and control information is passed around the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring and can be picked up by any of
the systems units. For example, radio station tuning/selection input by the vehicle user into the Touch-screen is sent along the
MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring and collected by the IAM (integrated audio module) which then selects the
requested radio station.
MOST (media orientated systems transport) technology uses a plastic optical fibre which forms a network connecting the audio
and multimedia system components. Each component in the ring is connected to the plastic optical fibre through a device
known as a FOT (fibre optical transceiver). Each FOT (fibre optical transceiver) has two optical connections; one connection is
sensitive to light and is the input, the second connection forms the light source and is the output. The system operates by
connecting the output from one FOT (fibre optical transceiver) to the input of another FOT (fibre optical transceiver).
The light signals are sent in one direction only and are formed in the following way:
www.JagDocs.com
Electrical signals are converted into an electrical current

The current then drives an LED (light emitting diode) in the FOT (fibre optical transceiver) to produce a high intensity
red light
The LED transmits the light through a fibre optic cable
A photo diode in the FOT (fibre optical transceiver) at the opposite end of the fibre optic cable detects the light.
The following components may be connected to the MOST ring dependant on the vehicle equipment level:
IAM (integrated audio module)

Touch-screen
ICM (information control module)
DAB (digital audio broadcasting) radio receiver (Optional - Europe only)
Satellite radio digital receiver (Optional - NAS only)
Power amplifier (Not fitted to the Jaguar Sound System)
Portable audio module (Optional)
Telephone control module (Optional)
Navigation computer (Optional)
TV tuner (Optional)
NOTE: Do not view the red light directly
MOST is a synchronous network. A timing master supplies the clock information and all other devices on the network
synchronize their operation to this clock. The timing master for the MOST (media orientated systems transport) network on this
vehicle is the ICM (information control module). This unit also controls and manages the MOST (media orientated systems
transport) ring and the system components.
An Optical Bus tester is used in conjunction with the Jaguar diagnostic system to diagnose the MOST (media orientated
systems transport) system. The Optical Bus tester emits a visible, high intensity red light which can be connected into the ring
at any point to test the ring integrity. Disconnecting a MOST (media orientated systems transport) connector will reveal if the
high intensity red light is visible.
If a break occurs in the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring fault codes are stored in the ICM (information control
module) which can be retrieved using the Jaguar diagnostic system equipment.
With reference to the audio system information and signal transfer the instrument cluster is the gateway between the high
and medium speed CAN bus communication protocols. The ICM (information control module) is the gateway between medium
speed CAN and the MOST (media orientated systems transport) systems.
A typical example of information transfer is vehicle speed information from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module used to
control the automatic volume control function. The vehicle speed information from the ABS module is sent on the high speed
CAN network and collected by the instrument panel gateway. The signal is passed to the medium speed CAN network and onto
the ICM (information control module) gateway. The ICM (information control module) calculates the volume adjustment
required. The corrected audio volume level signal is sent on the MOST (media orientated systems transport) network to the
IAM (integrated audio module) or Power amplifier (dependant on vehicle equipment level) for output to the speaker system.
AUDIO SYSTEM GATEWAY FUNCTIONS
With reference to the audio system information and signal transfer the instrument cluster is the gateway between the high
and medium speed CAN bus communication protocols. The ICM is the gateway between medium speed CAN and the MOST
systems.
A typical example of information transfer is vehicle speed information from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module used to
control the automatic volume control function. The vehicle speed information from the ABS module is sent on the high speed
CAN network and collected by the instrument panel gateway. The signal is passed to the medium speed CAN network and onto
the ICM gateway. The ICM calculates the volume adjustment required. The corrected audio volume level signal is sent on the
MOST network to the IAM or Power amplifier (dependant on vehicle equipment level) for output to the speaker system.
AUDIO SYSTEM USER CONTROLS

Touch-Screen
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Touch-screen
2 Home menu button
3 Touch-screen on/off button
The Touch-screen forms the basis of the audio system. It communicates with the rest of the audio/infotainment system on the
MOST ring and allows control of the audio system and other infotainment systems from a single point.
The Touch-screen communicates with the IAM on the MOST ring and provides the primary user interface and display of the
audio system controls. No configuration procedure is required if the touch-screen is replaced.
Calibration of the Touch-screen using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new
The touch-screen provides user control of the following systems:
System Functions
Audio Radio display AM/FM or DAB, auxiliary and portable audio, digital TV or CD (compact disc)
Climate Air conditioning, distribution, seats, heated steering wheel, automatic air recirculation
control
Telephone Digit dialer, phone book, last ten calls (made, received, missed)
Navigation Destination, stored locations, navigation setup, route options
Vehicle Security, parking, valet mode, trip computer, clock, brightness, contrast, system settings, vehicle settings,
display settings
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Touch-screen
2 CD load
3 CD load and eject slot
4 Seek up
5 Settings button
6 Audio system on/off and volume control
7 Audio source
8 Seek down
9 Eject
The ICP duplicates many of the touch-screen audio user control features. Any volume setting made whilst in audio, TV, phone,
navigation or voice activation mode will be memorized for that system. The ICP communicates with the ICM on the medium
speed CAN. The ICM converts control/command signals from the ICP and then distributes the information onto the MOST
system to the audio system and other information and entertainment systems.
No configuration procedure is required if the ICP is replaced. There is no option to calibrate the ICP using the Jaguar approved
www.JagDocs.com
Steering Wheel Controls
Item Description
1 Volume adjustment
2 Change pre-set radio stations or CD tracks
3 Select audio source
4 Audio mute control/JaguarVoice control
Additional control of the audio system is available in the form of steering wheel mounted switches which are located on the
left hand side of the steering wheel. The four switches provide for volume adjustment, change pre-set radio stations or CD
tracks, select audio source and finally audio mute control. The mute control is also used for JaguarVoice control.
The steering wheel audio control switches are hardwired through the clock spring to the ICM. The ICM processes the analogue
signals from the switches into digital signals. The digital signals are then passed from the ICM onto the MOST system to
www.JagDocs.com
control the requested audio functions.
AVC (automatic volume control) controls the audio volume in relation to vehicle speed. As vehicle speed increases the audio
level is adjusted to compensate for extra road and vehicle noise. There are three settings for AVC:
Low
Medium
High
Setting of the AVC level is made using the audio controls. The default setting is medium.
The vehicle speed signal is used to enable the ICM to calculate the volume adjustment required. The vehicle speed signal is
received over the CAN. The signal is an average of the four wheel speed sensor signals. Should an invalid speed signal be
received the AVC will not alter the output volume.
INTEGRATED AUDIO MODULE
The IAM is located in the center console behind the ICP faceplate, and combines the radio tuner and CD player. The head unit
controls which of the two sources is routed to the speakers. All tuner versions have AM/FM reception. Each audio system
features auto-store, with a press and hold function to store selected channels as pre-sets. The standard search facility finds
the nine strongest channels currently available, while search and manual tuning allow channels to be stored as above.
The Jaguar Sound System IAM uses an internal amplifier which directly drives the system speakers. The Jaguar 320W Premium
Sound System and Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System differs from the Jaguar Sound System with the addition of
an external amplifier. Audio output signals from the IAM are sent on the MOST system to the external amplifier which drives
the system speakers.
Depending on audio specification the slot-loading CD unit is either a single-disc type or six-disc auto-changer. The system
automatically detects the CD format of the source (standard CD, MP3 or WMA files) and offers a full range of options,
presenting folders on the touch-screen, listed by albums and tracks, to browse as on a PC. Both versions have mix and repeat
functions and the six-disc version displays disc names.
The IAM communicates on the MOST system with the rest of the audio system. If the IAM is replaced it must be configured as
a new module using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment.
Calibration of the IAM using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new technology
becomes available or any fault concerns require software updates.
Audio Antennas
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Single TV antenna module
2 RF filter
4 Heated rear window
5 Heated rear window upper section
6 Heated rear window lower section
7 Triple TV antenna module
8 RF filter
The diversity antenna module, located on the left hand side of the heated rear window, receives signals from four antennas
located in the heated rear window, where one antenna is dedicated as an AM antenna.
The diversity tuning system ensures that the strongest signals are used by the radio system to ensure the best possible FM
reception. Using the three remaining receiving antennas serves to eliminate multipath signal distortion. Typically, the signal
from the antenna with the least noise is chosen, and the other antennas are ignored.
The diversity antenna module is an interface between the antenna aerials in the heated rear window and audio system
modules/tuners. It provides antenna signals to the AM/FM tuner in the IAM, to the DAB receiver and to the VICS (vehicle
information and communication systems) or TMC (traffic message channel) in the navigation computer.
There are three different types of diversity antenna module fitted depending on the vehicle market and infotainment
equipment specification:
AM/FM with one co-axial output

AM/FM and VICS/TMC with two co-axial outputs
AM/FM, VICS/TMC and DAB band III with three co-axial outputs
The diversity antenna module receives a power supply from the IAM.
Vehicle or other component generated electromagnetic interference may cause unwanted disturbances in the radio and TV
reception signals. The disturbance may interrupt, obstruct, or otherwise degrade or limit the effective performance of the
circuit. It frequently affects the reception of AM radio in urban areas and can also affect FM radio and television reception,
although to a lesser extent.
The RF filters, which act as RF isolators, are located on both sides of the heated rear window and are used to reduce the
electromagnetic interference. The left hand side RF filter is connected across the heated rear window power supply and used to
separate the DC (direct current) interference from the RF signals. The right hand side RF filter is used in conjunction with the
www.JagDocs.com
TV antenna module (if fitted). If the TV system is not fitted the filter is linked directly to ground.
INFORMATION CONTROL MODULE
The ICM is located beneath the IAM in the center console. The unit performs a range of infotainment and some climate-control
functions.
The ICM, which is the timing master of the MOST system; supplies clock information to all other devices on the network which
synchronize their operation to this clock.
The unit also controls and manages the MOST ring and provides the allocations of channels, system power management,
functionality and co-ordination of the other system components.
The system becomes operational when the vehicle is unlocked and a 'wake up' signal is received by the ICM on the medium
speed CAN. The ICM 'wakes up' all the control modules on the MOST system ready for immediate operation by the vehicle user.
If the ICM is replaced it must be configured as a new module using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment.
Calibration of the ICM using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new technology
becomes available or any fault concerns require software updates.
PORTABLE AUDIO MODULE
The portable audio module, located under the left hand front seat, allows for the connection, control and playback of a range
of portable audio devices through the car’s audio system.
No configuration procedure is required if the portable audio module is replaced. Calibration of the portable audio module using
the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new technology becomes available or any
fault concerns require software updates.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 iPod connection
2 USB connection
3 Auxiliary connection
The chosen audio device is plugged into the car using the interface panel located in the center console between the front
seats. Vehicles with the optional iPod function are supplied with a bespoke iPod lead in the vehicle delivery pack .
A menu option is available through the Touch-screen audio section when selecting a portable audio device for operation
through the vehicle audio system.
After the connection of an iPod or USB mass storage device the Touch-screen is used to operate and search the connected
device. Due to safety regulations, the normal control interfaces of either the iPod or USB device are disabled when it is
plugged into the interface panel.
NOTE: Some MP3 players have their own file system that is not supported by this system. To use the MP3 player it must
be set to USB Removable Device or Mass Storage Device mode. The manufacturer's information should include details of this
procedure. Only music that has been added to the device in this mode can be played via the vehicle's portable audio system.
Conversely, connection of any devices through the auxiliary connection cannot be controlled through the touch-screen and are
www.JagDocs.com
controlled through the device itself.
NOTE: The system will support devices with a storage capacity up to 256 GB which is approximately 65,000 audio tracks.
The wiring link harness between the portable audio module and interface panel consists of hardwired and digital connections
for data and signal exchange. The MOST carries the communication signals and information between the portable audio module
to the IAM and touch-screen. Audio output to the speaker system is controlled by the IAM or power amplifier depending on the
audio system specification.
POWER AMPLIFIER
www.JagDocs.com
The audio system has three amplification options dependant on the audio system specification:
IAM internal amplifier

Alpine AUD 8
Alpine AUD 12
The power amplifier is located in the left hand side of the luggage compartment and is connected to the audio system via the
MOST bus. Speaker connections are hardwired.
If the power amplifier is replaced it must be configured as a new module using the Jaguar diagnostic equipment.
Calibration of the power amplifier using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new
DIGITAL AUDIO BROADCASTING

DAB is a digital radio network designed to provide reliable, multi-service broadcasting for reception by mobile, portable and
fixed receivers.
DAB provides a clear signal with minimal interference, hiss or fading. After a channel (or station) has been tuned and stored, it
does not need retuning.
NOTE: Radio signals travel in a straight line so large obstacles, such as tall buildings, can shield the vehicle from the
signal causing temporary loss of reception (known as dead spots).
Digital radio is transmitted from regional terrestrial transmitters. Some local digital radio channels are not available outside
the range of a transmitter. To receive new local channels during vehicle movement around a country, the auto-tune function is
used to build new channel lists.
NOTE: When the vehicle DAB radio is first used the system will not receive any digital stations until the auto-tune
function has been completed.
Digital radio channels are organized into groups called ensembles (also known as multiplexes). Some individual channels may
also provide a number of subchannels. For example, if several sports events are being held simultaneously, the channel may
temporarily choose to broadcast each different event on a separate subchannel.
DAB is broadcast across Europe, Canada and parts of Asia. System transmission is via a terrestrial network, on two separate
broadcasting bands:
DAB band-L
DAB band III
The DAB system requires additional components to be added to the audio system. DAB antennas and a receiver are fitted to
allow reception of the service.
Operation of the DAB system is the same as the radio operation with selections made through the touch-screen and ICP to
access and navigate the system functions.
The DAB receiver is a dedicated tuner which is controlled by the ICM on the MOST ring. The receiver processes the signals from
the DAB antennas. Information is transmitted on the MOST ring and processed by the ICM. The processed information is sent
out to the power amplifier or IAM (with internal amplifier) and broadcast through the speaker system.
No configuration procedure is required if the DAB receiver is replaced. Calibration of the DAB receiver using the Jaguar
approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new technology becomes available or any fault concerns
require software updates.
Digital Audio Broadcasting Antennas

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Roof pod
The DAB band III antenna is located in the heated rear window and is part of the diversity antenna module circuit. The two
antenna circuits each have a co-axial connection to the DAB module.
DAB signals are transmitted on either DAB band III (174 - 240 MHz) or DAB band-L (1452 - 1492 MHz). Some countries may
only use the band III signals, while others may only use the band-L signals. Some countries use both frequency ranges within
the same geographical area. The type of DAB signal received depends on the vehicle market location.
The DAB antennas are designed with 50 ohm output impedance. The DAB receiver is fitted with 50 ohm fakra II connectors to
ensure compatibility with the antenna. For optimum performance 50 ohm low loss coaxial cable is used between the antenna
and receiver.
SATELLITE RADIO (NAS VEHICLES ONLY)
The digital radio format adopted for NAS vehicles is satellite radio. Satellite service providers transmit a signal from their
up-link facility (which is the original point of transmission of data, voice or other information through an antenna system) to a
satellite where the signal is then down linked to both the terrestrial repeater network and the individual satellite car radios.
The radio switches between the satellite signal and the repeater network signal depending on the strength of the signal at any
given time.
The Sirius satellite system comprises:
Satellites
Ground repeaters
Up-link ground stations
Radio receiver systems
The Sirius satellite radio system uses three satellites on an inclined elliptical orbit. This ensures that each satellite spends
www.JagDocs.com
approximately 16 hours a day over the continent of the USA, with at least one satellite over the country at any one time.
The satellites beam their signals down to the ground where the signal is picked up by receivers or is transmitted to repeater
stations to cover built up areas where the signal is obscured. The satellite service comprises over 100 channels of digital
entertainment which is provided by subscription requiring a monthly payment.
Operation of the satellite radio system is the same as the radio operations with selections made through the Touch-screen and
ICP to access and navigate the system functions.
The satellite radio receiver is a dedicated tuner which is controlled by the ICM on the MOST ring. The receiver filters the
signals from the satellite radio antenna. Information is transmitted on the MOST ring and processed by the ICM. The processed
information is sent out to the power amplifier or IAM (with internal amplifier) and broadcast through the speaker system.
No configuration procedure is required if the satellite radio receiver is replaced. Calibration of the satellite radio receiver using
the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new technology becomes available or any
Satellite Radio Antenna
The satellite radio antenna is located in the roof pod and is shared with the navigation system GPS (global positioning system)
antenna where fitted. The roof pod is located externally in a central position towards the rear of the roof.
Similar to the DAB system the satellite radio antenna is designed with 50 ohm output impedance. The satellite radio receiver
is fitted with 50 ohm fakra II connectors to ensure compatibility with the antenna. For optimum performance 50 ohm low loss
coaxial cable is used between the antenna and receiver.
The antenna is designed to receive one of two signals, using the strongest signal with the least distortion to process for audio
output. For example, if the vehicle drives into a tunnel, the signal received will change from a satellite signal to a repeater
station signal maintaining the strongest signal.
Information and Entertainment System - Speakers - Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
ItemDescription
1 LH (left-hand) front tweeter speaker (All models)
2 Front center speaker (Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System only)
3 RH (right-hand) front tweeter speaker (All models)
4 RH front mid-range speaker (Bowers & W ilkins 440W Surround Sound System only)
5 RH front mid-bass speaker (All models)
6 RH rear tweeter speaker (All models)
7 RH rear mid-bass speaker (All models)
8 RH rear full range speaker (Bowers & W ilkins 440W Surround Sound System only)
9 Subwoofer enclosure (Not fitted to Jaguar Sound System)
10 LH rear full range speaker (Bowers & W ilkins 440W Surround Sound System only)
11 LH rear mid-bass speaker (All models)
12 LH rear tweeter speaker (All models)
13 LH front mid-bass speaker (All models)
14 LH front mid-range speaker (Bowers & W ilkins 440W Surround Sound System only)
Information and Entertainment System - Speakers - Overview
Overview
The vehicle has three levels of audio system available:
Jaguar Sound System

Jaguar Premium Sound System
Bowers & Wilkins Surround Sound System
The Jaguar Sound System has 8 speakers, comprising an identical mid-bass and tweeter combination in each door. All
speaker domes in this system are of standard textile construction. The speakers are driven directly by the IAM (integrated
audio module) internal amplifier.
The Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System has 9 speakers including mid-bass and tweeters in the doors, adding a
sub-woofer in the spare wheel well. The speakers are driven by an Alpine AUD 8 amplifier located in the LH (left-hand)
side of the luggage compartment.
The Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System uses an Alpine AUD 12 amplifier, a Dolby Pro-Logic 2 7.1 Surround
Sound System and has 14 speakers. This layout adds a mid-range speaker to each front door while retaining a mid-bass
and tweeter in each rear door. It also adds an instrument panel center speaker, 2 surround-effect speakers in the rear
parcel shelf, and has the luggage compartment-mounted sub-woofer as the Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System. The
speakers are driven by an AUD 12 power amplifier located in the luggage compartment.
The main speakers on the Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System and the Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System
are identified by the bright yellow Kevlar constructed domes which are visible through the speaker grilles. The tweeter
speaker domes are an aluminum construction. The sub-woofer speakers are a textile dome construction.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Speakers - System Operation and
Control Diagram
• NOTE: A = Hardwired
CONTROL DIAGRAM - JAGUAR SOUND SYSTEM

www.JagDocs.com
ItemDescription
1 Battery
5 RH (right-hand) rear mid-bass speaker
6 RH rear tweeter speaker
7 RH front mid-bass speaker
8 RH front tweeter speaker
9 LH (left-hand) front mid-bass speaker
10 LH front tweeter speaker
11 LH rear tweeter speaker
12 LH rear mid-bass speaker
CONTROL DIAGRAM - JAGUAR 320W PREMIUM SOUND SYSTEM
www.JagDocs.com
ItemDescription
1 Battery
2 BJB
3 RJB
4 Power amplifier
5 RH rear mid-bass speaker
9 Subwoofer enclosure
10 LH front mid-bass speaker
CONTROL DIAGRAM - BOWERS & WILKINS 440W SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM
www.JagDocs.com
ItemDescription
1 Battery
2 BJB
3 RJB
4 Power amplifier
5 RH rear full range speaker
6 RH rear mid-bass speaker
9 RH front mid-range speaker
11 Front center speaker
12 Subwoofer enclosure
13 LH front mid-bass speaker
14 LH front mid-range speaker
18 LH rear full range speaker
System Operation
The Jaguar Sound System has 8 speakers, comprising an identical mid-bass and tweeter combination in each door. All
speaker domes in this system are of standard textile construction. The speakers are driven directly by the IAM (integrated
audio module) internal amplifier.
The Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System has 9 speakers including mid-bass and tweeters in the doors, adding a
sub-woofer in the spare wheel well. The speakers are driven by an Alpine AUD 8 amplifier located in the LH side of the
luggage compartment.
The Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System uses an Alpine AUD 12 amplifier, a Dolby Pro-Logic 2 7.1 Surround
Sound System and has 14 speakers. This layout adds a mid-range speaker to each front door while retaining a mid-bass
and tweeter in each rear door. It also adds an instrument panel center speaker, 2 surround-effect speakers in the rear
parcel shelf, and has the luggage compartment-mounted sub-woofer as the Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System. The
speakers are driven by an AUD 12 power amplifier located in the luggage compartment.
The main speakers on the Jaguar 320W Premium Sound System and the Bowers & Wilkins 440W Surround Sound System
are identified by the bright yellow Kevlar constructed domes which are visible through the speaker grilles. The tweeter
speaker domes are an aluminum construction. The sub-woofer speakers are a textile dome construction.
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Cellular Phone - Component
Location
www.JagDocs.com
ItemDescription
2 Touch-screen
4 Microphone
5 Steering wheel controls
6 Navigation Computer
7 Power amplifier
8 Speakers
9 Telephone control module
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Cellular Phone - Overview
Authoring Template
OVERVIEW
The cellular phone system uses the customers own Bluetooth® capable handset in conjunction with the vehicle
information and entertainment system. The telephone control module is located under the left-hand front seat, and has a
Bluetooth® antenna integrated into the unit. Telephone handsets must be paired with the telephone control module,
requiring input of a PIN (personal identification number) before they can be used with the vehicle system. Once paired, any
phone can be docked to the car without re-entering a PIN (personal identification number). In addition to this, the last
connected device will dock automatically the next time it is placed in the vehicle and the ignition is in power mode
(ignition on).
The system has the ability to pair and dock telephone handsets from the telephones themselves. By supplying a fixed PIN
(personal identification number), a user will be able to use their telephone or other telephone related Bluetooth® device
and pair with it without using the touch screen. This enables devices such as Blackberry's and other secure PDA's (personal
digital assistants) to pair and dock with the vehicle system.
Up to 5 telephone handsets can be paired with the vehicle, but only 1 telephone can be used at a time. The Touch-screen
displays phone functionality, including dialing, and (if compatible) the handset’s phone book. The Touch-screen also
displays the phone's signal strength and battery meter (if supported by the phone). These functions allow the user to view
the displays on the Touch-screen and not have to use the handset.
• NOTE: There is no physical connection (cradle) between the phone handset and the telephone control module.
Communications between the 2 components are purely Bluetooth®. This can limit the available functions dependant on
the handset used.
The system allows the driver to make, receive and end phone calls using the Touch-screen, steering wheel switches and
voice recognition system (if fitted).
www.JagDocs.com
Phone dialing is achieved using one of the following methods:
Dialing a number using the Touch-screen keypad

Selecting a number from the handsets (automatically or manually downloaded) phonebook on the Touch-screen
Selecting a number from the handsets (automatically or manually downloaded) phonebook in the instrument cluster
message center
Selecting from the handsets (downloaded) call register, typically the last 10 calls made, received and missed
The telephone control module is connected to the information and entertainment system on the MOST (media oriented
systems transport) ring. This allows audio and control signals to be routed to and from the telephone control module.
Information and Entertainment System - Cellular Phone - System Operation
Control Diagram
• NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN bus; P = MOST ring
www.JagDocs.com
ItemDescription
1 Touch-screen
2 Power amplifier
3 Speakers
5 Microphone
6 Telephone control module
7 Clock spring
8 Steering wheel controls
11 Navigation computer
System Operation
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Primary user control of the phone system is via the Touch-screen and JaguarVoice control switch. Selection of
'phone/comms' on the Touch-screen home menu sends a control signal to the telephone control unit on the MOST (media
orientated systems transport) ring, opening the phone submenu options.
When making an outgoing phone call using the JaguarVoice function the ICM (information control module) processes the
analogue signal from the switch into a digital signal. The digital signal is passed from the ICM (information control
module) onto the MOST (media orientated systems transport) system to the JaguarVoice control unit which is integral with
the navigation computer.
The navigation computer sends an instruction via MOST (media orientated systems transport) to the IAM (integrated audio
module) to turn on the microphone facility.
The voice command signals are relayed from the IAM (integrated audio module) via the MOST (media orientated systems
transport) ring to the navigation computer for processing.
The processed voice command is relayed on the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring from the navigation
computer to the phone control module.
Speech output information is transferred from the phone control module via the Bluetooth® connection to the cell phone.
Incoming calls are received from the Bluetooth® phone by the phone control module. The information is processed by the
phone control module and transferred on the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring to the power amplifier or IAM
(integrated audio module) for audio output through the vehicle’s audio speaker system.
A number of responses by the telephone and voice systems are reinforced by messages appearing in the instrument cluster
message center display. Information is relayed to the message center from the phone control module and navigation
computer on the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring to the ICM (information control module).
The ICM (information control module) is the gateway from the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring to the
medium speed CAN. The ICM (information control module) transfers the message center information onto the medium
www.JagDocs.com
speed CAN which is received and processed for display on the instrument cluster message center.
Users can pair & dock their handset using their phone or the touch screen. If there is no phone already docked with the
system, a user can use their phone to search for Bluetooth Devices. If the vehicles Bluetooth system has been successfully
discovered, the phone will display "Jaguar" as a device to pair & connect to. Using this method requires the user to enter
the Jaguar PIN of 1313. Alternatively, after accessing the phone menu from the Touch-screen home menu, selecting
‘Search New’ searches for the Bluetooth® enabled handsets within range, displays their identities on screen, and allows
the user to pair and dock the phone ready for use, using a random four-digit security code displayed on screen. The system
will normally try to dock (automatically) to the last phone docked, but if a different Bluetooth® enabled phone enters the
car it will become available on the screen’s list of handsets once the search has been completed.
Once a phone is paired and docked a digit dial screen is displayed, including phonebook options. W ith a Bluetooth®
compatible handset and software version there is the option, through the settings menu, to automatically download the
contents of the handset’s phonebook to the vehicle system. Because there is no industry standard for arranging the
phonebook, the downloaded lists from individual handsets may vary.
Cell phone handset manufacturers continually update hardware and software to standard specifications laid down by the
Bluetooth® Special Interest Group (SIG), which defined how Bluetooth® would work in an automotive environment.
However, because different makes and models may use different software, not all handsets are fully compatible with
Jaguar, but through testing individual handset models Jaguar has produced a list of compatible handsets and the
appropriate software version for Jaguar Bluetooth® connectivity. Referral to the list also describes how to check the
software version of each individual cell phone manufacturer. This list must be consulted by users, sales & service teams to
confirm whether customer's handsets are compatible or not.
Jaguar is continually validating compatible handset and software combinations. The most up-to-date compatibility list will
always be available on-line from Jaguar.
• NOTE: To achieve full Bluetooth® handset functionality it is crucial that the phone software level matches the version
detailed in the list of compatible handsets.
The upgraded hands free profile of this system allows the display of the network signal strength, network operator and
phone battery level indication on the vehicle display. Also, if applicable, the phone handset will show a "car" or "headset"
symbol to indicate it is in handsfree profile.
BLUETOOTH®
Bluetooth® is a short-range RF (radio frequency) technology that operates at 2.4 GHz and is capable of transmitting voice
and data wirelessly. The effective range of Bluetooth® devices is 32 feet (10 meters) with a data transfer rate of 1 Mbps.
Bluetooth® is essentially a wireless connection which operates with the user's own mobile handset, does not have to be
fixed into the car and is designed to function without an external aerial. The handset can be located anywhere within the
cabin, even in a bag, or jacket pocket. It could work from the luggage compartment, although the signal could be
compromised. The handset can be charged from the 12 volt power socket or USB (if supported) while in use.
Touch-Screen
The Touch-screen communicates with the telephone control module on the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring
and provides the primary user interface and display of the phone system.
ItemDescription
1 Touch-screen
3 Home menu button
The following functions are available on the phone menu:
Digit dial
www.JagDocs.com
Phone book
Last ten calls (made, received, missed)
Voicemail
ItemDescription
1 Volume adjustment
2 Scroll up/down to next/previous memory location.
3 Audio source (Long press for instrument cluster message center phonebook access)
4 JaguarVoice button. Briefly press to initiate or end a call. This is also used for voice control functions
Additional control of the phone system is available in the form of steering wheel mounted switches which are located on
the left hand side of the steering wheel. The switches provide for volume adjustment, scroll up/down to next/previous
memory location, instrument cluster message center phonebook access and finally JaguarVoice/call control.
The steering wheel control switches are hardwired through the clock spring to the ICM (information control module). The
ICM (information control module) processes the analogue signals from the switches into digital signals. The digital signals
are then passed from the ICM (information control module) onto the MOST (media orientated systems transport) system
for control unit processing and operation of the requested functions.
JaguarVoice
JaguarVoice enables activation of several voice activated functions of the infotainment and climate control systems
without the need to touch any controls manually. The following systems include JaguarVoice functionality;
Navigation system
Phone system
Climate control system
Vehicle display system
Vehicle notepad
The 'notepad' facility allows voice notes to be recorded. Nametags for phone dialing and navigation locations allow the
system to be personalized and there is a help and tutorial function to provide advice on using the system.
The system allows the vehicle user to concentrate fully on driving the vehicle, without any need to divert their eyes from
the road ahead in order to check information read outs on the vehicle instrument panel information units. The voice control
system also feeds back audible information to the vehicle user.
JaguarVoice is a key component of the phone system, allowing hands free control and use of the Bluetooth® enabled
phone.
The system is controlled by the voice button on the left hand side of the steering wheel. Voice commands are picked by
the dedicated microphone. When giving a voice command audible feedback will be heard through the vehicle’s audio
speakers. Received call voice/speech is also broadcast on the vehicle audio speaker system. All speakers are used for
voice/speech output with the exception of the front center speaker (only fitted on the Bowers & W ilkins 440W Surround
Sound System) due to echo return picked up by the microphone.
www.JagDocs.com
ItemDescription
1 JaguarVoice button
Efficient operation of JaguarVoice is reliant on the user understanding some of the following basic operating conditions;
Face forwards, sitting in a normal driving position

After pressing the voice button, always wait for the end of the audible tone before speaking.
Speak naturally, as if you were talking to a passenger or on the phone without pausing between words
When the system asks for more information, always wait for the end of the tone before responding
Always say numbers correctly
Excessive noise, for example while driving with windows open, may cause voice command mis-recognition. If it is
too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized
Most accents are understood without difficulty, but if the system does not recognize the command it will respond "SORRY"
and allow two more attempts to say the command.
Voice feedback is given in the same language as the command recognition. It is possible to change the language of the
speech control system.
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Navigation System - Component
Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
2 Touch-screen
4 Microphone
5 Roof pod antenna module (GPS antenna)
6 RF filter
8 Power amplifier
9 RF filter
10 Diversity antenna module (VICS/TMC antenna)
12 VICS (vehicle information and communication system) beacon antenna - Japan only
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Navigation System - Overview
OVERVIEW
The navigation system provides audible and visual route guidance information to enable the driver to reach a desired
destination. The system allows the driver to choose the desired route using minor or major roads and will present 3 routes to
the driver based on user preferences. Directions to hospitals, museums, monuments and hotels are also available. The
navigation computer uses map information stored on a DVD (digital versatile disc) to determine the best route for the journey
and provide the driver with details of directions and approaching junctions.
The navigation system has various levels of user control through the Touch-screen and JaguarVoice system. System volume
adjustment can be made using the ICP (integrated control panel), Touch-screen and steering wheel controls.
There are 3 navigation system variants specific to various markets. On all systems the GPS (global positioning system) signal
is received by the GPS (global positioning system) antenna located in the roof pod antenna module.
The European navigation system includes the TMC (traffic messaging channel) function, which receives traffic information from
an FM antenna integrated into the heated rear window. On a pre-selected route the system will offer re-routing options
depending on traffic conditions.
The Japanese navigation system includes the VICS (vehicle information and communication systems) function. The VICS
(vehicle information and communication systems) supplies information to enable the navigation computer to re-route the
navigation guidance or to inform the vehicle driver of traffic conditions in the vehicles vicinity. Information is provided to the
system through an FM antenna integrated into the heated rear window and a VICS beacon located in the LH upper side of the
instrument panel.
The NAS (North American specification) variant does not include any additional traffic information systems.
The navigation system is primarily controlled from the Touch-screen which is located in the center of the instrument panel.
www.JagDocs.com
Control signals from the Touch-screen are sent on the MOST (media oriented systems transport) ring to the navigation
computer. The navigation computer uses a dedicated GVIF (gigabit video interface) bus to transmit video signals to the Touch-
screen.
Depending upon the audio system version fitted the navigation audio output signals are sent on the MOST (media oriented
systems transport) ring to the IAM (integrated audio module) or the power amplifier for speaker output.
Information and Entertainment System - Navigation System - System
Control Diagram
NOTE: A = Hardwired; D = High Speed CAN bus; N = Medium Speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus; P = MOST ring; Q = GVIF; T
= CoAxial
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
3 Touch-screen
4 Power amplifier
5 Speakers
7 Microphone
9 VICS (vehicle information and communication system) beacon antenna - Japan only
10 Roof pod antenna module (GPS (global positioning system) antenna)
11 Diversity antenna module (VICS/TMC antenna)
14 Clock spring
System Operation
Authoring Template
INTRODUCTION TO THE GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM

The system used to calculate the current position of the vehicle is called the GPS. The system utilizes satellites which are
owned by the United States Department of Defense. A total of 24 satellites circular orbit the earth every 12 hours at a height
of 20,000 km (12500 miles), and between 5 and 11 of these satellites can be seen from a single point at any given time. The
orbits are tilted to the earth's equator by 55 degrees to ensure coverage of polar regions. Each satellite transmits radio signals
to provide information about the satellite position i.e. latitude, longitude, altitude, almanac data and an accurate time signal
generated by an on-board atomic clock. Each satellite contains four atomic clocks.
The vehicle needs to receive data from at least four different satellites to give a three dimensional fix on its current position.
As the vehicle moves, this information is continually being updated. The computer determines which satellites are 'visible' to
www.JagDocs.com
the system and their current position and relationship to each other. Using this information the computer can account for
positional deviations of the satellites and compensate to enhance the accuracy of the navigation system.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
The GPS signal is also known as the PPS (precision positioning signal).
PPS (precision positioning signal) predictable accuracy is:
22 meters horizontal accuracy

27.7 meters vertical accuracy
200 nanoseconds time accuracy
The navigation system receives GPS information via the GPS antenna. The GPS signals are used by the navigation computer to
calculate the vehicles position. Once the driver has input a desired destination the navigation computer can calculate a route,
based on the driver's pre-determined preferences or the default settings in the navigation computer.
The navigation system is accessed from the Touch-screen home menu.
Navigation is initiated by the driver inputting a destination. This can be achieved by:
Entering an address using the Touch-screen

Entering a post code
Choosing a previous destination
Choosing a point of interest from the map disc database
Choosing the home location
Choosing a memory stored location
The driver is then guided to the destination by a scrolling map display and voice guidance. The display can be varied by scale
and display type.
In addition to the standard navigation system there are two market dependant systems that supply extra information to the
navigation system and the driver. These are:
TMC (traffic message channel) (Europe only)

VICS (vehicle information and communication system) (Japan only)
The TMC (traffic message channel) is a function of the FM (frequency modulation)RDS (radio data system). The system
broadcasts real-time traffic and weather information. Data messages are received and decoded by the TMC (traffic message
channel) integral receiver and processed by the navigation computer. TMC (traffic message channel) messages can be filtered
by the navigation computer so that only those relevant to the current journey are displayed, allowing the navigation system to
offer dynamic route guidance - alerting the driver of a problem on the planned route and calculating an alternative route to
avoid the incident. All TMC (traffic message channel) events on the map can be viewed not just the ones on the calculated
route.
TMC (traffic message channel) traffic information systems conform to a global standard that has been adopted by traffic data
gatherers, information service providers, broadcasters and vehicle/receiver manufacturers.
All TMC (traffic message channel) receivers use the same list of event codes, while the location database (on the map disc)
contains both a country-specific set of location codes for the strategic European road network.
TMC (traffic message channel) traffic data is currently broadcast in many European countries.
The VICS (vehicle information and communication system) is broadcast in the Japanese market.
The VICS (vehicle information and communication system) supplies information to enable the navigation computer to re-route
the navigation guidance or to inform the vehicle driver of traffic conditions in the vehicles vicinity. Information is provided to
the system through 3 routes:
RF (radio frequency) transmission

Infra-red transmission
FM multiplex transmissions
The RF (radio frequency) transmissions are generally transmitted from road side beacons mainly on expressways. The
www.JagDocs.com
information transmitted is as follows:
Traffic congestion
Travel time to next intersection
Traffic conditions in surrounding areas and expressway turn offs
Traffic accidents
Speed limits
Lane regulations
Tire change
Parking availability at expressway service areas and parking areas
Infra-Red transmissions are transmitted from road side beacons on major trunk roads. The information transmitted is:
Traffic congestion and travel time

Traffic accidents
Breakdowns
Road works restrictions
Parking availability
FM transmissions are broadcast as part of the FM multiplex broadcasting system from NHK FM stations. Information
transmitted is:
Traffic congestion and travel time for wide areas

Traffic accidents, road works, speed limits and lane restrictions for a wide area
Parking availability information
The traffic data is split from the normal FM transmissions by the diversity antenna module.
Selection of 'Navigation' on the Touch-screen home menu and subsequent sub-menu selection sends a control request signal to
the navigation computer on the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring. The requested control information is
processed by the navigation computer.
If voice guidance is operational the voice signal information is relayed from the navigation computer on the MOST (media
orientated systems transport) ring to either the IAM (integrated audio unit) or Power Amplifier, dependant on equipment level,
for output on the speaker system. The navigation audio output is through the front speakers whilst the background audio, for
example radio or CD (compact disc), is played at a reduced volume on the rear speakers.
The GPS signal is available to the navigation system at all times when the vehicle ignition is switched on.
Navigation user voice commands are made using the JaguarVoice system. The ICM (information control module) processes the
analogue signal from the JaguarVoice switch into a digital signal. The digital signal is passed from the ICM (information control
module) onto the MOST (media orientated systems transport) system to the JaguarVoice control unit which is integral with the
navigation computer.
The navigation computer sends an instruction via the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring to the IAM (integrated
audio module) to turn on the microphone facility.
The microphone is hardwired to the IAM (integrated audio module). The spoken voice command signals are relayed from the
IAM (integrated audio module) via the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring to the navigation computer for
processing.
The processed voice command is relayed from the navigation computer to the Touch-screen.
Traffic data from TMC (traffic message channel) or VICS (vehicle information and communication system) is processed by the
navigation computer, distributed to the Touch-screen with any supporting voice instruction relayed through the MOST (media
orientated systems transport) ring to either the IAM (integrated audio unit) or Power Amplifier, dependant on equipment level,
for output on the speaker system.
A number of actions, when using the navigation voice system, are reinforced by messages appearing in the instrument cluster
message center display. Information is relayed to the message center from the navigation computer on the MOST (media
orientated systems transport) ring to the ICM (information control module).
The ICM (information control module) is the gateway from the MOST (media orientated systems transport) ring to the medium
speed CAN (controller area network). The ICM (information control module) transfers the message center information onto the
medium speed CAN which is received and processed for display on the instrument cluster message center.
NAVIGATION COMPUTER
The navigation computer is located in the left hand side of the luggage compartment.
www.JagDocs.com
The navigation computer incorporates the following:
GPS receiver
VICS (vehicle information and communication system) receiver (Japan only)
TMC (traffic message channel) receiver (Europe only)
JaguarVoice control module
The navigation computer contains a solid state piezo gyro which measures the motion of the vehicle around its vertical axis.
The gyro operates on the principle known as the coriolis force. The coriolis force is the force that appears to accelerate a body
moving away from its rotational axis against the direction of rotation of the axis.
Using inputs from the ABS module, the GPS antenna and the gyro sensor, the computer calculates the vehicle's current
position, direction and speed.
The navigation computer houses the DVD (digital versatile disc) drive. The drive is used to read map data from region specific
DVD's. The number of DVD's issued per region varies depending on the amount of information available. The regions are as
follows:
Europe (2 versions, Western Europe and Whole of Europe)

NAS (North American specification)
Japan, Middle East, Australia and South Africa
A button, located adjacent to the DVD slot, is provided to eject the DVD from the unit. Prior to ejecting the disc the slot
protection has to be slid to the side. If the ignition is on, or the entertainment system is in 1-hour mode, one press of the
button will eject the DVD.
The navigation computer uses non-volatile memory to store settings and configuration information when it is powered down.
This process takes place just before the computer turns off.
No configuration procedure is required if the navigation computer is replaced. There is no option to calibrate the navigation
computer using the Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment; however in some regions a software download, contained in the
DVD disc, is required before the navigation system becomes operational.
www.JagDocs.com
MICROPHONE
A single microphone is used for hands-free operation using the JaguarVoice system. The microphone has an integrated noise
suppression system for hands-free use. The microphone is a standard directional type and is located in the front roof overhead
console. The microphone is hardwired to the IAM (integrated audio module). When replacing the microphone extra care must be
taken to make sure it is fitted into its securing clips for correct positioning and orientation.
GPS Antenna
The GPS antenna passes signals from the GPS satellites to the navigation computer for processing. The antenna is located in
the roof pod and is shared with the DAB (digital audio broadcasting) band L antenna or satellite radio antenna where fitted.
The roof pod is located externally in a central position towards the rear of the roof.
The GPS antenna is designed with 50 ohm output impedance. The navigation computer is fitted with 50 ohm fakra II
connectors to ensure compatibility with the antenna. For optimum performance 50 ohm low loss coaxial cable is used between
the antenna and navigation computer.
It is possible for the GPS antenna to lose the signal from the GPS satellites;
In hilly or tree lined areas

Built up areas with tall buildings
In multi storey car parks
In garages
In tunnels
On bridges
During heavy rain or thunderstorms
When the signal is lost the navigation computer will continue to give guidance using memory mapped data from the DVD map
until the signal is restored.
TMC/VICS FM Antenna
Data messages for both TMC (traffic message channel) and VICS (vehicle information and communication system) are received
through the FM antennas and diversity antenna module located in the heated rear window.
VICS Beacon Antenna (Japan Only)

www.JagDocs.com
The VICS (vehicle information and communication system) beacon antenna receives infra red and RF (radio frequency) traffic
data signals from road side transmitters. The antenna is connected to the navigation computer which incorporates a VICS
(vehicle information and communication system) receiver.
Touch Screen Display
The Touch-screen is the control interface for the following vehicle systems;
System Functions
Audio Radio display AM/FM or DAB (digital audio broadcast), auxiliary and portable audio, digital TV or CD
Climate Air conditioning, distribution, seats, heated steering wheel, automatic air recirculation
control
Telephone Digit dialer, phone book, last ten calls (made, received, missed)
www.JagDocs.com
System Functions
Navigation Destination, stored locations, navigation setup, route options
Vehicle Security, parking, valet mode, trip computer, clock, brightness, contrast, system settings, vehicle settings,
display settings
The screen is a touch sensitive 7 inch LCD (liquid crystal display) VGA screen containing 800 x 480 pixels in a 15:9 format. The
screen processes its own video for system operation but receives the navigation graphics from the navigation computer.
Item Description
1 Volume adjustment
www.JagDocs.com
2 Scroll wheel (No navigation functionality)

3 Audio source (No navigation functionality)
4 JaguarVoice control
Additional control of the navigation system is available in the form of steering wheel mounted switches which are located on
the left hand side of the steering wheel. 2 switches are used for navigation functions;
Volume adjustment
JaguarVoice control
JaguarVoice enables operation of several voice activated functions of the infotainment and climate control systems without the
need to touch any controls manually. The following systems include JaguarVoice functionality;
Navigation system
Phone system
Climate control system
Vehicle display system
Vehicle notepad
The 'notepad' facility allows voice notes to be recorded. Nametags for phone dialing and navigation locations allow the system
to be personalized and there is a help and tutorial function to provide advice on using the system.
The system allows the vehicle user to concentrate fully on driving the vehicle, without any need to divert their eyes from the
road ahead in order to check information read outs on the vehicle instrument panel information units. The voice control system
also feeds back audible information to the vehicle user.
JaguarVoice is a key component of the navigation system, allowing hands free control when issuing navigation commands.
The system is controlled by the voice button on the left hand side of the steering wheel. Voice commands are picked up by a
dedicated microphone. When giving a voice command audible feedback will be heard through the vehicle’s audio speakers.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 JaguarVoice button
Efficient operation of JaguarVoice is reliant on the user understanding some of the following basic operating conditions;
Face forwards, sitting in a normal driving position

After pressing the voice button, always wait for the end of the tone before speaking.
Speak naturally, as if you were talking to a passenger or on the phone without pausing between words
When the system asks for more information, always wait for the end of the tone before responding
Always say numbers correctly
Excessive noise, for example while driving with windows open, may cause voice command mis-recognition. For example
if it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
Most accents are understood without difficulty, but if the system does not recognize the command it will respond "SORRY" and
allow two more attempts to say the command.
Voice feedback is given in the same language as the command recognition. It is possible to change the language of the speech
control system.
Information and Entertainment System - Video System - Component
Location
www.JagDocs.com
ItemDescription
2 Touch-screen
4 Microphone
5 Triple TV (television) antenna module
6 RF filter
7 Single TV (television) antenna module
8 Power amplifier
9 TV (television) tuner
10 RF filter
12 Steering wheel remote controls
Information and Entertainment System - Video System - Overview
OVERVIEW
The Television system combines digital and analogue reception. The digital element is similar to the home based freeview
system, and displays information such as current channel detail. The Japanese market uses the analogue signal as the
digital format is not compatible.
For legal reasons, the Touch-screen Television image can only be displayed when the vehicle is at rest, however the
system is configured not to constantly switch on and off in stop-start traffic. It is possible to listen to Television sound as
the vehicle is moving.
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Video System - System Operation
Control Diagram
• NOTE: A = Hardwired; N = Medium Speed CAN (controller area network) bus; O = LIN bus; P = MOST ring; T = CoAxial; I
= Composite video signal
www.JagDocs.com
ItemDescription
2 TV (television) tuner
3 Touch-screen
4 Microphone
6 Speakers
7 Power amplifier
8 Clock spring
9 Steering wheel remote controls
www.JagDocs.com
System Operation
The Television system has various levels of user control through the Touch-screen, ICP (integrated control panel) and
steering wheel control panel. The system includes nine analogue and nine digital channel pre-sets. As with the audio
system, the user can search up or down and store by a long press of the selected channel button. The system offers a
choice of screen aspect ratios similar to a typical domestic receiver, giving options between the standard 4:3 format, wide
screen 16:9 format and zoom to fill the screen.
To provide the strongest possible signal the Television tuner receives signals from 4 antenna sources located in the
heated rear window. Unlike domestic systems this system gives a more progressive picture loss if the signal is lost. The
signal loss is indicated to the user by a ‘loss of reception’ screen message.
The Television system is primarily controlled from the Touch-screen and the ICP (integrated control panel) which are
located in the center of the instrument panel. Control signals from the Touch-screen display are sent on the MOST (media
oriented systems transport) ring to the Television tuner. The Television tuner uses a dedicated CVBS (composite video
signal) bus to transmit video signals to the Touch-screen.
Control signals from the ICP (Integrated control panel) are relayed on the medium speed CAN bus to the ICM (information
control module). The ICM (information control module) relays the control signals to the Television tuner on the MOST
(media oriented systems transport) ring. The ICM (information control module) is the timing master for the MOST (media
oriented systems transport) ring and also hosts a gateway function between the medium speed CAN bus and the MOST
(media oriented systems transport) ring.
Depending upon the audio system version fitted the Television tuner audio output signals are sent on the MOST (media
oriented systems transport) ring to the IAM (integrated audio module) or the power amplifier for speaker output.
TELEVISION TUNER
www.JagDocs.com
The television tuner is a DVB-T (digital video broadcasting - terrestrial) receiver and consists of a 'front end' which is made
up of a tuner and a demodulator. Following pre-filtering, the tuner converts the signal from the antenna to an intermediate
frequency. In the demodulator, the signal is first converted to a basic frequency, so that a signal from a transponder can
be forwarded to the MPEG decoder as a transport stream. The transport stream usually contains several television
channels along with relevant auxiliary services such as teletext, subtitles and electronic program guides.
• NOTE: Not all digital features such as text and programme listings are currently available.
Control signals from the Touch-screen display are sent on the MOST (media oriented systems transport) ring to the
television tuner. The television tuner uses the dedicated CVBS (composite video signal) bus to transmit its video signals
to the Touch-screen. The CVBS (composite video signal) system utilizes a single wire transmission system and is limited in
bandwidth to less than 6MHz.
No configuration procedure is required if the television tuner is replaced. Calibration of the television tuner using the
Jaguar approved diagnostic equipment enables updates to be downloaded as new technology becomes available or any
www.JagDocs.com Television Antennas
ItemDescription
2 RF filter
4 Heated rear window
5 Heated rear window upper section
6 Heated rear window lower section
8 RF filter
The television tuner receives digital and analogue television signals through 4 antennas located in the heated rear
window. 3 of the antennas are connected to the triple antenna amplifier/module located on the RH (right-hand) side of the
heated rear window. A fourth antenna is connected to the single antenna amplifier/module located on the LH (left-hand)
side of the heated rear window.
The combination of signals from several antennas is known as 'diversity' reception. For example using two or more
antennas can reduce the signal error rate by 50%, which is of critical importance for mobile receivers.
Vehicle or other component generated electromagnetic interference may cause unwanted disturbance in the television
reception signals. The disturbance may interrupt, obstruct, or otherwise degrade or limit the effective performance of the
circuit.
Double coil RF (radio frequency) filters, which act as RF (radio frequency) isolators, are located on both sides of the heated
rear window and are used to reduce any electromagnetic interference. The LH side RF (radio frequency) filter is connected
across the heated rear window power supply and used to separate the DC (direct current) interference from the RF (radio
frequency) signals. The positive filter is present on all vehicle types and markets.
The right hand side double coil RF (radio frequency) filter is only used in conjunction with the television antenna modules
and is connected across the heated rear window ground circuit. If a television system is not fitted a filter is used which is
linked directly to ground.
Touch-Screen
www.JagDocs.com
ItemDescription
1 Touch-screen
3 Home menu button
The Touch-screen is the primary user interface for the television system. From the 'Home' screen menu television is a
sub-menu of 'Audio'. The Touch-screen communicates with the television tuner. Video signals to the Touch-screen are
transmitted from the television tuner.

ItemDescription
1 Touch-screen
2 Seek up button
3 Settings button
4 On/off and volume control
5 Source button
6 Seek down button
The ICP (integrated control panel) duplicates many of the Touch-screen television user control features. The ICP
(integrated control panel) communicates with the television system through the medium speed CAN and MOST (media
orientated systems transport) bus systems.

www.JagDocs.com
ItemDescription
1 Volume adjustment
2 Change pre-set TV (television) stations
3 Select source
4 Audio mute control/JaguarVoice control
Additional control of the television system is available in the form of steering wheel mounted switches which are located
on the left hand side of the steering wheel. The 4 switches provide for volume adjustment, change pre-set television
stations, select media source and finally audio mute control. The mute control is also used for JaguarVoice control.
Information and Entertainment System - Information and Entertainment
System
For additional information. REFER to: (415-00 Information and Entertainment System - General Information)
Information and Entertainment System (Diagnosis and Testing),

Cellular Phone (Diagnosis and Testing),
Navigation System (Diagnosis and Testing).
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Audio Unit
Removal
2. Refer to: Audio and Climate Control Assembly (415-01A Information and
3. CAUTION: Protect the surrounding trim to avoid

damage.
www.JagDocs.com
4. CAUTION: Cover fiber optic cable connectors to

minimize dust ingress and avoid bending the cables in a
radius of less than 30 mm.
Torque: 3 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com

Information and Entertainment System - Audio Unit Antenna Amplifier
Removal
2. Refer to: C-Pillar Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
3. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4.
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Audio and Climate Control
Assembly
Removal
1. Remove both floor console side trim panels.
2. Torque: 4 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Front Door Speaker
Removal
1. Refer to: Front Door Trim Panel (501-05, Removal and Installation).
2.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Display
Removal
2. Refer to: Center Registers (412-01 Climate Control, Removal and

Installation).
3. Torque: 2 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4. CAUTION: Cover fiber optic cable connectors to

minimize dust ingress and avoid bending the cables in a
radius of less than 30 mm.
Torque: 3 Nm
Installation

www.JagDocs.com
Module
Removal
2. Refer to: Audio Unit (415-01A Information and Entertainment System,

3. Torque: 3 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
1. NOTE: New units must be configured using the Programmable

Module Installation Routine in the diagnostic tool.

Information and Entertainment System - Instrument Panel Speaker
Removal
2. Refer to: Instrument Panel Speaker Grille (501-05 Interior Trim and
3. Torque: 2 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4.
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Rear Door Speaker
Removal
1. Refer to: Rear Door Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation,
2.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Information and Entertainment System - Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Removal
Refer to: Standard Workshop Practices (100-00 General Information,

2. Refer to: Driver Air Bag Module (501-20B Supplemental Restraint

System, Removal and Installation).
3. Refer to: Upshift Paddle Switch (307-05A Automatic

Installation).
4. Refer to: Downshift Paddle Switch (307-05A Automatic

Installation).
www.JagDocs.com
5. Torque: 3 Nm
6. Torque: 3 Nm
7. Torque: 6 Nm
8.
www.JagDocs.com
9.
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Subwoofer Amplifier
Removal

3. Torque: 7 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4. Torque: 7 Nm
5.

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 7 Nm
7. Torque: 7 Nm
Installation

Information and Entertainment System - Subwoofer Speaker
Removal
2.
www.JagDocs.com
3. Torque: 6 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
4. Torque: 6 Nm
Installation
www.JagDocs.com

Information and Entertainment System - Satellite Radio Tuner
Removal
NOTES:
2. Refer to: Front Seat (501-10 Seating, Removal and Installation).
3.
www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 10 Nm
6. Torque: 10 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
7.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
1. NOTE: If a new component is installed, a link lead must

be installed to the module in the position shown.

Information and Entertainment System - DTC: Audio Input Control Module -
Audio Input Control Module
This section of the manual concerns diagnostic procedures for the Dension audio input control module. For a detailed
description of the information and entertainment system, refer to the relevant description and operation sections in the
workshop manual
Visual Inspection
Audio input control module Fuses

Integrated audio module Audio amplifier module
Integrated control panel Integrated audio module
Touch screen display Integrated control panel
www.JagDocs.com
Loudspeakers Touch screen display

Loudspeakers
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for diagnostic trouble codes and refer to the relevant diagnostic trouble codes
index
Audio Input Control Module Diagnostics
NOTE: If problems are reported with the audio input control module, prior to further diagnostic checks or replacement of
components, first perform a hardware reset by depressing the reset button for a minimum of two seconds. If problems persist,
refer to the symptom charts below
Performing A Hardware Reset
Symptom Chart - Intermittent Fault With iPOD® Playback

Intermittent fault
with iPOD® The connected iPOD® unit has See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A1
playback crashed or frozen "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
www.JagDocs.com
The connected iPOD® unit's See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A2
battery is not holding charge and "Check The iPOD® Battery" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
requires replacement
The iPOD® dock cable is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A3
securely installed "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When Connected To The
The iPOD® dock cable is faulty Audio Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
Symptom Chart - Intermittent Fault With Playback From USB Device

Intermittent fault
with USB The USB memory stick Check for correct operation by connecting another working USB
playback is damaged or faulty memory stick loaded with a compatible test file (files may be
The USB memory stick downloaded from Dension website). If fault clears, then the original
is incompatible with USB stick should be replaced. If problem persists, suspect a fault with
the audio input control the USB extension cable
module
The USB extension See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test B3 "Check The
cable is not securely USB Extension Cable Is Operational And Securely Installed" below GO
installed to Pinpoint Test B.
The USB extension
cable is faulty
The audio input control Ensure all connectors of the audio input control module power harness
module power harness are correctly secured
www.JagDocs.com
is not securely installed If problem persists, check and install a new audio input control
The audio input control module power harness
module power harness
is faulty
Not all sound

files on the USB Sound files may be Check that affected sound file is encoded in a compatible file format
are played saved in an - Compatible file formats: AAC (up to 320 kbit/s); MP3 (up to
incompatible file format 320 kbit/s); MP3 variable bit rate (up to 320 kbit/s); WAV -
uncompressed files; OGG (up to 320 kbit/s); WMA - except
DRM protected files (up to 320 kbit/s)
Sound files may be Check integrity of affected files and remove any damaged files from
corrupted the memory stick
Symptom Chart - No Response From CDC Button

No response
when the CDC USB input or iPOD® input First check operation of iPOD® playback. If iPOD® operates
button is pressed faulty normally but USB playback is faulty, then follow diagnostic
procedures as specified in pinpoint test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback operates normally,
then follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A
The auxiliary input may be See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test A5:
switched to bypass mode "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary Input Unit Is
Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
The audio input control Ensure all connectors of the audio input control module power
module power harness is not harness are correctly secured
securely installed See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint tests C1:
The audio input control "Check The Integrity Of Power Supply From Vehicle" and C2:
module power "Check The Integrity And Operation Of The Audio Input Control
supply/harness is faulty Module Power Harness" below GO to Pinpoint Test C.
Optical cables/connectors (if Ensure the optical cables are routed appropriately to avoid
fitted) are not securely pinching the cable and with no excessive bends or kinks. Ensure
installed all connectors of the optical cables are correctly secured. Replace
Optical cables/connectors (if any damaged or faulty optical cables and/or connectors as
fitted) are faulty required
If no CD changer is fitted, ensure that the optical cables are
configured in a closed loop so that the optical circuit is intact
Symptom Chart - iPOD® Related Faults
iPOD® inoperative
iPOD® configured or If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback operates
connected incorrectly normally, then follow diagnostic procedures as
specified in pinpoint test A GO to Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® does not operate and

in-car display shows "99" on The connected iPOD® See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
the screen unit has crashed or frozen A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
The connected iPOD® See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test

unit's battery is flat and A2 "Check The iPOD® Battery" below GO to Pinpoint
requires charging Test A.
The connected iPOD®
unit's battery is not
holding charge and
The iPOD® unit is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
compatible with the audio A4 "Check The iPOD® Is Compatible With The Audio
input control module Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® playback drops out and

system reverts to radio input USB input or iPOD® input First check operation of iPOD® playback. If iPOD®
faulty operates normally but USB playback is faulty, then
follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback operates
www.JagDocs.com
normally, then follow diagnostic procedures as


unit has crashed or frozen A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.

holding charge and
The auxiliary input unit is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
faulty A6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary Input Unit"
below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® unit will not charge

when connected to the audio The iPOD® unit is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
input control module compatible with the audio A4 "Check The iPOD® Is Compatible With The Audio
The iPOD® dock cable is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
not securely installed A3 "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When Connected To
The iPOD® dock cable is The Audio Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint
faulty Test A.
iPOD® unit keeps cutting out

and rebooting The iPOD® unit is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
The iPOD® dock cable is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
not securely installed A3 "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When Connected To
The iPOD® dock cable is The Audio Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint
faulty Test A.

holding charge and
Unable to select specific

content on the iPOD® (ie: an Content/sound files Check if files/content can be accessed by iPOD® when
individual artist, album or corrupted or incompatible it is disconnected from the audio input control module.
song) with the iPOD® If fault persists, advise customer to renew or replace
the affected files
iPOD® not recognised when

connected The connected iPOD® See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
unit has crashed or frozen A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below GO to
Pinpoint Test A.
USB input or iPOD® input First check operation of iPOD® playback. If iPOD®
faulty operates normally but USB playback is faulty, then
follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
If iPOD® playback is faulty but USB playback operates
normally, then follow diagnostic procedures as
The auxiliary input may See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
be switched to bypass A5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary
mode Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
The auxiliary input unit is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
www.JagDocs.com
faulty A6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary Input Unit"

below GO to Pinpoint Test A.

holding charge and
The iPOD® unit is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
iPOD® connector pins are

misaligned The iPOD® dock cable is Replace dock cable as required. To ensure optimum
faulty compatibility, the cable with the white mini-DIN
connector - Part No C2S51762 - should be used
iPOD® not working at all. If

reset, the system will work for Optical cables/connectors Ensure the optical cables are routed appropriately to
6 songs then cuts out again. (if fitted) are not securely avoid pinching the cable and with no excessive bends
CDC button inoperative and installed or kinks. Ensure all connectors of the optical cables
CD sometimes cuts off for 2-3 Optical cables/connectors are correctly secured. Replace any damaged or faulty
seconds (if fitted) are faulty optical cables and/or connectors as required
If no CD changer is fitted, ensure that the optical
cables are configured in a closed loop so that the
optical circuit is intact
iPOD® inoperative. Display

shows no magazine The auxiliary input may See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint test
be switched to bypass A5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary
mode Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
iPOD® inoperative. Display

shows menu for CD6 and has Audio input control Download and install the latest system software.
to load all the tracks module software requires Software releases are available on the Dension
updating website - http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
Symptom Chart - USB Memory Stick/Storage Device Related Faults

No playback from memory
stick/storage device Memory stick/storage If iPOD® operates normally but USB playback is faulty,
device configured or then follow diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
connected incorrectly test B GO to Pinpoint Test B.
Symptom Chart - System Faults
System defaults to Audio/CD
Changer The auxiliary input unit See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
may be switched to test A5: "Check If The Bypass Switch On The Auxiliary
bypass mode Input Unit Is Activated" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
The auxiliary input unit is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

faulty test A6 "Check The Operation Of The Auxiliary Input
Unit" below GO to Pinpoint Test A.
The memory stick/storage See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

device is not correctly test B1 "Check For Correct Formatting" below GO to
formatted Pinpoint Test B.
The USB extension cable See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

is not securely installed test B3 "Check The USB Extension Cable Is
The USB extension cable Operational And Securely Installed" below GO to
is faulty Pinpoint Test B.
The USB memory stick is Check for correct operation by connecting another
damaged or faulty working USB memory stick loaded with a compatible
The USB memory stick is test file (files may be downloaded from Dension
incompatible with the website). If fault clears, then the original USB stick
audio input control should be replaced. If problem persists, suspect a
module fault with the USB extension cable
www.JagDocs.com
The storage capacity of See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

the memory stick/storage test B4 "Check The Capacity Of The Memory
device is close to or Stick/Storage Device" below GO to Pinpoint Test B.
exceeds 8 Gigabytes
The connected iPOD® See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

unit's battery is flat and test A2 "Check The iPOD® Battery" below GO to
requires charging Pinpoint Test A.
holding charge and
The iPOD® unit is not See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

compatible with the audio test A4 "Check The iPOD® Is Compatible With The
input control module Audio Input Control Module" below GO to Pinpoint
Test A.
The connected iPOD® See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

unit has crashed or frozen test A1 "Check The Operation Of The iPOD®" below
No sound from speakers The audio input control Ensure all connectors of the audio input control
(either front/rear or module power harness is module power harness are correctly secured
left/right) during not securely installed See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint
playback from The audio input control tests C1: "Check The Integrity Of Power Supply From
iPOD®/memory stick module power Vehicle" and C2: "Check The Integrity And Operation
Audio system loses supply/harness is faulty Of The Audio Input Control Module Power Harness"
connection to below GO to Pinpoint Test C.
iPOD®/memory stick
during playback
iPOD® and radio Optical cables/connectors Ensure the optical cables are routed appropriately to
playback skips after unit (if fitted) are not securely avoid pinching the cable and with no excessive bends
has been operating for 4 installed or kinks. Ensure all connectors of the optical cables
minutes Optical cables/connectors are correctly secured. Replace any damaged or faulty
(if fitted) are faulty optical cables and/or connectors as required
If no CD changer is fitted, ensure that the optical
cables are configured in a closed loop so that the
optical circuit is intact
The iPOD® dock cable is See diagnostic procedures as specified in pinpoint

not securely installed test A3 "Check The iPOD® Is Charging When
The iPOD® dock cable is Connected To The Audio Input Control Module" below
faulty GO to Pinpoint Test A.
PINPOINT TEST A : IPOD® INOPERATIVE
CONDITIONS
A1: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE IPOD®
1 Check if the iPOD® has crashed or frozen (it is unresponsive to any control commands)
Has the iPOD® crashed or frozen?
Yes
Reset the iPOD® or refer to Apple service procedures
No
GO to A2.
A2: CHECK THE IPOD® BATTERY
1 Check the charge state of the iPOD® battery
Is the iPOD® battery flat?
Yes
Charge the iPOD® battery for at least 10 minutes either by connecting to the charger supplied with the
iPOD® or by connecting to the audio input control module. If iPOD® will not charge when connected to
the audio input control module and with the ignition on thenGO to A3.
No
GO to A3.
A3: CHECK THE IPOD® IS CHARGING WHEN CONNECTED TO THE AUDIO INPUT CONTROL MODULE
iPOD® Dock Connector - Pin Configuration
www.JagDocs.com
1 Check that the iPOD® is charging when connected to the audio input control module
2 Ignition switch in position II.
3 Ensure the iPOD® dock cable is securely connected
Does the iPOD® charge up while connected to the audio input control module?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
Check the integrity of the iPOD® dock cable and its connections. Disconnect the iPOD® and check the
voltage readings of the iPOD® dock cable using a multimeter (Pin B8: 5 volts/Pin B15: GND). If a fault is
noted, replace dock cable as required. To ensure optimum compatibility, the cable with the white mini-DIN
connector - Part No C2S51762 - should be used. If iPOD® will not charge after replacement, then GO to
A4.
A4: CHECK THE IPOD® IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE AUDIO INPUT CONTROL MODULE
NOTES:
Some of the earlier (pre-2004) iPOD® models may not be compatible with the audio input control module. In order to
optimise functionality the audio input control module may require a firmware update and/or connection via the latest iPOD®
dock cable with the white mini-DIN connector - Part No C2S51762. See the manufacturer website for further details -
http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
Some of the earlier (pre-2004) iPOD® models may not be compatible with the audio input control module. In order to
optimise functionality the audio input control module may require a firmware update and/or connection via the latest iPOD®
dock cable with the white mini-DIN connector - Part No C2S51762. See the manufacturer website for further details -
http://www.dension.com
1 Determine whether the iPOD® model being used is compatible with the audio input control module
installed in the vehicle
2 Ensure the latest firmware updates are installed and an appropriate iPOD® dock cable is securely
connected
3 For advice, check details on the Dension website - http://www.dension.com/jaguar/
www.JagDocs.com
Is the iPOD® compatible with the audio input control module?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
Advise customer that an alternative device is required
A5: CHECK IF THE BYPASS SWITCH ON THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT IS ACTIVATED
Auxiliary Input Unit - Bypass Switch
1 Check the status of the bypass switch on the auxiliary input unit
Is the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
www.JagDocs.com
Toggle the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position. Turn off the ignition and wait two
minutes until the blue LED on the auxiliary input unit is extinguished. Switch ignition back on the complete
the switching process
A6: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT
1 Check the operation of the auxiliary input unit
2 Disconnect the auxiliary input unit from the audio input control module.
3 Ignition switch in position 0.
4 Wait two minutes
5 Install a new auxiliary input unit
Is the iPOD® now working?
Yes
No
Check the integrity of the iPOD® dock cable and its connectionsGO to A3.
PINPOINT TEST B : USB/STORAGE DEVICE DOES NOT POWER UP WHEN CONNECTED
CONDITIONS
B1: CHECK FOR CORRECT FORMATTING
NOTE: The storage device needs to be configured to FAT16 or FAT32 format
1 Check if the memory stick/storage device is correctly formatted

Is the storage device/memory stick configured to the FAT16 or FAT32 format?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
Reformat the storage device as required
B2: CHECK FOR FAULTY OR INCOMPATIBLE MEMORY STICK/STORAGE DEVICE
NOTE: Test files may be downloaded from Dension website
1Check the operation of the USB port on the auxiliary input unit by connecting another working USB
memory stick/storage device loaded with a compatible test file
Does the system operate normally when another USB memory stick/storage device is connected?
Yes
Replace the original USB memory stick/storage device
No
GO to B3.
B3: CHECK THE USB EXTENSION CABLE IS OPERATIONAL AND SECURELY INSTALLED
1 Check the integrity of the USB extension cable and its connections
Is the USB extension cable securely pushed into the USB connection port on the audio input control module
Yes
Replace the USB extension cable
No
Secure connections and retest
B4: CHECK THE CAPACITY OF THE MEMORY STICK/STORAGE DEVICE
NOTE: The higher the capacity of the memory stick is the longer it takes to register with the audio input control module
and power up. The maximum permitted capacity is 8 Gigabytes
1 Check the storage capacity of the memory stick/storage device does not exceed 8 Gigabytes
Is the storage capacity of the memory stick/storage device 8 Gigabytes or less?
Yes
High capacity devices may require longer to register and should be allowed up to two minutes to power up
following connection to the USB port. If memory stick fails to power up after two minutes, suspect a
faulty memory stick GO to B2. or USB extension cable GO to B3.
No
The memory stick/storage device exceeds the maximum permitted capacity. Replace with a device with a
capacity of 8 Gigabytes or less
B5: CHECK IF THE BYPASS SWITCH ON THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT IS ACTIVATED
Auxiliary Input Unit - Bypass Switch
www.JagDocs.com
1 Check the status of the bypass switch on the auxiliary input unit
Is the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position?
Yes
GO to B6.
No
Toggle the switch on the auxiliary input unit to the active mode position. Turn off the ignition and wait
two minutes until the blue LED on the auxiliary input unit is extinguished. Switch ignition back on the
complete the switching process
B6: CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE AUXILIARY INPUT UNIT
1 Check the operation of the auxiliary input unit
2 Disconnect the auxiliary input unit from the audio input control module.
3 Ignition switch in position 0.
4 Wait two minutes
5 Replace auxiliary input unit
Is the USB memory stick/storage device now powering up?
Yes
No
Check the integrity of the USB extension cable and its connectionsGO to B3.
PINPOINT TEST C : POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT/POWER HARNESS CHECKS
CONDITIONS
C1: CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF PRIMARY POWER SUPPLY
1 Remove the retrofitted audio input control module power harness
2 Reconnect the original power harness
Are the standard infotainment components on the vehicle operating normally?
Yes
GO to C2.
No
Check power and ground connections to the affected modules. Check for related power or lost
communications DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index. Check fuses and battery charging system.
Rectify as necessary
C2: CHECK THE INTEGRITY AND OPERATION OF THE AUDIO INPUT CONTROL MODULE POWER HARNESS
1 SELECT APPROPRIATE HARNESS TYPE BASED ON CONFIGURATION OF MICROFIT CONNECTOR
Audio Input Control Module Power Harness - 2x11 Microfit Connector
2 Reconnect the retrofit audio input control module power harness

3 Check the voltages of the 2x11 audio input control module microfit connector using a multimeter
Red wire: permanent 12 volts supply
Black wire: GND
Blue wire: switched 12 volts

www.JagDocs.com
Audio Input Control Module Power Harness - 2x2 Microfit Connector
4 Reconnect the retrofit audio input control module power harness

5 Check the voltages of the 2x2 audio input control module microfit connector using a multimeter
Red wire: permanent 12 volts supply
Black wire: GND
Purple wire: switched 12 volts
Are the voltage readings correct?

Yes
No further action
No
Replace the audio input control module power harness
DTC Index
For a list of diagnostic trouble codes that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to the relevant DTC index
Exterior Lighting -
Item Specification
Low beam headlamp bulb - Vehicles with conventional headlamps - non Federal H7
Low beam headlamp bulb - Vehicles with conventional headlamps - Federal H11
Low beam headlamp bulb - Vehicles with xenon headlamps D1S
High beam headlamp bulb H7
Cornering lamp bulb H8
Side repeater lamp bulb WY5W
Side marker lamp bulb - Federal W5W
Front turn signal lamp bulb - non Federal PY21W
Front turn signal lamp bulb - Federal 3457 AK
Rear turn signal lamp bulb PY19W
Front side/parking lamp bulb - Vehicles built up to 01/2009 W5W halogen cool blue
Front side/parking lamp bulb - Vehicles built 02/2009 onwards W5W
Reversing lamp bulb PS19W
www.JagDocs.com
Exterior Lighting - Exterior Lighting - Component Location
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Front height sensor
2 Headlamp leveling module
3 Rain/light sensor
4 Rear height sensor
5 Light switch - LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction switch
7 Side marker lamp (NAS only) (2 off)
8 Front turn signal indicator (2 off)
9 Halogen or xenon headlamp projector module (2 off)
10 Cornering/Static bending lamp (where fitted) (2 off)
www.JagDocs.com
11 Headlamp telescopic power washer (2 off)
12 Front side lamp (2 off)
13 High beam only halogen lamp (2 off)
14 High Mounted Stop Lamp (HMSL) LED (light emitting diode)'s
15 License plate lamps (2 off)
16 Rear fog lamp (2 off)
17 Rear turn signal indicator (2 off)
18 Reverse lamp (2 off)
19 Side lamp/stop lamp LED's (2 off)
20 Side marker LED's (All markets) (2 off)
21 Side repeater lamp (2 off)
www.JagDocs.com
Exterior Lighting - Exterior Lighting - Overview
OVERVIEW
The lighting systems are controlled by the EJB (engine junction box), RJB (rear junction box) and the CJB (central junction
box). The two boxes contain fuses, relays and microprocessors to control the power supply and functionality of the lighting
systems.
Driver lighting selections using the LH (left-hand) steering column multifunction switch or the auxiliary lighting switch are
passed to the CJB via the instrument cluster.
The lighting system has an 'auto' lights function which is controlled by the CJB on receipt of signals from the rain/light sensor
located at the top of the windscreen. The exterior lights are turned on or off in response to ambient light signals from the
rain/light sensor on a LIN (local interconnect network) bus connection to the CJB . The auto lights can also be activated when
the windshield wipers are activated by signals from the rain sensor, which is located at the top of the windshield or when the
driver activates the wipers in the fast wipe position.
Two levels of headlamp specification are available; halogen or xenon. In certain markets the headlamps feature a cornering
lamp or a static bending lamp which illuminates the area at the side of the vehicle when turning into driveways for example.
North American Specification (NAS) vehicles have a side marker lamp installed in the headlamp assembly. Replacement of any
of the headlamp bulbs requires removal of the headlamp assembly.
The tail lamp comprises two separate lamp assemblies. The turn signal indicator, side and stop lamps and reverse lamps are
located in each rear fender tail lamp assembly. The rear fog lamps are located in separate units attached to the luggage
compartment lid. A side marker lamp is fitted to the rear fender tail lamp assembly and is fitted in all markets.
Two systems of headlamp leveling are available; manual leveling which is only available on halogen headlamps and static
dynamic leveling which is available on xenon headlamps. The manual system uses a thumbwheel rheostat to adjust the
www.JagDocs.com
vertical alignment of the headlamps to compensate for differing vehicle loading. The static dynamic system uses height
sensors fitted to the front and rear suspension and a headlamp leveling module which periodically monitors the vehicle
attitude and adjusts the headlamp vertical alignment accordingly.
Exterior Lighting - Exterior Lighting - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
XENON HEADLAMPS - CONTROL DIAGRAM
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
A = Hardwired; D = High speed CAN bus; N = Medium speed CAN bus
1 Battery
5 Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus to other vehicle systems
7 Front height sensor
8 Rear height sensor
9 RH (right-hand) headlamp assembly
10 LH (left-hand) headlamp assembly
11 Lighting control switch - LH steering column multifunction switch
HALOGEN HEADLAMPS - CONTROL DIAGRAM
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus
1 Battery
2 BJB
3 CJB
4 EJB
6 RH headlamp assembly
7 LH headlamp assembly
SIDE LAMPS/TURN SIGNAL INDICATORS/FOG LAMPS - CONTROL DIAGRAM
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN bus; O = LIN bus
1 Battery
2 BJB - Megafuse
3 Stop lamp switch
7 RH licence plate lamp
www.JagDocs.com
8 LH licence plate lamp
9 LH fog lamp
10 RH fog lamp
11 High mounted stop lamp
12 RH tail lamp assembly
13 LH tail lamp assembly
14 RH door mirror side repeater
15 LH door mirror side repeater
16 RH front door module
18 LH front door module
20 Rain/light sensor
22 RH headlamp assembly - side lamp and side marker lamp (if fitted)
23 CJB
24 LH headlamp assembly - side lamp and side marker lamp (if fitted)
System Operation
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX (CJB) AND REAR JUNCTION BOX (RJB)
The CJB is an integrated unit which controls body functions and power distribution. The CJB is located on the RH 'A' pillar.
www.JagDocs.com
The RJB also controls body functions and power distribution and is located in the RH side of the luggage compartment.
Central Junction Box
The CJB receives inputs from the following switches via the instrument cluster and the medium speed CAN bus:
LH Steering column multifunction switch

- Side lamp position
- Headlamp position
- Automatic (AUTO) position
- Timer delay positions
- Turn signal indicators
- Headlamp flash and main beam positions.
The CJB receives direct inputs from the following components:
Stop lamp switch

Rain/light sensor.
The CJB provides power supplies to the following lamps:
LH and RH front side lamps

LH and RH front side marker lamps (if fitted)
LH and RH static bending lamp (if fitted)
LH and RH low beam headlamp
LH and RH high beam headlamp.
Rear Junction Box
The RJB provides power supplies to the following lamps:
LH and RH tail lamps

LH and RH stop lamps
LH and RH front turn signal indicators
LH and RH rear turn signal indicators
LH and RH licence plate lamps
LH and RH side marker lamps
High mounted stop lamp
Rear fog lamps
Reverse lamps.
The RJB also provides a power supply to the LH and RH door modules. The door modules use the power supply to activate the
turn signal indicator side repeater lamps located in the door mirrors, on receipt of a medium speed CAN bus message from the
RJB.
Circuit Protection
The CJB and the RJB provide circuit protection for their respective lighting circuits. The exterior lighting circuits are protected
by Field Effect Transistors (FET's). The FET's can detect overloads and short circuits and respond to heat generated by
increased current flow caused by a short circuit.
On a normal conventionally protected circuit this would cause a fuse to blow. The FET's respond to the heat increase and
disconnect the power supply to the affected circuit. When the fault is rectified or the FET has cooled, the FET will reset and
operate the circuit normally. If the fault persists the FET will cycle, disconnecting and reconnecting the power supply.
The CJB and the RJB store fault codes which can be retrieved using a Jaguar approved diagnostic system. The fault code will
identify that there is a fault on a particular output circuit which will assist with fault diagnosis and detection.
Alarm Indications
The exterior lighting system is used for alarm arm and disarm requests to show alarm system status.
When the driver locks and arms the vehicle, a visual indication of a successful lock and arm request is displayed to the driver
by a single flash of the hazard flashers. If the vehicle is superlocked, then the hazard flashers will flash a second time (200 ms
off and 200 ms on) to confirm the superlock request.
If the alarm is activated, the hazard flashers are operated for 10, 30 second cycles of 200 ms on and 200 ms off, with a 10
second delay between each cycle.
NOTE: On North American Specification (NAS) vehicles, the delay between the cycle when the alarm is activated is 60
seconds.
Lights on Warning
When the ignition is in the off power mode 0 or accessory power mode 4 and the lighting control switch is in the side lamp or
headlamp position, a warning chime will sound if the driver's door is opened. This indicates to the driver that the exterior
lights have been left switched on.
The chime is generated from the instrument cluster sounder on receipt of a lights on signal, a driver's door open signal and an
www.JagDocs.com
ignition off power mode 0 or accessory power mode 4 signal via a medium speed CAN bus signal from the CJB.
Headlamp Timer
The RJB controls the headlamp timer function which allows the headlamps to remain on for a period of time after leaving the
vehicle. This is a driver convenience feature which illuminates the driveway after leaving the vehicle.
To operate the timer function the lighting control switch must be in one of the three headlamp timer positions when the
ignition status is changed from ignition on power mode 6 to the off power mode 0. The timer function will then be initiated and
the low beam headlamps will be illuminated for the selected timer period.
NOTE: If the lighting switch is in the AUTO position, the headlamp timer will not function when the ignition is changed to
off power mode 0.
When the lighting control switch is in the autolamp exit delay position, the lighting control switch reference voltage flows
through 4 of the resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the
medium speed CAN bus to the RJB that autolamps has been selected.
Depending on the selected exit delay position, the reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 3, 2
or 1 resistors which is detected by the instrument cluster. The cluster outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the
RJB that autolamp exit delay period has been selected at 30, 60 or 120 seconds respectively.
Crash Signal Activation
When a crash signal is transmitted from the RCM (restraints control module), the RJB activates the hazard flashers. The hazard
flashers continue to operate until the ignition is in the off power mode 0 or accessory power mode 6. Once this ignition state
has occurred, the RCM will cease to transmit the crash signal.
LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCH

The instrument cluster outputs 2 reference voltages to the rotary lighting control switch; one feed being supplied to the light
selection function of the switch and the second feed being supplied to the auto headlamp exit delay function. The switch
position is determined by instrument cluster by the change in returned signal voltage which is routed through up to 4 resistors
in series depending on the selection made.
OFF - When the lighting control switch is in the off position, the reference voltage flows through 1 of the resistors. The
CJB that no lighting selection is made. The reference voltage to the auto headlamp exit delay switch is routed through 4
resistors which is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB that
auto headlamp or exit delay has not been selected.
SIDE LAMPS - When the lighting control switch is in the side lamp position, the reference voltage flows through 2 of the
resistors. The returned signal voltage is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed
CAN bus to the CJB to activate the side lamps. The reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed through 4
resistors which is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB that
auto headlamp or exit delay has not been selected.
HEADLAMPS - When the lighting control switch is in the headlamp position, the reference voltage flows through 3 of the
CAN bus to the CJB to activate the headlamps. The reference voltage to the auto headlamp exit delay switch is routed through
4 resistors which is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the CJB
that auto headlamp or exit delay has not been selected.
AUTOLAMPS - When the lighting control switch is in the auto headlamp position, the reference voltage flows through 4 of the
CAN bus to the CJB to activate the autolamp function. The reference voltage to the autolamp exit delay switch is routed
through 4 resistors which is detected by the instrument cluster which outputs a message on the medium speed CAN bus to the
CJB that auto headlamp has been selected.
AUXILIARY LIGHTING SWITCH

Headlamp Leveling Rotary Thumbwheel (Halogen headlamps only)
A power supply is passed to the headlamp leveling thumbwheel from the ignition relay in the EJB. Depending on the position
of the thumbwheel, the voltage passes through 1, 2 or 3 resistors connected in series. The voltage through the resistors is
passed to the headlamp leveling motor controller in each headlamp. The received voltage is determined as a request for the
appropriate level position and the controller powers the headlamp level motors to the applicable position for each headlamp.
Rear Fog Lamp Switch
The instrument cluster supplies a reference voltage and return to the rear fog lamp switch. The fog lamp switch is a
non-latching, momentary switch.
When the fog lamp switch is off the reference voltage is passed through a 1Kohm resistor. The voltage through the resistor is
returned to the instrument cluster that determines that no request for fog lamp operation has been made.
When the driver presses the fog lamp switch, the reference voltage is passed through a 330 ohm resistor. The change is return
voltage is sensed by the instrument cluster which determines fog lamp operation has been requested. The instrument cluster
transmits a medium speed CAN bus signal to the RJB providing the lighting control switch is in the correct position. The RJB
reacts to the message and provides a power supply to the 3 LED (light emitting diode)'s in each rear fog lamp. A fog lamp
www.JagDocs.com
warning lamp in the instrument cluster will also be illuminated when the fog lamps are operating.
The RJB will only activate the rear fog lamps if the headlamps are selected on or are active with auto headlamp activation.
When the headlamps are turned off the fog lamps are also turned off. When the headlamps are next switched on, the fog
lamps will not be activated until the driver requests fog lamp operation.
NOTE: The fog lamps do operate when DRL (daytime running lamps) are active.
HEADLAMP LEVELING
Manual Headlamp Leveling - Halogen headlamps only
A power supply is passed to the headlamp leveling motor in each headlamp from the ignition relay in the EJB. When a signal
voltage is received from the headlamp leveling rotary thumbwheel, the headlamp leveling motor controller in each headlamp
uses the power supply to operate the motors and move the headlamp to the requested position.
Static Dynamic Headlamp Leveling - Xenon headlamps only
The headlamp leveling module receives a power supply from the ignition relay in the EJB. The same power supply is also
supplied to the headlamp leveling motor in each headlamp assembly. The front and rear height sensors are connected to the
headlamp leveling module and receive a power and ground from the module. Each sensor has a signal line to the headlamp
leveling module to return height information to the module. The module uses the height signals from the sensors to calculate
the vehicle attitude and supplies a signal to each motor to power the headlamp to the required position.
EXTERIOR BULB TYPE/RATING
The following table shows the bulbs used for the exterior lighting system and their type and specification.
NOTE: The tail lamps, side marker lamps, stop lamps, high mounted stop lamp and rear fog lamps are illuminated by
LED's and are non-serviceable components.
Bulb Type Rating

Halogen headlamp - Projector module low/high beam - Not NAS H7 55W
Halogen headlamp - Projector module low/high beam - NAS only H11 60W
Xenon headlamp - Projector module low/high beam - All markets D1S 35W
High beam only (halogen) - High/low beam (xenon) - All markets H7 55W
Front side lamps - all markets W5W Halogen cool blue (HCB) 5W
Front turn signal indicators - Not NAS PY21W 21W
Front turn signal indicators - NAS only 3457AK 27W
Rear turn signal indicators - All markets PSY19W 19W
Turn signal indicator side repeaters - All markets WY5W 5W
Bulb Type Rating
Reverse lamps - All markets PS19W 19W
Licence plate lamps - All markets W5W 5W
LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCH

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Off position
2 Side lamp position
3 High beam position
5 Headlamp flash/high beam off position
7 Headlamp position
8 AUTO headlamp position
9 Headlamp timer 120 second delay position
10 Headlamp timer 60 second delay position
11 Headlamp timer 30 second timer delay position
The lighting control switch is located on the LH steering column multifunction switch. The lighting control switch is a rotary
control with positions for the following lighting functions:
Off
Side lamps
Headlamps
AUTO headlamps
Headlamp timer (3 time period selections).
The LH steering column multifunction switch also provides for the following functions:
Low beam headlamps

High beam headlamps
Headlamp flash
LH and RH turn signal indicators
Trip computer function button.
The switch has a turn signal indicator lane change function. If the switch is gently pushed to either turn signal indicator
position and then released, the applicable turn signal indicators will flash 3 times and then will be automatically cancelled. If a
turn signal indicator bulb fails, the green turn signal warning indicator in the instrument cluster will flash at twice the normal
rate and the audible ticking from the instrument cluster sounder will also be at twice the normal rate.
AUXILIARY LIGHTING SWITCH
NOTE: RHD (right-hand drive) switch shown

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Headlamp leveling rotary thumbwheel (halogen headlamps only)
2 Instrument panel illumination dimmer thumbwheel
3 Luggage compartment lid release switch
4 Forward alert switch (if fitted)
5 Rear fog lamp switch
The auxiliary lighting switch is located in the instrument panel, adjacent to the steering column. The switch has a rear fog
lamp switch and a rotary thumbwheel to adjust headlamp leveling on vehicles with halogen headlamps. The auxiliary lighting
switch also has a forward alert switch (if fitted) and a rotary thumbwheel for instrument panel illumination dimming.
The rear fog lamp switch is a non-latching switch which provides a momentary signal to the instrument cluster. The fog lamps
can only be activated if the ignition is in power mode 6 and the headlamp or auto headlamps are selected on. If the fog lamp
switch is pressed when the fog lamps are operating, they will be switched off. If the lighting control switch is moved to the
side lamp or off position or if the auto headlamps turns off the headlamps the rear fog lamps will be extinguished. If the
headlamps are subsequently turned on the rear fog lamp operation will not be active and the rear fog lamp switch must be
pressed to activate the lamps.
HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY
Two types of headlamp are available; xenon or halogen. The headlamp is secured in the front of the vehicle with three bolts;
one outboard bolt is screwed into the front upper cross member, one inboard bolt in the front upper body gusset and one bolt
located at the rear of the headlamp assembly which locates in the front fender reinforcing panel. Bulb replacement requires the
removal of the 3 bolts and the headlamp assembly.
The rear of the headlamp has removable panels which allow access to the bulbs for replacement. A large cover can be rotated
counter-clockwise for removal allows access the headlamp low beam halogen or xenon D1S bulb. Another large removable cover
can be rotated for removal to provide access to the high beam bulb, side lamp bulb and cornering/static bending lamp bulb (if
fitted).
The headlamps have 2 adjustment screws on the rear which allow for the manual setting of the vertical and horizontal
alignment.
On NAS vehicles, the headlamp is regarded as 'Visual Optically Left' aiming. The adjustment screws must be turned equal
amounts to maintain the correlation in the vertical axis only. There is no horizontal adjustment. Refer to the Service Repair
Procedures manual for headlamp alignment data and procedures.
Each headlamp has an integral 16 pin connector which provides inputs and outputs for the various functions of the headlamp
assembly.
www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Xenon control module (not fitted on halogen low beam headlamps)
2 Turn signal indicator
3 Side marker lamp (NAS only)
4 Projector module - Low beam headlamp(Halogen) – Low/High beam headlamp (xenon)
5 Cornering/static bending lamp (if fitted)
6 Side lamp
7 High beam headlamp
8 Power wash jets trim cover
9 Headlamp powerwash
10 Side marker lamp bulb (NAS only)
11 Turn signal indicator bulb
12 Headlamp adjuster screw (2 off)
13 Cover - Low beam headlamp projector module bulb
14 Mounting collar
15 Xenon igniter unit and bulb
16 Xenon igniter electrical connector
17 Cornering/static bending lamp bulb (if fitted)
18 Side lamp bulb
19 High beam headlamp bulb
20 Cover - Side lamp, cornering/static bending lamp (if fitted) and high beam headlamp bulbs
Bi-Xenon Headlamp
The bi-xenon headlamp uses a projector lens, similar to the halogen headlamp. The projector module comprises an ellipsoidal
lens and a reflector. The projector reflector collects the light produced by the halogen bulb and projects the light into a focal
plane containing a shield. The contour of the shield is projected onto the road by the lens. A complex surface reflector is used
for the halogen fill in high beam lamp. This type of reflector is divided into separate parabolic segments, with each segment
having a different focal length. The low and high beam bulbs are quartz halogen H7, with a rating of 55W. The bulbs are
retained in the headlamp unit with conventional wire retaining clips.
A tourist lever mechanism is located on the right hand side of the projector module. This mechanism moves a flap to blank off
a portion of the beam spread to enable the vehicle to be driven in opposite drive hand markets without applying blanking
decals to the headlamp lens. The beam is changed by removing the access cover at the rear of the lamp assembly and moving
a small lever located near the bulb holder, at the side of the projector.
NOTE: The tourist lever is not fitted to NAS vehicles.
WARNING: The Xenon system generates up to 30000 volts and contact with this voltage could lead to fatality. Make sure
that the headlamps are switched off before working on the system.
The following safety precautions must be adhered to when working on the xenon low beam headlamp system:
www.JagDocs.com
DO NOT attempt any procedures on the xenon headlamps when the lights are switched on.
Handling of the D1S xenon bulb must be performed using suitable protective equipment; for example gloves and
goggles. The glass part of the bulb must not be touched.
Xenon bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous waste.
Only operate the bulb in a mounted condition in the projector module installed in the headlamp.
The xenon headlamp is known as 'bi-xenon' because it operates as both a low and high beam headlamp unit. The xenon lamp,
or High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamp as they are sometimes referred to, comprises an ellipsoidal lens with a solenoid
controlled shutter to change the beam output from low to high beam.
NOTE: If the lighting control switch is in the 'off' position, both the xenon lamp and the halogen high beam lamp will
operate when the high beam 'flash' function is operated.
The xenon headlamp system is controlled by the CJB using a control module for each headlamp and an igniter. The control
modules and the igniters provide the regulated power supply required to illuminate the bulbs through their start-up phases of
operation.
The xenon headlamp is a self contained unit located within the headlamp assembly. The unit comprises a reflector, an adaptor
ring, the lens, a shutter controller and the xenon bulb, which together forms an assembly known as the projector module. The
reflector is curved and provides the mounting point for the xenon bulb. The bulb locates in a keyway to ensure the correct
alignment in the reflector and is secured by a plastic mounting ring. The bulb is an integral component of the igniter and is
electrically connected by a connector located in the igniter unit.
The shutter controller is a solenoid which operates the shutter mechanism via a lever. The shutter is used to change the beam
projection from low beam to high beam and vice versa.
The xenon bulbs illuminate when an arc of electrical current is established between 2 electrodes within the bulb. The xenon
gas sealed in the bulb reacts to the electrical excitation and the heat generated by the current flow to produce the
characteristic blue/white light.
To operate at full efficiency, the xenon bulb goes through 3 full stages of operation before full output for continuous operation
is achieved. The 3 phases are; start-up phase, warm-up phase and continuous phase.
In the start-up phase, the bulb requires an initial high voltage starting pulse of up to 30000 volts to establish the arc. This is
produced by the igniter. The warm-up phase begins once the arc is established. The xenon control module regulates the supply
to the bulb to 2.6A which gives a lamp output of 75W. During this phase, the xenon gas begins to illuminate brightly and the
environment within the bulb stabilizes, ensuring a continual current flow between the electrodes. When the warm-up phase is
complete, the xenon control module changes to continuous phase. The supply voltage to the bulb is reduced and the operating
power required for continual operation is reduced to 35W. The process from start-up to continuous phase is completed in a very
short time.
The xenon control modules (one per headlamp) receive an operating voltage from the CJB when the headlamps are switched
on. The modules regulate the power supply required through the phases of start-up.
The igniters (one per headlamp) generate the initial high voltage required to establish the arc. The igniters have integral coils
which generate high voltage pulses required for start-up. Once the xenon bulbs are operating, the igniters provide a closed
circuit for the regulated power supply from the control modules.
Halogen Low/high Beam Headlamp
The halogen low/high beam headlamp uses a projector lens, similar to the xenon headlamp. The projector module comprises
an ellipsoidal lens and a reflector. The projector reflector collects the light produced by the halogen bulb and projects the light
into a focal plane containing a shield. The contour of the shield is projected onto the road by the lens. The low/high beam
bulbs are quartz halogen and are retained in the headlamp unit with conventional wire retaining clips.
A tourist lever mechanism is located on the right hand side of the projector module. This mechanism moves a flap to blank off
a portion of the beam spread to enable the vehicle to be driven in opposite drive hand markets without applying blanking
decals to the headlamp lens. The beam is changed by removing the access cover at the rear of the lamp assembly and moving
a small lever located near the bulb holder, at the side of the projector.
Halogen High Beam Headlamp - Xenon and Halogen

The xenon and halogen headlamps use a complex surface reflector for the halogen fill in high beam lamp only lighting unit,
which is of the same design on both headlamp types. This type of reflector has the reflector divided into separate parabolic
segments, with each segment having a different focal length.
The high beam headlamp bulbs are quartz halogen and are retained in the headlamp unit with conventional wire retaining
clips.
Cornering Lamps
NOTE: The cornering lamps are not fitted to NAS vehicles.
The cornering lamps are an optional feature designed to illuminate the direction of travel when cornering at low speeds. The
design of the lens projects a spread of light from the vehicle at approximately 45 degrees to the vehicle axis. The cornering
lamp is incorporated into the headlamp assembly and shares the same housing as the low beam headlamp. The cornering lamp
uses a 35W Halogen H8 bulb which is permanently located in an integral holder which is connected on the headlamp housing.
The holder is located in an aperture in the headlamp housing and rotated to lock. The bulb is accessible via a removable cover
on the base of the headlamp housing.
www.JagDocs.com
The cornering lamps are controlled by the LH steering column multifunction switch with the lighting control switch in the
headlamp position and the ignition in power mode 6. The cornering lamps are supplied power via the ignition circuit to ensure
that they do not function with the headlamp delay feature. The cornering lamps are deactivated if the vehicle speed exceeds
25 mph (40 km/h). Only one cornering lamp will illuminate at any one time. If the left hand turn signal indicators are selected
on, the left hand cornering lamp will be illuminated and vice versa, providing the vehicle speed and lighting control switch
positions are correct.
Static Bending Lamps
NOTE: The static bending lamps are not fitted to NAS vehicles.
The static bending lamps are designed to illuminate the direction of travel when cornering at low speeds. The static bending
lamp functionality, which is controlled by the CJB and the headlamp leveling module, operates using inputs from the steering
angle sensor and vehicle speed information from the ABS (anti-lock brake system) module. The static bending lamp is
incorporated into the headlamp assembly and shares the same housing as the low beam headlamp. The design of the lens
projects a spread of light from the vehicle at approximately 45 degrees to the vehicle axis. The static bending lamp uses a
35W Halogen H8 bulb which locates in a holder which is connected via wires to the main connector on the headlamp housing.
The holder is located in an aperture in the headlamp housing and rotated to lock. The bulb is accessible via a removable cover
at the rear of the headlamp housing.
The static bending lamps operate with a steering angle sensor CAN bus signal which is received by the CJB. The CJB monitors
this signal and vehicle speed and activates the static bending lamp bulb. When the operation parameters of the lamp are
reached, the CJB fades the static bending lamp bulb on using a PWM (pulse width modulation) voltage over a period of
approximately 2 seconds. When the lamp is switched off, the CJB fades the bulb off by decreasing the PWM voltage in a linear
manner depending on steering angle and vehicle speed. The cornering lamps can only be active for a maximum of 3 minutes.
NOTE: Static bending lamps only operate when the transmission is in DRIVE or in SPORT.
Turn Signal Indicators
The turn signal indicator lamp is incorporated into the outer part of the headlamp assembly. The turn signal indicator lamp
uses a PY21W bayonet orange colored bulb in ROW markets, a S8W 27/7W wedge bulb is used in NAS markets. The bulb is
fitted into a holder which connects with contacts in the headlamp housing. The holder is fitted into an aperture in the
headlamp housing and rotated to lock into position.
When active, the turn signal indicator lamps will flash at a frequency cycle of 380ms on and 380ms off. If a bulb fails, the
remaining turn signal lamps bulbs continue to flash at normal speed. The turn signal indicators in the instrument cluster will
flash at double speed to indicate the bulb failure to the driver.
Side Lamps
The side lamp is located between the headlamp projector module and the high bean headlamp. The side lamp uses a W5W
wedge fitting bulb which locates in a holder which connected via wires to the main connector on the headlamp housing. The
holder is a push fit into a receptacle in the headlamp housing. The bulb is accessible by removal of the inner cover on the rear
of the headlamp housing. Access to the bulb requires removal of the headlamp from the vehicle. The side lamps are operated
by selecting side lamps or headlamps on the lighting control switch. The side lamps are functional at all times and are
dependant on a particular ignition mode status. The side lamps will also be illuminated when the lighting control switch is in
the AUTO position and a 'lights on' signal is received by the CJB from the rain/light sensor
Side Marker Lamps (NAS only)
The side marker lamp is located in the outer part of the headlamp assembly. The side marker lamp uses a W5W wedge fitting
bulb. The bulb is fitted into a holder which connects with contacts in the headlamp housing. The holder is fitted into an
aperture which connects with contacts in the headlamp housing. The side marker lamp is active at all times when the side
lamps are active.
AUTOMATIC HEADLAMP OPERATION

The automatic headlamp function is a driver assistance system. The driver can override the system operation by selection of
side lamp or headlamp on if the ambient light conditions require front and rear lighting to be active. The automatic headlamp
system uses a light sensor and the CJB, which are connected via a LIN (local interconnect network) bus to control the
headlamp functionality. The light sensor is incorporated in the rain/light sensor located on the inside of the windshield, below
the rear view mirror. The wiper system also uses the rain/light sensor for automatic wiper operation.
The light sensor measures the ambient light around the vehicle in a vertical direction and also the angular light level from the
front of the vehicle. The rain/light sensor uses vehicle speed signals, wiper switch position and the park position of the front
wipers to control the system. The automatic headlamp operation uses ambient light levels which are monitored by photodiode
incorporated in the rain/light sensor. The rain/light sensor sends a lights on/off request to the CJB on the LIN bus, which
responds by switching on the low beam headlamps, front side lamps and rear tail lamps. The automatic headlamps are
activated under the following conditions:
Twilight
Darkness
Rain
Snow
Tunnels
Underground or multistoried car parks.
www.JagDocs.com
Operation of the automatic headlamps requires the ignition to be in ignition mode 6, the lighting control switch to be in the
'AUTO' position and a lights on request signal from the light sensor. If the rain sensor signal activates the fast speed wipers,
the low beam headlamps are activated, providing the lighting control switch is in the 'AUTO' position.
HEADLAMP LEVELING
Headlamp leveling provides for the adjustment of the vertical aim of the headlamps. The leveling system is primarily required
to minimise glare to other road users when a heavy load is in the rear of the vehicle. Two systems of headlamp leveling are
available; manual and static dynamic.
Manual Headlamp Leveling
The manual system uses a thumbwheel rheostat to adjust the vertical alignment of the headlamps to compensate for differing
vehicle loading. The rotary thumbwheel is located on the auxiliary lighting switch, adjacent to the illumination dimmer
thumbwheel. Three positions are available to adjust the headlamps to a position to prevent glare to other road users.
Static Dynamic Headlamp Leveling
The static dynamic headlamp leveling system uses the following components:
Front and rear vehicle height sensors

Two headlamp leveling, vertical adjustment motors
Headlamp leveling module
Ignition in mode 6
Vehicle speed information from ABS module.
The static dynamic system uses height sensors fitted to the front and rear suspension and a headlamp leveling module which
periodically monitors the vehicle attitude and adjusts the headlamp vertical alignment accordingly.
Static dynamic headlamp leveling is controlled by a headlamp leveling module located in the lower instrument panel, behind
the glovebox.
The height sensors are both located on the RH side of the vehicle. The front sensor is attached to the front suspension lower
arm with a strap and to the front sub frame with a bracket and 2 bolts. The rear sensor is attached to the rear suspension
upper control arm with a cable tied clip and to the rear sub frame with a bracket and 2 bolts. Each sensor has 3 connections to
the headlamp leveling module; power, ground and signal.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL)

Refer to DRL section for details.
Refer to: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) (417-04 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL), Description and Operation).
REAR LAMP ASSEMBLY

The rear lamp assembly is a 2 piece unit, with one part located in the rear quarter panel and the second part attached to the
luggage compartment lid. The outer rear lamp assembly is located in a recess in the vehicle body. The lamp is secured with 2
studs inboard studs on the lamp body which are secured to the vehicle body with 2 nuts. A third outboard stud and nut secures
a clip to the vehicle body. To remove the lamp assembly, only the 2 inboard nuts require removal. The outboard nut retains a
sliding clip in position on the vehicle body. To remove the rear lamp assembly, remove the 2 inboard nuts and slide the lamp
rearwards to release the outboard clip.
The inner rear lamp is located in a recess in the luggage compartment lip and secured with a clip.
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Nut (3 off)
2 Reverse lamp bulb and holder
3 Rear lamp electrical connector
4 Turn signal indicator bulb and holder
5 Securing clip
6 Rear fog lamp electrical connector
7 Rear fog lamp LED's and Printed Circuit Board (PCB)
8 Side marker LED's (4 off - all markets)
9 Reverse lamp
10 Turn signal indicator lamp
11 Side lamp/stop lamp LED's (24 off)
12 Rear fog lamp LED's (3 off)
Rear Stop and Side Lamp
The turn signal indicator, side and stop lamps and reverse lamps are located in each outer rear lamp assembly. The side lamps
and stop lamps use 24 LED's. The 24 LED's are illuminated at a higher intensity than the side lamp when the stop lamp switch
is operated by pressing the brake pedal. A side marker lamp is fitted to the outer rear lamp assembly and is fitted in all
markets. The side marker lamp also uses 4 LED's and are active at all times when the side lamps are selected on.
The stop lamps can also be activated by the adaptive speed control system. A signal from the adaptive speed control module
is sent via the high speed CAN bus to the RJB which activates the stop lamps until an off message is received.
Turn Signal Indicator
The turn signal indicator lamp uses a Phillips Hypervision glass filament bulb. The bulb is located in a holder which has
contacts which mate with contacts on lamp body. The holder locates in the lamp body and is rotated to lock.
If a bulb fails, the remaining turn signal indicator lamps continue to flash at the normal speed. The applicable turn signal
indicator in the instrument cluster will flash at double speed to indicate the bulb failure to the driver.
www.JagDocs.com
Reverse Lamp
The reverse lamp also uses a Phillips Hypervision glass filament bulb. The bulb is located in a holder which has contacts which
mate with contacts on lamp body. The holder locates in the lamp body and is rotated to lock.
The reverse lamps are activated on receipt of a reverse selected message sent on the medium speed CAN bus to the RJB.
Rear Fog Lamp
The rear fog lamps are located in separate units attached to the luggage compartment lid. The rear fog lamps each use 3 high
intensity LED's. The fog lamp locates in a recess in the luggage compartment lid has a seal to prevent the ingress of water
into the luggage compartment. The lamp is secured in the recess with a metal securing clip. The rear fog lamp is activated
using a button located on the auxiliary lighting switch in the instrument panel.
LICENCE PLATE LAMPS

Two licence plate lamps are located in the luggage compartment lid trim finisher. One is located adjacent to the emergency
luggage compartment lid release key barrel cover and the other is adjacent to the rear view camera (if fitted). The licence plate
lamps are active at all times when the side lamps are operating. Each lamp can be removed from the finisher by inserting a
wide, flat screwdriver blade or similar tool in a slot between the lamp lens and the finisher and gently levering the lamp from
the surround. The bulb is a push fit in a holder which in turn is a press fit in the lamp housing.
HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP

The high mounted stop lamp is located at the bottom of the rear windshield. The lamp is secured to a bezel in the parcel shelf
with 2 screws.
The high mounted stop lamp uses 12, red colored LED's which illuminate through a clear lens. The high mounted stop lamp
functionality is the same as that described for the stop lamps.
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR SIDE REPEATER LAMPS

www.JagDocs.com
The turn signal indicator side repeaters are located in each door mirror. On vehicles from 10MY the lamp is an LED unit which
illuminates in an orange color. The LED unit is secured to the mirror bezel with 2 screws and is connected to the mirror wiring
harness with a 2 pin connector.
The side repeaters have the same functionality and operate in conjunction with the front and rear turn signal indicators and
the hazard warning flashers.
HAZARD FLASHERS
The hazard flashers are activated by a non-latching switch located in the switch pack located in the center of the instrument
panel. The hazard flashers operate at all times when selected and operate independent of the ignition mode.
When the hazard flashers are selected on by the driver, a ground path is momentarily completed to the CJB which activates the
front and rear and side repeater turn signal indicators. A second press of the switch is sensed by the CJB and the hazard
flasher are deactivated. When the hazard flashers are active, they override any request for turn signal indicator operation.
The hazard flashers can also be activated by a crash signal from the RCM.
Refer to: Air Bag and Safety Belt Pretensioner Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (501-20B Supplemental Restraint System,
Exterior Lighting - Headlamps
For a detailed description of the exterior lighting system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (417-01 Exterior Lighting)
Exterior Lighting (Description and Operation),

Exterior Lighting (Description and Operation),
Exterior Lighting (Description and Operation).
Safety Information
WARNINGS:
The Xenon Headlamp system generates up to 28,000 volts. Make sure that the headlamps are switched off before
working on the system. Failure to follow this instruction may lead to fatality.
The following safety precautions must be followed when working on the Xenon Headlamp system:
DO NOT attempt any procedures on the Xenon Headlamps or circuits when the system is energized.
Handling of the xenon bulb must be performed using suitable protective equipment, e.g. gloves and goggles. The glass
part of the bulb must not be touched.
Only operate the lamp in a mounted condition in the reflector.
All safety procedures and precautions must be followed to prevent personal injury.
www.JagDocs.com
CAUTION: Xenon bulbs must be disposed of as hazardous waste.
There are instructions on the correct procedures for Xenon Headlamp System repairs in the manual, refer to section 100-00 -
General Information, Standard Workshop Practices of the workshop manual.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of damage.
Visual Inspection
Electrical
Headlamp Leveling Module (HLM)

Bulb(s)
Photocell(s)
Ballast
Wiring harness/electrical connectors
Fuse(s)
the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to DTC Index.
Symptom Chart

Low beam lamp(s) Check the bulb and fuse condition (see visual inspection). Check the
inoperative Bulb failure headlamp circuits. Check the lighting control switch function. Check the
Fuse(s) blown left-hand steering column multifunction switch operation. Refer to the
Circuit fault electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a headlamp or related circuit
Lighting control switch fault.
High beam lamp(s) fault
inoperative Left-hand steering
column multifunction
switch fault
Low beam lamp(s) Check the bulb condition and rating. Check the tourist lever is set
dim Incorrect bulb rating correctly. Check the headlamp circuits. Check the lighting control switch
Tourist lever set in the function. Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch
wrong position function. Refer to the electrical guides.
Circuit fault
Lighting control switch
High beam lamp(s)
fault
dim
Left-hand steering
switch fault
Low beam lamp(s) Check the headlamp circuits. Check the lighting control switch function.
stuck on Circuit fault Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch operation. Check
Lighting control switch the headlamp timer function. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs
fault indicating a headlamp circuit fault
Left-hand steering
High beam lamp(s) column multifunction
stuck on switch fault
Headlamp timer
function fault
Headlamp low/high Check the headlamp circuits. Check the left-hand steering column
beam switching Circuit fault multifunction switch operation. Check the xenon lamp shutter mechanism
function inoperative Left-hand steering operation. Refer to the electrical guides. Check for DTCs indicating a
column multifunction headlamp circuit fault
switch fault
Xenon lamp shutter
mechanism fault
Warning lamp(s) Check the fuse(s) (see visual inspection). Check the lighting control switch
inoperative Fuse(s) blown function. Check the left-hand steering column multifunction switch
www.JagDocs.com
Lighting control switch function. Check the warning lamp circuits. Refer to the electrical guides.
fault Check for DTCs indicating an instrument cluster or CAN system fault.
Left-hand steering
switch inoperative
Circuit fault
Instrument cluster
fault
Headlamp Wet - Check for outstanding Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) relating to
Internal Condensation 'Headlamp Internal Condensation'. Carry out the instructions in the service
Water Ingress bulletin to determine if the fault is related to condensation or water
ingress.
DTC Index
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) that could be logged on this vehicle, please refer to Section 100-00. REFER to:
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Index - DTC: Headlamp Control Module (HCM) (100-00 General Information, Description and
Operation).
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Adjustment
General Procedures
1. Make sure to check and adjust the tyre pressures to the correct
level.
Park the vehicle on a horizontally level surface.
2. Align the headlamp beam setting equipment to one headlamp.

Headlamp beam setter
3. NOTE: The headlamp setting is 1 % below horizontal and parallel.
Check the headlamp beam alignment.
4. Open the hood.
5. Adjust the headlamps with an Allen Key.

www.JagDocs.com
6. To adjust the second headlamp, repeat the above procedure.

Exterior Lighting - Approach Lamp
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Glass (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and
Installation).
2.
www.JagDocs.com
3.
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Assembly
Removal
NOTE: RH illustration shown, LH is similar.
NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to full LH lock.

www.JagDocs.com
1.
2.
www.JagDocs.com
4.
3.
Installation
1.
2.
www.JagDocs.com
3. Torque: 5 Nm
4. Torque: 5 Nm
www.JagDocs.com
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Leveling Front Sensor
Removal

2. Remove the headlamp leveling sensor.

Disconnect the height sensor link.
Remove the 2 bolts.
www.JagDocs.com
3. NOTE: Do not disassemble further if the component is removed for

access only.
Remove the height sensor link.
Remove the bracket.

Remove the 2 Allen bolts.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation
Install the bracket.

Tighten to 5 Nm.
2. Install the height sensor link.
3. Install the headlamp leveling sensor.

Tighten to 25 Nm.
Connect the height sensor link.
www.JagDocs.com
Exterior Lighting - Headlamp Leveling Rear Sensor
Removal

2. Remove the headlamp leveling sensor.

Disconnect the height sensor link.
Release and disconnect the electrical connector.
Remove the 2 bolts.
www.JagDocs.com
3. NOTES:

Note the fitted position.
Remove the bracket.

Remove the 2 Allen bolts.
Installation
Install the bracket.

Tighten to 5 Nm.
2. Install the headlamp leveling sensor.
Tighten to 25 Nm
Install the height sensor link.
www.JagDocs.com
Exterior Lighting - High Mounted Stoplamp
Removal
1. Refer to: Parcel Shelf (501-05 Interior Trim and Ornamentation, Removal
and Installation).
2.
www.JagDocs.com
Installation

Exterior Lighting - Rear Fog Lamp
General Equipment
Spatula
Removal
1. Refer to: Luggage Compartment Lid Moulding (501-08 Exterior Trim and
2. CAUTIONS:
Protect the surrounding paintwork to avoid damage.
Take extra care not to damage the edges of the

component.
General Equipment: Spatula

www.JagDocs.com
Installation
www.JagDocs.com
Exterior Lighting - Rear Lamp Assembly
Removal
1. Refer to: Loadspace Scuff Plate Trim Panel (501-05 Interior Trim and

www.JagDocs.com
Torque: 3 Nm
4. CAUTION: Take extra care not to damage the edges of
the component.
www.JagDocs.com

Installation

Exterior Lighting - Side Turn Signal Lamp
Removal
NOTES:
1. Refer to: Exterior Mirror Cover (501-09 Rear View Mirrors, Removal and
Installation).
2.
www.JagDocs.com
3.
Installation

Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting - Component Location
INTERIOR LIGHTING COMPONENT LOCATION

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 Glovebox lamp
2 Door casing LED (light emitting diode) illumination
3 Approach lamp
4 Vanity mirror illumination
5 Overhead console
6 Vanity mirror illumination
7 Rear overhead console
8 Luggage compartment lamp
9 Approach lamp
10 Door casing LED illumination
11 Footwell lamps
Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting - Overview
OVERVIEW
Interior lighting is provided to enable the safe entry and departure from the vehicle for the driver and passengers in low
ambient light conditions, without any manual switching of the lights.
NOTE: The term interior lamps also includes the door mirror approach lamps.
The interior lamps are controlled by the CJB (central junction box) and the RJB (rear junction box) and have 2 modes of
operation: manual and automatic. The front interior lamps in the front overhead console are operated using the 'JaguarSense'
system. The system uses capacitive proximity sensor technology for the switch operation which is integral with the overhead
console. The rear overhead console interior lamps have conventional switches.
In the manual mode the interior lamps can be switched on and off with the JaguarSense system. Positioning your hand
adjacent to each lamp in the front overhead console will switch interior lamps on or off and completely disable the interior
lamp system. In the automatic mode the interior lamp functionality is controlled by the CJB and the RJB and reacts to the
vehicle being locked or unlocked and opening the vehicle doors.
In manual mode the interior lamps can be operated by placing your finger(s) close to, or touch, the surface of the appropriate
lamp. The courtesy light and map reading lamps can be operated manually by the 'JaguarSense' system. When in automatic
mode, the courtesy lamp functionality is also controlled by the CJB and the RJB and reacts to the vehicle being locked or
unlocked and opening the vehicle doors. To deactivate or activate automatic illumination, touch the front courtesy lamp for
approximately 2 seconds
The driver's and passenger door approach lamps are controlled by the driver's door module and the passenger door module
respectively and operate with the automatic mode. The door modules receive a power supply from the RJB and receive
www.JagDocs.com
information to illuminate the approach lamps on the medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus from the RJB and the
CJB.
www.JagDocs.com
Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting - System Operation and Component
Description
Control Diagram
CONTROL DIAGRAM (SHEET 1 OF 2)
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
A = Hardwired; N = Medium speed CAN Bus
1 Battery
2 BJB (battery junction box) - Megafuse
3 BJB - Megafuse
5 Driver's door mirror approach lamp
6 Driver's door module
7 Passenger door mirror approach lamp
8 Passenger door module
9 LH (left-hand) rear door latch
10 RH (right-hand) rear door latch
11 LH front door latch
12 RH front door latch
14 LH front door handle LED (light emitting diode) illumination
15 RH front door handle LED illumination
CONTROL DIAGRAM (SHEET 2 OF 2)
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
A = Hardwired
1 Battery
2 BJB - Megafuse
3 BJB - Megafuse
4 RJB
5 Glovebox lamp
6 Glovebox lamp switch
7 LH footwell lamp
8 RH footwell lamp
9 LH vanity mirror
10 RH vanity mirror
11 LH rear interior lamp
12 RH rear interior lamp
13 CJB
14 Ambience lighting LED's
15 LH map reading lamp
16 Courtesy lamp
17 RH map reading lamp
System Operation
JUNCTION BOXES
Inputs
The CJB receives the following inputs which affect the operation of the interior lamps:
www.JagDocs.com
Ignition mode
Lock/unlock
Luggage compartment lid latch switch
Door latch switches.
Outputs
The RJB outputs the following for the interior lighting system:
Luggage compartment lamp power supply

Driver and passenger door module power supplies
Fade on and off grounds for front and rear overhead console interior lamps and footwell lamps
PWM (pulse width modulation) power output for the ambience lighting.
Interior Lamp Time-Out
The interior lamps are controlled by a timer within the CJB which allows a 60 second delay period for the lamps to remain
active after the ignition mode has been changed to off power mode 0 or the vehicle has been unlocked. The interior lamp fade
off is controlled by the RJBvia a delayed power off relay in the CJB. The following interior lamps are subject to the delay
period:
Front overhead console interior lamp

Rear interior lamps
Footwell lamps
Door mirror approach lamps.
The timer delay is activated when the CJB receives one of the following signals:
An unlock signal from the Smart Key via the keyless vehicle module.
Ignition mode is changed from the crank power mode 9 or ignition power mode 6 to the accessory power mode 4 to the
off power mode 0.
If a second occurrence of the above actions occurs within the timer period, the timer will be rest and the delay period timer will
restart.
The timer delay is deactivated when the CJB receives one of the following signals:
A lock signal from the Smart Key via the keyless vehicle module
Ignition mode is changed from the off power mode 0 to the accessory power mode 4 or ignition power mode 6
The CJB receives a door opened signal (even if that door is subsequently closed).
Battery Saver
The battery saver provides an automatic shut-off of the interior lamps after a period of 15 minutes in order to prevent
excessive power drain on the battery.
When the ignition mode is changed from the ignition power mode 6 or accessory power mode 4 to the off power mode 0, the
CJB starts a timer which de-energizes a delayed power off relay in the CJB, removing the power supply to the interior lamps
after a period of 15 minutes, switching off all or any interior lamps which have remained on for any reason.
Once the timer has expired and the lamps are off, any one of the following will 'wake up' the battery saver and the interior
lamps will function again. The timer will be restarted as soon as an input is received by the CJB from one of the following:
Ignition mode changed from off power mode 0 to accessory power mode 4, ignition power mode 6 or crank power mode
9.
Any door, including the luggage compartment lid is opened
An unlock request is received from the Smart Key via the keyless vehicle module
Overhead console interior lamp is switched on via the JaguarSense function.
INTERIOR LAMPS
When the interior lighting system switches the interior lamps on, the CJB ramps the lamps up to full power over a period of 1.3
seconds. When the system switches the lamps off, after the time-out period has expired, the CJB fades the lamps off over a
period of 2.6 seconds.
The interior lighting system will illuminate the interior lamps when one of the following events occurs:
The CJB receives an unlock signal from the Smart Key via the keyless vehicle module
Any door is opened including the luggage compartment lid
The ignition mode is changed from ignition power mode 6 or accessory power mode 4 to off power mode 0.
The interior lighting system will turn off the interior lamps when one of the following events occurs:
Once the time-out timer delay has expired since the lamps were either activated or the last door is closed and the
vehicle is not locked
The ignition is in off power mode 0 and an external lock is requested (using either the door lock buttons or the Smart
Key) with all doors closed
The ignition mode is changed from the off power mode 0 or the accessory power mode 4 to the ignition power mode 6
The last door is closed and the vehicle is externally locked, on receipt of an unlock request from the Smart Key or door
handle operation detected when the time-out timer is still active.
DELIVERY MODE
www.JagDocs.com
Delivery mode is set at the factory on vehicles to minimize battery drain. The mode enables the switching off of non-critical
electrical components, including the interior lighting system. The delivery mode feature is cancelled by the dealer during the
Pre-Delivery Inspection using an approved Jaguar diagnostic system.
CRASH ILLUMINATION
When a crash signal is received from the RCM (restraints control module), the CJB activates the interior lamps once the vehicle
speed has reduced to 5 km/h (3.1 mph). The hazard flashers are also activated and the doors are prevented from being locked.
The lamps remain on until the crash signal is removed, they cannot be switched off using the JaguarSense feature. The crash
signal is removed by completing one ignition on and off cycle.
INTERIOR BULB TYPE/RATING
The following table shows the bulbs used for the interior lighting system and their type and specification.
NOTE: The front overhead console and the front door ambience lighting is illuminated by LED's and are non-serviceable
components.
Bulb Type Rating

Front overhead console - interior lamp W6WX 6W
Front overhead console - LH/RH map reading lamps W6WX 6W
Rear interior lamps W6WX 10W
Sunvisor lamps TS1.3W 1.3W
LH/RH footwell lamps W5W 5W
Glovebox lamp W5W 5W
LH/RH door mirror approach lamps W5W 5W
Luggage compartment lamp S10W 10W
JUNCTION BOXES
The CJB is an integrated unit located on the RH 'A' pillar, below the instrument panel. The CJB contains fuses, relays and
number of microprocessors which control the power supply and functionality of the interior lighting system and other vehicle
systems.
The RJB is located on the RH side of the luggage compartment. The RJB contains fuses, relays and microprocessors which in
conjunction with the CJB control the interior lighting system and other vehicle systems.
Circuit Protection
The CJB and the RJB provide circuit protection for all interior lamp circuits. The lamps are protected by fuses in the CJB and the
RJB.
FRONT OVERHEAD CONSOLE
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
1 LH map reading lamp bulb
2 Interior lamp bulb
3 RH map reading lamp bulb
4 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) - JaguarSense
5 Ambience lighting LED's
6 RH map reading lamp
7 Interior lamp
8 LH map reading lamp
The overhead console is located near the windshield in the head lining. The console can be removed by carefully levering out
the rear edge of the housing to release 2 spring clips, and then pulling the console rearwards to release 2 locating tabs.
Removal of the console is required to replace any of the interior or map reading lamp bulbs.
The interior lamps and air bag off warning lamp in the front overhead console are common to all vehicles. The overhead
console can also contain security system intrusion detection module and volumetric sensors, sunroof switch and a voice
activation microphone depending on vehicle specification and market.
The interior lamp can operated manually using the JaguarSense feature to switch the lamp on and off. The lamp is also
controlled as part of the automatic interior lighting system.
The map reading lamps only operate manually using the JaguarSense feature to activate the lamps.
The interior and map reading lamp bulbs are located in holders which locate in a PCB. The PCB also provides for the operation
of the ambience lighting LED's, the air bag off warning lamp and the JaguarSense proximity sensors which are integral with the
PCB.
The overhead console also contains 2 LED's for the ambience lighting system. The ambience lighting is part of the lighting
control switch functionality and is subject to the setting of the instrument panel illumination dimmer control in the auxiliary
lighting switch. The ambience lighting provides very limited illumination of the instrument panel and floor console when the
vehicle is being driven without affecting the driver's visibility.
www.JagDocs.com
REAR OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Item Description
1 Lamp body
2 Lamp lens
www.JagDocs.com
3 Interior lamp bulbs

4 LH lamp switch
5 RH lamp switch
6 Bulb holders
The rear overhead console is located in the head lining, at the rear of the vehicle. The console can be removed by carefully
levering the lamp lens from the body. This releases 2 tabs which are integral with the lens allowing the body to removed from
the aperture in the head lining.
the lamp comprises the lamp body and lens and 2 separate lamps with 2 switches to operate each lamp individually.
The rear interior lamps can operated manually using the 2 switches located on the lamp body. The lamp is also controlled as
part of the automatic interior lighting system.
The bulbs are located in bulb holders which locate in a PCB connected to each switch. Removal of the rear overhead console is
required to replace the bulbs.
GLOVEBOX LAMP
The glovebox lamp is located in the top of the glovebox housing in the instrument panel. The lamp is located in a cover on the
outside, upper surface of the housing and projects the light into the top of the glovebox.
The lamp is operated by a switch located at the rear of the glovebox housing. The switch protrudes into the housing and is
operated by the rear face of the glovebox lid tray when the glovebox is opened or closed.
The bulb is located in a holder which is fitted into the side of the glovebox lamp cover. Replacement of the bulb requires the
removal of the glovebox housing.
The glovebox lamp is active at all times when the interior lamps are active and will illuminate only when the glovebox is
opened.
FOOTWELL LAMPS
The footwell lamps are located under the instrument panel. Each lamp comprises a bulb and holder which is part of the
instrument panel wiring harness. The bulb and holder is located in a hole in the front footwell air ducts. The footwell lamps are
active at all times when the interior lamps are active.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LAMP

The luggage compartment lamp is located in the luggage compartment trim, in a central position below the rear screen. The
lamp comprises a molded lens and housing and two electrical contacts which locate the bulb.
The lamp is accessible be removed by levering one end from the trim panel to gain access to the bulb. The lamp is active at all
times when the interior lamps are active.
VANITY MIRROR LAMPS
Four vanity mirror lamps are fitted, two in each vanity mirror. The lamps are illuminated when the mirror cover is raised. The
vanity mirror lamps operate at all times when the interior lamps are active.
The vanity mirrors use low voltage, 1.2W festoon type bulbs.
DOOR MIRROR APPROACH LAMPS

A door mirror approach lamp is located on the underside of each exterior door mirror.
The approach lamps are active at all times when the interior lamps are active.
www.JagDocs.com
Interior Lighting - Interior Lighting
For a detailed description of the interior lighting system, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (417-02 Interior Lighting)
Interior Lighting (Description and Operation),

Interior Lighting (Description and Operation),
Interior Lighting (Description and Operation).
Visual Inspection
Bulbs Fuses/relays (refer to electrical guide)

Wiring harness
Correct engagement of electrical connectors
Loose or corroded connections
www.JagDocs.com
the next step.
DTC Index
number 3548-1358-00
NOTES:

B116511 Left Front Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test left front puddle
Puddle Lamp Left front puddle lamp lamp control circuit for short to ground
Output control circuit - short to
ground
B116515 Left Front Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Puddle Lamp Left front puddle lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Output control circuit - short to circuit diagrams and test left front puddle lamp control circuit
power, open circuit for short to power, open circuit
B116611 Right Front Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test right front
Puddle Lamp Right front puddle lamp puddle lamp control circuit for short to ground
Output control circuit - short to
ground
B116615 Right Front Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC using the
Puddle Lamp Right front puddle lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Output control circuit - short to circuit diagrams and test right front puddle lamp control circuit
power, open circuit for short to power, open circuit
B111E11 Boot/Trunk Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Lamps Luggage compartment lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
control circuit - short to circuit diagrams and check luggage compartment lamp control
ground circuit for short to ground
B111E15 Boot/Trunk Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Lamps Luggage compartment lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
control circuit - short to circuit diagrams and check luggage compartment lamp control
power, open circuit circuit for short to power, open circuit
B112412 Lamp Fade Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check interior lamp
Control Interior lamp fade control fade control circuit for short to power
B113C12 Hazard Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check hazard switch
Illumination Hazard switch illumination illumination control circuit for short to power
www.JagDocs.com
control circuit - short to

power
B1A8596 Ambient Light Check and install a new sensor as required

Sensor Light sensor internal
electronic failure
U201012 Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check switch/interior
Illumination Switch/interior illumination illumination PWM supply circuit for short to power
PWM supply circuit - short to
power
U201014 Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check switch/interior
Illumination Switch/interior illumination illumination PWM supply circuit for short to ground, open circuit
PWM supply circuit - short to
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) - Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) - Overview
OVERVIEW
DRL (daytime running lamps) use the full intensity low beam headlamps which are permanently illuminated when the vehicle is
being driven.
Two DRL systems are available depending on market requirements.

www.JagDocs.com
www.JagDocs.com
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) - Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) - System
System Operation
CENTRAL JUNCTION BOX (CJB)
The CJB (central junction box) controls the operation of the DRL (daytime running lamps). The DRL are activated once the CJB
detects an ignition on power mode 6 signal.
The CJB also monitors the lighting control switch and the auto lamps feature and overrides the DRL if required.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS - CANADA
The DRL for this market use full intensity low beam headlamps. The side marker lamps, tail lamps and license plate lamps will
be on, but instrument cluster illumination will be off. DRL are active when the following parameters are met:
PARK is not selected on the electronic transmission selector

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) is off
Power mode 6 (ignition on) detected by the CJB
The CJB receives an engine running signal
The lighting control switch is in the off or side lamps position.
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
If the lighting control switch is moved to the headlamp position, DRL are deactivated and normal side lamp and
headlamp functionality is operational.
When DRL are active, the headlamp flash function using the left hand steering column multifunction switch will operate
normally.
The high beam headlamp function using the left hand steering column stalk switch will be deactivated. When the transmission
is in PARK, DRL are turned off. This is to reduce battery discharge during long periods of engine idling in cold climate
conditions. When the electronic transmission selector is moved from the PARK position, normal DRL functionality is restored.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS - DENMARK, HOLLAND, NORWAY, SWEDEN, FINLAND AND

POLAND
NOTE: DRL for Poland is on vehicles from 2008MY.
DRL for these markets use full intensity low beam headlamps. Side lamps and license plate lamps will be on, but instrument
cluster illumination will be off. DRL are active when the following parameters are met:
Power mode 6 (ignition on) detected by the CJB

The CJB receives an engine running signal
The lighting control switch is in the off position.
NOTE: When DRL are active, the headlamp flash function using the left hand steering column multifunction switch will
operate normally. The high beam headlamp function using the left hand steering column stalk switch will be deactivated.
If the lighting control switch is moved to the side lamp or headlamp positions, DRL are deactivated and normal side lamp and
headlamp functionality is operational.
AUTOMATIC HEADLAMPS
On vehicles fitted with the automatic headlamps feature, DRL are overridden if the lighting control switch is in the 'Auto'
position and the CJB receives a signal from the rain/light sensor to activate the exterior lights.
When the CJB receives a signal to de-activate the automatic headlamps feature the DRL function is restored providing the
parameters for DRL activation are met.
Module Communications Network - Communications Network - Overview
OVERVIEW
A number of different types of communication network are incorporated into the vehicle wiring harnesses for the transmission
of commands and information between control modules. The configuration installed on a particular vehicle depends on the
model and equipment level.
NOTE: The control diagrams shown later in this section are schematics reflecting communications networks fitted to LH
(left-hand) vehicles only. For detailed layouts of the various communications networks fitted to LHD (left-hand drive) and RHD
(right-hand drive) vehicles, refer to the Electrical Guide.
The communications networks available on the vehicle are shown in the table below.
Network Baud Rate

LIN (local interconnect network) bus 9.6 kbits/s
Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus 125 kbits/s
High speed CAN bus 500 kbits/s
Media Orientated System Transport (MOST) ring 24 mbits/s
www.JagDocs.com
Module Communications Network - Communications Network - System
Control Diagram
NOTE:
CONTROL DIAGRAM - LIN BUS - SHEET 1 OF 2

www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
O = LIN (local interconnect network) bus
2 Battery backed sounder
3 Intrusion detection module
4 Rain/Light sensor
6 Battery monitoring system module
7 Rear view camera
9 Generator
10 Driver's door switch pack
11 Rear door control module
12 Driver's door control module
14 Electronic transmission selector
15 Driver's seat module
16 Driver's seat switch pack
17 Rear door control module
18 Front passenger door control module
19 Clockspring
20 Audio and telephone steering wheel switches
22 Start control module
www.JagDocs.com
CONTROL DIAGRAM - LIN BUS - SHEET 2 OF 2
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
O = LIN bus
2 Stepper motor - Windshield defrost
3 Stepper motor - Face/feet distribution
4 Stepper motor - LH (left-hand) temperature blend
5 Stepper motor - RH (right-hand) temperature blend
7 Stepper motor - RH outer face level vent
8 Stepper motor - RH inner face level vent
9 Stepper motor - LH inner face level vent
10 Stepper motor - LH outer face level vent
www.JagDocs.com
CONTROL DIAGRAM - MEDIUM SPEED CAN BUS
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
N = Medium speed CAN (controller area network) bus
2 RJB
3 Keyless vehicle module
5 Driver's seat module
6 Front seat climate control module
7 Information control module
8 ATC module
9 CJB
13 Front passenger door control module
14 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) module
15 Driver's door control module
16 LH blind spot monitoring module
CONTROL DIAGRAM - HIGH SPEED CAN BUS
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
D = High speed CAN bus
3 Diagnostic socket
5 Electronic transmission selector
6 Occupant classification system control module
9 ECM
10 TCM
11 Pedestrian protection system control module
12 Electric park brake module
14 Adaptive damping control module
CONTROL DIAGRAM - MOST RING
www.JagDocs.com
Item Description
P = MOST ring
2 Software download socket
4 Portable audio interface
5 Bluetooth® telephone module
7 Multi-media module
8 DAB/SDARS receiver
9 Television (TV) tuner
10 Audio system amplifier
System Operation
OPERATION
Refer to the relevant system section for details of system operation.
DESCRIPTION
Refer to the relevant system section for details of system description.
www.JagDocs.com
Module Communications Network - Communications Network
For a detailed description of the Communications Network, refer to the relevant Description and Operation sections in the
workshop manual. REFER to: (418-00 Module Communications Network)
Communications Network (Description and Operation),

Communications Network (Description and Operation),
Communications Network (Description and Operation).

CAUTIONS:
confirmation of a fault, and may also cause additional faults in the vehicle being tested and/or the donor vehicle.
Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result.
Visual Inspection
www.JagDocs.com
Electrical
Fuses (refer to electrical guide)

Wiring harness
Correct engagement of electrical connectors
Loose or corroded connections
Routing of fibre optic harnesses
Correct engagement of optical connectors
Correct placement of optical connectors (ring order)
Correct assembly of optical connectors (backout, etc)
Damage to fibre (chafing, abrasion, kinking, cuts, etc)
the next step
4. If the cause is not visually evident, check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and refer to the DTC Index
Symptom Chart

MOST network fault - Touch screen
display displaying flashing logo MOST ring broken after the touch screen display GO to
Control module on MOST network power or ground circuit open Pinpoint Test
circuit, high resistance B.
Control module on MOST network internal failure
MOST network fault - Touch screen

display blank MOST ring broken between the information and entertainment GO to
control module and the touch screen display Pinpoint Test
Information and entertainment control module or touch screen H.
display power or ground circuit open circuit, high resistance
Wake up signal not received by the information and
entertainment control module
Information and entertainment control module or touch screen
display internal failure
Controller Area Network (CAN)

Control Module Connections to the CAN Harness
Control modules are connected to the CAN harness either in a 'loop' or 'spur' configuration. In the 'loop' type configuration the
CAN harness loops into the module (via two connector pins) and then loops out of the module (via another two connector
pins). In the 'spur' type configuration, a harness spur is spliced into the main 'backbone' of the CAN harness and the module is
connected to the harness spur via two connector pins.
www.JagDocs.com
CAN Harness Architecture
For a detailed description of the CAN Networks and architecture, refer to the relevant Description and Operation section in the
Workshop Manual.
CAN Network Integrity Tests
If a control module is suspected of non-communication, the Network Integrity test application available on the manufacturer
approved diagnostic system can be used to confirm if communication is possible between the control modules on the vehicle
and the manufacturer approved diagnostic system (via the J1962 diagnostic connector ). The results from the test can be used
to determine if either a single module or multiple modules are failing to communicate.
CAN Terminating Modules
If the Network Integrity test indicates that one or more module on one of the CAN networks (HS or MS) are failing to
communicate, there are several checks that can be made. The first step is to identify if both of the CAN terminating modules
on each individual CAN Bus are communicating. If both CAN terminating modules for each individual CAN Bus are
communicating (identified via the Network Integrity test), then it can be confirmed that the main 'backbone' of the CAN
harness is complete. The main 'backbone' of the CAN harness consists of all the modules connected to the CAN harness via a
'loop' configuration and also includes the two terminating modules.
Communication with both CAN terminating modules via the Network Integrity test confirms the physical integrity of the main
'backbone' of the CAN harness (and the harness spur to the J1962 diagnostic connector). This means that there is no
requirement to check the resistance of the CAN Network. This is because the standard check for 60 ohms across the CAN High
and CAN Low lines will not provide any additional information regarding the physical condition of the CAN harness, beyond
what has already been determined from the Network Integrity test.
Non-Communication of a Terminating Module
If a Network Integrity test reveals a terminating module is failing to communicate it can indicate a break in the main
'backbone' of the CAN harness. The first checks should always be to confirm the power and ground supplies to the
non-communicating module are correct. Providing these are correct, the resistance between the CAN High and CAN Low lines at
the J1962 connector can be checked to determine the integrity of the main 'backbone' of the CAN harness. After disconnecting
the battery a reading of 120 ohms would indicate an open circuit in the main 'backbone' of the CAN harness. Alternatively, a
reading of 60 ohms would indicate that there is no open circuit fault with the main 'backbone' of the CAN harness.
www.JagDocs.com
It is worth noting that even if one of the terminating modules is disconnected from the CAN harness, communications between
the modules still connected may still be possible. Therefore communication between the manufacturer approved diagnostic
system and the connected modules may also be possible.
Locating CAN Harness Open Circuits
In the case where multiple modules, including a terminating module, are failing to communicate, having first confirmed the
power and ground supplies are correct, the approximate location of the open circuit can be identified from analysis of the
Network Integrity test results and reference to the relevant CAN network circuit diagrams. For example, if an open circuit
existed in a certain position on the CAN harness, any module positioned on the Network between the J1962 connector and the
open circuit should return a response during the Network Integrity test. No responses would be returned from any modules
past the open circuit fault in the Network.
CAN Harness 'Spur' Type Configuration Circuits
If, after the initial checks (Network Integrity test using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, and power and ground
supplies to the module have been checked and confirmed as correct), a module that is connected to the CAN harness via a
'spur' type configuration is suspected of not communicating, then the physical integrity of the CAN harness 'spur' can be
checked.
This is most easily undertaken by individually checking the continuity of the CAN High and CAN Low lines between the
non-communicating module connector (with the module disconnected) and the J1962 diagnostic connector.
'Lost Communications' DTCs
As well as the methods described so far in this document, which can be used to determine the location of an open circuit in
the CAN harness, 'Lost Communications' DTCs can also be used for this purpose. Lost communication DTCs mean that a
module is not receiving CAN information from another module.
For example, if a global DTC read were to be carried out, only DTCs stored in the modules that the manufacturer approved
diagnostic system could communicate with would be displayed. If there was an open circuit fault in a certain position on the
CAN harness, the modules that could display DTCs would all be prior to the open circuit on the Network, and these modules
should display 'Lost Communications' DTCs with all the modules located on the Network past the open circuit fault.
'Bus off' DTCs
The references to bus and its condition refer to the network concerned and the modules on that network.
If a module logs a 'Bus Off' DTC, it means that the module has detected CAN transmission errors and has disabled it's own
CAN transmissions and disconnected itself from the network in an attempt to allow the rest of the network to function. At this
point the 'Bus Off' DTC is set. A common cause of 'Bus Off' DTCs can be a short circuit in the CAN network.
Media Oriented Systems Transport (MOST)
www.JagDocs.com
NOTE: Items 1, 2, 3 and 6 will always be present. The remaining items are optional and/or market specific.
Item Description
1 Information and entertainment control module
2 MOST diagnostic connector
3 Touch screen display
4 Telephone module
5 Portable audio interface module
7 Power amplifier
8 Navigation control module
9 DAB tuner module
10 Television receiver
Overview
The basic guidelines are covered in the description and operation section, such as not attempting to repair fibre optic cables,
but additional precautions include:
Do not touch the exposed ends of the optical fibres (grease from skin can contaminate the fibre)
Whenever the fibre optic cable is disconnected, cover the connectors to prevent dust contamination
Do not expose the fibre optic cable to heat
Do not bend the fibre optic cable through less than a 25 mm (one inch) radius
Do not use laser pens to test the fibre optic cable's ability to pass light
MOST Diagnostic Tools
There are two dedicated tools for testing the MOST system:
www.JagDocs.com
MOST tester. The MOST tester is connected to the MOST network in place of a control module. It will confirm receipt of any
existing MOST signal and transmit it to the next control module on the network. Perform the following tests to validate the
operation of the MOST tester. GO to Pinpoint Test A.
MOST prism. The MOST prism is connected in the same way as the MOST tester but will simply reflect any existing signal
onward to the next control module. Using the MOST prism before or after a long run of harness may cause a ring break as a
good signal may be too weak after travelling the extended distance. Also, the MOST prism will pass light in either direction so
will not detect reversed MOST terminals elsewhere in the network. For these reasons, the MOST tester is the preferred tool and
should be used unless limited access does not permit it
MOST Ring Break Indication
A ring break in the MOST network is indicated by a blank touch screen display if the break is before the touch screen display or
a flashing logo of the break is after the touch screen display. Possible causes of ring breaks are listed in the symptom chart
Pinpoint Tests
PINPOINT TEST A : MOST TESTER TESTS

A1: MOST TESTER BATTERY TEST
1 Set the MOST tester power switch to 'on'
Is the power LED illuminated?
Yes
Test passed. GO to A2.
No
Test failed. Install a new battery into the MOST tester. GO to A1.
A2: 2+0 INPUT/OUTPUT TEST
NOTES:
'2+0' indicates that the loop harness connector consists of 2 fibre optic terminals and 0 electrical terminals.
The MOST tester may continue to emit a tone or illuminate the LED after the test switch is released. This does not
indicate a fault.

2 Set the connector selector switch to '2+0'
3 Set the indication switch to 'beep' or 'LED'
4 Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+0 connector and the 2+0 loop harness connector
5 Connect the 2+0 loop harness to the MOST tester 2+0 connector
6 Operate the test switch and check the MOST tester beep/LED
Did the MOST tester emit a tone or illuminate the LED?
Yes
No
Test failed. MOST tester or 2+0 harness fault
A3: 2+4 INPUT/OUTPUT TEST
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
'2+4' indicates that the loop harness connector consists of 2 fibre optic terminals and 4 electrical terminals.
indicate a fault.

4 Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+4 connector and the 2+4 loop harness connector
5 Connect the 2+4 loop harness to the MOST tester 2+4 connector
Yes
No
Test failed. MOST tester or 2+4 harness fault
A4: ADAPTER HARNESS AND PRISM TEST
NOTE: The MOST tester may continue to emit a tone or illuminate the LED after the test switch is released. This does
not indicate a fault.

4 Remove the covers from the MOST tester 2+0 connector, the prism, and the adapter harness
connectors
5 Connect the adapter harness to the MOST tester 2+0 connector
6 Connect the prism to the adapter harness
Yes
Test passed
No
Test failed. MOST tester, adapter harness or prism fault
PINPOINT TEST B : MOST NETWORK INITIAL TESTS
CONDITIONS
B1: MOST NETWORK INITIAL TEST 1
NOTE: When connecting the MOST tester, use the 2+0 or 2+4 socket as appropriate and set the connector selector
switch to match the socket in use
1Switch on the audio/video system

2Disconnect the MOST harness connector from a control module located after the touch screen display and
before the information and entertainment control module
4 Connect the MOST harness connector to the MOST tester
5 Check the touch screen display for indication of a MOST network fault
Has the MOST network been restored?
Yes
The disconnected control module is causing the MOST network fault. GO to Pinpoint Test E.
No
The disconnected control module is not causing MOST network fault. GO to B2.
B2: MOST NETWORK INITIAL TEST 2
1 Check the MOST tester beep/LED
Yes
MOST signal received. The MOST network fault is located downstream of the MOST tester. GO to Pinpoint
Test C.
No
MOST signal not received. The MOST network fault is located upstream of the MOST tester. Disconnect
the MOST harness connector from the MOST tester and reconnect it to the control module. GO to
Pinpoint Test D.
PINPOINT TEST C : MOST NETWORK DOWNSTREAM TESTS
www.JagDocs.com
CONDITIONS
C1: MOST NETWORK DOWNSTREAM TEST 1
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and identify the succeeding control module on the MOST network
Is this control module the information and entertainment control module?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test F.
No
GO to C2.
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector
2 Direct the MOST harness connector at a suitable surface and check for the presence of red light
Is red light present?
Yes
Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the MOST tester and reconnect it to the control module.
GO to C3.
No
The fault is in the MOST harness between the MOST tester and the disconnected MOST harness
connector. Install a new MOST harness as necessary
1 Connect the succeeding MOST harness connector to the MOST tester

Yes
No
The disconnected control module is not causing the MOST network fault. GO to C1.
PINPOINT TEST D : MOST NETWORK UPSTREAM TESTS
CONDITIONS
D1: MOST NETWORK UPSTREAM TEST 1
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and identify the preceding control module on the MOST network
Is this control module the touch screen display?
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test G.
No
GO to D2.
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the control module
www.JagDocs.com
Yes
The MOST network fault is in the control module or the MOST harness to the succeeding control
module. GO to D3.
No
The MOST network fault is located upstream of the disconnected control module. Reconnect the MOST
harness connector to the control module. GO to D1.

Yes
No
The fault is in the MOST harness between the MOST tester and the succeeding control module. Install a
new MOST harness as necessary
PINPOINT TEST E : CONTROL MODULE TESTS
CONDITIONS
E1: CONTROL MODULE TEST 1
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com
When connecting the MOST tester, use the 2+0 or 2+4 socket as appropriate and set the connector selector switch to
match the socket in use
indicate a fault.
1 Connect the MOST tester to the relevant control module using the adapter harness
Yes
MOST signal received. Tests inconclusive. Reconnect the MOST harness connector to the control module
and confirm that the MOST network fault is still present. Repeat the tests from the beginning. GO to
Pinpoint Test B.
No
GO to E2.
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the relevant control module power and ground circuits for
open circuit, high resistance
Yes
GO to E3.
No
Repair the power and/or ground circuit
1 Reconnect the MOST harness to the control module
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from the beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new control module
PINPOINT TEST F : MOST NETWORK FINAL DOWNSTREAM TEST
CONDITIONS
F1: MOST NETWORK FINAL DOWNSTREAM TEST 1
NOTES:
When connecting the MOST tester, use the 2+0 or 2+4 socket as appropriate and set the connector selector switch to
match the socket in use
indicate a fault.
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the MOST tester

2 Reconnect the MOST harness connector to the control module
3 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the information and entertainment control module
Yes
GO to F2.
No
The fault is in the harness between the information and entertainment control module and the
preceeding control module. Install a new MOST harness as necessary
F2: MOST NETWORK FINAL DOWNSTREAM TEST 2
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the MOST tester
2 Reconnect the MOST harness connector to the information and entertainment control module
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from the beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new information and entertainment control module
PINPOINT TEST G : MOST NETWORK FINAL UPSTREAM TESTS
CONDITIONS
www.JagDocs.com
G1: MOST NETWORK FINAL UPSTREAM TEST 1
NOTE: The MOST tester may continue to emit a tone or illuminate the LED after the test switch is released. This does
not indicate a fault.
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the touch screen display
2 Connect the MOST tester to the touch screen display using the adapter harness
Yes
The fault is in the MOST harness between the touch screen display and the succeeding control module.
Install a new MOST harness as necessary
No
GO to G2.
G2: MOST NETWORK FINAL UPSTREAM TEST 2
1 Reconnect the MOST harness to the touch screen display
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new touch screen display
PINPOINT TEST H : BLANK SCREEN TESTS
CONDITIONS
H1: BLANK SCREEN TEST 1
1 Switch on the audio/video system

2 Remove the cover from the MOST diagnostic connector
4 Connect the MOST tester to the MOST diagnostic connector
Yes
The MOST diagnostic connector cover is causing the MOST network fault. GO to H2.
No
The MOST diagnostic connector cover is not causing MOST network fault. GO to H3.
1 Disconnect the MOST tester
2 Install the cover to the MOST diagnostic connector
Yes
No
Install a new MOST diagnostic connector cover
1 Check the MOST tester beep/LED
Yes
MOST signal received. The MOST network fault is located downstream of the MOST tester. GO to H4.
No
MOST signal not received. The MOST network fault is located upstream of the MOST tester. Disconnect
the MOST tester from the MOST diagnostic connector and install the cover. GO to H5.
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the touch screen display
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test J.
No
The fault is in the MOST harness between the MOST diagnostic connector and the touch screen display.
Install a new MOST harness as necessary
1 Disconnect the MOST harness connector from the information and entertainment control module
2 Direct the information and entertainment control module at a suitable surface and check for the
presence of red light
Yes
www.JagDocs.com
Install a new MOST harness between the information and entertainment control module and the MOST
diagnostic connector
No
GO to Pinpoint Test I.
PINPOINT TEST I : INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE TESTS
CONDITIONS
I1: INFORMATION AND ENTERTAINMENT CONTROL MODULE TEST 1
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, check the information and entertainment control
module for related DTCs
Is communication possible between the manufacturer approved diagnostic system and the information and
entertainment control module?
Yes
Refer to the relevant DTC index
No
GO to I2.
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the information and entertainment control module power
and ground circuits for open circuit, high resistance
Yes
GO to I3.
No
1 Using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system, perform a CAN network integrity test. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and test the medium speed CAN bus circuit for short circuit to ground, short
circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance
Is the medium speed CAN bus within specification?
Yes
Install a new information and entertainment control module
No
Repair the medium speed CAN bus circuit
PINPOINT TEST J : TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY TESTS
CONDITIONS
J1: TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY TEST 1
1 Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and test the touch screen display power and ground circuits for
open circuit, high resistance
Yes
GO to J2.
No
J2: TOUCH SCREEN DISPLAY TEST 2
1 Reconnect the MOST harness to the touch screen display
Yes
Tests inconclusive. Repeat the tests from beginning. GO to Pinpoint Test B.
No
Install a new touch screen display
DTC Index
CAUTIONS:
3548-1358-00
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com

B00D511 Restraint System Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check PAD
Passenger Disable PAD lamp supply circuit - short lamp supply circuit for short to ground
Indicator to ground
Passenger Disable PAD lamp supply circuit - short lamp supply circuit for short to power
Indicator to power
Passenger Disable PAD lamp supply circuit - open lamp supply circuit for open circuit
Indicator circuit
B100951 Ignition Check ignition, power and ground supplies to CJB and
Authorisation Faulty instrument cluster instrument cluster. Re-synchronize ID by re-configuring
Target SID re-synchronisation the instrument cluster as a new module. Check CAN
error following programming communications between instrument cluster and tester
CAN fault
B100962 Ignition Check CAN communications between CJB and instrument

Authorisation Low speed CAN fault cluster. Check ignition, power and ground supplies to CJB
CJB fault and instrument cluster. Confirm correct module is
Instrument cluster fault installed. Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the
Incorrect module installed instrument cluster as a new module. Check CAN network
(CJB/Instrument cluster) for interference/EMC related issues
Target SID synchronisation
B100963 Ignition Check Power and Ground supplies to CJB and instrument
Authorisation CJB fault cluster. Check CAN communications between CJB and
Low speed CAN fault instrument cluster. Check battery is in fully charged and
Instrument cluster fault serviceable condition, refer to the battery care manual
Low battery voltage <9V
B100964 Ignition Check power and ground supplies to CJB and instrument
Authorisation CJB fault cluster. Check CAN communications between CJB and
Low speed CAN fault instrument cluster
Instrument cluster fault
B102B67 Passive Key Check power and ground supplies to CJB and RKE
CJB fault module. Check CAN communications between CJB and
Low speed CAN fault RKE module. Re-synchronise ID by re-configuring the RKE
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) module as a new module
www.JagDocs.com
module fault
Write target SID
synchronisation error following
re-programming
B102B87 Passive Key Check power and ground supplies to CJB, RKE module
CJB fault and receiver. Check CAN communications between CJB
Low speed CAN fault and instrument cluster. Check key fob battery. Confirm
RKE module fault vehicle surroundings, move vehicle. Check CAN network
Key fob battery low/battery for interference/EMC related issues. Disconnect battery,
contact issue then re-connect - confirm operation by re-programming
Interference from other RF keys. Check serial circuit between receiver and RKE
signal module. Confirm spare key works. Refer to the electrical
EMC/noise circuit diagrams and test circuits to all 3 antennas. Check
Receiver fault whereabouts of key
Receiver not programmed
correctly
Serial communications fault
(between receiver and RKE
module)
Key fault
Passive antenna fault
Confirm placement of key
within vehicle
B108413 Boot/Trunk Motor Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check trunk
Close Switch Trunk latch open signal circuit - latch open signal circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B108783 LIN Bus "A" Check operation of rain/light sensor by covering sensor or
Checksum of the received LIN applying water to screen, install a new sensor as
frame from battery backed required
sounder, roof header console,
and/or rain/light sensor is
incorrect
B108788 LIN Bus "A" Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Bus off. Battery backed using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
sounder, roof header console, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check battery
and/or rain/light sensor LIN backed sounder, roof header console, and rain/light
circuit - short to ground, power sensor LIN circuit for short to ground, power
B108A11 Start Button Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Start/Stop switch analogue Start/Stop switch analogue input circuits 1 and 2 for
input circuits 1 or 2 - short to short to ground
ground
www.JagDocs.com
B108A12 Start Button Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Start/Stop switch analogue Start/Stop switch analogue input circuits 1 and 2 for
input circuits 1 or 2 - short to short to power
power
B109512 Wiper On/Off Relay Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Wiper On/Off relay control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check wiper
On/Off relay control circuit for short to power
B109514 Wiper On/Off Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check wiper
Wiper On/Off relay control On/Off relay control circuit for short to ground, open
circuit - short to ground, open circuit
circuit
B109612 Wiper High/Low Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Relay Wiper Fast/Slow relay control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check wiper
Fast/Slow relay control circuit for short to power
B109614 Wiper High/Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check wiper
Relay Wiper Fast/Slow relay control Fast/Slow relay control circuit for short to ground, open
circuit
B109712 Heated Windshield Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Relay Heated windshield relay control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check heated
windshield relay control circuit for short to power
B109714 Heated Windshield Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check heated
Relay Heated windshield relay control windshield relay control circuit for short to ground, open
circuit
www.JagDocs.com
B10A612 Main Light Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check master
Master light switch signal from light switch signal from roof header console circuit for
roof header console circuit - short to power
short to power
B10A623 Main Light Switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Master light switch signal from using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
roof header console signal Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check master
stuck low. Switch is read as ON light switch signal from roof header console for short to
for too long a time ground
B10AD09 Rain Sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Component failures using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
Suspect the rain/light sensor, check and install a new
sensor as required
B10AD11 Rain Sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Rain/light sensor power circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
rain/light sensor power circuit for short to ground
B10AD96 Rain Sensor Suspect the rain/light sensor, check and install a new
Component internal failure sensor as required
B10E511 PCM Wake-up Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check ECM
Signal ECM wake-up signal circuit - wake-up signal circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Signal ECM wake-up signal circuit - wake-up signal circuit for short to power
short to power
Signal ECM wake-up signal circuit - wake-up signal circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B10F111 Key In Switch Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Keyless vehicle module, key IN using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
status circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check keyless
vehicle module, key IN status circuit for short to ground
B10F112 Key In Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check keyless
Keyless vehicle module, key IN vehicle module, key IN status circuit for short to power
status circuit - short to power
B10F113 Key In Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check keyless
Keyless vehicle module, key IN vehicle module, key IN status circuit for open circuit
status circuit - open circuit
B10F211 Sunroof Control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Sunroof enable signal circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sunroof
enable signal circuit for short to ground
B10F212 Sunroof Control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sunroof
Sunroof enable signal circuit - enable signal circuit for short to power
short to power
B10F213 Sunroof Control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check sunroof
Sunroof enable signal circuit - enable signal circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B10F311 Left Front Position Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Light Left front side lamps circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
front side lamps circuit for short to ground
B10F315 Left Front Position Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Light Left front side lamps circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
front side lamps circuit for short to power, open circuit
B10F411 Right Front Position Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Light Right front side lamps circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
front side lamps circuit for short to ground
B10F415 Right Front Position Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Light Right front side lamps circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
front side lamps circuit for short to power, open circuit
B10F812 Accessory socket 'A' Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
relay Accessory socket 'A' relay using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
www.JagDocs.com
control circuit - short to power Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
accessory socket 'A' relay control circuit for short to
power
B10F814 Accessory socket 'A' Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
relay Accessory socket 'A' relay accessory socket 'A' relay control circuit for short to
control circuit - short to ground, ground, open circuit
open circuit
B10F912 Accessory socket 'B' Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
relay Front powerpoint, trailer tow powerpoint, trailer tow connector, road pricing connector,
connector, road pricing sunblind power supply circuits for short to power
connector, sunblind power
supply circuits - short to power
B10F914 Accessory socket 'B' Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
relay Front powerpoint, trailer tow powerpoint, trailer tow connector, road pricing connector,
connector, road pricing sunblind power supply circuits for short to ground, open
connector, sunblind power circuit
supply circuits - short to
B10F993 Accessory socket 'B' Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
relay Front powerpoint, trailer tow using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
connector, road pricing Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
connector, sunblind power powerpoint, trailer tow connector, road pricing connector,
supply circuits - short to power, sunblind power supply circuits for short to power, ground,
ground, open circuit open circuit
B10FA93 Delayed Power Off Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
relay ADRC ECM, roof header console using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
lamp, glove box lamp , RH/LH Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check ADRC
footwell lamps, JAG Sense ECM, roof header console lamp, glove box lamp , RH/LH
glove box module, RH/LH footwell lamps, JAG Sense glove box module, RH/LH
sunvisor lamps, rear dome sunvisor lamps, rear dome lamps switched power circuits
lamps switched power circuits - for short to power, open circuit
B10FF11 Ignition control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
ECM and FPDB ignition control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check ECM and
FPDB ignition control circuit for short to ground
B10FF13 Ignition control Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
ECM and FPDB ignition control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check ECM and
FPDB ignition control circuit for open circuit
B110011 O2 sensor heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
relay FPDB O2 sensor heater relay using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
control circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check FPDB O2
sensor heater relay control circuit for short to ground
B113D12 Sunroof Global Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Open/Close Control Roof opening panel global using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
open/close control circuit - Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check roof
short to power opening panel global open/close control circuit for short
to power
B113D14 Sunroof Global Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check roof
Open/Close Control Roof opening panel global opening panel global open/close control circuit for short
open/close control circuit - to ground, open circuit
short to ground, open circuit
B114011 Engine Crank Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Authorisation Engine crank authorisation using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
signal circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check engine
crank authorisation signal circuit for short to ground
B114211 Ignition Status 1 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Ignition supply 1 circuits - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check all
ignition supply 1 circuits for short to ground
B114311 Ignition Status 2 Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Ignition supply 2 circuits - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check all
ignition supply 2 circuits for short to ground
B114411 Heated Steering Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Wheel Supply Heated steering wheel supply using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check heated
steering wheel supply circuit for short to ground
www.JagDocs.com
B114511 Glovebox Locking Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Motor Glovebox latch locking motor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
glovebox latch locking motor circuit for short to ground
B114512 Glovebox Locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Motor Glovebox latch locking motor glovebox latch locking motor control circuit for short to
control circuit - short to power power
B114513 Glovebox Locking Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Motor Glovebox latch locking motor glovebox latch locking motor control circuit for open
control circuit - open circuit circuit
B114612 Passive sounder Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check security
Supply Security passive sounder passive sounder control circuit for short to power
control circuit - short to power
B114614 Passive sounder Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check security
Supply Security passive sounder passive sounder control circuit for short to ground, open
control circuit - short to ground, circuit
open circuit
B115811 Front Passenger Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Seat Heater Sensor Front passenger seat heater using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
sensor circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
passenger seat heater sensor circuit for short to ground
B115813 Front Passenger Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Seat Heater Sensor Front passenger seat heater using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
sensor circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
passenger seat heater sensor circuit for open circuit
B115911 Driver Seat Heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Sensor Driver seat heater sensor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat heater sensor circuit for short to ground
B115913 Driver Seat Heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Sensor Driver seat heater sensor using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat heater sensor circuit for open circuit
B115A11 Front Passenger Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Seat Heater Front passenger seat heater using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
supply circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
passenger seat heater supply circuit for short to ground
B115A15 Front Passenger Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Seat Heater Front passenger seat heater using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
supply circuit - short to power, Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
open circuit passenger seat heater supply circuit for short to power,
open circuit
B115B11 Driver Seat Heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Driver seat heater supply circuit using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
- short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat heater supply circuit for short to ground
B115B15 Driver Seat Heater Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Driver seat heater supply circuit using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
- short to power, open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
seat heater supply circuit for short to power, open circuit
B117513 Driver Door Ajar Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check driver
Switch Driver door ajar switch signal door ajar switch signal circuit for open circuit
B117613 Passenger Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Ajar Switch Passenger door ajar switch passenger door ajar switch signal circuit for open circuit
signal circuit - open circuit
B117712 Screenwash Level Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Switch Screenwash level switch signal screenwash level switch signal circuit for short to power
B11C013 Driver Side Rear Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear
Door Ajar Switch Left rear door ajar switch signal door ajar switch signal circuit for open circuit
B11C113 Passenger Side Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Rear Door Ajar Right rear door ajar switch rear door ajar switch signal circuit for open circuit
Switch signal circuit - open circuit
B122223 Master Lock/Unlock Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check master
Switch Master lock or unlock switch lock and unlock switch digital input circuits for short to
digital input circuit - signal ground, open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
stuck low
B123711 Gear Shift Module Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Early Wake-up Transmission shift module using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
wake-up control circuit - short Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
to ground transmission shift module wake-up control circuit for
short to ground
B123712 Gear Shift Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Early Wake-up Transmission shift module transmission shift module wake-up control circuit for
wake-up control circuit - short short to power
to power
B123713 Gear Shift Module Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Early Wake-up Transmission shift module transmission shift module wake-up control circuit for
wake-up control circuit - open open circuit
circuit
B123E13 Crank Enable Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check OK to
OK to crank signal circuit - crank signal circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B1A8596 Ambient Light Check and install a new sensor as required

Sensor Light sensor internal electronic
failure
B1C4513 Front Wiper Park Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Position Switch Windshield wiper motor park windshield wiper motor park switch signal circuit for open
switch signal circuit - open circuit
circuit
B1C4523 Front Wiper Park Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check front
Position Switch Signal stuck low wiper park position switch input circuit for short, open
circuit
B1C7812 Powerwash Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Powerwash relay control circuit powerwash relay control circuit for short to power
- short to power
B1C7814 Powerwash Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Powerwash relay control circuit powerwash relay control circuit for short to ground, open
- short to ground, open circuit circuit
B1C7911 Front Washer Pump Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Screenwash pump control screenwash pump control circuit for short to ground
B1C7913 Front Washer Pump Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Screenwash pump control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
screenwash pump control circuit for open circuit
B1C9812 Left Corner Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
Circuit Left front corner lamp control front corner lamp control circuit for short to power
B1C9814 Left Corner Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left
Circuit Left front corner lamp control front corner lamp control circuit for short to ground, open
circuit
B1C9912 Right Corner Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Circuit Right front corner lamp control front corner lamp control circuit for short to power
B1C9914 Right Corner Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Circuit Right front corner lamp control front corner lamp control circuit for short to ground, open
circuit
B1D0011 Left Low Beam Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Left dip beam control circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left dip
beam control circuit for short to ground
B1D0012 Left Low Beam Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left dip
Left dip beam control circuit - beam control circuit for short to power
short to power
B1D0013 Left Low Beam Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left dip
www.JagDocs.com
Left dip beam control circuit - beam control circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B1D0111 Right Low Beam Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Right dip beam control circuit - using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right dip
beam control circuit for short to ground
B1D0112 Right Low Beam Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right dip
Right dip beam control circuit - beam control circuit for short to power
short to power
B1D0113 Right Low Beam Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right dip
Right dip beam control circuit - beam control circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B1D0211 Left High Beam Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left high
Circuit Left high beam control circuit - beam control circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Circuit Left high beam control circuit - beam control circuit for short to power
short to power
Circuit Left high beam control circuit - beam control circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B1D0311 Right High Beam Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
Circuit Right high beam control circuit high beam control circuit for short to ground
- short to ground
Circuit Right high beam control circuit high beam control circuit for short to power
- short to power
Circuit Right high beam control circuit high beam control circuit for open circuit
- open circuit
B1D1711 Battery Backed Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check battery
Sounder Battery backed sounder backed sounder inclination sensor control circuit for short
inclination sensor control circuit to ground
- short to ground
B1D1811 Volumetric Sensor Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Intrusion sensor module supply using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
intrusion sensor module supply circuit for short to ground
www.JagDocs.com
B1D2711 Heater Coolant Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Pump Heater coolant pump control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - short to ground Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check heater
coolant pump control circuit for short to ground
B1D2713 Heater Coolant Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Pump Heater coolant pump control using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
circuit - open circuit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check heater
coolant pump control circuit for open circuit
B1D9796 Tilt Sensor Suspect the battery backed sounder, check and install a
Component internal failure new battery backed sounder as required
P057112 Brake Switch A Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Circuit Footbrake switch circuit - short footbrake switch circuit for short to power
to power
P080111 Reverse Inhibit Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Control Circuit Electrochromic rear view mirror, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
reverse inhibit circuit - short to Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
ground electrochromic rear view mirror, reverse inhibit circuit for
short to ground
P080112 Reverse Inhibit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Control Circuit Electrochromic rear view mirror, electrochromic rear view mirror, reverse inhibit circuit for
reverse inhibit circuit - short to short to power
power
P080113 Reverse Inhibit Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Control Circuit Electrochromic rear view mirror, electrochromic rear view mirror, reverse inhibit circuit for
reverse inhibit circuit - open open circuit
circuit
P085013 Park/Neutral Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
www.JagDocs.com
Input Circuit Park/Neutral signal circuit - Park/Neutral signal circuit for open circuit
open circuit
P162413 Anti-theft System Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check RJB
RJB anti-theft signal circuit - anti-theft signal circuit for open circuit
open circuit
P254F13 Engine Hood Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check hood
Circuit/Open Hood ajar switch signal circuit - ajar switch signal circuit for open circuit
open circuit
U001988 Low Speed CAN Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Communication Bus Bus OFF using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
U014200 Lost Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Communication No sub type information using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
With Body Control
Module "B"
With Instrument
Panel Cluster (IPC)
Control Module
With Information
Center "A"
With HVAC Control
Module
U016800 Lost Check power and ground supplies to vehicle security
Communication No sub type information module
With Vehicle
Security Control
Module
With "Door Control
Module A"
With "Door Control
Module B"
With Remote
Function Actuation
U023100 Lost Check power and ground supplies to rain sensing module.
Communication No sub type information LIN circuit fault
With Rain Sensing
Module
U030000 Internal Control Suspect the CJB. Check and install a new CJB as
Module Software No sub type information required, refer to the new module/component installation
Incompatibility note at the top of the DTC Index
U1000-00 Solid State Driver
Protection Active - Central junction box output
NOTE: The relevant output is disabled while this
Driver Disabled - circuit - Short circuit to ground,
DTC is set. Do not clear the DTC until the fault has been
No sub type short circuit to power
rectified
information
system, check for other central junction box short
circuit to ground and/or short circuit to power
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index for
corrective actions
Once circuit faults have been rectified, clear DTC
and retest
U1A1449 CAN Initialisation Suspect the CJB. Check and install a new CJB as
Failure Internal electronic failure required, refer to the new module/component installation
U200813 Sensor Cluster Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Instrument cluster security instrument cluster security signal circuit for open circuit
signal circuit - open circuit
www.JagDocs.com
U201012 Switch Illumination Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Switch/interior illumination switch/interior illumination PWM supply circuit for short
PWM supply circuit - short to to power
power
U201014 Switch Illumination Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check
Switch/interior illumination switch/interior illumination PWM supply circuit for short
PWM supply circuit - short to to ground, open circuit
U210000 Initial Configuration Re-configure the RJB using the manufacturer approved
Not Complete RJB configuration (parameters) diagnostic system
failure

Internal electronic Central junction box - Internal
NOTE: The relevant output is disabled while this
failure failure
DTC is set

system, check for other central junction box short
circuit to ground and/or short circuit to power
DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC index for
corrective actions
Install a new central junction box as required.
Clear DTCs and retest
Not configured diagnostic system. Check the correct CJB is installed to
vehicle market/specification. Install a new/correct CJB as
required, refer to the new module/component installation
U300087 Control Module Carry out CAN network integrity test using the
Missing message manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the
electrical circuit diagrams and check CAN network
between RJB and CJB for short, open circuit. Check RJB
and then CJB for related DTCs and refer to the relevant
DTC Index
U300281 Vehicle Suspect the CJB has previously been installed to another
Identification Invalid serial data received vehicle. Check and install the original or a new CJB
Number
U300317 Battery Voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Circuit voltage above threshold using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
U300362 Battery Voltage Carry out any pinpoint tests associated with this DTC
Mis-match in battery voltage, using the manufacturer approved diagnostic system.
of 2 volts or more, between
CJB and RJB
Rear Junction Box (RJB)
CAUTIONS:
3548-1358-00
NOTES:
www.JagDocs.com

P046011 Fuel Level Sensor Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
A Circuit Fuel level sensor A manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
analogue input circuit - circuit diagrams and check fuel level sensor A analogue input
short to ground circuit for short to ground
A Circuit Fuel level sensor A manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
analogue input circuit - circuit diagrams and check fuel level sensor A analogue input
short to power, open circuit for short to power, open circuit
circuit
P057112 Brake Switch A Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check footbrake switch
Circuit Footbrake switch digital digital input signal circuits for short to power
input signal circuits -
short to power
P123012 Fuel Pump Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check fuel pump
Speed High Side output not delivery module for short to power
Malfunction driven - Diagnosis
(VLCM) feedback indicates output
is short to power
P123014 Fuel Pump Low Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check fuel pump
Speed High Side output not delivery module for short to ground, open circuit
Malfunction driven - Diagnosis
(VLCM) feedback indicates output
is short to ground, open
circuit
P123093 Fuel Pump Low Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Speed High Side output not manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Malfunction driven - Diagnosis circuit diagrams and check fuel pump delivery module for short to
(VLCM) feedback indicates output power, open circuit
is at open load or short
to power
B Circuit Fuel level sensor B manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
analogue input circuit - circuit diagrams and check fuel level sensor B analogue input
B Circuit Fuel level sensor B manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
analogue input circuit - circuit diagrams and check fuel level sensor B analogue input
circuit
P162413 Anti-theft System Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check anti-theft signal
Anti-theft signal circuit circuit from CJB for open circuit
from CJB - open circuit
C111A11 Right Stop Lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Right stomp lamp control manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
www.JagDocs.com
circuit - short to ground circuit diagrams and check right stomp lamp control circuit for
short to ground
C111A12 Right Stop Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right stomp
Right stomp lamp control lamp control circuit for short to power
C111A13 Right Stop Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right stomp
Right stomp lamp control lamp control circuit for open circuit
C111B11 Left Stop Lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Left stomp lamp control manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit - short to ground circuit diagrams and check left stomp lamp control circuit for
short to ground
C111B13 Left Stop Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left stomp lamp
Left stomp lamp control control circuit for open circuit
C112011 Reversing lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Reverse lamp control manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit - short to ground circuit diagrams and check reverse lamp control circuit for short
to ground
C112012 Reversing lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check reverse lamp
Reverse lamp control control circuit for short to power
C112013 Reversing lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check reverse lamp
Reverse lamp control control circuit for open circuit
C1120-15 Reversing lamp -

circuit short to Reverse lamp control Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check reverse
battery or open circuit - short circuit to lamp control circuit for short circuit to power, open circuit,
power, open circuit, high high resistance. Repair wiring harness as required. Clear
resistance DTC and retest
B100A51 Fuel Pump Check power and ground supplies to RJB. Check CAN
Authorisation RJB fault communications between RJB and instrument cluster. Check
Low speed CAN fault power and ground supplies to instrument cluster
Instrument cluster fault
B100A62 Fuel Pump Check CAN communications between RJB and instrument cluster.
Authorisation Low speed CAN fault Check power and ground supplies to RJB and instrument cluster.
RJB fault Confirm correct module installed. Re-synchronise ID by
Instrument cluster fault re-configuring the RJB as a new module. Check CAN network for
Incorrect module interference/EMC related issues
installed (RJB/Instrument
cluster)
Write target SID
following re-programming
B100A63 Fuel Pump Check power and ground supplies to RJB and instrument cluster.
Authorisation RJB fault Check CAN communications between RJB and instrument cluster.
Low speed CAN fault Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable condition, refer
Instrument cluster fault to the battery care manual
Low battery voltage <9V
B102612 Steering Column Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check steering column
Lock Steering column lock lock ground circuit for short to power
ground circuit - short to
power
B108783 LIN Bus "A" Check the battery monitoring system and rear parking aid system
The checksum of the for DTCs and refer to relevant DTC Index
received LIN frame is
incorrect
B108786 LIN Bus "A" Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
The header of the LIN manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Check the battery
message received is monitoring system and rear parking aid system for DTCs and
incorrect refer to relevant DTC Index
B108788 LIN Bus "A" Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Battery monitoring manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
system LIN circuit - short circuit diagrams and check battery monitoring system LIN circuit
to ground, power for short to ground, power
www.JagDocs.com
B108A23 Start Button Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Start/Stop switch digital manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
input signal circuit - circuit diagrams and check Start/Stop switch digital input signal
stuck low circuit for short to ground
B10A111 Trailer Tow Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Detection Trailer tow detection manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
digital input circuit - circuit diagrams and check trailer tow detection digital input
B10AF12 Blower Fan Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check blower motor
High Side output not supply circuit for short to power
driven - Diagnosis
feedback indicates output
is short to power
B10AF14 Blower Fan Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check blower motor
High Side output not supply circuit for short to ground, open circuit
driven - Diagnosis
circuit
B10AF93 Blower Fan Relay Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
High Side output not manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
driven - Diagnosis circuit diagrams and check blower motor supply circuit for short
feedback indicates output to power, open circuit
to power
B10DD11 Airbag Deployed Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Airbag deployed digital manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
input signal circuit - short circuit diagrams and check airbag deployed digital input signal
to ground circuit for short to ground
B10DD15 Airbag Deployed Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Airbag deployed digital manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
input signal circuit - short circuit diagrams and check airbag deployed digital input signal
to power, open circuit circuit for short to power, open circuit
B10DD38 Airbag Deployed Check the RCM for related DTCs and refer to the relevant DTC
Signal frequency incorrect Index
B10DE11 Low Fuel Warning Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Switch Diesel run-dry switch manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
analogue input circuit - circuit diagrams and check diesel run-dry switch analogue input
www.JagDocs.com
B10DE15 Low Fuel Warning Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Switch Diesel run-dry switch manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
analogue input circuit - circuit diagrams and check diesel run-dry switch analogue input
circuit
B111211 Park Aid Ignition Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Parking aid ignition manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
supply circuit - short to circuit diagrams and check parking aid ignition supply circuit for
ground short to ground
B111212 Park Aid Ignition Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check parking aid
Parking aid ignition ignition supply circuit for short to power
supply circuit - short to
power
B111511 High Mounted Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Stop Lamp High mounted stop lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Control control circuit - short to circuit diagrams and check high mounted stop lamp control circuit
ground for short to ground
B111611 Left Tail Lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Left hand tail lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
control circuit - short to circuit diagrams and check left hand tail lamp control circuit for
B111711 Right Tail Lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Right hand tail lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
control circuit - short to circuit diagrams and check right hand tail lamp control circuit for
www.JagDocs.com
B111A11 Number Plate Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Lamps Right hand or left hand manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
number plate lamp circuit diagrams and check right hand and left hand number plate
control circuits - short to lamp control circuits for short to ground
ground
B111A12 Number Plate Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right hand and
Lamps Right hand or left hand left hand number plate lamp control circuits for short to power
number plate lamp
control circuits - short to
power
B111A13 Number Plate Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right hand and
Lamps Right hand or left hand left hand number plate lamp control circuits for open circuit
number plate lamp
control circuits - open
circuit
B111A-15 Number Plate

Lamps - circuit Right or left side licence Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right
short to battery plate lamp(s) inoperative side and left side licence plate lamp control circuits for
or open Right or left side licence short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair
plate lamp control wiring harness as required. Clear DTC and retest
circuits - short circuit to
power, open circuit, high
resistance
B111D12 Boot/Trunk Motor Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Open Luggage compartment lid manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
latch actuator control circuit diagrams and check luggage compartment lid latch
circuit - short to power actuator control circuit for short to power
B111D14 Boot/Trunk Motor Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Open Luggage compartment lid manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
latch actuator control circuit diagrams and check luggage compartment lid latch
circuit - short to ground, actuator control circuit for short to ground, open circuit
open circuit
B111E11 Boot/Trunk Lamps Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Luggage compartment manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
lamp control circuit - circuit diagrams and check luggage compartment lamp control
B111E12 Boot/Trunk Lamps Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check luggage
Luggage compartment compartment lamp control circuit for short to power
lamp control circuit -
short to power
B111E13 Boot/Trunk Lamps Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check luggage
Luggage compartment compartment lamp control circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B111E-15 Boot/Trunk Lamps

- circuit short to Luggage compartment Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check luggage
battery or open lamp inoperative compartment lamp control circuit for short circuit to
Luggage compartment power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair wiring harness
lamp control circuit - as required. Clear DTC and retest
short circuit to power,
open circuit, high
resistance
B112312 Restraints Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Ignition Relay High Side output not manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
driven - diagnosis circuit diagrams and check restraints ignition relay output for
feedback indicates output short to power
is short to power
feedback indicates output short to ground, open circuit
circuit
feedback indicates output open load or short to power
www.JagDocs.com

to power
Control Interior lamp fade control fade control circuit for short to ground
Control Interior lamp fade control fade control circuit for short to power
Illumination Hazard switch illumination control circuit for short to power
illumination control
Illumination Hazard switch illumination control circuit for short to ground, open circuit
illumination control
circuit - short to ground,
open circuit
B113E12 External Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check external
Boot/Trunk External luggage luggage compartment lid release switch digital input circuit for
Release Switch compartment lid release short to power
switch digital input circuit
- short to power
B113E23 External Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Boot/Trunk External luggage manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
Release Switch compartment lid release circuit diagrams and check external luggage compartment lid
switch digital input circuit release switch digital input circuit for short to ground
- signal stuck low
B11D949 Vehicle Battery Check battery is in fully charged and serviceable condition using
Vehicle battery the Midtronics battery tester and the battery care manual
damaged/worn out
B11DB49 Battery Suspect the battery monitoring module. Check and install a new
Monitoring Internal electronic failure module as required, refer to the new module/component
Module installation note at the top of the DTC Index
B11DB87 Battery Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Monitoring Battery monitoring manufacturer approved diagnostic system. If additional DTCs
Module module connector B108783, B108786, B108787 are logged, suspect the RJB. Check
dis-connected/poor and install a new RJB as required, refer to the new
connection Battery module/component installation note at the top of the DTC Index.
monitoring If additional DTCs B108783, B108786, B108787 are NOT logged,
module to RJB LIN circuit check for good/clean contact at battery monitoring module
- open circuit
Battery monitoring connector, refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check battery
module to battery monitoring module to RJB LIN circuit and battery monitoring
positive monitor circuit - module to battery positive monitor circuit for open circuit. Clear
open circuit DTC and repeat automated diagnostic procedure using
Battery monitoring manufacturer approved diagnostic system. If DTC remains
module/RJB failure suspect the battery monitoring module, check and install a new
battery monitoring module as required, refer to the new
module/component installation note at the top of the DTC Index
B123A11 Left Front Turn Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left front turn
Indicator Left front turn signal signal lamp control circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Indicator Left front turn signal signal lamp control circuit for short to power
short to power
Indicator Left front turn signal signal lamp control circuit for open circuit
open circuit
B123A-15 Left Front Turn

Indicator - circuit Left front turn signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check left front
short to battery lamp control circuit - turn signal lamp control circuit for short circuit to power,
or open short circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair wiring harness as
open circuit, high required. Clear DTC and retest
resistance
B123B11 Right Front Turn Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right front turn
www.JagDocs.com
Indicator Right front turn signal signal lamp control circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Indicator Right front turn signal signal lamp control circuit for short to power
short to power
Indicator Right front turn signal signal lamp control circuit for open circuit
open circuit

Indicator - circuit Right front turn signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check right front
resistance
B124711 Left Rear Turn Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear turn
Indicator Left rear turn signal lamp signal lamp control circuit for short to ground
ground
Indicator Left rear turn signal lamp signal lamp control circuit for short to power
power
Indicator Left rear turn signal lamp signal lamp control circuit for open circuit
power, open circuit
B1247-15 Left Rear Turn

Indicator - circuit Left rear turn signal lamp Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check left rear turn
short to battery control circuit - short signal lamp control circuit for short circuit to power, open
or open circuit to power, open circuit, high resistance. Repair wiring harness as required.
circuit, high resistance Clear DTC and retest
B124811 Right Rear Turn Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check right rear turn
Indicator Right rear turn signal signal lamp control circuit for short to ground
short to ground
Indicator Right rear turn signal signal lamp control circuit for short to power
short to power
Indicator Right rear turn signal signal lamp control circuit for open circuit
open circuit

Indicator - circuit Right rear turn signal Refer to electrical circuit diagrams and check right rear
resistance
B126113 Fuel Flap/Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check fuel filler flap
Release Switch Fuel filler flap digital digital input signal circuit for open circuit
input signal circuit - open
circuit
B1A7911 Rear Fog Lamp Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Rear fog lamp control manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
circuit - short to ground circuit diagrams and check rear fog lamp control circuit for short
to ground
B1A7912 Rear Fog Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear fog lamp
Rear fog lamp control control circuit for short to power
B1A7913 Rear Fog Lamp Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check rear fog lamp
www.JagDocs.com
Rear fog lamp control control circuit for open circuit

B1C5512 Horn Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check horn control
Horn control circuit - circuit for short to power
short to power
B1C5514 Horn Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check horn control
Horn control circuit - circuit for short to ground, open circuit
short to ground, open
circuit
B1C8312 Rear Defog Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check heated rear
High Side output not window power supply circuit for short to power
driven - diagnosis
is short to power
B1C8314 Rear Defog Relay Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check heated rear
High Side output not window power supply circuit for short to ground, open circuit
driven - diagnosis
circuit
B1C8393 Rear Defog Relay Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
High Side output not manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
driven - diagnosis circuit diagrams and check heated rear window power supply
feedback indicates output circuit for open load and short to power
to power
B1C9112 Fuel Flap/Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check fuel filler flap
Lock Relay Coil Fuel filler flap locking locking motor control circuit for short to power
Circuit motor control circuit -
short to power
B1C9114 Fuel Flap/Door Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check fuel filler flap
Lock Relay Coil Fuel filler flap locking locking motor control circuit for short to ground, open circuit
Circuit motor control circuit -
short to ground, open
circuit
B1D3512 Hazard Switch Refer to the electrical circuit diagrams and check hazard warning
Hazard warning lamp lamp switch digital input circuit for short to power
switch digital input circuit
- short to power
B1D3523 Hazard Switch Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Hazard warning lamp manufacturer approved diagnostic system. Refer to the electrical
switch digital input circuit circuit diagrams and check hazard warning lamp switch digital
- signal stuck low input circuit for short to ground
U001988 Low Speed CAN Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Communication Bus off manufacturer approved diagnostic system
Bus
U014000 Lost Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Communication No sub type information manufacturer approved diagnostic system
With Body
Control Module
U015500 Lost Carry out any pinpoint test associated with this DTC using the
Communication No sub type information manufacturer approved diagnostic system
With Instrument
Panel Cluster
(IPC) Control

2010XFWorkshop3LD PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

2010XFWorkshop3LD PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

m

3.0 Litre TDV6

References to LH (left-hand) and RH (right-hand)

Vehicle LH and RH definition

Item Part Number Description

Powertrain LH and RH definition

How to use Repair Procedures

Important Safety Instructions

Warnings, Cautions and Notes in This Manual

NOTE: Removal steps in this procedure may contain installation details.

Reuse of fasteners and seals and gaskets

Types of self-locking nuts and bolts

Special Tools, Equipment, Materials and Torque Figures

Colors used in the graphic are as follows:

Blue - Component to be removed/installed or disassembled/assembled.

One illustration may have multiple steps assigned to it.

How to use Diagnosis and Testing procedures

Inspection and Verification

A representative tester graphic is used for voltmeters and ohmmeters.

INHALED: Dust from friction materials can be harmful if inhaled.

Only use new specified brake fluid from airtight containers.

Provide adequate ventilation when working on fuel systems.

Fuel must not be used as a cleaning agent.

irritation or abnormality. Wash contaminated clothing before reuse.

Make sure that non-plated tools are used.

Repairs and Replacements

Service Repair Operation Numbering

References to Bank-1 and Bank-2

Disconnecting/Connecting the Battery

The vehicle to be jacked up

Reconnecting the Battery

Connecting a Slave Battery Using Jump Leads

Always connect the jump leads in the following sequence.

Slave battery positive first then vehicle battery positive.

Components should be thoroughly cleaned before inspection prior to reassembly.

Calibration of Essential Measuring Equipment

WARNING: Failure to comply may result in personal injury or damage to components.

Use of Control Modules

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD)

The diagnosis and testing sections within the manual cover:

Daytime Running Lamps DRL

Acids and Alkalis

e.g. caustic soda, sulphuric acid.

Used in batteries and cleaning materials.

Display Eye Hazard sign.

Highly flammable, explosive – observe No Smoking policy.

Following any direct contact with gas generant.

Wash affected areas thoroughly with water

Air Bags - Do's

Do store in an air bag safe when not installed to the vehicle.

Air Bags - Do Nots

Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Highly flammable, combustible – observe No Smoking policy.

Skin contact may result in frostbite.

Air Conditioning Refrigerant - Do Nots

Do not expose refrigerant bottles to sunlight or heat

e.g. isopropanol, ethylene glycol, methanol.

Highly flammable, flammable, combustible.

See also Warning Symbols on Vehicles at the end of this subsection.

Ensure adequate ventilation.

Brake and Clutch Linings and Pads

Brake Fluids (Polyalkylene Glycols)

Chemical Materials - Do's